UNITED STATES

SECURITIES AND EXCHANGE COMMISSION

WASHINGTON, DC 20549

FORM20-F

(Mark One)

 

¨REGISTRATION STATEMENT PURSUANT TO SECTION 12(b) OR 12(g) OF THE SECURITIES EXCHANGE ACT OF 1934

OR

 

þANNUAL REPORT PURSUANT TO SECTION 13 OR 15(d) OF THE SECURITIES EXCHANGE ACT OF 1934

For the fiscal year endedDecember 31, 20152016

OR

 

¨TRANSITION REPORT PURSUANT TO SECTION 13 OR 15(d) OF THE SECURITIES EXCHANGE ACT OF 1934

For the transitionperiod from    to    

OR

 

¨SHELL COMPANY REPORT PURSUANT TO SECTION 13 OR 15(d) OF THE SECURITIES EXCHANGE ACT OF 1934

Date of event requiring this shell company report    

 

Commission file numbers  Barclays PLC  1-09246  
  Barclays Bank PLC  1-10257  

BARCLAYS PLC

BARCLAYS BANK PLC

(Exact Names of Registrants as Specified in their Charter[s])

ENGLAND

(Jurisdiction of Incorporation or Organization)

1 CHURCHILL PLACE, LONDON E14 5HP, ENGLAND

(Address of Principal Executive Offices)

PATRICK GONSALVES,MARIE SMITH, +44 (0)20 7116 2901, PATRICK.GONSALVES@BARCLAYS.COM2907, MARIE.SMITH@BARCLAYS.COM

1 CHURCHILL PLACE, LONDON E14 5HP, ENGLAND

*(Name, Telephone,E-mail and/or Facsimile number and Address of Company Contact Person)

Securities registered or to be registered pursuant to Section 12(b) of the Act:

Barclays PLC

 

Title of Each Class    

Name of Each Exchange

On Which Registered      

25p ordinary shares  New York Stock Exchange*


Title of Each Class    

Name of Each Exchange

On Which Registered    

American DepositoryDepositary Shares, each
representing four 25p ordinary shares

  New York Stock Exchange

4.375% Fixed Rate Subordinated Notes due
2024

  New York Stock Exchange

2.75% Fixed Rate Senior Notes due 2019

  New York Stock Exchange

2.00% Fixed Rate Senior Notes due 2018

  New York Stock Exchange

3.65% Fixed Rate Senior Notes due 2025

  New York Stock Exchange

2.875% Fixed Rate Senior Notes due 2020

  New York Stock Exchange

5.25% Fixed Rate Senior Notes due 2045

  New York Stock Exchange

3.25% Fixed Rate Senior Notes due 2021

  New York Stock Exchange

4.375% Fixed Rate Senior Notes due 2026

New York Stock Exchange

5.20% Fixed Rate Subordinated Notes due 2026

New York Stock Exchange

3.20% Fixed Rate Senior Notes due 2021

New York Stock Exchange

Floating Rate Senior Notes due 2021

New York Stock Exchange

Floating Rate Senior Notes due 2023

New York Stock Exchange


Title of Each Class  

Name of Each Exchange

On Which Registered    

3.684% Fixed Rate Senior Notes due 2023

New York Stock Exchange

4.337% Fixed Rate Senior Notes due 2028

New York Stock Exchange

4.950% Fixed Rate Senior Notes due 2047

  New York Stock Exchange

 

 *Not for trading, but in connection with the registration of American DepositoryDepositary Shares, pursuant to the requirements ofto the Securities and Exchange Commission.

Barclays Bank PLC

 

Title of Each Class

 

  

Name of Each Exchange

On Which Registered

 

Callable Floating Rate Notes 2035  New York Stock Exchange
Non-Cumulative Callable Dollar Preference Shares, Series 2New York Stock Exchange*

American Depository Shares, Series 2, each representing one Non-Cumulative Callable Dollar Preference Share, Series 2

New York Stock Exchange
Non-Cumulative Callable Dollar Preference Shares, Series 3  New York Stock Exchange*

American DepositoryDepositary Shares, Series 3, each representing oneNon-Cumulative Callable Dollar Preference Share, Series 3

  New York Stock Exchange
Non-Cumulative Callable Dollar Preference Shares, Series 4New York Stock Exchange*

American Depository Shares, Series 4, each representing one Non-Cumulative Callable Dollar Preference Share, Series 4

New York Stock Exchange
Non-Cumulative Callable Dollar Preference Shares, Series 5  New York Stock Exchange*

American DepositoryDepositary Shares, Series 5, each representing oneNon-Cumulative Callable Dollar Preference Share, Series 5

  New York Stock Exchange
5.140% Lower Tier 2 Notes due October 2020  New York Stock Exchange
Floating Rate Senior Notes due December 9 2016New York Stock Exchange


iPath® Bloomberg Commodity Index Total ReturnSM ETN  NYSE Arca
iPath® Bloomberg Agriculture Subindex Total ReturnSM ETN  NYSE Arca
iPath® Bloomberg Aluminum Subindex Total ReturnSM ETN  NYSE Arca
iPath® Bloomberg Cocoa Subindex Total ReturnSM ETN  NYSE Arca


iPath® Bloomberg Coffee Subindex Total ReturnSM ETN  NYSE Arca
iPath® Bloomberg Copper Subindex Total ReturnSM ETN  NYSE Arca
iPath® Bloomberg Cotton Subindex Total ReturnSM ETN  NYSE Arca
iPath® Bloomberg Energy Subindex Total ReturnSM ETN  NYSE Arca
iPath® Bloomberg Grains Subindex Total ReturnSM ETN  NYSE Arca
iPath® Bloomberg Industrial Metals Subindex Total ReturnSM ETN  NYSE Arca
iPath® Bloomberg Lead Subindex Total ReturnSM ETN  NYSE Arca
iPath® Bloomberg Livestock Subindex Total ReturnSM ETN  NYSE Arca
iPath® Bloomberg Natural Gas Subindex Total ReturnSM ETN  NYSE Arca
iPath® Bloomberg Nickel Subindex Total ReturnSM ETN  NYSE Arca
iPath® Bloomberg Platinum Subindex Total ReturnSM ETN  NYSE Arca
iPath® Bloomberg Precious Metals Subindex Total ReturnSM ETN  NYSE Arca
iPath® Bloomberg Softs Subindex Total ReturnSM ETN  NYSE Arca
iPath® Bloomberg Sugar Subindex Total ReturnSM ETN  NYSE Arca
iPath® Bloomberg Tin Subindex Total ReturnSM ETN  NYSE Arca
iPath® S&P GSCI® Total Return Index ETN  NYSE Arca
iPath® S&P GSCI® Crude Oil Total Return Index ETN  NYSE Arca
iPath® CBOE S&P 500 BuyWrite IndexSM ETN  NYSE Arca
iPath® MSCI India IndexSM ETN  NYSE Arca
iPath® EUR/USD Exchange Rate ETN  NYSE Arca
iPath® GBP/USD Exchange Rate ETN  NYSE Arca
iPath® JPY/USD Exchange Rate ETN  NYSE Arca
iPath® S&P 500 VIX Short-Term FuturesTM ETN  NYSE Arca


iPath® S&P 500 VIXMid-Term FuturesTM ETN  NYSE Arca
iPath® Inverse S&P 500 VIX Short-Term FuturesTM ETN  NYSE Arca
iPath® Long Extended Russell 1000® TR Index ETN  NYSE Arca
iPath® Long Extended Russell 2000® TR Index ETN  NYSE Arca
iPath® Long Enhanced MSCI EAFE® TR Index ETN  NYSE Arca
iPath® Long Enhanced MSCI Emerging Markets Index ETN  NYSE Arca
iPath® Short Enhanced MSCI Emerging Markets Index ETN  NYSE Arca
iPath® Long Extended S&P 500® TR Index ETN  NYSE Arca
iPath® Global Carbon ETN  NYSE Arca
iPath® Optimized Currency Carry ETN  NYSE Arca
iPath® US Treasury Steepener ETN  NASDAQ
iPath® US Treasury Flattener ETN  NASDAQ
iPath® US Treasury2-year Bull ETN  NASDAQ
iPath® US Treasury2-year Bear ETN  NASDAQ
iPath® US Treasury10-year Bull ETN  NASDAQ
iPath® US Treasury10-year Bear ETN  NASDAQ
iPath® US Treasury Long Bond Bull ETN  NASDAQ
iPath® US Treasury Long Bond Bear ETN  NASDAQ
iPath® Pure Beta Broad Commodity ETN  NYSE Arca
iPath® Pure Beta S&P GSCI®-Weighted ETN  NYSE Arca
iPath®Pure Beta Cocoa ETN  NYSE Arca
iPath® Pure Beta Coffee ETN  NYSE Arca
iPath® Pure Beta Cotton ETN  NYSE Arca


iPath® Pure Beta Sugar ETN  NYSE Arca
iPath® Pure Beta Aluminum ETN  NYSE Arca
iPath® Pure Beta Copper ETN  NYSE Arca
iPath® Pure Beta Lead ETN  NYSE Arca


iPath® Pure Beta Nickel ETN  NYSE Arca
iPath® Pure Beta Crude Oil ETN  NYSE Arca
iPath® Seasonal Natural Gas ETN  NYSE Arca
iPath® Pure Beta Agriculture ETN  NYSE Arca
iPath® Pure Beta Grains ETN  NYSE Arca
iPath® Pure Beta Softs ETN  NYSE Arca
iPath® Pure Beta Industrial Metals ETN  NYSE Arca
iPath® Pure Beta Energy ETN  NYSE Arca
iPath® Pure Beta Livestock ETN  NYSE Arca
iPath® Pure Beta Precious Metals ETN  NYSE Arca
iPath® US Treasury5-year Bull ETN  NASDAQ
iPath® US Treasury5-year Bear ETN  NASDAQ
iPath® S&P 500 Dynamic VIX ETN  NYSE Arca
iPath® Inverse S&P 500 VIX Short-Term FuturesTM ETN (II)  NYSE Arca
iPath® GEMS IndexTM ETN  NYSE Arca
iPath® GEMS Asia 8 ETN  NYSE Arca
iPath® Asian and Gulf Currency Revaluation ETN  NYSE Arca
iPath® S&P MLP ETN  NYSE Arca
iPath®Series B S&P GSCI Crude Oil Total Return Index ETNNYSE Arca
Barclays ETN+ S&P 500® VEQTOR™ ETN  NYSE Arca


Barclays ETN+ Shiller CAPETM ETNs  NYSE Arca
Barclays ETN+ Select MLP ETN  NYSE Arca
Barclays ETN+ FI Enhanced Europe 50 ETN  NYSE Arca
Barclays ETN+ FI Enhanced Global High Yield ETN  NYSE Arca
Barclays OFI SteelPath MLPETN+ FI Enhanced Europe 50 ETN Series B  NYSE Arca
Barclays Women in Leadership ETN  NYSE Arca
Barclays Return on Disability ETN  NYSE Arca
Barclays Inverse US Treasury Composite ETN  NASDAQ


*Not for trading, but in connection with the registration of American DepositoryDepositary Shares, pursuant to the requirements to the Securities and Exchange Commission.

Securities registered or to be registered pursuant to Section 12(g) of the Act: None

Securities for which there is a reporting obligation pursuant to Section 15(d) of the Act: None

Indicate the number of outstanding shares of each of the issuers’ classes of capital or common stock as of the close of the period covered by the annual report.

 

Barclays PLC  25p ordinary shares   16,804,603,949 
Barclays Bank PLC  £1 ordinary shares   2,342,558,515 
  £1 preference shares   1,000 
  £100 preference shares   20,930 
  100 preference shares   31,856 
  $0.25 preference shares   237,000,000161,000,000 
  $100 preference shares   58,133 

Indicate by check mark if each registrant is a well-known seasoned issuer, as defined in Rule 405 of the Securities Act.

Yesþ    No¨


If this report is an annual or transition report, indicate by check mark if the registrants are not required to file reports pursuant to Section 13 or 15(d) of the Securities Exchange Act 1934.

Yes¨    Noþ

Note—Checking the box above will not relieve any registrant required to file reports pursuant to Section 13 or 15(d) of the Securities Exchange Act of 1934 from their obligations under those Sections.

Indicate by check mark whether the registrants: (1) have filed all reports required to be filed by Section 13 or 15(d) of the Securities Exchange Act of 1934 during the preceding 12 months (or for such shorter period that the registrant was required to file such reports), and (2) have been subject to such filing requirements for the past 90 days.

Yesþ    No¨

Indicate by check mark whether the registrants have submitted electronically and posted on their corporate Web sites, if any, every Interactive Data File required to be submitted and posted pursuant to Rule 405 of RegulationS-T (§ 232.405 of this chapter) during the preceding 12 months (or for such shorter period that the registrant was required to submit and post such files).

Yes¨    No¨

Indicate by check mark whether each registrant is a large accelerated filer, an accelerated filer, or anon-accelerated filer. See definition of “accelerated filer and large accelerated filer” in Rule12b-2 of the Exchange Act. (Check one):

Barclays PLC

 

Large Accelerated Filerþ    Accelerated Filer¨    Non-Accelerated Filer¨  

Barclays Bank PLC

 

Large Accelerated Filer¨    Accelerated Filer¨    Non-Accelerated Filerþ  

*Indicate by check mark which basis of accounting the registrant has used to prepare the financial statements included in this filing:

U.S. GAAP¨

International Financial Reporting Standards as issued by the International Accounting Standards Board  þ

Other¨


*If “Other” has been checked in response to the previous question, indicate by check mark which financial statement item the registrant has elected to follow:

Item 17¨

Item 18¨


If this is an annual report, indicate by check mark whether the registrant is a shell company (as defined in Rule12b-2 of the Exchange Act).

Yes¨    Noþ

(APPLICABLE ONLY TO ISSUERS INVOLVED IN BANKRUPTCY PROCEEDINGS DURING THE PAST FIVE YEARS.)

Indicate by check mark whether the registrant has filed all documents and reports required to be filed by Section 12, 13 or 15(d) of the Securities Exchange Act of 1934 subsequent to the distribution of securities under a plan confirmed by a court.

Yes¨    No¨


SEC Form20-F Cross reference information

 

Form 20-F item number  

Page and caption references

in this document*

1 Identity of Directors, Senior Management and Advisers  Not applicable
2 Offer Statistics and Expected Timetable  Not applicable
3 Key Information  
 A.  Selected financial data  186, 189, 312-313, 431-432193, 195, 321-322, 447-448
 B.  Capitalization and indebtedness  Not applicable
 C.  Reason for the offer and use of proceeds  Not applicable
 D.  Risk factors  87-9486-96
4 Information on the Company  
 A.  History and development of the company  

43-44, 285-28644-46, 188, 233 (note 6), 235 (note 9), 294-295 (note 36), 291298-299 (note 38), 299-305306-307 (note 44), 308-316 (note 46), 434-435, 476-478

429, 465-467
 B.  Business overview  iv (Market and other data), 177, 181-182, 191-192, 215, 218-220182-189, 197-211, 227-230, 231 (note 1), 231-233 (note 15), 261-271 (note 29)2)
 C.  Organizational structure  285-286188, 294-295 (note 36), 299-305308-316 (note 46), 429
 D.  Property, plants and equipment  255 (Note223, 264 (note 21), 266-267 (note 23), 256-257 (Note 24), 258 (Note269 (note 25)
4A Unresolved staff comments  Not applicable
5 Operating and Financial Review and Prospects  
 A.  Operating results  145-146, 177-182, 184-208, 221-306vi-x, 107, 149-150, 182-189, 191-211, 231-316
 B.  Liquidity and capital resources  103-105, 115-116, 130, 148-171, 177-182, 231-233104-107, 121-122, 140, 152, 154-159, 161-177, 182-189, 242-244 (note 15), 272-275281-284 (note 30), 276285 (note 31), 291-293299-301 (note 39), 297304 (note 43), 441
 C.  Research and development, patents and licenses, etc.  Not applicable
44
 D.  Trend information  
 E.  Off-balance sheet arrangements  261272 (note 28), 286-290295-298 (note 37), 291-293299-301 (note 39)
 F.  Tabular disclosure of contractual obligations  411406-407
 G.  Safe harbor  iiv-v (Forward-looking statements)
6 Directors, Senior Management and Employees  
 A.  Directors and senior management  3-5, 324-329332-336
 B.  Compensation  50-83, 281-28451-85, 287-288 (note 34), 289-293 (note 35), 294-296302-304 (note 41), 426, 446 (note r)
 C.  Board practices  6-49, 67-716-50, 80-83
 D.  Employees  49 (Full time47, 50 (Permanent employees by region), 193, 195, 197, 199, 201, 202, 204200, 203, 207, 208, 210
 E.  Share ownership  50-83, 279-28051-85, 287-288 (note 34), 294-296302-304 (note 41), 333-335339-341
7 Major Shareholders and Related Party Transactions  
 A.  Major shareholders  44, 32345, 331-332
 B.  

Related party transactions

  294-296210, 302-304 (note 41), 431, 453426, 446 (note r)
 C.  Interests of experts and counsel  Not applicable


Form 20-F item number

Page and caption references

in this document*

8 Financial Information  
 A.  Consolidated statements and other financial information  184-185, 208-305, 434-455193-195, 219-316, 428-446
 B.  Significant changes  Not applicable
9 The Offer and Listing  
 A.  Offer and listing details  312-314321
 B.  Plan of distribution  Not applicable
 C.  Markets  312-314321
 D.  Selling shareholders  Not applicable
 E.  Dilution  Not applicable
 F.  Expenses of the issue  Not applicable
10 Additional Information  
 A.  Share capital  Not applicable
 B.  Memorandum and Articles of Association  43-45, 307-31143-46, 317-319
 C.  Material contracts  81-82, 276 (note 31)67-68
 D.  Exchange controls  318326
 E.  Taxation  314-318323-325
 F.  Dividends and paying assets  Not applicable
 G.  Statement by experts  Not applicable
 H.  Documents on display  318326
 I.  Subsidiary information  285-286294-295 (note 36) 299-305308-316 (note 46)
11 Quantitative and Qualitative Disclosure about Market Risk  101-102, 138-147, 297103, 141-151, 304 (note 43), 376-391


373-379
Form 20-F item number12 

Page and caption references

in this document*

12Description of Securities Other than Equity Securities  
 A.  Debt Securities  Not applicable
 B.  Warrants and Rights  Not applicable
 C.  Other Securities  Not applicable
 D.  American Depositary Shares  312, 316-320321, 327-328
13 Defaults, Dividends Arrearages and Delinquencies  Not applicable
14 Material Modifications to the Rights of Security Holders and Use of Proceeds  Not applicable
15 Controls and Procedures  
 A.  Disclosure controls and procedures  324332
 B.  Management’s annual report on internal control over financial reporting  4041
 C.  Attestation report of the registered public accounting firm  210218
 D.  Changes in internal control over financial reporting  4041
16A Audit Committee Financial Expert  1011


16B Code of Ethics  322330
16C Principal Accountant Fees and Services  16-18, 29617-19, 304 (note 42), 321 (External auditor objectivity and independence: Non-Audit Services)329
16D Exemptions from the Listing Standards for Audit Committees  Not applicable
16E Purchases of Equity Securities by the Issuer and Affiliated Purchasers  45, 27646, 284 (Share repurchase)
16F Change in Registrant’s Certifying Accountant  324Not applicable
16G Corporate Governance  322330
17 Financial Statements  Not applicable (See Item 8)
18 Financial Statements  Not applicable (See Item 8)
19 Exhibits  Exhibit Index

 

 *Captions have been included only in respect of pages with multiple sections on the same page in order to identify the relevant caption on that page covered by the corresponding Form20-F item number.


 

 

 

LOGOLOGO

  Return to stabilityBuilding the bank

  of the future

 

 

       

Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC

20152016 Annual Report on Form 20-F


Notes

The term Barclays or Group refers to Barclays PLC together with its subsidiaries. Unless otherwise stated, the income statement analysis compares the year ended 31 December 20152016 to the corresponding twelve12 months of 20142015 and balance sheet analysis as at 31 December 20152016 with comparatives relating to 31 December 2014.2015. The abbreviations ‘£m’ and ‘£bn’ represent millions and thousands of millions of Pounds Sterling respectively; and the abbreviations ‘$m’ and ‘$bn’ represent millions and thousands of millions of US Dollars respectively; and the abbreviations ‘m’ and ‘bn’ represent millions and thousands of millions of Euros respectively.

Comparatives have been restated to reflect the implementation of the Group structure changes and the reallocation of elements of the Head Office results under the revised business structure.reorganisation. These restatements were detailed in our Form6-K filed with the SEC dated 14 July 2014.

References throughout this document to ‘provisions for ongoing investigations and litigation including Foreign Exchange’ mean ‘provisions held for certain aspects of ongoing investigations involving certain authorities and litigation including Foreign Exchange.’15 April 2016.

The information in this documentannouncement, which was approved by the Board of Directors on 22 February 2017, does not comprise statutory accounts within the meaning of Section 434 of the Companies Act 2006. Statutory accounts for the year ended 31 December 2015, which includeincluded certain information required for the Joint Annual Report on Form20-F of Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC to the US SEC (2015 20-F) and which containcontained an unqualified audit report under Section 495 of the Companies Act 2006 (which doesdid not make any statements under Section 498 of the Companies Act 2006) have been delivered to the Registrar of Companies in accordance with Section 441 of the Companies Act 2006.

Barclays is a frequent issuer in the debt capital markets and regularly meets with investors via formal road-shows and other ad hoc meetings. Consistent with its usual practice, Barclays expects that from time to time over the coming quarter it will meet with investors globally to discuss these results and other matters relating to the Group.

Strategic Update

On 1 March 2016, Barclays also announced certain strategy updates of the Group, including in relation to reorganisation of operating segments into Barclays UK and Barclays Corporate & International, the intention to reduce the Group’s stake in Barclays Africa Group Limited, the contribution of certain assets to the Non-Core segment, revised guidance on future dividends and new Group financial targets. Further information can be found in the Form 6-K regarding the “Group Chief Executive Officer—Strategy Update” filed by Barclays on 1 March 2016, which is incorporated herein by reference.

Certainnon-IFRS measures

Barclays management believes that thenon-International Financial Reporting Standards(non-IFRS) measures included in this document provide valuable information to readers of its financial statements because they enable the reader to identify a more consistent basis for comparing the business’ performance between financial periods, and provide more detail concerning the elements of performance which the managers of these businesses are most directly able to influence or are relevant for an assessment of the Group. They also reflect an important aspect of the way in which operating targets are defined and performance is monitored by Barclays management. However, anynon-IFRS measures in this document are not a substitute for IFRS measures and readers should consider the IFRS measures as well. As management reviews

There are a number of key judgement areas, for example impairment calculations, which are based on models and which are subject to ongoing adjustment and modifications. Reported numbers reflect best estimates and judgements at the adjustinggiven point in time.

Notable items described below at a Group level, segmental resultsas set out on page 197 are presented excluding theseconsidered to be significant items impacting comparability of performance and have been called out for each of the business segments.

Relevant terms that are used in accordance with IFRS 8; “Operating Segments”. Statutorythis document but are not defined under applicable regulatory guidance or International Financial Reporting Standards (IFRS) are explained in the Results glossary of non-IFRS performance measures on page 212 and adjusted performance is reconciled at a Group level only.the glossary of terms on pages 449 to 464.

i


Keynon-IFRS measures included in this document, and the most directly comparable IFRS measures, are:

AdjustedAttributable profit/(loss) excluding notable items represents profit beforeafter tax excluding notable items less profit attributable tonon-controlling interests. The comparable IFRS measure is attributable profit. A reconciliation is presented on pages vi to vii;

– Average tangible shareholders’ equity is calculated as the non-IFRSaverage equity adjusted to remove the effect of goodwill and intangible assets. The comparable IFRS measure is average equity. A reconciliation is provided on page ix;

– Average allocated tangible equity represents the average tangible equity that is allocated to Barclays Core, and to the businesses. The comparable IFRS measure is average equity. A reconciliation is provided on page ix;

– Average tangible equity is equivalent to average tangible shareholders’ equity;

– Barclays Core results are considered to benon-IFRS because Barclays Core represents the sum of three Operating Segments, each of which is prepared in accordance with IFRS 8; “Operating Segments”: Barclays UK, Barclays International and Head Office. A reconciliation is provided on pages vi to viii;

– Basic earnings per share excluding notable items represents attributable profit beforeexcluding all notable items (page 197) divided by the basic weighted average number of shares in issue. The comparable IFRS measure is basic earnings per share. A reconciliation is provided on page 215;

– Core basic earnings per share excluding notable items represents basic earnings per share excluding notable items calculated for Barclays Core. Barclays Core represents the sum of three Operating Segments, each of which is prepared in accordance with IFRS 8, “Operating Segments”: Barclays UK, Barclays International and Head Office. The comparable IFRS measure is basic earnings per share. A reconciliation is provided on page 215;

– Cost: income ratio excluding notable items represents the ratio between total operating expenses excluding notable items and total income excluding notable items. The comparable IFRS measure is cost: income ratio. A reconciliation is provided on pages vi to viii;

– Core cost: income ratio excluding notable items represents cost: income ratio excluding notable items calculated for Barclays Core. Barclays Core represents the sum of three Operating Segments, each of which is prepared in accordance with IFRS 8, “Operating Segments”: Barclays UK, Barclays International and Head Office. The comparable IFRS measure is cost: income ratio. A reconciliation is provided on pages vi to viii;

– Total income excluding notable items represents total income excluding the impact of own credit, gain on disposal of Barclays’ share of Visa Europe Limited, revision of Education, Social Housing, and Local Authority (ESHLA) valuation methodology and gain on US Lehman acquisition assets. The comparable IFRS measure is total income. A full list of notable items is shown on page 197. A reconciliation is provided on pages vi to viii;

– Net operating income excluding notable items represents net operating income excluding the impact of own credit, gain on disposal of Barclays’ share of Visa Europe Limited, gain on US Lehman acquisition assets and revision of Education, Social Housing, and Local Authority (ESHLA) valuation methodology. The comparable IFRS measure is net operating income. A full list of notable items is shown on page 197. A reconciliation is provided on pages vi to viii;

ii


– Total operating expenses excluding notable items represents total operating expenses excluding the impact of provisions for UK customer redress, provisions for ongoing investigations and litigation including Foreign Exchange, gain on valuation of a component of the defined retirement benefit liability, impairment of goodwill and other assets relating to businesses being disposed and losses on sale relating to the Spanish, Portuguese and Italian businesses. The comparable IFRS measure is total operating expenses. A full list of notable items is shown on page 197. A reconciliation is provided on pages vi to viii;

– Profit after tax as it excludesexcluding notable items represents profit after tax excluding thepost-tax impact of own credit, impairment of goodwill and other assets relating to businesses being disposed, provisions for UK customer redress, gain on US Lehman acquisition assets, provisions for ongoing investigations and litigation including Foreign Exchange, losses on sale relating to the Spanish, Portuguese and Italian businesses, revision of Education, Social Housing, and Local Authority (ESHLA) revision of valuation methodology, and gain on a valuation of a component of the defined retirement benefit liability.liability, and gain on disposal of Barclays’ share of Visa Europe Limited. The comparable IFRS measure is profit after tax. A reconciliation is provided on pages vi to viii;

– Profit before tax excluding notable items represents profit before tax excluding the impact of own credit, impairment of goodwill and other assets relating to businesses being disposed, provisions for UK customer redress, excluding gain on US Lehman acquisition assets, provisions for ongoing investigations and litigation including Foreign Exchange, losses on sale relating to the Spanish, Portuguese and Italian businesses, revision of Education, Social Housing, and Local Authority (ESHLA) valuation methodology, gain on a valuation of a component of the defined retirement benefit liability, and gain on disposal of Barclays’ share of Visa Europe Limited. The comparable IFRS measure is presentedprofit before tax. A reconciliation is provided on pages vi to viii;

Return on average allocated tangible equity represents the return on average tangible equity that is allocated to Barclays Core, and to the businesses. The comparable IFRS measure is return on equity. A reconciliation is provided on page 192 for the Group;ix;

AdjustedAttributable profit/(loss) excluding notable items represents attributable profit after tax represents profit after tax excluding the post-tax impact of own credit, impairment of goodwill and other assets relating to businesses being disposed, provisions for UK customer redress, gain on US Lehman acquisition assets, provisions for ongoing investigations and litigation including Foreign Exchange, losslosses on sale relating to the Spanish, Portuguese and Italian businesses, Education, Social Housing, and Local Authority (ESHLA) revision of valuation methodology, and gain on valuation of a component of the defined retirement benefit liability. A reconciliation to IFRS is presented on page 192 for the Group;


– Adjusted attributable profit represents adjusted profit after tax less profit attributable to non-controlling interests. The comparable IFRS measure is attributable profit. A reconciliation to IFRS is provided on page 192 for the Group;

– Adjusted income and adjusted total income net of insurance claims represents total income net of insurance claims adjusted to exclude the impact of own credit, revision of Education, Social Housing, and Local Authority (ESHLA) valuation methodology, gain on a valuation of a component of the defined retirement benefit liability, and gain on US Lehman acquisition assets.disposal of Barclays’ share of Visa Europe Limited. The comparable IFRS measure is attributable profit. A full list of notable items is shown on page 197. A reconciliation to IFRS is presented on page 192pages vi to viii;

iii


– Return on average tangible shareholders’ equity excluding notable items represents attributable profit excluding notable items, including an adjustment for the Group;tax credit recorded in reserves in respect of other equity instruments, as a proportion of average shareholders’ equity excludingnon-controlling interests and other equity instruments adjusted for the deduction of intangible assets and goodwill. The comparable IFRS measure is return on equity. A reconciliation is provided on page 214;

AdjustedReturn on average tangible shareholders’ equity is calculated as the return on equity adjusted to remove the effect of goodwill and intangible assets. The comparable IFRS measure is return on equity. A reconciliation is provided on page ix;

– Tangible net asset value per share is calculated by dividing shareholders equity, excludingnon-controlling interests and other equity instruments, less goodwill and intangible assets, by the number of issued ordinary shares. The components of the calculation have been included on page 215;

– Total operating incomeexpenses, excluding conduct and litigation charges, and other notable items represents nettotal operating incomeexpenses excluding the impact of own credit; the gain on US Lehman acquisition assets and revision of ESHLA valuation methodology. A reconciliation to IFRS is presented on page 192 for the Group;

– Adjusted total operating expenses represents operating expenses excluding impairment of goodwill and other assets relating to businesses being disposed, provisions for UK customer redress, provisions for ongoing investigations and litigation including Foreign Exchange, and gain on a valuation of a component of the defined retirement benefit liability. The comparable IFRS measure is total operating expenses. A reconciliation is provided on pages vi to IFRS is presented on page 192 for the Group;viii;

AdjustedTotal operating expenses excluding conduct and litigation and conductcharges represents litigation and conducttotal operating expenses excluding the impact of provisions for UK customer redress, and the provisionprovisions for ongoing investigations and litigation including Foreign Exchange. A reconciliation to IFRS is presented on page 192 for the Group;

– Adjusted cost: income ratio represents adjusted operating expenses (defined above) compared to adjusted income (defined above). A reconciliation to IFRS is presented on page 192 for the Group;

– Adjusted compensation: net operating income ratio represents compensation costs: net operating income ratio excluding the impact of own credit; and the revision of ESHLA valuation methodology. A reconciliation is provided on page 192 for the Group;

– Adjusted compensation: operating income ratio represents compensation costs: operating income ratio excluding the impact of credit impairment charges and other provisions; own credit; gain on US Lehman acquisition and revision of ESHLA valuation methodology. A reconciliation is provided on page 192 for the Group;

– Adjusted basic earnings per share represents adjusted attributable profit (page 205) divided by the basic weighted average number of shares in issue. The comparable IFRS measure is basic earnings per share, which represents profit after tax and non-controlling interests, divided by the basic weighted average number of shares in issue. A reconciliation to IFRS is provided on page 192 for the Group;

– Adjusted return on average shareholders’ equity represents annualised adjusted profit after tax for the period attributable to ordinary shareholders, including an adjustment for the tax credit in reserves in respect of other equity instruments, as a proportion of average shareholders’ equity, excluding non-controlling interests, the impact of own credit on retained earnings, and other equity instruments. The comparable IFRS measure is return on average shareholders’ equity which represents annualised profit after tax for the period attributable to ordinary shareholders, including an adjustment for the tax credit in reserves in respect of other equity instruments, as a proportion of average shareholders’ equity, excluding non-controlling interests and other equity instruments. A reconciliation to IFRS is provided on page 192 for the Group;

– Adjusted return on average tangible shareholders’ equity represents annualised adjusted profit after tax for the period attributable to ordinary shareholders, including an adjustment for the tax credit in reserves in respect of other equity instruments, as a proportion of average shareholders’ equity excluding non-controlling interests, the impact of own credit on retained earnings, and other equity instruments adjusted for the deduction of intangible assets and goodwill. The comparable IFRS measure is return on average tangible shareholders’ equity which represents annualised profit after tax for the period attributable to ordinary shareholders, including an adjustment for the tax credit in reserves in respect of other equity instruments, as a proportion of average shareholders’ equity excluding non-controlling interests and other equity instruments adjusted for the deduction of intangible assets and goodwill. A reconciliation to IFRS is provided on page 192 for the Group;

– Barclays Core results are non-IFRS measures because they represent the sum of five Operating Segments, each of which is prepared in accordance with IFRS 8; “Operating Segments”: Personal and Corporate Banking, Barclaycard, Africa Banking, Investment Bank and Head Office.total operating expenses. A reconciliation to IFRS is provided on pages 191vi to viii; and 192;


– Constant currency results are calculated by converting ZAR results into GBP using the average exchange rate for the year ended 31 December 2015 for the income statement and the 31 December 2015 closing exchange rate for the balance sheet to eliminate the impact of movement in exchange rates between the two periods;

– Net Stable Funding Ratio (NSFR) is calculated according to the definition and methodology detailed in the standard provided by the Basel Committee on Banking Supervision. The original guidelines released in December 2010 (‘Basel III: International Framework for Liquidity Risk Measurement, Standards and Monitoring’, December 2010) were revised in October 2014 (‘Basel III: The Net Stable Funding Ratio’, October 2014). The metric is a regulatory ratio that is not yet finalised in local regulations and, as such, represents a non-IFRS measure. This definition and the methodology used to calculate this metric is subject to further revisions ahead of the implementation date and our interpretation of this calculation may not be consistent with that of other financial institutions;

– Liquidity Coverage Ratio (LCR) is calculated according to the Commission Delegated Regulation of October 2014 that supplements Regulation (EU) 575/2013 (CRDIV) published by the European Commission in June 2013. The metric is applicable from 01 October 2015 and as such is a binding measure as at 31 December 2015;

– Transitional CET1 ratio according to FSA October 2012. This measure is calculated by taking into account the statement of the Financial Services Authority, the predecessor of the Prudential Regulation Authority, on CRD IV transitional provisions in October 2012, assuming such provisions were applied as at 1 January 2014. This ratio is used as the relevant measure starting 1 January 2014 for purposes of determining whether the automatic write-down trigger (specified as a Transitional CET1 ratio according to FSA October 2012 of less than 7.00%) has occurred under the terms of the Contingent Capital Notes issued by Barclays Bank PLC on November 21, 2012 (CUSIP: 06740L8C2) and April 10, 2013 (CUSIP: 06739FHK0). Please refer to page 150155 for a reconciliation of this measure to CRD IV CET1 ratio.

Forward-looking statements

This document contains certain forward-looking statements within the meaning of Section 21E of the US Securities Exchange Act of 1934, as amended, and Section 27A of the US Securities Act of 1933, as amended, with respect to the Group. Barclays cautions readers that no forward-looking statement is a guarantee of future performance and that actual results or other financial condition or performance measures could differ materially from those contained in the forward-looking statements. These forward-looking statements can be identified by the fact that they do not relate only to historical or current facts. Forward-looking statements sometimes use words such as ‘may’, ‘will’, ‘seek’, ‘continue’, ‘aim’, ‘anticipate’, ‘target’, ‘projected’, ‘expect’, ‘estimate’, ‘intend’, ‘plan’, ‘goal’, ‘believe’, ‘achieve’ or other words of similar meaning. Examples of forward-looking statements include, among others, statements or guidance regarding the Group’s future financial position, income growth, assets, impairment charges, and provisions, notable items, business strategy, structural reform, capital, leverage and other regulatory ratios, payment of dividends (including dividend pay-out ratios)ratios and expected payment strategies), projected levels of growth in the banking and financial markets, projected costs or savings, original and revised commitments and targets in connection with the strategic cost programme and the Group Strategy Update, rundown of assets and businesses within Barclays Non-Core, sell down of the Group’s interest in Barclays Africa Group Limited, estimates of capital expenditures and plans and objectives for future operations, projected employee numbers and other statements that are not historical fact. By their nature, forward-looking statements involve risk and uncertainty because they relate to future events and circumstances. These may be affected by changes in legislation, the development of standards and interpretations under International Financial Reporting Standards, (IFRS), evolving practices with regard to the interpretation and application of accounting and regulatory standards, the outcome of current and future legal proceedings and regulatory investigations, future levels of conduct provisions, future levels of notable items, the policies and actions of governmental and regulatory authorities, geopolitical risks and the impact of competition. In addition, factors including (but not limited to) the following may have an effect: capital, leverage and other regulatory rules (including with regard to the future structure of the Group) applicable to past, current and future periods; United Kingdom (UK), United States (US),UK, US, Africa, Eurozone and global macroeconomic and business conditions; the effects of continued volatility in credit markets; market related risks such as changes in interest rates and foreign exchange rates; effects of changes in valuation of credit market exposures; changes in valuation of issued securities; volatility in capital markets; changes in credit ratings of any entities within the Group or any securities issued by such entities; the potential for one or more countries exiting the Eurozone; the implications of the results of the 23 June 2016 referendum in the United Kingdom and the disruption that may result in the UK and globally from the withdrawal of the United Kingdom from the European Union; the implementation of the strategic cost programme; and the success of future acquisitions, disposals and other strategic transactions. A number of these influences and factors are beyond the Group’s control. As a result, the Group’s actual future results, dividend payments, and capital and leverage ratios may differ materially from the plans, goals, expectations and expectationsguidance set forth in the Group’s forward-looking statements. Additional risks and factors which may impact the Group’s future financial condition and performance are identified in our filings with the SEC which are available on the SEC’s website at http://www.sec.gov.


Any forward-looking statements made herein speak only as of the date they are made and it should not be assumed that they have been revised or updated in the light of new information or future events. Except as required by the Prudential Regulation Authority, the Financial Conduct Authority, the London Stock Exchange plc (the LSE) or applicable law, Barclays expressly disclaims any obligation or undertaking to release publicly any updates or revisions to any forward-looking statements contained herein to reflect any change in Barclays’ expectations with regard thereto or any change in events, conditions or circumstances on which any such statement is based. The reader should, however, consult any additional disclosures that Barclays has made or may make in documents it has published or may publish via the Regulatory News Service of the LSE and/or has filed or may file with the SEC.

iv


Subject to our obligations under the applicable laws and regulations of the UK and the US in relation to disclosure and ongoing information, we undertake no obligation to update publicly or revise any forward-looking statements, whether as a result of new information, future events or otherwise.

Market and other data

This document contains information, including statistical data, about certain Barclays markets and its competitive position. Except as otherwise indicated, this information is taken or derived from Datastream and other external sources. Barclays cannot guarantee the accuracy of information taken from external sources, or that, in respect of internal estimates, a third party using different methods would obtain the same estimates as Barclays.

Uses of Internet addresses

This document contains inactive textual addresses to internet websites operated by us and third parties. Reference to such websites is made for information purposes only, and information found at such websites is not incorporated by reference into this document.

References to Pillar 3 report

This document contains references throughout to Barclays annual risk report, the Pillar 3. Reference to the aforementioned report is made for information purposes only, and information found in saidthis report is not incorporated by reference into this document.

v


Contents

 

Barclays Group results

reconciliation

for the year ended

  31.12.16 
  Barclays
UK
   Barclays
International
     Head
Office
   

Barclays

Core

   

Barclays

Non-Core

   Barclays
Group
 
  £m   £m     £m   £m   £m   £m 

Total income

   7,517    14,995      103    22,615    (1,164   21,451 

Own credit

   -    -      (35   (35   -    (35

Gain on disposal of Barclays’ share of Visa Europe Limited

   151    464      -    615    -    615 

Total income excluding notable items

   7,366    14,531      138    22,035    (1,164   20,871 
                                 

Credit impairment charges and other provisions

   (896   (1,355     -    (2,251   (122   (2,373
                                 

Net operating income/(expenses)

   6,621    13,640      103    20,364    (1,286   19,078 

Notable items

   151    464      (35   580    -    580 

Net operating income/(expenses) excluding notable items

   6,470    13,176      138    19,784    (1,286   18,498 
                                 

Operating expenses

   (3,792   (9,129     (135   (13,056   (1,509   (14,565
                                 

UK bank levy

   (48   (284     (2   (334   (76   (410
                                 
Total operating expenses excluding litigation and conduct, and other notable items   (3,840   (9,413     (137   (13,390   (1,585   (14,975
                                 

Litigation and conduct

   (1,042   (48     (27   (1,117   (246   (1,363

Provisions for UK customer redress

   (1,000   -      -    (1,000   -    (1,000

Litigation and conduct excluding notable items

   (42   (48     (27   (117   (246   (363
                                 

Total operating expenses

   (4,882   (9,461     (164   (14,507   (1,831   (16,338

Notable items

   (1,000   -      -    (1,000   -    (1,000

Total operating expenses excluding notable items

   (3,882   (9,461     (164   (13,507   (1,831   (15,338
                                 

Cost: income ratio

   65%    63%      n/a    64%    n/a    76% 

Cost: income ratio excluding notable items

   53%    65%      n/a    61%    n/a    72% 
                                 

Other net (expenses)/income

   (1   32      128    159    331    490 
                                 

Profit/(loss) before tax

   1,738    4,211      67    6,016    (2,786   3,230 

Notable items

   (849   464      (35   (420   -    (420

Profit/(loss) before tax excluding notable items

   2,587    3,747      102    6,436    (2,786   3,650 
                                 

Attributable profit/(loss)1

   828    2,412      110    3,350    (1,916   1,623 

Notable items

   (857   451      (25   (431   -    (431

Attributable profit/(loss) excluding notable items1

   1,685    1,961      135    3,781    (1,916   2,054 
                                 

Risk weighted assets (£bn) 1

   67.5    212.7      53.3    333.5    32.1    365.6 

1Attributable profit in respect of the Africa Banking discontinued operation is reported at the Group level only. Allocated tangible equity, RWAs and leverage exposure are reported in Head Office within Core.

 

vi


Barclays Group results reconciliation

for the year ended

  31.12.15 
   
Barclays
UK
 
 
  
Barclays
International
 
 
  
Head
Office
 
 
  

Barclays

Core

 

 

  

Barclays

Non-Core

 

 

  
Barclays
Group
 
 
   £m   £m   m   £m   £m   £m 

Total income

   7,343   13,747   338   21,428   612   22,040 

Own credit

   -   -   430   430   -   430 

Gains on US Lehman acquisition assets

   -   496   -   496   -   496 

Total income excluding notable items

   7,343   13,251   (92)   20,502   612   21,114 
                          

Credit impairment charges and other provisions

   (706)   (922)   -   (1,628)   (134)   (1,762) 
                          

Net operating income

   6,637   12,825   338   19,800   478   20,278 

Notable items

   -   496   430   926   -   926 
Net operating income/(expenses) excluding notable items   6,637   12,329   (92)   18,874   478   19,352 
                          

Operating expenses

   (3,464)   (8,029)   (272)   (11,765)   (1,958)   (13,723) 
Gain on valuation of a component of the defined retirement benefit liability   296   133   -   429   -   429 
Impairment of goodwill and other assets relating to businesses being disposed       (96)   (96) 
Losses on sale relating to the Spanish, Portuguese and Italian businesses   -   -   -   -   (3)   (3) 

Operating expenses excluding notable items

   (3,760)   (8,162)   (272)   (12,194)   (1,859)   (14,053) 
                          

UK bank levy

   (77)   (253)   (8)   (338)   (88)   (426) 
                          
Total operating expenses excluding litigation and conduct, and other notable items   (3,837)   (8,415)   (280)   (12,532)   (1,947)   (14,479) 
                          

Litigation and conduct

   (2,511)   (1,310)   (66)   (3,887)   (500)   (4,387) 

Provisions for UK customer redress

   (2,431)   (218)   -   (2,649)   (123)   (2,772) 
Provisions for ongoing investigations and litigation including Foreign Exchange   -   (984)   (52)   (1,036)   (201)   (1,237) 

Litigation and conduct excluding notable items

   (80)   (108)   (14)   (202)   (176)   (378) 
                          

Total operating expenses

   (6,052)   (9,592)   (346)   (15,990)   (2,546)   (18,536) 

Notable items

   (2,135)   (1,069)   (52)   (3,256)   (423)   (3,679) 

Total operating expenses excluding notable items

   (3,917)   (8,523)   (294)   (12,734)   (2,123)   (14,857) 
                          

Cost: income ratio

   82%   70%   n/a   75%   n/a   84% 

Cost: income ratio excluding notable items

   53%   64%   n/a   62%   n/a   70% 
                          

Other net income/(expenses)

   -   45   (106)   (61)   (535)   (596) 
Losses on sale relating to the Spanish, Portuguese and Italian businesses   -   -   (112)   (112)   (465)   (577) 
Other net income/(expenses) excluding notable items   -   45   6   51   (70)   (19) 
                          

Profit/(loss) before tax

   585   3,278   (114)   3,749   (2,603)   1,146 

Notable items

   (2,135  (573  266   (2,442  (888  (3,330

Profit/(loss) before tax excluding notable items

   2,720   3,851   (380  6,191   (1,715  4,476 
                          

Attributable (loss)/profit1

   (47  1,758   11   1,722   (2,418  (394

Notable items

   (2,008  (562  (187  (2,383  (707  (3,090

Attributable profit/(loss) excluding notable

items1

   1,961   2,320   (176  4,105   (1,711  2,696 
                          

Average allocated tangible equity (£bn) 1

   9.3   24.9   2.6   36.8   10.9   47.7 

Risk weighted assets (£bn) 1

   69.5   194.8   39.7   304.1   54.3   358.4 

1Attributable profit in respect of the Africa Banking discontinued operation is reported at the Group level only. Allocated tangible equity, RWAs and leverage exposure are reported in Head Office within Core.

vii


Barclays Group results reconciliation

 

for the year ended

  31.12.14 
  Barclays
UK
  Barclays
International
  Head
Office
  

Barclays

Core

  

Barclays

Non-Core

  Barclays
Group
 
  £m  £m  m  £m  £m  £m 

Total income

   7,436   12,908   276   20,620   1,143   21,763 

Own credit

   -   -   34   34   -   34 

Revision of ESHLA valuation methodology

   -   -   -   -   (935  (935

Gains on US Lehman acquisition assets

   -   461   -   461   -   461 

Total income excluding notable items

   7,436   12,447   242   20,125   2,078   22,203 
                          

Credit impairment charges and other provisions

   (901  (679  -   (1,580  (241  (1,821
                          

Net operating income

   6,535   12,229   276   19,040   902   19,942 

Notable items

   -   461   34   495   (935  (440
Net operating income/(expenses) excluding notable items   6,535   11,768   242   18,545   1,837   20,382 
                          

Operating expenses

   (4,108  (8,170  (70  (12,348  (2,611  (14,959
                          

UK bank levy

   (59  (248  (9  (316  (102  (418
                          

Total operating expenses excluding litigation

and conduct, and other notable items

   (4,167  (8,418  (79  (12,664  (2,713  (15,377
                          

Litigation and conduct

   (1,108  (1,333  (65  (2,506  (301  (2,807

Provisions for UK customer redress

   (1,067  32   -   (1,035  (75  (1,110

Provisions for ongoing investigations and litigation

including Foreign Exchange

   -   (1,250  -   (1,250  -   (1,250

Litigation and conduct excluding notable items

   (41  (115  (65  (221  (226  (447
                          

Total operating expenses

   (5,275  (9,751  (144  (15,170  (3,014  (18,184

Notable items

   (1,067  (1,218  -   (2,285  (75  (2,360

Total operating expenses excluding notable items

   (4,208  (8,533  (144  (12,885  (2,939  (15,824
                          

Cost: income ratio

   71%   76%   n/a   74%   n/a   84% 

Cost: income ratio excluding notable items

   57%   69%   n/a   64%   n/a   71% 
                          

Other net (expenses)/income

   -   52   316   368   (813  (445
Losses on sale relating to the Spanish, Portuguese and Italian businesses   -   -   315   315   (761  (446

Other net (expenses)/income excluding notable items

   -   52   1   53   (52  1 
                          

Profit/(loss) before tax

   1,260   2,530   448   4,238   (2,925  1,313 

Notable items

   (1,067  (757  349   (1,475  (1,771  (3,246

Profit/(loss) before tax excluding notable items

   2,327   3,287   99   5,713   1,154   4,559 
                          

Attributable profit/(loss)1

   852   926   374   2,152   (2,659  (174

Notable items

   (855  (808  260   (1,403  (1,550  (2,605

Attributable profit/(loss) excluding notable items1

   1,707   1,734   114   3,555   (1,109  2,779 
                          

Average allocated tangible equity (£bn) 1

   9.1   25.0   (2.7  31.4   15.6   47.0 

Risk weighted assets (£bn) 1

   69.3   201.7   41.8   312.8   89.1   401.9 

1Attributable profit in respect of the Africa Banking discontinued operation is reported at the Group level only. Allocated tangible equity, RWAs and leverage exposure are reported in Head Office within Core.

viii


     2016   2015   2014 

Average allocated equitya

     £bn   £bn   £bn

 

 

Barclays UK

     13.4    13.7    13.1 

Corporate and Investment Bank

     23.2    23.1    23.1 

Consumer, Cards and Payments

     5.0    4.0    4.0 

 

 

Barclays International

     28.2    27.1    27.1 

Head Officeb

     8.0    3.9    (1.3

 

 

Barclays Core

     49.6    44.7    38.9 

BarclaysNon-Core

     7.8    11.2    16.0 

 

 

Barclays Group

     57.4    55.9    54.9 

Effect of Goodwill and Intangibles

     £bn   £bn   £bn

 

 

Barclays UK

     (4.5   (4.4   (3.9

Corporate and Investment Bank

     (1.4   (1.2   (1.2

Consumer, Cards and Payments

     (1.3   (1.0   (1.0

 

 

Barclays International

     (2.7   (2.2   (2.2

Head Officeb

     (1.4   (1.3   (1.4

 

 

Barclays Core

     (8.6   (7.9   (7.6

BarclaysNon-Core

     (0.1   (0.3   (0.3

 

 

Barclays Group

     (8.7   (8.2   (7.9

Average allocated tangible equityc

     £bn   £bn   £bn

 

 

Barclays UK

     8.9    9.3    9.1 

Corporate and Investment Bank

     21.9    21.9    22.0 

Consumer, Cards and Payments

     3.6    3.0    3.0 

 

 

Barclays International

     25.5    24.9    25.0 

Head Officeb

     6.5    2.6    (2.7

 

 

Barclays Core

     41.0    36.8    31.4 

BarclaysNon-Core

     7.8    10.9    15.6 

 

 

Barclays Group

     48.7    47.7    47.0 

Notes

aThis table shows the allocation of Group average equity across IFRS and non-IFRS segments
bIncludes the African Banking discontinued operation
cThis table shows average tangible equity for the Group and for the IFRS and non-IFRS reporting segments

ix


     2016   2015   2014 

Profit/(loss) attributable to ordinary equity holders of the parent

     £m    £m    £m 

 

 

Barclays UK

     857    (33   869 

Corporate and Investment Bank

     1,342    1,180    421 

Consumer, Cards and Payments

     1,153    620    528 

 

 

Barclays International

     2,495    1,800    949 

Head Office

     109    11    373 

 

 

Barclays Core

     3,461    1,778    2,191 

Barclays Non-Core

     (1,899   (2,405   (2,645

Africa Banking discontinued operation

     189    302    334 

 

 

Barclays Group

     1,751    (324   (120
     2016   2015   2014 

Average allocated equitya

     £bn    £bn    £bn 

 

 

Barclays UK

     13.4    13.7    13.1 

Corporate and Investment Bank

     23.2    23.1    23.1 

Consumer, Cards and Payments

     5.0    4.0    4.0 

 

 

Barclays International

     28.2    27.1    27.1 

Head Officeb

     8.0    3.9    (1.3

 

 

Barclays Core

     49.6    44.7    38.9 

Barclays Non-Core

     7.8    11.2    16.0 

 

 

Barclays Group

     57.4    55.9    54.9 
     2016    2015    2014 

Return on average allocated equityc

     %    %    % 

 

 

Barclays UK

     6.4%    (0.2%   6.6% 

Corporate and Investment Bank

     5.8%    5.1%    1.8% 

Consumer, Cards and Payments

     23.1%    15.3%    13.2% 

Barclays International

     8.8%    6.6%    3.5% 

 

 

Barclays Core

     7.0%    4.0%    5.6% 

 

 

Barclays Group

     3.0%    (0.6%   (0.2%

Notes

aThis table shows the allocation of Group average equity across IFRS and non-IFRS reporting segments
bIncludes the African Banking discontinued operation
cThis table shows return on average equity for the Group and the return on average allocated equity for the IFRS and non-IFRS reporting segments

x


Governance

Governance

Page

Our corporate governance processes and the role they play in supporting the delivery of our strategy, including reports from the Chairman and each of the Board Committee Chairmen.

 

Directors’ report

 

 

2

§  Who we are

3

§  What we did in 2015

6

§  How we comply

35

§  Other statutory information

42People46Remuneration report50

Directors’ report

Page
UK Corporate Governance

§  Index to disclosures

2
Code
Who we are§   Board of Directors3
§   Group Executive Committee5

§   Board diversity

5

What we did in 2016§   Chairman’s introduction6
§   Board Audit Committee report10
§   Board Risk reviewCommittee report20
§   Board Reputation Committee report25

§   Board Nominations Committee report

29

How we comply

 

  

Page

 

36

 

The management of risk plays a central role in the execution of Barclays’ strategy and insight into the level of risk across businesses and portfolios and the material risks and uncertainties the Group face are key areas of management focus.

Material existing and emerging risks56
Risk management94
Risk performance110

§  Credit risk

111

§  Market risk

138

§  Funding risk - capital

148

§  Funding risk - liquidity

154

§  Operational risk

172

§  Conduct risk

174

§  Supervision and regulation

177

Financial review

Page

A review of the performance of Barclays, including the key performance indicators, and our businesses’ contribution to the overall performance of the Group.

Key performance indicators

184

Consolidated summary income statement186
Income statement commentary187
Consolidated summary balance sheet189
Balance sheet commentary190
Analysis of results by business191
Margins analysis207

Financial statements

Page

Detailed analysis of ourOther statutory accounts, independently audited and providing in-depth disclosure on the financial performance of the Group.

Consolidated financial statements209
Notes to the financial statements221

§   Performance/return

187

§  Assets and liabilities held at fair value

230

§  Financial instruments held at amortised cost

253

§  Non-current assets and other investments

255

§  Accruals, provisions, contingent liabilities and legal proceedings

259

§  Capital instruments, equity and reserves

272

§  Employee benefits

279

§  Scope of consolidation

285

§  Other disclosure matters

294

Additional information

 

  

Page

 

51

 

Additional shareholder information

People

  30747
Additional information321
Barclays’ approach to managing risks

§  Risk management strategy, governance and risk cultureRemuneration report

  336

§  Management of credit risk

354

§  Management of counterparty credit risk and credit risk mitigation techniques

370

§  Management of market risk

376

§  Management of operational risk

393

§  Management of funding risk

397

§  Management of conduct risk

406
Additional financial disclosure410
Barclays Bank PLC data434
Glossary456
Shareholder information47643

LOGO                             

 

  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 20152016 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  1


GovernanceGovernance: Directors’ report

ContentsUK Corporate Governance Code - index to disclosures

 

 

OurLOGO  The purpose of corporate governance processesis to facilitate effective, entrepreneurial and prudent management that can deliver the role they play in supporting the delivery of our strategy, including reports from the Chairman and eachlong-term success of the Board Committee Chairmen.company.LOGO

The UK Corporate Governance Code

The UK Corporate Governance Code (the Code) is not a rigid set of rules. It consists of principles (main and supporting) and provisions. The Listing Rules require companies to apply the main principles and report to shareholders on how they have done so. You can find our disclosures as follows:

 

   

Page

Governance: Directors’ report 

 

LeadershipEvery company should be headed by an effective board which is collectively responsible for the long-term success of the company.

Who we areBoard of Directors
Composition of the Board


3 to 4
39

  

 

§

There should be a clear division of responsibilities at the head of the company between the running of the board and the executive responsibility for the running of the company’s business. No one individual should have unfettered powers of decision.Roles on the Board of Directors

37
  

 

The chairman is responsible for leadership of the board and ensuring its effectiveness on all aspects of its role.Roles on the Board37

As part of their role as members of a unitary board,non-executive directors should constructively challenge and help develop proposals on strategy.Roles on the Board37

EffectivenessThe board and its committees should have the appropriate balance of skills, experience, independence and knowledge of the company to enable them to discharge their respective duties and responsibilities effectively.Board of Directors3 to 4

There should be a formal, rigorous and transparent procedure for the appointment of new directors to the board.

Appointment and re-election of Directors

32

All directors should be able to allocate sufficient time to the company to discharge their responsibilities effectively.

Attendance time commitment


38

39


 

  

§   Group Executive Committee

 
All directors should receive an induction on joining the board and should regularly update and refresh their skills and knowledge.

Induction, training and development

   

§   Board diversity

39 

What we did in 2015

  

 

The board should be supplied in a timely manner with information in a form and of a quality appropriate to enable it to discharge its duties.

§   Chairman’s introductionInformation provided to the Board

40
  

 

The board should undertake a formal and rigorous annual evaluation of its own performance and that of its committees and individual directors.

6Review of Board and Board Committee effectiveness

33

All directors should be submitted forre-election at regular intervals, subject to continued satisfactory performance.

Roles on the Board
Appointment and re-election of Directors


37

32


AccountabilityThe board should present a fair, balanced and understandable assessment of the company’s position and prospects.Risk management
going concern

97 to 114

32


 

  

§   Deputy Chairman’s statement

8 
  

§   Board Audit Committee Report

The board is responsible for determining the nature and extent of the principal risks it is willing to take in achieving its strategic objectives. The board should maintain sound risk management and internal control systems.
  9Risk management and internal control40 to 41 
  

§   Board Risk Committee Report

19 
  

§   Board Reputation Committee Report

The board should establish formal and transparent arrangements for considering how they should apply the corporate reporting, risk management and internal control principles, and for maintaining an appropriate relationship with the company’s auditors.
  24 Board Audit Committee report
   10 to 19

RemunerationExecutive directors’ remuneration should be designed to promote the long-term success of the company. Performance-related elements should be transparent, stretching and rigorously applied.Remuneration report51 to 85

There should be a formal and transparent procedure for developing policy on executive remuneration and for fixing the remuneration packages of individual directors. No director should be involved in deciding his or her own remuneration.Remuneration report51 to 85

§   Board Nominations Committee ReportRelations with shareholders

 

  

27 

There should be a dialogue with shareholders based on the mutual understanding of objectives. The board as a whole has responsibility for ensuring that a satisfactory dialogue with shareholders takes place.
Stakeholder engagement41 to 42

 

The board should use general meetings to communicate with investors and to encourage their participation.Stakeholder engagement41 to 42

 

How we comply

 

35 

Other statutory information

42 

People

46 

Remuneration report

50 

 

2  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 20152016 Annual Report on Form 20-F  


Governance: Directors’ report

Who we are

Board of Directors1

 

Board of Directorsa

Barclays understands the importance of having a Board containing the right balance of skills, experience and diversity and the composition of the Board is regularly reviewed by the Board Nominations Committee. The skills and experience of the current Directors and the value they bring to the Barclays Board is described below.

 LOGO

Full biographies can be accessed online via

home.barclays/investorrelations

 

 

LOGO

LOGO

John McFarlane

Chairman

 

Age: 68

Appointed:

1 January 2015

 

   

 

Relevant skills and experience

John is a formersenior figure in global banking and financial services circles and is in his 42nd year in the sector, including 22 years as a main board director, 10 years as a CEO and six years as a chairman. John is Chairman of Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC. He is also anon-executive director of Westfield Corporation and Old Oak Holdings Limited. He is chairman of TheCityUK and a member of the Financial Services Trade and Investment Board and the European Financial Round Table. John was formerly chairman of Aviva plc, where he oversaw a transformation of the company and for a brief period he was also chairman of FirstGroup plc. He was also anon-executive director of The Royal Bank of Scotland plc, joining at the time of the UK government rescue. Prior to that for 10 years he was chief executive officer of Australia and New Zealand Banking Group Limited with extensive financial services experience across retail, commercialLtd, Group Executive Director of Standard Chartered plc and investment banking, gained both globally andhead of Citibank in the UK. John has a proven track record of implementing cost reduction, cultural transformation and driving through strategic change; most recently demonstrated during his time as chairman of Aviva plc. He is also an experienced non-executive director and chairman. John became Chairman at the conclusion of the April 2015 AGM. He became Executive Chairman in July 2015 and held this position until 1 December 2015, when he resumed the role of Chairman.

 

Other principalcurrent appointments

Old Oak Holdings Limited; Westfield Corporation;

Chairman, The CityUKNone

 

Committees

Nom*

 

LOGO

LOGO

Jes Staley

Group Chief Executive

 

Age: 59

Appointed:

1 December 2015

 

   

Relevant skills and experience

Jes joined Barclays as Group Chief Executive on 1 December 2015. He has nearly four decades of extensive experience in banking and financial services. He worked for more than 30 years at JPJ P Morgan, initially training as a commercial banker, and later advancing to the leadership of major businesses involving equities, private banking and asset management and ultimately heading the company’s global investment bank.Global Investment Bank. Most recently, Jes served as managing partnerManaging Partner at BlueMountain Capital. These roles have provided him with a vast experience in leadership and he brings a wealth of investment banking knowledge to theBarclays’ Board. Jes joined Barclays as Group Chief Executive on 1 December 2015.

 

Other principalcurrent appointments

None

 

Committees

None

 

LOGO

LOGO

Sir Gerry Grimstone

Deputy Chairman and

Senior Independent

Director

 

Age: 66

Appointed:

1 January 2016

 

  

Relevant skills and experience

Sir Gerry brings to the Board a wealth of investment banking, financial services and commercial experience gained through his senior roles at Schroders and his various former board positions. Sir Gerry has global business experience across the UK, Hong Kong,Asia, the Middle East and the US.

Sir Gerry has significant experience as anon-executive director and chairman. He is currently the chairman of Standard Life plc, independentnon-executive board member of Deloitte LLP and the leadnon-executive at the Ministry of Defence.

 

Other principalcurrent appointments

Financial Services Trade and Investment Board;

The Shareholder ExecutiveBoard

 

Committees

Nom, Rep*

 

LOGO

LOGO

 

Mike Ashley

Non-executive

 

Age: 61

Appointed:

18 September 2013

 

   

Relevant skills and experience

Mike has deep knowledge of auditing and associated regulatory issues, having worked at KPMG for over 20 years, where he was a partner. Mike was the lead engagement partner on the audits of large financial services groups including HSBC, Standard Chartered and the Bank of England. While at KPMG, Mike was Head of Quality and Risk Management for KPMG Europe LLP, responsible for the management of professional risks and quality control. He also held the role of KPMG UK’s Ethics Partner.

 

Other principalcurrent appointments

ICAEW Ethics Standards Committee; European Financial Reporting Advisory Group’s Technical Expert Group; Chairman, Government Internal Audit Agency; Charity Commission; International Ethics Standards Board for AccountantsCommission

 

Committees

Aud*, Nom, Ris, Rep

 

LOGO

LOGO

Tim Breedon

Non-executive

 

Age: 58

Appointed:

1 November 2012

 

   

Relevant skills and experience

Tim joined Barclays after a distinguished career with Legal & General, where, among other roles, he was the group chief executive until June 2012. Tim’s experience as a CEO enables him to provide challenge, advice and support to the Executive on performance and decision-making.

 

Tim brings to the Board extensive financial services experience, knowledge of risk management and UK and EU regulation, as well as an understanding of the key issues for investors.

 

Other principalcurrent appointments

Marie Curie Cancer Care; Chairman, Apax Global

Alpha LimitedLimited; Chairman, The Northview Group

 

Committees

Aud, Nom, Rem, Ris*

 

LOGO

Mary Francis CBE

Non-executive

Appointed:

1 October 2016

Relevant skills and experience

Mary has extensive board-level experience across a range of industries. She is a non-executive Director of Swiss Re Group and Ensco plc and was formerly Senior Independent director of Centrica and a non-executive director of the Bank of England, Aviva and Alliance and Leicester. She held senior executive positions in the UK Treasury and Prime Minister’s Office and in the City as Director General of the Association of British Insurers. She brings to Barclays strong understanding of the interaction between public and private sectors and skills in strategic decision-making and all aspects of board governance.

Other current appointments

Advisory Panel of The Institute of Business Ethics

Committees

Rem, Rep

LOGO

LOGO

Crawford Gillies

Non-executive

 

Age: 59

Appointed:

1 May 2014

 

   

Relevant skills and experience

Crawford has extensive business and management experience, gained with Bain & Company and Standard Life plc. These roles have provided him with experience in strategic decision-making and knowledge of company strategy across various sectors and geographical locations.

 

Crawford has also held board and committee chairman positions during his career, notably as chairman of the remuneration committees of Standard Life plc and MITIE Group PLC.

 

Crawford intends to retire from his position at Standard Life plc in 2016.

Other principalcurrent appointments

SSE plc; Control Risks International; The Edrington Group Holdings Limited

 

Committees

Aud, Nom, Rem*

 

Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2016 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  3


Governance: Directors’ report

Who we are

Board of Directors

LOGO

LOGO

Reuben Jeffery III

Non-executive

 

Age: 62

Appointed:

16 July 2009

 

  

Relevant skills and experience

Reuben has extensive financial services experience, particularly within investment banking and wealth management, through his role as CEO and president of Rockefeller & Co. Inc. and Rockefeller Financial Services Inc. and his former senior roles with Goldman Sachs, including as the managing partner of the Paris office.

His various government roles in the US, including as chairman of the Commodity Futures Trading Commission, provides theBarclays’ Board with insight into the US political and regulatory environment.

 

Other principalcurrent appointments

International Advisory Council of the China Securities Regulatory Commission; Advisory Board of Towerbrook Capital Partners LP; Advisory Board of J. Rothschild Capital Management Limited; Financial Services Volunteer Corps; The Asia Foundation

 

Committees

Nom, Ris

aFull Director biographies can be found on pages324 to327
1The composition of the Board is correct as at 29 February 2016.

Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  3


LOGO

Wendy Lucas-Bull

Non-executive

Age: 62

Appointed:

19 September 2013

Relevant skills and experience

Wendy has significant financial services and African banking experience gained through CEO and senior executive roles on the boards of large South African banks, including Barclays Africa Group Limited. As a CEO she has a track record of successful financial turnaround and cultural transformation of a major South African bank. Her expertise in asset management, investment, commercial and retail banking on the continent is invaluable to the Board given its operations in the region.

Wendy’s previous experience of leading on a number of conduct-related consultations also provides Barclays with valuable insight into conduct risk issues.

Other principal appointments

Chairman, Barclays Africa Group Limited; Chairman, Absa Bank Limited; Chairman, Absa Financial Services; Afrika Tikkun NPC (non-profit); Peotona Group Holdings

Committees

Rep

 

LOGO

LOGO

Tushar Morzaria

Group Finance

Director

 

Age: 47

Appointed:

15 October 2013

 

   

Relevant skills and experience

Tushar joined Barclays in 2013 having spent the previous four years in senior management roles with JP Morgan Chase, most recently as the CFO of its Corporate & Investment Bank.

Throughout his time with JP Morgan he gained strategic financial management and regulatory relations experience. Since joining the Barclays Board he has been a driving influence on the Group’s strategic cost reduction programme and managing the Group’s capital plan, particularly in response to structural reform.Structural Reform.

 

Other principalcurrent appointments

NoneMember of the 100 Group main committee

 

Committees

None

 

LOGO

LOGO

Dambisa Moyo

Non-executive

 

Age: 47

Appointed:

1 May 2010

 

   

Relevant skills and experience

Dambisa is an international economist and commentator on the global economy, having completed a PhD in economics. Dambisa has a background in financial services and a wide knowledge and understanding of African economic, political and social issues, in addition to her experience as a director of companies with complex, global operations. She served as anon-executive director of SABMiller Plc from 2009-2016.

 

Other principalcurrent appointments

SABMiller Plc;Chevron Corporation; Barrick Gold Corporation; Seagate Technology plc

 

Committees

Rem, Rep

 

LOGO

Frits van Paasschen

Non-executive

 

Age: 54

Appointed:

1 August 2013LOGO

 

Relevant skills and experience

Frits is an experienced director, having held the position of CEO and non-executive director in a number of leading global organisations, most recently as CEO of Starwood Hotels and Resorts Worldwide, Inc. These roles have provided him with both a global business perspective and a clear understanding of key management issues, as well as experience of enhancing customer experience in a retail environment.

Other principal appointments

None

Committees

Rep

LOGO

Diane de Saint Victor

Non-executive

 

Age: 61

Appointed:

1 March 2013

 

   

Relevant skills and experience

Diane holds the rolesrole of executive director, general counsel and company secretary of ABB Limited, a listed internationalpioneering technology leader in electrification products, robotics and motion, industrial automation and power and automation technologies company.grids. Diane’s legal background, combined with her knowledge of regulatory and compliance requirements bring a unique perspective to the discussions of the Board and its Committees.committees.

 

Other principalcurrent appointments

NoneAmerican Chamber of Commerce in France

 

Committees

Aud, Rep

LOGO

LOGO

Diane Schueneman

Non-executive

 

Age: 63

Appointed:

25 June 2015

   

Relevant skills and experience

Diane joined Barclays after an extensive career at Merrill Lynch, holding a variety of senior roles. Dianeroles, including responsibility for banking, brokerage services and technology provided to the company’s retail and middle market clients, and latterly for IT, operations and client services worldwide. She brings a wealth of experience in managing global, cross-discipline business operations, client services and technology in the financial services industry. Diane’s experienceDiane is a good addition to discussionsmember of the Board and the Board Risk Committee. Diane will also join the Board Audit Committee with effect from 1 March 2016.board of Barclays US LLC, Barclays US intermediate holding company.

 

Other principalcurrent appointments

None

 

Committees

Aud, Ris

 

LOGO

LOGO

Steve Thieke

Non-executive

 

Age: 69

Appointed:

7 January 2014

   

Relevant skills and experience

Steve has significant experience in financial services, in both investment banking with JPJ P Morgan, where among other roles he served as the chairman of the risk management committee, and in regulation, through roles with the Federal Reserve Bank of New York and the Financial Services Authority. SteveHe also has significant board experience, having served in both executive andnon-executive director roles in his career. Steve is chairman of the board of Barclays US LLC.

 

Other principalcurrent appointments

None

 

Committees

Rem, Ris

 

Company Secretary   

LOGO

Company SecretaryClaire Davies

 

LOGO

Lawrence Dickinson

Age: 58

Appointed:

19 September 20021 December 2016

 

   

Relevant skills and experience

Since joining Barclays as a graduate in 1979, Lawrence has worked in a number of roles, including as Chief of Staff to the CEO and as the Private Bank’s Chief Operating Officer. LawrenceClaire is a membersolicitor and Treasurera Fellow of the GC100,Institute of Chartered Secretaries and Administrators. She has substantial experience in legal, compliance and company secretarial roles gainedin-house and in professional services. She was appointed Barclays Group Company Secretary with effect from 1 December 2016, a role she has previously held at Legal & General plc and Lloyds Banking Group plc. More recently, she was Society Secretary at the Association of General Counsels and Company SecretariesCo-operative Group. She is anon-executive member of the FTSE100. In August 2015 Lawrence also became Group Chiefaudit and risk committee of Staff to the Chairman.Department for Business, Energy & Industrial Strategy.

 

Note

The composition of the board is shown as at 22 February 2017.

 

Committee membership key
Aud  Board Audit Committee
Nom  Board Nominations Committee
Rem  Board Remuneration Committee
Rep  Board Reputation Committee
Ris  Board Risk Committee
*  Committee Chairman

 

4  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 20152016 Annual Report on Form 20-F  


Governance: Directors’ report

Who we are

Group Executive Committee1

 

 

Group Executive Committee

LOGO

Biographies for Jes Staley, Group Chief Executive, and Tushar Morzaria, Group Finance Director, who are members of the Group Executive Committee, which is chaired by Jes Staley, can be found on pages 3 and 4.

Group Executive Committeea

Biographies for Jes Staley, Group Chief Executive, and Tushar Morzaria, Group Finance Director, who are members of the Group Executive Committee, which is chaired by Jes Staley, can be found on pages 324 and 326.

 

LOGOLOGOLOGO

Michael Harte

Bob Hoyt

Thomas King

Chief Operations andGroup GeneralChief Executive,

Technology Officer

Counsel

Investment Bank

 

LOGO

LOGO

  LOGOLOGO

Robert Le Blanc

  

 

Jonathan Moulds

LOGO

    

 

Maria RamosLOGO

Chief Risk Officer

Paul Compton

Group Chief

Chief Executive,

Operating Officer

 

    

Barclays Africa Bob Hoyt

Group General

Counsel

Tristram Roberts

Group Human

Resources Director

 

        
  
LOGO

LOGO  LOGOLOGO

Tristram Roberts

  

 

LOGO

LOGO

MichaelMike Roemer

Group Head of

Compliance

    

 

Amer Sajed

Group Human

CEO, Barclaycard

International

  Group Head ofInterim Chief
Resources DirectorComplianceExecutive,
  

Barclaycard

Tim Throsby

President, Barclays

International and

Chief Executive

Officer, Corporate

and Investment Bank

 

LOGO

LOGO

    

LOGO

  

 

Ashok Vaswani

    

CS Venkatakrishnan

  
Chief Executive,CEO, Barclays UK    Chief Risk Officer  
Personal and

    
Corporate Banking

 

aExecutive Committee biographies can be found on pages 327 to 329
1The composition of the

Group Executive Committee meetings are also attended on a regular basis by the Chief Internal Auditor, Sally Clark, and by anex-officio member, drawn from senior management. The currentex-officio member is correct as at 29 February 2016.Kathryn McLeland, Head of Investor Relations.

 

 

Board diversity

The Board has a balanced and diverse range of skills and experience. All Board appointments are made on merit, in the context of the diversity of skills, experience, background and gender required to be effective.

Balance of non-executive Directors: executive Directors

 

LOGO

   1    Chairman  1
   2    Executive Directors  2
   3    Non-executive Directors  11
      
      
      
      
      
            
Balance ofnon-executive Directors: executive Directors  

 

 

 

LOGO

  

 

1

  

 

Chairman

    

 

 

 

1

 

 

  2  Executive Directors     2 
  3  

Non-executive Directors

 

 

 

 

     10 

 

 

Gender balance

Male: Female9:4

Length of tenure
(Chairman andnon-executive Directors)

0-3 years

6

LOGO

3-6 years

3

LOGO

6-9 years

2

LOGO

Geographical mix
(Chairman andnon-executive Directors)

UK

6

LOGO

US

3

LOGO

Continental Europe

1

LOGO

Other

1

LOGO

Industry/background experience

(Chairman andnon-executive Directors)a

Financial Services10 (91%)
Political/regulatory contacts11 (100%)
Current/recent Chair/CEO3 (27%)
Accountancy/financial1 (9%)
International (US)3 (27%)
International (Europe)1 (9%)
International (Rest of the World)3 (27%)

Operations and Technology

1 (9%)

Note

aIndividual Directors may fall into one or more categories



 

  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2016 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  5


Governance: Directors’ report

What we did in 2016

Chairman’s introduction

LOGO

LOGO  Strong and effective governance… benefits companies and the UK economy more generally, by instilling public confidence and respect for the corporate sector, making the UK an attractive place to do business. LOGO

Dear Fellow Shareholders

Welcome to my 2016 corporate governance report. When I think about corporate governance, I inevitably focus on how strong and effective governance acts to provide the necessary checks and balances at the very top of companies, thus supporting better decision-making and accountability. In turn, this benefits companies and the UK economy more generally, by instilling public confidence and respect for the corporate sector and making the UK an attractive place to do business, something that has grown in importance post the EU Referendum. As a bank, gaining this confidence and respect is paramount. Our business is founded on and operates on trust – the trust of our customers and clients, our employees and the wider public. Strong and effective corporate governance has a vital role in ensuring that we earn and keep that trust.

What is the role of the Board?

I firmly believe that the role of the Board is to focus on long-term, sustainable value creation. At the heart of our strategy, which we announced in March 2016, is building on our strength as a transatlantic consumer, corporate and investment bank, with global reach. To this end, the Board has provided critical oversight of executive management in developing and delivering this strategy, creating a smaller, simplified bank capable of producing high quality returns for our shareholders on a sustainable basis.

What were the Board’s key areas of focus in 2016?

During 2016, the Board focused its activity to support management in delivery of the agreed strategy. A summary of key items considered by the Board can be found pages 8 to 9. The main areas of Board activity have been on ensuring that we have strong foundations in place by focusing on the performance of our Core businesses, and on completing the restructuring of Barclays by accelerating therun-down of theNon-Core businesses. We also took the difficult, but important, decision to sell-down our holding in Barclays Africa. Progress in these areas is enabling us to build the Barclays of the future. As part of ensuring we are well-positioned, and to meet regulatory requirements, we have aligned our business more closely with our legal entity structure and geographic locations. You can read more about the Board’s role in preparing Barclays for Structural Reform in the case study on page 9. We also had to deal with the impacts of the UK’s vote to leave the EU and held a special meeting in the days following the EU Referendum result to assess the position for Barclays. You can read more about how we prepared for the EU Referendum in the case study on page 24.

How effective is the Board?

Effective delivery of long-term, sustainable value for shareholders requires an effective Board. It is an important part of my role as Chairman to satisfy myself that the Board – both collectively and its individual members – operates effectively. Each year, we conduct a self-assessment of our performance, with the aid of an independent facilitator, and you can read a report on the outcomes of the 2016 self-assessment on pages 34 to 35. We also describe the actions we took during 2016 in response to any matters identified for improvement during the 2015 self-assessment. I hope this provides a flavour of how seriously the Board regards this important exercise.

The working relationship between the Board and executive management is, of course, critical to the effectiveness of the Board and I am pleased to report that we enjoy a healthy, constructive relationship, with an appropriate level of creative tension that helps drive productive discussions in the boardroom.

Gender balance

Male: Female

6  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2016 Annual Report on Form 20-F
  
10:4

Length of tenure


How did the Board change in 2016?

To be effective, the Board needs the right people and, in particular, it needs to have the right balance and diversity of skills, experience and perspectives. It is important that the composition of the Board brings to bear a broad range of social perspectives and talent on decision-making and that the Board is able to connect with the demographics of Barclays’ customers and clients and employees. We have a healthynon-executive presence on the Board, which was strengthened further during 2016 with the appointments of Sir Gerry Grimstone as Deputy Chairman and Senior Independent Director and Mary Francis as anon-executive Director. Both are highly-experiencednon-executive Directors and add to the depth of experience and talent on the Board. During 2016, Wendy Lucas-Bull and Frits van Paasschen, bothnon-executive Directors, left the Board and I thank them on behalf of the Board for their service.

In early 2016, we set ourselves a new Board diversity target, which is to have 33% women on the Board by 2020. We currently have 31% women on the Board and are pleased with the progress we are making towards our target. Of course, diversity is not just about gender and although we have not set any other Board diversity targets, such as ethnicity, when it discusses and assesses Board composition and prospective candidates the Board Nominations Committee considers a number of factors before making its recommendations. Ultimately, maintaining the overall effectiveness of the Board is paramount and we maintain the position that all appointments to the Board are made on merit. More information on the Board appointments process can be found on page 32.

How does the Board ensure that high standards of business conduct are maintained?

There can be no argument that to be successful and to create long-term, sustainable value, we must maintain consumer and market trust and confidence. We need to act with transparency and integrity in every interaction we have with all of our stakeholders and this behaviour is integral to the way in which we operate. This is why as a Board we have continued to wholeheartedly support Barclays’ shared purpose and common values.The Barclays Way, which is endorsed by me, as Chairman, outlines the purpose and values that govern our way of working across our businesses globally. Of course, the challenge we have, in a large organisation such as Barclays, is to ensure that all employees do the right thing day in, day out. To address this challenge, all employees continue to be required to undertake training onThe Barclays Way annually, with the Board Reputation Committee tracking completion rates. Additionally, the Board Reputation Committee hears directly from the senior management in each business on how they are addressing any conduct and cultural matters specific to that business, thus holding senior management to account for the values and behaviours in their business. You can read more about the work of the Board Reputation Committee on pages 25 to 28.

How does the Board take account of Barclays’ wider stakeholders?

I’ve referred a number of times to the Board’s role in creating and delivering shareholder value in a long-term, sustainable way. This can only be achieved by being acutely alive to the impact that our business decisions might have on our customers, clients, employees and others and by fully understanding and appreciating the wider societal obligations that we have. These issues are important for the Board and the Board Reputation Committee fulfils a vital role on behalf of the Board by monitoring key indicators across the areas of conduct, culture, citizenship and customer complaints. This includes, for example, assessing not only the volumes of customer complaints that we receive, but also the way in which they are handled. It covers assessing the results from regular employee opinion surveys and the actions being taken to address any common issues or themes that arise across the business. It also includes oversight of the delivery of our citizenship strategy, theShared Growth Ambition, where our long-term aim is to create and grow a collection of products, services and partnerships that improve the lives of people in the communities that we serve. All of this activity can and does support the Board’s over-arching objective of delivering sustainable returns for our shareholders.

(Chairman and non-executive Directors)

0-3 years

9

LOGO

3-6 years

2

LOGO

>6 years

1

LOGO

Geographical mix

(Chairman and non-executive Directors)

UK

5

LOGO

Continental Europe

1

LOGO

US

4

LOGO

Other

2

LOGO

 

Industry/background experience

(Chairman and non-executive Directors)aLOGO

  

You can read more about theShared Growth Ambition at

home.barclays/citizenship

Looking ahead

I expect 2017 to be a pivotal year for Barclays in the delivery of its strategy; a year when we will complete our restructuring and establish ourselves as a bank that is recognised for financial strength, financial transparency, operational stability, underpinned by a values-driven culture. We are incredibly focused and working hard as your Board to engender respect and trust for our Company and the profession of banking, in order to support our customers and clients, to contribute to the UK’s reputation as a place to do business and to deliver long-term value to shareholders.

Financial ServicesLOGO

10

Political/regulatory contacts

9

John McFarlane

Current/recent Chair/CEO

8Chairman

Accountancy/financial

2

International (US)

4

International (Europe)

4

International (Rest of the World)

4

Operations and Technology

1

Retail/marketing

1

Note

a Individual Directors may fall into one or more categories

22 February 2017

 

 

  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 20152016 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  57


What we didGovernance: Directors’ report

Board activity in 2015

Chairman’s introduction2016

 

 

LOGO

“The role of any board, and one in which I passionately believe, is to create and deliver long-term, sustainable value.”

Dear Fellow Shareholders

I joined Barclays in January 2015 as a non-executive Director and succeeded Sir David Walker as Chairman following the April 2015 Annual General Meeting (AGM). I would like to extend my thanks and appreciation to Sir David for all that he did for Barclays during his tenure.

This is my first report to you as Chairman and is perhaps not quite the report I anticipated writing when I first took up this role. From 17 July to 30 November 2015, I served as Executive Chairman,During 2016 the Board having asked me to take on this role on an interim basis following its decision to search for a new Group Chief Executive to succeed Antony Jenkins. I welcome the flexibility afforded to us by the UK Corporate Governance Code that allowed us to operate under these revised governance arrangements for a short period of time and ensure continuity of focus and leadership. I was ably supported by my fellow Directors and by the Group Executive Committee during my period as Executive Chairman and thank them for their individual and collective guidance and input. I was delighted that, under the leadership of Sir Michael Rake, we were able to progress the search for a new Group Chief Executive quickly and welcome Jes Staley to the Board in December 2015, at which point I reverted to my role of non-executive Chairman. Jes has a track record as an outstanding leader and I believe he has the skills and experience to take Barclays forward to deliver improved shareholder returns and reclaim its position as the UK’s pre-eminent bank. Jes and I are already enjoying a constructive and positive time working together.

The role of the Board

The role of any board, and one in which I passionately believe, is to create and deliver long-term, sustainable value. Barclays is a standout brand and has first-class retail, cards, commercial and investment banking businesses, but this has not translated into shareholder value in recent years. To deliver that value sustainably, we need to be much more focused on what is attractive, what we are good at,a number of specific areas, outlined in the table below, in line with Barclays three strategic goals and where we are good at it. Put simply, we need to create a tangible and compelling reason for our shareholders to invest in us. This has driven the Board’s focus on three priorities during 2015: focus on our core segments and markets; generate shareholder value; and instil a high performance and customer culture, with strong ethical values.five principal risks:

Board appointments, performance and succession planningStrategic goals

LOGOHave strong foundations in place
LOGOAccelerate the completion of restructuring
LOGOBuild the Barclays of the future

One of the key aspects of my role as Chairman, and one which was especially important during my tenure as Executive Chairman, is to ensure that Barclays has an effective and cohesive, yet challenging Board, with the optimum balance of experience, skills, expertise and personal attributes. I have sought to promote a culture of integrity and transparency, enabling Board debate that allows diverse perspectives and constructive challenge. Certainly, the Board did not shy away from difficult conversations and decisions during 2015, always with a focus on what was needed to drive forward execution of the strategy to generate sustainable value for Barclays and its shareholders.Principal risks

The Barclays Board has undergone a significant amount of change in recent years and saw further changes during 2015. In addition to my own appointment, we welcomed Diane Schueneman to the Board in June 2015 and Jes Staley in December 2015. Diane brings valuable operations and technology experience to the Board. Sir David Walker and Sir John Sunderland left the Board in April 2015, following the AGM, with Antony Jenkins leaving the Board in July 2015. Finally, in October 2015, we announced that Sir Gerry Grimstone would succeed Sir Michael Rake as Deputy Chairman and Senior Independent Director with effect from 1 January 2016. Sir Michael retired from the Board at the end of 2015 and I would like to thank him for his dedicated service and commitment over his eight years as a non-executive Director, including being Senior Independent Director since October 2011 and Deputy Chairman since July 2012. Sir Michael offers his own perspective on governance during 2015 on page 8.

LOGOCredit
LOGOMarket
LOGOFunding
LOGOOperational
LOGOConduct
  

 

Board allocation of time (%)

 

  

 

 
     2016    2015 
  

 

 
  

 

LOGO

 

  

 

 

 

1

 

 

 

 

Strategy formulation and implementation monitoring

  

 

 

 

55

 

 

  

 

 

 

56

 

 

     2  Finance (incl. capital and liquidity)   17    11 
     3  Governance and Risk (incl. regulatory issues)   26    29 
     4  Other (incl. compensation)   2    4 
         
         
      ��  
         
         
 

Strategic GoalPrincipal Risks

Strategy formulation and monitoring

§  Debated the potential impact of the EU Referendum and the contingency plans being developed. Following the result of the Referendum, discussed and assessed the implications for the UK, the banking sector and for Barclays, including a presentation from a third party on the political aspects and their potential implications

LOGOLOGOLOGOLOGOLOGOLOGOLOGOLOGO

§  Regularly debated and monitored the progress of Barclays preparations for Structural Reform – see the case study on page 9 for further details

LOGOLOGOLOGOLOGOLOGOLOGOLOGOLOGO

§  Reflected on the position of Barclays Africa in the Barclays Group and its impact on Barclays’ capital position, deciding to sell-down Barclays’ holding to a position where Barclays Africa accounting and regulatoryde-consolidation could be achieved

LOGOLOGOLOGOLOGOLOGOLOGO

§  Assessed the progress of strategy execution in each of Barclays UK, Barclays International’s investment bank and corporate business and the Cards business, via presentations from the heads of each business

LOGOLOGOLOGOLOGOLOGOLOGOLOGOLOGO

§  Monitored the progress of therun-down of BarclaysNon-Core via regular presentations from the heads of theNon-Core business

LOGOLOGOLOGOLOGOLOGOLOGO

§  Discussed regular updates from the Group Chief Executive on the progress being made against the Group’s execution priorities and received insights on stakeholder issues (including those arising from customers and clients, employees, regulators and governments) and cultural matters, including results from employee opinion surveys

LOGOLOGOLOGOLOGOLOGOLOGOLOGOLOGO

§  Debated and provided input to management on the formulation of overall Group strategy, including

LOGOLOGOLOGOLOGOLOGOLOGOLOGOLOGO

–  the impact of structural change and the creation of new subsidiary legal entities in the Group

–  the progress of the sell-down of Barclays Africa, including potential options, costs of separation, potential conduct risks and customer impacts

–  the impact of the EU Referendum result, taking into account an assessment of possible political scenarios and the potential impacts on each of Barclays businesses in terms of capital, operations, economics, regulation, clients and customers

–  a strategic approach to costs optimisation

–  constraints and risks to strategy execution, covering economic assumptions; expected regulatory requirements on capital and solvency ratios at Group and subsidiary legal entity level; anticipated changes to accounting rules; investor expectations; and potential impacts for clients and customers

–  potential growth opportunities, covering an assessment of the competitive landscape for Barclays UK, Barclays International and the Cards business; key trends and risks for each business in terms of economics, regulation, customers, employees and technology; near-term focus areas and potential transformational opportunities

Finance, including capital and liquidity

§  Debated and approved the Group’s Medium Term Plan for 2016-2018 and short-term plan for 2016, with a focus on producing increased returns in future

LOGOLOGOLOGOLOGOLOGOLOGO

§  Regularly assessed financial performance of the Group and its main businesses via reports from the Group Finance Director

LOGOLOGOLOGOLOGOLOGOLOGO

§  Reviewed and approved Barclays’ financial results prior to publication, including approving final and interim dividends

LOGOLOGOLOGOLOGOLOGOLOGO

§  Discussed market and investor reaction to Barclays’ strategic and financial results announcements, with insights provided by the Head of Investor Relations

LOGOLOGOLOGOLOGOLOGOLOGO

§  Provided input, guidance and advice to senior management on the high-level shape of Barclays 2017-2019 Medium Term Plan and subsequently approved the final plan

LOGOLOGOLOGOLOGOLOGOLOGO

 

68  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 20152016 Annual Report on Form 20-F  


Governance: Directors’ report

What we did in 2015

Chairman’s introduction

I am also delighted to report that we have met the Board diversity target we set back in 2012, which was that 25% of the Board by the end of 2015 should be women. We have now agreed a new diversity target, which is that 33% of the Board by the end of 2020 should be women, although our overriding principle is that all appointments to the Board are made on merit, taking into account the skills and experience that the Board needs now and may need in the future to support delivery of our strategy.

I am on record as saying that Barclays needs to reduce its internal bureaucracy by becoming leaner and more agile and consequently more effective and the Board and its processes are no exception to this. One of the steps I took on becoming Chairman was to review the Board’s governance structure, with assistance from the Company Secretary, in order to simplify and streamline the principal Board Committees, in particular those Board Committees with responsibility for oversight of risk. As a result, the Board decided to disband the Board Enterprise Wide Risk Committee, with its responsibilities for oversight of enterprise-wide risk being assumed by the Board as a whole. We also concluded that the Board Financial Risk Committee should assume responsibility for oversight of the capital and financial aspects of operational risk, in addition to financial risk, leaving the Board Conduct, Operational and Reputational Risk Committee to focus on conduct and culture, reputational risk and citizenship. The Board Audit Committee continued to focus on the control aspects of operational risk. The Board Committees have subsequently been renamed to more accurately reflect their responsibilities.

As part of our discussions on Board and Board Committee succession planning, membership of each Committee was also reviewed to ensure that it had the right balance of skills, experience and perspectives and also to ensure that individual Directors were not being over-burdened by Committee responsibilities. Board Committees play a vital role in supporting the Board in its oversight of internal control and financial reporting, risk and risk management and reward and remuneration. Each of the Board Committee Chairmen report below on how their committees discharged their responsibilities during 2015 and the material matters each considered. The Board Nominations Committee has continued to play a role in succession planning for Group Executive Committee and senior leadership roles and, having had the opportunity during 2015, as Executive Chairman, to work even more closely with Group Executive Committee members, I was able to bring some fresh perspectives on the talent pipeline and talent management processes. More detail on the Board Nominations Committee’s work on succession planning can be found on page 28.

It is important to periodically obtain an independent perspective on the effectiveness of the Board and particularly so in a year when our conventional Board governance processes were temporarily revised. We have conducted an externally facilitated review of the effectiveness of the Board each year since 2004, and for 2015 we asked Independent Board Evaluation to facilitate that review. I am pleased to advise that the overall outcome of the review was that the Board is operating effectively, although there are some areas that could be enhanced. A report on the evaluation process and the outcomes may be found on pages 33 and 34.

Culture and values

People matter more than anything else in any business: it is a company’s people that make it great help it stand out from its competitors and make it an attractive proposition for customers and investors. As a Board, we are responsible for ensuring that Barclays’ people do things – the right things – in the right way by setting the tone from the top, by living Barclays’ culture and values in everything that we do and in the decisions we make, by holding the Group Executive Committee to account for the integrity of our Purpose and Values and by creating a culture in which doing the right thing is integral to the way we operate, globally. In an organisation as large and as complex as Barclays, that can be, and is, a challenge, but we are only too alive to the consequence of getting this wrong. I have personally endorsed our Code of Conduct, The Barclays Way, and the Board Reputation Committee has been monitoring, on behalf of the Board, the progress we are making to embed cultural change.

Shareholder and regulatory engagement

Meaningful engagement with our shareholders and regulators is a key pillar of our approach to corporate governance. We welcome open and constructive discussion with our stakeholders, particularly with regard to governance and succession planning, strategy and remuneration. You can read more about how we have engaged with key stakeholders during 2015 in this report. I also hope to meet with many of our private shareholders at our AGM, which will be held on 28 April 2016. A significant activity during 2015 was our external audit tender, on which we engaged with a number of our major shareholders, and you can read a report from Tim Breedon, who chaired our Audit Tender Oversight Sub-Committee, on page 18.

Looking ahead

2015 has not been without its challenges, but I believe that we now have the leadership in place to take forward execution of our strategy at pace, to deliver on our priorities and generate the long-term sustainable value that will benefit not only Barclays’ shareholders, but society at large.

        

        

LOGO

John McFarlane

Strategic GoalPrincipal Risks

Governance and risk, including regulatory issues

§  Debated and approved 2016 risk appetite for the Barclays Group

LOGOLOGOLOGOLOGOLOGOLOGOLOGOLOGO

§  Regularly assessed Barclays overall risk profile and emerging risk themes, hearing directly from the Chief Risk Officer and the Chairman of the Board Risk Committee

LOGOLOGOLOGOLOGOLOGOLOGOLOGOLOGO

§  Evaluated Barclays operational and technology capability, including specific updates on cyber-risk capability and the strategy for infrastructure services. Approved Barclays International’s investment bank’s IT and Data Global Strategy

LOGOLOGOLOGOLOGO

§  Approved the Group’s 2016 Recovery Plan and US Resolution Plan

LOGOLOGOLOGOLOGOLOGOLOGOLOGOLOGO

§  Held specific meetings with representatives of Barclays’ UK and US regulators to hear first-hand about regulatory expectations and their specific views on Barclays

LOGOLOGOLOGOLOGOLOGOLOGOLOGOLOGO

§  Evaluated the status of Barclays’ risk and control environment and the plans in place to enhance the risk and control framework and approved a revised Enterprise Risk Management Framework (ERMF)

LOGOLOGOLOGOLOGOLOGOLOGOLOGOLOGO

§  Considered regular updates from the Group General Counsel on the legal risks facing Barclays

LOGOLOGOLOGOLOGOLOGO

§  Heard regularly from the chairmen of the Board’s principal Board Committees on the matters discussed at Board Committee meetings

LOGOLOGOLOGOLOGOLOGOLOGOLOGOLOGO

§  Received updates from the chairman of Barclays US IHC on matters discussed at its board meetings

LOGOLOGOLOGOLOGOLOGOLOGOLOGOLOGO

§  Heard directly from representatives of the Banking Standards Board on its assessment of the culture in Barclays and the banking sector as a whole

LOGOLOGOLOGOLOGO

Other, including compensation

§  Reviewed Barclays’ Talent Management strategy and the process for succession planning for key executive positions, hearing directly from the Group HR Director and the Chairman of the Board Nominations Committee

LOGOLOGOLOGOLOGOLOGO

§  Received and debated a presentation from the independent facilitator of the 2016 Board effectiveness review on the outcomes and potential areas of focus for improvement

LOGOLOGOLOGOLOGOLOGO

The above analysis reflects the ERMF that was in place during 2016.

Chairman

29 February 2016

Governance in Action –

Preparing for Structural Reform

Law and regulation in the UK, and associated regulatory rules, require Barclays to separate its retail banking operations into a separate, independent legal entity (known as ‘ring-fencing’). Barclays has an internal Structural Reform Programme in place to implement these required changes in the UK. A new UK banking entity is being established as thering-fenced bank (Barclays UK) and will serve retail and small business customers, as well as UK wealth and credit card customers. Barclays International will continue to serve corporate, institutional and investment banking clients and will also serve international wealth and credit card customers. A Group Service Company will be established to support the revised operating entity structure.

These structural changes will have a material impact on the way in which Barclays operates in future. Consequently, the progress of the Structural Reform Programme featured heavily on the Board’s agenda during 2016, given the scale of change required and the potential material risks associated with transitioning to the new structure and with the new structure itself. The Board evaluated progress of the Structural Reform Programme at seven of the eight Board meetings held during 2016, including specifically evaluating the impact of structural change as part of the annual Group strategy Board meeting. Specific matters addressed by the Board included:

§  structural Reform design and implementation plans, including evaluating any identified risks and challenges; considering regulatory feedback on the plans and the status of actions arising from regulatory engagement; and agreeing the internal accountability framework

§  assessing the progress being made with establishing the new legal entity for Barclays UK, including any necessary regulatory licencing requirements and preparations for the ring-fence transfer scheme

§  monitoring the creation of the Group Service Company, including assessing its design, its board governance structure, its control and oversight framework and the execution milestones to be achieved

§  debating the potential implications of Structural Reform on Barclays’ pension scheme, both in terms of the potential impact on Barclays and on pension scheme members

§  conducting an assessment of the overall conduct risk considerations associated with Structural Reform, focusing on the potential impacts for clients and customers

§  evaluating the work being conducted to address sort-code migration, covering technology planning and implementation and customer impact considerations.

Separately, during 2016, Barclays’ US businesses were organised under an Intermediate Holding Company (IHC) in order to meet US legal requirements. The IHC became operational from 1 July 2016. The Board was regularly updated on progress of implementation, any risks and challenges and how they were being managed.

Board Committees have supported the Board in overseeing the implementation of Structural Reform on matters that fall directly within their remit. For example, the Board Nominations Committee determined the proposed composition of the boards of the new operating entities and is in the process of identifying and evaluating proposed candidates for appointment to those boards. It also discussed and endorsed a set of Governance Guiding Principles, which will govern the relationship between the parent company and its new operating entities. The Board Risk Committee spends time at each meeting assessing the prospective capital and liquidity impacts of Structural Reform, while the Board Audit Committee has evaluated the potential accounting implications. More information can be found in the individual Board Committee reports on the pages that follow.

 

  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 20152016 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  79


What we did in 2015

Statement from Sir Michael Rake,

Deputy Chairman until 31 December 2015

LOGO

“In asking the Chairman to take on executive responsibilities…we were mindful of the need to ensure that our Board governance arrangements remained effective.”

Board allocation of time (%)

          2015     2014  
LOGO  1   Strategy formulation and   56     47  
  implementation monitoring    
  2   Finance (incl. capital and liquidity)   11     17  
  3   Governance and Risk (incl. regulatory issues)   29     32  
  4   Other (incl. compensation)   4     4  
      
      
      
      
      

Dear Fellow Shareholders

In early July 2015, we announced the departure of Antony Jenkins as Group Chief Executive and the appointment of John McFarlane as Executive Chairman, pending the appointment of a new Group Chief Executive. The non-executive Directors had reflected long and hard on the issue of Group leadership and had concluded that new leadership, bringing a new set of skills, was required to accelerate the pace of execution going forward. These events were extensively reported at the time and, rather than revisit them, I would simply like to reiterate here the Board’s appreciation of Antony’s contribution at what was a critical period for Barclays.

In asking the Chairman to take on executive responsibilities, albeit for an interim period, we were mindful of the need to ensure that our Board governance arrangements remained effective and to maintain an appropriate balance of responsibilities on the Board and in the running of the Company until such time as a new Group Chief Executive was appointed. I wanted to give you my perspective on how we approached that and, in particular, how my role as Deputy Chairman and Senior Independent Director evolved during this time.

First, as Executive Chairman, John McFarlane relinquished his membership of the principal Board Committees on which he served, to ensure they continued to be composed solely of non-executive Directors and without any impediment to their ability to provide independent and constructive challenge to executive management. Specifically, John stood down as Chairman of both the Board Nominations Committee and the Board Reputation Committee and I became Chairman of both committees in his place.

Secondly, I took primary responsibility for the search for a new Group Chief Executive, leading the Board Nominations Committee through this process. As the relationship between the Chairman and Group Chief Executive is pivotal to the effectiveness of the Board, John worked closely with me during this process and his insight and guidance on the skills and qualities we needed in the new Group Chief Executive was invaluable. During the search process, I reported regularly to my non-executive colleagues on the Board on progress and on potential candidates, ensuring that they had the opportunity to provide their views and feedback. You can read more about the search for our new Group Chief Executive on page 32. We announced in late October 2015 that Jes Staley would join the Board as Group Chief Executive with effect from 1 December 2015. John subsequently resumed his chairmanship of the Board Nominations Committee, however, I continued to chair the Board Reputation Committee for the remainder of 2015.

Thirdly, my general interaction with our main stakeholders – our major shareholders and our regulators in the UK and US – increased during the period that John served as Executive Chairman.

Finally, I also maintained close contact with both John and members of senior management to ensure there were no significant issues arising from a governance perspective during this period.

2015 was my last year on the Barclays Board. I joined the Board in January 2008 and served through an eventful and difficult period for both Barclays and the financial services industry as a whole. Barclays announced in October 2015 that I would retire from the Board with effect from 31 December 2015 and I have spent time with my successor as Deputy Chairman and Senior Independent Director, Sir Gerry Grimstone, to ensure a smooth handover. I have been proud to serve on the Barclays Board and wish my fellow Directors continuing success for the future.

LOGO

Sir Michael Rake

Deputy Chairman and Senior Independent Director until

31 December 2015

8  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F


Governance: Directors’ report

What we did in 20152016

Board Audit Committee report

 

 

 

LOGOLOGO

 

“We haveLOGO Change has continued apace and it has been critical to play a role in changingfocus on ensuring that the culture and building a greater sense of personal accountability, not just at a senior level within the Group but throughout the organisation, for maintainingcommitment to strengthening the control environment.”environment is maintained throughout this transformational period.LOGO

 

Dear Fellow Shareholders

My report for 2014 emphasisedto you last year highlighted the rolesignificant degree of change that Barclays was facing, driven by its own strategic aims and by the demands of Structural Reform. Change has continued apace and it has been critical for the Committee to focus on ensuring the commitment to strengthening the control environment is maintained throughout this transformational period. Barclays has during 2016 put in ensuringplace a significantly changed senior management team and my Committee colleagues and I are greatly encouraged by the renewed focus and vigour with which the control environment is being addressed and the sense of personal accountability that Barclays operates withwe are seeing. A significant development in the fourth quarter of 2016 was the creation of a chief controls office and the appointment of a Chief Controls Officer, which will drive forward the delivery of an enhanced programme designed to strengthen the control environment and remediate any known issues. Although the new controls office structure is in its infancy, I welcome the more strategic approach that is now being taken to embed accountability for a strong control environment and, in particular,into the role it is playing in changing the culture and building a greater sensefirst line of personal accountability, not just at a senior level within the Group but throughout the organisation, for maintaining that control environment. During 2015, with the agreement of the Board and the Board Risk Committee, the Committee assumed primary responsibility for assessing and tracking the progress of embedding the Enterprise Risk Management Framework (ERMF), whichmanagement. Such is the way in whichimportance of this programme to Barclays approaches enterprise risk management and isthat, for its initial phase, progress on the bedrock of our management of internal risk and control. In particular, the Committee was keen to find ways in which the ERMF couldframework will be linkedreported directly to the Group’s assessment of Management’s Control Approach (MCA), both to drive the right behaviours and provide a more objective method of assessing MCA. In terms of specific control issues, an area of focus for the Committee during 2015 was operations and technology, where there are a number of material control issues the Group is addressing.full Board. In assessing control issues for disclosure in the Annual Report, the Committee has appliedcontinued to apply similar definitions to those used for assessing internal financial controls for the purposes of Sarbanes-Oxley and has concludedSarbanes-Oxley. The conclusion we have reached is that there are no control issues that are considered to be a material weakness, which would therefore merit specific disclosure. Further details may be found in the Risk Management and Internal Control section on page 39.40.

Our busy agenda in 2016 continued to include our responsibilities for overseeing the performance and effectiveness of internal and external audit, the main independent assurance mechanisms that serve to protect shareholders’ interests. The Committee also continued to addressexercise its responsibilities for ensuring the significantintegrity of Barclays’ published financial information by debating and challenging the judgements that need to be made by management and the assumptions and estimates on which they are based. The exercise of appropriate judgement in connection withpreparing the Group’s financial statements primarily those relatingis critical in ensuring that Barclays reports to conductits shareholders in a fair, balanced and litigation provisions and the valuations of specific financial instruments, derivatives assets and portfolios, particularly those where there is a lack of observable market data. Moretransparent way. The report that follows sets out details of the material matters addressedconsidered by the Committee are given in the report below. The Committee also spent time carefully considering the requirements of the new viability statement and confirmed that, as indicated insince my last year’s report, three years was the appropriate period, as it accorded with the Group’s Medium Term Plan.report.

 

A significant activity forchange that the Committee during 2015 washas been overseeing is the externaltransition to KPMG as Barclays’ statutory auditor, following the audit tender which was conducted by an Audit Tender Oversight Sub-Committee, chaired by Tim Breedon. Asconcluded in 2015. I was until 2013 a partner of KPMG, one of the bidding audit firms, I took no part in the external audit tender process, other than providing input to its initial design. Tim Breedon reports separately on the external audit tender process below.

The role of Board Audit Committee Chairman continues to be a full and busy one. During 2015, I had significant interaction with our regulators, meeting with representatives from our UK and US regulators and also participating in trilateral meetings with our auditors and UK regulators. I also took the opportunity to liaise with my fellow audit committee chairmen in other financial services companies, to discuss common issues and share practice, and I met with a group of investors to discuss disclosure issues, in particular with regard to realised profits. I carried on with my practice of meeting with representatives from senior management to discuss specific issues, such as customer complaints or cyber risk, in addition to my regular meetings with the Group Finance Director and Chief Internal Auditor. I also visited Barclays Africa, attending the African chairmen’s conference. I held regular private meetings with my fellow Committee members ahead of Committee meetings to ensure I had a good sense of the matters that concerned them most and likewise met regularly with the PwC lead audit partner ofand his KPMG successor during 2016. KPMG has been shadowing the external auditor.

current auditor, PwC, during the 2016year-end audit and the Committee performance

The Committee’s performance during 2015 was evaluated as part ofis already seeing some value from the independently facilitated Board effectiveness reviewnew perspective provided by KPMG on accounting estimates and I am pleased to report that the outcomes were positive. The Committee was regarded as effective and considered to be very thorough and detailed. The review commented on the continuing need to balance the demands of a busy agenda and programme of work with the need to cover issues in appropriate detail. We will also be seeking to strengthen the level of technical accounting experience on the Committee.policies. You can read more about auditor transition in the case study on page 19.

The introduction in March 2016 of the UK’s Senior Managers Regime allocated to me specific prescribed responsibilities for safeguarding the independence of and overseeing the performance of the internal audit function, including the performance of the Chief Internal Auditor, in line with regulatory requirements. In practice, little has changed in the way in which I fulfil my responsibilities: I continue to hold regular meetings with the Chief Internal Auditor and members of her senior management team to ensure I am aware of current work programmes and any emerging issues and I also agree the Chief Internal Auditor’s objectives and the outcomes of her performance assessment. During 2016, the BoardPRA undertook a review of Barclays Internal Audit (BIA) and made a number of recommendations to increase its effectiveness review on pages 33 and 34.the Committee’s monitoring thereof. An action plan has been developed to address these recommendations. The Committee also held a networking event with BIA during 2016, enabling Committee members to meet less formally with senior members of the BIA team.

 

Looking ahead

Barclays continues to face an unprecedented level of change, driven by both internal and external factors and it will be critical to ensure that a culture of strong control is maintained as the Group implements its strategy and also as it positions itself for structural reform. The Committee will continue to seek to ensure that management maintains its focus on building personal accountability for upholding a strong and effective control environment and is supportive of the pilot programme being implemented in 2016 that will require certain business personnel to spend time working in a control function before being promoted. 2016 will also see the Committee focus on the transition to a new auditor, KPMG, who will become Barclays auditor with effect from the 2017 financial year. We will be seeking to ensure that the quality of the audit performed by the existing auditor, PwC, is maintained until the end of its tenure and that KPMG has completed the steps it needs to undertake to ensure it is fully independent of Barclays’ and has a strong understanding of the business before it takes up office.

LOGO

Mike Ashley

Chairman, Board Audit Committee

29 February 2016

 

10  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 20152016 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  9


    

    

    

 

 

 

An additional responsibility I have assumed under the Senior Managers Regime is that of Whistleblower’s Champion, a position required by the FCA to be held at Board level. As champion, I have specific responsibility for the integrity, independence and effectiveness of the Barclays’ policies and procedures on whistleblowing, including the procedures for protecting employees who raise concerns from detrimental treatment. During 2016, I recorded a video message to all employees Group-wide, highlighting my role as Whistleblower’s Champion and raising awareness of the policies and procedures we have in place.

I continued to work closely with my fellow Board Committee chairmen during 2016, particularly with the Board Risk Committee chairman on the question of operational risk issues, which each Committee has a role in overseeing. I attended meetings of the IHC audit committee to gain a first-hand insight into the issues being addressed by that committee and have invited its chairman to attend a Committee meeting in early 2017 by way of reciprocating. I met frequently with other members of senior management, including the Group Finance Director, and continued my engagement with Barclays’ regulators both in the UK and US.

Committee performance

The Committee’s performance during 2016 was assessed as part of the independently facilitated annual Board effectiveness review. The conclusion of my Board colleagues was that the Committee is regarded as thorough and the Board takes assurance from the quality of the Committee’s work. The main area identified for improvement was to ensure that the Committee continues to strike an appropriate balance between covering issues in appropriate detail and taking a strategic approach to its oversight and supervision of management. The review also commented on the need to strengthen the depth of financial and accounting expertise on the Committee via new appointments, which is a matter that was already under consideration during 2016, and the need to ensure that the way in which the Committee works with the Board Reputation and Board Risk Committees continues to capture all significant issues effectively while minimising any overlap. I will be seeking to address each of these areas over the coming year. You can read more about the outcomes of the Board effectiveness review on pages 33 to 35.

Looking ahead

The Committee is looking forward to working with both the new Chief Controls Officer and with the new auditor, KPMG, during 2017. In addition to overseeing management’s progress on enhancing the control environment, the Committee will be focusing on some significant accounting issues, including the Group’s preparedness for the implementation of IFRS9 and the accounting implications of Structural Reform. We will also be closely monitoring the implementation of the action plan to address the recommendations arising from the PRA’s review of BIA.

LOGO

Mike Ashley

Chairman, Board Audit Committee

22 February 2017

  

 

Board Audit Committee allocation of time (%)

 

  

 

 
     2016    2015 
  

 

 
  

 

LOGO

 

 

 

1

 

 

Control issues

  

 

 

 

23

 

 

  

 

 

 

18

 

 

   2 Business control environment   19    16 
   3 Financial results   36    27 
   4 Internal audit matters   11    7 
   5 

External audit matters

(including, in 2015, external audit tender)

   6    26 
   6 Other (including governance and compliance)   4    6 
        
        
        

Committee composition and meetings

The Committee is composed solely of independentnon-executive Directors. Dambisa Moyo retired from Directors, with membership designed to provide the Committee atbreadth of financial expertise and commercial acumen its needs to fulfil its responsibilities. Its members as a whole have experience of the end of August 2015 following a review of Board Committee compositionbanking and size by the Board, which resultedfinancial services sector in the membership of each Board Committee being refreshed.addition to general management and commercial experience. Diane Schueneman was appointed to the Committee with effect from 1 March18 February 2016, bringing valuable insights into operational and technology risk and controls. Diane de Saint Victor retired from the Committee at the end of May 2016. Mike Ashley is the designated financial expert on the Committee for the purposes of the US Sarbanes-Oxley Act. Although each member of the Committee has financial and/or financial services experience, the Board has determinedidentified that the Committee would benefit fromcould be strengthened by the appointment of an additional member with direct accounting and auditing experience and considerationexperience. Consideration is being given to further appointments to the Committee in order to deepen its expertisethis regard, however, given the impact of Structural Reform, the search for suitable candidates is being addressed in these areas.the context of overall Board composition requirements. You can find more details of the experience of Committee members in their biographies on pages 3 and 4.

The Committee met 1012 times in 20152016 and the chart on page 17above shows how it allocated its time. One meeting was held purelyMeetings are generally arranged well in advance and are usually scheduled in line with Barclays’ financial reporting timetable. Two of the meetings were arranged specifically to provide the Committee opportunity to consider presentations fromparticular issues relevant to the three audit firms biddingfinancial statements, such as the viability statement and the proposed deadline for the external audit tender and was not attended by Mike Ashley.PPI claims. Committee meetings were attended by management, including the Group Chief Executive, Group Finance Director, Chief Internal Auditor, Chief Risk Officer, Chief Operating Officer, General Counsel and Head of Compliance, as well as representatives from the businesses and other functions. In future, the Chief Controls Officer will attend meetings on a regular basis. The lead audit partner of the external auditor attended all Committee meetings except the meeting to evaluate the external audit tender proposals, and the Committee held a number of private sessions with each of the Chief Internal Auditor or the lead auditauditor partner, which were not attended by management. From 1 July 2016, the lead audit partner of KPMG also attended meetings as part of the statutory auditor transition process. Representatives from the PRA also attended a meeting during 2016.

 

Member  Meetings attended/eligible to attend
Mike Ashley*Ashley  9/1012/12
Tim Breedon  10/1012/12
Crawford GilliesGillies*  10/1011/12
Dambisa Moyo (to 31 August 2015)6/7
Diane de Saint Victor (to 31 May 2016)  7/108/8
Diane Schueneman (from 18 February 2016)9/9

 

*Did not attend theone meeting that considered the appointment of a new statutory auditor given that KPMG, where until 2013 he was a partner, was one of the bidding audit firms.
Unable to attend certain meetingsconvened at short notice owing to a prior business commitments. Input was provided to the Committee Chairman prior to the meeting.commitment

Committee role and responsibilities

The Committee is responsible for:

 

§ assessing the integrity of the Group’s financial reporting and satisfying itself that any significant financial judgements made by management are sound

 

§ evaluating the effectiveness of the Group’s internal controls, including internal financial controls and

 

§ scrutinising the activities and performance of the internal and external auditors, including monitoring their independence and objectivity.

 

LOGOLOGO  

The Committee’s terms of reference are available at

home.barclays/corporategovernance

 

 

 

10  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 20152016 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  11


Governance: Directors’ report

What we did in 20152016

Board Audit Committee report

 

 

 

The Committee’s work

The significant matters addressed by the Committee during 20152016 and in evaluating Barclays’ 2016 annual report and financial statements, are described below.on the following pages.

Significant financialFinancial statement reporting issues

AssumptionsThe Committee’s main responsibility in relation to Barclays’ financial reporting is to review with both management and the external auditor the appropriateness of Barclays’ financial statements, including quarterly results announcements and half-year and annual financial statements and supporting analyst presentations, with its primary focus being on:

§the quality and acceptability of accounting policies and practices

§any correspondence from financial reporting regulators in relation to Barclays’ financial reporting

§material areas where significant judgements have been made, along with any significant assumptions or estimates, or where significant issues have been discussed with or challenged by the external auditor

§an assessment of whether the Annual Report, taken as a whole, is fair, balanced and understandable and provides the information necessary for shareholders to assess Barclays’ position and performance, business model and strategy.

Accounting policies and practices

The Committee discussed reports from management in relation to the identification of critical accounting judgements and key sources of estimation uncertainty, significant accounting policies and the proposed disclosure of these in the 2016 Annual Report. Following discussions with both management and the external auditor, the Committee approved the critical accounting judgements, significant accounting policies and disclosures, which are an unavoidableset out in note 1, Significant accounting policies, to the consolidated financial statements. There were no significant changes in accounting policy during the period. During 2016, the Committee was regularly updated on Barclays’ preparations for the implementation of IFRS9 (Financial Instruments), which is effective from 1 January 2018, including the key technical decisions and significant partinterpretations required and Barclays’ proposed approach for each. The Committee also

considered the accounting implications of Structural Reform and the establishment of the ring-fenced bank. These will continue to be areas of focus in 2017.

Financial reporting regulators and Barclays

During the third quarter of 2016, Barclays received a comment letter from the Corporate Reporting Review Team (CRRT) of the Financial Reporting Council (FRC) in relation to its thematic review of tax disclosures. The comment letter covered the disclosure of uncertain tax provisions in Barclays’ 2015 annual report and financial reporting processstatements. The CRRT requested and was provided with additional information in respect of Barclays’ disclosure of uncertain tax positions, including an advance copy of Barclays enhanced policy for such disclosure (see page 236), and subsequently confirmed in writing that it had closed its enquiries.*

The Committee from time to time considers comment letters from the SEC in relation to its reviews of Barclays’ annual report and other publicly filed financial statements. Such comment letters and Barclays’ responses are evaluated carefullymade publicly available by the SEC on its website, www.sec.gov, once it has closed each such review. The Committee sought to ensure that Barclays took due account of the SEC’s views in its external reporting.

Significant judgements and issues

The significant judgements and issues and actions taken by the Committee ahead ofin relation to the publication of Barclays’ results announcements.2016 annual report and financial statements are outlined below. The Committee examined in detail the mainsignificant judgements and assumptions made by management, any sensitivity analyses performed and the conclusions drawn from the available information and evidence,issues are broadly comparable in nature to prior years. Each of these matters was discussed with the main areas of focus during the year set out below. Where appropriate, the Committee sought input and guidance from the external auditor and welcomed its challenge on specific matters. In addition to these main areas of focus,during the Committee also covered matters relating to Barclays’ pension scheme, taxation and accounting policy choices.year.

 

*The CRRT’s review was based on Barclays’ annual report and financial statements and did not benefit from detailed knowledge of Barclays’ business or the transactions entered into. The closure of the CRRT’s enquiries provides no assurance that Barclays’ annual report and accounts are correct in all material respects, as the FRC’s role is not to verify information but to ensure compliance with reporting requirements. The FRC accepts no liability for reliance on its closure letter from Barclays or any third party, including but not limited to investors and shareholders.
 

Area of focus

  

Reporting issue

  

Role of the Committee

  

Conclusion/action taken

Conduct provisions

(see Note 27 to the financial statements).

  Barclays makes certain assumptions and estimates, analysis of which underpins provisions made for the costs of customer redress, such as for Payment Protection Insurance (PPI), Packaged Bank Accounts (PBA) and rates provided to certain customers on foreign exchange transactions..  

In debating Barclays’ financial results statements, the Committee examined the provisions held for the costs of customer redress.

In respect of PPI, the Committee:

§   Regularly analysed the judgements and estimates made with regard to theBarclays’ provisioning for PPI provision,claims, taking into account estimated overturn rates,forecasts and assumptions made for PPI complaints and actual claims experience for Barclays and the estimation policy on missing data, and complaints trend dataindustry as a whole.

§   evaluated Financial Ombudsman Service overturn rates and trends, provisions utilisation, latest flow forecasts and how reasonable high and low end scenarios had been determined in order to assessDebated the potential impact on the future range of reasonable possible future costs

§  debatedprovisions arising from the FCA’s proposed additional provisionstimebar on claims and whether the analysis performed by management was consistent with prior periods

§  assessed the Group’s ability to forecast trends in PPI complaints,expected deadline of June 2019, discussing the levels of uncertainty in the projectionsprojections.

§   debatedDiscussed the potential range of outcomes that might arise from the Plevin case (the 2014 UK Supreme Court ruling in Plevin v Paragon Personal Finance Ltd) and whether any increase in provisions was required.

§   Evaluated proposed additional provisions for PPI and whether the potential impact onanalysis performed by management was consistent with prior periods and reflected known trend data and whether Barclays’ approach was consistent with that taken by industry peers.

§   Assessed provisions for alternative PPI (card protection and payment break plan insurance) and the futureclaims experience compared to the range of provisions arising from the proposed timebar on claims.reasonable high and low end scenarios that had been determined.

  The Committee agreed that an additional provision of £150m should be taken at the first quarter but requested a full review of forecasts for PPI redress for the second quarter 2015. Having assessed the outputs of that review, it agreed to increase the provision at the half year by £600m. Following the review at the third quarter, the Committee concluded that no additional provisions were required but asked management to conduct further review and analysis for the 2015 year end to ensure that provisions were within an acceptable range. In deliberating the analyses presented by management in connection with the 2015 full year results, and considering in particular the potential impact resulting from the FCA’s consultation on introducing a time limit for claims and addressing the Plevin case, the Committee agreed with management’s proposal to increase the provision at the year end by £1,450m. The Committee and management will continue to monitor closely any changes in customer or claims management companies’ behaviour in light of the Plevin case and the proposed FCA timebar.
With regard to PBA redress, Over the Committee:

The Committee endorsed management’s recommendation that an expensecourse of £282m for PBA should be provided for in2016, having assessed actual claims experience and the first halfpotential impact of the proposed timebar and agreed it should be disclosed as a separate item in the interim results. Having examined claims trend data, it concluded that no further provisions were required during 2015.

ThePlevin case, the Committee agreed with the proposal to make a provisionrecognise additional provisions of £290m£1000m in the third quarter and that this provision should be separately disclosed. The remediation is still at an early stage and the Committee noted that there were no significant developments in the fourth quarter. The Committee therefore agreed that no adjustment was required in the provision at the end of 2015.

§  debated the practice of providing for future costs where persistent levels of complaints are received

§  assessed PBA claims experience throughout 2015, examining the level of2016, bringing Barclays’ total cumulative provisions against forecast volumesthe cost of PPI redress and actual claims experience

§  evaluated management’s analysisassociated processing costs to £8.4bn, of complaint levels and trends and the outputs of product reviews.

In relation to redress to certain customers regarding rates provided on foreign exchange transactions, the Committee:

§  examined the results of the internal review conducted by management on foreign exchange transactions

§  evaluated the Group’s proposal for calculating remediation for the customers affected.

which £2.0bn is remaining.

 

 

 

12  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 20152016 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  11


    

    

    

 

 

 

 

Area of focus  Reporting issue  Role of the Committee  Conclusion/action taken

Legal, competition and regulatory provisions

(see Notes 27 and 2927-29 to the financial statements).

  Barclays makes judgementsis engaged in respect of provisions forvarious legal, competition and regulatory matters. The extent of the impact on Barclays of these matters cannot always be predicted, but matters can give rise to provisioning for contingent and other liabilities depending on the relevant facts and circumstances. The level of provisioning is subject to management judgement on the basis of legal advice and is therefore an area of focus for the Committee.  

§  Evaluated advice on the status of current legal, competition and regulatory matters.

§  Assessed management’s judgements and estimates of the levels of provisions to be taken and the adequacy of those provisions, based on available information and evidence.

§  Considered the adequacy of disclosure, recognising that any decision to set provisions involves significant judgement.

  

The Committee discussed provisions and utilisation for Foreign Exchange and ISDAFix litigation and agreed that any residual provision should be retained and not released in the first half.

utilisation. Having reviewed the information available to determine what was probable and could be reliably estimated, the Committee agreed that theno additional provision should be made at the full year should be set at £1,237m for ongoing investigations and litigation including Foreign Exchange.litigation.

 

Further information may be found on pages 266 and 267.

270 to 280.

Valuations

(see Notes 13 to 1814-18 to the financial statements).

  Barclays exercises judgement in the valuation and disclosure of financial instruments, derivative assets and certain portfolios, particularly where quoted market prices are not available, in particularincluding the Group’s Education, Social Housing and Local Authority (ESHLA) portfolio, which during 2015 represented the most material judgement in view of widening credit spreads on social housing bonds and budget changes impacting social housing portfolios.portfolio.  

§  Debated fair value balance sheet items. This included evaluatingEvaluated reports from Barclays’ Valuations Committee, with particular focus on the restructuring of the ESHLA portfolio and its subsequentde-recognition; a reportvaluation disparity with a third party in respect of a specific long-dated derivative portfolio; and an assessment of the impact of negative interest rates on the valuation of derivatives.

§   Considered proposals from the Valuations Committee analysing social housing bonds credit spread performance and debatingto revise the appropriateness ofvaluations approach for the valuation model.

§  Assessed how theremaining ESHLA portfolio might be accounted for under IFRS 9.

§  Debated uncollateralised derivatives and differences in pricing ranges andto revise the potential impact onapproach to the Group’s financial statements.

§  Examined the significant valuation disparity between the Group and a counterparty in relation to a specific long-dated derivative portfolio.marking of Own Credit.

 

  

The Committee concluded that there should be no changeconfirmed its agreement to the fair value approach. It also agreed with management’s recommendation that an additional prudential valuation adjustment of £300m should be made in respectrestructuring andde-recognition of the ESHLA portfolio reflecting an increaseand concluded that it was ade-recognition event. It noted the lack of progress made in credit uncertaintyresolving the third-party valuation disparity, which has been outstanding for social housing sector loans arising from some wideningtime, and satisfied itself on the basis of social housing bond credit spreads.

The Committee notedthe information available to it that despite attemptsBarclays’ valuation methodology remains appropriate. It approved a revision to the model used for valuing the remaining ESHLA portfolio recommended by the front office trading team, the Group Finance Director and the Chairman of the Committee, it had not proved possible to gain a complete understanding of the causes of the valuation disparity from the relevant counterparty. Nonetheless, a significant element was understandable in light of the different underlying positions held and the Committee took further comfort from a third party valuation provided in relation to ongoing consideration of restructuring the trades. The Committee concluded that the Group’s valuation methodology was appropriate and also noted that the Group was protected against counterparty credit risk through a collateral escrow arrangement.

Valuations Committee.

Impairment

(see Note 7 to the financial statements).

  Where appropriate, Barclays models potential impairment performance, allowing for certain assumptions and sensitivities, to agree allowances for credit impairment, including agreeing the timing of the recognition of any impairment and estimating the size, particularly where forbearance has been granted.  

§  Assessed impairment experience against forecast and whether impairment provisions were appropriate.

§  Evaluated the resultsappropriateness and timing of the review and stress tests conducted by management of the Group’simpairment taken in connection with Barclays’ exposures to the oil and gas sectorsectors, including the impact of single name losses in light of the reduction in oil prices.and commodities sectors.

§  Debated management’s analysisthe adjustment in impairment taken in the Cards business for informal forbearance arrangements and the potential impact of changes in emergence modelling.

§  Considered a report from the emergenceGroup Impairment Committee on the adequacy of loan impairment allowances as at 31 December 2016, including assessing internal and outturn periods for the Barclaycard portfolios.external trends, methodologies and key management judgements.

  

The Committee agreed withchallenged the proposed adjustments to emergence and outcome periods and determined that the allowances for credit impairment on loans and advances were appropriate and adequately supported by model outputs.

In relation totiming of the oil and gas sector,impairment taken in the Committee determinedhalf-year results, although confirmed that the proposed provisions were appropriate but noted that further stressprovision was possibleadequate. It welcomed the proposal to create a new Group Impairment Committee and enhance the role of the Group Finance function in assessing impairment provisioning. It agreed a post-model adjustment of £250m for impairment in the eventUK and US Cards businesses during the third quarter of 2016 and obtained clarification on the impairment policy for the Cards business. At the full year, having debated the report from the Group Impairment Committee it confirmed the adequacy of the full year impairment charge of £2.4bn.

Tax

(see Note 10 to the financial statements).

Barclays is subject to taxation in a prolonged periodnumber of lower oil prices.jurisdictions globally and makes judgements with regard to provisioning for tax at risk and on the recognition and measurement of deferred tax assets.

§  Evaluated the appropriateness of tax risk provisions to cover existing tax risk.

 

§  Debated the forecasts and assumptions supporting the recognition and valuation of deferred tax assets.

The Committee confirmed the tax risk provisions for the full year and the treatment of deferred tax assets.

 

 

 

 

 

12  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 20152016 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  13


Governance: Directors’ report

What we did in 20152016

Board Audit Committee report

 

 

 

 

Area of focus  Reporting issue  Role of the Committee  Conclusion/action taken

Going concern

(see page 45 for further information).

Barclays is required to confirm that the going concern basis of accounting is appropriate.

§  Assessed a working capital report prepared by Barclays Treasury, covering forecast and stress tested forecasts for liquidity and capital compared to current and future regulatory requirements, while taking into account levels of conduct and litigation provisioning and possible further provisions that may be required.

After examining forecast working capital, along with Barclays’ ability to generate capital and raise funding in current market conditions, the Committee concluded that Barclays’ liquidity and capital position remained appropriate, that there were no material uncertainties and that the going concern basis of accounting remained appropriate.

ViabilityLong-term viability

  For the 2015 reporting year onwards, theThe Directors are required to make a statement in the Annual Report as to the longer-termlong-term viability of Barclays. The Committee provides advice to the Board on the form and content of the statement, including the underlying assumptions.  

§   At the request of the Board, evaluatedEvaluated at the year end a report from management that setsetting out the view of Barclays’longer-term long-term viability. This report was based on Barclays Medium Term Plan (MTP) and covered forecasts for capital, liquidity and leverage, including forecast performance against regulatory targets, outcomes of the stress test of the MTP and forecast capital and liquidity performance against stress hurdle rates, funding and liquidity forecasts and an assessment of global risk themes and the Group’s risk profile.

 

§   Considered the viability statement in conjunction with Barclays risk statements and strategy/business model disclosures.

§   Addressed specific feedback from investors and other stakeholders on viability statements in general.

  Taking into account the assessment by the Board Risk Committee of stress testing results and risk appetite, the Committee agreed to recommend the viability statement to the Board for approval, although it emphasised the need for the statement to refer specifically to the key risks to viability, in particular those outside the Group’s direct control.approval.

Fair, balanced and understandable reporting

(including Country by Countrycountry-by-country reporting and Pillar 3 reporting).

  

Barclays is required to ensure that its external reporting is fair, balanced and understandable. The Committee undertakes an assessment on behalf of the Board in order to provide the Board with assurance that it can make the statement required by the Code.

  

§   At the request of the Board, assessed,Assessed, via discussion with and challenge of management, including the Group Chief Executive and Group Finance Director, whether disclosures in Barclays’ published financial statements were fair, balanced and understandable, taking into account comments received from investors and others.understandable.

§   Evaluated reports from theBarclays’ Disclosure Committee on its assessment of the content, accuracy and tone of the disclosures.

§  Sought and obtained confirmation from the Group Chief Executive and Group Finance Director that they considered the disclosures to be fair, balanced and understandable.

§  Evaluated the outputs of Barclays’ Turnbull assessments and Sarbanes- Oxley s404 internal control process.

§   Established via reports from management that there were no indications of fraud relating to financial reporting matters.

§   Evaluated the outputs of Barclays’ internal control assessments and Sarbanes-Oxley s404 internal control process.

§   Assessed disclosure controls and procedures.

§   RequestedConfirmed that management reporthad reported on and evidenceevidenced the basis on which representations to the external auditors were made.

  

Having assessedevaluated all of the available information and the assurances provided by management, the Committee concluded that the processes underlying the preparation of Barclays’ published financial statements, including the 2016 annual report and financial statements, were appropriate in ensuring that those statements were fair, balanced and understandable.

 

In assessing Barclays’ financial results statements over the course of 2016, the Committee requested that certain amendments were made to disclosures on litigationspecifically addressed and also provided input to management on other keythe disclosure items,and presentation of:

§   Barclays restated financial results, including the US Wealth disposal,allocations to Barclays UK and Barclays International and the separation of the Cards business.

§   the sell-down of Barclays holding in Barclays Africa and its classification as held for sale.

§   guidance provided to the market on the costs of Structural Reform.

§   the Group Finance Director’s presentations to analysts.

§   alternative performance measures in view of new guidance from the European Securities & Markets Association.

§   core performance and headcount.

§   operational risk capital and guidance on Barclays Non-Core, adjusting items, dividends and outlook statements. It also debatedcapital levels.

§   the proposed statements to be made by the Chairman and Group Chief Executive, suggesting amendments.level of segmental reporting.

 

The Committee concluded that the disclosures and process underlying the production of the 2015 Annual Report and Financial Statements were appropriate and recommended to the Board that the 2015 Annual Report2016 annual report and Financial Statementsfinancial statements are fair, balanced and understandable.

 

14  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2016 Annual Report on Form 20-F


Other significant matters

Apart from financial reporting matters the Committee has responsibility for oversight of the effectiveness of Barclays’ internal controls, the performance and effectiveness of BIA and the performance, objectivity and independence of the external auditor. The most significant matters considered during 2016 are described below:

Area of focus

Matter addressed

Role of the Committee

Conclusion/action taken

Internal control

Read more about the Barclays’ internal control and risk management processes on pages 40 and 41

The effectiveness of the overall control environment, including the status of any material control issues and the progress of specific remediation plans.

§   Evaluated and tracked the status of the most material control issues identified by management via regular reports from the Head of Operational Risk and latterly from the Chief Controls Officer.

§   Evaluated the status of specific material control issues and associated remediation plans, including in particular those relating to Security of Secret and Confidential Data; Infrastructure Access Management; Group Resilience; IT Security; Data Governance; Model Risk Management; and Unsupported Infrastructure and Applications, all of which remained open at the end of 2016.

§   Discussed lessons learned from specific control incidents and how these could be applied to Barclays’ business globally, via an enhanced lessons-learned process.

§   Debated any regulatory reports or other feedback received from regulators on Barclays’ overall control environment.

§   Assessed the status of the enhancements being made to Barclays risk and control self-assessment (RCSA) process to support disclosures in Barclays annual report.

The Committee requested enhancements to reporting to make clear where operational risk was outside appetite and the actions being taken. The Committee welcomed the improvements made to the lessons-learned process and proposed that the new Group Controls Committee should play a role in setting standards for lessons-learned exercises and deciding when they should be conducted. The Committee endorsed the work being taken forward, under the leadership of the Chief Controls Officer, to address any feedback from regulators on Barclays’ control environment, noting that the Board would directly oversee the progress being made to address specific regulatory feedback. The Committee also challenged management to ensure that the RCSA process was sufficiently robust in light of some specific control issues that had emerged after certain RCSAs had been completed.

The effectiveness of the management control approach and control environment in each individual business, including the status of any material control issues and the progress of specific remediation plans.

§   Assessed individual reports from Barclays UK, Barclays International, the Cards business, Barclays’ Non Core operations, Barclays International’s US investment banking operations and Barclays Africa, including questioning directly the heads of those businesses on their management control approach/culture and control environment, including any specific control issues, resilience issues, the status and progress of any remediation plans or workstreams and plans to enhance the control environment.

§   Tracked plans for implementing revised control governance structures in each business to align with changes in Barclays’ organisational structure.

§   Provided feedback on the 2016 control objectives for each member of the Group Executive Committee.

The Committee welcomed the decision by Barclaycard to redirect strategic investment towards enhancing its control environment and to restrict growth in new business while certain control issues, such as fraud levels in the US, were addressed. To make clear the levels of personal accountability expected, the Committee asked for the control objectives for each member of the Group Executive Committee for 2016 to be made more specific, with an emphasis on prioritising control issues.

 

 

 

 

  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 20152016 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  13


Other significant matters

Other matters addressed by the Committee focused on the effectiveness of Barclays’ internal controls, the performance and effectiveness of the internal audit function, the performance, objectivity and independence of the external auditor, PricewaterhouseCoopers LLP (PwC) and the arrangements being made to ensure that the incoming auditor, KPMG LLP (KPMG), achieves full independence prior to commencing the Barclays’ audit. The most significant matters are described below.

Area of focusMatter addressedRole of the CommitteeConclusion/action taken

Internal control

Read more about the Barclays’ Internal control and risk management processes on page 39.

The effectiveness of the control environment in operations and technology (O&T) and the status and remediation of any material control issues.

§  Evaluated on a regular basis, the O&T control environment, including the status of any open material control issues, emerging risks and closed control issues, taking the opportunity to directly challenge and question functional leaders.

§  Scrutinised the status of specific material control issues and their associated remediation plans, including in particular those relating to access management, security of secret and confidential data, cyber risk, IT infrastructure and application issues and third party supplier management.

§  Debated any slippage to remediation programmes and whether this was a cultural indicator of the Group’s approach.

§  Conducted a deep dive on security of secure and confidential data control issues, discussing in particular the cultural changes that the businesses needed to make.

§  Assessed the threat presented by cyber risk, including the impact of any confirmed cyber attacks.

§  Debated the progress of remediation of third party supplier management control issues, including the potential impacts of the Group’s focus on cost management and of decentralisation.

Having assessed the status of material control issues and their remediation, the Committee suggested that resilience should be elevated as a material control issue and requested a deep dive. The deep dive has been scheduled for early 2016. The Committee also requested further updates on cyber risk and third party supplier management, both of which are scheduled to take place in early 2016.

The Committee requested a deep dive on access management control issues, which took place during 2015.

The effectiveness of the business control environment, including the status of any material control issues and the progress of specific remediation plans.

§  Assessed individual reports on the control environment in PCB, Barclaycard, Barclays Africa and US Investment Banking operations, including questioning directly the heads of those businesses.

§  Debated the importance of maintaining an effective control environment as the Group decentralises certain functional activities.

The Committee requested, and received, an update on decentralisation and its potential impact on the Group’s control environment.
The progress being made on embedding the ERMF to support a strong and effective internal control environment.

§  Assessed the results of a self-assessment pilot exercise conducted by the principal business units, as the first line of defence.

§  Evaluated a proposal for a revised approach to the internal control attestation process to link it to the ERMF.

§  Deliberated on the challenge of embedding conduct risk management as part of the ERMF.

§  Debated the effectiveness of the systems being used to support risk and control assessments by the first line of defence.

§  Focused on the need for effective challenge by the second line of defence.

§  Debated what metrics could be used to provide line of sight to control issues and whether a more objective approach to MCA ratings could be developed.

The Committee suggested to management that the assessment of MCA ratings could be more closely aligned to the ERMF. It subsequently considered and approved a proposal to align the MCA and ERMF, recommending that this be implemented with effect from 1 January 2016. The Committee requested further work on the revised approach to the internal control attestation process, so that the revised approach could be implemented for the 2015 year end attestation. The Committee asked for a further update on the effectiveness of the challenge by the second line of defence once all risk and control assessments had been completed. This update is scheduled to be provided in early 2016.

14  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F15


Governance: Directors’ report

What we did in 20152016

Board Audit Committee report

 

 

 

 

Area of focus  Matter addressed  Role of the Committee  Conclusion/action taken
   The effectiveness of the control environment in the Chief Operating Office (COO) and the status and remediation of any material control issues.

§  Scrutinised on a regular basis the COO control environment, taking the opportunity to directly challenge and question functional leaders, including the Chief Operating Officer on the progress of remediation plans.

§  Debated the clarity of accountability and standards of consistency needed, given decentralisation of the business.

§  Addressed the issue of resilience and associated risk appetite, discussing in particular the impact of change on resilience initiatives.

§  Discussed the impact of the proposed sell-down of Barclays holding in Barclays Africa, including any ongoing support requirements onCOO-related material control issues.

The Committee emphasised the need for clear ownership and accountability between the business and COO for technology control issues, which has been addressed via the implementation of the new organisational management structure. In view of the volume of technology and change remediation required, the Committee tasked the Chief Operating Officer with enhancing the processes for self-identification and logging of risk and control issues. The Committee also asked the new Chief Information Officer to conduct a deep dive into Technology control issues, the outputs of which were evaluated by the Committee in the fourth quarter of 2016. The Committee welcomed the improved clarity of the plans to enhance the COO control environment and will receive further regular updates throughout 2017.

The adequacy of the Group’s arrangements to allow employees to raise concerns in confidence without fear of retaliation and the outcomes of any substantiated cases.  

§  DebatedEvaluated the enhancements maderesults of benchmarking exercise to the Group’s whistleblowing framework, including changes in the team, communicationscompare Barclays’ processes and case volumes to employees and re-publication of the Raising Concerns Policy.40 peer companies.

§  EvaluatedTracked the levelprogress of substantiated cases andthe internal campaign to raise awareness among employees on raising concerns.

§  Monitored the trends in reporting.reported and substantiated whistleblowing cases, including any information on any instances of retaliation.

  

The Committee welcomed the steps that had been taken to strengthen the Group whistleblowing team and to enhance awareness and visibility across the Group of whistleblowing processes and the Raising Concerns Policy. It asked for more granular reporting to be made to the Committee, including ensuring that any cases of retaliation were clearly highlighted and that Barclays Africa incidents were reported to the Committee on the same basis as the rest of the Group. This information is now being received.

To enable an assessment of effectiveness, the Committee asked for Barclays’ processes to be benchmarked against its peers. It was subsequently presented with the results of the benchmarking exercise and concluded that Barclays’ processes were appropriate.appropriate and in line with peers. It noted that the successful internal campaign had generated an increase in the number of whistleblowing reports, all of which were investigated. Volumes of cases remain proportionate to Barclays’ size and footprint. The Committee asked management to provide additional detail in its future reports where any whistleblowing investigation was outstanding for more than six months. In future, as Barclays Whistleblowing Champion, the Chairman of the Committee will make an annual report to the Board on whistleblowing matters.

 

16  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2016 Annual Report on Form 20-F


Area of focus

Matter addressed

Role of the Committee

Conclusion/action taken

Internal audit

  

The performance of internal auditBIA and delivery of the internal audit plan, including scope of work performed, the level of resources and the methodology and coverage of the internal audit plan.

  

§  Focused on how to accelerate the remediation of any control weaknesses and the importance of having a culture of closing issues effectively, including debating a new approach to audit issues management, which requires issues to be remediated within six months of identification, with any extension to that time period requiring the approval of a member of the Group Executive Committee.

§   Evaluated progress of theScrutinised and agreed internal audit plan for 2015plans and debated the plandeliverables for 2016, including assessingagreeing the proposed internal audit coverageareas of focus, such as technology, data, change, execution risk, and key control themes identified.the resources required.

§   AssessedMonitored delivery of the agreed audit plans, including assessing internal audit resources and attrition levels.levels and any impacts on the plan.

§   Debated audit risk appetite and issue validation.

§   Tracked the levels of unsatisfactory audits, including discussing the time taken to issue audit reports and the reasons for any delays.

§   Discussed BIA’s assessment of the management control approach and control environment in Barclays UK, Barclays International and the COO.

§   Debated with BIA the possibility of auditing culture.

§   Evaluated the outcomes from Barclays Internal Audit’sBIA’s annual self-assessment.

§   Debated feedback received from the PRA on the performance of BIA and discussed the increased regulatory expectations of BIA and the impact on internal audit plans and resources.

  

The Committee supported the approach to enforcing even greater accountability and ensuring greater visibility at Group Executive Committee and senior management level of the remediation of control issues and audit issues management. It confirmed its agreement to the key control themes identified by internal audit, although it asked for execution risk to be covered specifically.

The Committee approved changesan increase in headcount to internal audit’s methodology and the approach toensure appropriate audit coverage of technology and issues validation, which has been implemented from 1 January 2016.change and agreed an interim audit risk appetite level pending recruitment, subject to the delivery of mitigating actions assigned to the Chief Operating Officer. The Committee emphasised to management that it was not content with the number of unsatisfactory audits and considered setting a target for management. It also asked BIA to disclose in its reports the reasons for internalany delay in issuing audit reports, to comment as a matteralong with details of course on the effectiveness of both first and second lines of defence when evaluating theirany audit findings. Having assessed internal audit’s reports on a regular basis, the Committee confirmed completion of the internal audit plan for the first half of 2015 and approved the plan for the second half of the year, including approving the resources requested. It also approved the plan for the first half of 2016.work that was deferred or cancelled. In view of the Group’s focusadditional expectations placed on cost management,BIA, the Committee asked for an assessmentrequested details of the impact on the internal audit vacancies, business areas and skills sets and encouraged the Chief Internal Auditor to consider internal transfers and other creative solutions to fill resourcing gaps. It agreed with BIA the action plan to address the recommendations arising from the PRA review of any proposed headcount reductions and for this to be reported to the Committee along with any revised plan.BIA’s performance. The Committee confirmed that it was contentsatisfied with the outcomes of the self-assessment of internal auditBIA performance, although requested an updatewhich evidenced that the function generally conforms to the standards set by the Institute of Internal Auditors. It further confirmed that it felt able to reply on the quality assurance programme, which will be providedwork of BIA in 2016.discharging its own responsibilities.

 

 

External audit

  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  15


 

Area of focusMatter addressedRole of the CommitteeConclusion/action taken
External auditThe work and performance of PwC, including the maintenance of audit quality during the period of transition to a new auditor.

  

§   Convened a separate sessionMet with the key members of the PwC audit team to discuss the 20152016 audit plan and agree areas of focus.

§   Assessed regular reports from PwC on the progress of the 20152016 audit and any material issues identified.identified, including debating with PwC whether any changes to the audit plan were needed following the UK’s vote to leave the EU.

§   DebatedDiscussed PwC’s report on certain control areas and the control environment, including a specific report on controls over access to payment systems requested by the Committee.

§   Discussed the draft audit opinion ahead of 20152016 year end.

 

The Committee was also briefed by PwC on critical accounting estimates, where significant judgement is needed.

  

The Committee approved the audit plan and the main areas of focus, including impairment, valuations, conduct redress provisions, litigation and regulation and IT systems and controls. The Committee asked PwC to comment on the Group’s reconciliations processes and how they compared to other financial institutions.focus.

 

Read more about the Committee’s role in assessing the performance, effectiveness and independence of the external auditor and the quality of the external audit below.

 

  The external audit tender, which was conducted during 2015,Barclays PLC and the arrangements for the transition to a new auditor.

§  Received regular updates from the Audit Tender Oversight Sub-CommitteeBarclays Bank PLC 2016 Annual Report on the progress of the audit tender.

§  Convened a special meeting to evaluate final presentations from the three audit firms who responded to the request for proposal.

§  Assessed and endorsed the proposed process to ensure that KPMG was independent by 1 July 2016.

Form 20-F  |  17

The Committee decided to look further at potential reputation risk before making a recommendation to the Board. Having done so, it concluded on two firms for recommendation to the Board for consideration, indicating its preferred option of KPMG. In July 2015, Barclays announced the appointment of KPMG as its statutory auditor with effect from the 2017 financial year.


Governance: Directors’ report

What we did in 2016

Board Audit Committee report

 

Read more about the external audit tender and the processes in place to ensure KPMG’s independence below.

 

The Committee also covered the following matters:

§  ensured it was updated ontracked the implementationprogress of IFRS 9, includingspecific work being done to enhance Barclays’ financial crime controls and the work under way to develop the Group’s approach, project status, resourcing and employee training.deployment of a revised financial crime operating model. The Committee requested,also assessed the Group Money Laundering Officer’s annual report and received, a specific briefing sessionwas briefed on IFRS 9, coveringany issues arising from the key assumptions and judgements that will be required

§  debatedpublication of the Group’s plan for recovery and resolution andinformation known as the process by which it was developed, including assessing the forward-looking trigger indicators

§  tracked progress of plans to ensure an attestation could be made to the Group’s regulators with regard to financial crime controls“Panama Papers”

§  assessed the status reports onof the Group’s controls aroundprogramme in place to ensure Barclays’ compliance with client assets regulatory requirements, including approving the annual client assets audit report and encouraged management to ensure that complexity, anddiscussing the associated compliance costs, was taken into account when deciding which products to be offeredpotential impact of Structural Reform on client assets

§  evaluated regular reports on regulatory issuesthe outcomes of the assessment of the Committee’s performance and any areas of Committee performance that needed to be enhanced

§  approved revisions toreviewed and updated its terms of reference, and recommendedrecommending them to the Board for approvalapproval.

§External auditor  approved

PwC, and its predecessor firms, has been Barclays’ external auditor since 1896. An external audit tender was conducted in 2015, with a revised Group Retail Impairment Policy.view to rotating the external audit firm for the 2017 audit onwards. PwC was not asked to tender. The tender process completed in summer 2015 and the Board announced in July 2015 that it had appointed KPMG as Barclays’ statutory auditor with effect from the 2017 financial year. Henry Daubeney of PwC has been Barclays’ senior statutory auditor with effect from the audit for the 2015 financial year. He will be succeeded by an audit partner from KPMG with effect from the audit for the 2017 financial year.

Assessing external auditor effectiveness, auditor objectivity and independence andnon-audit services

The Committee is responsible for assessing the effectiveness, objectivity and independence of the Group’s auditor, PwC. This responsibility was discharged throughout the year at formal committeeCommittee meetings, during private meetings with PwC and via discussions with key executive stakeholders. In addition to the matters noted above, during 2015,2016 the Committee:

§  approved the terms of the audit engagement letter and associated fees, on behalf of the Board having scrutinised the results of Barclays’ formal evaluation of PwC. More information on the formal evaluation is provided below

§  appraised PwC’s approach to key accounting judgements and how they were communicated and agreed with management and the Committee

§  recognising that PwC, and its predecessor firms, has been Barclays external auditor since 1896 and that it had been more than 10 years since the external audit was last tendered, conducted an external audit tender, identified KPMG as the preferred candidate for appointment as Barclays’ new auditor and made a recommendation to the Board. Details of the audit tender process, which was overseen by the Audit Tender Oversight Sub-Committee, can be found on page 18

§  discussed and agreed revisions to theGroup Policy on the Provision of Services by the Group Statutory Auditor and regularly analysed andregularlyanalysed reports from management on thenon-audit services that PwC provided to Barclays. Following the appointment of KPMG as auditor from 1 January 2017, the Committee also commenced oversight of new non-audit service engagements with KPMG in recognition of the potential threats to independence. Read more aboutnon-audit services below

§  instructed Barclays Internal Audit to undertake a review of a sample of non-audit services provided by PwC to ensure that the final deliverables aligned to the scope of work approved by the Committee. No concerns were identified by this review

§  evaluated and approved revisions to theGroup Policy on Employment of Employees or Workers from the Statutory Auditor and ensuredandensured compliance with the policy by regularly assessing reports from management detailing any appointments made

§  analysed the results of the inspection of PwC by the Financial Reporting Council’s Audit Quality Review Team and confirmed support for the actions PwC proposed to take to address areas identified for improvement

§  assessed the draft report to the PRA prepared by PwC regarding its detailed audit work on specific topics in particular, impairment.

§  was briefed by PwC on critical accounting estimates, where significant judgement is needed

§  assessed any potential threats to its independence self-identified and reported by PwC

§  reviewed the report on PwC issued by the FRC’s Audit Quality Review team.

PwC’s performance, independence and objectivity during 20152016 were formally assessed at the beginning of 2016. A2017 by way of a questionnaire incorporating best practice recommendations from a number of professional and governance bodies, and taking account of key findings from the 2014 review, was completed by key stakeholders across the Group. The questionnaire was designed to evaluate PwC’s audit process in its entirety and addressed matters including the quality of planning and communication, technical knowledge, the level of scrutiny and challenge applied and PwC’s understanding of the business. The subsequent report provided empirical data on which the Committee assessed PwC. It also reflected specific comments made by respondents, giving the Committee a valuable insight into management’s views. The Committee was particularly interested in assessing whether audit quality was being maintained throughout the period of transition to a new auditor.auditor and that the appropriate degree of challenge and scepticism was being maintained. The results of the evaluation confirmed that both PwC and the audit process were effective. Having considered the resultsIn view of the evaluation,external audit tender conducted in 2015 and the Committee recommendeddecision to appoint KPMG as Barclays’ external auditor with effect from the Board and to shareholders that2017 financial year, PwC should be reappointedwill resign as the Group’s auditorsstatutory auditor at the conclusion of the 2016 audit and the Board will resolve to appoint KPMG to fill the vacancy. A resolution to appoint KPMG as auditor will be proposed at Barclays’ 2017 AGM. PwC will be available at the 2017 AGM on 28 April 2016, noting that this would be PwC’s final year as Group auditor.

16  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F


Governance: Directors’ report

What we did in 2015to answer any questions.

Board Audit Committee reportNon-audit services

Non-audit services

In order to safeguard the auditor’s independence and objectivity, Barclays has in place a policy setting out the circumstances in which the auditor may be engaged to provide services other than those covered by the Group audit.The Group Policy on the Provision of Services by the Group Statutory Auditor (the Policy)(thePolicy) applies to all Barclays’ subsidiaries and other material entities over which Barclays has significant influence. The core principle of the Policy is thatnon-audit services (other than those legally required to be carried out by the Group’s auditor) should only be performed by the auditor in certain, controlled circumstances. The Policy sets out those types of services that are strictly prohibited and those that are allowable in principle. Any service types that do not fall within either list are considered by the Committee Chairman on a case by case basis, supported by a risk assessment provided by management.

The Since October 2015, the Committee has also required all new engagements of KPMG fornon-audit services to be considered in light of the Policy and has maintained oversight of such services on the same basis as for PwC. In particular, KPMG was not permitted to provide anynon-audit service that might have continued beyondmid-2016 if it had potential to cause independence issues.

During 2016, the Policy was revised to reflect the FRC’s draft Ethical Standard for Auditors published in September 2015, which implemented the EU’s revised Statutory Audit Directive. The new Ethical Standard is effective from financial years commencing on or after 17 June 2016, meaning that Barclays must comply with effect from 1 January 2017. However, the Committee decided to early adopt the requirements of the new Ethical Standard from 1 July 2016, to align with the point at which KPMG started its required period of independence. In order to comply with the new Ethical Standard, significant amendments were made to the list of services that are strictly prohibited by the Policy. A number of services being undertaken by PwC or KPMG were required to be exited following adoption of the new Policy, with any exceptions being approved by the Chairman and notified to the Committee.

Under the Policy, the Committee haspre-approved all allowable services up to £100,000, or £25,000 for tax advisory services, however, all proposed work, regardless of the fees, must be sponsored by a senior executive and recorded on a centralised online system, with a detailed explanation of the clear commercial benefit arising from engaging the auditor over other potential service providers. The audit firm engagement partner must also confirm that the engagement has been approved in accordance with the auditor’s own internal ethical standards and does not pose any threat to the auditor’s independence or objectivity.

All requests to engage the auditor are assessed by independent management before work can commence. Requests for allowable service types in respect of which the fees are expected to meet or exceed the above thresholds must be approved by the Chairman of the Committee before work is permitted to begin. Services where the fees are expected to be £250,000 or higher must be approved by the Committee as a whole. All expenses and disbursements must be included in the fees calculation.

During 2015, all engagements where expected fees met or exceeded the above The thresholds were not amended when the Policy was revised in 2016.

18 | Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2016 Annual Report on Form 20-F


During 2016, all engagements where expected fees met or exceeded the above thresholds were evaluated by either the Committee Chairman or the Committee as a whole who, before confirming any approval, assured themselves that there was justifiable reason for engaging the auditor and that its independence and objectivity would not be threatened. No requests to use PwC were declined in 2016 (2015: two), with one request to use KPMG declined (2015: n/a). On a quarterly basis, the Committee scrutinised details of individually approved andpre-approved services undertaken by PwC and KPMG in order to satisfy itself that they posed no risk to independence, either in isolation or on an aggregated basis. For the purposes of the Policy, the Committee has determined that anypre-approved service of a value of under £50,000 is to be regarded as clearly trivial in terms of its impact on Barclays’ financial statements and has required the Group Financial Controller to specifically review and confirm to the Committee that anypre-approved service with a value of £50,000 - £100,000 (or up to £25,000 for tax advisory services) may be regarded as clearly trivial. The Committee undertook a review ofpre-approved services at its meeting in December 2016 and satisfied itself that suchpre-approved services were clearly trivial in the context of their impact on the financial statements.

The fees paid to PwC for the year ended 31 December 2016 amounted to £49m (2015: £43m), of which £8m (2015: £9m) was payable in respect ofnon-audit services.Non-audit services represented 20.6% of the statutory audit fee (2015: 24.2%). A breakdown of the fees paid to the auditor for statutory audit andnon-audit work can be found in Note 42 on page 304. Of the £8m ofnon-audit services provided by PwC during 2016, the significant categories of engagement, i.e. services where the fees amounted to more than £500,000, included:

§  audit-related services: additional work to facilitate the transition to KPMG as Barclays’ statutory auditor

§  transaction support: services provided in connection with the sell-down of Barclays’ holding in Barclays Africa, including acting as the reporting accountant on the circular issued to Barclays’ shareholders and providing comfort on associated documentation

§  quality assurance: performed on behalf of Barclays Africa over work conducted by Barclays in connection with the separation arrangements from Barclays.

The fees paid to KPMG fornon-audit work during 2016 were £17.3m (2015: £38m). Significant categories of engagement approved in 2016 included:

§  Audit-related services: services provided in connection with minimum regulatory requirements for audits of benchmark interest rate submissions.

The Statutory Audit Services for Large Companies Market Investigation (Mandatory Use of Competitive Tender Processes and Audit Committee Responsibilities) Order 2014

As described in this report, Barclays is in compliance with the requirements of The Statutory Audit Services for Large Companies Market Investigation (Mandatory Use of Competitive Tender Processes and Audit Committee Responsibilities) Order 2014, which relates to the frequency and governance of tenders for the appointment of the external auditor and the setting of a policy on the provision ofnon-audit services.

Governance in Action – Statutory auditor transition

A significant activity for the Committee during 2016 has been overseeing the transition of Barclays’ statutory auditor from PwC to KPMG. Following the audit tender that concluded inmid-2015, KPMG will become Barclays statutory auditor with effect from the 2017 financial year onwards. The Committee has undertaken activity to manage the transition period to facilitate a smooth handover of responsibilities.

The Committee has overseen the steps required to enable KPMG to achieve independence by 1 July 2016. This included:

§  assigning a dedicated transition team to support operational activities, including progressing a global master services agreement and local jurisdictional agreements

§  agreeing with KPMG the overall plan to achieve independence and assessing regular reports from KPMG on the progress being made

§  monitoring the orderly termination ofnon-audit services being provided by KPMG to Barclays that would be prohibited when KPMG becomes statutory auditor

§  requiring KPMG to comply from 1 June 2016 with the provisions of the Group’s policies relating to the statutory auditor, specifically,The Group Policy on the Provision of Services by the Group Statutory AuditorandtheGroup Policy on Employment of Employees or Workers from the Statutory Auditor, and requiring management to report to the Committee on any services or appointments undertaken in line with these policies

§  accepting a formal independence letter from KPMG. This included a list of ongoingnon-audit services that are deemed permissible and which have been approved in accordance with Barclays’ policy and confirmation of KPMG’s compliance with applicable ethics and independence rules.

Once independence was achieved, the Committee oversaw the handover plan and the transition to business as usual. This included:

§  inviting the lead audit partner of KPMG to attend Committee meetings as part of the process of shadowing PwC’s 2016 audit

§  arranging for the lead audit partner of KPMG to attend meetings of the Board Reputation Committee and Board Risk Committee

§  receiving a briefing from KPMG on accounting developments, covering: Impairment and the impact of IFRS9 (Financial Instruments); Valuations; Negative interest rates; Structural Reform; IFRS15 (Revenue from contracts with customers) and IFRS16 (Leases)

§  discussing with KPMG accounting policy interpretations following KPMG’s review of Barclays’ accounting policies

§  assessing regular reports from KPMG on the progress being made with key activities, including building the Barclays’ audit team and gaining an understanding of Barclays’ key processes, systems and controls

§  reviewing the report on KPMG issued by the FRC’s Audit Quality Review team

§  scheduling a planning meeting between the Committee and KPMG for the second quarter of 2017 to discuss the audit strategy and provide input.

Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2016 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  19


Governance: Directors’ report

What we did in 2016

Board Risk Committee report

LOGO

LOGO  The Committee’s focus during 2016 has been driven by a number of key challenges, including emerging economic and political risks, notably those associated with the EU Referendum and the subsequent vote by the UK to leave the EU .LOGO

Dear Fellow Shareholders

The Committee’s focus during 2016 has been driven by a number of key challenges. First, Barclays has been implementing its new strategy and executing its Structural Reform Programme, which has some particular implications in terms of capital and liquidity management across Barclays’ legal entities. Second, there was continued focus on any emerging risks arising in our key markets in the UK, US and South Africa as a consequence of any macroeconomic deterioration or disruption in financial market conditions. Finally, there were the challenges presented by emerging economic and political risks, notably those associated with the EU Referendum and the subsequent vote by the UK to leave the EU.

Considerations for risk appetite for 2016 and the Medium Term Plan (MTP) included credit cycle conditions; the impact of ongoing low commodity prices; a potential slowdown in China; and the likelihood of interest rate rises. Consequently, the recommendation of the risk function, which was endorsed by the Committee, was that a conservative approach to growth should be maintained, with a focus on core products and markets. We expected continued volatility in external conditions and aimed to ensure that the Group was conservatively positioned. Headwinds developed during 2016 with the potential to have a significant first-order impact on Barclays’ businesses, including heightened economic risk in the UK post the EU Referendum; increasedgeo-political risk following the US presidential election; and the IAS19 position of Barclays’ pension scheme, which is vulnerable to market volatility. Other emerging risks with the potential to impact Barclays include interest rate and credit spread movements; UK property price stress; potential transmission impacts of any slowdown in China; and ongoing volatility in oil prices, which remain low. All of these potential risks continue to be actively managed and the risk profile and actions taken are subject to regular oversight by the Committee. In these circumstances, we were pleased with the capital and leverage performance for 2016, although impairment performance was adverse to plan, primarily as a result of one-off effects reflecting management’s review of impairment modelling in the UK and US Cards businesses.

In early 2016, Barclays appointed a new Chief Risk Officer, CS Venkatakrishnan, an appointment that was recommended to the Board by the Committee. The Committee oversaw the transition, specifically requesting information from the outgoing Chief Risk Officer on the transition plans and handover arrangements and seeking assurance from the new Chief Risk Officer that he had been provided with all of the information needed to enable him to fulfil his responsibilities. The Committee has welcomed the opportunity to work closely with the new Chief Risk Officer during 2016. We have also seen greater emphasis emerge over 2016 on the responsibilities of the first line of defence for

managing risk in their businesses, with the chief executives of each business attending Committee meetings to present directly to the Committee, with the support of their chief risk officers, on the risk profile of their business and how risk is being managed.

My own responsibilities as Chairman of the Committee werere-emphasised during 2016, with the introduction in March 2016 of the UK’s Senior Managers Regime. Under this regulatory regime, I have specific prescribed responsibilities for safeguarding the independence of and overseeing the performance of the risk function, including the performance of the Chief Risk Officer, in line with regulatory requirements. In addition to my regular meetings with the Chief Risk Officer and members of his senior management, I have led the Committee in encouraging the risk function to develop a way of assessing risk management capability, which we have also agreed will be subject to a periodic, external review. The risk function has also been encouraged to develop a way of measuring risk culture across the Group.

During 2016, I continued to liaise closely with the Chairman of the Board Audit Committee, particularly with regard to operational risk issues, where there is some degree of overlap between the remit of the two committees. I also attended a meeting of the risk committee of Barclays US IHC to gain a first-hand insight into the risk issues being addressed by management in that entity. I continued my practice of meeting regularly with other members of senior management and continued to engage with Barclays regulators in the UK and US.

Committee performance

The Committee’s performance during 2016 was assessed as part of the independently facilitated annual Board effectiveness review. I am pleased to report that the conclusion of my Board colleagues was that the Committee is regarded as thorough and effective and that the Board has a high degree of confidence in the diligence and coverage of the Committee. The main area identified for improvement was to ensure that theco-operation and collaboration between the Committee and the Board Audit and Board Reputation Committees continues to capture all significant risk issues effectively. I will be working even more closely with my fellow Board Committee chairmen on this over the coming year. You can read more about the outcomes of the Board effectiveness review on pages 33 to 35.

Looking ahead

2017 will be a key year for Barclays in delivering its strategy, as it completes its restructuring and makes significant steps in implementing the new legal entity structure required under Structural Reform. I expect the Committee to focus on strategic risk, with an emphasis on promoting even greater linkages between strategy formulation and risk management, and ensuring that there is appropriate global oversight of risk across the new Group structure.

LOGO

Tim Breedon

Chairman, Board Risk Committee

22 February 2017

20  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2016 Annual Report on Form 20-F


Board Risk Committee allocation of time (%)    
          2016    2015 
LOGO  1  Risk profile/risk appetite (including capital and liquidity management)   52    43 
  2  Key risk issues   26    31 
  3  Internal control/risk policies   8    11 
  4  Other (including remuneration and governance issues)   14    15 
      
      
      

Committee composition and meetings

The Committee is comprised solely of independentnon-executive Directors. Details of the skills and experience of the Committee Chairman or the Committee as a whole who, before confirming any approval, assured themselves that there was justifiable reason for engaging the auditor and that its independence and objectivity would not be threatened. Two requests were declined in 2015 (2014: two). On a quarterly basis, the Committee scrutinised details of individually approved and pre-approved services undertaken by the auditor in order to satisfy itself that they posed no risk to the auditor’s independence, either in isolation or on an aggregated basis. A breakdown of the fees paid to the auditor for non-audit workmembers can be found in Note 42their biographies on pages 3 and 4.

The Committee met eight times in 2016, with one of the meetings held at Barclays’ New York offices. A meeting was held specifically to consider the risk considerations arising from the outcome of the EU Referendum result, further details of which can be found on page 296, with non-audit fees representing 23.5% (2014: 25.7%) of24. The chart above shows how the audit fee. Significant categories of engagement undertaken in 2015 included:Committee allocated its time during 2016. Committee meetings were attended by management, including the Group Chief Executive, Group Finance Director, Chief Internal Auditor, Chief Risk Officer, Barclays Treasurer and General Counsel, as well as representatives from the businesses and other representatives from the risk function. Representatives from the current external auditor, PwC and, from 1 July 2016, representatives from the incoming external auditor, KPMG, also attended meetings.

MemberMeetings attended/eligible to attend
Tim Breedon8/8
Mike Ashley8/8
Reuben Jeffery*7/8
Diane Schueneman8/8
Steve Thieke8/8

*Didnot attend one meeting owing to a prior commitment

Committee role and responsibilities

The Committee’s main responsibilities include:

 

§ attestrecommending to the Board the total level of financial and assurance services required by regulators in connection with reviewsoperational risk the Group is prepared to take (risk appetite) to achieve the creation of internal controls including reviews of the suitability of design and operating effectiveness of controls related to custody of securities and funds within Barclays Wealth Americaslong-term shareholder value

 

§ tax compliance services in respectmonitoring financial and operational risk appetite, including setting limits for individual types of assignments initiatedpre-January 2011 in connection with Barclays internationalrisk, e.g., credit, market and expatriate employees, involving co-ordination and filing of statutory tax returns, social security applications and additional compliance filingsfunding risk

 

§ transaction support on secured funding transactions, includingmonitoring the provision of audits required by the Bank of EnglandGroup’s financial and the issue of comfort lettersoperational risk profile

 

§ provisionensuring that financial and operational risk is taken into account during the due diligence phase of advice and market insight in respect of regulatory requirements relating to remuneration structure, incentive funding and risk adjustment and remuneration reporting.

Independence of KPMG

Following the appointment of KPMG as Barclays’ auditor with effect from 1 January 2017, the Committee was concerned to ensure that KPMG obtained independence from Barclays during 2016, enabling it to familiarise itself with Barclays and receive a structured, formal handover from PwC. In order to ensure KPMG’s independence, and to allow the Committee to assess whether any non-audit work being conducted by KPMG in the meantime is appropriate, both in terms of type and scale, Barclays is in the process of exiting any current relationships or assignments that may prevent KPMG obtaining independent status and

has implemented procedures to manage the types of relationships and assignments that KPMG provides going forward. In particular, KPMG is not permitted to provide any service that may continue beyondmid-2016 if it has potential to cause independence issues. Since October 2015, the Committee has required all new engagements to be considered in light of the Policy and is maintaining oversight of them on the same basis as for the current auditor. The Committee has reserved the right to decline any proposed engagement with KPMG.

The fees paid to KPMG for non-audit work during 2015 were £38m. Significant categories of engagement undertaken in 2015 included:

§international tax compliance services for expatriate employees of Barclays, including expatriate tax returns, tax counselling, tax equalisation, international social security and other employment tax issuesany strategic transaction

 

§ independentproviding input from a financial and operational risk perspective into the deliberations of the Board Remuneration Committee.

LOGOThe Committee’s terms of reference are available athome.barclays/corporategovernance

The Committee’s work

The significant matters addressed by the Committee during 2016 are described below:

Area of focusMatter addressedRole of the CommitteeConclusion/action taken
Risk appetite and stress testing,i.e. the level of risk the Group chooses to take in pursuit of its business objectives, including testing whether the Group’s financial position and risk profile provide sufficient resilience to withstand the impact of severe economic stress.The risk context to MTP, the financial parameters and constraints and mandate and scale limits for specific business risk exposures; the Group’s internal stress testing exercises, including scenario selection and financial constraints, stress testing themes and the results and implications of stress tests, including those run by the Bank of England (BoE).

§  Assessed the risk context for the 2016 MTP, including general economic and financial conditions and how these had been reflected in planning assumptions.

§  Debated the assumptions, parameters and results of the internal stress test of the risk appetite of the 2016 MTP.

§  Discussed and agreed mandate and scale limits for market and credit risk.

§  Approved the parameters for the European Banking Authority stress test.

§  Approved the parameters for BoE stress test scenario expansion.

§  Evaluated the BoE stress test results, including updates on stress testing governance and methodology and assessing potential contingency plan actions.

§  Debated regulatory and market reaction to the BoE stress test results.

§  Considered and approved personinternal stress test themes and the financial constraints and scenarios for stress testing risk appetite for the 2017 MTP.

§  Regularly monitored the progress of the US IHC in preparing for the Comprehensive Capital Analysis and Review (CCAR) stress test.

The Committee recommended the proposed risk appetite for 2016 to the Board for approval, although asked management to develop a contingency plan with identified triggers and actions that could be implemented if the stress occurred. It also emphasised to management that mandate and scale limits should be set at appropriate levels, reflecting the desire to focus on conservative growth in core products and markets. The Committee approved credit and market risk limits and requested that additional limits were set for market risk in order to enhance monitoring and control. It also asked management to review (s.166)limits and guidelines and develop a revised framework for single name risk management, which it subsequently considered and approved. The Committee approved the stress test results for submission to the BoE. After evaluating feedback from the BoE on the stress test, the Committee encouraged management to engage with the BoE on specific points where additional clarity on regulatory expectations was desirable.

Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2016 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  21


Governance: Directors’ report

What we did in 2016

Board Risk Committee report

Area of focusMatter addressedRole of the CommitteeConclusion/action taken
Capital and funding, i.e. having sufficient capital and financial resources to meet the Group’s regulatory requirements and its obligations as they fall due, to maintain its credit rating, to support growth and strategic options.The trajectory to achieving required regulatory and internal targets and capital and leverage ratios, including the potential impact of Structural Reform and legal entity requirements.

§  Debated on a regular basis, capital performance against plan, tracking the capital trajectory, any challenges and opportunities and regulatory policy developments.

§  Assessed on a regular basis liquidity performance against both internal and regulatory requirements.

§  Regularly monitored capital and funding requirements on a legal entity basis, including evaluating proposed capital and liquidity processes for Barclays UK.

§  Debated with management proposed actions to be taken to restructure the Group’s asset swaps and ESHLA portfolio in order to reduce the impact of market volatility on capital.

The Committee supported the forecast capital and funding trajectory and the actions identified by management to manage the Group’s capital position, including the actions taken to restructure asset swaps and the ESHLA portfolio. The Committee approved the proposed capital and liquidity processes for Barclays UK for submission to the regulator.
Political and economic risk,i.e. the impact on the Group’s risk profile of political and economic developments and macroeconomic conditions.The potential impact on the Group’s risk profile of political developments, such as the UK’s EU Referendum and the US Presidential election, political and economic risk in South Africa, and weakening macroeconomic conditions, such as disruption and volatility in financial markets.

§  Closely monitored the potential impact of the UK’s EU Referendum on the Group’s risk profile and risk management –see the case study below for further details.

§  Requested an assessment of the potential impact of negative interest rates in the UK on Barclays and on UK banks generally, evaluating the potential impact on risk appetite, on customers and on Barclays’ models.

§  Continued to assess the economic and political situation in South Africa and the potential impact on the Group’s risk profile, including assessing the potential risk of a sovereign credit rating downgrade and the action taken by management to position the business appropriately.

§  Continued to assess Chinese economic metrics and the potential for the global impact of any economic slowdown in China.

§  Discussed the impact of market volatility on Barclays’ pension scheme.

§  Monitored Barclays’ exposures to certain European banks in view of potential specific stresses for individual banks and general economic and political conditions in the Eurozone.

The Committee identified interest rate swapsrisk as a potential area of emerging risk and asked management for an assessment of Barclays’ sensitivity to smallchanges in interest rates and inflation, which was presented to the Committee in the fourth quarter. The Committee suggested that the Board was briefed on this subject and a briefing session is planned for 2017.

The Committee satisfied itself that the actions taken to position Barclays’ business in South Africa were appropriate in the context of the identified economic and political risk. It continues to keep the potential impact of a Chinese slowdown under active review and will be updated by management in early 2017 with an assessment of the risk horizon. Given the political and economic uncertainty in Italy thatre-emerged in late 2016, the Committee asked management to renew its focus on reducing any redenomination risk arising from Barclays’ operations in Italy.

Specific sector risk, i.e. the Group’s risk profile in sectors showing signs of stress, such as the oil sector.The Group’s exposures to the oil and commodities sectors in light of the ongoing price weakness and volatility in these sectors during 2016.

§  Continued to regularly assess the Group’s exposures to the oil sector, including how the portfolio was performing and whether this was in line with expectations given the actions that had been taken to manage or restructure Barclays’ exposures.

The Committee satisfied itself that the actions taken by management were appropriate. Given ongoing volatility in this sector it will continue to monitor the portfolio for any further signs of stress that may require additional action.

22  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2016 Annual Report on Form 20-F


Area of focus

Matter addressed

Role of the Committee

Conclusion/action taken

Credit risk, i.e. the potential for financial loss if customers fail to fulfil their contractual obligations.

Conditions in the UK housing market, particularly in London and the South East and the Group’s risk appetite for and management of sectors such as thebuy-to-let sector, given changes in taxation; levels of UK consumer indebtedness, particularly in the context of the risk of rising interest rates; and the performance of the Cards business, particularly the US Cards business, including levels of impairment.

§   Continued to assess conditions in the UK property market for any signs of stress.

§   Evaluated how management was tracking and responding to rising levels of consumer indebtedness.

§   Scrutinised the performance of the Cards business, including reviewing performance against risk appetite, evaluating the drivers of impairment in the UK and US businesses coveringand assessing actions being taken to ensure that the saleperformance of interest rate hedging productscertain business segments remained within agreed risk appetite.

The Committee continued to encourage management to carry on with its conservative approach to UK mortgage lending, particularly in view of signs of slowdown the market post the EU Referendum. It also encouraged management to continue its close monitoring of overall levels of consumer indebtedness. The Committee challenged the credit performance of certain business segments in the US Cards business and encouraged management to complete the actions that had been identified to improve credit performance. It also emphasised to management the need to strengthen the linkages between business strategy and risk appetite.

Operational risk, i.e. costs arising from human factors, inadequate processes and systems or external events.

The Group’s operational risk capital requirements and any material changes to the Group’s operational risk profile and performance of specific operational risks against agreed risk appetite.

§   Tracked operational risk key indicators via regular reports from the Head of Operational Risk.

§   Evaluated the potential impact of regulatory developments on operational risk capital requirements.

§   Debated specific areas of operational risk, including fraud; transaction operations; technology; payments; and cyber-risk, evaluating the extent of any losses, the overall threat landscape, risk trends and the controls in place, in order to assess the potential impact on operational risk capital requirements.

The Committee focused its attention on the financial and capital impacts of operational risk, with specific attention on key risks that were outside appetite. It encouraged management to implement greater links between the control environment in each business and the operational risk capital allocated to that business. It also emphasised to management that there should be greaterco-ordination between the key risks highlighted to the Committee and the operational risk control issues escalated to the Board Audit Committee, which is being addressed via the new chief controls office.

Risk framework and governance

The frameworks, policies and talent and tools in place to support effective risk management and oversight.

§   Evaluated model risk and plans in place to enhance Barclays’ models and modelling capabilities.

§   Tracked the progress of significant risk management projects, including the plans in place to achieve compliance with BCBS239 risk data aggregation principles.

§   Debated any risk management matters raised by Barclays’ regulators and the actions being taken by management to respond.

§   Discussed and endorsed the revised Enterprise Risk Management Framework (ERMF) from the perspective of financial and operational risk.

§   Oversaw the transition and handover to a new Chief Risk Officer.

§   Encouraged management to find ways of assessing risk capability and risk management culture.

The Committee will continue to track the delivery of plans to enhance modelling and will focus on this during 2017 as part of its oversight of the model risk principal risk. The Committee encouraged management to continue to improve risk data quality, including embedding accountability for risk data quality with the business chief risk officers. The Committee will continue to track management’s response to any risk management matters raised by the Group’s regulators.

The Committee was satisfied that the handover to the new Chief Risk Officer was appropriate. The Committee welcomed the development of a risk management capability scorecard and asked for risk management capability to be evaluated by an external third party on a periodic basis, with a view to starting in 2017. It also welcomed the proposal to measure risk culture and asked for this to be fed into the Board Reputation Committee’s overall assessment of Barclays’ culture.

Remuneration

The scope of any risk adjustments to be taken into account by the Board Remuneration Committee when making remuneration decisions for 2016.

§   Debated the Risk function’s view of 2016 performance, making a recommendation to the Board Remuneration Committee on the financial and operational risk factors to be taken into account in remuneration decisions for 2016.

The Committee asked for capital and liquidity on a stressed basis to be taken into account when finalising the risk input to remuneration decisions.

Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2016 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  23


Governance: Directors’ report

What we did in 2016

Board Risk Committee report

In addition, the Committee also covered the following matters in 2016:

§  assessed Barclays’ exposures to the leveraged finance market and general conditions in that market

§  was briefed by PwC on any risk matters associated with the 2015year-end audit, specifically impairment; the valuation of the ESHLA portfolio; and a valuation disparity with a third party

§  evaluated the outcomes of the assessment of the Committee’s performance and any areas of Committee performance that needed to be enhanced

§  reviewed and updated its terms of reference, recommending them to the Board for approval

Governance in Action –

contingency planning for the UK’s EU Referendum

A significant external risk event in 2016 was the UK’s Referendum on its continued membership of the EU. The Board Risk Committee actively tracked this emerging risk throughout 2016, both before and after the vote.

Pre-EU Referendum activity by the Committee included:

§  debating the UK’s potential exit from the EU, including evaluating an assessment of the potential impacts on Barclays of a leave vote and discussing the key messages for policymakers and prudential authorities on the risks

§  evaluating Barclays’ potential exposures if there were to be a vote to leave the EU, including assessing the steps taken by management to mitigate any risk (such as reducing any currency mismatches) in order to position Barclays defensively to manage the impact of any volatility on market and funding risk

§  assessing the likelihood of any operational risk issues that might arise if there was a period of market volatility following a leave vote

§  conducting an overall review of the appropriateness of Barclays’ preparations for any market dislocation

§  reporting to the Board on the Committee’s deliberations.

In addition to the activities undertaken by the Committee, Board members, including certainnon-executive Directors, participated in a Group crisis management planning exercise based on the UK voting to leave the EU. The exercise focused on Barclays’ response and communications planning in the event of a vote to leave; articulating some of the high level impact scenarios following a vote to leave; and determining the decisions and ensuing direction required from Barclays’ Crisis Leadership Team.

Post-EU Referendum activity by the Committee included:

§  convening a special meeting to discuss and evaluate the effectiveness of Barclays’ preparations, concluding that the plans developed had been executed satisfactorily

§  assessing the performance of the actions taken to manage the impact of volatility on market and funding risk

§  evaluating a revised stressed outlook, based on revised economic assumptions, and its impact on Barclays’ risk profile, deliberating the effect of the revised outlook on forecast impairment and on capital and funding, market risk and credit risk

§  considering Barclays’ exposures to European banks in anticipation of potential market disruption in the Eurozone and the actions that had been taken to limit such exposures

§  discussing with management the actions that had been taken to reduce risk appetite and limits on exposures to residential property development, highloan-to-value mortgages and buyto-let lending and other actions that had been implemented to manage risk in higher risk retail segments and corporate portfolios

§  encouraging management to consider the strategic implications of the leave vote

§  emphasising to management the need to fully and openly engage on matters of mutual concern with the UK government and regulators given the new political and economic environment

§  continuing to track the potential impact of the leave vote and the actions being taken by management to deal with any emerging signs of stress in Barclays’ portfolios

§  reporting to the Board on the Committee’s deliberations.

The full Board also met in the aftermath of the vote result to be briefed on how Barclays had performed during the period of volatility immediately following the result, including discussing Barclays’ capital and liquidity position; market conditions; communications with employees and with customers and clients; contact with regulators and the UK government; the outlook for the UK economy; share price performance and potential strategic impacts.

LOGO

Read more about Barclays’ risk management on pages 342 to 403.


24  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2016 Annual Report on Form 20-F


Governance: Directors’ report

What we did in 2016

Board Reputation Committee report

LOGO

LOGO  Achieving and sustaining a culture where all of our people demonstrate consistent behaviours and conduct underpinned by the Barclays’ values is key to delivering high performance for all our stakeholders and, therefore, to our long-term success. LOGO

Dear Fellow Shareholders

One of the key areas of focus for the Committee during 2016 was encouraging management to develop a way of better understanding and measuring intangible areas such as behaviour and culture. Barclays has a strong and resonant purpose, Helping people achieve their ambitions in the right way, and a well understood set of values, Respect, Integrity, Service, Excellence and Stewardship. This culture is firmly endorsed from the top: achieving and sustaining a culture where all of our people demonstrate consistent behaviours and conduct, underpinned by Barclays’ values, is key to delivering high performance for all our stakeholders and, therefore, to our long-term success.

Our challenge has been how to co-ordinate the efforts to build culture across the Group and obtain assurance that progress is being made. Significant focus was given during 2016 to developing consistent measurement and reporting of culture and you can read about the Committee’s role in this important initiative in the case study on page 28. A similar approach has been taken to developing a set of indicators to allow us to measure progress across the Committee’s other areas of responsibility: conduct, complaints and citizenship.

During 2016, the Committee continued to track the exposure of Barclays, and the financial sector in general, to reputational risks. It also placed a renewed focus on the initiatives under way to build and manage Barclays’ reputation with its key stakeholders. We also continued to exercise oversight of the Barclays’ Compliance function, including approving its annual business plan, budget and resources.

Under the UK’s Senior Manager Regime, which was introduced in March 2016, I have specific responsibilities with regard to safeguarding the independence and integrity of Barclays’ Compliance function and for overseeing its performance, including that of the Head of Compliance. To this end, I regularly meet with the Head of Compliance to receive briefings on the work of Compliance and provide support when necessary. I also meet regularly with other members of senior management, including those in the Corporate Relations, Citizenship and Reputation Risk teams.

This is my first report as Chairman of the Board Reputation Committee and I wish to record my thanks to Sir Michael Rake, who I succeeded as Chairman on 1 January 2016, and to Wendy Lucas-Bull and Frits van Paasschen, who both stepped down from the Committee on their retirement from the Barclays Board during 2016. Mike Ashley and Mary Francis subsequently joined the Committee to ensure we have the right balance of skills and experience and appropriate cross-membership with other Board Committees.

The report on pages 26 to 28 sets out details of the material matters considered by the Committee during 2016.

Committee performance

The Committee’s performance during 2016 was assessed as part of the independently facilitated annual Board effectiveness review. I can report that my fellow Board members considered that the Committee has made progress in defining its role and is performing well. The main area identified for improvement was around ensuring that Board members have greater awareness of the Committee’s mandate and core agenda. You can read more about the outcomes of the Board effectiveness review on pages 33 to 35.

Looking ahead

Cultural transformation remains firmly on the Committee’s agenda and we will continue to track key indicators and measure the progress being made. This will be increasingly important as Barclays implements its Structural Reform Programme and begins to establish separate legal entities within the Group. My key objective in 2016 was to put the Committee at the centre of Barclays’ drive to be a leader in conduct, culture and reputation - matters at which we have not always excelled in the past. There is still lots to do, but I believe that the leadership and processes that we have now put in place give us a great foundation on which to build.

LOGO

Sir Gerry Grimstone

Chairman, Board Reputation Committee

22 February 2017

Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2016 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  25


Governance: Directors’ report

What we did in 2016

Board Reputation Committee report

 

Board Reputation Committee allocation of time (%)

 

          
          2016    2015   
LOGO 

 

 

 

1

 

 

 

 

Citizenship

  

 

 

 

8

 

 

  

 

 

 

6  

 

 

  2  Reputational issues   27    13   
  3  Culture, conduct and compliance   57    57   
  4  Operational risk*   0    19   
  5  Other   8    6   
      
      
      
      

*Oversight of operational risk now falls within the remit of the Board Risk Committee

Committee composition and meetings

The Committee comprises independentnon-executive Directors. During 2016 there were a number of changes to the membership of the Committee, which are set out in the table opposite.

The Committee met five times during 2016 with one of the meetings held at Barclays’ New York offices. The chart above shows how it allocated its time. Committee meetings were attended by representatives from management, including the Group Chief Executive, Chief Internal Auditor, Chief Risk Officer, General Counsel, Group Corporate Relations Director and Heads of Compliance, Conduct Risk and Operational Risk, as well as representatives from the businesses and other functions. Representatives from the FCA also attended a meeting during 2016.

MemberMeetings attended/eligible to attend
Sir Gerry Grimstone (from 1 January 2016)5/5
Mike Ashley (from 1 May 2016)4/4
Mary Francis (from 1 November 2016)2/2
Wendy Lucas-Bull (to 1 March 2016)0/0
Dambisa Moyo5/5
Diane de Saint Victor5/5
Frits van Paasschen (to 28 April 2016)1/1

*There were no Committee meetings held prior to 1 March 2016, when Wendy Lucas-Bull left the Committee

Committee role and responsibilities

The principal purpose of the Committee is to:

§support the Board in promoting its collective vision of Barclays’ purpose, values, culture and behaviours

 

§ ensure, on behalf of the buildingBoard, the efficiency of an internal lean self-sufficiency capability to support end-to-end value stream improvementsthe processes for identification and management of core business processes within Group Operationsconduct and Technologyreputational risk

 

§ assistanceoversee Barclays’ conduct in relation to its corporate and societal obligations, including setting the guidance, direction and policies for Barclays’ approach to customer and regulatory matters and Barclays’ Citizenship Strategy, including the management of Barclays’ economic, social and environmental contribution.

LOGO

The Committee’s terms of reference are available at

home.barclays/corporategovernance

The Committee’s work

The significant matters addressed by the Committee during 2016 are described below:

Area of focusMatter addressedRole of the CommitteeConclusion/action taken
Conduct riskThe risk of detriment to customers, clients, market integrity, competition or Barclays from the inappropriate supply of financial services, including instances of wilful or negligent misconduct.

§  Discussed updates from management on conduct risk and requested the development of a dashboard report of conduct indicators to be presented to each meeting.

§  Monitored on a regular basis performance against agreed conduct risk indicators.

§  Debated the indicators that had been developed to measure material conduct risks and issues, including providing feedback on indicators for policy breaches.

§  Discussed with BIA its view of the management of conduct risk across the Group, with particular emphasis on maintaining focus on conduct risk through periods of change.

§  Provided input, via the Committee Chairman, to the scope of BIA’s review of the conduct risk programme.

§  Discussed directly with the senior management of Barclays International and Barclays UK their view of conduct and cultural issues in those businesses and the status of any initiatives in place to strengthen conduct and culture.

§  Confirmed with management that reviews had been undertaken to learn lessons from issues that had arisen at other banks and financial institutions, e.g. sales-based incentive schemes.

§  Tracked the levels of attestation by colleagues globally toThe Barclays Way, the Group’s code of conduct.

The Committee requested further focus on product propositions and suitability and updates on product development and controls. In 2017, it will receive a quarterly report on new products. It provided input on the development of the dashboard, including requesting that it incorporates reports from BIA and draws on external data points where available. The Committee reiterated to management the importance of ensuring that the focus on conduct is maintained in those businesses or jurisdictions that Barclays is exiting or where it is reducing its presence. The Committee encouraged management to bring contingent workers into the scope ofThe Barclays Way training and arrangements are being made for all Committee members to complete the training themselves.

The scope of any conduct risk adjustments to be taken into account by the Board Remuneration Committee when making remuneration decisions for 2016.

§  Considered the proposed adjustments to be made to the incentive pool from a conduct risk perspective.

The Committee endorsed the methodology used and the resulting adjustments proposed.

26  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2016 Annual Report on Form 20-F


Area of focus

Matter addressedRole of the CommitteeConclusion/action taken
Cultural changeThe progress being made on embedding of cultural change.

§  Debated reports on the progress being made to effect cultural change across Barclays globally, discussing the measures being taken to define the desired culture and how it would be measured.

§  Requested that a single report of cultural indicators was developed for reporting to each meeting and monitored on a regular basis performance against the agreed indicators.

§  Discussed the status of the actions arising from the Banking Standards Board’s (BSB) 2015 assessment of Barclays, the progress of the 2016 assessment and the resulting 2016 assessment report, asking management for greaterco-ordination between the BSB’s work and internal employee surveys.

Read more about the development of the culture measurement framework in the establishmentcase study on page 28.
ComplaintsEnsuring fair outcomes for customers by monitoring volumes of complaints received and runningthe standard and quality of complaints handling processes.

§  Requested the development of a dashboard report of complaints indicators to be presented to each meeting.

§  Monitored on a regular basis performance against agreed complaints indicators.

§  Discussed the way in which complaints are handled and the focus on resolving complaints at first point of contact.

§  Debated imminent industry-wide changes in the way in which reportable complaints are recorded and the potential for reputation risk.

The Committee encouraged management to develop a way of defining and reporting on complaints in the Barclays International’s investment bank and a standard on complaint handling in that business will be issued in the first quarter of 2017. The Committee requested that additional information on the top root causes of complaints was included in future reports.
CitizenshipThe status of Barclays’ Citizenship Plan 2016-2018, theShared Growth Ambition.

§  Debated the targets to be set for the Shared Growth initiatives.

§  Agreed with the proposal to focus activity around the themes of access to employment, to financial and digital empowerment and to financing.

§  Assessed status updates on the progress of theShared Growth Ambition.

§  Requested the development of a dashboard report of citizenship indicators to be presented to each meeting and monitored on a regular basis performance against agreed indicators.

§  Considered and recommended to the Board for approval Barclays statement under the UK’s Modern Slavery Act, which can be found on Barclays’ website.

The Committee provided feedback on how theShared Growth Ambition was articulated and requested additional information on the focus areas and metrics and how progress would be measured and reported. Its feedback was incorporated into the plan, which was launched in June 2016.

Reputation riskEnsuring that Barclays anticipates, identifies and manages reputational issues that may impact it or the industry now or in the future.

§  Monitored current reputation risk issues, including Barclays’ involvement in sensitive sectors such as defence or energy and fossil fuels.

§  Assessed emerging reputational issues, such as climate change and the relaxation of certain sanctions against Iran.

§  Evaluated the measures being taken to proactively build and manage Barclays’ reputation with stakeholders.

§  Assessed external opinion survey results, the trends in indicators and factors influencing the survey results, including the potential impact of the programme management officeEU Referendum and government leadership changes in the UK and US.

§  Discussed the reputational risks associated with tax and how this was being managed across the AfricanGroup, including the effectiveness of Barclays’ Tax Principles and Code of Conduct.

The Committee provided feedback on the form and content of the reputation risk reports and how Barclays-specific and systemic risks might be monitored. It approved changes to Barclays’ Sanctions Policy with regard to sanctions with Iran. The Committee requested a regular report setting out a rolling12-month view of Barclays’ communications campaigns. It also requested and received an update on Barclays’ crisis management plans. It requested and received further information on Barclays’ business in low tax jurisdictions. It asked for and receives regular reports from the Tax Management Oversight Committee on the transactions it has reviewed.

Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2016 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  27


Governance: Directors’ report

What we did in 2016

Board Reputation Committee Report

The Committee also covered the following matters:

§   discussed the progress of plans to develop the Barclays brand migration project

§   endorsed the 2017 priorities for Barclays Corporate Relations team

§   assessed the revised ERMF from a conduct and reputation risk perspective and recommended it to the Board for approval

§   approved the 2016 Compliance business plan and tracked progress, including updates on resourcing and attrition levels

§   received a report on management’s annual review of the effectiveness of compliance with the Volcker Rule (restrictions on proprietary trading and certain fund investments by banks operating in the US)

§   assessed and discussed a report on the Committee’s performance during 2015

§   approved revisions to its terms of reference and recommended them to the Board for approval.

LOGORead more about Barclays’ risk management on pages 342 to 403.

Governance in Action –

measuring cultural progress

A primary area of focus for the Committee in 2016 was providing challenge and support to management in its delivery of cultural change. The Group Executive Committee confirmed conduct, culture and values as one of its execution priorities for 2016, with the aim of monitoring cultural change and bringing together different cultural indicators to form a coherent and consolidated view of culture across Barclays.

Senior representatives from Compliance, Risk, HR and BIA presented to the Committee in early 2016 on the progress of implementing cultural change and proposals for developing a set of key indicators, along with clear governance structures and accountability for monitoring and sustaining cultural progress. The Committee debated and endorsed the following objectives:

§  identify the desired cultureend-state and how to measure progress towards achieving it

§  develop a cultural measurement tool that provides simple and consistent reporting relevant to all stakeholders

§  use the insights obtained to drive actions and further embed and sustain the desired values-based culture.

Ten cultural outcomes were identified, firmly linked to Barclays’ values:

For each desired cultural outcome, a set of internal qualitative and quantitative indicators was identified, along with external perception indicators. The indicators proposed were drawn from existing indicators used in the Group, such as the results from Your View (the employee opinion survey), results from Barrett Values Surveys of Barclays’ Executive and Senior Leadership Group, external opinion survey results, BIA reports, performance reviews and indicators relating to risk management and compliance. Assessing these indicators will ensure that ongoing efforts are focused on priority issues and challenges that may impede cultural transformation.

In debating and endorsing the proposed cultural outcomes and indicators, the Committee provided feedback to management. It discussed in particular:

§   how to embed the desired culture across middle-management and whether a targeted action plan was needed for this population

§   how structuring incentives in the right way, based on personal accountability, could help drive the right culture and behaviours

§   whether a more holistic approach was needed to performance reviews, with even more focus on rewarding how things were done, rather than what was achieved

§   that indicators based around the ‘how’ assessments from performance reviews might be incorporated as a measure of success

§   that existing indicators on audit issues and regulatory actions could be incorporated as a measure of success.

Feedback from the Committee was subsequently incorporated into the measurement tool. The Committee also requested the development of a culture dashboard, setting out quarterly performance against the agreed indicators. The first such report was made in September 2016, with a further report in December 2016, allowing the Committee to debate the results and trends and the areas identified for potential deep dive reviews or targeted action. During 2017, the Committee will continue to assess the quarterly indicators, the potential themes emerging and any specific challenges identified at a business and functional level.

Value

Cultural outcomes            

RespectInclusionCollaboration
IntegritySpeaking upPersonal accountability
ServiceCustomer/client centricityBalanced short and long-term needs
ExcellenceSimplicity and efficiencyHigh performance
StewardshipContinuous improvementStrong reputation

28  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2016 Annual Report on Form 20-F


Governance: Directors’ report

What we did in 2016

Board Nominations Committee report

LOGO

LOGO  It is a key part of our role to be satisfied that there are proper processes in place for executive succession. LOGO

Dear Fellow Shareholders

Following his appointment as Group Chief Executive at the end of 2015, Jes Staley has been building his Group Executive Committee. Board level consideration is required for appointments to the Group Executive Committee and throughout 2016 the Board Nominations Committee continued to embed its oversight of Group Executive Committee succession planning. The Committee was updated on Barclays’ talent and succession strategy and presented with role profiles and outputs from reviews of internal successors to Group Executive Committee roles.

It is a key part of our role to be satisfied that there are proper processes in place for executive succession and at our regular meetings we discussed how potential successors are being provided with wider, relevant experience as part of their development.

Another ongoing area of focus for the Committee in 2016 was the composition of our subsidiary boards in light of the legal, regulatory and governance requirements of Structural Reform. A great deal of consideration has been given to ensuring the independence of the board and board committees of Barclays’ strategically significant subsidiaries, while allowing for collaboration between those boards and the Barclays Board. We have deliberated at length on the structure of the subsidiary boards and how they will report into and interact with our Group Board, which must continue to have appropriate oversight to ensure the effective operation of the Group and the protection of shareholder interests. During 2016, we finalised and recommended to the Board a set of Governance Guiding Principles, which document the high level expectations of the relationship that will exist between Barclays and its strategically significant subsidiaries.

The Committee regularly considered the balance of skills, experience and diversity needed on the Board during 2016. We refreshed the Board skills matrix to reflect the future strategy of the Group, identifying the attributes required to further strengthen and enhance the Board’s effectiveness. We conducted searches for newnon-executive Directors, approving the appointment of Mary Francis asnon-executive Director: Mary brings both financial services experience and significantnon-executive directorship experience to the Board. We also considered subsidiary board composition at each of our Committee meetings, with a particular focus on populating the strategically significant subsidiary boards as we continue to embed Structural Reform. It is fair to say that attracting candidates with the skills, experience and qualities we need remains a considerable task: serving on a bank board is not an undertaking that anyone considers lightly and our success in securing the right candidates has been necessarily limited by the challenges they perceive.

When considering Board and Board Committee composition and succession plans diversity remains at the front of our minds. We continued to receive regular updates on diversity and inclusion during 2016 and were pleased to hear that the number of women in senior leadership positions had increased for the third successive year. As a Board we met our target of 25% female representation by 2015 and are progressing towards the target we set ourselves last year of 33% female representation by 2020. Diversity is not just about gender, however, and we are always mindful of diversity in all of its forms, even where we have not set specific targets.

Certain responsibilities for me as Chairman of the Committee have been prescribed by the Senior Managers Regime that was introduced in the UK in March 2016. Under that regime, I am responsible for ensuring that the Committee remains independent and that it performs effectively, fulfilling the responsibilities expected of it by our regulators in terms of overseeing decisions around the structure, size, composition, diversity and performance of the Board. The report that follows describes how these responsibilities have been fulfilled. I would like to take this opportunity to thank my fellow Committee members for their continued support during 2016.

Committee performance

The performance of the Committee was assessed as part of the annual Board effectiveness review and I am pleased to report that is was assessed to be performing effectively. An area identified for improvement was around ensuring that there are more regular reports to the Board on the status of recruitment of newnon-executive Directors, which I will address. The report on the Board effectiveness review contains more information and can be found on pages 33 to 35.

Looking ahead

In 2017 we will continue to support the implementation of the new Group structure, ensuring that we have the right people in place to take Barclays forward. As appropriate, we will continue to make recommendations to the Board to ensure that we remain at the forefront of best practice corporate governance standards.

LOGO

John McFarlane

Chairman, Board Nominations Committee

22 February 2017

Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2016 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  29


Governance: Directors’ report

What we did in 2016

Board Nominations Committee report

 

 

Board Nominations Committee allocation of time (%)

 

  
          

 

 

 

2016

 

 

   2015   
 LOGO 1 Corporate governance matters   20    17   
  2 Board and Committee composition   36    24   
  3 Succession planning and talent   31    47   
  4 Board effectiveness   8    6   
  

5 Other

 

   5    6   

Committee composition and meetings

The Committee is composed solely of independentnon-executive Directors. John McFarlane, as Chairman of the Board, is also Chairman of the Committee. Mike Ashley, Tim Breedon, Crawford Gillies, and Sir Gerry Grimstone, being the Chairmen of each of the other Board Committees, and Reuben Jeffery, are also members of the Committee. Details of the skills and experience of the Committee members can be found in their biographies on pages3 and 4.

During 2016 there were seven meetings of the Committee, including one joint meeting with the Board Remuneration Committee. Three of these meetings were held at short notice to deal with specific matters. Attendance by members at Committee meetings is shown opposite and the chart above shows how the Committee allocated its time. Committee meetings were attended by the Group Chief Executive, with the Group HR Director, the Head of Talent, and the Global Head of Diversity and Inclusion attending as appropriate.

Member

Meetings attended/eligible to attend

John McFarlane7/7
Mike Ashley7/7
Tim Breedon*4/7
Crawford Gillies7/7
Sir Gerry Grimstone*6/7
Reuben Jeffery*6/7
*Did not attend certain meetings arranged and held at short notice owing to prior commitments

Note

The Chairman and the Group Chief Executive excuse themselves from meetings when the Committee focuses on the matter of succession to their roles.

Committee role and responsibilities

The principal purpose of the Committee is to:

§  support and advise the Board in ensuring that the composition of the Board and its Committees is appropriate and enables them to function effectively

§  examine the skills, experience and diversity on the Board and plan succession for key Board appointments, planning ahead to deal with upcoming retirements and to fill any expected skills gaps

§  provide Board level oversight of the Group’s talent management programme and diversity and inclusion initiatives

§  agree the annual Board effectiveness review process and monitor the progress of any actions arising.

LOGO

You can find the Committee’s terms of reference at
home.barclays/corporategovernance

The Committee’s work

The significant matters addressed by the Committee during 2016 are described below:

Area of focus

Matter consideredRole of the CommitteeConclusion/action taken

Board and Board

Committee composition

The membership of the Board and the current and future composition of the Board and its Committees.

§  Debated a forward-looking plan of the expected skills and experience needed on the Board in the context of future strategic direction.

§  Evaluated the revised Board skills matrix and, in consideration of known and expected changes to the Board, conducted a search fornon-executive Directors.

§  Reviewed the membership of Board Committees.

§  Considered and provided input to Board Committee Chairman succession plans.

The Committee approved the revised skills matrix and agreed to conduct a search for newnon-executive Directors in line with the requirements identified. It recommended the appointment of Mary Francis to the Board asnon-executive Director and she subsequently joined the Board with effect from 1 October 2016. The Committee concluded that additional accounting and auditing experience was needed in order to provide further options for succession to the Board Audit Committee chairmanship over time and a search for potential candidates continues.

Please refer to page 32 for more details of the Board’s approach to the recruitment of new Directors.

30  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2016 Annual Report on Form 20-F


Area of focusMatter consideredRole of the CommitteeConclusion/action taken
Executive succession planning and talent management

Group Executive Committee composition and succession following the appointment of the new Group Chief Executive in 2015.

Oversight of Group Chief Executive succession and appointments to key positions.

§  Discussed updates from the Group HR Director on Group Executive Committee succession plans, including assessing emergency cover and the existing talent pipeline.

§  Considered external assessments and benchmarking of internal talent.

§  Debated approval requirements for appointments to the Group Executive Committee and other key positions across the Group.

The Committee requested a presentation of key outputs from the Group Executive Committee offsite meeting on talent. It also asked to receive reports of the executive assessments carried out by an external facilitator. The Committee agreed the approval requirements for key positions, and subsequently approved the appointment of Tim Throsby as President of Barclays International in accordance with those requirements.

Governance implications of Structural Reform and strategically significant subsidiary board composition

The board and board committee composition of strategically significant subsidiaries, including board size, structure and proposed interactions.

The governance principles for the relationship between Barclays and its strategically significant subsidiaries.

§  Finalised Governance Guiding Principles for the Group post-Structural Reform, which set out ultimate decision-making powers, while respecting the rights and responsibilities of the boards of the strategically significant subsidiaries.

§  Debated the required structure and composition of the strategically significant subsidiary boards and board committees in light of regulatory requirements and feedback.

§  Scrutinised the proposed board skills matrix for Barclays UK.

§  Considered candidates for the positions of chairman of Barclays UK and Barclays International.

§  Considered appointments to the Board of, and the associated fees for, the US IHC board.

§  Considered appointments to the Barclays Africa board.

The Committee endorsed and recommended the Governance Guiding Principles to the Board for approval. It agreed the structure of the strategically significant subsidiary boards and commenced a search fornon-executive directors, including for the position of chairman of Barclays UK, and agreed the process of the appointing of the chairman of Barclays International. The Committee approved the appointment of Directors to the US IHC board, including agreeing the fees to be paid to them. It also approved appointments to the Barclays Africa board.
Board effectiveness

The progress made against the actions identified in the 2015

Board effectiveness review.

The 2016 effectiveness review of the Board and its Committees.

§  Discussed and agreed the proposed actions to be taken in response to the findings of the 2015 review.

§  Reassessed the status of the actions throughout the year and tracked the progress of the action plan.

§  Confirmed the process to be followed for the 2016 review.

The Committee recommended the proposed action plan and 2016 Board objectives to the Board for approval. The Committee agreed and recommended the process for the 2016 effectiveness review, which proceeded as recommended.
GovernanceChanges to the Board’s corporate governance framework following the implementation of the Senior Managers Regime in March 2016.

§  Reviewed updates toCorporate Governance in Barclays and theCharter of Expectations following the implementation of the Senior Managers Regime in order to integrate the requirements into the existing corporate governance framework, applying particular focus to the updated individual role profiles.

Approved and recommended to the Board for approval the updated corporate governance documents and role profiles for key positions on the Board.

Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2016 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  31


Governance: Directors’ report

What we did in 2016

Board Nominations Committee report

In addition the Committee covered the following matters:

§received a presentation from the PRA on its annual review of Barclays

 

§ support inproposals for the implementation of the Group conduct risk programme

§support with the development of the anti-money laundering programme and the provision of related advice

§support for Barclaycard in the assessment and restructuring of its pricing model2016 Corporate Governance Report

 

§ review of the Committee’s effectiveness and remediationits terms of know your customer documentation requirements for Barclays politically exposed persons and special focus clients in the US, UK, Switzerland, Monaco, India, Singapore and Hong Kongreference.

Appointment andre-election of Directors

Board and Board Committee composition is a standing item for consideration at each Committee meeting. This includes the consideration of potential newnon-executive Director appointments, both in respect of planned succession for known retirements and as a result of the ongoing review of the skills and experience needed on the Board in order for it to continue to operate effectively.

The Committee frequently considers a skills matrix for the Board, which identifies the core competencies, skills, diversity and experience required for the Board to deliver its strategic aims and govern the Group effectively. Each attribute identified in the skills matrix has a target weighting attached to it and these are regularly updated over time to reflect the needs of the Group. The Committee reviews the skills matrix when considering a new appointment to the Board, as well as reviewing the current and expected Board and Board Committee composition. This helps to determine a timeline for proposed appointments to the Board.

When recruiting a newnon-executive Director the specific skills that are needed are identified, for example, an individual with international experience, or recent history serving on a particular board committee. TheCharter of Expectationscontains the key competencies and skills expected ofnon-executive Directors, and these, in addition to other details such as expected time commitment, will be included in an individual specification. The Committee as a whole then considers curriculum vitae and references for potential candidates. Any candidates who are shortlisted will be interviewed by members of the Committee and, if applicable, key shareholders and Barclays’ regulators may be asked to provide feedback on the proposed appointment. The Board is updated on the progress of the recruitment and interview process, and any feedback from the interviews is provided to the Board alongside a recommendation for appointment.

Executive search firms Egon Zehnder, JCA Group and MWM Consulting were instructed to assist with the search fornon-executive Directors during 2016. None of these firms has any other connection to Barclays, other than to provide recruitment services. Open advertising for Board positions was not used in 2016, as the Committee believes that targeted recruitment is the optimal way of recruiting for Board positions. All of the firms used fornon-executive Director recruitment have signed up to the voluntary code of conduct for executive search firms, which include measures designed to improve gender diversity on boards.

In 2016, Barclays announced the appointment of Mary Francis asnon-executive Director and she joined the Board with effect from 1 October 2016. As previously reported, Mary has extensive board level experience across a range of industries. Wendy Lucas-Bull stood down from the Board in March 2016 following the announcement of Barclays’ intention to reduce its shareholding in Barclays Africa Group Limited, and Frits van Paasschen did not stand forre-election at the 2016 AGM.

The Directors in office at the end of 2016 were subject to an effectiveness review, as described on page 33. Based on the results of the review the Board accepted the view of the Committee that each Director proposed forre-election continues to be effective and that they each demonstrated the level of commitment required in connection with their role on the Board and the needs of the business. Diane de Saint Victor and Steve Thieke have each signalled their intention to retire from the Board at the 2017 AGM.

Diversity statement

The Board has had regard to two important publications that were issued in 2016: theHampton-Alexander Review recommendations to improve gender balance in FTSE leadership teams and theParker Review recommendations on the ethnic diversity of UK boards. The Committee reported last year that the Board had exceeded its target of 25% female Directors by the end of 2015 and had set a new target of 33% gender Board representation by 2020. This target has been formally reflected in the Board Diversity Policy, which can be found online at home.barclays/ corporategovernance. Below Board level the Group met its 2016 target of 24% female senior leaders. The Committee is mindful that the Group Executive Committee does not currently include any women, but is satisfied with the level of diversity across that Committee and with the percentage of women amongst the direct reports of Group Executive Committee members (25% at the end of 2016). To broaden the scope of the perspectives and contributions made to Group Executive Committee meetings an initiative was implemented by the Group Chief Executive during 2016 to create oneex-officio position on the Committee, with each appointee serving for a four-month rotation. The first appointee was Kathryn McLeland, Head of Investor Relations. With regard to ethnic diversity, the Board considers that Barclays is currently well-positioned in terms of representation at Board level and also at Group Executive Committee level when taking into account the Parker Review definition (being individuals of Black, East Asian, Latin American, Middle Eastern or South Asian ethno-cultural backgrounds).

During 2016, the Committee received regular updates from the Global Head of Diversity and Inclusion covering the full spectrum of Barclays’ diversity and inclusion agenda. For 2017, the Committee has requested additional information regarding social inclusion.

The Committee recognises the importance of ensuring that there is diversity of gender, ethnicity, geography and business experience on the Board, while continuing to recommend all appointments based on merit in the context of the skills and experience required. The Barclays Board female diversity target is noted in the Board skills matrix, which identifies the core competencies and skills needed for an effective Board. When executive search firms are engaged to assist with the recruitment of a new Director diversity is identified as a key factor. In addition, the external Board evaluation considered diversity when assessing the effectiveness of the Board.

 

§
LOGO  support for the developmentMore details on Barclays’ diversity and embedding of the Basel II-compliant models in Spain.inclusion strategy can be found on page 48

32  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2016 Annual Report on Form 20-F


The Statutory Audit ServicesReview of Board and Board Committee effectiveness

Each year the Board conducts an externally facilitated self-assessment of the effectiveness of the Board, the Board Committees and the individual Directors. Independent Board Evaluation facilitated the effectiveness review for Large Companies Market Investigation (Mandatory Use2015 and was engaged to conduct the 2016 review, which built on the findings of Competitive Tender Processes and Audit Committee Responsibilities) Order 2014

Barclays intendsthe 2015 review, including assessing the progress of the actions that had been identified. Independent Board Evaluation is an independent external consultancy with no other connection to complyBarclays. In order to ensure that high quality feedback was received, Ffion Hague, the consultant, based the review onface-to-face interviews with the requirements ofDirectors. The Statutory Audit ServicesDirectors received an agenda prior to their interview, which focused on areas for Large Companies Market Investigation (Mandatory Use of Competitive Tender Processes and Audit Committee Responsibilities) Order 2014, which relatesimprovement identified in the 2015 effectiveness review as well as any new issues that had emerged since that review was conducted. In addition to the frequencyinterviews, Ffion Hague attended Board and governance of tenders for the appointmentBoard Committee meetings as an observer, met with members of the Group Executive Committee, the Company Secretary and other members of senior management, along with seeking feedback from external auditorstakeholders.

In December 2016, Independent Board Evaluation presented a report to the Board on the findings of the effectiveness review. In addition, the Chairman was provided with a report and feedback on the performance of each of the Directors, and the setting ofSenior Independent Director received a policyreport on the provisionChairman. Board Committee chairmen received individual reports on the performance of non-audit services.the Board Committees.

Following consideration of the findings of the 2016 effectiveness review the Directors remain satisfied that the Board Auditand each of the Board Committees are operating effectively. Progress relative to 2015 was good and the Board remains committed to making further changes to ensure that it is considered to be at the top of the range of effectiveness for a FTSE100 company. Following the conclusion of the review the Board Nominations Committee, allocationwith support from the Company Secretary, prepared a detailed action planning document. An overview of time (%)actions that were identified to help the Board to maintain and improve its effectiveness have been disclosed on the following pages 34 and 35, as well as an update on the actions taken following the 2015 effectiveness review.

          2015     2014  

 

LOGO

 

 

 

 

1

 

  

 

 

Control issues

  

 

 

 

18

 

  

  

 

 

 

24

 

  

  2   Business control environment   16     10  
  3   Financial results   27     42  
  4   Internal audit matters   7     8  
  5   External audit matters (including external audit tender)   26     11  
  6   Other (including governance and compliance)   6     5  
      
      
      
 

 

 

 

  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 20152016 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  1733


Governance: Directors’ report

What we did in 2016

Board Nominations Committee report

Review of Board and Board Committee Effectiveness

Board priorities

Leveraging Board experience in support of executives

Greater awareness of Board Committee work

2015 findings

To ensure that the Board agenda is optimised, including time for‘blue-sky’ discussion of major risks.

2015 findings

To continue to ensure that allnon-executive Directors have the opportunity to contribute to strategic debate.

2015 findings

To continue to raise awareness across all Board members of the significant issues considered by Board Committees and to continue to refine the remit and scope of the Board Reputation Committee.

Actions taken in 2016

In early 2016 a set of Board objectives was agreed in order to track progress against the Board’s priorities.

Board agendas were updated to allow more time for discussion of strategic options. This was also the focus for the 2016 Board Strategy Offsite. Board dinners were used for more free-ranging discussions, with suggested topics notified to the Directors in advance. No decisions were taken or required as part of these discussions, which were used to inform the broader debate at subsequent Board meetings.

Actions taken in 2016

John McFarlane and Sir Gerry Grimstone took responsibility for ensuring that allnon-executive Directors were involved in strategic decision making.

In the course of the year, it was decided that partnering non-executive Directors with members of the Group Executive Committee would not be taken forward. However, the experience of non-executive Directors has been leveraged as appropriate, e.g. the appointments of Steve Thieke and Diane Schueneman to the board of Barclays US IHC. Non-executive Directors continue to make a valuable contribution to the Board and its Committees.

Actions taken in 2016

All Directors have access to Board Committee meeting papers and minutes, and have been reminded that they may attend Board Committee meetings whether or not they are members. Some Directors made use of this option during 2016. Board Committee Chairmen have continued to report to the Board on specific matters discussed at Board Committee meetings.

During 2016 Sir Gerry Grimstone, chairman of the Board Reputation Committee took action to define and focus its role and scope more clearly, including implementing new reporting initiatives such as the development of dashboard reports.

2016 findings

Create regular broad-based risk oversight sessions for the Board to allow Directors to look across the risk spectrum.

Schedule a debate on the role of the Board andnon-executive Directors and link the conclusions to revised Board objectives to help focus the Board’s agenda over the coming year.

2016 findings

The Board effectiveness review reported on positive and constructive relations between the new Board and the new management team.

2016 findings

Continue to optimise the information flow between Directors in therun-up to Structural Reform in 2018.

Consider agreeing common values for the Group and the banking subsidiary boards in the new structure.

For 2017 this finding will be renamed as ‘Optimise communication and collaboration between directors, boards and committees.’

Actions to be taken in 2017

We will continue to identify opportunities for more free-ranging discussion of risk, including as part of the annual Board strategy session.

The role of the Group Board and Groupnon-executive Directors will be reviewed in the context of Structural Reform.

Actions to be taken in 2017

The Board will continue to support and challenge executive management, with particular focus on execution of strategy.

Actions to be taken in 2017

The Chairman will continue to use his meetings withnon-executive Directors ahead of Board meetings to ensure that allnon-executive Directors are briefed on current issues.

Opportunities for the Board (and, in due course, the banking subsidiary boards) to spend more time together around Board meetings will be identified.

Once the subsidiary boards are established, a common set of values will be agreed to supplement the Governance Guiding Principles that are already in place.

34  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2016 Annual Report on Form 20-F


 

 

           

Governance in Action – external audit tender

 

As indicated in last year’s Annual Report, Barclays decided to undertake an external audit tender in 2015, with a view to replacing our external audit firm from the 2017 financial year onwards. This was done to conform with the auditor rotation requirements of the final statutory audit services order published in October 2014 by the UK’s Competition and Markets Authority, which took effect in January 2015.

In December 2014, we established an Audit Tender Oversight Sub-Committee, to oversee the external audit. I was asked to chair the Sub-Committee and Crawford Gillies and Colin Beggs, Chairman of the BAGL Audit Committee, were the other members. The tender process completed in summer 2015 and the Board announced in July 2015 that it had appointed KPMG as Barclays Auditor with effect from the 2017 financial year.

One of the Sub-Committee’s key objectives was to ensure that the selection process was efficient, fair, effective, open and transparent. It established and published the following weighted key assessment criteria: Audit Quality (50%), Cultural Fit (20%), Corporate Fit (15%) and Experience (15%). No fee information was availableImprovements to the Board Audit Committee before the recommendation was finalised. Three levels of governance were implemented to manage and support the process.appointment process

 

  

Director induction

 

Timeline and key activities

LOGO

Dealing more strategically with global regulation

  

Governance body

Purpose

    

2015 findings

To continue to assess the skills and experience needed on the Board and to ensure that Board composition is balanced between UK and international members.

To enhance Board succession planning, particularly in respect of key roles.

 
 

2015 findings

Core Audit Tender

TeamTo enhance the Board training and induction programme, with particular focus on the training needs of Board members from outside the financial services sector.

 

§  Assist the audit firms to put the best solution forward for consideration.2015 findings

§  Conduct a detailed assessment of the audit firms following the design approved by the Audit Tender Oversight Sub-Committee.

To continue to provide opportunities for Board members to provide early input to thinking on major issues and decisions.

    

Actions taken in 2016

During 2016 a revised Board succession plan and updated skills matrix were presented to the Board Nominations Committee. The plan addresses immediate needs as well as longer-term requirements to take account of the tenure of non-executive Directors. The succession plan included succession to key roles and considered the optimum size of the Board. The future composition of the Board post-Structural Reform has also been considered.

In addition, the Board received updates on executive talent management and succession planning during 2016.

 
 

 

Audit Tender OversightActions taken in 2016

Sub-CommitteeThe Board training programme for 2016 included specific sessions aimed primarily atnon-executive Directors without a financial services background. Details of the training programme offered during 2016 can be foundon page 39.

 

 

§Actions taken in 2016  Agree objectives

The Board’s agenda during 2016 focused more on strategic issues, including the capital and desired outcomes for the audit tender.

§  Approve the designliquidity impacts of Structural Reform. For a description of the audit tender process.

§  ConstructBoard’s activity in 2016, including the input provided to management on the formulation of Group strategy and agree a shortlist of firmsother significant decisions, see page 8 to be asked to participate.

§  Oversee the implementation of the audit tender process.

9.

    

2016 findings

Continue to refine the Board skills matrix to ensure it aligns with the Group’s strategy and informs the succession plan for key Board roles. Implement more regular reporting to the Board on potentialnon-executive Directors under consideration.

 
 

 

Board Audit Committee2016 findings

Continue to enhance the Director induction with a focus on providing broader governance training to anyone who has not previously served on a UK plc board.

 

 

2016 findings

Review reporting arrangements on strategy implementation and review the KPIs or dashboard reports for key initiatives.

§  RecommendFor 2017 this finding will be renamed as ‘Optimise reporting to the Board from at least two potential candidates, the preferred firm to be appointed.on strategy and execution priorities.’

    

Actions to be taken in 2017

The Board skills matrix will be kept under review, with separate skills matrices to be agreed with the respective chairmen of the banking subsidiaries. The Group Board succession plan will continue to be reviewed on a regular basis by the Board Nominations Committee and the Chairman will keep current Board members regularly updated on recruitment plans and potential candidates.

 
 

 

A numberActions to be taken in 2017

The Director induction programme will be reviewed and refreshed to factor in tailored governance training for new Directors. This is also being extended to directors of firms were invitedthe new banking subsidiaries.

Actions to participatebe taken in 2017

The form and content of reporting to the audit tender, including firms outsideBoard will be reviewed and refreshed by management to ensure that the ‘Big 4’ auditors. We published keyBoard is provided with appropriate management information on strategy and execution priorities. Specific topics that the tender in a timely manner, including makingBoard indicated that it wished to review have been factored into the request for proposal available2017 Board agenda.

Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2016 Annual Report on Barclays’ website. We also wrote to our major shareholders, setting out the processForm 20-F  |  35


Governance: Directors’ report

How we comply

Leadership

The Role of the Board

The Board of Directors is responsible for promoting the highest standards of corporate governance in Barclays. We act in a way that we consider promotes the success of Barclays for the benefit of shareholders as a whole, and are accountable to the shareholders for creating and delivering sustainable value. It is our responsibility as the Board to ensure that management not only delivers on short-term objectives, but promotes the long-term growth of Barclays. The existing corporate governance framework embeds the right culture, values and behaviours throughout the Group and supports our role in determining strategic objectives and policies.

In addition to setting strategy and overseeing its implementation we are also responsible for ensuring that management maintains an effective system of internal control. An effective system of internal control should provide assurance of effective and efficient operations, internal financial controls and compliance with law and regulation. In meeting this responsibility we consider what is appropriate for the Group’s business and reputation, the materiality of financial and other risks and the relevant costs and benefits of implementing controls.

The Board is the decision-making body for matters that, owing to their strategic, financial or reputational implications or consequences, are considered significant to the Group. A formal schedule of powers reserved to the Board ensures that our control of these key decisions is maintained. A summary of the matters reserved to the Board can be found at home.barclays/corporategovernance. It includes the approval of appointments to the Board, Barclays’ strategy, financial statements, capital expenditure and any major acquisitions, mergers or disposals.

Board Governance framework

The main Board Committees are the Board Audit Committee, the Board Nominations Committee, the Board Remuneration Committee, the Board Reputation Committee and the Board Risk Committee. Under the authority of our Articles of Association, each Board Committee has had specific responsibilities delegated to it by the Board. Further information on the role and activities of each of the Board Committees can be found in this report and in their individual terms of reference, which have been approved by the Board and are available at barclays/corporategovernance.

In addition, the Regulatory Investigations Committee was formed in 2012 and focuses on providing Board-level oversight of regulatory investigations. In 2016 the Committee met five times. John McFarlane is the Committee Chairman and the other Committee members are Mike Ashley, Sir Gerry Grimstone, Diane de Saint Victor and Jes Staley.

36  |  Barclays PLC and details of the tendering audit firms, which we considered essential to transparency. Enhanced compliance procedures were established. We then undertook a broadBarclays Bank PLC 2016 Annual Report on Form 20-F


Board Governance framework

LOGO

Roles on the Board

Executive andnon-executive Directors share the same duties and are subject to the same constraints but, in line with the principles of the Code, a clear division of responsibilities has been established. It is the responsibility of the Chairman to lead and manage the work of the Board, while responsibility for theday-to-day management of Barclays has been delegated to the Group Chief Executive. The Group Chief Executive is supported in this role by the Group Executive Committee. Further information on membership of the Group Executive Committee can be found on page 5.

As a Board we have set out our expectations of each Director inBarclays’ Charter of Expectations. This includes role profiles and the behaviours and competencies required for each role on the Board, namely the Chairman, Deputy Chairman, Senior Independent Director,non-executive Directors, executive Directors and Committee Chairmen. The Board Nominations Committee reviews theCharter of Expectations annually to ensure it remains relevant andup-to-date. It is published on home.barclays/corporategovernance to ensure that there is complete transparency of the standards we set for ourselves.

Barclays PLC and structured evaluation of each firm through site visits and workshops with the tendering firms, covering all the major businesses of the Group, the control functions and specific audit exercises, which were also attended byBarclays Bank PLC 2016 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  37


Governance: Directors’ report

How we comply

Attendance

As members of the Board Audit Committee. Ongoing feedbackof Directors we are expected to attend each Board meeting and in 2016 we attended both scheduled and additional Board meetings, as disclosed in the table below. The Chairman met privately with thenon-executive Directors ahead of each scheduled Board meeting, and if, owing to exceptional circumstances, a Director was providednot able to attend a Board meeting they ensured that their views were made known to the tendering audit firms through a single point of contactChairman in order to ensure that each was given the best chance possible of putting forward a credible proposal to the Board Audit Committee.

At the conclusionadvance of the audit tender process, the Board Audit Committee was able to recommend to the Board the preferred firm to be appointed, from two shortlisted firms. All tendering firms met the minimum thresholds set by the Audit Tender Oversight Sub- Committee and, following a full assessment of the proposals and detailed questioning of the audit firms, KPMG was identified as the preferred firm, based on audit quality, evaluation scores and its extensive experience of auditing banks. Mike Ashley and Sir Michael Rake, both former partners of KPMG, took no part in the evaluation process or the Board Audit Committee’s recommendation and both recused themselves when the Board discussed and approved the appointment.

meeting.

 

Board attendance

 Independent  

Scheduled

meetings

eligible to

attend

  

Scheduled

meetings

attended

  

%

attendance

  

Additional

meetings

eligible to

attend

  

Additional

meetings

attended

  

%  

attendance  

 

Group Chairman

             

John McFarlane

 On appointment  8  8  100  2  2  100  

 

Executive Directors

             

Tushar Morzaria

 Executive Director  8  8  100  2  2  100  

Jes Staley

 Executive Director  8  8  100  2  2  100  

 

Non-executive Directors

             

Mike Ashley

 Independent  8  8  100  2  1  50  

Tim BreedonRoles on the Board

Executive andnon-executive Directors share the same duties and are subject to the same constraints but, in line with the principles of the Code, a clear division of responsibilities has been established. It is the responsibility of the Chairman Audit Tender Oversight Sub-Committeeto lead and manage the work of the Board, while responsibility for theday-to-day management of Barclays has been delegated to the Group Chief Executive. The Group Chief Executive is supported in this role by the Group Executive Committee. Further information on membership of the Group Executive Committee can be found on page 5.

As a Board we have set out our expectations of each Director inBarclays’ Charter of Expectations. This includes role profiles and the behaviours and competencies required for each role on the Board, namely the Chairman, Deputy Chairman, Senior Independent Director,non-executive Directors, executive Directors and Committee Chairmen. The Board Nominations Committee reviews theCharter of Expectations annually to ensure it remains relevant andup-to-date. It is published on home.barclays/corporategovernance to ensure that there is complete transparency of the standards we set for ourselves.

 

18  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F


Governance: Directors’ report

What we did in 2015

Board Risk Committee reportaBarclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2016 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  37


Governance: Directors’ report

How we comply

    

 

 

LOGO

“In 2016 the Committee will continue to supervise the level and deployment of risk appetite, as well as the Group’s funding and capital position, as we respond to regulatory requirements and our expectations of continued volatility in external conditions.”Attendance

Dear Fellow Shareholders

Over the past year, the Board Risk Committee reviewed management’s responses to a range of external challenges. These included a slowdown in China and other emerging markets, falling oil and commodity prices, as well as some industry trends toward more aggressive lending terms in certain core markets, including UK property and international leveraged finance. Risk appetite, as well as country, sector and individual exposures, were carefully monitored to ensure that business activity and limits appropriately reflected external risks. We were pleased to see impairment remain broadly flat on 2014 levels and within planning expectations, despite increasingly challenging conditions in some markets.

A key activity for the Committee is recommending risk appetite to the Board and monitoring performance against the agreed appetite on its behalf. The context in which we set our Medium Term Plan (MTP) and risk appetite for 2015 was based on our assessment of our key markets, including risk factors arising from the near term geopolitical, macroeconomic and market environment and the potential for further conduct and litigation charges. Matters for particular focus were the UK housing market, where new mortgage regulations, a potential rise in interest rates, the growth in the buy-to-let market and ongoing high levels of household debt were expected to have an impact; continuing economic and political uncertainty in Europe; weak economic prospects for South Africa; and the potential effects of ongoing weakness in oil prices. 2015 risk appetite and risk triggers were set to position Barclays conservatively given this environment. During 2015, significant stress in emerging markets and economies became evident, underpinned by a slowing in the Chinese economy and resultant market volatility. Consequently, Barclays took early action to reduce its risk appetite to emerging markets, particularly Africa, and also remained vigilant to the potential impacts arising from a downturn in economic growth, indebtedness generally and further weakness in capital markets.

At the end of 2014, the Committee asked for a review of the Group’s process for setting risk appetite and during 2015 approved a revised methodology that takes a scenario-based approach, with stress testing as the basis of the risk appetite framework. This revised methodology was used to set risk appetite for 2016, with the Committee also approving the stress testing themes, the severity of the proposed stress and the financial constraints.

Note

a   The name of the Committee changed from the Board Financial Risk Committee in June 2015

Another key area of focus during 2015 was the structural reform programme, where the Committee was asked by the Group Chairman to oversee progress of the planning process, particularly with regard to structural options, their capital and liquidity implications and the potential risks for the Group, its customers and for the financial system. Now that the programme has moved into its implementation phase, the Board will directly oversee programme execution, although the Committee will continue to exercise oversight of capital and liquidity aspects, including assessing capital on a legal entity basis. From July 2015, the Committee also assumed oversight responsibility for operational risk, agreeing to focus on the financial and capital aspects of operational risk, while the Board Audit Committee oversees the control aspects.

The role of Board Risk Committee Chairman is not confined to the Committee’s regular meetings. During 2015, I continued to have significant interaction with our regulators, meeting regularly with representatives from our UK and US regulators. I held regular meetings with the Chief Risk Officer and members of his senior management team, with Barclays Treasurer and the Chief Operating Officer. I also liaised closely with the Chairman of Board Audit Committee, particularly on those matters where the remit of the two committees might overlap, including with regard to the implementation of the Enterprise Risk Management Framework and operational risk issues.

Committee performance

The Committee’s performance during 2015 was evaluated as part of the independently facilitated annual Board effectiveness review and I am happy to report that the outcomes were positive. The Committee was regarded as effective and as taking a thorough and detailed approach to its responsibilities. The main area identified for improvement was ensuring that the papers presented to the Committee strike the right balance between providing data for information and providing insight and analysis to encourage greater debate and I will be working with the Chief Risk Officer and Barclays Treasurer to address this during 2016. You can read more about the outcomes of the Board effectiveness review on pages 33 and 34.

Looking ahead

The Committee expects its areas of focus for 2016 to be guided by the ongoing level of change faced by the Group as it implements its strategy and executes the structural reform programme, with a particular focus on capital and liquidity management across legal entities. We will also continue to monitor and react to any emerging risks arising in our key markets in the UK, US and South Africa as a consequence of any macroeconomic deterioration or disruption in financial market conditions.

LOGO

Tim Breedon

Chairman, Board Risk Committee

29 February 2016

Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  19


Committee composition and meetings

The Committee is comprised solely of independent non-executive Directors. Following a review by the Board during 2015 of Board Committee composition, Dambisa Moyo stepped down from the Committee with effect from 31 August 2015 and Diane Schueneman joined the Committee with effect from 1 September 2015. Details of the skills and experience of the Committee members can be found in their biographies on pages3 and 4.

The Committee met seven times in 2015, with two of the meetings held in New York. Two additional meetings were held at short notice for the sole purpose of considering and approving revised risk limits in connection with specific transactions and, with the consent of the Committee Chairman, were not attended by all Committee members. The chart on page23 shows how the Committee allocated its time during 2015. Committee meetings were attended by management, including the Group Chief Executive, Group Finance Director, Chief Internal Auditor, Chief Risk Officer, Barclays Treasurer and General Counsel, as well as representatives from the businesses. Representatives from the external auditor also attended meetings.

MemberMeetings attended/eligible to attend
Tim Breedon7/7
Mike Ashley7/7
Reuben Jeffery III*5/7
Dambisa Moyo (to 31 August 2015)*3/5
Diane Schueneman (from 1 Sept 2015)2/2
Steve Thieke*5/7
*with the consent of the Chairman did not attend the two meetings held at short notice to consider specific transaction limits

Committee role and responsibilities

The Committee’s responsibilities include:

§
As members of the Board of Directors we are expected to attend each Board meeting and in 2016 we attended both scheduled and additional Board meetings, as disclosed in the table below. The Chairman met privately with thenon-executive Directors ahead of each scheduled Board meeting, and if, owing to exceptional circumstances, a Director was not able to attend a Board meeting they ensured that their views were made known to the Chairman in advance of the meeting. recommending to the Board the total level of financial and operational risk the Group is prepared to take (risk appetite) to create long-term shareholder value

 

§monitoring financial and operational risk appetite, including setting limits for individual types of risk, e.g., credit, market and funding risk

§monitoring the Group’s financial and operational risk profile

§ensuring that financial and operational risk is taken into account during the due diligence phase of any strategic transaction and

§providing input from a financial and operational risk perspective into the deliberations of the Board Remuneration Committee.

LOGO

The Committee’s terms of reference are available at

home.barclays/corporategovernance

The Committee’s work

The significant matters addressed by the Committee during 2015 are described below:

Area of focusMatter addressedRole of the CommitteeConclusion/action taken
Risk appetite, i.e. the level of risk the Group chooses to take in pursuit of its business objectives.The methodology for calculating the level of risk appetite.

§  Requested a review of the Group’s risk appetite process and methodology and debated proposals from management to move to a scenario-based stress testing approach.

§  Evaluated the proposed MTP stress test, agreeing on a scenario involving a global recession from an economic slowdown in China.

§  Debated the severity of the scenario and how it would apply across the Group’s main markets of the UK, US and South Africa and how it aligned to regulatory stress tests.

The Committee challenged the parameters proposed by management and asked for a parameter to be linked to PBT. It also asked for early consideration to be given to the impact of IFRS 9 on the Group’s risk appetite and stress testing assumptions. This work is under way and will be reported to the Committee in the first half of 2016. Given the change in methodology, the Committee requested early sight of the design and outputs as the new risk appetite process was implemented, resulting in a workshop being held in December 2015. All non-executive Directors were invited to attend the workshop.

Stress testing, i.e. testing whether the Group’s financial position and risk profile provide sufficient resilience to withstand the impact of severe economic stress.

The Group’s stress testing exercises, including scenario selection and constraints, the results and implications of stress tests, including stress tests run by the Bank of England (BoE), and regulatory feedback on the methodology and results.

§  Debated proposals from management to move to a scenario-based risk appetite setting approach and approved a change to the Group’s methodology.

§  Assessed the progress of the BoE stress test and evaluated the preliminary results, including discussing any potential areas of sensitivity.

The Committee approved the stress test results for submission to the BoE. It subsequently evaluated the BoE stress testing results and feedback from the BoE on the stress test.

20  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F


Governance: Directors’ report

What we did in 2015

Board Risk Committee report

Area of focusMatter addressedRole of the CommitteeConclusion/action taken
Structural reform, i.e. the progress of structural reform, including the challenges to execution.The impact of structural reform on the Group’s principal risks, including the impact on capital and liquidity for individual Group legal entities and the potential overall impact on the safety and soundness of the UK financial system.

§  Debated structural reform and the impact on the capital and liquidity flight paths for individual legal entities, in particular, the prospective credit rating of Barclays Bank PLC in the structural reform structure.

§  Evaluated the respective impacts on capital, liquidity and on the general safeness and soundness of the Group of different ring fence bank (RFB) structures.

The Committee recognised the design and implementation challenges of the programme and supported management in proposing structures and perimeters that best ensured the safety and soundness of all elements of the Group. It requested a workshop on structural reform to provide the Committee with an in-depth view of the key challenges. The workshop was held in December 2015 and all non-executive Directors were invited to attend.

Liquidity and funding, i.e. having sufficient financial resources available to enable the Group to meet its obligations as they fall due.Compliance with regulatory requirements and internal liquidity risk appetite (LRA).

§  Assessed on a regular basis liquidity performance against requirements.

§  Debated the credit ratings of Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC and potential market reaction to a ratings downgrade following removal of sovereign support notching.

§  Questioned the cost of additional liquidity and asked for options to reduce the cost to be considered.

The Committee ensured that management had in place options to manage any impact on liquidity of a ratings downgrade. It agreed that the cost of maintaining surplus liquidity was appropriate.

Capital and leverage,

i.e., having sufficient capital resources to meet the Group’s regulatory requirements, maintain its credit rating and support growth and strategic options.

The flight path to achieving required regulatory and internal targets and capital and leverage ratios.

§  Debated on a regular basis, capital performance against plan, tracking the capital flight path, any challenges/headwinds and regulatory developments.

§  Evaluated options to maximise capital and capital ratios in order to meet regulatory and market expectations.

The Committee supported the forecast trajectory and the actions identified by management to manage the Group’s capital position.
Country risk, i.e. the levels of risk the Group is prepared to take in specific countries.The potential impact on the Group’s risk profile of political instability and economic weakness in South Africa, one of its main markets.

§  Debated economic conditions in South Africa and the future outlook.

§  Examined the actions already taken to manage risks, improve controls and asset quality and develop triggers for additional action in the event of further macro deterioration.

§  Monitored the impact on South Africa of the slowdown in China and the fall in commodity prices.

The Committee sought additional information around the actions that had been taken to manage the risk profile in South Africa, including the impact of the actions taken to date. It requested a deep dive on the risk profile of the South African business, inviting the South African business heads to present on the actions that had been taken and how the business was positioned for a further economic downturn, including the impact of a further country rating downgrade.

Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  21


Area of focusMatter addressedRole of the CommitteeConclusion/action taken
Political and economic risk, i.e. the impact on the Group’s risk profile of political and economic developments and macroeconomic conditions.The potential impact on the Group’s risk profile of political developments, such as the UK general election and budget statement, the potential exit of countries from the Eurozone, and weakening macroeconomic conditions, such as disruption and volatility in financial markets.

§  Assessed the potential impact of the UK general election and steps that could be taken to manage any market volatility.

§  Evaluated the potential risks arising from a general macroeconomic slowdown and from financial markets disruption, including the global impact of the economic slowdown in China.

§  Assessed global consumer indebtedness indicators and the potential impact of rising consumer debt on the Group’s risk profile.

§  Debated the Group’s Eurozone exposures in the context of the potential break-up of the Eurozone in the event of a Greek exit and assessed the Group’s levels of redenomination risk in the Eurozone.

The Committee asked management to evaluate macroeconomic conditions and market indicators to inform the strategic plan and risk appetite proposals for 2016, so that the Group is positioned appropriately.

Retail credit risk,

i.e. UK property market, interest rate risk.

The potential overheating of the UK housing market, particularly in London and the South East and the Group’s risk appetite for and management of sectors such as the buy-to-let sector.

§  Debated UK property market indicators and conditions, particularly in the high loan to value (LTV) andthe buy-to-let markets and potential economic and political risks to that market.

§  Evaluated the Group’s lending criteria and its approach to assessing customers on affordability.

§  Assessed the potential impact of an increase in interest rates on customers, including how customers had been stress tested and assessed against affordability criteria.

The Committee encouraged management to continue to take a conservative approach to UK mortgage lending in the buy-to-let market and emphasised the need to keep risks and exposures within agreed appetite.

Specific sector risk,

i.e. the Group’s risk profile in sectors showing signs of stress, such as the oil sector.

The Group’s exposures to the oil and commodities sectors in light of the price weakness and volatility in these sectors during 2015.

§  Regularly assessed the Group’s exposures to the oil sector, including assessing steps taken with regard to the credit strategy for the sector, how the portfolio was performing and whether this was in line with expectations.

§  Evaluated the Group’s exposures to the commodities sector and actions taken to identify any names at risk and reduce exposures.

The Committee supported the actions that had been taken by management to manage the Group’s risks and exposures to the oil and commodities sectors. It requested a stress test to assess the impact of further (and longer) oil price weakness on the Group’s lending portfolio, including indirect exposure.

Operational Risk

From 1 July 2015, the Committee took responsibility for oversight of the capital and financial aspects of operational risk.

The Group’s operational risk capital requirements and any material changes to the Group’s operational risk profile and performance versus risk appetite.

§  Evaluated operational risk capital and debated the potential for an increase in regulatory operational capital requirements.

§  Debated whether Barclays advanced status for calculating operational risk capital should be retained.

§  Tracked operational risk key indicators via regular reports from the Head of Operational Risk.

The Committee focused its oversight of operational risk on the financial and capital implications, debating in particular the potential impact of regulatory operational risk requirements.

22  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F


Governance: Directors’ report

What we did in 2015

Board Risk Committee report

Area of focusMatter addressedRole of the CommitteeConclusion/action taken

Risk governance,

i.e. the capability, governance and controls that the Group has over the management of risk.

The development of a scorecard to assist the Committee in assessing risk capability across the Group; further enhancement to the limit framework and governance of leveraged finance; the actions being taken to enhance controls and governance around risk models.

§  Requested development of a risk capability scorecard.

§  Regularly debated conditions in the leveraged finance market, tracking market indicators and the Group’s risk exposures and assessing the limit framework for leveraged finance and underwriting, including proposed changes to the framework to strengthen controls.

§  Assessed the progress of enhancements to risk models controls and governance, including the role of the Group’s Independent Validation Unit.

§  Evaluated revisions proposed to the ERMF.

The Committee approved the approach to the risk capability scorecard and requested a formal annual assessment of capability, with the option of an external assessment every three years. The Committee approved a revised limit framework for leveraged finance transactions and approved underwriting limits in general. The Committee concluded that good progress had been made on enhancing the controls and governance around risk models and asked management to focus on improving the quality of models and data quality further. The Committee also recommended the revised ERMF to the Board for approval.

RemunerationThe scope of any risk adjustments to be taken into account by the Board Remuneration Committee when making remuneration decisions for 2015.

§   Evaluated the Risk function’s view of performance, which informed remuneration decisions for 2015.

The Committee supported the Risk function’s view of 2015 risk performance and endorsed the report that had been submitted to the Board Remuneration Committee.

The Remuneration Report on pages50 to 83 includes more detail on how risk is taken into account in remuneration decisions.

 

In addition, the Committee also covered the following matters in 2015:

 

§  regularly tracked the utilisation of risk appetite and evaluated the Group’s risk profile

 

§  evaluated the impact of the Swiss franc revaluation on the Group’s electronic trading systems and asked for any lessons learned to be applied to other electronic platforms

 

§  debated risk related matters arising from regulatory assessments and the actions needed to address any specific issues raised

 

§  approved regulatory submissions, including the Individual Capital Adequacy Assessment Process and the Individual Liquidity Adequacy Assessment

 

§  assessed and debated a report on its own performance during 2014, including considering whether its remit should be revised to cover operational risk and assessing the degree of challenge and support and value it provided to the Risk function

 

§  discussed and agreed on its own training needs, resulting in two workshops being held in 2015, one on risk appetite and one on structural reform, with a further briefing session on the impact of IFRS 9 planned for 2016

 

§  approved amendments to its terms of reference to reflect its revised remit and to ensure they remained in line with best practice and

 

§  discussed and agreed its specific responsibilities for the oversight of operational risk, focusing on the capital and financial impacts, leaving the Board Audit Committee to oversee operational risk control issues.

  Board Risk Committee allocation of time (%)  
            2015  2014  
  

 

LOGO

 1 Risk profile/risk appetite  43  57 
    (including capital and liquidity management)     
   2 Key risk issues  31  19 
   3 Internal control/risk policies  11  11 
   4 Other (including remuneration and  15  13 
    governance issues)     
         
         
         
  

LOGO

  Read more about Barclays’ risk management on pages 95 to  
    109 and 336 to 409  
      
            
            
            
            
            
            
            
            
            
 

    

 

 

                   

Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  23


What we did in 2015

Board Reputation Committee reporta

LOGO

‘The Committee’s responsibilities were reshaped during 2015 to focus on three main pillars: conduct and compliance; reputation; and citizenship.’

Dear Fellow Shareholders

The Board Reputation Committee underwent a period of change during 2015, in terms of both a reassessment of Board Committee responsibilities and membership. John McFarlane succeeded Reuben Jeffery III as Chairman of the Committee in March 2015 and, following John’s appointment as Executive Chairman in July 2015, the Board asked me to assume the role of Committee Chairman, a position I held until my retirement from the Board at the end of December 2015.

The Committee’s responsibilities were reshaped during 2015 to focus on three main pillars: conduct and compliance; reputation; and citizenship. Culture and conduct are the bedrock of the organisation and, with the right culture, much of Barclays’ exposure to conduct risk can be reduced. To this end, the Committee has continued to focus on these issues, assessing progress against plans for embedding our conduct risk programme and implementing cultural change throughout the Group. We assessed deep-dive reports into conduct risk within key businesses, such as Barclays Africa and the Cards business, and evaluated the findings of a report by Air Marshal Sir David Walker, commissioned by management to give an independent view on whether we are making progress with cultural change. I am pleased to report that, although there is more to be done, progress on both has been good and there is strong commitment throughout the Group to embedding the necessary changes.

The Committee also tracked the exposure of Barclays, and the financial sector generally, to reputational risks. Reputational risk is a risk type that is constantly evolving, with potential new risks emerging while we are implementing controls to manage identified risks. Consequently, we have taken a thematic approach to identifying our key reputational risks and have ensured that we look ahead to identify emerging risks enabling us to mitigate them early. You can read more on pages25 and 26 about the significant matters addressed during the year.

Committee performance

As part of the annual Board effectiveness review the performance of the Board’s committees was considered and I am pleased to report that the Committee is considered to be effective. The Committee is relatively new and areas for improvement included continuing to refine its agenda, particularly with regard to compliance and conduct risk, and ensuring that it does not duplicate the work of other Board Committees. Please turn to the report of the Board effectiveness review on pages 33 and 34 for more details.

Looking ahead

My successor, Sir Gerry Grimstone, will be assessing the areas of focus for the Committee in 2016 and I wish him and the Committee well for the future.

LOGO

Sir Michael Rake

Chairman, Board Reputation Committee until 31 December 2015

Committee composition and meetings

The Committee comprises independent non-executive Directors, with the exception of Wendy Lucas-Bull, who the Board has decided to deem as non-independent for the purposes of the UK Corporate Governance Code, owing to her position as Chairman of Barclays Africa Group Limited. During 2015, there were a number of changes to the membership of the Committee, which are set out in the table below.

The Committee met four times during 2015 and the chart on page26 shows how it allocated its time. Committee meetings were attended by management, including the Group Chief Executive, Chief Internal Auditor, Chief Risk Officer, General Counsel, Group Corporate Relations Director and the Heads of Compliance, Conduct Risk and Operational Risk, as well as representatives from the businesses and other functions.

MemberMeetings attended/eligible to attend
Reuben Jeffery III (Chairman and member to
31 March 2015)
1/1
John McFarlane (Chairman from 1 April 2015 –
16 July 2015)
2/2
Sir Michael Rake (Chairman and member from
17 July 2015 – 31 December 2015)
2/2
Mike Ashley (to 31 August 2015)2/2
Tim Breedon (to 31 August 2015)2/2
Wendy Lucas-Bull4/4
Dambisa Moyo4/4
Diane de Saint Victor4/4
Sir John Sunderland (to 23 April 2015)1/1
Frits van Paasschen (from 1 September 2015)2/2

Committee role and responsibilities

The principal purpose of the Committee is to:

§  ensure, on behalf of the Board, the efficiency of the processes for identification and management of conduct and reputational risk and

§  oversee Barclays’ Citizenship Strategy, including the management of Barclays’ economic, social and environmental contribution.

Until the end of June 2015, the Committee also had responsibility for oversight of operational risk. Following a review by the Board of its governance arrangements, responsibility for the oversight of the capital and financial aspects of operational risk was reallocated to the Board Financial Risk Committee, which was renamed the Board Risk Committee. The Board Audit Committee oversees the control aspects of operational risk.

LOGO

The Committee’s terms of reference are available at

home.barclays

Note

a   Formerly called the Board Conduct, Operational and Reputational Risk Committee

24  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F


Governance: Directors’ report

What we did in 2015

Board Reputation Committee report

The Committee’s work

The significant matters addressed by the Committee during 2015 are described below:

Area of focusMatter addressedRole of the CommitteeConclusion/action taken
Conduct riskProgress on embedding the conduct risk management framework, focus on specific conduct risks and continued reduction of customer complaint levels.

§  Continued its monitoring of the conduct risk programme via quarterly reports from management.

§  Specifically assessed the status of the conduct risk programmes in Barclays Africa and across the Cards business.

§  Monitored regulators’ views of Barclays’ conduct risk management and reporting via updates from management.

§  Assessed progress made in reducing numbers of complaints, including those escalated to the Financial Ombudsman Service.

The Committee welcomed the progress made in embedding the conduct risk programme and requested more visibility of the status of specific conduct risks. It encouraged management to continue to apply lessons learned from past events to prevent similar events occurring now or in the future. It was content with the progress made in embedding conduct risk in Barclays Africa, but encouraged greater simplification of the governance structures and communication. It also encouraged management to do more to reduce the number of complaints.

Operational risk

(to July 2015)

The management of Barclays’ operational risk profile and exposure to significant operational risks.

§  Monitored Barclays’ operational risk profile via quarterly reports from management.

§  Evaluated management’s strategy for addressing cyber risk and monitored its progress.

§  Assessed Barclays’ exposure to technology risk and examined plans to resolve identified control issues by the end of the year.

The Committee focused its attention on emerging risks and those to which the Group’s exposure was increasing. It supported tactical and strategic actions proposed by management to mitigate the Group’s risks, including endorsing management’s strategy for addressing cyber risk. The Committee also satisfied itself that progress in managing technology risk was good and there was a healthy focus on embedding the right culture.

Reputational issuesEnsuring that Barclays anticipates, identifies and manages reputational issues that may impact it or the industry now or in the future.

§  Tracked Barclays’ exposure to reputational risks via twice-yearly management reports.

§  Examined the effectiveness of the current reputation risk framework, including assessing case studies on specific reputational matters.

The Committee took a thematic approach to its assessment of reputational risks and guided management in its approach to managing them. It satisfied itself as to the effectiveness of the reputation risk framework.

Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  25


Area of focusMatter addressedRole of the CommitteeConclusion/action taken
Cultural changeThe progress being made on embedding of cultural change.

§  Evaluated the outputs of an independent review by Air Marshal Sir David Walker.

§  Assessed an industry-wide report by the Group of Thirty (G30) into banking conduct and culture and how Barclays’ practices benchmarked against the best practices and suggestions outlined in that report.

The Committee endorsed Air Marshal Sir David Walker’s report, which confirmed its view that progress had been good but that there was more to do to achieve the cultural change required. It encouraged management to continue to prioritise progress on cultural change. The Committee also concluded that many of the actions Barclays had taken in response to the Salz Review recommendations had aligned its practices with those proposed in the G30 report.

CitizenshipThe delivery of the 2015 Citizenship Plan and development of a Shared Growth Plan for 2016-2018.

§  Tracked progress against the current 2015 Citizenship plan via six-monthly reports from management.

§  With the current Citizenship Plan coming to completion, evaluated the proposed Shared Growth Plan for 2016-2018.

The Committee noted that all targets in the 2015 Citizenship Plan had been met or exceeded, with the exception of our new and renewed household lending target, which had not been possible to achieve owing to market and trading conditions. It endorsed the 2016-2018 Shared Growth Plan, particularly the proposal to link the plan to Barclays’ core purpose and values and to focus on employability skills.

 

The Committee also covered the following matters:

 

§   assessed progress of the programme to implement enhanced controls in the Investment Bank over conflicts of interest between Barclays and third parties

 

§   evaluated outcomes of regulatory thematic reviews of conduct issues and controls

 

§   evaluated the levels of attestation by colleagues globally to The Barclays Way, the Group’s code of conduct

 

§   assessed the status of specific remediation programmes being implemented by the business

 

  Board Reputation Committee allocation of time (%)    
            2015     2014    
  

 

LOGO

 

  1   Citizenship   6     2    
    2   Reputational issues   13     7    
   

 

 

 

3

 

  

 Culture, conduct and compliance   57     52    
    4   Operational risk   19     33    
    5   Other   6     6    
          
          
          
          

§  provided input to the Board Remuneration Committee on conduct and reputation issues to be taken into consideration for 2015 remuneration decisions

§  tracked progress against the Compliance function’s business plan, including updates on resourcing and attrition levels

§  monitored progress of Barclays’ plans for compliance with the Volcker Rule (restrictions on proprietary trading and certain fund investments by banks operating in the US)

§  assessed and discussed a report on the Committee’s performance during 2014

§  approved revisions to its terms of reference and recommended them to the Board for approval and

§  considered and approved Group Compliance Policies.

LOGO

  Read more about Barclays’ risk management on

 pages 95 to 109 and 336 to 409

26  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F


Governance: Directors’ report

What we did in 2015

Board Nominations Committee reporta

LOGO

“The importance of people as a driving force in sustaining a business over the long term.”

Dear Fellow Shareholders

I have often stressed the importance of people as a driving force in sustaining a business over the long term through their expertise, innovation and commitment. This is equally true of your Board, where it is crucially important that we have strong leaders able to make tough, strategic decisions while energising colleagues and galvanising them into action. It is with this in mind that the Committee approached appointments.

During 2015 we announced the appointment of two new non-executive Directors and a new Group Chief Executive. Board Committee membership was refreshed and we also took the opportunity to review the composition and roles of the Board Committees. In addition, we considered the requirements for independent non-executive directors for the boards of our strategically significant subsidiaries, including those that will be formed as the Group implements structural reform. We continued to foster executive succession by supporting new initiatives and by directly engaging with senior executives, for example, by mentoring individual senior executives, in order to nurture high potential individuals and help build a stronger succession pipeline.

The Committee was pleased that the Board achieved its target of having 25% female representation on the Board by the end of 2015. The target has subsequently been increased to 33% by 2020. While we also achieved our aspiration to reach 23% female representation within our senior leadership population by the end of 2015, we recognise that we need to sustain our focus to attract more senior women to Barclays, and to enable women to grow their careers with us. That will ensure we reach our 2018 goal of 26% women in senior leadership roles. We remain committed to maintaining the momentum of our gender diversity programme.

Committee performance

As part of the annual Board effectiveness review, a separate exercise was conducted to assess the Committee’s performance. The assessment found that the Committee is performing effectively. Please see the report on the Board effectiveness review on pages 33 and34 for more details. I would like to thank my fellow Committee members for their hard work and support during 2015, particularly Sir Michael Rake, who chaired the Committee during the period that I was Executive Chairman, and led the search for a new Group Chief Executive.

Looking ahead

We are preparing to implement a new structure in 2016 which will enable us to prepare for structural reform, simplify the organisation and speed up execution of the individual business strategies. These changes give us the opportunity to make sure that we have the right people in senior roles and that we also take action to build strength in each of the business executive teams for the longer term.

LOGO

John McFarlane

Chairman, Board Nominations Committee

29 February 2016

Committee composition and meetings

The Committee is composed solely of independent non-executive Directors. John McFarlane, as Chairman of the Board, is also Chairman of the Committee. Mike Ashley, Tim Breedon, Crawford Gillies, being the Chairmen of each of the other Board Committees, Reuben Jeffery III and Sir Gerry Grimstone, the Deputy Chairman and Senior Independent Director, are also members of the Committee. Details of the skills and experience of the Committee members can be found in their biographies on pages3 and 4.

During 2015, there were eight meetings of the Committee, including four additional meetings on Group Chief Executive succession. Attendance by members at Committee meetings is shown below. The chart on page30 shows how the Committee allocated its time during 2015.

Committee meetings were attended by the Group Chief Executive or Executive Chairman, with the HR Director, the Global Head of Leadership, Learning & Talent, the Global Head of Diversity and Inclusion and representatives from Spencer Stuart presenting on specific items.

MemberMeetings attended/eligible to attend
Sir David Walker (Chairman until 23 April 2015)2/2
John McFarlane* (Chairman from 24 April 2015 –
16 July 2015 and from 1 December 2015)*
4/4
Sir Michael Rake (Chairman from 17 July 2015 to
1 December 2015)
8/8
Mike Ashley8/8
Tim Breedon7/8
Crawford Gillies (from 24 April 2015)7/7
Reuben Jeffery III6/7
Sir John Sunderland (until 23 April 2015)2/2

*   John McFarlane stood down as a member of the Committee during the period 17 July – 30 November 2015, when he was Executive Chairman. No Director with executive responsibilities may be a member of the Committee

†  did not attend one meeting owing to prior business commitments

Note

The Chairman and the Group Chief Executive excuse themselves from meetings when the Committee focuses on the matter of succession to their roles.

Committee role and responsibilities

The principal purpose of the Committee is to:

§  support and advise the Board in ensuring that the composition of the Board and its Committees is appropriate and enables them to function effectively

§  examine the skills, experience and diversity on the Board and plan succession for key Board appointments, planning ahead to deal with upcoming retirements and to fill any expected skills gaps

§  provide oversight, at Board level, of the Group’s talent management programme and diversity and inclusion initiatives

§  agree the annual Board effectiveness review process and monitor the progress of any actions arising, and

§  keep the Board’s governance arrangements under review and make appropriate recommendations to the Board to ensure that they are consistent with best practice corporate governance standards.

LOGO

You can find the Committee’s terms of reference at

home.barclays/corporategovernance

Note

a   The name of the Committee changed from the Board Corporate Governance and Nominations Committee in June 2015

Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  27


The Committee’s work

The significant matters addressed by the Committee during 2015 are described below:

Area of focusMatter addressedRole of the CommitteeConclusion/action taken
Board appointmentsThe refreshment of Board and Board Committee membership to secure individuals with the desired skills and experience needed on the Board in light of future strategic direction.

§  Conducted a search for successors to Sir Michael Rake and Antony Jenkins.

§  Evaluated a gap analysis of the skills and experience on the Board and identified the requirement for new non-executive Directors with financial services experience, and the preference to appoint more UK-based Directors given the time commitments associated with Board Committee appointments.

The Committee recommended the appointments of Sir Gerry Grimstone as Deputy Chairman and Senior Independent Director, Jes Staley as Group Chief Executive and Diane Schueneman as a non-executive Director.

Please refer to pages 30 and 32 for details of the Board’s approach to recruitment of new Directors and the case study of the recruitment of Jes Staley in particular.

Board and Board Committee structure, size and compositionThe restructure of the Board and Board Committees to allow the Board to focus on the Group’s commercial and strategic performance. The optimum size of the Board, the potential impact of structural reform and the need to constitute subsidiary boards.

§  Reassessed the structure, size and composition of the Board and Board Committees, as well as the current roles and responsibilities of the Board Committees, and recommended a number of changes to the Board.

§  Requested a working plan for Board succession over the next three years.

The Committee agreed that the size of the Board should be reduced over time and more matters should be delegated to the principal Board Committees. The Committee agreed that non-executive Directors should normally not serve on more than two Board Committees, to avoid being over-stretched, and to reduce the Committees in size over time to a maximum of four members, while taking care to ensure appropriate cross-membership. The Committee recommended revised Board-level responsibilities for oversight of risk, including the Board re-taking overall responsibility for enterprise-wide risk, disbanding the Board Enterprise Wide Risk Committee and reallocating responsibility for oversight of the capital and financial aspects of operational risk to the Board Risk Committee.

Succession planning and talent managementThe management of Board succession and oversight of the leadership needs of the Group to enable it to meet its strategic aims and its changing make-up resulting from the effects of structural reform.

§  Examined regular reports on succession plans and talent management of the leadership of the Group to address succession planning in the short-term and internal talent development.

§  Debated options for Directors to engage with members of the Group Executive Committee and senior management to help in nurturing high potential individuals and to support building a stronger succession pipeline.

The Committee agreed a proposal for Committee members to partner high potential senior management. The Committee endorsed the Group’s rapid development programme for high potential talent and agreed to support the programme by providing an insight into the role of the Board and its priorities. The Committee also endorsed the introduction of an improved talent assessment process and assessed the efficacy of the Group’s external talent acquisition process. The Committee examined the results of internal and external benchmarking exercises, including external benchmarking of senior management roles against similar roles in equivalent companies as part of the work on Group Executive Committee succession.

28  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F


Governance: Directors’ report

What we did in 2015

Board Nominations Committee report

Area of focusMatter addressedRole of the CommitteeConclusion/action taken
Board effectivenessThe 2015 Board effectiveness review of the Board and its Committees. The progress made against the actions identified in the 2014 Board effectiveness review.

§   Considered the effectiveness of the 2014 Board effectiveness review process and agreed the approach to be taken to the 2015 Board effectiveness review.

§   Regularly examined progress of the action plan arising from the outcomes of the 2014 Board effectiveness review.

The Committee set the criteria for conduct of the 2015 Board effectiveness review, including the appointment of a new external facilitator, Independent Board Evaluation, and agreed an action plan to address the matters arising from the 2014 Board effectiveness review.

See pages 33 and 34 for a full description of the process and outputs from the 2014 and 2015 effectiveness reviews.

Governance implications of structural reformThe establishment of governance principles for the Group under structural reform.

§   Scrutinised proposed governance guiding principles for the Group post-structural reform, which set out ultimate decision-making powers, while respecting the rights and responsibilities of the boards of the strategically significant subsidiaries: the ring-fence bank (RFB), Barclays Bank PLC, the US Intermediate Holding Company (IHC) and Barclays Africa Group (BAGL).

§  Discussed the potential composition of the RFB and Barclays Bank PLC boards in light of regulatory requirements.

The Committee endorsed and supported the governance guiding principles. The Committee provided views on the outline board and committee composition of the RFB and Barclays Bank PLC for the Board’s consideration.
Significant subsidiary board compositionThe composition of Barclays’ US IHC board and associated committees.

§   Determined the required structure and composition of the IHC board.

§   Endorsed the implementation of measures to allow potential future IHC board candidates the opportunity to build their knowledge of Barclays US businesses ahead of the formal creation of the IHC board in 2016.

The Committee agreed the proposed composition of the IHC board, including the appointments of Steve Thieke as chairman and Diane Schueneman as a non-executive director. It oversaw the establishment of a US Governance Review Board to allow proposed IHC board members to familiarise themselves with Barclays’ US businesses.

Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  29


In addition the Committee covered the following matters:

§the review of non-executive Directors’ performance, independence and time commitment as part of the Committee’s assessment of their eligibility for re-election

§consideration of a new target for Board diversity beyond the end of 2015 in the Company’s Board Diversity Policy and recommended it to the Board for approval

§updating of the Charter of Expectations and Corporate Governance in Barclays

§proposals for the 2015 Corporate Governance Report

§its annual review of the Directors’ register of interests and authorisations granted and

§changes to the Committee’s terms of reference.

Board Nominations Committee allocation of time (%)

          2015     2014  

 

LOGO

  1   Corporate governance matters   17     21  
  2   Board and Committee composition   24     20  
  3   Succession planning and talent (includging CEO succession)   47     43  
  4   Board effectiveness   6     11  
  5   Other   6     5  
      
      
      

Appointment and re-election of Directors

The Committee reviews Board and Board Committee composition, including potential new non-executive Directors, at each of its meetings. In addition to seeking successors for known retirements from the Board, the Committee monitors the skills and experience the Group needs to be able to deliver its strategic aims, to govern the Group appropriately, to ensure that risks threatening performance are identified and either addressed or mitigated, and to set ‘the tone from the top’ in terms of Barclays’ corporate culture and values. In 2015, the Committee also focused on the need to identify non-executive directors to serve on the boards of the Group’s strategically significant subsidiaries.

When considering a new appointment to the Board, the Committee relies on assessments of the current and expected Board and Board Committee composition, in order to assess the timeline for appointments, and a skills matrix that identifies the core competencies, skills, experience and diversity required for the Board to function effectively, with target weightings for each attribute. These assessments are regularly updated to take account of the Group’s needs over time.

The approach to recruiting new non-executive Directors is to create an individual specification with reference to the role requirements, including time commitment, the key competencies and behaviours set out in our Charter of Expectations and the desired key skills and experience identified from the skills matrix. The curriculum vitae and references of

potential candidates are assessed by the Committee as a whole, before shortlisted candidates are interviewed by members of the Committee. For certain Board positions, the Committee seeks engagement with key shareholders and Barclays’ regulators as part of the selection process. Feedback from these parties is taken into account before any recommendation is made to the Board, which is kept informed of progress throughout the selection and recruitment process. An illustration of the rigorous process applied to appointments can be found in the case study and timeline of the process to identify Jes Staley as Group Chief Executive, which is set out on page 32.

Executive search firms MWM Consulting, Egon Zehnder International and Spencer Stuart were instructed to assist with our Director searches in 2015. None of these firms has any other connection with Barclays, other than to provide executive recruitment services. Open advertising for Board positions was not used during 2015, as the Committee believes that targeted recruitment is the optimal way of recruiting for Board positions.

Barclays announced the appointment of two new non-executive Directors during 2015: Diane Schueneman and Sir Gerry Grimstone. In addition, Barclays announced the appointment of Jes Staley as Group Chief Executive. Each of them brings valued skills and experience which contribute to the efficacy of the Board as a whole. As previously reported, Diane Schueneman brings expertise in operations and technology to the Board, which she gained in financial services organisations, as well as wide-ranging experience of implementing change and achieving turnaround in business success and profitability. Sir Gerry Grimstone, who succeeded Sir Michael Rake as Deputy Chairman and Senior Independent Director, is well known, commands great respect within the financial services industry and brings immense experience, integrity and knowledge to his roles at Barclays. Jes Staley has the leadership skills and wide-ranging experience to deliver shareholder value and to take the Group forward strategically and, in particular, possesses a good understanding of corporate and investment banking. Biographical information is provided on pages 3 and 4, with further details available online at home.barclays

Changes in the composition of the Board and the Committee’s reassessment of the structure, size and composition of the Board and its Committees resulted in a refresh of the membership of Board Committees, as well as their roles and responsibilities, during 2015. Details of the changes are included in each of the Board Committee reports.

The Directors in office at the end of 2015 were subject to an effectiveness review, as described below. Based on the results of the review, the Board accepted the view of the Committee that each Director proposed for re-election continued to be effective and that they had each demonstrated the level of commitment required in connection with their role on the Board and the needs of the business.

30  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F


Governance: Directors’ report

What we did in 2015

Board Nominations Committee report

Diversity statement

The Financial Reporting Council maintains that one of the ways in which constructive board debate can be encouraged is through having sufficient diversity on the board. Barclays agrees with this view and, when it adopted a Board Diversity Policy in 2012, stated the Board’s aspirational goal of achieving 25% female representation on the Board by 2015. Female representation on the Board exceeded 25% at the end of 2015, having increased during the year with the appointment of Diane Schueneman. Noting that the latest progress report onWomen on Boards from the Davies Review has suggested a target of 33% by 2020, Barclays has adopted this new target in its Board Diversity Policy.

The Committee assisted the Board in achieving its target of 25% by ensuring that this was recorded on the Board skills matrix and, in particular, that the search firms were aware of the priority. The Committee also supported a number of initiatives to grow the talent pipeline within the Group and sought opportunities to engage with female members of senior management. Diversity as a whole, including gender, was also taken into account when evaluating the effectiveness of the Board. The comprehensive brief provided to Independent Board Evaluation for this year’s review included an evaluation of boardroom dynamics and the effects of diversity. The consultant accordingly assessed the impact of diversity including gender, age, the internationality of the Directors, the breadth of experience, qualifications and skills, concluding that there was a good degree of diversity on the Board with a range of different experiences and outlooks and that the Chairman should continue to nurture inputs from all Directors to derive the benefits of this diversity.

Below Board level, Barclays met its target of 23% female representation among the Managing Director and Director population in 2015. To achieve the target, the Committee endorsed programmes to embed accountability for diversity and inclusion throughout the Group. These efforts included Balanced Scorecard aligned targets for hiring, promotion and attrition set for each business or function, expansion of diversity data to include greater focus, expanding global campaigns to raise awareness and refined communications to drive impact. More details of Barclays’ diversity and inclusion strategy may be found on pages 47 to 49.

LOGO

You can find the Board Diversity Policy at

home.barclays/corporategovernance

Review of Board and Board Committee effectiveness

Barclays conducts an externally facilitated review of the effectiveness of the Board, Board Committees, individual Directors and the Chairman each year. For 2015, the effectiveness review was facilitated by Independent Board Evaluation, an independent external consultancy with no other connection with Barclays. The review process involved the consultant, Ffion Hague, attending certain Board and Board Committee meetings in November and December 2015 as an observer, alongside detailed interviews conducted according to a set agenda with Directors, members of the Group Executive Committee, the Company Secretary and other members of the executive and senior management. Feedback was also sought from external stakeholders. Independent Board Evaluation prepared a report for the Board on the findings from the review process, which was presented to the Board in December 2015. In addition, the Chairman was provided with a report and feedback on the performance of each of the Directors and the Senior Independent Director received a report on the Chairman. A similar process was followed for the Board Committees. Independent Board Evaluation provided feedback to each of the Committee Chairmen on the performance of each Committee. The feedback is scheduled to be discussed by each Committee in early 2016.

Having assessed the findings of the effectiveness review, the Directors were satisfied that the Board and each of its Committees operated effectively during 2015. Nonetheless, the Board identified a number of actions to help maintain and improve its effectiveness. These, together with an update on the actions taken following the 2014 review, are set out on pages 33 and 34.

Directors’ Conflicts of Interest

Barclays requires Directors to declare any potential or actual conflict of interest that could interfere with a Director’s ability to act in the best interests of the Group. The Board has adopted procedures for ensuring that its powers to authorise Directors’ conflicts operate effectively. A register of actual and potential conflicts and of any authorisation of a conflict granted by the Board is maintained by the Company Secretary and reviewed annually by the Board Nominations Committee.

Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  31


LOGO

Governance in action: the appointment of

Jes Staley

Role requirements

The Committee, which has responsibility for identifying suitable candidates to join the Board, agreed the desired attributes for a successor to Antony Jenkins as Group Chief Executive (CEO). In addition to strong and motivational leadership qualities, the Committee sought candidates with significant experience of retail and/or commercial and investment banking in large scale, complex organisations and an excellent track record of delivery and credibility with regulators and internal and external stakeholders. Personal attributes sought included strategic thinking and the ability to lead and manage change, especially cultural change.

Process

The Committee directed the selection process. As the Chairman had accepted the role of Executive Chairman until a successor was in place, it was agreed that he would step down from the Committee to ensure that it remained composed of independent non-executive Directors and that I would lead the process. It was also agreed that the Committee as a whole would be involved in shortlisting and interviewing candidates and, once preferred candidates had been agreed, to involve the rest of the Board and key senior executives. Spencer Stuart, an external search consultant, was engaged to assist with the search and selection process.

Search

Having established that there were currently no potential candidates within the Group with the spread and depth of experience required for the role, the Committee examined a ‘long list’ of candidates produced as a result of the global search and received a presentation from Spencer Stuart covering the prospects for consideration. The Committee identified the most credible prospects to be contacted and invited to interview and requested that the views of the Group’s regulators on the preferred type of candidate for the role also be obtained.

I asked Committee members to consider sources for potential candidates that might be approached directly and to recommend potential candidates for the role. In addition, although John McFarlane did not take part in the selection process, he was consulted for his view and insights. I also ensured that Board members were kept up-to-date throughout the process.

Recruitment

As Jes Staley emerged as the preferred candidate and had confirmed his interest in the role, he undertook a series of interviews involving me, the Chairman and members of the Committee. He also met with the remaining members of the Board and the Group Executive Committee.

In addition to the regular communication with Directors, the Board held an additional meeting specifically to discuss the proposed appointment and to allow Directors to share their feedback on Jes Staley before approving his appointment, which was announced on 28 October 2015.

LOGO

Sir Michael Rake

32  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F


Governance: Directors’ report

What we did in 2015

Board Nominations Committee report

Review of Board and Board Committee effectiveness

Board priorities

Exhibiting and upholding the Company’s values

Leveraging Board experience in support of executives

Greater awareness of Board Committee work

2014 findings

To refine the Board’s priorities for 2015.

2014 findings

To continue the embedding of cultural change across and deeper into the organisation and provide effective oversight of progress.

2014 findings

To continue to build effective relationships between the Board and business and functional heads.

2014 findings

To continue to deepen the Board’s focus on the key priorities and main issues facing each of the Board Committees and to ensure that the Board Committee structure remains appropriate and fit for purpose.

Actions taken in 2015

In 2015 the Board re-focused its time on three key themes:

§  focus on core

§  accelerate earnings growth

§  high performance ethic.

A set of execution priorities was developed for each theme  and progress against these priorities was reported to the Board on a regular basis.

Actions taken in 2015

The Board Reputation Committee received reports on the progress of cultural change in 2015.

Members of senior management completed a survey on cultural change, the results of which were shared with the Board Reputation Committee.

The results of the employee opinion survey and a values survey were shared with the Board.

Actions taken in 2015

John McFarlane has, and will continue to, discuss his key priorities as Chairman with senior management.

Members of the Board Nominations Committee are mentoring high-potential senior managers.

Actions taken in 2015

The Board Committee structure was updated in 2015, following review by the Board Nominations Committee. The revised structure was approved by the Board and implemented from July 2015.

In line with prior years, all non-executive Directors may attend Board Committee meetings on request, with the agreement of the Committee Chairman. All non-executive Directors were invited to attend Board Risk Committee workshops on risk appetite and on structural reform.

2015 findings

To ensure that the Board agenda is optimised, including time for ‘blue-sky’ discussion of major risks.

2015 findings

No specific matters were raised during the 2015 review.

2015 findings

To continue to ensure that all non-executive Directors have the  opportunity to contribute to strategic debate.

2015 findings

To continue to raise awareness across all Board members of the significant issues considered by Board Committees and to continue to refine the remit and scope of the Board Reputation Committee.

Actions to be taken in 2016

We will identify opportunities for more free-ranging Board discussions, including discussion of risk.

A revised set of Board objectives will be agreed in order to track progress.

Actions to be taken in 2016

No actions are proposed for 2016.

Actions to be taken in 2016

We will continue to identify ways in which the skills and experience of individual non-executive Directors may be leveraged, including partnering individual non-executive Directors with members of the Group Executive Committee.

Actions to be taken in 2016

We will provide opportunities for Board Committee Chairmen to provide more detailed briefings to non-Committee members on the work of their Committee.

We will review the role and scope of the Board Reputation Committee with its new Chairman.

Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  33


Improvements to the Board appointment process

Director induction

Effective handling of legacy issues

Dealing more strategically with global regulation

2014 findings

To continue to ensure that the Board has sufficient visibility of executive succession planning and the talent pipeline.

2014 findings

To extend the new Director induction programme to involve senior executives below Group Executive Committee level and to continue to support new Board Committee Chairmen.

2014 findings

To continue to focus on the existing priority of overseeing the resolution of legacy issues.

2014 findings

To continue to focus the Board’s  time on strategy and strategic options.

Actions taken in 2015

The non-executive Directors attended a briefing on talent management and succession planning in April 2015.

The Board Nominations Committee considered Group Executive Committee succession in October 2015. In November 2015, the HR Director attended the Board meeting to provide an update on talent and succession.

Actions taken in 2015

Directors have been offered the opportunity of additional meetings with senior executives as part of their induction programmes.

Actions taken in 2015

Work has continued in 2015 to resolve historical legal and conduct risks. Several outstanding  issues have been resolved in 2015.

Actions taken in 2015

Additional time was allocated to the discussion of business strategy at Board meetings in 2015. In particular, the Investment Bank and structural reform were both covered in depth.

The Group’s three strategic priorities: focus on core; accelerate earnings growth; and high performance ethic, were developed with the Board’s collective input.

Representatives from the Group’s UK and US regulators attended Board and Board Committee meetings during the year.

2015 findings

To continue to assess the skills and experience needed on the Board and to ensure that Board composition is balanced between UK and international members.

To enhance Board succession planning, particularly in respect of key roles.

2015 findings

To enhance the Board training and induction programme, with particular focus on the training needs of Board members from outside the financial services sector.

2015 findings

No specific matters were raised during the 2015 review.

2015 findings

To continue to provide opportunities for Board members  to provide early input to thinking on major issues and decisions.

Actions to be taken in 2016

We will develop a revised Board succession plan for discussion by the Board Nominations Committee, including planning for succession to key roles, considering the optimum size of the Board and the balance of UK and overseas Directors.

We will schedule additional updates to the Board on talent  management and succession planning.

Actions to be taken in 2016

We will schedule as part of the Board’s training programme for 2016 specific briefings for non-executive Directors who do not have a financial services background.

Actions to be taken in 2016

No actions are proposed for 2016.

Actions to be taken in 2016

We will continue to allocate sufficient time for Board discussion of strategic priorities and options.

34  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F


Governance: Directors’ report

How we comply

Leadership

The Role of the Board

As members of the Board of Directors, we have a collective responsibility to create and deliver sustainable value for our shareholders, in a manner that is supported by the right culture, values and behaviours throughout the Group. To support our role in determining the strategic objectives and policies of the Group, there exists a well-defined Corporate Governance framework. We aim to achieve long-term and sustainable value and it is our responsibility as the Board to ensure that management effectively delivers on short-term objectives, while promoting the long-term growth of Barclays.

In addition, we have further responsibility for ensuring that management maintains both an effective system of internal control and an effective risk management and oversight process. When carrying out these responsibilities we consider the Group’s business and reputation, the materiality of risks that are inherent in the business and the relevant costs and benefits of implementing controls. The Group’s internal control system provides assurance of internal financial controls, compliance with law and regulation and effective and efficient operations.

The Board is the decision-making body for those matters that are considered of significance to the Group owing to their strategic, financial or reputational implications or consequences. To retain control of these key decisions, certain matters have been identified that only we as the Board can approve and there is in place a formal schedule of powers reserved to the Board. As Directors we must act in accordance with the Company’s constitution and only exercise powers for the purposes for which they have been conferred. A summary of the matters reserved to the Board is available at home.barclays/corporategovernance. These matters include the approval of Barclays’ strategy, interim and full year financial statements and any major acquisitions, mergers, disposals or capital expenditure.

Specific responsibilities have been delegated to Board Committees and each Committee has its own terms of reference, which are available on home.barclays/corporategovernance. Each Committee reports to, and has its terms of reference approved by, the Board and the minutes of Committee meetings are shared with the Board. The main Board Committees are the Board Audit Committee, the Board Nominations Committee, the Board Remuneration Committee, the Board Reputation Committee and the Board Risk Committee.

In addition to the principal Board Committees, the Regulatory Investigations Committee, which was formed in late 2012, focuses on providing Board-level oversight of regulatory investigations. This Committee met six times in 2015. John McFarlane is Chairman of the Committee and the other current Committee members are Mike Ashley, Sir Gerry Grimstone, Diane de Saint Victor and Jes Staley. Antony Jenkins, Sir Michael Rake, Sir John Sunderland and Sir David Walker also served on the Committee during 2015, stepping down when they left the Board.

Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  35


Attendance

In 2015 we attended both scheduled and additional Board meetings, as disclosed in the table below. The Chairman met privately with non-executive Directors ahead of scheduled Board meetings. If, owing to exceptional circumstances, a Director was not able to attend a Board meeting, he or she ensured that their views were known to the Chairman.

Board attendance

 Independent   
 
 
 
Scheduled
meetings
eligible to
attend
  
  
  
  
   
 
 
Scheduled
meetings
attended
  
  
  
   
 
 
 
Additional
meetings
eligible to
attend
  
  
  
  
   
 
 
Additional
meetings
attended
  
  
  

Group Chairman

                      

John McFarlane

 On appointment   8     8     2     2  
                       

Executive Directors

                      

Tushar Morzariaa

 Executive Director   8     8     2     1  

Jes Staley

 Executive Director   1     1     0     0  
                       

Non-executive Directors

                      

Mike Ashley

 Independent   8     8     2     2  

Tim Breedon

 Independent   8     8     2     2  

Crawford Gillies

 Independent   8     8     2     2  

Reuben Jeffery III

 Independent   8     7     2     2  

Wendy Lucas-Bullb

 Non-Independent   8     8     2     2  

Dambisa Moyo

 Independent   8     8     2     1  

Frits van Paasschen

 Independent   8     8     2     2  

Sir Michael Rake

 Deputy Chairman, Senior Independent Director   8     7     2     2  

Diane de Saint Victor

 Independent   8     8     2     2  

Diane Schueneman

 Independent   5     5     1     1  

Steve Thieke

 Independent   8     8     2     2  
                       

Former Directors

                      

Sir David Walker

 On appointment   3     3     0     0  

Antony Jenkins

 Executive Director   4     4     1     1  

Sir John Sunderland

 Independent   3     3     0     0  
                       

Secretary

                      

Lawrence Dickinson

     8     8     2     2  

Notes

a Although eligible to attend, as an executive Director, Tushar Morzaria did not attend the additional meeting held to consider and approve the appointment of the new Group Chief Executive.
b Although we have reached the conclusion that all non-executive Directors exhibit independence of character and judgement, we continue to disclose that, for the purposes of the Code, Wendy Lucas-Bull was not designated as independent owing to her chairmanship of Barclays Africa Group Limited, a62%-owned subsidiary of Barclays.

36  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F


Governance: Directors’ report

How we comply

Board Governance Framework

LOGO

As a Board we may, under the authority of our Articles of Association and where appropriate, delegate all or any of our powers to an individual Director or to a Committee of Directors. Further information on the operations of each of the Barclays Board Committees can be found on the pages referenced above. Board Committee membership is reviewed regularly by the Board Nominations Committee.

Board attendance

 Independent  

Scheduled

meetings

eligible to

attend

  

Scheduled

meetings

attended

  

%

attendance

  

Additional

meetings

eligible to

attend

  

Additional

meetings

attended

  

%  

attendance  

 

Group Chairman

             

John McFarlane

 On appointment  8  8  100  2  2  100  

 

Executive Directors

             

Tushar Morzaria

 Executive Director  8  8  100  2  2  100  

Jes Staley

 Executive Director  8  8  100  2  2  100  

 

Non-executive Directors

             

Mike Ashley

 Independent  8  8  100  2  1  50  

Roles on the Board

AsExecutive andnon-executive Directors we have establishedshare the same duties and are subject to the same constraints but, in line with the principles of the Code, a clear division of responsibilities between running the Board and running the business of the Group.has been established. It is the responsibility of the Chairman to lead and manage the work of the Board, and to ensure that it operates effectively, while the responsibility for theday-to-day management of Barclays has been delegated to the Group Chief Executive.

Role profiles setting out the responsibilities of the Chairman, the Group Chief Executive, Deputy Chairman, Senior Independent Director, non-executive Directors, Executive Directors, Committee Chairmen and the Company Secretary can be found inBarclays Charter of Expectations, which is available on home.barclays/corporategovernance.Barclays Charter of Expectationsalso sets out high-performance indicators for non-executive Directors.

The Group Chief Executive is supported in this role by the Group Executive Committee, which is responsible for making and implementing operational decisions while running the Group’s day-to-day business.Committee. Further information on membership of the Group Executive Committee can be found on page 5. The Group Executive Management structure has been designed to support management’s decision-making responsibilities, aligned to personal accountability and delegated authority, while embedding risk and control in business decision-making.

Effectiveness

CompositionAs a Board we have set out our expectations of each Director inBarclays’ Charter of Expectations. This includes role profiles and the behaviours and competencies required for each role on the Board, namely the Chairman, Deputy Chairman, Senior Independent Director,non-executive

Directors, executive Directors and Committee Chairmen. The Board Nominations Committee reviews theCharter of Expectations annually to ensure it remains relevant andup-to-date. It is responsible for reviewing Board composition, considering succession plans for both the Board and senior executives, selecting and appointing new Directors and considering the resultspublished on home.barclays/corporategovernance to ensure that there is complete transparency of the Board effectiveness review. For more information on the work of this Committee in 2015 please turn to page 27.

Our individual biographies can be found onpages 3 and 4: these include our relevant skills and experience, Board Committee membership and any other principal appointments. Details of changes to the Board in 2015 and year to date are disclosed on page 6.standards we set for ourselves.

The Board currently comprises a Chairman, who was independent on appointment, two Executive Directors and11 non-executive Directors. In line with the Code, independent non-executive Directors form a majority of our Board. Each year we consider the independence of our non-executive Directors, using the guidance set out in the Code and behaviours determined by us as essential in order for a Director to be considered independent. These independence criteria are disclosed inCorporate Governance in Barclays, which can be viewed at home.barclays/corporategovernance. Having considered this guidance, we have determined those non-executive Directors who are standing for re-election at the 2016 AGM to be independent.

Executive Directors’ service contracts and the letters of appointment for the Chairman and non-executive Directors are available for inspection at the Company’s registered office.

 

 

  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 20152016 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  37


Governance: Directors’ report

How we comply

Attendance

As members of the Board of Directors we are expected to attend each Board meeting and in 2016 we attended both scheduled and additional Board meetings, as disclosed in the table below. The Chairman met privately with thenon-executive Directors ahead of each scheduled Board meeting, and if, owing to exceptional circumstances, a Director was not able to attend a Board meeting they ensured that their views were made known to the Chairman in advance of the meeting.

Board attendance

 Independent  

Scheduled

meetings

eligible to

attend

  

Scheduled

meetings

attended

  

%

attendance

  

Additional

meetings

eligible to

attend

  

Additional

meetings

attended

  

%  

attendance  

 

Group Chairman

             

John McFarlane

 On appointment  8  8  100  2  2  100  

 

Executive Directors

             

Tushar Morzaria

 Executive Director  8  8  100  2  2  100  

Jes Staley

 Executive Director  8  8  100  2  2  100  

 

Non-executive Directors

             

Mike Ashley

 Independent  8  8  100  2  1  50  

Tim Breedon

 Independent  8  8  100  2  2  100  

Mary Francis

 Independent  2  2  100  0  0  n/a  

Crawford Gillies

 Independent  8  8  100  2  2  100  

Sir Gerry Grimstone

 Senior Independent Director  8  8  100  2  2  100  

Reuben Jeffery III

 Independent  8  7  88  2  1  50  

Dambisa Moyo

 Independent  8  8  100  2  2  100  

Diane de Saint Victor

 Independent  8  7  88  2  2  100  

Diane Schueneman

 Independent  8  8  100  2  2  100  

Steve Thieke

 Independent  8  8  100  2  2  100  

 

Former Directors

             

Wendy Lucas-Bull

 Non-independent  1  1  100  1  1  100  

Frits van Paasschen

 Independent  3  3  100  1  1  100  

 

Secretary

             

Claire Davies

    1  1  100  0  0  n/a  

 

Former Secretary

             

Lawrence Dickinson

    7  7  100  2  2  100  

 

† Unable to attend one scheduled meeting owing to prior commitments.

          

  

 

Board Committee cross-membership

        
               
        Board Audit
Committee
 Board Nominations
Committee
 Board Remunerations
Committee
 Board Reputation
Committee
  
 

 

Board Risk
Committee

 

   3 3 1 1 
 

 

Board Reputation
Committee

 

   1 2 2  
 

 

Board Remuneration
Committee

 

   2 2   
 

 

Board Nominations
Committee

 

   3    
 

    

 

      

38 | Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2016 Annual Report on Form 20-F


    

    

 

 

Effectiveness

Composition of the Board

In line with the requirements of the Code a majority of the Board are independentnon-executive Directors. The Board currently comprises a Chairman, who was independent on appointment, two executive Directors and tennon-executive Directors. We consider the independence of ournon-executive Directors annually, using the independence criteria set out in the Code and by reviewing performance against behaviours that we have identified as essential in order to be considered independent. The independence criteria can be found inCorporate Governance in Barclays at home.barclays/ corporategovernance.

The Board Nominations Committee considers Board succession planning and regularly reviews the composition of the Board and the Board Committees to ensure that there is an appropriate balance and diversity of skills, experience, independence and knowledge. The size of the Board is not fixed and may be revised from time to time to reflect the changing needs of the business and the Board Nominations Committee will consider the balance of skills and experience of current Directors when considering a proposed appointment.

Each year we carry out an annual effectiveness review in order to evaluate our performance as a Board. This evaluation includes an assessmentBoard, as well as the performance of each of the effectiveness of Board Committees and individual Directors, to ensure thatDirectors. This annual review assesses whether each of us continues to contributedischarge our respective duties and responsibilities effectively to the decision-making of the Board. Independence and the existence of any conflicts of interest areis considered as part of the effectiveness evaluation. We take the outcomes of the review into account when deciding whether individual Directors will offer themselves for election orre-election at the AGM.

More information on the 2016 Board effectiveness review can be found on page 3333.

Our biographies containing our relevant skills and 34.experience, Board Committee membership and other principal appointments can be found on pages 3 and 4. Details of changes to the Board in 2016 and year to date are disclosed on page43.

The service contracts for the executive Directors and the letters of appointment for the Chairman andnon-executive Directors are available for inspection at our registered office.

Time commitment

InIt is expected that in order to effectively discharge our responsibilities non-executive Directors must commiteffectively we will each allocate sufficient time to their role. Set outour role on the Board. We are expected to attend, and to be well prepared for, all Board and Board Committee meetings, as well as making time to understand the business, meet with executives and regulators, and complete ongoing training. As stated in ourCharter of Expectations,time commitment is agreed with eachnon-executive Director on an individual basis. Disclosed below is the average expected time commitment for each the role ofnon-executive position Director and the othernon-executive positions on the Board. In practice, however,For these additional positions there is an expectation that, in order to effectively fulfil extra responsibilities, additional time commitment is agreed on an individual basis and for certain Board positions additional time commitment will often be required in order to fulfil extra responsibilities, such as those of the Deputy Chairman, Senior Independent Director and Committee Chairmen. In addition, in exceptional circumstances, we are expected to commit significantly more time than disclosed below.required.

 

Role  Expected time commitment
Chairman  80% of a full-timefull time position
Deputy Chairman  At least 0.5 days a week
Senior Independent Director  As required to fulfil the role
Non-executive Director  30-3630 days a year (membership of one Board Committee included, increasing to 40-5040 days a year if a member of two Board Committees)
Committee Chairmen  50-60At least 60 days (inclusive of a year (includingnon-executive Director time commitment)

It is expected that ourThe Chairman willmust commit as muchto expend whatever time as is necessary to fulfil his duties withand, while this is expected to be equivalent to 80% of a full time position, his responsibilities to Barclays takingChairmanship of the Group and leadership of the Board has priority over other business commitments. The Chairman and non-executive DirectorsIn exceptional circumstances we are alsoall expected to allocate sufficientcommit significantly more time to understandingour work on the business, through meetings with regulators and executives and undergoing training to ensure ongoing business awareness. This time is in addition to that spent preparing for, and attending, Board and Board Committee meetings. When appropriate, a Director joining a Board Committee will be given a specific Board Committee induction programme.Board.

Induction

FollowingOn appointment each Director undergoesto the Board all Directors receive a comprehensive induction that has beenwhich is tailored to the new Director’s individual requirements. The personal induction programmeschedule is designed and organised byto quickly provide the Company Secretary in consultationnew Director with the Chairman and in doing so they consider how to develop each Director’san understanding of how the Group works and the key issues that it faces. The Company Secretary consults the Chairman when designing an induction schedule, giving consideration to the particular needs of the new Director. When a Director is joining a Board Committee the schedule includes an induction to the operation of that committee.

The purposeOn completion of the induction programme isthe Director should have sufficient knowledge and understanding of the nature of the business, and the opportunities and challenges facing Barclays, to provide Directors withenable them to effectively contribute to strategic discussions and oversight of the information they need to become as effective as possible within the shortest practicable time afterGroup.

In 2016 Sir Gerry Grimstone and Mary Francis both received induction programmes on joining the Board. Typically, a new Director will meetIn line with normal practice, they met with the Company Secretary, the currentnon-executive Directors and members of the Group Executive Committee and senior management, allowing an opportunity to familiarise themselvesthe Senior Leadership Group. In addition, Sir Gerry Grimstone met with various businessesSir Michael Rake, the outgoing Deputy Chairman and discuss specific matters with senior individuals. When an induction programme is complete, in addition to understandingSenior Independent Director, and former Chairman of the Group’s business, a new Director should have a clear understanding of Barclays’ relationships with its shareholders, regulators and customers and clients.Board Reputation Committee.

In 2015, John McFarlane and Diane Schueneman both received tailored induction programmes on joining the Board. Feedback was sought from both new Directors to ensure that the induction programme remains effective.

Training and development

In order to ensure that our non-executive Directors have the necessary knowledge and understanding of the Group’s business to enable themcontinue to contribute effectively atto Board and Board Committee meetings theywe are regularly provided with the opportunity forto take part in ongoing training and development.

As part of theour annual performance evaluation processreview with the individualChairman we discuss any particular development needs of each non-executive Director are reviewed and discussed with the Chairman. Trainingthat can be providedmet through one-to-one meetingseither formal training or meeting with senior executives, in order to receive further insight into a particular area ofsenior executive.

The Company Secretary organises a formal training schedule for the year, covering both Board and Board Committee training requirements, to ensure that our insight into the Group’s business or as part of dedicated training on a particular issue identified by the Directors and the Company Secretary.

Our Directors have a continuing responsibility to fulfil their duties as membersawareness of the Board and Board Committees and this is managed through the provision of focused training and development opportunities.external environment in which we operate continues after our formal induction schedules have been completed.

During 2015, non-executive Directors2016 we attended briefings on the following subjects:

 

§ talent managementcapital and succession planningliquidity (including regulatory targets and constraints)

 

§ Senior Managers Regime, andthe Federal Reserve’s CCAR exercise

§ operational resilience.group Resilience

Board Committees also undertook specific training and details can be found in the respective Committee Chairmen’s reports.

During 2015, individual Directors also attended regular meetings with our regulators, external auditors and major shareholders. In addition, the Board Audit Tender Oversight Sub-Committee carried out site visits as part of the audit tender process.

The following provides more detail of a specific training session that took place in 2015.

 

§cyber Risk

 

Governance in action: training§a presentation from Compliance and development

Regulatory Relations on the regulatory expectations of Directors and the PRA’s threshold conditions

 

Following the July 2015 Board meeting, the non-executive Directors attended
§a briefing sessionfrom Finance and Risk on the Senior Managers Regime, ledimpact of IFRS9

§an accounting update presented by Barclays Compliance. The Senior Managers Regime commences in March 2016 and, although only certain non-executive Directors will be in scope, there are a number of governance, reporting and conduct requirements that will apply to all Board Directors. The briefing session provided KPMG

§an overviewupdate on the implementation of the Senior Managers Regime with particular focus on the following:

 

§  an introduction to ‘Reasonable Steps’, including practical examples

§  the roles

strategic planning and responsibilities of non-executive Directors in scope

§  guidance for non-executive Directors who are not in scope, and

§  the Conduct Rules (standards that will be expected of all employees in a regulated firm).

In addition, Barclays Compliance detailed the work needed in order for Barclays to be ready for implementation of the regime in early 2016. This timetable included scheduling individual briefing sessions with in-scope non-executive Directors.

In late 2015/early 2016, Mike Ashley, Tim Breedon, Crawford Gillies and Sir Gerry Grimstone each had individual meetings with Barclays Compliance in order to cover the reasonable steps that, as a result of their particular role on the Board, each of them will be expected to take under the Senior Managers Regime. The session included a review of case studies, which focused on each Director’s prescribed responsibilities under the Senior Managers Regime. The Directors were briefedcrisis management plans ahead of the meetings and provided with supporting documentation in advance. These meetings were also attended by the Company Secretary and external advisers.

EU Referendum

 

§internal briefings on Structural Reform.

These briefing sessions were supplemented by written material, such as a briefing note on the implementation of the Market Abuse Regulation in the UK.

In addition, site visits were arranged to Barclays UK and Cards US operations, as well as the regular business visits and engagements that we may undertake. This included the attendance of our Board Audit Committee Chairman and Board Risk Committee Chairman at US IHC board committee meetings at Barclays’ offices in New York.

Conflicts of interest

In accordance with the Companies Act 2006 and the Articles of Association the Board has the authority to authorise conflicts of interest. Directors are required to declare any potential or actual conflicts of interest that could interfere with their ability to act in the best interests of the Group. The Company Secretary maintains a conflicts register, which is a record of actual and potential conflicts, together with any Board authorisation of the conflict. The authorisations are for an indefinite period but are reviewed annually by the Board Nominations Committee. The Board retains the power to vary or terminate the authorisation at any time.

 

 

38  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 20152016 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  39


Governance: Directors’ report

How we comply

    

 

Information provided to the Board

AsThe Role Profile for the Chairman, as set out in the Code, the Chairman is responsibleourCharter of Expectations, confirms his responsibility for ensuring that membersof the Board receivesreceive accurate, timely and high qualityhigh-quality information. In particular, we require information about the Company’sBarclays’ performance at appropriate intervals and in an appropriate manner to enable itus to take sound decisions, monitor effectively and provide advice to promote the success of the Company. OurWorking in collaboration with the Chairman, the Company Secretary supports the Chairman inis responsible for ensuring good governance and consults Directors to ensure that good information flows betweenexist and that the Board receives the Board Committees and the senior executives. In addition to providing dedicated support for the Board, the Company Secretary maintains dialogue with our Directorsinformation it requires in order to confirm thatbe effective.

Throughout the information they require in order to fulfil their responsibilities as a member ofyear both the Board is being received. If there is a need for independentexecutive Directors and professional advice this can be sought bysenior executives keep the Board via the Company Secretary or directly, at Barclays expense.

Directors expect to be kept informed of key developments in the business by boththrough regular reports and updates. These are in addition to the Executive Directors and senior management, and take seriously their responsibility to request any further explanations as required. Thepresentations that the Board and Board Committee annual forward calendarsCommittees receive as part of businesstheir formal meetings. Directors are formulatedable to ensure thatseek independent and professional advice at Barclays’ expense, if required, to enable Directors receive regular reports and presentations, in addition to periodic communications advising of any updates to the businessfulfil their obligations as members of the Company, current events and the regulatory environment.Board.

Accountability

Risk management and internal control

The Directors have responsibilityare responsible for ensuring that management maintainmaintains an effective system of risk management and internal control and for assessing its effectiveness. Such a system is designed to identify, evaluate and manage, rather than eliminate, the risk of failure to achieve business objectives and can only provide reasonable and not absolute assurance against material misstatement or loss.

Barclays is committed to operating within a strong system of internal control that enables business to be transacted and risk taken without exposing itself to unacceptable potential losses or reputational damage. Barclays has an overarching framework that sets out the Group’s approach to internal governance, (theBarclays Guide). TheBarclays Guide, which establishes the mechanisms and processes by which the Board directs the organisation, through setting the tone and expectations from the top, delegating its authority and assessing compliance.

A key component of theThe Barclays Guide is theEnterprise Risk Management Framework (ERMF). The purpose of the ERMF is to identify and set minimum requirements in respect of the main risks to achieving the Group’s strategic objectives and to provide reasonable assurance that internal controls are effective. The key elements of the Group’s system of internal control, which is aligned to the recommendations ofThe Committee of Sponsoring Organizations of the Treadway Commission, Internal Control – Integrated Framework (2013 COSO), are set out in the risk control frameworks relating to each of the Group’s principalPrincipal and key risks.Key Risks. As well as incorporating our internal requirements, these reflect material Group-wide legal and regulatory requirements relating to internal control and assurance.

Effectiveness of internal controls

Key controls are assessed on a regular basis for both design and operating effectiveness. Issues arising out of business risk and control assessments and other internal and external sources are examined to identify pervasive themes. Where appropriate, control issues are reported to the Board Audit Committee.Committee (BAC). In addition, regular reports are made to the Board Audit CommitteeBAC by management, Barclays Internal AuditBIA and the Finance, Compliance and Legal functions covering, in particular, financial controls, compliance and other operational controls.

Risk management and internal control framework

The ERMF is the Group’s internal control framework.Internal Control Framework. It is refreshed annually with an assessment of operational maturity provided to the Board Audit Committee. In 2015, the Board Audit Committee receivedand has been substantially revised during 2016. The BAC receives quarterly reports onrelating to the effectiveness of the control environment: these reports coveredControl Environment covering all risks and controls including financial, operational and compliance risk.

The Board Audit CommitteeBAC formally reviews the system of internal control and risk management annually. Throughout the year endingended 31 December 20152016 and to date, the Group has operated a system of internal control that provides reasonable assurance of effective operations covering all controls, including financial and operational controls and compliance with laws and regulations. Processes are in place for identifying, evaluating and managing the principal risks facing the Group in accordance with the Guidance on Risk Management, Internal Control and Related Financial and Business Reporting published by the Financial Reporting Council.

The review of the effectiveness of the system of risk management and internal control is achieved through a four-step approach which is centred on reviewing the effectiveness of theBarclays Guide and its component parts, including the ERMF.parts:

 

1.Governance Risk and& Control meetings of the businessBusiness and functional executive committeesFunctional Executive Committees monitor, review and challenge the effective operation of key risk management and control processes, including the results of audits and reviews undertaken by Barclays Internal AuditBIA (which include assessments of the control environmentControl Environment and management’s control approach)Management Control Approach) and examinations and assessments undertaken by our primary regulators, on an ongoing basis as part of the system of risk management and internal control. The remediation of issues identified within the control environmentControl Environment is regularly monitored by management and the Board Audit Committee.BAC.

 

2.Testing of the Governance Risk and Control meetings held within the executive committeesExecutive Committees provides assurance that the committees are effectively overseeing the control environmentControl Environment and associated risk management and internal control processes.

 

3.The owners of the key governance processes which comprise theThe Barclays Guideundertake a review to confirm that processes have been implemented and are operating effectively.implemented.

 

4.The annual review of the system of risk management and internal control brings together the results of the activities completed in steps 1 to 3 to ensure that each of the key processes has been effectively reviewed.

In 2015,Regular reports are made to the Board received regular reports covering risks of Group-levelGroup level significance. Over the year, theThe Board Risk Committee and the Board Reputation Committee examinedexamine reports covering the principal risks (creditPrincipal Risks (Credit Risk, Market risk, market risk, capital risk, liquidity risk, operational riskCapital Risk, Liquidity Risk, Operational Risk and conduct risk)Conduct Risk) as well as reports on risk measurement methodologies and risk appetite. Further details of risk management procedures and potential risk factors are given in the Risk Management section on pages 8786 to 93.114.

Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  39


Controls over financial reporting

A framework of disclosure controls and procedures is in place to support the approval of the Group’s financial statements. The Legal and Technical Review Committee is responsible for examining the Group’s financial reports and disclosures to ensure that they have been subject to adequate verification and comply with applicable standards and legislation. The Committee reports its conclusions to the Disclosure Committee. The Disclosure Committee examines the content accuracy and toneaccuracy of the disclosures and reports its conclusions to the Board Audit Committee which debates its conclusions and provides further challenge. Finally, the Board scrutinises and approves results announcements and the Annual Report, and ensures that appropriate disclosures have been made. This governance process ensures that both management and the Board are given sufficient opportunity to debate and challenge the Group’s financial statements and other significant disclosures before they are made public.

40  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2016 Annual Report on Form 20-F


Management’s report on internal control over financial reporting

Management is responsible for establishing and maintaining adequate internal control over financial reporting. Internal control over financial reporting is a process designed under the supervision of the principal executive and principal financial officers to provide reasonable assurance regarding the reliability of financial reporting and the preparation of financial statements for external reporting purposes in accordance with International Financial Reporting Standards (IFRS) as adopted by the European Union and issued by the International Accounting Standards Board (IASB). Internal control over financial reporting includes policies and procedures that pertain to the maintenance of records that, in reasonable detail, accurately and fairly reflect transactions and dispositions of assets; provide reasonable assurances that transactions are recorded as necessary to permit preparation of financial statements in accordance with IFRS and that receipts and expenditures are being made only in accordance with authorisations of management and the respective Directors; and provide reasonable assurance regarding prevention or timely detection of unauthorised acquisition, use or disposition of assets that could have a material effect on the financial statements.

Internal control systems, no matter how well designed, have inherent limitations and may not prevent or detect misstatements. Also, projections of any evaluation of effectiveness to future periods are subject to the risk that internal controls may become inadequate because of changes in conditions, or that the degree of compliance with the policies or procedures may deteriorate.

Management has assessed Barclays PLC Group’s and Barclays Bank PLC Group’s internal control over financial reporting as of 31 December 2015.2016. In making its assessment, management has utilised the criteria set forth by the 2013 COSO framework. Management concluded that, based on its assessment, the internal control over financial reporting was effective as of 31 December 2015.2016. Our independent registered public accounting firm has issued a report on the Barclays PLC’s internal control over financial reporting, which is set out on page 210.218.

The system of internal financial and operational controls is also subject to regulatory oversight in the UK and overseas. Further information on supervision by the financial services regulators is provided under Supervision and Regulation in the Risk review section on pages 177182 to 182.189.

Changes in internal control over financial reporting

There have been no changes in the Group’s internal control over financial reporting that occurred during the period covered by this report which have materially affected or are reasonably likely to materially affect the Group’s internal control over financial reporting.

Remuneration

We haveThe Board has delegated responsibility tofor the Board Remuneration Committee to determineconsideration and approval of the remuneration arrangements forof the Chairman, our Executiveexecutive Directors, and other senior executives and certain other Group employees to the Board Remuneration Committee. The Board as determined bya whole, with the Committee. Additional informationnon-executive Directors abstaining, considers annually the fees paid tonon-executive Directors. Information on the activities of the Board Remuneration Committee including its membership and activities in 2015,2016 can be found on pages 70 and 71 in51 to 85 of the Directors’ remuneration report, which forms part of the corporate governance statement.

Stakeholder engagement

We describe below how we engage with our stakeholders.

Investor engagement

The Board is committed to promoting effective channels of communication with our shareholders and upholding good corporate governance as a means of building stronger and more engaged relationships with them. Our comprehensive investorInvestor Relations engagement initiatives helpwith the market helps us to understand theirinvestor views about Barclays, which are communicated regularly to the Board. Our shareholder communication guidelines, which underpin all investor engagement, are available on our website at home.barclays/barclays-investor-relations/corporate-governance/shareholder-communication-guidelines.html.barclays-investor-relations.

Institutional investors

In 2015,2016, our Investor Relations engagement with institutional investors took place throughout the year, both following our quarterly results as well as outside of the reporting cycle. This allowed the opportunity for existing and potential new investors to engage with usBarclays regularly, and promotedpromoting dialogue on longer-term strategic developments as well as abouton the recent financial performance of the Group.

The Directors, in conjunction with the senior executive team and Investor Relations, participated in varied forms of engagement, including investor meetings, seminars and conferences across multiplemany geographic locations, reflecting the diverse nature of our equity and debt institutional ownership. Divisional management also presented extensively to investors, promoting greater awareness and understanding of our operational businesses and other functions.businesses.

In the past year,During 2016, discussions with investors were focused on the continued execution of our strategic plan outlined in 2014,strategy, following the appointment of Jes Staley as Group Chief Executive, and the steps taken in 2015 to improve our returns to shareholders, while adapting to the changing regulatory environment and addressing legacy issues. Meetingsstrategic update announced on 1 March 2016.

Investor meetings focused on corporate governance matters also took place throughout the year, covering topics including management changes, remuneration and other AGM-related matters. Followingwith the appointment of Sir Gerry Grimstone asChairman, Senior Independent Director, on 1 January 2016,other Board representatives and the Company Secretary.

We held conference calls/webcasts for our major investors were offered a meeting with him.

During 2015, we held quarterly results briefings includingand anin-person presentation for the 2014our 2015 full year results announcement in March 2015, and quarterly breakfast briefings for equity and debt sellside analysts,2016, all hosted by the Group Chief Executive and Group Finance Director. In addition, the Group Finance Director held a quarterly breakfast briefing for sellside analysts, with a transcript of the discussions uploaded to our website. For fixed income investors we held conference calls at our full year and half year results, hosted by our Group Finance Director and Group Treasurer, as well as quarterly briefings for credit analysts.Treasurer.

An independent auditThe Investor Relations section of investor views took place in April 2015. Interviews with a cross-section of institutional shareholders and non-holders, were conducted on specific topics including strategy, business performance and the management team. The findings of the investor audit were presented to the Board.

To enableour website is an important communication channel that enables the effective distribution of information to all investors, transcripts of executivethe market in a clear and consistent manner. Executive management presentations, speeches wereand, where possible, webcast replays are uploaded to the investor relations section of the website, alongside associated presentation materials. In 2015, we received the UK Investor Relations Society’s award for the Best Use of Digital Communications, reinforcing the importance placed on using our website on a timely basis. In 2016, we also created an improved ‘About Barclays’ factsheet, allowing investors the opportunity to engage with the market. For example, we introducedunderstand Barclays’ strategy and key financial metrics at a glance. We also continued to provide short videos providing a summary ofsummarising the key messages in our results from our Chairman, Group Chief Executive and Group Finance Director.

 

 

40  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 20152016 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  41


Governance: Directors’ report

How we comply

        

 

Private shareholders

Throughout 2015,During 2016, we continued to communicate with our private shareholders usingthrough our shareholder mailings. Also, shareholdersShareholders can also choose to sign up to Shareview so that they receive information about Barclays and their shareholding directly by email. On a practical level, over 60,000 shareholders did not cash their Shares Not Taken Up (SNTU) cheque following the Rights Issue in September 2013. During 2015,In 2016, we conducted acontinued the tracing process to reunite these shareholders with their SNTU monies together withand any unclaimed dividends. By the end of the year,2016, we had returned over £2.2m£1.65m to our shareholders. Inshareholders in addition weto the £2.2m returned in 2015. We also launched a special share dealing serviceSpecial Share Dealing Service in October 2015November 2016 aimed at shareholders with relatively small shareholdings for whom it might otherwise be uneconomical to deal. One option open to shareholders holding 4,000 shares or less. Shareholders couldwas to donate their sale proceeds to ShareGift if they wished. Shareholders donated nearly £130,000.ShareGift. As a result of this initiative, more than £100,000 was donated.

Our Annual General Meeting (AGM)AGM

OurThe Board and the senior executive team continue to consider our AGM continues to beas a key date in the diary for the Board. It affordsdiary. The AGM provides us with our primarymain opportunity to engage with shareholders, particularly our private shareholders, on the key issues facing the Group and any questions they may have. The majorityA number of Directors, including the Chairman, were available for informal discussion either before andor after the formal business of our 2015 AGM.meeting. All resolutions proposed at the 20152016 AGM, which were considered on a poll, were passed with votes for ranging from 88.5%86% to 99.9% of the total votes cast.

The 20162017 AGM will be held on Thursday 28 April 2016wednesday 10 May 2017 at the Royal Festival Hall in London. The Notice of AGM can be found in a separate document, which is sent out at least 20 working days before the AGM and also made available at home.barclays/agm. Voting on the resolutions will again be by poll and the results will be announced via the Regulatory News Service and made available on our website on the same day. We encourage any shareholders who are unable to attend on the day to vote in advance of the meeting via home.barclays/investorrelations/vote or through Shareview (www.shareview.co.uk).

LOGOEngagement timeline

LOGO

 

 

42  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 20152016 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  41


Governance: Directors’ report

Other statutory informationStatutory Information

 

 

The Directors present their report together with the audited accounts for the year ended 31 December 2016.

Other information that is relevant to the Directors’ report, together with the audited accounts for the year ended 31 December 2015.

Other information that is relevant to the Directors’ Report, and which is incorporated by reference into this report, can be located as follows:

 

Contents

Page

Employee involvement  44-49

47

Policy concerning the employment of disabled persons  48

49

Financial instruments  230-254

242

Hedge accounting policy  231226
Remuneration policy, including details of the51 to 85
remuneration of each Director and Directors’ interests in shares  50-83
Corporate governance report  2-49

2 to 42

Risk review  84-182

86 to 189

Disclosures required pursuant to Listing Rule 9.8.4R can be found on the following pages:

Page

Disclosures required pursuant to Listing Rule 9.8.4R can be found on the following pages:

Page

Long-term incentive schemes  77

63

Director emoluments  295

302

Allotment for cash of equity securities  276

284

Waiver of dividends  42

43

The particulars of important events affecting the Company since the financial year end can be found in Note 29 Legal, competition and regulatory matters.

Profit and dividends

The adjusted profit for the financial year, after taxation, was £3,713m (2014: £3,798m). Statutory profit after tax for 20152016 was £623m (2014: £845m)£2,828m (2015: £623m). The final dividend for 20152016 of3.5p2.0p per share will be paid on 5 April 20162017 to shareholders whose names are on the Register of Members at the close of business on 113 March 2016.2017. With the interim dividendsdividend totalling 3p1.0p per ordinary share, paid in June, September and December 2015,2016, the total distribution for 2015 is 6.5p (2014:2016 is3.0p (2015: 6.5p) per ordinary share. The interim and final dividends for 20152016 amounted to £1,081m (2014: £1,057m)£757m (2016: £1,081m).

The nominee companies of certain Barclays’ employeesemployee benefit trusts holding shares in Barclays in connection with the operation of the Company’s share plans have lodged evergreen dividend waivers on shares held by them that have not been allocated to employees. The total amount of dividends waived during the year ended 31 December 20152016 was £6.4m.£2.6m (2015: £6.4m).

Board of Directors

The names of the current Directors of Barclays PLC, along with their biographical details, are set out on pages 3 and 4 and are incorporated into this report by reference. Changes to Directors during the year are set out below.

 

Name  Role  

Effective date of appointment/

resignation

Diane Schueneman

Non-executive Director

Appointed 25 June 2015

James (Jes) Staley

Executive Director

Appointed 1 December 2015

Sir Gerald (Gerry) Grimstone

  

Non-executive Director

  

Appointed 1 January 2016

Sir John Sunderland

Mary Francis
  

Non-executive Director

  

Retired 23 April 2015

Appointed 1 October 2016

Sir David Walker

Wendy Lucas-Bull
  

Non-executive Director

  

Retired 23 April 2015

1 March 2016

Antony Jenkins

Frits van Paasschen
  

ExecutiveNon-executive Director

  

Resigned 16 July 2015

Sir Michael Rake

Non-executive Director

Retired 31 December 2015

28 April 2016

John McFarlane succeeded Sir David Walker as Chairman of Barclays with effect from the conclusion of the Barclays PLC AGM in April 2015. John McFarlane held the position of Executive Chairman with effect from 17 July 2015 to 1 December 2015, when Jes Staley took up the position of Group Chief Executive.

42  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F


Governance: Directors’ report

Other statutory information

Appointment and retirement of Directors

The appointment and retirement of Directors is governed by the Company’s Articles of Association (the Articles), the UK Corporate Governance Code (the Code), the Companies Act 2006 and related legislation.

The Articles may only be amended by a special resolution of the shareholders. The Board has the power to appoint additional Directors or to fill a casual vacancy amongamongst the Directors. Any such Director holds office only until the next AGM and may offer himself/herself for election.re-election. The Code recommends that all directors of FTSE 350 companies should be subject to annual re-election.re-election and all Directors will stand for election orre-election at the 2017 AGM with the exception of Diane de Saint Victor and Steve Thieke.

Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2016 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  43


Governance: Directors’ report

Other statutory information

Directors’ indemnities

Qualifying third party indemnity provisions (as defined by section 234 of the Companies Act 2006) were in force during the course of the financial year ended 31 December 20152016 for the benefit of the then Directors and, at the date of this report, are in force for the benefit of the Directors in relation to certain losses and liabilities which they may incur (or have incurred) in connection with their duties, powers or office. In addition, the Company maintains Directors’ and& Officers’ Liability Insurance which gives appropriate cover for legal action brought against its Directors.

Qualifying pension scheme indemnity provisions (as defined by section 235 of the Companies Act 2006) were in force during the course of the financial year ended 31 December 20152016 for the benefit of the then Directors, and at the date of this report are in force for the benefit of directors of Barclays Pension Funds Trustees Limited as Trustee of the Barclays Bank UK Retirement Fund. The directors of the Trustee are indemnified against liability incurred in connection with the Company’scompany’s activities as Trustee of the retirement fund.Barclays Bank UK Retirement Fund.

Similarly, qualifying pension scheme indemnities were in force during 20152016 for the benefit of directors of Barclays Executive Schemes Trustees Limited as Trustee of Barclays Bank International Limited Zambia Staff Pension Fund (1965), Barclays Capital International Pension Scheme (No.1), Barclays Capital Funded Unapproved Retirement Benefits Scheme, and Barclays PLC Funded Unapproved Retirement Benefits Scheme. The Directorsdirectors of the Trustee are indemnified against the liability incurred in connection with the Company’scompany’s activities as Trustee of the schemes above.

Political donations

The Group did not give any money for political purposes in the UK, the rest of the EU or outside of the EU, nor did it make any political donations to political parties or other political organisations, or to any independent election candidates, or incur any political expenditure during the year.

In accordance with the US Federal Election Campaign Act, Barclays provides administrative support to a federal Political Action Committee (PAC) in the US funded by the voluntary political contributions of eligible employees. The PAC is not controlled by Barclays and all decisions regarding the amounts and recipients of contributions are directed by a steering committee comprising employees eligible to contribute to the PAC. Contributions to political organisations reported by the PAC during the calendar year 20152016 totalled $79,500 (2014: $103,000)$12,500 (2015: $79,500).

Environment

Barclays’ climate action programmeBarclays focuses on addressing environmental issues where we believe we have the greatest potential to make a difference. The programme focusesWe focus on managing our own carbon footprint and reducing our absolute carbon emissions,emissions; developing products and services to help enable the transition to alow-carbon economy, and managing the risks of climate change to our operations, clients, customers and society at large. We invest in improving the energy efficiency of our operations and offset the emissions remaining through the purchase of carbon credits. We also have a long-standing commitment to managing the environmental and social risks associated with our lending practices, which is embedded into our credit riskCredit Risk processes. A governance structure is in place to facilitate clear dialogue across the business and with suppliers around

issues of potential environmental and social risk.

We have disclosed global greenhouse gas emissions that we are responsible for as set out by the‘The Companies Act 2006 (Strategic Report and Directors’ Report) Regulations 2013.2013’. We provide fuller disclosure acrosson (i) financing solutions for the lower carbon economy, (ii) environmental risk management and (iii) management of our carbon emissions withinand environmental footprint in the Barclays Citizenship DataEnvironmental, Social and Governance (ESG) Supplement foundavailable on our website home.barclays/at home. barclays.com/citizenship.

   

Reporting 

yeara

2015 

  

Reporting 

yeara

2014 

  

Reporting 

yeara

2013 

  

Comparison 

yeara

2012 

Global GHG

emissionsb

            

Total CO2e (tonnes)b

  701,600   853,376   1,036,755   1,119,145 

Scope 1 CO2e emissions (tonnes)c

  65,340   49,939   58,372   47,904 

Scope 2 CO2e emissions (tonnes)d

  500,086   678,443   791,766   880,995 

Scope 3 CO2e emissions (tonnes)e

  136,174   124,993   186,616   190,245 

Intensity ratio

            

Total full time employees (FTE)

  129,400   132,300   139,600   139,200 

Total CO2e per FTE (tonnes)

  5.42   6.45   7.43   8.04 
    


Current
reporting
yeara
2016
 
 
 
 
   


Previous
reporting
yearb
2015
 
 
 
 
   


Previous
reporting
yearc
2014
 
 
 
 
   

Comparison
yeard

2013

 
 

 

Global GHG emissions

                    

Total CO2e (tonnes)e

   678,412    712,916    830,668    968,781 

Scope 1 CO2e

emissions (tonnes)f

   46,571    56,642    49,994    58,176 

Scope 2 CO2e

emissions (tonnes)g

   538,783    520,098    655,426    723,993 

Scope 3 CO2e

emissions (tonnes)h

   93,059    136,176    125,248    186,612 

Intensity Ratioi

                    

Total full time employees (FTE)

   119,300    129,400    132,300    139,600 

Total CO2e per FTE (tonnes)

   5.69    5.51    6.28    6.94 

Scope 2 market based emissions (tonnes)j

   596,198                

Notes

a2015, 2014 and 2013 reporting years cover2016 Reporting Year covers Q4 from the previous year2015 and Q1, 2, 3 of the reporting year in question.2016. The carbon reporting year is not fully aligned to the financial reporting year covered by the Directors’ report. This report is produced earlier than previous carbon reporting to allow us to report within the year end financial reporting timelines. The 2012 reporting year is the full calendar year (Jan 2012 – Dec 2012).
b2015 Reporting Year covers Q4 2014 and Q1, 2, 3 of 2015.
c2014 Reporting Year covers Q4 2013 and Q1, 2, 3 of 2014.
d2013 Reporting Year covers Q4 2012 and Q1, 2, 3 of 2013.
eThe methodology used to calculate our CO2e emissions is the operational control approach on reporting boundaries and carbon emissions methodology as defined by the World Resources Institute/World Business Council for Sustainable Development (WRI/(WRI / WBCSD) Greenhouse Gas Protocol (GHG): A Corporate Accounting and Reporting Standard, Revised Edition. Where properties are covered by Barclays’Barclays consolidated financial statements but are leased to tenants who are invoiced for utilities, these emissions are not included in the Group GHG calculations. ForWe also capture consumption from properties where Barclays is the tenant, landlords provide Barclays with utility bills which are included in our emissions reporting.yet to be consolidated by Barclays and as such Barclays still is responsible for the utility cost.
§fScope 1 covers direct combustion of fuels and company–company owned vehicles (from UK and South Africa only, which areis the most material contributors). Fugitive emissions reported in Scope 1 for 2013 – 2016 cover emissions from Americas, Asia-Pacific and South Africa. Scope 1 fugitive emissions excludes the UK whilst we amend our governance procedures in the UK Business travel is reported in Scope 1.
§gScope 2 covers emissions from electricity and steam purchased for own use. Scope 2 emissions are using location based emission factors. Please see line below for Scope 2 Market Based emissions.
§hScope 3 covers indirect emissions from business travel (global flights and ground transport) from the UK and South Africa. We have improved our coverage for car hire data and now include data from the US and India. Ground transportation data (excluding Scope 1 company cars) covers those countries where this type of transport is material and robust data is available.

In cases where we have collected new data for previously unreported consumption, we have restated the baseline if the new data amounts to a material change greater than 1% of the total consumption. If the change is less than 1%, we have reported consumption from the point at which the data became available. If it is greater than 1%, we have restated the baseline and previous years’ figures based on actual or estimated figures. Reasons for restatements in data are due to more accurate data being available which led to replacements of estimates with actual data for 2012, 2013 and 2014.

cFugitive emissions reported in Scope 1 for 2015, 2014 and 2013 cover emissions from UK, Americas, Asia-Pacific and South Africa. Fugitive emission data for 2012 is not available. Business travel reported in Scope 1 covers company cars in the UK and South Africa. This covers the majority of our employees where we have retail operations with car fleets.
dScope 2 carbon emissions from electricity have been calculated using location–based carbon conversion factors as defined by the GHG Protocol 2015. We are mindful of the new location and market based methodology for accounting Scope 2 electricity emissions and these emissions will be reported in future reports.
eScope 3 is limited to emissions from business travel which covers global flights and ground transport from the UK and South Africa. We have improved our coverage forAfrica). From 2014 onwards car hire data and now include data fromcovers the USUSA and India. Ground transportation data (excluding Scope 1 company cars) covers only countries where this type of transport is material and data is available.
iIntensity ratio calculations have been calculated using location based emission factors only.
jScope 2 Market Based emissions have been reported for 2016 only.

Research and development

In the ordinary course of business the Group develops new products and services in each of its business divisions.

44  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2016 Annual Report on Form 20-F


Share capital

Share capital structure

The Company has ordinary shares in issue. The Company’s Articles also allow for the issuance of sterling, US dollar, euro and yen preference shares (preference shares). No preference shares have been issued as at 2620 February 20162017 (the latest practicable date for inclusion in this report). Ordinary shares therefore represent 100% of the total issued share

Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  43


capital as at 31 December 20152016 and as at 2620 February 20162017 (the latest practicable date for inclusion in this report). Details of the movement in ordinary share capital during the year can be found in Note31 on page 276.284.

Voting

Every member who is present in person or represented at any general meeting of the Company, and who is entitled to vote, has one vote on a show of hands. Every proxy present has one vote. The proxy will have one vote for and one vote against a resolution if he/she has been instructed to vote for or against the resolution by different members or in one direction by a member while another member has permitted the proxy discretion as to how to vote. On a poll, every member who is present or represented and who is entitled to vote has one vote for every share held. In the case of joint holders, only the vote of the senior holder (as determined by order in the share register) or his proxy may be counted. If any sum payable remains unpaid in relation to a member’s shareholding, that member is not entitled to vote that share or exercise any other right in relation to a meeting of the Company unless the Board otherwise determine. If any member, or any other person appearing to be interested in any of the Company’s ordinary shares, is served with a notice under section 793 of the Companies Act 2006 and does not supply the Company with the information required in the notice, then the Board, in its absolute discretion, may direct that that member shall not be entitled to attend or vote at any meeting of the Company. The Board may further direct that if the shares of the defaulting member represent 0.25% or more of the issued shares of the relevant class, that dividends or other monies payable on those shares shall be retained by the Company until the direction ceases to have effect and that no transfer of those shares shall be registered (other than certain specified ‘excepted transfers’)excepted transfers). A direction ceases to have effect seven days after the Company has received the information requested, or when the Company is notified that an excepted transfer of all of the relevant shares to a third party has occurred, or as the Board otherwise determines.

Transfers

Ordinary shares may be held in either certificated or uncertificated form. Certificated ordinary shares shall be transferred in writing in any usual or other form approved by the Secretary and executed by or on behalf of the transferor. Transfers of uncertificated ordinary shares shall be made in accordance with the Companies Act 2006 and CREST Regulations.

The Board is not bound to register a transfer of partly-paid ordinary shares or fully-paid shares in exceptional circumstances approved by the FCA. The Board may also decline to register an instrument of transfer of certificated ordinary shares unless it is duly stamped and deposited at the prescribed place and accompanied by the share certificate(s) and such other evidence as reasonably required by the Board to evidence right to transfer, it is in respect of one class of shares only, and it is in favour of a single transferee or not more than four joint transferees (except in the case of executors or trustees of a member).

In accordance with the provisions of Section 84 of the Small Business, Enterprise and Employment Act 2015, preference shares may only be issued in registered form. Preference shares shall be transferred in writing in any usual or other form approved by the Secretary and executed by or on behalf of the transferor. The Company’s registrar shall register such transfers of preference shares by making the appropriate entries in the register of preference shares. Each preference share shall confer, in the event of a winding up or any return of capital by reduction of capital (other than, unless otherwise provided by their terms of issue, a redemption or purchase by the Company of any of its issued shares, or a reduction of share capital), the right to receive out of the surplus assets of the Company available for distribution amongamongst the members and in priority to the holders of the ordinary shares and any other shares in the Company ranking junior to the relevant series of preference shares

and pari passu with any other class of preference shares (other than any class of shares then in issue ranking in priority to the relevant series of preference shares), repayment of the amount paid up or treated as paid up in respect of the nominal value of the preference share together with any premium which was paid or treated as paid when the preference share was issued in addition to an amount equal to accrued and unpaid dividends.

Variation of rights

The rights attached to any class of shares may be varied either with the consent in writing of the holders of at least 75% in nominal value of the issued shares of that class, or with the sanction of a special resolution passed at a separate meeting of the holders of the shares of that class. The rights of shares shall not (unless expressly provided by the rights attached to such shares) be deemed varied by the creation of further shares ranking equally with them or subsequent to them.

Limitations on foreign shareholders

There are no restrictions imposed by the Articles of Association or (subject to the effect of any economic sanctions that may be in force from time to time) by current UK laws which relate only tonon-residents of the UK and which limit the rights of suchnon-residents to hold or (when entitled to do so) vote the ordinary shares.

Exercisability of rights under an employee share scheme

Employee Benefit Trusts (EBTs) operate in connection with certain of the Group’s Employee Share Plans (Plans). The trustees of the EBTs may exercise all rights attached to the shares in accordance with their fiduciary duties other than as specifically restricted in the relevant Plan governing documents. The trustees of the EBTs have informed the Company that their normal policy is to abstain from voting in respect of the Barclays shares held in trust. The trustees of the Global Sharepurchase EBT and UK Sharepurchase EBTs may vote in respect of Barclays shares held in the EBTs, but only as instructed by participants in those Plans in respect of their partnership shares and (when vested) matching and dividend shares. The trustees will not otherwise vote in respect of shares held in the Sharepurchase EBTs.

Special rights

There are no persons holding securities that carry special rights with regard to the control of the Company.

Major shareholdersa

Major shareholders do not have different voting rights from those of other shareholders. Information provided to the Company by majorsubstantial shareholders pursuant to the FCA’s Disclosure RulesGuidance and Transparency Rules (DTRs) are published via a Regulatory Information Service and is available on the Company’s website. As at 31 December 2015,2016, the Company had been notified under Rule 5 of the DTRsDisclosure Guidance and Transparency Rules of the following holdings of voting rights in its shares.

 

Person interested  

Number of

Barclays shares

    

% of total  

voting rights  

attaching to  

issued share  

capitala 

   

Number of

Barclays shares

 

 

   



% of total 

voting rights 
attaching to 

issued share 
capitala 

 

 
 

 
 

The Capital Group Companies Incb  1,172,090,125    6.98  
The Capital Group Companies Inc.b   1,172,090,125    6.98 
Qatar Holding LLCc  813,964,522    6.65     1,017,455,690    5.99 
BlackRock, Inc.d  822,938,075    5.02     922,509,972    5.45 
Norges Bank  506,870,056    3.02     512,348,359    3.03 

Notes

aSignificant shareholders for the last 3 years are shown on page 323.331.
bThe percentage of voting rights detailed above was calculated at the time of the relevant disclosures made in accordance with Rule 5 of the DTR.Disclosure Guidance and Transparency Rules.
cThe Capital Group Companies Inc (CG) holds its shares via CG Management companies and funds. Part of the CG holding is held as American Depositary Receipts.
dQatar Holding LLC is wholly ownedwholly-owned by Qatar Investment Authority.
eTotal shown includes 1,408,6183,860,531 contracts for difference to which voting rights are attached. Part of the holding is held as American Depositary Receipts. On 2519 January 2016,2017, BlackRock, Inc. disclosed by way of a Schedule 13G filed with the SEC, beneficial ownership of 1,109,026,1561,054,988,420 ordinary shares of the Company as of 31 December 2015,2016, representing 6.6%6.2% of that class of shares.

Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2016 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  45


Governance: Directors’ report

Other Statutory Information

Between 31 December 2016 and 20 February 2017 (the latest practicable date for inclusion in this report) the Company was notified that Norges Bank now holds 508,175,594 Barclays shares, representing 2.996% of the total voting rights attached to issued share capital.

Powers of Directors to issue or buy back the Company’s shares

The powers of the Directors are determined by the Companies Act 2006 and the Company’s Articles. The Directors are authorised to issue and allot shares and to buy back shares subject to annual shareholder approval at the AGM. Such authorities were granted by shareholders at the 20152016 AGM. It will be proposed at the 20162017 AGM that the Directors be granted new authorities to allot and buy back shares.

44  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F


Governance: Directors’ report

Other statutory information

Repurchase of shares

The Company did not repurchase any of its ordinary shares during 2015 (2014:2016 (2015: none). As at26 20 February 20162017 (the latest practicable date for inclusion in this report) the Company had an unexpired authority to repurchase ordinary shares up to a maximum of 1,650,234,6021,681m ordinary shares.

Change of control

There are no significant agreements to which the Company is a party that are affected by a change of control of the Company following a takeover bid. There are no agreements between the Company and its Directors or employees providing for compensation for loss of office or employment that occurs because of a takeover bid.

Going concern

The Group’s business activities, and financial position, thecapital, factors likely to affect its future development and performance, and its objectives and policies in managing the financial riskrisks to which it is exposed and its capital are discussed in the Risk Management section.

The Directors considered it appropriate to prepare the financial statements on a going concern basis.

Disclosure of information to the auditor

Each Director confirms that, so far as he/she is aware, there is no relevant audit information of which the Company’s auditors are unaware and that each Directorof the Directors has taken all the steps that he/she ought to have taken as a Director to make himself/herself aware of any relevant audit information and to establish that the Company’s auditors are aware of that information. This confirmation is given pursuant to section 418 of the Companies Act 2006 and should be interpreted in accordance with and subject to those provisions.

Directors’ responsibilities

The following statement, which should be read in conjunction with the report of the independent registered public accounting firm set out on page 210,218, is made with a view to distinguishing for shareholders the respective responsibilities of the Directors and of the auditors in relation to the accounts.

The Directors are required by the Companies Act 2006 to prepare accounts for each financial year and, with regards to Group accounts, in accordance with Article 4 of the IAS Regulation. The Directors have prepared groupGroup and individual accounts in accordance with IFRS as adopted by the EU. The accounts are required by law and IFRS to present fairly the financial position and performance of the Company and the Group and the performance for that period. The Companies Act 2006 provides, in relation to such accounts, that references to accounts giving a true and fair view are references to fair presentation.

The Directors consider that, in preparing the accounts on pages 211216 to 305,316, and the additional information contained on pages 11186 to 182,189, the Group has used appropriate accounting policies, supported by reasonable judgements and estimates, and that all accounting standards which they consider to be applicable have been followed.

Having taken all the matters considered by the Board and brought to the attention of the Board during the year into account, the Directors are satisfied that the Annual Report and Financial Statements, taken as a whole, are fair, balanced and understandable, and provide the information necessary for shareholders to assess the Company’s position and performance, business model and strategy.

Directors’ responsibility statement

The Directors have responsibility for ensuring that the Company and the Group keep accounting records which disclose with reasonable accuracy the financial position of the Company and the Group and which enable them to ensure that the accounts comply with the Companies Act 2006.

The Directors are responsible for the maintenance and integrity of the Company’s website. Legislation in the UK governing the preparation and dissemination of financial statements may differ from legislation in other jurisdictions.

The Directors have a general responsibility for taking such steps as are reasonably open to them to safeguard the assets of the Group and to prevent and detect fraud and other irregularities.

The Directors, whose names and functions are set out on pages 3 and 4, confirm to the best of their knowledge that:

(a) the financial statements, prepared in accordance with the applicable set of accounting standards, give a true and fair view of the assets, liabilities, financial position and profit or loss of the Company and the undertakings included in the consolidation taken as a whole, and

(a)the financial statements, prepared in accordance with the applicable set of accounting standards, give a true and fair view of the assets, liabilities, financial position and profit or loss of the Company and the undertakings included in the consolidation taken as a whole; and

(b) the management report, which is incorporated into the Directors’ Report on pages 3 to 45, includes a fair review of the development and performance of the business and the position of the Company and the undertakings included in the consolidation taken as a whole, together with a description of the principal risks and uncertainties that they face.

(b)the management report, which is incorporated in the Directors’ Report on pages 2 to 46, includes a fair review of the development and performance of the business and the position of the Company and the undertakings included in the consolidation taken as a whole, together with a description of the principal risks and uncertainties that they face.

By order of the Board

LOGO

Lawrence DickinsonClaire Davies

Company Secretary

2922 February 2016

Barclays PLC2017

Registered in England, England.

Company No. 48839

 

 

46  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 20152016 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  45


GovernanceGovernance: People

People

 

 

During 2015 we have continued our work to enhance support for our colleagues in their careersCulture and to enable them to contribute to the long-term success of Barclays.

Culture, values and learningValues

We are four years into our third year ofa cultural change journey at Barclays. WeOver this period we have defined a common set of Values and Behavioursvalues and embedded them into our core people processes so thatacross the organisation, ensuring they are recognised and understood by our colleagues. Having setemployees. We recognise that fostering the tone fromright culture at Barclays is critical to our success and we have placed continued focus on the top by driving cultural changeimportance of a values based culture to the organisation. Early in 2016 conduct, culture and values was established as one of the strategic priorities for the year, and within that we have developed a culture measurement framework to manage and measure progress in embedding a values based culture across Barclays. This framework is anchored in our values and through quarterly indicators and insights we are able to assess what we are doing well and where we might need to focus attention and prioritise management action across our businesses and functions. The quarterly indicators and insights are presented to the Board Reputation Committee and the Group Executive Committee and business/ functionalshared with our senior leaders,leadership teams with a view to becoming an integral part of our regular management reporting so that we can ensure our priorities and decisions are focused in the right areas. The insights from the indicators and metrics within the culture measurement framework this year support the view that our ongoing efforts are having a positive impact in continuing to create a culture that will help us build the Barclays of the future.

Your View

Engagement of our employees is one of the key indicators of cultural health and we recognise the importance of listening to our colleagues and maintaining an open,two-way dialogue. The views of our colleagues shape the decisions we make, helping us create an environment in which colleagues want to work, and which in turn we believe will drive high performance. To ensure that we constantly review and reappraise to see what is working, in 2016, the annual Your View survey, our employee opinion survey, became a quarterly pulse survey excluding Africa, providing colleagues the opportunity on a more regular basis to say how it feels to work at Barclays. In the third quarter of the year, we surveyed 50% of all colleagues and the remaining 50% were surveyed in the fourth quarter. Starting from 2017, each quarter 25% of colleagues excluding Africa will be invited to take part in Your View.

The Your View results have continued to measure Sustainable Engagement and this year we have deliveredbeen provided with more regular snapshots. The quarterly results were then aggregated at the end of the year into an overall annual picture of engagement. At the end of 2016 Sustainable Engagement of our colleagues has remained stable year on year at 75%. Areas of particular strength from the annual results include: colleagues feeling safe to speak up (81% favourable, up 6% points on 2015); colleagues feeling proud of the contribution Barclays makes to the community and society (88% favourable, up 3% points on 2015) and employees feeling respected regardless of their job (83% favourable, up 4% points on 2015). In addition, the commitment and discretionary effort of employees continues to be very high with 94% saying they believe they work beyond what is required of them to help Barclays succeed. Along with the insights from the quarterly indicators within the culture measurement framework, these results evidence that we continue to make strong progress in embedding a number of group-wide initiatives to embedvalues based culture across the organisational culture. bank.

Leadership and Learning

Our leadership development programme isand learning solutions are underpinned by our Values, and ensures all senior management are aware of,values and are enabledfocused on supporting our colleagues to role model our Valuesdevelop critical skills and Behaviours.capabilities. Both the Barclays Leadership Academy and theour Global Curriculum which providesprovide colleagues with development resources, focusedthrough a variety of formats and content. In 2016 our employees spent an average of 40 hours each on personal and behavioural skill,training through formal programmes, in addition to having access to many other informal learning opportunities that are widely available and provide a consistent approach to core and leadership development.

not captured through our learning management system. We continue to assess candidate alignment to our Values and Behaviours through our recruitment and promotion processes and we also ensure new joiners attend the ‘Being Barclays’ Global Induction programme, which provides anin-depth experience of the Values and life at Barclays.Values. All colleagues are required to attest and demonstrate their understanding of expected behaviours through the Global Code of Conduct (The Barclays Way).

This year a new event was launched, sponsored by the Group CEO, to

begin to develop the next generation of enterprise leaders who actively contribute towards rebuilding the profession of banking through their own leadership and their influence of others. By bringing together high potential senior leaders from across our businesses and functions we seek to strengthen collaboration and an enterprise wide perspective amongst our senior leaders to deliver improved solutions and products for our customers and clients.

We have continued to launch and refresh learning and leadership initiatives with particular focus on supporting the development of line managers. Examples include our Manager Excellence Programme, the iLead programme for high potential Directors, and the Senior Leadership Development programme in the Banking business. All our leadership development activities follow a common principle of leaders teaching leaders, creating opportunities for knowledge sharing across different parts of Barclays.

Early careers and apprenticeships

Barclays is committed to helping young people achieve their ambitions when they enter the world of work so ourwhether they are a young person entering the workplace for the first time or an experienced professional seeking to develop new skills. Barclays Early Careers proposition includes graduate, internship and apprenticeship programmes which provide structured support to young people. In 2015,and in 2016 we launched our Bolder Apprenticeship Programme, targeting long-term unemployed adultshired over the age of 24, which is the first of its kind in the UK750 interns and underlines our commitment to tackling societal issues and attracting diverse talent.

700 graduates. Since 2012 we have created over 3,000 apprenticeships. We provide pathways for progression from apprentice to graduate supported by recognised qualifications and, in doing so, help to create an internal talent pipeline. In 2015, Barclays hired

The ambition in 2016 for our apprenticeship programmes was to widen accessibility and ensure our programmes are fully inclusive. We expanded our Bolder Apprenticeship Programme, targeting long-term unemployed adults over 1,000 interns, 800 graduatesthe age of 24, and we also piloted our Able to Enable Programme targeting the long-term unemployed who have created over 2,500 apprenticeships since 2013. During 2015a disability. These programmes along with our place on the UK Government’s Apprenticeship Delivery Board reflect our commitment to tackling societal issues and attracting diverse talent. Throughout 2016 we increasedhave continued to receive external recognition for our genderapprenticeship programmes.

We have transformed the way we recruit for our EMEA Internship and Graduate programmes to deliver an improved candidate experience and to ensure that we are assessing candidates against the right skills and qualities. This recruitment process helps to drive diversity acrossand inclusion as students are able to demonstrate ability and potential throughout the process so that recruitment outcomes are based on performance and not on the basis of academic grades, universities attended and previous work experience. This year in the Americas we rolled out our first ‘Sophomore Springboard’ programme aimed at preparing a diverse range of students for an internship programmes by 8%in their junior year. This was the first phase of a two year strategy to 42% female representation.identify diverse talent early on.

My CareerIndustrial relations

Barclays has a long-standing partnership approach to industrial relations and mentoring tool

Colleague development, both personalwe value the relationships we have with over 30 trade unions, works councils and professional,staff associations around the world. Within the UK we have a formal partnership with Unite which has been a priority in 2015. We launchedplace for over 15 years and is one of the ‘My Career’ online portal which provideslongest standing partnerships in the UK. Throughout 2016, we have continued to have regular, constructive dialogue with employee representatives on a wide range of informationtopics that impact our employees in order to seek their feedback prior to implementation. Regional consultation forums have also provided a platform for bringing together and tools to help colleagues understand their potential and make informed career decisions. We recogniseengaging employee representatives on a wide range of topics that affect the importanceinterests of great mentor relationships and have deployed an online tool to match mentors and mentees based on skill sets and experience.

Wellbeing

Our new global wellbeing programme, ‘Be Well’ launched in 2015, aiming to support employee engagement and improve health and well-being. The programme includes existing health and well-being resources, as well as new investment in areas such as employee health screenings, a global speaker series and a new global portal which acts as a gateway to education materials and events.

Performance management

Colleagues are encouraged to align their objectives to business and team goals and behavioural expectations are set in relation to our Values. Performance is assessed against both ‘what’ colleagues do and ‘how’ they do it. The ‘Values in Action’ framework provides all colleagues with the tools to assess ‘what’ objectives they achieved and ‘how’ they achieved them, together with a guide on expected behaviours in line with the Values. Our global recognition plan allows colleagues to recognise the outstanding achievements of those who have demonstrated our Values, with over 188,500 colleagues receiving a Values ‘Thank You’ in 2015.employees.

Managing change

Where business restructuring has beenis necessary to support the transformation of our business and cost profile,strategy, we have consulted on potential job lossesproposals with our recognised trade unions or employee representatives, as well as theforums and impacted individuals. Our aim has beenemployees, prior to implementation. In line with our Values and to ensure we treat all colleagues with respect, andwe seek to avoid compulsory redundancies wherever possible.possible and we try to find ways in which we can achieve this during consultation. We have placedcontinue to place significant emphasis on both voluntary redundancy programmes as well as internal redeployment via “Internals First”.

through our ‘Internals First’ programme. Internals First supports colleagues who have been impacted by change and provides individual support to ensure that we retain talent within

Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2016 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  47


Governance: People

Barclays. Internals First is deployed in all our main locations and is managed by a dedicated team. In 2015, 9352016, over 1,000 colleagues registered for Internals First support and we redeployed 39%32% of them within Barclays. Throughout 2015,2016, colleagues have attended Internals First Careercareers and Networking Eventsnetworking events and opted for outplacement support services.

During 2015, we also developed ‘Be Informed’, which is available on both desktop and mobile devices. This intuitive support site gives transparent and helpful advice for colleagues who are impacted by change, including how to manage change, further career options available to them and where to go for help and support during periods of uncertainty.

When an employee does leave Barclays as a consequence of restructuring, our commitment is to ensure that they are given the best support for the next stage in their career and life. Following an extensive review,career. To achieve this, Barclays provides a new globally consistentglobal career transition service has been implemented which offers personalised advice and support for all employees placed at risk of redundancy. We also hope to keep in touch with former colleagues through the Barclays Global Alumni Programme which provides a platform for current and former employees to connect with Barclays and one another through global networking events, monthlye-newsletters and access to career opportunities.

Industrial relationsInternal Mobility

During 2016 internal mobility has been a key focus. Being able to attract and retain talented individuals, as well as provide them with the opportunity to take control of their career and development at Barclays is one of our most important ambitions. Our aim is that by supporting internal mobility across Barclays and making it simple and easy for colleagues to move internally, we are successfully retaining and developing our internal talent. To promote this and provide colleagues with opportunities to broaden their experience, the Group CEO launched ‘Apply Within’, our internal mobility programme, early in 2016. We have developed multiple tools and resources for colleagues to find new internal career opportunities and for managers to find and assess suitable internal candidates. Global careers fairs, the Barclays Mentoring Tool and enhancements to the ‘My Career’ online portal, which was launched in 2015, are part of the campaign. Thousands of colleagues have visited the ‘My Career’ portal this year to update career profiles, upload CVs and import LinkedIn profiles and our Resourcing teams have sought to match vacant roles to colleagues’ skills and aspirations. We have increased our internal recruitment percentage to 48% firm wide (excluding Africa).

Wellbeing

By actively supporting employees to be healthy and happy, we will deliver better outcomes for colleagues, for Barclays and for society. Our global wellbeing programme ‘Be Well’ launched in 2015 and has focused on health education, a Global Speaker Series, health risk identification, prevention and management as well as new leadership and management programmes to help line managers support colleagues. The insights developed this year through our wellbeing programme help to identify themes and areas to focus on in 2017.

Performance Management

Barclays approach to performance management is key to enabling the delivery of our strategy and to continue to embed a values-based culture. Colleagues align their objectives (‘what’ they will deliver) to business and team goals to support the delivery of our strategy and good customer outcomes. Behavioural expectations (‘how’ they will achieve their objectives) are set in the context of our Values. This year we have enhanced the focus on balancing the ‘what’ and the ‘how’ through the launch of our ‘Let’s talk about how’ campaign to remind colleagues that ‘how’ they achieve their objectives is just as important as ‘what’ they achieve. Both the campaign and the ‘Values in Action’ framework provide tools and resources for colleagues to bring to life the behaviours that underpin our Values and to enhance the quality of performance reviews.

Our global recognition programme provides colleagues the opportunity to recognise the outstanding achievements of those who have demonstrated our Values. We continue to advocate and practisesee a partnership approach to industrial relations and valueyear on year increase in the relationships we havenumber of colleagues receiving a Values ‘Thank You’ message from a fellow colleague, with over 30 trade unions, works councils and staff associations around250,000 sent in 2016.

Colleagues are also encouraged to be involved with the world. In particular,company’s performance by participating in our formal partnership with Unite since 2000 is one of the longest standing in the UK. During 2015, weall-employee share plans, which have continued to have regular, constructive dialogue with employee representatives on a wide range of topics that affect employees, facilitated through established regional consultation forums which bring together representatives from across our businesses.

We are confident that through all these established core people processes and others, we have created the right landscape at Barclays to sustain the desired organisational culture. We also believe that while we have a common purpose, Values, and vision, this can mean different thingsbeen running successfully for different parts of our business and so we need to continue to shape our culture in a way that makes sense for each of our business areas. To that end, in 2015, each business CEO was tasked with driving the organisational culture for their business and we supported this by deploying business-specific training academies across the Group. This will continue into 2016.

46  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F


Governance

People

Your Viewover 10 years.

Barclays’ recognises the importance of listening to our colleagues and maintaining open, two-way dialogues between the organisation and colleagues. The views of our colleagues shape the decisions we make, helping us create an environment that colleagues want to work in, which we in turn believe will help drive high performance.

We deployed a global colleague survey, ‘Your View’ once again in 2015 to seek the views of colleagues. This year’s survey was more focused, based on the insights derived from the previous year’s survey, and asked for our colleagues’ views on a range of topics, including our Values, leadership and line management, the working environment, and citizenship. The results showed a near-universal understanding among colleagues of the Values and related behaviours (97% favourable) with 81% agreeing that role modelling the Values is central to creating the right culture at Barclays.

Compared to 2014, colleagues feel an increased sense of job accomplishment and enthusiasm, believe more strongly in Barclays’ goals, and are more likely to recommend Barclays as a place to work. Sustainable Engagement is at 75%, a 3% increase compared to 2014. This is a strong result, suggesting action taken during 2015 is having an impact, notwithstanding the continued and sustained change we have experienced. We have performed an in-depth review of the results of the survey with all senior leaders, and will continue to focus our efforts on improving employee engagement in 2016.

Barclays regularly updates employees regarding the financial and economic factors affecting the company’s performance throughout the year, using a variety of communications channels. These include CEO and senior leader email communications, line manager briefing packs, video

interviews and talking points which are distributed to employees every quarter to coincide with Barclays’ financial reporting calendar. They are all designed to build awareness and understanding of Barclays’ results and the broader macroeconomic environment, and to drive dialogue around what the figures mean and how employees should respond.dialogue. We also hold a variety of events for all employees across each business division and function throughout the year, which provide employees the chance to hear directly from the CEO ExCo member or leaderand the Group Executive Committee and to ask them questions.

We have also recently introduced an ‘Ask the Experts’ communication which gives perspectives from across the bank on what Barclays’ results mean and how they are received by different stakeholders such as investors, politicians and the media.

stakeholders. Flagship campaigns are released to all employees each quarter, covering topics such as wellbeing, recognition and dynamic working. Each quarter, colleagues and managers receive interactive updatesworking to raise awareness of the tools being introduced to help them develop their careers at Barclays and to provide them with the opportunity to understand and engage in employee initiatives. Colleagues are also kept informed through regular intranet and email updates about the progress Barclays is making across activity such as our Diversity and Inclusion agenda,and Performance Management and annual Pay and Reward processes.Management.

Employees are invited to share their opinion on what it is like to work at Barclays through regular interactive events with senior leaders. These events provide employees with the opportunity to discuss their perspective on a range of areas to help senior management understand what is working well and where we need to improve. Any changes that are implemented as a result of colleague feedback are communicated through leadership briefings and engagement initiatives at an individual business/function level.

Colleagues are also encouraged to be involved with the company’s performance by participating in Barclays all-employee shareplans, which have been running successfully for over 10 years. Further details of our approach to remuneration are included in the Remuneration Report pages 53across each business and 54.function.

Diversity and inclusionInclusion

Barclays’ global Diversity and Inclusion (D&I) strategy sets outestablishes objectives, initiatives and frames our plans foracross each of five core pillars: Gender, LGBT, Disability, Multicultural and Multigenerational. CentralAs an organisation we remain focussed on increasing the diversity of our employees and by continuing to each pillar is buildingfoster an inclusive culture we seek to ensure that employees of all backgrounds are treated equally and have the opportunity to be successful.

In recognition of this in 2016 we have continued to develop opportunities to attract and retain a diverse pipeline of talented employees across the bank. This year we have launched new initiatives including our ‘Encore!’ Returnship Programme which offers leadership development and training opportunities to professionals who have taken a career break and are looking to re-enter the workforce. Also launched in 2016 is whyour Able to Enable apprenticeship initiative which targets the long-term unemployed who have a disability. Working with Remploy and by providing a bespoke, supportive selection process, which includes a 13 week development experience, we continuehope to provide opportunities for this population.

In June we announced enhancements to our US Leave of Absence policies for Childcare and Military Leave, supporting our commitment to creating a diverse and inclusive environment through policies that help employees successfully integrate their profession and personal lives.

Providing leadership development to ensure we are continuing to build leadership competency aboutan inclusive work environment is paramount to our diversity strategy and in 2016 our Unconscious Bias and have had more than 10,000 participants undertake the training. Following our 2014 programmeTraining, previously delivered to engageover 8,000 senior leaders, was deployed to our ‘Everyday Ism’s’ programme has this year opened up dialoguejunior populations with colleagues more widely focusing on stereotypes, assumptions and bias.over 1,900 attending workshops to date.

An important aspect of our D&I agenda is ensuring people from all backgrounds have equal opportunity to join, and progress through, our organisation. In support of this, we have established candidate shortlist diversity goals for senior positions to provide focus during talent decisions, and ensure hiring panels are diverse to broaden assessment perspectives.

This ethos begins with our most senior roles. Having achieved the target we set ourselves in 2012 to increase Board level diversity to 25%, we have now challenged ourselves to achieve a minimum of 33% by 2020. To strengthen the pipeline, we have consecutively achieved our year on year goals towards representation of women in senior roles to 26% by 2018. We always have more to do, but are pleased when our progress towards greater inclusion is recognised. During 2015,2016, we continued to receive national and international recognition from respected organisations such as Stonewallthe Business Disability Forum in the UK, Working MotherHuman Rights Campaign in the US and Community Business in Asia have praisedfor our programmes and achievements, citing our D&I work as innovative, robust and robust.sustainable.

Gender

Sustaining progress towards our Balanced Scorecard and Board Diversity goalsincreasing female representation at all levels across Barclays remains a core focus. focus of our talent management and leadership succession processes. Across our organisation and the financial services industry we hope to see more females in senior roles and we are determined to enable women to fulfil their career aspirations. As referenced in the Board Nominations Committee section on pages 29 to 35 we revised our Board Diversity Policy in 2015 to reflect our new target of minimum 33% female representation on our Board by 2020.

48  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2016 Annual Report on Form 20-F


Our Board membership currently has increased31% female representation, reflecting that we are on track to four women, with one woman on Group Executive Committee. Ourmeet our 2020 target.

As a founding signatory of the HM Treasury Women in Leadership Charter and supporter of the Hampton-Alexander Review we proactively set gender targets and at the end of 2016 female representation across the senior leadership population stood at 23% at24% representing the third consecutiveyear-on-year increase and progress towards our 2018 Women in Leadership goal of 26%. In line with the recommendations from the Hampton-Alexander Review, from 2017, we will publish the combined number of women on the Group Executive Committee and in the direct reports to the Executive Committee. At the end of 2015 representing a consecutive 1% increase year-on-year since 2011.2016 female representation across this population stood at 25%. We will also use the review output to inform the update of our Women are also leading countries where we operate, for example in Ireland, Brazil, Singapore, Botswana and Gibraltar.Leadership targets.

At all levels our gender pipeline is strengtheninghas continued to strengthen thanks to extensive programmes which focus on building capability and fostering gender intelligence. Our internal HeForShe campaign,capacity, such as our Global Women in partnershipLeadership conference with over 5,000 colleagues participating, the ‘Encore!’ Returnship Programme and the number of female graduate hires we have made increasing from 31% in 2014 to 39% in 2016. The Barclays Women’s Initiatives Network (WiN) also provides targeted development and networking opportunities such as group mentoring, careers fairs, and events helping to connect both junior and senior colleagues from across the organisation.

Recognising our efforts, we were invited to be a corporate IMPACT champion by the United Nations asksin their HeForShe campaign on gender equality. Internally we have asked colleagues to pledgeshow their support by pledging a specific commitment that will contribute to gender parity. Since launching HeForShe, 60% of new Women’s Initiative Network members have beenare male and men have also taken active rolesmany are now taking a more visible role as mentors and sponsors.

Also new this year issponsors, helping to contribute towards gender diversity and greater inclusion. Staying at the vanguard of good practice requires sustained commitment and we value independent assessment that allows us to calibrate our Returnship programme which is enabling senior women who needed to pause their career, the opportunity to refresh their skills and confidence in preparation for a return to leadership roles.approach. For the eighthninth year running, we were pleased to be included in The Times Top 50 Workplaces for Women in the UK, and for the thirdfourth successive year to be named in ‘Working Mother’ 100 Best Companies in the US.

Female representation

 

 

LOGO

Above shows the positive change in female representation within Barclays from 2014 (H2) to 2015 (H2)

LOGO

LGBT

An inclusive culture is vital for colleagues to have the freedom and choice to bring their whole selves to work, and in particular for people to be open about their sexual orientation if they choose to. Our Your View survey saw 5% of global colleagues identifying as being LGBT globally, a 1% increase since 2014.work. Enabling that culture, are our Global‘Spectrum Allies’- colleagues who are committed to inclusion and equality. By educating others and visibly supporting equality, allies help to make LGBT colleagues, friends and family feel safer and more comfortable in leading their lives. The Spectrum Allies campaign has identified over 7,000 colleagues from every region who share our commitment toglobally as LGBT equality and who take an active roleallies in shaping an LGBT-inclusive workplace. The Allies programme is led by Spectrum, our employee network for anyone interested in LGBT matters. Since 2001, Spectrum has been an important contributor of insight and innovation and now connects colleagues across the world, with the Spectrum App providing access outside the workplace.

2016.

Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  47


#PrideHeroes’#nofilter’ was the theme of Pride in London 2016, which we were againproud to be the lead sponsorsheadline sponsor of in 2015.for the third consecutive year. More than 4001,100 colleagues, leaders, friends and family came together for Pride with many more joining other events acrossin London and hundreds of colleagues marched at the head of the parade in June. Events for our regionscolleagues, customers and clients took place throughout June to celebrate Pride month, and a partnership between the BUK Marketing Team and Thomson Reuters resulted in a successful social media campaign, including over 10,000 downloads of operation. A specially ‘Pride wrapped’ DLR train carried the ‘#RidewithPride’ message acrossPride in London with ATM’s up and down the UK communicating our support for LGBT equality.smartphone application, in which Barclays’ ‘nofilter’ advert was

highlighted.

Barclays ATM messaging also conveyed our advocacy for IDAHOBIT (International Day Against Homophobia, Biphobia and Transphobia). For and for World AIDSAids Day, £ for £ matching augmented colleague fundraising for organisations leading on the treatment and prevention of AIDS.HIV and Aids.

Independent recognition reflects the sustained impact of our global work and further motivates us to continue to shape our culture so that colleagues can be themselves at work. In Singapore, we won best LGBT employee network at this year’s ALMA Awards, and Stonewall continue to name us as one of just eight ‘Star Performer’ organisations that are seen as leaders globally. Colleagues across a range of levelsRole-model colleagues were this year recognised in the Financial Times OUTstanding list of 100 LGBT business leaders, and in the Pride Power List. Awards simply serve to motivate us to continue to shape our culture so that colleagues really can bring their whole selves to work. Through the Your View survey we provide colleagues with the opportunity to identify as being LGBT, with 3% of colleagues identifying as being LGBT in 2016.

Disability

Our aspiration to become ‘the most accessible bank’ remains firm. Understanding where we need to focus attention is key which is why we valueProgressing our Disability Listening forums to bring together colleagues who have insightaim, this year in partnership with those who have influence to turn ideas into action. We listen to our customers too, directly and via our external partners – from RNIB to Leonard Cheshire – as partthe Lord Mayor of our continual improvement ethos. Their feedback contributed to us becoming the first bank to receive an accreditation from AbilityNet for our Mobile Banking app, reflecting its improved accessibility functionality.

In another first, we successfully launched our Return on Disability Exchange Traded Notes (ETNs) on the New York Arca Stock Exchange. The ETNs are a first of a kind investment product, linked to the performance of an index developed in conjunction with The Return on Disability Group. They provide investors with exposure to US based companies that have acted to attract and serve people with disabilities, and their friends and family, as customers and employees.

Continually improving our own workplace is a steadfast aim, and is whyCity we expanded our internal campaign, ‘This Is Me’ from a UK, into the City of London to a global campaign. Originally focused onencourage other organisations to join in eliminating the stigma associated with mental health throughissues. Over 70 organisations have already signed up for ‘This Is Me’ colleagues tell their stories as to how disability touches their lives.is Me in The stories told via ‘This Is Me’ included members ofCity’. Through our Reach employee network, which connects anyone interested in disability. The inclusive culture enabled by Reach is instrumental in helping us attract people whocorporate accessibility portal, we have a disability, so that they bring their talent to us. Our apprenticeship programme is just one career route that we are ensuring is fully accessible to all.

Awardsnow made our learning on accessibility and recognition from exemplar organisations, including the Business Disability Forum, indicates that we are fast moving towards our own ‘most accessible’ ambition but we want to share learning with others. To celebrate and recognise the 25th anniversary of the American Disability Act (ADA), we partnered with the New York Mayor’s Office to host the only B2B event in the ADA calendar to stimulate thought leadership and encourage partnership. Our Your view Survey saw over 6% of colleagues identifying as having a disability globally, a 1 percentage point improvement from previous year results.inclusion available for any organisation.

We recognise ability is multi-faceted. Wegive continued to give full and fair consideration to applications from candidates who may have a disability. Our people processes ensure all colleagues can progress their careers, with comprehensive training and

development including our Disability Confident eLearning, and through tailored and needs-based workplace adjustments where relevant. This year we reviewed our Workplace Adjustment process to make it simpler and easier for colleagues and our Adjustment Passport outlines colleagues’ reasonable adjustments to eliminate the need for colleagues to inform new line managers and to increase the ease of internal mobility. Employees who become disabled during their employment with us can access a full range of services and support ensuring where-ever possible, we retain their talent. Ongoing reviews ensure adjustments are updated and relevant

Our efforts were recognised when Barclays achieved 98% in the Business Disability Forum’s world-renown Disability Standard – the highest ever score awarded to individual requirements, providingany organisation since the ability for colleagues to move between roles with consistent support.introduction of the Disability Standard in 2004.

Multigenerational

LOGO

We benefit from the diverse perspectives of employees from five generations and need to ensure our workplace is inclusive for all. ‘Work’ and ‘place’ are increasingly becoming less co-joined, with shifts in technology and generational expectations requiring us to think and act differently. Dynamic Working, our signature campaign relevant to colleagues’colleagues every life stagesstage with the strapline of ‘how do your work your life’, encourages dialogue aboutis encouraging the integration of personal and professional responsibilities through smarter working. With flexibility and agility at the core, more than 12,000 line managers and their teams have participated in workshops, presentations and training to open up discussions about how work could be done differently.patterns.

Multigenerational

 

Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2016 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  49

LOGO


Above shows the different generations working at Barclays and the percentage change over 2014 (H2) and 2015 (H2)Governance: People

  

  

As an example of our commitment to colleagues in different life stages, we are one of the eight founding members in the Equality and Human Rights Commissions (EHRC) Working Forward campaign that aims to make British workplaces the best they can be for pregnant women and working mothers. Our Working Families network is supporting the campaign by running integration workshops for returners from parental and adoption leave.

The Emerge network supports colleagues early in their career or new to financial services and the multigenerational composition of our workforce. This year a global reverse mentoring programme was launched with over 200 successful reverse mentoring partnerships established. Our Bolder Apprentice Programme continues to grow and our Returnship programmes, both in the UK and US, are proving to be successful.

Changing careers is anotheralso important, time, which is why our Armed Forces Transitioning, Employment and Rehabilitation (AFTER) programme also continued to seeex-military talent join our company, or be supported to gain relevant work-ready skills. OurSince the programme began in 2010 AFTER has assisted over 4,000 veterans in employment transition, we have hired nearly 400ex-military talent and over £4m has been donated to military charities to assist wounded and injured personnel in employment transition. Meanwhile, our ‘LifeSkills’ programmeprogrammes continue to prepare young people for their first steps into the world of work andwork.

Working Families UK recognised Barclays for best embedded workplace flexibility through our Emerge network ensures new joiners, whatever their career stage, feel connected from the moment they arrive.

Dynamic Working Campaign. In Singapore, we won the Most Empowering Company for Mums award by the National Trades Union Congress, while in the US we were included in the ‘100 Best Companies for Working Mothers’. In the UK, our approach to Talent Attractiontalent attraction was recognised by Working Mums as well as by Business In the Community who felt our apprenticeship and ‘LifeSkills’ programmes were award winning.Community.

48  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F


Governance

People

Multicultural

Our

LOGO

Barclays global footprint covers more than 50 countries, makingmakes multicultural inclusion imperative. Fostering cross-cultural connections is enabled by Embrace our multicultural network which brings together all those who share an interest in all aspects of race, ethnicity, nationalitynetwork. Through the year Embrace has partnered with leaders and faith. Embrace took an active role in Interfaith week, when leaders hostedengaged colleagues across our global community to host discussions to gain insight and ideas foron how we can better servingserve our multicultural customers and clients, and for engaging colleagues across our global community.clients. Embrace also helped us mark important cultural and religious calendar dates throughout 20152016 such as Diwali and Eid, creating communications and events to bring to life the rich multicultural diversity of our people. Day-to-day,Day to day, this diversity is enabled by, for example, a dedicated quiet roomrooms in many of our larger sites for prayer and reflection, and by serving halal and kosher food in our canteens.

Barclays Apprenticeship Programme reflects our commitment to recruit a diverse workforce. Since the programme launched in 2012, we have recruited over 3,000 apprentices who are considered NEET (Not in Education, Employment or Training). 30% identify as Black, Asian and Minority Ethnic, which is 19% higher than the national apprenticeship average of 11%. In addition, 43% of our apprentices are from a disadvantaged area, as defined by the Department of Education.

Through this scheme we are making a positive impact on both youth unemployment and social mobility.

Ensuring Black, Asian and Minority Ethnic (BAME) female entrepreneurs can sustain and develop their businesses has been a shared focus via our partnership with the UK Women’s Business Council, and in 20152016 we also supported the Black British Business Awards to celebrate the achievements of BAME leaders in the UK.

Insight from BAME colleagues has been put into practice for our attraction and recruitment processes, including profiling available roles in jobsites dedicated to The multicultural profile of the diverse job-seeker and targeting high calibre candidates for our apprenticeship programmes. 26% of our Bolder apprentices have been from a BAME background, evidencing our engagement approach is working but we will continue to strive to ensure our workforce is representative of our communities.

Multicultural

LOGO

Above shows the percentage of underrepresented populations that make up our global and regional populations. Note that underrepresented populations are defined regionally to ensure inclusionorganisation was acknowledged externally with all groupssenior leader role models recognised in the workplace

aUK includes Asian, Mixed, Black, Other and Non-disclosed.
bUS includes Hispanic/Latino, Asian, Mixed, Black, Other and Non-disclosed.
cSouth Africa includes African, Indian, Coloured, Other, and Non-disclosed.

top 100 inaugural ‘UPstanding Executive Power List’ of BAME leaders in the UK and US and in the Powerlist an annual publication of Britain’s most influential people of African and African Caribbean heritage.

FTEPermanent Employees by region

 

 

   2015     2014     2013     2016    2015    2014 
United Kingdom   49,000     48,600     54,400     46,400    49,000    48,600 
Continental Eurpe   7,400     9,900     9,800  
Continental Europe   4,700    7,400    9,900 
Americas   10,600     10,900     11,100     9,700    10,600    10,900 
Africa and Middle East   43,600     44,700     45,800     42,800    43,600    44,700 
Asia Pacific   18,000     18,200     18,500     15,700    18,800    18,200 
Total   129,400     132,300     139,600     119,300    129,400    132,300 

50  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2016 Annual Report on Form 20-F


Governance: Remuneration report

Annual statement from the Chairman of the Board Remuneration Committee

LOGO

Summary

“We remain focused on aligning our pay to performance and setting pay at a level which allows us to attract, retain and motivate, but is no more than necessary to ensure that we accelerate the delivery of shareholder value. The inherent tension between these important considerations continues to be a key component of the Committee’s deliberations.”

Remuneration Committee members

Chairman

Crawford Gillies

Members

Tim Breedon

Mary Francis (from November 2016) Dambisa Moyo

Steve Thieke (until March 2016)

Contents

Page

Annual statement

51

New Directors’ remuneration policy – at a glance53
2016 incentives55
Remuneration policy for all employees57
Directors’ remuneration policy60
Annual report on Directors’ remuneration73
Additional remuneration disclosures85

The tables marked ‘audited’ in the report have been audited by PricewaterhouseCoopers LLP

Dear Fellow Shareholders

As Chairman of the Board Remuneration Committee, I am pleased to introduce the Remuneration report for 2016. I set out below the business context which influenced the major decisions taken by the Committee for the year. This year’s report also includes a new Directors’ remuneration policy, which has been updated for regulatory changes, and simplified where possible.

Performance and pay

We remain focused on aligning our pay to performance and setting pay at a level which allows us to attract, retain and motivate, but is no more than necessary to ensure that we accelerate the delivery of shareholder value. The inherent tension between these important considerations continues to be a key component of the Committee’s deliberations.

2016 represented a year of strong progress against our strategy. We have moved a step closer towards completing the restructuring of Barclays – a restructuring that will create a simplified bank focused on delivering long-term sustainable value for all our stakeholders. Our Core businesses are performing well, the rundown ofNon-Core businesses has accelerated and Barclays continues to explore opportunities to reduce its shareholding in BAGL to a level that would permit regulatory deconsolidation. The result will be the creation of a high performing transatlantic consumer, corporate and investment bank.

Our Core businesses delivered profit before tax up materially, 60% up compared to 2015. Excluding notable items this increase was 4%, and 10% excluding the impact of changes to our deferral arrangements (further detail overleaf). Core costs of £13.4bn exceeded guidance due to changes to the deferral arrangements. Return on Tangible Equity (RoTE) in our Core businesses has increased to 8.4% in 2016 (2015: 4.8%). Excluding notable items, Core RoTE was 9.4% (2015: 11.2%).

Non-Core has executed well against strategy, accelerating the rundown while preserving capital, delivering a £22bn reduction in Risk Weighted Assets.

Group profit before tax for 2016 is 182% up from 2015, at £3,230m, in part driven by a material reduction in costs associated with risk and conduct events in 2016. The Group’s capital position continues to strengthen with a 2016 year end CRD IV fully loaded Common Equity Tier 1 (CET1) ratio of 12.4% (2015: 11.4%).

The Committee’s deliberations on the 2016 incentive pool reflected Group performance and strategic delivery in both the Core andNon-Core businesses. We reached the decision that an overall Group incentive pool of £1,533m, down slightly from £1,544m in 2015, is appropriate notwithstanding strong 2016 delivery. This level of incentive pool also absorbs the material adverse impact of foreign exchange movements through the year, which more than offset the impact of reductions in staff numbers in the year.

The Core compensation to net income (excluding notable items) ratio decreased from 34.0% in 2015 to 32.7% in 2016 excluding the impact of the deferral changes, increasing slightly to 34.7% including the impact of these changes. At a Group level, the ratio increased to 40.2% (2015: 37.7%) driven byNon-Core as it continues to be run down.

Risk and conduct

The Committee takes risk and conduct issues very seriously and ensures that appropriate adjustments are made at both the individual level and to the incentive pool.

Individual performance management reviews assess individuals’ alignment with Barclays’ Values, which in turn impacts individual incentive decisions. Employees who exhibit Barclays’ Values, resulting in positive risk and conduct outcomes, are rewarded accordingly while those who are directly or indirectly accountable for risk and conduct issues have their remuneration adjusted downwards. This includes reductions in current year bonus and, where appropriate, reductions through the application of malus and, going forward, clawback.

 

 

  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 20152016 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  4951


Governance: Remuneration report

Annual statement from the Chairman of the Board Remuneration Committee

    

 

LOGO

‘The Committee’s priorities are to ensure that Barclays pays for sustainable performance, aligns remuneration with risk and delivers a greater proportion of the income we generate to our shareholders.’

 

   Remuneration Committee members

    Chairman

    Crawford Gillies (member from 1 May 2014,

                               Chairman from 24 April 2015)

    Sir John Sunderland (until 23 April 2015)

    Members

    Sir David Walker (until 23 April 2015)

    Tim Breedon

    Steve Thieke

    Dambisa Moyo (from 1 September 2015)

Contents

Page

Annual statement50
At a Glance – Performance and pay52
Remuneration policy for all employees53
2015 incentives55
Annual report on Directors’ remuneration59
Additional remuneration disclosures72
Directors’ remuneration policy (abridged)75

The tables marked ‘audited’ in the report have been audited by PricewaterhouseCoopers LLP

Dear Shareholders

I am pleasedCollective adjustments have also been made to introduce my first Remuneration report as Chairman of the Board Remuneration Committee, having taken over from Sir John Sunderland on 24 April 2015.

The Committee thought carefully about Barclays’ remuneration philosophy during 2015, and we agreed a revised, simplified statement, which articulates Barclays’ overarching approach to remuneration. This is set out in full on page 53 and is the background to our 2015 decisions.

The Committee’s priorities are to ensure that Barclays pays for sustainable performance, aligns remuneration with risk and delivers a greater proportion of the income we generate to our shareholders.

Performance and pay

The Committee’s 2015 pay decisions took full consideration of financial performance, both on an adjusted and a statutory basis, and non-financial performance including progress towards the 2018 targets within the Balanced Scorecard. The Committee also recognised the need to improve returns to shareholders and to accelerate delivery. We are committed to moving this forward in a manner that is consistent with Barclays’ Values to ensure that legacy events are not repeated.

Although there were improvements in the Core operating businesses, adjusted profit before tax was down 2% to £5,403m for 2015. Statutory profit before tax was down 8% at £2,073m. The Group’s capital position has continued to strengthen with a CRD IV fully loaded Common Equity Tier 1 (CET1) ratio of 11.4% and a leverage ratio of 4.5% at the end of the year. Cost targets have been met and Barclays Non-Core has made significant progress in reducing its risk weighted assets.

Against this background, the Group incentive pool for 2015 is again significantly lower than in prior years, down by £191m or 10% in absolute terms at £1,669m compared to the incentive pool of £1,860m for 2014. Similarly, the 2015 Investment Bank incentive pool is down 7%.

Total compensation costs are down 6%, and the compensation to adjusted net income ratio is 37.2%, down from 37.7% in 2014. Compensation to statutory net income ratio is 35.7%, down from 38.5% in 2014. The Core compensation to adjusted net income ratio is also down at 34.7% (2014: 35.7%). For a reconciliation of total incentive awards granted to the relevant income statement charge, see table on page 56.

Risk and conduct

A central feature of our remuneration philosophy is that remuneration must be aligned with risk, and with the conduct expectations of Barclays, our regulators and stakeholders. The Group incentive pool outlined above is after adjustments the Committee has made for both risk and conduct events. In addition to specific material risk and conduct events, we also adjusted the incentive pooland to take account of an overall assessment of a wide range of future risks including conduct,non-financial factors that can support the delivery of a strong risk management and conduct culture and other factors including reputation, impact on customers, markets and other stakeholders.

Changes to deferral arrangements

Under existing incentive deferral arrangements, there is a limited relationship betweenin-year performance costs booked and changes in the incentive pool. This is a result of high overall levels of deferral, as well as the way that the costs of those deferrals have been recognised in our accounts. The effect of this is that if we chose – for example – to reduce the incentive pool in a given year due to underperformance, there would be limited impact on costs for the year in question. This lack ofin-year flexibility on such an important cost line is not ideal. From 2016, a change in the recognition timing of deferral costs, together with a harmonisation of deferral levels across the Group will result in improvements to the Group’s operational flexibility going into 2017 and beyond.

These changes are described in further detail on page 56.

New remuneration policy for 2017

We will be seeking shareholder approval for a new Directors’ remuneration policy (DRP) at the 2017 AGM. The new policy adopts, where possible, a more simplified and transparent approach to remuneration and is more closely aligned to Barclays’ remuneration philosophy. Changes in the policy also address recent regulatory developments in particular the requirement to defer bonuses and Long Term Incentive Plan (LTIP) awards for a period of up to seven years. We have also introduced a robust processnew requirement for considering riskexecutive Directors to hold shares for two years post-termination.

The Committee was supportive of an even more simplified approach than that proposed, but the Committee concluded that while this alternative was attractive, there was not yet sufficient clarity on major shareholders’ expectations for us to propose such a change at the present time. The proposed changes to the DRP have been discussed with a number of our larger shareholders and conduct issues as partinstitutional shareholder bodies, and overall they are broadly supportive of individual performance management reviews with outcomes reflected in individual incentive decisions. Individuals who are directly or indirectly accountable for risk and conduct events have had their remuneration adjusted as appropriate. This includes reductions in current year bonus levels and reductions in vesting amountsthe changes. An ‘at a glance’ summary of deferred awards through the application of malus. Further detailsnew policy can be found on page 56.pages 53 and 54 of this report and the full policy is set out on pages 60 to 72.

Key remuneration decisions for executive Directors

2015 saw a change in Group Chief Executive. AllBased on the performance of the associated remuneration decisions were made in accordance with the Directors’ remuneration policy approved by our shareholders at the 2014 Annual General Meeting (AGM).

We announced on 28 October 2015 that Jes Staley was to become Group Chief Executive with effect from 1 December 2015. He was appointed on a salary of £1,200,000 and Role Based Pay of £1,150,000 commensurate with market pay levels. He was not eligible for a 2015 bonus or a grant under the 2016-2018 long term incentive plan (LTIP) cycle. The Committee approved the grant of a share ‘buy-out’ award to compensate him for an unvested share award granted to him by a previous employer which was forfeited as a result of him joining Barclays.

50  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F


Governance: Remuneration report

Annual statement from the Chairman of the Board Remuneration Committee

The award was made on terms aligned to the forfeited award. Jes Staley satisfied, at the date of joining, the executive Directors’ shareholding requirement of four times salary through his personal purchase of 2,790,000 Barclays shares.

During the four month period between Antony Jenkins’ departure as Group Chief Executive and Jes Staley starting in the role, John McFarlane served as Executive Chairman. He indicated to the Committee that he did not wish his remuneration to be increased during that time, and therefore his fee remained unchanged for the period during which he served as Executive Chairman.

The Committee also approved compensation arrangements on Antony Jenkins’ departure as Group Chief Executive during the year. Further details can be found on page 68.

Bonuses for both of the executive Directors in role at the start of 2015 were determined against the financial, Balanced Scorecard and personalperformance measures set at the beginning of the year. Theyear, the Committee approved a pro-rated2016 bonus award of £505,000£1,318,000 (60% of maximum) for Antony Jenkins. A 2015 bonus awardJes Staley and £854,000 (61% of £701,000 was approvedmaximum) for Tushar Morzaria. Tushar Morzaria took on significantly increased executive responsibilities in the second half of 2015 and we regard this bonus as fully deserved in recognition of his strong performance. Further details of the Committee’s 20152016 decisions for the executive Directors are set out on pages 5973 and 74. 70% of Jes Staley’s annual bonus and 60% of Tushar Morzaria’s annual bonus have been deferred in shares. The period over which variable remuneration has been deferred has increased to 61.seven years. Unvested variable remuneration is subject to malus during the vesting period. All variable remuneration awarded to the executive Directors is also subject to clawback for a period of up to 10 years.

DuringThe Committee has agreed that Jes Staley’s Fixed Pay will be unchanged for 2017 at £2,350,000 (2016: salary £1,200,000 and Role Based Pay (RBP) £1,150,000). The Committee has agreed that Tushar Morzaria’s Fixed Pay will be increased to £1,650,000 for 2017 (2016: salary £800,000 and RBP £750,000). In considering the year, we also reviewedappropriate level of Tushar Morzaria’s Total fixed pay (Fixed Pay plus Pension), the Committee took account of the time he has been in role without any increase (over three years), his strong performance and importance to the organisation, and industry market rates for the role. The Committee concluded that an increase of 5.7%, being less than the cumulative increase paid to UK employees over the same period, was warranted but agreed that the executive Directors would not be eligible for any further increase in the next three years (i.e. during the new policy period).

From 2017, Barclays is evolving from the existing Balanced Scorecard approach to one which better reflects progress towards our strategic goals. While many of the performance measures remain consistent with the Balanced Scorecard, the new Performance Measurement Framework allows for a more holistic assessment and broadens our approach to strategicnon-financial measures while retaining a balance of ourkey financial performance measures. The framework has been incorporated into the measures for the 2017 annual bonus and LTIP with effect from the 2017 award. Financial measures will guide 60% of the maximum opportunity for the 2017 annual bonus, and 70% of the maximum opportunity for the 2017 LTIP award.

Agenda for 2017

The Committee will continue to ensure they are appropriate givenfocus on ensuring that remuneration is aligned to the delivery of our strategy and alignsustainable shareholder returns. The Committee will also continue to monitor the interestscompetitiveness of executive Directorsour remuneration in the light of recent regulatory changes by the PRA, FCA and shareholders. We have changed the financial measures and given them an increased weighting of 70% for the award to be granted in 2016 and added a comprehensive Risk Scorecard as the new risk measure which will focus on Barclays’ management of principal risks (including Conduct Risk). Before formal approval, we engaged with shareholders on these changes. Tushar Morzaria is the only participant in this LTIP cycle. Further details are set out on pages 62 and 63.

Regulatory developments

The volume and pace of regulatory change has continued during 2015.

The PRA made revisions to the Remuneration part of its Rulebook (formerly the UK Remuneration Code) which apply from 1 January 2016. These include the seven, five and three year ‘tiered’ deferral requirements for Senior Managers and different categories of Material Risk Taker (MRT) respectively, and the potential extension of the clawback period to 10 years for Senior Managers (under certain circumstances).EBA. These changes which apply globally to Barclays as a UK-headquartered bank, further emphasisehave compounded the competitive disadvantagesdisadvantage for UK based global firms attributable to the lack of a global level regulatory ‘playing field’.

Further revisionsWe will also continue to progress further our agenda to address pay inequality, further details on page 58, which is in line with the Remuneration part ofproposals in the PRA Rulebook are expected during 2016 as a consequence of the European Banking Authority’s (EBA) final GuidelinesGovernment’s Green Paper on sound remuneration policies.Corporate Governance Reform. The most significant changes include a prohibitionCommittee welcomes this Green Paper and supports its intent to strengthen accountability over executive pay. We have provided our views on the payment of dividends on deferred sharesproposals via an industry response and an increase to a one year (from six months) holding period for incentive awards delivered in shares to the large majority of MRTs. The Guidelines apply from 1 January 2017. The application of the Guidelines to UK firms, once confirmed by the PRA and FCA, will contribute to changes to our Directors’ remuneration policy in 2017.

Agenda for 2016

In line with legal requirements, we will be seeking shareholder approval for our Directors’ remuneration policy at the 2017 AGM. As a Committee we will review our remuneration policy to ensure that future arrangements are fully aligned to our strategy to accelerate delivery to shareholders in a manner consistent with Barclays’ Values and also to meet new regulatory requirements. This will be developedmonitor developments over the coming months and we will engage constructively with shareholders and regulators as we do so.months.

Our Remuneration report

We have provided an ‘At a glance’ summary of 2015 performance and pay on the next page. The Annual report on Directors’ remuneration provides further details.

The report has been prepared in accordance with the remuneration disclosures required by the Large andMedium-sized Companies and Groups (Accounts and Reports) (Amendment) Regulations 2013. TheWe are seeking shareholder approval at the 2017 AGM for our new DRP, the Remuneration report (other than the part containing the Directors’DRP) and revisions to the Barclays LTIP in response to changes in regulatory requirements. Further details can be found in the 2017 AGM Notice of Meeting.

I am grateful for the feedback received from our larger shareholders on our remuneration policy)proposals and value the insight the discussions provide. I hope you will be subject to an advisory vote by shareholderssupport these resolutions at the 20162017 AGM.

On behalf of the Board

 

LOGOLOGO

Crawford Gillies

Chairman, Board Remuneration Committee

2922 February 2016

51  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F


Governance: Remuneration report

At a Glance – Performance and pay

How did we perform and pay in 2015?

The Committee’s 2015 pay decisions took full consideration of financial and non-financial performance. Statutory profit before tax decreased between 2014 and 2015 by 8%, while the absolute reduction in the Group incentive pool was 10%.

Since 2010 the Group incentive pool has declined steadily, from £3,484m in 2010 to £1,669m in 2015 – a decrease of more than 50% over five years. Over the same period, Group statutory profit before tax is down 65%.

Group incentive pool

LOGO

How much were executive Directors paid in 2015?

All of the Committee’s 2015 decisions in relation to executive Directors’ remuneration were made within the parameters of the Directors’ remuneration policy which was approved at the 2014 AGM.

    

 

Antony Jenkinsa

£000

   

 

Tushar Morzaria

£000

  

  

   
 
Jes Staleyb
£000
  
  
    2015    2014    2015     2014     2015  
Fixed Pay          
Salary   598    1,100    800     800     100  
Role Based Pay (RBP)   516    950    750     750     96  
Benefits   89    100    82     95     48  
Pension   197    363    200     200     33  
Variable pay          
Annual Bonusc   505    1,100    701     900       
LTIPd   1,494    1,854                
Total pay   3,399            5,467    2,533     2,745     277  

Notes

aThe 2015 figures for Antony Jenkins relate to the period to 16 July 2015 when he ceased to be a Director, save in the case of the LTIP which relates to the whole period pursuant to the LTIP rules. In accordance with his contractual entitlements, Antony Jenkins will receive salary, RBP, benefits and pension, in instalments, until 7 July 2016 subject to mitigation. Full details of his leaving arrangements can be found on page 68.
bThe 2015 figures for Jes Staley relate to the period from 1 December 2015 when he joined the Board as Group Chief Executive. On joining Barclays, Jes Staley was granted a share award of 896,450 Barclays shares to compensate him for an unvested share award granted to him by JP Morgan. The award will be delivered on 14 March 2016 in line with the vesting date of the original JP Morgan award.
c2015 bonus awards reflect the formulaic outcome of 2015 performance against the financial measures and the Committee’s assessment of progress towards the Balanced Scorecard targets. These resulted in a total of 22.1% (out of 50% maximum) and 15% (out of 35%) of the maximum bonus being payable respectively. Personal objectives were assessed by the Committee on an individual basis.
dOver the 2013-2015 LTIP performance period, a return on risk weighted assets (RoRWA) of 0.21% and a loan loss rate (LLR) of 53 bps resulted in nil (out of 50%) outcome for RoRWA and 30% (out of 30%) for LLR. The Balanced Scorecard assessment was 9% (out of 20%). Therefore 39% of the maximum number of shares will be considered for release in March 2016, subject to an additional two year holding period.

How will executive Directors’ pay be structured?

2016 Fixed pay

    
 
Salary
£000
  
  
   
 
RBP
£000
  
  
   
 
Pension
£000
  
  
Jes Staley   1,200     1,150     396  
Tushar Morzaria   800     750     200  

Salary, RBP, pension and benefits are unchanged from 2015.

Variable pay
2016 Annual Bonus
Maximum 80% of fixed pay

2016 performance measures and weighting:

Financial

    Adjusted profit before tax

20%    

    CET1 ratio

20%    

    Adjusted costs

    10%    
50%  

Balanced Scorecard

35%  

Personal objectives

15%  

2016-2018 Long term incentive plan
Maximum 120% of fixed pay

2016-2018 cycle performance measures and weighting:

Financial

    Adjusted return on tangible equity (subject to CET1 ratio underpin)

25%    

    CET1 ratio

25%    

    Cost: income ratio

    20%    
70% 

Balanced Scorecard

15% 
Risk Scorecard(new Risk measure which will focus on Barclays’ management of principal risks, including Conduct Risk)15% 

Tushar Morzaria is the only participant in the 2016-2018 LTIP cycle.2017

 

 

52  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 20152016 Annual Report on Form 20-F  


Governance: Remuneration report

New Directors’ remuneration policy – at a glance

Introduction

Barclays’ new DRP is subject to shareholder approval at the 2017 AGM on 10 May 2017 and, if approved, is intended to apply immediately, for three years to the date of the 2020 AGM.

What were the key factors taken into account when determining the new DRP?

The Committee considered the Barclays’ remuneration philosophy (adopted in 2015), regulatory developments and its experience of operating the prior DRP when designing the new DRP.

Inputs

Outcomes

Alignment with Barclays’ remuneration philosophy

§  Attract and retain talent needed to deliver Barclays’ strategy

§  Align pay with investor interests

§  Reward sustainable performance

§  Support Barclays’ Values and culture

§  Align with risk appetite, risk exposure and conduct expectations

§  Be clear, transparent and as simple as possible

Regulatory developments

§  Longer deferral periods:

–  7 yearpro-rata, from year 3 for PRA Senior Managers (including executive Directors)

–  Extension of clawback periods from 7 to 10 years for PRA Senior Managers (including executive Directors)

§  Applies for first time for 2017 performance year:

–  Prohibition on dividend equivalents on deferred shares

–  Increase to one year (from 6 months) holding period for awards delivered in shares

–  Requirement that LTIP grants are based on performance over prior year as well as forward-looking performance period

What are the key changes to the DRP?

Key changes

Fixed pay

§  ‘Fixed Pay’ introduced, replacing salary and RBP

§  Fixed Pay delivered 50% in cash and 50% in shares (subject to 5 year holding period liftingpro-rata)

§  Fixed Pay will not change during the policy period for either of the current executive Directors

§  Pension allowance retained at current levels, but limited to 10% of Fixed Pay for new hires

Variable pay

§  Bonus and LTIP combined for regulatory deferral purposes

Performance measures

§  Bonus: Financial measures³ 60%

§  LTIP: Financial measures³ 70%

Delivery

§  Any bonus deferral vests in equal tranches between the third and seventh anniversary of award

§  LTIP performance is tested at end of 3 year performance period and vests in equal tranches between the third and seventh anniversary of award

Shareholding requirement

§  Requirement increased to 200% of Total fixed pay (i.e. Fixed Pay plus Pension) within 5 years from their respective date of appointment (from 400% of salary to equivalent of 457% of salary for CEO)

§  New requirement to hold shares worth 100% of Total fixed pay (orpro-rata thereof) for 2 years post-termination

Employment contracts

§  For new hires, asymmetry for notice periods removed i.e. 6 months from the Company and 6 months from the Director (from 12 months from the Company and 6 months from the Director)

LOGO

Full details of the changes to the DRP can be found on page 65.

The full DRP is set out on pages 60 to 72.

Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2016 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  53


Governance: Remuneration report

New Directors’ remuneration policy – at a glance

How will the new DRP be implemented?

The following charts illustrate how the vesting profiles of maximum total compensation for the Group CEO would change from the current policy to the new policy. All share awards are subject to additional holding periods following vesting, during which shares may not be sold or transferred.

LOGO

Subject to shareholder approval of the new DRP, the proposed DRP will apply from the 2017 performance year.

How will the executive Directors’ remuneration be structured in 2017?

Total fixed pay      
    
Fixed Pay
£000
 
 
     
Pension
£000
 
 

  Jes Staley

   2,350      396 

  Tushar Morzaria

   1,650      200 

Annual bonus         LTIP    
  Maximum 80% of Total fixed pay         Maximum 120% of Total fixed pay     
  2017 Performance measures and weighting:      2017-2019 cycle performance measures and weighting:  
  Profit before tax excluding notable items   22.5%     RoTE excluding notable items   25% 
  CET1 ratio   22.5%     CET1 ratio as at 31.12.19   25% 
  Cost:Income ratio excluding notable items   15.0%     Cost:Income ratio excluding notable items   20% 
  Strategic/non-financial   20.0%     Strategic/non-financial   15% 
  Personal objectives   20.0%     Risk Scorecard   15% 

54  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2016 Annual Report on Form 20-F


Governance: Remuneration report

2016 incentives

This section provides details of how the 2016 total incentive award decisions were made.

2016 pay and performance headlines

The key performance considerations which the Committee took into account in making its remuneration decisions for 2016 are highlighted below:

§Group profit before tax was up 182% at £3,230m (2015: £1,146m)

§Group CET1 ratio was up to 12.4% (2015: 11.4%)

§Core profit before tax was up 60% from 2015 at £6,016m. Excluding notable items Core profit before tax was up 4% to £6,436m (2015: £6,191m), and up 10% excluding the impact of deferral changes made in 2016

§RoTE in our Core businesses increased to 8.4% in 2016 (2015: 4.8%). Excluding notable items, Core RoTE was 9.4% (2015: 11.2%)

§strong execution of the rundown ofNon-Core resulting in a reduction in Risk Weighted Assets of £22bn.

The pay outcomes and decisions can be summarised as follows:

§total compensation costs increased 2% to £7,445m (2015: £7,301m) including the impact of the deferral changes. Excluding this impact compensation costs were down 3%

§total incentive awards granted were slightly down at £1,533m (2015: £1,544m)

§the level of incentive pool absorbs the material adverse impact of foreign exchange movements through the year which more than offset the impact of reductions in staff numbers in the year

§the Core compensation to net income ratio improved to (excluding notable items) 32.7% (2015: 34.0%) excluding the impact of deferral changes, increasing slightly to 34.7% including the impact of these changes

§Group compensation to net income ratio (excluding notable items) was 40.2% (2015: 37.7%) driven byNon-Core income reduction as it runs down

§Corporate and Investment Bank (CIB) front office incentive awards were also slightly down at £875m (2015: £884m). Excluding the impact of deferral changes made in 2016, CIB compensation to net income ratio (excluding notable items) was 39.2% (2015: 40.3%)

§there has been continued strong differentiation on the basis of individual performance to allow the Group to more effectively manage compensation costs.

2016 total incentive award decisions

The Committee’s 2016 incentives decisions took full consideration of financial andnon-financial performance and also the material repositioning of incentives undertaken since 2010. Since 2010, the Group incentive pool has declined steadily, from £3,484m in 2010 to £1,533m in 2016 – a decrease of 56% over six years.

LOGO

Notes

a.Part of the reduction in incentive pools in 2014 was due to the introduction of RBP.
b.The 2015 Group incentive pool has been restated from £1,669m to reflect the treatment of Africa Banking as a discontinued operation. The 2010 – 2014 Group incentive pools have not been restated.

Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2016 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  55


Governance: Remuneration report

2016 incentives

Total incentive awards granted – current year

      Barclays Group        
      

Year ended
31.12.16

£m

 
 

 

     

Year ended
31.12.15

£m

 
 

 

     % change 
Incentive awards granted            
Bonus pool     1,459      1,453      0 
Commissions and other incentivesa     74      91      19 
Total incentive awards granted     1,533      1,544      1 
Proportion of bonus pool that is deferred %     30      46     
Reconciliation of incentive awards granted to income statement charge:            
Less: deferred bonuses granted but not charged in current year     (300     (665     55 
Add: current year charges for deferred bonuses from previous years     690      856      19 
Otherb     (26     26        
Income statement charge for performance costsc     1,897      1,761      (8
Total compensation costsd,e     7,445      7,301      (2
Total compensation costs before the impact of deferral changesd,e     7,050      7,301      3 

Notes

aAwards included in 2015 as commitments are now reflected in Bonus pool for consistency with 2016.
bDifference between incentive awards granted and Income Statement charge for commissions and other incentives.
cIncludes the £395m impact of changes to deferral arrangements.
d2015 total compensation costs have been adjusted to exclude the impact of a £429m gain on valuation of a component of the defined benefit liability.
eIn addition £212m of Group compensation (2015: £236m) was capitalised as internally generated software.

Changes to deferral arrangements

From 2016 onwards, costs in relation to deferred bonuses are expensed from the performance year in respect of which they are granted. Approximately 33% of deferred bonus costs will be taken in the year of performance, being the year prior to granting (previously 0%). This acceleration of future cost immediately improves the link betweenin-year performance costs and the size of the incentive pool.

The relationship betweenin-year performance costs and changes in the incentive pool will be further improved through a change to harmonise the deferral approach for all staff across the Group, creating internal consistency. Historically, we have applied deferral levels significantly higher than those required by our regulators for bonus payments made specifically to senior staff in our Investment Bank, making them defer 100% of incentive awards over at least three years, with nothing paid at all in the year in which the performance is delivered. This meant that any change to the Investment Bank pool in incentive awards to those staff had limited impact on thein-year performance costs recognised in our accounts. This approach also put us out of step with peer practice where deferral levels are typically lower. Our new Group deferral approach ensures that all staff will defer at least what is required by our regulators, while all of our highest paid staff will continue to defer more than is required to preserve the strong alignment to future Group performance. This change means that any change in incentive awards will now have a direct and immediate impact on performance costs for the year when the charge is made.

The alignment of deferral levels across the Group also helps from a global competitive perspective given the differences in approach being adopted by the different regulatory regimes. The differences have widened given the recent changes in the UK e.g. the increase in deferral duration to seven years for PRA Senior Managers and to five years for many other MRTs (from three years previously). Harmonising our deferral approach makes the delivery less uncompetitive outside the UK while importantly maintaining our responsibility to all our stakeholders.

Impact of deferral changes

      Barclays Group 

Barclays Group

     

Year ended
31.12.16

%

 
 

 

     

Year ended
31.12.15

%

 
 

 

Compensation costs as a % of net income (excluding notable items)

        

Before impact of deferral changes

     38.1      37.7 

After impact of deferral changes

     40.2      37.7 

Barclays Core

     %      % 

Compensation costs as a % of net income (excluding notable items)

        

Before impact of deferral changes

     32.7      34.0 

After impact of deferral changes

     34.7      34.0 

56  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2016 Annual Report on Form 20-F


Governance: Remuneration report

Remuneration policy for all employees

 

 

This section sets out Barclays’ remuneration policy for all employees, explaining the philosophy underlying the structure of remuneration packages, and how this links remuneration to the achievement of sustained high performance and long-term value creation.

This section sets out Barclays’ remuneration policy for all employees, explaining the philosophy underlying the structure of remuneration packages, and how this links remuneration to the achievement of sustained high performance and long-term value creation.

Remuneration philosophy

In October 2015, the Committee formally adopted a revised, simplified remuneration philosophy which articulates Barclays’ overarching remuneration approach and is set out below.

 

 

Barclays’ Remunerationremuneration philosophy

 

   

 

Attract and retain talent needed to deliver Barclays’ strategy

 

  

 

Long termLong-term success depends on the talent of our employees. This means attracting and retaining an appropriate range of talent to deliver against our strategy, and paying the right amount for that talent

 

 

Align pay with investor interests

 

  

 

Ensure employees’ interests are aligned with those of investors (equity and debt holders), both in structure and the appropriate balance of returns

 

 

Reward sustainable performance

 

  

 

Sustainable performance means making a positive contribution to stakeholders, in both the short and longer term, playing a valuable role in society

 

 

Support Barclays’ Values and culture

 

  

 

Results must be achieved in a manner consistent with our Values. Our Values and culture should drive the way that business is conducted

 

 

Align with risk appetite, risk exposure and conduct expectations

 

  

 

Designed to reward employees for achieving results in line with the Bank’s risk appetite and conduct expectations

 

 

Be clear, transparent and as simple as possible

 

  

 

All employees and stakeholders should understand how we reward our employees. Remuneration structures should be as simple as possible so that everyone can understand how they work and the behaviours they reward

 

RemunerationCulture and performanceremuneration

Barclays’ remuneration philosophy links remuneration to achieving sustained high performance and creating long-term value. Our remuneration philosophy applies to all employees globally across Barclays and aims to reinforce our belief that effective performance management is critical to enabling the wholedelivery of Barclays. It ensures that all employeesour business strategy in line with our Values. Employees who adhere to the Barclays’ Values and contribute to Barclays’ success are aligned with and support the achievement of Barclays’ Group priorities.rewarded accordingly.

This is achieved by linking remuneration to a broadbasing performance assessment of performance, based on expectedclear standards of delivery and behaviour, which are discussedand starts with employees at the start of, and throughout, the performance year. Under the Barclays’ performance management approach, employees are encouraged to align each ofaligning their objectives (‘what’ they will deliver) to business and team goals in order to support the delivery of the business strategy and behaviouralgood customer outcomes. Behavioural expectations (‘how’ people will achieve their objectives) are set in relation tothe context of our Values. This ensures that clear expectations are set for not only ‘what’ employees are expected to deliver, but also ‘how’ they are expected to go about it.

Individual performance is then evaluatedassessed against both the ‘what’ (performance against objectives) and the ‘how’ (demonstration of our Values). This evaluation takes into account various factors including:

§performance against agreed objectives (both financial and non-financial) and core job responsibilities

§adherence to relevant risk policies and procedures and control frameworks

§behaviour in line with Barclays’ Values

§colleague and stakeholder feedback

§input from the Risk and Compliance functions where there are concerns about the behaviour of any individuals or the risk of the business undertaken.

There is no specific weighting between the financial andnon-financial considerations for employees because all of them criteria. Other factors are important to the determination ofalso taken into consideration within the overall performance assessment.assessment, including core job responsibilities, behaviours towards risk and control, colleague and stakeholder feedback as well as input from the Risk and Compliance functions, where appropriate.

LinkingThrough our performance management approach we emphasise the equal importance of both ‘what’ an individual has delivered as well as ‘how’ they have achieved this, encouraging balanced consideration of each dimension. Both of these elements are assessed and rated independently of each other. In 2016 we eliminated the requirement to have an overall rating which should allow for more robust and reflective conversations between managers and team members on the individual components of performance.

A key part of the performance management philosophy promotes ongoing quality dialogue throughout the year. This helps manage performance messages effectively and allows for more timely recognition as well as appropriate coaching and support where needed.

By linking individual performance assessment and remuneration decisions to both the Barclays’ business strategy and our Values and, in this way promotes the delivery of sustainable individual and business performance, and establishesturn, to remuneration decisions, a clear alignment between what we are striving to achieve, how we go about this, and ultimately, how we recognise this in individual financial terms is achieved.

Risk, conduct and remuneration

Another key feature of our remuneration philosophy is the alignment of remuneration with our risk appetite and with the conduct expectations of Barclays, our regulators and stakeholders. The Committee takes risk and conduct events very seriously and ensures that there are appropriate adjustments to individual remuneration and, where necessary, the incentive pool.

The Remuneration Review Panel, which reports to the Committee, supports the Committee in this process. The Panel is chaired by the Chief Risk Officer and includes senior representatives from the key control functions of Risk, Compliance, Internal Audit, Legal and HR as well as the CEOs of Barclays UK and Barclays International. It sets the policy and Barclays’processes for assessing compensation adjustments for risk and conduct events.

We have robust processes for considering risk and conduct as part of individual performance management processes with outcomes reflected in individual remuneration decisions. Line managers have primary accountability for ensuring the risk and conduct issues are considered when assessing performance and making remuneration decisions. In addition, there is a secondary review by the control functions for individuals involved in significant failures of risk management, conduct issues, regulatory actions or other major incidents which impact either the Group or business to ensure these issues are also considered. When considering individual responsibility, a variety of factors are taken into account such as whether an individual was directly responsible or whether the individual, by virtue of seniority, could be deemed indirectly responsible, including staff who drive the Group’s culture and set its strategy.

 

  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 20152016 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  5357


Governance: Remuneration report

Remuneration policy for all employees

 

 

Actions which may be taken where risk management and conduct falls below required standards include:

 

Adjustment

Current year annual bonuses are adjusted downwards where individuals are found to be responsible (either directly or indirectly) in a risk or misconduct event.

Malus

Deferred unvested bonuses from prior years are subject to malus provisions which enable the Committee to reduce the vesting level of deferred bonuses (including to nil) at its discretion. Events which may lead the Committee to do this include, but are not limited to, employee misconduct or a material failure of risk management.

Clawback

Clawback applies to any variable remuneration awarded to a PRA Material Risk Taker (MRT) on or after 1 January 2015 in respect of years for which they are a MRT. Barclays may apply clawback if, at any time during the seven year period from the date on which variable remuneration is awarded to a MRT: (i) there is reasonable evidence of employee misbehaviour or material error, and/or (ii) the firm or the business unit suffers a material failure of risk management, taking account of the individual’s proximity to and responsibility for that incident.

Clawback may be extended to 10 years for PRA Senior Managers where there are outstanding internal or regulatory investigations at the end of the 7 year clawback period.

Where possible, an adjustment will be made to current year annual bonus, before the application of malus and then clawback.

In addition to reductions to individuals’ bonuses, the Committee considers and makes collective adjustments to the incentive pool for specific material risk and conduct events. In 2016, the impact of these collective adjustments, resulting from both the direct financial impact on performance and the additional adjustments applied by the Committee, is a reduction of £150m.

We have also adjusted the incentive pool to take account of an assessment of a wide range of future risks including conduct, non-financial factors that can support the delivery of a strong risk environment, control and conduct culture and other factors including reputation, impact on customers, markets and other stakeholders.

Remuneration structurelevels

The remuneration structure for employees is aligned with that for executive Directors, set out in detail in the Directors’ remuneration policy which was approved by shareholders at the 2014 AGM. A full copy of the policy can be found on the Barclays PLC website. An abridged version is at pages 75 to 83 of this Report.

Employees receive salary, pension and other benefits and are eligible to be considered for an annual bonus. Employees in some customer-facing businesses participate in incentive plans including plans based on a balanced scorecard of performance which has good customer outcomes at its centre. The plans also recognise how results have been achieved in line with Barclays’ Values. Some senior employees receive Role Based Pay (RBP). Remuneration of PRA Material Risk Takers (MRTs) is subject to the 2:1 maximum ratio of variable to fixed pay. A total of 1,523 (2014: 1,277) individuals were MRTs in 2015.

Barclays is a long standinglong-standing supporter of the Living Wage. As an accredited Living Wage employer, Barclays commits to ensure that all permanent UK employees and those UK employees of third party contractors who provide services to us at our sites, are paid at least the current London or UK Living Wage. This is a commitment which we have also extended to all our UK employed apprentices.

Barclays is also fully committed to addressing pay inequality. Barclays’ work in this area is illustrated by recent union pay deals and the repositioning of the incentive pools over recent years. Over the past few years, we have consciously redirected the bonus pool funding, providing proportionally more to junior employees.

For UK employees, average Total Compensation (fixed pay plus bonus) for Managing Directors has reduced materially since 2010 (broadly in line with the reduction in the incentive pool). Over the same period, junior populations have been protected and have seen small increases in Total Compensation despite a challenging business environment. Similarly, salaries have been consciously increased for those within lower corporate grades within the UK. The UK pay deal which was in place for the 2014-2016 period providednon-management populations (primarily outside of the Investment Bank) with a 7.5% merit increase over the three-year period. A new three-year pay deal with Unite was reached in January 2017 which commits for thenon-management population to a 7.5% merit increase over the 2017-2019 period and also commits to a minimum increase of 10% for the most junior graded employees.

Remuneration structure

The remuneration structure for employees is closely aligned with that for executive Directors, set out in detail in the DRP which is at pages 60 to 72 of this report and for which shareholder approval is being sought at the 2017 AGM. The primary exception being that the executive Directors participate in the Barclays’ LTIP.

Employees receive salary, pension and other benefits and are eligible to be considered for an annual bonus. Employees in some customer-facing businesses participate in formulaic incentive plans including plans which have good customer outcomes as the primary performance measure. The plans also recognise how results have been achieved in line with Barclays’ Values. Some senior employees also receive RBP. For executive Directors, under the new DRP, salary and RBP are replaced by Fixed Pay. Remuneration of MRTs is subject to the 2:1 maximum ratio of variable to total fixed pay. A total of 1,561 (2015: 1,523) individuals were MRTs in 2016.

The remuneration of employees engaged in control functions is determined independently from the business they support and within the parameters of the incentive pool allocated to them by the Committee.

58  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2016 Annual Report on Form 20-F


Fixed remuneration

 

Salary

 

 

Salaries reflect individuals’ skills and experience and are reviewed annually in the context of annual performance assessment. They are increased where justified by role change, increased responsibility or a change in the latest availableappropriate market data. rate.

Salaries may also be increased in line with local statutory requirements and in line with union and works council commitments.

 

 

Role Based Pay (RBP)

 

 

 

A small number of senior employees receive a class of fixed pay called RBP to recognise the seniority, breadth and depth of their role.

 

 

Pension and benefits

 

 

 

The provision of a competitive package of benefits is important to attracting and retaining the talented staff needed to deliver Barclays’ strategy. Employees have access to a range of country specific company fundedcountry-specific company-funded benefits, including pension schemes, healthcare, life assurance and BarclaysBarclays’ share plans as well as other voluntary employee funded benefits. The cost of providing these benefits is defined and controlled. Gracechurch Services Corporation is used to employ US nationals seconded overseas allowing them to retain eligibility to US benefits.

 

Variable remuneration

 

 

Annual bonus

 

 

Annual bonuses incentivise and reward the achievement of Group, business and individual objectives, and reward employees for demonstrating individual behaviours in line with Barclays’ Values.

 

 

 

The ability to recognise performance through variable remuneration enables the Group to control its cost base flexibly and to react to events and market circumstances. Bonuses remain a key feature of remuneration practice in the highly competitive and mobile market for talent in the financial services sector. The Committee is careful to control the proportion of variable to fixed remuneration paid to individuals.

 

 

 

From 2016, the typical deferral structures are:

For MRTs:                    Fornon-MRTs:                    
 

Incentive award

Amount deferred

Bonus deferral levels are significantly in excess of PRA requirements.Incentive award

Amount deferred

 

< £500,000
40% of total awardUp to £65,0000%
 £500,000 to £1,000,00060% of total award> £65,000Graduated level of deferral
³ £1,000,000

60% up to £1,000,000

The typical deferral structures include:100% above £1,000,000

 

  For MRTs:     For non-MRTs:     For Managing Directors in the Investment Bank:
 

Incentive award

  Amount deferred            

Incentive award

  

Amount deferred            

      Incentive award  

Amount deferred

 < £500,000  40%    Up to £65,000  0%    All values  100%
 ³ £500,000  60%    > £65,000  

Graduated level

of deferral

     

 

Deferred bonuses are generally delivered in equal portions as deferred cash under the Cash Value Plan (CVP) and deferred shares under the Share Value Plan (SVP), each typically vesting in annual tranches over three years subject to the rules of the deferred cash and share plans (as amended from time to time) and continued service. From 2016, deferred bonuses are subject to either a 3, 5 or 7 year deferral period in line with regulatory requirements.

Share plans

Alignment of senior employees with shareholders is achieved through deferral of incentive pay. We also encourage wider employee shareholding through theall-employee share plans. 82% of the global employee population (excluding Africa) is eligible to participate.

Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2016 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  59


Governance: Remuneration report

Directors’ remuneration policy

This section sets out the proposed new Barclays’ forward-looking remuneration policy for Directors, which has evolved from the existing policy and explains each element of remuneration and how it operates. The policy described in this section is intended to apply for three years beginning on the date of the 2017 AGM, subject to shareholder approval.

The existing policy can be found on pages 100 to 110 of the 2013 Annual Report or at home.barclays/annualreport.

Remuneration policy for executive Directors

Element and purposeOperationMaximum value and performance measures

A. Fixed pay

Fixed Pay

To reward skills and experience appropriate for the breadth and depth of the role and to provide the basis for a competitive remuneration package

Fixed Pay is determined with reference to market practice and historical market data (on which the Committee receives independent advice), and reflects the individual’s experience and role.

Executive Directors’ total compensation is benchmarked against comparable roles in the following banks: Bank of America, BNP Paribas, Citigroup, Credit Suisse, Deutsche Bank, HSBC, JP Morgan Chase & Co, Lloyds, Morgan Stanley, Standard Chartered and UBS. The Committee may amend the list of comparator companies to ensure it remains relevant to Barclays or if circumstances make this necessary (for example, as a result of takeovers or mergers).

50% of Fixed Pay is delivered in cash (paid monthly), and 50% is delivered in shares. The shares are delivered quarterly and are subject to a holding period with restrictions lifting over five years (20% each year). As the executive Directors beneficially own the shares, they will be entitled to any dividends paid on those shares.

Malus and clawback provisions do not apply to Fixed Pay.

Fixed Pay for executive Directors is set within the benchmark range determined by the Committee taking into account their experience and performance.

The maximum Fixed Pay is £2,350,000 for Jes Staley (Group Chief Executive) and £1,650,000 for Tushar Morzaria (Group Finance Director).

These amounts are fixed and will not change during the policy period for these individuals.

There are no performance measures.

Pension

To enable executive Directors to build long-term retirement savings

Executive Directors receive an annual cash allowance in lieu of participation in a pension arrangement.

The maximum annual cash allowance is £396,000 for Jes Staley (Group Chief Executive) and £200,000 for Tushar Morzaria (Group Finance Director).

These amounts are fixed and will not change during the policy period for these individuals.

Benefits

To provide a competitive and cost effective benefits package appropriate to the role and location

Executive Directors’ benefits provision includes, but is not restricted to, private medical cover, annual health check, life and ill health income protection, car cash allowance, and use of a Company vehicle and driver when required for business purposes.

In addition to the above, if an executive Director were to relocate, additional support would be provided for a defined and limited period of time in line with Barclays’ general employee mobility policy including, but not restricted to, the provision of temporary accommodation, tax advice, home leave related costs, payment of removal costs and relocation flights for the executive Director, spouse and children. Barclays will pay the executive Director’s tax on the relocation costs but will not tax equalise and will also not pay the tax on any other employment income.

The maximum value of the benefit is determined by the nature of the benefit itself and costs of provision may depend on external factors, e.g. insurance costs.

60  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2016 Annual Report on Form 20-F


Remuneration policy for executive Directorscontinued

Element and purposeOperationMaximum value and performance measures

B. Variable pay

Annual bonus

To reward delivery of short-term financial targets set each year, the individual performance of the executive Directors in achieving those targets, and their contribution to delivering Barclays’ strategic objectives

Delivery in part in shares with a holding period increases alignment with shareholders. Deferred bonuses encourage longer term focus and retention

Determination of annual bonus

Individual bonuses are discretionary and decisions are based on the Committee’s judgement of executive Directors’ performance in the year, measured against Group and personal objectives.

Delivery structure

Annual bonuses are delivered as a combination of cash and shares, a proportion of which may be deferred and/or subject to a holding period.

Deferral proportions and vesting profiles will be structured so that, in combination with any LTIP award, the proportion of variable pay that is deferred is no less than that required by regulations.

Deferred bonuses are granted by the Committee (or an authorisedsub-committee) at its discretion, subject to the relevant plan rules as amended from time to time.

Dividend equivalents, in the form of additional shares, are payable on the vested deferred bonus shares, equal to the dividends paid or payable between the award date and the relevant release date. If dividend equivalents are not permissible under regulations, the number of deferred bonus shares to be awarded will be based on a share price discounted by reference to an expected dividend yield over the vesting period. In such circumstances, the Committee has discretion to reduce (not increase) the number of shares that vest if actual dividends paid over the period are materially lower than the original dividend assumption.

A notional discount may be applied to the deferred bonus awards for the purposes of calculating the 2:1 cap to the extent this is permitted by regulations (currently a discount is permitted on up to 25% of variable pay where the conditions for applying such a discount are met).

Operation of risk and conduct adjustment, malus and clawback

Any bonus awarded will reflect appropriate consideration in relation to Group risk and conduct events. Individual bonus decisions may also reflect appropriate reductions in relation to specific risk and conduct events. Any bonus is also subject to malus and clawback provisions.

The malus provisions enable the Committee to reduce the amount of unvested bonus (including to nil) prior to the unvested bonus vesting in specified circumstances, including, but not limited to:

§  a participant deliberately misleading Barclays, the market and/or shareholders in relation to the financial performance of the Barclays Group

§  a participant causing harm to Barclays’ reputation or where his/her actions have amounted to misconduct, incompetence or negligence

§  a material restatement of the financial statements of the Barclays Group or any subsidiary, or the Group or any business unit suffering a material downturn in its financial performance

§  a material failure of risk management in the Barclays Group

§  a significant deterioration in the financial health of the Barclays Group

The maximum annual bonus opportunity is 80% of Total fixed pay. For these purposes Total fixed pay is Fixed Pay plus Pension.

The performance measures by which any executive Director’s bonus is assessed include financial andnon-financial measures which also include risk-related measures and personal objectives. In making its assessment of any bonus, the Committee will consider financial factors to guide at least 60% of the bonus opportunity. Any bonus is discretionary and any amount may be awarded from zero to the maximum value.

The Committee has the discretion to vary the measures and their respective weightings within each category. The measures and weightings will be disclosed annually as part of the Annual report on Directors’ remuneration.

Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2016 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  61


Governance: Remuneration report

Directors’ remuneration policy

Remuneration policy for executive Directorscontinued

Element and purposeOperationMaximum value and performance measures

B. Variable pay continued

The clawback provisions enable amounts to be recovered after they have vested (for a period of seven years from grant/ten years in specified circumstances e.g. where a relevant investigation is ongoing at the end of the initial seven year period) in circumstances where (i) a participant’s actions or omissions have amounted to misbehaviour and material error and/or (ii) Barclays or the relevant business unit has suffered a material failure of risk management.

Timing of receipt

Non-deferred cash components of any bonus are paid following the performance year to which they relate, normally in March.Non-deferred share bonuses are also awarded normally in March and are subject to a holding period (after the payment of tax) in line with regulations and with release no faster than permitted by regulations (currently minimum of six months, increasing to one year for the 2017 performance year).

Deferred share bonuses are structured so that no deferred shares vest faster than permitted by regulations (currently in five equal tranches with the first vesting on or around the third anniversary of grant and the last tranche vesting on or around the seventh anniversary of grant). Vesting is also subject to the provisions of the plan rules including employment and the malus and clawback provisions (as explained above). Any shares that vest are subject to an additional holding period (after payment of tax) in line with regulations and with release no faster than permitted by regulations (currently minimum of six months, increasing to one year for the 2017 performance year).

62  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2016 Annual Report on Form 20-F


Remuneration policy for executive Directorscontinued

Element and purposeOperationMaximum value and performance measures

B. Variable pay continued

Long Term Incentive Plan (LTIP) award

To reward execution of Barclays’ strategy over a multi-year period

Long-term performance measurement, deferral and holding periods encourage a long-term view and align executive Directors’ interests with those of shareholders. Malus and clawback provisions discourage excessive risk-taking and inappropriate behaviours

Determination of LTIP award

LTIP awards are made by the Committee following discussion of recommendations made by the Chairman (for the Group Chief Executive’s LTIP award) and by the Group Chief Executive (for other executive Directors’ LTIP awards) based on satisfactory performance over the prior year.

Delivery structure

LTIP awards are granted subject to the plan rules and are satisfied in Barclays’ shares (although they may be satisfied in other instruments as may be required by regulation).

LTIP awards are structured so that when combined with the annual bonus the proportion of variable pay that is deferred is no less than that required by regulations.

For each award, forward-looking performance measures are set at grant and there is no retesting allowed of those conditions. The Committee has, within the parameters set out opposite, the flexibility to vary the weighting of performance measures and calibration for each award prior to its grant.

The Committee has discretion, and in line with the plan rules approved by shareholders, in exceptional circumstances to amend targets, measures, or the number of awards if an event happens (for example, a major transaction) that, in the opinion of the Committee, causes the original targets or measures to be no longer appropriate or such adjustment to be reasonable. The Committee also has the discretion to reduce the vesting of any award, including to nil, if it deems that the outcome is not consistent with performance delivered.

Dividend equivalents, in the form of additional shares, are payable on the vested deferred shares, equal to the dividends paid or payable between the award date and the relevant release date. If dividend equivalents are not permissible under regulations, the number of shares to be awarded will be based on a share price discounted by reference to an expected dividend yield over the vesting period. In such circumstances, the Committee has discretion to reduce (not increase) the number of shares that vest if actual dividends paid over the period are materially lower than the original dividend assumption.

A notional discount may be applied to LTIP awards for the purposes of calculating the 2:1 cap to the extent this is permitted by regulations (currently a discount is permitted on up to 25% of variable pay where the conditions for applying such a discount are met).

Operation of malus and clawback

The achievement of performance measures determines the extent to which LTIP awards will vest. Awards are also subject to malus during the vesting period and clawback for a period of seven years (10 years in specific circumstances) from the date of award which enables the Committee to reduce the vesting level of awards (including to nil). This is explained further in the annual bonus paragraphs above.

Timing of receipt

Barclays LTIP awards are structured so that no award vests before the third anniversary of grant and an award vests no faster than permitted by regulations (currently in five equal tranches with the first tranche vesting on or around the third anniversary of grant and the last tranche vesting on or around the seventh anniversary of the grant date). Any shares that vest are subject to an additional holding period (after payment of tax) in line with regulations, with restrictions lifting no faster than permitted by regulations (currently minimum of six months, increasing to one year for the 2017 performance year).

The maximum annual LTIP award is 120% of Total fixed pay. For these purposes Total fixed pay is Fixed Pay plus Pension.

Vesting is dependent on performance measures and service.

Forward-looking performance measures will be based on financial performance and other long-term strategic measures. The Committee has discretion to change the weightings but financial measures will be at least 70% of the total opportunity. Measures and weightings will be set in advance of each grant. The threshold and maximum level of performance for each financial performance measure will be disclosed annually as part of the Annual report on Directors’ remuneration. Straight-line vesting applies between threshold and maximum for the financial measures and weightings with no more than 25% vesting at threshold performance.

Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2016 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  63


Governance: Remuneration report

Directors’ remuneration policy

Remuneration policy for executive Directorscontinued

Element and purposeOperationMaximum value and performance measures

C. Other

All employee share plans

To provide an opportunity for executive Directors to voluntarily invest in the Company through UK HMRC employee tax advantaged share schemes

Executive Directors are entitled to participate in:

(i)  Barclays Sharesave under which they can make monthly savings over a period of three or five years linked to the grant of an option over Barclays’ shares which can be at a discount of up to 20% on the share price set at the start.

(ii)  Barclays Sharepurchase under which they can make contributions (monthly or lump sum) out ofpre-tax pay (if based in the United Kingdom) which are used to acquire Barclays’ shares.

(i)  Savings between £5 and the maximum set by Barclays (which will be no more than the HMRC maximum) per month. There are no performance measures.

(ii)  Contributions of between £10 and the maximum set by Barclays (which will be no more than the HMRC maximum) per tax year which Barclays may match up to HMRC maximum (current match is £600). There are no performance measures.

Previous legacy awards

To honour existing awards and payments

Awards granted and/or payments agreed at a time where a previous policy, approved by shareholders, was in place, may be released and/or paid in accordance with such previous policy notwithstanding that such awards and/or payments may not be in line with the new policy described above.

In line with existing arrangements.

Shareholding requirement

To further enhance the alignment of shareholders’ and executive Directors’ interests in long-term value creation

Executive Directors must build up a shareholding of 200% of Total fixed pay (i.e. Fixed Pay plus Pension) within five years from the date of appointment as executive Director. They have a reasonable period to build up to this requirement again if it is not met because of a significant share price depreciation.

Executive Directors must also continue to hold a shareholding for two years post-termination as follows:

(i)  if the executive Director has been employed for more than five years: 100% of Total fixed pay; or

(ii)  if the executive Director has been employed for less than five years: either

(a) grow their holding to thepro-rated requirement if thepro-rated requirement has not been met. Directors would only be allowed to sell shares to pay for tax liabilities which crystallise when deferred awards vest on or after termination; or

(b) if thepro-rated requirement has been exceeded, executive Directors would be allowed to sell shares above this requirement and also sell shares to pay for tax liabilities which crystallise when deferred awards vest on or after termination.

Shares that count towards the requirement are beneficially owned shares including any vested share awards subject only to holding periods (including vested LTIPs, vested deferred share bonuses, Fixed Pay shares, and RBP shares). Shares from unvested deferred share bonuses and unvested LTIPs do not count towards the requirement.

Barclays’ shares worth a minimum of 200% of Total fixed pay must be held within five years plus a shareholding of 100% of Total fixed pay (orpro-rata thereof) for two years post termination.

Outside appointments

To encourage self-development and allow for the introduction of external insight and practice

Executive Directors may accept onenon-executive Director board appointment in another listed company.

The Chairman’s approval must be sought before accepting an appointment. Fees may be retained by the executive Director. Neither of the executive Directors currently hold an outside appointment.

Not applicable.

64  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2016 Annual Report on Form 20-F


Notes to the table on pages 60 to 64

Performance measures and targets

The Committee select financial performance measures which are fundamental to delivery against the Bank’s strategy and are considered to be the most important financial measures used by the executive Directors to oversee the direction of the business. Thenon-financial performance measures and sources of data are chosen to represent key indicators of sustainable performance that are robustly monitored and reported on to management. The measures are determined in consultation with major shareholders.

Financial targets are set to be stretching but achievable and are aligned to enhancing shareholder value. In respect of the LTIP, the financial measures, weightings and targets will be disclosed at the start of the relevant performance period. In respect of the annual bonus, the financial measures and weightings will be disclosed at the start of the relevant performance year. The Committee is of the opinion that the financial targets for the annual bonus are commercially sensitive in respect of the Company and that it would be detrimental to disclose details at the start of the relevant performance year. Performance against the targets will be disclosed at the end of the relevant peformance year in that year’s remuneration report, subject to commercial sensitivity no longer remaining.

The existing Balanced Scorecard has evolved into a ‘Performance Measurement’ framework which better reflects progress towards our strategic andnon-financial goals. Enhancements to the available sources of management information and reporting, ranging from internal dashboards to external third party measures, allows for a more holistic view of sustainable business performance, rather than focusing on a few narrowly defined targets. The evaluation will focus on key performance measures (many continuing from the Balanced Scorecard), with a detailed retrospective disclosure on progress throughout the period against each category, together with supporting rationale for payments.

Changes in remuneration policy for 2017

The following table provides a summary of the changes to the DRP for 2017:

  ElementChangeRationale for change
  Fixed Pay

§

Consolidate salary and RBP into a single ‘Fixed Pay’ element (delivered 50% in cash and 50% in shares subject to a 5 year holding period liftingpro-rata).

§

Simplicity, transparency.

§

Fixed Pay will not change during the policy period for either of the current executive Directors.

  Pension

§

Continue pension allowance as a separate allowance:

§

Supports simplified approach to fixed pay.

–  for existing executive Directors, amount unchanged but fixed for the duration of this policy

–  for new hires, pension allowance limited to 10% of Fixed Pay.

  Variable pay

§

Combine annual bonus and LTIP for deferral purposes, while retaining maximum variable at 200% of Total fixed pay and 60:40 split between maximum LTIP and annual bonus.

§

Mitigates the global competitive impact of longer deferral periods and holding periods under the PRA Remuneration Rules and the EBA Guidelines on sound remuneration policies

§

Performance measures

§

Simplicity, transparency.

–  Bonus: financial performance measures at least 60%.

–  LTIP: financial performance measures at least 70%.

§

Dividends

§

Recreates shareholder alignment lost through regulatory dividend prohibition.

–  Where regulatory constraints prevent dividend alignment, use discounted share price to calculate number of shares under award.

–  Committee has discretion to reduce the number of shares that vest if actual dividends paid are materially lower than original dividend assumption.

  Shareholding   requirement

§

Increase requirement to 200% of Total fixed pay (i.e. Fixed Pay plus Pension) from 400% of Salary.

§

Longer and stronger shareholder alignment (equivalent to 457% of salary for CEO).

§

Introduce shareholding requirement of 2 years post
termination of 100% of Total fixed pay (orpro-rata thereof).
  Employment   contracts

§

For new hires, 6 months’ notice from the Company and 6 months’ notice from the executive Director.

§

Remove asymmetry for notice periods.

 

 

§

Alignment between the employee and the
Company.
  Leavers

§

Apply eligible leaver treatment to deferred bonus and LTIP awards from 5 years (except for termination for gross misconduct). Ability to apply malus for the full vesting period maintained.

§

Partially mitigates the global competitive impact of longer deferral periods (increasing from 3 years to 7 years) and holding periods under the PRA Remuneration Rules and the EBA Guidelines respectively.

 

 

§

Pro-ration of LTIP for eligible leavers retained but based on 4 year performance period, i.e. includes assessment period prior to grant.

§

Alignment to the EBA Guidelines for performance assessment prior to award.

§

Clawback extended to 10 years in specific circumstances.

Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2016 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  65


Governance: Remuneration report

Directors’ remuneration policy

Differences between the remuneration policy of the executive Directors and the policy for all employees of the Barclays Group

The structure of remuneration packages for executive Directors is closely aligned with that for the broader employee population. Employees receive salary, pension and benefits and are eligible to be considered for a bonus and to participate inall-employee share plans. The broader employee population typically does not have a contractual limit on the quantum of remuneration and does not receive RBP which is paid only to some, but not all, MRTs and other senior employees. Under the new DRP, executive Directors do not receive RBP.

As with executive Directors, variable pay for the broader employee population is performance based. Variable pay for executive Directors and the broader employee population are subject to deferral requirements. Executive Directors and other MRTs are subject to deferral at a minimum rate of 40% (for variable pay of less than £500,000) or 60% (for variable pay between £500,000 and £1,000,000) or 60% up to £1,000,000 and 100% above £1,000,000 (for variable pay of more than £1,000,000). Fornon-MRTs, bonuses in excess of £65,000 are currently subject to a graduated level of deferral. The terms of deferred bonus awards for executive Directors and the wider employee population are broadly the same, in particular the vesting of all deferred bonuses (subject to service and malus conditions).

The broader employee population does not currently participate in the Barclays LTIP.

How shareholder views and broader employee pay are taken into account by the Committee in setting policy and making remuneration decisions

We recognise that remuneration is an area of particular interest to shareholders and that in setting and considering changes to remuneration it is critical that we listen to and take into account their views. Accordingly, a series of meetings are held each year with major shareholders and shareholder representative groups. The Committee Chairman attends these meetings, accompanied by senior Barclays’ employees (including the Group Reward and Performance Director and the Company Secretary). The Committee notes that shareholder views on some matters are not always unanimous, but values the insight and engagement that these interactions provide, including the expression of sometimes different views. This engagement is meaningful and helpful to the Committee in its work and contributes directly to the decisions made by the Committee. Shareholders’ feedback has been incorporated into the new DRP.

The Committee takes account of the pay and employment conditions of the broader employee base when it considers the remuneration of the executive Directors. The Committee receives and reviews analyses of summary remuneration proposals for employees across all of the Group’s businesses. When the Committee considers executive Directors’ remuneration, it therefore makes that consideration in the context of a detailed understanding of remuneration for the broader employee population to ensure consistency throughout the Group.

66  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2016 Annual Report on Form 20-F


Executive Directors’ policy on recruitment

Barclays operates in a highly specialised sector and many of its competitors for talent are outside of the United Kingdom. The Committee’s approach to remuneration on recruitment is to pay no more than is necessary to attract the best candidates to the role.

Approval of the remuneration packages offered on appointment to any new executive Director is a specific requirement of the Committee’s Terms of Reference. The terms of such packages must be approved by the Committee in consultation with the Chairman and (except for the terms of his own remuneration) the Group Chief Executive.

Any new executive Director’s package would include the same elements as those of the existing executive Directors, as shown below.

Element of remunerationCommentaryMaximum value
Fixed PayDetermined by experience, market practice, market conditions and ability to recruit.

As determined by the Committee with reference to these factors. Fixed Pay will only exceed amounts paid to current executive Directors, as considered reasonable by the Committee, by reference to these factors.

If on appointment Fixed Pay is equal to or greater than maximum stated for the relevant role in the policy (for current executive Director), no changes are allowed over the policy period.

If on appointment Fixed Pay is at a level below the maximum stated for the relevant role in the policy (for current executive Director), the Committee retains the discretion to realign Fixed Pay over a transitional period which may mean that annual Fixed Pay increases for the new appointee are required up to such maximum amounts.

PensionIn line with policy.10% of Fixed Pay.
BenefitsIn line with policy.In line with policy.
Annual BonusIn line with policy.80% of Total fixed pay.
Long Term Incentive PlanIn line with policy.120% of Total fixed pay.
Buy-outThe Committee can consider buying out forfeited bonus opportunity or incentive awards that the new executive Director has forfeited as a result of accepting the appointment with Barclays, subject to proof of forfeiture where applicable.The value of any buy-out is not included within the maximum incentive levels above since it relates to a buy-out of forfeited bonus opportunity or incentive awards from a previous employer.
As required by the PRA Remuneration Rules, any award made to compensate for forfeited remuneration from the new executive Director’s previous employment may not be more generous than, and must mirror as far as possible the expected value, timing and form of delivery of, the terms of the forfeited remuneration and must be in the best long-term interests of Barclays. Barclays’ deferral policy shall however apply as a minimum to anybuy-out of annual bonus opportunity.

Where a senior executive is promoted to the Board, his or her existing contractual commitments agreed prior to his or her appointment may still be honoured in accordance with the terms of the relevant commitment including vesting of anypre-existing deferred bonus or long-term incentive awards.

Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2016 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  67


Governance: Remuneration report

Directors’ remuneration policy

Executive Directors policy on payment for loss of office (including or following a takeover)

The Committee’s approach to payments in the event of termination is to take account of the individual circumstances including the reason for termination, individual performance, contractual obligations and the terms of the deferred bonus plans and LTIPs in which the executive Director participates.

Provisions relating to executive Directors’ termination

Standard provisionPolicyDetails
Notice periods in executive Directors’ service contracts

For existing executive Directors. twelve months’ notice from the Company and six months’ notice from the executive Director.

For new executive Director hires, six months’ notice from the Company and six months’ notice from the executive Director.

Executive Directors may be required to work during the notice period or may be placed on garden leave or, if not required to work the full notice period, may be provided with pay in lieu of notice (subject to mitigation where relevant).

Pay during notice period or payment in lieu of notice per service contractsFixed Pay payable and continuation of pension and other contractual benefits while an employee during notice period.

Fixed Pay delivered in cash is payable in phased instalments (or lump sum) and subject to mitigation if paid in instalments and executive Director obtains alternative employment during the notice period or while on garden leave.

Fixed Pay delivered in shares is delivered on the next quarterly delivery date and ispro-rated for the number of days from the start of the relevant quarter to the termination date. Where Barclays elects to terminate the employment with immediate effect by making a payment in lieu of notice, the executive Director will not receive any shares that would otherwise have been payable during the period for which the payment in lieu is made (unless required otherwise by regulations or local law).

In the event of termination for gross misconduct neither notice nor payment in lieu of notice is given.

Treatment of annual bonus on termination

No automatic entitlement to bonus on termination, but may be considered at the Committee’s discretion,pro-rated for service, and subject to performance measures being met. No bonus would be payable in the case of gross misconduct or resignation.

Treatment of unvested deferred bonus awards

In the case of death or if the executive Director is an ‘eligible leaver’ the executive Director would continue to be eligible to be considered for unvested portions of deferred awards, subject to the rules of the relevant plan, unless the Committee determines otherwise in exceptional circumstances. ‘Eligible leaver’ is defined as leaving due to injury, disability or ill health, retirement, redundancy, the business or company which employs the executive Director ceasing to be part of the Group or the employer terminating employment, other than in circumstances which amount to gross misconduct or dismissal for cause. In addition, the Committee will apply its discretion to treat resignation on or after the fifth anniversary of the date of grant as ‘eligible leaver’ status. Outstanding deferred bonus awards would lapse if the executive Director leaves by reason of resignation prior to fifth anniversary, is terminated for gross misconduct or cause, or is otherwise not designated an ‘eligible leaver’.

 

Deferred bonusesawards are subject to malus provisions which enable the Committee to reduce the vesting level of deferred bonuses (including to nil) at its discretion. Events which may leadand once vested are subject to clawback provisions (as described above).

In the event of a takeover or other major corporate event, the Committee has absolute discretion to do this include, but are not limited to, employee misconductdetermine whether all outstanding awards would vest early or a material failurewhether they should continue in the same or revised form following the change of risk management.control. The Committee may also determine that participants may exchange existing awards for awards over shares in an acquiring company with the agreement of that company.

 

Clawback applies to any variable remuneration awarded to a MRT on or after 1 January 2015 in respect of years for which they are a MRT. Barclays may apply clawback if, at any time during the seven year period from the date on which variable remuneration is awarded to a MRT: (i) there is reasonable evidence of employee misbehaviour or material error, and/or (ii) the firm or the business unit suffers a material failure of risk management, taking account of the individual’s proximity to and responsibility for that incident.

Share plans

 

AlignmentIn an ‘eligible leaver’ situation, deferred bonus awards may be considered for release in full on the scheduled release dates unless the Committee determines otherwise in exceptional circumstances. After release, the shares are subject to an additional holding period in line with regulations (currently minimum of senior employees with shareholders is achieved through deferral of incentive pay intosix months, increasing to one year for the SVP. We also encourage wider employee shareholding through the all employee share plans. 82% of the global employee population (excluding Africa) are eligible to participate.

2017 performance year).

 

5468  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 20152016 Annual Report on Form 20-F  


Governance: Remuneration report

2015 incentives

This section provides details of how 2015 total incentive award decisions were made.

2015 pay and performance headlines

The key performance considerations which the Committee took into account in making its remuneration decisions for 2015 are highlighted below:

§Group adjusted profit before tax was down 2% to £5,403m (2014: £5,502m) while the Investment Bank adjusted profit before tax was up 17% at £1,611m (2014: £1,377m)

§Group statutory profit before tax was down 8% at £2,073m (2014: £2,256m)

§the CET1 ratio was up to 11.4% (2014: 10.3%)

§the leverage ratio was up to 4.5% (2014: 3.7%)

§Balanced Scorecard – progress has been made against the Balanced Scorecard in respect of 2018 targets.

The pay outcomes and decisions can be summarised as follows:

§the Group compensation to adjusted net income ratio improved to 37.2% (2014: 37.7%). The Core compensation to adjusted net income ratio also improved to 34.7% (2014: 35.7%)

§the Group compensation to statutory net income ratio improved to 35.7% (2014: 38.5%)

§total compensation costs decreased 6% to £8,339m (2014: £8,891m). Total compensation costs in the Investment Bank were down 5% at £3,423m (2014: £3,620m)

§total incentive awards granted were £1,669m, down 10% on 2014. Investment Bank incentive awards granted were £976m, down 7% on 2014

§there has been strong differentiation on the basis of individual performance to allow the Group to more effectively manage compensation costs

§average value of incentive awards granted per Group employee is £12,900 (2014: £14,100) and the average value of incentive awards granted per Investment Bank employee is £46,500 (2014: £51,400)

§levels of bonus deferral continue to significantly exceed the minimum requirements in the Remuneration part of the PRA Rulebook and are expected to remain among the highest deferral levels globally. 2015 bonuses awarded to Managing Directors in the Investment Bank were again 100% deferred.

2015 pay – Questions and answers

How do you justify a 2015 incentive pool of £1,669m?

The Committee remains focused on aligning pay to performance and setting pay at a level which is no more than necessary but is motivational to ensure that we accelerate the delivery of shareholder value.

In line with our financial performance, the final 2015 incentive pool at £1,669m is down 10% on 2014.

The following chart illustrates the reduction in variable remuneration over the period from 2010.

Barclays incentive pools

    

    

LOGO

Notes

Provisions relating to executive Directors’ terminationcontinued

a2013 Investment Bank incentive pool
Standard provisionPolicyDetails
Treatment of unvested awards under the LTIP

In the case of death or if the executive Director is an ‘eligible leaver’ the executive Director would continue to be entitled to be considered for an award. ‘Eligible leaver’ is defined as leaving due to injury, disability or ill health, retirement, redundancy, the business or company which employs the executive Director ceasing to be part of the Group or for any other reason if the Committee decides at its discretion. In addition, the Committee will apply its discretion to treat resignation on or after the fifth anniversary of the date of grant as ‘eligible leaver’ status. Outstanding unvested awards under the LTIP would lapse if the executive Director leaves by reason of resignation prior to fifth anniversary, is terminated for gross misconduct, or is otherwise not designated an ‘eligible leaver’.

Awards are subject to malus provisions which enable the Committee to reduce the vesting level of awards (including to nil) and once vested, awards are subject to clawback provisions (as described above).

In the event of a takeover or other major corporate event (but excluding an internal reorganisation of the Group), the Committee has been restated from £1,574mabsolute discretion to determine whether all outstanding awards vest subject to the achievement of any performance conditions. The Committee has discretion to apply apro-rata reduction to reflect the business reorganisation. The 2010, 2011 and 2012 Investment Bank incentive pools have not been restated.

bPartunexpired part of the reductionvesting period. The Committee may also determine that participants may exchange awards for awards over shares in incentive poolsan acquiring company with the agreement of that company. In the event of an internal reorganisation, the Committee may determine that outstanding awards will be exchanged for equivalent awards in 2014 was dueanother company.

In an ‘eligible leaver’ situation, awards may be considered for release on the scheduled release dates,pro-rated for time (over the whole performance period, including the assessment period prior to grant for awards granted on or after 10 May 2017) and performance, subject to the introductionCommittee’s discretion to determine otherwise in exceptional circumstances, in accordance with the plan rules, as amended from time to time. After release, the shares (net of Role Based Pay.deductions for tax) are subject to an additional holding period (currently minimum of six months, increasing to one year for the 2017 performance year).
cFor a reconciliation
Repatriation

Except in the case of total incentive awards grantedgross misconduct or resignation, where an executive Director has been relocated at the commencement of employment, the Company may pay for the executive Director’s repatriation costs in line with Barclays’ general employee mobility policy including temporary accommodation, payment of removal costs and relocation flights for the executive Director, spouse and children. The Company will pay the executive Director’s tax on the relocation costs but will not tax equalise and will also not pay tax on his or her other income relating to the relevant income statement charge, see tabletermination of employment.

Other

Except in the case of gross misconduct or resignation, the Company may pay for the executive Director’s legal fees and tax advice relating to the termination of employment and provide outplacement services. The Company may pay the executive Director’s tax on page 56.these particular costs.

 

  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 20152016 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  5569


Governance: Remuneration report

Directors’ remuneration policy

    

 

 

What have you doneIllustrative scenarios for executive Directors’ remuneration

The charts below show the potential value of the current executive Directors’ 2017 total remuneration under the new DRP in termsthree scenarios: ‘Minimum’ (i.e. Fixed Pay, Pension and benefits), ‘Maximum’ (i.e. Fixed Pay, Pension and benefits and the maximum variable pay that may be awarded) and‘Mid-point’ (i.e. Fixed Pay, Pension and benefits and 50% of conduct adjustments in 2015?the maximum variable pay that may be awarded). For the purposes of these charts, the value of benefits is based on an estimated annual value for 2017. The scenarios do not reflect share price movement between award and vesting.

A key featuresignificant proportion of our revisedthe potential remuneration philosophyof the executive Directors is the alignment of remuneration with risk appetite and with the conduct expectations of Barclays, our regulators and stakeholders. The Committee takes risk and conduct events very seriously and ensures that there are appropriate adjustments to individual remuneration and, where necessary, the incentive pool.

The Remuneration Review Panel, which reports to the Committee, supports the Committee in this process. The Panel is chaired by the Chief Risk Officer and includes senior representatives from the key control functions of Risk, Compliance, Internal Audit, Legal and HR. It sets the policy and processesvariable and is responsible for assessingtherefore performance-related. It is also subject to deferral, additional holiding periods, malus and recommending to the Committee compensation adjustments for risk and conduct events.

We have a robust process for considering risk and conduct as part of individual performance management reviews with outcomes reflected in individual incentive decisions. When considering individual responsibility, a variety of factors are taken into account such as:clawback.

 

§Total remuneration opportunity:Group Chief Executive (£000)

  whether the individual was solely responsible for the event or whether others were also responsible, if not directly involved,

§ whether the individual was aware (or could reasonably have been expected to be aware) of the failure,

Total remuneration opportunity:Group Finance Director (£000)

 

§

LOGO

  whether the individual took or missed opportunities to take adequate steps to address the failure, and

§ whether the individual, by virtue of seniority, could be deemed indirectly responsible, including staff who drive the Group’s culture and set its strategy.

LOGO

Individuals who were directly or indirectly accountableIn the above illustrative scenarios, benefits include regular contractual benefits. Additional ad hoc benefits may arise, for an event have had their remuneration adjusted as appropriate. This includes reductionsexample, overseas relocation of executive Directors, but will always be provided in current year bonus levels and reductions in vesting amounts of deferred awards through the application of malus. In addition, a number of employees have been terminated for responsibility and accountability for risk and conduct events resolved during the year. The Committee fully acknowledges the impact such risk and conduct events have on shareholders and believes it is wholly appropriate that this should be reflected in incentive decisions for those whose performance and conduct falls short of Barclays’ standards.

The Committee recognises that conduct events continue to weigh on Group performance, impacting profitability and returns, so in addition to reductions to individuals’ incentive outcomes, material adjustments have also been made to the incentive pool for conduct. These included, but were not limited to, the settlement reachedline with the New York State Department of Financial Services in respect of its investigation into electronic trading of Foreign Exchange, the settlements reached with the US Securities and Exchange Commission and New York State Attorney General in respect of those agencies’ investigations relating to the operation of LX (an alternative trading system), and the settlement reached with the FCA following an investigation into whether Barclays carried out the appropriate due diligence in connection with a transaction it executed in 2012.

The Committee also made a further adjustment in respect of the settlements reached with a number of authorities in May 2015 in relation to investigations into certain sales and trading practices in the Foreign Exchange market and the setting of the US Dollar ISDAFIX benchmark, over and above the substantial adjustments made in 2014 as part of the Committee’s prudent approach towards incentive funding. The Committee took a similar prudent approach in determining 2015 incentive funding.

The overall impact on the incentive pool resulting from both the direct financial impact on performance and the additional adjustments applied by the Committee is a reduction in excess of £600m.

We have also, in addition to the adjustment for specific risk and conduct issues, adjusted the incentive pool to take account of an overall assessment of a wide range of future risks (including Conduct), non-financial factors that can support the delivery of a strong conduct culture and other factors including reputation, impact on customers, markets and other stakeholders.

Total incentive awards granted – current year and deferred (audited)

         Barclays Group               Investment Bank       
    
 
 
Year ended
31.12.15
£m
  
  
  
   
 

 

Year ended
31.12.14

£m

  
  

  

   % change     
 
 
Year ended
31.12.15
£m
  
  
  
   
 

 

Year ended
31.12.14

£m

  
  

  

   % change  
Total current year bonus   839     885     5     367     381     4  
Total deferred bonus   661     757     13     579     634     9  
Bonus pool   1,500     1,642     9     946     1,015     7  
Commissions, commitments and other incentives   169     218     22     30     38     21  
Total incentive awards granted   1,669     1,860     10     976     1,053     7  
Proportion of bonus that is deferred   44%     46%       61%     62%    
Total employees (full time equivalent)   129,400     132,300     2     21,000     20,500     (2
Average bonus per employee   £12,900     £14,100     9     £46,500     £51,400     10  

Deferral levels vary according to the incentive award quantum. With reductions in incentive award levels, this has reduced the proportion of the bonus that is deferred.

Deferred bonuses are delivered, subject to the rules, and only once an employee meets certain conditions, including continued service. This creates a timing difference between the communication of the bonus pool and the charges that appear in the income statement which are reconciled in the table below:

Reconciliation of total incentive awards granted to income statement charge (audited)

         Barclays Group          Investment Bank            
    
 
 
Year ended
31.12.15
£m
  
  
  
   
 

 

Year ended
31.12.14

£m

  
  

  

   % change     
 

 

Year ended
31.12.15

£m

  
  

  

   
 
 
Year ended
31.12.14
£m
  
  
  
   % change  
Total incentive awards for 2015   1,669     1,860     10     976     1,053     7  
Less: deferred bonuses awarded in 2015   (661   (757   13     (579   (634   9  
Add: current year charges for deferred bonuses from previous years   874     1,067     18     736     854     14  
Othera   2     (108     51     12    
Income statement charge for performance costs   1,884     2,062     9     1,184     1,285     8  

Note

a Difference between incentive awards granted and income statement charge for commissions, commitments and other incentivesDRP.

 

5670  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 20152016 Annual Report on Form 20-F  


Governance: Remuneration report

2015 incentives

    

    

§Employees only become eligible to receive payment from a deferred bonus once all of the relevant conditions have been fulfilled, including the provision of services to the Group.

Remuneration policy fornon-executive Directors

This section provides details of the remuneration policy for the Chairman andnon-executive Directors.

 

§

Element and purpose

  The income statement charge for performance costs

Operation

Maximum value

Fees

Reflect individual responsibilities and membership of Board Committees and are set to attractnon-executive Directors who have relevant skills and experience to oversee the implementation of our strategy

Fees are set at a level which reflects the chargerole, responsibilities and time commitment which are expected from the Chairman, Deputy Chairman andnon-executive Directors

The Chairman and Deputy Chairman are paid anall-inclusive fee for employees’ actual servicesall Board responsibilities. The Chairman has a minimum time commitment equivalent to at least 80% of a full-time role. The othernon-executive Directors receive a basic Board fee, with additional fees payable where individuals serve as a member or Chairman of a Committee of the Board.

Fees are reviewed each year by the Board as a whole.

£30,000 (Chairman: £100,000) after tax and national insurance contributions per annum of eachnon-executive Director’s basic fee is used to purchase Barclays’ shares which are retained on thenon-executive Director’s behalf until they retire from the Board.

Somenon-executive Directors may also receive fees as directors of subsidiary companies of Barclays PLC. In the case of certain subsidiary appointments, such additional remuneration is approved by the Board Nominations Committee.

Fees are reviewed against those fornon-executive Directors in companies of similar size and complexity. Other than in exceptional circumstances, fees will not increase by more than 20% above the current fee levels during this policy period (basic fees last increased in 2011).

Benefits

The Chairman is provided with private medical cover subject to the Group duringterms of the relevant calendar year (including where those services fulfil conditions attachedBarclays’ scheme rules from time to previously deferred bonuses). It doestime, and is provided with the use of a Company vehicle and driver when required for business purposes.

Benefits which are minor in nature and in any event do not include charges for deferred bonuses where conditions haveexceed a cost of £500 may be provided tonon-executive Directors in specific circumstances.

Non-executive Directors are not been met.

eligible to join Barclays’ pension plans.

 

§Expenses

  As a consequence, the 2015 incentive awards granted decreased 10% compared to 2014, while the income statement charge

The Chairman andnon-executive Directors are reimbursed for performance costs decreasedany reasonable and appropriate expenses incurred for business reasons. Any tax that arises on these reimbursed expenses is paid by 9%.

Income statement charge (audited)Barclays.

    Barclays Group     Investment Bank  
    
 
 
Year ended
31.12.15
£m
  
  
  
   
 

 

Year ended
31.12.14

£m

  
  

  

   % change     
 

 

Year ended
31.12.15

£m

  
  

  

   
 
 
Year ended
31.12.14
£m
  
  
  
   % change  

Deferred bonus charge

   874     1,067     18      736      854     14   

Current year bonus charges

   839     885          367      381       

Commissions, commitments and other incentives

   171     110     (55)     81      50     (62)  

Performance costs

   1,884     2,062          1,184      1,285       

Salariesa

   4,954     4,998          1,847      1,749     (6)  

Social security costs

   594     659     10      248      268       

Post retirement benefitsbc

   545     624     13      112      120       

Allowances and trading incentives

   147     170     14      56     ��64     13   

Other compensation costs

   215     378     43      (24)     134       

Total compensation costsd

   8,339     8,891          3,423      3,620       

 

Other resourcing costs

                              

Outsourcing

   1,034     1,055          15      9     (67)  

Redundancy and restructuring

   134     358     63      84      239     65   

Temporary staff costs

   697     530     (32)     248      176     (41)  

Other

   185     171     (8)     51      42     (22)  

Total other resourcing costs

 

   2,050     2,114          398      466     15   

Total staff costs

   10,389     11,005          3,821      4,086       
                               

Compensation as % of adjusted net income

   37.2%     37.7%       45.5%      47.6%    

Compensation as % of statutory net income

   35.7%     38.5%          45.5%      47.6%       

Compensation as % of adjusted income

   34.0%     34.6%       45.2%      47.7%    

Compensation as % of statutory income

   32.8%     35.2%          45.2%      47.7%       

Notes

aSalaries include Role Based Pay and fixed pay allowances.
bPost retirement benefits charge includes £246m (2014: £242m) in respect of defined contribution schemes and £(130)m credit (2014: £382m) in respect of defined benefit schemes.
c2015 post-retirement benefits have been adjusted to exclude the impact of a £429m (2014: nil) gain on valuation of a component of the defined benefit liability. Including the gain would result in a compensation: adjusted net income ratio of 35.3% and a compensation: adjusted income ratio of 32.3%. The aforementioned gain is already included in the statutory ratios.
dIn addition, £236m of Group compensation (2014: £250m) was capitalised as internally generated software.

 

§Bonus and share plans

  Total staff costs decreased 6%

The Chairman is required to £10,389m, principally reflectingbe eligible to participate in HMRC employee tax advantaged share schemes, due to his 80% of a 9% decreasefull-role time commitment, but has opted not to participate. The Chairman is not eligible to participate in performance costsany other Barclays’ cash, share or long-term incentive plans.

All othernon-executive Directors are not eligible to participate in Barclays’ cash, share or long-term incentive plans.

Notice and a 63% decrease in redundancy and restructuring charges.

termination provisions

§  Performance costs decreased 9%, reflecting

Eachnon-executive Director’s appointment is for an initial six year term, renewable at Barclays’ discretion for a 18% decreasesingle term of three years thereafter and subject to annualre-election by shareholders.

Notice period

Chairman: twelve months from the Company (six months from the Chairman).Non-executive Directors: six months from the Company (six months from thenon-executive Director).

Termination payment policy

The Chairman’s appointment may be terminated by Barclays on 12 months’ notice or immediately in which case 12 months’ fees and contractual benefits are payable in instalments at the chargestimes they would have been received had the appointment continued, but subject to mitigation if he or she were to obtain alternative employment. There are similar termination provisions for deferred bonuses,non-executive Directors based on 6 months’ fees. No continuing payments of fees (or benefits) are due if a 5% decrease innon-executive Director is notre-elected by shareholders at the bonus charge partially offset by an increase in other performance charges.Barclays AGM.

§Redundancy and restructuring charges decreased 63% to £134m, predominantly due to the non-recurrence of the 2014 restructuring costs in the Investment Bank.

Deferred bonuses awarded are expected toIn accordance with the policy table above, any new Chairman and Deputy Chairman would be charged to the income statementpaid anall-inclusive fee only and any newnon-executive Director would be paid a basic fee for their appointment as anon-executive Director, plus fees for their participation on and/or chairing of any Board committees, time apportioned in the years outlined in the table that follows.first year as necessary. Nosign-on payments are offered tonon-executive Directors.

 

  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 20152016 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  5771


��Governance: Remuneration report

Directors’ remuneration policy

        

 

 

YearService contracts and letters of appointment

All executive Directors have a service contract whereas allnon-executive Directors have a letter of appointment. Copies of the service contracts and letters of appointment respectively are available for inspection at the Company’s registered office. The dates of the current Directors’ service contracts and letters of appointment are shown in which income statement charge is expected to be taken for deferred bonuses awarded to dateathe table below.

    Actual   Expectedb 
    
 
 
Year ended
31.12.14
£m
  
  
  
   
 
 
Year ended
31.12.15
£m
  
  
  
   
 
 
Year ended
31.12.16
£m
  
  
  
   
 
 
2017 and
beyond
£m
  
  
  
Barclays Group        
Deferred bonuses from 2012 and earlier bonus pools   488     117     13       
Deferred bonuses from 2013 bonus pool   579     293     111     17  
Deferred bonuses from 2014 bonus pool        464     194     100  
Deferred bonuses from 2015 bonus pool             370     247  
Income statement charge for deferred bonuses   1,067     874     688     364  
Investment Bank                    
Deferred bonuses from 2012 and earlier bonus pools   398     101     11       
Deferred bonuses from 2013 bonus pool   456     239     93     13  
Deferred bonuses from 2014 bonus pool        396     167     80  
Deferred bonuses from 2015 bonus pool             341     217  
Income statement charge for deferred bonuses   854     736     612     310  

Bonus pool componentExpected grant dateExpected payment date(s)cYear(s) in which income statement charge arisesd
Current year cash bonus

§   March 2016

§   March 2016

§   2015

Current year share bonus

§   March 2016

§   March 2016

§   2015

Deferred cash bonus

§   March 2016

§   March 2017 (33.3%)

§   2016  (48%)

§   March 2018 (33.3%)

§   2017  (35%)

§   March 2019 (33.3%)

§   2018  (15%)

§   2019 (2%)

Deferred share bonus

§   March 2016

§   March 2017 (33.3%)

§   2016  (48%)

§   March 2018 (33.3%)

§   2017  (35%)

§   March 2019 (33.3%)

§   2018  (15%)

§   2019 (2%)

Notes

aThe actual amount charged and payments made are subject to all conditions being met prior to the expected payment date and will vary compared with the above expectation. In addition, employees receiving a deferred cash bonus may be awarded a service credit of 10% of the initial value of the award at the time that the final instalment is made, subject to continued employment. Dividend equivalent shares may also be awarded under SVP awards.
bDoes not include the impact of grants which will be made in 2016 and 2017.
cShare awards may be subject to an additional holding period.
dThe income statement charge is based on the period over which conditions are met.

 

58

Effective date

  Chairman
  John McFarlane1 January 2015(non-executive Director), 24 April 2015 (Chairman)
  Executive Directors
  Jes Staley1 December 2015
  Tushar Morzaria15 October 2013
  Non-executive Directors
  Michael Ashley18 September 2013
  Tim Breedon1 November 2012
  Mary Francis1 October 2016
  Crawford Gillies1 May 2014
  Sir Gerry Grimstone1 January 2016
  Reuben Jeffery III16 July 2009
  Dambisa Moyo1 May 2010
  Diane de Saint Victor1 March 2013
  Diane Schueneman25 June 2015
  Steve Thieke7 January 2014

All Directors are put forward forre-election at each AGM, unless they have indicated that they will not seekre-election at the AGM.

Discretion

In addition to the various operational discretions that the Committee can exercise in the performance of its duties (including those discretions set out in the Company’s share plans), the Committee reserves the right to make either minor or administrative amendments to the policy to benefit its operation or to make more material amendments in order to comply with new laws, regulations and/or regulatory guidance. The Committee would only exercise this right if it believed it was in the best interests of the Company to do so and where it is not possible, practicable or proportionate to seek or await shareholder approval in General Meeting.

72  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 20152016 Annual Report on Form 20-F  


Governance: Remuneration report

Annual report on Directors’ remuneration

        

 

 

  This section explains how our Directors’ remuneration policy was implemented during 2015.

This section explains how our Directors’ remuneration policy was implemented during 2016.

Executive Directors

Executive Directors: Single total figure for 20152016 remuneration (audited)

The following table shows a single total figure for 20152016 remuneration in respect of qualifying service for each executive Director together with comparative figures for 2014.2015.

 

    

 

Salary

£000

  

  

   
 
Role Based Pay
£000
  
  
   
 
Taxable benefits
£000
  
  
   Annual bonus £000     

 

LTIP

£000

  

  

   

 

Pension

£000

  

  

 

Total

£000

  

  

        2015     2014     2015     2014     2015     2014       2015      2014     2015     2014         2015         2014        2015     2014  
 Antony Jenkinsa   598     1,100     516     950     89     100     505     1,100     1,494     1,854     197     363     3,399    5,467  
 Tushar Morzaria   800     800     750     750     82     95     701     900               200     200     2,533    2,745  
 Jes Staleyb   100          96          48                                 33           277       
    

Salary

£000

 

 

   

Role Based Pay

£000

 

 

   

Taxable benefits

£000

 

 

   

Annual bonus

£000

 

 

   

LTIP

£000

 

 

   

Pension

£000

 

 

 

£000

Total

 

 

    2016    2015    2016    2015    2016    2015      2016      2015    2016    2015    2016    2015     2016     2015 
  Jes Staleya   1,200    100    1,150    96    169    48    1,318                 396    33    4,233    277 
  Tushar Morzaria   800    800    750    750    44    82      854      701    1,008        200    200     3,656     2,533 

NotesNote

aThe 2015 figures for Antony Jenkins relate to the period to 16 July 2015 when he ceased to be a Director, save in the case of the LTIP which relates to the whole performance period. Details of his leaving arrangements are provided on page 68.
bThe 2015 figures for Jes Staley relate to the period from 1 December 2015 when he joined the Board as Group Chief Executive.

John McFarlane was appointed Executive Chairman from 17 July 2015 pending the appointment of a new Group Chief Executive. At his request, he received no increase in fees. Details of his fees are provided on page 67. John McFarlane is not eligible to participate in Barclays’ cash, share or long-term incentive plans or pension plans.

Additional information in respect of each element of pay for the executive Directors (audited)

Salary

Jes Staley commenced employment as Group Chief Executive on 1 December 2015 onhas been paid a salary of £1,200,000 per annum.annum since his appointment to the Group Chief Executive role on 1 December 2015. Tushar Morzaria was paid a salary of £800,000 per annum as Group Finance Director. Antony Jenkins was paid a salary of £1,100,000 per annum.

Role Based Pay (RBP)

Executive Directors receivereceived RBP which iswas delivered quarterly in shares, subject to a holding period with restrictions lifting over five years (20% each year). The value shown is of shares at the date awarded.

Taxable benefits

Taxable benefits include private medical cover, life and ill health income protection, tax advice, relocation, home leave related costs, car allowance, the use of a company vehicle and driver when required for business purposes and other benefits that are considered minor in nature.

Annual bonus

Annual bonuses are discretionary and are typically awarded in Q1 following the financial year to which they relate. The 2015 bonus awards reflect the Committee’s assessmentCommittee considered each of the extent to whichexecutive Directors’ performance against the executive Directors achieved their Financialfinancial (50% weighting) and Balanced Scorecard (35% weighting) performance measures andwhich had been set to reflect strategic priorities for 2016. Performance against their individual personal objectives (15% weighting). More information is assessed on an individual basis.

2016 annual bonus outcomes

Financial (50% weighting)

The approach taken to assessing financial performance against each of the financial measures is based on a straight-line outcome between 25% for threshold performance and 100% applicable to each measure for achievement of maximum performance.

The formulaic outcome from 2016 performance against the financial measures gave a total of 29% out of 50% being payable attributable to those measures. A summary of the assessment is provided in the following table.

  Financial

  performance measure

  Weighting              Threshold 25%              Maximum 100%  2016             Actual  2016               Outcome  
  Profit before tax (excluding notable items)  20%  £3.45bn  £4.20bn  £3.65bn  9%  
  Costs (excluding notable items)  10%  £14.6bn  £13.7bn  £15.3bn  0%  
  CET1 ratio  20%  11.1%  11.6%  12.4%  20%  
  Total Financial  50%           29%  

When reflecting upon the appropriate 2016 bonus, the Committee considered the impact of the deferral changes on the formulaic outcomes against the financial measures. In particular, the Committee noted that while the decision to accelerate the deferral charges would improve the Group’s operational flexibility going into 2017 and beyond, it would also lead to a lower 2016 bonus outcome than could have been justified absent the changes. However, on balance, the Committee felt that the overall outcomes were appropriate particularly given theon-going focus to rebalance towards improving shareholder returns.

Balanced Scorecard (35% weighting)

Progress in relation to each of the 5Cs of the Balanced Scorecard was assessed by the Committee. The Committee took a similar approach as for 2015 i.e. based on a three-point scale in relation to each measure, with 0% to 2% for ‘below’ target, 3% or 4% for a ‘met’ target, and 5% to 7% for ‘above’ target progress against a particular Balanced Scorecard component.

Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2016 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  73


Governance: Remuneration report

Annual report on Directors’ remuneration

Based on this approach to assessing performance against 2016 Balanced Scorecard milestones, the Committee agreed a 18% outcome out of a maximum of 35%. A summary of the assessment is provided in the following table.

Balanced Scorecard – 5 Cs   Weighting     Metric   

2016

Target

 

 

   
2016
Actual
 
 
  

2016  

Outcome out  

of maximum  

7% for each ‘C’  

Customer and Client   7%     

PCB, Barclaycard and Africa Banking weighted

average ranking of RNPS v peer sets

Client Franchise Risk

   4th    4th   4%  
            
             6th    5th    
Colleague   7%     Sustained engagement of colleagues’ score   77-79%    75%   3%  
          % women in senior leadership   24%    24%    
Citizenship   7%     Citizenship Plan – initiatives on track or ahead   Plan targets    8/10  ��5%  
Conduct   7%     Conduct Reputation (YouGov Survey)   5.5-5.6/10    5.4/10   2%  
Companyb   7%     Return on tangible equityc   4.8%    4.4%   
      Cost:Income ratioc   70%    72%   4%  
          CET1 ratio   11.3%    12.4%    
Total Balanced Scorecard   35%                  18%  

Note

aCompany metrics have been updated to reflect the 1 March 2016 strategy announcement.
bExcluding notable items.
cCost: Income ratio expressed as total operating expenses of the Group, including Africa, divided by the total income of these businesses.

Individual outcomes including assessment of personal objectives

Performance against each of the executive Directors’ individual personal objectives (15% weighting overall) was assessed by the Committee on an individual basis.

(i) Jes Staley

A summary of the assessment for Jes Staley against his specific performance measures andis provided in the outcomes for the 2015 bonuses isfollowing table.

Performance measure      Weighting   Outcome  
Financial  See table on page 73   50%   29%  
Balanced Scorecard – 5Cs  See table above   35%   18%  
Personal objectives  Judgemental assessment – see below   15%   13%  
Total      100%   60%  
Final outcome approved by the Remuneration Committee       60%  

The Committee assessed Jes Staley’s performance against his 2016 personal objectives (as set out on pages 60page 97 of the 2015 Annual Report) and 61.concluded that Jes Staley had delivered a very strong performance throughout the year. By the end of 2016, a clear new strategy was not eligiblefirmly embedded and a new Core organisational structure consistent with structural reform has been implemented. The Core businesses have performed well, delivering improved profitability and cost income efficiency. At the same time significant progress has been made in exiting theNon-Core businesses. Jes Staley has demonstrated strong leadership, strengthened the management team and has instilled a more effective performance ethic and culture within the organisation. Given his strong personal performance, the Committee judged that 13% of a maximum of 15% attributable to individual objectives was appropriate.

In aggregate, the performance assessment for a 2015 bonus.

Jes Staley resulted in an overall formulaic outcome of 60% of each executive Director’s 2015maximum bonus will beopportunity being achieved. The resulting 2016 bonus is £1,318,000 of which 70% is deferred in the form of a share award under the Share Value Plan vesting over three yearsand will vest in five equal tranches from the third to seventh anniversary (subject to the rules of the Share Value Plan as amended from tiem to time).

(ii) Tushar Morzaria

A summary of the assessment for Tushar Morzaria against his specific performance measures is provided in the following table.

Performance measure      Weighting   Outcome  
Financial  See table on page 73   50%   29%  
Balanced Scorecard – 5Cs  See table above   35%   18%  
Personal objectives  Judgemental assessment – see below   15%   14%  
Total      100%   61%  
Final outcome approved by the Remuneration Committee       61%  

The Committee assessed Tushar Morzaria’s performance against his 2016 personal objectives (as set out on page 97 of the 2015 Annual Report) and concluded that Tushar Morzaria had delivered an outstanding performance in 2016. In doing so, the Committee noted the role provided by Tushar Morzaria in reshaping the business and in particular, recognised his contribution in the significant progress in exitingNon-Core, resulting in a reduction of 22bn in Risk Weighted Assets and his focus in delivering an organisation with onea significantly higher CET1 ratio and lower Cost:Income ratio. In doing so, it was also noted that Tushar Morzaria has continued to develop very strong working relationships with shareholders, investors and regulators, while also improving the performance delivery within the Finance Functions. Given his exceptional personal performance during 2016, the Committee judged that 14% of a maximum 15% attributable to individual objectives was appropriate.

In aggregate, the performance assessment for Tushar Morzaria resulted in an overall formulaic outcome of 61% of maximum bonus opportunity being achieved. The resulting 2016 bonus is £854,000 of which 60% is deferred under the Share Value Plan and will vest in five equal tranches from the third vesting each year. 20% will be paid in cash and 20% delivered in shares. to seventh anniversary (subject to the rules of the Share Value Plan as amended from time to time).

All shares (whether deferred or not deferred)not) are subject to a further six month holding period from the point of release. 20152016 bonuses are subject to clawback provisions and, additionally, unvested deferred 20152016 bonuses are subject to malus provisions which enable the Committee to reduce the vesting level of deferred bonuses (including to nil).

74  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2016 Annual Report on Form 20-F


LTIP

The LTIP amount included in Antony Jenkins’ 2015Tushar Morzaria’s 2016 single total figure is the value of the amount scheduled to be released in relation to the LTIP award granted in 20132014 in respect of performance period 2013-2015.2014-2016 (by reference to Q4 average share price). As Tushar Morzaria and Jes Staley werewas not participantsa participant in this cycle, the LTIP figure in the single figure table is shown as zero for them.him. Release is dependent on, amongstamong other things, performance over the period from 1 January 20132014 to 31 December 2015.2016. Straight line vesting applied between the threshold and maximum points in respect of the RoRWA and loan loss rate measures. The performance achieved against the performance targets is as follows.

 

 Performance measure  Weighting      Threshold  Maximum vesting  Actual    % of award vesting

 Return on risk weighted

 assets (RoRWA)

  50%  13% of award vests for average annual RoRWA of 1.1%  Average annual RoRWA of 1.6%  0.21%    0%
 Loan loss rate  30%  10% of award vests for average annual loan loss rate of 75bps  Average annual loan loss rate of 60bps or below  53bps    30%
 Balanced Scorecard  20%  Performance against the Balanced Scorecard was assessed by the Committee to determine the percentage of the award that may vest between 0% and 20%. Each of the 5Cs in the Balanced Scorecard has equal weighting.  See below    9%
 Total                39%

Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  59


Performance measure   Weighting       Threshold  Maximum vesting       Actual   % of award vesting        
Return on risk weighted assets (RoRWA)   50%   23% of award vests for average annual RoRWA of 1.08%  Average annual RoRWA of 1.52%   0.33%   0%
Loan loss rate   20%   7% of award vests for average annual loan loss rate of 70bps  Average annual loan loss rate of 55bps or below   50bps   20%
Balanced Scorecard   30%   Performance against the Balanced Scorecard was assessed by the Committee to determine the percentage of the award that may vest between 0% and 30%. Each of the 5Cs in the Balanced Scorecard has equal weighting.   See below   14%
Total               34%

A summary of the Committee’s assessment against the Balanced Scorecard performance measure over the three year performance period is provided below.

 

Category  Performance  

Vesting out of

maximum 4%6%

for each ‘C’

 Customer and ClientThe Customer and Client        §Relationship metrics remained stable atNet Promoter Score performance against peers was 4th place as a strong performance in corporate banking, combined with improvements in Barclaycardduring the period. Across key product categories, notably UK and Barclays current accounts was offset by the impact of reshaping the Wealth business and competitive challenges in South Africa. The UK credit cards, Barclays’ scores have improved with more customers advocating our brands.3%
§Client Franchise Rank remained stable at 5th placerank throughout the period, a positive result given the shift in challenging market conditions.strategy to focus on geographies and businesses of strength in the Investment
Bank.
  2%
Colleague  

There has been continued advancement towards Barclays’ 2018 gender goal of 26% women§

Continued improvement in the female representation across our senior leadership, roles;rising from 22% in 2014 to 24% at 23% by the end of 2015.

Sustained Engagement is currently 75%, a positive result in light of the on-going change the organisation has experienced in 2015. Further work is required to achieve the 2018 target.

2%
 CitizenshipIn Citizenship Plan, 10 out of 11 metrics on target shows Barclays is having a positive impact on the communities in which it operates, with lending to households the only initiative to lose momentum primarily as a result of market and trading conditions.2016.  3%
  §Colleague engagement improved from 72% in 2014 to 75% overall in 2016, a positive result in the light of the change the organisation has undergone over the period.
Citizenship§Continuing on from the successful Citizenship Plan, which closed 2015 with 10 out of 11 initiatives on or ahead of target, Barclays Group (ex Africa) exceeded objectives on all 6 initiatives
in the first year of the Shared Growth Ambition.
4%
§Africa also delivered strong performance on investment in education and SME financing, both of which were on track for 2016. Two objectives wereoff-track due to external challenges
which impacted the delivery of planned employability and financial inclusion interventions (although foundations are now established which will enable strong 2017 momentum).
Conduct  While §Conduct reputation, as measured by the YouGov survey, improvedremained at or below 5.4 over the period.1%
§However, new conduct items and costs have reduced.
Company§The CET1 ratio has strengthened significantly over the period, to 12.4% at the Committee nevertheless determined that, by reference to the material conduct events that crystallised during the performance period, nil vesting was appropriate.end of 2016.  0%3%
  Company  There has been a significant strengthening in the CET1 ratio, which is ahead of 2018 target, however there is plenty of work to do to deliver an acceptable return to shareholders, with adjusted RoE slightly down on 2014.§ 2%However, returns excluding notable items (both RoE and RoTE) were below target through much of the period.
Total    9%14%

The LTIP award is also subject to a discretionary underpin whereby the Committee must be satisfied with the underlying financial health of the Group based on profit before tax. The Committee was satisfied that this underpin was met, and accordingly determined that the award should be considered for release to the extent of 39%34% of the maximum number of shares under the total award. The shares are scheduled to be released in March 2016.2017. After release, the shares are subject to an additional two year holding period.

Pension

Executive Directors are paid cash in lieu of pension contributions. This is market practiceThe cash allowance in 2016 was 33% of salary for senior executives in comparable roles.

2015 Annual bonus outcomes

The Committee considered eachJes Staley and 25% of the eligible executive Directors’ performance against the financial and non-financial measures which had been set to reflect the strategic prioritiessalary for 2015. Performance against their individual personal objectives (15% weighting overall) is assessed on an individual basis. The Committee may exercise its discretion to amend the formulaic outcome of assessment against the targets.

Financial (50% weighting)

The approach taken to assessing financial performance against each of the financial measures is based on a straight line outcome between 25% for threshold performance and 100% applicable to each measure for achievement of maximum performance.

The formulaic outcome from 2015 performance against the financial measures gave a total of 22.1% out of 50% being payable attributable to those measures. A summary of the assessment is provided in the following table.

 Financial

 performance measure

  Weighting        Threshold 25%     Maximum 100%       2015 Actual       
 
2015
    Outcome
  
  
 Adjusted profit before tax  20%       £5,801m     £7,022m       £5,403m       0.0%  
 Adjusted costs (ex CTA)  10%       £16,780m     £15,182m       £16,205m       5.2%  
 CET1 ratio  10%       10.47%     11.34%       11.4%       10.0%  
 Leverage ratio  10%        4.17%     4.72%       4.5%       6.9%  
 Total Financial  50%                           22.1%  

60  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F


Governance: Remuneration report

Annual report on Directors’ remuneration

Balanced Scorecard (35% weighting)

Progress in relation to each of the five ‘Cs’ of the Balanced Scorecard was assessedTushar Morzaria. No other benefits were received by the Committee. The Committee took an approach based on a three-point scale in relation to each measure, with 0% to 3% for ‘below’ target, 4% or 5% for a ‘met’ target, and 6% or 7% for ‘above’ target progress against a particular Balanced Scorecard component.

Based on this approach to assessing performance against 2015 Balanced Scorecard milestones, the Committee agreed a 15% outcome out of a maximum of 35%. A summary of the assessment is provided in the following table.

 Balanced Scorecard – 5 Cs   Weighting      Metric   
 
2015
Target
  
  
   
 
2015
Actual
  
  
  

2015

Assessment

by the

Committee

  

2015  

Outcome out  

of maximum  

  7% for each ‘C’  

 Customer and Client   7%      PCB, Barclaycard and Africa Banking weighted average ranking of Relationship Net Promoter Score v peer sets Client Franchise Risk   4th     4th    Met target  4.0%  
              
             5th     5th    Met target   
 Colleague   7%      Sustained engagement of colleagues’ score   82-88%     75%    Below target  
          % women in senior leadership   23%     23%    Met target  2.0%  
 Citizenship   7%      Citizenship Plan – initiatives   11/11     10/11    Below target  3.0%  
 Conduct   7%      Conduct Reputation (You Gov Survey)   5.6/10     5.4/10    Below target  3.0%  
 Company   7%      Adjusted return on equity   5.9%     4.9%    Below target  
          CET1 ratio   11.0%     11.4%    Above target  3.0%  
 Total Balanced Scorecard   35%                      15.0%  

Individual outcomes including assessment of personal objectives

Performance against each of the executive Directors’ individual personal objectives (15% weighting overall) was assessed by the Committee on an individual basis.

(i) Antony Jenkins

A summary of the assessment for Antony Jenkins against his specific performance measures is provided in the following table.

 Performance measure         Weighting    Outcome  
 Financial  See table on page 60     50%    22.1%  
 Balanced Scorecard – 5Cs  See table above     35%    15.0%  
 Personal objectives  Judgemental assessment – see below      15%    11.0%  
 Total         100%    48.1%  
 Final outcome approved by the Remuneration Committee          48.1%  

The Committee determined at the time of his departure that he would remain eligible for a pro rated 2015 bonus for the part of the year in which he was Group Chief Executive, subject to an assessment post year end of the relevant performance measures and the general discretion of the Committee. Although it was deemed the appropriate time forDirectors from any Barclays to change Group Chief Executive in mid-2015, the Committee recognised that during the first half of the year Antony Jenkins showed full commitment to continuing to embed a customer and client focused culture backed by the Barclays’ Values and to delivering on financial commitments with particular focus on capital accretion, reducing costs and continuing the run-down of Non-Core. He was also responsible for ensuring that the Conduct Risk Framework was embedded into the business. Given Antony Jenkins’ overall personal performance in the first half of the year, the Committee judged that 11% of a maximum of 15% was appropriate.

In aggregate, the performance assessment resulted in an overall formulaic outcome of 48.1% of maximum bonus opportunity being achieved. The resulting 2015 bonus, pro rated for service, is £505,000.

(ii) Tushar Morzaria

A summary of the assessment for Tushar Morzaria against his specific performance measures is provided in the following table.

 Performance measure         Weighting    Outcome  
 Financial  See table on page 60     50%    22.1%  
 Balanced Scorecard – 5Cs  See table above     35%    15.0%  
 Personal objectives  Judgemental assessment – see below      15%    13.0%  
 Total         100%    50.1%  
 Final outcome approved by the Remuneration Committee          50.1%  

The Committee concluded that Tushar Morzaria had delivered a strong personal performance throughout the year, and noted that during the second half of the year (pending Jes Staley’s arrival) this was achieved while discharging considerably increased executive responsibilities. During 2015, Tushar Morzaria continued to drive transformational change, encouraging focus on the simplification of the operating model, including improved process and technology. He managed external relationships very effectively, in particular with shareholders, investors and regulators. He personally worked hard on improving colleague engagement and diversity and actively participated in supporting and promoting Barclays’ Citizenship agenda. He has managed risk effectively and embedded a positive risk culture. He has also fully embedded the Conduct Risk Framework into the activities of Group Finance, Tax and Treasury. The Committee, in particular, recognised Tushar Morzaria’s role in the significant improvement in the Bank’s capital position and in driving further focus on close and effective cost management during 2015. Given this strong personal performance, the Committee judged that 13% of a maximum of 15% attributable to individual objectives was appropriate.

As a result, the formulaic outcome for Tushar Morzaria would be 50.1% of maximum bonus opportunity. The resulting 2015 bonus is £701,000.

Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  61


pension plans.

Executive Directors: other LTIP awards

The Directors’ remuneration reporting regulations require inclusion in the single total figure of only the value of the LTIP awards whose last year of performance ends in the relevant financial year and whose vesting outcome is known. For 2015,2016, this is the award to Antony JenkinsTushar Morzaria under the 2013-20152014-2016 LTIP cycle and further details are set out on page 59.75. This section sets out other LTIP cycles in which the executive Directors participate, the outcome of which remains dependent on future performance.

Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2016 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  75


Governance: Remuneration report

Annual report on Directors’ remuneration

LTIP awards to be granted during 20162017

The Committee decided to make an award under the 2016-20182017-2019 LTIP cycle to Jes Staley and Tushar Morzaria with a face value at grant of 120% of histheir respective Total fixed pay at 31 December 2015. Jes Staley is not eligible for a grant under the 2016-2018 LTIP cycle.2016.

The 2016-20182017-2019 LTIP award will be subject to the following forward-looking performance measures.

 

Performance measure  Weighting  Threshold  Maximum vesting

 Adjusted returnReturn on tangible

equity (RoTE)

excluding notable items
  25%  6.25% of award vests for average adjusted RoTE excluding notable items of 7.5%  average adjustedAverage RoTE excluding notable items of 10.0%9.5%

CET1 ratio as at 31

December 2019

  25%  CET1CETI ratio must remain at or above an acceptable level for any of this element to vest. The threshold will be reviewed and set annually based on market conditions and regulatory requirements (11% as aton 31 December 2016).2017)
6.25% of award vests for CET1 ratio 100 basis points above the mandatory distribution restrictions hurdle (MDRH)
CET1 ratio 200 basis points above the MDRH
Cost:Income ratio excluding notable items20%

5% of award vests for average

Cost:Income ratio of 63%

Average Cost:Income ratio of 58%
Risk Scorecard15%The Risk Scorecard captures a range of risks and is aligned with the annual incentive risk adjustment framework agreed with the PRA. The current framework measures performance against three broad categories – Capital and Liquidity, Control Environment and Conduct – using a combination of quantitative and qualitative metrics. The framework may be updated from time to time in line with the Group’s risk strategy. Specific targets within each of the categories are deemed to be commercially sensitive. Retrospective disclosure of performance will be made in the 2019 Remuneration report.
Strategic / Non-financial measures15%

§   The existing Balanced Scorecard has evolved into a ‘Performance Measurement’ framework in line with the objective of delivering a simplified Barclays through the strategic actions announced in March 2016. The evaluation will focus on key performance measures (many continuing from the Balanced Scorecard), with a detailed retrospective narrative on progress throughout the period against each category.

§   Performance against theStrategic/Non-financial Measures will be assessed by the Committee to determine the percentage of the award that may vest between 0% and 15%. The measures are organised around 3 main categories: Customer & Client, Colleague and Citizenship. Each of the three main categories has equal weighting. Measures will likely include, but not be limited to, the following:

–   Customer & Client: NPS for consumer businesses, Client rankings and market shares for the Corporate and Investment Bank, complaints performance and volume of lending provided to customers and clients.

–   Colleague: Diversity and Inclusion statistics (including women in senior leadership), Employee sustainable engagement survey scores and conduct and culture measures.

–   Citizenship: Delivery against our Shared Growth Ambition, Colleague engagement in Citizenship activities and external benchmarks and surveys.

Straight line vesting applies between the threshold and maximum points in respect of the financial measures.

The award is subject to a discretionary underpin by which the Committee must be satisfied with the underlying financial health of the Group.

Outstanding LTIP awards

(i) LTIP awards granted during 2015

The performance measures for the awards made under the 2015-2017 LTIP cycle are shown below.

Performance measureWeightingThresholdMaximum vesting
Net generated equitya30%7.5% of award vests for Net Generated Equity of £1,363mNet Generated Equity of £1,844m
Core return on risk weighted assets (RoRWA) excluding own credit20%5% of award vests for average annual Core RoRWA of 1.34%Average annual Core RoRWA of 1.81%
Non-Core drag on return on equity (RoE) excluding notable items10%

2.5% of award vests forNon-Core drag on

RoE of –4.02%

Non-Core drag on RoE of –2.97%
Loan loss rate10%2.5% of award vests for average annual loan loss rate of 70bpsAverage annual loan loss rate of 55bps or below
Balanced Scorecard30%Performance against the Balanced Scorecard is assessed by the Committee to determine the percentage of the award that may vest between 0% and 30%. Each of the 5Cs in the Balanced Scorecard has equal weighting. The targets within each of the 5Cs are deemed to be commercially sensitive. However, retrospective disclosure of the targets and performance against them will be made in the 2017 Remuneration report subject to commercial sensitivity no longer remaining.

Note

aNet generated equity is a metric which converts changes in the CET1 ratio into an absolute capital equivalent measure. For remuneration purposes, net generated equity will exclude inorganic actions such as rights issues, as determined by the Committee.

Straight line vesting applies between the threshold and maximum points in respect of the financial and risk measures. The award is subject to a discretionary underpin by which the Committee must be satisfied with the underlying financial health of the Group.

76  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2016 Annual Report on Form 20-F


(ii) LTIP awards granted during 2016

An award was made to Tushar Morzaria on 14 March 2016 under the 2016-2018 LTIP cycle at a share price on the date of grant of £1.6535, in accordance with our Directors’ remuneration policy. This is the price used to calculate the face value below. Jes Staley was not eligible for a grant under the 2016-2018 LTIP cycle.

    
% of
fixed pay
 
 
   
Number
of shares
 
 
   
Face value
at grant
 
 
   
Performance
period
 
 
Tushar Morzaria   120%    1,270,033    £2,100,000    2016-2018 

The performance measures for the 2016-2018 LTIP awards are as follows:

Performance measureWeightingThresholdMaximum vesting

Return on tangible equity (RoTE)

excluding notable items

25%

6.25% of award vests for average RoTE of

7.5%

Average RoTE of 10.0%
CET1 ratio must remain at or above an acceptable level for any of this element to vest.
The threshold will be reviewed and set annually based on market conditions and regulatory requirements (11% on 31 December 2017)
CET1 ratio as at 31
December 2018

  25%  6.25% of award vests for CET1 ratio of 11.6%  CET1 ratio of 12.7%
Cost:incomeIncome ratio excluding notable items  20%  

5% of award vests for average cost:income Cost:Income

ratio of 66%

  average cost:incomeAverage Cost:Income ratio of 58%
Risk Scorecard  15%  Performance against the Risk Scorecard is assessed by the Committee, with input from the Group Risk function, Board Risk Committee and Board Reputation Committee as appropriate, to determine the percentage of the award that may vest between 0% and 15%. The Risk Scorecard measures performance against three broad categories – Risk Profile (including Conduct), Control Environment and Risk Capability – using a combination of quantitative and qualitative metrics. Specific targets within each of the categories are deemed to be commercially sensitive. Retrospective disclosure of performance will be made in the 2018 Remuneration report subject to commercial sensitivity no longer remaining.
Balanced Scorecard  15%  Performance against the Balanced Scorecard is assessed by the Committee to determine the percentage of the award that may vest between 0% and 15%. Each of the 5Cs in the Balanced Scorecard has equal weighting. Assessment will be made against progress towards the 2018 targets.

Straight line vesting applies between the threshold and maximum points in respect of the financial measures.

The award is subject to a discretionary underpin by which the Committee must be satisfied with the underlying financial health of the Group.

Outstanding LTIP awards

(i) LTIP awards granted during 2014

The performance measures for the awards made under the 2014-2016 LTIP cycle are shown below.

Performance measureWeightingThresholdMaximum vesting
 Return on risk weighted assets (RoRWA)50%23% of award vests for average annual RoRWA of 1.08%Average annual RoRWA of 1.52%
 Loan loss rate20%7% of award vests for average annual loan loss rate of 70bpsAverage annual loan loss rate of 55bps or below
 Balanced Scorecard30%Performance against the Balanced Scorecard is assessed by the Committee to determine the percentage of the award that may vest between 0% and 30%. Each of the 5Cs in the Balanced Scorecard has equal weighting. The targets within each of the 5Cs are deemed to be commercially sensitive. However, retrospective disclosure of the targets and performance against them will be made in the 2016 Remuneration report subject to commercial sensitivity no longer remaining.

Straight line vesting applies between the threshold and maximum points in respect of the RoRWA and loan loss rate measures. If the Committee is satisfied with the underlying financial health of the Group based on profit before tax, depending on the extent of its satisfaction, the percentage of Barclays shares that may be considered for release by the Committee under the RoRWA measure can be increased or decreased by 10% of the total award, subject always to a maximum of 50% of the award. Performance outcome will be determined at the end of the performance period. For Antony Jenkins, the resulting number of shares will then be pro-rated to his termination date.

(ii) LTIP awards granted during 2015

Awards were made on 16 March 2015 under the 2015-2017 LTIP cycle at a share price on the date of grant of £2.535, in accordance with our remuneration policy to the executive Directors. This is the price used to calculate the face value below.

    % of fixed pay     Number of shares     Face value at grant     Performance period  
 Antony Jenkins   120%     1,142,248     £2,895,599     2015-2017  
 Tushar Morzaria   120%     828,402     £2,099,999     2015-2017  

62  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F


Governance: Remuneration report

Annual report on Directors’ remuneration

The performance measures for the 2015-2017 LTIP awards are as follows:

Performance measure

Weighting        ThresholdMaximum vesting

Net generated equitya

30%7.5% of award vests for Net Generated Equity of £1,363mNet Generated Equity of £1,844m

Core return on risk weighted assets (RoRWA) excluding own credit

20%5% of award vests for average annual Core RoRWA of 1.34%Average annual Core RoRWA of 1.81%

Non-Core drag on adjusted return on equity (RoE)

10%2.5% of award vests for Non-Core drag on adjusted RoE of –4.02%Non-Core drag on adjusted RoE of –2.97%

Loan loss rate

10%2.5% of award vests for average annual loan loss rate of 70bpsAverage annual loan loss rate of 55bps or below

Balanced Scorecard

30%Performance against the Balanced Scorecard is assessed by the Committee to determine the percentage of the award that may vest between 0% and 30%. Each of the 5Cs in the Balanced Scorecard has equal weighting. The targets within each of the 5Cs are deemed to be commercially sensitive. However, retrospective disclosure of the targets and performance against them will be made in the 2017 Remuneration report subject to commercial sensitivity no longer remaining.

Note

aNet generated equity is a metric which converts changes in the CET1 ratio into an absolute capital equivalent measure. For remuneration purposes, Net generated equity will exclude inorganic actions such as rights issues, as determined by the Committee.

Straight line vesting applies between the threshold and maximum points in respect of the financial and risk measures. The award is subject to a discretionary underpin by which the Committee must be satisfied with the underlying financial health of the Group. For Antony Jenkins, the resulting number of shares will then be pro-rated to his termination date.

Executive Directors: pension (audited)

Jes Staley and Tushar Morzaria receive cash in lieu of pension. The 2015 cash in lieu of pension shown below for Jes Staley is for the period 1 December 2015 to 31 December 2015.

Antony Jenkins left the UK pension scheme in April 2012, and then started receiving cash in lieu of pension. He has benefits in both the final salary 1964 section and in the cash balance Afterwork section. The accrued pension shown below relates to his 1964 section pension only. The other pension entries relate to his benefits in both sections. Antony Jenkins ceased to be an executive Director on 16 July 2015. The 2015 cash in lieu of pension shown below is for the period 1 January 2015 to 16 July 2015.

      
 
 
 

 

Accrued
pension at
31 December
2015

£000

  
  
  
  

  

     
 
 
 
 
 
 
Increase in
value of
accrued
pension over
year net of
inflation
£000
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
   
 

 

Normal
retirement

date

  
  

  

     
 
 
 
Pension value
in 2015 from
DB Scheme
£000
  
  
  
  
     
 
 
 
2015
Cash in lieu
of pension
£000
  
  
  
  
     
 
2015 Total
£000
  
  
 Antony Jenkins     4       0     11 July 2021       0       197       197  
 Tushar Morzaria                            200       200  
 Jes Staley                               33       33  

Executive Directors: Statement of implementation of remuneration policy in 20162017

The introduction ofexecutive Directors’ package for 2017, in line with the new deferral and LTIP requirements in the Remuneration part of the PRA Rulebook and EBA Guidelines will require some structural changes as to how the approved Directors’ remuneration policyDRP, will be implemented in 2016. It is therefore our intent to consult with shareholders over proposed changes once formulated. This section explains howeffect from the approved Directors’ remuneration policy would be implemented in 2016 under the current framework.2017 AGM as follows:

 

   Jes Staley  Tushar Morzaria  Comments
 SalaryFixed Pay  £1,200,0002,350,000  £800,0001,650,000  

‘Fixed Pay’ replaces Salary and Role Based Pay. Fixed Pay delivered 50% in cash and 50% in shares (subject to 5 year holding period lifting pro rata)

No change in ‘Fixed Pay’ from 2016 for Jes Staley

Fixed Pay has increased to £1,650k from £1,550k for Tushar Morzaria

Pension£396,000£200,000  No change from 2015.2016
 RBPMaximum Bonus  £1,150,00080% of Total Fixed Paya  £750,00080% of Total Fixed Paya  Delivered quarterly in shares subject to a holding period with restrictions lifting over five years. No change from 2015.Total variable opportunity unchanged Bonus and LTIP combined for regulatory deferral purposes
 Pension33% of salary25% of salaryFixed cash allowance in lieu of participation in pension plan. No change from 2015.

 Maximum bonus

80% of fixed pay

80% of fixed pay

Variable remuneration for the executive Directors is delivered through bonus and LTIP, both of which are currently deferred over three years. Variable remuneration for the 2016 performance year will be delivered in line with the requirements of the Remuneration part of the PRA Rulebook, including the vesting requirements. Awards under the LTIP will be delivered in shares. The performance and holding periods will be determined before the awards are made in Q1 2017. Vesting will be dependent on performance over the performance period and subject to a further holding period after vesting.
Maximum LTIP  120% of fixed payTotal Fixed Paya  120% of fixed pay
Total Fixed Paya  

Note:

aTotal Fixed Pay is defined as Fixed Pay plus Pension

In considering the appropriate level of Tushar Morzaria’s Total fixed pay (Fixed Pay plus Pension), the Committee took account of the time he has been in role without any increase (over three years), his strong performance and importance to the organisation, and industry market rates for the role. The Committee concluded that an increase of 5.7%, being less than the increase paid to UK employees over the same period, was warranted but agreed that the executive Directors would not be eligible for any further increase in the next three years (i.e. during the new policy period).

 

  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 20152016 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  6377


Governance: Remuneration report

Annual report on Directors’ remuneration

    

 

 

Total Fixed Pay

The Directors’ remuneration policy sets out the policy on RBP for executive Directors. Following the EBA Guidelines, published in December 2015, and despite the formal power to reduce RBP in the Directors’ remuneration policy, the Committee has agreed, as they also did in 2015, that total fixed pay (salary and RBP elements) will not be reduced in 2016. The Committee will review the structure of RBP in light of the change in regulation and any changes will be reflected in the Directors’ remuneration policy which will be presented to shareholders for approval at the 2017 AGM.

Clawback and malus

Clawback applies to any variable remuneration awarded to the executive Directors on or after 1 January 2015. Barclays may apply clawback if at any time during the seven year period from the date on which any variable remuneration is awarded: (i) there is reasonable evidence of individual misbehaviour or material error, and/or (ii) the firm suffers a material failure of risk management, taking account of the individual’s proximity to, and responsibility for, that incident. For variable remuneration awards granted to executive Directors in respect of 2016 onwards, the clawback period may be extended to 10 years in circumstances where the Company or a regulatory authority has commenced an investigation which could potentially lead to the application of clawback.

As set out in the Directors’ remuneration policy, malusMalus provisions will continue to apply to unvested deferred awards.

Deferral

A seven7 year deferral period (with no vesting prior to the third anniversary of award, and vesting no faster than on a pro rata basisin equal tranches between the third and seventh year), will apply to any 2017 deferred variable remuneration awarded to the executive Directors in respect of the 2016 performance year onwards.Directors.

20162017 Annual bonus performance measures

Performance measures with appropriately stretching targets have been selected to cover a range of financial andnon-financial goals that support the key strategic objectives of the Company. The performance measures and weightings are shown below.

 

 

Financial (50%(60% weighting)

§  Adjusted profit before tax (20% weighting)

§  Adjusted costs (10% weighting)

 

A performance target range has been set for each financial measure.

 

  

 

§  Profit before tax excluding notable items (22.5% weighting)

§  Cost:Income ratio excluding notable items (15% weighting)

§CET1 ratio (20%(22.5% weighting)

 

Balanced Scorecard (35%Strategic/Non-financial (20% weighting)

  

 

Progress towards the five year§  The existing Balanced Scorecard targetshas evolved into a ‘Performance Measurement’ framework in line with the objective of delivering a simplified Barclays through the strategic actions announced in March 2016. Enhancements to the available sources of management information and reporting, ranging from internal dashboards to external third party measures, allows for a more holistic view of sustainable business performance, rather than focusing on a few narrowly defined targets. The evaluation will focus on key performance measures (many continuing from the Balanced Scorecard), with a detailed retrospective narrative on progress throughout the period against each category.

§  Performance against theStrategic/Non-financial Measures will be assessed by the Committee atto determine the year end.percentage of the award that may vest between 0% and 20%. The measures are organised around 3 main categories: Customer & Client, Colleague and Citizenship. Each of the 5Csthree main categories has equal weighting. Measures will likely include, but not be limited to, the following:

–  Customer & Client: NPS for consumer businesses, Client rankings and market shares for the Corporate and Investment Bank, complaints performance and volume of lending provided to customers and clients.

–  Colleague: Diversity and Inclusion statistics (including women in the Balanced Scorecard will have equal weightingsenior leadership), Employee sustainable engagement survey scores and conduct and culture measures.

–  Citizenship: Delivery against our Shared Growth Ambition, Colleague engagement in Citizenship activities and external benchmarks and surveys.

 

 

Personal (15%(20% weighting)

  

 

The executive Directors have the following joint personal objectives for 2016:2017:

 

§  structure the business effectively, ensuring it is focused on a sustainable core proposition with a simpler performing portfolio, with the majority of restructuring completed in 2016

§  make significant progress in exiting Non-Core by the end of 2016

§  deliverDeliver on 2017 financial commitments with particular focus onincluding continued improvement in costRoTE, the Cost:Income ratio and productivity, as evidenced by an improved profit and a lower cost:income ratiocontinuedbuild-up of our capital base (CET1 ratio)

§  manageExitNon-Core and ensure successful reintegration of remaining assets / businesses into Core

§  Achieve the sell-down of Barclays Africa Group Ltd to obtain regulatory deconsolidation

§  Ensure successful implementation of the 2017 Structural Reform programme, including creation of the Service Company and establishment of subsidiary Boards for Barclays UK and Barclays InternationaI

§  Identify and implement as far as possible in 2017 a structural solution to ensure continued access to the single market in Europe

§  Manage risk and conductcontrol effectively and make significantcontinued progress in ensuring thatresolving legacy events are both resolved expedientlyconduct and not repeated.litigation matters.

 

In addition, individual personal objectives for 20162017 are as follows:

 

Jes Staley:

 

§  implement the new management structure to support structural reform, including a new operating model designed to improve efficiency

§  make substantiveMake continued progress towards a higherhigh performing culture in line with our Values while also strengthening employee engagement at all levels

§  foster an externally focused and customer-centric culture.

Tushar Morzaria:

 

§  demonstrateImprove customer and client satisfaction while reducing the number of overall complaints

§  Strengthen succession planning pipeline for Group and Business Unit/Functional Executive Committees and continue to improve percentage of women in senior leadership positions.

Tushar Morzaria:

§  Demonstrate effective management of external relationships and reputation

§  Continue to strengthen theteam performance, ethictalent pipeline and employee engagement in Group Finance, Tax and Treasury, while also improving productivity.Treasury.

 

Detailed calibration of the Financial and Balanced ScorecardStrategic targets is commercially sensitive and it is not appropriate to disclose this information externally on a prospective basis. Disclosure of achievement against the targets will be made in the 20162017 Annual Report subject to the targets no longer being commercially sensitive. The Committee may exercise its discretion to amend the formulaic outcome of assessment against the targets. Any exercise of discretion will be disclosed and explained.

 

6478  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 20152016 Annual Report on Form 20-F  


Governance: Remuneration report

Annual report on Directors’ remuneration

    

    

 

Illustrative scenarios for executive Directors’ remuneration

The charts below show the potential value of the executive Directors’ 2016 remuneration in three scenarios: ‘Minimum’ (i.e. fixed pay only), ‘Maximum’ (i.e. fixed pay and the maximum variable pay that may be awarded) and ‘Mid-point’ (i.e. fixed pay and 50% of the maximum variable pay that may be awarded). For the purposes of these charts, the value of benefits is based on an estimated annual value. The scenarios do not reflect share price movement between award and vesting. LTIP is included at face value; the amount received and included in the single total figure for remuneration will depend on performance over the performance period.

A significant proportion of the potential remuneration of the executive Directors is variable and is therefore performance related. It is also subject to deferral, malus and clawback.

Total remuneration opportunity:Group Chief Executive (£000)

Total remuneration opportunity:Group Finance Director (£000)

LOGOLOGO

In the above illustrative scenarios, benefits include regular contractual benefits. Additional ad hoc benefits may arise, for example, overseas relocation of executive Directors, but will always be provided in line with the Directors’ remuneration policy.

Performance graph and table

The performance graph below illustrates the performance of Barclays over the financial years from 2009 to 20152016 in terms of total shareholder return compared with that of the companies comprising the FTSE 100 index. The index has been selected because it represents a cross-section of leading UK companies.

 

LOGO

Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  65


LOGO

In addition, the table below provides a summary of the total remuneration of the relevant Group Chief Executive over the same period as the previous graph. For the purpose of calculating the value of the remuneration of the Group Chief Executive, data has been collated on a basis consistent with the ‘single figure’ methodology.

 

Year   2009     2010     2011      2012      2012      2013      2014     
2015 
  
   2015      2015   
Group Chief Executive   
 
John
Varley
  
  
   
 
John
Varley
  
  
   
 
Bob 
Diamond 
  
  
   
 
Bob 
Diamonda
  
  
   
 
Antony 
Jenkinsb
  
  
   
 
Antony 
Jenkins 
  
  
   
 
Antony 
Jenkins 
  
  
  

 

Antony 

Jenkinsb

  

  

   

 

John 

McFarlanec

  

  

   
 
Jes 
Staleyd
  
  
Group Chief Executive single figure of total
remuneration £000s
   2,050     4,567     11,070e     1,892      529      1,602      5,467f    3,399     305      277   
Annual bonus against maximum
opportunity %
   0%     100%     80%      0%      0%      0%      57%     48%     N/A      N/A   
Long-term incentive vesting against
maximum opportunity %
   50%     16%     N/Af     0%      N/Ag     N/Ag     30%     39%     N/Ag     N/Ag  
Year   2009     2010     2011      2012      2012      2013      2014      2015      2015      2015      2016   
Group Chief Executive   
 
John
Varley
  
  
   
 
John
Varley
  
  
   
 
Bob 
Diamond 
  
  
   
 
Bob 
Diamonda
  
  
   
 
Antony 
Jenkinsb 
  
  
   
 
Antony 
Jenkins 
  
  
   
 
Antony 
Jenkins 
  
  
   
 
Antony 
Jenkinsb
  
  
   
 
John 
McFarlanec
  
  
   
 
Jes 
Staleyd
  
  
   
 
Jes 
Staley 
  
  
Group Chief Executive single figure of total remuneration £000s   2,050     4,567     11,070e     1,892      529      1,602      5,467f     3,399      305      277      4,233   
Annual bonus against maximum opportunity %   0%     100%     80%      0%      0%      0%      57%      48%      N/A      N/A      60%   
Long-term incentive vesting against maximum opportunity %   50%     16%     N/Ag     0%      N/Ag     N/Ag     30%      39%      N/Ag     N/Ag     N/Ag  

Notes

aBob Diamond left the Board on 3 July 2012.
bAntony Jenkins became Group Chief Executive on 30 August 2012 and left the Board on 16 July 2015.
cJohn McFarlane was Executive Chairman from 17 July 2015 to 30 November 2015. His fees, which remained unchanged, have beenpro-rated for his time in the position. He was not eligible to receive a bonus or LTIP.
dJes Staley became Group Chief Executive on 1 December 2015.
eThis figure includes £5,745k tax equalisation as set out in the 2011 Remuneration report. Bob Diamond was tax equalised on tax above the UK rate where that could not be offset by a double tax treaty.
fAntony Jenkins’ 2014 pay is higher than in earlier years since he declined a bonus in 2012 and 2013 and did not have LTIP vesting in those years.
gNot a participant in a long-term incentive award which vested in the period.

Percentage change in Group Chief Executive’s remuneration

The table below shows how the percentage change in the Group Chief Executive’s salary, benefits and bonus between 20142015 and 20152016 compares with the percentage change in the average of each of those components of pay for UK based employees.

 

   Salary     Role Based Pay                    Benefits        Annual bonus      Fixed Pay     Benefits      Annual bonus   
Group Chief Executivea   0.0%     0.0%      20.0%b  (15.6%)    0%     118%b     N/Ac  
Average based on UK employeesc   3.0%     12.2%d    0.0%    (8.0%) 
Average based on UK employeesd   3.6%     No change      (0.1)%   

Notes

aThe 2015 figures for the Group Chief Executive are based on formerthe Group Chief Executive, Antony Jenkins,Jes Staley, and are annualised in order to provide a meaningful comparison of the year on year change in remuneration for the Group Chief Executive and UK based employees.
bThe percentage changeincrease in benefits for the Group Chief Executive represents an increasearises primarily as a result of relocation provided in the cost to Barclays of existing benefits. There was no change in actual benefit provision to the former2016.
cThe Group Chief Executive from 2014 todid not receive an annual bonus in 2015.
cdCertain populations were excluded to enable a meaningful like for like comparison.
dThe majority of the increase was due to the introduction of Role Based Pay to certain populations, including new MRTs required to comply with PRA/EBA requirements.

We have chosen UK based employees as the comparator group as it is the most representative group for pay structure comparisons.

Relative importance of spend on pay

A year on year comparison of the relative importance of payGroup compensation costs and distributions to shareholders is shown below. 2015 Group compensation costs have reduced by 6% and dividends to shareholders have increased 2% from 2014.

 

LOGO

Note

a
2015 Group Compensation Costs (£m) Dividendscompensation costs have been adjusted to Shareholders (£m)
LOGOLOGOexclude the impact of £429m gain on valuation of a component of the defined benefit liability.

 

66  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 20152016 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  79


Governance: Remuneration report

Annual report on Directors’ remuneration

 

 

Chairman andnon-executive Directors

Chairman and non-executive Directors

Remuneration fornon-executive Directors reflects their responsibilities and time commitment and the level of fees paid tonon-executive Directors of comparable major UK companies.

Chairman andnon-executive Directors: Single total figure for 20152016 fees (audited)

 

     Fees       Benefits       Total       Fees       Benefits       Total  
     
 
2015
£000
  
  
     
 
2014
£000
  
  
     
 
2015
£000
  
  
     
 
2014
£000
  
  
     
 
2015
£000
  
  
     
 
2014
£000
  
  
     

 

2016

£000

  

  

     

 

2015

£000

  

  

     

 

2016

£000

  

  

     

 

2015

£000

  

  

     

 

2016

£000

  

  

     

 

2015

£000

  

  

Chairman                                                
John McFarlanea     628              11              639              800       628       1       11       801       639  
Sir David Walkerb     285       750       6       19       291       769              285              6              291  
Non-executive Directors                                                
Mike Ashley     207       213                     207       213       207       207                     207       207  
Tim Breedon     232       240                     232       240       220       232                     220       232  
Crawford Gilliesc     178       91                     178       91  
Mary Francisc     29                            29         
Crawford Gillies     195       178                     195       178  
Sir Gerry Grimstoned     250                            250         
Reuben Jeffery III     135       160                     135       160       120       135                     120       135  
Wendy Lucas-Bulld     358       367                     358       367  
Wendy Lucas-Bulle     64       358                     64       358  
Dambisa Moyo     152       151                     152       151       135       152                     135       152  
Frits van Paasschen     88       80                     88       80  
Sir Michael Rakee     250       250                     250       250  
Frits van Paasschenf     35       88                     35       88  
Diane de Saint Victor     135       135                     135       135       118       135                     118       135  
Diane Schuenemanfk     74                            74         
Sir John Sunderlandg     60       190                     60       190  
Steve Thiekehk     184       131                     184       131  
Fulvio Contii            37                            37  
Simon Fraserj            47                            47  
Diane Schuenemangh     232       74                     232       74  
Steve Thiekeh     221       184                     221       184  
Sir Michael Rakei            250                            250  
Sir John Sunderlandj            60                            60  
Total     2,966       2,842       17       19       2,983       2,861       2,626       2,966       1       17       2,627       2,983  

Non-executive Directors are reimbursed expenses that are incurred for business reasons. Any tax that arises on these reimbursed expenses is paid by Barclays.

The Chairman is provided with private medical cover and the use of a company vehicle and driver when required for business purposes.

Notes

aJohn McFarlane joined the Board as anon-executive Director with effect from 1 January 2015 and as Chairman from 24 April 2015. The 2015 total includesnon-executive Director fees of £78,000 for the period from 1 January 2015 to 24 April 2015.
bSir David Walker retired from the Board with effect from 23 April 2015.
cCrawford GilliesMary Francis joined the Board as anon-executive Director with effect from 1 May 2014.October 2016.
dThe 2014 figure has been updated toSir Gerry Grimstone joined the Board as anon-executive Director from 1 January 2016 and succeeded Sir Michael Rake as Senior Independent Director and Deputy Chairman with effect from 1 January 2016.
eWendy Lucas-Bull retired from the Board with effect from 1 March 2016. Figures include fees received by Wendy Lucas-Bull for her role as Chairman of Barclays Africa Group Limited. The 2015 figure includes fees received by her in 2015 for that role.
efSir Michael RakeFrits van Paasschen retired from the Board with effect from 31 December 2015.28 April 2016.
fgDiane Schueneman joined the Board as anon-executive Director with effect from 25 June 2015.
gSir John Sunderland retired from the Board with effect from 23 April 2015.
hSteve Thieke joined the Board as a non-executive Director with effect from 7 January 2014.
iFulvio Conti retired from the Board with effect from 24 April 2014.
jSimon Fraser retired from the Board with effect from 24 April 2014.
kDiane Schueneman and Steve Thieke both served in 20152016 on the US Governance Review Board, which iswas an advisory board set up as the forerunner of the board of our US intermediate holding company which will bewas established during 2016. They each subsequently joined the board of the US intermediate holding company on its formation. The 2015 figures for Diane Schueneman and Steve Thieke includeincluded fees of $37,500 and $75,000 respectively for thesetheir roles respectively.on the US Governance Review Board. The 2016 figures include fees of $138,000 and $150,000 respectively for their roles on the US Governance Review Board and the board of the US intermediate holding company. In addition, Steve Thieke waived fees of $63,000.
iSir Michael Rake retired from the Board with effect from 31 December 2015.
jSir John Sunderland retired from the Board with effect from 23 April 2015.

Chairman andnon-executive Directors: Statement of implementation of remuneration policy in 20162017

20162017 fees, subject to annual review in line with policy, for the Chairman andnon-executive Directors are shown below.

 

   
 
1 January 2016  
£000  
  
  
   
 
1 January 2015
£000
  
  
   
 
Percentage
Increase
  
  
   

 

1 January 2017

£000

  

  

   

 

1 January 2016

£000

  

  

   

 

Percentage

Increase

  

  

Chairmana   800b     750          800     800     0  
Deputy Chairmana   250       250     0     250     250     0  
Board member   80       80     0     80     80     0  
Additional responsibilities            
Senior Independent Director   30       30     0     30     30     0  
Chairman of Board Audit or Board Remuneration Committee   70       70     0     70     70     0  
Chairman of Board Risk Committee   60       60     0     70     60     17  
Chairman of Board Reputation Committee   50       50     0     50     50     0  
Membership of Board Audit or Board Remuneration Committee   30       30     0     30     30     0  
Membership of Board Reputation or Board Risk Committee   25       25     0     25     25     0  
Membership of Board Nominations Committee   15       15     0     15     15     0  

Notes

aThe Chairman and Deputy Chairman do not receive any other additional responsibility fees in addition to the Chairman and Deputy Chairman fees respectively.
bJohn McFarlaneThe basic fee payable tonon-executive Directors was appointedlast increased in May 2011. Some revisions have been made to the additional fees payable to Board Committee Chairman on 24 April 2015 on fees of £800,000.to reflect time commitment and responsibilities.

 

80  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 20152016 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  67


    

    

    

 

 

Payments to former Directors

Former Group Chief Executive: Antony Jenkins

Antony Jenkins ceasedcontinued to be Group Chief Executive on 16 July 2015. In accordance with his contractual entitlements, Antony Jenkins will receive base salary, RBP, benefits and pension allowance until 7 July 2016 (the Termination Date). These payments are being made in instalments and are subjectFull details of his eligibility to mitigationvariable pay were disclosed in the event that Antony Jenkins brings his termination date forward.

The Committee carefully considered2015 Directors’ Remuneration report (page 101 of the circumstances of Antony Jenkins’ departure, taking into account his contribution in bringing the Group to a much stronger position during a difficult period for the Group. Against that background, the Committee agreed to exercise its discretion to treat Antony Jenkins as an eligible leaver for the purposes of his variable pay in accordance with the Directors’ remuneration policy approved by shareholders at the 2014 AGM. The Committee agreed that:

§Antony Jenkins would remain eligible for an annual bonus in respect of 2015, pro-rated to 16 July 2015

§Antony Jenkins’ 260,355 deferred shares will be considered for release in full on the scheduled release dates. After release, the shares will be subject to an additional 6 month holding period

§the unvested LTIP awards granted to Antony Jenkins in 2014 and 2015 will be considered for release on the scheduled release dates subject to achievement of the applicable performance measures and time pro-rated to the Termination Date. The maximum number of shares (subject to the achievement of the applicable performance measures) after reduction for time pro-rating are LTIP 2014-2016: 1,418,805 shares and LTIP 2015-2017: 475,937 shares. After vesting, the shares will be subject to an additional two year holding period

§all outstanding unvested deferred awards are subject to malus provisions

The Company has paid £106k in respect of outplacement services and legal costs in connection with Antony Jenkins’ termination of employment in line with the approved Directors’ remuneration policy on terminations.2015 Annual Report).

Former Group Finance Director: Chris Lucas

In 2015,2016, Chris Lucas continued to be eligible to receive life assurance cover, private medical cover and payments under the Executive Income Protection Plan (EIPP). Full details of his eligibility under the EIPP were disclosed in the 2013 Directors’ Remuneration report (page 91115 of the 2013 Form 20-F)Annual Report). Chris Lucas did not receive any other payment or benefit in 2015.

Other policy information

Outside appointments

During the period while he was Executive Chairman, John McFarlane retained fees in respect of external directorships at Westfield Corporation Limited of $62k and at Old Oak Holdings Limited of £37k.2016.

Directors’ shareholdings and share interests

Executive Directors’ shareholdings and share interests (audited)

The chart below shows the value of Barclays’ shares held beneficially by Jes Staley and Tushar Morzaria as at 2621 February 20162017 that count towards the shareholding requirement of, as a minimum, Barclays’ shares worth four times salary. The current executive Directors have five years from their respective date of appointment to meet this requirement. At close of business on 2621 February 2016,2017, the market value of Barclays ordinary shares was £1.6910.

Jes Staley (£000)

LOGO

Tushar Morzaria (£000)

LOGO

68  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F


Governance: Remuneration report

Annual report on Directors’ remuneration£2,375m.

 

LOGO

Interests in Barclays PLC Shares (audited)

The table below shows shares owned beneficially by all the Directors and shares over which executive Directors hold awards which are subject to either deferral terms or performance measures. The shares shown below, that are subject to performance measures, are based on the maximum number of shares that may be released (before pro-rating for Antony Jenkins).

Interests in Barclays PLC shares (audited)released.

 

            
 

 

Total as at
31 December

2015 (or date

  
  

  

   
     Unvested          Unvested    

Total as at

31 December

2016 (or date

of retirement

from the Board,

if earlier)

 

 

 

 

 

 

   
   Owned outright     
 
 
Subject to
performance
measures
  
  
  
   
 
 
Not subject to
performance
measures
  
  
  
   
 
 
of retirement
from the Board,
if earlier)
  
  
  
   
 
 
Total as at
26 February
2016
  
  
  
   Owned outright   

 

 

 

Subject to

performance

measures

 

 

 

 

   

Not subject to

performance

measures

 

 

 

   

Total as at
21 February
2017
 
 
 
Executive Directors                    
Antony Jenkinsa   5,540,236     4,579,983     260,355     10,380,574       
Jes Staley   4,243,848            4,243,848    4,243,848 
Tushar Morzaria   931,310     2,204,213     741,829     3,877,352     3,877,352     1,466,204    3,474,246    578,391    5,518,841    5,518,841 
Jes Staleyb   2,812,997          896,450     3,709,447     3,709,447  
Chairman                    
John McFarlanec   11,995               11,995     11,995  
Sir David Walkerd   151,455               151,455       
John McFarlane   46,852            46,852    46,852 
Non-executive Directors                    
Mike Ashley   23,547               23,547     23,547     65,290            65,290    65,290 
Tim Breedon   19,196               19,196     19,196     29,755            29,755    29,755 
Mary Francisa   7,600            7,600    7,600 
Crawford Gillies   58,856               58,856     58,856     70,208            70,208    70,208 
Sir Gerry Grimstone   103,288            103,288    103,288 
Reuben Jeffery III   184,988               184,988     184,988     200,196            200,196    200,196 
Wendy Lucas-Bull   14,672               14,672     14,672  
Wendy Lucas-Bullb   15,672            15,672     
Dambisa Moyo   40,696               40,696     40,696     51,192            51,192    51,192 
Frits van Paasschen   17,184               17,184     17,184  
Sir Michael Rakee   75,670               75,670       
Frits van Paasschenc   23,681            23,681     
Diane de Saint Victor   21,579               21,579     21,579     36,691            36,691    36,691 
Diane Schuenemanf   2,000               2,000     2,000  
Sir John Sunderlandg   139,081               139,081       
Diane Schueneman   16,004            16,004    16,004 
Steve Thieke   23,123               23,123     23,123     55,073            55,073    55,073 
Sir Gerry Grimstoneh                       97,045  

Notes

aAntony Jenkins left the Board with effect from 16 July 2015.
bJes StaleyMary Francis joined the Board as Group Chief Executive with effect from 1 December 2015.
cJohn McFarlane joined the Board as anon-executive Director with effect from 1 January 2015 and as Chairman with effect from 24 April 2015. He was Executive Chairman from 17 July 2015 to 30 November 2015.October 2016.
dbSir David WalkerWendy Lucas-Bull retired from the Board as anon-executive Director with effect from 23 April 2015.1 March 2016.
ecSir Michael RakeFrits van Paasschen retired from the Board with effect from 31 December 2015.
fDiane Schueneman joined the Board as anon-executive Director with effect from 25 June 2015.
gSir John Sunderland retired from the Board with effect from 2328 April 2015.
hSir Gerry Grimstone joined the Board as Senior Independent Director and Deputy Chairman with effect from 1 January 2016. On appointment, he held 97,045 Barclays PLC shares.

 

  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 20152016 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  6981


Governance: Remuneration report

Annual report on Directors’ remuneration

        

 

 

Barclays Board Remuneration Committee

The Board Remuneration Committee is responsible for overseeing Barclays’ remuneration as described in more detail below.

Terms of Reference

The role of the Committee is to:

 

§ set the overarching principles and parameters of remuneration policy across the Group;Group

 

§ consider and approve the remuneration arrangements of (i) the Chairman, (ii) the executive Directors, (iii) members of the Barclays Group Executive Committee and any other senior executives specified by the Committee from time to time, and those(iv) all other Group employees whose total annual compensation exceeds an amount determined by the Committee from time to time (currently £2m or more)£2m)

 

§ exercise oversight for remuneration issues.

The Committee considers all aspects of the design and operation of remuneration policy to ensure a coherent approach is taken in respect of all employees. In discharging this responsibility the Committee seeks to ensure that the policy assesses, among other things, the impact of pay arrangements on culture and all elements of risk management. The Committee also considersapproves incentive pools for all major businesses and approves buy-outs of forfeited rights for new hires of £2m or more, and packages on termination where the total discretionary value is £1m or more. Itfunctions, regularly reviews the policy relating to all remuneration plans including pensions,design and provision of retirement benefits, and considers and approves measures designed to promote the alignment of the interests of shareholders and employees. ItThe Committee and its members work as necessary with other Board Committees, and is also responsible for the selectionauthorised to select and appointment ofappoint its independent remuneration adviser.own advisers as required.

The Terms of Reference can be found at home.barclays/corporategovernance or from the Company Secretary on request.

Chairman and members

The Chairman and members of the Committee are as follows:

 

§ Crawford Gillies, Committee member since 1 May 2014 and Chairman since 24 April 2015

 

§ Tim Breedon, Committee member since 1 December 2012

 

§ Steve Thieke,Mary Francis, Committee member since 6 February 20141 November 2016

 

§ Dambisa Moyo, Committee member since 1 September 20152015.

Former Chairman and membersmember

Members whoSteve Thieke left the Committee during 2015 were as follows:on 1 March 2016 having been a Committee member since 6 February 2014.

§Sir John Sunderland, Committee member since 1 July 2005 and Committee Chairman from 24 July 2012 to 23 April 2015

§Sir David Walker, Committee member from 1 September 2012 to 23 April 2015

All current members are considered independent by the Board.

Remuneration Committee attendance in 20152016

 

   
 
Number of meetings
eligible to attend
  
  
   
 
Number of
                meetings attended
  
 
   
Number of meetings
eligible to attend
 
 
   
Number of
                meetings attended
 
 
Crawford Gillies   7     7     9    9 
Tim Breedon   7     7     9    8 
Mary Francis   2    2 
Dambisa Moyo   9    9 
Steve Thieke   7     7     3    3 
Dambisa Moyo   4     4  
Sir John Sunderland   1     1  
Sir David Walker   1     1  

The performance of the Committee is reviewed each year as part of the Board Effectiveness Review. The December 20152016 review concluded that Board members have full confidence in the effectiveness and thoroughness of the Committee. Full details of the Board Effectiveness review can be found on pages 33 and 34.page 33.

Advisers to the Remuneration Committee

During 2015,Until February 2016, the Committee was advised by Towers Watson (now known as Willis Towers Watson. The Committee is satisfied that the advice provided by Willis Towers Watson to the Committee is independent.was independent and objective. Willis Towers Watson is a signatory to, and its appointment as adviser to the Committee iswas conditional on adherence to, the voluntary UK Code of Conduct for executive remuneration consultants.

Towers Watson’s work in 2015 included advisingDuring the rest of 2016, the Committee and providingdecided not to engage an independent adviser but Willis Towers Watson continued to provide the latestCommittee with market data on compensation and trends when considering incentive levels and remuneration packages. A representative from Towers Watson attends Committee meetings. When requested by the Committee, Towers Watson is available to advise and meet with the Committee members separate from management.

Fees for the Committee work arewere charged on a time/cost basis and Willis Towers Watson was paid a total of £195,000£48,000 (excluding VAT) in fees for its advice to the Committee in 20152016 relating to the executive Directors (either exclusively or along with other employees within the Committee’s Terms of Reference).

Willis Towers Watson also provides pensions advice, advice on health and benefits provision, assistance and technology support for employee surveys and performance management, and remuneration data to the Group. Willis Towers Watson also provides pensions advice and administration services to the Barclays Bank UK Retirement Fund.

The Committee regularly reviews the objectivity and independence of the advice it receives from Towers Watson.

In the course of its deliberations, the Committee also considers the views of the Group Chief Executive, Group Human Resources Director and the Group Reward and Performance Director. The Group Finance Director and Chief Risk Officer provide regular updates on Group and business financial performance and the Group’s risk profile respectively.

No Barclays‘Barclays’ employee or Director participates in discussions with, or decisions of, the Committee relating to his or her own remuneration. No other advisers provided significant services to the Committee in the year.

 

7082  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 20152016 Annual Report on Form 20-F  


Governance: Remuneration report

Annual report on Directors’ remuneration

    

 

 

Remuneration Committee activities in 20152016

The following provides a summary of the Committee’s activities during 20152016 and at the January and February 20162017 meetings when 2015at which 2016 remuneration decisions were finalised.

 

Meeting  Fixed and variable pay issues  Governance, risk and other matters

 

February 2015January 2016

  

 

§

2015 incentive funding proposals

§

Finance and Risk updates

February 2016

(Two meetings)

§

  

 

Approved executive Directors’ and senior executives’ 20152016 fixed pay

  

 

§

 

§

§

§

  

 

Risk adjustment and malus review

Approved 20142015 Remuneration report

 

Review of 2014 reward communications strategy

§

 

Approved 2016 executive Directors’ annual bonus performance measures

§

Finance and Risk updates including ex ante risk adjustment

§

Approved Group fixed pay budgets for 2016

§

Appointment of Committee independent adviser

  

 

§

 

Approved 2015 executive Directors’ annual bonus performance measures

§

Approved group salary and RBP budgets for 2015

§

  

 

Approved final 20142015 incentive funding

  

§

Updates on headcount and employee attrition

   

 

§

  

 

Approved proposals for executive Directors’ and senior executives’ 20142015 bonuses and 20152016 LTIP awards for executive Directors

 

  

§

 

May 2015

  §

2015 early incentive funding projections

§

Consideration of the outcomes of the 2014 Board Committees’2015 Committee effectiveness review

June 2016

§

Barclays’ deferral approach

§

Review of Directors’ remuneration policy

§

Impact of corporate restructuring on executive Director and Group Executive Committee members’ remuneration

§

Update on Structural Reform

July 2016

      

 

§

  

 

Update on EBA consultation on draft revisedReview of Barclays broader remuneration guidelines

§

Employee compensation adjustment reviewphilosophy

         

 

§

 

Barclays’ remuneration approach review

July 2015

§

  

 

Review of Committee activity and Terms of ReferenceDirectors’ remuneration policy

 

§September 2016

(joint meeting with Nominations Committee)

  

 

Consideration of process for appointment of Committee’s independent adviser from April 2016

§

  

 

Update on July 2014 PRA consultationApproved Tim Throsby’s appointment and resulting changes to the Remuneration part of the PRA Rulebookremuneration arrangements

    

 

§October 2016

 

Scope of remuneration philosophy review

        

 

§

Review of Directors’ remuneration policy

§November 2016

  

 

Employee compensation adjustment review

October 2015§

  

 

§2016 incentive funding projections including risk adjustments

  

 

Approved Jes Staley’s remuneration arrangements§

§

§

§

  

 

§Annual review of Committee Terms of Reference

Remuneration philosophy review

(Two meetings)

November 2015

§

2015 incentive funding projections

§

 

Finance and Risk updates including ex ante risk adjustment

Updates on headcount and employee attrition

2016 payround shareholder engagement planning

  

 

§

  

 

20162017 LTIP performance measures

  

§

Updates on headcount and attrition

      

§

2015 payround shareholder engagement planning

§

Employee compensation adjustment review

December 2015

§

Initial considerations on senior executives’ 2016 fixed pay

§

Review of draft 2015 Remuneration report

§

2015 incentive funding proposals and initial proposals for senior executives’ 2015 bonuses

§

§

Finance and Risk updates including ex ante risk adjustment

Updates on headcount and attrition

           

 

JanuaryDecember 2016

  

 

§

Initial considerations on senior executives’ 2016 bonuses and 2017 fixed pay

§

§

§

Review of draft Directors’ remuneration policy

Finance and Risk updates

Updates on headcount and employee attrition

§

2017 LTIP performance measures

§

2016 incentive funding proposals including risk adjustments

§January 2017

  

 

2015 incentive funding proposals§

  

 

2016 incentive funding proposals including risk adjustments

§

 

  

 

Finance and Risk updates

§

2016 bonus proposals for senior executives

§

Barclays’ deferral approach

 

February 20162017

(Two meetings)

  

 

§

  

 

Approved executive Directors’ and senior executives’ 20162017 fixed pay

  

§

 

§

 

§

 

§

  

 

Approved 20152016 Remuneration report

 

Finance and Risk updates including ex ante risk adjustment

Appointment of Committee independent adviser

 

Updates on headcount and employee attrition

  

 

§

  

 

Approved 20162017 executive Directors’ annual bonus performance measures

    
  

 

§

  

 

Approved Group fixed pay budgets for 20162017

    
  

 

§

  

 

Approved final 20152016 incentive funding including risk adjustments

    
   

 

§

  

 

Approved proposals for executive Directors’ and senior executives’ 20152016 bonuses and 20162017 LTIP awards for executive Directors

 

      

Regular items: market and stakeholder updates including PRA/FCA, US Federal Reserve and other regulatory matters; updates from Remuneration Review Panel meetings; operation of the Committee’s Control Framework on hiring, retention and termination; and LTIP performance updates.

Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2016 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  83


Governance: Remuneration report

Annual report on Directors’ remuneration

Statement of voting at Annual General Meeting

The table below shows the voting result in respect of our remuneration arrangements at the AGM held on 2328 April 20152016 and the last policy vote at the AGM held on 24 April 2014:

 

  For

% of

votes cast

Number

  Against

% of

votes cast

Number

  Withheld

Number

  For

% of

votes cast

Number

  Against

% of

votes cast

Number

  Withheld

Number

Advisory vote on the 2014 Remuneration report  97.50%  2.50%  

Advisory vote on the 2015 Remuneration report

  

 

93.60%

  

 

6.40%

  
  11,385,216,004          291,926,107          63,613,057          11,351,168,552        

 

  776,042,467          83,768,745        

 

Binding vote on the Directors’ remuneration policy

  93.21%  6.79%    

 

93.21%

  

 

6.79%

  
  9,936,116,114  723,914,712  154,598,278  9,936,116,114

 

  723,914,712

 

  154,598,278

 

 

84  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 20152016 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  71


Governance: Remuneration report

Additional remuneration disclosures

    

 

 

This section contains voluntary disclosures about levels of remuneration for our eight most highly paid senior executive officers, levels of remuneration of employees in the Barclays Group and outstanding share plan and LTIP awards for our executive Directors.

This section contains voluntary disclosures about levels of remuneration for our eight most highly paid senior executive officers and levels of remuneration of employees in the Barclays Group.

20152016 total remuneration of the eight highest paid senior executive officers below Board level

The table below shows remuneration for the eight highest paid senior executive officers below Board level who were Key Management Personnel in 2015.2016.

Eight highest paid senior executive officers below Board level

    

 
 

1

2015
£000

  

  
  

   

 
 

2

2015
£000

  

  
  

   

 
 

3

2015
£000

  

  
  

   

 
 

4

2015
£000

  

  
  

   

 
 

5

2015
£000

  

  
  

   

 
 

6

2015
£000

  

  
  

   

 
 

7

2015
£000

  

  
  

   

 
 

8

2015
£000

  

  
  

Fixed Pay (salary and RBP)   3,150     1,500     1,700     1,300     2,050     1,192     878     661  
Current year cash bonus        600     320     320     100     140     180     204  
Current year share bonus        600     320     320     100     140     180     204  
Deferred cash bonus   3,150     900     480     480     150     210     270     306  
Deferred share bonus   3,150     900     480     480     150     210     270     306  
Total remuneration   9,450     4,500     3,300     2,900     2,550     1,892     1,778     1,681  

      

 

 

1

2016

£000

  

  

  

     

 

 

2

2016

£000

  

  

  

     

 

 

3

2016

£000

  

  

  

     

 

 

4

2016

£000

  

  

  

     

 

 

5

2016

£000

  

  

  

     

 

 

6

2016

£000

  

  

  

     

 

 

7

2016

£000

  

  

  

     

 

 

8

2016

£000

  

  

  

Fixed Pay (salary and RBP)

     1,813       1,500       1,974       1,925       1,250       1,300       1,170       1,049  

Current year cash bonus

     200       200       200       200       200       190       198       105  

Current year share bonus

     200       200       200       200       200       190       198       105  

Deferred cash bonus

     2,233       1,125       813       825       375       285       297       158  

Deferred share bonus

     2,233       1,125       813       825       375       285       297       158  

Total remuneration

     6,679       4,150       4,000       3,975       2,400       2,250       2,160       1,575  

Total remuneration of the employees in the Barclays Group

The table below shows the number of employees in the Barclays Group in 20142015 and 20152016 in bands by reference to total remuneration. Total remuneration comprises salary, RBP, other allowances, bonus and the value at award of LTIP awards.

Total remuneration of the employees in the Barclays Group

 

          Number of employees       
   Number of employees       2016       2015       2015  
Remuneration band                                2015                                  2014            Constant currency       Actual  
£0 to £25,000   71,886     72,262       33,989       38,457       39,720  
£25,001 to £50,000   31,804     33,760       22,927       25,220       25,153  
£50,001 to £100,000   21,196     20,491       17,063       18,869       18,885  
£100,001 to £250,000   9,903     9,000       9,098       10,047       9,210  
£250,001 to £500,000   2,266     2,323  

£250,001, to £500,000

     2,093       2,367       2,181  
£500,001 to £1,000,000   761     871       771       879       740  
£1,000,001 to £2,500,000   268     301       307       309       264  
£2,500,001 to £5,000,000   50     55       46       51       50  
Above £5m   5     3       11       9       5  

Barclays is a global business. Of those employees earning above £1m in total remuneration for 20152016 in the table above, 55%63% are based in the US, 34%32% in the UK, and 11%5% in the rest of the world.

The number of employees paid above £1m has reduced from 359is slightly down year on year on a constant currency basis (364 in 2014 to 3232016 vs. 369 in 2015.

72  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F


Governance: Remuneration report

Additional remuneration disclosures

2015).

Outstanding share plan and long-term incentive planLTIP awards (audited)

 

Plan   
 
 
Number of shares under
award at 1 January
2015 (maximum)
  
  
  
   
 
 
Number of shares
awarded in year
(maximum)
  
  
  
   
 
Market price
on award date
  
  
   
 
Number of shares
released
  
  
   
 
Market price
on release date
  
  
   
 
 
 
 
 
Number of
shares under
award at
1 January
2016
(maximum)
  
  
  
  
  
  
   
 
 

 
 

Number of
shares
awarded

in year
(maximum)

  
  
  

  
  

   
 
 
Market
price on
award date
  
  
  
   
 
 
Number of
shares
released
  
  
  
   
 
 
Market
price on
release date
  
  
  
   
 
 
 
 
 
Number of
shares under
award at
31 December
2016
(maximum)
  
  
  
  
  
  
   
 
 
Value of
release
£000
  
  
  
   
 
 
 
 
End of
performance
period or first
scheduled
release date
  
  
  
  
  
   
 
Last scheduled
release date
  
  
Antony Jenkins          
Barclays LTIP 2012-2014   1,139,217          £1.81     332,286     £2.67  
Barclays LTIP 2012-2014   1,371,280          £1.86     400,030     £2.67  
Barclays LTIP 2013-2015   1,545,995          £3.06            
Barclays LTIP 2014-2016   1,891,740          £2.31            
Barclays LTIP 2015-2017        1,142,248     £2.54            
Share Value Plan 2012   332,377          £2.53     332,377     £2.54  
Share Value Plan 2012   1,079,970          £1.86     1,079,970     £2.54  

Jes Staley

                  
Share Value Plan 2015        260,355     £2.54               896,450          £2.34     896,450     £1.65          1,479            
Tushar Morzaria                            
Barclays LTIP 2014-2016   1,375,811          £2.31               1,375,811          £2.31               1,375,811          31/12/2016     08/03/2017  
Barclays LTIP 2015-2017        828,402     £2.54               828,402          £2.54               828,402          31/12/2017     05/03/2018  

Barclays LTIP 2016-2018

        1,270,033     £1.65               1,270,033          31/12/2018     04/03/2019  
Share Value Plan 2013   733,877          £2.51     411,437     £2.54     322,440          £2.51     243,616     £1.65     78,824     402     17/03/2014     05/03/2018  
Share Value Plan 2014   309,557          £2.31     103,185     £2.54     206,372          £2.31     103,186     £1.65     103,186     170     16/03/2015     08/03/2017  
Share Value Plan 2015        213,017     £2.54               213,017          £2.54     71,005     £1.65     142,012     117     14/03/2016     05/03/2018  
Jes Staley          
Share Value Plan 2015        896,450     £2.34            

The interests shown in the table above are the maximum number of Barclays’ shares that may be received under each plan (before pro-rating for Antony Jenkins). Executive Directors do not pay for any share plan or long-term incentive plan awards. Antony Jenkins received 178,527 dividend shares from Share Value Plan (SVP) and LTIP awards and Tushar Morzaria received 19,669 dividend shares from SVP awards released in 2015.

The SVP 2015 award granted to Jes Staley was made in respect of awards he forfeited as a result of accepting employment at Barclays. This award was made in line with the Barclays’ recruitment policy and was made on no more favourable terms than those forfeited awards.

Outstanding Cash Value Plan (CVP) awards (audited)

   

   

  

Plan         
 
 

 

Value under award at
1 January 2015
(maximum)

£000

  
  
  

  

   
 
Value paid in year
£000
  
  
   
 

 

 

Value under award at
31 December 2015

((maximum)

£000

  
  

  

  

Antony Jenkins          
Cash Value Plan 2012         750     750       

Share Value Plan 2016

        254,369     £1.65               254,369          06/03/2017     04/03/2019  

A ‘service credit’ was added, onThe interests shown in the final vesting date, totable above are the thirdmaximum number of Barclays’ shares that may be received under each plan. Executive Directors do not pay for any share plan or LTIP awards. No shares lapsed during 2016.

Jes Staley received 19,846 dividend equivalent shares from SVP awards released in 2016 and final vesting amount which, for the award shown, was 10% of the original award amount. Antony JenkinsTushar Morzaria received the CVP award as part of his 2011 bonus, which was awarded27,503 dividend equivalent shares from SVP awards released in respect of performance in his role as CEO of Retail and Business Banking.2016.

 

  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 20152016 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  7385


     Number of shares lapsed in 2015    

Number of shares under award at 31 December 2015

(maximum)

    

Value of release

£000

    

End of performance period

or first scheduled release date

    

Last scheduled

release date

    806,931        887        
    971,250        1,068        
        1,545,995        31/12/2015    14/03/2016
        1,891,740        31/12/2016    06/03/2017
        1,142,248        31/12/2017    05/03/2018
            844        
            2,743        
        260,355        14/03/2016    05/03/2018
        1,375,811        31/12/2016    06/03/2017
        828,402        31/12/2017    05/03/2018
        322,440    1,045    17/03/2014    05/03/2018
        206,372    262    16/03/2015    06/03/2017
        213,017        14/03/2016    05/03/2018
         896,450        14/03/2016    14/03/2016

74  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F

Risk review

 


Governance: Remuneration report

Directors’ remuneration policy (abridged)

Barclays’ forward looking remuneration policy for Directors was approved at the 2014 AGM held on 24 April 2014 and applies for three years from that date. The full policy can be found on pages 76 to 86 of the 2013 Form20-F or at home.barclays/annualreport.

This section sets out an abridged version of the Directors’ remuneration policy and is provided for information only.

This remuneration policy sets out the framework for how the Committee’s remuneration strategy will be executed for the Directors over the three years beginning on the date of the 2014 AGM. This is to be achieved by having a remuneration policy that seeks to:

§provide an appropriate and competitive mix of fixed and variable pay which, through its short and long-term components, incentivises management and is aligned to shareholders;

§provide direct line of sight with Barclays’ strategy through the incentive programmes; and

§comply with and adapt to the changing regulatory landscape.

Remuneration policy for executive Directors

 

Element and purposeOperationMaximum value and performance measures

A. Fixed pay

Salary

To reward skills and experience appropriate for the role and provide the basis for a competitive remuneration package

Salaries are determined with reference to market practice and market data (on which the Committee receives independent advice), and reflect individual experience and role.

Executive Directors’ salaries are benchmarked against comparable roles in the following banks: Bank of America, BBVA, BNP Paribas, Citigroup, Credit Suisse, Deutsche Bank, HSBC, JP Morgan, Lloyds, Morgan Stanley, RBS, Santander, Société Générale, Standard Chartered and UBS. The Committee may amend the list of comparator companies to ensure it remains relevant to Barclays or if circumstances make this necessary (for example, as a result of takeovers or mergers).

Salaries are reviewed annually and any changes are effective from 1 April in the financial year.

Salaries for executive Directors are set at a point within the benchmark range determined by the Committee taking into account their experience and performance. Increases for the current executive Directors over the policy period will be no more than local market employee increases other than in exceptional circumstances where the Committee judges that an increase is needed to bring an executive Director’s salary into line with that of our competitors. In such circumstances Barclays would consult with its major shareholders.

Role Based Pay

To enable competitive remuneration opportunity in recognition of the breadth and depth of the role

Paid quarterly in shares which are subject to a holding period with restrictions lifting over five years (20% each year). As the executive Directors beneficially own the shares, they will be entitled to any dividends paid on those shares.

RBP will be reviewed and fixed annually and may be reduced or increased in certain circumstances. Any changes are effective from 1 January in the relevant financial year.

The maximum RBP for executive Directors is set at £950,000 for the Group Chief Executive, Antony Jenkins, and £750,000 for the Group Finance Director, Tushar Morzaria. It is not pensionable (except where required under local law). These amounts may be reduced but are at the maxima and may not be increased above this level.

There are no performance measures.

Pension

To enable executive Directors to build long-term retirement savings

Executive Directors receive an annual cash allowance in lieu of participation in a pension arrangement.

The maximum annual cash allowance is 33% of salary for the Group Chief Executive and 25% of salary for the Group Finance Director and any other executive Director.

Benefits

To provide a competitive and cost effective benefits package appropriate to role and location

Executive Directors’ benefits provision includes private medical cover, annual health check, life and ill health income protection, tax advice, car cash allowance, and use of a company vehicle and driver when required for business purposes.

Additional benefits may be offered that are minor in nature or are normal market practice in a country to which an executive Director relocates or from which an executive Director is recruited.

In addition to the above, if an executive Director were to relocate, additional support would be provided for a defined and limited period of time in line with Barclays’ general employee mobility policy including provision of temporary accommodation, payment of removal costs and relocation flights. Barclays will pay the executive Director’s tax on the relocation costs but will not tax equalise and will also not pay the tax on his or her other employment income.

The maximum value of the benefit is determined by the nature of the benefit itself and costs of provision may depend on external factors, e.g. insurance costs.

Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  75


Remuneration policy for executive Directors continued

Element and purposeOperationMaximum value and performance measures

B. Variable Pay

Annual bonus

To reward delivery of short-term financial targets set each year, the individual performance of the executive Directors in achieving those targets, and their contribution to delivering Barclays’ strategic objectives

While financial objectives are important, the Balanced Scorecard (which also includes Group financial targets) plays a significant role in bonus determination, to ensure alignment with Barclays’ strategy

Deferred bonuses encourage long-term focus and retention. Delivery substantially or fully in shares with a holding period increases alignment with shareholders. Deferred bonuses are granted by the Committee (or an authorised sub-committee) at its discretion, subject to the relevant plan rules

Determination of annual bonus

Individual bonuses are discretionary and decisions are based on the Committee’s judgement of executive Directors’ performance in the year, measured against Group and personal objectives.

Delivery structure

Executive Directors are Code Staff and their bonuses are therefore subject to deferral of at least the level applicable to all Code Staff, currently 40% (for bonuses of no more than £500,000) or 60% (for bonuses of more than £500,000). The Committee may choose to defer a greater proportion of any bonus awarded to an executive Director than the minimum required by the PRA Remuneration Code. At least half the non-deferred bonus is delivered in shares or share-linked instruments.

Deferred bonuses for executive Directors may be delivered in a combination of shares or other deferral instruments.

Participants may, at the Committee’s discretion, also receive the benefit of any dividends paid between the award date and the relevant release date in the form of dividend shares.

Operationmanagement of risk and conduct adjustment and malus

Any bonus awarded will reflect appropriate reductions madeis a critical underpinning to incentive pools in relation to risk events. Individual bonus decisions may also reflect appropriate reductions in relation to specific risk and conduct events.

All unvested deferred bonuses are subject to malus provisions which enable the Committee to reduce the vesting level of deferred bonuses (including to nil) for any reason. These include, but are not limited to:

§  A participant deliberately misleading Barclays, the market and/or shareholders in relation to the financial performance of the Barclays Group

§  A participant causing harm to Barclays’ reputation or where his/her actions have amounted to misconduct, incompetence or negligence

§  A material restatement of the financial statements of the Barclays Group or the Group or any business unit suffering a material down turn in its financial performance

§  A material failure of risk management in the Barclays Group

§  A significant deterioration in the financial health of the Barclays Group

Timing of receipt

Non-deferred cash components of any bonus are paid following the performance year to which they relate, normally in February. Non-deferred share bonuses are awarded normally in March and are subject to a six-month holding period.

Deferred share bonuses normally vest in three equal portions over a minimum three-year period, subject to the provisions of the plan rules including continued employment and the malus provisions (as explained above). Should the deferred awards vest, the shares are subject to an additional six-month holding period (after payment of tax).

The maximum annual bonus opportunity is 80% of fixed pay.

The performance measures by which any executive Director bonuses are assessed include Group, business and personal measures, both financial and non-financial. Financial measures may include, but are not restricted to such measures as net income, adjusted profit before tax, return on equity, CET1 ratio and return on risk weighted assets. Non-financial measures are based on the Balanced Scorecard. Personal objectives may include key initiatives relating to the role of the Director or in support of Barclays’ strategic objectives. The Balanced Scorecard may be updated from time to time in line with the Group’s strategy. In making its assessment of any bonus, the Committee will consider financial factors to guide 50% of the bonus opportunity, the Balanced Scorecard 35%, and personal objectives 15%. Any bonus is discretionary and any amount may be awarded from zero to the maximum value.

76  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F


Governance: Remuneration report

Directors’ remuneration policy (abridged)

Remuneration policy for executive Directors continued

Element and purposeOperationMaximum value and performance measures

B. Variable Pay continued

Long Term Incentive Plan (LTIP) award

To reward execution of Barclays’ strategystrategy. The material risks and growth in shareholder value over a multi-year period

Long-term performance measurement, holding periods and the malus provisions discourage excessive risk-taking and inappropriate behaviours, encourage a long-term view and align executive Directors’ interests with those of shareholders

Performance measures balance incentivising management to deliver strong risk-adjusted financial returns, and delivery of strategic progress as measured by the Balanced Scorecard. Delivery in shares with a further two-year holding period increases alignment with shareholders

Determination of LTIP award

LTIP awards are made by the Committee following discussion of recommendations made by the Chairman (foruncertainties the Group Chief Executive’s LTIP award)faces across its business and by the Group Chief Executive (for other executive Directors’ LTIP awards).

Delivery structure

LTIP awardsportfolios are granted subject to the plan rules and are satisfied in Barclays’ shares (although they may be satisfied in other instruments as may be required by regulation).

For each award, performance measures are set at grant and there is no retesting allowedkey areas of those conditions. The Committee has, within the parameters set out opposite, the flexibility to vary the weighting of performance measures and calibration for each award prior to its grant.

The Committee has discretion, and in line with the plan rules approved by shareholders, in exceptional circumstances to amend targets, measures, or number of awards if an event happens (for example, a major transaction) that, in the opinion of the Committee, causes the original targets or measures to be no longer appropriate or such adjustment to be reasonable. The Committee also has the discretion to reduce the vesting of any award if it deems that the outcome is not consistent with performance delivered, including to zero.

Participants may, at the Committee’s discretion, also receive the benefit of any dividends paid between the award date and the relevant release date in the form of dividend equivalents (cash or securities).

Operation of risk adjustment and malus

The achievement of performance measures determines the extent to which LTIP awards will vest. Awards are also subject to malus provisions (as explained in the Annual bonus paragraphs above) which enable the Committee to reduce the vesting level of awards (including to nil).

Timing of receipt

Barclays LTIP awards have a five-year period in total from grant to when all restrictions are lifted. This will include a minimum three-year vesting period and an additional two-year holding period once vested (after payment of tax)

The maximum annual LTIP award is 120% of fixed pay.

Vesting is dependent on performance measures and service.

Following determination of the financial measures applicable to an LTIP cycle, if the Committee is satisfied with the underlying financial health of the Barclays Group (based on profit before tax) it may, at its discretion, adjust the percentage of shares considered for release up or down by up to 10% (subject to the maximum % for the award calibrated against financial performance measures).

Performance measures will be based on financial performance (e.g. measured on return on risk weighted assets), risk metrics (e.g. measured by loan loss rate) and the Balanced Scorecard which also includes financial measures. The Committee has discretion to change the weightings but financial measures will be at least 50% and the Balanced Scorecard will be a maximum of 30%. The threshold level of performance for each performance measure will be disclosed annually as part of the implementation of remuneration report.

Straight line vesting applies between threshold and maximum for the financial and risk measures.

Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  77


Remuneration policy for executive Directors continued

Element and purposeOperationMaximum value and performance measures

C. Other

All employee share plans

To provide an opportunity for Directors to voluntarily invest in the Company

Executive Directors are entitled to participate in:

(i)  Barclays Sharesave under which they can make monthly savings over a period of three or five years linked to the grant of an option over Barclays’ shares which can be at a discount of up to 20% on the share price set at the start.

(ii)  Barclays Sharepurchase under which they can make contributions (monthly or lump sum) out of pre-tax pay (if based in the United Kingdom) which are used to acquire Barclays’ shares.

(i)  Savings between £5 and the maximum set by Barclays (which will be no more than the HMRC maximum) per month. There are no performance measures.

(ii)Contributions of between £10 and the maximum set by Barclays (which will be no more than the HMRC maximum) per tax year which Barclays may match up to HMRC maximum (current match is £600). There are no performance measures.

Previous buy out awardsmanagement focus.  

Tushar Morzaria currently holds an unvested buy-out award under the Barclays Joiners Share Value Plan which was granted to him in respect of awards he forfeited as a result of accepting employment at Barclays. This award was made in line with the Barclays’ recruitment policy.

LOGO
 

The award was no more generous than and mirrored as far as possible the expected value and timing of vesting of the forfeited awards granted by JP Morgan.

Shareholding requirement

To further enhance the alignment of shareholders’ and executive Directors’ interests in long-term value creation

Executive Directors must build up a shareholding of 400% of salary over five years from the later of: (i) the introduction of the new requirement in 2013; and (ii) the date of appointment as executive Director. They have a reasonable period to build up to this requirement again if it is not met because of a share price fall.

Shares that count towards the requirement are beneficially owned shares including any vested share awards subject only to holding periods (including vested LTIPs, vested deferred share bonuses and RBP shares). Shares from unvested deferred share bonuses and unvested LTIPs do not count towards the requirement.

Barclays’ shares worth a minimum of 400% of salary must be held within five years.

Outside appointments

To encourageself-development and allow for the introduction of external insight and practice

Executive Directors may accept one board appointment in another listed company.

Chairman’s approval must be sought before accepting appointment. Fees may be retained by the executive Director. None of the executive Directors currently hold an outside appointment.

Not applicable.

78  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F


Governance: Remuneration report

Directors’ remuneration policy (abridged)

Notes to the table on pages 75 to 78:

Performance measures and targets

The Committee selected the relevant financial and risk based performance measures because they are key to the bank’s strategy and are important measures used by the executive Directors to oversee the direction of the business. The Balanced Scorecard has been selected as it demonstrates the performance and progress of Barclays as measured across the following dimensions (5Cs): Customers & Clients, Colleagues, Citizenship, Conduct and Company. Each of the 5Cs in the Balanced Scorecard will have equal weighting. All targets are set to be stretching but achievable and aligned to enhancing shareholder value.

The Committee is of the opinion that the performance targets for the annual bonus and Balanced Scorecard element of the LTIP are commercially sensitive in respect of the Company and that it would be detrimental to the interests of the Company to disclose them before the start of the relevant performance period. The performance against those measures will be disclosed after the end of the relevant financial year in that year’s remuneration report subject to the sensitivity no longer remaining.

Differences between the remuneration policy of the executive Directors and the policy for all employees of the Barclays Group

The structure of total remuneration packages for executive Directors and for the broader employee population is similar. Employees receive salary, pension and benefits and are eligible to be considered for a bonus and to participate in all employee share plans. The broader employee population typically does not have a contractual limit on the quantum of their remuneration and does not receive RBP which is paid only to some, but not all, Code Staff. Executive Director RBP is determined on a similar basis to other Code Staff.

The Committee approaches any salary increases for executive Directors by benchmarking against market data for named banks. Incremental annual salary increases remain more common among employees at less senior levels.

As with executive Directors, bonuses for the broader employee population are performance based. Bonuses for executive Directors and the broader employee population are subject to deferral requirements. Executive Directors and other Code Staff are subject to deferral at a minimum rate of 40% (for bonuses of no more than £500,000) or 60% (for bonuses of more than £500,000) but the Committee may choose to operate higher deferral rates. For non-Code Staff, bonuses in excess of £65,000 are subject to a graduated level of deferral. The terms of deferred bonus awards for executive Directors and the wider employee population are broadly the same, in particular the vesting of all deferred bonuses (subject to service and malus conditions).

The broader employee population is not eligible to participate in the Barclays LTIP.

How shareholder views and broader employee pay are taken into account by the Committee in setting policy and making remuneration decisions

We recognise that remuneration is an area of particular interest to shareholders and that in setting and considering changes to remuneration it is critical that we listen to and take into account their views. Accordingly, a series of meetings are held each year with major shareholders and shareholder representative groups (including the Association of British Insurers, National Association of Pension Funds and ISS). The Committee Chairman attends these meetings, accompanied by senior Barclays’ employees (including the Reward and Performance Director and the Company Secretary). The Committee notes that shareholder views on some matters are not always unanimous, but values the insight and engagement that these interactions and the expression of sometimes different views provide. This engagement is meaningful and helpful to the Committee in its work and contributes directly to the decisions made by the Committee.

The Committee takes account of the pay and employment conditions of the broader employee base when it considers the remuneration of the executive Directors. The Committee receives and reviews analysis of remuneration proposals for employees across all of the Group’s businesses. This includes analysis by corporate grade and by performance rating and information on proposed bonuses and salary increases across the employee population and individual proposals for Code Staff and highly paid individuals. When the Committee considers executive Director remuneration, it therefore makes that consideration in the context of a detailed understanding of remuneration for the broader employee population and uses the all employee data to compare remuneration and ensure consistency throughout the Group. Employees are not consulted directly on the Directors’ remuneration policy.

Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  79


Executive Directors’ policy on recruitment

Element of remunerationCommentaryMaximum value
Salary

Determined by market conditions, market practice and ability to recruit.

For a newly appointed executive Director, whether through external recruitment or internal promotion, if their salary is at a level below the desired market level, the Committee retains the discretion to realign their salary over a transitional period which may mean that annualised salary increases for the new appointee are higher than that set out in the salary section of the remuneration policy.

In line with policy.
Role Based Pay

Determined by role, market practice and ability to recruit. Percentage may decrease or increase in certain circumstances subject to maximum value.

100% of salary.
Benefits

In line with policy.

In line with policy.
PensionIn line with policy.

33% of salary (Group Chief Executive), 25% of salary (Group Finance Director) and 25% if another executive Director is appointed.

Annual BonusIn line with policy.80% of fixed pay.
Long Term Incentive PlanIn line with policy.120% of fixed pay.
Buy out

The Committee can consider buying out forfeited bonus opportunity or incentive awards that the new executive Director has forfeited as a result of accepting the appointment with Barclays, subject to proof of forfeiture where applicable.

As required by the PRA Remuneration Code, any award made to compensate for forfeited remuneration from the new executive Director’s previous employment may not be more generous than, and must mirror as far as possible the expected value, timing and form of delivery, the terms of the forfeited remuneration and must be in the best long-term interests of Barclays. Barclays deferral policy shall however apply as a minimum to any buy out of annual bonus opportunity.

The value of any buy out is not included within the maximum incentive levels above since it relates to a buy out of forfeited bonus opportunity or incentive awards from a previous employer.

Where a senior executive is promoted to the Board, his or her existing contractual commitments agreed prior to his or her appointment may still be honoured in accordance with the terms of the relevant commitment including vesting of any pre-existing deferred bonus or long-term incentive awards.

80  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F


Governance: Remuneration report

Directors’ remuneration policy (abridged)

Executive Directors’ policy on payment for loss of office (including a takeover)

The Committee’s approach to payments in the event of termination is to take account of the individual circumstances including the reason for termination, individual performance, contractual obligations and the terms of the deferred bonus plans and long-term incentive plans in which the executive Director participates.

Standard provisionPolicyDetails
Notice periods in executive Directors’ service contracts

12 months’ notice from the Company.

6 months’ notice from the executive Director.

Executive Directors may be required to work during the notice period or may be placed on garden leave or if not required to work the full notice period may be provided with pay in lieu of notice (subject to mitigation where relevant).

Pay during notice period or payment in lieu of notice per service contracts12 months’ salary payable and continuation of pension and other contractual benefits while an employee.

Payable in phased instalments (or lump sum) and subject to mitigation if paid in instalments and executive Director obtains alternative employment during the notice period or while on garden leave.

In the event of termination for gross misconduct neither notice nor payment in lieu of notice is given.

Treatment of Role Based PayCeases to be payable from the executive Director’s termination date. Therefore, RBP will be paid during any notice period and/or garden leave, but not where Barclays elects to make a payment in lieu of notice (unless otherwise required by local law).

Shares to be delivered on the next quarterly delivery date shall be pro rated for the number of days from the start of the relevant quarter to the termination date. Where Barclays elects to terminate the employment with immediate effect by making a payment in lieu of notice, the executive Director will not receive any shares that would otherwise have accrued during the period for which the payment in lieu is made (unless required otherwise by local law).

Treatment of annual bonus on termination

No automatic entitlement to bonus on termination, but may be considered at the Committee’s discretion and subject to performance measures being met and pro rated for service. No bonus would be payable in the case of gross misconduct or resignation.

Treatment of unvested deferred bonus awards

Outstanding deferred bonus awards would lapse if the executive Director leaves by reason of resignation or termination for gross misconduct. However in the case of death or if the Director is an ‘eligible leaver’ defined as leaving due to injury, disability or ill health, retirement, redundancy, the business or company which employs the executive Director ceasing to be part of the Group or in circumstances where Barclays terminates the employment (other than in cases of cause or gross misconduct), he or she would continue to be eligible to be considered for unvested portions of deferred awards, subject to the rules of the relevant plan unless the Committee determines otherwise in exceptional circumstances. Deferred awards are subject to malus provisions which enable the Committee to reduce the vesting level of deferred bonuses (including to nil).

In the event of a takeover or other major corporate event, the Committee has absolute discretion to determine whether all outstanding awards would vest early or whether they should continue in the same or revised form following the change of control. The Committee may also determine that participants may exchange existing awards for awards over shares in an acquiring company with the agreement of that company.

In an eligible leaver situation, deferred bonus awards may be considered for release in full on the scheduled release date unless the Committee determines otherwise in exceptional circumstances. After release, the awards may be subject to an additional holding period of six months.

Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  81


Executive Directors’ policy on payment for loss of office (including a takeover) continued

Standard provision

PolicyDetails
Treatment of unvested
awards under the LTIP

Outstanding unvested awards under the LTIP would lapse if the executive Director leaves by reason of resignation or termination for gross misconduct. However, in line with the plan rules approved by shareholders, in the case of death or if the Director is an ‘eligible leaver’ defined as leaving due to injury, disability or ill health, retirement, redundancy, the business or company which employs the executive Director ceasing to be part of the Group (or for any other reason if the Committee decides at its discretion), he or she would continue to be entitled to be considered for an award. Awards are also subject to malus provisions which enable the Committee to reduce the vesting level of awards (including to nil).

In the event of a takeover or other major corporate event (but excluding an internal reorganisation of the Group), the Committee has absolute discretion to determine whether all outstanding awards vest subject to the achievement of any performance conditions. The Committee has discretion to apply a pro rata reduction to reflect the unexpired part of the vesting period. The Committee may also determine that participants may exchange awards for awards over shares in an acquiring company with the agreement of that company. In the event of an internal reorganisation, the Committee may determine that outstanding awards will be exchanged for equivalent awards in another company.

In an eligible leaver situation, awards may be considered for release on the scheduled release date, pro rated for time and performance, subject to the Committee’s discretion to determine otherwise in exceptional circumstances. After release, the shares (net of deductions for tax) are subject to an additional holding period of two years.
Repatriation

Except in a case of gross misconduct or resignation, where a Director has been relocated at the commencement of employment, the Company may pay for the Director’s repatriation costs in line with Barclays’ general employee mobility policy including temporary accommodation, payment of removal costs and relocation flights. The company will pay the executive Director’s tax on the relocation costs but will not tax equalise and will also not pay tax on his or her other income relating to the termination of employment.

Other

Except in a case of gross misconduct or resignation, the Company may pay for the executive Director’s legal fees and tax advice relating to the termination of employment and provide outplacement services. The Company may pay the executive Director’s tax on these particular costs.

82  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F


Governance: Remuneration report

Directors’ remuneration policy (abridged)

Remuneration policy for non-executive Directors

Element and purposeOperation

Fees

Reflect individual responsibilities and membership of Board Committees and are set to attract non-executive Directors who have relevant skills and experience to oversee the implementationdetailed breakdown of our strategy

The Chairman and Deputy Chairman are paid an all-inclusive fee for all Board responsibilities. The Chairman has a minimum time commitment equivalentRisk Management approach please see pages 98 to at least 80% of a full-time role. The other non-executive Directors receive a basic Board fee, with additional fees payable where individuals serve as a member or Chairman of a Committee of the Board.

Fees are reviewed each year by the Board as a whole against those for non-executive Directors in companies of similar scale and complexity. Fees were last increased in May 2011.

The first £30,000 (Chairman: first £100,000) after tax and national insurance contributions of each non- executive Director’s basic fee is used to purchase Barclays’ shares which are retained on the non-executive Director’s behalf until they retire from the Board.

Benefits

For Chairman only

The Chairman is provided with private medical cover subject to the terms of the Barclays scheme rules from time to time, and is provided with the use of a Company vehicle and driver when required for business purposes.

No other n on-executive Director receives any benefits from Barclays. Non-executive Directors are not eligible to join Barclays’ pension plans.

Bonus and share plans

Non-executive Directors are not eligible to participate in Barclays cash, share or long-term incentive plans.

Notice and termination provisions

Each non-executive Director’s appointment is for an initial six year term, renewable for a single term of three years thereafter and subject to annual re-election by shareholders.

Notice period:

Chairman: 12 months from the Company (six months from the Chairman). Non-executive Directors: six months from the Company (six months from the Non-executive Director).

Termination payment policy

The Chairman’s appointment may be terminated by Barclays on 12 months’ notice or immediately in which case 12 months’ fees and contractual benefits are payable in instalments at the times they would have been received had the appointment continued, but subject to mitigation if they were to obtain alternative employment. There are similar termination provisions for non-executive Directors based on six months’ fees. No continuing payments of fees (or benefits) are due if a non-executive Director is not re-elected by shareholders at the Barclays Annual General Meeting.

114.

In accordance with the policy table above, any new Chairman and Deputy Chairman would be paid an all-inclusive fee only and any new non-executive Director would be paid a basic fee for their appointment as a Director, plus fees for their participation on and/or chairing of any Board committees, time apportioned in the first year as necessary. No sign-on payments are offered to non-executive Directors.

Discretion

In addition to the various operational discretions that the Committee can exercise in the performance of its duties (including those discretions set out in the Company’s share plans), the Committee reserves the right to make either minor or administrative amendments to the policy to benefit its operation or to make more material amendments in order to comply with new laws, regulations and/or regulatory guidance. The Committee would only exercise this right if it believed it was in the best interests of the Company to do so and where it is not possible, practicable or proportionate to seek or await shareholder approval in General Meeting.

Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  83


Risk review

Contents

The management of risk plays a central role in the execution of Barclays’ strategy and insight into the level of risk across businesses and portfolios and the material risks and uncertainties the Group face are key areas of management focus.

For a more detailed breakdown of our Risk performance and Risk management contents please see pages 336-409.

 

Page

Material existing and emerging risks

  

Annual Report    

Insight into the level of risk across our business and portfolios, the material existing and emerging risks and uncertainties we face and the key areas of management focus.

§

Material existing and emerging risks potentially impacting more than one Principal Risk

89   
 § Credit risk  8791   
 § Market risk  8893   
 § FundingTreasury and capital risk  8893   
 § Operational risk  94   
89§Model risk95   
 § Conduct risk  9195   
 § Reputation risk96   

Material existing and emerging risks potentially impacting more than one Principal§

Legal risk

 

  9296   

Risk management

   

Overview of Barclays’ approach to risk management. A detailed overview together with more specific information on policies that the Group determines to be of particular significance in the current operating environment can be found in Barclays PLC 2016 Pillar 3 Report or at Barclays.com.

 

§

 

Risk management strategy

95
§Governance structure95
§Risk governance and assigning responsibilities97
§Principal risks and Key risks

  98   
 § Credit risk management  101   
99§Management of credit risk mitigation techniques and counterparty credit risk102   
 § Market risk management  101
§Funding risk management103   
 § Capital risk managementManagement of securitisation exposures  103n/a   
 § LiquidityTreasury and capital risk management  105104   
 § Operational risk management  106109   
 § Model risk management111   
§Conduct risk management112   
§Reputation risk management113   

Conduct§

Legal risk management

 

  108114   

Risk performance

   

Credit risk:

§

Credit risk overview

118   
The risk of suffering financial loss should the Group’s customers, clients or market counterparties fail to fulfil their contractual obligations to the Group.

obligations.
§Credit risk overview and summary of performance112
 § Analysis of the balance sheet  112118   
 § 

MaximumAnalysis of maximum exposure and collateral and other credit enhancement held

  113119   
 § The Group’s approach to manage and represent credit quality  115
§Loans and advances to customers and banks117121   
 § Analysis of the concentration of credit risk  118123   
 § Group exposures

Exposure to specificEurozone countries and industries

  124   
119§

Loans and advances to customers and banks

127   
 § Analysis of specific portfolios and asset types  122
§Analysis of loans on concession programmes131128   
 § Analysis of problem loans  134132   
 § 

Forebearance

134   

§

Impairment

 

  137138   

Market risk:

§

Market risk overview and measures in the Group143   
The risk of a reduction to earnings or capital due to volatility of the trading book positions or as a consequence of running aan inability to hedge the banking book balance sheet and liquidity pools.

sheet.
§Market risk overview, measures in the Group and summary of
performance
139
 § Balance sheet view of trading and banking books  140144   
 § Traded market risk  141145   
 § Business scenario stresses  142146   
 § Review of regulatory measures  142146   
 § Non-tradedCapital requirements for market risk  n/a   
143§Non-traded market risk147   
§Economic capital148   
 § Foreign exchange risk  145149   
§Pension risk review  146

§

 

Pension risk review

150   

Funding risk – Capital:

§

Capital risk overview and regulatory minimum capital and leverage requirements

154   
The risk that the Group is unable to maintain appropriate capital ratios. § 

Insurance risk review

Capital resources

  147

Funding risk – Capital:

The risk that the Group has insufficient capital resources.

§Capital risk overview and summary of performance149155   
 § Regulatory minimum capital and leverage requirements

Risk weighted assets

  149
§Capital resources150157   
 § 

Leverage ratio requirementsand exposures

 

  153158   

Funding risk – Liquidity:

§

Liquidity risk overview and stress testing

161   
The risk that the Group,firm, although solvent, either does not have sufficient financial resources available to enable it to meet its obligations as they fall due, or can secure such resources only at excessive cost.

§

 §

Liquidity pool

  Liquidity risk overview and summary of performance155
§Liquidity risk stress testing155
§Liquidity pool158163   
 § Funding structure and funding relationships  164   
159§

Deposit funding

165   
 § Wholesale funding Group  160166   
 § Term financing  162168   
 § Encumbrance  162168   
 § Credit ratings  166172   
 § Liquidity management at Barclays AfricaBAGL Group Limited  167173   
 

§

 

Contractual maturity of financial assets and liabilities

 

  167173   

 

8486   |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 20152016 Annual Report on Form 20-F  


Risk review

Contents

    

 

 

Risk performance continued

  Page  

Annual Report    

Risk performance continued

Operational risk:

Any instance where there is a potentialThe risk of direct or actual impact to the Groupindirect impacts resulting from human factors, inadequate or failed internal processes people,and systems or from an external event. The impacts to the Group can be financial, including losses or an unexpected financial gain, as well as non-financial such as customer detriment, reputational or regulatory consequences.events.

 

 

§

§

Operational risk overview and summary

§  Summary of performance in the period

Operational§  Operation risk profile

  173

173179   

179   

179   

Conduct risk:

The risk that detriment is caused to our customers, clients, counterparties or the GroupBarclays and its employees because of inappropriate judgement in the execution of our business activities.

§
§
§
§
§

 

 

§Conduct risk overview

Reputation risk

§Summary of performance

Salz recommendations

§Conduct reputation measure

  175

175181   

175181   

176

176181   

Supervision and regulation:

The Group’s operations, including its overseas offices, subsidiaries and associates, are subject to a significant body of rules and regulations that are a condition for authorisation to conduct banking and financial services business.

 

§

Supervision of the Group

  177182   
 §  Global regulatory developments  Global regulatory developments177183   
 §  Regulation in the EU and UK  Influence of European legislation178183   
 §  Regulation in the United States  EU developments178186   
 §  Regulatory developments in the US  Regulation in the UK179187   
 §  Structural reform developments  Resolution of UK banking groups179
§Structural reform of banking groups180
§Compensation schemes180
§Regulation in the US181
§

Regulation in Africa

182188   

The Pillar 3 report of Barclays published on 1 March 2016 contains additional information on Barclays’ risk as well as capital management. Readers may access the complete Pillar 3 report at the Barclays investor relations web site. The Pillar 3 report is not incorporated by reference into and is not part of the 2015 20-F.

 

  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 20152016 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  8587


Risk review

Material existing and emerging risks

    

 

 

Analysis of material existing and emerging risks

This section describes the material risks to which senior management is currently focused on andpay particular attention, which they believe could cause the Group’s future results of the Group’s operations, financial condition and prospects to differ materially from current expectations.

 

LOGO LOGO

For more information about the major risk policies which underlie risk exposures, see the consolidated policy-based qualitative information in the Barclays PLC 2015 Pillar 3 Report. A summary of this information may also be found in this report in the Risk management section between pages 33697 to 409.114.

LOGO

 

 

8688 | Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 20152016 Annual Report on Form 20-F  


Risk review

Material existing and emerging risks

Material existing and emerging risks to the Group’s future performance

 

 

This section describes the material risks to which senior management payspay particular attention, which they believe could cause the future results of the Group’s operations, financial condition and prospects to differ materially from current expectations. These expectations include the ability to pay dividends, maintain appropriate levels of capital and meet capital and leverage ratio targets, and achieve stated commitments. In addition, risks relating to the Group that are not currently known, or that are currently deemed immaterial, may individually or cumulatively have the potential to materially affect the future results of the Group’s operations, financial condition and prospects.

Material risks and their impact are described below in two sections: i) risks which senior management believesbelieve are likely to impact a singleaffect more than one Principal Risk; and ii) risks which senior management believesbelieve are likely to affect more than oneimpact a single Principal Risk. Certain risks below have been classified as an ‘emerging risk’, whichAn emerging risk is a risk that has the potential to have a significant detrimental effect on the Group’s performance, but currently the outcome and the time horizon for the crystallisation of its possible impact is more uncertain and more difficult to predict than for other risk factors that are not identified as emerging risks. A revised ERMF was approved by the Board in December 2016. This includes a revised risk taxonomy comprising eight Principal Risks (Model Risk, Reputation Risk and Legal Risk were not previously classified as Principal Risks). Additional detail on ERMF and Principal Risks may be found on pages 98.

More informationAdditional detail on the management of risks may be found in Barclays’ Approach to Managing Risk in the Barclays PLC 20152016 Pillar 3 Report.

Material existing and emerging risks potentially impacting more than one Principal Risk

i) Structural reform

The UK Financial Services (Banking Reform) Act 2013 (the UK Banking Reform Act) and associated secondary legislation and regulatory rules, require all UK deposit-taking banks with over £25bn of deposits (from individuals and small businesses) to separate certain day-to-day banking activities (e.g. deposit-taking) offered to retail and smaller business customers from other wholesale and investment banking services.

Through the creation of Barclays’ ring-fenced bank, the Group will ensure that core deposits placed within the European Economic Area (EEA) are ring-fenced to meet the requirements of the legislation by 2019. The implementation of these changes involves a number of risks which include:

§The Group must restructure its intra-group and external capital, funding and liquidity arrangements to meet regulatory requirements and support business needs. The changes will impact the sources of funding available to the different entities, including preventing the non ring-fenced bank’s access to certain categories of deposit funding. These changes may result in higher funding costs.

§The changes to the Group structure may negatively impact the assessment made by credit rating agencies and creditors. The risk profile and key risk drivers of the ring-fenced bank and the non ring-fenced bank will be specific to the activities and risk profile of each entity. As a result different Group entities are likely to be assessed differently and this may result in differences in credit ratings. Changes to the credit assessment at the Group or individual entity level, including the potential for ratings downgrades and ratings differences across entities, could impact access and cost of certain sources of funding.

§Implementation of ring-fencing introduces a number of execution risks. Technology change could result in outages or operational errors. Legal challenge to the ring-fence transfer scheme may delay the transfer of assets and liabilities to the ring-fenced bank. In particular, the setup of the Group Service Company as a separate legal entity servicing both trading entities (i.e. ring-fenced bank and non ring-fenced bank) will require a number of intra-group service level agreements to be established and agreed between the Group Service Company and the trading entities and will require the Group to set up a new approach to manage, fund and deliver the activities that will be provided by this entity. Delayed delivery could increase reputational risk or result in regulatory non-compliance. Uncertain customer preference (for placement in the ring-fenced or non ring-fenced bank) may result in changes to design and implementation plans.

§At the European level, structural reform regulation is still being developed as highlighted by the European Union proposal issued in November 2016 for Intermediate Holding Companies. The impact of final rules on Barclays’ businesses is still to be assessed once European regulation is finalised. Final rules will need to be considered alongside EU Referendum implications. The implementation date for these proposals will depend on the date on which any final legislation is agreed.
§There is a risk that Barclays does not meet regulatory requirements across the new structure. Failure to meet these requirements may have an adverse impact on the Group’s profitability, operating flexibility, flexibility of deployment of capital and funding, return on equity, ability to pay dividends, credit ratings, and/or financial condition.

ii) Business conditions, general economy and geopolitical issues

The Group’s performance could be adversely affected in relation to more than one Principal Risk by a weak or deteriorating global economy or political instability. These factors may also occur in one or more of the Group’s main countries of operation.

The Group offers a broad range of services including to retail, institutional and government customers, in a large number of countries. The breadth of these operations means that deterioration in the economic environment, or an increase in political instability in countries where the Group is active, or in any other systemically important economy, could adversely affect the Group’s performance and prospects.

For the Group, a deterioration of conditions in its key markets could affect performance in a number of ways including, for example: (i) deteriorating business, consumer or investor confidence leading to reduced levels of client activity, or indirectly, a material adverse impact on GDP growth in significant markets and therefore on Group performance; (ii) higher levels of default rates and impairment; (iii) mark to market losses in trading portfolios resulting from changes in factors such as credit ratings, share prices and solvency of counterparties; and (iv) lower levels of fixed asset investment and productivity growth overall.

Global growth is expected to remain modest in 2017, with low singledigit growth in advanced economies alongside a slowdown in emerging markets. This moderate economic performance, lower commodity prices and increased geopolitical tensions mean that the distribution of risks to global economic activity continues to be biased to the downside. Commodity prices, particularly oil prices, remain depressed, but could fall further if growth in demand remains weak or supply takes longer than expected to adjust. At the same time, countries with high reliance on commodity-related earnings have already experienced a tightening of financial conditions. A sustained period of low prices risks triggering further financial distress, default and contagion, for our customers, their suppliers and local communities, and resulting losses for Barclays.

Moreover, sentiment towards emerging markets as a whole continues to be driven in large part by developments in China, where there is significant concern around the ability of authorities to manage growth whilst transitioning towards services. A stronger than expected slowdown could result if authorities fail to appropriately manage the end of the investment andcredit-led boom, while the consequences from a faster slowdown would flow through both financial and trade channels into other economies, and affect commodity markets.

Whilst tightening of monetary policy by the US Federal Reserve was not as pronounced as expected during 2016, a moderate increase in activity is expected during 2017, the increasing divergence of policies between major advanced economies risks triggering further financial market volatility. Changes to interest rate expectations could ignite further volatility and US Dollar appreciation, particularly if the US Federal Reserve were to increase interest rates faster than markets currently expect. Emerging markets have already seen growth slow following increased .capital outflows, but growth may slow further if tighter US interest rate policy drives further reallocation of capital.

In several countries, reversals of capital inflows, as well as fiscal austerity, have already caused deterioration in political stability. This could be exacerbated by a renewed rise in asset price volatility or sustained pressure on government finances. In addition, geopolitical tensions in some areas of the world, including the Middle East and Eastern Europe are already acute, and are at risk of further deterioration.

In the US, the policy platform of the new administration is expected to be clarified during the early part of 2017. There is the possibility of significant changes in policy in sectors including trade, healthcare and commodities which may have an impact on associated Barclays’ portfolios. Proposed policy changes (includingtax-cuts and significant infrastructure spending) are likely to result in higher global growth,

Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2016 Annual Report on Form 20-F | 89


Risk review

Material existing and emerging risks

Material existing and emerging risks to the Group’s future performance

further reinforcing the move towards global reflation. Political change may increase uncertainty as to regulatory trends, both in the US and the EU.

In the UK, the vote in favour of leaving the EU has given rise to political uncertainty with attendant consequences for investment and confidence. See vi) EU Referendum on page 91.

iii) Change and execution risk

The Group continues to drive changes to its functional capabilities and operating environment in order to allow the business to exploit emerging and digital technologies, and improve customer experience whilst also embedding enhanced regulatory requirements, strategic realignment, and business model changes. The complexity, increasing pace, and volume of changes underway simultaneously mean there is heightened execution risk and potential for change not being delivered to plan.

Failure to adequately manage this risk could result in extended outages and disruption, financial loss, customer detriment, legal liability, potential regulatory censure and reputational damage.

iv) Risks arising from regulation of the financial services industry

The financial services industry continues to be the focus of significant regulatory change and scrutiny which may adversely affect the Group’s business, financial performance, capital and risk management strategies. For further information on regulations affecting the Group, including significant regulatory developments, please see the section on Supervision and Regulation on page 182.

a) Regulatory change

The Group, in common with much of the financial services industry, remains subject to significant levels of regulatory change and increasing scrutiny in many of the countries in which it operates (including, in particular, the UK and the US). This has led to a more intensive approach to supervision and oversight, increased expectations and enhanced requirements. As a result, regulatory risk will remain a focus for senior management and consume significant levels of business resources. Furthermore, this more intensive approach and the enhanced requirements, uncertainty and extent of international regulatory coordination as enhanced supervisory standards are developed and implemented may adversely affect the Group’s business, capital and risk management strategies and/or may result in the Group deciding to modify its legal entity structure, capital and funding structures and business mix, or to exit certain business activities altogether or not to expand in areas despite otherwise attractive potential.

b) Changes in prudential requirements, including changes to CRD IV

The Group’s results and ability to conduct its business may be negatively affected by changes or additions to supervisory and prudential expectations, including in relation to any minimum requirements for own funds and eligible liabilities, leverage or liquidity requirements, applicable buffers and/oradd-ons to such minimum requirements and RWA calculation methodologies all as may be set by international, EU or national authorities from time to time (including, for example, through changes being proposed to the CRD IV framework).

Changes to or additional supervisory and prudential expectations, either individually or in aggregate, may lead to unexpected enhanced requirements in relation to the Group’s capital, leverage, liquidity and funding ratios or alter the way such ratios are calculated. This may result in, amongst other things, a need for further management actions to meet the changed requirements, such as: increasing capital or liquidity resources, reducing leverage and risk weighted assets; modifying legal entity structure (including with regard to issuance and deployment of capital and funding for the Group); changing the Group’s business mix or exiting other businesses; and/or undertaking other actions to strengthen the Group’s position. See Treasury and Capital Risk on page 104 and Supervision and Regulation on page 184 for more information.

c) Market infrastructure reforms

Financial market infrastructure is subject to extensive and increasing regulation in many of the Group’s markets. The derivatives market has been the subject of particular focus across the G20 countries, requiring the clearing of standardised derivatives and the mandatory margining ofnon-cleared derivatives. More broadly, the recast Markets in Financial Instruments Directive in Europe (MiFID II) will fundamentally change the framework for market infrastructure, the Benchmarks Regulation will regulate the use of benchmarks in the EU, and regulation governing Central Securities Depositories will increase the requirements upon participants in the financial markets.

It is possible that these additional regulations, and the related expenses and requirements, will increase the cost of and therefore impact willingness of participation in the financial markets.

d) Recovery and resolution planning

In recent years, there has been a strong regulatory focus on ‘resolvability’ from regulators globally, and Barclays continues to work with the relevant authorities to identify and address potential impediments to the Group’s resolvability. As part of this work, the Group is required to submit formal Recovery and Resolution Plan (RRP) submissions to UK, US and South African regulators describing Barclays’ strategy for recovery and rapid and orderly resolution. These submissions are evaluated by regulators on the basis of both qualitative and quantitative metrics, the specifics of which may become more rigorous over time.

Should the relevant authorities in any jurisdiction ultimately determine that a resolution plan were not credible or would not facilitate an orderly resolution, Barclays or its subsidiaries could be made subject to more stringent capital, leverage or liquidity requirements, or restrictions on growth, activities or operations. The potential structural changes that may be required to address such a determination may negatively impact the financial or competitive position or results of operations of the Group, as well as increase the risk that the Group would be unable to maintain appropriate prudential ratios or be restricted from making intra group or external capital contributions.

e) Stress testing

The Group and certain of its members are subject to supervisory stress testing exercises in a number of jurisdictions. These exercises currently include the programmes of the BoE, the EBA, the FDIC, the FRB and the SARB. These exercises are designed to assess the resilience of banks to adverse economic or financial developments and ensure that they have robust, forward-looking capital and liquidity management processes that account for the risks associated with their business profile. Assessment by regulators is on both a quantitative and qualitative basis, the latter focusing on the Group’s or certain of its members’ business model, data provision, stress testing capability and internal management processes and controls. The stress testing requirements to which the Group and its members are subject are becoming increasingly stringent, including in the US where the newlysub-consolidated operations and the IHC will be stress-tested and examined under the FRB’s annual CCAR programme for the first time in 2017. Failure to meet requirements of regulatory stress tests, or the failure by regulators to approve the stress test results and capital plans of the Group, could result in the Group being required to enhance its capital position, limit capital distributions or position capital in specific subsidiaries. For more information on stress testing, please see Supervision and Regulation on page 184.

v) Regulatory action in the event of a bank failure

As described under ‘Supervision of the Group, Regulation in the EU and UK, Recovery and Resolution developments’ on page 183 UK resolution authorities have the right under certain circumstances to intervene in the Group pursuant to the stabilisation and resolution powers granted to them under the Banking Act and other applicable legislation.

90 | Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2016 Annual Report on Form 20-F


If any of the powers conferred on the BoE were to be exercised, or there were an increased risk of exercise, in respect of the Group or any entity within the Group, this might result in a material adverse effect on the rights or interests of shareholders and creditors including holders of debt securities and could have a material adverse effect on the market price of shares and other securities issued by the Group. Such effects could include losses of shareholdings or associated rights including, the dilution of percentage ownership of the Group’s share capital, and may result in creditors, including debt holders, losing all or a part of the value of their investment in the Group’s issued securities.

vi) EU referendum

The UK held a referendum on 23 June 2016 on whether it should remain a member of the EU. This resulted in a vote in favour of leaving the EU. The result of the referendum means that the long-term nature of the UK’s relationship with the EU is unclear and there is uncertainty as to the nature and timing of any agreement with the EU on the terms of exit. In the interim, there is a risk of uncertainty for both the UK and the EU, which could adversely affect the economy of the UK and the other economies in which we operate. The potential risks associated with an exit from the EU have been carefully considered by the Board and include:

Market risk

§Potential for continued market volatility (notably FX and interest rates) given political uncertainty which could affect the value of Trading Book positions.

Credit risk

§Increased risk of a UK recession with lower growth, higher unemployment and falling UK house prices. This would likely negatively impact a number of Barclays’ portfolios, notably: higher Loan to Value home loans, UK unsecured lending including cards and Commercial Real Estate exposures.

Operational risk

§Changes to current EU “Passporting” rights: the UK’s withdrawal from the EU may result in the loss of cross-border market access rights which would require Barclays to make alternative licensing arrangements in EU jurisdictions in which Barclays continues to operate.

§Uncertainty over UK’s future approach to EU freedom of movement will impact Barclays’ access to the EU talent pool, decisions on hiring from the EU of critical roles and rights to work of current Barclaysnon-UK EU citizens located in the UK and UK citizens located in the EU.

Legal risk

§The legal framework within which Barclays operates could change and become more uncertain as the UK takes steps to replace or repeal certain laws currently in force, which are based on EU legislation and regulation. Certainty of existing contracts, enforceability of legal obligations and uncertainty around the outcome of disputes may be affected until the impacts of the loss of the current jurisdictional arrangements between UK and EU courts and the universal enforceability of judgements across the EU, are fully known (including the status of existing EU case law).

Treasury and capital risk

§Potential for credit spread widening and reduced investor appetite for Barclays debt issuance, which could negatively impact the cost of and/or access to funding. Potential for continued market volatility could affect interest rate risk in the banking book, as well as securities held by Barclays for liquidity purposes.

§Changes in the long-term outlook for UK interest rates might also adversely affect UK Pension IAS19 liabilities.

vii) Impairment

The introduction of the impairment requirements of IFRS 9 Financial Instruments, due to be implemented on 1 January 2018, is expected to result in higher impairment loss allowances that are recognised earlier, on a more forward looking basis and on a broader scope of financial instruments than is the case under IAS 39. Measurement will involve increased complexity, judgement and is expected to have a material financial impact and impairment charges will tend to be more volatile. Unsecured products with longer expected lives, such as revolving credit cards, are expected to be most impacted. The capital treatment on the increased reserves is the subject of ongoing discussion with regulators and across the industry, but there is potential for significant adverse impact on regulatory capital ratios. In addition, the move from incurred to expected credit losses has the potential to impact the Group’s performance under stressed economic conditions or regulatory stress tests. For more information please refer to Note 1 Significant Accounting Policies on pages 226 to 230.

Barclays has a jointly accountable risk and finance implementation and governance programme with representation from all impacted departments. During 2016, work continued on the design and build of impairment models, systems, processes, governance, controls and data collection and continues to be refined during 2017. During 2017, there is a planned parallel run which includes continued model, process and output validation, testing, calibration and analysis.

There will be three different layers of impairment committees. In addition to the existing Group and Business level committees, Legal Entity committees for Barclays UK and Barclays International will also be in place. Committees will be chaired by the Chief Risk Officer (CRO), with joint accountability by both CROs and Chief Financial Officers (CFOs) for signing off the results. The new IFRS 9 impairment committee structure, with underlying key controls, is expected to be in operation from Q2 2017. There will also be a Scenarios Management Committee to review and approve the scenario process. The scope of review will include the scenarios and scenario narratives, the core set of macroeconomic variables and any management overlays. The Scenario Management Committee will attest that the scenarios adequately account for thenon-linearity and asymmetry of the loss distribution. Reported results and key messages will be communicated to the Board Audit Committee and Risk Executive Committee, who will have oversight roles and provide challenge of key assumptions, including the basis of the scenarios adopted.

Material existing and emerging risks by Principal Risk

Credit risk

The financial conditionrisk of loss to the Group’sfirm from the failure of clients, customers clients andor counterparties, including governmentssovereigns, to fully honour their obligations to the firm, including the whole and timely payment of principal, interest, collateral and other financial institutions, could adversely affect the Group.receivables.

The Group may suffer financial loss if any of its customers, clients or market counterparties fails to fulfil their contractual obligations to the Group. The Group may also suffer loss when the value of its investment in the financial instruments of an entity falls as a result of that entity’s credit rating being downgraded. In addition, the Group may incur significant unrealised gains or losses due to changes in the Group’s credit spreads or those of third parties, as these changes affect the fair value of the Group’s derivative instruments, debt securities that the Group holds or issues, and loans held at fair value.

Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2016 Annual Report on Form 20-F | 91


Risk review

Material existing and emerging risks

Material existing and emerging risks to the Group’s future performance

i) Deterioration in political and economic environment

The Group’s performance is at risk from deterioration in the political and economic environment (see also ‘Business conditions, general economy and political environmentgeopolitical issues’ on pages89) which may result from a number of uncertainties, including the following:

a) Specific regions

Political instability, economic uncertainty or deflation in regions in which the Group operates could weaken growth prospects and have an adverse impactAdverse impacts on customers’ ability to service debt and somay result in result in higher impairment charges for the Group. These include:

China (emerging risk)United Kingdom

EconomicFollowing the EU referendum on 23 June 2016 (see EU Referendum on page91), the UK may experience a period of political and economic uncertainty throughout the negotiation period during which exit options are hard to fully and accurately predict. The initial impact has been the depreciation of Sterling resulting in higher costs for companies exposed to imports and a more favourable environment for exporters. Rising domestic costs resulting from higher import prices may impact household incomes and the affordability of consumer loans and home loans. In turn this may affect businesses dependent on consumers for revenue. There has also been a reduction in activity in both commercial and residential real estate markets which has the potential to impact value.

United States

A significant proportion of the Group’s portfolio is located in the US, including a major credit card portfolio and a range of corporate and investment banking exposures. Stress in the US economy, weakening GDP, rising unemployment and/or an increase in interest rates could lead to increased levels of impairment.

Emerging Markets

Slower growth in China continues to affect a number of emerging economies, particularly those with high fiscal deficits and those reliant on short-term external financing and/or material reliance on commodity exports. Their vulnerability has been further impacted by the fall, and sustained volatility in oil prices, the strong US dollar and the winding down of quantitative easing policies by some central banks. The impact on the Group may vary depending on the vulnerabilities present in each country, but the impact may result in increased impairment charges through sovereign defaults, or the inability or unwillingness of clients and counterparties in that country to meet their debt obligations.

South Africa

The negative economic outlook in South Africa continues, with a challenging domestic and external environment. Recenteconomic environment and ongoing political events including changes to leaders in the Finance Ministry have added to the domestic challenges.uncertainty. Real GDP growth remains low as a result of decliningresulting in these domestic and global demand, in particular China, prices for key mineral exports, a downturn in tourism, persistent power shortages and slowing

house price growth.factors impacting credit quality across our portfolios. In the retail sector, concerns remain over the level of consumer indebtedness and affordability, particularly as the slowdown in China impacts the mining sector with job losses increasing. Emerging market turmoil has added further pressure on the Rand, which has continued to depreciate against major currencies. The decline in the economic outlook may impact a range of industry sectors in the corporate portfolio, with clients with higher leverage being impacted most.interest rates rise.

b) Interest rate rises, including as a result of slowing of monetary stimulus, could impact consumer debt affordability and corporate profitability

To the extent that central banks increase interest rates in certain developed markets, particularly in our main markets, the UK and the US, they are expected to be small and gradual in scale during 2016,2017, albeit following differing timetables. The first of theseRecent increases in interest rates occurred in the US with a quarter point0.25% rise in December 2015. While an increase2015 and the same rise in December 2016. Whilst further increases may support Group income, any sharperfuture interest rate increases, if larger or more frequent than expected changesexpectations, could cause stress in the loan portfolio and underwriting activity of the Group,Group. This would be particularly in relationapplicable tonon-investment grade lending, leading to the possibility of the Group incurring higher impairment. Higher credit losses and a requirement to increase the Group’s level ofdriving an increased impairment allowance would most notably occur in the Group’simpact retail unsecured and secured portfolios as a result of a reduction in recoverability and value of the Group’s assets, coupled with a decline in collateral values.

Interest rate increases in developed markets may also negatively impact emerging economies, as capital flows to mature markets to take advantage of the higher returns and strengthening economic fundamentals.

ii) Specific sectors

The Group is subject to risks arising from changes in credit quality and recovery rate of loans and advances due from borrowers and counterparties in a specific portfolio. Any deterioration in credit quality could lead to lower recoverability and higher impairment in a specific sector. The following provides examples ofare areas of uncertainties to the Group’s portfolio which could have a material impact on performance.

a) UK property

With UK property representing the mosta significant portion of the overall PCBUK Corporate and Retail credit exposure, the Group is at risk from a fall in property prices in both the residential and commercial sectors in the UK. Strong house price growth in London and the South East of the UK, fuelled by foreign investment, strong buy to letbuy-to-let (BTL) demand and subdued housing supply, has resulted in affordability levels reaching record levels; averagemetrics becoming stretched. Average house prices as at the end of 20152016 were more than seven7.9 times average earnings. A fall

However, the recent EU referendum has had a negative impact on home loan applications due to the increased uncertainty in the UK housing market, with ongoing concerns regarding the potential for falling house prices, particularly in London and the South EastEast. Further, a weakening economy would impact the home loan portfolio as costs rise off the back of higher interest rates and customers are impacted by inflationary affordability pressures. Potential losses would likely be most pronounced in the UK, wouldhigher Loan to Value (LTV) segments as falling house prices lead to higher impairment and negative capital impact as loss given default (LGD) rates increase. Potential losses would likely be most pronounced in the higher loan to value (LTV) segments.

The proposal on BTL properties announced by the UK Chancellor of the Exchequer in 2015, changing both the level of tax relief on rental income and increasing levels of stamp duty from April 2016, may cause some dislocation in the BTL market. Possible impacts include a reduced appetite in the BTL market and an influx of properties for sale causing downward pricing pressure, as well as reduced affordability as increased tax liabilities reduce net retail yields. As a consequence this may lead to an increase in BTL defaults at a time when market values may be suppressed, with the potential that, while the Group carefully manages such exposures, it may experience increased credit losses and impairment from loans with high LTV ratios.

b) Natural Resources (emerging risk)resources

TheDespite limited recovery in oil and commodities prices, the risk of losses and increased impairment is more pronounced where leverage is higher, or in sectors currently subject to strain, notably oil and gas, mining and metals and commodities. Sustained oil price depression from its recent high continues and is driven by ongoing global excess supply. While theThe positioning of these portfolios is relatively defensive and focuses on investment grade customers or collateralised positions, very severepositions. Continued stress in this market does have the potential to significantlyfurther increase credit losses and impairment.impairment where a decline in the value of oil impacts both customer revenue and the value of our underlying collateral.

Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  87


c) Large single name losses

The Group has large individual exposures to single name counterparties. The default of such counterparties could have a significant impact on the carrying value of these assets. In addition, where such counterparty risk has been mitigated by taking collateral, credit risk may remain high if the collateral held cannot be realised, or has to be liquidated at prices which are insufficient to recover the full amount of the loan or derivative exposure. Any such defaults could have a material adverse effect on the Group’s results due to, for example, increased credit losses and higher impairment charges.

d) Leverage Financefinance underwriting

The Group takes on significantsub-investment grade underwriting exposure, including single name risk, particularly focused in the US and Europe and to a lesser extent in South Africa and other regions.Europe. The Group is exposed to credit events and market volatility during the underwriting period. Any adverse events during this period may potentially result in loss for the Group or an increased capital requirement should there be a need to hold the exposure for an extended period.

92 | Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2016 Annual Report on Form 20-F


Market risk

The Group’s financial position may be adversely affected byrisk of loss arising from potential adverse changes in both the levelvalue of the firm’s assets and volatility ofliabilities from fluctuation in market variables including, but not limited to, interest rates, foreign exchange, equity prices, leading to lower revenues, or reduced capital:commodity prices, credit spreads, implied volatilities and asset correlations.

i) Concerns of majorIncreased uncertainty across global markets from such factors as an unexpected slowdown in global economic growth, sudden changes in monetary policy, and quantitative easing programmes,unexpected foreign exchange movements or slowdownvolatility, especially if accompanied by a significant deterioration in emerging market economies spilling over to global marketsthe depth of marketplace liquidity (emerging risk).

The trading business model is focused on client facilitation in wholesale financial markets, involvingranging from underwriting of debt and equity on behalf of issuers, to acting as a market making activities,maker in exchange-traded and over the counter products, to providing risk management solutions and execution.solutions.

The Group’s trading business is generally adversely exposed to a rapid unwindingprolonged period of quantitative easing programmes and deterioration inelevated asset price volatility, particularly if it negatively affects the macro environment driven by concerns in global growth. An extremely high leveldepth of volatility in asset pricesmarketplace liquidity. Such a scenario could affect market liquidity and cause excess market volatility, impactingimpact the Group’s ability to execute client trades and may also result in lower client flow-driven income and/or market-based losses on its existing portfolio losses.of market risks. These can include having to absorb higher hedging costs from rebalancing risks that need to be managed dynamically as market levels and their associated volatilities change.

A suddenTreasury and capital risk

The risk that the Group may not achieve its business plans because of the availability of planned liquidity, a shortfall in capital or a mismatch in the interest rate exposures of its assets and liabilities.

The Group may not be able to achieve its business plans due to: i) being unable to maintain appropriate capital ratios; ii) being unable to meet its obligations as they fall due; iii) rating agency downgrades; iv) adverse volatilitychanges in interest or foreign currency exchange rates on capital ratios; v) negative interest rates; and vi) adverse movements in the pension fund.

i) Inability to maintain appropriate prudential ratios

Should the Group be unable to maintain or achieve appropriate capital ratios this could lead to: an inability to support business activity; a failure to meet regulatory capital requirements including any additional capitaladd-ons or the requirements set for regulatory stress tests; increased cost of funding due to deterioration in investor appetite or credit ratings; restrictions on distributions including the ability to meet dividend targets; and/or the need to take additional measures to strengthen the Group’s capital or leverage position. While the requirements in CRD IV are now in force in the UK, further changes to regulatory capital requirements could occur, whether as a result of (i) further changes to EU legislation (for example, expected implementation of Bank of International Settlements (BIS) regulatory update recommendations through CRD V, etc); (ii) relevant binding regulatory technical standards updates by the European Banking Authority (EBA); (iii) changes to UK legislation; (iv) changes to PRA rules; (v) additional capital requirements through Financial Policy Committee (FPC) recommendations; or (vi) changes to International Financial Reporting Standards (IFRS). Such changes, either individually and/or in aggregate, may lead to further unexpected additional requirements in relation to the Group’s regulatory capital. For example, during 2016, the European Commission proposed substantial changes to the CRD IV framework (including CRR) in line with internationally-agreed standards. These include changes to the regulatory definition of trading activity, standardised and advanced RWA calculation methodologies for market risk and new standardised RWA rules for counterparty credit risk. The proposal also includesphase-in arrangements for the regulatory capital impact of IFRS9 and the ongoing interaction of IFRS9 with the regulatory framework. The Basel Committee has continued its post-crisis work on RWA and leverage reform. Further standards are expected during the course of 2017 on RWAs for credit risk and operational risk, limitations on the use of internal models for RWA purposes and possible floors based on standardised RWAs. The implementation timeframe for these changes is not yet certain.

Additional prudential requirements may also arise from other regulatory reforms, including UK, EU and US proposals on bank structural reform and current proposals for ‘Minimum Requirement for own funds and Eligible Liabilities (MREL) under the EU Bank Recovery and Resolution Directive (BRRD). Included within these reforms are the Bank of England’s latest responses to consultation and statement of policy on MREL requirements for UK banks which were published in November 2016 and which remain subject to further changes.

Many of the expected regulatory proposals are still subject to finalisation, with calibration and timing of implementation still to be determined, and there is potential for the impacts to detrimentallybe different from those originally expected when in final form. Overall, it is likely that these changes in law and regulation will have an impact on the Group as they are likely, when implemented, to require changes to the legal entity structure of the Group and how businesses are capitalised and funded. Any such increased prudential requirements may also constrain the Group’s planned activities, require balance sheet reductions and could increase the Group’s costs, impact the Group’s income from non-trading activity.

Thisearnings and restrict the Group’s ability to pay dividends. Moreover, if combined with a period of market dislocation or when there is becausesignificant competition for the type of funding that the Group has exposureneeds, it may be more difficult and/or costly to non-traded interest rateincrease the Group’s capital resources.

ii) Inability to manage liquidity and funding risk arising fromeffectively

Failure to manage its liquidity and funding risk effectively may result in the provisionGroup either not having sufficient financial resources to meet its payment obligations as they fall due or, although solvent, only being able to meet these obligations at excessive cost. This could cause the Group to fail to meet regulatory liquidity standards, be unable to supportday-to-day banking activities, or no longer be a going concern.

iii) Credit rating changes and the impact on funding costs

A credit rating assesses the creditworthiness of retailthe Group, its subsidiaries and wholesale non-traded banking productsbranches, and services,is based on reviews of a broad range of business and financial attributes including productsrisk management processes and procedures, capital strength, asset quality, earnings, funding, liquidity, accounting and governance. Any adverse event to one or more of these attributes may lead to a downgrade, which do not havein turn could result in contractual outflows to meet contractual requirements on existing contracts. Furthermore, outflows related to a defined maturity datemultiple-notch credit rating downgrade are included in the LRA stress scenarios and have an interest ratea portion of the liquidity pool is held against this risk. There is a risk that does not change in line with base rate movements, e.g. current accounts. The level and volatility of interest rates canany potential downgrades could impact the Group’s net interest margin, which isperformance should borrowing cost and liquidity change significantly versus expectations or the interest rate spread earned between lending and borrowing costs. The potential for future volatility and margin changes remains in key areas such ascredit spreads of the Group be negatively affected.

For further information please refer to Credit Ratings in the UK benchmark interest rate to the extent such volatility and marginLiquidity Risk Performance section on page 172.

iv) Adverse changes are not fully addressed by hedging programmes.in foreign exchange rates on capital ratios

The Group is also athas capital resources, risk from movementsweighted assets and leverage exposures denominated in foreign currencies. Changes in foreign currency exchange rates as thesemay adversely impact the sterlingSterling equivalent value of these items. As a result, the Group’s regulatory capital ratios are sensitive to foreign currency denominated assetsmovements, and any failure to appropriately manage the Group’s balance sheet to take account of foreign currency movements could result in the banking book, exposing it to currency translation risk.an adverse impact on regulatory capital and leverage ratios.

Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2016 Annual Report on Form 20-F | 93


Risk review

Material existing and emerging risks

ii)Material existing and emerging risks to the Group’s future performance

v) Negative interest rates

A fall in interest rates leading to an environment with negative nominal interest rates would adversely impact Group profitability as retail and corporate business income would decrease due to margin compression. This is because the significant reduction in asset income would not be offset by a reduction in cost in liabilities due to the presence of a floor in our customer deposit and savings rates which are typically set at positive level of rates.

vi) Adverse movements in the pension fund

Adverse movements between pension assets and liabilities for defined benefit pension schemes could contribute to a pension deficit. The liabilities discount rate is a key driver and, in accordance with International Financial Reporting Standards (IAS 19), is derived from the yields of high quality corporate bonds (deemed to be those with AA ratings) and consequently includes exposure to both risk-free yields and credit spreads. Therefore, the Group’s defined benefits scheme valuation would be adversely affected by a prolonged fall in the discount rate or a persistent low rate and/or credit spread environment. Inflation is another significant risk driver to the pension fund, as the liabilities are adversely impacted by an increase in long termlong-term inflation expectation.expectations. However in the long term, inflation and rates risk tend to be negatively correlated and therefore partially offset each other.

FundingOperational risk

The abilityrisk of the Group to achieve its business plans may be adversely impacted if it does not effectively manage its capital (including leverage), liquidity and other regulatory requirements.

The Group may not be able to achieve its business plans due to: i) being unable to maintain appropriate capital ratios; ii) being unable to meet its obligations as they fall due; iii) rating agency methodology changes resulting in ratings downgrades; and iv) adverse changes in foreign exchange rates on capital ratios.

i) Inability to maintain appropriate prudential ratios

Should the Group be unable to maintain or achieve appropriate capital ratios this could lead to: an inability to support business activity; a failure to meet regulatory capital requirements including the requirements of regulator set stress tests; increased cost of funding due to deterioration in credit ratings; restrictions on distributions including the ability to meet dividend targets; and/or the need to take additional measures to strengthen the Group’s capital or leverage position. While the requirements in CRD IV are now in force in the UK, further changes to capital requirements could occur, whether as a result of (i) further changes to EU legislation by EU legislators (for example, implementation of Bank of International Settlements (BIS) regulatory update recommendations), (ii) relevant binding regulatory technical standards updates by the European Banking Authority (EBA), (iii) changes to UK legislation by the UK government, (iv) changes to PRA rules by the PRA, or (v) additional capital requirements through Financial Policy Committee (FPC) recommendations. Such changes, either individually and/or in aggregate, may lead to further unexpected additional requirements in relationloss to the Group’s regulatory capital.

Additional prudential requirements may also arisefirm from other regulatory reforms, including UK, EU and the US proposals on bank structural reform and current proposals for ‘Minimum Requirement for own funds and Eligible Liabilities (MREL) under the EU Bank Recovery and Resolution Directive (BRRD). Included within these reforms are the BoE proposals on MREL requirements for UK banks which were published in December 2015. The BoE stated its intentions to communicate MREL requirements to UK banks during 2016. Many of the proposals are still subject to finalisation and implementation and may have a different impact when in final form. The impact of these proposals is still being assessed. Overall, it is likely that these changes in law and regulation will have an impact on the Group as they are likely, when implemented, to require changes to the legal entity structure of the Group and how businesses are capitalised and funded. Any such increased prudential requirements may also constrain the Group’s planned activities, lead to forced asset sales and balance sheet reductions and could increase the Group’s costs, impact on the Group’s earnings and restrict the Group’s ability to pay dividends. Moreover, during periods of market dislocation, as currently seen, or when there is significant competition for the type of funding that the Group needs, increasing the Group’s capital resources in order to meet targets may prove more difficult and/or costly.

ii) Inability to manage liquidity and funding risk effectively

Failure to manage its liquidity and funding risk effectively may result in the Group either not having sufficient financial resources to meet its payment obligations as they fall due or, although solvent, only being able to meet these obligations at excessive cost. This could cause the Group to fail to meet regulatory liquidity standards, be unable to support day-to-day banking activities, or no longer be a going concern.

iii) Credit rating changes and the impact on funding costs

A credit rating assesses the creditworthiness of the Group, its subsidiaries and branches and is based on reviews of a broad range of business and financial attributes including risk management processes and procedures, capital strength, earnings, funding, liquidity, accounting and governance. Any adverse event to one or more of these attributes may lead to a downgrade, which in turn could result in contractual outflows to meet contractual requirements on existing contracts.

88  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F


Risk review

Material existing and emerging risks

Material existing and emerging risks to the Group’s future performance

Furthermore, outflows related to a multiple notch credit rating downgrade are included in the LRA stress scenarios and a portion of the liquidity pool held against this risk. There is a risk that any potential downgrades could impact the Group’s performance should borrowing costs and liquidity change significantly versus expectations.

For further information, please refer to Credit Ratings in the Liquidity Risk Performance section on page 166.

iv) Adverse changes in foreign exchange rates on capital ratios

The Group has capital resources and risk weighted assets denominated in foreign currencies. Therefore changes in foreign currency exchange rates may adversely impact the sterling equivalent value of foreign currency denominated capital resources and risk weighted assets. As a result, the Group’s regulatory capital ratios are sensitive to foreign currency movements, and a failure to appropriately manage the Group’s balance sheet to take account of foreign currency movements could result in an adverse impact on regulatory capital ratios. The impact is difficult to predict with any accuracy, but it may have a material adverse effect on the Group if capital and leverage ratios fall below required levels.

Operational risk

The operational risk profile of the Group may change as a result of human factors, inadequate or failed internal processes andor systems, human factors or due to external events.events (for example fraud) where the root cause is not due to credit or market risks.

The Group is exposed to many types of operational risk. This includes:These include: fraudulent and other internal and external criminal activities; breakdowns in processes, controls or procedures (or their inadequacy relative to the size and scope of the Group’s business); systems failures or an attempt by an external party to make a service or supporting technological infrastructure unavailable to its intended users, known as a denial of service attack; and the risk of geopolitical cyber threat activity which destabilises or destroys the Group’s information technology, or critical technological infrastructure the Group depends upon but does not control. The Group is also subject to the risk of business disruption arising from events wholly or partially beyond its control, for example natural disasters, acts of terrorism, epidemics and transport or utility failures, which may give rise to losses or reductions in service to customers and/or economic loss to the Group. All of these risks are also applicable where the Group relies on outside suppliers or vendors to provide services to it and its customers. The operational risks that the Group is exposed to could change rapidly and there is no guarantee that the Group’s processes, controls, procedures and systems are sufficient to address, or could adapt promptly to, such changing risks to avoid the risk of loss.

i) Cyber attacks (emerging risk)risk

The risk posed by cyber attacks continues to grow.is growing, with financial institutions being a primary target of increasingly capable cyber crime groups, as demonstrated by sophisticated targeted attacks against global payment networks throughout 2016. The proliferationincreased maturity of online marketplaces tradingfor criminal services and stolen data has reduced barriers ofto entry for criminals perpetrating financial attacks which carry high reward and low risk of law enforcement prosecution.

The cyber threat increases the inherent risk to perpetrate cyber attacks, while at the same time increasing motivation.

Attacker capabilities continue to evolve as demonstrated by a marked increase in denial of service attacks, and increased sophistication of targeted fraud attacks by organised criminal networks. We face a growing threat to our informationGroup’s data (whether it is held by usthe Group or in ourits supply chain), to the integrity of our financial transactions, and to the availability of our services. All of these necessitate a broad intelligence and response capability.

Given the level of increasing global sophistication and scope of potential cyber attacks, future attacks may lead to significant breaches of security which jeopardise the sensitive information and financial transactions of the Group, its clients, counterparties orand customers, or cause disruptionand to systems performing critical functions.the availability of the Group’s services. Failure to adequately manage cyber threatsthis risk, and to continually review and update processes, in response to new threats could result in increased fraud losses, inability to perform critical economic functions, customer detriment, potential regulatory censure and penalty, legal liability and reputational damage.

ii) Infrastructure and technology resilience

AsThe failure of the dependency on digital channelsGroup’s and otherits suppliers’ technology infrastructures remain a material risk driver for the Group. The increased use of technologies grows, the impact of technology issues can becometo support business strategy, and customer and client demand, means any failures will be felt more materialimmediately and immediate. This is also the casewith greater impact.

Failure to adequately manage resilience in many other industries and organisations but particularly impactful in the banking sector.

The Group’s technology,our technologies, real-estate, and supplier infrastructure is critical to the operation of its businessesbusiness and to the delivery of products and services to customers and clients and to meet our market integrity obligations. Sustainedsuppliers’ processes, may result in disruption to services provided by Barclays, either directly or through third parties,normal service which could have ain turn result in significant impactcustomer detriment, cost to customers and to the Group’s reputation and may also lead to potentially large costs to rectify the issue and reimburse losses incurred by our customers, as well as possiblepotential regulatory censure or penalty, and penalties.reputational damage.

iii) Ability to hire and retain appropriately qualified employees

The Group requires a diverse mix of highly skilled and qualified colleagues to deliver its strategy and so is dependent on attracting and retaining appropriately qualified and experienced individuals. BarclaysBarclays’ ability to attract and retain such talent is impacted by a range of external and internal factors.

External regulatory changesregulation such as the introduction of the Individual Accountability Regime and the required deferral and claw back provisions of our compensation arrangements may make Barclays a less attractive proposition relative to both our international competitors and other industries. Similarly, meeting the requirementsimpact of structural reform may increase the competitiveness inplanned exit of the market for talent. Internally, restructuring of our businesses and functions, and an increased focus on costs may allUK from the EU could potentially have an impact on employee engagementour ability to hire and retention.retain key employees.

Failure to attract or prevent the departure of appropriately qualified employees who are dedicated to overseeing and managing current and future regulatory standards and expectations, or who have the necessary skills required to deliver the Group strategy, could negatively impact our financial performance, control environment, and level of employee engagement.engagement and may result in disruption to service which could in turn lead to customer detriment and reputational damage.

iv) Losses due to additional tax chargesTax risk

The Group is subjectrequired to comply with the domestic and international tax laws inand practice of all countries in which it operates, including tax laws adopted at the EU level, andhas business operations. There is impacted by a number of double taxation agreements between countries. There is risk that the Group could suffer losses due to additional tax charges, other financial costs or reputational damage due toas a rangeresult of possible factors. This includes a failurefailing to comply with such laws and practice or correctly assessby failing to manage its tax affairs in an appropriate manner. The Group also faces emerging risks from domestic and international tax developments. For example, the applicationOECD’s Base Erosion and Profit Shifting (‘BEPS’) project, and the implementation of relevant taxits recommendations into domestic law a failurein countries around the world, has the potential to deal with tax authorities in a timely and effective manner or an incorrect calculation of tax estimates for reported and forecast tax numbers. Such charges, orsignificantly increase the conduct of any dispute with a relevant tax authority, could lead to adverse publicity, reputational damage and potentially to costs materially exceeding current provisions, which could have an adverse effectcompliance burden on the Group’s operations, financial conditionsGroup, as well as to increase the incidence of double taxation on the Group as a result of different countries adopting different interpretations and prospects.approaches to the BEPS recommendations.

v) Critical accounting estimates and judgements

The preparation of financial statements in accordance with IFRS requires the use of estimates. It also requires management to exercise judgement in applying relevant accounting policies. The key areas involving a higher degree of judgement or complexity, or areas where assumptions are significant to the consolidated and individual financial statements include provisions for conduct and legal, competition and regulatory matters, fair value of financial instruments, credit impairment charges for amortised cost assets, impairment and valuation of available for sale investments, calculation of current and deferred tax and accounting for pensions and post-retirements benefits. There is a risk that if the judgement exercised, or the estimates or assumptions used, subsequently turn out to be incorrect, this could result in significant loss to the Group, beyond what was anticipated or provided for.

94  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2016 Annual Report on Form 20-F


As part of the assets in theNon-Core business, the Group holds a UK portfolio of generally longer termlonger-term loans to counterparties in ESHLAEducation, Social Housing and Local Authorities (ESHLA) sectors, which are measured on a fair value basis. The valuation of this portfolio is subject to substantial uncertainty due to the long datedlong-dated nature of the portfolios, the lack of a secondary market in the relevant loans and unobservable loan spreads. As a result of these factors, the Group may be required to revise the fair values of these portfolios to reflect, among other things, changes in valuation methodologies due to

Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  89


changes in industry valuation practices and as further market evidence is obtained in connection with theNon-Core asset rundownrun-off and exit process. For further information refer to Note 18 Fair value of assets and liabilitiesfinancial instruments of the Group’s consolidated financial statements.

The further development of standards and interpretations under IFRS could also significantly impact the financial results, condition and prospects of the Group.

vi) Outsourcing

The introductionGroup depends on suppliers for the provision of many of our services, though the Group continues to be accountable for risk arising from the actions of such suppliers. Failure to monitor and control our suppliers could potentially lead to client information, or our critical infrastructures and services, not being adequately protected.

The dependency on suppliers andsub-contracting of outsourced services introduces concentration risk where the failure of specific suppliers could have an impact on our ability to continue to provide services that are material to the Group.

Failure to adequately manage outsourcing risk could result in increased losses, inability to perform critical economic functions, customer detriment, potential regulatory censure and penalty, legal liability and reputational damage.

vii) Data quality

The quality of the impairment requirementsdata used in models across Barclays has a material impact on the accuracy and completeness of IFRS 9 Financial Instruments will resultour risk and financial metrics. The evolution of complex modelling underpinning risk decisions, forecasting and capital calculations, demands greater precision in impairment being recognised earlier than is the case under IAS 39 because it requires expected lossesour data. Failure to be recognised before the loss event arises. Measurement will involve increased complexity and judgement including estimation of probabilities of defaults, losses given default, a range of unbiased future economic scenarios, estimation of expected lives, estimation of exposures at default and assessing increases in credit risk. It is expected tomanage data standards accordingly may have a material financial impact, but it will not be practical to disclose reliable financial impact estimates untiladverse effect on the implementation programme is further advanced.quality of our risk management.

For more information please referviii) Operational precision and payments

The risk of material errors in operational processes, including payments, are exacerbated during the present period of significant levels of structural and regulatory change, the evolving technology landscape, and a transition to Note 1 Significant accounting policiesdigital channel capabilities.

Material operational or payment errors could disadvantage our customers, clients or counterparties and could result in regulatory censure and penalties, legal liability and reputational damage.

Model risk

The risk of the potential adverse consequences from financial assessments or decisions based on pagesincorrect or misused model outputs and reports.218

Barclays uses models to 220.support a broad range of business and risk management activities, including informing business decisions and strategies, measuring and limiting risk, valuing exposures, conducting stress testing, assessing capital adequacy, supporting new business acceptance and risk/reward evaluation, managing client assets, or meeting reporting requirements.

Models are imperfect and incomplete representations of reality, and so they may be subject to errors affecting the accuracy of their outputs. Models may also be misused. Model errors or misuse may result in the Group making inappropriate business decisions and being subject to financial loss, regulatory risk, reputational risk and/or inadequate capital reporting.

Conduct risk

The risk of detriment to customers, clients, market integrity, competition or Barclays from the inappropriate supply of financial services, including instances of wilful or negligent misconduct.

Barclays is committed to ensuring that positive customer and client outcomes and protecting market integrity are integral to the way the firm operates. This includes taking reasonable steps to ensure our culture and strategy are appropriately aligned to these objectives; our products and services are reasonably designed and delivered to meet the needs of our customers and clients, as well as maintaining the fair and orderly operation of the markets in which we do business.

Certain other risks referenced herein may result in detriment to customers, clients and market integrity if not managed effectively. These include but are not limited to: cyber risk; infrastructure and technology resilience; ability to hire and retain qualified people; outsourcing; data quality; operational precision and payments; regulatory change; structural reform; change and execution risk; and the exit of the UK from the EU.

i) Execution of strategic divestment inNon-Core businesses

As Barclays executes strategic decisions to exit products, businesses or countries, the firm must consider and mitigate any potential detriment to customers, clients and market integrity. There is a risk some customers and clients may have reduced market access and a limited choice of alternative providers, or transitions to alternate providers could cause disruptions. There is also a risk the firm’s strategic divestments may impact market liquidity or result in adverse pricing movements. In connection with any country exits, there is a risk that any ongoing cross-border activities into those countries are not conducted in accordance with local laws and regulations. The crystallisation of any of these risks could cause detriment to customers, clients and market integrity, as well as regulatory sanctions, financial loss and reputational damage.

ii) Product governance and sales practices

Effective product governance, including design, approval and periodic review of products, and appropriate controls over various internal and third-party sales channels are critical to ensuring positive outcomes for customers and clients. In particular, Barclays must ensure that its remuneration practices and performance management framework are designed to prevent conflicts of interest and inappropriate sales incentives. Failure of product governance and sales controls could result in the sale of products and services that fail to meet the needs of, or are unsuitable for, customers and clients, regulatory sanctions, financial loss and reputational damage.

iii) Trading controls and benchmark submissions

Maintaining controls over trading activities and benchmark submissions is critical to ensuring the trust of our customers, clients and other market participants. These controls must be designed to ensure compliance with all applicable regulatory requirements, as well as to prevent market manipulation, unauthorised trading and inadvertent errors. A failure of these controls could result in detriment to customers and clients, disruptions to market integrity, regulatory sanctions, financial loss and reputational damage. The risk of failure could be enhanced by the changes necessary to address various new regulations, including but not limited to the Markets in Financial Instruments Directive II.

iv) Financial Crime

The management of Financial Crime remains a key area of regulatory focus. Delivering a robust control environment to ensure that the Bank effectively manages the risks of Money Laundering, Terrorist Financing, Sanctions and Bribery and Corruption protects the Bank, its customers and its employees, as well as society at large, from the negative effects of financial crime. Failure to maintain an effective control environment may lead to regulatory sanctions, financial loss and reputational damage.

Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2016 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  95


Risk review

Material existing and emerging risks

Material existing and emerging risks to the Group’s future performance

v) Data protection and privacy

The proper handling of data and protection of data privacy is critical to developing trust and sustaining long-term relationships with our customers and clients. Inadequate protection of data (including data held and managed by third party suppliers) could lead to security compromise, data loss, financial loss and other potential detriment to our customers and clients, as well as regulatory sanctions, financial loss and reputational damage. The risk of failure could be enhanced by the changes necessary to address various new regulations, including but not limited to the EU Data Protection Initiative.

vi) Regulatory focus on culture and accountability

Various regulators around the world have emphasised the importance of culture and personal accountability in helping to ensure appropriate conduct and drive positive outcomes for customers, clients and markets integrity. Regulatory changes such as the new UK Senior Managers Regime and Conduct Rules coming into effect in 2017, along with similar regulations in other jurisdictions, will require Barclays to enhance its organisational and operational governance to evidence its effective management of culture and accountability. Failure to meet these new requirements and expectations may lead to regulatory sanctions, financial loss and reputational damage.

Reputation risk

The risk that an action, transaction, investment or event will reduce trust in the firm’s integrity and competence by clients, counterparties, investors, regulators, employees or the public.

Climate change, human rights and support for the defence sector

Any one transaction, investment or event that, in the perception of key stakeholders reduces their trust in the firm’s integrity and competence, may have the potential to give rise to risk to Barclays reputation. Barclays’ association with sensitive sectors is often an area of concern for stakeholders and the following topics have been of particular interest:

Fossil fuels: As the Paris agreement on CO2 emissions comes into force, banks are coming under increased pressure from civil society, shareholders and potentially national governments regarding the management and disclosure of their climate risks and opportunities, including the activities of certain sections of their client base;

Human Trafficking: The UK Modern Slavery Act came into force in October 2015 and with the scrutiny of global business investments rising, the risks of association with human rights violations are growing within the banking sector, through the perceived indirect involvement in human rights abuses committed by clients and customers. Campaigners have been seeking to hold all parties in the value chain to account for environmental and human rights violations where they occur; and

Defence Sector: Supporting the manufacture and export of military and riot control goods and services continues to require significant review internally in order to ensure compliance with all relevant requirements and to avoid reputational damage.

Legal competition andrisk

The risk of loss or imposition of penalties, damages or fines from the failure of the firm to meet its legal obligations including regulatory mattersor contractual requirements.

Legal disputes, regulatory investigations, fines and other sanctions relating to conduct of business and financial crimebreaches of legislation and/or regulations may negatively affect the Group’s results, reputation and ability to conduct its business.

The Group conducts diverse activities in a highly regulated global market and therefore is therefore exposed to the risk of fines and other sanctions relating to the conduct of its business. In recent years authorities have increasingly investigated past practices, vigorously pursued alleged breaches and imposed heavy penalties on financial services firms. This trend is expected to continue. In relation to financial crime, aA breach of applicable legislation and/or regulations could result in the Group or its staff being subject to criminal prosecution, regulatory censure, fines and other sanctions in the jurisdictions in which it operates, particularly in the UK and the US. Where clients, customers or other third parties are harmed by the

Group’s conduct, this may also give rise to legal proceedings, including class actions. Other legal disputes may also arise between the Group and third parties relating to matters such as breaches, enforcement of legal rights or obligations arising under contracts, statutes or common law. Adverse findings in any such matters may result in the Group being liable to third parties seeking damages, or may result in the Group’s rights not being enforced as intended.

Details of material legal, competition and regulatory matters to which the Group is currently exposed are set out in Note29 Legal,legal, competition and regulatory matters. In addition to those material ongoing matters specifically described in Note 29, the Group is engaged in various other legal proceedings in the UK and US and a number of other overseas jurisdictions which arise in the ordinary course of business. The Group is also subject to requests for information, investigations and other reviews by regulators, governmental and other public bodies in connection with business activities in which the Group is or has been engaged. The Group is keeping all relevant agencies briefed as appropriate in relation to these matters on an ongoing basis. In light of the uncertainties involved in legal, competition and regulatory matters, there can be no assurance that the outcome of a particular matter or matters will not be material to the Group’s results of operations or cash flow for a particular period, depending on, amongamongst other things, the amount of the loss resulting from the matter(s) and the amount of income otherwise reported for the period.

The outcome of material, legal, competition and regulatory matters, both those to which the Group is currently exposed and any others which may arise in the future, is difficult to predict. However, it is likely that in connection with any such matters the Group willmay incur significant expense, regardless of the ultimate outcome, and any such matters could expose the Group to any of the following: substantial monetary damages and/or fines; remediation of affected customers and clients; other penalties and injunctive relief; additional litigation; criminal prosecution in certain circumstances; the loss of any existing agreed protection from prosecution; regulatory restrictions on the Group’s business operations including the withdrawal of authorisations; increased regulatory compliance requirements; suspension of operations; public reprimands; loss of significant assets or business; a

negative effect on the Group’s reputation; loss of investor confidence and/or dismissal or resignation of key individuals.

In January 2017, Barclays PLC was sentenced to serve three years of probation from the date of the sentencing order in accordance with the terms of its May 2015 plea agreement with the DOJ. During the term of probation Barclays PLC must, amongst other things, (i) commit no crime whatsoever in violation of the federal laws of the United States, (ii) implement and continue to implement a compliance programme designed to prevent and detect the conduct that gave rise to the plea agreement and (iii) strengthen its compliance and internal controls as required by relevant regulatory or enforcement agencies. Potential consequences of breaching the plea agreement include the imposition of additional terms and conditions on the Group, an extension of the agreement, or the criminal prosecution of Barclays PLC, which could, in turn, entail further financial penalties and collateral consequences and have a material adverse effect on the Group’s business, operating results or financial position.

There is also a risk that the outcome of any legal, competition or regulatory matters in which the Group is involved may give rise to changes in law or regulation as part of a wider response by relevant law makers and regulators. An adverseA decision in any one matter, either against the Group or another financial institution facing similar claims, could lead to further claims against the Group.

vii) Risks arising from regulation of the financial services industry

The financial services industry continues to be the focus of significant regulatory change and scrutiny which may adversely affect the Group’s business, financial performance, capital and risk management strategies. For further information on regulations affecting the Group, including significant regulatory developments, see the section on Supervision and Regulation.

a) Regulatory change

The Group, in common with much of the financial services industry, remains subject to significant levels of regulatory change and increasing scrutiny in many of the countries in which it operates (including, in particular, the UK and the US). This has led to a more intensive approach to supervision and oversight, increased expectations and enhanced requirements. As a result, regulatory risk will remain a focus for senior management and consume significant levels of business resources. Furthermore, this more intensive approach and the enhanced requirements, uncertainty and extent of international regulatory coordination as enhanced supervisory standards are developed and implemented may adversely affect the Group’s business, capital and risk management strategies and/or may result in the Group deciding to modify its legal entity structure, capital and funding structures and business mix, or to exit certain business activities altogether or not to expand in areas despite otherwise attractive potential.

b) Changes in prudential requirements, including changes to CRD IV

The Group’s results and ability to conduct its business may be negatively affected by changes to, or additional supervisory expectations.

In July 2015, the Financial Policy Committee (FPC) of the BoE published a policy statement directing the PRA to require all major UK banks and building societies to hold enough Tier 1 capital to satisfy a minimum leverage ratio of 3% and a countercyclical leverage ratio buffer of 35% of the institution-specific countercyclical capital buffer rate. The FPC also directed that UK G-SIBs and domestically systemically important banks should meet a supplementary leverage buffer ratio of 35% of corresponding risk-weighted capital buffer rates. The PRA published a policy statement, finalised rules and a supervisory statement implementing the FPC’s directions in December 2015 and the new leverage ratio framework came into force on 1 January 2016.

In January 2016, the BCBS endorsed a new market risk framework, including rules made as a result of its fundamental review of the trading book, which will take effect in 2019. Barclays continues to monitor the potential effects on its capital position arising from these rules and from (i) revisions to the BCBS’s standardised rules for credit risk, counterparty credit risk, CVA volatility risk and operational risk; and (ii) the BCBS considering the position regarding the limitation of the use of internal models in certain areas (for example, removing the Advanced Measurement Approach for operational risk) and applying RWA floors based on the standardised approaches.

Changes to, or additional supervisory expectations, in relation to capital and/or leverage ratio requirements either individually or in aggregate, may lead to unexpected enhanced requirements in relation to the Group’s capital, leverage, liquidity and funding ratios or alter the way such ratios are calculated. This may result in a need for further management actions to meet the changed requirements, such as: increasing capital or liquidity resources, reducing leverage and risk weighted assets; modifying legal entity structure (including with regard to issuance and deployment of capital and funding for the Group); changing the Group’s business mix or exiting other businesses; and/or undertaking other actions to strengthen the Group’s position.

 

 

9096 | Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 20152016 Annual Report on Form 20-F  


Risk review

Material existing and emerging risksRisk management

Material existing and emerging risks to the Group’s future performance

 

 

c) Market infrastructure reforms

The derivatives markets are subject to extensive and increasing regulation in many of the Group’s markets, including, in particular, Europe pursuant to the European Market Infrastructure Regulation (EMIR) and in the US under the Dodd Frank Wall Street Reform and Consumer Protection Act of 2010 (DFA). Certain of these increased regulatory requirements have already come into force, with further provisions expected to become effective in stages, including through a new recast version of the Markets in Financial Instruments Directive and a new regulation (the Markets in Financial Instruments Regulation) in Europe.

It is possible that additional regulations, and the related expenses and requirements, will increase the cost of and restrict participation in the derivatives markets, thereby increasing the costs of engaging in hedging or other transactions and reducing liquidity and the use of the derivatives markets.

Changes in regulation of the derivatives markets could adversely affect the business of the Group and its affiliates in these markets and could make it more difficult and expensive to conduct hedging and trading activities, which could in turn reduce the demand for swap dealer and similar services of the Group and its subsidiaries. In addition, as a result of these increased costs, the new regulation of the derivatives markets may also result in the Group deciding to reduce its activity in these markets.

d) Recovery and resolution planning

There continues to be a strong regulatory focus on ‘resolvability’ from regulators, particularly in the UK, the US and South Africa. The Group made its first formal Recovery and Resolution Plan (RRP) submissions to the UK and US regulators in mid-2012 and made its first Recovery Plan submission to the South African regulators in 2013. Barclays continues to work with the relevant authorities to identify and address potential impediments to the Group’s ‘resolvability’.

In the UK, RRP work is considered part of continuing supervision. Removal of potential impediments to an orderly resolution of the Group or one or more of its subsidiaries is considered as part of the BoE and PRA’s supervisory strategy for each firm, and the PRA can require firms to make significant changes in order to enhance resolvability. Barclays provides the PRA with a Recovery Plan annually and with a Resolution Pack every other year.

In the US, Barclays is one of several systemically important banks required to file resolution plans with the Board of Governors of the Federal Reserve System (Federal Reserve) and the Federal Deposit Insurance Corporation (FDIC) (collectively, the Agencies) under provisions of the DFA. Pursuant to the resolution plan regulation in the US, a joint determination by the Agencies that a resolution plan is not credible or would not facilitate an orderly resolution under the US Bankruptcy Code may result in a bank being made subject to more stringent capital, leverage, or liquidity requirements, or restrictions on growth, activities or operations in the US.

Additionally, there are further resolution-related proposals in the US, such as the Federal Reserve’s proposed regulation requiring internal total loss absorbing capital (TLAC) for Barclays’ US Intermediate Holding Company (IHC) that will be established during 2016, and increased record keeping and reporting requirements for obligations under qualified financial contracts (QFC proposal) that may, depending on final rules, materially increase the operational and financing costs of Barclays’ US operations.

In South Africa, the South African Treasury and the South Africa Reserve Bank are considering material new legislation and regulation to adopt a resolution and depositor guarantee scheme in alignment with FSB principles. Barclays Africa Group Limited (BAGL) and its primary subsidiary Absa Bank Limited, will be subject to these schemes when they are adopted. It is not clear what shape these schemes will take, or when the schemes will be adopted, but current proposals for a funded deposit insurance scheme and for operational continuity may result in material increases in operational and financing costs for the BAGL group.

While the Group believes that it is making good progress in reducing potential impediments to resolution, should the relevant authorities ultimately determine that the Group or any significant subsidiary could

not be resolved in an orderly manner, the impact of potential structural changes that may be required to address such a determination (whether in connection with RRP or other structural reform initiatives) may impact capital, liquidity and leverage ratios, as well as the overall profitability of the Group, for example, due to duplicated infrastructure costs, lost cross-rate revenues and/or additional funding costs.

viii) Regulatory action in the event of a bank failure

The EU Bank Recovery and Resolution Directive (BRRD) contains provisions similar to the Banking Act on a European level, many of which augment and increase the powers which national regulators are required to have in the event of a bank failure.

The UK Banking Act 2009, as amended (the Banking Act) provides for a regime to allow the BoE (or, in certain circumstances, HM Treasury) to resolve failing banks in the UK. Under the Banking Act, these authorities are given powers to make share transfer orders and property transfer orders. Amendments introduced by the Banking Reform Act gave the BoE statutory bail-in power from 1 January 2015. This power enables the BoE to recapitalise a failed institution by allocating losses to its shareholders and unsecured creditors. It also allows the BoE to cancel liabilities or modify the terms of contracts for the purposes of reducing or deferring the liabilities of the bank under resolution, and gives it the power to convert liabilities into another form (e.g. equity). In addition to the bail-in power, relevant UK resolution authorities are granted additional powers under the Banking Act including powers to direct the sale or transfer of a relevant financial institution or all or part of its business in certain circumstances. Further, parallel developments such as the implementation in the UK of the FSB’s TLAC requirements may result in increased risks that a bank would become subject to resolution authority requirements by regulators seeking to comply with international standards in this area. Please see Funding risk, inability to maintain appropriate prudential ratios on page 88.

If any of these powers were to be exercised, or there is an increased risk of exercise, in respect of the Group or any entity within the Group, this might result in a material adverse effect on the rights or interests of shareholders and creditors including holders of debt securities and/or could have a material adverse effect on the market price of shares and other securities issued by the Group. Such effects could include losses of shareholdings/associated rights including, the dilution of percentage ownership of the Group’s share capital, and may result in creditors, including debt holders, losing all or a part of their investment in the Group’s securities.

Conduct risk

Barclays is committed to Group-wide changes to business practices, governance and mindset and behaviours so that good customer outcomes and protecting market integrity are integral to the way Barclays operates. Improving our reputation will demonstrate to customers that in Barclays they have a partner they can trust. Conduct risk is the risk that detriment is caused to the Group’s customers, clients, counterparties or the Group itself because of inappropriate judgement in the execution of our business activities.

During 2015 potential customer impact and reputation risk inherent in varied emerging risks has been managed across the Group and escalated to senior management for discussion. These risks will remain prevalent in 2016 and beyond and the most significant of these include:

i) Organisational change

The Group is at risk of not being able to meet customer and regulatory expectations due to a failure to appropriately manage the: i) complexity in business practice, processes and systems; ii) challenges faced in product suitability, automation and portfolio-level risk monitoring; iii) resilience of its technology; and, iv) execution strategy, including the failure to fulfil the high level of operational precision required for effective execution in order to deliver positive customer outcomes.

ii) Legacy issues

Barclays remains at risk from the potential outcomes of a number of investigations relating to our past conduct. While we are continuing to embed cultural change and improved governance, many stakeholders

Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  91


will remain sceptical and so until there is clear and sustained evidence of consistent cultural and behavioural change, the risk to Barclays’ reputation will remain. Barclays continues to work to rebuild customer trust and market confidence impacted by legacy issues.

For further information in respect of such investigations and related litigation and discussion of the associated uncertainties, please see the Legal, competition and regulatory matters note on page 261.

iii) Market integrity

There are potential risks arising from conflicts of interest, including those related to the benchmark submission process. While primarily relevant to the Investment Bank, these potential risks may also impact the corporate and retail customer base. The Group may be adversely affected if it fails to mitigate the risk of individuals making such inappropriate judgement by the enhancing of operating models, and effective identification and management of conflicts of interest, controls and supervisory oversight.

iv) Financial crime

The Group, as a global financial services firm, is exposed to the risks associated with money laundering, terrorist financing, bribery and corruption and sanctions. As a result, the Group may be adversely affected if it fails to effectively mitigate the risk that its employees or third parties facilitate, or that its products and services are used to facilitate financial crime.

Any one, or combination, of the above risks could have significant impact on the Group’s reputation and may also lead to potentially large costs to both rectify this issue and reimburse losses incurred by customers and regulatory censure and penalties.

Material existing and emerging risks potentially impacting more than one Principal Risk

i) Structural reform (emerging risk)

The UK Financial Services (Banking Reform) Act 2013 (the UK Banking Reform Act) and associated secondary legislation and regulatory rules, require the separation of the Group’s UK and EEA retail and SME deposit taking activities into a legally, operationally and economically separate and independent entity and restrict the types of activity such an entity may conduct (so-called ‘ring fencing’).

The PRA issued a policy statement (PS10/15) in May 2015 setting up legal structures and governance requirements that the UK regulator considers as ‘near-final’. A PRA Consultation was issued in October 2015 relating to post ring fencing prudential requirements and intra-group arrangements among other matters. PRA final rules are expected in 2016. UK ring fencing rules will become binding from January 2019 and Barclays has an internal structural reform programme to implement the changes required by these new regulations (alongside other group structural requirements applicable to or in the course of development for the Group both in the UK and other jurisdictions in which the Group has operations – such as the proposed move towards a single point of entry (Holding Company) resolution model under the BoE’s preferred resolution strategy and the requirement under section 165 of the DFA to create a US intermediate holding company (IHC) to hold the Group’s US banking and non-banking subsidiaries) and to evaluate the Group’s strategic options in light of all current and proposed global structural reform initiatives. Changes resulting from this work will have a material impact in the way the Group operates in the future through increased cost and complexity associated with changes required by ring fencing laws and regulations. Specifically, in order to comply with the UK Banking Reform Act and the DFA, it is proposed that:

§Barclays will create a new UK banking entity which will serve as the ring fenced bank (RFB). It is expected to serve retail and small business customers as well as UK Wealth and credit card customers

§Barclays Bank PLC (BBPLC) is expected to serve corporate, institutional and investment banking clients and will also serve international Wealth and credit card customers; it is also expected to house both the Corporate Banking payments and Barclaycard merchant acquiring businesses

§many of the Group’s US businesses (including Barclays Bank Delaware and Barclays Capital Inc., the Group’s US broker-dealer subsidiary) will be organised under an IHC
§the Group will establish a number of service companies in order to support its revised operating entity structure.

Implementation of these changes involves a number of risks related to both the revised Group entity structure and also the process of transition to that revised Group structure. Those risks include the following:

§the establishment and ongoing management of the RFB and BBPLC as separate entities will require the Group to evaluate and restructure its intra-group and external capital, funding and liquidity arrangements to ensure they continue to meet regulatory requirements and support business needs. The changes required by ring fencing will in particular impact the sources of funding available to the different entities, including restricting BBPLC’s access to certain categories of deposit funding

§while the Group will seek to manage the changes to business mix and capital, funding and liquidity resources so as to maintain robust credit ratings for each of its key operating entities, the restructuring required by ring fencing is complex and untested, and there is a risk that the changes may negatively impact the assessment made by credit rating agencies, creditors and other stakeholders of the credit strength of the different entities on a standalone basis. Adverse changes to the credit assessment, including the potential for ratings downgrades, could in turn make it more difficult and costly for the Group’s entities to obtain certain sources of funding

§the Financial Services and Markets Act 2000 (Banking Reform) (Pensions) Regulations 2015 provide that, after 1 January 2026, ring fence banks cannot be or become liable for pension schemes outside of the ring fence. To comply with the regulations, the Group will need to decide which Group entities will participate in the Barclays Bank UK Retirement Fund (UKRF) from 2026, and reach a mutually satisfactory position with the UKRF Trustee regarding past service liabilities. The Group is currently discussing a variety of options with the UKRF Trustee, and engaging with the PRA and the UK Pensions Regulator

§execution risk associated with moving a material number of customer accounts and contracts from one legal entity to another and in particular the risk of legal challenge to the ring-fenced transfer scheme that will be used in order to transfer certain assets and liabilities from BBPLC to the RFB

§customer impacts derived from operational changes related to, for example, the reorganisation of sort codes. In addition, uncertain and potentially varying customer preference in terms of being served by the RFB or BBPLC may increase the execution risk associated with ring fencing; customers may also be impacted by reduced flexibility to provide products through a single entity interface

§at the European level, the draft Bank Structural Reform Regulation contains powers restricting proprietary trading and, if certain conditions are met, for the mandated separation of core retail banking activity from certain trading activities save where a bank is already subject to a national regime which provides for the separation of such activities in a manner compatible with the regulation. The regulation is currently in draft form and no single version (including the scope of any national derogation) has yet been agreed by the Council of Ministers, the European Commission and the European Parliament. The implementation date for these proposals will depend on the date on which any final legislation is agreed. Accordingly, the potential impact on the Group remains unclear.

These, and other regulatory changes and the resulting actions taken to address such regulatory changes, may have an adverse impact on the Group’s profitability, operating flexibility, flexibility of deployment of capital and funding, return on equity, ability to pay dividends, credit ratings, and/or financial condition.

ii) Business conditions, general economy and geopolitical issues

The Group’s performance could be adversely affected in relation to more than one Principal Risk by a weak or deteriorating global economy or political instability. These factors may also occur in one or more of the Group’s main countries of operation.

The Group offers a broad range of services to retail, institutional and government customers, in a large number of countries. The breadth of

92  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F


Risk review

Material existing and emerging risks

Material existing and emerging risks to the Group’s future performance

these operations means that deterioration in the economic environment, or an increase in political instability in countries where it is active, or any other systemically important economy, could adversely affect the Group’s performance.

Global growth is expected to remain modest, with low single digit growth in advanced economies alongside a slowdown in emerging markets. This moderate economic performance, lower commodity prices and increased geopolitical tensions mean that the distribution of risks to global economic activity continues to be biased to the downside.

As the US Federal Reserve embarks on monetary policy tightening, the increasing divergence of policies between major advanced economies risks triggering further financial market volatility. The sharp change in value of the US dollar during 2015 reflected this and, has played a major role in driving asset price volatility and capital reallocation as markets adjusted. Changes to interest rate expectations risk igniting further volatility and US dollar appreciation, particularly if the US Federal Reserve were to increase rates faster than markets currently expect.

Emerging markets have already seen growth slow following increased capital outflows, but a deeper slowdown in growth could emerge if tighter US interest rate policy drives further reallocation of capital. Moreover, sentiment towards emerging markets as a whole continues to be driven in large part by developments in China, where there is significant concern around the ability of authorities to manage the growth transition towards services. A stronger than expected slowdown could result if authorities fail to appropriately manage the end of the investment and credit-led boom, while the consequences from a faster slowdown would flow through both financial and trade channels into other economies, and affect commodity markets.

Commodity prices, particularly oil prices, have already fallen significantly, but could fall further if demand growth remains weak or supply takes longer than expected to adjust. At the same time, countries with high reliance on commodity related earnings have already experienced a tightening of financial conditions. A sustained period of low prices risks triggering further financial distress, default and contagion.

In several countries, reversals of capital inflows, as well as fiscal austerity, have already caused deterioration in political stability. This could be exacerbated by a renewed rise in asset price volatility or sustained pressure on government finances. In addition, geopolitical tensions in some areas of the world, including the Middle East and Eastern Europe are already acute, and are at risk of further deterioration.

While in Europe, risks of stagnation, entrenched deflation and a Eurozone break up have diminished, they remain a risk.

In the UK, the referendum on EU membership gives rise to some political uncertainty and raises the possibility of a disruptive and uncertain exit from the EU, with attendant consequences for investment and confidence. Following the referendum in June 2016, in the event that there is a vote in favour of leaving the EU, a period of negotiation is likely, widely anticipated to be around two years, with unpredictable implications on market conditions.

A drop in business or consumer confidence related to the aforementioned risks may have a material impact on GDP growth in one or more significant markets and therefore Group performance. At the same time, even if output in most advanced economies does grow, it would also be likely to advance at a slower pace than seen in the pre-crisis period. Growth potential could be further eroded by the low levels of fixed asset investment and productivity growth.

For the Group, a deterioration of conditions in its key markets could affect performance in a number of ways including, for example: (i) deteriorating business, consumer or investor confidence leading to reduced levels of client activity; (ii) higher levels of default rates and impairment; and (iii) mark to market losses in trading portfolios resulting from changes in credit ratings, share prices and solvency of counterparties.

iii) Business change/execution (emerging risk)

As Barclays moves towards a single point of entry (Holding Company) resolution model and implementation of the structural reform programme execution, the expected level of structural and strategic change to be implemented over the medium term will be disruptive and is likely to increase funding and operational risks for the Group and could impact its revenues and businesses. These changes will include: the creation and rundown of Non-Core; the delivery against an extensive agenda of operational and technology control and infrastructure improvements; and, planned cost reductions. Execution may be adversely impacted by external factors (such as a significant global macroeconomic downturn or further significant and unexpected regulatory change in countries in which the Group operates) and/or internal factors (such as availability of appropriately skilled resources or resolution of legacy issues). Moreover, progress in regard to Barclays’ strategic plans is unlikely to be uniform or linear and progress on certain targets may be achieved more slowly than others.

If any of the risks outlined above were to occur, singly or in aggregate, they could have a material adverse effect on the Group’s business, results of operations and financial condition.

Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  93


Risk review

Risk management

An overview of Barclays’

approach to risk management

  
   Page

Barclays’ risk management strategy

  
Introduction  

95

98
Enterprise Risk Management Framework98
Principal Risks98
Risk management strategyAppetite for the Principals Risks  

95

98
Governance structureRoles and responsibilities in the management of risk  

95

Risk governance and assigning responsibilities

97

98

Principal and Key risksBarclays’ Risk Culture

 

  

98100

 

 

Credit risk management

  
Overview  99101
Organisation and structure  99101
Roles and responsibilities  100102

Credit risk mitigation

 

  100

102

 

Market risk management

Overview101
Organisation and structure102

Roles and responsibilities

102

Funding and capital risk management

  
Overview  103
Organisation and structure  103

Roles and responsibilities

 

  

103

 

LiquidityTreasury and capital risk management

  
Overview  105104
Organisation and structure  104
Liquidity risk105
Capital risk106

LiquidityInterest rate risk managementin the banking book

 

  105108

 

Operational risk management

  
Overview  106109
Organisation and structure  106109

Roles and responsibilities

 

  107

110

Model risk management

Overview111
Organisation and structure111

Roles and responsibilities

111

 

Conduct risk management

  
Overview  108112
Organisation and structure  108112

Roles and responsibilities

112

Reputation risk management

Overview113
Organisation and structure113

Roles and responsibilities

113

Legal risk management

Overview114
Organisation and structure114
Roles and responsibilities  108114

 

LOGOLOGO

  

For a more detailed breakdown on our Riskrisk review and Riskrisk management contents please see pages 117 and 118. 86 to 87.

More detailed information on how Barclays manages these risks can be found in Barclays PLC 20152016 Pillar 3 Report.

94  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F


Risk review

Risk management

A more comprehensive overview, together with more specific information on Group policies, can be found in Barclays PLC 2015 Pillar 3 Report or at home.barclays/annualreport

Introduction

This section outlines the Group’s strategy for managing risk and how risk culture has been developed to ensure that there is a set of objectives and practices which are shared across the Group. It provides details of the Group’s governance, specific information on policies that the Group determines to be of particular significance in the current operating environment, committee structures and how responsibilities are assigned.

Risk management strategy

The Group has clear risk management objectives and a well established strategy to deliver them through core risk management processes.

At a strategic level, the Group’s risk management objectives are to:

§identify the Group’s significant risks

 

§formulate the Group’s risk appetite and ensure that the business profile and plans are consistent with it

§optimise risk/return decisions by taking them as closely as possible to the business, while establishing strong and independent review and challenge structures

§ensure that business growth plans are properly supported by effective risk infrastructure

§manage the risk profile to ensure that specific financial deliverables remain achievable under a range of adverse business conditions

§help executives improve the control and coordination of risk taking across the business.

A key element in the setting of clear management objectives is the ERMF, which sets out key activities, tools, techniques and organisational arrangements so that material risks facing the Group are identified and understood, and that appropriate responses are in place to protect Barclays and prevent detriment to its customers, employees or community. This will help the Group meet its goals, and enhance its ability to respond to new opportunities.

The ERMF covers those risks incurred by the Group that were foreseeable, continuous and material enough to merit establishing specific Group-wide control frameworks. These are known as Principal and Key Risks. See Principal and Key Risks on page 98 for more information.

The aim of the risk management process is to provide a structured, practical and easily understood set of three steps, Evaluate, Respond and Monitor (the E-R-M process), that enables management to identify and assess risks, determine the appropriate risk response, and then monitor the effectiveness of the response and changes to the risk profile.

1. Evaluate: risk evaluation must be carried out by those individuals, teams and departments who manage the underlying operational or business process, and so are best placed to identify and assess the potential risks, and also include those responsible for delivering the objectives under review.

2. Respond: the appropriate risk response effectively and efficiently ensures that risks are kept within appetite, which is the level of risk that the Group is prepared to accept while pursuing its business strategy. There are three types of response: i) accept the risk but take necessary mitigating actions such as use of risk controls; ii) stop the existing activity/do not start the proposed activity; or iii) continue the activity but transfer risks to another party via the use of insurance.LOGO

Barclays risk management strategy

LOGO

3. Monitor: once risks have been identified and measured, and controls put in place, progress towards objectives must be tracked. Monitoring must be ongoing and can prompt re-evaluation of the risks and/or changes in responses. Monitoring must be carried out proactively. In addition to ‘reporting’, it includes ensuring risks are maintained within risk appetite, and checking that controls are functioning as intended and remain fit for purpose.

The process is orientated around material risks impacting delivery of objectives, and is used to promote an efficient and effective approach to risk management. This three step risk management process:

§can be applied to every objective at every level in the bank, both top-down or bottom-up

§is embedded into the business decision making process

§guides the Group’s response to changes in the external or internal environment in which existing activities are conducted

§involves all staff and all three lines of defence (see pages 97).

Governance structure

Risk exists when the outcome of taking a particular decision or course of action is uncertain and could potentially impact whether, or how well, the Group delivers on its objectives.

The Group faces risks throughout its business, every day, in everything it does. Some risks are taken after appropriate consideration – such as lending money to a customer. Other risks may arise from unintended consequences of internal actions, for example an IT system failure or poor sales practices. Finally, some risks are the result of events outside the Group but which impact its business – such as major exposure through trading or lending to a market counterparty which later fails.

All employees must play their part in the Group’s risk management, regardless of position, function or location. All employees are required to be familiar with risk management policies that are relevant to their activities, know how to escalate actual or potential risk issues, and have a role appropriate level of awareness of the ERMF (see Risk governance and assigning responsibilities for more information on page 97), risk management process and governance arrangements.

 

 

  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 20152016 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  9597


Risk review

Risk management

Barclays’ risk management strategy

Introduction

Barclays engages in activities which entail risk taking, every day, throughout its business. This section introduces these risks, and outlines key governance arrangements for managing them. These include roles and responsibilities, frameworks, policies and standards, assurance and lessons learned processes. The Group’s approach to fostering a strong Risk Culture is also described.

Enterprise Risk Management Framework (ERMF)

The Group has clear risk management objectives and a strategy to deliver them through core risk management processes. The ERMF sets the strategic direction by defining clear standards, objectives and responsibilities for all areas of Barclays. It supports the CEO and CRO in embedding effective risk management and a strong Risk Culture.

The ERMF sets out:

§Principal Risks faced by the Group

§Risk Appetite requirements

§Roles and responsibilities for risk management

§Risk Committee structure.

A revised ERMF was approved by the Board in December 2016. This includes a revised risk taxonomy comprising eight Principal Risks. Credit, market, funding, operational and conduct risks have been aligned to this new taxonomy and the management of these risks has not materially changed. Model risk, reputation risk and legal risk are newly classified as Principal Risks in the latest version of the ERMF, reflecting the heightened importance of these risk types in the current environment. IIn 2016, Model risk was managed in accordance with dedicated policies linked to the ERMF. These policies supplemented the key risk control frameworks underlying the financial risk types and applied to all businesses and functions in which financial risks were incurred or managed. Reputation risk was considered as part of conduct risk and legal risk was included as a sub-risk type under operational risk. In this Annual Report, the Risk Management sections (pages 97 to 114) follow the new Principal Risk taxonomy of eight risks, reflecting our current approach to risk management. The Risk Performance sections (pages 116-181) follow the Principal Risk taxonomy (of five risks) which prevailed during 2016. Information on reputation risk performance in 2016 is included as part of the conduct risk section. Information on legal risk management in 2016 can be found in the Material Existing and Emerging Risks section (page 89), the Supervision and Regulation section (page 182) and Note 29 to the Financial Statements (page 280). The definition of the Three Lines of Defence and associated responsibilities were also revised. The ERMF also contains a revised governance structure, including new Group and Business Risk committees, with representation from the first and second lines of defence.

Principal Risks

The ERMF identifies Principal Risks and sets out responsibilities and risk management standards. Note that Legal, Reputation and Model risks are Principal Risks from January 2017 following Board approval in December 2016.

Financial Principal Risks:

§Credit risk: The risk of loss to the firm from the failure of clients, customers or counterparties, including sovereigns, to fully honour their obligations to the firm, including the whole and timely payment of principal, interest, collateral and other receivables

§Market risk: The risk of loss arising from potential adverse changes in the value of the firm’s assets and liabilities from fluctuation in market variables including, but not limited to, interest rates, foreign exchange, equity prices, commodity prices, credit spreads, implied volatilities and asset correlations

§Treasury and capital risk: This comprises:

–  Liquidity risk: The risk that the firm is unable to meet its contractual or contingent obligations or that it does not have the appropriate

amount, tenor and composition of funding and liquidity to support its assets

–  Capital risk: The risk that the firm has an insufficient level or composition of capital to support its normal business activities and to meet its regulatory capital requirements under normal operating environments or stressed conditions (both actual and as defined for internal planning or regulatory testing purposes). This includes the risk from the firm’s pension plans

–  Interest rate risk in the banking book: The risk that the firm is exposed to capital or income volatility because of a mismatch between the interest rate exposures of its(non-traded) assets and liabilities

Non-Financial Principal Risks:

§Operational risk: The risk of loss to the firm from inadequate or failed processes or systems, human factors or due to external events (for example fraud) where the root cause is not due to credit or market risks.

§Model risk: The risk of the potential adverse consequences from financial assessments or decisions based on incorrect or misused model outputs and reports.

§Reputation risk: The risk that an action, transaction, investment or event will reduce trust in the firm’s integrity and competence by clients, counterparties, investors, regulators, employees or the public.

§Conduct risk: The risk of detriment to customers, clients, market integrity, competition or Barclays from the inappropriate supply of financial services, including instances of wilful or negligent misconduct.

§Legal risk: The risk of loss or imposition of penalties, damages or fines from the failure of the firm to meet its legal obligations including regulatory or contractual requirements.

Risk Appetite for the Principal Risks

Risk Appetite is defined as the level of risk which the firm is prepared to accept in the conduct of its activities. The Risk Appetite of the firm:

§specifies the level of risk we are willing to take and why, to enable specific risk taking activities

§considers all Principal Risks individually and, where appropriate, in aggregate

§communicates the acceptable level of risk for different risk types; this may be expressed in financial ornon-financial terms, and is measured and effectively monitored

§describes agreed parameters for the firm’s performance under varying levels of financial stress with respect to profitability

§is considered in key decision-making processes, including business planning, mergers and acquisitions, new product approvals and business change initiatives.

Risk Appetite is approved and disseminated across legal entities and businesses, including by use of Mandate and Scale limits to enable and control specific activities that have material concentration risk implications for the firm. These limits also help reduce the likelihood and size ofone-off losses. The Risk Appetite must be formally reviewed on at least an annual frequency in conjunction with the Medium Term Planning (MTP) process and approved by the Board.

Roles and responsibilities in the management of risk – the Three Lines of Defence

All colleagues have a responsibility to contribute to the risk management of the Group. These responsibilities are set out in the “Three Lines of Defence”. In 2016 these definitions were simplified. Regardless of their function, all teams who manage processes in the firm are responsible for designing, implementing, remediating, monitoring and testing the controls for those processes.

First Line of Defence:

The First Line comprises all employees engaged in the revenue generating and client facing areas of the firm and all associated support

98  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2016 Annual Report on Form 20-F


    

    

    

 

Board oversight

functions, including Finance, Treasury, Technology and flow of risk related information

LOGO

Furthermore, from March 2016 members ofOperations, Human Resources etc. Employees in the Board, Executive Committee and a limited number of specified senior individuals will be subject to additional rules included within the Senior Managers Regime (SMR), which clarifies their accountability and responsibilities. Members of the SMRfirst line are held to four additional specific rules of conduct in which they must:responsible for:

 

1.§take reasonable stepsidentifying all the risks in the activities in which they are engaged, and developing appropriate policies, standards and controls to ensure that the Group is effectively controlledgovern their activities

 

2.§take reasonable steps to ensure thatoperating within any and all limits which the Group compliesRisk and Compliance functions establish in connection with relevant regulatory requirements and standardsthe Risk Appetite of the firm

 

3.§take reasonable stepsescalating risk events to ensure that any delegated responsibilities are to the appropriate individualsenior managers and that the delegated responsibilities are effectively dischargedRisk and Compliance.

Internal controls are critical to running a cost-effective and stable business. To ensure these controls remain strong, sustainable, and efficient the new strategic position of Chief Controls Officer has been created. The Chief Controls Office will help to maintain and enhance an effective and consistent control framework across the organisation.

4.disclose appropriately any information to the FCA or PRA, which they would reasonably expect to be made aware of.

The First Line must establish their own policies and controls (subject to the Controls Framework of the firm), particularly with respect to operational activities, and require their colleagues to manage all controls to specified tolerances. These control-related activities are also considered First Line and are permitted so long as they are within any applicable limits established by Risk or Compliance. All activities in the first line are subject to oversight from the relevant parts of the second and third lines.

Second Line of Defence:

Employees of Risk and Compliance comprise the Second Line of Defence. The role of the Second Line is to establish the limits, rules and constraints under which first line activities shall be performed, consistent with the Risk Appetite of the firm, and to monitor the performance of the First Line against these limits and constraints.

The Second Line may not establish limits for all First Line activities, especially those related to Operational Risk. The controls for these will ordinarily be established by Controls Officers operating within the Controls Framework of the firm, under the oversight of the Second Line.

The Second Line can also undertake certain additional activities if, in the judgement of the Group CRO, this will reduce the firm’s exposure to risk.

Third Line of Defence:

Employees of Internal Audit comprise the Third Line of Defence. They provide independent assurance to the Board and Executive Management over the effectiveness of governance, risk management and control over current, systemic and evolving risks.

The Legal department does not sit in any of the three lines, but supports them all. The Legal department is, however, subject to oversight from Risk and Compliance, with respect to Operational and Conduct risks.

Roles and responsibilities in the management of risk – risk committees

Business Risk Committees consider risk matters relevant to their business, and escalate as required to the Group Risk Committee (GRC), whose Chairman in turn escalates to Board Committees and the Board.

There are three key board-level forumsfive Board-level fora which review and monitor risk across the Group. These are: theThe main Board, itself; the Board Risk Committee, the Board Audit Committee, the Board Reputation Committee and the Board ReputationRemuneration Committee.

The Chairman of each Committee prepares a statement each year on the committee’s activities, which is included in this report from page 6 to 28.

LOGO

The Board

One of the Board’s (Board of Directors of Barclays PLC) responsibilities is the approval of risk appetite,Risk Appetite (see the Risk Management and Strategy section on page 98), which is the level of risk the Group chooses to take in pursuit of its business objectives. The Chief Risk OfficerGroup CRO (GCRO) regularly presents a report to the Board summarising developments in the risk environment and performance trends in the key portfolios. The Board is also responsible for the Internal Control and Assurance Framework (Group Control Framework).ERMF. It oversees the management of the most significant risks through regular review of risk exposures and related key controls.exposures. Executive management responsibilities relating to this are set out in the ERMF.

The Board Risk Committee (BRC)

The BRC monitors the Group’s risk profile against the agreed financial appetite. Where actual performance differs from expectations, the actions being taken by management are reviewed to ensure that the BRC is comfortable with them. After each meeting, the ChairChairman of the BRC prepares a report for the next meeting of the Board. All members are non-executiveindependent executive directors. The Group Finance Director (GFD) and the Chief Risk Officer (CRO)GCRO attend each meeting as a matter of course.

The BRC also considers the Group’s risk appetite statement for operational risk and evaluates the Group’s operational risk profile and operational risk monitoring.

The BRC receives regular and comprehensive reports on risk methodology,methodologies, the effectiveness of the risk management framework, and the Group’s risk profile, including the key issues affecting each business portfolio and forward risk trends. The Committee also commissionsin-depth analyses of significant risk topics, which are presented by the CRO or senior risk managers in the businesses. The Chair of the Committee prepares a statement each year on its activities.

The Board Audit Committee (BAC)

The BAC receives regular reports on the effectiveness of internal control systems, quarterly reports on material control issues of significance, quarterly papers on accounting judgements (including impairment). It also receives a half yearly review of the adequacy of impairment allowances, which it reviews relative to the risk inherent in the portfolios, the business environment, the Group’s policies and methodologies and the performance trends of peer banks. The Chairman of the BAC also sits on the BRC.

The Board Reputation Committee (RepCo)

The RepCo reviews management’s recommendations on conduct and reputational risk and the effectiveness of the processes by which the Group identifies and manages these risks. It also reviews and monitors the effectiveness of Barclays’ Citizenship strategy, including the management of Barclays’ economic, social and environmental contribution.

In addition, the Board Audit and Board Remuneration Committees receive regular risk reports to assist them in the undertaking of their

Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2016 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  99


Risk review

Risk management

Barclays’ risk management strategy

duties.

The Board Audit Committee (BAC)

The BAC receives regular reports on the effectiveness of internal control systems, quarterly reports on material control issues of significance, and quarterly papers on accounting judgements (including impairment). It also receives a quarterly review of the adequacy of impairment allowances, which it reviews relative to the risk inherent in the portfolios, the business environment, the Group’s policies and methodologies and the performance trends of peer banks. The Chairman of the BAC also sits on the BRC.

The Board Remuneration Committee (RemCo)

The RemCo receives a detailed report on risk management performance from the BRC, regular updates on the risk profile and proposals for the on anex-ante andex-post risk adjustments to variable remuneration. These inputs are considered in the setting of performance incentives.

Summaries of the relevant business, professional and risk management experience of the Directors of the Board are presented in the Board of Directors section on pages 3 to 4.

Barclays’ Risk Culture

Barclays defines Risk Culture as “norms, attitudes and 4.behaviours related to risk awareness, risk taking and risk management”. At Barclays this is reflected in how we identify, escalate and manage risk matters.

Our Code of Conduct – the Barclays Way

Globally, all colleagues must attest to the “Barclays Way”, our Code of Conduct, and all frameworks, policies and standards applicable to their roles. The termsCode of Conduct outlines the Purpose and Values which govern our Barclays Way of working across our business globally. It constitutes a reference point covering all aspects of colleagues’ working relationships, specifically (but not exclusively) with other Barclays employees, customers and additional details on membershipclients, governments and activities for eachregulators, business partners, suppliers, competitors and the broader community.

Definition of Risk Culture and its determinants

We review our culture through the lens of four “determinants”, associated with desired outcomes:

§Management and governance: Consistent tone from the top; responsibilities are clear to enable identification and challenge

§Motivation and incentives: The right behaviours are rewarded and modelled

§Competence and effectiveness: Colleagues are enabled to identify, coordinate, escalate and address risk and control matters

§Integrity: Colleagues are willing to meet their risk management responsibilities; colleagues escalate issues on a timely basis.

Management and governance

Leaders must demonstrate through their everyday behaviours the importance of strong risk management and ensure that their teams have sufficient resource and capability to manage the risk environment.

The simplification of the principalThree Lines of Defence, as well as the reorganisation of business and risk committees with First and Second Lines of defence representation, promote ownership and accountabilities for risk management.

Motivation and incentives

Barclays seeks to ensure that compensation and promotion decisions take account of risk behaviours.

Management of risk and control is assessed as part of the annual performance appraisal process for all colleagues globally. Positive risk management behaviours will be rewarded and considered as part of promotion decisions, particularly to Managing Director.

Competence and effectiveness

A risk capability scorecard was developed for the Board Committees are availableRisk Committee to monitor and measure capability, and to identify any areas for improvement. Barclays has also appointed a Chief Risk Officer for Treasury and Capital and a Head of Model Risk Management.

Integrity

The “Being Barclays” global induction supports new colleagues in understanding how risk management culture and practices support how the Group does business and the link to Barclays’ values. The Leadership Curriculum covers building, sustaining and supporting a trustworthy organisation and is offered to colleagues globally.

The continued promotion and reinforcement of Barclays’ Values, as well as the Barclays Way was reflected in the near-perfect rate of completion of related training by employees. Messages and communications from the Corporate Governance section at: home.barclays/corporategovernance.

The CRO managesChief Risk Officer emphasise the independent Risk function and chairs the Financial Risk Committees (FRC) and the Operational Risk Review Forum (ORRF), which monitor the Group’s financial and non-financialimportance of early escalation of risk profile relative to agreed risk appetite.

The Group Treasurer heads the Treasury function and chairs the Treasury Committee which manages the Group’s liquidity, maturity transformation and structural interest rate exposure through the setting of policies and controls, monitors the Group’s liquidity and interest rate maturity mismatch, monitors usage of regulatory and economic capital, and has oversight of the Group’s capital plan.

The Head of Compliance chairs the Conduct and Reputational Risk Committee (CRRC) which assesses the quality of the application of the Reputation and Conduct Risk Control Frameworks. It also recommends conduct risk appetite, sets policies to ensure consistent adherence to that appetite, and reviews known and emerging reputational and conduct related risks to consider if action is required.issues.

 

 

96100  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 20152016 Annual Report on Form 20-F  


Risk review

Risk management

Risk governance and assigning responsibilities

Responsibility for risk management resides at all levels of the Group, from the Board and the Executive Committee down through the organisation to each business manager and risk specialist. These responsibilities are distributed so that risk/return decisions are taken at the most appropriate level, as close as possible to the business, and are subject to robust and effective review and challenge. Responsibilities for effective review and challenge also reside at all levels.

The ERMF articulates a clear, consistent, comprehensive and effective approach for the management of all risks in the Group and creates the context for setting standards and establishing the right practices throughout the Group. The ERMF sets out a philosophy and approach that is applicable to the whole bank, all colleagues and to all types of risk. It sets out the key activities required for all employees to operate Barclays risk and control environment, with specific requirements for key individuals, including the CRO and CEO, and the overall governance framework designed to support its effective operation. See Risk Culture in Barclays PLC 2015 Pillar 3 Report for more information.

The ERMF supports risk management and control by ensuring that there is a:

§sustainable and consistent implementation of the three lines of defence across all businesses and functions

§clear segregation of activities and duties performed by colleagues across the Group

§framework for the management of Principal Risks

§consistent application of Barclays’ risk appetite across all Principal Risks

§clear and simple policy hierarchy.

Three lines of defence

The enterprise risk management process is the ‘defence’, and organising businesses and functions into three ‘lines’ enhances the E-R-M process by formalising independence and challenge, while still promoting collaboration and the flow of information between all areas. The three lines of defence operating model enables the Group to separate risk management activities:

First line: manage operational and business processes; design, implement, operate, test and remediate controls.

First line activities are characterised by:

§ownership of and direct responsibility for the Group’s returns or elements of Barclays’ results

§ownership of major operations, systems and processes fundamental to the operation of the bank

§direct linkage of objective setting, performance assessment and reward to financial performance.

Second line: oversee and challenge the first line and provide second line risk management activity.

Second line activities are characterised by:

§oversight, monitoring and challenge of the first line of defence activities

§design, ownership or operation of Key Risk Control Frameworks impacting the activities of the first line of defence

§operation of certain second line risk management activities (e.g. financial rescue of a firm)

§no direct linkage of objective setting, performance assessment and reward to revenue (measures related to mitigation of losses and balancing risk and reward are permissible).

Third line: provide assurance that the E-R-M process is fit for purpose, and that it is being carried out as intended.

Third line activities are characterised by:

§providing independent and timely assurance to the Board and Executive Management over the effectiveness of governance, risk management and control.

Following the annual review, in 2016, we have further refined the three lines of defence model by clarifying that responsibilities for risk management and control are defined in relation to the activities individuals undertake as part of their role. The three key activities are: ‘Setting Policy and Conformance’ (second line); ‘Managing Operational or Business Process’ (first and second line); and ‘Providing Independent Assurance’ (third line). Second and third line activities have not changed, however we have emphasised the key responsibilities of the first line, which includes colleagues’ responsibility for understanding and owning the process end to end, and designing, operating, testing and remediating appropriate controls to manage those risks. Performed appropriately and by all colleagues, together these responsibilities will drive a stronger risk and control environment at Barclays, benefitting our customers, clients, shareholders and regulators.

Reporting and control

LOGO

Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  97


Principal and Key Risks

Principal Risks comprise individual Key Risks to allow for more granular analysis. As at 31 December 2015, the five Principal Risks were: i) Credit; ii) Market; iii) Funding; iv) Operational; and v) Conduct. Since the beginning of 2015, Reputation Risk has been recognised as a Key Risk within Conduct Risk given their close alignment and the fact that as separate Principal Risks they had a common Principal Risk Officer.

Risk management responsibilities for Principal and Key Risks are set out in the ERMF. The ERMF creates clear ownership and accountability; ensures the Group’s most significant risk exposures are understood and managed in accordance with agreed risk appetite and risk tolerances; and ensures regular reporting of risk exposures and control effectiveness.

For each Key Risk, the Key Risk Officer is responsible for developing a risk appetite statement and overseeing and managing the risk in line with the ERMF. This includes the documentation, communication and maintenance of a Key Risk Control Framework which sets out, for every business across the firm, the mandated control requirements in managing exposures to that Key Risk. These control requirements are given further specification, according to the business or risk type, to provide a complete and appropriate system of internal control.

Business and Function Heads are responsible for obtaining ongoing assurance that the key controls they have put in place to manage the risks to their business objectives are operating effectively. Reviews are undertaken on a six-monthly basis and support the regulatory requirement for the Group to make an annual statement about its system of internal controls. At the business level, executive management hold specific Business Risk Oversight Meetings to monitor all Principal Risks.

Key Risk Officers report their assessments of the risk exposure and control effectiveness to Group-level oversight committees and their assessments form the basis of the reports that go to the:

Board Risk Committee:

§Financial Risk Committee has oversight of Credit and Market Risks

§Treasury Committee has oversight of Funding Risk

§Operational Risk Review Forum has oversight of the risk profile of all Operational Risk types.

Board Reputation Committee:

§Conduct and Reputation Risk Committee has oversight of Conduct and Reputation Risks.

The following sections provide an overview of each of the five Principal Risks, and details of the structure and organisation of the relevant management function and its roles and responsibilities, including how the impact of the risk to the Group may be minimised.

98  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F


Risk review

Risk management

Credit risk management

 

 

Credit risk

The risk of loss to the firm from the failure of clients, customers or counterparties, including sovereigns, to fully honour their obligations to the firm, including the whole and timely payment of principal, interest, collateral and other receivables.

Credit risk

The risk of suffering financial loss should any of the Group’s customers, clients or market counterparties fail to fulfil their contractual obligations to the Group.

Overview

The granting of credit is one of the Group’s major sources of income and, as a Principal Risk, the Group dedicates considerable resources to its control. The credit risk that the Group faces arises mainly from wholesale and retail loans and advances together with the counterparty credit risk arising from derivative contracts with clients. Other sources of credit risk arise from trading activities, including: debt securities, settlement balances with market counterparties,counterparties; available for sale assets and reverse repurchase agreements (reverse repos).agreements.

Credit risk management objectives are to:

 

§ maintain a framework of controls to ensure credit risk taking is based on sound credit risk management principles

 

§ identify, assess and measure credit risk clearly and accurately across the Group and within each separate business, from the level of individual facilities up to the total portfolio

 

§ control and plan credit risk taking in line with external stakeholder expectations and avoiding undesirable concentrations

 

§ monitor credit risk and adherence to agreed controls

 

§ ensure that risk-reward objectives are met.met

More information of the reporting of credit risk can be found in Barclays PLC 2015 Pillar 3 Report.

LOGOMore information of the reporting of credit risk can be found in Barclays PLC 2016 Pillar 3 Report.

Organisation and structure

Wholesale and retail portfolios are managed separately to reflect the differing nature of the assets; wholesale balances tend to be larger in value and are managed on an individual basis, while retail balances are larger in number but smaller in value and are, therefore, managed on a homogenous portfolio basis.

Credit risk management responsibilities have been structured so that decisions are taken as close as possible to the business, while ensuring robust review and challenge of performance, risk infrastructure and strategic plans. The credit risk management teams in each business are accountable to the relevant Business Credit Risk Officer (BCRO)CRO who, in turn, reports to the Group CRO.

 

 

Board oversight and flow of risk related information

Organisation and structure

 

LOGO

LOGO

 

  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 20152016 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  99101


Risk review

Risk management

Credit risk management

 

 

Roles and responsibilities

The responsibilities of the credit risk management teams in the businesses, the sanctioning team and other shared services include: sanctioning new credit agreements (principally wholesale); setting policies for approval of transactions (principally retail); setting risk appetite; monitoring risk against limits and other parameters; maintaining robust processes, data gathering, quality, storage and reporting methods for effective credit risk management; performing effective turnaround and workout scenarios for wholesale portfolios via dedicated restructuring and recoveries teams; maintaining robust collections and recovery processes/units for retail portfolios; and review and validation of credit risk measurement models.

For wholesale portfolios, credit risk approval is undertaken by experienced credit risk professionals operating within a clearly defined delegated authority framework, with only the most senior credit officers entrusted with the higher levels of delegated authority. The largest credit exposures, which are outside the Risk Sanctioning Unit or Risk Distribution Committee authority require the support of the Group Senior Credit Officer (GSCO), the Group’s most senior credit risk sanctioner. For exposures in excess of the GSCO’s authority, approval by Group CRO is required. In the wholesale portfolios, credit risk managers are organised in sanctioning teams by geography, industry and/or product.

The role of the Central Risk function is to provide Group-wide direction, oversight and challenge of credit risk taking.risk-taking. Central Risk sets the Credit Risk Control Framework, which provides the structure within which credit risk is managed, together with supporting credit risk policies.

Credit risk mitigation

The Group employs a range of techniques and strategies to actively mitigate the counterparty credit risks. These can broadly be divided into three types: netting and set-off; collateral; and

§netting andset-off

§collateral

§risk transfer.

Netting andset-off

Netting and set-off

In most jurisdictions in which the Group operates, credit risk exposures can be reduced by applying netting andset-off. In exposure terms, this credit risk mitigation technique has the largest overall impact on net exposure to derivative transactions, compared with other risk mitigation techniques.

For derivative transactions, the Group’s normal practice is to enter into standard master agreements with counterparties (e.g. ISDAs). These master agreements typically allow for netting of credit risk exposure to a counterparty resulting from a derivative transactiontransactions against the Group’s obligations to the counterparty in the event of default, and so produce a lower net credit exposure. These agreements may also reduce settlement exposure (e.g. for foreign exchange transactions) by allowing payments on the same day in the same currency to beset-off against one another.

Collateral

The Group has the ability to call on collateral in the event of default of the counterparty, comprising:

 

§ home loans: a fixed charge over residential property in the form of houses, flats and other dwellings

 

§ wholesale lending: a fixed charge over commercial property and other physical assets, in various forms

 

§ other retail lending: includes charges over motor vehicles and other physical assets, second lien charges over residential property, and finance lease receivables

 

§ derivatives: the Group also often seeks to enter into a margin agreement (e.g. Credit Support Annex (CSA))CSA) with counterparties with which the Group has master netting agreements in place

 

§ reverse repurchase agreements: collateral typically comprises highly liquid securities which have been legally transferred to the Group subject to an agreement to return them for a fixed price

 

§ financial guarantees and similaroff-balance sheet commitments: cash collateral may be held against these arrangements.

Risk transfer

A range of instruments including guarantees, credit insurance, credit derivatives and securitisationsecuritisations can be used to transfer credit risk from one counterparty to another. These mitigate credit risk in two main ways:

 

§ if the risk is transferred to a counterparty which is more credit worthy than the original counterparty, then overall credit risk is reduced

 

§ where recourse to the first counterparty remains, both counterparties must default before a loss materialises. This is less likely than the default of either counterparty individually so credit risk is reduced.

Detailed policies are in place to ensure that credit risk mitigation is appropriately recognised and recorded and more information can be found in the Barclays PLC 20152016 Pillar 3 Report.

 

 

100102  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 20152016 Annual Report on Form 20-F  


Risk review

Risk management

Market risk management

 

 

Market risk

The risk of loss arising from potential adverse changes in the value of the firm’s assets and liabilities from fluctuation in market variables including, but not limited to, interest rates, foreign exchange, equity prices, commodity prices, credit spreads, implied volatilities and asset correlations

Overview

Market risk

The risk of a reduction to earnings or capital due to volatility of trading book positions or as a consequence of running a banking book balance sheet and liquidity pools.

Overview

Traded market risk

Traded marketMarket risk arises primarily as a result of client facilitation in wholesale markets, involving market making activities, risk management solutions and execution of syndications. Upon execution of a trade with a client, the Group will look to hedge against the risk of the trade moving in an adverse direction. Mismatches between client transactions and hedges result in market risk due to changes in asset prices.

Non-tradedMarket risk in the businesses resides primarily in Barclays International, Group Treasury andNon-Core. These businesses have the mandate to incur market riskrisk.

Banking book operations generate non-tradedMarket risk oversight and challenge is provided by business committees and Group committees, including the Market Risk Committee.

Roles and responsibilities

The objectives of market risk primarily through interest rate risk arising from the sensitivity of net interest margins due to changes in interest rates. The principal banking businesses engage in internal derivative trades with Treasury to manage their interest rate risk to within its defined risk appetite. However, the businesses remain susceptible to market risk from four key sources:management are to:

 

§ prepayment risk: balance run-off may be faster or slower than expected, due to customer behaviour in response to general economic conditions or interest rates. This can lead to a mismatch between the actual balance of productsunderstand and the hedges executed with Treasury based on initial expectationscontrol market risk by robust measurement, limit setting, reporting and oversight

 

§ recruitment risk: the volume of newfacilitate business may be lower or higher than expected, requiring the business to unwind or execute hedging transactions with Treasury at different rates than expectedgrowth within a controlled and transparent risk management framework

 

§ residualensure that market risk and margin compression: the business may retain a small element of interest rate risk to facilitate the day-to-day management of customer business. Additionally, in the current low rate environment, deposits on whichbusinesses is controlled according to the Group sets the interest rate are exposed to margin compression. This is because for any further fall in base rate the Group must absorb an increasing amount of the rate move in its marginallocated appetite

 

§ lagsupport theNon-Core strategy of asset reductions by ensuring that market risk remains within agreed risk appetite.

To ensure the above objectives are met, a well-established governance structure is in place to manage these risks consistent with the ERMF. See page 98 on risk management strategy, governance and risk culture.

The BRC recommends market risk appetite to the Board for their approval. The Market Risk Principal Risk Officer (MRPRO) is responsible for the Market Risk Control Framework and, under delegated authority from the CRO, agrees with the BCROs a limit framework within the context of the approved market risk appetite.

Across the Group, market risk oversight and challenge is provided by business committees, Group committees, including the Market Risk Committee.

The Market Risk Committee approves and makes recommendations concerning the Group-wide market risk profile. This includes overseeing the operation of the Market Risk Framework and associated standards and policies; reviewing arising market or regulatory issues, limits and utilisation; and risk appetite levels to the Board. The Committee is chaired by the MRPRO and attendees include the business heads of market risk, business aligned market risk managers and Internal Audit.

The head of each business is accountable for all market risks associated with its activities, while the head of the market risk team covering each business is responsible for implementing the risk control framework for market risk.

More information on market risk management can be found in Barclays PLC 2016 Pillar 3 Report.

Organisation and structure

LOGO

Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2016 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  103


Risk review

Risk management

Treasury and capital risk management

Treasury and capital risk

The risk that the Group may not achieve its business plans because of the availability of planned liquidity, a shortfall in capital or a mismatch in the interest rate exposures of its assets and liabilities. The Treasury and Capital Risk function is an independent risk function with responsibility for oversight of the following risks:

  Liquidity risk:The risk that the firm is unable to meet its contractual or contingent obligations or that it does not have the appropriate amount, tenor and composition of funding and liquidity to support its assets

  Capital risk:The risk that the firm has an insufficient level or composition of capital to support its normal business activities and to meet its regulatory capital requirements under normal operating environments or stressed conditions (both actual and as defined for internal planning or regulatory testing purposes). This includes the risk from the firm’s pension plans

  Interest rate risk in the banking book: The risk that the firm is exposed to capital or income volatility because of being unable to re-price products immediately after a change inmismatch between the interest rates due to mandatory notification periods. This is highly prevalent in managed rates saving products (e.g. Every Day Saver) where customers must be informed in writingrate exposures of any planned reduction in their savings rate.its(non-traded) assets and liabilities.

Overview

Barclays Treasury manages treasury and capital risk on aday-to-day basis with the Treasury Committee acting as the principal management body. To ensure effective oversight and segregation of duties and in line with the ERMF, the Treasury and Capital Risk function is responsible for oversight of key capital and liquidity risk management activities.

To ensure effective oversight and segregation of duties and in line with the ERMF, the Treasury and Capital Risk function is responsible for oversight of key capital, liquidity,non-traded market risk (NTMR) and pension risk management activities. The following describes the structure and governance associated with the risk types within the Treasury and Capital Risk function.

Organisation and structure

LOGO

104  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2016 Annual Report on Form 20-F


Liquidity risk management

Overview

The efficient management of liquidity is essential to the Group in retaining the confidence of the financial markets and ensuring that the business is sustainable. There is a control framework in place for managing liquidity risk and this is designed to meet the following objectives:

§to maintain liquidity resources that are sufficient in amount and quality and a funding profile that is appropriate to meet the liquidity risk appetite as expressed by the Board

§to maintain market confidence in the Group’s name.

This is achieved via a combination of policy formation, review and governance, analysis, stress testing, limit setting and monitoring. Together, these meet internal and regulatory requirements.

Roles and responsibilities

The Treasury and Capital Risk function is responsible for the management and governance of the liquidity risk mandate defined by the Board. Treasury has the primary responsibility for managing liquidity risk within the set risk appetite.

Liquidity risk management

A control framework is in place for Liquidity Risk under which the Treasury function operates. The control framework describes liquidity risk management processes, associated policies and controls that the Group has implemented to manage liquidity risk within the Liquidity Risk Appetite (LRA) and is subject to annual review.

The Board sets the LRA over Group stress tests and is represented as the level of risk the Group chooses to take in pursuit of its business objectives and in meeting its regulatory obligations. The approved LRA is implemented in line with the control framework and policy for liquidity risk

Control framework

Barclays has a comprehensive control framework for managing the Group’s liquidity risk. It is designed to deliver the appropriate term and structure of funding consistent with the LRA set by the Board.

The control framework incorporates a range of ongoing business management tools to monitor, limit and stress test the Group’s balance sheet and contingent liabilities and a Contingency Funding Plan. Limit setting and transfer pricing are tools that are designed to control the level of liquidity risk taken and drive the appropriate mix of funds. Together, these tools reduce the likelihood that a liquidity stress event could lead to an inability to meet the Group’s obligations as they fall due.

The stress tests assess the potential contractual and contingent stress outflows under a range of scenarios, which are then used to determine the size of the liquidity pool that is immediately available to meet anticipated outflows if a stress occurs.

The Group maintains a Contingency Funding Plan which details how liquidity stress events of varying severity would be managed. Since the precise nature of any stress event cannot be known in advance, the plans are designed to be flexible to the nature and severity of the stress event and provide a menu of options that can be drawn upon as required. Barclays also maintains Recovery Plans which consider actions to generate additional liquidity in order to facilitate recovery in a severe stress.

Risk Appetite and planning

Barclays has established a LRA over Group stress tests and is represented as the level of liquidity risk the Group chooses to take in pursuit of its business objectives and in meeting its regulatory obligations.

The key expression of the liquidity risk is through stress tests. It is measured with reference to the liquidity pool compared to anticipated stressed net contractual and contingent outflows for each of five stress scenarios. Barclays has defined both internal short-term and long-term LRA stress test metrics.

The LRA for internal stress tests is approved by the Board. The LRA is reviewed on a continuous basis and is subject to formal review at least annually as part of the Individual Liquidity Adequacy Assessment Process (ILAAP).

The stress outflows are used to determine the size of the Group Liquidity Pool, which represents those resources immediately available to meet outflows in a stress. In addition to the liquidity pool, the control framework and policy provides for other management actions, including generating liquidity from other liquid assets on the Group’s balance sheet in order to meet additional stress outflows, or to preserve or restore the Liquidity Pool in the event of a liquidity stress.

Liquidity limits

Barclays manages limits on a variety of on- andoff-balance sheet exposures, a sample of which is shown in the table below. These limits serve to control the overall extent and composition of liquidity risk taken by managing exposure to the cash outflows.

Early warning indicators

Barclays monitors a range of market indicators for early signs of liquidity risk either in the market or specific to Barclays, a sample of which are shown in the table below. These are designed to immediately identify the emergence of increased liquidity risk to maximise the time available to execute appropriate mitigating actions. Early warning indicators are used as part of the assessment of whether to invoke the Group’s Contingency Funding Plan (CFP).

Contingency funding plan and recovery and resolution planning

Barclays maintains a CFP which is designed to provide a framework where a liquidity stress could be effectively managed. The CFP is proportionate to the nature, scale and complexity of the business and is tested to ensure that it is operationally robust. The CFP details the circumstances in which the plan could be invoked, including as a result of adverse movements in liquidity early warning indicators. As part of the plan, the Barclays Treasurer has established a

LOGO

Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2016 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  105


Risk review

Risk management

Treasury and capital risk management

Liquidity Management Committee (LMC). On invocation of the CFP by the Executive Committee, the LMC would meet to identify the likely impact of the event on the Group and determine the appropriate response for the nature and severity of the stress.

The CFP provides a communication plan and includes management actions to respond to liquidity stresses of varying severity. This could include monetising the liquidity pool, slowing the extension of credit, increasing the tenor of funding and securitising or selling assets.

Capital risk management

Overview

Capital risk is managed through ongoing monitoring and management of the capital position, regular stress testing and a robust capital governance framework.

Organisation and structure

The management of capital risk is integral to the Group’s approach to financial stability and sustainability management, and is embedded in the way businesses and legal entities operate.

Capital risk management is underpinned by a control framework and policy. The capital management strategy, outlined in the Group and legal entity capital plans, is developed in alignment with the control framework and policy for capital risk, and is implemented consistently in order to deliver on the Group’s objectives.

The Board approves the Group capital plan, internal and regulatory stress tests, and the Group recovery plan. The Treasury Committee is responsible for monitoring and managing capital risk in line with the Group’s capital management objectives, capital plan and risk frameworks. The Board Risk Committee reviews the risk profile, and annually reviews risk appetite and the impact of stress scenarios on the Group capital plan/forecast in order to agree the Group’s projected capital adequacy.

Local management ensures compliance with an entity’s minimum regulatory capital requirements by reporting to local Asset and Liability Committees with oversight by the Group’s Treasury Committee, as required.

LOGO

Roles and responsibilities

Treasury has the primary responsibility for managing and monitoring capital and reports to the Group Finance Director. The Treasury and Capital Risk function contains a Capital Risk Oversight team, and is an independent risk function that reports to the Group CRO and is responsible for oversight of capital risk.

Capital risk management

The Group’s capital management strategy is driven by the strategic aims of the Group and the risk appetite set by the Board. The Group’s objectives are achieved through well embedded capital management practices.

Capital planning and allocation

The Group assesses its capital requirements on multiple bases, with the Group’s capital plan set in consideration of the Group’s risk profile and appetite, strategic and performance objectives, regulatory requirements, and market and internal factors, including the results of stress testing. The capital plan is managed on atop-down andbottom-up basis through both short-term and medium-term financial planning cycles, and is developed with the objective of ensuring that the Group maintains an adequate level of capital to support its capital requirements.

The PRA determines the regulatory capital requirements for the consolidated Group. Under these regulatory frameworks, capital requirements are set in consideration of the level of risk that the firm is exposed to and the factors above, and are measured through both risk-based RWAs and leverage-based metrics. An internal assessment of the Bank’s capital adequacy is undertaken through the Internal Capital Adequacy Assessment Process (ICAAP) and is used to inform the capital requirements of the firm.

106  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2016 Annual Report on Form 20-F


The Group expects to meet the minimum requirements for capital and leverage both during the transition period and upon full implementation, and also holds an internal buffer sized according to the firm’s assessment of capital risk.

Through the capital planning process, capital allocations are approved by the Group Executive Committee, taking into consideration the risk appetite and strategic aims of the Group. Regulated legal entities are, at a minimum, capitalised to meet their current and forecast regulatory and business requirements.

Monitoring and reporting

Capital is managed and monitored to ensure that Barclays’ capital plans remain appropriate and that risks to the plans are considered.

Limits are in place to support alignment with the capital plan and adherence to regulatory requirements, and are monitored through appropriately governed forums. Capital risks against firm-specific and macroeconomic early warning indicators are monitored and reported to the Treasury Committee, with clear escalation channels to senior management. This enables a consistent and objective approach to monitoring the capital outlook against the capital plan, and supports the early identification when outlooks deteriorate.

Capital management information is readily available to support the Senior Management’s strategic andday-to-day business decision making.

Stress testing and risk mitigation

Internal Group-wide stress testing is undertaken to quantify and understand the impact of sensitivities on the capital plan and capital ratios arising from stressed macroeconomic conditions. Recent economic, market and peer institution stresses are used to inform the assumptions developed for internal stress tests and to assess the effectiveness of mitigation strategies.

The Group also undertakes stress tests prescribed by the BoE and EBA, and legal entities undertake stress tests prescribed by their local regulators. These stress tests inform decisions on the size and quality of the internal capital buffer required and the results are incorporated into the Group capital plan to ensure adequacy of capital under normal and severe, but plausible stressed conditions.

Actions are identified as part of the stress tests that can be taken to mitigate the risks that may arise in the event of material adverse changes in the current economic and business outlook. As an additional layer of protection, the Group Recovery Plan defines the actions and implementation strategies available to the Group to increase or preserve capital resources in the situation that a stress occurs that is more severe than anticipated.

Transferability of capital

Surplus capital held in Group entities is required to be repatriated to Barclays Bank PLC in the form of dividends and/or capital repatriation, subject to local regulatory requirements, exchange controls and tax implications. This approach provides optimal flexibility on the redeployment of capital across legal entities. Pre and post the implementation of ring-fencing, capital is managed for the Group as a whole as well as its operating subsidiaries to ensure fungibility and redeployment of capital while meeting relevant internal and regulatory targets at entity levels.

Foreign exchange risk

The Group has capital resources and RWAs denominated in foreign currencies. Changes in foreign exchange rates result in changes in the Sterling equivalent value of foreign currency denominated capital resources and RWAs. As a result, the Group’s regulatory capital ratios are sensitive to foreign currency movements.

The Group’s capital ratio management strategy is to minimise the volatility of the capital ratios caused by foreign exchange rate movements. To achieve this, the Group aims to maintain the ratio of foreign currency CET1, Tier 1 and Total capital resources to foreign currency RWAs the same as the Group’s consolidated capital ratios.

The Group’s investments in foreign currency subsidiaries and branches, to the extent that they are not hedged for foreign exchange movements, translate into GBP upon consolidation creating CET1 capital resources sensitive to foreign currency movements. Changes in the GBP value of the investments due to foreign currency movements are captured in the currency translation reserve, resulting in a movement in CET1 capital.

To create foreign currency Tier 1 and Total Capital resources additional to the CET1 capital resources, the Group issues debt capital innon-Sterling currencies, where possible. This is primarily achieved through the issuance of debt capital from Barclays PLC or Barclays Bank PLC in US Dollar and Euro, but can also be achieved by subsidiaries issuing capital in local currencies.

Pension risk

The Group maintains a number of defined benefit pension schemes for past and current employees. The ability of the pension fund to meet the projected pension payments is maintained principally through investments.

Pension risk arises because the estimated market value of the pension fund assets might decline; investment returns might reduce; or the estimated value of the pension liabilities might increase as a result of changes to the market process. The Group monitors the market risks arising from its defined benefit pension schemes and works with the Trustees to address shortfalls. In these circumstances, the Group could be required or might choose to make extra contributions to the pension fund. The Group’s main defined benefit scheme was closed to new entrants in 2012.

Insurance risk

Insurance risk is managed within Africa Banking, where four categories of insurance risk are recognised: short-term insurance underwriting risk, life insurance underwriting risk, life insurance mismatch risk, and life and insurance investment risk.

Insurance risk arises when:

§aggregate insurance premiums received from policyholders under a portfolio of insurance contracts are inadequate to cover the claims arising from those policies and the expenses associated with the management of the portfolio of policies and claims

§premiums are not invested to adequately match the duration, timing and size of expected claims

§unexpected fluctuations in claims arise or excessive exposure (e.g. in individual or aggregate exposures) relative to capacity is retained in the entity.

Insurance entities also incur market risk (on the investment of accumulated premiums and shareholder capital), credit risk (counterparty exposure on investments and reinsurance transactions), liquidity risk and operational risk from their investments and financial operations.

Organisation and structure

LOGO

Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  101


Overview of the business market risk control structure

LOGO

Organisation and structure

Traded market risk in the businesses resides primarily in the Investment Bank, Treasury, Africa Banking and Non-Core. These businesses have the mandate to incur traded market risk. Non-traded market risk is mostly incurred in PCB, Barclaycard and Treasury.

Market risk oversight and challenge is provided by business committees, Group committees, including the Market Risk Committee and Group Market Risk. The chart above gives an overview of the business control structure.

Roles and responsibilities

The objectives of market risk management are to:

§understand and control market risk by robust measurement, limit setting, reporting and oversight

§facilitate business growth within a controlled and transparent risk management framework

§ensure that traded market risk in the businesses is controlled according to the allocated appetite

§control non-traded market risk in line with approved appetite

§control insurance risk in line with approved appetite

§support the Non-Core strategy of asset reductions by ensuring that market risk remains within agreed risk appetite.

To ensure the above objectives are met, a well-established governance structure is in place to manage these risks consistent with the ERMF (evaluate-respond-monitor). See page 95 on risk management strategy, governance and risk culture.

More information on market risk management can be found in Barclays PLC 2015 Pillar 3 Report.

102  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F


Risk review

Risk management

Funding and capital risk management

Funding risk

The ability of the Group to achieve its business plans may be adversely impacted if it does not effectively manage its capital (including leverage) and liquidity ratios. Group Treasury manage funding risk on a day-to-day basis with the Group Treasury Committee acting as the key governance forum.

Organisation and structure

LOGO

Capital risk

Capital risk is the risk that the Group has insufficient capital resources to:

§meet minimum regulatory requirements in the UK and in other jurisdictions such as the US and South Africa where regulated activities are undertaken. The Group’s authority to operate as a bank is dependent upon the maintenance of adequate capital resources at each level where prudential capital requirements are applied

§support its credit rating. A weaker credit rating would increase the Group’s cost of funds

§support its growth and strategic options.

Overview

Organisation and structure

Capital management is integral to the Group’s approach to financial stability and sustainability management and is therefore embedded in the way businesses and legal entities operate. Capital demand and supply is actively managed on a centralised basis, at a business level, at a local entity level and on a regional basis taking into account the regulatory, economic and commercial environment in which Barclays operates.

Roles and responsibilities

The Group’s capital management strategy is driven by the strategic aims of the Group and the Risk Appetite set by the Board. The Group’s objectives are achieved through well embedded capital management practices.

Capital planning

Capital forecasts are managed on a top-down and bottom-up basis through both short term (one year) and medium term (three to five years) financial planning cycles. Barclays’ capital plans are developed with the objective of maintaining capital that is adequate in quantity and quality to support the Group’s risk profile, regulatory and business needs. As a result, the Group holds a diversified capital base that provides strong loss absorbing capacity and optimised returns.

Barclays’ capital forecasts are continually monitored against relevant internal target capital ratios to ensure they remain appropriate, and consider risks to the plan including possible future regulatory changes.

Local management ensures compliance with an entity’s minimum regulatory capital requirements by reporting to local Asset and Liability Committees with oversight by the Group’s Treasury Committee, as required.

 

 

  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 20152016 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  103107


Risk review

Risk management

Treasury and capital risk management

 

 

LOGOInterest rate risk in the banking book management

Regulatory requirementsOverview

Capital planning is setBanking book operations generatenon-traded market risk, primarily through interest rate risk arising from the sensitivity of net interest margins to changes in consideration of minimum regulatory requirementsinterest rates. To manage interest rate risk within its defined risk appetite, the principal banking businesses engage in all jurisdictions in whichinternal derivative trades with Treasury. However, the Group operates. Group regulatory capital requirements are determined bybusinesses remain susceptible to market risk from six key sources:

§direct risk: the mismatch between therun-off of product balances and the associated interest rate hedge, given that the balance sheet is held static

§structural risk: the impact of the rate shock on the rolling hedge replenishment rate onnon-maturity products, given that the balance sheet is held static

§prepayment risk: balancerun-off may be faster or slower than expected, due to customer behaviour in response to general economic conditions or interest rates. This can lead to a mismatch between the actual balance of products and the hedges executed with Treasury based on initial expectations

§recruitment risk: the volume of new business may be lower or higher than expected, requiring the business to unwindpre-hedging or execute hedging transactions with Treasury at different rates than expected

§residual risk and margin compression: the business may retain a small element of interest rate risk to facilitate the day-to-day management of customer business. Additionally, in the current low interest rate environment, deposits on which the Group sets the interest rate are exposed to margin compression. This is because for any further fall in base rates the Group must absorb an increasing amount of the rate move in its margin

§lag risk: the risk of being unable tore-price products immediately after a change in interest rates due to both mandatory notification periods and operational constraints in large volume mailings. This is highly prevalent in managed rates savings product (e.g. Everyday Saver) where customers must be informed in writing of any planned reduction in their savings rates.

Non-traded market risk also arises from the PRA.

Under these regulatory frameworks, capital requirements are set in consideration of the level of risk that the firm is exposed toLiquidity Buffer investment portfolio, which is measured through bothmanaged to a defined risk weighted assets (RWAs) and leverage.

Capital held to support the level of risk identified is set in consideration of minimum ratio requirements and internal buffers. Capital requirements are set in accordance with the firm’s level of risk.

Governance

The Group and legal entity capital plans are underpinned by the Capital Risk Framework, which includes capital management policies and practices approved by the Principal Risk Officer. These plans are implemented consistently in order to deliver on the Group objectives.

The Board approves the Group capital plan, stress tests and recovery plan. The Treasury Committee manages compliance with the Group’s capital management objectives. The Committee reviews actual and forecast capital demand and resources on a bi-monthly basis. The Board Risk Committee annually reviews risk appetite and then analyses the impacts of stress scenarios on the Group capital forecast in order to understand and manage the Group’s projected capital adequacy.

Monitoring and managing capital

Capital is monitored and managed on an ongoing basis through:

Stress testing: internal group-wide stress testing is undertaken to quantify and understand the impact of sensitivities on the capital plan and capital ratios arising from stressed macroeconomic conditions. Actual recent economic, market and regulatory scenarios are used to inform the assumptions of the stress tests and assess the effectiveness of mitigation strategies.

The Group also undertakes stress tests prescribed by the BoE and EBA. Legal entities undertake stress tests prescribed by their local regulators. These stress tests inform decisions on the size and quality of capital buffer required and the results are incorporated into the Group capital plan to ensure adequacy of capital under normal and severe, but plausible, stressed conditions.

Risk mitigation: as part of the stress testing process, actions are identified that should be taken to mitigate the risks that could ariseappetite. Investments in the event of material adverseliquidity buffer are generally subject to available for sale accounting rules; changes in the current economic and business outlook.

As an additional layervalue of protection,these assets impact capital via the Barclays Recovery Plan defines the actions and implementation strategies available for the Group to increase or preserve capital resourcessale reserve.

Roles and responsibilities

The Treasury Market Risk team:

§provides risk management oversight and monitoring of all traded andnon-traded market risk in Treasury, which specifically includes risk management of the liquidity buffer, funding activities, asset and liability management hedging, residual interest rate risk from the hedge accounting solution and foreign exchange translation hedging

§sets and monitors risk limits to ensurenon-traded market risk taken in Treasury and the customer banking book adheres to agreed risk appetite.

The Interest Rate Risk in the event that stress events are more extreme than anticipated.Banking Book team:

Senior management awareness and transparency: Treasury works closely with Risk, businesses and legal entities to support a proactive approach to identifying sources of capital ratio volatilities which are considered in the Group’s capital plan. Capital risks against firm-specific and macroeconomic early warning indicators are monitored and reported to the Treasury Committee, associated with clear escalation channels to senior management.

§assesses interest rate risk in the banking book, particularly as it relates to customer banking book and Treasury

Capital management information is readily available at all times to support the Executive Management’s strategic and day-to-day business decision making, as may be required.

§acts as review and challenge of the First Line’s risk management practices and decisions including the hedging activity performed by Treasury on behalf of the business

The Group submits its Board approved ICAAP document to the PRA on an annual basis, which forms the basis of the Individual Capital Guidance (ICG) set by the PRA.

Capital allocation:capital allocations are approved by the Group Executive Committee and monitored by the Treasury Committee, taking into consideration the risk appetite, growth and strategic aims of the Group. Regulated legal entities are, at a minimum, allocated adequate capital to meet their current and forecast regulatory and business requirements.

Transferability of capital: the Group’s policy is for surplus capital held in Group entities to be repatriated to BBPLC in the form of dividends and/or capital repatriation, subject to local regulatory requirements, exchange controls and tax implications. This approach provides optimal flexibility on the re-deployment of capital across legal entities. The Group is not aware of any material impediments to the prompt transfer of capital resources, in line with the above policy, or repayment of intra-Group liabilities when due.

More information on capital risk management can be found in pages 402 to 403.

§acts as review and challenge for the behavioural assumptions used in hedging and transfer pricing.
 

 

104108  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 20152016 Annual Report on Form 20-F  


Risk review

Risk management

FundingOperational risk – Liquiditymanagement

 

 

Liquidity risk

The risk that the Group, although solvent, either does not have sufficient financial resources available to enable it to meet its obligations as they fall due, or can secure such resources only at excessive cost. This also results in a firm’s inability to meet regulatory liquidity requirements. This risk is inherent in all banking operations and can be affected by a wide range of Group-specific and market-wide events.

Overview

The Board has formally recognised a series of risks that are continuously present in Barclays and materially impact the achievement of Barclays objectives, one of which is Funding risk. Liquidity risk is recognised as a key risk within Funding risk. The efficient management of liquidity is essential to the Group in retaining the confidence of the financial markets and ensuring that the business is sustainable. Liquidity risk is managed through the Liquidity Risk Management Framework (the Liquidity Framework) which is designed to meet the following objectives:

§to maintain liquidity resources that are sufficient in amount and quality and a funding profile that is appropriate to meet the liquidity risk appetite (LRA) as expressed by the Board

§to maintain market confidence in the Group’s name.

This is achieved via a combination of policy formation, review and governance, analysis, stress testing, limit setting and monitoring. Together, these meet internal and regulatory requirements.

Organisation and structure

Barclays Treasury operates a centralised governance control process that covers all of the Group’s liquidity risk management activities. As per the ERMF, the Key Risk Officer (KRO) approves the Key Risk Control Framework for Liquidity Risk (Key Risk Control Framework) under which the Treasury function operates. The KRO is in the Risk function. The Key Risk Control Framework is subject to annual review. The Key Risk Control Framework describes liquidity policies and controls that the Group has implemented to manage liquidity risk within the LRA and is subject to annual review.

The Board sets the LRA, over Group stress tests, being the level of risk the Group chooses to take in pursuit of its business objectives and in meeting its regulatory obligations. The approved LRA is implemented and managed by the Treasury Committee through the Key Risk Control Framework.

Liquidity risk management

Barclays has a comprehensive Key Risk Control Framework for managing the Group’s liquidity risk. The Key Risk Control Framework describes liquidity policies and controls that the Group has implemented to manage liquidity risk within the LRA. The Key Risk Control Framework is designed to deliver the appropriate term and structure of funding consistent with the LRA set by the Board.

Liquidity is monitored and managed on an ongoing basis through:

Group Stress test risk appetite and planning: Established Group stress test LRA together with the appropriate limits for the management of liquidity risk. This is the level of liquidity risk the Group chooses to take in pursuit of its business objectives and in meeting its regulatory obligations.

Liquidity limits: Management of limits on a variety of on and off-balance sheet exposures and these serve to control the overall extent and composition of liquidity risk taken by managing exposure to the cash outflows.

Internal pricing and incentives: Active management of the composition and duration of the balance sheet and of contingent liquidity risk through the transfer of liquidity premium directly to the business.

Early warning indicators: Monitoring of a range of market indicators for early signs of liquidity risk in the market or specific to Barclays. These are designed to immediately identify the emergence of increased liquidity risk to maximise the time available to execute appropriate mitigating actions.

Contingency Funding Plan: Maintenance of a Contingency Funding Plan (CFP) which is designed to provide a framework where a liquidity stress could be effectively managed. The CFP provides a communication plan and includes management actions to respond to liquidity stresses of varying severity.

RRP: In accordance with the requirements of the PRA Rulebook: Recovery and Resolution, Barclays has developed a Group Recovery Plan. The key objectives are to provide the Group with a range of options to ensure the viability of the firm in a stress, set consistent early warning indicators to identify when the Recovery Plan should be invoked and to enable the Group to be adequately prepared to respond to stressed conditions. The Group continues to work with the authorities on RRP, including identifying and addressing any impediments to resolvability.

LOGO

Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  105

Operational risk

The risk of loss to the firm from inadequate or failed processes or systems, human factors or due to external events (for example fraud) where the root cause is not due to credit or market risks.


Risk review

Risk management

Operational risk management

Operational risk

Any instance where there is a potential or actual impact to the Group resulting from inadequate or failed internal processes, people, systems, or from an external event. The impacts to the Group can be financial, including losses or an unexpected financial gain, as well as non-financial such as customer detriment, reputational or regulatory consequences.

Overview

The management of operational risk has two key objectives:

 

§ minimise the impact of losses suffered, both in the normal course of business (small losses) and from extreme events (large losses)

 

§ improve the effective management of the Group and strengthen its brand and external reputation.

The Group is committed to the management and measurement of operational risk and was granted a waiver by the FSA (now the PRA) to operate an Advanced Measurement Approach (AMA) for operational risk, under Basel II, which commenced in January 2008. The majority of the Group calculates regulatory capital requirements using AMA (93%(94% of capital requirements); however, in specific areas,, except for small parts of the organisation acquired since the original permission (6% of capital requirements) using the Basic Indicator Approach (7%) is applied.(BIA). The Group works to benchmark its internal operational risk management and measurement practices with peer banks and to drive the further development of advanced techniques.

The Group is committed to operating within a strong system of internal controlcontrols that enables business to be transacted and risk taken without exposing the Group to unacceptable potential losses or reputational damage.damages. The Group has an overarching framework that sets out the approach to internal governance. This guide establishes the mechanisms and processes by which the Board directs the organisation, through setting the tone and expectations from the top, delegating authority and monitoring compliance.

Organisation and structure

Operational riskRisk comprises a number of specific Key Risksrisks defined as follows:follow:

 

§ external supplier: inadequate selection and ongoing management of external suppliers

 

§ financial crime: failure to comply with anti-money laundering, anti-bribery, anti-corruption and sanctions policies. In early January 2016, the oversight of financial crime was transferred to Group Compliance

§financial reporting:reporting misstatement or omission within external financial or regulatory reporting

 

§ fraud:dishonest behaviour with the intent to make a gain or cause a loss to others

 

§ information: inadequate protection of the Group’s information in accordance with its value and sensitivity

 

§ legal: payments process:failure to identify and manage legal risksin operation of payments processes

 

§ payments process: failure in operation of payments processes

§people:inadequate people capabilities, and/or performance/reward structures, and/or inappropriate behaviours

 

§ premises and security:unavailability of premises (to meet business demand) and/or safe working environments, and inadequate protection of physical assets, employees and customers against external threats

 

§ taxation:failure to comply with tax laws and practice which could lead to financial penalties, additional tax charges or reputational damagedamages

 

§ technology (including cyber security):failure to develop and deploy secure, stable and reliable technology solutions which includes risk of loss or detriment to Barclays’the Group’s business and customers as a result of actions committed or facilitated through the use of networked information systems

 

§ transaction operations:failure in the management of critical transaction processes.

In order to ensure complete coverage of the potential adverse impacts on the Group arising from operational risk, the operational risk taxonomy extends beyond the operational key risks listed above to cover areas included within conduct risk. For more information on conduct risk please see pages 108 and 109.page 112.

These risks may result in financial and/ornon-financial impacts including legal/regulatory breaches or reputational damage.damages.

 

 

ReportingOrganisation and controlstructure

 

LOGOLOGO

 

106  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 20152016 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  109


Risk review

Risk management

Operational risk management

 

 

Roles and responsibilities

The prime responsibility for the management of operational risk and the compliance with control requirements rests with the business and functional units where the risk arises. The operational risk profile and control environment is reviewed by business unit management through specific meetings which cover governance, risk and control. Businesses are required to report their operational risks on both a regular and an event drivenevent-driven basis. The reports include a profile of the material risks that may threaten the achievement of their objectives and the effectiveness of key controls, material control issues, operational risk events and a review of scenarios.

The Group Head of Operational Risk as Principal Risk Officer, is responsible for establishing, owning and maintaining an appropriate Group-wide Operational Risk Framework and for overseeing the portfolio of operational risk across the Group.

Operational risk management acts in a second lineSecond Line of defenceDefence capacity, and is responsible for implementation of the framework and monitoring operational risk events and risk exposuresexposures. Key indicators (KIs) allow the Group to monitor its operational risk profile and material control issues.alert management when risk levels exceed acceptable ranges or risk appetite levels and drive timely decision making and actions. Through attendance at Business Unit Governance, Risk and Controlsbusiness GRC meetings, itoperational risk management provides specific risk input into the issues highlighted and the overall risk profile of the business. Operational risk issues escalated from these meetings are considered by the Group Principal Risk Officer through the second lineSecond Line of defenceDefence review meetings, which also consider material control issues and their effective remediation.meetings. Depending on their nature, the outputs of these meetings are presented to the BRC or the BAC.

Specific reports are prepared by businesses, Key Risk Officers and Group Operational Risk on a regular basis for ORRF, BRC and BAC.

Risk and control self-assessments and key indicators

The Group identifies and assesses all material risks within each business and evaluates the key controls in place to mitigate those risks. Managers in the businesses use self-assessment techniques to identify risks, evaluate the effectiveness of key controls in place and assess whether the risks are being effectively managed within business risk appetite.managed. The businesses are then able to make decisions on what action, if any, is required to reduce the level of risk to the Group. These risk assessments are monitored on a regular basis to ensure that each business continually understands the risks it faces.

Key Indicators (KIs) are metrics which allow the Group to monitor its operational risk profile. KIs include measurable thresholds that reflect the risk appetite of the business and are monitored to alert management when risk levels exceed acceptable ranges or risk appetite levels and drive timely decision making and actions.

    

 

110  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2016 Annual Report on Form 20-F


Risk review

Risk management

Model risk management

Model risk

The risk of the potential adverse consequences from financial assessment or decisions based on incorrect or misused model outputs and reports.

Overview

Barclays uses models to support a broad range of activities, including informing business decisions and strategies, measuring and limiting risk, valuing exposures, conducting stress testing, assessing capital adequacy, managing client assets, and meeting reporting requirements.

Because models are imperfect and incomplete representations of reality, they may be subject to errors affecting the accuracy of their output.

Model errors can result in inappropriate business decisions being made, financial loss, regulatory risk, reputational risk and/or inadequate capital reporting.

Models may also be misused, for instance applied to products that they were not intended for, or not adjusted, where fundamental changes to their environment would justifyre-evaluating their core assumptions.

Errors and misuse are the primary sources of model risk.

Robust model risk management is crucial to ensuring that model risk is assessed and managed within a defined risk appetite. Strong model risk culture, appropriate technology environment, and adequate focus on understanding and resolving model limitations are crucial components.

Organisation and structure

Barclays allocates substantial resources to identify and record models and their usage, document and monitor the performance of models, validate models and ensure that model limitations are adequately addressed.

Barclays has a dedicated Model Risk Management (MRM) function that consists of two main units: the Independent Validation Unit (IVU), responsible for model validation and approval, and Model Governance and Controls (MGC), covering model risk governance, controls and reporting, including ownership of model risk policy.

The model risk policy prescribes Group-wide, end to end requirements for the identification, measurement and management of model risk, covering model documentation, development, implementation, monitoring, annual review, independent validation and approval, change and reporting processes. The Policy is supported by global Standards covering model inventory, documentation, validation, complexity and materiality, testing and monitoring, overlays, as well as vendor models and CCAR benchmarking.

Barclays is continuously enhancing model risk management. MRM reports to the Group Chief Risk Officer and operates a global framework. Implementation of best practice standards is a central objective of the Group. Large new model development programmes are currently in motion to implement the model requirements of UK structural reform, CCAR, FRTB and IFRS9.

Roles and responsibilities

The key model risk management activities include:

§ensuring that models are correctly identified across all relevant areas of the firm, and recorded in the Group Models Database (GMD), the Group-wide model inventory. The heads of the relevant areas (typically, the Business Chief Risk Officers, Business Chief Executive Officers, the Treasurer, the Chief Financial Officer) annually attest to the completeness and accuracy of the model inventory. MGC undertakes regular conformance reviews on the model inventory. These activities are detailed in the Model Inventory, Workflow and Taxonomy Standard

§ensuring that every model has a model owner who is accountable for the model. The model owner must sign off models prior to submission to IVU for validation. The model owner works with the relevant technical teams (model developers, implementation, monitoring, data services, regulatory) to ensure that the model presented to IVU is and remains fit for purpose, in accordance with the Model Documentation Standard, and the Model Testing, Monitoring and Annual Review Standard

§ensuring that every model is subject to validation and approval by IVU, prior to being implemented and on a continual basis, in accordance with the Model Validation and Approval Standard. The level of review and challenge applied by IVU is tailored to the materiality and complexity of each model. Validation includes a review of the model assumptions, conceptual soundness, data, design, performance testing, compliance with external requirements if applicable, as well as any limitations, proposed remediation and overlays with supporting rationale. Material model changes are subject to prioritised validation and approval

§specific Standards cover model risk management activities relating to CCAR benchmarking and challenger modelling, model overlays, vendor models, and model complexity and materiality.

Organisation and structure

LOGO

 

  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 20152016 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  107111


Risk review

Risk management

Conduct risk management

 

 

Conduct risk

The risk of detriment to customers, clients, market integrity, competition or Barclays from the inappropriate supply of financial services, including instances of wilful or negligent misconduct.

Conduct risk

The risk that detriment is caused to customers, clients, counterparties or the Group because of inappropriate judgement in the execution of our business activities.

Overview

The Group defines, manages and mitigates conduct risk with the goalgoals of providing goodpositive customer and client outcomes and protecting market integrity. This includes taking reasonable steps to ensure our culture and strategy are appropriately aligned to these goals; our products and services are reasonably designed and delivered to meet the needs of our customers and clients as well as promoting the fair and orderly operation of the markets in which we do business.

As part of the Enterprise Risk Management Framework (ERMF) refresh (page 98), Reputation risk has been designated as a Principal Risk and Financial Crime has been designated as a Risk Category under Conduct Risk.

Organisation and structure

The Group has defined seven Key Risks that are the main sub risk types to Conduct Risk:

§our products or services do not meet customers’ needs or have the potential to cause customer detriment

§the way we design and undertake transaction services has the potential to cause customer detriment

§the way we design or undertake customer servicing has the potential to cause customer detriment

§our strategy or business model has the potential to cause customer detriment

§our governance arrangements or culture has the potential to cause customer detriment

§we fail to obtain and maintain relevant regulatory authorisations, permissions and licence requirements

§damage to Barclays’ reputation is caused during the conduct of our business.

Organisation and structure

The Conduct and Reputation Risk Committee (CRRC) derives its authority from(GRC) is the Barclays Group Head of Compliance. The purpose of the CRRC is to reviewmost senior Executive body responsible for reviewing and monitormonitoring the effectiveness of Barclays’ management of Conduct and Reputation Risk. In addition, specific committees monitor conduct risk and the control environment at the business level.risk.

Roles and responsibilities

The Conduct Risk Principal Risk Framework (PRF) comprises a number of elements that allow the Group to manage and measure its conduct risk profile.

The PRF is implemented vertically across the Group:Group through an organisational structure that requires all businesses to implement and operate their own conduct risk frameworks that meet the requirements within the ERMF.

§vertically, through an organisational structure that requires all businesses to implement and operate their own conduct risk framework that meets the requirements detailed within the ERMF

§horizontally, with Group Key Risk Officers (KROs) required to monitor information relevant to their Key Risk from each element of the Conduct Risk PRF.

The primary responsibility for managing conduct risk and compliance with control requirements sits with the business where the risk arises. The Conduct Risk Accountable Executive for each business is responsible for ensuring the implementation of, and adherence to the PRF.

The Conduct Principal RiskGroup Chief Compliance Officer is responsible for owning and maintaining an appropriate Group-wide Conduct Risk PRF and for overseeing Group-wide Conduct Riskconduct risk management.

Businesses are required to report their conduct risks on both a quarterly and an event drivenevent-driven basis. The quarterly reports detail the conduct risks inherent within the business strategy and include forward looking horizon scanning analysis as well as backward looking evidence-based indicators from both internal and external sources. For details please refer to the Risk Review, Conduct Risk Performance section of this report (page 175).

Business level reports are reviewed within Compliance. Compliance then creates Group level reports for consideration by CRRC and RepCo. The Group periodically assesses its management of conduct risk through independent audits and addresses issues identified.

Event-driven reporting consists of any risks or issues that breach certain thresholds for severity and probability. Any such risks or issues must be promptly escalated to the business and the appropriate KRO.

In 2015 Reputation Risk was re-designated as a Key Risk under the Conduct Risk Principal Risk. The Reputation Key Risk Framework outlines the processes and actions required of the business. These include regular and forward looking reviews of current and emerging reputation risks so that a topical and comprehensive reputation risk profile of the organisation can be maintained.on page 180.

 

 

Organisation and structure

 

LOGOLOGO

 

108112  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 20152016 Annual Report on Form 20-F  


Risk review

Risk management

ConductReputation risk management

 

 

Reputation risk

The risk that an action, transaction, investment or event will reduce trust in the firm’s integrity and competence by clients, counterparties, investors, regulators, employees or the public.

Reputation risk is the riskOverview

A reduction of damage to the Group’s brand arising from any association, action or inaction which is perceived by stakeholders (e.g. customers, clients, colleagues, shareholders, regulators, opinion formers) to be inappropriate or unethical. Damage to the Group’s brandtrust in Barclays’ integrity and consequent erosion of our reputation reducescompetence may reduce the attractiveness of the GroupBarclays to stakeholders and maycould lead to negative publicity, loss of revenue, regulatory or legislative action, loss of existing and potential client business, reduced workforce morale and difficulties in recruiting talent. Ultimately it may destroy shareholder value.

With effect from 2017, Reputation risk may arise in many different ways,has been redesignated as a Principal Risk within the Enterprise Risk Management Framework.

Organisation and structure

The Group Risk Committee (GRC) is the most senior Executive body responsible for example:reviewing and monitoring the effectiveness of Barclays’ management of Reputation risk.

Roles and responsibilities

§failure to act in good faith and in accordance with the Group’s values and code of conduct

§failure (real or perceived) to comply with the law or regulation, or association (real or implied) with illegal activity

§failures in corporate governance, management or technical systems

§failure to comply with internal standards and policies

§association with controversial sectors or clients

§association with controversial transactions, projects, countries or governments

§association with controversial business decisions, including but not restricted to, decisions relating to: products (in particular new products), delivery channels, promotions/advertising, acquisitions, branch representation, sourcing/supply chain relationships, staff locations, treatment of financial transactions

§association with poor employment practices.

In each case, the risk may arise from failureThe Chief Compliance Officer is accountable for ensuring that a Reputation Principal Risk Framework and policies are developed and that they are subject to comply with either stated norms, which are likely to change over time, so an assessment of reputation risk cannot be static. If not managed effectively, stakeholder expectations of responsible corporate behaviour will not be met.limits, monitored, reported on and escalated, as required.

Reputation risk may also ariseis by nature pervasive and cause damagecan be difficult to quantify, requiring more subjective judgement than many other risks. The Reputation Principal Risk Framework sets out what is required to ensure Reputation risk is managed effectively and consistently across the bank.

The primary responsibility for identifying and managing Reputation risk and adherence to the Group’s image, through associationcontrol requirements sits with clients, their transactions or their projects if these are perceived by external stakeholdersthe business and support functions where the risk arises.

Each business is required to be environmentally damaging. Whereoperate within established Reputation risk appetite and to submit quarterly reports to the Group is financing infrastructure projectsReputation Management team, highlighting their most significant current and potential Reputation risks and issues and how they are being managed. These reports are a key internal source of information for the quarterly Reputation risk reports which have potentially adverse environmental impacts, the Group’s Client Assessment and Aggregation policy and supporting Environmental and Social Risk Standard will apply. This policy identifies the circumstances in whichare prepared for the Group requires due diligence to include assessment of specialist environmental reports. These reports will include consideration of a wide range ofRisk Committee and the project’s potential impacts including on air, waterBoard Reputation Committee.

Organisation and land quality, on biodiversity issues, on locally affected communities, including any material upstream and downstream impacts, and working conditions together with employee and community health and safety. Adherence to the Environmental and Social Risk Standard is the mechanism by which Barclays fulfils the requirements of the Equator Principles. These Principles are an internationally recognised framework for environmental due diligence in project finance. Barclays was one of four banks which collaborated in developing the Principles, ahead of their launch in 2003 with 10 adopting banks. There are now more than 80 banks worldwide which have adopted the Equator Principles (see www.equator-principles.com).

structure

 

LOGO

 

  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 20152016 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  109113


Risk review

Risk management

Legal risk

Legal risk

The risk of loss or imposition of penalties, damages or fines from the failure of the firm to meet its legal obligations including regulatory or contractual requirements.

Overview

With effect from 2017, Legal risk, which was previously a Key Risk under operational risk, has beenre-designated as a Principal Risk within the Enterprise Risk Management Framework.

The Legal Risk Framework prescribes Group-wide requirements for the identification, measurement and management of Legal risk, covering assessment, risk appetite, key indicators and governance. The Group General Counsel (GCC) is the Legal Principal Risk Officer and owns the Legal Risk Framework and the associated legal policies.

Legal risk is defined by the five respective Legal Policies:

§Contractual arrangements – failure to have enforceable contracts in place or for contracts to be enforceable as intended

§Litigation management– failure to adequately manage litigation involving Barclays as either claimant or defendant

§Intellectual property (IP)– failure to protect the Group’s IP assets or Barclays infringing IP rights of third parties

§Competition/antitrust law– failure to follow competition/antitrust law or failure to manage relationships with competition and antitrust authorities

§Use of law firms– failure to control instruction of an external law firm.

Group-wide and Business/Function specific Standards may be put in place to support the implementation of the legal policies. The standards are aligned to one of the policies and are implemented by Businesses/ Functions.

Organisation and structure

The Group Risk Committee (GRC) is the most senior executive body responsible for reviewing and monitoring the effectiveness of Barclays’ management of Legal risk. Escalation paths from this forum exist to the Board of Barclays PLC.

Roles and responsibilities

The Legal Risk Framework sets out what is required to ensure Legal risk is managed effectively and consistently across the bank.

The primary responsibility for managing Legal risk and adherence to the control requirements sits with the business where the risk arises.

On behalf of the businesses, the aligned General Counsel or Legal Senior Management, will undertake Legal risk appetite assessments and provide advice and guidance on Legal risk management. The Legal risk assessment includes both quantitative and qualitative criteria including:

§Knowledge of Legal risk material control issues or weaknesses

§Emerging risks resulting from upcoming changes in the control environment, systems, or internal organisational structures

§Potential implications on Barclays of forthcoming changes in the external legal and regulatory environment and/or prevailing decisions from courts and enforcing authorities as they relate to defined legal risks.

The Legal Principal Risk Officer is responsible for owning and maintaining an appropriate Legal Risk Framework and for overseeing Group-wide legal risk management.

Organisation and structure

LOGO

114  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2016 Annual Report on Form 20-F


Risk review

Risk performance

        

 

Maintaining our risk profile at an acceptable and appropriate level is essential to ensure our continued performance. This section provides a review of the performance of the Group in 20152016 for each of the five Principal Risks in operation throughout the year, which are credit, market, funding, operational, and conduct risk.

Please refer to the Risk Management section (pages97 to 114) for an overview of the changes to Barclays’ Principal Risk taxonomy in December 2016.

 

  

 

 

 

 

Page

 

 

 

 

 

 

  

Credit risk  

111 

116
 
Market risk   138 141  
Funding risk – capital risk   148 152  
Funding risk – liquidity risk   154 159  
Operational risk   172 178  
Conduct risk   174 180  

 

   LOGOLOGO

  For a more detailedcomprehensive breakdown on our Risk review and Risk management contents please see pages 84-8586 to 87.

LOGO

 

 

110  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 20152016 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  115


Risk review

Risk performance

Credit risk

 

 

Analysis of credit risk

Credit risk is the risk of the Group suffering financial loss should any of its customers, clients, or market counterparties fail to fulfil their contractual obligations to the Group.

This section details the Group’s credit risk profile and provides information on the Group’s exposure to loans and advances to customer and banks, maximum exposures with collateral held and net impairment charges raised in the year. It provides information on balances that are categorised as credit risk loans, balances in forbearance, as well as exposure to and performance metrics for specific portfolios and asset types.

Key metrics

Key metricsCredit impairment charges in 2016 were 35% higher than 2015:

§Credit impairment charges in 2015 were 2% lower than 2014:

32m 608m Group Core

Loan impairment broadly stableincreased reflecting benign economic conditions ina higher charge following the management review of the UK and US cards portfolio impairment modelling and a number of single name exposures.

30m 555m Retail Core

PerformanceIncreased charges primarily due to a charge following the review of UK and US cards portfolio impairment modelling.

Underlying performance across key portfolios has remained stable and broadly within expectations

2m 63m Wholesale Core

Performance benefiting from economic conditionsIncreased charges reflecting limited range of single name exposures.

-£10m Non-Core

Decreased charges reflecting lower charges in the UKEuropean businesses.

– Net Loans and US markets offsetadvances to customers and banks decreased by impact of stress2% in Oil and Gas portfolios2016

-£139m Non-Core– The loan loss rate rose to 53bps

Lower charge reflects sale of Spanish business and higher recoveries in Portugal

LOGO

 

116  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2016 Annual Report on Form 20-F


§Summary of Contents Net

Page

§  Credit risk overview and summary of performance

§  Analysis of the balance sheet

§  The Group’s maximum exposure and collateral and other credit enhancements held

§  The Group’s approach to manage and represent credit quality

    –  Asset credit quality

    –  Debt securities

    –  Balance sheet credit quality

118

118

119

121

121

121

122

Credit risk represents a significant risk to the Group and mainly arises from exposure to wholesale and retail loans and advances together with the counterparty credit risk arising from derivative contracts entered into with clients.

This section provides a macro view of the Group’s credit exposures.

§  Analysis of the concentration of credit risk

    –  Geographic concentrations

    –  Group exposures to specific countries

    –  Industrial concentrations

123

123

124

125

The Group reviews and monitors risk concentrations in a variety of ways to ensure the continuation of a diversified portfolio operating within agreed appetites.

This sections outlines performance against key concentration risks at a macro Group level.

§  Loans and advances to customers and banks decreased by 6% in 2015.

§  Analysis of specific portfolios and asset types

    –  Secured home loans

    –  Credit cards, overdrafts, and unsecured loans

    –  Exposure to UK Commercial Real Estate

 

127 128 128 129 131

In addition to Group-wide concentrations, Credit Risk monitors exposure performance across a range of specific portfolios where the risk profile is considered to be heightened.

This section provides a more detailed analysis of these exposures and notes on how certain aspects of the risk profile are mitigated on an ongoing basis.

§  Analysis of problem loans

    –  Age analysis of loans and advances that are past due but

        not impaired

    –  Analysis of loans and advances assessed as impaired

    –  Potential credit risk loans

    –  Impaired loans

    –  Forbearance

132 132

133 132

134

134

The loan loss rate was stable at 47bps.Group monitors exposures to assets where there is a heightened likelihood of default and assets where an actual default has occurred.

This section outlines the exposure to assets that have been classified as impaired analysing the exposures between business units and by key product types.

The Group, from time to time, agrees to the suspension of certain aspects of customer/client credit agreements, generally during temporary periods of financial difficulties where the Group is confident that the customer/client will be able to remedy the suspension.

During this time, customer/client assets are separately monitored to ensure that remedies are completed.

This section outlines the Group’s current exposure to assets with this treatment.

§  Impairment

     –  Impairment allowances

     –  Management adjustments to models for impairment

§  Analysis of debt securities

§  Analysis of derivatives

138 138 138 139 139

The Group holds impairment provisions on the balance sheet as a result of the raising of a charge against profit for incurred losses in the lending book. An impairment allowance may either be identified or unidentified and individual or collective.

This section outlines the movements in allowance for impairment by asset class exposure, material management adjustments to model output, analysis of debt securities and derivatives.

 

  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 20152016 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  111117


Risk review

Risk performance

Credit risk

Credit risk is the risk of the Group suffering financial loss should any of its customers, clients or market counterparties fails to fulfil their contractual obligations to the Group.

All disclosures in this section (pages 112-137) are unaudited unless otherwise stated

Credit risk

Credit risk is the risk of the Group suffering financial loss if any of its customers, clients or market counterparties fails to fulfil their contractual obligations to the Group.

All disclosures in this section (pages 118 to 120) are unaudited unless otherwise stated. Disclosures for 2016 exclude BAGL balances which are now recognised as held for sale, comparative tables for 2015 include BAGL balances unless otherwise stated.

Overview

Credit risk represents a significant risk to the Group and mainly arises from exposure to wholesale and retail loans and advances together with the counterparty credit risk arising from derivative contracts entered into with clients. A summary of performance may be found below.

This section provides an analysis of areas of particular interest or potentially of higher risk, including: i) balance sheet, including the maximum exposure, and collateral, and loans and advances; ii) areas of concentrations, including the Eurozone;concentration; iii) exposure to and performance metrics for specific portfolios and assets types, including home loans, credit cards and UK commercial real estate; iv) exposure and performance of loans on concession programmes, including forbearance; v) problem loans, including credit risk loans (CRLs); and vi) impairment, including impairment stock and management adjustments to model outputs.

The topics covered in this section may be found in the credit risk section of the contents on page 84. Please see risk management section on pages 94-109101 to 102 for details of governance, policies and procedures.

Summary of performance in the period

Credit impairment charges increased £0.6bn to £2.4bn including a £0.3bn charge in 2015 fell 2% to £2.1bn which principally reflectedQ316 following the benign economic conditions inmanagement review of the UK and US and effective risk management, includingcards portfolio impairment modelling. Overall, this resulted in an 11bps increase in the strengthening ofloan loss rate to 53bps.

Credit Risk Loans (CRLs) remained stable at £6.5bn (2015: £6.4bn) with the Retail Impairment Policy. These supported generally stable delinquency rates inGroup’s CRL coverage ratio increasing to 71% (2015: 65%) mainly within retail and lower default rates in wholesale where large single names were limited in number and focused on the Oil and Gas sector.

The level of CRL reduced to £7.8bn principally due to a reduction in Non-Core and Personal and Corporate Banking. The coverage ratios for home loans, unsecured retail portfolios and corporate loans remain broadly in line with expected severity rates for these types of portfolios.

NetTotal loans and advances net of impairment decreased by £11.4bn to customers£449.5bn driven by a £31bn decrease due to the reclassification of BAGL balances to held for sale and banks reduced 6% to £440.6bn reflecting a decrease£9bn from the exit of other assets in Non-Core businesses, Investment Bank and Africa BankingNon-Core. This was offset by increaseslending growth of £20bn and a net £9bn increase in Personalsettlement and Corporate Banking.

The loan loss rate was broadly stable at 47bps (2014: 46bps).cash collateral balances.

Analysis of the balance sheetBalance Sheet

The Group’s maximum exposure and collateral and other credit enhancements held

Basis of preparation

The following tables present a reconciliation between the Group’s maximum exposure and its net exposure to credit risk; reflecting the financial effects of collateral, credit enhancements and other actions taken to mitigate the Group’s exposure.

For financial assets recognised on the balance sheet, maximum exposure to credit risk represents the balance sheet carrying value after allowance for impairment. Foroff-balance sheet guarantees, the maximum exposure is the maximum amount that the Group would have to pay if the guarantees were to be called upon. For loan commitments and other credit related commitments that are irrevocable over the life of the respective facilities, the maximum exposure is the full amount of the committed facilities.

This and subsequent analyses of credit risk include only financial assets subject to credit risk. They exclude other financial assets not subject to credit risk, mainly equity securities held for trading, as available for sale or designated at fair value, and traded commodities. Assets designated at fair value in respect of linked liabilities to customers under investment contracts have also not been included as the Group is not exposed to credit risk on these assets. Credit losses in these portfolios, if any, would lead to a reduction in the linked liabilities and not result in a loss to the Group. Foroff-balance sheet exposures certain contingent liabilities not subject to credit risk such as performance guarantees are excluded.

Both on- andoff-balance sheet exposures for 2016 exclude BAGL balances now held for sale. Comparative tables for 2015 include BAGL balances unless stated otherwise.

The Group mitigates the credit risk to which it is exposed through netting andset-off, collateral and risk transfer. Further detail on the Group’s policies to each of these forms of credit enhancement is presented on pages 100.in the Barclays Pillar 3 Report.

Overview

As at 31 December 2015,2016, the Group’s net exposure to credit risk after taking into account netting andset-off, collateral and risk transfer decreasedincreased 6% to £701.4bn,£740.7bn, reflecting a decreasean increase in maximum exposure of 14%3% and a reductionan increase in the level of mitigation held by 21%of 1%. Overall, the extent to which the Group holds mitigation against its total exposure reduced slightly toremained stable at 47% (2015: 48% (2014: 53%).

Of the remaining exposure left unmitigated, a significant portion relates to cash held at central banks, available for salefinancial investment debt securities issued by governments, cash collateral and settlement balances, all of which are considered lower risk. Trading portfolio liability positions, which to a significant extent economically hedge trading portfolio assets but which are not held specifically for risk management purposes, are excluded from the analysis. The credit quality of counterparties to derivative, available for salefinancial investments and wholesale loan assets are predominantly investment grade. Further analysis on the credit quality of assets is presented on pages 115-116.121 to 122.

Where collateral has been obtained in the event of default, the Group does not, as a rule, use such assets for its own operations and they are usually sold on a timely basis. The carrying value of assets held by the Group as at 31 December 2015,2016, as a result of the enforcement of collateral, was £69m (2014: £161m)£16m (2015: £69m).

 

 

112118  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 20152016 Annual Report on Form 20-F  


Risk review

Risk performance

Credit risk

    

    

 Maximum exposure and effects of collateral and other credit enhancements (audited)  
   Maximum      Netting     

 

Collateral       

  

   Risk      Net  
   exposure      and set-off      Cash      Non-cash      transfer      exposure  
 As at 31 December 2015   £m      £m      £m      £m      £m      £m  
 On-balance sheet:                              
 Cash and balances at central banks   49,711      –      –      –      –      49,711  
 Items in the course of collection from other banks   1,011      –      –      –      –      1,011  
 Trading portfolio assets:            
 Debt securities   45,576      –      –      –      –      45,576  
 Traded loans   2,474      –      –      (607)     (1)     1,866  
 Total trading portfolio assets   48,050      –      –      (607)     (1)     47,442  
 Financial assets designated at fair value:            
 Loans and advances   17,913      –      (21)     (5,850)     (515)     11,527  
 Debt securities   1,383      –      –      –      –      1,383  
 Reverse repurchase agreementsa   49,513      –      (315)     (49,027)     –      171  
 Other financial assets   375      –      –      –      –      375  
 Total financial assets designated at fair value   69,184      –      (336)     (54,877)     (515)     13,456  
 Derivative financial instruments   327,709      (259,582)     (34,918)     (7,484)     (5,529)     20,196  
 Loans and advances to banks   41,349      –      (4)     (4,072)     (64)     37,209  
 Loans and advances to customers:            
 Home loans   155,863      –      (221)     (154,355)     (634)     653  
 Credit cards, unsecured and other retail lending   67,840      (12)     (1,076)     (14,512)     (1,761)     50,479  
 Corporate loans   175,514      (8,399)     (593)     (45,788)     (4,401)     116,333  
 Total loans and advances to customers   399,217      (8,411)     (1,890)     (214,655)     (6,796)     167,465  
 Reverse repurchase agreements and other similar secured lending   28,187      –      (166)     (27,619)     –      402  
 Available for sale debt securities   89,278      –      –      (832)     (811)     87,635  
 Other assets   1,410      –      –      –      –      1,410  
 Total on-balance sheet   1,055,106      (267,993)     (37,314)     (310,146)     (13,716)     425,937  
 Off-balance sheet:            
 Contingent liabilities   20,576      –      (604)     (1,408)     (104)     18,460  
 Documentary credits and other short-term trade-related transactions   845      –      (33)     (57)     (3)     752  
 Forward starting reverse repurchase agreementsb   93      –      –      (91)     –      2  
 Standby facilities, credit lines and other commitments   281,369      –      (313)     (24,156)     (662)     256,238  
 Total off-balance sheet   302,883      –      (950)     (25,712)     (769)     275,452  
                               
 Total   1,357,989      (267,993)     (38,264)     (335,858)     (14,485)     701,389  

 

 

Notes

aDuring 2015, new reverse repurchase agreements and other similar secured lending in certain businesses have been designated at fair value to better align to the way the business manages the portfolio’s risk and performance.
bForward starting reverse repurchase agreements were previously disclosed as loan commitments. Following the business designation of reverse repurchase and repurchase agreements at fair value through profit and loss, new forward starting reverse repurchase agreements are within the scope of IAS 39 and are recognised as derivatives on the balance sheet.
 Maximum exposure and effects of collateral and other credit enhancements (audited) 
   Maximum    Netting    

Collateral      

    Risk    Net 
   exposure    and set-off    Cash    Non-cash    transfer    exposure 
 As at 31 December 2016   £m    £m    £m    £m    £m    £m 
 On-balance sheet:                              
 Cash and balances at central banks   102,353                    102,353 
 Items in the course of collection from other banks   1,467                    1,467 
 Trading portfolio assets:            
 Debt securities   38,789                    38,789 
 Traded loans   2,975            (270       2,705 
 Total trading portfolio assets   41,764            (270       41,494 
 Financial assets designated at fair value:            
 Loans and advances   10,519        (17   (4,107   (432   5,963 
 Debt securities   70                    70 
 Reverse repurchase agreements   63,162        (688   (62,233       241 
 Other financial assets   262                    262 
 Total financial assets designated at fair value   74,013        (705   (66,340   (432   6,536 
 Derivative financial instruments   346,626    (273,602   (41,641   (8,282   (5,205   17,896 
 Loans and advances to banks   43,251        (4   (4,896   (22   38,329 
 Loans and advances to customers:            
 Home loans   144,765        (184   (143,912       669 
 Credit cards, unsecured and other retail lending   57,808        (235   (5,258   (95   52,220 
 Corporate loans   190,211    (8,622   (320   (52,029   (5,087   124,153 
 Total loans and advances to customers   392,784    (8,622   (739   (201,199   (5,182   177,042 
 Reverse repurchase agreements and other similar secured lending   13,454        (79   (13,242       133 
 Financial investments - debt securities   62,879            (533   (1,286   61,060 
 Other assets   1,205                    1,205 
 Totalon-balance sheet   1,079,796    (282,224   (43,168   (294,762   (12,127   447,515 
 Off-balance sheet:            
 Contingent Liabilities   19,908        (247   (1,403   (130   18,128 
 Documentary credits and other short-term trade-related transactions   1,005        (24   (18   (3   960 
 Forward starting reverse repurchase agreements   24            (24        
 Standby facilities, credit lines and other commitments   302,657        (321   (26,524   (1,704   274,108 
 Totaloff-balance sheet   323,594        (592   (27,969   (1,837   293,196 
                               
 Total   1,403,390    (282,224   (43,760   (322,731   (13,964   740,711 

 

  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 20152016 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  113119


Risk review

Risk performance

Credit risk

 Maximum exposure and effects of collateral and other credit enhancements (audited) 
   Maximum    Netting    

Collateral    

    Risk    Net 
   exposure    andset-off    Cash    Non-cash    transfer    exposure 
 As at 31 December 2015   £m    £m    £m    £m    £m    £m 
 On-balance sheet:                              
 Cash and balances at central banks   49,711                    49,711 
 Items in the course of collection from other banks   1,011                    1,011 
 Trading portfolio assets:            
 Debt securities   45,576                    45,576 
 Traded loans   2,474            (607   (1   1,866 
 Total trading portfolio assets   48,050            (607   (1   47,442 
 Financial assets designated at fair value:            
 Loans and advances   17,913        (21   (5,850   (515   11,527 
 Debt securities   1,383                    1,383 
 Reverse repurchase agreements   49,513        (315   (49,027       171 
 Other financial assets   375                    375 
 Total financial assets designated at fair value   69,184        (336   (54,877   (515   13,456 
 Derivative financial instruments   327,709    (259,582   (34,918   (7,484   (5,529   20,196 
 Loans and advances to banks   41,349        (4   (4,072   (64   37,209 
 Loans and advances to customers:            
 Home loans   155,863        (221   (154,355   (634   653 
 Credit cards, unsecured and other retail lending   67,840    (12   (1,076   (14,512   (1,761   50,479 
 Corporate loans   175,514    (8,399   (593   (45,788   (4,401   116,333 
 Total loans and advances to customers   399,217    (8,411   (1,890   (214,655   (6,796   167,465 
 Reverse repurchase agreements and other similar secured lending   28,187        (166   (27,619       402 
 Financial investments - debt securities   89,278            (832   (811   87,635 
 Other assets   1,410                    1,410 
 Totalon-balance sheet   1,055,106    (267,993   (37,314   (310,146   (13,716   425,937 
 Off-balance sheet:            
 Contingent liabilities   20,576        (604   (1,408   (104   18,460 
 Documentary credits and other short-term trade-related transactions   845        (33   (57   (3   752 
 Forward starting reverse repurchase agreements   93            (91       2 
 Standby facilities, credit lines and other commitments   281,369        (313   (24,156   (662   256,238 
 Totaloff-balance sheet   302,883        (950   (25,712   (769   275,452 
                               
 Total   1,357,989    (267,993   (38,264   (335,858   (14,485   701,389 

120  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2016 Annual Report on Form 20-F


        

        

        

 

 

 Maximum exposure and effects of collateral and other credit enhancements (audited)  
   Maximum      Netting     

 

Collateral       

  

   Risk      Net  
   exposure      and set-off      Cash      Non-cash      transfer      exposure  
 As at 31 December 2014   £m      £m      £m      £m      £m      £m  
 On-balance sheet:                              
 Cash and balances at central banks   39,695      –      –      –      –      39,695  
 Items in the course of collection from other banks   1,210      –      –      –      –      1,210  
 Trading portfolio assets:            
 Debt securities   65,997      –      –      –      –      65,997  
 Traded loans   2,693      –      –      –      –      2,693  
 Total trading portfolio assets   68,690      –      –      –      –      68,690  
 Financial assets designated at fair value:            
 Loans and advances   20,198      –      (48)     (6,657)     (291)     13,202  
 Debt securities   4,448      –      –      –      –      4,448  
 Reverse repurchase agreements   5,236      –      –      (4,803)     –      433  
 Other financial assets   469      –      –      –      –      469  
 Total financial assets designated at fair value   30,351      –      (48)     (11,460)     (291)     18,552  
 Derivative financial instruments   439,909      (353,631)     (44,047)     (8,231)     (6,653)     27,347  
 Loans and advances to banks   42,111      (1,012)     –      (3,858)     (176)     37,065  
 Loans and advances to customers:            
 Home loans   166,974      –      (274)     (164,389)     (815)     1,496  
 Credit cards, unsecured and other retail lending   69,022      –      (954)     (16,433)     (1,896)     49,739  
 Corporate loans   191,771      (9,162)     (620)     (40,201)     (5,122)     136,666  
 Total loans and advances to customers   427,767      (9,162)     (1,848)     (221,023)     (7,833)     187,901  
 Reverse repurchase agreements and other similar secured lending   131,753      –      –      (130,135)     –      1,618  
 Available for sale debt securities   85,539      –      –      (938)     (432)     84,169  
 Other assets   1,680      –      –      –      –      1,680  
 Total on-balance sheet   1,268,705      (363,805)     (45,943)     (375,645)     (15,385)     467,927  
 Off-balance sheet:            
 Contingent liabilities   21,263      –      (781)     (848)     (270)     19,364  
 Documentary credits and other short-term trade-related transactions   1,091      –      (6)     (8)     (3)     1,074  
 Forward starting reverse repurchase agreements   13,856      –      –      (13,841)     –      15  
 Standby facilities, credit lines and other commitments   276,315      –      (457)     (17,385)     (793)     257,680  
 Total off-balance sheet   312,525      –      (1,244)     (32,082)     (1,066)     278,133  
                               
 Total   1,581,230      (363,805)     (47,187)     (407,727)     (16,451)     746,060  

114  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F


Risk review

Risk performance

Credit risk

The Group’s approach to managingmanagement and representingrepresentation of credit quality

Asset credit quality

All loans and advances are categorised as either ‘neither past due nor impaired’, ‘past due but not impaired’, or ‘past due and impaired’, which includes restructured loans. For the purposes of the disclosures in the balance sheet credit quality section below and the analysis of loans and advances and impairment section (page 117)138):

§a loan is considered past due when the borrower has failed to make a payment when due under the terms of the loan contract

§the impairment allowance includes allowances against financial assets that have been individually impaired and those subject to collective impairment

 

§ loans neither past due nor impaired consist predominantly of wholesale and retail loans that are performing. These loans, although unimpaired may carry an unidentified impairment

 

§ loans that area loan is considered past due but not impaired consist predominantlyand classified as Higher risk when the borrower has failed to make a payment when due under the terms of wholesale loans that are past due but individually assessed as not being impaired. These loans, although individually assessed as unimpaired, may carry an unidentified impairment provisionthe loan contract

 

§ impaired loans thaton forbearance programmes, as defined on page 134, are individually assessed consist predominantly of wholesale loans that are past due and for which an individual allowance has been raisedcategorised as Higher risk

 

§ the impairment allowance includes allowances against financial assets that have been individually impaired loans that are collectively assessed consist predominantly of retail loans that are one day or more past due for which aand those subject to collective allowance is raised. Wholesale loans that are past due, individually assessed as unimpaired, but which carry an unidentified impairment provision, are excluded from this category.impairment.

Home loans, unsecured loans and credit card receivables that are subject to forbearance in the retail portfolios are included in the collectively assessed impaired loans column in the tables in the analysis of loans and advances and impairment section (page 117). Included within wholesale loans that are designated as neither past due nor impaired is a portion of loans that have been subject to forbearance or similar strategies as part of the Group’s ongoing relationship with clients. The loans will have an internal rating reflective of the level of risk to which the Group is exposed, bearing in mind the circumstances of the forbearance, the overall performance and prospects of the client. Loans on forbearance programmes will typically, but not always, attract a higher risk rating than similar loans which are not. A portion of wholesale loans under forbearance is included in the past due but not impaired column, although not all loans subject to forbearance are necessarily impaired or past due. Where wholesale loans under forbearance have been impaired, these form part of individually assessed impaired loans.

The Group uses the following internal measures to determine credit quality for loans that are performing:

 

 Default Grade  

Retail lending
Probability of
default




Wholesale lending
Probability of
default
 
 
 
   
Credit Quality
descriptionDescription
 
 
 1-30.0-0.60%  0.0-0.05%    Strong 
 4-5  0.05-0.15%   
 6-8  0.15-0.30%   
 9-11  0.30-0.60%      
 12-14  0.60-10.00%0.60-2.15%    Satisfactory 
 15-19  2.15-11.35%      
 20-2110.00%+20 - 21  11.35%+    Higher risk 

For retail clients, a range of analytical tools is used to derive the probability of default of clients at inception and on an ongoing basis.

For loans that are performing, these descriptions can be summarised as follows:

Strong:there is a very high likelihood of the asset being recovered in full.

Satisfactory:while there is a high likelihood that the asset will be recovered and therefore, of no cause for concern to the Group, the asset may not be collateralised, or may relate to retail facilities, such as credit card balances and unsecured loans, which have been classified as satisfactory, regardless of the fact that the output of internal grading models may have indicated a higherstrong or high classification. At the lower end of this grade there are customers that are being more carefully monitored, for example, corporate customers which are indicating some evidence of deterioration, mortgageshome loans with a high loan to value, and unsecured retail loans operating outside normal product guidelines.

Higher risk:there is concern over the obligor’s ability to make payments when due. However, these have not yet converted to actual delinquency. There may also be doubts over the value of collateral or security provided. However, the borrower or counterparty is continuing to make payments when due and is expected to settle all outstanding amounts of principal and interest.

Loans that are past due are monitored closely, with impairment allowances raised as appropriate and in line with the Group’s impairment policies. These loans are all considered higherHigher risk for the purpose of this analysis of credit quality.

Debt securities

For assets held at fair value, the carrying value on the balance sheet will include, among other things, the credit risk of the issuer. Most listed and some unlisted securities are rated by external rating agencies. The Group mainly uses external credit ratings provided by Standard & Poor’s, Fitch or Moody’s. Where such ratings are not available or are not current, the Group will use its own internal ratings for the securities.

Balance sheet credit quality

The following tables present the credit quality of Group assets exposed to credit risk.

Overview

As at 31 December 2015,2016, the ratio of the Group’s assets classified as strong remained broadly stable at 86% (2015: 85% (2014: 84%) of total assets exposed to credit risk.

Traded assets remained mostly investment grade with the following proportions being categorised as strong: 96% (2014: 94%) of total derivative financial instruments, 95% (2014: 91%) of debt securities held for trading and 99% (2014: 98%) of debt securities held as available for sale. The credit quality of counterparties to reverse repurchase agreements held at amortised cost, and designated at fair value categorised as strong was 83% (2014: 78%). The credit risk of these assets is significantly reduced as balances are largely collateralised.

 

  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 20152016 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  115121


Risk review

Risk performance

Credit risk

 

 

In the loan portfolios, 89% of home loans (2014: 86%) to customers are measured as strong. The majority of credit card, unsecured and other retail lending remained satisfactory, reflecting the unsecured nature of a significant proportion of the balance, comprising 76% (2014: 71%) of the total. The credit quality profile of the Group’s wholesale lending remained stable with counterparties rated strong at 72% (2014: 72%).

Further analysis of debt securities by issuer and issuer type and netting and collateral arrangements on derivative financial instruments is presented on pages 129139 and 130140 respectively.

 

Balance sheet credit quality (audited)

  

   
 
 
 

 

Strong
(including
investment
grade)

£m

  
  
  
  

  

  
 
 
Satisfactory
(BB+ to B)
£m
  
  
  
  
 
 

 

Higher risk
(B- and
below)

£m

  
  
  

  

  
 
 
 
Maximum
exposure to
credit risk
£m
  
  
  
  
  
 
 
 

 

Strong
(including
investment
grade)

%

  
  
  
  

  

  
 

 

Satisfactory
(BB+ to B)

%

  
  

  

  
 
 

 

Higher risk
(B-and
below)

%

  
  
  

  

  
 
 

 

Maximum
exposure to
credit risk

%

  
  
  

  

As at 31 December 2015

                                

Cash and balances at central banks

  49,711            49,711    100    0    0    100  

Items in the course of collection from other banks

  922    62    27    1,011    91    6    3    100  

Trading portfolio assets:

        

Debt securities

  43,118    2,217    241    45,576    95    5    0    100  

Traded loans

  329    1,880    265    2,474    13    76    11    100  

Total trading portfolio assets

  43,447    4,097    506    48,050    90    9    1    100  

Financial assets designated at fair value:

        

Loans and advances

  16,751    790    372    17,913    94    4    2    100  

Debt securities

  1,378    3    2    1,383    100    0    0    100  

Reverse repurchase agreements and other similar secured lendinga

  41,145    8,352    16    49,513    83    17    0    100  

Other financial assets

  313    62        375    83    17    0    100  

Total financial assets designated at fair value

  59,587    9,207    390    69,184    86    13    1    100  

Derivative financial instruments

  313,114    13,270    1,325    327,709    96    4    0    100  

Loans and advances to banks

  39,059    1,163    1,127    41,349    94    3    3    100  

Loans and advances to customers:

        

Home loans

  139,252    9,704    6,907    155,863    89    6    5    100  

Credit cards, unsecured and other retail lending

  12,347    51,294    4,199    67,840    18    76    6    100  

Corporate loans

  125,743    39,600    10,171    175,514    72    22    6    100  

Total loans and advances to customers

  277,342    100,598    21,277    399,217    70    25    5    100  

Reverse repurchase agreements and other similar secured lending

  23,040    5,147        28,187    82    18    0    100  

Available for sale debt securities

  88,536    632    110    89,278    99    1    0    100  

Other assets

  1,142    233    35    1,410    81    17    2    100  

Total assets

  895,900    134,409    24,797    1,055,106    85    13    2    100  

 

As at 31 December 2014

          ��                     

Cash and balances at central banks

  39,695            39,695    100    0    0    100  

Items in the course of collection from other banks

  1,134    47    29    1,210    94    4    2    100  

Trading portfolio assets:

        

Debt securities

  60,290    5,202    505    65,997    91    8    1    100  

Traded loans

  446    1,935    312    2,693    16    72    12    100  

Total trading portfolio assets

  60,736    7,137    817    68,690    89    10    1    100  

Financial assets designated at fair value:

        

Loans and advances

  18,544    844    810    20,198    92    4    4    100  

Debt securities

  4,316    130    2    4,448    97    3    0    100  

Reverse repurchase agreements and other similar secured lending

  4,876    346    14    5,236    93    7    0    100  

Other financial assets

  269    168    32    469    57    36    7    100  

Total financial assets designated at fair value

  28,005    1,488    858    30,351    92    5    3    100  

Derivative financial instruments

  414,980    24,387    542    439,909    94    6    0    100  

Loans and advances to banks

  39,453    1,651    1,007    42,111    94    4    2    100  

Loans and advances to customers:

        

Home loans

  143,700    13,900    9,374    166,974    86    8    6    100  

Credit cards, unsecured and other retail lending

  15,369    49,255    4,398    69,022    23    71    6    100  

Corporate loans

  137,102    42,483    12,186    191,771    72    22    6    100  

Total loans and advances to customers

  296,171    105,638    25,958    427,767    69    25    6    100  

Reverse repurchase agreements and other similar secured lending

  102,609    29,142    2    131,753    78    22    0    100  

Available for sale debt securities

  84,405    498    636    85,539    98    1    1    100  

Other assets

  1,336    282    62    1,680    79    17    4    100  

Total assets

  1,068,524    170,270    29,911    1,268,705    84    13    3    100  

Note

aDuring 2015, new reverse repurchase agreements and other similar secured lending in certain businesses have been designated at fair value to better align to the way the business manages the portfolio’s risk and performance.

Balance sheet credit quality (audited)

 

As at 31 December 2016

  



Strong
(including
investment
grade)

£m

 
 
 
 

 

  

Satisfactory
(BB+ to B)

£m

 
 

 

  


Higher risk
(B- and
below)

£m

 
 
 

 

  


Maximum
exposure to
credit risk
£m
 
 
 
 
  



Strong
(including
investment
grade)

%

 
 
 
 

 

  

Satisfactory
(BB+ to B)

%

 
 

 

  


Higher risk
(B- and
below)

%

 
 
 

 

  


Maximum
exposure to
credit risk

%

 
 
 

 

Cash and balances at central banks

  102,353         102,353   100         100 

Items in the course of collection from other banks

  1,328   130   9   1,467   91   9      100 

Trading portfolio assets:

        

Debt securities

  37,037   1,344   408   38,789   96   3   1   100 

Traded loans

  594   1,977   404   2,975   20   66   14   100 

Total trading portfolio assets

  37,631   3,321   812   41,764   90   8   2   100 

Financial assets designated at fair value:

        

Loans and advances

  9,692   533   294   10,519   92   5   3   100 

Debt securities

  59   11      70   84   16      100 

Reverse repurchase agreements

  53,151   9,999   12   63,162   84   16      100 

Other financial assets

  244   18      262   93   7      100 

Total financial assets designated at fair value

  63,146   10,561   306   74,013   85   14   1   100 

Derivative financial instruments

  330,737   14,963   926   346,626   95   5      100 

Loans and advances to banks

  39,159   3,830   262   43,251   91   9      100 

Loans and advances to customers:

        

Home loans

  136,922   2,589   5,254   144,765   95   1   4   100 

Credit cards, unsecured and other retail lending

  5,343   50,685   1,780   57,808   9   88   3   100 

Corporate loans

  140,414   37,170   12,627   190,211   74   19   7   100 

Total loans and advances to customers

  282,679   90,444   19,661   392,784   72   23   5   100 

Reverse repurchase agreements and other similar secured lending

  9,364   4,090      13,454   70   30      100 

Financial investments – debt securities

  62,842   30   7   62,879   100         100 

Other assets

  1,085   117   3   1,205   90   10      100 

Total assets

  930,324   127,486   21,986   1,079,796   86   12   2   100 
        

Balance sheet credit quality (audited)

 

As at 31 December 2015

  



Strong
(including
investment
grade)

£m

 
 
 
 

 

  

Satisfactory
(BB+ to B)

£m

 
 

 

  

Higher risk
(B- and below)

£m

 
 

 

  


Maximum
exposure to
credit risk

£m

 
 
 

 

  



Strong
(including
investment
grade)

%

 
 
 
 

 

  

Satisfactory
(BB+ to B)

%

 
 

 

  


Higher risk
(B- and
below)

%

 
 
 

 

  


Maximum
exposure to
credit risk

%

 
 
 

 

Cash and balances at central banks

  49,711         49,711   100         100 

Items in the course of collection from other banks

  922   62   27   1,011   91   6   3   100 

Trading portfolio assets:

        

Debt securities

  43,118   2,217   241   45,576   95   5      100 

Traded loans

  329   1,880   265   2,474   13   76   11   100 

Total trading portfolio assets

  43,447   4,097   506   48,050   90   9   1   100 

Financial assets designated at fair value:

        

Loans and advances

  16,751   790   372   17,913   94   4   2   100 

Debt securities

  1,378   3   2   1,383   100         100 

Reverse repurchase agreements

  41,145   8,352   16   49,513   83   17      100 

Other financial assets

  313   62      375   83   17      100 

Total financial assets designated at fair value

  59,587   9,207   390   69,184   86   13   1   100 

Derivative financial instruments

  313,114   13,270   1,325   327,709   96   4      100 

Loans and advances to banks

  39,059   1,163   1,127   41,349   94   3   3   100 

Loans and advances to customers:

        

Home loans

  139,252   9,704   6,907   155,863   89   6   5   100 

Credit cards, unsecured and other retail lending

  12,347   51,294   4,199   67,840   18   76   6   100 

Corporate loans

  125,743   39,600   10,171   175,514   72   22   6   100 

Total loans and advances to customers

  277,342   100,598   21,277   399,217   70   25   5   100 

Reverse repurchase agreements and other similar secured lending

  23,040   5,147      28,187   82   18      100 

Financial investments – debt securities

  88,536   632   110   89,278   99   1      100 

Other assets

  1,142   233   35   1,410   81   17   2   100 

Total assets

  895,900   134,409   24,797   1,055,106   85   13   2   100 

 

116122  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 20152016 Annual Report on Form 20-F  


Risk review

Risk performance

Credit risk

As the principal source of credit risk to the Group, loans and advances to customers and banks is analysed in detail below:

Loans and advances to customers and banks

Analysis of loans and advances and impairment to customers and banks  
    

 

 

Gross

L&A

£m

  

  

  

   
 
 
Impairment
allowance
£m
  
  
  
   
 
 
L&A net of
impairment
£m
  
  
  
   
 

 

Credit risk
loans

£m

  
  

  

   
 

 

CRLs % of
gross L&A

%

  
  

  

   
 
 
 
Loan
impairment
chargesa
£m
  
  
  
  
   
 

 

Loan loss
rates

bps

  
  

  

As at 31 December 2015              
Personal & Corporate Banking   137,212     713     136,499     1,591     1.2     199     15  
Africa Banking   17,412     539     16,873     859     4.9     273     157  
Barclaycard   43,346     1,835     41,511     1,601     3.7     1,251     289  
Barclays Core   197,970     3,087     194,883     4,051     2.0     1,723     87  
Barclays Non-Core   11,610     369     11,241     845     7.3     85     73  
Total Group Retail   209,580     3,456     206,124     4,896     2.3     1,808     86  
Investment Bank   92,321     83     92,238     241     0.3     47     5  
Personal & Corporate Banking   87,855     914     86,941     1,794     2.0     182     21  
Africa Banking   14,955     235     14,720     541     3.6     80     53  
Head Office and Other Operations   5,922          5,922                      
Barclays Core   201,053     1,232     199,821     2,576     1.3     309     15  
Barclays Non-Core   34,854     233     34,621     345     1.0     (20   (6
Total Group Wholesale   235,907     1,465     234,442     2,921     1.2     289     12  
Group Total   445,487     4,921     440,566     7,817     1.8     2,097     47  
Traded loans   2,474     n/a     2,474          
Loans and advances designated at fair value   17,913     n/a     17,913          
Loans and advances held at fair value   20,387     n/a     20,387          
Total loans and advances   465,874     4,921     460,953          
As at 31 December 2014              
Personal & Corporate Bankingb,c   136,544     766     135,778     1,733     1.3     215     16  
Africa Banking   21,334     681     20,653     1,093     5.1     295     138  
Barclaycard   38,376     1,815     36,561     1,765     4.6     1,183     308  
Barclays Core   196,254     3,262     192,992     4,591     2.3     1,693     86  
Barclays Non-Core   20,259     428     19,831     1,209     6.0     151     75  
Total Group Retail   216,513     3,690     212,823     5,800     2.7     1,844     85  
Investment Bank   106,377     44     106,333     71     0.1     (14)     (1)  
Personal & Corporate Bankingb   88,192     873     87,319     2,112     2.4     267     30  
Africa Banking   16,312     246     16,066     665     4.1     54     33  
Head Office and Other Operations   3,240          3,240                      
Barclays Core   214,121     1,163     212,958     2,848     1.3     307     14  
Barclays Non-Core   44,699     602     44,097     841     1.9     53     12  
Total Group Wholesale   258,820     1,765     257,055     3,689     1.4     360     14  
Group Total   475,333     5,455     469,878     9,489     2.0     2,204     46  
Traded loans   2,693     n/a     2,693          
Loans and advances designated at fair value   20,198     n/a     20,198          
Loans and advances held at fair value   22,891     n/a     22,891          
Total loans and advances   498,224     5,455     492,769          

Loans and advances at amortised cost net of impairment decreased to £440.6bn (2014: £469.9bn):

§Non-Core decreased £18.1bn to £45.9bn driven by reclassification of Portuguese and Italian loans now held for sale and a reduction in Europe Retail driven by a run-off of assets

§Investment Bank decreased by £14.1bn to £92.2bn reflecting a decrease in cash collateral balances and a decrease in settlement balances as a result of reduced trading volumes

§Barclaycard increased by £5.0bn to £41.5bn as a result of business growth across the portfolio.

CRLs decreased £1.7bn to £7.8bn primarily due to a reduction of £0.9bn in Non-Core relating to the reclassification of the Portuguese business as held for sale and improved economic conditions for Corporate portfolios.

Loan impairment charges improved 5% to £2,097m, with a loan loss rate of 47bps (2014: 46bps). This reflected higher recoveries in Europe and the sale of the Spanish business in Non-Core, lower impairments in PCB due to the benign economic environment in the UK resulting in lower default rates and charges, partially offset by increased impairment in Barclaycard driven by growth in the business and updates to impairment model methodologies. Loan loss rates for Africa Banking increased reflecting lower year-end loans and advances balances due to Rand depreciation.

Notes

aExcluding impairment charges on available for sale investments and reverse repurchase agreements.
bUK Business Banking has been reclassified from Retail to Wholesale in line with how the business is now managed. 2014 figures have been revised to reflect this, with net loans and advances of £8.4bn, credit risk loans of £482m and impairment charges of £48m reclassified to Wholesale.
c2014 PCB Credit Risk Loans have been revised by £151m to align the methodology for determining arrears categories with other Home Finance risk disclosures.

Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  117


        

        

 

 

Analysis of gross loans and advances by product  
    
 
Home Loans
£m
  
  
   
 
 

 

 

Credit cards,
unsecured
and other

retail lending

£m

  
  
  

  

  

   

 

 

Corporate

Loans

£m

  

  

  

   
 

 

Group
Total

£m

  
  

  

As at 31 December 2015        
Personal & Corporate Banking   135,380     21,026     68,661     225,067  
Africa Banking   10,368     7,633     14,366     32,367  
Barclaycard        41,559     1,787     43,346  
Investment Bank             92,321     92,321  
Head Office and Other Operations             5,922     5,922  
Total Core   145,748     70,218     183,057     399,023  
Barclays Non-Core   10,633     1,016     34,815     46,464  
Group Total   156,381     71,234     217,872     445,487  
As at 31 December 2014        
Personal & Corporate Banking   136,022     23,837     64,877     224,736  
Africa Banking   12,959     8,375     16,312     37,646  
Barclaycard        38,376          38,376  
Investment Bank             106,377     106,377  
Head Office and Other Operations             3,240     3,240  
Total Core   148,981     70,588     190,806     410,375  
Barclays Non-Core   18,540     1,779     44,639     64,958  
Group Total   167,521     72,367     235,445     475,333  

Analysis of the concentration of credit risk

A concentration of credit risk exists when a number of counterparties are located in a geographical region or are engaged in similar activities and have similar economic characteristics that would cause their ability to meet contractual obligations to be similarly affected by changes in economic or other conditions. The Group implements limits on concentrations in order to mitigate the risk. The analyses of credit risk concentrations presented below are based on the location of the counterparty or customer or the industry in which they are engaged. Further detail on the Group’s policies with regard to managing concentration risk is presented on page 126 of the Barclays PLC 2015 Pillar 3 Report.370.

Geographic concentrations

As at 31 December 2015,2016, the geographic concentration of the Group’s assets remained broadly consistent with 2014. 40% (2014: 38%) of the exposure2015. Exposure is concentrated in the UK 31% (2014: 31%41% (2015: 40%), in the Americas 33% (2015: 31%) and Europe 21% (2015: 20% (2014: 22%). The decrease of £58bn in Europe.Africa and the Middle East is due to the reclassification of BAGL balances now held for sale.

Information on exposures to selected Eurozone countries is presented on page 119.124.

 

Credit risk concentrations by geography (audited)  
As at 31 December 2015   
 
 
United
Kingdom
£m
  
  
  
   

 

Europe

£m

  

  

   
 
Americas
£m
  
  
   
 
 
Africa and
Middle East
£m
  
  
  
   

 

Asia

£m

  

  

   

 

Total

£m

  

  

On-balance sheet:            
Cash and balances at central banks   14,061     19,094     13,288     2,055     1,213     49,711  
Items in the course of collection from other banks   543     72          396          1,011  
Trading portfolio assets   7,150     10,012     23,641     2,111     5,136     48,050  
Financial assets designated at fair value   22,991     5,562     35,910     3,039     1,682     69,184  
Derivative financial instruments   99,658     103,498     101,592     3,054     19,907     327,709  
Loans and advances to banks   10,733     9,918     13,078     2,900     4,720     41,349  
Loans and advances to customers   239,086     47,372     69,803     33,461     9,495     399,217  
Reverse repurchase agreements and other similar secured lendinga   5,905     4,361     15,684     915     1,322     28,187  
Available for sale debt securities   20,509     40,344     20,520     3,999     3,906     89,278  
Other assets   868     4     131     314     93     1,410  
Total on-balance sheet   421,504     240,237     293,647     52,244     47,474     1,055,106  
Off-balance sheet:            
Contingent liabilities   9,543     3,020     5,047     2,505     461     20,576  
Documentary credits and other short-term trade-related transactions   594     58          193          845  
Forward starting reverse repurchase agreementsb   9     5     65          14     93  
Standby facilities, credit lines and other commitments   104,797     34,370     125,456     13,600     3,146     281,369  
Total off-balance sheet   114,943     37,453     130,568     16,298     3,621     302,883  
Total   536,447     277,690     424,215     68,542     51,095     1,357,989  

Note

aDuring 2015, new reverse repurchase agreements and other similar secured lending in certain businesses have been designated at fair value to better align to the way the business manages the portfolio’s risk and performance.
bForward starting reverse repurchase agreements were previously disclosed as loan commitments. Following the business designation of reverse repurchase and repurchase agreements at fair value through profit and loss, new forward starting reverse repurchase agreements are within the scope of IAS 39 and are recognised as derivatives on the balance sheet.

Credit risk concentrations by geography (audited)

 

As at 31 December 2016

   

United
Kingdom

£m

 
 

 

   

Europe

£m

 

 

   

Americas

£m

 

 

   

Africa and
Middle East
£m
 
 
 
   

Asia

£m

 

 

   

Total

£m

 

 

On-balance sheet:

            

Cash and balances at central banks

   30,485    40,439    24,859    77    6,493    102,353 

Items in the course of collection from other banks

   969    498                1,467 

Trading portfolio assets

   8,981    9,171    19,848    435    3,329    41,764 

Financial assets designated at fair value

   25,821    10,244    33,181    733    4,034    74,013 

Derivative financial instruments

   108,559    107,337    105,129    1,493    24,108    346,626 

Loans and advances to banks

   7,458    12,674    16,894    1,778    4,447    43,251 

Loans and advances to customers

   253,752    47,050    81,045    3,089    7,848    392,784 

Reverse repurchase agreements and other similar secured lending

   218    309    11,439    92    1,396    13,454 

Financial Investments - debt securities

   18,126    27,763    12,030    251    4,709    62,879 

Other assets

   987        137    10    71    1,205 

Totalon-balance sheet

   455,356   ��255,485    304,562    7,958    56,435    1,079,796 

Off-balance sheet:

            

Contingent liabilities

   8,268    3,275    6,910    702    753    19,908 

Documentary credits and other short-term trade related transactions

   915    9        40    41    1,005 

Forward starting reverse repurchase agreements

   14    1    5    2    2    24 

Standby facilities, credit lines and other commitments

   106,413    35,475    156,072    1,692    3,005    302,657 

Totaloff-balance sheet

   115,610    38,760    162,987    2,436    3,801    323,594 

Total

   570,966    294,245    467,549    10,394    60,236    1,403,390 
            

Credit risk concentrations by geography (audited)

 

As at 31 December 2015

   

United
Kingdom

£m

 
 

 

   

Europe

£m

 

 

   
Americas
£m
 
 
   

Africa and
Middle East

£m

 
 

 

   

Asia

£m

 

 

   

Total

£m

 

 

On-balance sheet:

            

Cash and balances at central banks

   14,061    19,094    13,288    2,055    1,213    49,711 

Items in the course of collection from other banks

   543    72        396        1,011 

Trading portfolio assets

   7,150    10,012    23,641    2,111    5,136    48,050 

Financial assets designated at fair value

   22,991    5,562    35,910    3,039    1,682    69,184 

Derivative financial instruments

   99,658    103,498    101,592    3,054    19,907    327,709 

Loans and advances to banks

   10,733    9,918    13,078    2,900    4,720    41,349 

Loans and advances to customers

   239,086    47,372    69,803    33,461    9,495    399,217 

Reverse repurchase agreements and other similar secured lending

   5,905    4,361    15,684    915    1,322    28,187 

Financial investments - debt securities

   20,509    40,344    20,520    3,999    3,906    89,278 

Other assets

   868    4    131    314    93    1,410 

Totalon-balance sheet

   421,504    240,237    293,647    52,244    47,474    1,055,106 

Off-balance sheet:

            

Contingent liabilities

   9,543    3,020    5,047    2,505    461    20,576 

Documentary credits and other short-term trade related transactions

   594    58        193        845 

Forward starting reverse repurchase agreements

   9    5    65        14    93 

Standby facilities, credit lines and other commitments

   104,797    34,370    125,456    13,600    3,146    281,369 

Totaloff-balance sheet

   114,943    37,453    130,568    16,298    3,621    302,883 

Total

   536,447    277,690    424,215    68,542    51,095    1,357,989 

 

118  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 20152016 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  123


Risk review

Risk performance

Credit risk

 

 

Credit risk concentrations by geography (audited)  
As at 31 December 2014   
 
 
United
Kingdom
£m
  
  
  
   

 

Europe

£m

  

  

   
 
Americas
£m
  
  
   
 
 
Africa and
Middle East
£m
  
  
  
   

 

Asia

£m

  

  

   

 

Total

£m

  

  

On-balance sheet:            
Cash and balances at central banks   13,770     12,224     9,365     2,161     2,175     39,695  
Items in the course of collection from other banks   644     158          408          1,210  
Trading portfolio assets   12,921     15,638     31,061     2,498     6,572     68,690  
Financial assets designated at fair value   21,274     1,591     3,986     2,999     501     30,351  
Derivative financial instruments   133,400     147,421     129,771     2,332     26,985     439,909  
Loans and advances to banks   7,472     12,793     13,227     3,250     5,369     42,111  
Loans and advances to customers   241,543     60,018     76,561     39,241     10,404     427,767  
Reverse repurchase agreements and other similar secured lending   20,551     22,655     81,368     928     6,251     131,753  
Available for sale debt securities   22,888     33,368     22,846     4,770     1,667     85,539  
Other assets   837          232     483     128     1,680  
Total on-balance sheet   475,300     305,866     368,417     59,070     60,052     1,268,705  
Off-balance sheet:            
Acceptances, endorsements and other contingent liabilities            
Contingent liabilities   10,222     2,542     5,517     2,757     225     21,263  
Documentary credits and other short-term trade-related transactions   851     36          186     18     1,091  
Forward starting reverse repurchase agreements   4,462     5,936     701     2     2,755     13,856  
Standby facilities, credit lines and other commitments   108,025     34,886     116,343     14,911     2,150     276,315  
Total off-balance sheet   123,560     43,400     122,561     17,856     5,148     312,525  
Total   598,860     349,266     490,978     76,926     65,200     1,581,230  

Group exposuresExposures to specificEurozone countries (audited)

The following table shows Barclays most significant current exposure (above £4bn neton-balance sheet exposure) to Eurozone countries.

Basis of preparation

The Group recognisespresents the direct balance sheet exposure to credit and market risk resulting from the ongoing volatility in the Eurozone and continues to monitor events closely while taking coordinated steps to mitigate the risks associatedby country, with the challenging economic environment. These contingency plans have been reviewedtotals reflecting allowance for impairment, netting and refreshed to ensure they remain effective.

The following table shows Barclays’ exposure to specific Eurozone countries monitored internally as being higher risk and thus being the subject of particular management focus. The basis of preparation is consistent with that described in the 2014 Form 20-F.cash collateral held where appropriate.

The net on-balance sheet exposure providesincludes:

§Loans and advances held at amortised cost, net of impairment. Settlement balances and cash collateral are excluded from this analysis

§Trading assets and liabilities are presented by issuer type on a net basis. Where liability positions exceed asset positions by issuer type, exposures are presented as nil

§Derivative assets and liabilities are presented by counterparty type on a net basis. Cash collateral held is then added to give a net credit exposure. Where liability positions and collateral held exceed asset positions by counterparty type, exposures are presented as nil

§Financial investments – debt securities principally relating to investments in government bonds and other debt securities

§Other assets held for sale. Businesses held for sale with European exposures are included within the Financial institutions category

The analysis excludes financial assets not subject to credit risk

§Equity securities held for trading, as financial investments or designated at fair value, and traded commodities

§Reverse repurchase agreements measured at amortised cost and at fair value which are materially fully collateralised

Gross exposure reflects total exposures before the most appropriate measureeffects of economic hedging by way of trading portfolio liabilities, derivative liabilities and cash collateral, but after taking into account impairment allowances and IFRS netting.

The Italian home loans of £9.7bn (2015: £9.5bn) are secured on residential property with average balance weighted marked to market LTVs of 61.8% (2015: 60.6%) and CRL coverage of 36% (2015: 31%). 90 days arrear and grosscharge-off rates remained stable at 1.2% (2015: 1.2%) and 0.8% (2015: 0.7%) respectively.

Net exposure by country and counterparty

 

    

Sovereign

£m

 

 

   

Financial
institutions

£m

 
 

 

   

Corporate

£m

 

 

   

Home loans

£m

 

 

   

Other retail
lending

£m

 
 

 

   



Net
on-balance
sheet
exposure

£m

 
 
 
 

 

   



Gross
on-balance
sheet
exposure

£m

 
 
 
 

 

   

Contingent
liabilities and

commitments

£m

 
 

 

 

As at 31 December 2016

                

Italy

   2,668    299    763    9,741    331    13,802    18,580    2,835 

Germany

   5,250    3,399    1,379    8    2,967    13,003    47,964    13,362 

France

   3,708    6,886    1,160    736    139    12,629    41,056    6,565 

Ireland

   6    2,230    1,855    30    9    4,130    6,474    2,735 

Total

   11,632    12,814    5,157    10,515    3,446    43,564    114,074    25,497 

As at 31 December 2015

                

Italy

   1,708    2,283    1,039    9,505    675    15,210    20,586    2,701 

Germany

   7,494    3,621    1,602    9    2,313    15,039    50,930    8,029 

France

   7,426    4,967    805    1,472    152    14,822    43,427    7,436 

Ireland

   9    2,824    1,282    37    51    4,203    7,454    2,673 

Total

   16,637    13,695    4,728    11,023    3,191    49,274    122,397    20,839 

124  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2016 Annual Report on Form 20-F


Industry concentrations

The concentration of the credit risk to which the Group is exposed. The gross exposure is also presented below, alongside off-balance sheet contingent liabilities and commitments.

During 2015, the Group’s net on-balance sheet exposures to Spain, Italy, Portugal, Ireland, Cyprus and Greece decreasedassets by £17.2bn to £26.1bn primarily due to a £13.4bn reduction in Spain following the sale of the Spanish business. The £7.0bn decrease in residential mortgages relates predominantly to Portuguese and Italian loans reclassified to held for sale within the Financial institutions category.

industry remained broadly consistent year on year. As at 31 December 2015,2016, total assets concentrated towards banks and other financial institutions was 43% (2015: 42%), predominantly within derivative financial instruments. The proportion of the local net funding deficit in Italy was3.8bn (2014:9.9bn)overall balance concentrated towards governments and the deficit in Portugal was1.4bn (2014:1.9bn)central banks remained stable at 14% (2015: 12%) and home loans at 11% (2015: 12%). The net funding surplus in Spain was0.2bn (2014:4.3bn).

 

Net exposure by country and counterparty (audited)  
    
 
Sovereign
£m
  
  
   
 
 
Financial
institutions
£m
  
  
  
   
 
Corporate
£m
  
  
   
 
 
Residential
mortgages
£m
  
  
  
   
 

 

Other retail
lending

£m

  
  

  

   

 
 
 
 

Net

on-balance
sheet
exposure
£m

  

  
  
  
  

   
 
 
 
 
Gross
on-balance
sheet
exposure
£m
  
  
  
  
  
   
 
 
 
Contingent
liabilities and
commitments
£m
  
  
  
  
As at 31 December 2015                
Spain   90     623     1,176     7     311     2,207     7,944     2,073  
Italy   1,708     2,283     1,039     9,505     675     15,210     20,586     2,701  
Portugal   87     3,346     152     6     700     4,291     4,555     1,299  
Ireland   9     2,824     1,282     37     51     4,203     7,454     2,673  
Cyprus   29     6     59     16     46     156     391     1  
Greece   1     3     14     4     3     25     975       
Total   1,924     9,085     3,722     9,575     1,786     26,092     41,905     8,747  
As at 31 December 2014                
Spain   108     14,043     1,149     12     248     15,560     24,873     2,863  
Italy   1,716     485     1,128     13,530     1,114     17,973     25,967     3,033  
Portugal   105     7     531     2,995     1,207     4,845     5,050     1,631  
Ireland   37     3,175     1,453     43     50     4,758     9,445     2,070  
Cyprus   28     12     61     6     16     123     707     26  
Greece   1     11     15               27     1,279       
Total   1,995     17,733     4,337     16,586     2,635     43,286     67,321     9,623  

Credit risk concentrations by industry (audited)

 

As at 31 December 2016

  

Banks

£m

 

 

  



Other
financial
insti-
tutions

£m

 
 

 

 

  

Manu-
facturing

£m


 

 

  



Const-
ruction
and
property

£m


 
 
 

 

  



Govern-
ment and
central
bank

£m


 
 
 

 

  


Energy
and
water

£m

 
 
 

 

  




Wholesale
and retail
distribu-
tion and
leisure

£m

 
 

 
 

 

  


Business
and other
services
£m
 
 
 
 
  

Home
loans

£m

 
 

 

  





Cards,
unsecured
loans and
other
personal
lending

£m

 
 
 
 
 
 

 

  

Other

£m

 

 

  

Total

£m

 

 

On-balance sheet:

            

Cash and balances at central banks

              102,353                     102,353 

Items in the course of collection from other banks

  1,467                                 1,467 

Trading portfolio assets

  2,231   7,998   1,625   565   21,047   3,733   324   2,972   257      1,012   41,764 

Financial assets designated at fair value

  14,714   49,783   3   5,699   856   5   33   2,811   33   2   74   74,013 

Derivative financial instruments

  182,664   139,066   2,913   3,488   6,547   4,585   810   3,392         3,161   346,626 

Loans and advances to banks

  38,932            4,319                     43,251 

Loans and advances to customers

     91,812   12,337   24,200   12,028   7,384   12,967   21,838   144,765   56,730   8,723   392,784 

Reverse repurchase agreements and other similar secured lending

  2,596   10,568      38   252                     13,454 

Financial investments - debt securities

  12,842   4,877         44,263      43   807         47   62,879 

Other assets

  975   205         25                     1,205 

Totalon-balance sheet

  256,421   304,309   16,878   33,990   191,690   15,707   14,177   31,820   145,055   56,732   13,017   1,079,796 

Off-balance sheet:

            

Contingent liabilities

  1,484   4,232   3,387   707   8   2,649   1,032   4,847   40   531   991   19,908 

Documentary credits and other short-term trade related transactions

  433      377            157   38            1,005 

Forward starting reverse repurchase agreements

  5   19                              24 

Standby facilities, credit lines and other commitments

  1,016   29,310   38,829   11,876   400   29,699   14,741   26,359   9,610   126,708   14,109   302,657 

Totaloff-balance sheet

  2,938   33,561   42,593   12,583   408   32,348   15,930   31,244   9,650   127,239   15,100   323,594 

Total

  259,359   337,870   59,471   46,573   192,098   48,055   30,107   63,064   154,705   183,971   28,117   1,403,390 

Other country risks being closely monitored include exposures to Russiathe oil and China.

gas sector. Neton-balance sheet exposure to Russiathe oil and gas sector was £4.2bn (2015: £4.4bn), with contingent liabilities and commitments to this sector of £1.4bn (2014: £1.9bn) largely consists of retail loans and advances of £1.0bn (2014: £0.6bn)£16.0bn (2015: £13.8bn). Impairment charges were £94m (2015: £106m). The retail loans and advances are predominantly secured against property inratio of the UK and southGroup’s net total exposures classified as strong or satisfactory was 93% (2015: 97%) of France. Grossthe total net exposure to Russia was £2.5bn (2014: £3.8bn) including derivative assets with financial institutions. The gross exposure is mitigated by offsetting derivative liabilities.credit risk to this sector.

 

  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 20152016 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  119


Net exposure to China of £3.7bn (2014: £4.8bn) largely consists of loans and advances (mainly cash collateral and settlement balances) to sovereign of £1.4bn (2014: £1.7bn) and financial institutions of £1.1bn (2014: £1.4bn). The gross exposure to China excluding offsetting derivative liabilities was £3.9bn (2014: £5.0bn).

Industrial concentrations (audited)

As at 31 December 2015, the industrial concentration of the Group’s assets remained broadly consistent year on year. 42% (2014: 49%) of total assets were concentrated towards banks and other financial institutions, predominantly within derivative financial instruments which decreased during the year. The proportion of the overall balance concentrated towards governments and central banks remained stable at 12% (2014: 11%) and home loans at 12% (2014: 12%).

Credit risk concentrations by industry (audited)  
As at 31 December 2015  

 

Banks

£m

  

  

  
 
 
 
 
Other
financial
insti-
tutions
£m
  
  
  
  
  
  
 
 
Manu-
facturing
£m
  
  
  
  
 
 
 
 
Const-
ruction
and
property
£m
 
  
  
  
  
  
 
 
 

 

Govern-
ment and
central
bank

£m

  
  
  
  

  

  
 

 

 

Energy
and

water

£m

  
  

  

  

  
 
 
 
 

 

Wholesale
and retail
distribu-
tion and
leisure

£m

  
  
  
  
  

  

  
 
 
 
Business
and other
services
£m
  
  
  
  
  
 

 

Home
loans

£m

  
  

  

  
 
 
 
 
 

 

Cards,
unsecured
loans and
other
personal
lending

£m

  
  
  
  
  
  

  

  

 

Other

£m

  

  

  

 

Total

£m

  

  

On-balance sheet:            
Cash and balances at central banks                  49,711                            49,711  
Items in the course of collection from other banks  1,011                                            1,011  
Trading portfolio assets  1,897    11,826    970    538    25,797    2,554    315    2,727    550        876    48,050  
Financial assets designated at fair value  14,015    35,109    104    8,642    7,380    33    191    3,402    229        79    69,184  
Derivative financial instruments  185,782    114,727    2,701    2,940    6,113    4,538    1,063    5,346            4,499    327,709  
Loans and advances to banks  36,829                4,520                            41,349  
Loans and advances to customers      80,729    12,297    23,519    5,940    7,743    13,830    25,728    155,863    60,162    13,406    399,217  
Reverse repurchase agreements and other similar secured lendinga  8,676    18,022        1,011    305        35    138                28,187  
Available for sale debt securities  9,745    6,114    68    43    67,645    182    107    5,134            240    89,278  
Other assets  312    1,077            20                        1    1,410  
Total on-balance sheet  258,267    267,604    16,140    36,693    167,431    15,050    15,541    42,475    156,642    60,162    19,101    1,055,106  
Off-balance sheet:            
Contingent liabilities  1,152    4,698    3,142    958    9    3,073    1,301    4,645    100    548    950    20,576  
Documentary credits and other short-term trade-related transactions  378    17    142    1        3    129    50   ��    123    2    845  
Forward starting reverse repurchase agreementsb  78    15                                        93  
Standby facilities, credit lines and other commitments  946    31,152    35,865    11,337    871    26,217    15,054    23,180    11,708    111,988    13,051    281,369  
Total off-balance sheet  2,554    35,882    39,149    12,296    880    29,293    16,484    27,875    11,808    112,659    14,003    302,883  
Total  260,821    303,486    55,289    48,989    168,311    44,343    32,025    70,350    168,450    172,821    33,104    1,357,989  

Net on-balance sheet exposure to the Oil and Gas sector was £4.4bn (2014: £5.8bn), with contingent liabilities and commitments to this sector of £13.8bn (2014: £12.5bn). Impairment charges were £106m (2014: £1m). The ratio of the Group’s total net exposures classified as strong or satisfactory was 97% (2014: 99%) of the total net exposure to credit risk in this sector.

If average oil prices remained at $30 per barrel throughout 2016, estimated additional impairment of approximately £250m would result. If average oil prices were to reduce to $25 per barrel throughout 2016, estimated additional impairment of approximately £450m would result.

Note

aDuring 2015, new reverse repurchase agreements and other similar secured lending in certain businesses have been designated at fair value to better align to the way the business manages the portfolio’s risk and performance.
bForward starting reverse repurchase agreements were previously disclosed as loan commitments. Following the business designation of reverse repurchase and repurchase agreements at fair value through profit and loss, new forward starting reverse repurchase agreements are within the scope of IAS 39 and recognised as derivatives on the balance sheet.

120  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F125


Risk review

Risk performance

Credit risk

 

 

Credit risk concentrations by industry (audited)Credit risk concentrations by industry (audited)                    

Credit risk concentrations by industry (audited)

  

                  
As at 31 December 2014  

 

Banks

£m

  

  

  
 
 
 
 
Other
financial
insti-
tutions
£m
  
  
  
  
  
  
 
 
Manu-
facturing
£m
  
  
  
  
 
 
 
 
Const-
ruction
and
property
£m
 
  
  
  
  
  
 
 
 

 

Govern-
ment and
central
bank

£m

  
  
  
  

  

  
 

 

 

Energy
and

water

£m

  
  

  

  

  
 
 
 
 

 

Wholesale
and retail
distribu-
tion and
leisure

£m

  
  
  
  
  

  

  
 
 
 
 
Business
and
other
services
£m
  
  
  
  
  
  
 

 

Home
loans

£m

  
  

  

  
 
 
 
 
 

 

Cards,
unsecured
loans and
other
personal
lending

£m

  
  
  
  
  
  

  

  

 

Other

£m

  

  

  

 

Total

£m

  

  

As at 31 December 2015

  

 

Banks

£m

  

  

  
 
 
 

 

Other
financial
insti-
tutions

£m

  
  
 
  

  

  
 

 

Manu-
facturing

£m

 
  

  

  
 
 
 

 

Const-
ruction
and
property

£m

  
  
  
  

  

  
 
 
 

 

Govern-
ment and
central
bank

£m

 
  
  
  

  

  
 
 

 

Energy
and
water

£m

  
  
  

  

  
 
 
 
 

 

Wholesale
and retail
distribu-
tion and
leisure

£m

  
  
 
  
  

  

  
 
 

 

Business
and other
services

£m

  
  
  

  

  
 

 

Home
loans

£m

  
  

  

  
 
 
 
 
 

 

Cards,
unsecured
loans and
other
personal
lending

£m

  
  
  
  
  
  

  

  

 

Other

£m

  

  

  

 

Total

£m

  

  

On-balance sheet:                        
Cash and balances at central banks                  39,695                            39,695                    49,711                            49,711  
Items in the course of collection from other banks  1,210                                            1,210    1,011                                            1,011  
Trading portfolio assets  2,894    17,718    1,466    593    39,201    2,745    385    2,751            937    68,690    1,897    11,826    970    538    25,797    2,554    315    2,727    550        876    48,050  
Financial assets designated at fair value  5,113    1,548    70    9,358    10,378    73    207    3,127    393        84    30,351    14,015    35,109    104    8,642    7,380    33    191    3,402    229        79    69,184  
Derivative financial instruments  257,463    149,050    2,519    3,454    7,691    7,794    1,510    6,227            4,201    439,909    185,782    114,727    2,701    2,940    6,113    4,538    1,063    5,346            4,499    327,709  
Loans and advances to banks  40,265                1,846                            42,111    36,829                4,520                            41,349  
Loans and advances to customers      103,388    11,647    22,842    7,115    8,536    13,339    22,372    166,974    58,914    12,640    427,767        80,729    12,297    23,519    5,940    7,743    13,830    25,728    155,863    60,162    13,406    399,217  
Reverse repurchase agreements and other similar secured lending  38,946    86,588        4,845    739        24    611                131,753    8,676    18,022        1,011    305        35    138                28,187  
Available for sale debt securities  11,122    8,365    68    45    61,341    194    27    4,084            293    85,539  

Financial investments - debt securities

  9,745    6,114    68    43    67,645    182    107    5,134            240    89,278  
Other assets  635    995        14    24            12                1,680    312    1,077            20                        1    1,410  
Total on-balance sheet  357,648    367,652    15,770    41,151    168,030    19,342    15,492    39,184    167,367    58,914    18,155    1,268,705    258,267    267,604    16,140    36,693    167,431    15,050    15,541    42,475    156,642    60,162    19,101    1,055,106  
Off-balance sheet:                        
Contingent liabilities  1,159    5,177    2,709    698        2,757    1,157    6,496    45    191    874    21,263    1,152    4,698    3,142    958    9    3,073    1,301    4,645    100    548    950    20,576  
Documentary credits and other short-term trade-related transactions  470    12    197    14        1    218    62    55    28    34    1,091  

Documentary credits and other short-term trade related transactions

  378    17    142    1        3    129    50        123    2    845  
Forward starting reverse repurchase agreements  2,128    11,724            4                            13,856    78    15                                        93  
Standby facilities, credit lines and other commitments  2,643    29,645    28,589    11,449    2,400    24,830    12,771    24,534    16,119    110,091    13,244    276,315    946    31,152    35,865    11,337    871    26,217    15,054    23,180    11,708    111,988    13,051    281,369  
Total off-balance sheet  6,400    46,558    31,495    12,161    2,404    27,588    14,146    31,092    16,219    110,310    14,152    312,525    2,554    35,882    39,149    12,296    880    29,293    16,484    27,875    11,808    112,659    14,003    302,883  
Total  364,048    414,210    47,265    53,312    170,434    46,930    29,638    70,276    183,586    169,224    32,307    1,581,230    260,821    303,486    55,289    48,989    168,311    44,343    32,025    70,350    168,450    172,821    33,104    1,357,989  

126 | Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2016 Annual Report on Form 20-F


As the principal source of credit risk to the Group, loans and advances to customers and banks is analysed in detail below:

Analysis of loans and advances and impairment to customers and banks

 

As at 31 December 2016

   

Gross

L&A

£m

 

 

 

   

Impairment

allowance

£m

 

 

 

   

L&A net of
impairment

£m

 
 

 

   

Credit risk
loans

£m

 
 

 

   

CRLs % of
gross L&A

%

 
 

 

   


Loan
impairment
chargesa

£m

 
 
 

 

   

Loan loss
rates

bps

 
 

 

Barclays UK

   155,729    1,519    154,210    2,044    1.3    866    56 

Barclays International

   33,485    1,492    31,993    1,249    3.7    1,085    324 

Barclays Core

   189,214    3,011    186,203    3,293    1.7    1,951    103 

BarclaysNon-Core

   10,319    385    9,934    838    8.1    102    99 

Total Group retail

   199,533    3,396    196,137    4,131    2.1    2,053    103 

Barclays UK

   15,204    282    14,922    591    3.9    30    20 

Barclays International

   180,102    748    179,354    1,470    0.8    258    14 

Barclays Core

   199,716    1,030    198,686    2,061    1.0    288    14 

BarclaysNon-Core

   41,406    194    41,212    299    0.7    11    3 

Total Group wholesale

   241,122    1,224    239,898    2,360    1.0    299    12 

Total loans and advances at amortised cost

   440,655    4,620    436,035    6,491    1.5    2,352    53 

Traded loans

   2,975    n/a    2,975    n/a       

Loans and advances designated at fair value

   10,519    n/a    10,519    n/a       

Loans and advances held at fair value

   13,494    n/a    13,494    n/a       

Total loans and advances

   454,149    4,620    449,529    6,491                

As at 31 December 2015

                                   

Barclays UK

   153,539    1,556    151,983    2,238    1.5    682    44 

Barclays International

   26,041    896    25,145    863    3.3    714    274 

Head Office

                            

Barclays Core

   179,580    2,452    177,128    3,101    1.7    1,396    78 

BarclaysNon-Core

   12,588    465    12,123    936    7.4    139    110 

Total Group retail

   192,168    2,917    189,251    4,037    2.1    1,535    80 

Barclays UK

   16,400    312    16,088    636    3.9    24    15 

Barclays International

   159,776    617    159,159    1,331    0.8    201    13 

Head Office

   5,767        5,767                 

Barclays Core

   181,943    929    181,014    1,967    1.1    225    12 

BarclaysNon-Core

   39,979    336    39,643    441    1.1    (16   (4

Total Group wholesale

   221,922    1,265    220,657    2,408    1.1    209    9 

Total loans and advances at amortised costb

   414,090    4,182    409,908    6,445    1.6    1,744    42 

BAGL loans and advances at amortised cost

   31,397    739    30,658    1,372       

Traded loans

   2,474    n/a    2,474    n/a       

Loans and advances designated at fair value

   17,913    n/a    17,913    n/a       

Loans and advances held at fair value

   20,387    n/a    20,387    n/a       

Total loans and advances

   465,874    4,921    460,953    7,817                

Total loans and advances decreased by £11.4bn to £449.5bn driven by a £31bn decrease due to the reclassification of BAGL balances to held for sale and £9bn from the exit of other assets inNon-Core. This was offset by lending of £20bn driven by volume growth and foreign currency movements due to the appreciation of average US Dollar and Euro against Sterling. There was also a net £9bn increase in settlement and cash collateral balances.

Credit risk loans (CRLs) and the ratio of CRLs to gross loans and advances excluding BAGL balances now held for sale remained stable at £6.5bn (2015: £6.4bn) and 1.5% (2015: 1.6%) respectively.

Loan impairment charges increased £0.6bn to £2.4bn primarily due to increased charges following the management review of impairment modelling for UK and US cards portfolios and the impairment of a number of single name exposures. Overall, this resulted in an 11bps increase in the loan loss rate to 53bps.

Notes

aExcluding impairment charges on available for sale investments and reverse repurchase agreements.
bExcluding BAGL balances now held for sale.

 

  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 20152016 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  121127


Risk review

Risk performance

Credit risk

 

 

Analysis of specific portfolios and asset types

This section provides an analysis of principal portfolios and businesses in the retail and wholesale segments. In particular, home loans, credit cards, overdrafts and unsecured loans are covered for retail segments whilesegments. In addition, this section details exposures in Investment Bank and PCB including watch list analysis are covered for wholesale segments.

In general, benign economic conditions in theto UK and US aided better performance in 2015. South African portfolios were resilient despite challenging market conditions with economic growth being affected by weak manufacturing and low commodity prices.commercial real estate.

Secured home loans

TotalThe UK home loans to retail customersportfolio comprises first lien home loans and accounts for 98%a (2015: 98%) of £156bn (2014: £161bn) represented 75% (2014: 72%the Group’s Core home loan balances and 91% (2015: 90%) of the Group’s total retailhome loan balances. The reduction in balances was principally driven by: PortugueseItaly home loans and partaccounts for 100% (2015: 91%) of the ItalianGroup’sNon-Core home loans portfolio being redesignated as held for sale;loan balances and South African home loans due to the depreciation7% (2015: 7%) of the Rand.

The two principal portfolios listed below account for 88% ofGroup’s total home loans in the Group’s retail portfolios, and comprise first lien mortgages.loan balances.

 

Home loans principal portfolios  
    
 
 
 
Gross loans
and
advances
£m
  
  
  
  
   
 

 

>90 day
arrears

%

  
  

  

   
 
 
 
 

 

Non-
performing
proportion of
outstanding
balances

%

  
  
  
  
  

  

   
 
 

 

Gross
charge-off
rates

%

  
  
  

  

   
 
 
 

 

Recoveries
proportion of
outstanding
balances

%

  
  
  
  

  

   
 
 
 

 

Recoveries
impairment
coverage
ratio

%

  
  
  
  

  

As at 31 December 2015            
PCB – UK   127,750     0.2     0.7     0.3     0.4     10.1  
Africa Banking – South Africa   9,180     0.9     4.0     1.6     3.2     26.4  
As at 31 December 2014            
PCB – UK   126,668     0.2     0.6     0.4     0.4     8.3  
Africa Banking – South Africa   11,513     0.7     4.8     1.9     4.1     31.1  

Home loans principal portfoliosb

 

   Barclays UK 

As at 31 December

   2016    2015 

Gross loans and advances (£m)

   129,136    127,750 

>90 day arrears, excluding recovery book (%)

   0.2    0.2 

Non-performing proportion of outstanding balances (%)

   0.6    0.7 

Annualised grosscharge-off rates (%)

   0.3    0.3 

Recovery book proportion of outstanding balances (%)

   0.4    0.4 

Recovery book impairment coverage ratio (%)

   9.1    10.1 

PCB –Barclays UK:Portfolio performance remained steady reflecting the continuing low base rate environment, house price appreciation and benignsteady economic conditions.Non-performing proportion of outstanding balances and recovery book impairment coverage reduced due to a reduction in repossession stock.

Within the UK home loans portfolio:

 

§ owner-occupied interest onlyinterest-only home loans comprised 31% (2015: 32% (2014: 33%) of total balances. The average balance weighted LTV on these loans reduced to 41.7% (2015: 44.7% (2014: 48.7%), as house prices have improved across core regions, and >90 day arrears excluding recovery book remained broadly steady at 0.2% (2014: 0.1%(2015: 0.2%)

 

§ buy-to-let home loans comprised 9% (2014: 8%(2015: 9%) of total balances. The average balance weighted LTV reduced to 52.6% (2015: 54.6% (2014: 57.6%), and >90 day arrears remained steady atexcluding recovery book reduced to 0.1% (2015: 0.2% (2014: 0.1%).

The recoveries impairment coverage increased to 10.1% (2014: 8.3%). In 2015, management adjustments to impairment allowances were better aligned to appropriate segments of the portfolio, resulting in a reduction of the impairment allocated to the recoveries book. The overall impairment coverage of the total home loans portfolio remained unchanged.

Africa Banking – South Africa:Gross loans and advances reduced by 20%, primarily driven by the depreciation of the Rand and repayments on the existing book. The improvement in the charge-off rates to 1.6% (2014: 1.9%) resulted from the focus on collections strategies and reduced rolls through delinquency cycles.

Home loans principal portfolios – distribution of balances by LTVc

 

  
Distribution of
balances
 
 
  

Impairment coverage

ratio

 

 

  

Non-performing
proportion of
outstanding balances
 
 
 
  

Non-performing
balances impairment
coverage ratio
 
 
 
  

Recovery book
proportion of
outstanding balances
 
 
 
  

Recovery book
impairment coverage
ratio
 
 
 

As at 31 December

  

2016

%

 

 

  

2015

%

 

 

  

2016

%

 

 

  

2015

%

 

 

  

2016

%

 

 

  

2015

%

 

 

  

2016

%

 

 

  

2015

%

 

 

  

2016

%

 

 

  

2015

%

 

 

  

2016

%

 

 

  

2015

%

 

 

Barclays UK

            

<=75%

      91.8       92.1   0.1   0.1   0.6   0.6   4.2   4.7   0.4   0.4   5.9   6.8 

>75% and <=80%

  3.5   3.4   0.2   0.2   0.6   1.0   17.1   13.5   0.4   0.8   22.1   15.7 

>80% and <=85%

  2.1   2.1   0.2   0.3   0.8   1.0   20.4   16.7   0.6   0.7   25.0   21.4 

>85% and <=90%

  1.3   1.4   0.3   0.3   0.7   1.3   23.0   15.7   0.6   1.0   25.4   17.8 

>90% and <=95%

  0.8   0.6   0.4   0.6   1.1   1.8   28.3   25.7   0.8   1.5   33.7   28.2 

>95% and <=100%

  0.3   0.2   0.7   1.3   1.9   4.0   23.4   25.4   1.5   3.5   27.0   27.9 

>100%

  0.2   0.2   3.1   3.4   5.7   7.0   38.6   35.6   5.0   5.6   40.9   41.2 

 

122  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F

Home loans principal portfolios – Average LTV

        
  Barclays UK 

As at 31 December

  2016   2015 

Portfolio marked to market LTV (%):

  

Balance weighted

  47.7   49.2 

Valuation weighted

  35.6   37.3 

Performing balances (%):

  

Balance weighted

  47.3   48.8 

Valuation weighted

  35.5   37.3 

Non-performing balances (%):

  

Balance weighted

  52.5   56.5 

Valuation weighted

  41.7   45.1 

For >100% LTVs:

  

Balances (£m)

  239   310 

Marked to market collateral (£m)

  210   260 

Average LTV: balance weighted (%)

          118.4           123.0 

Average LTV: valuation weighted (%)

  113.1   118.5 

% of balances in recovery book

  5.0   5.6 


Risk review

Risk performance

Credit risk

Home loans principal portfolios – distribution of balances by LTVa  
  
 
Distribution of
balances
  
  
  
 
Impairment coverage
ratio
  
  
  
 
 
Non-performing
proportion of
outstanding balances
  
  
  
  
 
 
Non-performing
balances impairment
coverage ratio
  
  
  
  
 
 
Recoveries proportion
of outstanding
balances
  
  
  
  
 
 
Recoveries
impairment coverage
ratio
  
  
  
As at 31 December  
 
2015
%
  
  
  
 
2014
%
  
  
  

 

2015

%

  

  

  

 

2014

%

  

  

  

 

2015

%

  

  

  

 

2014

%

  

  

  

 

2015

%

  

  

  

 

2014

%

  

  

  

 

2015

%

  

  

  

 

2014

%

  

  

  

 

2015

%

  

  

  

 

2014

%

  

  

PCB UK            
<=75%  92.1    90.2    0.1        0.6    0.6    4.7    2.8    0.4    0.3    6.8    4.6  
>75% and <=80%  3.4    4.2    0.2    0.2    1.0    1.2    13.5    6.9    0.8    0.8    15.7    9.2  
>80% and <=85%  2.1    2.3    0.3    0.2    1.0    1.4    16.7    8.9    0.7    0.9    21.4    11.3  
>85% and <=90%  1.4    1.4    0.3    0.4    1.3    1.7    15.7    13.0    1.0    1.3    17.8    15.9  
>90% and <=95%  0.6    1.0    0.6    0.4    1.8    1.9    25.7    13.7    1.5    1.3    28.2    17.8  
>95% and <=100%  0.2    0.4    1.3    1.0    4.0    2.9    25.4    21.4    3.5    2.2    27.9    26.4  
>100%  0.2    0.5    3.4    2.4    7.0    6.0    35.6    28.6    5.6    4.3    41.2    36.1  
Africa Banking –            
South Africa            
<=75%  76.1    74.6    0.7    0.7    0.6    0.5    13.6    16.2    1.8    1.9    17.9    20.4  
>75% and <=80%  6.8    7.7    1.6    1.5    1.0    0.9    18.4    20.0    3.3    3.0    21.4    23.5  
>80% and <=85%  5.3    5.9    1.9    2.0    1.0    1.1    19.2    21.1    3.5    4.2    21.1    23.7  
>85% and <=90%  3.8    4.3    2.3    2.5    0.9    1.0    20.2    22.3    4.8    5.1    21.8    24.3  
>90% and <=95%  2.6    2.5    3.7    4.3    1.2    1.4    23.8    26.3    5.9    8.7    24.2    27.6  
>95% and <=100%  1.8    1.5    4.8    5.4    1.3    1.5    25.6    23.4    7.8    11.6    26.0    24.1  
>100%  2.8    3.5    14.1    16.4    1.9    1.9    29.7    32.5    26.7    37.1    29.7    32.9  

Home loans principal portfolios – Average LTV                
  PCB – UK    Africa Banking – South Africa  
As at 31 December  

 

2015

%

  

  

  

 

2014

%

  

  

  

 

2015

%

  

  

  

 

2014

%

  

  

Portfolio marked to market LTV (%):    
Balance weighted  49.2    51.6    58.4    59.9  
Valuation weighted  37.3    39.8    39.1    40.2  
Performing balances (%):    
Balance weighted  48.8    51.5    57.5    58.6  
Valuation weighted  37.3    39.7    38.6    39.5  
Non-performing balances (%):    
Balance weighted  56.5    62.1    79.3    87.0  
Valuation weighted  45.1    49.8    59.3    64.7  
For >100% LTVs:    
Balances (£m)  310    641    257    390  
Marked to market collateral (£m)  260    558    218    324  
Average LTV: balance weighted (%)    123.0    120.9    121.1    124.2  
Average LTV: valuation weighted (%)  118.5      114.8    117.7    120.3  
% of balances in recoveries  5.6    4.4    26.6    37.1  

Balance weighted LTV in the UK reduced to 49.2% (2014: 51.6%) due to an increase in average house prices, particularly in London and the South East. The overall non-performing impairment coverage in the UK remained flat year on year but increased across LTV ranges, due to granular alignment of management adjustments across portfolio segments.

PCB – UK: The house price appreciation resulted in a 52% reduction in home loans that have LTV >100% to £310m (2014: £641m).

Africa Banking – South Africa: Balances with >100% LTV reduced 34% to £257m (2014: £390m), primarily due to a reduction in the size of the recovery book as older and higher risk loans were written off, in addition to the depreciation of the Rand.

Home loans principal portfolios – new lending                
  PCB – UK    Africa Banking – South Africa  
As at 31 December  2015    2014    2015    2014  
New bookings (£m)    18,812    20,349    1,621    1,590  
New mortgages proportion above 85% LTV (%)  8.2    6.6    40.8    33.5  
Average LTV on new mortgages: balance weighted (%)  63.9    64.8    75.7    74.8  
Average LTV on new mortgages: valuation weighted (%)  55.0    57.0    66.9    65.4  

PCB – UK:New lending during 2015 reduced by 8%, reflecting an unchanged risk profile against heightened market activity in the prime residential segment.

Africa Banking – South Africa:The proportion of new home loans with LTV above 85% increased to 40.8% (2014: 33.5%) due to a revised strategy which allowed a greater proportion of higher LTV loans to be booked for lower risk customers.

NoteNotes

aRemaining balance includes Wealth portfolio.
bGross loans and advances include loans and advances to customers and banks. Risk metrics based on exposures to customers only.
cPortfolio marked to market based on the most updated valuation including recoveriesrecovery book balances. Updated valuations reflect the application of the latest house price index available in the country as at 31 December 2015.2016.

 

128  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 20152016 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  123


        

        

        

 

 

Exposure to interest only owner-occupied home loans excluding part and part interest only (P&P IO)a          
As at 31 December   2015     2014  
Interest only balances, excluding P&P IO (£m)    33,901      35,328  
Interest only home loans maturity years (£m):    
2016   703     864  
2017   1,043     1,180  
2018   1,131     1,249  
2019   1,080     1,195  
2020   1,090     1,176  
2021-2025   7,359     7,632  
Post 2025   21,155     21,104  
Total Impairment coverage (bps)   11     8  
Marked to market LTV: total balances (%)    
Balance weighted   44.7     48.7  
Valuation weighted   34.7     37.6  
For >100% LTVs: (£m)    
Balances   178     349  
Marked to market collateral   150     302  
Overview of performing portfolio    
Performing balances (£m)   33,690     35,155  
Marked to market LTV: performing balances (%)    
Balance weighted   44.6     48.6  
Valuation weighted   34.6     37.5  
Overview of non-performing portfolio    
Non-performing balances (£m)   211     173  
Non-performing proportion of interest only balances excluding P&P IO (%)   0.6     0.5  
Marked to market LTV: non-performing balances (%)    
Balance weighted   61.4     66.2  
Valuation weighted   49.8     54.1  

Interest only mortgages account for £50bn (2014: £51bn) of the total balance of £128bn (2014: £127bn) of UK home loans. This comprised £40bn (2014: £42bn) to owner-occupied customers, and £10bn (2014: £9bn) to buy-to-let customers.

Of the £40bn exposure to owner-occupied customers, £34bn (2014: £35bn) was interest only, with the remaining £6bn (2014: £7bn) representing the interest only component of part and part mortgages.

The average balanceBalance weighted LTV for interest only owner-occupied balances reduced to 44.7% (2014: 48.7%) as property prices appreciated. The increase in impairment coverage to 11bps (2014: 8bps) was due to (i) enhancements in methodology, where management adjustments to impairment allowances were allocated on a more granular basis to their appropriate segments; and (ii) a broadening of the high risk definition used on interest only mortgages. The overall impairment coverage of the total home loans portfolio remained unchanged.

Exposures to mortgage current accounts (MCA) reserves

The MCA reserve is a secured overdraft facility previously available to home loan customers in the UK on either a fully amortising or interest only mortgage loan, which allows them to borrow against the equity in their home. It permits draw-down up to an agreed available limit on a separate but connected account to the main mortgage loan facility. The balance drawn must be repaid on redemption of the mortgage.

Of the total 917k home loan customers in the UK, 442k have MCA reserves, with total reserve limits of £11.3bn (2014: £17.9bn).

As at 31 December   2015     2014  
Total outstanding of home loans with MCA reserve balances (£bn)        53.6          62.2  
As a proportion of outstanding UK home loan balances (%)   42.0     49.1  
Home loan customers with active reserves (000s)   442     505  
Total reserve limits (£bn)   11.3     17.9  
Utilisation rate (%)   48.9     32.3  
Utilisation (£bn)   5.5     5.8  
Marked to market LTV: balance weighted (%)   43.7     47.7  

Total outstanding balances which are an aggregate of the mortgage account and the drawn reserve, reduced 14% to £53.6bn (2014: £62.2bn), during the period reflecting paydowns in the main mortgage account.

Reduction in portfolio reserve limits to £11.3bn (2014: £17.9bn) is due to an active limit management programme, combined with natural mortgage redemptions from the existing book during the period. As a result, the utilisation rate increased to 48.9% (2014: 32.3%). MCA balances have remained broadly stable at £5.5bn (2014: £5.8bn), while the average balance weighted LTV reduced to 43.7% (2014: 47.7% (2015: 49.2%) due to an increase in average house prices and repayment on the main mortgage loan.across core regions.

Although the product has been withdrawn from sale, existing customers can continueThe house price appreciation resulted in a 23% reduction in home loans that have LTV >100% to draw against their available reserves.

Note

aA part and part home loan is a product in which part of the loan is interest only and part is amortising. Analysis excludes the interest only portion of the part and part book which contributes £6.2bn (2014: £6.6bn) to the total owner occupied interest only balance of the £40.1bn (2014: £41.9bn)£239m (2015: £310m). The total exposure on part and part book is £9.9bn (2014, £9.8bn) and represents 8% of total UK home loans portfolio.

 

124  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F


Risk review

Risk performance

Home loans principal portfolios – new lending

          
   Barclays UK 

As at 31 December

   2016    2015 

New home loan bookings (£m)

   19,885    18,812 

New home loans proportion above 85% LTV (%)

   8.6    8.2 

Average LTV on new home loans: balance weighted (%)

   63.4    63.9 

Average LTV on new home loans: valuation weighted (%)

   54.4    55.0 

CreditBarclays UK:New lending in 2016 increased by 6%, reflecting a steady risk profile against the backdrop of heightened market activity. Average balance weighted LTV on new lending remained broadly stable at 63.4% (2015: 63.9%).

Credit cards overdrafts, and unsecured loans

The principal portfolios listed below accounted for 91% (2014: 88%94% (2015: 92%) of the Group’s total credit cards overdrafts and unsecured loans.

 

Principal portfolios   
 
 
 
Gross loans
and
advances
£m
  
  
  
  
   
 
 
 

 

30 day
arrears,
excluding
recoveries

%

  
  
  
  

  

   
 
 
 

 

90 day
arrears,
excluding
recoveries

%

  
  
  
  

  

   
 
 

 

Gross
charge-off
rates

%

  
  
  

  

   
 
 
 
 

 

Recoveries
proportion
of
outstanding
balances

%

  
  
  
  
  

  

   
 
 
 

 

Recoveries
impairment
coverage
ratio

%

  
  
  
  

  

As at 31 December 2015            
Barclaycard            
UK cardsa   18,502     2.3     1.2     5.2     3.6     82.6  
US cardsa   16,699     2.2     1.1     3.9     2.0     84.8  
Barclays Partner Finance   3,986     1.5     0.6     2.4     2.5     85.2  
Germany cards   1,419     2.3     1.0     3.8     2.7     81.2  
Personal & Corporate Banking            
UK personal loans   5,476     1.9     0.8     3.0     7.5     73.9  
Africa Banking            
South Africa cards   1,886     8.5     5.0     8.4     7.4     72.6  
As at 31 December 2014            
Barclaycard            
UK cardsa   17,447     2.5     1.2     4.3     4.9     87.6  
US cardsa   14,005     2.1     1.0     3.7     1.8     87.1  
Barclays Partner Finance   3,399     1.5     0.7     2.4     2.7     76.8  
Germany cards   1,355     2.5     1.1     3.8     3.4     82.8  
Personal & Corporate Banking            
UK personal loans   4,953     2.0     0.9     3.4     10.0     76.3  
Africa Banking            
South Africa cards   2,364     8.1     4.6     7.6     5.9     75.7  

Credit cards and unsecured loans principal portfolios

 

    

Gross  loans
and
advances

£m

 
 
a 

 

   




30 day
arrears,
excluding
recovery
book

%

 
 
 
 
 

 

   




90 day
arrears,
excluding
recovery
book

%

 
 
 
 
 

 

   



Annualised
gross
charge-off
rates

%

 
 
 
 

 

   




Recovery
book
proportion of
outstanding
balances

%

 
 
 
 
 

 

   




Recovery
book
impairment
coverage
ratio

%

 
 
 
 
 

 

As at 31 December 2016

            

Barclays UK

            

UK cardsb

   17,833    1.9    0.9    5.5    3.0    83.8 

UK personal loans

   6,076    2.1    0.9    3.1    4.7    77.2 

Barclays International

            

US cardsb

   23,915    2.6    1.3    4.5    2.4    83.6 

Barclays Partner Finance

   4,041    1.5    0.6    2.5    2.6    81.5 

Germany cards

   1,812    2.6    1.0    3.7    2.7    79.0 

As at 31 December 2015

            

Barclays UK

            

UK cardsb

   18,502    2.3    1.2    5.2    3.6    82.6 

UK personal loans

   5,476    1.9    0.8    3.0    7.5    73.9 

Barclays International

            

US cardsb

   16,699    2.2    1.1    3.9    2.0    84.8 

Barclays Partner Financec

   3,986    1.5    0.6    2.4    2.5    82.2 

Germany cards

   1,419    2.3    1.0    3.8    2.7    81.2 

UK cards: In 2015, both early and late stage arrears remained stable within UK cards. The increase in charge-off rate and the reduction in recoveries as a proportion of outstanding was due to the acceleration of delinquent accounts to charge-off prior to debt sale. The decrease in recovery coverage ratio was driven by enhancements to impairment methodology, which took into account the improvement in recoveries and the impact of debt sales.

US cards:Gross loans and advances decreased 4% to £17.8bn primarily due to reduced loans and advances to banks. Annualised grosscharge-off rates increased 19%due to £16.7bn (2014: £14bn) principally driven by increased new business volumes. Arrearsaccelerated asset sales in the latter half of the year and acceleratedcharge-off rates remained broadly in line with 2014. of informal arrangements stock. The decrease in recoveriesrecovery book impairment coverage ratio was due to enhancements to impairment methodology and improvements in recovery expectation.increased reflecting the impact of increased flow intocharge-off.

UK personal loans: Arrears30 day arrears increased to 2.1% (2015: 1.9%) and charge-off rates fell despite a 11%90 day arrears increased to 0.9% (2015: 0.8%) partially driven by portfolio growth and an increased level of operational delinquency from new customer acquisitions. The recovery book proportion of outstanding balances reduced to 4.7% (2015: 7.5%) due to an asset sale that also resulted in grossan increase in the recovery book impairment coverage ratio to 77.2% (2015: 73.9%).

US cards:Gross loans and advances increased 43% to £23.9bn due to portfolio growth, new acquisitions and reflectedappreciation of USD against GBP. Increased arrears andcharge-off rate were driven by a change in portfolio mix, volume growth and the benign economic conditions in the UK.appreciation of average USD against GBP.

Barclays Partner Finance: Gross loans and advances increased 17% to £4.0bn (2014: £3.4bn). Portfolio arrears andcharge-off rates remained broadly steady in 2015. The recoveries impairment coverage ratio increased following a management adjustment for the secured motor segment (portfolio started in 2012), which took into account changes to expected recoveries performance as the portfolio matured.during 2016.

Germany cards: The decrease in recoveries proportion of outstanding balances wasLoans and advances were 28% higher mainly due to writea combination of the appreciation of EUR against GBP and portfolio growth. 90 day arrears and charge off of legacy accounts previously held in recoveries until system migration activities were concluded.

South Africa cards: The increased arrears reflected bookings growth in 2015 in line with business strategy and weaker economic conditions. The gross charge-off rate andrates remained stable, while the recoveries proportion of outstanding balances percentage increased during 2015 due to additional charge-off in the Edcon portfolio as it was aligned with the Group’s charge-off policy.recovery book coverage ratio reduced slightly reflecting favourable recovery expectations.

 

Note

Notes

aGross loans and advances include loans and advances to customers and banks. Risk metrics based on exposures to customers.
bFor UK and US cards, outstanding recoveriesrecovery book balances for acquired portfolios recognised at fair value (which have no related impairment allowance) have been excluded from the recoveriesrecovery book impairment coverage ratio. Losses have been recognised where related to additional spend from acquired accounts in the period post acquisition.
c2015 figures for recovery book coverage ratio restated from 85.2% to 82.2% to reflect more granular allocation of management adjustments to the recovery book.

 

  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 20152016 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  125129


Risk review

Risk performance

Credit risk

Wholesale loans and advances at amortised cost

Analysis of wholesale loans and advances at amortised cost

 

    

Gross

L&A

£m

 

 

 

   

Impairment
allowance

£m

 
 

 

   

L&A net of
impairment

£m

 
 

 

   

Credit risk
loans

£m

 
 

 

   

CRLs % of
gross L&A

%

 
 

 

   


Loan
impairment
charges

£m

 
 
 

 

   

Loan loss
rates

bps

 
 

 

As at 31 December 2016

              

Banks

   35,979        35,979                 

Other financial institutions

   91,673    14    91,659    89    0.1    6    1 

Manufacturing

   12,373    130    12,243    226    1.8    37    30 

Construction

   3,418    40    3,378    58    1.7    5    15 

Property

   20,541    137    20,404    464    2.3    27    13 

Government and central bank

   15,847        15,847                 

Energy and water

   7,569    181    7,388    348    4.6    102    135 

Wholesale and retail distribution and leisure

   12,995    169    12,826    258    2.0    38    29 

Business and other services

   21,210    284    20,926    331    1.6    54    25 

Home loansa

   5,497    48    5,449    190    3.5    9    16 

Cards, unsecured loans and other personal lendinga

   5,329    129    5,200    207    3.9    6    11 

Other

   8,691    92    8,599    189    2.2    15    17 

Total wholesale loans and advances at amortised cost

   241,122    1,224    239,898    2,360    1.0    299    12 

As at 31 December 2015

              

Banks

   32,824        32,824                 

Other financial institutions

   78,766    28    78,738    63    0.1    4    1 

Manufacturing

   10,107    114    9,993    183    1.8    17    17 

Construction

   3,358    44    3,314    54    1.6    4    12 

Property

   18,444    217    18,227    713    3.9    34    18 

Government and central bank

   9,686        9,686                 

Energy and water

   7,370    120    7,250    296    4.0    101    137 

Wholesale and retail distribution and leisure

   12,542    195    12,347    287    2.3    7    6 

Business and other services

   23,403    261    23,142    341    1.5    23    10 

Home loansa

   5,769    26    5,743    159    2.8         

Cards, unsecured loans and other personal lendinga

   8,894    107    8,787    166    1.9    2    2 

Other

   10,759    153    10,606    146    1.4    17    16 

Total wholesale loans and advances at amortised cost

   221,922    1,265    220,657    2,408    1.1    209    9 

BAGL loans and advances at amortised cost

   13,985    200    13,785    513    3.7     

Total wholesale loans and advances at amortised cost

   235,907    1,465    234,442    2,921    1.2     

Excluding BAGL balances:

§Wholesale loans and advances increased by £19bn to £241bn (2015: £222bn) due to increased lending of £11bn driven by volume growth and foreign currency movements due to the appreciation of average US Dollar and Euro against Sterling, £8bn due to the reclassification of ESHLA loans now recognised at amortised cost and a net £9bn increase in settlement and cash collateral balances, offset by £9bn from the exit of assets inNon-Core.

§CRLs remained stable at £2.4bn (2015: £2.4bn).

§Loan impairment charges increased to £299m (2015: £209m) from a number of single name exposures. The loan loss rates increased to 12bps (2015: 9bps).

Note

aIncluded in the above analysis are Wealth and Private Banking exposures measured on an individual customer exposure basis.

130  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2016 Annual Report on Form 20-F


        

        

 

 

Exposure to UK Commercial Real Estatecommercial real estate (CRE)

The UK CRE portfolio includes property investment, development, trading and house builders but excludes social housing and contractors.

 

UK CRE summary      
   2015     2014  

UK CRE summarya

     
As at 31 December     2016    2015 
UK CRE loans and advances (£m)   11,617     11,681   11,227    10,690 
Past due balances (£m)   183     393   83    152 
Balances past due as % of UK CRE balances (%)   1.6     3.4   0.7    1.4 
Impairment allowances (£m)   99     100   58    79 
Past due coverage ratio (%)   54.1     25.7   69.9    52.0 
Total collateral (£m)a   27,062     25,205  

Total collateral (£m)

 23,225    21,858 
Twelve months ended 31 December         
Impairment charge (£m)   4     23  

Impairment (credit)/charge (£m)

 (2)    3 

 

Maturity analysis of exposure to UK CRE                                                
   Contractual maturity of UK CRE loans and advances at amortised cost               Contractual maturity of UK CRE loans and advances at amortised cost      
As at 31 December   
 
 
Past due
balances
£m
  
  
  
   
 
 
 
Not more
than
six months
£m
  
  
  
  
   
 
 
 
 
 
Over
six months
but not
more than
one year
£m
  
  
  
  
  
  
   
 
 
 
 
 
Over
one year
but not
more than
two years
£m
  
  
  
  
  
  
   
 
 
 
 
 
Over
two years
but not
more than
five years
£m
  
  
  
  
  
  
   
 
 
 
 
 
Over
five years
but not
more than
ten years
£m
  
  
  
  
  
  
   
 
 
Over
ten years
£m
  
  
  
   
 
 
Total loans
& advances
£m
  
  
  
   

Past due
balances

£m

 
 

 

   


Not more
than
six months

£m

 
 
 

 

   




Over
six months
but not
more than
one year

£m

 
 
 
 
 

 

   




Over
one year
but not
more than
two years

£m

 
 
 
 
 

 

   




Over
two years
but not
more than
five years

£m

 
 
 
 
 

 

   




Over
five years
but not
more than
ten years

£m

 
 
 
 
 

 

   

Over
ten years

£m

 
 

 

   

Total loans and
advances

£m

 
 

 

2016

   83    774    668    1,200    6,318    700    1,484    11,227 
2015   183     801     751     941     5,779     1,076     2,087     11,617     152    784    744    929    5,678    852    1,551    10,690 
2014   393     838     839     1,287     4,161     1,939     2,224     11,681  

Total loans and advances at amortised cost remained broadly stable at £11.6bn (2014: £11.7bn) with growth limitedexposure to high quality assets. The total collateral increased by 7% to £27.1bn.

The UK CRE businesses operate to specific lending criteria and the portfolio of assets is continually monitored through a range of mandates and limits. The improvement in the past due coverage ratio in 2015 was driven by the sale of three unimpairedcommercial real estate loans.following the 2015 restatement rose moderately from £10.7bn to £11.2bn primarily in medium-term deals. Past due balances fell to £83m from £152m due to favourable recovery activity and a selective approach to new deals in this sector.

 

UK CRE LTV analysis                                  
   Balances   
 
Balances as proportion
of total
  
  
   Collateral held     Balances      

Balances as proportion

of total

 

 

As at 31 December   

 

2015

£m

  

  

   

 

2014

£m

  

  

   

 

2015

%

  

  

   

 

2014

%

  

  

   

 

2015

£m

  

  

   

 

2014

£m

  

  

   
    2016
£m
 
 
   
    2015
£m
 
 
     
      2016
£m
 
 
     
      2015
£m
 
 
Group                        
<=100%   9,045     9,011     78     78     26,927     25,036  

<=75%

   7,884    7,208      70      68 

>75% and <=100%

   102    244      1      2 
>100% and <=125%   119     149     1     1     106     138     15    109            1 
>125%   47     167          1     29     31     60    18      1       
Unassessed balancesb   1,636     1,748     14     15               2,286    2,370      20      22 
Unsecured balances   770     606     7     5            

Unsecured balancesc

   880    741      8      7 
Total   11,617     11,681     100     100     27,062     25,205     11,227    10,690      100      100 

Portfolio LTVs have reduced due to appreciating commercial property values. Unsecured balances primarily relate to working capital facilities granted to CRE companies.

 

Notes

aBased on the most recent valuation assessment.assessment, 2015 year end numbers have been restated following closer alignment of industry classifications between corporate banking and business lending.
bCorporate Banking balances under £1m.

c
126  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F


Risk review

Risk performance

Credit risk

Investment Bank

Analysis of loans and advances at amortised cost                           
    
 
Gross L&A
£m
  
  
   
 
 
Impairment
allowance
£m
  
  
  
   
 
 
L&A net of
impairment
£m
  
  
  
   
 

 

Credit risk
loans

£m

  
  

  

   
 

 

CRLs % of
gross L&A

%

  
  

  

   
 
 
 
Loan
impairment
charges
£m
  
  
  
  
   
 

 

Loan loss
rates

bps

  
  

  

As at 31 December 2015              
Loans and advances to banks              
Interbank lending   10,174          10,174               –      –   
Cash collateral and settlement balances   7,259          7,259               –      –   
Loans and advances to customers              
Wholesale lending   31,451     83     31,368     241     0.8     47      15   
Cash collateral and settlement balances   43,437          43,437               –      –   
Total   92,321     83     92,238     241     0.3     47        
As at 31 December 2014              
Loans and advances to banks              
Interbank lending   10,275          10,275               (3)     (3)  
Cash collateral and settlement balances   9,626          9,626               –      –   
Loans and advances to customers              
Wholesale lending   28,436     44     28,392     71     0.2     (11)     (4)  
Cash collateral and settlement balances   58,040          58,040               –      –   
Total   106,377     44     106,333     71     0.1     (14)     (1)  

Non-Core Wholesale

The table below details Non-Core loans and advances which form part of the Wholesale risk portfolio.

Analysis of loans and advances at amortised cost                           
    
 
Gross L&A
£m
  
  
   
 
 
Impairment
allowance
£m
  
  
  
   
 
 
L&A net of
impairment
£m
  
  
  
   
 

 

Credit risk
loans

£m

  
  

  

   
 

 

CRLs % of
gross L&A

%

  
  

  

   
 
 
 
Loan
impairment
charges
£m
  
  
  
  
   
 

 

Loan loss
rates

bps

  
  

  

As at 31 December 2015              
Loans and advances to banks              
Interbank lending   258          258               (7)     (271)  
Cash collateral and settlement balances   10,131          10,131               –      –   
Loans and advances to customers              
Wholesale lending   5,277     233     5,044     345     6.5     (13)     (25)  
Cash collateral and settlement balances   19,188          19,188               –      –   
Total   34,854     233     34,621     345     1.0     (20)     (6)  
As at 31 December 2014              
Loans and advances to banks              
Interbank lending   373          373               –      –   
Cash collateral and settlement balances   11,622          11,622               –      –   
Loans and advances to customers              
Wholesale lending   8,978     602     8,376     841     9.4     53      59   
Cash collateral and settlement balances   23,726          23,726               –      –   
Total   44,699     602     44,097     841     1.9     53      12   

Wholesale lending decreased £3.7bn to £5.3bn driven by the reclassification of Portuguese loans now held for sale and rundown of legacy loan portfolios. Wholesale loans predominantlyUnsecured balances primarily relate to capital equipment loans, legacy Collateralised Loan Obligations (CLO) and legacy Collateralised Debt Obligations (CDO).

Loan impairment charges improved £73m to a release of £20m reflecting higher recoveries in Europe and the sale of the Spanish business.

CRLs decreased to £345m (2014: £841m) as a result of the reclassification of Portuguese loans now held for sale and continued rundown of the Non-Core Investment Bank portfolio.

Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  127


Wholesale Personal and Corporate Banking

The table below details Personal and Corporate Banking loans and advances which form part of the Wholesale risk portfolio.

Analysis of loans and advances at amortised cost                                   
    
 
Gross L&A
£m
  
  
   
 
 
Impairment
allowance
£m
  
  
  
   
 
 
L&A net of
impairment
£m
  
  
  
   
 

 

Credit risk
loans

£m

  
  

  

   
 

 

CRLs % of
gross L&A

%

  
  

  

   
 
 
 
Loan
impairment
charges
£m
  
  
  
  
   
 

 

Loan loss
rates

bps

  
  

  

As at 31 December 2015              
Banks   3,593          3,593                      
Other financial institutions   6,321     16     6,305     46     0.7     2     3  
Manufacturing   6,762     37     6,725     51     0.8     2     3  
Construction   3,267     38     3,229     47     1.4     1     3  
Property   15,309     166     15,143     645     4.2     2     1  
Government and central bank   1,304          1,304                      
Energy and water   2,216     79     2,137     103     4.6     82     370  
Wholesale and retail distribution and leisure   11,333     165     11,168     261     2.3     (8   (7
Business and other services   16,536     223     16,313     271     1.6     54     33  
Home loansa   5,730     20     5,710     142     2.5            
Cards, unsecured loans and other personal lendinga   8,714     1     8,713     14     0.2     4     5  
Other   6,770     169     6,601     214     3.2     43     64  
Total   87,855     914     86,941     1,794     2.0     182     21  
As at 31 December 2014b              
Banks   5,507          5,507               1     2  
Other financial institutions   5,357     13     5,344     85     1.6     26     49  
Manufacturing   7,174     47     7,127     106     1.5            
Construction   3,094     40     3,054     58     1.9     7     21  
Property   15,480     194     15,286     833     5.4     36     23  
Government and central bank   1,187          1,187                      
Energy and water   1,950     2     1,948     2     0.1     3     16  
Wholesale and retail distribution and leisure   10,928     175     10,753     342     3.1     56     52  
Business and other services   14,160     177     13,983     344     2.4     54     38  
Home loansa   6,864     36     6,828     96     1.4     34     50  
Cards, unsecured loans and other personal lending   9,628     60     9,568     16     0.2     22     23  
Other   6,863     129     6,734     229     3.3     28     40  
Total   88,192     873     87,319     2,111     2.4     267     30  

Wholesale PCB loans and advances and CRLs remained broadly stable at £87.9bn (2014: £88.2bn) and £1.8bn (2014: £2.1bn) respectively.

Loan impairment charges improved 32% to £182m due to the benign economic environment in the UK. This led to a decrease in the loan loss rate to 21bps (2014: 30bps).

Analysis of Wholesale balances on watch list

Wholesale accounts that are deemed to contain heightened levels of risk are recorded on a graded watch list comprising four categories graded in line with the perceived severity of the risk attached to the lending, and its probability of default:

§Category 1: a temporary classification for performing obligors who exhibit some unsatisfactory features

§Category 2: performing obligors where some doubt exists, but the belief is that the obligor can meet obligations over the short term

§Category 3: obligors where definite concern exists with well defined weaknesses and failure in the short term could arise should further deterioration occur

§Category 4: non-performing obligors, insolvent or regulatory default. High risk of loss.

Notes

aIncluded in the above analysis are Wealth and Investment Management exposures measured on an individual customer exposure basis.
bUK Business Banking has been reclassified from Retail to Wholesale in line with how the business is now managed. 2014 figures have been restatedworking capital facilities agreed to reflect this, with net loans and advances of £8.4bn, credit risk loans of £482m and impairment charges of £48m being reclassified to Wholesale.

128  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F


Risk review

Risk performance

Credit risk

Watch list rating of wholesale balancesa                                                  
   Watch list 1     Watch list 2     Watch list 3     Watch list 4     Total  
As at 31 December   
 
2015
£m
  
  
   
 
2014
£m
  
  
   
 
2015
£m
  
  
   
 
2014
£m
  
  
   
 
2015
£m
  
  
   
 
2014
£m
  
  
   
 
2015
£m
  
  
   
 
2014
£m
  
  
   
 
2015
£m
  
  
   
 
2014
£m
  
  
Energy and Water   1,247     160     314     1,011     447     480     285     49     2,293     1,700  
Manufacturing   928     483     539     347     138     162     267     395     1,872     1,387  
Agriculture, Forestry, Fishing & Miscellaneous Activities   425     277     496     517     544     324     275     445     1,740     1,563  
Wholesale and Retail, Distribution and Leisure   626     249     582     939     272     388     260     536     1,740     2,112  
Property   424     513     410     600     378     1,458     498     1,212     1,710     3,782  
Business and Other Services   220     241     516     583     639     214     149     157     1,524     1,196  
Transport   86     98     121     148     208     285     98     111     513     641  
Construction   65     47     175     131     108     136     84     147     432     461  
Financial Institutions/Services   (59   29     69     391     62     345     302     325     374     1,090  
Other   53     75     69     91     119     72     88     29     329     268  
Total   4,015     2,172     3,291     4,758     2,915     3,865     2,306     3,405     12,527     14,200  
As a percentage of total balances   32%     15%     26%     34%     23%     27%     19%     24%     100%     100%  

Total watch list balances fell by 12% to £12.5bn principally reflecting the sale of the corporate business in Spain.

Total watch list balances to energy and water increased by 35% to £2,293m (2014: £1,700m), reflecting the increased stress in the oil and gas sector as a result of the oil price. Watch list balances in manufacturing increased due to increased stress in the automotive sector.

Analysis of debt securities

Debt securities include government securities held as part of the Group’s treasury management portfolio for liquidity and regulatory purposes, and are for use on a continuing basis in the activities of the Group.

The following tables provide an analysis of debt securities held by the Group for trading and investment purposes by issuer type, and where the Group held government securities exceeding 10% of shareholders’ equity.

Further information on the credit quality of debt securities is presented on pages 115 to 116. Further disclosure on sovereign exposures to selected Eurozone countries is presented on page 119.

Debt securities                    
   2015     2014  
As at 31 December   £m     %     £m     %  
Of which issued by:        
Governments and other public bodies   96,537     70.9     106,292     68.1  
Corporate and other issuers   26,166     19.2     29,557     19.0  
US agency   8,927     6.6     11,460     7.3  
Mortgage and asset backed securities   4,009     2.9     8,396     5.4  
Bank and building society certificates of deposit   598     0.4     279     0.2  
Total   136,237     100.0     155,984     100.0  
        
Government securities                    
As at 31 December             

 

 

2015

Fair value

£m

  

  

  

   

 
 

2014

Fair value
£m

  

  
  

US       26,119     32,096  
UK       22,372     28,938  
France       8,874     6,259  
Germany             6,619     7,801  

Note

aBalances represent on-balance sheet exposures and comprise PCB, Barclays Africa, Non-Core and Investment Bank.CRE companies.

 

  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 20152016 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  129


Analysis of derivatives (audited)

The tables below set out the fair value of the derivative assets, together with the value of those assets subject to enforceable counterparty netting arrangements for which the Group holds offsetting liabilities and eligible collateral.

Derivative assets                              
   2015     2014  
As at 31 December   
 
 
Balance
sheet assets
£m
  
  
  
   
 

 

Counterparty
netting

£m

  
  

  

   
 
 
Net
exposure
£m
  
  
  
   
 
 
Balance
sheet assets
£m
  
  
  
   
 

 

Counterparty
netting

£m

  
  

  

   
 
 
Net
exposure
£m
  
  
  
Foreign exchange   54,936     40,301     14,635     74,470     58,153     16,317  
Interest rate   231,426     190,513     40,913     309,946     253,820     56,126  
Credit derivatives   18,181     14,110     4,071     23,507     19,829     3,678  
Equity and stock index   13,799     8,358     5,441     14,844     10,523     4,321  
Commodity derivatives   9,367     6,300     3,067     17,142     11,306     5,836  
Total derivative assets   327,709     259,582     68,127     439,909     353,631     86,278  
Cash collateral held             34,918               44,047  
Net exposure less collateral             33,209               42,231  

Derivative asset exposures would be £295bn (2014: £398bn) lower than reported under IFRS if netting were permitted for assets and liabilities with the same counterparty, or for which the Group holds cash collateral. Similarly, derivative liabilities would be £295bn (2014: £397bn) lower reflecting counterparty netting and collateral placed. In addition, non-cash collateral of £7bn (2014: £8bn) was held in respect of derivative assets. The Group received collateral from clients in support of over the counter derivative transactions. These transactions are generally undertaken under International Swaps and Derivative Association (ISDA) agreements governed by either UK or New York law.

Exposure relating to derivatives, repurchase agreements, reverse repurchase agreements, stock borrowing and loan transactions is calculated using internal PRA approved models. These are used as the basis to assess both regulatory capital and capital appetite and are managed on a daily basis. The methodology encompasses all relevant factors to enable the current value to be calculated and the future value to be estimated, for example, current market rates, market volatility and legal documentation (including collateral rights).

The table below sets out the fair value and notional amounts of Over the Counter (OTC) derivative instruments by type of collateral arrangement.

Derivatives by collateral arrangement                              
   2015     2014  
   
 
 

 

Notional
contract
amount

£m

  
  
  

  

  

 

 

 

Fair value

 

  

   
 
 

 

Notional
contract
amount

£m

  
  
  

  

  

 

 

 

Fair value

 

  

      

 

Assets

£m

  

  

   

 

Liabilities

£m

  

  

     

 

Assets

£m

  

  

   

 

Liabilities

£m

  

  

Unilateral in favour of Barclays            
Foreign exchange   15,645     242     (308   15,067     191     (158
Interest rate   4,365     846     (65   5,826     940     (72
Credit derivatives   277     2     (7   226     3     (4
Equity and stock index   303     4     (146   310     3     (8
Commodity derivatives   905     150     (30   2,455     158     (120
Total unilateral in favour of Barclays   21,495     1,244     (556   23,884     1,295     (362
Unilateral in favour of counterparty            
Foreign exchange   50,343     810     (2,107   24,861     681     (2,713
Interest rate   121,231     4,436     (6,981   138,396     6,073     (8,751
Credit derivatives   140     3     (1   403     6     (19
Equity and stock index   827     100     (83   1,100     133     (137
Commodity derivatives   74          (3   2,881     359     (138
Total unilateral in favour of counterparty   172,615     5,349     (9,175   167,641     7,252     (11,758
Bilateral arrangement            
Foreign exchange   2,878,125     46,831     (50,899   3,350,366     67,496     (70,919
Interest rate   7,315,345     197,900     (188,293   9,032,753     263,812     (256,697
Credit derivatives   663,090     13,617     (11,985   887,041     18,290     (17,002
Equity and stock index   144,108     4,991     (8,297   162,615     6,033     (10,498
Commodity derivatives   36,794     3,164     (3,104   68,400     6,254     (6,377
Total bilateral arrangement   11,037,462     266,503     (262,578   13,501,175     361,885     (361,493
Uncollateralised derivatives            
Foreign exchange   271,819     7,008     (5,424   303,341     6,028     (5,452
Interest rate   193,565     6,091     (2,907   199,615     8,572     (3,524
Credit derivatives   7,881     467     (700   8,716     565     (800
Equity and stock index   6,672     2,204     (3,075   5,789     2,115     (2,406
Commodity derivatives   13,347     1,733     (1,667   26,099     2,806     (2,766
Total uncollateralised derivatives   493,284     17,503     (13,773   543,560     20,086     (14,948
Total OTC derivative assets/(liabilities)   11,724,856     290,599     (286,082   14,236,260     390,518     (388,561

130  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F131


Risk review

Risk performance

Credit risk

 

 

Analysis of loans on concession programmes

Re-age activity

Re-age is applicable only to revolving products where a minimum due payment is required. Re-age refers to returning of a delinquent account to up to date status without collecting the full arrears (principal, interest and fees).

The following are the principal portfolios in which re-age activity occurs.

Principal portfolios – core portfolios               
   New re-ages in the year     
 
New re-ages as proportion
of total outstanding
  
  
   

 

30 day arrears at

12 months since re-age

  

  

As at 31 December   
 
2015
£m
  
  
   
 
2014
£m
  
  
   

 

2015

%

  

  

   

 

2014

%

  

  

   

 

2015

%

  

  

   

 

2014

%

  

  

UK cards   117     163     0.7     1.0     40.5     43.4  
US cards   36     31     0.2     0.2     47.2     46.8  

 

UK cards: The reduction of new to re-ages in the year is due to changes in operational and qualification criteria resulting in reduced volume of accounts qualifying for re-age. Enhanced criteria has also led to lower 30 day arrears at 12 months after re-age.

 

US cards: The increase in new to re-ages is in line with portfolio growth, the ratio as a proportion of total outstanding remained stable at 0.2%.

 

Re-age activity in South Africa and Europe card portfolios are not considered to be material. For further detail on policy relating to the re-ageing of loans, please refer to page 368.

 

Forbearance

 

   

  

  

  

Analysis of forbearance programmes               
   Balances     Impairment allowance     Impairment coverage  
As at 31 December   
 
2015
£m
  
  
   
 
2014
£m
  
  
   

 

2015

£m

  

  

   

 

2014

£m

  

  

   

 

2015

%

  

  

   

 

2014

%

  

  

Personal and Corporate Bankinga   589     931     33     63     5.6     6.8  
Africa Banking   209     299     29     45     13.8     15.1  
Barclaycard   729     972     247     394     33.9     40.5  
Barclays Core   1,527     2,202     309     502     20.2     22.8  
Barclays Non-Core   246     419     20     49     8.3     11.7  
Total retail   1,773     2,621     329     551     18.5     21.0  
Investment Bank   210     106     4     10     2.1     9.4  
Personal and Corporate Banking   1,764     1,590     253     225     14.3     14.2  
Africa Banking   228     132     17     7     7.5     5.3  
Barclays Core   2,202     1,828     274     242     12.4     13.2  
Barclays Non-Core   230     651     117     271     50.7     41.6  
Total wholesale   2,432     2,479     391     513     16.1     20.7  
Group total   4,205     5,100     720     1,064     17.1     20.9  

Balances on forbearance programmes reduced 18% to £4.2bn (2014: £5.1bn) driven primarily by; (i) fewer customers requiring forbearance as macroeconomic conditions improved; and (ii) the ongoing impact of enhanced qualification criteria. The decrease in impairment coverage to 17.1% (2014: 20.9%) reflected coverage reduction across both the wholesale and retail portfolios.

Retail balances on forbearance reduced by 32% to £1.8bn and reflected a decrease across all businesses.

§PCB:Migration of Business Banking from Retail to Corporate amounting to £239m.

§Barclaycard:Primarily due to multiple asset sales through the year and updated entry criteria for forbearance programmes, which reduced inflows in the UK cards portfolio.

§Africa Banking:Updated qualifying criteria in South African home loans and depreciation of the Rand.

Wholesale balances on forbearance reduced by 2% to £2.4bn as the removal of assets following the sale of the Spanish corporate business was partially offset by the migration of Business Banking forborne assets into the UK Corporate Bank. Excluding these movements, the overall level of forborne balances was broadly stable.

See over for more information on these portfolios.

Note

aThe forbearance definition has been tightened during the year based on observed performance to more accurately reflect signs of financial distress. As a result an element of the MCA population has been reclassified as high risk instead of forbearance. 2014 forbearance balances have been restated for a like for like comparison.

Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  131


Retail forbearance programmes

Forbearance on the Group’s principal retail portfolios in the UK, US and South Africa is presented below. The principal portfolios listed below account for 70% (2014: 83%) of total retail forbearance balances.

 Analysis of key portfolios in forbearance programmes  
   Balances on forbearance programmes   Marked   Marked   Impairment     
           Of which:   to market   to market   allowances   Total 
               Past due of which:   LTV of   LTV of   marked   balances on 
                       forbearance   forbearance   against   forbearance 
       % of gross           91 or more   balances:   balances:   balances on   programmes 
       loans and       1-90 days   days past   balance   valuation   forbearance   coverage 
   Total   advances   Up-to-date   past due   due   weighted   weighted   programmes   ratio 
    £m     %     £m     £m     £m     %     %     £m     %  
As at 31 December 2015                  
Home loans                  
PCB – UKa   445     0.3     211     177     57     48.0     34.1     4     0.8  
Africa Banking – South Africa   125     1.3     50     64     11     67.5     53.6     7     5.5  
Credit cards                  
UK   448     2.4     414     31     3     n/a     n/a     159     35.5  
US   133     0.8     92     30     11     n/a     n/a     30     22.7  
Unsecured loans                  
UK   85     1.6     59     22     3     n/a     n/a     21     24.6  
As at 31 December 2014                  
Home loans                  
PCB – UK   522     0.4     257     206     59     52.1     36.8     3     0.6  
Africa Banking – South Africa   207     1.8     95     99     13     71.1     57.4     13     6.5  
Credit cards                  
UK   724     4.3     679     41     4     n/a     n/a     324     44.8  
US   98     0.7     67     22     9     n/a     n/a     22     22.1  
Unsecured loans                  
UK   121     2.4     83     33     5     n/a     n/a     25     20.9  

Loans in forbearance in the principal home loans portfolios decreased 22% to £570m (2014: £729m).

§PCB – UK (home loans): Balances under forbearance decreased 15% to £445m, principally due to an update to the entry criteria, and fewer customers requiring forbearance in a stable macroeconomic environment. Total past due balances reduced 12% to £234m in line with falling total balances under forbearance.

§Africa Banking – South Africa (home loans): Reduction in forbearance balances to £125m (2014: £207m) was due to enhanced qualification criteria which resulted in a more appropriate and sustainable programme for customers, and depreciation of the Rand.

Forbearance balances on principal credit cards, overdrafts and unsecured loan portfolios decreased by 29% to £666m.

§UK Cards: The reduction in forbearance balances was driven by the implementation of enhanced qualification criteria and asset sales. Balances in arrears and coverage ratio reduced in line with balance reduction.

§US Cards: The increase in balances on forbearance programmes was in line with asset growth on the US portfolio. Balances in arrears remained low as a proportion of the total and coverage was stable.

Forbearance by type  
   Home loans – Barclays Core portfolios  
   UK     South Africa  
As at 31 December   
 
2015
£m
  
  
   
 
2014
£m
  
  
   
 
2015
£m
  
  
   
 
2014
£m
  
  
Interest only conversion   94     100            
Interest rate reduction             1     1  
Payment concession   103     106     97     161  
Term extension   248     316     28     45  
Total   445     522     125     207  

Note

aThe forbearance definition has been tightened during the year based on observed performance to more accurately reflect signs of financial distress. As a result, an element of the MCA population has been reclassified as high-risk instead of forbearance. 2014 forbearance balances have been restated for a like for like comparison. (2014 MCA balances: £1.3bn).

132  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F


Risk review

Risk performance

Credit risk

 Forbearance by type                              
   Credit cards and unsecured loans – Barclays Core portfolios  
   UK cards     US cards     UK personal loans  
As at 31 December   
 
2015
£m
  
  
   
 
2014
£m
  
  
   

 

2015

£m

  

  

   
 
2014
£m
  
  
   
 
2015
£m
  
  
   
 
2014
£m
  
  
Payment concession   21     31                      
Term extension                       6     28  
Fully amortising             69     58    ��79     93  
Repayment plana   427     693     64     40            
Total   448     724     133     98     85     121  

Payment concessions reduced to £21m (2014: £31m) in UK cards following its withdrawal from forbearance offering in 2014.

Repayment plan balances in UK cards decreased to £427m (2014: £693m) driven by a debt sale and the continued reduction in new repayment plan volumes, following the implementation of enhanced qualification criteria in 2012.

Wholesale forbearance programmes

The tables below detail balance information for wholesale forbearance cases.

 Analysis of wholesale balances in forbearance programmes                           
   Balances on forbearance programmes   Impairment     
           Of which:   allowances   Total 
    
 
 
Total
balances
£m
  
  
  
   
 
 
 
% of gross
loans and
advances
%
  
  
  
  
   
 
 
Performing
balances
£m
  
  
  
   
 
 
 
Impaired
up-to-date
balances
£m
  
  
  
  
   
 
 
 
 
Balances
between 1
and 90 days
past due
£m
  
  
  
  
  
  

 

 

 

 

 

Balances

91 days

or more

past due

£m

  

  

  

  

  

   

 

 

 

 

 

marked

against

balances on

forbearance

programmes

£m

  

  

  

  

  

  

   

 

 

 

 

 

balances on

forbearance

programmes

coverage

ratio

%

  

  

  

  

  

  

As at 31 December 2015                
Investment Bank   210     0.2     81          100     29     4     2.1  
Personal & Corporate Banking   1,764     2.0     578     661     93     432     253     14.3  
Africa Banking   228     1.5     103     4          121     17     7.5  
Total Barclays Core   2,202     1.1     762     665     193     582     274     12.4  
Barclays Non-Core   229     0.7     38     103     2     87     117     50.7  
Group   2,431     1.0     800     768     195     669     391     16.1  
As at 31 December 2014                
Investment Bank   106     0.1     52          22     32     10     9.4  
Personal & Corporate Banking   1,590     2.0     574     587     38     391     225     14.1  
Africa Banking   132     0.8     30     47     13     42     7     5.0  
Total Barclays Core   1,828     0.9     656     634     73     465     242     13.2  
Barclays Non-Core   651     1.5     36     336     41     238     271     41.6  
Group   2,479     1.0     692     970     114     703     513     20.7  

Wholesale forbearance reporting split by exposure class                    
    
 
Corporate
£m
  
  
   
 
 
Personal
and trusts
£m
  
  
  
   
 
Other
£m
  
  
   
 
Total
£m
  
  
As at 31 December 2015        
Restructure: reduced contractual cash flows   158               158  
Restructure: maturity date extension   716     24     62     801  
Restructure: changed cash flow profile (other than extension)   317     1          318  
Restructure: payment other than cash   12               12  
Change in security   7     1          8  
Adjustments or non-enforcement of covenants   295     92          387  
Other (e.g. capital repayment holiday; restructure pending)   538     208          746  
Total   2,043     326     62     2,431  
As at 31 December 2014        
Restructure: reduced contractual cash flows   180               180  
Restructure: maturity date extension   600     79     4     683  
Restructure: changed cash flow profile (other than extension)   335     25     4     364  
Restructure: payment other than cash   7     9          16  
Change in security   17               17  
Adjustments or non-enforcement of covenants   383     53          436  
Other (e.g. capital repayment holiday; restructure pending)   607     175     1     783  
Total   2,129     341     9     2,479  

Note

aRepayment plan represents a reduction to the minimum payment due requirements and interest rate.

Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  133


 Wholesale forbearance reporting split by business unit                       
    
 
 
 
Personal &
Corporate
Banking
£m
  
  
  
  
   
 

 

Investment
Bank

£m

  
  

  

   
 

 

Africa
Banking

£m

  
  

  

   
 

 

Barclays
Non-Core

£m

  
  

  

  

Total

£m

As at 31 December 2015          
Restructure: reduced contractual cash flows   131          4     23    158
Restructure: maturity date extension   370     162     153     116    801
Restructure: changed cash flow profile (other than extension)   248     2     68         318
Restructure: payment other than cash   1     11              12
Change in security   8                   8
Adjustments or non-enforcements of covenants   338     2          47    387
Other (e.g. capital repayment holiday; restructure pending)   668     33     3     43    747
Total   1,764     210     228     229    2,431
As at 31 December 2014          
Restructure: reduced contractual cash flows   125          1     54    181
Restructure: maturity date extension   314     72     78     219    683
Restructure: changed cash flow profile (other than extension)   178     2     49     135    364
Restructure: payment other than cash   13               3    16
Change in security   11               6    17
Adjustments or non-enforcements of covenants   329               107    436
Other (e.g. capital repayment holiday; restructure pending)   620     32     4     127    783
Total   1,589     106     134     651    2,479

Wholesale forbearance decreased 2% to £2.4bn with an impairment coverage ratio of 16.1% (2014: 20.7%). Personal & Corporate Banking accounted for the largest portion with 73% (2014: 64%) of total balances held as forbearance.

Overall forbearance balances in Core portfolios rose by 20% to £2.2bn, driven primarily by the migration of forborne Business Banking assets into the PCB UK Corporate Banking portfolio from PCB Retail.

Non-Core balances remain focused on the European corporate portfolios and reduced by 65% to £230m following the sale of the Spanish corporate business.

 Wholesale forbearance flows in 2015a

Balance

£m


As at 1 January 20152,479
Added to forbearanceb1,302
Removed from forbearance (credit improvement)(190
Fully or partially repaid and other movementsc(936
Written off/moved to recoveries(224
As at 31 December 20152,431

Analysis of problem loans

Impaired loans and loansLoans that are past due or assessed as impaired within this section are reflected in the balance sheet credit quality tables on page 116122 as being Higher Risk.

Age analysis of loans and advances that are past due but not impaired (audited)

The following table presents an age analysis of loans and advances that are past due but not impaired. Loans that are past due but not impaired consist predominantly of wholesale loans that are past due but individually assessed as not being impaired. These loans although individually assessed as unimpaired, may carry an unidentified impairment provision.

 

Loans and advances past due but not impaired (audited)                                    
   


Past due
up to 1
month

£m

 
 
 

 

   

Past due

1-2

months

£m

 

 

 

 

   

Past due

2-3

months

£m

 

 

 

 

   

Past due
3-6

months

£m

 
 

 

 

   


Past due
6 months
and over
£m
 
 
 
 
   

Total

£m

 

 

As at 31 December 2016

            

Loans and advances designated at fair value

   29    8    18        16    71 

Home loans

   1            33    31    65 

Credit cards, unsecured and other retail lending

   2        2    11    77    92 

Corporate loans

   6,962    1,235    149    178    354    8,878 

Total

   6,994    1,243    169    222    478    9,106 
   
 
 
Past due up
to 1 month
£m
  
  
  
   
 
 
Past due
1-2 months
£m
  
  
  
   
 
 
Past due
2-3 months
£m
  
  
  
   
 
 
Past due
3-6 months
£m
  
  
  
   
 
 
 
Past due
6 months
and over
£m
  
  
  
  
   
 
Total
£m
  
  
As at 31 December 2015                        
Loans and advances designated at fair value   70     14               209     293     70    14            209    293 
Home loans   22     8     6     24     80     140     22    8    6    24    80    140 
Credit cards, unsecured and other retail lending   288     14     15     93     120     530     288    14    15��   93    120    530 
Corporate loans   5,862     897     207     226     280     7,472     5,862    897    207    226    280    7,472 
Total   6,242     933     228     343     689     8,435     6,242    933    228    343    689    8,435 
As at 31 December 2014            
Loans and advances designated at fair value   594     48     1          33     676  
Home loans   46     6     17     135     230     434  
Credit cards, unsecured and other retail lending   64     29     14     139     194     440  
Corporate loansd   5,251     630     874     190     387     7,332  
Total   5,955     713     906     464     844     8,882  

NotesCorporate loans past due up to 1 month increased £1.1bn to £7.0bn primarily driven by the appreciation of average USD against GBP.

aRefer to sustainability of loans under forbearance in Barclays PLC 2015 Pillar 3 Report for more information.
bIncludes £239m transitioned to wholesale forbearance categories within the UK SME Businesses previously in Retail.
cIncludes £321m removed following the sale of the Non-Core Business in Spain.
dCorporate loan balances past due up to 1 month have been revised down by £1,953m to better reflect the ageing of the loans.

Analysis of loans and advances assessed as impaired (audited)

The following table presents an analysis of loans and advances into those collectively or individually assessed as impaired. The table includes an age analysis for loans and advances collectively assessed as impaired.

Loans that are collectively assessed as impaired consist predominantly of retail loans that are one day or more past due for which a collective allowance is raised. Wholesale loans that are past due, individually assessed as unimpaired, but which carry an unidentified impairment provision, are excluded from this category.

Loans that are individually assessed as impaired consist predominantly of wholesale loans that are past due and for which an individual allowance has been raised.

Home loans, unsecured loans and credit card receivables that are subject to forbearance in the retail portfolios are included within the collectively assessed for impairment category. Where wholesale loans under forbearance have been impaired, these form part of individually assessed impaired loans.

Loans and advances assessed as impaired (audited)

 

                          
    


Past due
up to
1 month

£m

 
 
 

 

   


Past due
1-2
months

£m

 
 
 

 

   


Past due
2-3
months

£m

 
 
 

 

   


Past due
3-6
months

£m

 
 
 

 

 

Past due 6 months and over

£m

 

Total collectively assessed

£m

 

Individually assessed for impairment

£m

   

Total

£m

 

 

As at 31 December 2016

             

Home loans

   2,866    795    201    298  452 4,612 820   5,432 

Credit cards, unsecured and other retail lending

   1,135    354    250    516  1,702 3,957 492   4,449 

Corporate loans

   288    53    35    72  131 579 1,580   2,159 

Total

   4,289    1,202    486    886  2,285 9,148 2,892   12,040 

As at 31 December 2015

             

Home loans

   3,672    1,036    278    364  812 6,162 648   6,810 

Credit cards, unsecured and other retail lending

   1,241    691    284    541  1,792 4,549 964   5,513 

Corporate loans

   251    76    45    76  96 544 1,786   2,330 

Total

   5,164    1,803    607    981  2,700 11,255 3,398   14,653 

The decrease in loans collectively assessed as impaired to £9.1bn (2015: £11.3bn) predominantly relates to BAGL balances now held for sale.

 

134132  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 20152016 Annual Report on Form 20-F  


Risk review

Risk performance

Credit risk

Impaired loans

The following table represents an analysis of impaired loans in line with the disclosure requirements from the Enhanced Disclosure Taskforce. For further information on definitions of impaired loans refer to the identifying potential credit risk loans section of Barclays PLC 2015 Pillar 3 Report.

Movement in impaired loans                                
   
 

 

At beginning
of year

£m

  
  

  

  
 

 

 

 

Classified as
impaired

during the

year

£m

  
  

  

  

  

  
 
 
 
 

 

Transferred
to not
impaired
during the
year

£m

  
  
  
  
  

  

  

 

Repayments

£m

  

  

  

 

 

Amounts

written off

£m

  

  

  

  
 
 
 
Acquisitions
and
disposals
£m
  
  
  
  
  
 
 
 
Exchange
and other
adjustmentsa
£m
  
  
  
  
  
 
 
Balance at
31 December
£m
  
  
  
2015        
Home loans  1,503    602    (192  (272  (97      (207  1,337  
Credit cards, unsecured and other retail lending  2,613    2,226    (112  (269  (1,873      (385  2,200  
Corporate loans  2,683    1,032    (558  (208  (333  (43  (475  2,098  
Total impaired loans  6,799    3,860    (862  (749  (2,303  (43  (1,067  5,635  
2014        
Home loans  1,983    762    (352  (412  (161      (317  1,503  
Credit cards, unsecured and other retail lending  3,385    2,089    (108  (361  (1,885      (507  2,613  
Corporate loans  5,142    1,167    (729  (658  (1,211      (1,028  2,683  
Total impaired loans  10,510    4,018    (1,189  (1,431  (3,257      (1,852  6,799  

 

For information on restructured loans refer to disclosures on forbearance on pages 131 to 134.

 

Analysis of loans and advances assessed as impaired (audited)

The following table presents an age analysis of loans and advances collectively impaired and total individually impaired loans.

 

  

  

  

 Loans and advances assessed as impaired (audited)                  
   
 
 
Past due up
to 1 month
£m
  
  
  
  
 
 
Past due
1-2 months
£m
  
  
  
  
 
 
Past due
2-3 months
£m
  
  
  
  
 
 
Past due
3-6 months
£m
  
  
�� 
  
 
 
 
Past due
6 months
and over
£m
  
  
  
  
  

 

Total

£m

  

  

  
 
 
 
Individually
assessed for
impairment
£m
  
  
  
  
  

 

Total

£m

  

  

As at 31 December 2015        
Home loans  3,672    1,036    278    364    812    6,162    648    6,810  
Credit cards, unsecured and other retail lending  1,241    691    284    541    1,792    4,549    964    5,513  
Corporate loans  251    76    45    76    96    544    1,786    2,330  
Total  5,164    1,803    607    981    2,700    11,255    3,398    14,653  
As at 31 December 2014        
Home loans  5,155    1,424    335    470    1,050    8,434    455    8,889  
Credit cards, unsecured and other retail lending  1,196    738    299    532    2,225    4,990    800    5,790  
Corporate loans  284    30    24    25    148    511    2,679    3,190  
Total  6,635    2,192    658    1,027    3,423    13,935    3,934    17,869  

The decrease in collectively impaired loans to £11.3bn (2014: £13.9bn) predominantly relates to home loans within the past due up to 1 month category. MCA forbearance balances previously allocated into this category (2014 MCA balances: £1.3bn) no longer form part of the forbearance programme nor collectively assessed for impairment.

Note

aExchange and other adjustments includes the reclassification of the Portuguese loans now held for sale and the Spanish loans held for sale in 2014.

Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  135


        

        

        

 

 

Potential credit risk loans (PCRLs) and coverage ratios

The Group reports potentially and actually impaired loans as PCRLs. PCRLs comprise two categories of loans: credit risk loans (CRLs) and potential problem loans (PPLs). For further information on definitions

CRLs comprise three classes of CRLs and PPLs refer to the identifying potential credit risk loans section of the Barclays PLC 2015 Pillar 3 Report.loans:

 Potential credit risk loans and coverage ratios by business                                          
     CRLs       PPLs       PCRLs  
As at 31 December     

 

2015

£m

  

  

     

 

2014

£m

  

  

     
 
2015
£m
  
  
     
 
2014
£m
  
  
     
 
2015
£m
  
  
     

 

2014

£m

  

  

Personal & Corporate Bankinga     1,591       1,733       263       264       1,854       1,997  
Africa Banking     859       1,093       154       161       1,013       1,254  
Barclaycard     1,601       1,765       249       227       1,850       1,992  
Barclays Core     4,051       4,591       666       652       4,717       5,243  
Barclays Non-Core     845       1,209       13       26       858       1,234  
Total Group retail     4,896       5,800       679       678       5,575       6,477  
Investment Bank     241       71       450       107       691       178  
Personal & Corporate Bankinga     1,794       2,112       567       614       2,361       2,726  
Africa Banking     541       665       245       94       786       759  
Barclays Core     2,576       2,848       1,262       815       3,838       3,663  
Barclays Non-Core     345       841       109       119       454       960  
Total Group wholesale     2,921       3,689       1,371       934       4,292       4,623  
Group total     7,817       9,489       2,050       1,612       9,867       11,100  
                        
      Impairment allowance       CRL coverage       PCRL coverage  
As at 31 December     

 

2015

£m

  

  

     

 

2014

£m

  

  

     
 
2015
%
  
  
     
 
2014
%
  
  
     
 
2015
%
  
  
     

 

2014

%

  

  

Personal & Corporate Bankinga,b     713       766       44.8       44.2       38.5       38.4  
Africa Banking     539       681       62.7       62.3       53.2       54.3  
Barclaycard     1,835       1,815       114.6       102.8       99.2       91.1  
Barclays Core     3,087       3,262       76.2       71.1       65.4       62.2  
Barclays Non-Core     369       428       43.7       35.4       43.0       34.7  
Total Group retail     3,456       3,690       70.6       63.6       62.0       57.0  
Investment Bank     83       44       34.4       62.0       12.0       24.7  
Personal & Corporate Bankinga     914       873       50.9       41.3       38.7       32.0  
Africa Banking     235       246       43.4       37.0       29.9       32.4  
Barclays Core     1,232       1,163       47.8       40.8       32.1       31.7  
Barclays Non-Core     233       602       67.5       71.6       51.3       62.7  
Total Group wholesale     1,465       1,765       50.2       47.8       34.1       38.2  
Group total     4,921       5,455       63.0       57.5       49.9       49.1  
§impaired loans: comprises loans where an individually identified impairment allowance has been raised. This category also includes all retail loans that have been transferred to a recovery book. See page 134 for further analysis of impaired loans

 

§ accruing past due 90 days or more: comprises loans that are 90 days or more past due with respect to principal or interest

§impaired and restructured loans: comprises loans not included above where, for economic or legal reasons related to the debtor’s financial difficulties, a concession has been granted to the debtor that would not otherwise be considered. For information on restructured loans refer to disclosures on forbearance on pages 134 to 137.

PPLs are loans that are currently complying with repayment terms but where serious doubt exists as to the ability of the borrower to continue to comply with such terms in the near future. If the credit quality of wholesale loan on a watchlist deteriorates to the highest category, or a retail loan deteriorates to delinquency cycle 2 (typically when past due 60 to 90 days), consideration is given to including it within the PPL category.

Potential credit risk loans and coverage ratios by business

                              
   CRLs    PPLs    PCRLs 

As at 31 December

   

2016

£m

 

 

   

2015

£m

 

 

   

2016

£m

 

 

   

2015

£m

 

 

   

2016

£m

 

 

   

2015

£m

 

 

Barclays UK

   2,044    2,238    310    382    2,354    2,620 

Barclays International

   1,249    863    192    117    1,441    980 

Barclays Core

   3,293    3,101    502    499    3,795    3,600 

BarclaysNon-Core

   838    936    11    26    849    962 

Total retail

   4,131    4,037    513    525    4,644    4,562 
                               

Barclays UK

   591    637    94    127    685    764 

Barclays International

   1,470    1,330    1,530    877    3,000    2,207 

Barclays Core

   2,061    1,967    1,624    1,004    3,685    2,971 

BarclaysNon-Core

   299    441    59    122    358    563 

Total wholesale

   2,360    2,408    1,683    1,126    4,043    3,534 

Total retail and wholesale

   6,491    6,445    2,196    1,651    8,687    8,096 

BAGL

       1,372        399        1,771 

Group total

   6,491    7,817    2,196    2,050    8,687    9,867 
            
    Impairment allowance        CRL coverage      PCRL coverage     

As at 31 December

   

2016

£m

 

 

   

2015

£m

 

 

   
2016
%
 
 
   
2015
%
 
 
   
2016
%
 
 
   
2015
%
 
 

Barclays UK

   1,519    1,556    74.3    69.5    64.5    59.4 

Barclays International

   1,492    897    119.5    103.9    103.5    91.5 

Barclays Core

   3,011    2,453    91.4    79.1    79.3    68.1 

BarclaysNon-Core

   385    464    45.9    49.6    45.3    48.2 

Total retail

   3,396    2,917    82.2    72.3    73.1    63.9 
                               

Barclays UK

   282    312    47.7    49.0    41.2    40.8 

Barclays International

   748    617    50.9    46.4    24.9    28.0 

Barclays Core

   1,030    929    50.0    47.2    28.0    31.3 

BarclaysNon-Core

   194    336    64.9    76.2    54.2    59.7 

Total wholesale

   1,224    1,265    51.9    52.5    30.3    35.8 

Total retail and wholesale

   4,620    4,182    71.2    64.9    53.2    51.7 

BAGL

       739        53.9        41.7 

Group total

   4,620    4,921    71.2    63.0    53.2    49.9 

§Excluding BAGL balances, CRLs decreased 17.6% to £7.8bn,remained stable at £6.5bn (2015: £6.4bn) with the Group’s CRL coverage ratio increasing to 63.0% (2014: 57.5%71% (2015: 65%). mainly within retail portfolios.

 

§ CRLs inThe CRL coverage ratio for retail portfolios have decreased 15.6%increased to £4.9bn. This is82% (2015: 72%) primarily driven by Non-Core as a resultdue to increased impairment allowances following the management review of the sale of the Portuguese businessUK and rundown of assets in Europe. Another driver of the decrease is the Africa retail portfolios reducing as a result of improved recoveries. Retail CRL coverage increased to 70.6% (2014: 63.6%), due to the decrease in the retail CRL portfolio.US cards portfolio impairment modelling.

 

§ Wholesale CRL portfolios decreased by 20.8%PPLs increased to £2.9bn. This is£2.2bn (2015: £1.7bn) primarily within Barclays International wholesale portfolios. The increase was driven by reductions in Non-Core asexposures within the Corporate and Investment bank across a resultnumber of the sale of the Portuguese corporate loansindustries.

Barclays PLC and continued rundown of the Non-Core InvestmentBarclays Bank portfolio; and within PCBPLC 2016 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  133


Risk review

Risk performance

Credit risk

Impaired loans

The following table represents an analysis of impaired loans in line with the disclosure recommended by the Enhanced Disclosure Taskforce. Impaired loans are a subcomponent of CRLs (defined on page 133) and comprise loans where an individually identified impairment allowance has been raised. This category also includes all retail loans that have been transferred to a recovery book. For the majority of products, transfer to a recovery book occurs for loans that are past due over 6 months unless a forbearance agreement is agreed. Earlier transfer points may occur depending on specific circumstances. Impaired loans may include loans that are still performing, fully collateralised loans or where indebtedness has already been written down to the expected realisable value.

 Movement in impaired loans                                        
    

At beginning
of year

£m

 
 

 

   


Classified
as impaired
during

the year

£m

 
 
 

 

 

   



Transferred
to not
impaired
during

the year

£m

 
 
 
 

 

 

   
Repayments
£m
 
 
   

Amounts
written off
£m
 
 
 
   


Acquisitions
and
disposals
£m
 
 
 
 
   

Exchange
and other
adjustments

£m

 
 
a 

 

   

Balance at
31 December
£m
 
 
 
 2016                
 Home loans   1,337    308    (150   (171   (19       (165   1,140 

Credit cards, unsecured and other retail lending

   2,200    1,761    (17   (136   (1,605   (92   (407   1,704 
 Corporate loans   2,098    984    (427   (220   (331   (15   (319   1,770 
 Total impaired loans   5,635    3,053    (594   (527   (1,955   (107   (891   4,614 
 2015                
 Home loans   1,503    602    (192   (272   (97       (207   1,337 

Credit cards, unsecured and other retail lending

   2,613    2,226    (112   (269   (1,873       (385   2,200 
 Corporate loans   2,683    1,032    (558   (208   (333   (43   (475   2,098 
 Total impaired loans   6,799    3,860    (862   (749   (2,303   (43   (1,067   5,635 
Forbearance               

Forbearance measures consist of concessions towards a debtor that is experiencing or about to experience difficulties in meeting their financial commitments (“financial difficulties”).

 

 

 Analysis of forbearance programmes 
       Balances    Impairment allowance    Impairment coverage 
 As at 31 December             

2016

£m

 

 

   

2015

£m

 

 

   

2016

£m

 

 

   

2015

£m

 

 

   

2016

%

 

 

   

2015

%

 

 

 Barclays UK       926    1,036    237    191    25.6    18.4 
 Barclays International             243    185    57    46    23.5    24.9 
 Barclays Core       1,169    1,221    294    237    25.1    19.4 
 BarclaysNon-Core             211    247    9    20    4.3    8.1 
 Total retail             1,380    1,468    303    257    22.0    17.5 
 Barclays UK       589    412    62    32    10.5    7.8 
 Barclays International             2,044    1,333    257    196    12.6    14.7 
 Barclays Core       2,633    1,745    319    228    12.1    13.1 
 BarclaysNon-Core             269    459    50    146    18.5    31.8 
 Total wholesale             2,902    2,204    369    374    12.7    17.0 
 Group totalb             4,282    3,672    672    631    15.7    17.2 

Balances on forbearance programmes increased 17% driven by an increase in forborne loans in Barclays International.

Retail balances on forbearance programmes reduced 6% to £1.4bn and reflected a decrease in Barclays UK and BarclaysNon-Core offset by an increase in Barclays International portfolios.

§Barclays UK: The reduction was driven by UK cards portfolio, where balances on forbearance plans are lower due to the improved economic environment. Investment Bank CRLs increased £170m to £241m predominantly relating toapplication of an updated entry criteria, as well as asset sales.

§Barclays International: The increase in US cards forbearance was in line with portfolio growth and appreciation of the Oil and Gas sector. Wholesale CRL coverage increased to 50.2% (2014: 47.8%), driven by the decrease in CRLs in 2015.US Dollar against Sterling.

Wholesale balances on forbearance increased by 32% to £2.9bn due to an increase in the Barclays Core portfolio where forbearance programmes increased mainly in performing segments of the corporate portfolio due to a change in methodology, extending the previously narrow scope of forbearance in relation to adjustment onnon-enforcement of convenants. This change has been applied consistently across the corporate portfolio with the increase primarily at the higher end of the corporate portfolio where there is a greater tendency for exposure to be under covenants.

 

 

Notes

aUK Business Banking has been reclassified from RetailExchange and other adjustments for 2016 includes the reclassification of £1,015m related to Wholesale in line with howBAGL balances now held for sale offset by currency movements due to the business is now managed.appreciation of average US Dollar and Euro against Sterling.
b2014 PCB CRLs, PPLsExcludes BAGL balances now held for sale.

134  |  Barclays PLC and PCRLsBarclays Bank PLC 2016 Annual Report on Form 20-F


Retail forbearance programmes

Forbearance on the Group’s principal retail portfolios in the US and UK is presented below. The principal portfolios listed below account for 73% (2015: 76%) of total retail forbearance balances.

 Analysis of key portfolios in forbearance programmes 
   Balances on forbearance programmes   Marked   Marked   Impairment     
           Of which:   to market   to market   allowances   Total 
               Past due of which:   LTV of   LTV of   marked   balances on 
                       forbearance   forbearance   against   forbearance 
       % of gross           91 or   balances:   balances:   balances on   programmes 
       loans and       1-90 days   more days   balance   valuation   forbearance   coverage 
   Total   advances   Up-to-date   past due   past due   weighted   weighted   programmes   ratio 
    £m    %    £m    £m    £m    %    %    £m    % 
 As at 31 December 2016                  
 Barclays UK                  
 UK home loans   390    0.3    188    149    53    44.7    31.3    3    0.8 
 UK cards           337    1.9    255    59    23    n/a    n/a    185    54.9 
 UK personal loans   94    1.5    58    26    10    n/a    n/a    38    40.4 
 Barclays International                  
 US cards   186    0.8    139    35    12    n/a    n/a    38    20.4 
 As at 31 December 2015                  
 Barclays UK                  
 UK home loans   445    0.3    211    177    57    48.0    34.1    4    0.8 
 UK cards   448    2.4    414    31    3    n/a    n/a    159    35.5 
 UK personal loans   85    1.6    60    22    3    n/a    n/a    21    24.6 
 Barclays International                  
 US cards   133    0.8    92    30    11    n/a    n/a    30    22.7 

§UK home loans:Balances under forbearance decreased by 12% to £390m, principally due to fewer customers requiring forbearance in a stable macroeconomic environment. Total past due balances reduced by 14% to £202m in line with falling total balances under forbearance.

§UK cards:Balances on forbearance plans have been revised by £151m, £121m and £273m respectivelyreduced due to an updated entry criteria, as well as asset sales. The forbearance impairment coverage ratio has increased due to implementation of updated impairment methodology.

§UK personal loans:Increased forbearance coverage ratio reflects the changes in methodology to align methodologywith the impairment policy.

§US cards: Balances are higher in line with portfolio growth while the balances in arrears remain stable.Past-due balances as a proportion of total balances have reduced, which reflects in the lower forbearance impairment coverage ratio.

Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2016 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  135


Risk review

Risk performance

Credit risk

 Forbearance by type 
   Barclays UK    Barclays International 
   UK home loans    UK cards    UK personal loans    US cards 
 As at 31 December   

2016

£m

 

 

   

2015

£m

 

 

   

2016

£m

 

 

     

2015

£m

 

 

   

2016

£m

 

 

     

2015

£m

 

 

    

2016

£m

 

 

  

2015

£m

 

 

 Payment concession   96    103    45      21                  
 Interest only conversion   84    94                            
 Term extension   210    248              16      6        
 Fully amortising                     65      79    97   69 
 Repayment plana           218      427    13          89   64 
 Interest rate concession           74                         
 Total   390    445    337      448    94      85     186   133 
Payment concessions in UK cards increased to £45m (2015: £21m), including an additional £31m identified in second half of the year following a review of policy adherence. These balances have been appropriately provisioned. 
Repayment plan balances in UK cards decreased to £218m (2015: £427m) driven by an asset sale and the continued reduction in new repayment plan volumes. Following review of policy adherence, additional interest rate concession for UK cards (£74m) and repayment plan for UK personal loans (£13m) were identified in the year. 
Wholesale forbearance programmes 

The tables below detail balance information for wholesale forbearance cases.

 

 

 Analysis of wholesale balances in forbearance programmesb                              
   Balances on forbearance programmes    Impairment    
           Of which:    allowances  Total 
    

Total
balances
£m
 
 
 
   


% of gross
loans and
advances
%
 
 
 
 
   

Performing
balances
£m
 
 
 
     


Impaired
up-to-date
balances
£m
 
 
 
 
   



Balances
between 1
and 90 days
past due
£m
 
 
 
 
 
     



Balances
91 days
or more
past due
£m
 
 
 
 
 
    




marked
against
balances on
forbearance
programmes
£m
 
 
 
 
 
 
  




balances on
forbearance
programmes
coverage
ratio

%

 
 
 
 
 

 

 As at 31 December 2016                   
 Barclays UK   589    3.9    187      93    78      231    62   10.5 
 Barclays International   2,044    1.1    1,285      567    33      159     257   12.6 
 Total Barclays Core   2,633    1.3    1,472      660    111      390     319   12.1 
 BarclaysNon-Core   269    0.6    57      44    25      143     50   18.6 
 Total   2,902    1.2    1,529      704    136      533     369   12.7 
 As at 31 December 2015                   
 Barclays UK   412    2.5    153      48    30      181    32   7.8 
 Barclays International   1,333    0.8    614      423    61      235     196   14.7 
 Total Barclays Core   1,745    1.0    767      471    91      416     228   13.1 
 BarclaysNon-Core   459    1.1    118      101    5      235     146   31.8 
 Total   2,204    1.0    885      572    96      651     374   17.0 

Notes

aRepayment plan represents a reduction to the minimum payment due requirements and interest rate.
b2015 figures restated due to restructuring of portfolio from Barclays International to Non-Core Figures exclude BAGL balances now held for determining arrears categories with other Home Finance risk disclosures.sale.

 

136  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 20152016 Annual Report on Form 20-F  


 Wholesale forbearance reporting split by exposure class                      
    
Corporate
£m
 
 
   

Personal and
trusts

£m

 
 

 

   

Other

£m

 

 

     
Total
£m
 
 
 As at 31 December 2016          
 Restructure: reduced contractual cash flows   32              32 
 Restructure: maturity date extension   411    107          518 
 Restructure: changed cash flow profile (other than extension)   346    1          347 
 Restructure: payment other than cash   10              10 
 Change in security   7              7 
 Adjustments ornon-enforcement of covenants   1,242    155          1,397 
 Other (e.g. capital repayment holiday; restructure pending)   438    153          591 
 Total   2,486    416          2,902 
 As at 31 December 2015          
 Restructure: reduced contractual cash flows   155              155 
 Restructure: maturity date extension   563    23    62      648 
 Restructure: changed cash flow profile (other than extension)   250    1          251 
 Restructure: payment other than cash   12              12 
 Change in security   7    1          8 
 Adjustments ornon-enforcement of covenants   295    92          387 
 Other (e.g. capital repayment holiday; restructure pending)   535    208          743 
 Total   1,817    325    62      2,204 
          
 Wholesale forbearance reporting split by business unit                      
    
Barclays UK
£m
 
 
   

Barclays
International
£m
 
 
 
   

Barclays
Non-Core
£m
 
 
 
     
Total
£m
 
 
 As at 31 December 2016          
 Restructure: reduced contractual cash flows   3    29          32 
 Restructure: maturity date extension   114    316    88      518 
 Restructure: changed cash flow profile (other than extension)   180    164    3      347 
 Restructure: payment other than cash       10          10 
 Change in security   1    6          7 
 Adjustments ornon-enforcements of covenants   132    1,212    53      1,397 
 Other (e.g. capital repayment holiday; restructure pending)   159    307    125      591 
 Total   589    2,044    269      2,902 
 As at 31 December 2015          
 Restructure: reduced contractual cash flows   1    130    24      155 
 Restructure: maturity date extension   77    287    284      648 
 Restructure: changed cash flow profile (other than extension)   51    199    1      251 
 Restructure: payment other than cash       12          12 
 Change in security   1    7          8 
 Adjustments ornon-enforcements of covenants   71    260    56      387 
 Other (e.g. capital repayment holiday; restructure pending)   211    438    94      743 
 Total   412    1,333    459      2,204 
          
 Wholesale forbearance flows in 2016                      
                     £m 
 As at 1 January 2016           2,204 
 Added to forbearance           1,811 
 Removed from forbearance (credit improvement)           (383
 Fully or partially repaid and other movements           (442
 Written off/moved to recovery book                    (288
 As at 31 December 2016                    2,902 

Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2016 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  137


Risk review

Risk performance

Credit risk

 

 

Impairment

Impairment allowances

Impairment allowances decreased 10%6% to £4,921m£4,620m primarily within Non-Core as a result ofdue to the reclassification of impairments held against the Portuguese loansBAGL balances now held for sale.sale, partially offset by the impact of a management review of impairment modelling within the credit cards portfolios and increases within Barclays International due to volume growth, the appreciation of average US Dollar and Euro against Sterling and increased impairment for a number of single name exposures.

 

Movements in allowance for impairment by asset class (audited)Movements in allowance for impairment by asset class (audited)  

Movements in allowance for impairment by asset class (audited)

 

  

At beginning
of year

£m

 
 

 

  


Acquisitions
and
disposals

£m

 
 
 

 

  

Unwind of
discount

£m

 
 

 

  


Exchange
and other
adjustmentsa
£m
 
 
 
 
  

Amounts
written off

£m

 
 

 

  

Recoveries

£m

 

 

  



Amounts
charged to
income
statement

£m

 
 
 
 

 

  

Balance at
31 December

£m

 
 

 

2016

        

Home loans

 518  (3 (5 (108 (23    88  467 

Credit cards, unsecured and other retail lending

 3,394  (2 (70 (709 (1,806 296  1,957  3,060 

Corporate loans

 1,009        81  (364 69  298  1,093 

Total impairment allowance

 4,921  (5 (75 (736 (2,193 365  2,343  4,620 
   
 

 

At beginning
of year

£m

  
  

  

   
 
 
 
Acquisitions
and
disposals
£m
  
  
  
  
   
 
 
Unwind of
discount
£m
  
  
  
   
 
 
 
Exchange
and other
adjustmentsa
£m
  
  
  
  
   
 
 
Amounts
written off
£m
  
  
  
   
 
Recoveries
£m
  
  
   
 
 
 
 
Amounts
charged to
income
statement
£m
  
  
  
  
  
   
 
 
Balance at
31 December
£m
  
  
  
2015                        
Home loans   547          (32)     (64)     (94)     7     154     518    547      (32  (64  (94  7   154   518 
Credit cards, unsecured and other retail lending   3,345          (105)     (170)     (1,848)     301     1,871     3,394    3,345      (105  (170  (1,848  301   1,871   3,394 
Corporate loans   1,563          (12)     (383)     (335)     92     84     1,009    1,563      (12  (383  (335  92   84   1,009 
Total impairment allowance   5,455          (149)     (617)     (2,277)     400     2,109     4,921    5,455      (149  (617  (2,277  400   2,109   4,921 
2014                
Home loans   788          (23)     (200)     (191)     17     156     547  
Credit cards, unsecured and other retail lending   3,603     13     (116)     (307)     (1,679)     126     1,705     3,345  
Corporate loans   2,867          (14)     (540)     (1,167)     78     339     1,563  
Total impairment allowance   7,258     13     (153)     (1,047)     (3,037)     221     2,200     5,455  

Management adjustments to models for impairment

Management adjustments to models for impairment are applied in order to factor in certain conditions or changes in policy that are not incorporated into the relevant impairment models, or to ensure that the impairment allowance reflects all known facts and circumstances at the period end. Adjustments typically increase the model derived impairment allowance. Where applicable, management adjustments are reviewed and incorporated into future model development.

Management adjustments to models of more than £10m with respect to impairment allowance in our principal portfolios are presented below.

 

Principal portfolios that have management adjustments greater than £10m (unaudited)  
   2015     2014  
As at 31 December   
 
 
 
 

 

Total management
adjustments to
impairment stock,
including
forbearance

£m

  
  
  
  
  

  

   
 
 
Proportion of total
impairment stock
%
  
  
  
   
 
 
 
 

 

Total management
adjustments to
impairment stock,
including
forbearance

£m

  
  
  
  
  

  

   
 
 
Proportion of total
impairment stock
%
  
  
  
PCB        
UK home loans   68     67     52     55  
UK personal loans   75     16     48     10  
UK overdrafts   37     29     30     19  
UK large corporate and business lending   183     26     98     14  
Africa Banking        
South Africa home loans   22     17     22     11  
Barclaycard        
UK cards   147     17     62     5  
US Cards   58     9     10     2  
Barclays Partner Finance   41     28     9     7  
Germany Cards   20     21     3     3  

Principal portfolios that have management adjustments greater than £10m

 

   2016    2015 

As at 31 December

   







Total
management
adjustments
to
impairment
stock,
including
forbearance

£m

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 

 

   



Proportion
of total
impairment
stock

%

 
 
 
 

 

   







Total
management
adjustments
to
impairment
stock,
including
forbearance

£m

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 

 

   



Proportion
of total
impairment
stock

%

 
 
 
 

 

Barclays UK

        

  UK cards

   312    34    147    17 

  UK home loans

   70    69    68    67 

  UK business lending

   69    33    67    36 

Barclays International

        

  US cards

   278    24    58    9 

  Corporate Banking

   71    14    116    25 

  Barclays Partner Finance

   59    37    41    28 

  Germany cards

   29    23    20    21 

During 2015,2016, the models were aligned to a strengthened Retail Impairment Policy, was significantly strengthenedfollowing which adjustments were reviewed.

UK and US cards: Higher provisions held pending full implementation of newly developed and independently approved models enhanced.with enhanced methodology following an impairment policy revision in Q316.

UK home loans: Adjustments toTo capture the potential impact from an increase in the house price to earnings ratio, change in the impairment methodology and increased coverage on interest onlyinterest-only loans maturing in the next five years.

UK personal loans:business lending: AdjustmentsTo align to incorporate revised impairment policy requirements, and for updated model requirements.

UK overdrafts: Principally for updated model-related requirements and adjustments to align to revised impairment policy.

UK large corporate and business lending: In business lending to reflect policy changes affecting customers on forbearance and impairment treatment. In corporate lending to account for single name losses, adjustment to allow for small names yet to emerge within the oil and gas sector,potential impact from commercial property price deterioration and the susceptibility of minimum debt service customers to interest rate raisesrises not currently captured in models.

South Africa home loans:Corporate Banking: Primarily to incorporate the uncertaintyReflects release against single names in the macroeconomic outlook. The adjustment has increased by 27% in local currency.oil and gas sector.

Barclaycard:Barclays Partner Finance: PredominantlyDue to increased risk in the secured motor portfolio along with adjustments on account of impairment methodology.

Germany cards: To align to new impairment policy requirements in models,methodology and to increase coverageincreased cover on forbearance programmes and accounts in recoveries.programme.

Note

aExchange and other adjustments for 2016 primarily includes the reclassification of impairments held against the Portuguese loans£762m related to BAGL now held for sale offset by currency movements due to the appreciation of average US Dollar and the Spanish loans held for sale in 2014.Euro against Sterling.

138  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2016 Annual Report on Form 20-F


Analysis of debt securities

Debt securities include government securities held as part of the Group’s treasury management portfolio for liquidity and regulatory purposes, and are for use on a continuing basis in the activities of the Group.

The following tables provide an analysis of debt securities held by the Group for trading and investment purposes by issuer type, and where the Group held government securities exceeding 10% of shareholders’ equity.

Further information on the credit quality of debt securities is presented on pages121 to122. Further disclosure on sovereign exposures in the Eurozone is presented on page124

 Debt securities                    
   2016    2015 
 As at 31 December   £m    %    £m    % 
 Of which issued by:        
 Governments and other public bodies   64,852    63.7    96,537    70.9 
 Corporate and other issuers   28,284    27.8    26,166    19.2 
 US agency   6,208    6.1    8,927    6.6 
 Mortgage and asset backed securities   2,372    2.3    4,009    2.9 
 Bank and building society certificates of deposit   23    0.1    598    0.4 
 Total   101,739    100.0    136,237    100.0 
        
        
 Government securities                    
 As at 31 December             

2016
Fair value
£m
 
 
 
   

2015
Fair value
£m
 
 
 
 United Kingdom       20,145    22,372 
 United States             16,284    26,119 

Analysis of derivatives (audited)

The tables below set out the fair values of the derivative assets together with the value of those assets subject to enforceable counterparty netting arrangements for which the Group holds offsetting liabilities and eligible collateral.

 Derivative assets                              
   2016    2015 
 As at 31 December   

Balance sheet
assets

£m

 
 

 

   

Counterparty
netting

£m

 
 

 

   

Net
exposure
£m
 
 
 
   

Balance sheet
assets

£m

 
 

 

   

Counterparty
netting

£m

 
 

 

   

Net
exposure
£m
 
 
 
 Foreign exchange   79,744    59,040    20,704    54,936    40,301    14,635 
 Interest rate   228,652    185,723    42,929    231,426    190,513    40,913 
 Credit derivatives   16,273    12,891    3,382    18,181    14,110    4,071 
 Equity and stock index   17,089    12,603    4,486    13,799    8,358    5,441 
 Commodity derivatives   4,868    3,345    1,523    9,367    6,300    3,067 
Total derivative assets   346,626    273,602    73,024    327,709    259,582    68,127 
Cash collateral held             41,641              34,918 
Net exposure less collateral             31,383              33,209 

Derivative asset exposures would be £315bn (2015: £295bn) lower than reported under IFRS if netting were permitted for assets and liabilities with the same counterparty or for which the Group holds cash collateral. Similarly, derivative liabilities would be £317bn (2015: £295bn) lower reflecting counterparty netting and collateral placed. In addition,non-cash collateral of £8bn (2015: £7bn) was held in respect of derivative assets. The Group received collateral from clients in support of over the counter derivative transactions. These transactions are generally undertaken under International Swaps and Derivative Association (ISDA) agreements governed by either UK or New York law.

Exposure relating to derivatives, repurchase agreements, reverse repurchase agreements, stock borrowing and loan transactions is calculated using internal PRA approved models. These are used as the basis to assess both regulatory capital and capital appetite and are managed on a daily basis. The methodology encompasses all relevant factors to enable the current value to be calculated and the future value to be estimated, for example, current market rates, market volatility and legal documentation (including collateral rights).

 

  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 20152016 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  137139


Risk review

Risk performance

MarketCredit risk

 

 

The table below sets out the fair value and notional amounts of OTC derivative instruments by type of collateral arrangement.

 

Analysis of market risk

Market risk is the risk of a reduction in earnings or capital due to volatility of trading book positions or as a consequence of running a banking book balance sheet and liquidity pools.

This section contains key disclosures describing the Group’s market risk profile, highlighting regulatory as well as management measures.

Key metrics

Measures of traded market risk, such as Value at Risk (VaR), decreased in the year primarily due to the removal of certain banking book assets from VaR, reduced client activity, and risk reduction in Non-Core businesses.

We saw a reduction in associated risk measures and lower income from reduced activity

85%

of days generated positive trading revenue

-23%

reduction in management VaR

10%

increase in average daily trading revenue

Derivatives by collateral arrangement

                              
   2016    2015 
   

Notional 

contract 

amount 

£m 

 

 

 

 

   Fair value    

Notional
contract

amount

£m

 
 

 

 

   Fair value 
     

 

 

 

Assets
£m

 

 
 

  

 

 

 

Liabilities
£m

 

 
 

    

 

 

 

Assets
£m

 

 
 

  

 

 

 

Liabilities
£m

 

 
 

Unilateral in favour of Barclays

            

Foreign exchange

   17,713     607    (274)    15,645    242    (308) 

Interest rate

   6,666     1,017    (60)    4,365    846    (65) 

Credit derivatives

   174     3    (2)    277    2    (7) 

Equity and stock index

   390     3    (147)    303    4    (146) 

Commodity derivatives

   753     33    (26)    905    150    (30) 

Total unilateral in favour of Barclays

   25,696     1,663    (509)    21,495    1,244    (556) 

Unilateral in favour of counterparty

            

Foreign exchange

   20,837     786    (2,549)    50,343    810    (2,107) 

Interest rate

   108,915     3,795    (5,979)    121,231    4,436    (6,981) 

Credit derivatives

   152     3    (7)    140    3    (1) 

Equity and stock index

   1,121     312    (49)    827    100    (83) 

Commodity derivatives

   1,231     67    (66)    74        (3) 

Total unilateral in favour of counterparty

   132,256     4,963    (8,650)    172,615    5,349    (9,175) 

Bilateral arrangement

            

Foreign exchange

   3,772,477     70,464    (68,788)    2,878,125    46,831    (50,899) 

Interest rate

   7,335,641     187,155    (179,650)    7,315,345    197,900    (188,293) 

Credit derivatives

   608,859     11,422    (9,994)    663,090    13,617    (11,985) 

Equity and stock index

   192,448     6,146    (9,692)    144,108    4,991    (8,297) 

Commodity derivatives

   11,766     1,318    (1,442)    36,794    3,164    (3,104) 

Total bilateral arrangement

   11,921,191    276,505    (269,566)    11,037,462    266,503    (262,578) 

Uncollateralised derivatives

            

Foreign exchange

   363,921     7,490    (6,287)    271,819    7,008    (5,424) 

Interest rate

   184,362     5,723    (2,459)    193,565    6,091    (2,907) 

Credit derivatives

   5,872     383    (510)    7,881    467    (700) 

Equity and stock index

   13,706     2,558    (3,385)    6,672    2,204    (3,075) 

Commodity derivatives

   16,389     504    (748)    13,347    1,733    (1,667) 

Total uncollateralised derivatives

   584,250     16,658    (13,389)    493,284    17,503    (13,773) 

Total OTC derivative assets/(liabilities)

   12,663,393    299,789    (292,114)    11,724,856    290,599    (286,082) 

 

138140  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 20152016 Annual Report on Form 20-F  


Risk review

Risk performance

Market risk

 

 

Analysis of market risk

Market risk is the risk of a reduction in earnings or capital due to volatility of trading book positions or as a consequence of running aan inability to fully hedge the banking book balance sheetsheet.

This section contains key disclosures describing the Group’s market risk profile, highlighting regulatory as well as management measures.

Key metrics

Value at Risk increased in the year due to increased volatility. The income sensitivity to falling rates has increased compared to 2015 as a result of the lower GBP rate environment and liquidity pool.subsequent deposit repricing.

All disclosures24%

Increase in this section (page 139 to 147) are unaudited unless otherwise stated.management Value at Risk

-£220m

Decrease in Annual Earnings at Risk from a negative 25bps shock in interest rates (floored assumption)

LOGO

Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2016 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  141


Risk review

Risk performance

Market risk

Summary of Contents

Page

§  Overview of Market Risk and Summary of Performance in the Period

143

Outlines key measures used to summarise the market risk profile of the bank such as Value at Risk (VaR) and Annual Earnings at Risk (AEaR). A distinction is made between management and regulatory measures.

§  Balance sheet view of trading and banking books

144

Provides a Group-wide overview of where assets and liabilities on the Group’s balance sheet are managed within regulatory traded andnon-traded books.

Traded Market Risk

§  Review of Management Measures

    –  The daily average, maximum and minimum values of

        management VaR

    –  Business scenario stresses

§  Review of Regulatory Measures

    –  Analysis of Regulatory VaR, SVaR, IRC and Comprehensive Risk

        Measure

    –  Breakdown of the major regulatory risk measures by portfolio.

145

146

146

146

The Group discloses details on management measures of market risk. Total management VaR includes all trading positions and is presented on a diversified basis by risk factor.

This section also outlines stress scenarios including macroeconomic conditions modelled as part of the Group’s risk management framework.

Group’s regulatory measures of market risk under the approved internal models approach are also disclosed.

As part of this year’s disclosure, both1-day and10-day VaR have been included.

Non-Traded Market Risk

§  Overview

§  Net Interest Income Sensitivity

    –  by business unit

    –  by currency

§  Economic Capital by Business Unit

§  Analysis of Equity Sensitivity

§  Volatility of the available for sale portfolio in the liquidity pool

§  Foreign Exchange Risk

    –  Transactional foreign currency exposure

    –  Translational foreign exchange exposure

    –  Functional currency of operations.

§  Pension Risk Review

    –  Assets and liabilities

    –  IAS19 position

    –  Risk measurement

147

147

148

148

149

149

149

149

150

150

150

151

151

A description of thenon-traded market risk framework is provided.

The Group discloses a sensitivity analysis onpre-tax net interest income fornon-trading financial assets and liabilities. The analysis is carried out by Business Unit and currency.

The Group measures somenon-traded market risks, in particular prepayment, recruitment and residual risk using an Economic Capital methodology.

The Group discloses the overall impact of a parallel shift in interest rates on retained earnings, available for sale and cash flow hedges.

The Group measures the volatility of the value of the available for sale instruments in the liquidity pool throughnon-traded market risk VaR.

The Group discloses the two sources of foreign exchange risk that it is exposed to.

A review focusing on the UK retirement fund, which represents majority of the Group’s total retirement benefit obligation.

142  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2016 Annual Report on Form 20-F


Risk review

Risk performance

Market risk

Market risk

Market risk is the risk of a reduction in earnings or capital due to volatility of the trading book positions or as a consequence of running a banking book balance sheet and liquidity funding pools.

All disclosures in this section [pages 143-151] are unaudited unless otherwise stated. Disclosures for 2016 and 2015 exclude BAGL balances held for sale unless otherwise stated.

Overview of market risk

This section contains key statistics describing the market risk profile of the Group. This includes risk weighted assets by major business line, as wellGroup, such as Value at Risk (VaR) and Annual Earnings at risk (AEaR) measures. A distinction is made between regulatory and management measures within the section. The market risk management section on pages 376 to 391144 to147 provides descriptions of these metrics:

 

§ page 140page144 provides a view of market risk in the context of the Group’s balance sheet

 

§ pages 101 to 102pages145 to146 cover the management of traded market risk. Management measures are shown from page 141 and regulatory equivalent measures are shown from page 142

Management measures are shown from page145 and regulatory equivalent measures are shown from page146

 

§ non-traded market risk, arising from our banking books, is reviewed from page 143.147.

Measures of market risk in the Group and accounting measures

Traded market risk measures such as VaR and balance sheet exposure measures have fundamental differences:

 

§ balance sheet measures show accruals-based balances or marked to market values as at the reporting date

 

§ VaR measures also take account of current marked to market values, but in addition hedging effects between positions are considered

 

§ market risk measures are expressed in terms of changes in value or volatilities as opposed to static values.

For these reasons, it is not possible to present direct reconciliations of traded market risk and accounting measures. The table ‘Balance sheet view of trading and banking books’, on page 140,144, helps the reader understand the main categories of assets and liabilities subject to regulatory market risk measures.

Summary of performance in the period

TheOverall, the Group has seenmaintained a decrease in marketsteady risk from reduced risk positions, notably in equities and interest rates, in addition to risk reduction in Non-Core businesses:profile, with key movements outlined below:

 

§ measures of traded market risk, such as VaR, decreasedvalue at risk (VaR), increased in the year mainly due to the removal of certain banking book assets fromunderlying movements to credit spreads and volatility in the measure (now reported as non-tradedcross currency markets driven by market risks), reduced client activity, and risk reduction in Non-Core businesses

§average trading revenue, in contrast, increased 10% compared with the previous year

§market risk RWAs fell from 2014 levels due to the implementation of diversification of the general and specific market risk VaR charges, partially offset by the inclusion of cost of funding RNIV into VaRstructural changes

 

§ Annual Earnings at Risk (AEaR), is a key measure of interest rate risk volatility in the banking book (IRRBB),. This sensitivity measure decreased in 2015, primarily2016, driven by PCB duetwo factors: the reduction in GBP base rate in August 2016 with the 0% model floor; and additional protection that the Group has put in place to increased hedging; andreduce exposure to a possible further reduction in Treasury driven by increased exposure in the short dated available for sale bond portfolio, partially offset by reduced mismatch between assets and liabilities in the wholesale funding portfolioGBP base rate

 

§ other marketpension risks such as pension risk and insurance risk, are disclosed from page 146page150 onwards.
 

 

  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 20152016 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  139143


Risk review

Risk performance

Market risk

 

 

Balance sheet view of trading and banking books

As defined by the regulatory rules, a trading book consists of positions held for trading intent or to hedge elements of the trading book. Trading intent must be evidenced in the basis of the strategies, policies and procedures set up by the firm to manage the position or portfolio. The table below provides a Group-wide overview of where assets and liabilities on the Group’s balance sheet are managed within regulatory traded andnon-traded books.

The balance sheet split by trading book and banking books is shown on an IFRS accounting scope of consolidation. The reconciliation between the accounting and regulatory scope of consolidation is shown in the Barclays PLC 20152016 Pillar 3 Report. The reconciling items are all part of the banking book.

 

Balance sheet split by trading and banking books

                  

As at 31 December 2015

   
 

 

Banking
book

£m

  
a 

  

   
 

 

Trading
book

£m

  
  

  

   

 

Total

£m

  

  

As at 31 December 2016

   

Banking
book

£m

 
a 

 

   

Trading
book

£m

 
 

 

   

Total

£m

 

 

Cash and balances at central banks

   49,711          49,711     102,353        102,353 

Items in course of collection from other banks

   1,011          1,011     1,467        1,467 

Trading portfolio assets

   3,355     73,993     77,348     1,160    79,080    80,240 

Financial assets designated at fair value

   25,263     51,567     76,830     10,475    68,133    78,608 

Derivative financial instruments

   296     327,413     327,709     1,551    345,075    346,626 

Available for sale financial investments

   90,267          90,267  

Financial investments

   63,317        63,317 

Loans and advances to banks

   39,779     1,570     41,349     42,288    963    43,251 

Loans and advances to customers

   380,406     18,811     399,217     373,156    19,628    392,784 

Reverse repurchase agreements and other similar secured lending

   28,187          28,187     13,454        13,454 

Prepayments, accrued income and other assets

   3,010          3,010     2,893        2,893 

Investments in associates and joint ventures

   573          573     684        684 

Property, plant and equipment

   3,468          3,468     2,825        2,825 

Goodwill and intangible assets

   8,222          8,222     7,726        7,726 

Current tax assets

   415          415     561        561 

Deferred tax assets

   4,495          4,495     4,869        4,869 

Retirement benefit assets

   836          836     14        14 

Non-current assets classified as held for disposal

   7,364          7,364  

Assets included in disposal groups classified as held for saleb

   64,139    7,315    71,454 

Total assets

   646,658     473,354     1,120,012     692,932    520,194    1,213,126 

Deposits from banks

   45,344     1,736     47,080     46,905    1,309    48,214 

Items in course of collection due to other banks

   1,013          1,013     636        636 

Customer accounts

   401,927     16,315     418,242     408,434    14,744    423,178 

Repurchase agreements and other similar secured borrowing

   25,035          25,035     19,760        19,760 

Trading portfolio liabilities

        33,967     33,967         34,687    34,687 

Financial liabilities designated at fair value

   7,027     84,718     91,745  

Financial liabilities designated at fair value:

   5,059    90,972    96,031 

Derivative financial instruments

   1,699     322,553     324,252     883    339,604    340,487 

Debt securities in issue

   69,150          69,150     75,932        75,932 

Subordinated liabilities

   21,467          21,467     23,383        23,383 

Accruals, deferred income and other liabilities

   10,610          10,610     8,830    41    8,871 

Provisions

   4,142          4,142     4,134        4,134 

Current tax liabilities

   903          903     737        737 

Deferred tax liabilities

   122          122     29        29 

Retirement benefit liabilities

   423          423     390        390 

Liabilities included in disposal groups classified as held for sale

   5,997          5,997  

Liabilities included in disposal groups classified as held for saleb

   60,703    4,589    65,292 

Total liabilities

   594,859     459,289     1,054,148     655,815    485,946    1,141,761 

Included within the trading book are assets and liabilities which are included in the market risk regulatory measures. For more information on these measures (VaR, SVaR, IRC and APR) see the risk management section on page 383.146.

 

NoteNotes

aThe primary risk factors for banking book assets and liabilities are interest rates and to a lesser extent, foreign exchange rates. Credit spreads and equity prices will also be factors where the Group holds debt and equity securities respectively, either as financial assets designated at fair value (see Note 14)15) or as available for sale (see Note 16)17).
bIncluding BAGL.

 

140144  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 20152016 Annual Report on Form 20-F  


Risk review

Risk performance

Market risk

 

 

Traded market risk review

Review of management measures

The following disclosures provide details on management measures of market risk. See the risk management section on page 38389 for more detail on management measures and the differences when compared to regulatory measures.

The table below shows the Total managementtotal Management VaR on a diversified basis by risk factor. Total managementManagement VaR includes all trading positions in the Investment Bank, Barclays International,Non-Core, Africa Banking BAGL and Head Office.

Limits are applied against each risk factor VaR as well as Total managementtotal Management VaR, which are then cascaded further by risk managers to each business.

 

The daily average, maximum and minimum values of management VaR (audited)

  

            
The daily average, maximum and minimum values of management VaRaThe daily average, maximum and minimum values of management VaRa             

Management VaR (95%) (audited)

                  
      2015           2014        2016    2015 

Management VaR (95%)

           Average             Higha            Lowa            Average             Higha            Lowa 

For the year ended 31 December

   £m     £m     £m     £m     £m     £m     

        Average 

£m 

 

 

   

        High

£m

b 

 

   

        Low

£m

b 

 

   

        Average 

£m 

 

 

   

        High

£m

b 

 

   

        Low

£m

b 

 

Credit risk

   11     17     8     11     15     9     16     24    9    11     17    8 

Interest rate risk

   6     14     4     11     17     6         13    4        14    4 

Equity risk

   8     18     4     10     16     6         11    4        18    4 

Basis risk

   3     4     2     4     8     2         9    3        4    2 

Spread risk

   3     6     2     4     8     3         5    2        6    2 

Foreign exchange risk

   3     6     1     4     23     1         5    2        6    1 

Commodity risk

   2     3     1     2     8     1         4    1        3    1 

Inflation risk

   3     5     2     2     4     2         3    2        5    2 

Diversification effecta

   (22   n/a     n/a     (26   n/a     n/a  

Diversification effectb

   (24)    n/a    n/a    (22)    n/a    n/a 

Total management VaR

   17     25     12     22     36     17     21     29    13    17     25    12 

Average interest rateCredit Risk VaR increased by £5m to £16m (2015: £11m) primarily due to the underlying volatile movements to credit spreads given own credit contribution.

Average Basis VaR increased by £2m to £5m (2015: £3m) primarily due to a combination of structural changes in the cross currency markets that led to higher volatility and higher client activity in G10 cross currency basis.

Average Equity VaR decreased by £5m£1m to £6m (Dec 14: £11m) during 2015 as certain banking book positions were transferred from the Investment Bank to Head Office Treasury, reflecting the operational transfer of responsibility (see page 143). These positions are high quality and liquid banking book assets and are now reported as non-traded market risk exposures. Similarly, lower spread risk and basis risk VaR in 2015 reflect reduced risk taking.

Average equities risk VaR reduced by 20% to £8m,£7m (2015: £8m) reflecting reduced cash portfolio activities and a more conservative risk profile maintained in the derivatives portfolio.

Average foreign exchange riskForeign Exchange Risk VaR decreased by 25% to £3mwas stable as a result of lower activitymaintaining a conservative risk profile in the first half of the year, partially offset by higher volatilityderivatives portfolio.

Group Management VaRa (£m)

LOGO

The daily VaR chart illustrates an average increasing trend in the global foreign exchange market seen in the second half of the year.

Inflation risk2016. Intermittent VaR increased by £1m to £3m, primarilyincreases were due to increased client flow in periods of heightened volatility in the inflation market.

Average commodityspecific markets and subsequent risk VaR remained stable at £2m, but the high levels reduced significantly year-on-year due to the portfolio having been largely divested, and reduced client flows impacted by lower oil prices.

Group management VaR

Daily trading revenue

LOGO

LOGO

The chart above presents the frequency distribution of our daily trading revenues for all material positions included in VaR for 2015. This includes daily trading revenue generated in the Investment Bank (except for Private Equity and Principal Investments), Treasury, Africa Banking and Non-Core.

The basis of preparation for trading revenue was changed in 2015 to align better with and reflect the portfolio structure included in Group Management VaR. 2014 figures have been presented on a comparable basis. Disclosed trading revenue includes realised and unrealised mark to market gains and losses from intraday market moves but excludes commission and advisory fees. The trading revenue measure is based on actual trading results and holding periods. In contrast, the VaR shows the volatility of a hypothetical measure. To construct this measure, positions are assumed to be held for one day, and the aggregate unrealised gain or loss is the measure. VaR and the actual revenue figure are not directly comparable. VaR informs risk managers of the risk implications of current portfolio decisions.position.

 

NoteNotes

aIncluding BAGL.
bDiversification effects recognise that forecast losses from different assets or businesses are unlikely to occur concurrently, hence the expected aggregate loss is lower than the sum of the expected losses from each risk factor area. Historic correlations between losses are taken into account in making these assessments. The high and low VaR figures reported for each category did not necessarily occur on the same day as the high and low VaR reported as a whole. Consequently a diversification effect balancesbalance for the high and low VaR figures would not be meaningful and areis therefore omitted from the above table.

 

  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 20152016 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  141145


Risk review

Risk performance

Market risk

 

 

The average daily net revenue increased by 10% to £10.1m; there were more positive trading revenue days in 2015 than in 2014, with 85% (2014: 82%) of days generating positive trading revenue.

The daily VaR chart illustrates an average declining trend in 2015. Intermittent VaR increases were due to increased client flow in periods of heightened volatility in specific markets and subsequent risk management of the position.

Business scenario stressesScenario Stresses

As part of the Group’s risk management framework on a regular basis the performance of the trading business in hypothetical scenarios characterised by severe macroeconomic conditions is modelled. Up to sixseven global scenarios are modelled on a regular basis, for example, a sharp deterioration in liquidity, a slowdown in the global economy, terrorist attacks, global recession, and a sovereign peripheral crisis.sharp increase in economic growth.

Throughout 2015In 2016, the scenario analyses showed that the biggestlargest market risk related impactimpacts would be due to a severe deterioration in market liquidity and a sovereign peripheral crisis.global recession.

Review of regulatory measures

The following disclosures provide details on regulatory measures of marketMarket risk. See the Barclays Pillar 3 Report for more detail on regulatory measures and the differences when compared to management measures.

The Group’s market risk capital requirement comprises of two elements:

 

§ the market risk of trading book positions booked to legal entities within the scope of the Group’s PRA waiver where the market risk isthat are measured under a PRA approved internal models approach, including Regulatory VaR, Stressed Value at Risk (SVaR), Incremental Risk Charge (IRC), and All PriceComprehensive Risk (APR)Measure as required

 

§ trading book positions that do not meet the conditions for inclusion within the approved internal models approach. The capital requirement for these positions is calculated using standardised rules.rules

The table below summarises the regulatory market risk measures, under the internal models approach. See Table ‘Market risk own funds requirements’in the Barclays 2016 Pillar 3 Report for a breakdown of capital requirements by approach.

 

Analysis of Regulatory VaR, SVaR, IRC and APR

                            
      
 
Year end
£m
  
  
     
 
Average
£m
  
  
     
 
Max
£m
  
  
     
 
Min
£m
  
  

As at 31 December 2015

                

Regulatory VaR

     26       28       46       20  

SVaR

     44       54       68       38  

IRC

     129       142           254           59  

APR

     12       15       27       11  

As at 31 December 2014

                

Regulatory VaR

     29       39       66       29  

SVaR

     72       74       105       53  

IRC

     80       118       287       58  

APR

     24       28       39       24  

Analysis of Regulatory VaR, SVaR, IRC and Comprehensive Risk Measure

                            
      
Year-end
£m
 
 
     
Avg.
£m
 
 
     
Max
£m
 
 
     
Min
£m
 
 

As at 31 December 2016

                

Regulatory VaR(1-day)

     33      26      34      18 

Regulatory VaR(10-day)a

     105      84      108      57 

SVaR(1-day)

     65      56      75      34 

SVaR(10-day)a

     205      178      236      109 

IRC

     154      155      238      112 

Comprehensive Risk Measure

     2      5      12      2 

As at 31 December 2015

                

Regulatory VaR(1-day)

     26      28      46      20 

Regulatory VaR(10-day)a

     82      89      145      63 

SVaR(1-day)

     44      54      68      38 

SVaR(10-day)a

     139      171      215      120 

IRC

     129      142      254      59 

Comprehensive Risk Measure

     12      15      27      11 

Overall, there was a lower risk profile during 2015:an increase in average IRC in 2016, with no significant movements in other internal model components:

 

§ Regulatory VaR/SVaR:reduction in a Regulatory VaR/SVaR is driven by application of diversification to the general and specific market risk VaR charges which resulted in an overall RWA reduction Remained broadly stable year on year.

 

§ IRC:Increased primarily due to positional increases in the IRC increase was mainly driven by the implementationthird quarter of an updated IRC model in Q4 15 which features a more refined correlation structure, adoption of a continuous transition matrix and a local currency adjustment for sovereign issuance2016.

 

§ APR:Comprehensive Risk Measure:reduced Reduced as a result of further reductions in a specific legacy portfolio.

 

Breakdown of the major regulatory risk measures by portfolio

  

As at 31 December 2015

   

 

Macro

£m

  

  

   

 

Equities

£m

  

  

   
 
Credit
£m
  
  
  

 
 

Client Capital

Management
£m

  

  
  

   
 
Treasury
£m
  
  
   
 
Africa
£m
  
  
   
 
Non-Core
£m
  
  

Regulatory VaR

   10     8     5    12     4     4     3  

SVaR

   25             33             15            18             11             6             12  

IRC

           197     5     79    99     13          62  

APR

                                12  

Breakdown of the major regulatory risk measures by portfolio

 

As at 31 December 2016

   

Macro

£m

 

 

   
Equities
£m
 
 
   

Credit

£m

 

 

  

Barclays
International
Treasury

£m

 
 
b 

 

   

Banking

£m

b 

 

   

Group
Treasury
£m
 
 
 
   

Barclays
Non-Core
£m
 
 
 

Regulatory VaR(1-day)

   14    12    6   14    12    5    6 

Regulatory VaR(10-day)

   44    38    20   45    40    15    21 

SVaR(1-day)

   22    43    7   30    18    9    22 

SVaR(10-day)

   69            137    24   95    58    30    69 

IRC

           220    8            146   196    25    10    18 

Comprehensive Risk Measure

                          2 

The table above shows the primary portfolios which are drivingdrove the trading businesses’ modelled capital requirement as at 2015 year end.31 December 2016. The standalonestand-alone portfolio results diversify at the total level and are not necessarily additive. Regulatory VaR, SVaR, IRC and APRComprehensive Risk Measure in the prior table show the diversified results at a groupGroup level.

Notes

aThe 10 day VaR is based on scaling of 1 day VaR model output. More information about Regulatory and Stressed VaR methodology is available in the Barclays PLC 2016 Pillar 3 Report.
bIn the fourth quarter, the Client Capital Management (CCM) portfolio was split into Barclays International Treasury, Banking and Agency Derivative Services (ADS) and Financing. For the purposes of the disclosures, only material portfolios (Barclays International Treasury and Banking) have been included.

 

142146  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 20152016 Annual Report on Form 20-F  


Risk review

Risk performance

Market risk

 

 

Non-traded market risk

Overview

Thenon-traded market risk framework covers exposures in the banking book, mostly consisting of exposures relating to accrual accounted and available for sale instruments. The potential volatility of the net interest income of the bank is measured by an Annual Earnings at Risk (AEaR) metric that is monitored regularly and reported to senior managementSenior Management and the Board Risk Committee as part of the limit monitoring framework.

Net interest income sensitivity

The table below shows a sensitivity analysis onpre-tax net interest income for the non-trading financial assets and financial liabilities, including the effect of any hedging. The sensitivity has been measured using the Annual Earnings at Risk (AEaR) methodology.methodology as described in the Barclays Pillar 3 Report. Note that this metric assumes an instantaneous parallel change to interest rate forward curves. The model floors shocked market rates at zero; changes in net interest income sensitivity are only observed where forward rates are greater than zero. The main model assumptions are: (i) one year time horizon; (ii) balance sheet is simplisticheld constant; (iii) balances are adjusted for assumed behavioural profiles (i.e. considers that customers may remortgage before the contractual maturity); and (iv) behavioural assumptions are kept unchanged in that it assumes a large parallel shock occurs instantaneously across all major currencies and ignores the impact of any management actions on customer products.rate scenarios.

 

                                                                                                                                          
  Net interest income sensitivity (AEaR) by business unit  
   
 
 
 
Personal &
Corporate
Banking
£m
  
  
  
  
  
 
Barclaycard
£m
  
  
  
 
Africa
£m
  
  
  

 

Non-Core

£m

a 

  

  

 

Treasury

£m

b 

  

  
 
Total
£m
  
  

  As at 31 December 2015

      

  +200bps

  305    (31  28    27    (131  198  

  +100bps

  152    (14  14    14    (63  103  

  -100bps

  (385  10    (11      (26  (412

  -200bps

  (433  14    (14      (36  (469

  As at 31 December 2014c

      

  +200bps

  464    (59  26    6    14    451  

  +100bps

  239    (27  13    3    10    238  

  -100bps

  (426  26    (9  (1  (29  (439

  -200bps

  (430  29    (17  (1  (39  (458
  Net interest income sensitivity (AEaR) by business unita,b (audited) 
   

    Barclays

UK

£m

  

Barclays

International

£m

  

Barclays

Non-Core

£m

   

        Total

£m

 

  As at 31 December 2016

     

  +25bps

  5   16   1    22 

  -25bps

  (130  (90      (220

  As at 31 December 2015

     

  +25bps

  16   21   5    42 

  -25bps

  (50  (41      (91

Overall the NIIThe income sensitivity to falling rates has increased compared to 2015 as a result of the Group to sudden changes in interest rates has decreased. The main drivers of the change in NII sensitivities are:lower GBP rate environment and subsequent depositre-pricing.

 

§PCB:The reduction in NII sensitivity was due to increased hedging of certain deposit products exposure to interest rate changes
  Net interest income sensitivity (AEaR) by currencyc          
  As at 31 December 2016   

+25 basis
points
£m
 
 
 
   

-25 basis
points
£m
 
 
 

  GBP

   9    (215

  USD

   3    (5

  EUR

   7    1 

  Other currencies

   3    (1

  Total

   22    (220

  As percentage of net interest income

   0.21%    (2.09%

 

§Barclaycard:The reduction in NII is due to a decrease in the period of time that the book can be repriced post a change in interest rates

§Non-Core:The increase is predominantly due to a change in the hedge profile following the announced disposals in Europe

§Treasury:The increase in NII sensitivity is primarily driven by an increased exposure in the short dated available for sale bond portfolio This results in a higher duration mismatch between assets and liabilities which an up-shock scenario creates a negative impact. In a down shock scenario the full benefit of this is not realised due to the rates being floored as zero, resulting in a net negative Nil impact from Treasury under these simple modelling assumptions.

  Net interest income sensitivity (AEaR) by currency (audited)                    
   2015     2014  
  As at 31 December   
 

 

+100 basis
points

£m

  
  

  

   
 

 

-100 basis
points

£m

  
  

  

   
 

 

+100 basis
points

£m

  
  

  

   
 

 

-100 basis
points

£m

  
  

  

  GBP

   94     (368   184     (406

  USD

   (15   (30   (11   (11

  EUR

   (6   (8   21     3  

  ZAR

   6     (5   10     (8

  Other currencies

   24     (1   34     (17

  Total

   103     (412   238     (439

  As percentage of net interest income

   0.82   (3.28)%    1.97   (3.63)% 

 

 

Notes

aOnly retail exposures within Non-Core are included in the calculation.The investment banking part of Barclays International has been excluded.
bExcludes Treasury includes both accrual and fair value accounted positions modelled with an appropriate holding period. It excludes hedge accounting ineffectiveness. Although hedge accounting ineffectiveness is recorded withinoperations, which are driven by the Group’s investments in the liquidity pool, which are risk managed using VaR measures described on page 149. Treasury’s net interest income itsensitivity (AEaR) sensitivity to a +25/-25bps move is excluded in this analysis as it is driven by fair value movements rather than interest accruals.£(39)m / £36m respectively.
c2014 comparatives have been revised to reflect the inclusion of allIncludes Barclays UK, Barclays International (excluding investment banking) andNon-Core sensitivity. Treasury banking books and the exclusion of hedge ineffectiveness.excluded.

 

  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 20152016 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  143147


Risk review

Risk performance

Market risk

 

 

Economic Capital by business unit

Barclays measures somenon-traded market risks using an economic capital (EC) methodology. EC is predominantly calculated using a daily VaR model and then scaled up to a one-year EC99% confidence interval. A 99.98% confidence interval, (99.98%).as previously reported, is considered to be a very extreme shock i.e. a 1 in 5000 event. A 99% confidence interval is considered more appropriate and also aligns to other regulatory submissions. For more information on definitions of prepayment, recruitment and residual risk, and on how EC is used to manage market risk, see the markettreasury and capital risk management section on page 389.372.

 

Economic capital for non-trading risk by business unit              
Economic Capital by business unit           
   

Barclays
UK

£m

 
 

 

  

Barclays
International

£m

 
a 

 

   

Barclays
Non-Core

£m

 
b 

 

   
Total
£m
 
 

As at 31 December 2016

       

Prepayment risk

   27  8        35 

Recruitment risk

   18  1    1    20 

Residual risk

   1  23    12    36 

Total

   46  32    13    91 
   
 
 
 
Personal &
Corporate
Banking
£m
  
  
  
  
  
 
Barclaycard
£m
  
  
   

 
 

Africa

Banking
£m

  

  
  

   

 

Non-Core

£m

a 

  

   
 
Total
£m
  
  

As at 31 December 2015

                

Prepayment risk

   35   7               42     20   7        27 

Recruitment risk

   64   1          5     70     39   4    4    47 

Residual risk

   7   2     126     5     140     2   26    3    31 

Total

   106   10     126     10     252     61   37    7    105 

As at 31 December 2014

         

Prepayment risk

   32    15               47  

Recruitment risk

   148    1               149  

Residual risk

   12    3     34     16     65  

Total

   192    19     34     16     261  

PCB recruitment risk:The reduction of EC for PCB isTotal Economic Capital decreased by £14m to £91m (2015: £105m), mainly driven by lower levels of recruitment risk associated with hedging mismatch for savings and mortgage products as at 31 December 2015. The mortgage book in particular saw significant falls in recruitment riskBarclays UK which decreased by £21m due to lower levels of pre-hedging, particularly within mortgages of longer tenor.

Africa Banking residual risk: The significant changesa reduction in EC for Africa Banking are mainly due to the adoption of new behavioural assumptions for residual risk which went live on 1 January 2015.market rates and volatility.

Analysis of equity sensitivity

The equity sensitivity table below measures the overall impact of a +/- 100bps25bps movement in interest rates on retained earnings, available for sale and cash flow hedge reserves. This data is captured using PV01a DV01 metric which is an indicator of the shift in asset value for a 1 basis point shiftmovement in the yield curve. Note that the methodology used to estimate the impact of the negative movement applied a 0% floor to interest rates.

 

Analysis of equity sensitivity            
Analysis of equity sensitivity (audited)            
   2015   2014     2016    2015 
As at 31 December   
 

 

+100 basis 
points 

£m 

  
  

  

   
 

 

-100 basis 
points 

£m 

  
  

  

   
 

 

+100 basis 
points 

£m 

  
  

  

   
 

 

-100 basis 
points 

£m 

  
  

  

   

+25 basis
points
£m
 
 
 
   

-25 basis
points
£m
 
 
 
   

+25 basis
points
£m
 
 
 
   

-25 basis
points

£m

 
 

 

Net interest income

   103      (412)     238      (439)     22    (220   42    (91

Taxation effects on the above

   (31)     124      (57)     105      (7   66    (13   27 

Effect on profit for the year

   72      (288)     181      (334)     15    (154   29    (64

As percentage of net profit after tax

   11.56%     (46.23)   21.42%      (39.53)%     0.54%    (5.45%   4.72%    (10.22%

Effect on profit for the year (per above)

   72      (288)     181      (334)     15    (154   29    (64

Available for sale reserve

   (751)     1,052      (698)     845      (154   114    (180   248 

Cash flow hedge reserve

   (3,104)     1,351      (3,058)     2,048      (732   692    (754   694 

Taxation effects on the above

   1,157      (721)     901      (694)     222    (202   280    (283

Effect on equity

   (2,626)     1,394      (2,674)     1,865      (649   450    (625   595 

As percentage of equity

   (3.99)   2.12%     (4.05)   2.83%     (0.91%   0.63%    (0.95%   0.90% 

As discussed inIn relation to the net interest income sensitivity table on page 143,147, the impact of a 100bps25bps movement in rates is largely driven by PCB and Treasury. Barclays UK.

The change in available for sale reserve change in sensitivitysensitivities was mainly driven by changesa reduction in portfolio composition, primarily due to an increaseinterest rate risk in available for sale assets held on a shorter dated outright basis. Note that the movementliquidity pool during the year. Movements in the available for sale reserve would impact CRD IV fully loaded Common Equity Tier 1 (CET1)CET1 capital, buthowever the movement in the cash flow hedge reserve would not impact CET1 capital.

 

 

 

NoteNotes

aResidual risk for Barclays International includes Barclays Bank Delaware products to align with the NII disclosure. Prior period restated on the same basis for consistency.
bOnly the retail exposures withinNon-Core are captured in thethis measure.

 

144148  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 20152016 Annual Report on Form 20-F  


Risk review

Risk performance

Market risk

 

 

Volatility of the available for sale portfolio in the liquidity pool

Changes in value of the available for sale exposures flow directly through capital via the equityavailable for sale reserve. The volatility of the value of the available for sale investments in the liquidity pool is captured and managed through a value measure rather than an earning measure, i.e. the non-tradedNon-traded market risk VaR.

Although the underlying methodology to calculate thenon-traded VaR is the same asidentical to the one used to calculatein traded management VaR, the two measures are not directly comparable. Thenon-traded VaR represents the volatility to capital driven by the available for sale exposures. This is used for internal management purposes and although it is not formally backtested like the regulatory VaR (as shown on page 142), it is reviewed on a regular basis by risk managers to ensure it remains adequate for risk appetite and monitoring purposes.

These exposures are in the banking book and do not meet the criteria for trading book treatment. As such available for sale volatility is a risk which is taken into account in the IRRBB internal capital assessment, which is covered by the Pillar 2 capital framework.

Volatility of the Available for saleAFS portfolio in liquidity poolLiquidity Pool

 

LOGOLOGO

 

Analysis of volatility of the available for sale portfolio in the liquidity pool

 

                                   
     2016      2015 

For the year ended 31 December

     
Average
£m
 
 
     
High
£m
 
 
     
Low
£m
 
 
     
Average
£m
 
 
     
High
£m
 
 
     
Low
£m
 
 

Non-traded market Value at Risk (daily, 95%)

     40      46      32      42      49      37 

Analysis of volatility of the available for sale portfolio in liquidity pool

                     
     2015  

For the year ended 31 December

     
 
Average
£m
  
  
     
 
High
£m
  
  
     
 
Low
£m
  
  

Non-traded market VaR (daily, 95%)

     41.6       48.5       37.0  

The non-tradedNon-traded VaR is mainly driven by volatility of interest rates in developed markets in the chart above.

The increasesharp reduction in available for sale VaR seen in H215 is due toat the volatility in the government and swap rate markets observed in that period, particularly in the US and the UK. The subsequent decreaseend of September was due to subsiding market volatility in combination withdriven by a reduction in exposure.outright interest rate risk taken in the liquidity pool, which wasre-established in early October.

Foreign exchange risk

The Group is exposed to two sources of foreign exchange risk.

a) Transactional foreign currency exposure

Transactional foreign exchange exposure representsexposures represent exposure on banking assets and liabilities, denominated in currencies other than the functional currency of the transacting entity.

The Group’s risk management policies prevent the holding of significant open positions in foreign currencies outside the trading portfolio managed by the Investment BankBarclays International which is monitored through VaR.

Banking book transactional foreign exchange risk outside of the Investment BankBarclays International is monitored on a daily basis by the market risk functionsMarket Risk function and minimised by the businesses.

b) Translational foreign exchange exposure

The Group’s investments in overseas subsidiaries and branches create capital resources denominated in foreign currencies, principally USD, EUR and ZAR. Changes in the GBP value of the net investments due to foreign currency movements are captured in the currency translation reserve, resulting in a movement in CET1 capital.

The Group’s strategy is to minimise the volatility of the capital ratios caused by foreign exchange movements by ensuring thatusing the CET1 capital movements to broadly match the revaluation of the Group’s foreign currency RWA exposures.

The economic hedges primarily represent the USD and EUR preference shares and Additional Tier 1 (AT1) instruments that are held as equity, which are accounted for at historic cost under IFRS and do not qualify as hedges for accounting purposes.

 

  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 20152016 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  145149


Risk review

Risk performance

Market risk

 

 

Functional currency of operations (audited)                                   
  Foreign
currency
net
investments
£m
   Borrowings
which hedge
the net
investments
£m
   Derivatives
which hedge
the net
investments
£m
   

Structural
currency
exposures
pre-economic
hedges

£m

   Economic
hedges
£m
 Remaining
structural
currency
exposures
£m
 
As at 31 December 2016           
USD   29,460    (12,769   –     16,691    (7,898 8,793 
EUR   2,121    (363   –     1,758    (2,053 (295
ZAR   3,679    –     (2,571   1,108    –   1,108 
JPY   438    (209   (224   5    –   5 
Other   2,793    –     (1,318   1,475    –   1,475 
Total   38,491    (13,341   (4,113   21,037    (9,951 11,086 
   

 

 

 

 

Foreign

currency

net

investments

£m

  

  

  

  

  

   

 

 

 

 

Borrowings

which hedge

the net

investments

£m

  

  

  

  

  

   

 

 

 

 

Derivatives

which hedge

the net

investments

£m

  

  

  

  

  

   

 

 

 

 

 

Structural

currency

exposures

pre-economic

hedges

£m

  

  

  

  

  

  

   

 

 

Economic

hedges

£m

  

  

  

   

 

 

 

 

Remaining

structural

currency

exposures

£m

  

  

  

  

  

As at 31 December 2015                       
USD   24,712     8,839     1,158     14,715     7,008     7,707     24,712    (8,839   (1,158   14,715    (7,008  7,707 
EUR   2,002     630     14     1,358     1,764     (406   2,002    (630   (14   1,358    (1,764  (406
ZAR   3,201     4     99     3,098          3,098     3,201    (4   (99   3,098    –    3,098 
JPY   383     168     205     10          10     383    (168   (205   10    –    10 
Other   2,927          1,294     1,633          1,633     2,927    –     (1,294   1,633    –    1,633 
Total   33,225     9,641     2,770    ��20,814     8,772     12,042     33,225    (9,641   (2,770   20,814    (8,772  12,042 
As at 31 December 2014            
USD   23,728     5,270     1,012     17,446     6,655     10,791  
EUR   3,056     328     238     2,490     1,871     619  
ZAR   3,863          103     3,760          3,760  
JPY   364     164     208     (8        (8
Other   2,739          1,198     1,541          1,541  
Total   33,750     5,762     2,759     25,229     8,526     16,703  

During 2015,2016, total structural currency exposure net of hedging instruments decreased by £4.7bn£1.0bn to £12.0bn (2014: £16.7bn)£11.1bn (2015: £12.0bn). The decrease iswas broadly driven by an increase in line withZAR hedges following Barclays announcement to reduce the overall RWA currency profile, with a reductionGroup’s interest in USD RWAs in the year.BAGL. Foreign currency net investments remained stable at £33.2bn (2014: £33.8bn)increased by £5.3bn to £38.5bn (2015: £33.2bn) driven predominantly by the appreciation of US Dollar against Sterling. The hedges associated with these investments increased by £5.0bn to £17.5bn (2015: £12.4bn).

Pension risk review

The UK Retirement Fund (UKRF) represents approximately 92% (2014:96% (2015: 92%) of the Group’s total retirement benefit obligations globally. The other material overseas schemes are in South Africa and in the US and they represent approximately 4% (2014: 4%) and 2% (2014: 2%) respectively of the Group’s total retirement benefit obligations. As such, this risk review section focuses exclusively on the UKRF. Note that the schemeThe UKRF is closed to new entrants.entrants, and there is no new final salary benefit being accrued. Existing active members accrue a combination of a cash balance benefit and a defined contribution element.

Pension risk arises as the estimated market value of the pension fund assets mightmay decline, or the investment returns might reduce;may reduce or the estimated value of the pension liabilities mightmay increase.

See page 390the Barclays PLC 2016 Pillar 3 Report for more information on how pension risk is managed.

Assets

The Trustee Board of Trusteesthe UKRF defines anits overall long termlong-term investment strategy for the UKRF, with investments across a broad range of asset classes. This ensures an appropriate mix of return seeking assets to generate future returns as well as liability matching assets to better match the future pension obligations. The main market risks within the asset portfolio are due to movements inagainst interest rates and equities, as shown by the analysisequities. The split of scheme assets is shown within Note 35 Pensions and retirement benefits.

35. The fair value of the UKRF plan assets was £26.8bn. See Note 35 Pensions and retirement benefits.£31.8bn as at 31 December 2016.

 

146150  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 20152016 Annual Report on Form 20-F  


Risk review

Risk performance

Market risk

 

 

Liabilities

The UKRF retirement benefit obligations are a series of future cash flows with relatively long duration. On an IAS 19IAS19 basis these cash flows are sensitive to changes in the expected long termlong-term price inflation rate (RPI) and the discount rate (AA corporate bond yield curve):

 

§ anAn increase in long termlong-term expected inflation corresponds to an increase in liabilities

 

§ an increaseA decrease in the discount rate corresponds to a decreasean increase in liabilities.liabilities

Pension risk is generated through the Group’s defined benefit schemes and this risk is set to reduce over time as our main defined benefit schemes arescheme is closed to new entrants, and in many cases closed to future accruals.entrants. The chart below outlines the shape of the UKRF’s liability cash flow profile (as at 31 December 2016) that takes account of future inflation indexing of payments to beneficiaries, with the majority of the cash flows (approximately 83%) falling between 0 and 40 years, peaking within the 2111 to 3020 year band and reducing thereafter. The shape may vary depending on changes in inflation expectation and mortality and it is updated in line with the triennial valuation process.mortality.

For more detail on liabilitythe UKRF’s financial and demographic assumptions see Note 35 to the financial statements. Pensions and post retirement benefits.

 

Proportion of liability cash flowsNet IAS19 Position

LOGO

LOGO

ProportionThe graph above shows the UKRF’s net IAS19 pension position for eachquarter-end for the past two years. The volatility shown by the fluctuation in the net IAS19 pension position is reflective of the IAS 19 liability cash flowsmovements observed in the market.

In Q2 2016, the UKRF IAS19 position deteriorated as the AA discount rate moved lower, driven by both a decrease in long-dated government bond yields as well as tightening in credit spreads.

During H2 2016, this trend continued driven by the outcome of the EU Referendum in June as well as the Bank of England’s announcement on quantitative easing in August. These events drove significant market moves adversely affecting the UKRF AA discount rate. For example, the market index IBOXX £-Corp AA yield was 53bps lower between June and September.

LOGOGilt yields reverted higher in the months following September which was also reflected in higher AA discount rate. As a result, the net IAS19 position reverted close to zero as at 31 December 2016.

Please see Note 35 for the sensitivity of the UKRF to change in key assumptions.

Risk measurement

In line with BarclaysBarclays’ risk management framework, the assets and liabilities of the UKRF are modelled within a VaR framework to show the volatility of the pension positions on a total portfolio level. This ensures that the risks, diversification and liability matching characteristics of the UKRF obligations and investments are adequately captured. VaR is measured and monitored on a monthly basis. It is discussedRisks are reviewed and reported regularly at pension risk fora such as theforums including Market Risk Committee, Group Risk Committee, Pensions Management Group and Pension Executive Board. The VaR model takes into account the valuation of the liabilities followingbased on an IAS 19IAS19 basis (see Note 35 Pension and post-retirement benefits in the financial statements)35). The trustees receiveTrustee receives quarterly VaR measures on a funding basis.

The pension liability is also sensitive to post-retirement mortality assumptions (seewhich are also reviewed regularly. See Note 35).35 for more details.

In addition, to this, the impact of pension risk to the Group is taken into account as part of the stress testing process. Stress testing is performed internally on at least on an annual basis. The UKRF exposure is also included as part of the regulatory stress tests and exercises indicated that the UKRF risk profile is resilient to severe stress events.tests.

TheBarclays defined benefit pension schemeschemes affects capital in two ways. An IAS 19 deficit impacts the CET1 capital ratio, and pension risk is also taken into account in the Pillar 2A capital assessment.

Triennial valuation

Please see Note 35 Pensions and retirement benefits for information on the funding position of the UKRF.

Insurance risk review

Insurance risk is managed within Africa Banking primarily in the Wealth, Investment Management & Insurance (WIMI) portfolios and is reported across four significant categories. Please see page 138 of the Barclays PLC 2015 Pillar 3 Report for more information on the definitions and governance procedure.

The risk types below mainly determine the regulatory capital requirements. The year-on-year decrease in risk appetite was agreed as part of the medium-term planning process.ways:

 

  Analysis of insurance riska                    
   2015     2014  
  As at 31 December   
 
Position
£m
  
  
   
 
Appetite
£m
  
  
   
 
Position
£m
  
  
   
 
Appetite
£m
  
  

  Short term insurance underwriting risk

   30     32     40     44  

  Life insurance underwriting risk

   17     20     21     28  

  Life insurance mismatch risk

   12     20     16     40  

  Life and short-term insurance investment risk

   11     18     12     14  
§An IAS19 deficit is treated as a liability on the Group’s balance sheet. Movement in a deficit due to remeasurements, including actuarial losses, are recognised immediately through Other Comprehensive Income and as such reduces shareholders’ equity and CET1 capital. An IAS19 surplus is treated as an asset on the balance sheet and increases shareholders’ equity, however is deducted for the purposes of determining CET1 capital.

In 2015, the largest year-on-year movement was in short-term insurance underwriting risk where the reduction in the position reflected the closure of the Agriculture book to new insurance business.

For mismatch risk, the 2015 Appetite was materially lower than the 2014 Appetite as the level of mismatch between policyholder assets and policyholder liabilities decreased following the adoption of improved reserving methodologies and sign off by the independent statutory actuary function. As a result, while 2015 Position has reduced in absolute terms, the utilisation against appetite has increased.

From 2016 onwards, the methodology for assessment of Insurance Risk will change from a CAR-based approach to a Solvency Assessment and Management (SAM) based approach (the Solvency II equivalent) which is considered to be a more robust risk management approach with well-developed methodologies.

Note

a§The figuresIn the Group’s statutory balance sheet, an IAS19 surplus or deficit is partially offset by a deferred tax liability or asset respectively. These may or may not be recognised for calculating CET1 capital depending on the overall deferred tax position of the Group at the particular time.

§Pension risk is taken into account in the table are reported usingPillar 2A capital assessment undertaken by the PRA at least annually. The Pillar 2A requirement forms part of the Group’s overall regulatory minimum requirement for CET1 capital, Tier 1 capital and total capital. More detail on minimum regulatory requirements can be found in the Funding Risk – Capital Adequacy Requirement (CAR) approach.section on page152.

 

  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 20152016 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  147151


Risk review

Risk performance

Funding risk – Capital

 

 

Analysis of capital risk

Capital risk is the risk that the Group has insufficient capital resources to (i) meet minimum regulatory requirements in all jurisdictions; (ii) support its credit rating; and (iii) support its business strategy.

This section details Barclays’ capital position providing information on both capital resources and capital requirements. It also provides details of the leverage ratio and exposures.

Key metrics

12.4%

Fully loaded Common Equity Tier 1 ratio

The fully loaded CRD IV CET1 ratio increased to 12.4% (2015: 11.4%) reflecting an increase in CET1 capital of £4.5bn to £45.2bn, despite RWAs increasing by £7bn to £366bn.

The increase in CET1 capital was largely driven by profits of £2.1bn generated in the period, after absorbing the impact of notable items. Other favourable movements included the currency translation reserve as a result of the appreciation of all major currencies against Sterling.

The increase in RWAs was principally due to the appreciation of South African Rand, US Dollar and Euro against Sterling and business growth, which more than offset RWA reductions inNon-Core.

4.6%

Leverage ratio

The leverage ratio increased to 4.6% (2015: 4.5%) driven by a £5.8bn increase in fully loaded Tier 1 capital to £52.0bn partially offset by an increase in the leverage exposure of £97bn to £1,125bn.

Total IFRS assets increased 8% to £1,213bn from 2015 contributing to the 9% increase in the leverage exposure.

LOGO

    

Analysis of capital risk

Capital risk is the risk that the Group has insufficient capital resources, which could lead to: (i) a failure to meet regulatory requirements; (ii) a change to credit rating; or (iii) an inability to support business activity and growth.

This section details Barclays’ capital position providing information on both capital resources and capital requirements. It also provides detail of the leverage ratio and exposures.

Key metrics

11.4% fully loaded

Common Equity Tier 1 ratio

RWAs decreased by £44bn to £358bn. Non-Core RWAs decreased £29bn to £47bn as a result of the sale of the Spanish business and the rundown of legacy structured and credit products. Investment Bank RWAs decreased by £14bn to £108bn mainly due to a reduction in securities and derivatives, and improved RWA efficiency.

CET1 capital decreased £0.7bn to £40.7bn after absorbing adjusting items and dividends paid and foreseen.

4.5% leverage ratio

The leverage ratio increased significantly to 4.5% (2014: 3.7%) driven by a reduction in the leverage exposure of £205bn to £1,028bn predominantly due to the rundown in Non-Core of £156bn to £121bn.

 

148152  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 20152016 Annual Report on Form 20-F  


Summary of Contents

Page

§  Capital risk overview and summary of performance

§  Regulatory minimum capital and leverage requirements

–  Capital

–  Leverage

 ��

154

Capital risk is the risk that the Group has insufficient capital resources to (i) meet minimum regulatory requirements in all jurisdictions; (ii) support its credit rating; and (iii) support its business strategy.

This section details Barclays’ capital position providing information on both capital resources and capital requirements. It also provides details of the leverage ratio and exposures.

§  Analysis of capital resources

–  Capital ratios

–  Capital resources

–  Movement in CET1 capital

155

This section outlines the Group’s capital ratios, capital composition, and provides information on significant movements in CET1 capital during the year.

§  Analysis of risk weighted assets157

This section outlines risk weighted assets by risk type, business and macro drivers.

–  Risk weighted assets by risk type and business

–  Movement analysis of risk weighted assets

§  Analysis of leverage ratio and exposures

–  Leverage ratio and exposures

158

This section outlines the Group’s leverage ratios, leverage exposure composition, and provides information on significant movements in the IFRS and leverage balance sheet.

Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2016 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  153


Risk review

Risk performance

Funding risk – Capital

 

 

Capital risk is the risk that the Group has insufficient capital resources to:

 

§

Capital risk is the risk that the Group has insufficient capital resources to:

–  meet minimum regulatory requirements in the UK and in otherall jurisdictions such as the US and South Africa where regulated activities are undertaken. The Group’s authority to operate as a bank is dependent upon the maintenance of adequate capital resources at each level where prudential capital requirements are applied

 

§

–  support its credit rating. A weaker credit rating would increaserating; and

–  support its business strategy.

More details on monitoring and managing capital risk may be found in the Group’s cost of fundsRisk Management sections on pages97 to114

All disclosures in this section (pages154 to178) are unaudited unless otherwise stated. Disclosures for 2016 and 2015 include BAGL balances held for sale unless otherwise stated.

§support its growth and strategic options.

More details on monitoring and managing capital risk may be found in the Risk Management sections on pages 103 to 104.

All disclosures in this section (pages 149 to 153) are unaudited unless otherwise stated.

Overview

The fully loaded CRD IV CET1 ratio, among other metrics, is a measure of the capital strength and resilience of Barclays. Maintenance of our capital is vital in order to meet the minimum capital requirements of regulatory authorities and to fund growth within our businesses.

This section provides an overview of the Group’s: i)(i) regulatory minimum capital and leverage requirements; ii)(ii) capital resources; iii)(iii) risk weighted assets (RWAs); and iv)(iv) leverage ratio and exposures.

Summary of performance in the period

Barclays continues to be in excess of the minimum CRD IV transitional and fully loaded capital ratiosrequirements and PRA capital and leverage ratios.requirements.

The fully loaded CRD IV CET1 ratio increased to 12.4% (2015: 11.4% (2014: 10.3%) driven by a £43.5bn reductionreflecting an increase in RWAs to £358.4bn partially offset by a decrease in fully loaded CRD IV CET1 capital of £0.7bn£4.5bn to £40.7bn.£45.2bn, despite RWAs increasing by £7bn to £366bn.

The RWA reductionincrease in CET1 capital was primarilylargely driven by a £29bn decreaseprofits of £2.1bn generated in the Non-Core RWAs to £47bnperiod, after absorbing the impact of notable items. Other favourable movements included the currency translation reserve as a result of the saleappreciation of the Spanish business and a rundown of legacy structured and credit products. Investment Bankall major currencies against Sterling.

The increase in RWAs decreased £14bn to £108bn mainlywas principally due to a reductionthe appreciation of South African Rand, US Dollar and Euro against Sterling and business growth, which more than offset RWA reductions in securities and derivatives, and improved RWA efficiency.

CET1 capital decreased £0.7bn to £40.7bn after absorbing adjusting items and dividends paid and foreseen.Non-Core.

The leverage ratio increased significantly to 4.6% (2015: 4.5% (2014: 3.7%), driven by a reduction£5.8bn increase in fully loaded Tier 1 capital to £52.0bn partially offset by an increase in the leverage exposure of £97bn to £1,028bn (2014: £1,233bn). This£1,125bn.

Total IFRS assets increased 8% to £1,213bn from 2015 contributing to the 9% increase in leverage exposure.

The IFRS asset increase was predominantlymainly driven by loans and advances and other assets which increased £82bn to £707bn. The increase was primarily due to the appreciation of major currencies against Sterling, an increase in liquidity pool assets, and lending growth in Barclays UK and Barclays International. This was partially offset by the rundown and exit ofNon-Core assets.

Net derivative leverage exposure, remained broadly flat as an increase in assets of the Non-Core business£19bn to £347bn was offset by an increase in derivative liabilities resulting in regulatory derivative netting increasing £20bn to £313bn. The increase was mainly within foreign exchange derivatives driven by an increase in trade volumes and appreciation of £156bn to £121bn.

all major currencies against Sterling.

Regulatory minimum capital and leverage requirements

Capital – Fully loaded

Barclays’ current regulatory requirement is to meet a fully loaded CRD IV CET1 ratio of 9% by 2019, plus a Pillar 2A add-on. The 9% comprisescomprising the required 4.5% minimum CET1 ratio and, phased in from 2016, a Combined Buffer Requirement made up ofRequirement. This currently comprises a Capital Conservation Buffer (CCB) of 2.5% and a Globally Systemically Important Institution(G-SII) buffer determined by the PRA in line with guidance from the Financial Stability Board (FSB). Both buffers are subject to phased implementation, the CCB is phased in at 25% per annum with 0.625% applicable for 2016. TheG-SII buffer for 2016 and 2017 has been set at 2% and is also phased in at 25% per annum with 0.5% applicable for 2016 and 1% for 2017. On 21 November 2016 the FSB confirmed that theG-SII buffer for 2018 will be 1.5% with 1.1% applicable for 2018 and taking full effect from 2019 onwards.

Also forming part of 2%the Combined Buffer Requirement is a Counter-Cyclical Capital Buffer (CCyB) and a Systemic Risk Buffer (SRB). On 30 November 2016 the Financial Policy Committee (FPC) reaffirmed that it expects to maintain a CCyB of 0% on UK exposures until at least June 2017. Other national authorities also determine the appropriate CCyBs that should be applied to exposures in their jurisdiction. During 2016, CCyBs started to apply for Barclays’ exposures to other jurisdictions; however based on current exposures these are not material. No SRB has been set to date.

In addition, Barclays’ Pillar 2A requirement as per the PRA’s Individual Capital Guidance (ICG) is subject to review at least annually. Under current PRA guidance, the Pillar 2A add-on for 2016 will bebased on a point in time assessment was 3.9% of which 56% will needneeds to be met in CET1 form, equating to approximately 2.2% of RWAs. Basel Committee consultations and reviews might further impact theThe Pillar 2A requirement in the future.

In addition, a Counter-Cyclical Capital Buffer (CCCB) and/or additional Sectoral Capital Requirements (SCR) mayis subject to at least annual review and for 2017 Barclays’ Pillar 2Aadd-on will be required by the BoE to protect against perceived threats to financial stability. These buffers could be applied at the Group level or at a legal entity, sub-consolidated or portfolio level. No SCR has been set to date by the BoE, while the CCCB is currently 0% for UK exposures. Other national authorities determine the appropriate CCCBs that should be applied to exposures in their jurisdiction. During 2016, CCCBs will start to apply for our exposures in Hong Kong, Norway and Sweden. Based on current exposures we do not expect this4.0%, with approximately 2.3% of RWAs needing to be material.met in CET1 form. All capital, RWA and leverage calculations reflect Barclays’ interpretation of the current rules.

Capital – Transitional

On aThe CRD IV CET1 transitional basis,minimum capital requirement for 2016 is 7.8% including the PRA has implemented a minimum requirement4.5% CET1 ratio requirement, 2.2% of 4%, Tier 1 ratio of 5.5%Pillar 2A, a 0.625% CCB buffer, a 0.5%G-SII buffer and Total Capital ratio of 8%.

From 1 January 2015, the transitional capital ratios are equal to the fully loaded ratios following the PRA’s acceleration of transitional provisions relating to CET1 deductions and filters. The adjustment relating to unrealised gains on available for sale debt and equity that was applied throughout 2014 as an exception no longer applies.

Grandfathering limits on capital instruments, previously qualifying as Tier 1 and Tier 2, are unchanged under the PRA transitional rules.a 0% CCyB.

Leverage

In additionEffective 1 January 2016, Barclays is required to the Group’s capital requirements, minimum ratios have also been set in respect of leverage. Thedisclose a leverage ratio and an average leverage ratio applicable to the Group has been calculated in accordanceGroup:

§The leverage ratio is consistent with the December 2015 method of calculation and has been included in our disclosure. The calculation uses the end point CRR definition of Tier 1 capital for the numerator and the CRR definition of leverage exposure. The current expected minimum fully loaded requirement is 3%, but this could be impacted by the Basel Consultation on the Leverage Framework

§The average leverage ratio as outlined by the PRA Supervisory Statement SS45/15 and the updated PRA rulebook is calculated as the capital measure divided by the exposure measure, where the capital and exposure measure is based on the average of the last day of each month in the quarter. The expected end point minimum requirement is 3.5% comprising of the 3% minimum requirement, a fully phased inG-SII additional leverage ratio buffer(G-SII ALRB) and a countercyclical leverage ratio buffer (CCLB). The minimum requirement is on a phased basis in line with CET1G-SII buffer which results in a minimum requirement of 3.175% at 31 December 2016.

In August 2016, the requirementsPRA implemented the FPC’s recommendation to allow firms to exclude qualifying central bank claims from the calculation of the EU Capital Requirements Regulation (CRR)leverage exposure measure, as long as these are matched by deposits denominated in the same currency, subject to firms obtaining permission from the PRA. This change in reporting requirements is effective 1 April 2017, which was amended effective from January 2015. The leveragewill result in a modification to the calculation usesof the end-point CRR definition of Tier 1 capitalexposure measure for the numerator and the CRR definitionpurpose of leverage exposure. During 2015 Barclays was measured against the PRA leverage ratio requirement of 3%.

In December 2015, the PRA finalisedcalculating the UK leverage ratio framework in which it adopted the FPC’s recommendations onratio. At 31 December 2016, Barclays’ reported leverage ratio requirements. These recommendations have been finalised in the Supervisory Statement SS45/15 and have been incorporated as part of the updated PRA rulebook, effective January 2016. This would result in a fully phased inaverage leverage ratio requirement of 3.7% for Barclays. The minimum requirement would increase in the event that Barclays was subject to: (i) an increased CCCB; and/or (ii) Barclays was reclassified into a higher G-SII category. Furthermore from January 2016,disclosed is unaffected by this announcement as firms are required to report quarterly leverage ratio information, including an average ratio.

disclose based on the existing rules.

 

 

154  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 20152016 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  149


 

 

 

 

Capital resourcesResources

The CRR and Capital Requirements Directive (CRD) implemented Basel III within the EU (collectively known as CRD IV) on 1 January 2014. The rules are supplemented by Regulatory Technical Standards and the PRA’s rulebook, including the implementation of transitional rules. However, rules and guidance are still subject to change as certain aspects of CRD IV are dependent on final technical standards and clarifications to be issued by the EBA and adopted by the European Commission and the PRA. All capital, RWA and leverage calculations reflect Barclays’ interpretation of the current rules.

 

Key capital ratios

        

Capital ratios

        

As at 31 December

   2015       2014    2016      2015 

Fully Loaded CET1

   11.4%       10.3% 

PRA Transitional CET1a

   11.4%       10.2% 

PRA Transitional Tier 1b,c

   14.7%       13.0% 

PRA Transitional Total Capitalb,c

   18.6%       16.5% 

Fully Loaded CET1a,b

   12.4%      11.4% 

PRA Transitional Tier 1c,d

   15.6%      14.7% 

PRA Transitional Total Capitalc,d

   19.6%      18.6% 
            

Capital resources (audited)

                

As at 31 December

   

 

2015 

£m 

  

  

    

2014 

£m 

   

2016 

£m 

 

 

    

2015 

£m 

Shareholders’ equity (excluding non-controlling interests) per the balance sheet

   59,810       59,567    64,873      59,810 

Less: other equity instruments (recognised as AT1 capital)

   (5,305)      (4,322)   (6,449)     (5,305)

Adjustment to retained earnings for foreseeable dividends

   (631)      (615)   (388)     (631)

Minority interests (amount allowed in consolidated CET1)

   950       1,227    1,825      950 

Other regulatory adjustments and deductions

            

Additional value adjustments (PVA)

   (1,602)      (2,199)   (1,571)     (1,602)

Goodwill and intangible assets

   (8,234)      (8,127)   (9,054)     (8,234)

Deferred tax assets that rely on future profitability excluding temporary differences

   (855)      (1,080)   (494)     (855)

Fair value reserves related to gains or losses on cash flow hedges

   (1,231)      (1,814)   (2,104)     (1,231)

Excess of expected losses over impairment

   (1,365)      (1,772)   (1,294)     (1,365)

Gains or losses on liabilities at fair value resulting from own credit

   127       658    86      127 

Defined benefit pension fund assets

   (689)      –    (38)     (689)

Direct and indirect holdings by an institution of own CET1 instruments

   (57)      (25)   (50)     (57)

Deferred tax assets arising from temporary differences (amount above 10% threshold)

   (183)     – 

Other regulatory adjustments

   (177)      (45)   45      (177)

Fully loaded CET1 capital

   40,741       41,453    45,204      40,741 

Regulatory adjustments relating to unrealised gains

   –       (583)

PRA transitional CET1 capital

   40,741       40,870 

Additional Tier 1 (AT1) capital

            

Capital instruments and the related share premium accounts

   5,305       4,322    6,449      5,305 

Qualifying AT1 capital (including minority interests) issued by subsidiaries

   6,718       6,870    5,445      6,718 

Other regulatory adjustments and deductions

   (130)      –    (130)     (130)

Transitional AT1 capitald

   11,893       11,192 

Transitional AT1 capitale

   11,764      11,893 

PRA transitional Tier 1 capital

   52,634       52,062      56,968      52,634 

Tier 2 capital

      

Tier 2 (T2) capital

      

Capital instruments and the related share premium accounts

   1,757       800    3,769      1,757 

Qualifying Tier 2 capital (including minority interests) issued by subsidiaries

   12,389       13,529    11,366      12,389 

Other regulatory adjustments and deductions

   (253)      (48)   (257)     (253)

PRA transitional total regulatory capital

   66,527       66,343    71,846      66,527 

 

 

 

Notes

aThe transitional regulatory adjustments to CET1 capital are no longer applicable resulting in CET1 capital on a fully loaded basis being equal to that on a transitional basis.
bThe CRD IV CET1 ratio (FSA October 2012 transitional statement) as applicable to Barclays’ Tier 2 Contingent Capital Notes was 13.1%13.7% based on £46.8bn£50.0bn of transitional CRD IV CET1CET 1 capital and £358bn£366bn RWAs.The transitional CET1 ratio according to the FSA October 2012 transitional statement would be 13.1%13.7%. This is calculated as CET1 capital as adjusted for the transitional relief (£46.8bn)(£50.0bn), divided by CRD IV RWAs. The following transitional relief items are added back to CET1 capital: Goodwill and Intangibles (£4.9bn)(£3.6bn), Deferred tax asset (£0.5bn), Debt valuation adjustment (£0.1bn)(£0.2bn), Expected losses over impairment (£0.8bn) and(£0.5bn), Excess minority interest (£0.2bn), partially offset by the defined benefit pension adjustment of £0.5bn. and Deferred tax assets arising from temporary differences (amount above 10% threshold) (£0.2bn).
bcThe PRA transitional capital is based on the PRA Rulebook and accompanying supervisory statements.
cdAs at 31 December 2015,2016, Barclays’ fully loaded Tier 1 capital was £46,173m,£51,993m, and the fully loaded Tier 1 ratio was 12.9%14.2%. Fully loaded total regulatory capital was £62,103m£67,772m and the fully loaded total capital ratio was 17.3%18.5%. The fully loaded Tier 1 capital and total capital measures are calculated without applying the transitional provisions set out in CRD IV and assessing compliance of AT1 and Tier 2 instruments against the relevant criteria in CRD IV.
deOf the £11.9bn£11.8bn transitional AT1 capital, fully loaded AT1 capital used for the leverage ratio comprises the £5.3bn£6.4bn capital instruments and related share premium accounts, £0.3bn£0.5bn qualifying minority interests and £0.1bn capital deductions. It excludes legacy Tier 1 capital instruments issued by subsidiaries that are subject to grandfathering.

 

150  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 20152016 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  155


Risk review

Risk performance

Funding risk – Capital

 

 

Movement in CET1 capital

   
   

20152016  

£m  

Opening balance as at 1 January

  41,45340,741 

LossProfit for the period attributable to equity holders

  (49)2,080 

Own credit

  (531)(41)

Dividends paid and foreseen

  (1,372)(843)

DecreaseIncrease in retained regulatory capital generated from earnings

  (1,952)1,196 

Net impact of share awards

  609535 

Available for sale reserves

  (245)(391)

Currency translation reserves

  (41)3,674 

Other reserves

  (778)

Increase in other qualifying reserves

  3323,040 

Retirement benefit reserve

  916 (988)

Defined benefit pension fund asset deduction

  (689)651

Net impact of pensions

  227 (337)

Minority interests

  (277)875 

Additional value adjustments (PVA)

  59731 

Goodwill and intangible assets

  (107)(820)

Deferred tax assets that rely on future profitability excluding those arising from temporary differences

  225361 

Excess of expected loss over impairment

  40771 

Direct and indirect holdings by an institution of own CET1 instruments

  (32)

Deferred tax assets arising from temporary differences (amount above 10% threshold)

(183)

Other regulatory adjustments

  (132)222 

DecreaseIncrease in regulatory capital due to adjustments and deductions

  681564 

Closing balance as at 31 December

  40,74145,204 

The CET1 ratio improved to 12.4% (2015: 11.4%) primarily driven by an increase in CET1 capital of £4.5bn to £45.2bn as a result of profits of £2.1bn generated in the year, after absorbing the impact of notable items. Regulatory capital generated from earnings after absorbing the impact of own credit and dividends paid and foreseen increased CET1 capital by £1.2bn. Other significant movements in the year were:

§a £3.0bn increase in other qualifying reserves including a £3.7bn increase in the currency translation reserves as US Dollar, Euro and South African Rand strengthened against Sterling; partially offset by a £0.4bn decrease as a result of preference share redemptions and a £0.4bn decrease in available for sale reserves;

 

§ Duringa £0.3bn decrease, net of tax, as a result of movements relating to pensions. There was a £1.0bn decrease in the retirement benefit reserve largely due to the UKRF, which is the Group’s main pension scheme, moving from a £0.8bn surplus in December 2015 to a £27m deficit in December 2016. The decrease in reserves was partially offset by the fully loaded CET1 ratio increased to 11.4% (2014: 10.3%) driven byremoval of a significant reduction£0.7bn capital deduction for the UKRF asset in RWAs.December 2015;

 

§ CET1 capital decreased by £0.7bn to £40.7bn, after absorbing adjusting items, with thea £0.9bn increase in minority interests following significant movements:

a £1.4bn reduction for dividends paid and foreseen

a £0.2bn net increase as the retirement benefit reserve increased £0.9bn, offset by £0.7bn pension asset deduction

a £0.7bn increase due to lower regulatory deductions and adjustments including a £0.6bn decrease in PVA, a £0.4bn decrease in expected losses due to the sale of the Spanish business and disposals across the Investment Bank,12.2% of BAGL’s issued share capital was partially offset by a £0.3bn decrease in eligible minority interests.higher capital deductions.

Transitional AT1 capital remained largely flat in the period as redemptions and repurchases of £1.3bn of CRD IV end point non qualifying preference shares, tier one notes and reserve capital instruments were offset by the issuance of $1.5bn of end point qualifying AT1 capital instruments.

 

156  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 20152016 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  151


        

    

    

 

 

 Risk weighted assets (RWAs) by risk type and business  
   Credit risk               Counterparty credit riska       Market riskb                  
 
Operational
risk
  
  
   Total RWAs  
    

 

Std

£m

  

  

   

 

IRB

£m

  

  

   

 

Std

£m

  

  

   

 

IRB

£m

  

  

  

 

Std

£m

  

  

  

 

IMA

£m

  

  

  £m     £m  
 As at 31 December 2015             
 Personal & Corporate Banking   31,506     71,352     242     1,122    30        16,176     120,428  
 Barclaycard   17,988     17,852                      5,505     41,345  
 Africa Banking   8,556     17,698     22     487    885    682    5,604     33,934  
 Investment Bank   4,808     39,414     11,020     10,132    9,626    13,713    19,620     108,333  
 Head Office and Other Operations   1,513     2,763     32     59    48    1,230    2,104     7,749  
 Total Core   64,371     149,079     11,316     11,800    10,589    15,625    49,009     311,789  
 Barclays Non-Core   5,078     11,912     1,397     9,231    679    10,639    7,651     46,587  
 Total risk weighted assets   69,449     160,991     12,713     21,031    11,268    26,264    56,660     358,376  
             
 As at 31 December 2014             
 Personal & Corporate Banking   32,657     70,080     238     1,049    26        16,176     120,226  
 Barclaycard   15,910     18,492                      5,505     39,907  
 Africa Banking   9,015     21,794     10     562    948    588    5,604     38,521  
 Investment Bank   5,773     36,829     13,739     11,781    18,179    16,480    19,621     122,402  
 Head Office and Other Operations   506     2,912     234     62    7    521    1,326     5,568  
 Total Core   63,861     150,107     14,221     13,454    19,160    17,589    48,232     326,624  
 Barclays Non-Core   10,679     19,416     3,023     18,406    2,236    13,088    8,428     75,276  
 Total risk weighted assets   74,540     169,523     17,244     31,860    21,396    30,677    56,660     401,900  
             
 Movement analysis of risk weighted assets  
 Risk weighted assets                  
 
Credit risk
£bn
  
  
  
 

 

Counterparty
credit risk

£bn

  
a 

  

  

 

Market risk

£bn

b 

  

  
 

 

Operational
risk

£bn

  
  

  

   
 
Total RWAs
£bn
  
  
 As at 1 January 2015         244.0    49.1    52.1    56.7     401.9  
 Book size         8.3    (10.6  (9.5       (11.8
 Acquisitions and disposals         (14.2      (0.4       (14.6
 Book quality         0.1    (1.7  0.7         (0.9
 Model updates         (2.1  (1.1  (2.7       (5.9
 Methodology and policy         2.3    (1.9  (2.6       (2.2
 Foreign exchange movementc         (8.0  (0.1           (8.1
 Other                                     
 As at 31 December 2015                  230.4    33.7    37.6    56.7     358.4  

Risk weighted assets

Risk weighted assets (RWAs) by risk type and business

 

   Credit risk    Counterparty credit riska,b    Market risk    
Operational
risk
 
 
   

Total

RWAs

 

 

As at 31 December 2016

   

Std

£m

 

 

   

IRB

£m

 

 

   

Std

£m

 

 

   

IRB

£m

 

 

   

Settlement
Risk

£m

 
 

 

   

CVA

£m

 

 

   

Std

£m

 

 

   

IMA

£m

 

 

   £m    £m 

Barclays UK

   5,592    49,591    47                        12,293    67,523 

Barclays International

   53,201    82,327    13,515    13,706    30    3,581    9,343    9,460    27,538    212,701 

Head Officec

   9,048    27,122    77    1,157        927    482    2,323    12,156    53,292 

Barclays Core

   67,841    159,040    13,639    14,863    30    4,508    9,825    11,783    51,987        333,516 

BarclaysNon-Core

   4,714    9,945    1,043    6,081    37    2,235    477    2,928    4,673    32,133 

Barclays Group

   72,555    168,985    14,682    20,944    67    6,743    10,302    14,711    56,660    365,649 

As at 31 December 2015

                                                  

Barclays UK

   6,562    50,763    26                        12,174    69,525 

Barclays International

   45,892    77,275    10,463    11,055    516    3,406    8,373    10,196    27,657    194,833 

Head Officec

   8,291    20,156    54    538    8    382    399    1,903    8,003    39,734 

Barclays Core

   60,745    148,194    10,543    11,593    524    3,788    8,772    12,099    47,834    304,092 

BarclaysNon-Core

   8,704    12,797    1,653    9,430    1    7,480    1,714    3,679    8,826    54,284 

Barclays Group

   69,449    160,991    12,196    21,023    525    11,268    10,486    15,778 ��  56,660    358,376 
                    

Movement analysis of risk weighted assets

 

Risk weighted assets

                            
Credit risk 
£bn 
 
 
   

Counterparty
credit risk

£bn

 
a,b  

 

   
Market risk 
£bn 
 
 
   

Operational
risk

£bn

 
 

 

   

Total 
RWAs 

  £bn 

 
 

 

As at 1 January 2016

             230.4     45.0    26.3     56.7    358.4  

Book size

             0.8     1.2    (0.6)        1.4  

Acquisitions and disposals

             (6.4)    (0.2           (6.6) 

Book quality

             (0.5)    (0.4   0.6         (0.3) 

Model updates

             (2.9)    (2.0   (0.3)        (5.2) 

Methodology and policy

             1.1     (1.2   (1.0)        (1.1) 

Foreign exchange movementd

 

           19.0         –         19.0  

As at 31 December 2016

                            241.5     42.4    25.0     56.7    365.6  

RWAs decreased £43.5bnincreased £7.2bn to £358.4bn,£365.6bn, driven by:

 

§ Book size:book size increased RWAs decreased £11.8bnby £1.4bn primarily due to a reductionan increase in holdings of US bondstrading activity in Barclays International and equitiesbusiness growth in corporate and a reduction in derivatives and securities financing transactions. This wasconsumer lending partially offset by a growth in corporate lending, particularly in Africa and the UKsecuritisation transactions

 

§ Acquisitionsacquisitions and disposals:disposals decreased RWAs decreased £14.6bnby £6.6bn primarily due to disposals in the rundown ofNon-Core portfolios, including the sale of the Spanish businessPortuguese and Italian businesses

 

§ Model updates:model updates decreased RWAs decreased £5.9bnby £5.2bn primarily due to implementation of diversification benefits across advanced general and specific market risk, as well as a recalibration of a credit riskdriven by model within the Investment Bank and Non-Corechanges in Barclays UK mortgages following formal approval

 

§ Methodologymethodology and policy:Policy decreased RWAs decreased £2.2bnby £1.1bn primarily due todriven by the implementationeffect of collateral modelling for mismatched FX collateral on average CVA and a transfer of securities financing transactions in certain businesses from the banking book to trading book, enabling further collateralnew treatment for sovereign exposures partly offset by modelled wholesale recalibration

 

§ Foreignforeign exchange movements decreasedincreased RWAs by £8.1bn£19.0bn primarily due to depreciationdriven by the appreciation of ZARSouth African Rand, US Dollar and Euro against GBP.Sterling.

 

Notes

aRWAs in relation to default fund contributions are included in counterparty credit risk.
bRWAs in relation to credit valuation adjustment (CVA) are included in marketcounterparty credit risk.
cIncludes Africa Banking discontinued operations.
dForeign exchange movement does not include FX for modelled counterparty risk or modelled market risk.

 

152  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 20152016 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  157


Risk review

Risk performance

Funding risk – Capital

 

 

Leverage ratio and exposures

The leverage ratio applicable to the Group has been calculated in accordance with the requirements of the CRR which was amended effective from January 2015. The leverage calculation below uses the end point CRR definition of Tier 1 capital for the numerator and the CRR definition of leverage exposure.

At 31 December 2015,2016, Barclays’ leverage ratio was 4.6% (2015: 4.5%) and the average leverage ratio was 4.3%, which exceeds the transitional minimum requirement for Barclays of 3.175% and expected end point minimum requirement of 3.7% as outlined by3.5%.

The impact of the PRA Supervisory Statement SS45/15 andrule modification to allow firms to exclude qualifying central bank claims from the updated PRA rulebook, comprisingcalculation of the 3% minimum requirement,leverage exposure measure would have resulted in an average leverage ratio of 4.5% and the fully phased in G-SII buffer.a leverage ratio at 31 December 2016 of 5.0%.

 

Leverage exposure            
   

 

 

As at

31.12.15

£bn

  

  

  

   

 

 

As at

31.12.14

£bn

  

a 

  

   

As at 
    31.12.16 
£bn 
 
 
 
   

As at 
31.12.15 
£bn 
 
 
 
Accounting assets        
Derivative financial instruments   328     440     347     328  
Cash collateral   62     73     67     62  
Reverse repurchase agreements and other similar secured lending   28     132     13     28  
Financial assets designated at fair valueb   77     38  

Financial assets designated at fair valuea

   79     77  
Loans and advances and other assets   625     675     707     625  
Total IFRS assets   1,120     1,358     1,213     1,120  
        
Regulatory consolidation adjustments   (10   (8   (6)    (10) 
    
Derivatives adjustments        
Derivatives netting   (293   (395   (313)    (293) 
Adjustments to cash collateral   (46   (53   (50)    (46) 
Net written credit protection   15     27     12     15  
Potential Future Exposure (PFE) on derivatives   129     179     136     129  
Total derivatives adjustments   (195   (242   (215)    (195) 
        
Securities financing transactions (SFTs) adjustments   16     25     29     16  
        
Regulatory deductions and other adjustments   (14   (15   (15)    (14) 
Weighted off-balance sheet commitments   111     115     119     111  
Total fully loaded leverage exposure   1,028     1,233  

Total leverage exposure

   1,125     1,028  
        
Fully loaded CET1 capital   40.7     41.5     45.2     40.7  
Fully loaded AT1 capital   5.4     4.6     6.8     5.4  
Fully loaded Tier 1 capital   46.2     46.0     52.0     46.2  
        
Fully loaded leverage ratio   4.5%     3.7%  

Leverage ratio

   4.6%     4.5%  

The leverage ratio increased to 4.6% (2015: 4.5%) primarily driven by a £5.8bn increase in fully loaded Tier 1 capital to £52.0bn (December 2015: £46.2bn), partially offset by an increase in the leverage exposure of £97bn to £1,125bn (2015: £1,028bn):

 

§ During 2015 the leverage ratio increased significantly to 4.5% (2014: 3.7%)IFRS asset increase was mainly driven by a reductionloans and advances and other assets which increased £82bn to £707bn. The increase was primarily due to the appreciation of major currencies against Sterling, an increase in liquidity pool assets, and lending growth in Barclays UK and Barclays International. This was partially offset by the leverage exposurerundown and exit of £205bn to £1,028bn.Non-Core assets

 

§ Total derivative exposurescdecreased £76bnSFT adjustments increased by £13bn to £195bn:

PFE decreased £50bn to £129bn, mainly£29bn, primarily as a result of continued Non-Core rundown and optimisations including trade compressions and tear-ups

other derivative assets decreased £14bn to £51bn, driven by a net decreasechange in IFRS derivatives. The decrease was mainly within interest rate and foreign exchange derivatives due to net trade reduction and an increase in major interest forward curves

net written credit protection decreased £12bn to £15bn due to a reduction in business activity and improved portfolio netting.treatment of securitiespre-positioned for use against undrawn central bank lending facilities

 

§ Taken together, reverse repurchase agreementsPFE on derivatives increased by £7bn to £136bn primarily driven by the appreciation of major currencies against Sterling, partially offset by compression activity, sale of positions and other similar secured lending and financial assets designated at fair value decreased £65bn to £105bn, reflecting a reduction in matched book trading and general firm financing due to balance sheet deleveraging.maturity of trades

 

§ Loans and advances and other assets decreased £50bnweightedoff-balance sheet commitments increased by £8bn to £625bn£119bn primarily driven by £37bn reduction in trading portfolio assets primarily due to Non-Core rundown, a reduction in trading activities in the Investment Bank, as well as a £10bn decrease in settlement balances and a £5bn decrease in Africa reflecting the depreciationappreciation of ZARmajor currencies against GBP. This was partially offset by lending growth of £3bn in Barclaycard.Sterling.

The average leverage exposure measure for Q4 2016 was £1,206bn resulting in an average leverage ratio of 4.3%. The CET1 capital held against the 0.175% transitionalG-SII ALRB was £2bn. The impact of the CCLB is currently nil.

§SFT adjustments decreased by £9bn to £16bn due to maturity of trades and a reduction in trading volumes.

The difference between the average leverage ratio and the leverage ratio was primarily driven by higher positions in October and November within trading portfolio assets, reverse repurchase agreements and settlements balances.

 

Notes

Note

a2014 comparatives have been prepared on a BCBS 270 basis. Barclays does not believe that there is a material difference between the BCBS 270 leverage exposure and a leverage exposure calculated in accordance with the EU delegated act.
bIncluded within financial assets designated at fair value are reverse repurchase agreements designated at fair value of £50bn (2014: £5bn)£63bn (2015: £50bn).
cTotal derivative exposures includes IFRS derivative financial instruments, cash collateral and total derivative adjustments.

 

Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  153


Risk review

Risk performance

Funding risk – liquidity

Analysis of liquidity risk

Liquidity risk is the risk that a firm, although solvent, either does not have sufficient financial resources available to enable it to meet its obligations as they fall due, or can secure such resources only at excessive cost.

This section details the Group’s liquidity risk profile and provides information on the way the Group manages that risk.

Key metrics

133% LCR

The Group strengthened its liquidity position during the year, increasing its surplus to internal and regulatory requirements.

£9bn Term Issuance

The Group maintains access to stable and diverse sources of funding across customer deposits and wholesale debt.

154158  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 20152016 Annual Report on Form 20-F  


Risk review

Risk performance

Funding risk – liquidity

 

 

Analysis of liquidity risk

Liquidity risk is the risk that a firm, although solvent, either does not have sufficient financial resources available to enable it to meet its obligations as they fall due, or can secure such resources only at excessive cost.

This section details the Group’s liquidity risk profile and provides information on the way the Group manages that risk.

Key metrics

131% LCR

The Group strengthened its liquidity position during the year, increasing its surplus to internal and regulatory requirements

£12bn Term

Issuance

The Group maintains access to stable and diverse sources of funding across customer deposits and wholesale debt

LOGO

Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2016 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  159


Summary of Contents

Page

§  Liquidity risk overview and summary of performance

§  Liquidity risk stress testing

    –  Liquidity Risk appetite

    –  Liquidity regulation

    –  Internal and regulatory stress tests

161 161 161 162 163

The risk that the firm, although solvent, either does not have sufficient financial resources available to enable it to meet its obligations as they fall due, or can secure such resources only at excessive cost.

This section provides an overview of the Group’s liquidity risk.

§  Liquidity pool

    –  Composition of the liquidity pool

    –  Liquidity pool by currency

    –  Management of the group liquidity pool

    –  Contingent liability

164 164 164 164 165

The liquidity pool is held unencumbered and is not used to support payment or clearing requirements. The liquidity pool is intended to offset stress outflows, and comprises cash and unencumbered assets.

§  Funding structure and funding relationships

    –  Deposit funding

    –  Behavioural Maturity Profile

    –  Wholesale funding

    –  Term financing

165 165 166 166 168

The basis for sound liquidity risk management is a solid funding structure that reduces the probability of a liquidity stress leading to an inability to meet funding obligations as they fall due.

§  Encumbrance

    –  On-balance sheet

    –  Off-balance sheet

    –  Repurchase agreements and reverse repurchase

        agreements

168 169 169 171

Asset encumbrance arises from collateral pledged against secured funding and other collateralised obligations. Barclays funds a portion of trading portfolio assets and other securities via repurchase agreements and other similar borrowing, and pledges a portion of customer loans and advances as collateral in securitisation, covered bond and other similar secured structures.

§  Credit ratings

    –  Contractual credit rating downgrade exposure

172 172

In addition to monitoring and managing key metrics related to the financial strength of the Group, Barclays solicits independent credit ratings.

These ratings assess the creditworthiness of the Group, its subsidiaries and branches and are based on reviews of a broad range of business and financial attributes including risk management processes and procedures, capital strength, earnings, funding, asset quality, liquidity, accounting and governance.

§  Liquidity management at BAGL Group

173

Liquidity risk is managed separately at BAGL Group due to local currency, funding and regulatory requirements.

§  Contractual maturity of financial assets and liabilities

174

Provides details on the contractual maturity of all financial instruments and other assets and liabilities.

160  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2016 Annual Report on Form 20-F


Risk review

Risk performance

LiquidityFunding risk is the risk that the Group, although solvent, either does not have sufficient financial resources available to meet its obligations as they fall due, or can secure such resources only at excessive cost. This also results in a firm’s inability to meet regulatory liquidity requirements. This risk is inherent in all banking operations and can be affected by a range of Group-specific and market-wide events.

All disclosures in this section (pages 155 to 171) are unaudited and exclude BAGL unless otherwise stated.

Liquidity risk

Liquidity risk is the risk that the Group, although solvent, either does not have sufficient financial resources available to meet its obligations as they fall due, or can secure such resources only at excessive cost. This also results in a firm’s inability to meet regulatory liquidity requirements. This risk is inherent in all banking operations and can be affected by a range of Group-specific and market-wide events.

All disclosures in this section (pages 161 to 177) are unaudited and exclude BAGL unless otherwise stated.

Overview

The Group has a comprehensive Key Risk Control Framework for managing the Group’s liquidity risk. The Liquidity Framework meets the PRA’s standards and is designed to ensure the Group maintains liquidity resources that are sufficient in amount and quality, and a funding profile that is appropriate to meet the liquidity risk appetite. The Liquidity Framework is delivered via a combination of policy formation, review and governance, analysis, stress testing, limit setting and monitoring.

Liquidity risk is managed separately at Barclays Africa Group Limited (BAGL) due to local currency and funding requirements. Unless stated otherwise, all disclosures in this section exclude BAGL and they are reported on a stand-alonestandalone basis. Adjusting for local requirements, BAGL liquidity risk is managed on a consistent basis to the Group.

This section provides an analysis of the Group’s: i) liquidity risk stress testing; ii) internal and regulatory stress tests; iii) liquidity pool; iv) funding structure and funding relationships; v) wholesale funding; vi) term financing; vii) encumbrance; viii) repurchase agreements; ix) credit ratings; x) liquidity management at BAGLBAGL; and xi) contractual maturity of financial assets and liabilities.

For further detail on liquidity risk governance and framework see page 105.384.

Summary of performance in the period

The Group maintained a surpluscontinued to maintain surpluses to its internal and regulatory requirements in 2015.requirements. The liquidity pool was £145bn (2014: £149bn)increased to £165bn (2015: £145bn), primarily driven by the depreciation of GBP against other major currencies and net increase in retail and commercial deposits and wholesale funding to support business growth. The Liquidity Coverage Ratio (LCR) was 131% (December 2015: 133% (2014: 124%), equivalent to a surplus of £37bn (2014: £30bn)£39bn (December 2015: £37bn). While the liquidity pool may reduce in future, the Group intends to continue to maintain a prudent surplus to regulatory requirements.

Wholesale funding outstanding excluding repurchase agreements reduced to £142bn (2014: £171bn)was £158bn (December 2015: £142bn). The increase was driven by the prudent management of the liquidity position, holding company issuance and depreciation of GBP against other major currencies. The Group issued £9bn£12.1bn equivalent of term funding net of early redemptions during 2015,capital and senior unsecured debt from the holding company of which £4bn was£8.6bn equivalent and £0.7bn equivalent in public and private senior unsecured debt issued byrespectively, and £2.8bn of capital instruments. In the holding company, Barclays PLC. During Q415, Barclays PLC also issued EUR Tier 2 securitiessame period £7.4bn of £1bn equivalent. All the capital and debt proceeds raised by Barclays PLC have been used to subscribe for instruments at Barclays Bank PLC the operating company with a ranking corresponding to the securities issued by Barclays PLC.capital and senior unsecured debt was bought back or called.

Liquidity risk stress testing

Under the Liquidity Framework, the Group has established a Liquidity Risk Appetite (LRA) together with the appropriate limits for the management of the liquidity risk. This is the level of liquidity risk the Group chooses to take in pursuit of its business objectives and in meeting its regulatory obligations. The key expression of the liquidity risk is through internal stress tests. It is measured with reference to the liquidity pool compared to anticipated stressed net contractual and contingent outflows for each of three short-term stress scenarios.

Liquidity Risk Appetite

As part of the LRA, the Group runs three primary short-term liquidity stress scenarios, aligned to the PRA’s prescribed stresses:

 

§ a 90-day market-wide stress event

 

§ a 30-day Barclays-specific stress event

 

§ a combined30-day market-wide and Barclays-specific stress event.

Under normal market conditions, the liquidity pool is managed to be at a target of at least 100% of anticipated outflows under each of these stress scenarios. The30-day Barclays-specific stress scenario results in the greatest net outflows of each of the liquidity stress tests .Thetests. The combined30-day scenario assumes outflows consistent with a firm specificfirm-specific stress for the first two weeks of the stress period, followed by relatively lower outflows consistent with a market-wide stress for the remainder of the stress period.

Barclays also evaluates its long-term LRA, one year stress test based on prolonged closure of capital markets.

 

 

  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 20152016 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  155161


        

        

        

 

 

Key LRA assumptions include:

For the year ended 31 December 2015

 Liquidity risk driverBarclays-specific stressKey LRA assumptions include:
For the year ended 31 December 2016

 Wholesale secured

 and unsecured

 fundingDrivers of Liquidity Risk

 

§   Zero rollover of wholesale unsecured liabilities maturing, senior unsecured debt and conduit commercial paper.

LRA Specific Stress – Key Assumptions

 

§   No benefit assumed from reverse repos covering firm short positions.Wholesale Secured and Unsecured Funding Risk

§   Rollover of trades secured on extremely liquid collateral.

§   Varying rollover of trades secured on liquid collateral, subject to haircut widening.

 

 

§   Zero rollover of trades secured on less-liquid collateral.maturing wholesale unsecured funding

§   100%Loss of repo capacity onnon-extremely liquid repos at contractual maturity date

§   Withdrawal of contractual buybacks will occur.buyback obligations, excess client futures margin, PB client cash and overlifts

§   Haircuts applied to the market value of marketable assets held in the liquidity buffer.

 Deposit outflow

§   Substantial deposit outflows in PCB and Barclaycard as the Group is seen as greater credit risk than competitors.

 Funding

 concentration

§   Additional outflows recognised against concentration of providers of wholesale financing (largest unsecured counterparty unwilling to roll).

 Intra-day liquidity

§   Anticipated liquidity required to support additional intra-day requirements at cash payment and securities settlement venues based on historical peak usage and triparty settlement based on forward maturities of trades.buffer

 

 

 Intra-groupRetail and Corporate Funding Risk

 

 

 

§   Anticipated liquidity requiredRetail and Corporate deposit outflows as counterparties seek to diversify their deposit balances

Intra-day Liquidity Risk

§   Liquidity held againstintra-day requirements for the settlement of cash and securities under a stress

Intra-Group Liquidity Risk

§   Liquidity support for material subsidiaries, based on stand-alone stress tests.subsidiaries. Surplus liquidity held within certain subsidiaries is not taken as a benefit to the wider Group.

 

 Off-balance sheetCross-Currency Liquidity Risk

 

§   Currency liquidity cash flows at contractual maturity for physically settled FX forwards and cross currency swaps

Off-Balance Sheet Liquidity Risk

§   Drawdown on committed facilities based on facility type,and counterparty type and counterparty creditworthiness.

§   Outflow of all collateral owed to counterparties but not yet called.

§   Collateral outflows based on Monte Carlo simulation and historical stress outflows.due to a 2 notch credit rating downgrade

§   Increase in the Group’s initial margin requirement across all major exchanges.exchanges

§   Outflows as a result of a multi-notch downgrade in credit rating.

 Franchise viability

§   Liquidity required in order to meetVariation margin outflows that are non-contractual in nature but necessary in order to support the Group’s ongoing franchise (for example, market-making activities and non contractual debt buyback).from collateralised risk positions

 Cross currency risk

§   Net settlement cash flows at contractual maturity for physically settled FX forwards and cross currency swaps are reflected.

§   No benefit assumed from surplus net inflows in non-G10 currencies.

 Mitigating actions

§   MonetisationOutflow of unencumbered assets that are of known liquidity value to the firmcollateral owing but held outside the liquidity pool (subject to haircut/valuation adjustment).not called

 Internalisation Risk

§   Loss of internal sources of funding within the Prime Brokerage Synthetic Business.synthetics business

Franchise-Viability Risk

 

 

§   Acceleration of term profile associated with Prime Brokerage Clients deleveraging their portfolios asymmetrically by closing short positions.Liquidity held in order to meet outflows that arenon-contractual in nature, but are necessary in order to support the firm’s ongoing franchise (e.g. debt buybacks)

Funding Concentration Risk

§   Liquidity held against largest wholesale funding counterparty refusing to roll

Management Actions

§   Specifically defined actions that raise liquidity or mitigate cash outflows that would be conducted in a manner so as not to increase market volatility, whilst maintaining all core franchises

 

Liquidity regulation

Since October 2015, the Group manages its liquidity profile against the new CRD IV liquidity regime implemented by PRA. The CRD IV regime defines the liquidity risk ratio, liquidity pool asset eligibility and net stress outflow applied against Barclays reported balances.

The Group monitors its position against the CRD IV Interim LCRDelegated Act Liquidity Coverage Ratio (LCR) and the Basel III Net Stable Funding Ratio (NSFR).

The LCR is designed to promote short-term resilience of a bank’s liquidity risk profile by ensuring that it hasholds sufficient high quality liquid resourcesHigh Quality Liquid Assets to survive an acute stress scenario lasting for 30 days. The NSFR has a time horizon of at least six12 months and has been developed to promote a sustainable maturity structure of assets and liabilities.

The PRA regime requires phased compliance with theCRD IV LCR standard frombecame effective on 1 October 2015, atwith a minimum ratio requirement in the UK of 80% increasingas at 31 December 2016; this will increase to 90% on 1 January 2017 and then to 100% byon 1 January 2018. The methodology forAs of 31 December 2016, the Group reported a CRD IV LCR is based off the final published Delegated Act which became EU law in October 2015.of 131% (2015: 133%).

In October 2014, the BCBS published a final standard for the NSFR with the minimum requirement to be introduced in January 2018 at 100% on an ongoing basis. The methodology for calculatingOn 23 November 2016 the European Commission published draft amendments to the Capital Requirements Regulation (CRR) including its proposed implementation of NSFR in the EU. This proposal makes a number of changes from Basel NSFR, particularly in the treatment of derivative and secured financing transactions. Barclays is in the process of assessing the impact of these changes on its NSFR ratio, and notes that NSFR is not proposed to be a binding regulation in the EU until two years after the European legislation is finalised. We remain above 100% well ahead of implementation timelines, based on ana conservative interpretation of the Basel standards published in October 2014 and includes a number of assumptions which are subject to change prior to adoption by the European Commission through the CRD IV.

Based on the CRD IV and Basel III standards respectively, as at 31 December 2015, the Group had a surplus to both of these metrics with a CRD IV Interim LCR of 133% (2014: 124%) and a Basel III NSFR of 106% (2014: 102%).rule.

 

156162  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 20152016 Annual Report on Form 20-F  


Risk review

Risk performance

Funding risk – liquidity

 

 

Comparing internal and regulatory liquidity stress tests

The LRA stress scenarios and the CRD IV Interim LCR are all broadly comparable short-term stress scenarios in which the adequacy of defined liquidity resources is assessed against contractual and contingent stress outflows. The CRD IV Interim LCR stress tests provide an independent assessment of the Group’s liquidity risk profile.

 

Stress Test

  Barclays LRA  CRD IV Interim LCRBasel III NSFR

Time Horizon

  30 to 90 days  30 days6+ months

Calculation

  Liquid assets to net cash outflows  Liquid assets to net cash outflows

Stable funding resources to stable

funding requirements

As at 31 December 2015,2016, the Group held eligible liquid assets in excess of 100% of stress requirements for all three short-term LRA scenarios and the CRD IV Interim LCR requirement.

 

 Compliance with internal and regulatory stress tests  
 As at 31 December 2015   

 

 

 
 

 

Barclays’ LRA

(one month

Barclays

specific
requirement

£bn

  

  

  

  
)a 

  

     
 
 

 

CRD IV
Interim
LCR

£bn

  
  
b 

  

 Total eligible liquidity pool   145       147  
 Asset inflows   1       18  
 Stress outflows      
 Retail and commercial deposit outflows   (50     (72
 Wholesale funding   (15     (12
 Net secured funding   (12     (1
 Derivatives   (8     (6
 Contractual credit rating downgrade exposure   (6     (5
 Drawdowns of loan commitments   (7     (32
 Intraday   (13       
 Total stress net cash flows   (110     (110
 Surplus   35       37  
 Liquidity pool as a percentage of anticipated net cash flows   131%       133%  
 As at 31 December 2014   124%       124%  
Compliance with internal and regulatory stress tests 

As at 31 December 2016

   


Barclays’ LRA

(30 day

Barclays-

specific
requirement

£bn

 

 

 

 
)a, b 

 

     

CRD IV

LCRb

£bn

 

 

 

Eligible liquidity buffer

   173      166 

Net stress outflows

   (144     (127

Surplus

   29      39 

Liquidity pool as a percentage of anticipated net outflows as at 31 December 2016

   120%      131% 

Liquidity pool as a percentage of anticipated net outflows as at 31 December 2015

   131%      133% 

In 2015, the Group strengthened its liquidity position, building a larger surplus to its internal and regulatory requirements. The Group plans to maintain its surplus to the internal and regulatory stress requirements at an efficient level, while considering risks to market funding conditions and its liquidity position. The continuous reassessment of these risks may lead to appropriate actions being taken with respect to sizing of the liquidity pool.

 

 

 

Note

Notes

aOf the three stress scenarios monitored as part of the LRA, the30-day Barclays-specific scenario results in the lowest ratio at 120% (December 2015: 131% (2014: 124%). This compares to 134% (December 2015: 144% (2014: 135%) under the90-day market-wide scenario, and 144% (December 2015: 133% (2014: 127%) under the30-day combined scenario.
bIncludes BAGL.

 

  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 20152016 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  157163


    

    

    

 

 

Liquidity pool

The Group liquidity pool as at 31 December 20152016 was £145bn (2014: £149bn)£165bn (2015: £145bn). During 2015,2016, themonth-end liquidity pool ranged from £132bn to £175bn (2015: £142bn to £168bn (2014: £134bn to £156bn)£168bn), and themonth-end average balance was £155bn (2014: £145bn)£153bn (2015: £155bn). The liquidity pool is held unencumbered and is not used to support payment or clearing requirements. Such requirements are treated as part of our regular business funding. The liquidity pool is intended to offset stress outflows, and comprises the following cash and unencumbered assets.

 

 Composition of the Group liquidity pool as at 31 December 2015  
      Liquidity pool of which CRD IV LCR eligible      
     

 

 

     
      
 

 

      Liquidity
pool

£bn

  
  

  

  

 

    Cash

£bn

  

  

  

 

   Level 1

£bn

  

  

  

 

Level 2A

£bn

  

  

     
 
 
2014
      Liquidity
pool
  
  
  
 Cash and deposits with central banksa     48    45    1           37  
 Government bondsb           
 AAA rated     63        63           73  
 AA+ to AA- rated     11        7    4       12  
 Other government bonds     1        1             
 Total government bonds     75        71    4       85  
 Other           
 Supranational bonds and multilateral development banks     7        7           9  
 Agencies and agency mortgage-backed securities     8        6    2       11  
 Covered bonds (rated AA- and above)     4        2    2       3  
 Other     3                   4  
 Total Other     22        15    4       27  
 Total as at 31 December 2015     145    45    87    8      
 Total as at 31 December 2014     149    37    99    7         

 

 The Group liquidity pool is well diversified by major currency and the Group monitors LRA stress scenarios for major currencies.

 

  

 Liquidity pool by currency  
     

 

 

 

 

USD

£bn

 

  

  

 

 

 

 

 

EUR

£bn

 

  

  

 

 

 

 

 

GBP

£bn

 

  

  

 

 

 

 

 

Other

£bn

 

  

  

    

 

 

 

 

Total

£bn

 

  

  

 Liquidity pool as at 31 December 2015     41    33    46    25       145  
 Liquidity pool as at 31 December 2014     46    27    54    22       149  

Composition of the Group liquidity pool as at 31 December 2016

 

  

 

 

 

        Liquidity

pool

£bn

 

 

 

 

   Liquidity pool of which CRD IV LCR eligible      

 

 


 

2015

Liquidity
pool

£bn

 

 

 
 

 

     

    Cash

£bn

 

 

  

   Level 1

£bn

 

 

  

Level 2A

£bn

 

 

    

Cash and deposits with central banksa

   103   101            48 

Government bondsb

         

AAA to AA-

   34      34        

A+ to A-

   3      3        

BBB+ to BBB-

   1      1        

Other LCR Ineligible Government bonds

   1                 

Total government bonds

   39      38         75 

Other

         

Government Guaranteed Issuers, PSEs and GSEs

   12      9   3     

International Organisations and MDBs

   6      7        

Covered bonds

   1      1        

Corporate bonds

                 

Other

   4                 

Total Other

   23      17   3      22 

Total as at 31 December 2016

   165   101   55   3     

Total as at 31 December 2015

   145   45   87   8        

 

The Group liquidity pool is well diversified by major currencies and the Group monitors LRA stress scenarios for major currencies.

 

 

Liquidity pool by currency

 

   

 

 

 

USD

£bn

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

EUR

£bn

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

GBP

£bn

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Other

£bn

 

 

 

    

 

 

 

Total

£bn

 

 

 

Liquidity pool as at 31 December 2016

   44   36   49   36      165 

Liquidity pool as at 31 December 2015

   41   33   46   25      145 

Management of the Group liquidity pool

The composition of the Group liquidity pool is efficiently managed. The maintenance of the liquidity pool increases the Group’s costs as the interest expense paid on the liabilities used to fund the liquidity pool is greater than the interest income received on liquidity pool assets. This cost can be reduced by investing a greater portion of the Group liquidity pool in highly liquid assets other than cash and deposits with central banks while maintaining a minimum level of cash in the liquidity pool to meet cash outflows on the first day of a Barclays-specific stress and enough cash and same day settlement securities to meet all outflows in the first three days of the stress. These assets in the liquidity pool primarily comprise highly rated government bonds, and their inclusion in the liquidity pool does not compromise the liquidity position of the Group.

The composition of the liquidity pool is subject to limits set by the Board, Treasury Committee and the independent Creditcredit risk and Marketmarket risk functions. In addition, the investment of the liquidity pool is monitored for concentration risk by issuer, currency and asset type. Given the incremental returns generated by these highly liquid assets, the risk and reward profile is continuously managed.

The Group manages the liquidity pool on a centralised basis. As at 31 December 2015, 94%2016, 91% of the liquidity pool was located in Barclays Bank PLC (2014: 92%(2015: 94%) and was available to meet liquidity needs across the Group. The residual liquidity pool is held predominantly within Barclays Capital Inc. (BCI). The portion of the liquidity pool outside of Barclays Bank PLC is held against entity-specific stressed outflows and regulatory requirements. To the extent the use of this portion of the liquidity pool is restricted due to regulatory requirements, it is assumed to be unavailable to the rest of the Group.

 

Notes

aOf which over 97% (2014:98% (2015: over 95%97%) was placed with the BoE,Bank of England, US Federal Reserve, European Central Bank, Bank of Japan and Swiss National Bank.
bOf which over 92% (2014:90% (2015: over 95%92%) are comprised of UK, US, Japanese, French, German, Danish, Swiss and Dutch securities.

 

158164  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 20152016 Annual Report on Form 20-F  


Risk review

Risk performance

Funding risk – liquidity

 

 

Contingent liquidity

In addition to the Group liquidity pool, the Group has access to other unencumbered assets which provide a source of contingent liquidity. While these are not relied on in the Group’s LRA, a portion of these assets may be monetised in a stress to generate liquidity through use as collateral for secured funding or through outright sale.

In either a Barclays-specific or market-wide liquidity stress, liquidity available via market sources could be severely disrupted. In circumstances where market liquidity is unavailable or available only at heavily discounted prices, the Group could generate liquidity via central bank facilities. The Group maintains a significant amount of collateralpre-positioned at central banks and available to raise funding.

For more detail on the Group’s other unencumbered assets see page 163.168.

Funding structure and funding relationships

The basis for sound liquidity risk management is a solid funding structure that reduces the probability of a liquidity stress leading to an inability to meet funding obligations as they fall due. The Group’s overall funding strategy is to develop a diversified funding base (geographically, by type and by counterparty) and maintain access to a variety of alternative funding sources, to provide protection against unexpected fluctuations, while minimising the cost of funding.

Within this, the Group aims to align the sources and uses of funding. As such, retail and commercial customer loans and advances are largely funded by customer deposits, with the surplus funding the liquidity pool. Other assets, together with other loans and advances and unencumbered assets, are funded by long-term wholesale debt and equity.

The majority of reverse repurchase agreements are matched by repurchase agreements. The liquidity pool is predominantly funded through wholesale markets. These funding relationships are summarised below:

 

Assets   
 
       2015
£bn
  
  
   
 
       2014
£bn
  
  
   Liabilities   
 
       2015
£bn
  
  
   
 
       2014
£bn
  
  
  

 

 

 

       2016

£bn

 

 

 

  

 

 

 

       2015

£bn

 

 

 

   Liabilities  

 

 

 

       2016

£bn

 

 

 

  

 

 

 

       2015

£bn

 

 

 

Loans and advances to customersa   336     346    Customer accountsa   374     366     326    336   Customer accountsa   374    374 
Group liquidity pool   145     149    < 1 Year wholesale funding   54     75     165    145   < 1 Year wholesale funding   70    54 
      > 1 Year wholesale funding   88     96        > 1 Year wholesale funding   88    88 
Other assetsb   135     153    Equity and other liabilitiesb   104     112  

Reverse repurchase agreements and other similar secured lendingc

   178     271    Repurchase agreements and other similar secured borrowingc   178     271  
Derivative financial instruments   326     439    Derivative financial instruments   322     438  
Other assets   185    135   Equity and other liabilities   151    104 

Reverse repurchase agreements and other similar secured lendingb

   190    178   Repurchase agreements and other similar secured borrowingb   190    178 
Derivative financial instrumentsb   347    326   Derivative financial instrumentsb   340    322 
Total assets   1,120     1,358    Total liabilities and equity   1,120     1,358     1,213    1,120   Total liabilities   1,213    1,120 

Deposit funding (Includes BAGL) (audited)

  

   2015     2014  

Funding of loans and advances to customers

   
 
 
Loans and
advances to
customers
  
  
  
   
 
Customer
deposits
  
  
   
 
 
Loan to
deposit
ratio
  
  
  
   
 
 
Loan to
deposit
ratio
  
  
  

As at 31 December 2015

   £bn     £bn     %     %  

Personal and Corporate Banking

   218     305      

Barclaycard

   40     10      

Africa Banking

   30     31      

Non-Core (retail)

   12     2            

Total retail and corporate funding

   300     348     86     89  

Investment Bank, Non-Core (wholesale) and Other

   99     70            

Total

   399     418     95     100  

Deposit funding

 

Deposit funding (audited)

 

   2016    2015 

Funding of loans and advances to customers

As at 31 December 2016

  

 

 

 

Loans and
advances to
customers

£bn

 

 
 
 

 

  

 

 

 

Customer
deposits

£bn

 

 
 

 

  

 

 

 

Loan to
deposit ratio

%

 

 
 

 

  

 

 

 

Loan to
deposit ratio

%

 

 
 

 

        

Barclays UK

   167    189         

Barclays International

   98    152         

Non-Core

   19             

Total Barclays UK, Barclays International andNon-Corec

   284    341    83%    86% 

Barclays International, Head Office andNon-Cored

   109    82           

Total

   393    423    93%    95% 

Total Barclays UK, Barclays International andNon-Corec are largely funded by customer deposits. The loan to deposit ratio for these businesses was 83% (2015: 86%). The customer deposits in excess of loans and advances are primarily used to fund liquidity buffer requirements for these businesses. The loan to deposit ratio for the Group was 93% (2015: 95%).

As at 31 December 2016, £139bn (2015: £129bn) of total customer deposits were insured through the UK Financial Services Compensation Scheme (FSCS) and other similar schemes. In addition to these customer deposits, there were £4bn (2015: £4bn) of other liabilities insured by governments.

Notes

aExcluding cash collateral and settlement balances.
bBAGL Group balances other than customer loans and advances of £29bn and customer deposits of £29bn are included in other assets and liabilities.
cComprised of reverse repurchase agreements that provide financing to customers collateralised by highly liquid securities on a short-term basis or are used to settle short-term inventory positions and repo financing of trading portfolio assets.
cExcluding investment banking businesses.
dIncluding investment banking businesses.

 

  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 20152016 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  159165


        

        

        

 

 

PCB, Barclaycard, Non-Core (Retail) and Africa Banking activities are largely funded with customer deposits. As at 31 December 2015, the loan to deposit ratio for these businesses was 86% (2014: 89%). The Group loan to deposit ratio as at 31 December 2015 was 95% (2014: 100%).

The excess of the Investment Bank’s loans and advances over customer deposits is funded with long-term debt and equity. The Investment Bank does not rely on customer retail deposit funding from PCB.

As at 31 December 2015, £129bn (2014: £128bn) of total customer deposits were insured through the UK Financial Services Compensation Scheme (FSCS) and other similar schemes. In addition to these customer deposits, there were £4bn (2014: £4bn) of other liabilities insured by governments.

Although, contractually, current accounts are repayable on demand and savings accounts at short notice, the Group’s broad base of customers, numerically and by depositor type, helps protect against unexpected fluctuations in balances. Such accounts form a stable funding base for the Group’s operations and liquidity needs. The Group assesses the behavioural maturity of both customer assets and liabilities to identify structural balance sheet funding gaps. Customer behaviour is determined by quantitative modelling combined with qualitative assessment taking into account for historical experience, current customer composition, and macroeconomic projections. These behavioural profiles represent our forward looking expectation of therun-off profile. The relatively low cash outflow within one year demonstrates that customer funding remains broadly matched with customer assets from a behavioural perspective.

 

Behavioural maturity profile (Includes BAGL)

                                   
         Behavioural maturity profile cash outflow/(inflow)  
    
 
 
 
Loans and
advances to
customers
£bn
  
  
  
  
   
 
 
Customer
deposits
£bn
  
  
  
   
 
 
 

 

Customer
funding
surplus/
(deficit)

£bn

  
  
  
  

  

   
 
 

 

Not more
than one
year

£bn

  
  
  

  

   
 
 
 
 
 
Over one
year but
not more
than five
years
£bn
  
  
  
  
  
  
   
 
 
More than
five years
£bn
  
  
  
   
 
Total
£bn
  
  

As at 31 December 2015

              

Personal and Corporate Banking

   218     305     87     18     3     66     87  

Barclaycard

   40     10     (30   (10   (10   (10   (30

Africa Banking

   30     31     1     2     1     (2   1  

Non-Core (Retail)

   12     2     (10   (1   (2   (7   (10

Total

   300     348     48     9     (8   47     48  

As at 31 December 2014

              

Personal and Corporate Banking

   217     299     82     19     3     60     82  

Barclaycard

   37     7     (30   (10   (10   (10   (30

Africa Banking

   35     35          2     (2          

Non-Core (Retail)

   20     8     (12        (2   (10   (12

Total

   309     349     40     11     (11   40     40  

Behavioural maturity profile

                              
         
Behavioural maturity profile
cash outflow/(inflow)
 
 
    


Loans and
advances to
customers
£bn
 
 
 
 
   

Customer
deposits
£bn
 
 
 
   



Customer
funding
surplus/
(deficit)
£bn
 
 
 
 
 
   


Not more
than one
year

£bn

 
 
 

 

   




Over one
year but
not more
than five
years
£bn
 
 
 
 
 
 
   

More than
five years
£bn
 
 
 

As at 31 December 2016

            

Barclays UK

   167    189    22    (2   (19   43 

Barclays International

   98    152    54    3    17    34 

BarclaysNon-Core

   19        (19   (1   (6   (12

Total

   284    341    57        (8   65 

As at 31 December 2015

            

Barclays UK

   166    176    10    (4   (26   40 

Barclays International

   88    135    47    11    18    18 

Africa (discontinued)

   29    29        1        (1

BarclaysNon-Core

   17    8    (9   1    (1   (9

Total

   300    348    48    9    (9   48 

Wholesale funding Group

Wholesale funding relationships are summarised below:

 

Assets

   

 

      2015

£bn

  

  

   
 
      2014
£bn
  
  
   

Liabilities

   
 
      2015
£bn
  
  
   
 
      2014
£bn
  
  
   
        2016
£bn
 
 
   
        2015
£bn
 
 
   

Liabilities

   
        2016
£bn
 
 
   
        2015
£bn
 
 

Trading portfolio assets

   28     37    

Repurchase agreements

   70     124     33    28   

Repurchase agreements

   75    70 

Reverse repurchase agreements

   42     87           42    42           

Reverse repurchase agreements

   34     45    

Trading portfolio liabilities

   34     45     35    34   

Trading portfolio liabilities

   35    34 

Derivative financial instruments

   326     440    

Derivative financial instruments

   322     439     347    326   

Derivative financial instruments

   340    322 

Liquidity pool

   97     109    

Less than one year wholesale debt

   54     75     108    97   

Less than 1 year wholesale debt

   70    54 

Other assetsa

      103        122    

Greater than one year wholesale debt and equity

      150        157     109    103   

Greater than 1 year wholesale debt and equity

   154    150 

Repurchase agreements fund reverse repurchase agreements and trading portfolio assets. Trading portfolio liabilities are settled by the remainder of reverse repurchase agreements (see Note 19 Offsetting financial assets and financial liabilities for further detail on netting).

Derivative liabilities and assets are largely matched. A substantial proportion of balance sheet derivative positions qualify for counterparty netting and the remaining portions are largely offset once netted against cash collateral received and paid.

Wholesale debt, along with the surplus of customer deposits to loans and advances to customers, is used to fund the liquidity pool. Term wholesale debt and equity largely fund other assets.

 

 

Note

aPredominantly available for sale investments, financial assets designated at fair value and loans and advances to banks funded by greater than one year wholesale debt and equity and trading portfolio assets.assets partially.

 

160166  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 20152016 Annual Report on Form 20-F  


Risk review

Risk performance

Funding risk – liquidity

 

 

Composition of wholesale fundinga

The Group maintains access to a variety of sources of wholesale funds in major currencies, including those available from term investors across a variety of distribution channels and geographies, money markets, and repo markets. The Group has direct access to US, European and Asian capital markets through its global investment banking operations and long-term investors through its clients worldwide, and is an active participant in money markets. As a result, wholesale funding is well diversified by product, maturity, geography and major currency.

As at 31 December 2015,2016, the Group’s total wholesale funding outstanding (excluding repurchase agreements) was £142bn (2014: £171bn)£158bn (December 2015: £142bn). £54bn (2014: £75bn)£70bn (December 2015: £54bn) of wholesale funding matures in less than one year, of which £14bn (2014: £22bn)£22bn (December 2015: £14bn)ab relates to term funding.

As at 31 December 2015,2016, outstanding wholesale funding comprised £25bn (2014: £33bn)£26bn (December 2015: £25bn) of secured funding and £117bn (2014: £138bn)£132bn (December 2015: £117bn) of unsecured funding.

In preparation forAs the Group progresses to a Single Point of Entry resolution model, Barclays continues to issue debt capital and term senior unsecured funding out offrom Barclays PLC, the holding company, replacing maturing debt in Barclays Bank PLC.

 

Maturity profile of wholesale fundingb

Maturity profile of wholesale fundingb

  

Maturity profile of wholesale fundingb

 

  
 
 

 

Not more
than one
month

£bn

  
  
  

  

  
 
 
 
 

 

Over one
month but
not more
than three
months

£bn

  
  
  
  
  

  

  
 
 
 
 
 

 

Over three
months
but not
more than
six
months

£bn

  
  
  
  
  
  

  

  
 
 
 
 

 

Over six
months
but not
more than
one year

£bn

  
  
  
  
  

  

  
 
 

 

Sub-total
less than
one year

£bn

  
  
  

  

  
 
 
 
 

 

Over one
year but
not more
than two
years

£bn

  
  
  
  
  

  

  
 
 
 
 

 

Over two
years but
not more
than three
years

£bn

  
  
  
  
  

  

  
 
 
 
 

 

Over three
years but
not more
than four
years

£bn

  
  
  
  
  

  

  
 
 
 
 

 

Over four
years but
not more
than five
years

£bn

  
  
  
  
  

  

  
 

 

More than
five years

£bn

  
  

  

  

 

Total

£bn

  

  

   

<1
month
£bn
 
 
 
   

1-3
months
£bn
 
 
 
   

3-6
months
£bn
 
 
 
   

6-12
months
£bn
 
 
 
   

<1
year
£bn
 
 
 
   

1-2
years
£bn
 
 
 
   

2-3
years
£bn
 
 
 
   

3-4
years
£bn
 
 
 
   

4-5
years
£bn
 
 
 
   

>5
years
£bn
 
 
 
   
Total
£bn
 
 

Barclays PLC

                                            

Senior unsecured (public benchmark)

                         0.8   1.3   0.9   3.1   6.1  

Senior unsecured (privately placed)

                         0.1               0.1  

Senior unsecured (Public benchmark)

                       0.9    1.6    1.1    4.5    7.9    16.0 

Senior unsecured (Privately placed)

                       0.1            0.2    0.5    0.8 

Subordinated liabilities

                                 0.9   0.9   1.8                                 1.1        2.7    3.8 

Barclays Bank PLC

                                                       

Deposits from banks

 9.5   3.1   1.3   0.8   14.7   0.1               0.3   15.1     9.2    4.3    1.7    1.1    16.3    0.2        0.3            16.8 

Certificates of deposit and commercial paper

 0.5   4.9   3.4   5.3   14.1   1.0   0.6   0.9   0.4   0.5   17.5     0.3    5.2    5.6    10.9    22.0    0.7    1.1    0.5    0.5    0.3    25.1 

Asset backed commercial paper

 2.2   3.3   0.2       5.7                       5.7     3.7    3.1    0.7        7.5                        7.5 

Senior unsecured (public benchmark)

     1.3       1.4   2.7   3.6       4.3   1.3   3.9   15.8  

Senior unsecured (privately
placed)c

 0.6   1.6   2.3   4.8   9.3   5.1   5.4   3.7   3.0   8.5   35.0  

Senior unsecured (Public benchmark)

   1.7    0.6    1.6        3.9        2.7    0.7    0.7    1.1    9.1 

Senior unsecured (Privately placed)c

   0.6    1.5    3.6    3.5    9.2    7.3    5.5    3.2    1.6    10.0    36.8 

Covered bonds

         1.1       1.1   4.4   1.0   1.6       4.2   12.3         1.8    1.6    1.5    4.9    1.0    1.8        1.0    3.7    12.4 

Asset backed securities

 0.7               0.7   0.5   1.4   1.3   0.5   0.3   4.7         0.6    1.0    0.6    2.2    0.7    1.4    0.4        0.7    5.4 

Subordinated liabilities

                     1.1   3.0   0.2   0.9   14.0   19.2                 1.3    1.3    3.2    0.1    1.0    5.5    8.5    19.6 

Otherd

 2.3   1.1   0.3   1.5   5.2   0.7   0.3   0.4   0.4   1.6   8.6     1.1    0.2    0.6    1.1    3.0    0.2    0.2    0.3    0.1    0.7    4.5 

Total as at 31 December 2016

   16.6    17.3    16.4    20.0    70.3    14.3    14.4    8.6    14.1    36.1    157.8 

Of which secured

   3.7    5.6    3.4    2.3    15.0    1.8    3.2    0.4    1.0    4.4    25.8 

Of which unsecured

   12.9    11.7    13.0    17.7    55.3    12.5    11.2    8.2    13.1    31.7    132.0 

Total as at 31 December 2015

 15.8   15.3   8.6   13.8   53.5   16.5   12.6   13.7   8.3   37.3   141.9     15.8    15.3    8.6    13.8    53.5    16.5    12.6    13.7    8.3    37.3    141.9 

Of which secured

 4.2   3.9   1.6   0.3   10.0   5.1   2.4   2.8   0.5   4.5   25.3     4.2    3.9    1.6    0.3    10.0    5.1    2.4    2.8    0.5    4.5    25.3 

Of which unsecured

 11.6   11.4   7.0   13.5   43.5   11.4   10.2   10.9   7.8   32.8   116.6     11.6    11.4    7.0    13.5    43.5    11.4    10.2    10.9    7.8    32.8    116.6 

Total as at 31 December 2014

  16.8    23.2    14.4    21.0    75.4    14.0    16.1    6.5    14.0    45.4    171.4  

Of which secured

  5.3    7.8    1.7    2.2    17.0    2.7    5.1    0.1    2.4    6.0    33.3  

Of which unsecured

  11.5    15.4    12.7    18.8    58.4    11.3    11.0    6.4    11.6    39.4    138.1  

Outstanding wholesale funding includes £35bn (2014: £45bn)£37.6bn (December 2015: £35.1bn) of privately placed senior unsecured notes in issue. These notes are issued through a variety of distribution channels including intermediaries and private banks. Although not a requirement, the liquidity pool exceeded wholesale funding maturing in less than one year by £91bn (2014: £74bn)£95bn (December 2015: £91bn).

 

 

Notes

aTerm funding maturities comprise public benchmark and privately placed senior unsecured notes, covered bonds/asset backed securities (ABS) and subordinated debt where the original maturity of the instrument was more than one year.
bThe composition of wholesale funds comprises the balance sheet reported deposits from banks, financial liabilities at fair value, debt securities in issue and subordinated liabilities, excluding cash collateral and settlement balances. It does not includebalances and collateral swaps, including participation in the BoE’s Funding for Lending Scheme.swaps. Included within deposits from banks are £6bn£4.5bn of liabilities drawn in the European Central Bank’s facilities.
bTerm funding maturities comprise public benchmark and privately placed senior unsecured notes, covered bonds/asset-backed securities (ABS) and subordinated debt where the original maturity of the instrument was more than 1 year.
cIncludes structured notes of £28bn, £8bn£30.8bn, £7.7bn of which maturematures within one year.
dPrimarily comprised of fair value deposits £5bnof £3.0bn and secured financing transactions of physical gold £3bn.of £0.5bn.

 

  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 20152016 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  161167


    

    

    

 

 

Currency composition of wholesale debt

As at 31 December 2015,2016, the proportion of wholesale funding by major currencies was as follows:

 

Currency composition of wholesale funding                        
   
 
        USD
%
  
  
   
 
        EUR
%
  
  
   
 
        GBP
%
  
  
   
 
        Other
%
  
  
   

        USD

%

 

 

   

        EUR

%

 

 

   

        GBP

%

 

 

   

        Other

%

 

 

Deposits from banks   25     51     19     5     22    44    30    4 
Certificates of deposits and commercial paper   25     60     14     1     44    48    7    1 
Asset backed commercial paper   92     8               89    8    3     
Senior unsecured (public benchmark)   43     20     28     9     51    25    16    8 
Senior unsecured (privately placed)   39     21     18     22     48    25    11    16 
Covered bonds/ABS   27     41     31     1     30    42    28     
Subordinated liabilities   44     19     37          53    28    19     
Total as at 31 December 2016   48    32    16    4 
Total as at 31 December 2015   38     31     23     8     38    31    23    8 
Total as at 31 December 2014   35     32     25     8  

To manage cross-currency refinancing risk the Group manages to foreign exchange cash flow limits, which limit risk at specific maturities. Across wholesale funding, theThe composition of wholesale funding is materially unchanged.

Term financing

The Group issued £9bn (2014: £15bn) of term funding net of early redemptions during 2015. The Group has £14bn of term debt maturing in 2016 and £16bn maturing in 2017a.

The Group expectsissued £12.1bn equivalent of capital and senior unsecured debt from the holding company of which £8.6bn equivalent and £0.7bn equivalent in public and private senior unsecured debt respectively, and £2.8bn of capital instruments. In the same period £7.4bn of Barclays Bank PLC capital and senior unsecured debt was bought back or called.

The Group has £21.2bn of term funding maturing in 2017 and £13.2bn in 2018.

The Group expect to continue issuing public wholesale debt in 2016,2017 from Barclays PLC, in order to ensure compliance with new prospective loss absorbency requirements and to maintain a stable and diverse funding base by type, currency and distribution channel.

Encumbrance

Asset encumbrance arises from collateral pledged against secured funding and other collateralised obligations. Barclays funds a portion of trading portfolio assets and other securities via repurchase agreements and other similar borrowing, and pledges a portion of customer loans and advances as collateral in securitisations,securitisation, covered bond and other similar secured structures. Barclays monitors the mix of secured and unsecured funding sources within the Group’s funding plan and seeks to efficiently utilise available collateral to raise secured funding and meet other collateralised obligations.collateral requirements.

Encumbered assets have been defined consistently with the Group’s reporting requirements under Article 100 of the CRR.Capital Requirements Regulation (CRR). Securities and commodities assets are considered encumbered when they have been pledged or used to secure, collateralise or credit enhance a transaction which impacts their transferability and free use. This includes external repurchase or other similar agreements with market counterparts.

Excluding assets positioned at central banks, as at 31 December 2015, £157bn (2014: £176bn)2016, £168bn (December 2015: £157bn) of the Group’s assets were encumbered, primarily due to cash collateral posted, firm financing of trading portfolio assets and other securities and funding secured against loans and advances to customers.

Assets may also be encumbered under secured funding arrangements with central banks, such as the Funding for Lending Scheme.banks. In advance of such encumbrance, assets are often positioned with central banks to facilitate efficient future draw down. £88bn (2014: £99bn)£63bn (December 2015: £88bn) ofon-balance sheet assets were positioned at the central banks, consisting of encumbered assets and collateralpre-positioned and available for use in secured financing transactions.

£212bn (2014: £270bn)277bn (December 2015: £212bn) of on andoff-balance sheet assets not positioned at the central bank were identified as readily available and available for use in secured financing transactions. Additionally, they include cash and securities held in the Group liquidity pool as well as unencumbered assets which provide a source of contingent liquidity. While these additional assets are not relied upon in the Group’s LRA, a portion of these assets may be monetised to generate liquidity through use as collateral for secured funding or through outright sale. Loans and advances to customers are only classified as readily available if they are already in a form, such that, they can be used to raise funding without further management actions. This includes excess collateral already in secured funding vehicles.

£208bn (2014:231bn (December 2015: £208bn) of assets not positioned at the central bank were identified as available as collateral. These assets are not subject to any restrictions on their ability to secure funding, to be offered as collateral, or to be sold to reduce potential future funding requirements, but are not immediately available in the normal course of business in their current form. They primarily consist of loans and advances which would be suitable for use in secured funding structures but are conservatively classified as not readily available because they are not in transferable form.

Not available as collateral consistconsists of assets that cannot be pledged or used as security for funding due to restrictions that prevent their pledge or use as security for funding in the normal course of business.

Derivatives and reverse repo assets relate specifically to derivatives, reverse repurchase agreements and other similar secured lending. These are shown separately as theseon-balance sheet assets cannot be pledged. However, these assets can give rise to the receipt ofnon-cash assets which are heldoff-balance sheet, and can be used to raise secured funding or meet additional funding requirements.

In addition, £265bn (2014: £313bn)£406bn (December 2015: £265bn) of the total £306bn (2014: £396bn)£466bn (December 2015: £306bn) securities accepted as collateral, and heldoff-balance sheet, wereon-pledged, the significant majority of which related to matched-book activity where reverse repurchase agreements are matched by repurchase agreements entered into to facilitate client activity. The remainder relates primarily to reverse repurchases used to settle trading portfolio liabilities as well as collateral posted against derivativederivatives margin requirements.

Note

aIncludes £0.6bn of bilateral secured funding in 2016 and £0.4bn in 2017.

 

162168  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 20152016 Annual Report on Form 20-F  


Risk review

Risk performance

Funding risk – liquidity

 

 

Asset encumbrancea

  

      

Asset encumbrance

Asset encumbrance

 

      
   
 
Assets encumbered as a result of transactions
with counterparties other than central banks
  
  
     

 

Other assets (comprising assets encumbered at the central bank

and unencumbered assets)

  

  

   
Assets encumbered as a result of transactions
with counterparties other than  central banks
 
 
   
Other assets (comprising assets encumbered at the central
banks and unencumbered assets)
 
 
      Assets    Assets not positioned at the central bank          Assets   Assets not positioned at the central banks   

On-balance sheet

As at 31 December 2015

  
 
Assets
£bn
  
  
  

 
 

 

As a result

of covered
bonds

£bn

  

  
  

  

  

 
 
 

 

As a

result of
securitis-
ations

£bn

  

  
  
  

  

  
 
Other
£bn
  
  
  

 

Total

£bn

  

  

 

positioned 

at 

central  banksc

£bn 

  

  

   

  

  
 
 
Readily
available
assets £bn
  
  
  
  

 

 
 

Available

as

collateral
£bn

  

  

  
  

  
 
 
 
 
Not
available
as
collateral
£bn
  
  
  
  
  
  
 
 

 

Derivatives
and Reverse
repos

£bn

  
  
  

  

  
 
Total
£bn
  
  

On-balance sheet

As at 31 December 2016

  
Assets
£bn
 
 
  

As a result

of covered

bonds

£bn

 

 

 

 

  


As a

result of

securitis-
ations

£bn

 

 


 

 

  

Other

£bn

 

 

  

Total

£bn

 

 

    


positioned
at the
central
banks

£bn

 
 
 
b 

 

  



Readily

available
assets
£bn

 

 
 
 

  


Available
as
collateral
£bn
 
 
 
 
  



Not
available
as
collateral
£bn
 
 
 
 
 
  



Derivatives
and
Reverse
repos

£bn

 
 
 
 

 

  
Total
£bn
 
 

Cash and balances at central banks

 47.9                       –    47.9               47.9   102.4                  102.4           102.4 

Trading portfolio assets

 74.8           49.1   49.1     –    25.7               25.7   80.2        51.2  51.2      29.0           29.0 

Financial assets at fair value

 72.5           2.5   2.5     –    3.2   17.7   1.3   47.8   70.0   78.6        3.2  3.2      1.5  10.7     63.2  75.4 

Derivative financial instruments

 325.5                     –                325.5   325.5   346.6                           346.6  346.6 

Loans and advances – banksb

 19.6                     –    7.9   10.2   1.5       19.6  

Loans and advances – customersb

 307.3   16.4   5.9   8.0   30.3    86.4    14.8   175.8           277.0  

Loans and advances – banksa

 20.2                  10.1  9.0  1.1     20.2 

Loans and advances – customersa

 325.7  16.5  6.2  8.0  30.7   63.0  23.8  208.2        295.0 

Cash collateral

 62.6           62.6   62.6     –                        68.8        68.8  68.8                    

Settlement balances

 20.4                     –            20.4       20.4   21.3                        21.3     21.3 

Available for sale financial investments

 87.0           12.2   12.2     –    72.2   1.0   1.6       74.8  

Financial investments

 63.3        13.6  13.6      49.3  0.4        49.7 

Reverse repurchase agreements

 28.2                     –                28.2   28.2   13.5                           13.5  13.5 

Non-current assets held for sale

 7.3                    1.9    1.2   3.2   1.0       7.3   6.4                  1.2  3.1  2.1     6.4 

Other financial assets

 19.9                      –            19.9       19.9  

Other Financial Assets

 21.0                         21.0     21.0 

Total on-balance sheet

 1,073.0   16.4   5.9   134.4   156.7     88.3    172.9   207.9   45.7   401.5   916.3   1,148.0  16.5  6.2  144.8  167.5    63.0  217.3  231.4  45.5  423.3  980.5 
            
Off-balance sheetOff-balance sheet   
          

Collateral
received
£bn
 
 
 
    




Collateral
received
of which
on-
pledged
£bn
 
 
 
 
 
 
  


Readily
available
assets
£bn
 
 
 
 
  


Available
as
collateral
£bn
 
 
 
 
  



Not
available
as
collateral
£bn
 
 
 
 
 
  
Fair value of securities accepted as collateralFair value of securities accepted as collateral    466.2    405.5  59.7     1.0   
Total unencumbered collateralTotal unencumbered collateral           277.0  231.4  46.5   

 

 Off-balance sheet  
   
 
 
Collateral
received
£bn
  
  
  
  
 
 

 
 
 

Collateral
received of
which

on-
pledged
£bn

  
  
  

  
  
  

  
 
 
 
Readily
available
assets
£bn
  
  
  
  
  
 
 
Available as
collateral
£bn
  
  
  
  
 
 
 
 
Not
available
as
collateral
£bn
  
  
  
  
  
 Fair value of securities accepted as collateral  305.9    265.4    39.0        1.5  
 Total unencumbered collateral          211.9    207.9    47.2  

 

 

 

Notes

aThe format of this disclosure has been updated following the issuance of a ‘Dear CFO’ letter by the PRA. The revised format continues to satisfy the recommendations of the Enhanced Disclosure Task Force on encumbrance disclosure.
bExcluding cash collateral and settlement balances.
cbIncludes both encumbered and unencumbered assets. Assets within this category that have been encumbered are disclosed as assets pledged in Note 40 to the financial statements.statements page 301.

 

  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 20152016 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  163169


    

    

    

 

 

Asset encumbrancea

  

      

Asset encumbrance

Asset encumbrance

      
   

 

Assets encumbered as a result of transactions

with counterparties other than central banks

  

  

     

 

Other assets (comprising assets encumbered at the central bank

and unencumbered assets)

  

  

   

Assets encumbered as a result of transactions

with counterparties other than central banks

 

 

   

Other assets (comprising assets encumbered at the central

banks and unencumbered assets)

 

 

      Assets     Assets not positioned at the central bank           Assets   Assets not positioned at the central banks   

On-balance sheet

As at 31 December 2014

  

 

Assets

£bn

  

  

  

 

 

 

As a result

of covered

bonds

£bn

  

  

  

  

  

 

 

 

 

As a

result of

securitis-

ations

£bn

  

  

  

  

  

  

 

Other

£bn

  

  

  

 

Total

£bn

  

  

 

positioned 

at the 

central 

banksc

£bn 

  

  

  

  

  

  

 

 

 

Readily

available

assets

£bn

  

  

  

  

  

 

 

 

Available

as

collateral

£bn

  

  

  

  

  

 

 

 

 

Not

available

as

collateral

£bn

  

  

  

  

  

  

 

 

 

 

Derivatives

and

Reverse

repos

£bn

  

  

  

  

  

  

 

Total

£bn

  

  

On-balance sheet

As at 31 December 2015

  
Assets
£bn
 
 
  


As a result
of covered
bonds

£bn

 
 
 

 

  



As a
result of
securitis-
ations

£bn

 
 
 
 

 

  

Other

£bn

 

 

  

Total

£bn

 

 

    


positioned
at the
central
banks

£bn

 
 
 
b 

 

  


Readily
available
assets
£bn
 
 
 
 
  


Available
as
collateral
£bn
 
 
 
 
  



Not
available
as
collateral
£bn
 
 
 
 
 
  

Derivatives

and

Reverse

repos

£bn

 

 

 

 

 

  
Total
£bn
 
 

Cash and balances at central banks

  37.8                     –     37.8                37.8    47.9                   47.9            47.9 

Trading portfolio assets

  111.9            50.7    50.7     –     61.2                61.2    74.8         49.1   49.1       25.7            25.7 

Financial assets at fair value

  34.2            2.3    2.3     –     3.5    20.7    2.5    5.2    31.9    72.5         2.5   2.5       3.2   17.7   1.3   47.8   70.0 

Derivative financial instruments

  438.6                     –                 438.6    438.6    325.5                            325.5   325.5 

Loans and advances – banksb

  19.5                     –     8.6    9.2    1.7        19.5  

Loans and advances – customersb

  311.1    20.4    9.2    10.3    39.9     93.4     8.7    169.1            271.2  

Loans and advances – banksa

  19.6                   7.9   10.2   1.5      19.6 

Loans and advances – customersa

  307.3   16.4   5.9   8.0   30.3    86.4   14.8   175.8         277.0 

Cash collateral

  72.6            72.6    72.6     –                         62.6         62.6   62.6                    

Settlement balances

  30.8                     –             30.8        30.8    20.4                         20.4      20.4 

Available for sale financial investments

  82.0            9.3    9.3     –     70.0    0.5    2.2        72.7  

Financial investments

  87.0         12.2   12.2       72.2   1.0   1.6      74.8 

Reverse repurchase agreements

  131.7                     –                 131.7    131.7    28.2                            28.2   28.2 

Non-current assets held for sale

  15.6        1.5        1.5     5.1     0.2    8.3    0.5        14.1    7.3                1.9   1.2   3.2   1.0      7.3 

Other financial assets

  18.8                      –             18.8        18.8  

Other Financial Assets

  19.9                          19.9      19.9 

Total on-balance sheet

  1,304.6    20.4    10.7    145.2    176.3      98.5     190.0    207.8    56.5    575.5    1,128.3    1,073.0   16.4   5.9   134.4   156.7     88.3   172.9   207.9   45.7   401.5   916.3 
  

Off-balance sheet

Off-balance sheet

 

  
          

Collateral
received

£bn

 
 

 

    




Collateral
received
of which
on-
pledged

£bn

 
 
 
 
 

 

  


Readily
available
assets

£bn

 
 
 

 

  


Available
as
collateral

£bn

 
 
 

 

  



Not
available
as
collateral

£bn

 
 
 
 

 

  

Fair value of securities accepted as collateral

Fair value of securities accepted as collateral

 

    305.9     265.4   39.0      1.5   

Total unencumbered collateral

Total unencumbered collateral

 

            211.9   207.9   47.2   

 

 Off-balance sheet     
    

 

 

Collateral

received

£bn

  

  

  

   

 

 

 

 

 

Collateral

received

of which

on-

pledged

£bn

  

  

  

  

  

  

   

 

 

 

Readily

available

assets

£bn

  

  

  

  

   

 

 

 

Available

as

collateral

£bn

  

  

  

  

   

 

 

 

 

Not

available

as

collateral

£bn

  

  

  

  

  

   
 Fair value of securities accepted as collateral   395.7     313.0     79.9          2.8                            
 Total unencumbered collateral             269.9     207.8     59.3     

 

 

 

Notes

aThe format of this disclosure has been updated following the issuance of a ‘Dear CFO’ letter by the PRA. The revised format continues to satisfy the recommendations of the Enhanced Disclosure Task Force on encumbrance disclosure.
bExcluding cash collateral and settlement balances.
cbIncludes both encumbered and unencumbered assets. Assets within this category that have been encumbered are disclosed as assets pledged in Note 40 to the financial statements.statements page301.

 

164170  |  ��Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 20152016 Annual Report on Form 20-F  


Risk review

Risk performance

Funding risk – liquidity

 

 

Repurchase agreements and reverse repurchase agreements

Barclays enters into repurchase and other similar secured borrowing agreements to finance its trading portfolio assets. The majority of reverse repurchase agreements are matched by offsetting repurchase agreements entered into to facilitate client activity. The remainder are used to settle trading portfolio liabilities.

Due to the high quality of collateral provided against secured financing transactions, the liquidity risk associated with this activity is significantly lower than unsecured financing transactions. Nonetheless, Barclays manages to gross and net secured mismatch limits to limit refinancing risk under a severe stress scenario and a portion of the Group’s liquidity pool is held against stress outflows on these positions. The Group secured mismatch limits are calibrated based on market capacity, liquidity characteristics of the collateral and risk appetite of the Group.appetite.

The cash value of repurchase and reverse repurchase transactions will typically differ from the market value of the collateral against which these transactions are secured by an amount referred to as a haircut (or over-collateralisation). Typical haircut levels vary depending on the quality of the collateral that underlies these transactions. For transactions secured against extremely liquid fixed income collateral, lenders demand relatively small haircuts (typically ranging from0-2%). For transactions secured against less liquid collateral, haircuts vary by asset class (typically ranging from5-10% for corporate bonds and other less liquid collateral).

As at 31 December 2015,2016, the significant majority of repurchasesrepurchase activity related to matched-book activity. The Group may face refinancing risk on the net maturity mismatch for matched-book activity.

 

Net matched-book activitya,b

Negative number represents net repurchase agreement (net liability)

   
 
 
Less than 
one month 
£bn 
  
  
  
   
 
 
 
One month 
to three 
months 
£bn 
  
  
  
  
  Over three    months    £bn   

As at 31 December 2015

      

Extremely liquid fixed income

   (12.9)     7.3     5.6   

Liquid fixed income

   0.3      0.6     (0.9)  

Equities

   7.0      (1.5)    (5.5)  

Less liquid fixed income

   1.6      (0.4)    (1.2)  

Total

   (4.0)     6.0     (2.0)  

As at 31 December 2014

      

Extremely liquid fixed income

   (8.9)     6.3     2.6   

Liquid fixed income

   (0.1)     0.5     (0.4)  

Equities

   8.9      (3.0)    (5.9)  

Less liquid fixed income

   1.2      0.3     (1.5)  

Total

   1.1      4.1     (5.2)  

The residual repurchase agreement activity is the firm-financing component and reflects the Group funding of a portion of its trading portfolio assets. The primary risk related to firm-financing activity is the inability to roll-over transactions as they mature. However, 50% (2014: 54%) of firm-financing activity was secured against highly liquid assets.

Firm financing repurchase agreementsa,b

  

   

Net matched-book activitya,b

Net matched-book activitya,b

Negative number represents the cash value of the net repurchase agreement (net liability)

      

Less than 
one month 
£bn 
 
 
 
   


One month 
to three 
months 
£bn 
 
 
 
 
  Over three    months    £bn   

As at 31 December 2016

        

Extremely Liquid Fixed Incomec

     (21.8)    11.6    10.7   

Liquid Fixed Income

     (0.4)    0.8    (0.7)  

Equities

     6.1     (0.5)   (9.6)  

Less liquid Fixed Income

      0.6     (0.2)   (1.3)  

Total

      (15.5)    11.7    (0.9)  

As at 31 December 2015

        

Extremely Liquid Fixed Income

     (12.9)    7.3    5.6   

Liquid Fixed Income

     0.3     0.6    (0.9)  

Equities

     7.0     (1.5)   (5.5)  

Less liquid Fixed Income

      1.6     (0.4)   (1.2)  

Total

      (4.0)    6.0    (2.0)  
   
 
 
Less than
  one month
£bn
  
  
  
   
 
 

 

  One month
to three
months

£bn

  
  
  

  

   
 

 

Over three
months

£bn

  
  

  

           Total   £bn  

As at 31 December 2015

        

Extremely liquid fixed income

   28.8     8.3     0.3    37.4  

Liquid fixed income

   2.0     0.6     1.1    3.7  

The residual repurchase agreement activity is the firm-financing component and reflects Barclays funding of a portion of its trading portfolio assets. The primary risk related to firm-financing activity is the inability to roll-over transactions as they mature. However, 44% (2015: 50%) of firm-financing activity was secured against extremely liquid fixed income assets.

The residual repurchase agreement activity is the firm-financing component and reflects Barclays funding of a portion of its trading portfolio assets. The primary risk related to firm-financing activity is the inability to roll-over transactions as they mature. However, 44% (2015: 50%) of firm-financing activity was secured against extremely liquid fixed income assets.

Firm financing repurchase agreementsa,b

Firm financing repurchase agreementsa,b

 

   
   

Less than
  one month
£bn
 
 
 
   


  One month
to three
months

£bn

 
 
 

 

   

Over three
months
£bn
 
 
 
               Total   £bn  

As at 31st December 2016

        

Extremely Liquid Fixed Incomec

   28.3    7.1    1.1   36.5  

Liquid Fixed Income

   2.8    0.8    1.2   4.8  

Highly liquid

   10.9     6.3     10.2    27.4     13.2    8.9    14.0   36.1  

Less liquid

   2.7     1.1     1.9    5.7     1.9    0.8    2.6   5.3  

Total

   44.4     16.3     13.5    74.2     46.2    17.6    18.9   82.7  

As at 31 December 2014

        

Extremely liquid fixed income

   33.4     4.1     2.2    39.7  

Liquid fixed income

   3.6     0.3     0.6    4.5  

As at 31st December 2015

        

Extremely Liquid Fixed Income

   28.8    8.3    0.3   37.4  

Liquid Fixed Income

   2.0    0.6    1.1   3.7  

Highly liquid

   13.1     5.0     4.1    22.2     10.9    6.3    10.2   27.4  

Less liquid

   2.3     1.3     3.3    6.9     2.7    1.1    1.9   5.7  

Total

   52.4     10.7     10.2    73.3     44.4    16.3    13.5   74.2  

 

 

 

Notes

aIncludes collateral swaps.
bIncludes financing positions for prime brokerage clients which are reported as customer payables/receivables on-balanceon balance sheet.
cExtremely liquid fixed income is defined as very highly rated sovereigns and agencies, typically rated AA+ or better. It excludes liquid fixed income, equities and other less liquid collateral.

 

  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 20152016 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  165171


        

        

        

 

 

Credit ratings

In addition to monitoring and managing key metrics related to the financial strength of the Group, Barclays also subscribe tosolicits independent credit rating agency reviewsratings by Standard & Poor’s (S&P), Moody’s and Fitch, andas well as Rating and Investment Information (R&I). These ratings assess the creditworthiness of the Group, its subsidiaries and branches and are based on reviews of a broad range of business and financial attributes including risk management processes and procedures, capital strength, earnings, funding, asset quality, liquidity, accounting and governance.

 

 Credit ratingsa          
 As at 31 December 20152016                                          Standard & Poor’s   Moody’s   Fitch
 Barclays Bank PLC     
 Long-term A- (Stable) (Negative)  A2 (Stable)A1 (Negative)  A (Stable)
 Short-term A-2  P-1  F1
 Stand-alone ratinga BBB+bbb+   BAA2Baa2   

A

a
 Barclays PLC     
 Long-term BBB (Stable)(Negative)  Baa3 (Stable)Baa2 (Negative)  A (Stable)
 Short-term A-2   P-3   F1

During the year, Barclays’ ratings outlooks for Moody’s and S&P were changed to Negative from Stable following the outcome of the EU referendum in June 2016. The rating actions were part of a wider set of actions which saw the two agencies place several UK banks on negative outlooks whilst affirming the ratings. The ratings continue to carry a stable outlook with Fitch.

In December 2016 Moody’s upgraded senior long-term ratings for both Barclays Bank PLC and Barclays PLC by one notch reflecting the continuedbuild-up of loss absorbing capacity at Barclays PLC which would provide additional protection for Barclays Bank PLC’s depositors and senior unsecured creditors, and Barclays PLC’s senior unsecured creditors in a failure scenario. The negative outlooks assigned in June remained in place as the rating agency’s assessment of Barclays’ stand-alone credit strength was unaffected by the rating action.

S&P Moody’s and Fitch. Fitch affirmed theBarclays’ ratings in July and December 20152016 respectively as part of itstheir periodic review, noting the balance of Barclays’ stable PCB and strong Barclaycard businesses against the Investment Bank and Barclays Non-Core performance.reviews.

Credit rating agencies took industry wide actions in 2015 driven by evolving resolution frameworks. This involved the reassessment of the likelihood of sovereign support resulting in downward pressure on senior credit ratings. They also updated their methodologies which provided some mitigation to reflect the subordination of junior debt available to absorb losses ahead of senior bank creditors.

As a consequence, S&P downgraded Barclays PLC, the holding company, by two notches and Barclays Bank PLC, the operating company, by one notch in H115. Moody’s downgraded Barclays PLC by three notches while affirming the rating of Barclays Bank PLC also in H115. There was no impact on Barclays’ stand-alone credit ratings with all credit rating agencies.

During the year, Barclays also solicitedsolicits issuer ratings from R&I for which they assignedlocal issuance purposes in Japan and the ratings ofA- for Barclays PLC and A for Barclays Bank PLC were affirmed in July 2016 with stable outlooks.

 

Contractual credit rating downgrade exposure (cumulative cash flow)  
Contractual credit rating downgrade exposure (incremental cash outflow) Contractual credit rating downgrade exposure (incremental cash outflow) 
  Cumulative cash outflow   Incremental cash outflow 
   

One-notch
downgrade
£bn
 
 
 
   

Two-notch
downgrade
£bn
 
 
 
As at 31 December 2016    
Securitisation derivatives   (2   (1
Contingent liabilities        
Derivatives margining   (1    
Liquidity facilities   (1    
Total contractual funding or margin requirements   (4   (1
   
 
 
One-notch
downgrade
£bn
  
  
  
   
 
 
Two-notch
downgrade
£bn
  
  
  
As at 31 December 2015        
Securitisation derivatives   2     3     (2   (1
Contingent liabilities   1     1     (1    
Derivatives margining        1          
Liquidity facilities   1     1     (1   (1
Total contractual funding or margin requirements   4     6     (4   (2
As at 31 December 2014    
Securitisation derivatives   5     6  
Contingent liabilities   8     8  
Derivatives margining        1  
Liquidity facilities   1     2  
Total contractual funding or margin requirements   14     17  

 

 

 

 

 

 

Note

aRefers to Standard & Poor’s Stand-Alone Credit Profile (SACP), Moody’s Bank Financial Strength Ratio (BFSR)/Baseline Credit Assessment (BCA) and FitchFitch’s Viability Rating (VR).

 

166172  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 20152016 Annual Report on Form 20-F  


Risk review

Risk performance

Funding risk – liquidity

 

 

Liquidity management at BAGL Group (audited)

Liquidity risk is managed separately at BAGL Group due to local currency, funding and regulatory requirements.

In addition to the Group liquidity pool, as at 31 December 2015,2016, BAGL Group held £6bn (2014: £7bn)£10.6bn (2015: £6.0bn) of liquidity pool assets against BAGL specificBAGL-specific anticipated stressed outflows. The liquidity pool consists of notes and coins, central bank deposits, government bonds, treasury bills and Treasury bills.notes, and coins. Absa Bank successfully applied for a Committed Liquidity Facility from the South African Reserve Bank, which is included in the liquidity pool from January 2016.

The BAGL loan to deposit ratio as at 31 December 20152016 was 102% (2014:107% (2015: 102%).

As at 31 December 2015, BAGL had £9bn (2014: £9bn) of wholesale funding outstanding, of which £5bn (2014: £5bn) matures in less than 12 months.

Additional information on liquidity management at BAGL can be found in the Barclays Africa Group Annual Report.

Contractual maturity of financial assets and liabilities (audited)

The table on the next pagebelow provides detail on the contractual maturity of all financial instruments and other assets and liabilities. Derivatives (other than those designated in a hedging relationship) and trading portfolio assets and liabilities are included in the ‘on demand’ column at their fair value. Liquidity risk on these items is not managed on the basis of contractual maturity since they are not held for settlement according to such maturity and will frequently be settled before contractual maturity at fair value. Derivatives designated in a hedging relationship are included according to their contractual maturity.

Financial assets designated at fair value in respect of linked liabilities to customers under investment contracts have been included in other assets and other liabilities as the Group is not exposed to liquidity risk arising from them; any request for funds from creditors would be met by simultaneously liquidating or transferring the related investment.

 

  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 20152016 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  167173


 

 

 

 

 

  Contractual maturity of financial assets and liabilities (including BAGL) (audited)
  

As at

31 December 2015

  
 
 
On
demand
£m
  
  
  
  
 
 
 
Not more
than three
months
£m
  
  
  
  
  
 
 
 

 
 
 

Over three
months
but not
more

than six
months
£m

  
  
  
  

  
  
  

  
 
 
 
 
 
 
Over six
months
but not
more
than nine
months
£m
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
 
 
 
 
 
Over nine
months
but not
more than
one year
£m
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
 

 
 
 
 

Over one
year

but not
more than
two years
£m

  
  

  
  
  
  

  
 
 
 
 

 

Over two
years but
not more
than three
years

£m

  
  
  
  
  

  

  

 

 

 

 

 

Over three

years but

not more

than five

years

£m

  

  

  

  

  

  

  
 
 

 
 

 

Over five
years but
not more

than ten
years

£m

  
  
 

  
  

  

  
 

 

Over ten
years

£m

  
  

  

 

Total  

£m  

 Assets           
 Cash and balances at central banks  49,580    131                                   49,711 
 Items in the course of collection from other banks  631    380                                   1,011 
 Trading portfolio assets  77,348                                       77,348 
 Financial assets designated at fair value  5,692    46,941    1,722    1,372    583    1,021    587    424    867    16,172   75,381 
 Derivative financial instruments  326,772    28    3    1    53    328    61    257    147    59   327,709 
 Loans and advances to banks  5,354    31,539    1,954    366    468    588    991    43    12    34   41,349 
 Loans and advances to customers  29,117    76,337    13,935    7,084    12,332    27,616    27,318    48,707    50,737    106,034   399,217 
 Reverse repurchase agreements and other similar secured lending  2    24,258    3,296    292    205    74    35    1    24       28,187 
 Available for sale investments  467    2,396    1,792    4,936    2,088    11,537    14,659    17,898    21,445    13,049   90,267 
  Other financial assets      1,304                100                   1,404 
  Total financial assets  494,963    183,314    22,702    14,051    15,729    41,264    43,651    67,330    73,232    135,348   1,091,584 
  Other assetsa                                         28,428 
  Total assets                                         1,120,012 
 Liabilities           
 Deposits from banks  5,717    38,720    1,355    540    335    97    9    67    236    4   47,080 
 Items in the course of collection due to other banks  1,013                                       1,013 
 Customer accounts  312,921    80,114    7,605    4,253    5,304    2,845    912    1,654    622    2,012   418,242 
 Repurchase agreements and other similar secured borrowing  66    17,346    3,479    1,975    876    843    52        398       25,035 
 Trading portfolio liabilities  33,967                                       33,967 
 Financial liabilities designated at fair value  319    52,185    3,152    3,470    2,317    6,093    5,458    7,446    4,139    5,533   90,112 
 Derivative financial instruments  323,786    80    92    49    49    42    13    57    70    14   324,252 
 Debt securities in issue  50    14,270    5,615    4,322    4,469    10,164    4,797    13,037    10,028    2,398   69,150 
 Subordinated liabilities  2            9    28    1,254    2,994    2,194    8,741    6,245   21,467 
  Other financial liabilities      2,685                1,075                   3,760 
  Total financial liabilities  677,841    205,400    21,298    14,618    13,378    22,413    14,235    24,455    24,234    16,206   1,034,078 
  Other liabilitiesa                                         20,070 
  Total liabilities                                         1,054,148 
  Cumulative liquidity gap  (182,878  (204,964  (203,560  (204,127  (201,776  (182,925  (153,509  (110,634  (61,636  57,506   65,864 

Contractual maturity of financial assets and liabilities (including BAGL) (audited)

 

As at

31 December 2016

  


On

demand
£m

 

 
 

  


Not more
than three
months

£m

 
 
 

 

  





Over three
months
but not
more

than six
months
£m

 
 
 
 

 
 
 

  





Over six
months
but not
more

than nine
months
£m

 
 
 
 

 
 
 

  




Over nine
months
but not
more

than one
year

£m

 
 
 
 

 
 

 

  




Over one
year but
not more
than two
years

£m

 
 
 
 
 

 

  




Over two
years but
not more
than three
years

£m

 
 
 
 
 

 

  




Over three
years but
not more
than five
years

£m

 
 
 
 
 

 

  




Over five
years but
not more
than ten
years

£m

 
 
 
 
 

 

  

Over ten
years

£m

 
 

 

  

Total  

£m  

 

 

Assets

           

Cash and balances at central banks

  102,031   322                           102,353  

Items in the course of collection from other banks

  1,467                              1,467  

Trading portfolio assets

  80,240                              80,240  

Financial assets designated at fair value

  15,558   43,270   5,518   2,376   2,081   686   90   129   771   8,129   78,608  

Derivative financial instruments

  345,625   5   400   5   2   14   168   175   123   109   346,626  

Loans and advances to banks

  4,858   34,346   2,753   480   133   412   236   20   13      43,251  

Loans and advances to customers

  26,929   85,993   7,522   6,310   8,245   29,326   25,602   44,776   48,233   109,848   392,784  

Reverse repurchase agreements and other similar secured lending

  7,043   3,678   892   144   905   792               13,454  

Available for sale financial investments

  40   1,015   3,064   741   2,666   10,127   9,031   15,148   12,768   8,717   63,317  

Other financial assets

     1,128            77               1,205  

Total financial assets

  583,791   169,757   20,149   10,056   14,032   41,434   35,127   60,248   61,908   126,803   1,123,305  

Other assetsa

                                          89,821  

Total assets

                                          1,213,126  

Liabilities

           

Deposits from banks

  5,906   39,610   1,120   672   351   193   13   328   21      48,214  

Items in the course of collection due to other banks

  636                              636  

Customer accounts

  317,963   86,081   5,305   3,023   4,528   2,836   1,262   1,043   441   696   423,178  

Repurchase agreements and other similar secured borrowing

  5,480   9,235   1,934   917   1,326   311      83   474      19,760  

Trading portfolio liabilities

  34,687                              34,687  

Financial liabilities designated at fair value

  15,285   41,583   3,970   4,112   1,827   7,540   5,762   5,773   3,588   6,591   96,031  

Derivative financial instruments

  339,646   4         2   10   34   46   75   670   340,487  

Debt securities in issue

  27   16,731   11,713   5,902   6,867   3,166   8,069   9,186   10,152   4,119   75,932  

Subordinated liabilities

     8         1,317   3,230   56   7,487   6,575   4,710   23,383  

Other financial liabilities

     3,198            1,189               4,387  

Total financial liabilities

  719,630   196,450   24,042   14,626   16,218   18,475   15,196   23,946   21,326   16,786   1,066,695  

Other liabilitiesa

                                          75,066  

Total liabilities

                                          1,141,761  

Cumulative liquidity gap

  (135,839  (162,532  (166,425  (170,995  (173,181  (150,222  (130,291  (93,989  (53,407  56,610   71,365  

 

 

Note

aOtherAs at 31 December 2016, other assets includes balances of £7,364m (2014: £15,574m)£71,454m (2015: £7,364m) and other liabilities includes balances of £5,997m (2014: £13,115m)£65,292m (2015: £5,997m) relating to amounts held for sale. Please refer to Note 44 for details.

 

168174  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 20152016 Annual Report on Form 20-F  


Risk review

Risk performance

Funding risk – liquidity

 

 

  Contractual maturity of financial assets and liabilities (including BAGL) (audited)  
  

As at

31 December 2014

  
 
 
On
demand
£m
  
  
  
  
 
 
 
Not more
than three
months
£m
  
  
  
  
  
 
 
 

 
 
 

Over three
months
but not
more

than six
months
£m

  
  
  
  

  
  
  

  
 

 
 

 

 
 

Over six
months

but not
more

than nine

months
£m

  
  

  
  

 

  
  

  
 
 
 
 
 
Over nine
months
but not
more than
one year
£m
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
 

 
 
 
 

Over one
year

but not
more than
two years
£m

  
  

  
  
  
  

  
 
 
 
 

 

Over two
years but
not more
than three
years

£m

  
  
  
  
  

  

  
 
 
 
 

 

Over three
years but
not more
than five
years

£m

  
  
  
  
  

  

  
 
 
 
 

 

Over five
years but
not more
than ten
years

£m

  
  
  
  
  

  

  
 

 

Over ten
years

£m

  
  

  

 

Total

£m

  
 Assets            
 Cash and balances at central banks  39,466    229                                   39,695 
 Items in the course of collection from other banks  828    382                                   1,210 
 Trading portfolio assets  114,717                                       114,717 
 Financial assets designated at fair value  5,732    3,139    1,540    797    602    2,696    1,322    1,253    1,038    18,538   36,657 
 Derivative financial instruments  438,270    26    6    8    7    204    274    443    439    232   439,909 
 Loans and advances to banks  5,875    31,138    3,236    225    944    404    233    20    36       42,111 
 Loans and advances to customers  24,607    99,208    9,225    6,900    9,241    35,477    24,653    48,486    54,168    115,802   427,767 
 Reverse repurchase agreements and other similar secured lending  144    117,977    9,857    2,013    941    28    116    109    22    546   131,753 
 Available for sale investments  513    1,324    2,045    3,576    844    10,804    16,705    10,107    23,683    16,465   86,066 
  Other financial assets      1,469                176                   1,645  
  Total financial assets  630,152    254,892    25,909    13,519    12,579    49,789    43,303    60,418    79,386    151,583   1,321,530  
  Other assetsa                                         36,376  
  Total assets                                         1,357,906  
 Liabilities            
 Deposits from banks  7,978    48,155    1,041    504    298    187    95    69    57    6   58,390 
 Items in the course of collection due to other banks  1,177                                       1,177 
 Customer accounts  317,449    86,626    7,284    5,442    3,245    4,208    494    1,219    713    1,024   427,704 
 Repurchase agreements and other similar secured borrowing  40    111,766    7,175    2,847    1,989    119    116        427       124,479 
 Trading portfolio liabilities  45,124                                       45,124 
 Financial liabilities designated at fair value  665    6,554    3,493    4,056    3,244    7,015    5,524    9,573    6,174    8,851   55,149 
 Derivative financial instruments  438,623    29    7    12    5    62    69    78    268    167   439,320 
 Debt securities in issue  10    19,075    11,146    9,712    4,791    7,568    10,560    10,350    11,376    1,511   86,099 
 Subordinated liabilities      235    48    15        37    1,259    1,947    10,938    6,674   21,153 
  Other financial liabilities      3,060                815                   3,875  
  Total financial liabilities  811,066    275,500    30,194    22,588    13,572    20,011    18,117    23,236    29,953    18,233   1,262,470  
  Other liabilitiesa                                         29,478  
  Total liabilities                                         1,291,948  
  Cumulative liquidity gap  (180,914  (201,522  (205,807  (214,876  (215,869  (186,091  (160,905  (123,723  (74,290  59,060   65,958  

Contractual maturity of financial assets and liabilities (including BAGL) (audited)

 

As at

31 December 2015

  


On

demand
£m

 

 
 

  


Not more
than three
months

£m

 
 
 

 

  



Over three
months

but not
more

than six
months

£m

 
 

 
 

 
 

 

  



Over six
months

but not
more

than nine
months

£m

 
 

 
 

 
 

 

  



Over nine
months

but not
more

than one
year

£m

 
 

 
 

 
 

 

  




Over one
year but
not more
than two
years

£m

 
 
 
 
 

 

  




Over two
years but
not more
than three
years

£m

 
 
 
 
 

 

  




Over three
years but
not more
than five
years

£m

 
 
 
 
 

 

  




Over five
years but
not more
than ten
years

£m

 
 
 
 
 

 

  

Over ten
years

£m

 
 

 

  

Total

£m

 

 

Assets

           

Cash and balances at central banks

  49,580   131                           49,711 

Items in the course of collection from other banks

  631   380                           1,011 

Trading portfolio assets

  77,348                              77,348 

Financial assets designated at fair valuea

  30,667   21,966   1,722   1,372   583   1,021   587   424   867   16,172   75,381 

Derivative financial instruments

  326,772   28   3   1   53   328   61   257   147   59   327,709 

Loans and advances to banks

  5,354   31,539   1,954   366   468   588   991   43   12   34   41,349 

Loans and advances to customers

  29,117   76,337   13,935   7,084   12,332   27,616   27,318   48,707   50,737   106,034   399,217 

Reverse repurchase agreements and other similar secured lendinga

  12,171   12,089   3,296   292   205   74   35   1   24      28,187 

Available for sale financial investments

  467   2,396   1,792   4,936   2,088   11,537   14,659   17,898   21,445   13,049   90,267 

Other financial assets

     1,304            100               1,404 

Total financial assets

  532,107   146,170   22,702   14,051   15,729   41,264   43,651   67,330   73,232   135,348   1,091,584 

Other assets

                                28,428 

Total assets

                                1,120,012 

Liabilities

           

Deposits from banks

  5,717   38,720   1,355   540   335   97   9   67   236   4   47,080 

Items in the course of collection due to other banks

  1,013                              1,013 

Customer accounts

  312,921   80,114   7,605   4,253   5,304   2,845   912   1,654   622   2,012   418,242 

Repurchase agreements and other similar secured borrowinga

  5,729   11,683   3,479   1,975   876   843   52      398      25,035 

Trading portfolio liabilities

  33,967                              33,967 

Financial liabilities designated at fair valuea

  20,051   32,453   3,152   3,470   2,317   6,093   5,458   7,446   4,139   5,533   90,112 

Derivative financial instruments

  323,786   80   92   49   49   42   13   57   70   14   324,252 

Debt securities in issue

  50   14,270   5,615   4,322   4,469   10,164   4,797   13,037   10,028   2,398   69,150 

Subordinated liabilities

  2         9   28   1,254   2,994   2,194   8,741   6,245   21,467 

Other financial liabilities

     2,685            1,075               3,760 

Total financial liabilities

  703,236   180,005   21,298   14,618   13,378   22,413   14,235   24,455   24,234   16,206   1,034,078 

Other liabilities

                                20,070 

Total liabilities

                                1,054,148 

Cumulative liquidity gap

  (171,129  (204,964  (203,560  (204,127  (201,776  (182,925  (153,509  (110,634  (61,636  57,506   65,864 

Expected maturity dates do not differ significantly from the contract dates, except for:

 

§ trading portfolio assets and liabilities and derivative financial instruments, which may not be held to maturity as part of the Group’s trading strategies

 

§ retail deposits, which are included within customer accounts, are repayable on demand or at short notice on a contractual basis. In practice, these instruments form a stable base for the Group’s operations and liquidity needs because of the broad base of customers both numerically and by depositor type (see behaviouralBehavioural maturity profile on page 160)166; and

 

§ financial assets designated at fair value held in respect of linked liabilities, which are managed with the associated liabilities.

Note

aOtherThe On demand and Not more than three months categories for 2015 have been adjusted by £37bn for financial assets includes balancesand £25bn for financial liabilities to better reflect the contractual maturity of £7,364m (2014: £15,574m)both Reverse repurchase agreements and other liabilities includes balances of £5,997m (2014: £13,115m) relating to amounts held for sale. Please refer to Note 44 for details.Repurchase agreements measured at amortised cost and fair value.

 

  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 20152016 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  169175


        

        

        

 

 

Contractual maturity of financial liabilities on an undiscounted basis (audited)

The table below presents the cash flows payable by the Group under financial liabilities by remaining contractual maturities at the balance sheet date. The amounts disclosed in the table are the contractual undiscounted cash flows of all financial liabilities (i.e. nominal values).

The balances in the below table do not agree directly to the balances in the consolidated balance sheet as the table incorporates all cash flows, on an undiscounted basis, related to both principal as well as those associated with all future coupon payments.

Derivative financial instruments held for trading and trading portfolio liabilities are included in the on demand column at their fair value.

Financial liabilities designated at fair value in respect of linked liabilities under investment contracts have been excluded from this analysis as the Group is not exposed to liquidity risk arising from them.

 

  Contractual maturity of financial liabilities – undiscounted (including BAGL Group) (audited)  
      

 

 

On

demand

£m

  

  

  

   

 

 

 

Not more

than three

months

£m

  

  

  

  

   

 

 

 

 

 

Over three

months but

not more

than six

months

£m

  

  

  

  

  

  

   

 

 

 

 

Over six

months but

not more

than one year

£m

  

  

  

  

  

   

 

 

 

 

 

Over one

year

but not

more than

three years

£m

  

  

  

  

  

  

   

 

 

 

 

 

Over three

years but

not more

than five

years

£m

  

  

  

  

  

  

   

 

 

 

 

 

Over five

years but

not more

than ten

years

£m

  

  

  

  

  

  

   

 

 

Over ten

years

£m

  

  

  

   

 

Total

£m

  

  

 As at 31 December 2015                  
 Deposits from banks   5,717     38,721     1,357     877     108     70     239     10     47,099  
 Items in the course of collection due to other banks   1,013                                        1,013  
 Customer accounts   312,921     80,142     7,640     9,655     3,858     1,854     744     3,087     419,901  
 Repurchase agreements and other similar secured lending   66     17,349     3,482     2,853     898          491          25,139  
 Trading portfolio liabilities   33,967                                        33,967  
 Financial liabilities designated at fair value   319     52,202     3,165     5,830     11,851     7,840     4,690     8,694     94,591  
 Derivative financial instruments   323,786     81     94     102     57     59     80     16     324,275  
 Debt securities in issue   50     14,352     5,845     9,277     16,777     14,175     11,276     4,547     76,299  
 Subordinated liabilities   2     253     403     344     6,057     3,737     9,969     6,313     27,078  
  Other financial liabilities        2,685               1,075                    3,760  
  Total financial liabilities   677,841     205,785     21,986     28,938     40,681     27,735     27,489     22,667     1,053,122  
 As at 31 December 2014                  
 Deposits from banks   7,978     48,155     1,042     804     287     75     62     29     58,432  
 Items in the course of collection due to other banks   1,177                                        1,177  
 Customer accounts   317,449     86,659     7,364     8,854     4,851     1,399     1,046     2,218     429,840  
 Repurchase agreements and other similar secured lending   40     111,769     7,178     4,837     236          428          124,488  
 Trading portfolio liabilities   45,124                                        45,124  
 Financial liabilities designated at fair value   665     6,561     3,508     7,378     12,854     10,285     7,170     14,273     62,694  
 Derivative financial instruments   438,623     30     7     17     137     85     314     341     439,554  
 Debt securities in issue   10     19,481     11,406     14,952     19,416     11,352     12,075     2,760     91,452  
 Subordinated liabilities        380     324     171     1,403     4,339     11,218     6,683     24,518  
  Other financial liabilities        3,060               815                    3,875  
  Total financial liabilities   811,066     276,095     30,829     37,013     39,999     27,535     32,313     26,304     1,281,154  

Contractual maturity of financial liabilities – undiscounteda (including BAGL) (audited)

 

    

On
demand
£m
 
 
 
   


Not more
than three
months
£m
 
 
 
 
   




Over three
months but
not more
than six
months

£m

 
 
 
 
 

 

   




Over six
months but
not more
than one
year

£m

 
 
 
 
 

 

   




Over one
year but
not more
than three
years

£m

 
 
 
 
 

 

   




Over three
years but
not more
than five
years

£m

 
 
 
 
 

 

   




Over five
years but
not more
than ten
years

£m

 
 
 
 
 

 

   

Over ten
years
£m
 
 
 
   

Total

£m

 

 

As at 31 December 2016

                  

Deposits from banks

   5,906    39,617    1,122    1,025    207    328    21        48,226 

Items in the course of collection due to other banks

   636                                636 

Customer accounts

   317,963    86,101    5,325    7,565    4,266    1,120    1,403    1,013    424,756 

Repurchase agreements and other similar secured lending

   5,480    9,249    1,939    2,253    312    83    474        19,790 

Trading portfolio liabilities

   34,687                                34,687 

Financial liabilities designated at fair value

   15,285    41,599    3,986    5,979    13,445    5,899    3,900    8,443    98,536 

Derivative financial instruments

   339,646    4        2    44    48    84    1,086    340,914 

Debt securities in issue

   27    17,126    11,894    13,285    12,915    10,505    12,282    6,054    84,088 

Subordinated liabilities

       398    680    3,117    7,089    9,324    7,842    4,866    33,316 

Other financial liabilities

       3,198            1,189                4,387 

Total financial liabilities

   719,630    197,292    24,946    33,226    39,467    27,307    26,006    21,462    1,089,336 

As at 31 December 2015

                  

Deposits from banks

   5,717    38,721    1,357    877    108    70    239    10    47,099 

Items in the course of collection due to other banks

   1,013                                1,013 

Customer accounts

   312,921    80,142    7,640    9,655    3,858    1,854    744    3,087    419,901 

Repurchase agreements and other similar secured lendingb

   5,729    11,686    3,482    2,853    898        491        25,139 

Trading portfolio liabilities

   33,967                                33,967 

Financial liabilities designated at fair valueb

   20,051    32,470    3,165    5,830    11,851    7,840    4,690    8,694    94,591 

Derivative financial instruments

   323,786    81    94    102    57    59    80    16    324,275 

Debt securities in issue

   50    14,352    5,845    9,277    16,777    14,175    11,276    4,547    76,299 

Subordinated liabilities

   2    253    403    344    6,057    3,737    9,969    6,313    27,078 

Other financial liabilities

       2,685            1,075                3,760 

Total financial liabilities

   703,236    180,390    21,986    28,938    40,681    27,735    27,489    22,667    1,053,122 

Note

aFinancial liabilities on an undiscounted basis for 2016 exclude BAGL balances now held for sale but are included for 2015.
bThe On demand and Not more than three months categories for 2015 have been adjusted by £25bn for financial liabilities to better reflect the contractual maturity of Repurchase agreements measured at amortised cost and fair value.

 

170176  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 20152016 Annual Report on Form 20-F  


Risk review

Risk performance

Funding risk – liquidity

 

 

Maturity ofoff-balance sheet commitments received and given (audited)

The table below presents the maturity split of the Group’soff-balance sheet commitments received and given at the balance sheet date. The amounts disclosed in the table are the undiscounted cash flows (i.e. nominal values) on the basis of earliest opportunity at which they are available.

 

  Maturity analysis of off-balance sheet commitments received (including BAGL)  
      
 
 
On
demand
£m
  
  
  
   
 
 
 
Not more
than three
months
£m
  
  
  
  
   
 
 
 
 
 
 
Over three
months
but not
more
than six
months
£m
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
   
 
 
 
 
 
 
Over six
months
but not
more
than nine
months
£m
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
   
 
 
 
 
 

 

Over nine
months
but not
more
than one
year

£m

  
  
  
  
  
  

  

   
 
 
 
 

 

Over one
year but
not more
than two
years

£m

  
  
  
  
  

  

   
 
 
 
 

 

Over two
years but
not more
than three
years

£m

  
  
  
  
  

  

   
 
 
 
 

 

Over three
years but
not more
than five
years

£m

  
  
  
  
  

  

   
 
 
 
 

 

Over five
years but
not more
than ten
years

£m

  
  
  
  
  

  

   
 
 
Over ten
years
£m
  
  
  
   

 

Total

£m

  

  

 As at 31 December 2015                      
 Guarantees, letters of credit and credit insurance   6,329     138     4     5     32     84     12     97     4     17     6,722  
  Forward starting repurchase agreementsa        392          73                                   465  
  Total off-balance sheet commitments received   6,329     530     4     78     32     84     12     97     4     17     7,187  
 As at 31 December 2014                      
 Guarantees, letters of credit and credit insurance   6,571     60     37     38     39     152     138     203     65          7,303  
  Forward starting repurchase agreementsa        10,778                                             10,778  
  Total off-balance sheet commitments received   6,571     10,838     37     38     39     152     138     203     65          18,081  
                       
  Maturity analysis of off-balance sheet commitments given (including BAGL) (audited)  
      
 
 
On
demand
£m
  
  
  
   
 
 
 
Not more
than three
months
£m
  
  
  
  
   
 
 
 
 
 
 
Over three
months
but not
more
than six
months
£m
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
   
 
 
 
 
 
 
Over six
months
but not
more
than nine
months
£m
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
   
 
 
 
 
 

 

Over nine
months
but not
more
than one
year

£m

  
  
  
  
  
  

  

   
 
 
 
 

 

Over one
year but
not more
than two
years

£m

  
  
  
  
  

  

   
 
 
 
 

 

Over two
years but
not more
than three
years

£m

  
  
  
  
  

  

   
 
 
 
 

 

Over three
years but
not more
than five
years

£m

  
  
  
  
  

  

   
 
 
 
 

 

Over five
years but
not more
than ten
years

£m

  
  
  
  
  

  

   
 
 
Over ten
years
£m
  
  
  
   

 

Total

£m

  

  

 As at 31 December 2015                      
 Contingent liabilities   17,421     933     493     140     590     423     158     161     164     138     20,621  
 Documentary credits and other short-term trade-related transactions   617     30     10          61     119          8               845  
 Forward starting reverse repurchase agreementsa        93                                             93  
  Standby facilities, credit lines and other commitments   274,020     1,152     1,564     1,116     1,071     873     554     906     78     35     281,369  
  Total off-balance sheet commitments given   292,058     2,208     2,067     1,256     1,722     1,415     712     1,075     242     173     302,928  
 As at 31 December 2014                      
 Contingent liabilities   17,304     1,770     352     162     102     410     55     83     1,037     49     21,324  
 Documentary credits and other short-term trade-related transactions   869     75     13          19     115                         1,091  
 Forward starting reverse repurchase agreementsa        13,735          121                                   13,856  
  Standby facilities, credit lines and other commitments   262,540     4,045     1,722     844     646     3,638     877     1,846     137     20     276,315  
  Total off-balance sheet commitments given   280,713     19,625     2,087     1,127     767     4,163     932     1,929     1,174     69     312,586  

Maturity analysis ofoff-balance sheet commitments received

 

    

On
demand
£m
 
 
 
   


Not more
than three
months
£m
 
 
 
 
   





Over three
months
but not
more
than six
months
£m
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
   





Over six
months
but not
more
than nine
months
£m
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
   



Over nine
months
but not
more than

one year

£m

 
 
 
 

 

 

   




Over one
year but
not more
than two
years

£m

 
 
 
 
 

 

   




Over two
years but
not more
than three
years

£m

 
 
 
 
 

 

   




Over three
years but
not more
than five
years

£m

 
 
 
 
 

 

   




Over five
years but
not more
than ten
years

£m

 
 
 
 
 

 

   

Over ten
years
£m
 
 
 
   

Total

£m

 

 

As at 31 December 2016

                      

Guarantees, letters of credit and credit insurance

   6,044    18    1    410    2    23    1    3            6,502 

Forward starting repurchase agreements

   102    246        1            18                367 

Totaloff-balance sheet commitments receiveda

   6,146    264    1    411    2    23    19    3            6,869 

As at 31 December 2015

                      

Guarantees, letters of credit and credit insurance

   6,329    138    4    5    32    84    12    97    4    17    6,722 

Forward starting repurchase agreements

       392        73                            465 

Totaloff-balance sheet commitments receiveda

   6,329    530    4    78    32    84    12    97    4    17    7,187 
                      

Maturity analysis ofoff-balance sheet commitments given (audited)

 

    

On
demand
£m
 
 
 
   


Not more
than three
months
£m
 
 
 
 
   





Over three
months
but not
more
than six
months
£m
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
   





Over six
months
but not
more
than nine
months
£m
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
   




Over nine
months
but not
more than
one year
£m
 
 
 
 
 
 
   




Over one
year but
not more
than two
years

£m

 
 
 
 
 

 

   




Over two
years but
not more
than three
years

£m

 
 
 
 
 

 

   




Over three
years but
not more
than five
years

£m

 
 
 
 
 

 

   




Over five
years but
not more
than ten
years

£m

 
 
 
 
 

 

   

Over ten
years
£m
 
 
 
   

Total

£m

 

 

As at 31 December 2016

                      

Contingent liabilities

   17,111    425    845    233    285    355    187    88    259    151    19,939 

Documentary credits and other short-term trade related transactions

   987    10    8                                1,005 

Forward Starting reverse repurchase agreements

       24                                    24 

Standby facilities, credit lines and other commitments

   300,043    455    415    604    818    55    47    150        70    302,657 

Totaloff-balance sheet commitments givena

   318,141    914    1,268    837    1,103    410    234    238    259    221    323,625 

As at 31 December 2015

                      

Contingent liabilities

   17,421    933    493    140    590    423    158    161    164    138    20,621 

Documentary credits and other short-term trade related transactions

   617    30    10        61    119        8            845 

Forward Starting reverse repurchase agreements

       93                                    93 

Standby facilities, credit lines and other commitments

   274,020    1,152    1,564    1,116    1,071    873    554    906    78    35    281,369 

Totaloff-balance sheet commitments givena

   292,058    2,208    2,067    1,256    1,722    1,415    712    1,075    242    173    302,928 

Note

aForward starting reverse repurchase and repurchase agreements were previously disclosed as loan commitments. Following the business designation of reverse repurchase and repurchase agreements at fair value through profit and loss, new forward starting reverse repurchase and repurchase agreementsAmounts for 2016 exclude BAGL balances now held for sale but are within the scope of IAS 39 and are recognised as derivatives on the balance sheet.included for 2015.

 

  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 20152016 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  171177


Risk review

Risk performance

Operational risk

Analysis of operational risk

Operational risk is the risk of direct or indirect impacts resulting from human factors, inadequate or failed internal processes and systems or external events.

This section provides an analysis of the Group’s operational risk profile, including events which have had a significant impact in 2015.

A small reduction in the number of recorded incidents occurring during the period

83%

of the Group’s net reportable operational risk events had a loss value of £50,000 or less

67%

of events are due to external fraud

 

 

    

Analysis of operational risk

This section provides an analysis of the Group’s operational risk profile, including events which have had a significant impact in 2016.

Key metrics

A small reduction in the number of recorded incidents occurring during the period

91%

of the Group’s net reportable operational risk events had a loss value of £50,000 or less

65%

of events by number are due to External Fraud

LOGO

 

172178  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 20152016 Annual Report on Form 20-F  


Risk review

Risk performance

Operational risk

 

 

Operational risk

Operational risk is defined as any instance where there is a potential or actual impactthe risk of loss to the Group resultingfirm from inadequate or failed internal processes people,or systems, human factors or from andue to external event. The impactsevents (for example fraud) where the root cause is not due to the Group can be financial, including lossescredit or an unexpected financial gain, as well as non-financial such as customer detriment, reputational or regulatory consequences.market risks

All disclosures in this section (page 173) are unaudited.unaudited unless otherwise stated.

Overview

Operational risks are inherent in all the Group’s business activities and are typical of any large enterprise. Itit is not always cost effective or possible to attempt to eliminate all operational risks and in any event it would not be possible to do so. Small losses fromrisks. The operational risk management framework is therefore focused on ensuring operational risks are expected to occuridentified, assessed and are accepted as part ofmitigated within the normal course of business.Group’s approved risk appetite. More material losses are less frequent and the Group seeks to reduce the likelihood of these in accordance with its risk appetite.

The Operational Principal Riskprincipal risk comprises the following Key Risks: External suppliers, Financial crime, Financialrisks: financial reporting, Fraud, Information, Legal, Paymentsfraud, information, payments process, People, Premisespeople, premises and security, Taxation, Technologysupplier, tax, technology (including cyber security)cyber) and Transactiontransaction operations. In 2016 legal risk and financial crime risk were managed as part of operational risk.

For definitions of these key risks see page 106.109. In order to ensure complete coverage of the potential adverse impacts on the Group arising from Operationaloperational risk, the Operationaloperational risk taxonomy extends beyond the Operational keyoperational risks listed above to cover areas included within Conductconduct and legal risk.

This section provides an analysis of the Group’s operational risk profile, including events, those which are above the Bank’s reportable threshold, which have had a financial impact in 2015.2016.

For more information on Conductconduct risk events please see page 175.181.

Summary of performance in the period

During 2015,2016, total operational risk lossesa increased decreased to £241.3m (2014: £143.9m)£225.9m (2015: £283.5m) with a 3%4% reduction in the number of recorded events as compared to lastprior year. The loss for the year was primarily driven by a limited number of events in execution, delivery and process management category.

Losses were mainly due to execution, deliverycategories and process management impacts, external fraud and business disruption and system failures.fraud.

Operational risk profile

Within operational risk, a high proportion of risk events have a low associated financial cost and a very small proportion of operational risk events will have a material impact on the financial results of the Group. In 2015, 82.6% (2014: 78.0%)2016, 90.8% of the Group’s net reportable operational risk events had a value of £50,000 or less (2015: 88.1%) and accounted for 11.1% (2014: 30.5%23.2% (2015: 14.5%) of the Group’s total net loss impact.

The analysis below presents the Group’s operational risk events by Basel event category:

 

§ Execution, delivery and process management impacts increased to £137.5m (2014: £81.3m)£124.4m (2015: £111.8m) and accounted for 57.0% (2014: 56.5%55.0% (2015: 39.4%) of overall operational risk losses. The events in this category are typical of the banking industry as a whole where high volumes of transactions are processed on a daily basis. The increases in impacts were largely driven by limited number of events with higher loss valuesvalues.

 

§ External fraud (66.6%(65.2%) is the category with the highest frequency of events where high volume, low value events are also consistent with industry experience, driven by debit and credit card fraud. This accounted for 27.4%25.8% of overall operational risk losses in the year from 29.7%22.2% last year.

The Group’s operational risk profile is informed bybottom-up risk assessments undertaken by each business unit andtop-down qualitative review from the Governance Risk and Control Committeesoperational risk management for each of the key risks.risk type. External fraudFraud and technology are highlighted as key operational risk exposures. DevelopmentsThe operational risk profile is also informed by a number of risk themes: change, resilience and cyber security. These represent material risk to the bank but have scope which sits across multiple risk types, and therefore require a risk management approach which is integrated within relevant risk and control frameworks.

Investment continues to be made in new and enhanced fraud prevention systems and transaction profiling tools underway to combat the increasing externallevel of fraud frequency especially inattempts being made and to minimise any disruption to genuine transactions. Fraud remains anindustry-wide threat and the credit cards, digital banking, unauthorised trading and social engineering.

Cyber security riskBank continues to be an area of attention givenwork closely with external partners on various prevention initiatives. Technology, resilience and cyber security risks evolve rapidly so the increasing sophistication and scope of potential cyber-attack. Risks to technology and Cyber security change rapidly and requireBank maintains continued focus and investment.investment in our control environment to manage these risks, and actively partners with peers and relevant organisations to understand and disrupt threats originating outside the Bank.

For further information see Operational Risk managementManagement section on pages 106109 to 107.110.

 

LOGO

Operational risk events by risk category

% of total risk events by count

LOGO

Operational risk events by risk category

% of total risk events by value

LOGO

Note

aFiguresThe data disclosed include operational risk losses for reportable events (excluding Africa) having impact of +/-> £10,000 and exclude events that are conduct risk, aggregatedaggregate and boundary events. A boundary event is an operational risk event that results in a credit risk impact. Legal risk events are also included. Due to the nature of risk events that keep evolving, prior year losses are updated.

 

  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 20152016 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  173179


Risk review

Risk performance

Conduct risk

 

 

Analysis of conduct risk

Conduct risk is the risk that detriment is caused to our customers, clients, counterparties or Barclays because of inappropriate judgement in the execution of our business activities.

This section details Barclays’ conduct risk profile and provides information on key 20152016 risk events and risk mitigation actions Barclays has taken.

Conduct riskKey metrics

5.4/10 on the conduct

Balanced Scorecard

The Conduct Reputation Balanced

Scorecard Measure

Driven has been sustained mainly by improvements in the following components:our focus on:

 

 § OperatesOperating openly and transparently

 

 § HasHaving high quality products and services

 

 § DeliversDelivering value for money for customers and clients

 

 

 

LOGO

 

 

174180  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 20152016 Annual Report on Form 20-F  


Risk review

Risk performance

Conduct risk

 

 

Conduct risk

Conduct risk is the risk thatof detriment is caused to our customers, clients, counterpartiesmarket integrity, competition or Barclays becausefrom the inappropriate supply of inappropriate judgement in the executionfinancial services, including instances of our business activities.wilful or negligent conduct

All disclosures in this section (pages 175 to 176) are unaudited unless otherwise statedstated.

Conduct riskRisk

Doing the right thing in the right wayBarclays strives to create and maintain mutually beneficial long-term relationships with our customers and clients. This means taking personal accountability for understanding their needs and providing suitablethem with products and services that meet those needs appropriately and help them manage their financial affairs.

As a transatlantic consumer, corporate and investment bank, Barclays also plays a critical role in promoting fair, open and transparent markets, as well as fostering shared growth for customers and clients is central to Barclays’ strategy. Barclays is committed to Group-wide changes to business practices, governance and mindset and behaviours so that good customer outcomes and protecting market integrity are integral to the way Barclays operates. Improving our reputation in the market will demonstrate to customersall. This means abiding by standards that in Barclays they have a partner they can trust.

The FCA expects Barclays Boardmany cases are higher than those set by the laws and Senior Management, supported by a governance structure and suitable management information to: have oversight of and mitigate conduct risks; consistently promote appropriate conduct outcomes; and drive the embedding of a conduct focused culture.

A key driver in delivering effective structural reform is balancing regulatory requirements and ensuring good outcomes for customers. The structural reform programme expects conduct risks to be managed through existing committees with escalation to the Structural Reform Programme Implementation Steering Committee as appropriate.

Furthermore, Barclays is working to implement new regulatory requirements related to Individual Accountability whichregulations that apply to all UK banks and certain investment firms. The three new interlinking elements under the new rules on Strengthening Personal Accountability are: Senior Managers Regime, Certification Regime and a new set of Conduct Rules. These represent some of the most important regulatory changes in banking to date. At Barclays, we welcome these changes, and recognise the importance of how strengthening personal accountability will enhance the way we work, and will provide us with a framework to demonstrate our integrity and professionalism.business.

Reputation risk

Reputation risk is designated as a key risk by Barclays. It is defined as the risk of damage to the Group’s brand arising from any association, action or inaction which is perceived by stakeholders to be inappropriate or unethical. While reputation risk can arise anywhere in the business, it is aligned with the Conduct Principal Risk due to the significant correlation between them as issues relating to conduct have material reputation impact.

The Reputation Key Risk Framework governs how Barclays’ businesses and functions implement effective risk management in this area, including identification, evaluation, prioritisation, mitigation, escalation and reporting of current and emerging reputation risks. Forward looking reputation risk horizon scanning is undertaken centrally and validated via ongoing stakeholder dialogue with a variety of relevant opinion formers. This provides an informed and broad view of the external reputation environment and identifies issues and themes likely to impact the reputation of Barclays and the finance sector.

Summary of performance in the period

In 2016, Barclays remained focused on the continuous improvements being made to manage risk effectively, with an emphasis on enhancing governance and management information to help ensure forward-looking risks are identified at earlier stages.

The cornerstone of our efforts is the Strengthening Personal Accountability programme, which is designed to strengthen our culture and embed our values throughout the organisation. The programme includes implementation of the UK Senior Manager, Certification and Conduct Rules, in addition to similar regulatory requirements and expectations in other jurisdictions.

The Group introduced dashboards on conduct, culture, complaints and citizenship to help the Board and senior management oversee and measure change across the organisation and take action where necessary to address issues and encourage progress. The dashboard data reflects a downward trend in conduct issues and complaints alongside an upward trend in confidence with respect to speaking up about potential conduct risks and issues.

Barclays proactively undertook ‘Lessons Learned’ assessments on issues identified in enforcement matters across the industry, including the use of performance metrics and formulaic incentives in remuneration and performance management. The Group also enhanced the role and impact of conduct issues in the remuneration process at both the individual and business level.

Businesses have continued to assess the potential customer, client and market impacts of strategic change and structural reform. As part of the 2016 Medium-Term Planning Process, material conduct risks associated with strategic and financial plans were assessed. Divestment ofNon-Core assets and businesses remains subject to a governance framework that considers the impacts on customer and client choice, market access, liquidity and other conduct risks.

The Group also continually assesses the impact of economic and geopolitical events on customers, clients and markets. In anticipation of the EU Referendum, Barclays successfully applied incident management techniques to prepare for and respond to customer and client needs and provide market liquidity.

Throughout 2014 the Conduct Risk Programme designed relevant governance, reporting, training, and definition of roles and responsibilities, and from January 2015 conduct risk management was fully integrated within the businesses.

Following stakeholder feedback additional improvements have been made to enhance conduct risk management in 2015. The main aims have been to:

§simplify the governance processes

§improve the quality, completeness and reliability of Management information reported, including reporting against forward looking risk indicators

§improve the quality of Conduct Material Risk Assessment through more explanation of what good looks like and provision of targeted support to both the business and Compliance

§develop more productive relationships with internal stakeholders and other control functions, including colleagues across Compliance

§increase staff awareness of Conduct risk through e-learning

§align Conduct risk management more closely with HR colleagues

§build a relationship with Operational risk to leverage technology and in recognition of the high level of crossover between the two risks

§improve the consideration of Conduct risk in strategy setting and review processes.

Throughout 2015,2016 conduct risks were raised by businesses for consideration by the RepCo. RepCo hasBoard Reputation Committee. The Board Reputation Committee reviewed the risks raised and whether the managementmanagement’s proposed actions proposed were appropriate to ensuremanage the risks effectively. In addition to structural reform, strategic change, the EU Referendum and lessons learned assessments, the Board Reputation Committee reviewed

issues related to data security, cyber risk and technology resilience.

While there has been significant progress, a need for continued focus remains. Barclays must drive cultural change through all levels of the organisation and evidence consistent consideration of conduct risks were managed effectively.

Below are general themes ofin long-term, medium-term andday-to-day strategic decisions. The Group must continue to refine its conduct riskgovernance structure, particularly with respect to forward-looking management information to drive proactive decision making and control discussed by Senior Management at the RepCo in 2015.

§Barclays continues to be party to litigation and regulatory actions involving claimants who consider that inappropriate conduct by the Group has caused damage. Details in respect of such investigations and related litigation are included in Note 29 Legal, competition and regulatory matters on page (261).

§The need to ensure that customers, and especially vulnerable customers, experiencing financial difficulty are treated appropriately and with due regard to their circumstances as a means to ensuring good customer outcomes.

§There are potential risks arising from conflicts of interest, including those related to the benchmark submission process. While primarily relevant to the Investment Bank, these potential risks may also impact the corporate and retail customer base. Barclays seeks to mitigate these risks by the maintaining of clear operating models and effective identification and management of conflicts of interest controls and supervisory oversight.

§The risk of mismanagement of customer data.

§Due to the volume and pace of strategic change, good customer outcomes are not sufficiently considered and achieved.

§Customers have degraded access to systems and information such as transaction delays, inability to access funds and incorrect information, increased risk of fraudulent activity and payment delays.

§The risk of digitisation that automated channels may not deliver the services that customers expect, the impact on vulnerable customers, fraud and cyber security risk. The need for strong and robust product design to ensure the minimisation or avoidance of adverse customer outcomes through the sale of products, services and advice inappropriate for a target market.

§Client assets sourcebook (CASS) – Due to the unprecedented level of change the firm is to implement over the next 12 months, the current stable environment relating to CASS is affected.

Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  175


Such conduct related themes also carry material reputation risk implications. Another area of reputation riskaddress issues that continues to intensify relates to public, regulatory and political concernspersist around the integration of climate change issuesgeneral control environment and impacts into finance sector operations and strategy.

§infrastructure.The intergovernmental conference on climate change in December 2015 agreed to keep global warming to within 2ºC, which will require significant and far reaching policy and regulation to constrain the combustion of fossil fuel reserves. This will impact many sectors, however, there has been significant activity during 2015 on furthering the finance sector’s understanding of the potential financial, operational and strategic implications of climate change. In particular, the Financial Stability Board (FSB) recommended a proposal to the G20 for the creation of an industry-led disclosure task force on climate-related risks in November 2015. This taskforce has been established with the mandate to consider the physical, liability and transition risks associated with climate change; identify effective corporate financial disclosures and develop a set of recommendations for climate-related disclosures. Improving the quality and consistency of climate financial risk disclosures by companies will enable the effective disclosure and analysis of material information by lenders, insurers, investors and other stakeholders.

Barclays participates in a number of industry groups looking at these issues and is assessing the implications for our global business.

Increasing the awareness of all staff of the importance of good customer outcomes and protecting market integrity has been a priority in 2015. Over 97% of Barclays staff have successfully completed training in this area.

The Group continued to incur significant costs in relation to litigation and conduct matters, please refer to Note 29 Legal, competition and regulatory matters and Note 27 Provisions for further detail. Litigation and conduct chargesCosts include customer redress and remediation, as well as expenses including damages, fines remediation of affected customers or clients, other penalties or settlements incurred in connection with legal, competition and regulatory matters.

settlements. Resolution of these matters remains a necessary and important part of delivering the Group’s strategy but there are early signs that we are driving better outcomes for customers from a more thoughtful consideration of our customers’ needs.

As a result of increased awareness and early consideration of conduct risk in the business, a number of actions have been takenan ongoing commitment to improve customer outcomes including:oversight of culture and conduct.

Reputation Risk has been managed as a Key Risk under Conduct Risk, prior to beingre-designated as a Principal Risk with effect from 2017. Barclays association with sensitive sectors is often an area of concern for stakeholders and the following topics were of particular interest during the year:

 

§ proactive considerationClimate change and the management of potential customer detriment associatedclimate risks is an increasingly important issue for the banking sector. There has been an increase in the level of interest in our response to climate change from a number of different stakeholder groups, largely driven by the ratification of COP21 requirements and publication of draft recommendations by the Financial Stability Board’s Taskforce on Climate-related Financial Disclosures for annual reports. We are undertaking a review of our global energy sector client portfolio, in order to develop a strategic approach that is sustainable in the long term. We expect credit appetite to fossil fuels more broadly to decrease over time due to regulatory requirements, political appetite and moves towards development of cleaner energy sources, with Barclays’ strategyparticular short-term focus on coal. In the meantime, we are actively pursuing opportunities in the green energy and renewable sectors. Please refer to simplify its business and product. For example, change programmes monitoring customers subject to multiple changes including platform and online migrationshome.barclays/citizenship/our-reporting.html for further information.

 

§ applicationSupporting the manufacture and export of more stringent residential mortgage requirementsmilitary and riot control goods and services is a reputation risk for the financial services sector. Political and public concern in particular relates to buy-to-let mortgage applicants, ensuring better lending decisionsthe use of weapons against civilians in conflict situations and to support unjustified external aggression. Our Defence Policy mandates our relationship with clients in this sector and includes a number of restrictions regarding client activities. For example, it is our policy not to finance trade in, or manufacture of, nuclear, chemical, biological or other weapons of mass destruction. A formal governance structure is in place to review high risk defence relationships and trade transactions on a case by case basis, taking into account the client, types of goods, end user and country risk.

 

§ enhanced surveillance monitoringThe banking sector has come under increased scrutiny for its perceived indirect involvement in human rights abuses committed by clients and customers. Barclays Group Statement on Human Rights outlines how we manage our impacts across four key areas: employees, local communities, suppliers and clients/customers, taking into account the Investment Bank identifyingUN Framework and proactivelyGuiding Principles on business and human rights and other internationally recognised human rights standards. The UK Modern Slavery Act which came into force in October 2015 has helped raise awareness of the role business plays in managing activity which appearhuman rights impacts. We are committed to cause unusual market impactcombatting the risk of modern slavery or human trafficking in our supply chain or in any part of our business and Barclays Group Statement on Modern Slavery is available on home.barclays/content/dam/barclayspublic/docs/Citizenship/Policy-Positions/MSA2016.pdf

§improvements in key areas suchReputation Risk may also arise as bereavement and power of Attorney and ongoing training to equip staff to support customers in vulnerable circumstances and

§separation plans of Non-Core businesses to consider customer outcomes.

Salz recommendations

The Board commissioned a reviewresult of Barclays’ business practicesissues and incidents relevant to other Principal Risks, in July 2012, led by Sir Anthony Salz. The report contained 34 recommendations that can be categorised broadly under Regulatory, Culture, Board Governance, People Pay and Management Oversight and Risk Management. Please refer to previous annual updates for further detail of past actions taken. All actions to implement the recommendations have been completed and independently validated. The Group continues to monitor the actions to ensure that they become fully embedded throughout the organisation.

particular othernon-financial risks e.g. Conduct reputation measureor Operational Risk.

To aid monitoring of progress in the management of conduct, a ‘Conduct Reputation’ measure is included within Barclays’ Balanced Scorecard. The conduct measure is developed through a conduct and reputation survey, undertaken by YouGov, across a range of respondents including business and political stakeholders, the media, NGOs, charities and other opinion formers across key geographies (the UK, Europe, Africa, the US and Asia).

In 2015 Barclays made progress on its Conduct measure recording a score of 5.4 (2014: 5.3). ‘Operates openly and transparently’, ‘Has high quality products and services’ and ‘Delivers value for money for customers and clients’ have all improved according to audience perception. Performance on two components, ‘Treats staff well at all levels of the business’ and ‘it can be trusted’ have declined slightly. In terms of target we are below where we would like to be for 2015, although overall progress on the measure is in line with our expectations and puts our 2018 target within reach.

 

 

176  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 20152016 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  181


Risk review

Supervision and regulation

                

 

 

Supervision of the Group

The Group’s operations, including its overseas offices, subsidiaries and associates, are subject to a significant body of rules and regulations that are a condition for authorisation to conduct banking and financial services business. These apply to business operations, affectimpact financial returns and include reserve and reporting requirements and prudential and conduct of business regulations. These requirements are set by the relevant central banks and regulatory authorities that authorise, regulate and supervise the Group in the jurisdictions in which it operates. The requirements generally reflect global standards developed by, amongamongst others, the Basel Committee on Banking Supervision (BCBS) and, the International Organization of Securities Commissions.Commissions (IOSCO) and the Financial Stability Board (FSB). They also reflect requirements imposed directly by, or derived from, EU legislation. Various bodies, such as central banks, also create voluntary Codes of Conduct which affect the way the Group does business.

Regulatory developments impact the Group globally. We focus particularly on EU, UK and US regulation due to the location of Barclays’ principal areas of business. Regulations elsewhere will affect Barclays due to the location of its branches, subsidiaries and, in some cases, clients.

The Group and certain of its members are subject to supervisory stress testing exercises in a number of jurisdictions. These exercises currently include the programmes of the Bank of England (BoE), the European Banking Authority (EBA), the Federal Deposit Insurance Corporation (FDIC), the Board of Governors of the Federal Reserve System (FRB) and the South African Reserve Bank (SARB). These exercises are designed to assess the resilience of banks to adverse economic or financial developments and ensure that they have robust, forward-looking capital planning processes that account for the risks associated with their business profile. Assessment by regulators is on both a quantitative and qualitative basis, the latter focusing on the Group’s data provision, stress testing capability and internal management processes and controls. Failure to meet requirements of regulatory stress tests, or the failure by regulators to approve the stress test results and capital plans of the Group or its members subject to these exercises, could result in the Group or certain of its members being required to enhance its capital position or limit capital distributions, to any external holders of its equity or capital or within the Group. In 2016 Barclays and certain of its subsidiaries completed stress testing pursuant to the requirements of the BoE, EBA and SARB. Barclays was not required to submit revised plans as a result of these tests. Further details of Barclays capital requirements are set out below under ‘Prudential Developments’.

Supervision in the EU

Financial regulation in the UK is to a significant degree shaped and influenced by EU legislation. This provides the structure of the European Single Market, an important feature of which is the framework for the regulation of authorised firms in the EU. This framework is designed to enable a credit institution or investment firm authorised in one EU member state to conduct banking or investment business in another member state through the establishment of branches or by the provision of services on a cross-border basis without the need for local authorisation. Barclays’ operations in Europe are authorised and regulated by a combination of both home and host regulators. The impact of the UK’s departure from the EU in this respect and, more broadly, its impact on the UK domestic regulatory framework, is yet to be determined. See the Risk Factor entitled ‘EU referendum’, which discusses the potential impact of the UK’s departure from the EU in more detail.

In the UK, the BoE has responsibility for monitoring the UK financial system as a whole. Theday-to-day regulation and supervision of the Group is divided between the PRA – which is established as part of the Bank of England –Prudential Regulation Authority (PRA) and the Financial Conduct Authority (FCA).

In addition, the Financial Policy Committee (FPC) of the BoE has significant influence on the prudential requirements that may be imposed on the banking system through its powers of direction and recommendation. The FPC has direction powers over leverage ratios and sectoral capital requirements, which it sets in relation to exposures to specific sectors judged to pose a risk to the financial system as a whole and which apply to all UK banks and building societies generally, rather than to the Group specifically. The government has also made the FPC responsible for the Basel III countercyclical capital buffer, introduced in the EU under the CRD and CRR (collectively known as CRD IV).

The Financial Services and Markets Act 2000 (as amended)(FSMA) remains the principal statute under which financial institutions are regulated in the UK. Barclays Bank PLC is authorised under FSMA to carry on a range of regulated activities within the UK. It is also authorised and subject to solo and consolidated prudential supervision by the PRA and subject to conduct regulation and supervision by the FCA. Barclays Bank PLC’s Italian and French branches are also subject to direct supervision by the European Central Bank (ECB).

In its role as supervisor, the PRA seeks to maintain the safety and soundness of financial institutions with the aim of strengthening, but not guaranteeing, the protection of customers and the financial system. The PRA’s continuing supervision of financial institutions is conducted through a variety of regulatory tools, including the collection of information by way of prudential returns, reports obtained from skilled persons, visits to firms and regular meetings with management to discuss issues such as performance, risk management, conduct and culture and strategy.

The regulation and supervision of market conduct matters is the responsibility of the FCA. FCAThe FCA’s regulation of the UK firms in the Group is carried out through a combination of continuous assessment;assessment, regular thematic and project work based on the FCA’s sector assessments, which analyse the different areas of the market and the risks that may lie ahead; and responding to crystallised risks, seeking to ensure remediation as appropriate.

Global regulatory developments

Regulatory change continues to affect all large financial institutions; globally notably through the G20, Financial Stability Board (FSB) and Basel Committee on Banking Supervision (BCBS), regionally through the EU and nationally, especially in the UK and US. Further changes to prudential requirements and further refinements to the definitions of capital and liquid assets may affect the Group’s planned activities and could increase costs and contribute to adverse impacts on the Group’s earnings. Similarly, increased requirements in relation to capital markets activities and to market conduct requirements may affect the Group’s planned activities and could increase costs and thereby contribute to adverse impacts on the Group’s earnings.

The programme of reform of the global regulatory framework previously agreed by G20 Heads of Government in April 2009 has continued to be taken forward throughout 2015 and into 2016.

The FSB has been designated by the G20 as the body responsible for co-ordinating the delivery of the global reform programme in relation to the financial services industry. It has focused particularly on the risks posed by systemically important financial institutions. In 2011, G20 Heads of Government adopted FSB proposals to reform the regulation of Global Systematically Important Financial Institutions (G-SIFIs), including Global Systematically Important Banks (G-SIBs). A key element of this programme is that G-SIFIs should be capable of being resolved without recourse to taxpayer support. Barclays has been designated a G-SIB by the FSB. G-SIBs are subject to a number of requirements, including additional loss absorption capacity above that required by Basel III standards (see below). The surcharges rise in increments from 1% to 2.5% of risk weighted assets (with an empty category of 3.5% for institutions that increase the extent of the systemic risk they pose which is intended to discourage institutions from developing their business in a way that heightens their systemic nature). This additional buffer must be met with common equity.

In its November 2015 list of G-SIBs, the FSB confirmed Barclays position in a category that requires it to meet a 2% surcharge. The additional loss absorbency requirements apply to those financial institutions identified in November 2014 as G-SIBs and will be phased in starting from January 2016, with full implementation due to have taken place by January 2019. G-SIBs have also been required to meet higher supervisory expectations for data aggregation capabilities since 1 January 2016. In the EU the requirements for a systemic risk buffer have been implemented through mechanisms under CRD IV.

The BCBS issued the final guidelines on Basel III capital and liquidity standards in June 2011, with revisions to counterparty credit risk in July and November 2011. Regulatory liquidity revisions were agreed in January 2013 to the definitions of high quality liquid assets and net cash outflows for the purpose of calculating the Liquidity Coverage Ratio, as well as establishing a timetable for phasing in the standard from January 2016. The requirements of Basel III as a whole are subject to a number of transitional provisions that run to the end of 2018. The Group is, however, primarily subject to the EU’s implementation of the Basel III standard through CRD IV (see below).

The BCBS also maintains a number of active workstreams that will affect the Group. In January 2016, the BCBS endorsed a new market risk framework, including rules made as a result of its fundamental review of the trading book, which will take effect in 2019. The Committee also continues to focus on the consistency of risk weighting of assets and explaining the variations between banks. This includes revisions to the standardised rules for credit risk, counterparty credit risk, CVA volatility risk and operational risk. The Committee is also considering whether to limit the use of internal models in certain areas (for example, removing the Advanced Measurement Approach for operational risk) and applying RWA floors based on the standardised approaches. The final standards for measuring and controlling large exposures were published by the Basel Committee in April 2014 to take effect in 2019. Also in April 2014, the Basel Committee published the final standard for calculating regulatory capital for banks’ exposure to Central Counterparties (CCPs). In conjunction with the International Organization of Securities Commissions, the BCBS published a revised version of the framework for margin requirements for non-centrally cleared derivatives in March 2015, which recommends the phasing in of requirements for initial and variation margin from 1 September 2016.

In November 2015 the FSB finalised its proposals to enhance the loss absorbing capacity of G-SIBs to ensure that there is sufficient loss absorbing and recapitalisation capacity available in resolution to implement an orderly resolution which minimises the impact on financial stability, ensures the continuity of critical functions and avoids exposing taxpayers to losses. To this end, the FSB has set a new minimum requirement for ‘Total Loss Absorbing Capacity’ (TLAC). From 1 January 2019, the FSB will expect Barclays and other G-SIBs to meet a minimum TLAC requirement of 16% of the risk weighted assets of their respective resolution groups, rising to 18% from 1 January 2022. From that time, G-SIBs will also be expected to hold TLAC equivalent to at least 6% of the Basel III leverage ratio denominator, rising to 6.75% from 1 January 2022. The BCBS is also consulting on the capital treatment of banks’ TLAC holdings from other issuers.

Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  177


Also in November 2015, Barclays re-adhered to a protocol which was developed by the International Swaps and Derivatives Association (ISDA) in coordination with the FSB to support cross-border resolution and reduce systemic risk. By re-adhering to this protocol Barclays is able, in ISDA Master Agreements and related credit support agreements, as well as certain repo and stock lending agreements, entered into with other adherents, to opt in to different resolution regimes such that cross-default and direct default rights that would otherwise arise under the terms of such agreements would be stayed temporarily (and in some circumstances overridden) on the resolution of one of the parties.

Influence of European legislation

Financial regulation in the UK is to a significant degree shaped and influenced by EU legislation. This provides the structure of the European Single Market, an important feature of which is the framework for the regulation of authorised firms. This framework is designed to enable a credit institution or investment firm authorised in one EU member state to conduct banking or investment business through the establishment of branches or by the provision of services on a cross-border basis in other member states without the need for local authorisation. Barclays’ operations in Europe are authorised and regulated by a combination of both home and host regulators.

EU developments

The EU continues to develop its regulatory structure in response to the financial and Eurozone crises. At the December 2012 meeting of EU Finance Ministers it was agreed to establish a single supervisory mechanism within the Eurozone. The European Central Bank (ECB) has had responsibility for the supervision of the most significant credit institutions, financial holding companies or mixed financial holding companies within the Eurozone since November 2014. The ECB can also extend its supervision to institutions of significant relevance that have established subsidiaries in more than one participating member state and with significant cross-border assets or liabilities.

Notwithstanding the new responsibilities of the ECB, the European Banking Authority (EBA), along with the other European Supervisory Authorities, remains charged with the development of a single rulebook for the EU as a whole and with enhancing co-operation between national supervisory authorities. The European Securities Markets Authority (ESMA) has a similar role in relation to the capital markets and to banks and other firms doing investment and capital markets business. The progressive reduction of national discretion on the part of national regulatory authorities within the EU may lead to the elimination of prudential arrangements that have been agreed with those authorities. This may serve to increase or decrease the amount of capital and other resources that the Group is required to hold. The overall effect is not clear and may only become evident over a number of years. The EBA and ESMA each have the power to mediate between and override national authorities under certain circumstances.

Responsibility for day-to-day supervision remains with national authorities and for banks, like Barclays Bank PLC, that are incorporated in countries that will not participate in the single supervisory mechanism, is expected to remain so. Barclays Bank PLC Italian and French branches are, however, also subject to direct supervision by the ECB.

Basel III and the capital surcharge for G-SIBs have been, or will be, implemented in the EU by CRD IV. The provisions of CRD IV either entered into force automatically on, or had to be implemented in member states by, 1 January 2014. Much of the ongoing and outstanding implementation is expected to be done through binding technical standards being developed by the EBA, that are intended to ensure a harmonised application of rules through the EU, some of which are still in the process of being developed and adopted.

A significant addition to the EU legislative framework for financial institutions has been the Bank Recovery and Resolution Directive (BRRD) which establishes a framework for the recovery and resolution of EU credit institutions and investment firms. The BRRD is intended to implement many of the requirements of the FSB’s ‘Key Attributes of Effective Resolution Regimes for Financial Institutions’. The BRRD entered into force in July 2014. All of the provisions of the BRRD had to be implemented in the law of EU Member States by 1 January 2015 except for those relating to bail-in which had to be implemented in Member States by 1 January 2016.

As implemented, the BRRD gives resolution authorities powers to intervene in and resolve a financial institution that is no longer viable, including through the transfers of business and, when implemented in relevant member states, creditor financed recapitalisation (bail-in within resolution) that allocates losses to shareholders and unsecured and uninsured creditors in their order of seniority, at a regulator determined point of non-viability that may precede insolvency. The concept of bail-in will affect the rights of unsecured creditors subject to any bail-in in the event of a resolution of a failing bank.

The BRRD also requires competent authorities to impose a ‘Minimum Requirement for own funds and Eligible Liabilities’ (‘MREL’) on financial institutions to facilitate the effective exercise of the bail-in tool referred to above. This will have to be co-ordinated with the FSB’s TLAC standards mentioned above and, as set out in more detail below, the BoE has stated that MREL for UK G-SIBs will be set consistently with those standards. The BRRD also requires the development of recovery and resolution plans at group and firm level. The BRRD sets out a harmonised set of resolution tools across the EU, including the power to impose a temporary stay on the rights of creditors to terminate, accelerate or close out contracts. There are also significant funding implications for financial institutions, which include the establishment of pre-funded resolution funds of 1% of covered deposits to be built up over 10 years, although the proposal envisages that national deposit guarantee schemes may be able to fulfil this function (see directly below). The UK Government uses the bank levy to meet the ex ante funding requirements set out in the BRRD.

The Directive on Deposit Guarantee Schemes provides that national deposit guarantee schemes should be pre-funded, with the funds to be raised over a number of years. The funds of national deposit guarantee scheme are to total 0.8% of the covered deposits of its members by the date 10 years after the entry into force of the recast directive. In the UK, the pre-funding requirements of the UK Financial Services Compensation Scheme are met through the bank levy.

In October 2012, a group of experts set up by the European Commission to consider possible reform of the structure of the EU banking sector presented its report. Among other things, the Group recommended the mandatory separation of proprietary trading and other high risk trading activities from other banking activities. The European Commission issued proposals to implement these recommendations in January 2014. These proposals would apply to institutions that have been identified as G-SIBs under CRD IV and envisage, among other things: (i) a ban on proprietary trading in financial instruments and commodities; and (ii) rules on the economic, legal, governance, and operational links between the separated trading entity and the rest of the banking group.

Contemporaneously, the European Commission also adopted proposals to enhance the transparency of shadow banking, especially in relation to securities financing transactions. These proposals have still yet to be considered formally by the European Parliament and by the Council.

178  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F


Risk review

Supervision and regulation

The European Market Infrastructure Regulation (EMIR) has introduced requirements designed to improve transparency and reduce the risks associated with the derivatives market, some of which are still to be brought in. When it is fully in force, EMIR will require entities that enter into any form of derivative contract, including interest rate, foreign exchange, equity, credit and commodity derivatives: to report specified details of every derivative contract that they enter to a trade repository (this requirement is already in force); implement risk management standards for all bilateral over-the-counter derivatives trades that are not cleared by a central counterparty (this requirement is also partly in force, but requirements relating to the mandatory provision of margin are to be phased in from 2016); and clear, through a central counterparty, over-the-counter derivatives, but only where those derivatives are subject to a mandatory clearing obligation. The obligation to clear derivatives will only apply to certain counterparties and specified types of derivative. EMIR has potential operational and financial impacts on the Group, including by imposing collateral requirements.

CRD IV aims to complement EMIR by applying higher capital requirements for bilateral, uncleared over-the-counter derivative trades. Lower capital requirements for cleared derivatives trades are only available if the central counterparty through which the trade is cleared is recognised as a ‘qualifying central counterparty’ which has been authorised or recognised under EMIR (in accordance with binding technical standards).

Amendments to the Markets in Financial Instruments Directive (known as MiFID II) came into force in July 2014. These amendments take the form of a directive and a regulation, and will affect many of the investment markets in which the Group operates and the instruments in which it trades, and how it transacts with market counterparties and other customers. Changes to the MiFID regime include the introduction of a new type of trading venue (the organised trading facility), to capture non-equity trading that falls outside the current regime.

Investor protections have been strengthened, and new curbs imposed on high frequency and commodity trading. Pre- and post-trade transparency has been increased, and a new regime for third country firms introduced. The changes also include new requirements for non-discriminatory access to trading venues, central counterparties, and benchmarks, and harmonised supervisory powers and sanctions across the EU. While the final implementation date of MiFID II remains subject to discussions between various European bodies, member states will not have to apply the provisions of MiFID II until 3 January 2017 at the earliest, although recent communications by several European bodies has suggested that this date might be delayed by 12 months. Many of the provisions of MiFID II and its accompanying regulation will be implemented by means of technical standards to be drafted by ESMA. While ESMA has published its final report in respect of some of these technical standards, the impacts on the Group will not be clear until all of the relevant technical standards have been finalised and adopted.

Regulation in the UK

Recent developments in banking law and regulation in the UK have been dominated by legislation designed to ring-fence the retail and SME deposit-taking business of large banks. The content and the impact of this legislation are outlined above. The Banking Reform Act put in place a framework for this ring-fencing and secondary legislation passed in 2014 elaborated on the operation and application of the ring-fence. Ring-fencing rules have been consulted on by the PRA and the FCA and it is expected that final rules will be published during the first half of 2016 which will further determine how ring-fenced banks will be permitted to operate.

In addition to, and complementing a EU-wide stress testing exercise conducted on a sample of EU banks by the EBA, and in response to recommendations from the FPC, the BoE conducted a variant of the EU-wide stress test in 2014. The ‘UK variant’ test explored particular UK macroeconomic vulnerabilities facing the UK banking system. Key parameters of the test – including the design of the UK elements of the stress scenario – were designed by the BoE and approved by the FPC and the PRA. The BoE published key elements of its 2014 stress test in March 2015 and the results of its 2015 stress test on 1 December 2015. The FPC determined that no macroprudential actions on bank capital were required in response to the results of either test.ahead.

Both the PRA and the FCA have continued to develop and apply a more assertive approach to supervision and the application of existing standards. This may include application of standards that either anticipate or go beyond requirements established by global or EU standards, whether in relation to capital, leverage and liquidity, resolvability and resolution or matters of conduct. The PRA has implemented the European capital regime under CRD IV in the UK and has required banks to meet a 4.5% Pillar 1 CET1 requirement since 1 January 2015, which is up from 4% in 2014. The PRA has expected Barclays, in common with six other major UK banks and building societies, to meet a 7% CET1 ratio at the level of the consolidated Group since 1 January 2016.

The FCA has retained an approach to enforcement based on credible deterrence that has continued to seeseen significant growth in the size of regulatory fines. The approach appears to be trending towards a more US model of enforcement including the use of Deferred Prosecution Agreements, vigorous enforcement of criminal and regulatory breaches, heightened fines and proposed measures related to increased corporate criminal liability and the failure to prevent the facilitation of tax evasion.

The FCA has focused strongly on conduct risk and on customer outcomes and will continue to do so. This has included a focus on the design and operation of products, the behaviour of customers and the operation of markets. This may impactaffect both the incidence of conduct costs and increase the cost of remediation. The FCA has also increasingly focused on individual accountability within firms, as illustrated by the Senior Managers’ Regime and Certification Regime detailed below.

On 1Supervision in the US

The supervisory framework of Barclays within the US is set out below in the section entitled ‘Regulation in the United States’.

Supervision in South Africa

In South Africa, BAGLs operations are supervised and regulated by the South African Reserve Bank (SARB), the Financial Services Board (SAFSB) as well as ancillary regulators including, amongst others, the Financial Intelligence Centre. SARB oversees the banking industry and follows a risk-based approach to supervision, whilst the SAFSB overseesnon-banking financial services such as insurance and investment businesses. The National Credit Regulator regulates consumer credit and the National Consumer Commission is responsible for other aspects of consumer protection not regulated under the jurisdiction of the SAFSB. It is intended that regulatory responsibilities in South Africa will in future be divided between the SARB, which will be responsible for prudential regulation, and the SAFSB, which will be responsible for matters of market conduct. The proposed ‘twin peaks’ legislation is currently going through the consultation phase of the Parliamentary process to enact the legislation. Barclays’ and BAGL’s operations in other African countries are primarily supervised and regulated by the central banks in the jurisdictions where Barclays or BAGL (as relevant) has a banking presence. In some African countries, the conduct of Barclays’ and BAGL’s operations and thenon-banking activities are also regulated by financial market authorities.

182  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2016 Annual Report on Form 20-F


Risk review

Supervision and regulation

Supervision in Asia Pacific

Barclays’ operations in Asia Pacific are supervised and regulated by a broad range of national regulators including: the Japan Financial Services Agency, the Bank of Japan, the Hong Kong Monetary Authority, the Hong Kong Securities and Futures Commission, the Monetary Authority of Singapore, the Reserve Bank of India, the Securities and Exchange Board of India and the People’s Bank of China, China’s State Administration of Foreign Exchange and the China Banking Regulatory Commission. Such supervision and regulation extends to activities conducted through branches of Barclays Bank PLC in the Asia Pacific region as well as subsidiaries of the Group.

Global regulatory developments

Regulatory change continues to affect all large financial institutions. Such change emanates from: global institutions such as the G20, FSB, IOSCO and BCBS; the European Union regionally; and national regulators, especially in the UK and US. 2016 gave rise to significant political changes in these markets, which have increased the level of regulatory and supervisory uncertainty faced by the Group and the financial markets more broadly. For more information, please see the Risk Factor entitled ‘Business conditions, general economy and geopolitical issues’.

Further changes to financial services regulations impacting Barclays may affect the Group’s planned activities and could increase costs and contribute to adverse impacts on the Group’s earnings.

The programme of reform of the global regulatory framework previously agreed by G20 Heads of Government in April 20142009 has continued to be taken forward throughout 2016. The G20 continues to monitor emerging risks and vulnerabilities in the FCA took overfinancial system and has stated that it will take action to address them if necessary.

The FSB has been designated by the G20 as the body responsible forco-ordinating the delivery of the global reform programme in relation to the financial services industry. It has focused particularly on the risks posed by systemically important financial institutions. In 2011, G20 Heads of Government adopted FSB proposals to reform the regulation of consumer creditglobal systematically important financial institutions(G-SIFIs), including global systematically important banks(G-SIBs), such as Barclays.

Regulatory developments in the UK. Thisfinancial services industry can broadly be categorised as follows: (a) prudential developments; (b) recovery and resolution developments, a key aspect of which is to ensure thatG-SIFIs are capable of being resolved without recourse to taxpayer support; (c) structural reform developments; (d) market infrastructure developments, aimed at enhancing client protection, financial stability and market integrity; and (e) conduct, culture and consumer protection developments.

Regulation in the EU and the UK

(a) Prudential developments

The ‘Basel III’ capital and liquidity standards, defined by BCBS, are implemented in EU law through CRD IV. The provisions of CRD IV either applied from, or had to be implemented in EU Member States by, 1 January 2014. In addition, the PRA has ledexpected Barclays, in common with other major UK banks and building societies, to meet a 7% CET1 ratio at the level of the consolidated group since 1 January 2016.

G-SIBs are subject to a regulatory regime for consumer credit whichnumber of additional prudential requirements, including the requirement to hold additional loss absorbing capacity and additional capital buffers above the level required by Basel III standards. The level ofG-SIB buffer is considerably more intensive and intrusive than was the case when consumer credit was regulatedset by the OfficeFSB according to a bank’s systemic importance and can range from 1% to 3.5% of Fair Trading.risk-weighted assets. TheG-SIB buffer must be met with common equity.

In 2014November 2016, the FSB published an update to its list ofG-SIBs, reducing theG-SIB buffer that Barclays is required to hold from 2% to 1.5%, effective from January 2018. The additionalG-SIB buffer began to be phased in from January 2016, from whenG-SIBs were required to meet 25% of their designated buffer. This will increase to 50% in 2017, 75% in 2018 and 100% in January 2019.G-SIBs have also been required to meet higher supervisory expectations for data aggregation capabilities since 1 January 2016. Barclays is also subject to, among other buffers, a countercyclical capital buffer (CCyB) based on rates determined by the regulatory authorities in each jurisdiction in which

Barclays maintains exposures. These rates may vary in either direction – for example, in July 2016, the FPC published a policy statement directing the PRA to reduce the UK CCyB rate from 0.5% to 0% of banks’ UK exposures with immediate effect, which was subsequently adopted by the PRA. In November 2016, the FPC reaffirmed that it expects to maintain a UK CCyB rate at 0% until at least June 2017, absent any material change in the economic outlook. The systemic risk buffer is expected to be set by the PRA for the first time in early 2019.

The BCBS maintains a number of active workstreams that will affect the Group. In January 2016, the BCBS endorsed a new market risk framework, including rules made as a result of its fundamental review of the trading book, to take effect in 2019. The BCBS also continues to focus on the consistency of risk weighting of assets and on reducing the variations of approaches to risk weightings between banks. This includes revisions to the standardised rules for credit risk, CVA volatility risk and operational risk. The BCBS is also considering whether to limit the use of internal models in certain areas (for example, removing the Advanced Measurement Approach for operational risk) and to apply capital floors based on the standardised approaches. The BCBS has also recently published final standards on the Basel III securitisation framework, interest rate risk in the banking book and minimum capital requirements for market risk. The final standards for measuring and controlling large exposures were published by the BCBS in April 2014 to take effect in 2019. In November 2016 the European Commission adopted a proposal (commonly referred to as CRD V) to begin the legislative process for introducing these standards within the EU, with legislation expected to be finalised in late 2017 or early 2018. These proposals, if implemented in their current form would, among other things, overhaul existing rules relating to standardised and advanced market risk and the FCA consulted on new accountability mechanismsrules governing the inclusion of positions in the regulatory trading book. The proposals would also enhance rules for individuals workingcounterparty credit risk, strengthen requirements relating to leverage and large exposures and introduce a net stable funding ratio, requiring banks to ensure that they hold reliable sources of funds in banks, includingexcess of their required amount of stable funding over a one year period. CRD V also proposes to require thatnon-EU parent undertakings with two or more subsidiary firms established in the introduction of a new ‘Senior Managers Regime’ (aimed at a limited number of individuals with senior management responsibilities within a firm)EU establish an intermediate parent undertaking, authorised and a ‘Certification Regime’ (aimed at assessingestablished in, and monitoring the fitness and propriety of a wider range of employees who could pose a risk of significant harmsubject to the firm or anysupervision of, an EU Member State. This requirement would apply tonon-EU groups that have been identified asnon-EU Global Systemically Important Institutions(G-SIIs) under CRD IV (as amended) and to groups with entities in the EU with total assets of at least30bn. If implemented as proposed, Barclays could be required to establish such a holding company in respect of its customers). This representsEU operations following the implementationUK’s departure from the EU.

In January 2017, the BCBS announced that its finalisation of recommendations made byreforms to Basel III had been delayed. The BCBS is now expected to issue updated standards on the Parliamentarycalculation of operational risk, the standardised framework for credit risk, restrictions on the use of internal models (including the application of RWA floors based on standardised approaches), the leverage ratio (including a leverage ratio buffer forG-SIBs) and an output floor based on a standardised approach, later in 2017. As these measures will require EU and domestic legislation to be implemented, it is not clear when they will become effective.

IFRS9 will be implemented in the European Union from 1 January 2018. In October 2016, the Basel Committee issued two documents on Banking Standardsthe treatment of accounting provisions in this area. The FCA and PRA have published final rules on most aspectsthe regulatory framework, to take account of the Senior Managers Regimefuture move to expected credit loss provisioning under IFRS and Financial Accounting Standards Board (FASB) standards. One paper considered transitional arrangements tophase-inthe regime will enter into force on 7 March 2016.

Resolution of UK banking groups

The Banking Act 2009 (the Banking Act) provides a regime to allow the BoE (or, in certain circumstances, HM Treasury) to resolve failing banks in the UK, in consultation with the PRA and HM Treasury as appropriate. Under the Banking Act the BoE is given powers to: (i) make share transfer instruments pursuant to which all or someimmediate capital impact of the securities issued by a UK bank may be transferrednew provisioning standards, while the other discussed more fundamental changes to a commercial purchaser; (ii) the powerrecognition of provisions in regulatory capital and changes to transferthe risk weighting framework. The European Commission’s CRR2 proposal also proposed transitional arrangements. The regulatory capital impact of IFRS9 on the group will depend on the timing and final form of all or somethese initiatives.

(b) Recovery and Resolution developments

An important component of the property, rightsEU legislative framework is the 2014 Bank Recovery and liabilitiesResolution Directive (BRRD) which establishes a framework for the recovery and resolution of aEU credit institutions and investment firms. The UK bank to a commercial purchaser or a ‘bridge bank’, which is a company wholly owned byimplemented the BoE; and (iii) transferBRRD through the impaired or problem assets of the relevant financial institution to an asset management vehicle to allow them to be managed over time. In addition, under the Banking Act, HM Treasury is given the power to take a bank into temporary public ownership by making one or more share transfer orders in which the transferee is a nominee of HM Treasury or a company wholly owned by HM Treasury. A share transfer instrument or share transfer order can extend to a wide range of securities including shares and bonds issued by a UK bank (including Barclays Bank PLC) or its holding company (Barclays PLC) and warrants for such shares and bonds. Certain of these powers also extend to companies within the same group as a UK bank.Financial

 

 

  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 20152016 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  179183


                

                

                    

 

 

TheServices (Banking Reform) Act 2013 (the Banking Reform Act), which amended the Banking Act also gives2009.

Pursuant to the Banking Act, UK resolution authorities are empowered to intervene in and resolve a UK financial institution that is no longer viable. Pursuant to these laws, the BoE (in consultation with the PRA and HM Treasury as appropriate) has several stabilisation options where a banking institution is failing or likely to fail: (i) transfer some or all of the securities of the bank to a commercial purchaser; (ii) transfer some or all of the property, rights and liabilities of the bank to a ‘bridge bank’ wholly owned by the BoE or to a commercial purchaser; (iii) transfer the impaired or problem assets to an asset management vehicle to allow them to be managed over time; (iv) cancel or reduce certain liabilities of the institution or convert liabilities to equity to absorb losses and recapitalise the institution and (v) in the case of a holding company, transfer the banking institution into temporary public ownership. In addition, the BoE may apply for a court insolvency order in order to wind up or liquidate the institution or to put the institution into special administration. When exercising any of its stabilisation powers, the BoE must generally provide that shareholders bear first losses, followed by creditors in accordance with the priority of their claims under normal insolvency proceedings.

In order to enable the exercise of its stabilisation powers, the BoE may impose a temporary stay on the rights of creditors to terminate, accelerate or close out contracts, and in some cases to override events of default or termination rights that might otherwise be invoked as a result of the exercise of thea resolution powers. The Banking Act powers apply regardless of any contractual restrictions and compensation that may be payable in the context of both share transfer orders and property appropriation.

The resolution powers described above were supplemented with effect from 31 December 2014 by a ‘bail-in’ power introduced under the Banking Reform Act. This power allows for the cancellation or modification of one or more liabilities (with the exception of ‘excluded liabilities’).

Excluded liabilities include (among other things): deposits protected under a deposit insurance scheme, secured liabilities (to the extent that they are secured), client assets and assets with an original maturity of less than seven days which are owed to a credit institution or investment firm. The BoE’s new bail-in powers were brought into force with effect from 1 January 2015.

action. In a consultation paper published in 2015, the BoE indicated that during 2016 it would notify banks of the final MREL requirements which would apply to them from 1 January 2020, when the regime will become fully effective. The Bank intends to apply MREL standards on a transitional basis from 2016 until that time. As noted above, during the consultation process, the BoE announced that it intends to set MREL for UK G-SIBs consistently with the FSB’s TLAC standards, and will not set any TLAC requirement for a UK G-SIB which is separate from or different to its MREL.

Since 20 February 2015, UK banks and their parents have also been required to include in debt instruments, issued by them under the law of a non-EEA country, terms under which the relevant creditor recognises that the liability is subject to the exercise of bail-in powers by the BoE. Similar terms will be required in contracts governing other liabilities of UK banks and their parents if those liabilities are governed by the law of a non-EEA country, are not excluded liabilities underaddition, the Banking Act 2009 and are issued, entered into or arise after 31 December 2015. The PRA has made rules and will be consulting further in relation to contractual recognition of bail-in of liabilities governed by third country laws.

The Banking Act also gives the BoE the power to override, vary, or impose conditions or contractual obligations between a UK bank, its holding company and its group undertakings, in order to enable any transferee or successor bank to operate effectively after any of the resolution tools have been applied. There is also power for HM Treasury to amend the law (excluding provisions made by or under the Banking Act) for the purpose of enabling it to use the regime powers effectively, potentially with retrospective effect.

The Financial Services Act 2010, among other things, requires the UK regulators to make rules about remuneration and to require regulated firms to have a remuneration policy that is consistent with effective risk management. The Banking Act also amended FSMApowers apply regardless of any contractual restrictions and compensation that may be payable. In July 2016 the PRA issued final rules on ensuring operational continuity in resolution. The rules will apply from 1 January 2019 and will require banks to allowensure that their operational structures facilitate effective recovery and resolution planning and the FCAcontinued provision of functions critical to makethe economy in a resolution scenario.

In July 2016 the PRA issued final rules requiring firmson ensuring operational continuity in resolution. The rules will apply from 1 January 2019 and will require banks to operateensure that their operational structures facilitate effective recovery and resolution planning and the continued provision of fucntions ciritcal to the economy in a collective consumer redress schemeresolution scenario.

The BRRD requires EU member states to deal with casesestablishpre-funded resolution funds of widespread failure1% of covered deposits to be built up by regulated firms31 December 2024. The UK government uses the Bank Levy to meet regulatorythis ex ante funding requirements, as well as the ex post contributions that would be required were theex-ante contributions not to cover costs or other expenses incurred by use of the resolution funds.

Separately, Financial Services Compensation Scheme (FSCS), a deposit guarantee scheme established under the EU Deposit Guarantee Schemes Directive and Investor Schemes Directive, is funded through fees levied on participant firms, including Barclays. The FSCS operates when an authorised firm is unable or is likely to be unable to meet claims made against it by its customers because of its financial circumstances. Most insured deposits made with branches of Barclays Bank PLC within the EEA are covered by the FSCS. Most claims made in respect of investment business will also be protected claims if the business was carried on from the UK or from a branch of the bank or investment firm in question in another EEA member state. Deposits covered by the FSCS are preferred in an insolvency of the bank.

In the event that the HM Treasury significantly increases the Bank Levy applicable to Barclays, or the FSCS significantly increases the fees levied on Barclays by virtue of its participation in the FSCS, the associated costs to the Group may have created consumer detriment.a material impact on the Group’s results.

The BRRD also requires competent authorities to impose a ‘Minimum Requirement for own funds and Eligible Liabilities’ (‘MREL’) on financial institutions to facilitate the effective exercise of thebail-in tool referred to above. The EU proposes that forG-SIBs, such as Barclays, MREL should be set in accordance with the FSB Total Loss Absorbing Capital (TLAC) standard, discussed further below.

In November 2015 the FSB finalised its proposals to enhance the loss-absorbing capacity ofG-SIBs to ensure that there is sufficient loss-absorbing and recapitalisation capacity available in resolution to implement an orderly resolution which minimises the impact on financial stability, ensures the continuity of critical functions and avoids exposing taxpayers to losses. To this end, the FSB has set a new minimum requirement for ‘total loss absorbing capacity’ (TLAC). The EU has proposed to implement the TLAC standard via the MREL requirement and the European Commission has proposed amendments in its CRD V proposal to achieve this. As the proposals remain in draft it is uncertain what the final requirements and timing will be. The statement of policy confirmed that the BoE will set MREL for UKG-SIBs as necessary to implement the TLAC standard and that institution or group-specific MREL requirements will depend on the preferred resolution strategy for that institution or group. The MREL will be phased in from 1 January 2019 and will be fully implemented by 1 January 2022, at which timeG-SIBs with resolution entities incorporated in the UK, including Barclays, will be required to meet a MREL equivalent to the higher of (i) two times the sum of its Pillar 1 and Pillar 2A requirements or (ii) the higher of two times its leverage ratio or 6.75% of leverage exposures. However, the PRA will review the MREL calibration by the end of 2020, including assessing the proposal for Pillar 2A recapitalisation which may drive a different 1 January 2022 MREL requirement than currently proposed. In addition, it is proposed that CET1 capital cannot be counted towards both MREL and the combined buffer requirement (CBR), meaning that the CBR will effectively be applied above both the Pillar 1 and Pillar 2A requirements relating to own funds and MREL, such that a failure to maintain sufficient other MREL resources could result in a breach of the CBR.

In October 2016, the BCBS also published its final standard on the prudential treatment of banks’ investments in TLAC instruments issued by other institutions, confirming that internationally active banks (bothG-SIBs andnon-G-SIBs) must deduct their holdings of TLAC instruments that do not otherwise qualify as regulatory capital from their own Tier 2 capital. Where the investing bank owns less than 10% of the issuing bank’s common shares, TLAC holdings are to be deducted from Tier 2 capital only to the extent that they exceed 10% of the investing bank’s common equity (or 5% fornon-regulatory capital TLAC holdings); below this threshold, holdings would instead be subjected to risk-weighting.G-SIBs may only apply risk-weighting tonon-regulatory capital TLAC holdings by the 5% threshold where those holdings are in the trading book and are sold within 20 business days.

In addition to the amendments proposed to align MREL forG-SIBs with the TLAC standard, in November 2016 the European Commission proposed a package of amendments to the BRRD, including to harmonise the priority ranking of unsecured debt instruments under national insolvency proceedings and to enhance the stabilisation tools by including a moratorium tool.

The PRA has made rules that require authorised firms to draw up recovery plans and resolution packs.packs, as required by the BRRD. Recovery plans are designed to outline credible recovery actions that authorised firms could implement in the event of severe stress in order to restore their business to a stable and sustainable condition. The resolution pack contains detailed information on the authorised firm in question which will be used to develop resolution strategies for that firm, assess its current level of resolvability against the strategy, and to inform work on identifying barriers to the implementation of operational resolution plans.

In additionthe UK, Recovery and Resolution Planning (RRP) work is considered part of continuing supervision. Removal of potential impediments to establishingan orderly resolution of the FPC, PRAGroup or one or more of its subsidiaries in considered as part of the BoE’s and FCA, the Financial Services Act 2012 among other things clarifies responsibilities between HM TreasuryPRA’s supervisory strategy for each firm, and the BoEPRA can require firms to make significant changes in order to enhance resolvability. Barclays currently provides the PRA with a Recovery Plan annually and with a Resolution Pack every other year.

184  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2016 Annual Report on Form 20-F


Risk review

Supervision and regulation

The BoE’s preferred approach for the resolution of the Group is abail-in strategy with a single point of entry through Barclays PLC. Under such a strategy, Barclays PLC’s subsidiaries would remain operational while Barclays PLC’s eligible liabilities would be written down or converted to equity in order to recapitalise the Group and allow for the continued provision of services and operations throughout the resolution. This strategy relies on Barclays PLC having issued sufficient loss-absorbing capacity to effectbail-in and recapitalise the Group should the need arise. As a result the Group is focusing on transitioning eligible loss absorbing capital from subsidiary level to Barclays PLC level.

(c) Structural reform developments

Recent developments in banking law and regulation in the eventUK have included legislation designed to ring-fence the retail and smaller deposit-taking businesses of large banks. The Banking Reform Act put in place a financial crisis by givingframework for this ring-fencing and secondary legislation passed in 2014 elaborated on the Chancelloroperation and application of the Exchequer powersring-fence. Ring-fencing rules have been published by the PRA further determining how ring-fenced banks will be permitted to direct the BoE where public funds are at risk and there is a serious threat to financial stability. The Financial Services Act 2012 also establishes the objectives and accountabilities of the FPC, PRA and FCA; amends the conditions which need to be metoperate. Further rules published by a firm before it can be authorised; gives the FPC, PRA and FCA additional powers, including powers of direction over unregulated parent undertakings (such as Barclays PLC) where this is necessary to ensure effective consolidated supervision of the Group; and gives the FCA a powerset out the disclosures thatnon-ring-fenced banks are required to make temporary product intervention rules for a maximum period of six months, if necessary without consultation. The Financial Services Act 2013 also created a new criminal offence relating to the making of a false or misleading statement, or the creation of a false or misleading impression, in connection with the setting of a benchmark.

Structural reform of banking groupsprospective customers that are individuals.

In additionrelation to providing forring-fencing in the bail-in stabilisation power referred to above,UK, FSMA, as amended by the Banking Reform Act, requires, amongamongst other things: (i)things, the separation of the retail and SMEsmaller-business deposit-taking activities of UK banks in the UK and branches of UK banks in the European Economic Area (EEA) into a legally distinct, operationally separate and economically independent entity, which will not be permitted to undertake a range of activities (so called ring-fencing); (ii) the increase of the loss absorbing capacity of. UK ring-fenced banks and large UK headquartered global systemically important banksbuilding societies will be required to levels higher thanhold CET1 capital in excess of that required under CRD IV from 2019. This requirement will be applied by the PRA on an institution specific basis according to a framework set out by the FPC. The implications of these requirements on Barclays are discussed in more detail in the Risk Factor entitled ‘Structural Reform’.

At European level, the European Commission issued proposals recommending the mandatory separation of proprietary trading and (iii) preferenceother high-risk trading activities from banking activities in January 2014.

These proposals would apply to deposits protected under the Financial Services Compensation Scheme if a bank enters insolvency.

The Banking Reform Act also implements key recommendations of the Parliamentary Commission on Banking Standards. Recommendationsinstitutions that have been implementedidentified asG-SIIs under CRD IV and envisage, amongst other things: (i) a ban on proprietary trading in financial instruments and commodities; and (ii) rules on the economic, legal, governance, and operational links between the trading entities and other banking group entities. The legislative proposal includes a derogation in respect of the separation of trading activities (but not the ban on proprietary trading) for Member States which had adopted similar measures before the date of its publication. The legislative proposal remains under consideration by the European Parliament and the Council of the EU.

(d) Market Infrastructure developments

The European Market Infrastructure Regulation (EMIR) has introduced requirements designed to improve transparency and reduce the risks associated with the derivatives market, some of which are still to be fully implemented. EMIR requires that certain entities that enter into derivative contracts: report such transactions; clear certain over the counter (OTC) transactions where mandated to do so; and implement risk mitigation standards in respect of uncleared OTC trades. The obligation to clear derivatives only applies to certain counterparties and specified types of derivative. In October 2016 the European Commission adopted a delegated regulation relating to the exchange of collateral, one of the risk mitigation techniques under EMIR. Provisions relating to initial margin will be phased in from 6 February 2017 until 1 September 2020. Provisions relating to variation margin applied on a phased basis from 4 February 2017. EMIR has potential operational and financial impacts on the Group, including by imposing collateral requirements.

CRD IV aims to complement EMIR by applying higher capital requirements for bilateral, unclearedover-the-counter derivative trades. Lower capital requirements for cleared derivatives trades are only available if the central counterparty through which the trade is cleared is recognised as a ‘qualifying central counterparty’ (QCCP) which has been authorised or recognised under EMIR (in accordance with binding technical standards). Higher capital requirements may apply to the Group following the UK’s departure from the EU if UK CCPs are not

regarded as QCCPs.

The amended Markets in Financial Instruments Directive and Markets in Financial Instruments Regulation (collectively referred to as MiFID II) is expected to apply from 3 January 2018. MiFID II will affect many of the investment markets in which the Group operates, the instruments in which it trades and the way it transacts with market counterparties and other customers. Changes introduced by MiFID II include: (i) the establishmentintroduction of a reserve powernew type of trading venue (the organised trading facility), capturingnon-equity trading that falls outside the current regime; and the expansion of the concept of, and requirements applicable to, firms which systematically trade against proprietary capital (systematic internalisers).

MiFID II also strengthens investor protections and imposes new curbs on high frequency and commodity trading. It also increasespre-and post-trade transparency and introduces a new regime for third country firms. MiFID II also includes new requirements relating tonon-discriminatory access to trading venues, central counterparties and benchmarks, and harmonised supervisory powers and sanctions across the EU.

The EU Benchmarks Regulation came into force in June 2016, with the majority of provisions intended to apply from January 2018. This Regulation applies to the administration, contribution of data to and use of benchmarks within the EU. Financial institutions within the EU will be prohibited from using benchmarks unless their administrators are authorised, registered or otherwise recognised in the EU. This may impact the ability of Barclays to use certain benchmarks.

In 2015 the European Commission launched work on establishing a Capital Markets Union (CMU) within the EU. The CMU aims to increase the availability ofnon-bank financing in the EU, deepen the single market for financial services and promote growth and financial stability. The Commission’s work on the CMU includes the development of a regulatory framework in order to enhance efficiencies in the cross-border environment for capital markets, as well as a review of existing legislation to determine instances in which such legislation should be modified. This work is likely to continue through 2017 and beyond and may result in changes to the EU regulatory framework in which the Group operates.

(e) Conduct, Culture and Consumer Protection developments

On 7 March 2016 the PRA and FCA introduced measures to enforce full separationincrease the individual accountability of UK banks under certain circumstances; (ii) the creation of a ‘senior manager’s’ regime for senior managers and other covered individuals in the banking sector. The new regime comprises the ‘Senior Managers Regime’, which applies to a limited number of individuals with senior management responsibilities within a firm, the ‘Certification Regime’, which is intended to assess and investment banking sectors to ensure better accountability for decisions made; (iii)monitor the establishmentfitness and proprietary of a criminal offencewider range of causingemployees who could pose a financial institutionrisk of significant harm to fail;the firm or its customers and (iv)conduct rules that individuals subject to either regime must comply with. From March 2017, the establishmentconduct rules will apply more widely to other staff of a regulator for payment systems.firms within scope of the regime.

The Financial Services Act 2010, amongst other things, requires the UK regulators to make rules about remuneration and to require regulated firms to have a remuneration policy that is consistent with effective risk management. The Banking Reform Act is primarily an enabling statute which provides HM Treasuryalso amended FSMA to allow the FCA to make rules requiring firms to operate a collective consumer redress scheme to deal with cases of widespread failure by regulated firms to meet regulatory requirements, that may have created consumer detriment.

Barclays has to comply with national data protection laws, governing the requisite powers to implement the policy underlying the legislation through secondary legislation. Secondary legislation relating to the ring-fencingcollection, use, and disclosure of banks has now been passed. Partspersonal data, in a majority of the secondary legislation became effective on 1 January 2015 andcountries in which it operates. From 25 May 2018 data protection laws throughout the rest will come into effect on 1 January 2019 by which date UK banksEU will be required to be compliant with the structural reform requirements. The PRA published ‘near final’ rules on the legal structure and governance of ring-fenced banks in May 2015 andreplaced by a consultation paper on post-ring-fencing prudential requirements and intra-group arrangements (among other things) in October 2015. PRA final rules are expected in 2016.

Compensation schemes

Banks, insurance companies and other financial institutions insingle General Data Protection Regulation (GDPR); the UK are subject to a single compensation scheme (the Financial Services Compensation Scheme – FSCS) which operates when an authorised firm is unable or is likely togovernment has confirmed the UK will adopt and apply the GDPR from May 2018. The impact across Barclays will be unable to meet claims made against it by its customers because of its financial circumstances. Most deposits made with branches of Barclays Bank PLCsignificant, affecting not only Group entities operating and processing personal data within the EEA are covered byEU but also those outside the FSCS. Most claims made in respectEU offering goods or services to, or monitoring individuals within the EU. The GDPR contains significant penalties for data protection breaches andnon-compliance, up to 4% of investment business will also be protected claims if the business was carried on from the UK or from a branch of the bank or investment firm in question in another EEA member state. The FSCS is funded by levies on authorised UK firms such as Barclays Bank PLC. In the event that the FSCS raises those funds more frequently or significantly increases the levies to be paid by firms, the associated costs to the Group may have a material impact on the Group’s results.global turnover.

 

 

180  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 20152016 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  185


Risk review

Supervision and regulation

                    

 

 

A number of recent developments have indicated a clear political and regulatory desire to make customer transactional account information more easily accessible to customers and parties providing services to them. One such example is the revised Payment Services Directive (PSD2), which came into force on 12 January 2016 and must be implemented by 13 January 2018. Shortly after the finalisation of PSD2, the Open Banking Working Group, a body established at the request of HM Treasury, issued a report outlining how an ecosystem allowing the sharing of bank and customer information could be established, operated and governed. The resulting ‘Open Banking Standard’ is intended to allow for the provision of access to public data and secure access to private data.

In August 2016, the UK Competition and Markets Authority (CMA) published the results of its market investigation into retail banking, identifying features of the market that were having an adverse effect on competition and setting out a number of measures to remedy the shortcomings. One of these remedies requires Barclays, among other banks, to help establish and fund an entity to govern open access to information about bank services, provision and service quality. Barclays expects to be required to make public information available through open application programming interfaces (APIs) through the course of 2017, with transactional information being available through an open API by January 2018 to align with the PSD2 timeframes.

EU regulation and governments have been increasingly focused on cyber security risk management for banking organisations and have proposed laws that would impose a variety of requirements on regulated Barclays entities. These requirements include minimum required security measures, enhanced reporting requirements and a variety of other cyber and information risk governance measures. When implemented, the proposals may increase technology and compliance costs for Barclays.

The UK Bribery Act 2010 introduced a new form of corporate criminal liability focussed on a company’s failure to prevent bribery on its behalf. The legislation has broad application and in certain circumstances may have extraterritorial impact as to entities, persons or activities located outside the UK, including Barclays PLC and its subsidiaries. In practice, the legislation requires Barclays to have adequate procedures to prevent bribery which, due to the extraterritorial nature of the status, makes this both complex and costly.

Regulation in the USUnited States

InSupervision in the US

Barclays’ US activities and operations are subject to umbrella supervision by the Board of Governors of the Federal Reserve System (FRB), as well as additional supervision, requirements and restrictions imposed by other federal and state regulators. Barclays PLC, Barclays Bank PLC and their US branches and subsidiaries are subject to a comprehensive regulatory framework involving numerous statutes, rules and regulations, including the International Banking Act of 1978, the Bank Holding Company Act of 1956 (BHC Act), the USA PATRIOT Act of 2001 and the DFA. This legislation regulates theDodd Frank Wall Street Reform and Consumer Protection Act of 2010 (DFA). In some cases, US requirements may impose restrictions on Barclays’ global activities of Barclays, includingin addition to its US banking subsidiaries and the US branches of Barclays Bank PLC, as well as imposing prudential restrictions, such as limits on extensions of credit by Barclays Bank PLC’s US branches and the US banking subsidiaries to a single borrower and to affiliates. The New York and Florida branches of Barclays Bank PLC are subject to extensive federal and state supervision and regulation by the Board of Governors of the Federal Reserve System (FRB) and, as applicable, the New York State Department of Financial Services and the Florida Office of Financial Regulation. Barclays Bank Delaware, a Delaware chartered commercial bank, is subject to supervision and regulation by the Federal Deposit Insurance Corporation (FDIC), the Delaware Office of the State Bank Commissioner and the Consumer Financial Protection Bureau (CFPB). The deposits of Barclays Bank Delaware are insured by the FDIC. The licensing authority of each US branch of Barclays Bank PLC has the authority, in certain circumstances, to take possession of the business and property of Barclays Bank PLC locatedactivities in the state of the office it licenses or to revoke or suspend such licence. Such circumstances generally include violations of law, unsafe business practices and insolvency.US.

Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC are bank holding companies registered with the FRB, which exercises umbrella supervisory authority over Barclays’ US operations. Barclays is required to implement byIn July 2016, Barclays established a US intermediate holding company, (IHC)Barclays US LLC (BUSL), which will holdholds substantially all of Barclays’ US subsidiaries and assets (including Barclays Capital Inc. and Barclays Bank Delaware,Delaware), other than Barclays’ US branches and certain other assets and subsidiaries). This IHC will also besubsidiaries. BUSL, Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC are regulated as bank holding companies (BHCs) by the FRB, which exercises umbrella supervisory authority over and imposes a wide variety of requirements and restrictions on Barclays’ US operations, including with respect to safety and soundness. As Barclays’top-tier US bank holding company, and generally regulated as such under the BHC Act. As part of this supervision, the IHCBUSL is or will also generally bebecome subject to substantially similarthe enhanced prudential supervision requirements asapplicable to US bank holding companies of similarcomparable size, including: (i) regulatory capital requirements and leverage limits; (ii) mandatory annual supervisory and annual and semi-annualcompany-runstress testing of capital levels, , and annual submission of a capital plan in connection with the FRB’s annual Comprehensive Capital Analysis and Review (CCAR), resulting in an FRB objection ornon-objection to the capital plan; (iii) supervisory approval ofFRBnon-objection to any proposed capital distributions by the IHCBUSL, including to Barclays Bank PLC; (iv) additional substantive liquidity requirements,

including requirements to conduct monthly internal liquidity stress tests for the IHCBUSL (and also, separately, for Barclays Bank PLC’s US branch network), and to maintain a30-day buffer of highly liquid assets; (v) other liquidity risk management requirements, including compliance with liquidity risk management standards established by the FRB, and maintenance of an independent function to review and evaluate regularly the adequacy and effectiveness of the liquidity risk management practices of Barclays’ combined US operations; and (vi) overall risk management requirements, including a US risk committee and a US chief risk officer. The IHCBUSL will also bebecome subject to TLACthe FRB’s capital planning requirements pursuantin 2017.

The BHC Act generally restricts the activities of BHCs to proposed regulations issued by the Federal Reservebanking and activities closely related to banking. In order to engage in the falla broader range of 2015. Barclays is well advanced in its plans to transfer the relevant US subsidiaries and assets into a newly incorporated IHC, and to implement the related DFA and other requirements, to meet the prescribed deadlines.

activities, Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC have eachalso elected to be treated as a financial holding companycompanies under the BHC Act. Financial holding companies may generally engage in a broader range of financial and related activities, directly or through subsidiaries, including underwriting, dealing and dealingmaking markets in all types of securities, than are permittedsecurities. In order to registered bank holding companies that do not maintain its status as a financial holding company, status. Financiala financial holding companies such as Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC arecompany is required to meet or exceed certain regulatory capital ratios and other requirements toand be considereddeemed ‘well capitalised’ and be deemed to be ‘well managed’ in order to maintain their status as such. Once established, Barclays’ IHC would also need to meet similar requirements for FHC purposes. Barclays Bank Delaware is also required to meet certain capital ratio requirements and be deemed to be ‘well managed’. In addition, the financial holding company status requires Barclays Bank Delaware must haveto maintain at least a ‘satisfactory’ rating under the Community Reinvestment Act of 1977 (CRA). Entities ceasing to meet any of these requirements are required to enter into an agreement to correct the deficiency and are allotted a period of time in which to restore capital levels or the management or CRA rating. Should the relevant Barclays entities failratings. Thenon-compliant entity will be subject to meet the above requirements,limitations on activities during the allottedany period of time they could be prohibited from engaging in new types of financial activities or making certain types of acquisitions in the US.non-compliance. If the capital level or rating is not restored, the Group maynon-compliant entity would be subjected to increasingly stringent penalties and could ultimately be closed or required by the FRB to cease certain activities in the US. More generally, Barclays’ US activities and operations may be subject

In addition to other requirements and restrictionsgeneral oversight by the FRB, under itscertain of Barclays’ branches and subsidiaries are regulated by additional authorities based on the location or activities of those entities. The deposits of Barclays Bank Delaware are insured by the FDIC, which also exercises supervisory authority including with respect to safety and soundness.

over the bank’s operations. Under the Federal Deposit Insurance Act as amended by the DFA, Barclays PLC, Barclays Bank PLC and the IHC (once established)BUSL are required to act as a source of financial strength for Barclays Bank Delaware. This could, among other things, require Barclays and/or the IHCthese entities to inject capital into Barclays Bank Delaware if it fails to meet applicable regulatory capital requirements.

Regulations applicable to US operations The New York and Florida branches of Barclays Bank PLC are subject to extensive supervision and its subsidiaries impose obligationsregulation by, as applicable, the New York State Department of Financial Services (NYSDFS) and the Florida Office of Financial Regulation. Barclays Bank Delaware, a Delaware chartered commercial bank, is subject to maintain appropriate policies, proceduressupervision and controls to detect, prevent and report money laundering and terrorist financing and to ensure compliance with US economic sanctions against designated foreign countries, nationals and others. The enforcementregulation by the Delaware Office of these regulations has been a major focus of US government policy relating to financial institutions in recent years. Failure of a financial institution to maintain and implement adequate programmes to combat money laundering and terrorist financing or to ensure economic sanction compliance could have serious legal and reputational consequences for the institution.State Bank Commissioner.

Barclays’ US securities broker/dealer, investment advisory and investment banking operations are also subject to ongoing supervision and regulation by the Securities and Exchange Commission (SEC), the Financial Industry Regulatory Authority (FINRA) and other government agencies and self-regulatory organisations (SROs) as part of a comprehensive scheme of regulation of all aspects of the securities and commodities business under the US federal and state securities laws.

Similarly, BarclaysBarclays’ US commodity futures, commodity options and commodity options-relatedswaps-related operations are subject to ongoing supervision and regulation by the Commodity Futures Trading Commission (CFTC), the National Futures Association and other SROs.

Barclays’ US retail and consumer activities, including the US credit card activitiesoperations of Barclays Bank Delaware, are subject to ongoingdirect supervision and regulation by the CFPB,Consumer Financial Protection Bureau (CFPB), which was established by the DFA. The statute gave the CFPB has the authority to examine and take enforcement action against any US financial institution with over $10bn in total assets, such as Barclays Bank Delaware, with respectrelated to its compliance with federal laws and regulations regarding the provision of consumer financial services (including credit card and deposit services) and with respect tothe prohibition of ‘unfair, deceptive or abusive acts and practices.’ One of the laws the CFPB enforces is the Credit Card Accountability, Responsibility and Disclosure Act of 2009 which prohibits certain pricing and marketing practices for consumer credit card accounts.practices’.

 

 

186  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 20152016 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  181


Risk review

Supervision and regulation

 

 

The ‘Volcker Rule’, a provision of the DFA that came into effect in July 2015, prohibits banking entities from undertaking certain ‘proprietary trading’ activities and limits the sponsorship of, and investment in, private equity funds (includingnon-conforming real estate and credit funds) and hedge funds, in each case broadly defined, by such entities. These restrictions are subject to certain exemptions, including for underwriting, market-making and risk-mitigating hedging activities as well as for transactions and investments occurring solely outside of the US. As required by the rule, Barclays has developed and implemented an extensive compliance and monitoring programme (both inside and outside of the US) addressing proprietary trading and covered fund activities. These efforts are expected to continue as the FRB and the other relevant US regulatory agencies further implement and monitor these requirements and Barclays may incur additional costs in relation to such efforts. The Volcker Rule is highly complex and its full impact will not be known with certainty until market practices and structures further develop under it.

The Bank Secrecy Act, USA PATRIOT Act 2001 and regulations thereunder contain numerous anti-money laundering and anti-terrorist financing requirements for financial institutions. In addition, Barclays is subject to the US Foreign Corrupt Practices Act, which prohibits certain payments to foreign officials, as well as rules and regulations relating to economic sanctions and embargo programs administered by the US Office of Foreign Assets Control which restrict certain business activities with certain individuals, entities, groups, countries and territories. In some cases, these regulations may impact entities, persons or activities located outside the US, including Barclays PLC and its subsidiaries. The enforcement of these regulations has been a major focus of US government policy relating to financial institutions in recent years, and failure of a financial institution to ensure compliance could have serious legal, financial and reputational consequences for the institution.

The US regulators have enhanced their focus on the promotion of cultural values as a key area for banks. The regulators view the responsibility for reforming culture as primarily sitting with the industry. In this regard regulators have increasingly focused on areas such as incentive compensation, promotion processes and measurements of success.

Title II of the DFA established the Orderly Liquidation Authority, a new regime for orderly liquidation of systemically important financial institutions, which could apply to BUSL. Specifically, when a systemically important financial institution is in default or danger of default, the FDIC may be appointed receiver under the orderly liquidation authority instead of the institution being resolved through a voluntary or involuntary proceeding under the US Bankruptcy Code. In addition, the licensing authorities of each US branch of Barclays Bank PLC and of Barclays Bank Delaware have the authority, in certain circumstances, to take possession of the business and property of the applicable Barclays entity they license or to revoke or suspend such licence. Such circumstances include violations of law, unsafe business practices and insolvency.

Under the DFA, Barclays must submit annually to the FRB and the FDIC a plan for its ‘rapid and orderly’ resolution in the event of material financial distress or failure. As required, Barclays submitted its most recent annual US resolution plan to the US regulators on 1 July 2015. Barclays’ next submission will be due on 1 July 2017 in view of the FDIC’s and FRB’s joint determination that certain foreign banking organisations’ 2016 annual resolution plan filing requirements would be satisfied by the 2017 submission.

In addition, on 3 February 2017, the President of the US issued an executive order identifying ‘core principles’ for the administration’s financial services regulatory policy and directing the US Secretary of Treasury, in consultation with the heads of other US financial regulatory agencies, to evaluate and issue a report within 120 days examining how the current regulatory framework promotes or inhibits the principles and what actions have been and are being taken to promote the principles.

Regulatory developments in the US

The DFA’s ultimate impact on the Group continues to remain uncertain and some rules are not yet fully implemented. In addition, market practices and structures may change in response to the requirements of the DFA in ways that are difficult to predict but that could impact BarclaysBarclays’ business. Nonetheless, certain provisions of the DFAproposed or final regulations are particularly likely to have a significant effect on the Group, including:

(a) Regulation of derivatives markets

§Restrictions on proprietary trading and fund-related activities:Theso-called ‘Volcker Rule’ which was promulgated by the relevant US regulatory agencies, including the FRB, the FDIC, the SEC, and the CFTC, prohibits banking entities, including Barclays PLC, Barclays Bank PLC and their various subsidiaries and affiliates, from undertaking certain ‘proprietary trading’ activities and will limit the sponsorship of, and investment in, private equity funds (including non-conforming real estate and credit funds) and hedge funds, in each case broadly defined, by such entities. These restrictions are subject to certain exceptions and exemptions, including exemptions for underwriting, market-making and risk-mitigating hedging activities as well as exemptions applicable to transactions and investments occurring solely outside of the US. As required by the rule, Barclays has developed and implemented an extensive compliance and monitoring programme (both inside and outside of the US) addressing proprietary trading and covered fund activities. These efforts are expected to continue as the FRB and the other relevant US regulatory agencies further implement and monitor these requirements and Barclays may incur additional costs in relation to such efforts. The Volcker Rule is highly complex and its full impact will not be known with certainty until market practices and structures further develop under it. The prohibition on proprietary trading and the requirement to develop an extensive compliance programme came into effect in July 2015. The FRB subsequently extended the compliance period through July 2016 for investments in and relationships with covered funds that were in place prior to 31 December 2013, and indicated that it intends to further extend the compliance period through July 2017.

The DFA also established a regulatory scheme with respect toover-the-counter swaps and other derivatives, which has resulted in substantial changes in the markets for such instruments and will result in additional regulatory requirements. Among the changes mandated by the DFA is a requirement that many types of derivatives that used to be traded in the over the counter markets be traded on an exchange or swap execution facility and centrally cleared through a regulated clearing house. At present, most interest rate swaps and certain credit default swaps are subject to these requirements, but other categories of swaps will become subject to the requirements in the future. The DFA also mandates that swaps and security-based swaps entered into within the jurisdiction of U.S. regulators be reported to central data repositories and that certain of that information be made available to the public on an anonymous basis. In addition, certain participants in these markets are required to register with the CFTC as ‘swap dealers’ or ‘major swap participants’ and/or, following the compliance date for relevant SEC rules, with the SEC as ‘security-based swap dealers’ or ‘major security-based swap participants’. Such registrants are or will be subject to CFTC and SEC regulation and oversight. SEC finalised the rules governing security based swap dealer registration in 2015 but clarified that registration timing is contingent upon the finalisation of certain additional rules under Title VII of DFA, several of which are still pending. Additional SEC rules governing security-based swap transactions, including security-based swap reporting, will become effective after the security-based swap dealer registration date. Barclays Bank PLC has provisionally registered with the CFTC as a swap dealer. Entities required to register are subject to business conduct and record-keeping and reporting requirements and will be subject to capital and margin requirements in connection with transactions with certain US andnon-US counterparties. Barclays Bank PLC is also prudentially regulated as a swaps dealer so is subject to the FRB swaps rules.

§Resolution plans:The DFA requires non-bank financial companies supervised by the FRB, such as Barclays, and bank holding companies with total consolidated assets of $50bn or more to submit annually to the FRB, the FDIC, and the Financial Stability Oversight Council (FSOC), a plan for a ‘the firm’s rapid and orderly’ resolution in the event of material financial distress or failure. As required, Barclays submitted its most recent annual US resolution plan to the US regulators on 1 July 2015.

The CFTC has approved certain comparability determinations that would permit substituted compliance withnon-US regulatory regimes for certain swap regulations related to business conduct requirements. The CFTC had previously stated that its transaction-level rules (such as margin and documentation requirements) would apply to certain transactions entered into between anon-US swap dealer and anon-US counterparty but has delayed the compliance date for this requirement a number of times. The most recent extension of this relief expires on 30 September 2017. In addition, the CFTC has proposed to apply transaction-level rules to certain cross-border transactions with a U.S. nexus. It is unclear whether further changes will be made to these proposed rules or when they will become effective.

§Regulation of derivatives markets:Among the changes mandated by the DFA is a requirement that many types of derivatives that used to be traded in the over-the-counter markets be traded on an exchange or swap execution facility and centrally cleared through a regulated clearing house. The DFA also mandates that many swaps and security-based swaps be reported and that certain of that information be made available to the public on an anonymous basis. In addition, certain participants in these markets are required to register with the CFTC as ‘swap dealers’ or ‘major swap participants’ and/or, following the compliance date for relevant SEC rules, with the SEC as ‘security based swap dealers’ or ‘major security- based swap participants’. Such registrants would be subject to CFTC and SEC regulation and oversight. SEC finalised the rules for security based swap dealers in August 2015 with an effective date of October 2015. The SEC clarified that registration timing is contingent upon the finalisation of rules under Title VII of DFA in 2016 and no earlier than six months after such date. Barclays Bank PLC has registered as a swap dealer. Entities required to register are subject to business conduct and record-keeping requirements and will be subject to capital and margin requirements.

In this regard, the US prudential regulators and the CFTC recently finalised and issued their respectivehave imposed rules imposing initial and variation margin requirements onrequiring the exchange of collateral in respect of OTC derivative transactions, in uncleared swaps and security-based swaps. Such requirements will become effective over a period of time beginningsimilar manner to the European Commission as set out above in September, 2016. The margin requirements can be expected to increase the costs of over-the-counter derivative transactions and could adversely affect market liquidity.section entitled ‘Market Infrastructure Developments’.

These registration, execution, clearing, reporting and compliance requirements could adversely affect the business of Barclays Bank PLC and its affiliates, including by reducing market liquidity and increasing the difficulty and cost of hedging and trading activities.

§CFPB and consumer protection regulations and enforcement:Since its creation, the CFPB has issued a number of regulations aimed at protecting consumers of financial products including credit card and deposit customers. The CFPB has also initiated several high-profile public actions against financial companies, including major credit card issuers. Settlements of those actions have included monetary penalties, customer remediation requirements, and commitments to modify business practices.

§TLAC in the US:In 2015, the FRB also issued its own TLAC proposal that, while generally following the FSB framework, contains a number of provisions that are more restrictive. If ultimately adopted in its current form, the US TLAC proposal would require the Barclays IHC, subject to certain phase-in provisions between 2019 and 2022: (i) a specified outstanding amount of eligible long term debt (LDT), (ii) a specified outstanding amount of TLAC (consisting of common and preferred equity regulatory capital plus LTD), and (iii) a specified internal common equity buffer, in each case issued to a controlling parent of the IHC. The US TLAC proposal also contains certain other requirements, including that the LTD must be cancellable or convertible into equity of the IHC upon the order to the FRB if the IHC is in default or danger of default and certain other requirements are met. If finally adopted by the FRB, these requirements may increase the funding costs of the IHC.

Regulation in Africa(b) Prudential developments

Barclays’ operations in South Africa, including Barclays Africa Group Limited, are supervised and regulated mainly by the South African Reserve Bank (SARB), the Financial Services Board (SAFSB)The FRB has proposed a number of prudential rules to implement DFA requirements, as well as its own versions of a number of international regulatory standards, including Basel large exposure rules (or single counterparty credit limits, proposed in March 2016) and temporary resolution stays for qualified financial contracts (proposed in May 2016).

In December 2016, the Department of Trade and Industry (DTI). The SARB oversees the banking industry and follows a risk-based approach to supervision, while the SAFSB oversees financial services such as insurance and investment business and focuses on enhancing consumer protection and regulating market conduct. The DTI regulates consumer credit through the National Credit Regulator, established under the National Credit Act (NCA) 2005, as well as other aspects of consumer protection not regulated under the jurisdiction of the SAFSB through the Consumer Protection Act (CPA) 2008. It is intended that regulatory responsibilities in South Africa will in future be divided between the SARBFRB issued final regulations for TLAC which will be responsibleapply to BUSL. The FRB’s final TLAC rule, while generally following the FSB termsheet, contains a number of provisions that are more restrictive. For example, the FRB’s TLAC rule includes provisions that require BUSL (the Barclays IHC) to have (i) a specified outstanding amount of eligible long-term debt, (ii) a specified outstanding amount of TLAC (consisting of common and preferred equity regulatory capital plus long term debt), and (iii) a specified common equity buffer. In addition, the FRB’s TLAC rule would prohibit BUSL, for prudential regulationso long as the Group’s overall resolution plan treats BUSL as anon-resolution entity, from issuing TLAC to entities other than the Group and the SAFSB will be responsible for matters of market conduct. The transition to ‘twin peaks’ regulation will commence in 2016. Barclays’ operations in other African countries are primarily supervised and regulated by the central banks in the jurisdictions where Barclays has a banking presence. In some African countries, the conduct of Barclays’ operations and the non-banking activities are also regulated by Financial Market Authorities.itsnon-US subsidiaries.

 

 

182Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2016 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  187


In addition, the FRB has issued proposed regulations for net stable funding ratio (NSFR) implementation. The NSFR is one of the two BaselIII-based liquidity measures, along with the LCR, and as proposed by the FRB, would apply to US bank holding companies with more than $250bn in total assets or $10bn or more inon-balance sheet foreign exposures, including BUSL, and consolidated depositary institution subsidiaries of such banking organisations with more than $10bn in assets, including Barclays Bank Delaware. Under the proposed rule, such entities would be required to maintain a minimum level of available stable funding that equals or exceeds the amount of required stable funding over aone-year period. The proposal provides for an effective date of 1 January 2018, subject to finalisation of the rules.

If finally adopted as currently proposed, the NSFR requirement could impact Barclays liquidity and increase the funding and compliance costs for BUSL.

(c) Cybersecurity

US regulators, including the FRB, FDIC and NYSDFS, have been increasingly focused on cybersecurity risk management for banking organisations and have issued proposals for, or requested comment on, regulations that would impose a variety of new requirements on regulated Barclays entities. These requirements include, among others,

the adoption of cybersecurity policies and procedures meeting specified criteria, a set of minimum required security measures, new reporting and compliance certification requirements and a variety of other cyber and information risk governance measures. If finally implemented, the proposals may increase technology and compliance costs for Barclays.

Structural Reform

Overview

Barclays announced in March 2016 that it will be organised as two clearly defined divisions, Barclays UK and Barclays International, to simplify the Group and prepare early for UK ring-fencing requirements.

Barclays intends to achieve ring-fencing separation by setting up an operational legal entity, which will constitute the ring-fenced bank (RFB) and will be separate from Barclays Bank PLC. The Barclays UK division of Barclays Bank PLC will be transferred to RFB. Barclays Bank PLC will continue to house the Barclays International division. The two legal entities, RFB (including Barclays UK) and BBPLC (including Barclays International) will operate alongside one another together with the Group Service Company, Barclays Services Limited (BSerl), as subsidiaries of Barclays PLC within the Barclays Group.

LOGO

In order to achieve this target-state structure, Barclays will need to undertake a number of legal transfers, including the transfer of customer and non-customer assets, liabilities and contractual arrangements.

Barclays intends to use a court approved statutory ring-fence transfer scheme process as defined in Financial Services and Markets Act 2000 part VII section 106B (RFTS) to conduct the majority of these transfers to the RFB, as well as certain other items to BSerL. In addition to the transfers conducted through the RFTS, certain items will be transferred via alternative arrangements.

Between now and 1 January 2019, Barclays will complete the transition from the former divisional constructs to the legal entity constructs described above.

188  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 20152016 Annual Report on Form 20-F  


Risk review

Supervision and regulation

Timeline

Barclays’ Structural Reform timeline, including progress to date and indicative future milestones is as follows:

§2015:

The legal entity which will become the RFB was incorporated.

§2016:

Barclays’ US intermediate holding company was established.

RFB banking authorisation application was submitted to the regulators.

BSerL, which will become the Group Service Company, was transferred to be a direct subsidiary of BPLC.

§2017:

Various legal entities connected with the future Barclays UK business will be transferred to be subsidiaries of the entity which will become the RFB.

Certain assets, liabilities, and other items connected with service provision will be transferred from Barclays Bank PLC to BSerL to establish the entity as the Group Service Company.

RFTS court process will be initiated during Q4 2017 with the submission of an application to the high court followed by the directions court hearing.

§2018:

Final court hearing will be held in respect of the RFTS.

Barclays UK businesses and related items will be transferred to the RFB through the RFTS and via alternative arrangements, taking effect in H1 2018.

Additional items connected with service provision will be transferred to BSerL, also via the RFTS in H1 2018.

Immediately following completion of the RFTS, the equity ownership in the RFB will be transferred, establishing the RFB as a direct subsidiary of Barclays PLC, alongside Barclays Bank PLC and BSerL.

Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2016 Annual Report on Form 20-F | 189


Financial review

Contents

    

 

A review of the performance of Barclays,

including the key performance indicators, and the contribution of each of our businesses’ contribution to the overall performance of the Group.

    

 

Financial review         

 

Page

 

 

 

Financial review
    

§  Key performance indicators

  

184

191

    

§  Consolidated summary income statement

   186193 
    

§  Income statement commentary

   187194 
    

§  Consolidated summary balance sheet

   189195 
    

§  Balance sheet commentary

   190196 
    

§  Analysis of results by business

   191197

§  Appendix:Non-IFRS performance measures

212 

    LOGO

 

190  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 20152016 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  183


Financial review

Key performance indicators

 

 

In assessing the financial performance of the Group, management uses a range of Key Performance Indicators (KPIs) which focus on the Group’s financial strength, the delivery of sustainable returns and cost management.

Non-IFRS performance measures

Barclays management believes that thenon-IFRS performance measures included in this document provide valuable information to the readers of the financial statements as they enable the reader to identify a more consistent basis for comparing the business’ performance between financial periods, and provide more detail concerning the elements of performance which the managers of these businesses are most directly able to influence or are relevant for an assessment of the Group. They also reflect an important aspect of the way in which operating targets are defined and performance is monitored by Barclays’ management. However, anynon-IFRS performance measures in this document are not a substitute for IFRS measures and readers should consider the IFRS measures as well. Refer to pagesi to x and pages 212 to 215 for further information, reconciliations and calculations ofnon-IFRS performance measures included throughout this document, and the most directly comparable IFRS measures.

 

Definition

  Why is it important and how the Group performed     

 

CRD IV fully loaded Common Equity Tier 1 (CET1)CET1 ratio

Capital requirements are part of the regulatory framework governing how banks and depository institutions are supervised. Capital ratios express a bank’s capital as a percentage of its risk weighted assets (RWAs)RWAs as defined by the PRA.

 

In the context of CRD IV, the fully loaded CET1 ratio is a measure of capital that is predominantly common equity as defined by the Capital Requirements Regulation.

  

 

The Group’s capital management objective is to maximise shareholders’shareholder value by prudently optimisingmanaging the level mix, and distribution to businessesmix of its capital resources, while maintaining sufficient capital resources to: ensure the Group is welland all of its subsidiaries are appropriately capitalised relative to itstheir minimum regulatory and stressed capital requirements set byrequirement support the PRA and other regulatory authorities; support its credit rating; and support itsGroup risk appetite, growth and strategic objectives.option wide seeking to maintain a robust credit proposition for the Group and its subsidiaries.

 

The Group’s CRD IV fully loaded CET1 ratio increased to 12.4% (2015: 11.4% (2014: 10.3%) due to a £44bn reduction in RWAs to £358bn, demonstrating continued progress on the Non-Core rundown together with reductions in the Investment Bank, which was partially offset by a decreasean increase in CET1 capital to £40.7bn (2014: £41.5bn)£45.2bn (2015: £40.7bn), partially offset by an increase in RWAs to £366bn (2015: £358bn). The 100 bps increase reflected the Group’s ability to grow capital through profit generation.

Group target: Revisedend-state CET1 capital ratio target of 150-200bps above the minimum regulatory level providing400-450bps buffer to the Bank of England stress test systemic reference point.

 

  

12.4%

CRD IV fully loaded CET1 ratio

2015:11.4%

2014: 10.3%

2013: 9.1%

Leverage ratio

The ratio is calculated as fully loaded Tier 1 Capital divided by leverage exposure.

The leverage ratio is non-risk based and is intended to act as a supplementary measure to the risk based capital metrics such as the CET1 ratio.

The leverage ratio increased to 4.5% (2014: 3.7%), reflecting a reduction in the leverage exposure of £205bn to £1,028bn and an increase in Tier 1 Capital to £46.2bn (2014: £46.0bn). Tier 1 Capital includes £5.4bn (2014: £4.6bn) of Additional Tier 1 (AT1) securities.

2015:4.5%

2014: 3.7%

2013: n/a

  

 

Return on average shareholders’ equity (RoE)

RoE is calculated as profit for the yearafter tax attributable to ordinary shareholders, including an adjustment for the tax credit recorded in reserves in respect of other equity holdersinstruments, as a proportion of the parent, divided by average shareholders’ equity for the year excludingnon-controlling interests and other equity interests.

Adjusted RoE excludes post tax adjusting items for gains on US Lehman acquisition assets, movements in own credit, the revision to the Education, Social Housing and Local Authority (ESHLA) valuation methodology, provisions for UK customer redress, provisions for ongoing investigations and litigation including Foreign Exchange, the gain on valuation of a component of the defined retirement benefit liability, impairment of goodwill and other assets relating to businesses being disposed, and losses on sale relating to the Spanish, Portuguese and Italian businesses.

Average shareholders’ equity for adjusted
RoE excludes the impact of own credit on
retained earnings.

instruments.

  

 

This measure indicates the return generated by the management of the business based on shareholders’ equity. Achieving a target RoE demonstrates the Group’sorganisation’s ability to execute its strategy and align management’s interests with the shareholders’.

RoE for the Group increased to 3.0% (2015: (0.6%)) reflecting an increase in Group attributable profit to £1,623m (2015: loss of £394m) and increased shareholders’ equity of £57.4bn (2015: £55.9bn).

3.0%

Group RoE

2015: (0.6%)

2014: (0.2%)

Return on average tangible shareholders’ equity

RoTE is calculated as profit after tax attributable to ordinary shareholders, including an adjustment for the tax credit recorded in reserves in respect of other equity instruments, as a proportion of average shareholders’ equity excludingnon-controlling interests and other equity instruments adjusted for the deduction of intangible assets and goodwill.

This measure indicates the return generated by the management of the business based on shareholders’ tangible equity. Achieving a target RoTE demonstrates the organisation’s ability to execute its strategy and align management’s interests with the shareholders’. RoTE lies at the heart of the Group’s capital allocation and performance management process.

 

Adjusted RoERoTE for the Group decreasedincreased to 4.9% (2014: 5.1%3.6% (2015: (0.7%)) driven by a 3% reductionreflecting an increase in Group adjusted attributable profit asto £1,623m (2015: loss of £394m) and increased average tangible shareholders’ equity remained in line at £56bn (2014: £56bn)of £49bn (2015: £48bn).

 

Statutory RoE for the Group decreasedCore RoTE increased to negative 0.6% (2014: negative 0.2%8.4% (2015: 4.8%) driven byreflecting a 95% increase in attributable profit to £3,350m and a £4bn increase in average allocated tangible equity to £41bn, as capital was returned fromNon-Core. Core RoTE excluding notable items reduced to 9.4% (2015: 11.2%) with a 4% increase in profit before tax to £6,436m and an 8% reduction in attributable profit to £3,781m primarily reflecting an increase in attributable loss.tax, due to the introduction of a new surcharge of 8% that applies to banks’ UK profits with effect from 1 January 2016.

Group target: Group RoTE will converge with Core RoTE.

  

Group adjusted RoE

2015:4.9%

2014: 5.1%

2013: 4.3%a3.6%

 

Group statutory RoE

2015: (0.6%)RoTE

 

2014: (0.2%2015: (0.7%)

2013: 1.0%2014: (0.3%)

8.4%

Core RoTE

2015: 4.8%

2014: 7.0%

9.4%

Core RoTE excluding notable items

2015: 11.2%

2014: 11.2%

  

Note

a2013 adjusted total operating expenses and profit before tax have been revised to account for the reclassification of £173m of charges, relating to a US residential mortgage-related business settlement with the Federal Housing Finance Agency, to provisions for ongoing investigations and litigation including Foreign Exchange to aid comparability.

 

184  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 20152016 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  191


    

    

    

 

Definition

  Why is it important and how the Group performed     

Leverage ratio

The ratio is calculated as fully loaded tier 1 capital divided by leverage exposure.

The leverage ratio isnon-risk based and is intended to act as a supplementary measure to the risk-based capital metrics such as the CET1 ratio.

The leverage ratio increased to 4.6% (2015: 4.5%), reflecting an increase in tier 1 capital to £52.0bn (2015: £46.2bn) and an increase in leverage exposure of £97bn to £1,125bn. Tier 1 capital included £6.8bn (2015: £5.4bn) of AT1 securities.

Group target: maintaining the leverage ratio above future minimum requirements

4.6%

Leverage ratio

2015: 4.5%

2014: 3.7%

Cost: income ratio

Total operating expenses divided by total income

This is a measure management uses to assess the productivity of the business operations. Restructuring the cost base is a key execution priority for management and includes a review of all categories of discretionary spending and an analysis of how we can run the business to ensure that costs increase at a slower rate than income.

The Group cost: income ratio reduced to 76% (2015: 84%) driven by a 12% reduction in operating expenses, partially offset by a 3% reduction in income.

The reduction in operating expenses included a £3,024m reduction in litigation and conduct charges in 2016 to £1,363m.

The Core cost: income ratio reduced to 64% (2015: 75%) reflecting the reduction in litigation and conduct charges. Excluding notable items, the Core cost: income ratio reduced to 61% in 2016 (2015: 62%).

Group target: cost: income ratio of less than 60% over time

76%

Cost: income ratio

2015: 84%

2014: 84%

  

 

Operating expenses excluding costs to achieve

Defined as adjusted totalTotal operating expenses excluding costs to achieve.

Adjusted operating expenses exclude provisions for UK customer redress, provisions for ongoing investigations and litigation including Foreign Exchange, the gain on valuation of a component of the defined retirement benefit liability, impairment of goodwill and other assets relating to businesses being disposed, and losses on sale relating to the Spanish, Portuguese and Italian businesses.

  

 

Barclays views the active management and control of operating expenses as a key strategic objective.

Adjusted operating expenses excludingarea for banks; those who actively manage costs to achieve of £793m (2014: £1,165m), decreased 4% to £16,205m.

Statutory operating expenses, excluding costs to achieve of £793m (2014: £1,165m), increased 3% to £19,884m.and control them effectively will gain a strong competitive advantage.

 

Operating expenses for the Group were £16,338m (2015: £18,536m). This reflected lower litigation and conduct charges, increased structural reform implementation costs and the strengthening in average USD and EUR against GBP. Q416 included the impact of a decision for 2016 compensation awards, to more closely align income statement recognition with performance awards and to harmonise deferral structures across the Group. These changes resulted in a £395m income statement charge in Q416, of which £390m was in Core, business,resulting in Core costs being above guidance by that amount.

Refer to pages vi to viii for a reconciliation of total operating expenses excluding costs to achieve of £693m (2014: £953m), were broadly in line at £15,106m (2014: £15,105m).conduct and litigation charges, and other notable items.

  

 

Group adjusted

2015: £16,205m

2014: £16,904m

2013: £18,511ma16,338m

 

Group statutory

 

2015: £18,536m

2014: £18,184m

£14,975m

£19,884mGroup total operating expenses, excluding conduct and litigation charges, and other notable items

 

2015: £14,479m

2014: £19,264m£15,377m

2013: £20,763m

£14,507m

 

Core statutory

 

2015: £15,990m

2014: £15,170m

£13,390m

£15,106mCore total operating expenses, excluding conduct and litigation charges, and other notable items

 

2015: £12,532m

2014: £15,105m

2013: £16,377m£12,664m

 

  

 

Non-Core RWAs

RWAs are a risk adjusted measure of assets adjusted for associated risks.assets. Risk weightings are established in accordance with the rulesBasel Capital Accord as implemented by CRD IV and local regulators.the PRA.

  

 

BarclaysNon-Core was established as a separate unit in 2014 and groups together businesses and assets which do not fit with the strategic objectives of the Group. ReducingNon-Core RWAs will rebalance the Group to deliver higher and more sustainable returns.

 

Non-Core RWAs have reduced from £110bnby £22bn to £32bn in December 20132016. The 41% reduction in the year reflects strong progress in the rundown, driven by a £10bn reduction in Derivatives, a £3bn reduction in Securities and loans, a £4bn reduction in Businesses RWAs, and a £4bn reallocation to £47bn, resulting in an equity allocationHead Office of £7.2bnoperational risk RWAs associated with exited businesses and assets.

Target:Non-Core RWAs of c.£25bn as at December 2015, 13% of the Group total. This is down from £15.1bn as at December 2013, which was 28% of the Group total.30 June 2017.

 

  

£32bn

 

Non-Core

 

2015: £47bn

£54bn

2014: £75bn

2013: £110bn£89bn

  

Note

a2013 adjusted total operating expenses and profit before tax have been revised to account for the reclassification of £173m of charges, relating to a US residential mortgage-related business settlement with the Federal Housing Finance Agency, to provisions for ongoing investigation and litigation including Foreign Exchange to aid comparability.

 

192  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 20152016 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  185


Financial review

Consolidated summary income statement

                

 

For the year ended 31 December

   

 

2015 

£m 

  

  

   

 

2014 

£m 

  

  

   

 

2013a

£m 

  

  

   

 

2012 

£m 

  

  

   

 

2011 

£m 

  

  

Continuing operations

          

Net interest income

   12,558      12,080      11,600      11,654      12,201   

Non-interest income net of claims and benefits on insurance contracts

   11,970      13,648      16,296      17,707      16,312   

Adjusted total income net of insurance claims

   24,528      25,728      27,896      29,361      28,513   

Gain on US Lehman acquisition assets

   496      461      259      –      –   

Own credit gain/(charge)

   430      34      (220)     (4,579)     2,708   

Revision of ESHLA valuation methodology

   –      (935)     –      –      –   

Gain/(loss) on disposal of BlackRock, Inc. investment

   –      –      –      227      (58)  

Gains on debt buy-backs

   –      –      –      –      1,130   

Statutory total income net of insurance claims

   25,454      25,288      27,935      25,009      32,292   

Adjusted credit impairment charges and other provisions

   (2,114)     (2,168)     (3,071)     (3,340)     (3,802)  

Impairment of BlackRock, Inc. investment

   –      –      –      –      (1,800)  

Statutory credit impairment charges and other provisions

   (2,114)     (2,168)     (3,071)     (3,340)     (5,602)  

Adjusted operating expenses

   (16,998)     (18,069)     (19,720)     (18,562)     (19,289)  

Provisions for UK customer redress

   (2,772)     (1,110)     (2,000)     (2,450)     (1,000)  

Provisions for ongoing investigations and litigation including Foreign Exchange

   (1,237)     (1,250)     (173)     –      –   

Gain on valuation of a component of the defined retirement benefit liability

   429      –      –      –      –   

Impairment of goodwill and other assets relating to businesses being disposed

   (96)     –      (79)     –      (597)  

Losses on sale relating to the Spanish, Portuguese and Italian businesses

   (3)     –       –     –      –   

Statutory operating expenses

       (20,677)         (20,429)         (21,972)         (21,012)         (20,886)  

Adjusted other net (expenses)/income

   (13)     11      (24)     140      60   

Losses on sale relating to the Spanish, Portuguese and Italian businesses

   (577)     (446)     –      –      –   

Losses on acquisitions and disposals

   –      –      –      –      (94)  

Statutory other net (expenses)/income

   (590)     (435)     (24)     140      (34)  

Statutory profit before tax

   2,073      2,256      2,868      797      5,770   

Statutory taxation

   (1,450)     (1,411)     (1,571)     (616)     (1,902)  

Statutory profit after tax

   623      845      1,297      181      3,868   

Statutory (loss)/profit attributable to equity holders of the parent

   (394)     (174)     540      (624)     2,924   

Statutory profit attributable to non-controlling interests

   672      769      757      805      944   

Statutory profit attributable to other equity holdersb

   345      250      –      –      –   
    623      845      1,297      181      3,868   

Selected statutory financial statistics

                         

Basic (loss)/earnings per share

   (1.9p)     (0.7p)     3.8p      (4.8p)     22.9p   

Diluted (loss)/earnings per share

   (1.9p)     (0.7p)     3.7p      (4.8p)     21.9p   

Dividends per ordinary share

   6.5p      6.5p      6.5p      6.5p      6.0p   

Return on average tangible shareholders’ equityb

   (0.7%)     (0.3%)     1.2%      (1.4%)     7.1%   

Return on average shareholders’ equityb

   (0.6%)     (0.2%)     1.0%      (1.2%)     5.9%  

Adjusted profit before tax

   5,403      5,502      5,081      7,599      5,482   

Adjusted taxation

   (1,690)     (1,704)     (2,029)     (2,159)     (1,299)  

Adjusted profit after tax

   3,713      3,798      3,052      5,440      4,183   

Adjusted profit attributable to equity holders of the parent

   2,696      2,779      2,295      4,635      3,239   

Adjusted profit attributable to non-controlling interests

   672      769      757      805      944   

Adjusted profit attributable to other equity interestsb

   345      250      –      –      –   
    3,713      3,798      3,052      5,440      4,183   

Selected adjusted financial statistics

                         

Basic earnings per share

   16.6p      17.3p      16.0p      35.5p      25.3p   

Dividend payout ratio

   39%      38%      41%      18%      24%   

Return on average tangible shareholders’ equityb

   5.8%      5.9%      5.1%      10.6%      8.1%   

Return on average shareholders’ equityb

   4.9%      5.1%      4.3%      9.0%      6.7%   

For the year ended 31  Decembera

   

2016 

£m 

 

 

   

2015 

£m 

 

 

   

2014 

£m 

 

 

   

2013 

£m 

 

 

   

2012 

£m 

 

 

Continuing operationsb

          

Net interest income

   10,537     10,608     10,086     9,457     9,442  

Non-interest income

   10,914     11,432     11,677     14,587     11,399  

Total income

   21,451     22,040     21,763     24,044     20,841  
          

Credit impairment charges and other provisions

   (2,373)    (1,762)    (1,821)    (2,601)    (2,659) 

Operating expenses

   (14,565)    (13,723)    (14,959)    (16,628)    (15,256) 

UK bank levy

   (410)    (426)    (418)    (462)    (311) 

Litigation and conduct

   (1,363)    (4,387)    (2,807)    (2,442)    (2,912) 

Total operating expenses

   (16,338)    (18,536)    (18,184)    (19,532)    (18,479) 
          

Other net income/(expenses)

   490     (596)    (445)    (32)    122  
                          

Profit/(loss) before tax

   3,230     1,146     1,313     1,879     (175) 

Tax charge

   (993)    (1,149)    (1,121)    (1,251)    (326) 

Profit/(loss) after tax in respect of continuing operations

   2,237     (3)    192     628     (502) 

Profit after tax in respect of discontinued operationb

   591     626     653     669     683  

Non-controlling interests in respect of continuing operations

   (346)    (348)    (449)    (414)    (467) 

Non-controlling interests in respect of discontinued operationb

   (402)    (324)    (320)    (343)    (339) 

Other equity holders

   (457)    (345)    (250)    –     –  

Attributable profit/(loss)

   1,623     (394)    (174)    540     (624) 
          

Selected financial statistics

                         

Basic earnings/(loss) per sharec

   10.4p     (1.9p)    (0.7p)    3.8p     (4.8p) 

Diluted earnings/(loss) per sharec

   10.3p     (1.9p)    (0.7p)    3.7p     (4.8p) 

Dividends per ordinary share

   4.5p     6.5p     6.5p     6.5p     6.5p  

Dividend payout ratio

   23%     39%     38%     41%     18%  

Return on equity

   3.0%     (0.6%)    (0.2%)    1.0%     (1.2%) 

Return on average tangible shareholders’ equityc

   3.6%     (0.7%)    (0.3%)    1.2%     (1.4%) 

The financial information above is extracted from the published accounts. This information should be read together with the information included in the accompanying consolidated financial statements.

Notes

a2013 adjusted total operating expenses and profit before taxComparatives have been revisedrestated to account forreflect the reclassificationimplementation of £173m of charges, relating to a US residential mortgage relatedthe Group business settlement with the Federal Housing Finance Agency, to provisions for ongoing investigations and litigation including Foreign Exchange to aid comparability.reorganisation. These restatements were detailed in our announcement on 14 April 2016, accessible at home.barclays/results.
bRefer to page 210 for further information on the Africa Banking discontinued operation.
cThe profit after tax attributable to other equity holders of £345m (2014: £250m)£457m (2015: £345m) is offset by a tax credit recorded in reserves of £70m (2014: £54m)£128m (2015: £70m). The net amount of £275m (2014: £196m)£329m (2015: £275m), along with non-controlling interests (NCI)NCI is deducted from profit after tax in order to calculate earnings per share and return on average tangible shareholders’ equity and return on average shareholders’ equity.

 

186  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 20152016 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  193


Financial review

Income statement commentary

                    

 

 

2016 compared to 2015

Profit before tax increased to £3,230m (2015: £1,146m). The Group performance reflected good operational performance in Barclays UK and Barclays International whilst being impacted by theNon-Core loss before tax of £2,786m (2015: £2,603m) driven by the accelerated rundown ofNon-Core and provisions for UK customer redress of £1,000m (2015: £2,772m). The appreciation of average USD and EUR against GBP positively impacted income and adversely affected impairment and operating expenses.

Total income decreased 3% to £21,451m asNon-Core income reduced £1,776m to a net expense of £1,164m due to the acceleration of theNon-Core rundown, while Core income increased 6% to £22,615m. Within Core, Barclays International income increased 9% to £14,995m, with growth in both CIB and Consumer, Cards and Payments, and Barclays UK income increased 2% to £7,517m.

Total income included a £615m (2015: £nil) gain on disposal of Barclays’ share of Visa Europe Limited and an own credit loss of £35m (2015: gain of £430m).

Credit impairment charges increased £611m to £2,373m including a £320m charge in Q316 following the management review of the UK and US cards portfolio impairment modelling and balance growth primarily within Consumer, Cards and Payments. This was partially offset by a reduction in credit impairment charges of 9% to £122m inNon-Core due to lower impairment charges in European businesses. This resulted in a 11bps increase in the loan loss rate to 53bps.

Total operating expenses reduced 12% to £16,338m reflecting lower litigation and conduct charges. This was partially offset by thenon-recurrence of the prior year gain of £429m on the valuation of a component of the defined retirement benefit liability and increased structural reform implementation costs. Operating expenses also included a £395m additional charge in Q416 relating to 2016 compensation awards reflecting a decision to more closely align income statement recognition with performance awards and to harmonise deferral structures across the Group.

Total operating expenses included provisions for UK customer redress of £1,000m (2015: £2,772m).

The cost: income ratio improved to 76% (2015: 84%).

Other net income of £490m (2015: expense of £596m) included gains on the sale of Barclays Risk Analytics and Index Solutions, the Asia wealth and investment management business and the Southern European cards business, partly offset by the loss on sale of the French retail business of £455m.

The effective tax rate on profit before tax decreased to 30.7% (2015: 100.3%) principally as a result of a reduction innon-deductible charges.

Profit after tax in respect of continuing operations increased to £2,237m (2015: loss of £3m). Profit after tax in relation to the Africa Banking discontinued operation decreased 6% to £591m as increased credit impairment charges and operating expenses were partially offset by income growth.

Return on shareholders’ equity was 3.0% (2015: (0.6)%).

Return on average tangible shareholders’ equity was 3.6% (2015: (0.7%)) and basic earnings per share was 10.4p (2015: (1.9p)).

2015 compared to 2014

Statutory profitProfit before tax decreased to £2,073m£1,146m (2014: £2,256m), adjusted profit before tax decreased 2% to £5,403m.£1,313m).

Statutory totalTotal income net of insurance claims increased 1% to £25,454m, including adjusting items for£22,040m as Core income increased 4% to £21,428m, reflecting a £496m (2014: £461m) gain on the US Lehman acquisition assets6% increase to £13,747m in Barclays International and an own credit gain of £430m (2014: £34m). 2014 statutory total income net of insurance claims included a loss of £935m (2015: nil) relating22% increase in Head Office to £338m, which was partially offset by a revision1% decrease to the ESHLA valuation methodology.

£7,343m in Barclays UK.Adjusted total income net of insurance claims decreased 5% to £24,528m, as Non-Core income reduced 46% to a net expense of £164m£612m, following assets and securities rundown, business sales including the impact of the sales of the Spanish and UAE retail businesses, and fair value losses on the ESHLA portfolio of £359m (2014: £156m). Core

Total income remained in line at £24,692mincluded a £496m (2014: £24,678m) reflecting:£461m) gain on the US Lehman acquisition assets and an own credit gain of £430m (2014: £34m). 2014 total income included a 13% increaseloss of £935m (2015: £nil) relating to £4,927m in Barclaycard, primarily reflecting growth in US cards; Investment Bank income remaining broadly in line at £7,572m (2014: £7,588m); a 1% reduction in PCB duerevision to the impact of customer redress in, and the sale of, the US Wealth business; and a 2% reduction in Africa Banking as the ZAR depreciated against GBP. On a constant currency basisa income in Africa Banking increased 7% reflecting good growth in Retail and Business Banking and corporate banking in South Africa, and Wealth, Investment Management and Insurance (WIMI).ESHLA valuation methodology.

Net interest income increased 4% to £12,558m, with higher net interest income in PCB, Barclaycard and Non-Core, partially offset by reductions in Africa Banking, the Investment Bank and Head Office. Net interest income for PCB, Barclaycard and Africa Banking increased 5% to £12,024m due to an increase in average customer assets to £287.7bn (2014: £280.0bn) with growth in PCB and Barclaycard, partially offset by reductions in Africa Banking as the ZAR depreciated against GBP. Net interest margin increased 10bps to 4.18% primarily due to growth in interest earning lending within Barclaycard.

Credit impairment charges improved 2%3% to £2,114m,£1,762m, with a loan loss rate of 47bps42bps (2014: 46bps)42bps). This reflected higher recoveries in Europe and the sale of the Spanish business in Non-Core, and lower impairments in PCBBarclays UK due to the benign economic environment in the UK resulting in lower default rates and charges.charges and higher recoveries in European businesses inNon-Core. This was partially offset by a number of single name exposures in the Investment Bank, and increased impairment charges in Barclaycard reflectingConsumer, Cards and Payments primarily driven by asset growth and updates to impairment model methodologies.methodologies, and increased impairment charges in CIB due to impairment of a number of single name exposures.

StatutoryTotal operating expenses increased 1%2% to £20,677m.£18,536m due to an increase in litigation and conduct charges, and costs associated with the implementation of structural reform. This was partially offset by savings from the strategic cost programme, in addition to the continued rundown ofNon-Core.

Total operating expenses included adjusting itemsadditional provisions for additional UK customer redress provisions of £2,772m (2014: £1,110m), £1,237m (2014: £1,250m) of additional provisions for ongoing investigations and litigation including Foreign Exchange of £1,237m (2014: £1,250m), a £429m (2014: nil)£nil) gain on valuation of a component of the defined retirement benefit liability and £96m (2014: nil)£nil) of impairment of goodwill and other assets relating to businesses being disposed, and £3m (2014: nil) of losses on sale relating to the Spanish, Portuguese and Italian businesses.

Adjusted operating expenses decreased 6% to £16,998m as a result of savings from strategic cost programmes, particularly in the Investment Bank and PCB, in addition to the continued rundown of Non-Core. Total compensation costs decreased 6% to £8,339m, with the Investment Bank reducing 5% to £3,423m, reflecting lower deferred and current year bonus charges and reduced headcount. Reductions in costs to achieve of 32% to £793m, and in litigation and conduct charges of 16% to £378m, were partially offset by costs associated with the implementation of the structural reform programme and a 3% increase in the UK bank levy to £476m.disposed.

The statutory cost:income ratio remained in linestable at 81%84% (2014: 81%). The adjusted cost:income ratio decreased to 69% (2014: 70%84%).

Statutory otherOther net expenses increased to £590m£596m (2014: £435m) and included an adjusting item for£445m) primarily relating to losses on sale relating to the Spanish, Portuguese and Italian businesses of £577m (2014: £446m).

The tax charge of £1,450m£1,149m (2014: £1,411m)£1,121m) on statutory profit before tax of £2,073m£1,146m (2014: £2,256m) represents£1,313m) represented an effective tax rate of 69.9%100.3% (2014: 62.5%85.4%), impacted bynon-deductible items.

Profit after tax in respect of continuing operations decreased to a loss of £3m (2014: profit of £192m). Profit after tax in relation to the Africa Banking discontinued operation decreased 4% to £626m driven by a reduction in total income and an increase in credit impairment charges, partially offset by a reduction in operating expenses.

Return on shareholders’ equity was (0.6)% (2014: (0.2)%). The effective tax rate

Return on adjusted profit before tax of 31.3%average tangible shareholders’ equity was (0.7%) (2014: 31.0%(0.3%)) is less than the effective tax rate on statutory profit before tax mainly because it excludes the impact of adjusting items such as non-deductible provisions for ongoing investigations and litigation including Foreign Exchange and provisions for UK customer redress. The adjusted measure of profit before tax is considered to provide a more consistent basis for comparing business performance between periods as it is more representative of the underlying, ongoing performance. Consistent with this, the effective tax rate on adjusted profit before tax is considered a more representative measure of the Group’s underlying, ongoing tax charge.basic loss per share was 1.9p (2014: 0.7p).

 

194  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2016 Annual Report on Form 20-F


Financial review

Consolidated summary balance sheet

    

 

 

Note

aConstant currency results are calculated by converting ZAR results into GBP using the average exchange rate for 2015.

As at 31 December

   

2016

£m

 

 

   

2015

£m

 

 

   

2014

£m

 

 

   

2013

£m

 

 

   

2012

£m

 

 

Assets

          

Cash and balances at central banks

   102,353    49,711    39,695    45,687    86,191 

Items in the course of collection from other banks

   1,467    1,011    1,210    1,282    1,473 

Trading portfolio assets

   80,240    77,348    114,717    133,069    146,352 

Financial assets designated at fair value

   78,608    76,830    38,300    38,968    46,629 

Derivative financial instruments

   346,626    327,709    439,909    350,300    485,140 

Financial investments

   63,317    90,267    86,066    91,756    75,109 

Loans and advances to banks

   43,251    41,349    42,111    39,422    41,799 

Loans and advances to customers

   392,784    399,217    427,767    434,237    430,601 

Reverse repurchase agreements and other similar secured lending

   13,454    28,187    131,753    186,779    176,522 

Assets included in disposal groups classified held for sale

   71,454    7,364             

Other assets

   19,572    21,019    36,378    22,128    22,535 

Total assets

   1,213,126    1,120,012    1,357,906    1,343,628    1,512,351 

Liabilities

          

Deposits from banks

   48,214    47,080    58,390    55,615    77,345 

Items in the course of collection due to other banks

   636    1,013    1,177    1,359    1,587 

Customer accounts

   423,178    418,242    427,704    431,998    390,828 

Trading portfolio liabilities

   34,687    33,967    45,124    53,464    44,794 

Financial liabilities designated at fair value

   96,031    91,745    56,972    64,796    78,561 

Derivative financial instruments

   340,487    324,252    439,320    347,118    480,987 

Debt securities in issuea

   75,932    69,150    86,099    86,693    119,525 

Subordinated liabilities

   23,383    21,467    21,153    21,695    24,018 

Repurchase agreements and other similar secured borrowings

   19,760    25,035    124,479    196,748    217,178 

Liabilities included in disposal groups classified as held for sale

   65,292    5,997             

Other liabilities

   14,161    16,200    31,530    20,193    17,542 

Total liabilities

   1,141,761    1,054,148    1,291,948    1,279,679    1,452,365 

Equity

          

Called up share capital and share premium

   21,842    21,586    20,809    19,887    12,477 

Other equity instruments

   6,449    5,305    4,322    2,063     

Other reserves

   6,051    1,898    2,724    249    3,674 

Retained earnings

   30,531    31,021    31,712    33,186    34,464 

Total equity excludingnon-controlling interests

   64,873    59,810    59,567    55,385    50,615 

Non-controlling interests

   6,492    6,054    6,391    8,564    9,371 

Total equity

   71,365    65,864    65,958    63,949    59,986 

Total liabilities and equity

   1,213,126    1,120,012    1,357,906    1,343,628    1,512,351 
                          

Net asset value per ordinary share

   344p    324p    335p    331p    414p 

Tangible net asset value per share

   290p    275p    285p    283p    349p 

Number of ordinary shares of Barclays PLC (in millions)

   16,963    16,805    16,498    16,113    12,243 
                          

Year-end US Dollar exchange rate

   1.23    1.48    1.56    1.65    1.62 

Year-end Euro exchange rate

   1.17    1.36    1.28    1.20    1.23 

Year-end South African Rand exchange rate

   16.78    23.14    18.03    17.37    13.74 

 

  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 20152016 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  187195


Financial review

Income statementBalance sheet commentary

 

 

 

2014 compared to 2013

Statutory profit before tax decreased to £2,256m (2013: £2,868m), adjusted profit before tax increased 8% to £5,502m.

Statutory total income net of insurance claims decreased 9% to £25,288m including adjusting items for an own credit gain of £34m (2013: loss of £220m), a £461m (2013: £259m) gain on the US Lehman acquisition assets and a valuation revision of £935m (2013: nil) relating to changes in discount rates applied in the valuation methodology of the ESHLA loan portfolio held at fair value.

Adjusted total income net of insurance claims decreased 8% to £25,728m, reflecting a 54% reduction in Non-Core following assets and securities rundown and business disposals, a 12% reduction in the Investment Bank, driven by a decrease in the Markets business, particularly Macro, and a 9% reduction in Africa Banking, due to adverse currency movements, partially offset by growth in Barclaycard and PCB.

Net interest income increased 4% to £12,080m, with higher net interest income in PCB, the Investment Bank and Barclaycard, partially offset by reductions in Africa Banking, Head Office and Non-Core. Net interest income for PCB, Barclaycard and Africa Banking increased 4% to £11,435m driven by strong savings income growth in PCB, and volume growth in Barclaycard, partially offset by a reduction in Africa Banking due to currency movements. This resulted in a net interest margin of 4.08% (2013: 4.02%).

Credit impairment charges improved 29% to £2,168m, with a loan loss rate of 46bps (2013: 64bps). This reflected the non-recurrence of impairments on single name exposures, impairment releases on the wholesale portfolio, and improved performance in Europe withinNon-Core. Within the Core business there were lower impairments in PCB due to the improving UK economic environment, particularly impacting Corporate Banking which benefited from one-off releases and lower defaults from large UK corporate clients, and reduced impairments in the Africa Banking South Africa mortgages portfolio.

As a result, statutory net operating income for the Group decreased 7% to £23,120m. Net adjusted operating income excluding movements in own credit, the gains on US Lehman acquisition assets and the revision of the ESHLA valuation methodology decreased 5% to £23,560m.

Statutory operating expenses reduced 7% to £20,429m. This included adjusting items for an additional PPI redress provision of £1,270m, resulting in a full year net charge of £1,110m (2013: £2,000m) in relation to UK customer redress, £1,250m (2013: £173m) of provisions for ongoing investigations and litigation including Foreign Exchange and goodwill impairment of nil (2013: £79m). Adjusted operating expenses decreased 8% to £18,069m, driven by savings from strategic cost programmes, including a 5% reduction in headcount and currency movements. Total compensation costs decreased 8% to £8,891m, with the Investment Bank reducing 9% to £3,620m, reflecting reduced headcount, and lower deferred and current year bonus charges. Costs to achieve were £1,165m (2013: £1,209m) and the UK bank levy was £462m (2013: £504m).

The statutory cost:income ratio increased to 81% (2013: 79%). The adjusted cost:income ratio excluding movements in own credit, the gains on US Lehman acquisition assets, provisions for UK customer redress, the provision for ongoing investigations and litigation including Foreign Exchange, the revision of the ESHLA valuation methodology and goodwill impairment decreased to 70% (2013: 71%).

Statutory other net expense increased to £435m (2013: £24m) including an adjusting item for a loss on the sale of the Spanish business of £446m, which completed on 2 January 2015. In addition, accumulated currency translation reserve losses of approximately £100m were recognised on completion in Q115.

The tax charge was £1,411m (2013: £1,571m) on statutory profit before tax of £2,256m (2013: £2,868m), representing an effective tax rate of 62.5% (2013: 54.8%). The effective tax rate on adjusted profit before tax decreased to 31.0% (2013: 39.9%). 2013 included a charge of £440m relating to the write-down of deferred tax assets in Spain.

188  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F


Financial review

Consolidated summary balance sheet

As at 31 December

   

 

2015

£m

  

  

   

 

2014

£m

  

  

   

 

2013

£m

  

  

   

 

2012

£m

  

  

   

 

2011

£m

  

  

Assets

          

Cash and balances at central banks

   49,711     39,695     45,687     86,191     106,894  

Items in the course of collection from other banks

   1,011     1,210     1,282     1,473     1,812  

Trading portfolio assets

   77,348     114,717     133,069     146,352     152,183  

Financial assets designated at fair value

   76,830     38,300     38,968     46,629     36,949  

Derivative financial instruments

   327,709     439,909     350,300     485,140     559,010  

Available for sale investments

   90,267     86,066     91,756     75,109     68,491  

Loans and advances to banks

   41,349     42,111     39,422     41,799     48,576  

Loans and advances to customers

   399,217     427,767     434,237     430,601     437,355  

Reverse repurchase agreements and other similar secured lending

   28,187     131,753     186,779     176,522     153,665  

Other assets

   28,383     36,378     22,128     22,535     23,745  

Total assets

   1,120,012     1,357,906     1,343,628     1,512,351     1,588,680  

Liabilities

          

Deposits from banks

   47,080     58,390     55,615     77,345     90,905  

Items in the course of collection due to other banks

   1,013     1,177     1,359     1,587     969  

Customer accounts

   418,242     427,704     431,998     390,828     371,806  

Trading portfolio liabilities

   33,967     45,124     53,464     44,794     45,887  

Financial liabilities designated at fair value

   91,745     56,972     64,796     78,561     87,997  

Derivative financial instruments

   324,252     439,320     347,118     480,987     548,944  

Debt securities in issue

   69,150     86,099     86,693     119,525     129,736  

Subordinated liabilities

   21,467     21,153     21,695     24,018     24,870  

Repurchase agreements and other similar secured borrowings

   25,035     124,479     196,748     217,178     207,292  

Other liabilities

   22,197     31,530     20,193     17,542     16,315  

Total liabilities

   1,054,148     1,291,948     1,279,679     1,452,365     1,524,721  

Equity

          

Called up share capital and share premium

   21,586     20,809     19,887     12,477     12,380  

Other equity instruments

   5,305     4,322     2,063            

Other reserves

   1,898     2,724     249     3,674     3,837  

Retained earnings

   31,021     31,712     33,186     34,464     38,135  

Total equity excluding non-controlling interests

   59,810     59,567     55,385     50,615     54,352  

Non-controlling interests

   6,054     6,391     8,564     9,371     9,607  

Total equity

   65,864     65,958     63,949     59,986     63,959  

Total liabilities and equity

   1,120,012     1,357,906     1,343,628     1,512,351     1,588,680  
                          

Net tangible asset value per share

   275p     285p     283p     349p     381p  

Net asset value per ordinary share

   324p     335p     331p     414p     446p  

Number of ordinary shares of Barclays PLC (in millions)

   16,805     16,498     16,113     12,243     12,199  
                          

Year-end US Dollar exchange rate

   1.48     1.56     1.65     1.62     1.54  

Year-end Euro exchange rate

   1.36     1.28     1.20     1.23     1.19  

Year-end South African Rand exchange rate

   23.14     18.03     17.37     13.74     12.52  

Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  189


Financial review

Balance sheet commentary

2015 compared to 2014

Total assets

Total assets decreased £238bnincreased £93bn to £1,120bn.£1,213bn.

Cash and balances at central banks and items in the course of collection from other banks increased £10bn£53bn to £51bn,£102bn, as the cash contribution to the Group liquidity pool was increased.

Trading portfolio assets decreased £37bnincreased £3bn to £77bn£80bn primarily driven by balance sheet deleveraging resulting in lower securities positions, consistent with client demand inactivity and the Investment Bank, and exitingappreciation of positions in Non-Core.USD against GBP, partially offset by reduction due to firm strategy.

Financial assets designated at fair value increased by £39bn£2bn to £77bn.£79bn. During the period, reverse repurchase agreements designated at fair value have increased by £14bn as new reverse repurchase agreements in certain businesses have been designated at fair value to better align to the way the business manages the portfolio’s risk and performance. This has resulted in an increase of £44bn in this account line. Across fair value and amortised cost classifications, total reverse repurchase agreements have decreased £59bn due to a reduction in matched book trading and general firm financing due to balance sheet deleveraging. Additionally, within financial assets designated at fair value, there was a partial offset by decreases in loans and advances, equity securities, debt securities and debt securities.assets held in respect of linked liabilities.

Derivative financial instrument assets decreased £112bnincreased £19bn to £328bn,£347bn, consistent with the decreaseincrease in derivative financial instrument liabilities. This included a £79bn decrease in interest rate derivativesThe increase was primarily due to net trade reductions and increases in major forward interest rates and a £19bn decrease in foreign exchange derivatives reflectingmainly driven by an increase in trade reductions.volumes and appreciation of all major currencies against GBP.

Available for saleFinancial investments increased £4bndecreased £27bn to £90bn£63bn due to an increasea decrease in government bonds held in the liquidity pool.

Total loans and advances decreased by £29bn£5bn to £441bn£436bn driven by a £31bn decrease due to the reclassification of BAGL balances to held for sale and £9bn from the exit of other assets inNon-Core. This was offset by lending growth of £20bn, a net £20bn decrease£9bn increase in settlement and cash collateral balances, a £6bnand an £8bn increase due to the reclassification of ESHLA loans to other assets, relating to the Portuguese retail business and Italian retail banking branch network which are now held for sale and a £5bn decrease in Africa reflecting the depreciation of ZAR against GBP. This was partially offset by lending growth of £5bn in Barclaycard.recognised at amortised cost.

Reverse repurchase agreements and other similar secured lending decreased £104bn£15bn to £28bn reflecting a reduction in matched book trading and general firm financing£13bn mainly due to balance sheet deleveraging andmaturity of trades within amortised cost. New trades are designated as a result of the designation to fair value described inthrough profit and loss to better align to the financialway the business manages the portfolio’s risk and performance.

Non current assets designated at fair value comment above.classified as held for disposal increased £64bn to £71bn mainly due to the reclassification of BAGL to held for sale.

Total liabilities

Total liabilities decreased £238bnincreased £88bn to £1,054bn.

Deposits from banks decreased £11bn to £47bn primarily driven by a £9bn decrease in cash collateral due to lower derivative mark to market.£1,142bn.

Customer accounts decreased £10bnincreased £5bn to £418bn as a result£423bn mainly due to deposit growth of £38bn and an increase in settlement and cash collateral balances of £5bn offset by reclassification of £4bn£29bn of BAGL balances to other liabilities relating to the Portuguese retail business and Italian retail banking branch network which are now held for sale a £7bn reduction in settlement balances, a £3bn decrease in cash collateral due to lower derivative mark to market and a £7bnan £8bn decrease due to depreciation of ZAR. This is partially offset by £13bn growth within PCB, BarclaycardNon-Core disposals.

Repurchase agreements and Africa.other similar secured borrowing decreased £5bn to £20bn in line with Reverse repurchase agreements and other similar secured lending described above.

Trading portfolio liabilities decreased £11bnincreased £1bn to £34bn£35bn primarily driven by balance sheet deleveraging resulting in lower securities positions, consistent with client demand inand the Investment Bank, and exitingappreciation of positions in Non-Core.the USD against GBP.

Financial liabilities designated at fair value increased by £35bn£4bn to £92bn. In line with financial assets£96bn. During the period, repurchase agreements designated at fair value the designation of repurchase agreements to fair value resulted in an increase of £45bn during the year. Across fair valuehave increased by £5bn and amortised cost classifications, total repurchase agreements have decreased £54bn due to a reduction in matched book trading and general firm financing due to balance sheet deleveraging. Additionally, within financial liabilities designateddebt securities at fair value thereby £2bn, which was a partialpartially offset due by decreases in debt securities dueliabilities to reduced funding requirements.customer under investment contracts and deposits at fair value.

Derivative financial instrument liabilities decreased £115bnincreased £16bn to £324bn£340bn in line with the decreaseincrease in derivative financial assets.

Debt Securities in issue decreasedincreased by £17bn£7bn to £69bn£76bn driven primarily driven by a decreasean increase in Certificateliquidity requirements and currency revaluations partially offset by the reclassification of Deposits and Bonds and MTNs dueBAGL balances to reduced funding requirements.held for sale.

Subordinated liabilities increased £0.3bn£2bn to £21.5bn£23bn due to issuances of dated subordinated notes and FX movements due to the appreciation of USD and EUR against GBP. These were partially offset by the redemptions of dated and undated subordinated notes, and fair value hedge movements.the reclassification of BAGL balances to held for sale.

Repurchase agreementsAccruals, deferred income and other similar secured borrowingsliabilities decreased £99bn£2bn to £25bn reflecting£9bn mainly driven by a reduction in matched book trading and general firm financinginsurance contract liabilities.

Liabilities included in disposal groups classified as held for sale increased £59bn to £65bn mainly due to balance sheet deleveraging and as a resultthe reclassification of the designationBAGL to fair value described in the financial assets designated at fair value comment above.held for sale.

Shareholders’ equity

Total shareholders’ equity remained flat at £66bn.increased by £6bn to £71bn.

Share capital and share premium increased by £0.8bn£0.3bn to £22bn£21.8bn due to the issuance of shares under employee share schemes and the Barclays PLC scrip dividend programme.

Other equity instruments increased by £1.0bn£1.1bn to £5.3bn£6.4bn due to issuance of equity accounted AT1 securities to investors.

TheAs at 31 December 2016 there was a debit balance of £0.1bn (2015: £0.3bn credit) in the available for sale reserve decreasedreserve. The decrease of £0.4bn (2015: £0.2bn decrease) was due to £0.3bn driven by £0.4bn of lossesa £2.2bn gain from changes in the fair value of government bonds,on Government Bonds, predominantly held in the liquidity pool £0.1bnwhich was more than offset by £1.7bn of losses from related hedging £0.4bnand £0.9bn of net gains transferred to net profit, partially offset by £0.4bn gains from changes in fair valuemainly due to £0.6bn purchase of equity investments in Visa Europe and an £0.1bn change in insurance liabilities.by Visa Inc. A tax creditcharge of £0.1bn£28m was recognised in the period relating to these items.

The cash flow hedging reserve decreased £0.6bnincreased £0.8bn to £1.3bn£2.1bn driven by a £0.4bn decrease£1.6bn increase in the fair value of interest rate swaps held for hedging purposes as forward interest rate forward curves increased, and £0.2bnrates decreased, partially offset by decreases of £0.5bn due to gains recycled to the income statement in line with when the hedged item affects profit or loss, partially offset by aand £0.3bn tax credit of £0.1bn.charge.

The currency translation reserve remained stable as the effect of ZAR depreciating against GBP was offsetincreased by £3.7bn to £3.1bn due to the appreciation of USD and EUR against GBP.

Net asset value per share increased to 344p (2015: 324p). Net tangible asset value per share decreasedincreased to 275p (2014: 285p)290p (2015: 275p). The decreaseThis increase was primarilymainly attributable to dividends paid and a decreasefavourable movements in the cash flow hedgingcurrency translation reserve as explained.partially offset by pension remeasurement.

Capital and indebtedness

The capital and indebtedness tables with respect to Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC that are exhibited to this Annual Report onForm 20-F as Exhibits 99.1 and 99.2, respectively, are incorporated by reference into thisForm 20-F.

 

 

190196  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 20152016 Annual Report on Form 20-F  


Financial review

Analysis of results by business

All disclosures in this section are unaudited unless otherwise stated.

Segmental analysis (audited)

Analysis of adjusted results by business

                                        
    
 
 
 
 
Personal 
and 
Corporate 
Banking 
£m 
  
  
  
  
  
   
 
Barclaycard 
£m 
  
  
   
 
 
Africa 
Banking 
£m 
  
  
  
   
 

 

Investment 
Bank 

£m 

  
  

  

   
 
 
Head 
Office 
£m 
  
  
  
   
 

 

Barclays 
Core 

£m 

  
  

  

   
 
 
Barclays 
Non-Core 
£m 
  
  
  
   
 
 
 
Group 
adjusted 
results 
£m 
  
  
  
  

For the year ended 31 December 2015

                

Total income net of insurance claims

   8,726      4,927      3,574      7,572      (107)     24,692      (164)     24,528   

Credit impairment charges and other provisions

   (378)     (1,251)     (352)     (55)     –      (2,036)     (78)     (2,114)  

Net operating income

   8,348      3,676      3,222      7,517      (107)     22,656      (242)     22,414   

Operating expenses

   (4,774)     (1,927)     (2,169)     (5,362)     (246)     (14,478)     (873)     (15,351)  

UK bank levy

   (93)     (42)     (52)     (203)     (8)     (398)     (78)     (476)  

Litigation and conduct

   (109)     –      –      (107)     (14)     (230)     (148)     (378)  

Costs to achieve

   (292)     (106)     (29)     (234)     (32)     (693)     (100)     (793)  

Other (losses)/incomea

   (40)     33           –                (18)     (13)  

Profit/(loss) before tax from continuing operations

   3,040      1,634      979      1,611      (402)     6,862      (1,459)     5,403   

Total assets (£bn)

   287.2      47.4      49.9      375.9      56.4      816.9      303.1      1,120.0   
                                         

For the year ended 31 December 2014

                

Total income net of insurance claims

   8,828      4,356      3,664      7,588      242      24,678      1,050      25,728   

Credit impairment charges and other provisions

   (482)     (1,183)     (349)     14      –      (2,000)     (168)     (2,168)  

Net operating income

   8,346      3,173      3,315      7,602      242      22,678      882      23,560   

Operating expenses

   (4,951)     (1,727)     (2,244)     (5,504)     (57)     (14,483)     (1,510)     (15,993)  

UK bank levy

   (70)     (29)     (45)     (218)     (9)     (371)     (91)     (462)  

Litigation and conduct

   (54)     –      (2)     (129)     (66)     (251)     (198)     (449)  

Costs to achieve

   (400)     (118)     (51)     (374)     (10)     (953)     (212)     (1,165)  

Other income/(losses)a

   14      40      11      –      (3)     62      (51)     11   

Profit/(loss) before tax from continuing operations

   2,885      1,339      984      1,377      97      6,682      (1,180)     5,502   

Total assets (£bn)

   285.0      41.3      55.5      455.7      49.1      886.5      471.5      1,357.9   
                                         

For the year ended 31 December 2013b

                

Total income net of insurance claims

   8,723      4,103      4,039      8,596      142      25,603      2,293      27,896   

Credit impairment charges and other provisions

   (621)     (1,096)     (479)     22           (2,171)     (900)     (3,071)  

Net operating income

   8,102      3,007      3,560      8,618      145      23,432      1,393      24,825   

Operating expenses

   (5,362)     (1,752)     (2,451)     (6,141)     (103)     (15,809)     (1,929)     (17,738)  

UK bank levy

   (66)     (22)     (42)     (236)     (29)     (395)     (109)     (504)  

Litigation and conduct

   (98)     (34)     –      (31)     (10)     (173)     (96)     (269)  

Costs to achieve

   (384)     (49)     (26)     (190)     (22)     (671)     (538)     (1,209)  

Other income/(losses)a

   41      33           –           86      (110)     (24)  

Profit/(loss) before tax from continuing operations

   2,233      1,183      1,049      2,020      (15)     6,470      (1,389)     5,081   

Total assets (£bn)

   278.5      34.4      54.9      438.0      26.6      832.4      511.2      1,343.6   

Notes

aOther (losses)/income represents the share of post-tax results of associates and joint ventures, profit (or loss) on disposal of subsidiaries, associates and joint ventures, and gains on acquisitions.
b2013 adjusted total operating expenses and profit before tax have been revised to account for the reclassification of £173m of charges, relating to a US residential mortgage-related business settlement with the Federal Housing Finance Agency, to provisions for ongoing investigations and litigation including Foreign Exchange to aid comparability.

Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  191


Financial review

Analysis of results by business

All disclosures in this section are unaudited unless otherwise stated.

 

 

Adjusted results reconciliation

  

        2015              2014               2013a       

For the year ended 31 December

   
 
 

 

Group
adjusted
results

£m

  
  
  

  

   
 

 

Adjusting
items

£m

  
  

  

   
 
 

 

Group
statutory
results

£m

  
  
  

  

   
 
 

 

Group
adjusted
results

£m

  
  
  

  

  
 

 

Adjusting
items

£m

  
  

  

   
 
 

 

Group
statutory
results

£m

  
  
  

  

   
 
 

 

Group
adjusted
results

£m

  
  
  

  

   
 

 

Adjusting
items

£m

  
  

  

   
 
 

 

Group
statutory
results

£m

  
  
  

  

Total income net of insurance claims

   24,528     926     25,454     25,728    (440   25,288     27,896     39     27,935  

Credit impairment charges and other provisions

   (2,114        (2,114   (2,168       (2,168   (3,071        (3,071

Net operating income

   22,414     926     23,340     23,560    (440   23,120     24,825     39     24,864  

Operating expenses

   (15,351   330     (15,021   (15,993       (15,993   (17,738   (79   (17,817

UK bank levy

   (476        (476   (462       (462   (504        (504

Litigation and conduct

   (378   (4,009   (4,387   (449  (2,360   (2,809   (269   (2,173   (2,442

Costs to achieve

   (793        (793   (1,165       (1,165   (1,209        (1,209

Other (losses)/incomeb

   (13   (577   (590   11    (446   (435   (24        (24

Profit/(loss) before tax from continuing operations

   5,403     (3,330   2,073     5,502    (3,246   2,256     5,081     (2,213   2,868  

    

                 

Adjusted profit reconciliation

                                            

For the year ended 31 December

                                

 

2015

£m

  

  

   

 

2014

£m

  

  

   

 

2013

£m

a 

  

Adjusted profit before tax

  

     5,403       5,502       5,081  

Provisions for UK customer redress

  

   (2,772   (1,110   (2,000

Provisions for ongoing investigations and litigation including Foreign Exchange

  

   (1,237   (1,250   (173

Losses on sale relating to the Spanish, Portuguese and Italian businesses

  

   (580   (446     

Gain on US Lehman acquisition assets

  

   496     461     259  

Own credit

  

   430     34     (220

Gain on valuation of a component of the defined retirement benefit liability

  

   429            

Impairment of goodwill and other assets relating to businesses being disposed

  

   (96        (79

Revision of ESHLA valuation methodology

  

        (935     

Statutory profit before tax

  

            2,073     2,256     2,868  

    

                 

Income by geographic region (audited)

                                            
             Adjusted               Statutory       
                   

 

2015

£m

  

  

  

 

2014

£m

  

  

   

 

2013

£m

  

  

   

 

2015

£m

  

  

   

 

2014

£m

  

  

   

 

2013

£m

  

  

Continuing operations

                 

UKc

         11,730    12,357     11,681     12,160     11,456     11,461  

Europe

         2,245    2,896     4,019     2,245     2,896     4,019  

Americasd

         6,114    5,547     6,775     6,610     6,008     7,034  

Africa and Middle East

         3,801    4,152     4,137     3,801     4,152     4,137  

Asia

         638    776     1,284     638     776     1,284  

Total

                  24,528    25,728     27,896     25,454     25,288     27,935  

    

                 

Statutory income from individual countries which represent more than 5% of total income (audited)e

  

               
                                 

 

2015

£m

  

  

   

 

2014

£m

  

  

   

 

2013

£m

  

  

Continuing operations

                 

UK

              12,160     11,456     11,461  

US

              6,228     5,866     6,760  

South Africa

                                2,727     2,915     2,884  

Segmental analysis (audited)

Analysis of results by business

                              
    

Barclays 

UK 

£m 

 

 

 

   

Barclays 

International 

£m 

 

 

 

   

Head 

Office 

£m 

 

 

 

   

Barclays 

Core 

£m 

 

 

 

   

Barclays 

Non-Core 

£m 

 

 

 

   

Group 

results 

£m 

 

 

 

For the year ended 31 December 2016

            

Total income

   7,517     14,995     103     22,615     (1,164)    21,451  

Credit impairment charges and other provisions

   (896)    (1,355)    –     (2,251)    (122)    (2,373) 

Net operating income

   6,621     13,640     103     20,364     (1,286)    19,078  

Operating expenses

   (3,792)    (9,129)    (135)    (13,056)    (1,509)    (14,565) 

UK bank levy

   (48)    (284)    (2)    (334)    (76)    (410) 

Litigation and conduct

   (1,042)    (48)    (27)    (1,117)    (246)    (1,363) 

Total operating expenses

   (4,882)    (9,461)    (164)    (14,507)    (1,831)    (16,338) 

Other net (expenses)/incomea

   (1)    32     128     159     331     490  

Profit/(loss) before tax from continuing operations

   1,738     4,211     67     6,016     (2,786)    3,230  

Total assets (£bn)b

   209.6     648.5     75.2     933.4     279.7     1,213.1  
                               

For the year ended 31 December 2015

            

Total income

   7,343     13,747     338     21,428     612     22,040  

Credit impairment charges and other provisions

   (706)    (922)    –     (1,628)    (134)    (1,762) 

Net operating income

   6,637     12,825     338     19,800     478     20,278  

Operating expenses

   (3,464)    (8,029)    (272)    (11,765)    (1,958)    (13,723) 

UK bank levy

   (77)    (253)    (8)    (338)    (88)    (426) 

Litigation and conduct

   (2,511)    (1,310)    (66)    (3,887)    (500)    (4,387) 

Total operating expenses

   (6,052)    (9,592)    (346)    (15,990)    (2,546)    (18,536) 

Other net income/(expenses)a

   –     45     (106)    (61)    (535)    (596) 

Profit/(loss) before tax from continuing operations

   585     3,278     (114)    3,749     (2,603)    1,146  

Total assets (£bn)b

   202.5     532.2     59.4     794.2     325.8     1,120.0  
                               

For the year ended 31 December 2014

            

Total income

   7,436     12,908     276     20,620     1,143     21,763  

Credit impairment charges and other provisions

   (901)    (679)    –     (1,580)    (241)    (1,821) 

Net operating income

   6,535     12,229     276     19,040     902     19,942  

Operating expenses

   (4,108)    (8,170)    (70)    (12,348)    (2,611)    (14,959) 

UK bank levy

   (59)    (248)    (9)    (316)    (102)    (418) 

Litigation and conduct

   (1,108)    (1,333)    (65)    (2,506)    (301)    (2,807) 

Total operating expenses

   (5,275)    (9,751)    (144)    (15,170)    (3,014)    (18,184) 

Other net income/(expenses)a

   –     52     316     368     (813)    (445) 

Profit/(loss) before tax from continuing operations

   1,260     2,530     448     4,238     (2,925)    1,313  

Total assets (£bn)b

   198.0     596.5     61.0     855.5     502.4     1,357.9  

Notable itemsc

                

For the year ended 31 December

   

2016 

£m 

 

 

     

2015 

£m 

 

 

  

2014 

£m 

 

 

Total income

       

Own credit

   (35)      430    34  

Gain on disposal of Barclays’ share of Visa Europe Limited

   615       –    –  

Revision of ESHLA valuation methodology

   –       –    (935) 

Gains on US Lehman acquisition assets

   –       496    461  

Litigation and conduct

       

Provisions for UK customer redress

   (1,000)      (2,772)   (1,110) 

Provisions for ongoing investigations and litigation including Foreign Exchange

   –       (1,237)   (1,250) 

Operating expenses

       

Gain on valuation of a component of the defined retirement benefit liability

   –       429    –  

Impairment of goodwill and other assets relating to businesses being disposed

   –       (96)   –  

Other net expenses

       

Losses on sale relating to the Spanish, Portuguese and Italian businesses

   –       (580)   (446) 

Total notable items

   (420)      (3,330)   (3,246) 

 

Notes

a2013 adjusted total operating expenses and profit before tax have been revised to account for the reclassification of £173m of charges, relating to a US residential mortgage-related business settlement with the Federal Housing Finance Agency, to provisions for ongoing investigations and litigation including Foreign Exchange to aid comparability.
bOther (losses)net (expenses)/income represents the share ofpost-tax results of associates and joint ventures, profit (or loss) on disposal of subsidiaries, associates and joint ventures, and gains on acquisitions.
bAfrica Banking assets held for sale are reported in Head Office within Core.
cUK adjusted income excludes the impactRefer to pagesi to x and pages 212 to 215 for further information, reconciliations and calculations of an own credit gain of £430m (2014: £34m gain) and ESHLA valuation revision of nil (2014: £935m).
dAmericas adjusted income excludes the gains on US Lehman acquisition assets of £496m (2014: £461m).
eTotal income net of insurance claims based on counterparty location. Income from any single external customer does not amount to 10% or greater of the Group’s total income net of insurance claims.

192  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F


Barclays Core                    

    

 

2015

£m

  

  

   

 

2014

£m

  

  

   

 

2013

£m

  

  

Income statement information

      

Total income net of insurance claims

   24,692     24,678     25,603  

Credit impairment charges and other provisions

   (2,036   (2,000   (2,171

Net operating income

   22,656     22,678     23,432  

Operating expenses

   (14,478   (14,483   (15,809

UK bank levy

   (398   (371   (395

Litigation and conduct

   (230   (251   (173

Costs to achieve

   (693   (953   (671

Total operating expenses

   (15,799   (16,058   (17,048

Other net income

   5     62     86  

Profit before tax

   6,862     6,682     6,470  

Tax charge

   (1,749   (1,976   (1,754

Profit after tax

   5,113     4,706     4,716  

Non-controlling interests

   (610   (648   (638

Other equity interests

   (284   (194     

Attributable profit

   4,219     3,864     4,078  

Balance sheet information

               

Total assets

   £816.9bn     £886.5bn     £832.4bn  

Risk weighted assets

   £311.8bn     £326.6bn     £332.6bn  

Leverage exposure

   £906.5bn     £955.9bn     n/a  

Key facts

      

Number of employees (full time equivalent)

   123,800     123,400     129,700  

Performance measures

               

Return on average tangible equity

   10.9%     11.3%     14.4%  

Average allocated tangible equity

   £39.2bn     £34.6bn     £28.4bn  

Return on average equity

   9.0%     9.2%     11.3%  

Average allocated equity

   £47.3bn     £42.3bn     £35.9bn  

Period end allocated equity

   £47.6bn     £44.9bn     £39.0bn  

Cost:income ratio

   64%     65%     67%  

Loan loss rate (bps)

   51     49     55  

Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  193


Financial review

Analysis of results by business

Personal and

Corporate Banking

£8,726m total income

£3,040m profit before tax

2015 compared to 2014non-IFRS performance measures included throughout this document.

Profit before tax improved 5% to £3,040m driven by the continued reduction in operating expenses and lower impairment due to the benign economic environment in the UK. The reduction in operating expenses was delivered through strategic cost programmes including the restructure of the branch network and technology improvements to increase automation. Corporate performed strongly with income increasing 5% through growth in both lending and cash management.

PCB results were significantly impacted by customer redress in, and the sale of, the US Wealth business. Excluding the US Wealth business profit before tax improved 12% to £3,277m.

Total income reduced 1% to £8,726m. Excluding the US Wealth business income remained flat. Personal income decreased 3% to £4,054m driven by a reduction in fee income and mortgage margin pressure, partially offset by improved deposit margins and balance growth. Corporate income increased 5% to £3,754m due to balance growth in both lending and deposits and improved deposit margins, partially offset by reduced margins in the lending business. Wealth income reduced 15% to £918m primarily as a result of the impact of customer redress in, and the sale of, the US Wealth business. Excluding the US Wealth business income decreased 2%.

Net interest income increased 2% to £6,438m driven by growth in Corporate balances and the change in the overdraft proposition in June 2014. Net interest margin remained broadly in line at 2.99% (2014: 3.00%) as mortgage margin pressure and lower Corporate lending margins were partially offset by increased margins on Corporate and Personal deposits, and the benefit of the change in the overdraft proposition.

Net fee, commission and other income reduced 10% to £2,288m driven primarily by the impact of the change in the overdraft proposition and customer redress in the US.

Credit impairment charges improved 22% to £378m due to the benign economic environment in the UK resulting in lower default rates and charges across all businesses. The loan loss rate reduced 4bps to 17bps.

Total operating expenses reduced 4% to £5,268m reflecting savings realised from strategic cost programmes relating to restructuring of the branch network and technology improvements, and lower costs to achieve, partially offset by increased litigation and conduct charges.

Loans and advances to customers increased 1% to £218.4bn due to increased Corporate lending.

Total assets increased 1% to £287.2bn driven by the growth in loans and advances to customers.

Customer deposits increased 2% to £305.4bn primarily driven by the Personal and Corporate businesses.

RWAs were broadly flat at £120.4bn (2014: £120.2bn).

2014 compared to 2013

Profit before tax increased 29% to £2,885m driven by 3% growth in Personal income, lower impairment due to the improving economic environment in the UK, and the continued reduction in operating expenses delivered through strategic cost programmes. This resulted in a 2.2% increase in return on average equity to 11.9%. In Personal, income increased £119m alongside significant cost reductions, with the net closure of 72 branches as part of ongoing branch network optimisation, as well as investment in the customer experience across multiple channels. Corporate increased both loans and deposits, and Wealth undertook a substantial reorganisation to reduce the number of target markets while simplifying operations.

Total income increased 1% to £8,828m. Personal income increased 3% to £4,159m due to balance growth and improved savings margins, partially offset by lower fee income. Corporate income was broadly in line at £3,592m (2013: £3,620m), with balance growth in both lending and deposits, offset by margin compression. Wealth income was broadly in line at £1,077m (2013: £1,063m) driven by growth in the UK business, offset by client and market exits as part of the reorganisations in the US and EU businesses, and lower fee income.

Net interest income increased 7% to £6,298m driven by lending and deposit growth and margin improvement. Net interest margin improved 9bps to 3.00% primarily due to the launch of a revised overdraft proposition, which recognises the majority of overdraft income as net interest income as opposed to fee income, and higher savings margins within Personal and Wealth. These factors were partially offset by lower Corporate deposit margins.

Net fee, commission and other income reduced 11% to £2,530m due to the launch of the revised overdraft proposition and lower transactional income in Wealth.

Credit impairment charges improved 22% to £482m and the loan loss rate reduced 7bps to 21bps due to the improving economic environment in the UK, particularly impacting Corporate which benefited from one-off releases and lower defaults from large UK Corporate clients.

Total operating expenses reduced 7% to £5,475m reflecting savings realised from strategic cost programmes relating to restructuring of the branch network and technology improvements to increase automation.

Loans and advances to customers increased 2% to £217.0bn due to mortgage growth and Corporate loan growth.

Total assets increased 2% to £285.0bn driven by the growth in loans and advances to customers.

Customer deposits increased to £299.2bn (2013: £295.9bn).

RWAs increased 2% to £120.2bn primarily driven by growth in mortgage and Corporate lending.

194  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F


    

 

2015 

£m 

  

  

   

 

2014 

£m 

  

  

  

2013 

£m 

Income statement information

      

Net interest income

   6,438      6,298     5,893 

Net fee, commission and other income

   2,288      2,530     2,830 

Total income

   8,726      8,828     8,723 

Credit impairment charges and other provisions

   (378)     (482)    (621)

Net operating income

   8,348      8,346     8,102 

Operating expenses

   (4,774)     (4,951)    (5,362)

UK bank levy

   (93)     (70)    (66)

Litigation and conduct

   (109)     (54)    (98)

Costs to achieve

   (292)     (400)    (384)

Total operating expenses

   (5,268)     (5,475)    (5,910)

Other net (expenses)/income

   (40)     14     41 

Profit before tax

   3,040      2,885     2,233 

Attributable profit

   2,179      2,058     1,681 

Balance sheet information

             

Loans and advances to customers at amortised cost

   £218.4bn      £217.0bn     £212.2bn 

Total assets

   £287.2bn      £285.0bn     £278.5bn 

Customer deposits

   £305.4bn      £299.2bn     £295.9bn 

Risk weighted assets

   £120.4bn      £120.2bn     £118.3bn 

Key facts

             

Average LTV of mortgage lendinga

   49%      52%     56% 

Average LTV of new mortgage lendinga

   64%      65%     64% 

Client assetsb

   £112.2bn      £148.6bn     £155.3bn 

Number of branches

   1,362      1,488     1,560 

Number of employees (full time equivalent)

   45,700      45,600     50,100 

Performance measures

             

Return on average tangible equity

   16.2%      15.8%     12.7% 

Average allocated tangible equity

   £13.6bn      £13.1bn     £13.2bn 

Return on average equity

   12.1%      11.9%     9.7% 

Average allocated equity

   £18.2bn      £17.5bn     £17.3bn 

Cost:income ratio

   60%      62%     68% 

Loan loss rate (bps)

   17      21     28 

Net interest margin

   2.99%      3.00%     2.91% 

Analysis of total income

   £m      £m     £m 

Personal

   4,054      4,159     4,040 

Corporate

   3,754      3,592     3,620 

Wealth

   918      1,077     1,063 

Total income

   8,726      8,828     8,723 

Analysis of loans and advances to customers at amortised cost

             

Personal

   £137.0bn      £136.8bn     £133.8bn 

Corporate

   £67.9bn      £65.1bn     £62.5bn 

Wealth

   £13.5bn      £15.1bn     £15.9bn 

Total loans and advances to customers at amortised cost

   £218.4bn      £217.0bn     £212.2bn 

Analysis of customer deposits

             

Personal

   £151.3bn      £145.8bn     £140.5bn 

Corporate

   £124.4bn      £122.2bn     £118.5bn 

Wealth

   £29.7bn      £31.2bn     £36.9bn 

Total customer deposits

   £305.4bn      £299.2bn     £295.9bn 

Notes

aAverage LTV of mortgage lending and new mortgage lending calculated on the balance weighted basis.
bIncludes assets managed or administered by Barclays on behalf of clients including Assets Under Management (AUM), custody assets, assets under administration, and Wealth client deposits and client lending.

 

  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 20152016 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  195197


Income by geographic region (audited)

                 

For the year ended 31 December

   

2016 

£m 

 

 

     

2015 

£m 

 

 

   

2014 

£m 

 

 

Continuing operations

        

UK

   11,096       12,160     11,456  

Europe

   2,087       2,245     2,896  

Americas

   7,278       6,610     6,008  

Africa and Middle East

   419       387     627  

Asia

   571       638     776  

Total

   21,451       22,040     21,763  
        

Income from individual countries which represent more than 5% of total income (audited)a

                 

For the year ended 31 December

   

2016 

£m 

 

 

     

2015 

£m 

 

 

   

2014 

£m 

 

 

Continuing operations

        

UK

   11,096       12,160     11,456  

US

   6,876       6,228     5,866  

Note

aTotal income based on counterparty location. Income from each single external customer does not amount to 10% or greater of the Group’s total income.

198  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2016 Annual Report on Form 20-F


Financial review

Analysis of results by business

    

 

Barclaycard

 

£4,927m total income

£1,634m profit before taxBarclays Core

 

 

2015 compared to 2014

    

2016

£m

 

 

   

2015

£m

 

 

   

2014

£m

 

 

Income statement informationa

      

Total income

   22,615    21,428    20,620 

Credit impairment charges and other provisions

   (2,251   (1,628   (1,580

Net operating income

   20,364    19,800    19,040 

Operating expenses

   (13,056   (11,765   (12,348

UK bank levy

   (334   (338   (316

Litigation and conduct

   (1,117   (3,887   (2,506

Total operating expenses

   (14,507   (15,990   (15,170

Other net income/(expenses)

   159    (61   368 

Profit before tax

   6,016    3,749    4,238 

Tax charge

   (1,975   (1,479   (1,590

Profit after tax

   4,041    2,270    2,648 

Non-controlling interests

   (297   (266   (303

Other equity interests

   (394   (282   (193

Attributable profitb

   3,350    1,722    2,152 

Balance sheet information

               

Total assetsb

   £933.4bn    £794.2bn    £855.5bn 

Risk weighted assetsb

   £333.5bn    £304.1bn    £312.8bn 

Leverage exposureb

   £1,024.0bn    £879.1bn    £917.1bn 

Key facts

               

Number of employees (full time equivalent)

   73,000    78,000    75,000 

Performance measures

               

Return on equity

   7.0%    4.0%    5.6% 

Average equity

   £49.6bn    £44.7bn    £38.9bn 

Return on average allocated tangible equity

   8.4%    4.8%    7.0% 

Average allocated tangible equityb

   £41.0bn    £36.8bn    £31.4bn 

Cost: income ratio

   64%    75%    74% 

Loan loss rate (bps)

   58    45    43 

Basic earnings per share contribution

   20.5p    10.7p    13.4p 

Notable items

               

Total income

      

Own credit

   (35   430    34 

Gain on disposal of Barclays’ share of Visa Europe Limited

   615         

Gains on US Lehman acquisition assets

       496    461 

Litigation and conduct

      

Provisions for UK customer redress

   (1,000   (2,649   (1,035

Provisions for ongoing investigations and litigation including Foreign Exchange

       (1,036   (1,250

Operating expenses

      

Gain on valuation of a component of the defined retirement benefit liability

       429     

Other net expenses

      

Losses on sale relating to the Spanish, Portuguese and Italian businesses

       (112   315 

Total notable items

   (420   (2,442   (1,475

Profit before tax increased 22% to £1,634m. Strong growth was delivered throughExcluding notable items, the diversified consumer and merchant business model with asset growth across all geographies. The cost to income ratio improved to 42% (2014: 43%) whilst investment in business growth continued. The business focus on risk management was reflected in stable 30 day delinquency rates and improved loan loss rates.

Total income increased 13% to £4,927m driven primarily by business growth in US cards and the appreciation of the average USD rate against GBP.

Net interest income increased 16% to £3,520m driven by business growth. Net interest margin also improved to 9.13% (2014: 8.75%) reflecting growth in interest earning lending.

Net fee, commission and other income increased 7% to £1,407m due to growth in payment volumes, partially offset by the impact of rate capping from European Interchange Fee Regulation.

Credit impairment charges increased 6% to £1,251m primarily reflecting asset growth and updates to impairment model methodologies, partially offset by improved performance in UK Cards. Delinquency rates remained broadly stable and the loan loss rate reduced 19bps to 289bps.

Total operating expenses increased 11% to £2,075m due to continued investment in business growth, the appreciation of the average USD rate against GBP and the impact of one-off items, including a write-off of intangible assets of £55m relating to the withdrawal of the Bespoke product.

Loans and advances to customers increased 9% to £39.8bn reflecting growth across all geographies.

Total assets increased 15% to £47.4bn primarily due to the increase in loans and advances to customers.

Customer deposits increased 40% to £10.2bn driven by the deposits funding strategy in the US.

RWAs increased 4% to £41.3bn primarily driven by the growth in the US cards business.

2014 compared to 2013

Profit before tax increased 13% to £1,339m. Strong growth in 2014 was delivered through a diversified consumer and merchant business model, with customer numbers increasing to 29m (2013: 26m) and asset growth across all geographies generating a 6% increase in income. Growth has been managed on a well-controlled cost base, with the business focusing on scale through insourcing of services, consolidation of sites and digitalisation, resulting in an improvement in the cost to income ratio to 43% (2013: 45%). The business focus on risk management is reflected in stable 30 day delinquency rates and falling loan loss rates. The diversified and scaled business model has allowed the business to deliver a strongCore return on average allocated tangible equity of 16.0% (2013: 15.5%was 9.4% (2015: 11.2%).

Total income increased 6% to £4,356m reflecting growth in the UK consumer and merchant, Germany and US businesses, partially offset by depreciation of average USD against GBP.

Net interest income increased 8% to £3,044m driven by volume growth. Net interest margin decreased to 8.75% (2013: 8.99%) due to a change in product mix and the impact of promotional offers, particularly in the US, partially offset by lower funding costs.Core basic earnings per share was 23.1p (2015: 24.9p).

Net fee, commission and other income increased 3% to £1,312m due to growth in payment volumes.

Credit impairment charges increased 8% to £1,183m due to asset growth and enhanced coverage for forbearance. Delinquency rates remained broadly stable and the loan loss rate reduced 24bps to 308bps.

Total operating expenses increased 1% to £1,874m driven by higher costs to achieve of £118m (2013: £49m), partially offset by depreciation of average USD against GBP, VAT refunds, and savings from strategic cost programmes, including insourcing of services, consolidation of sites and digitalisation.

Loans and advances to customers increased 16% to £36.6bn reflecting growth across all geographies, including the impact of promotional offers and the acquisition of portfolios in the US.

Total assets increased 20% to £41.3bn due to the increase in loans and advances to customers.

Customer deposits increased 43% to £7.3bn driven by the deposits funding strategy in the US.

RWAs increased 12% to £39.9bn primarily driven by the growth in loans and advances to customers.

Notes

a
196  |  Barclays PLCRefer to pages i to x and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-Fpages 212 to 215 for further information, reconciliations and calculations ofnon-IFRS performance measures included throughout this document.


      

 

2015 

£m 

  

  

   

 

2014 

£m 

  

  

  

2013 

£m 

  
 Income statement information       
 Net interest income   3,520      3,044     2,829  
  Net fee, commission and other income   1,407      1,312     1,274   
 Total income   4,927      4,356     4,103  
  Credit impairment charges and other provisions   (1,251)     (1,183)    (1,096)  
  Net operating income   3,676      3,173     3,007   
 Operating expenses   (1,927)     (1,727)    (1,752) 
 UK bank levy   (42)     (29)    (22) 
 Litigation and conduct   –      –     (34) 
  Costs to achieve   (106)     (118)    (49)  
 Total operating expenses   (2,075)     (1,874)    (1,857) 
  Other net income   33      40     33   
 Profit before tax   1,634      1,339     1,183  
 Attributable profit   1,106      938     822  
  Balance sheet information               
 Loans and advances to customers at amortised cost   £39.8bn      £36.6bn     £31.5bn  
 Total assets   £47.4bn      £41.3bn     £34.4bn  
 Customer deposits   £10.2bn      £7.3bn     £5.1bn  
  Risk weighted assets   £41.3bn      £39.9bn     £35.7bn   
  Key facts               
 30 days arrears rates – UK cards   2.3%      2.5%     2.4%  
 30 days arrears rates – US cards   2.2%      2.1%     2.1%  
 Total number of Barclaycard consumer customers   28.2m      29.1m     26.3m  
 Total number of Barclaycard business clients   341,000      340,000     350,000  
 Value of payments processed   £293bn      £257bn     £236bn  
  Number of employees (full time equivalent)   13,100      12,200     11,000   
  Performance measures               
 Return on average tangible equity   22.3%      19.9%     19.9%  
 Average allocated tangible equity   £5.0bn      £4.7bn     £4.1bn  
 Return on average equity   17.7%      16.0%     15.5%  
 Average allocated equity   £6.3bn      £5.9bn     £5.3bn  
 Cost:income ratio   42%      43%     45%  
 Loan loss rate (bps)   289      308     332  
  Net interest margin   9.13%      8.75%     8.99%   
bAttributable profit in respect of the Africa Banking discontinued operation is reported at the Group level only. Assets held for sale, risk weighted assets, leverage exposure and allocated tangible equity are reported in Head Office within Core.

 

  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 20152016 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  197


Financial review

Analysis of results by business

Africa Banking

£3,574m total income net

of insurance claims

£979m profit before tax

2015 compared to 2014

Profit before tax decreased 1% to £979m and total income net of insurance claims decreased 2% to £3,574m. The ZAR depreciated against GBP by 10% based on average rates and by 28% based on the closing exchange rate in 2015. The deterioration was a significant contributor to the movement in the reported results of Africa Banking and therefore the discussion of business performance below is based on results on a constant currency basis.

Results on a constant currency basis

Profit before tax increased 11% to £979m reflecting an increase of 18% in operations outside South Africa and an increase of 9% in South Africa despite the challenging macroeconomic environment. Good growth was delivered in the focus areas of Retail and Business Banking (RBB) and corporate banking in South Africa, and Wealth, Investment Management and Insurance (WIMI), whilst performance in the corporate business outside South Africa was impacted by higher impairment.

Total income net of insurance claims increased 7% to £3,574m.

Net interest income increased 8% to £2,066m driven by higher average customer advances in Corporate and Investment Banking (CIB) and strong growth in customer deposits in RBB. Net interest margin increased 11bps to 6.06% primarily due to improved asset margins in retail in South Africa.

Net fee, commission and other income increased 5% to £1,668m reflecting increased transactional income in RBB, partially offset by lower investment banking income in South Africa.

Credit impairment charges increased 11% to £352m driven by an increase in single name exposures and additional coverage on performing loans. The loan loss rate increased 16bps to 109bps.

Total operating expenses increased 5% to £2,250m reflecting inflationary impacts, partially offset by savings from strategic cost programmes including the restructure of the branch network, technology improvements and property rationalisation.

Loans and advances to customers increased 8% to £29.9bn driven by strong CIB growth.

Total assets increased 14% to £49.9bn primarily due to the increase in loans and advances to customers.

Customer deposits increased 11% to £30.6bn reflecting strong growth in the RBB business.

RWAs increased 8% to £33.9bn primarily due to an increase in corporate lending.

2014 compared to 2013

On a reported basis, total income net of insurance claims decreased 9% to £3,664m and profit before tax decreased 6% to £984m. Based on average rates, the ZAR depreciated against GBP by 18% in 2014. The deterioration was a significant contributor to the movement in the reported results of Africa Banking. The discussion of business performance below is based on results on a constant currency basis unless otherwise stated.

Results on a constant currency basis

Profit before tax increased 13% to £984m, reflecting good growth in Corporate and Investment Banking (CIB) and Retail and Business Banking (RBB). CIB experienced strong income growth, driven by the corporate banking business outside South Africa and improved investment banking trading performance across Africa. Continued progress was made on the RBB South Africa turnaround strategy, with increased net fee and commission income growth in the second half of the year, and Wealth, Investment Management and Insurance (WIMI) delivered strong growth outside South Africa due to expansion initiatives.

Total income net of insurance claims increased 7% to £3,664m.

Net interest income increased 9% to £2,093m, primarily driven by higher average loans and advances to customers in CIB and growth in customer deposits in RBB in South Africa. Net interest margin on a reported basis increased 14bps to 5.95% following the rise in the South African benchmark interest rate and the favourable impact of higher deposit margins, partially offset by lower rates outside South Africa.

Net fee, commission and other income increased 4% to £1,741m mainly reflecting increased RBB transactions in South Africa.

Credit impairment charges decreased 14% to £349m and on a reported basis the loan loss rate improved 35bps to 93bps, driven by reduced impairments in the South Africa mortgages portfolio and business banking, partially offset by increased impairments in the card portfolio.

Total operating expenses increased 8% to £2,342m largely reflecting inflationary increases, resulting in higher staff costs and increased investment spend on key initiatives, including higher costs to achieve of £51m (2013: £23m), partially offset by savings from strategic cost programmes.

Loans and advances to customers increased 5% to £35.2bn primarily driven by strong corporate banking growth across Africa in CIB and limited growth in RBB, mainly due to a modest reduction in the South Africa mortgages portfolio.

Total assets increased 5% to £55.5bn due to the increase in loans and advances to customers.

Customer deposits increased 5% to £35.0bn reflecting strong growth in the South African RBB business.

RWAs increased 1% to £38.5bn on a reported basis, primarily driven by growth in loans and advances to customers, partially offset by the depreciation of ZAR against GBP.

198  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F199


    

    

    

 

                          Constant currencya   
        

 

2015 

£m 

  

  

   

 

2014 

£m 

  

  

    

2013 

£m 

      

2015 

£m 

    

2014 

£m 

  
 Income statement information                    
 Net interest income     2,066      2,093       2,245      2,066     1,908  
  Net fee, commission and other income     1,668      1,741       1,979       1,668     1,583   
 Total income     3,734      3,834       4,224      3,734     3,491  
  Net claims and benefits incurred under insurance contracts     (160)     (170)      (185)      (160)    (155)  
 Total income net of insurance claims     3,574      3,664       4,039      3,574     3,336  
  Credit impairment charges and other provisions     (352)     (349)      (479)      (352)    (317)  
  Net operating income     3,222      3,315       3,560       3,222     3,019   
 Operating expenses     (2,169)     (2,244)      (2,451)     (2,169)    (2,051) 
 UK bank levy     (52)     (45)      (42)     (52)    (45) 
 Litigation and conduct     –      (2)      –      –     (2) 
  Costs to achieve     (29)     (51)      (26)      (29)    (46)  
 Total operating expenses     (2,250)     (2,342)      (2,519)     (2,250)    (2,144) 
  Other net income          11                 10   
 Profit before tax     979      984       1,049      979     885  
 Attributable profit     332      360       356      332     320  
  Balance sheet information                               
 Loans and advances to customers at amortised cost     £29.9bn      £35.2bn       £34.9bn      £29.9bn     £27.6bn  
 Total assets     £49.9bn      £55.5bn       £54.9bn      £49.9bn     £43.8bn  
 Customer deposits     £30.6bn      £35.0bn       £34.6bn      £30.6bn     £27.6bn  
  Risk weighted assets     £33.9bn      £38.5bn       £38.0bn       £33.9bn     £31.3bn   
  Key facts                               
 Average LTV of mortgage portfoliob     58.4%      59.9%       62.3%           
 Average LTV of new mortgage lendingb     74.7%      74.8%       74.9%           
  Number of employees (full time equivalent)     44,400      45,000       45,900               
  Performance measures                               
 Return on average tangible equity     11.7%      12.9%       11.3%           
 Average allocated tangible equity     £2.8bn      £2.8bn       £3.2bn           
 Return on average equity     8.7%      9.3%       8.1%           
 Average allocated equity     £3.8bn      £3.9bn       £4.4bn           
 Cost:income ratio     63%      64%       62%           
 Loan loss rate (bps)     109      93       128           
  Net interest margin     6.06%      5.95%       5.81%               

 

Barclays UK

 

 

    

2016

£m

 

 

   

2015

£m

 

 

   

2014

£m

 

 

Income statement informationa

      

Net interest income

   6,048    5,973    5,839 

Net fee, commission and other income

   1,469    1,370    1,597 

Total income

   7,517    7,343    7,436 

Credit impairment charges and other provisions

   (896   (706   (901

Net operating income

   6,621    6,637    6,535 

Operating expenses

   (3,792   (3,464   (4,108

UK bank levy

   (48   (77   (59

Litigation and conduct

   (1,042   (2,511   (1,108

Total operating expenses

   (4,882   (6,052   (5,275

Other net expenses

   (1        

Profit before tax

   1,738    585    1,260 

Attributable profit/(loss)

   828    (47   852 

Balance sheet information

               

Loans and advances to customers at amortised cost

   £166.4bn    £166.1bn    £165.3bn 

Total assets

   £209.6bn    £202.5bn    £198.0bn 

Customer deposits

   £189.0bn    £176.8bn    £168.3bn 

Risk weighted assets

   £67.5bn    £69.5bn    £69.3bn 

Key facts

               

Average LTV of mortgage portfoliob

   48%    49%    52% 

Average LTV of new mortgage lendingb

   63%    64%    65% 

Number of branches

   1,305    1,362    1,488 

Barclays mobile banking customers

   5.7m    4.7m    3.6m 

30 day arrears rate – Barclaycard Consumer UK

   1.9%    2.3%    2.5% 

Number of employees (full time equivalent)

   36,000    38,800    38,300 

Performance measures

               

Return on equity

   6.4%    (0.2)%    6.6% 

Average equity

   £13.4bn    £13.7bn    £13.1bn 

Return on average allocated tangible equitya

   9.6%    (0.3%   9.5% 

Average allocated tangible equitya

   £8.9bn    £9.3bn    £9.1bn 

Cost: income ratio

   65%    82%    71% 

Loan loss rate (bps)

   52    42    53 

Loan: deposit ratio

   88%    94%    98% 

Net interest margin

   3.62%    3.56%    n/a 

Notable Items

               

Total income

      

Gain on disposal of Barclays’ share of Visa Europe Limited

   151         

Litigation and conduct

      

Provisions for UK customer redress

   (1,000   (2,431   (1,067

Operating expenses

      

Gain on valuation of a component of the defined retirement benefit liability

       296     

Total notable items

   (849   (2,135   (1,067

Excluding notable items, the Barclays UK return on average allocated tangible equity was 19.3% (2015: 21.1%).

Notes

aConstant currency results are calculated by converting ZAR results into GBP using the average 2015 exchange rateRefer to pagesi to x and pages 212 to 215 for the income statementfurther information, reconciliations and the closing 2015 exchange rate for the balance sheet to eliminate the impactcalculations of movement in exchange rates between the two periods.non-IFRS performance measures included throughout this document.
bAverage LTV of mortgage portfolio and new mortgage lending calculated on the balance weighted basis.

 

200  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 20152016 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  199


Financial review

Analysis of results by business

    

 

Investment

Analysis of Barclays UK

   

2016

£m

 

 

  

2015

£m

 

 

  

2014

£m

 

 

Analysis of total income

             

Personal Banking

   3,891   3,714   3,788 

Barclaycard Consumer UK

   2,022   2,065   2,078 

Wealth, Entrepreneurs & Business Banking

   1,604   1,564   1,570 

Total income

   7,517   7,343   7,436 

 

Analysis of credit impairment charges and other provisions

             

Personal Banking

   (183  (194  (211

Barclaycard Consumer UK

   (683  (488  (592

Wealth, Entrepreneurs & Business Banking

   (30  (24  (98

Total credit impairment charges and other provisions

   (896  (706  (901

 

Analysis of loans and advances to customers at amortised cost

             

Personal Banking

   £135.0bn   £134.0bn   £133.8bn 

Barclaycard Consumer UK

   £16.5bn   £16.2bn   £15.8bn 

Wealth, Entrepreneurs & Business Banking

   £14.9bn   £15.9bn   £15.7bn 

Total loans and advances to customers at amortised cost

   £166.4bn   £166.1bn   £165.3bn 

 

Analysis of customer deposits

             

Personal Banking

   £139.3bn   £131.0bn   £124.5bn 

Barclaycard Consumer UK

          

Wealth, Entrepreneurs & Business Banking

   £49.7bn   £45.8bn   £43.8bn 

Total customer deposits

   £189.0bn   £176.8bn   £168.3bn 

Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2016 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  201


    

    

 

£7,572m total income

£1,611m profit before tax

2016 compared to 2015

Profit before tax increased £1,153m to £1,738m reflecting lower provisions for UK customer redress. Profit before tax excluding notable itemsa decreased 5% to £2,587m driven by an increase in credit impairment charges following the management review of the cards portfolio impairment modelling, partially offset by a reduction in total operating expenses.

Total income, including a gain on disposal of Barclays’ share of Visa Europe Limited recognised in Personal Banking and Wealth, Entrepreneurs & Business Banking (WEBB), increased 2% to £7,517m.

Total income excluding notable items was broadly in line at £7,366m (2015: £7,343m). Personal Banking income increased 1% to £3,762m driven by improved deposit margins and balance growth, partially offset by lower mortgage margins. Barclaycard Consumer UK income decreased 2% to £2,022m primarily as a result of the European Interchange Fee Regulation, which came into full effect from December 2015, offset by balance growth and gains from debt sales. WEBB income increased 1% to £1,582m reflecting improved margins and deposit growth, partially offset by reduced transactional fee income. Net interest income increased 1% to £6,048m due to balance growth and deposit pricing initiatives, partially offset by lower mortgage margins.

Net interest margin increased 6bps to 3.62% reflecting higher margins on deposits, partially offset by lower mortgage margins. Net fee, commission and other income decreased 4% to £1,318m due to the impact of the European Interchange Fee Regulation in Barclaycard Consumer UK, which came into full effect from December 2015, and reduced fee and commission income in WEBB.

Credit impairment charges increased 27% to £896m due to a £200m charge in Q316 following the management review of the cards portfolio impairment modelling. The 30 day and 90 day arrears rates on the cards portfolio improvedyear-on-year to 1.9% (2015: 2.3%) and 0.9% (2015: 1.2%) respectively.

Total operating expenses, including provisions for UK customer redress of £1,000m (2015: £2,431m), reduced 19% to £4,882m. Total operating expenses excluding notable items reduced 1% to £3,882m reflecting savings realised from strategic cost programmes, relating to restructuring of the branch network and technology improvements, offset by structural reform programme implementation costs.

The cost: income ratio was 65% (2015: 82%), RoE was 6.4% (2015: (0.2%)) and RoTE was 9.6% (2015: (0.3%))

The cost: income ratio excluding notable items was 53% (2015: 53%) and RoTE excluding notable items was 19.3% (2015: 21.1%).

Loans and advances to customers were stable at £166.4bn (December 2015: £166.1bn).

Total assets increased £7.1bn to £209.6bn primarily reflecting an increase in the allocated liquidity pool.

Customer deposits increased 7% to £189.0bn primarily driven by higher balances in Personal Banking and WEBB.

RWAs reduced £2.0bn to £67.5bn primarily driven by changes in the mortgages credit risk model.

2015 compared to 2014

Profit before tax decreased 54% to £585m. Profit before tax excluding notable items increased 17% to £1,611m. Income remained flat despite reductions£2,720m driven by the continued reduction in RWAs. Focusing on its home marketsoperating expenses and lower credit impairment charges. The reduction in operating expenses was delivered through strategic cost programmes including the restructure of the branch network and technology improvements to increase automation.

Total income reduced 1% to £7,343m.

Personal Banking income decreased 2% to £3,714m due to a reduction in fee income and mortgage margin pressure, partially offset by improved deposit margins and balance growth.

Barclaycard Consumer UK income decreased 1% to £2,065m primarily due to the impact of the European Interchange Fee Regulation, partially offset by balance growth.

WEBB income remained broadly flat at £1,564m (2014: £1,570m) as balance growth was offset by margin pressure.

Net interest income increased 2% to £5,973m due to balance growth, deposit pricing initiatives and the impact of changes in the overdraft proposition in June 2014, partially offset by mortgage margin pressure. Net fee, commission and other income decreased 14% to £1,370m due to the change in the overdraft proposition and the impact of the European Interchange Fee Regulation.

Credit impairment charges decreased 22% to £706m primarily due to the benign economic environment in the UK resulting in lower default rates and charges across all businesses. The loan loss rate reduced 11bps to 42bps.

Total operating expenses increased 15% to £6,052m, including provisions for UK customer redress of £2,431m (2014: £1,067m). Total operating expenses excluding notable items reduced 7% to £3,917m reflecting savings realised from strategic cost programmes including the restructure of the branch network and technology improvements.

Loans and advances to customers remained broadly flat at £166.1bn (2014: £165.3bn).

Total assets increased 2% to £202.5bn.

Customer deposits increased 5% to £176.8bn driven by higher balances in Personal Banking and WEBB.

RWAs were broadly flat at £69.5bn (2014: £69.3bn).

Note

aRefer to pagesi to x and pages 212 to 215 for further information, reconciliations and calculations ofnon-IFRS performance measures included throughout this document.

202  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2016 Annual Report on Form 20-F


Financial review

Analysis of results by business

Barclays International

    

2016

£m

 

 

   

2015

£m

 

 

   

2014

£m

 

 

Income statement information

      

Net interest income

   4,512    4,324    3,874 

Net trading income

   4,580    3,782    3,533 

Net fee, commission and other income

   5,903    5,641    5,501 

Total income

   14,995    13,747    12,908 

Credit impairment charges and other provisions

   (1,355   (922   (679

Net operating income

   13,640    12,825    12,229 

Operating expenses

   (9,129   (8,029   (8,170

UK bank levy

   (284   (253   (248

Litigation and conduct

   (48   (1,310   (1,333

Total operating expenses

   (9,461   (9,592   (9,751

Other net income

   32    45    52 

Profit before tax

   4,211    3,278    2,530 

Attributable profit

   2,412    1,758    926 
    

Balance sheet information

               

Loans and advances to banks and customers at amortised costb

   £211.3bn    £184.1bn    £193.6bn 

Trading portfolio assets

   £73.2bn    £61.9bn    £87.3bn 

Derivative financial instrument assets

   £156.2bn    £111.5bn    £149.6bn 

Derivative financial instrument liabilities

   £160.6bn    £119.0bn    £157.3bn 

Reverse repurchase agreements and other similar secured lending

   £13.4bn    £24.7bn    £62.9bn 

Financial assets designated at fair value

   £62.3bn    £46.8bn    £5.7bn 

Total assets

   £648.5bn    £532.2bn    £596.5bn 

Customer depositsc

   £216.2bn    £185.6bn    £188.2bn 

Risk weighted assets

   £212.7bn    £194.8bn    £201.7bn 
    

Key facts

      

Number of employees (full time equivalent)

   36,900    39,100    36,600 
    

Performance measures

               

Return on equity

   8.8%    6.6%    3.5% 

Average equity

   £28.2bn    £27.1bn    £27.1bn 

Return on average allocated tangible equitya

   9.8%    7.2%    3.8% 

Average allocated tangible equitya

   £25.5bn    £24.9bn    £25.0bn 

Cost: income ratio

   63%    70%    76% 

Loan loss rate (bps)

   63    49    35 

Loan: deposit ratio

   86%    88%    90% 

Net interest margind

   3.98%    3.80%    n/a 
    

Notable items

      

Total income

               

Gains on US Lehman acquisition assets

       496    461 

Gain on disposal of Barclays’ share of Visa Europe Limited

   464         

Litigation and conduct

      

Provisions for UK customer redress

       (218   32 

Provisions for ongoing investigations and litigation including Foreign Exchange

       (984   (1,250

Operating expenses

      

Gain on valuation of a component of the defined retirement benefit liability

       133     

Total notable items

   464    (573   (757

Excluding notable items, the Barclays International return on average allocated tangible equity was 8.0% (2015: 9.5%).

Notes

aRefer to pagesi to x and pages 212 to 215 for further information, reconciliations and calculations ofnon-IFRS performance measures included throughout this document.
bAs at 31 December 2016 loans and advances included £185.9bn (December 2015: £162.6bn) of loans and advances to customers (including settlement balances of £19.5bn (December 2015: £18.5bn) and cash collateral of £30.1bn (December 2015: £24.8bn)), and £25.4bn (December 2015: £21.5bn) of loans and advances to banks (including settlement balances of £1.7bn (December 2015: £1.6bn) and cash collateral of £6.3bn (December 2015: £5.7bn)). Loans and advances to banks and customers in respect of Consumer, Cards and Payments were £39.7bn (December 2015: £32.1bn).
cAs at 31 December 2016 customer deposits included settlement balances of £16.6bn (December 2015: £16.3bn) and cash collateral of £20.8bn (December 2015: £15.9bn).
dBarclays International margins have been restated to include interest earning lending within the investment banking business.

Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2016 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  203


Analysis of Barclays International   

2016

£m

 

 

   

2015

£m

 

 

   

2014

£m

 

 

Corporate and Investment Bank

      

Income statement information

               

Analysis of total income

      

Credit

   1,185    824    792 

Equities

   1,790    1,912    1,956 

Macro

   2,304    2,108    1,950 

Markets

   5,279    4,844    4,698 

Banking fees

   2,397    2,087    2,115 

Corporate lending

   1,195    1,361    1,268 

Transactional banking

   1,657    1,663    1,594 

Banking

   5,249    5,111    4,977 

Other

   5    495    476 

Total income

   10,533    10,450    10,151 

Credit impairment charges and other provisions

   (260)    (199)    (87) 

Total operating expenses

   (7,624)    (7,929)    (8,279) 

Profit before tax

   2,650    2,322    1,787 

 

Balance sheet information

               

Risk weighted assets

   £178.6bn    £167.3bn    £175.1bn 

 

Performance measures

               

Return on equity

   5.8%    5.1%    1.8% 

Average equity

   £23.2bn    £23.1bn    £23.1bn 

Return on average allocated tangible equitya

   6.1%    5.4%    1.9% 

Average allocated tangible equitya

   £21.9bn    £21.9bn    £22.0bn 

    

      
    

2016

£m

 

 

   

2015

£m

 

 

   

2014

£m

 

 

Consumer, Cards and Payments

      

Income statement information

               

Total income

   4,462    3,297    2,757 

Credit impairment charges and other provisions

   (1,095)    (723)    (592) 

Total operating expenses

   (1,837)    (1,663)    (1,472) 

Profit before tax

   1,561    956    743 

 

Balance sheet information

               

Loans and advances to banks and customers at amortised cost

   £39.7bn    £32.1bn    £29.7bn 

Customer deposits

   £50.0bn    £41.8bn    £37.9bn 

Risk weighted assets

   £34.1bn    £27.5bn    £26.6bn 

 

Key facts

               

30 day arrears rates - Barclaycard US

   2.6%    2.2%    2.1% 

Total number of Barclaycard business clients

   355,000    341,000    340,000 

Value of payments processed

   £296bn    £271bn    £236bn 

 

Performance measures

               

Return on equity

   23.1%    15.3%    13.2% 

Average equity

   £5.0bn    £4.0bn    £4.0bn 

Return on average allocated tangible equitya

   31.4%    20.2%    17.8% 

Average allocated tangible equitya

   £3.6bn    £3.0bn    £3.0bn 

Notes

aRefer to pagesi to x and pages 212 to 215 for further information, reconciliations and calculations of non-IFRS performance measured included throughout this document.

204  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2016 Annual Report on Form 20-F


Financial review

Analysis of results by business

2016 compared to 2015

Profit before tax increased 28% to £4,211m, including the gain on disposal of Barclays’ share of Visa Europe Limited. Profit before tax excluding notable itemsa decreased 3% to £3,747m driven by an 11% increase in total operating expenses, and a 47% increase in impairment, partially offset by a 10% increase in total income.

Total income increased 9% to £14,995m including the gain on disposal of Barclays’ share of Visa Europe Limited, as well as the factors outlined below.

Total income excluding notable items increased 10% to £14,531m, including the appreciation of average USD and EUR against GBP, with Consumer, Cards and Payments income increasing 21% to £3,998m and Corporate and Investment Bank (CIB) income increasing 6% to £10,533m.

Markets income increased 9% to £5,279m. Credit income increased 44% to £1,185m driven by strong performance in fixed income flow credit, which benefitted from increased market volatility and client demand. Equities income decreased 6% to £1,790m with lower client activity in Asia and the simplification of the EMEA business, partially offset by improved performance in cash, derivatives and financing in H216. Macro income increased 9% to £2,304m driven by increased activity post the EU referendum decision and US elections.

Banking income increased 3% to £5,249m. Banking fees income increased 15% to £2,397m driven by higher debt underwriting and advisory fees, partially offset by lower equity underwriting fees. Corporate lending reduced 12% to £1,195m due to losses on fair value hedges and thenon-recurrence ofone-offwork-out gains recognised in Q215. Transactional banking was broadly flat at £1,657m (2015: £1,663m) as income from higher deposit balances was offset by margin compression.

Consumer, Cards and Payments income increased 35% to £4,462m driven by growth the gain on disposal of Barclays’ share of Visa Europe Limited, across all key businesses and the appreciation of average USD and EUR against GBP.

Credit impairment charges increased 47% to £1,355m including the appreciation of average USD and EUR against GBP. CIB credit impairment charges increased 31% to £260m driven by the impairment of a number of single name exposures. Consumer, Cards and Payments credit impairment charges increased 51% to £1,095m primarily driven by balance growth, a change in portfolio mix and a £120m charge in Q316 following a management review of the cards portfolio impairment modelling.

Total operating expenses decreased 1% to £9,461m, resulting from lower litigation and conduct charges. This decrease was mostly offset by the appreciation of average USD against GBP, an additional charge in Q416 relating to the 2016 compensation awards, higher restructuring costs, £150m of which related to reducing the real estate footprint in Q316, and higher structural reform programme implementation costs including those relating to the incorporation of the US Intermediate Holding Company (IHC) on 1 July 2016.

The cost: income ratio was 63% (2015: 70%), RoE was 8.8% (2015: 6.6%) and RoTE was 9.8% (2015: 7.2%).

The cost: income ratio excluding notable items was 65% (2015: 64%) and RoTE excluding notable items was 8.0% (2015: 9.5%).

Loans and advances to banks and customers at amortised cost increased £27.2bn to £211.3bn with CIB increasing £19.7bn to £171.7bn due to increased lending and cash collateral and the appreciation of USD and EUR against GBP. Consumer, Cards and Payments increased £7.6bn to £39.7bn driven by appreciation of USD and EUR against GBP and growth in Barclaycard US, including the acquisition of the JetBlue credit card portfolio.

Trading portfolio assets increased £11.3bn to £73.2bn due to an increase in client activity and appreciation of major currencies against GBP.

Derivative financial instrument assets and liabilities increased £44.7bn to £156.2bn and £41.6bn to £160.6bn respectively, due to the appreciation of USD and EUR against GBP and decreases in forward interest rates.

Financial assets designated at fair value increased £15.5bn to £62.3bn and reverse repurchase agreements and other similar lending decreased £11.3bn to £13.4bn. Since 2015, new reverse repurchase agreements in certain businesses have been designated at fair value to better align to the way the business continued to build on existing strengths inmanages the face of challenging market conditions. Costs decreasedportfolio’s risk and performance. On a net basis reverse repos have increased by £4.2bn as a result of improved cost efficiencyincreased matched book trading.

Customer deposits increased £30.6bn to £216.2bn, with CIB increasing £22.6bn to £166.3bn primarily driven by increases in deposits cash collateral and the appreciation of USD and EUR against GBP. Consumer, Cards and Payments increased £8.2bn to £50.0bn driven by balance growth in Barclaycard US and Private Banking, and the appreciation of USD and EUR against GBP.

RWAs increased £17.9bn to £212.7bn, due to the appreciation of USD against GBP, and business growth, including the acquisition of the JetBlue credit card portfolio in Consumer, Cards and Payments.

Note

aRefer to pages i to x and pages 212 to 215 for further information, reconciliations and calculations ofnon-IFRS performance measures included throughout this document.

Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2016 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  205


2015 compared to 2014

Profit before tax increased 30% to £3,278m. Profit before tax excluding notable itemsa increased 17% to £3,851m driven by a reduction6% increase in costs to achieve.

Total income, was broadly flat at £7,572m (2014: £7,588m), including the appreciation of the average USD rateand EUR against GBP.GBP, with Consumer, Cards and Payments income increasing 20% to £3,297m and CIB income increasing 3% to £9,954m.

Markets income increased 3% to £4,844m. Credit income increased 4% to £824m driven by a higher contribution from credit flow trading and financing businesses. Equities income decreased 2% to £1,912m driven by lower client activity in EMEA equity derivatives, partially offset by higher performance in cash equities. Macro income increased 8% to £2,108m due to higher income in rates and currency products reflecting increased market volatility and client activity.

Banking income was flat at £2,529m (2014: £2,528m). Investmentincreased 3% to £5,111m. Banking fee income reduced 1% to £2,093m£2,087m driven by lower equity underwriting fees, partially offset by higher financial advisory and debt underwriting fees. Lending incomeCorporate lending increased 7% to £436m (2014: £417m) due to lower losses on fair value hedges.

Markets income was broadly flat at £5,030m (2014: £5,040m). Credit income decreased 5% to £995m£1,361m driven by lower income in securitised products as a result of the accelerated strategic repositioning in thisfair value losses on hedges and increased asset class and lower income from distressed credit. This was partially offset by higher income as a result of client driven credit flow trading. Equities income decreased 2% to £2,001m driven by lower client activity in EMEA in equity derivatives, partially offset by higher performance in cash equities. Macrobalances. Transactional banking income increased 4% to £2,034m£1,663m primarily due to cash management income driven by higher balances with improved margins.

Consumer, Cards and Payments income increased 20% to £3,297m, driven by business growth in ratesBarclaycard US and currency products reflecting increased market volatility and client activity.the appreciation of average USD against GBP.

Credit impairment charges of £55mincreased to £922m (2014: release of £14m) arose from£679m). Consumer, Cards and Payments credit impairment charges increased £131m to £723m primarily reflecting asset growth and updates to impairment model methodologies. CIB credit impairment charges increased £112m to £199m driven by a number of single name exposures.

Total operating expenses decreased 5%2% to £5,906m reflecting£9,592m, resulting from a 5% reduction in compensation costs to £3,423m and lower costs to achieve.restructuring costs. Further cost savings were achieved from strategic cost programmes, including business restructuring, operational streamlining and real estate rationalisation, partially offset by the appreciation of the average USD rate against GBP.

The cost: income ratio was 70% (2014: 76%), RoE was 6.6% (2014: 3.5%) and RoTE was 7.2% (2014: 3.8%)

Cost: income ratio excluding notable items was 64% (2014: 69%) and RoTE excluding notable items was 9.5% (2014: 7.0%).

Loans and advances to banks and customers decreased £9.5bn to £184.1bn as CIB decreased £11.8bn to £152.0bn due to a decrease in settlement and cash collateral balances, partially offset by an increase of £2.4bn in Consumer, Cards and Payments to £32.1bn reflecting growth in Barclaycard US.

Derivative financial instrument assets and liabilities decreased 25%£38.1bn to £114.3bn£111.5bn and 24%£38.3bn to £122.2bn£119.0bn respectively, due to net trade reduction and increases in major interest rate forward curves.

Trading portfolio assets decreased 31%£25.4bn to £65.1bn primarily£61.9bn driven by balance sheet deleveraging, resulting in lower securities positions.

TotalFinancial assets designated at fair value increased £41.1bn to £46.8bn and reverse repurchase agreements and other similar lending decreased 18%£38.2bn to £375.9bn due£24.7bn. Since 2015, new reverse repurchase agreements in certain businesses have been designated at fair value to better align to the way the business manages the portfolio’s risk and performance. On a decreasenet basis reverse repos have increased by £0.2bn as a result of increased matched book trading.

Customer deposits decreased £2.6bn to £185.6bn, with CIB decreasing £6.6bn to £143.7bn primarily driven by decreases in derivative financial instrument assets, trading portfolio assets, and settlement and cash collateral balances, within loanspartially offset by an increase of £3.9bn to £41.8bn in Consumer, Cards and advances to banks and customers.Payments, driven by the deposits funding strategy in Barclaycard US.

RWAs decreased 12%£6.9bn to £108.3bn mainly£194.8bn, within which CIB RWAs decreased £7.8bn to £167.3bn primarily due to a reduction in securities and derivatives, and improved RWA efficiency.

2014 compared to 2013

Profit before tax decreased 32% to £1,377m. The Investment Bank continues to make progress on its origination-led strategy, building on leading positions in its home markets of the UK and US, while driving cost savings and RWA efficiencies. The business is focused on a simpler product set in Markets, which will enable it to build on existing strengths and adapt to regulatory developments. The business continued to execute this strategy despite difficult market-making conditions and continued low levels of activity. This has particularly impacted credit and interest rate products, resulting in an income decline across the Markets businesses. This decline was partially offset by improved banking performance and significant cost reductions as a result of savings from strategic cost programmes.

Total income decreased 12% to £7,588m, including the impact of depreciation of average USD against GBP. Banking income increased 2% to £2,528m. Investment Banking fee income decreased 2% to £2,111m driven by lower debt underwriting fees, partially offset by higher financial advisory and equity underwriting fees. Lending income increased to £417m (2013: £325m) due to lower fair value losses on hedges and higher net interest and fee income.

Markets income decreased 18% to £5,040m. Credit decreased 17% to £1,044m driven by reduced volatility and client activity, with lower income in distressed credit, US high yield and US high grade products. Equities decreased 11% to £2,046m due to declines in cash equities and equity derivatives, reflecting lower client volumes, partially offset by higher income in equity financing. Macro decreased 24% to £1,950m reflecting subdued client activity in rates and lower volatility in currency markets in the first half of the year.

Net credit impairment release of £14m (2013: £22m) arose from a number of single name exposures.

Total operating expenses decreased 6% to £6,225m reflecting a 9% reduction in compensation costs to £3,620m, savings from strategic cost programmes, including business restructuring, continued rationalisation of the technology platform and real estate infrastructure, and depreciation of average USD against GBP. This was partially offset by increased costs to achieve of £374m (2013: £190m) and litigation and conduct charges.

Loans and advances to customers and banks increased 2% to £106.3bn driven by an increase of £0.9bn to £27.5bn in cash collateralConsumer, Cards and lending, partially offset by a reduction in settlement balances due to reduced activity.

Derivative financial instrument assets and liabilities increased 40% to £152.6bn and 38% to £160.6bn respectively, driven by decreases in predominantly GBP, USD and EUR forward interest rates, and strengthening of USD against major currencies.

Reverse repurchase agreements and other similar secured lending decreased 18% to £64.3bn due to decreased match book trading and funding requirements.

Total assets increased 4% to £455.7bn due to an increase in derivative financial instrument assets, partially offset by a decrease in reverse repurchase agreements and other similar secured lending, and financial assets at fair value.

RWAs decreased 2% to £122.4bnPayments, primarily driven by risk reductionsthe growth in the trading book, partially offset by the implementation of a revised credit risk model for assessing counterparty probability of default.US cards business.

 

Note

aRefer to pagesi to x and pages 212 to 215 for further information, reconciliations and calculations ofnon-IFRS performance measures included throughout this document.

 

200206  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 20152016 Annual Report on Form 20-F  


Financial review

Analysis of results by business

            

 

 

Head Office

 

    

 

2015

£m

  

  

   

 

2014

£m

  

  

   

 

2013

£m

  

  

  Income statement information      
  Net interest income   588     647     393  
  Net trading income   3,859     3,735     4,969  
  Net fee, commission and other income   3,125     3,206     3,234  
  Total income   7,572     7,588     8,596  
  Credit impairment (charges)/releases and other provisions   (55   14     22  
  Net operating income   7,517     7,602     8,618  
  Operating expenses   (5,362   (5,504   (6,141
  UK bank levy   (203   (218   (236
  Litigation and conduct   (107   (129)     (31
  Costs to achieve   (234   (374   (190
  Total operating expenses   (5,906   (6,225   (6,598
  Profit before tax   1,611     1,377     2,020  
  Attributable profit   804     397     1,308  
  Balance sheet information               
  Loans and advances to banks and customers at amortised costa   £92.2bn     £106.3bn     £104.5bn  
  Trading portfolio assets   £65.1bn     £94.8bn     £96.6bn  
  Derivative financial instrument assets   £114.3bn     £152.6bn     £108.7bn  
  Derivative financial instrument liabilities   £122.2bn     £160.6bn     £116.6bn  
  Reverse repurchase agreements and other similar secured lendingb   £25.5bn     £64.3bn     £78.2bn  
  Financial assets designated at fair valueb   £48.1bn     £8.9bn     £16.5bn  
  Total assets   £375.9bn     £455.7bn     £438.0bn  
  Risk weighted assets   £108.3bn     £122.4bn     £124.4bn  
    
  Key facts      
  Number of employees (full time equivalent)   19,800     20,500     22,600  
  Performance measures               
  Return on average tangible equity   6.0%     2.8%     8.5%  
  Average allocated tangible equity   £13.9bn     £14.6bn     £15.3bn  
  Return on average equity   5.6%     2.7%     8.2%  
  Average allocated equity   £14.8bn     £15.4bn     £15.9bn  
  Cost:income ratio   78%     82%     77%  
    
  Analysis of total income               
  Investment banking fees   2,093     2,111     2,160  
  Lending   436     417     325  
  Banking   2,529     2,528     2,485  
  Credit   995     1,044     1,257  
  Equities   2,001     2,046     2,297  
  Macro   2,034     1,950     2,580  
  Markets   5,030     5,040     6,134  
  Banking & Markets   7,559     7,568     8,619  
  Other   13     20     (23
  Total income   7,572     7,588     8,596  
    

2016

£m

 

 

   

2015

£m

 

 

   

2014

£m

 

 

Income statement information

      

Net interest income

   (183   (305   (216

Net fee, comission and other income

   286    643    492 

Net operating income

   103    338    276 

Operating expenses

   (135   (272   (70

UK bank levy

   (2   (8   (9

Litigation and conduct

   (27   (66   (65

Total operating expenses

   (164   (346   (144

Other net income/(expenses)

   128    (106   316 

Profit/(loss) before tax

   67    (114   448 

Attributable profit

   110    11    374 

Balance sheet information

               

Total assetsb

   £75.2bn    £59.4bn    £61.0bn 

Risk weighted assetsb

   £53.3bn    £39.7bn    £41.8bn 

Key facts

               

Number of employees (full time equivalent)

   100    100    100 

Performance measuresa

               

Average allocated tangible equity

   £6.5bn    £2.6bn    £(2.7bn

Notable items

               

Total income

      

Own credit

   (35   430    34 

Litigation and conduct

      

Provisions for ongoing investigations and litigation including Foreign Exchange

       (52    

Other net expenses

      

Losses on sale relating to the Spanish business

       (112   315 

Total notable items

   (35   266    349 

 

2016 compared to 2015

Profit before tax was £67m (2015: loss of £114m). Profit before tax excluding notable itemsa improved from a loss of £380m to a profit of £102m.

Net operating income decreased to £103m (2015: £338m) reflecting a reduction in own credit.

Net operating income excluding notable items increased to £138m (2015: loss of £92m) primarily due to changes in net income from treasury operations.

Total operating expenses reduced to £164m (2015: £346m) reflecting reduced litigation and conduct charges and a reduction in structural reform implementation costs now allocated to the businesses.

Other net income increased to £128m (2015: (£106m)) due to the non recurrence of notable items and the recycling of the currency translation reserve on the disposal of the Southern European cards business.

Total assets increased £15.8bn to £75.2bn primarily driven by the appreciation of ZAR against GBP.

RWAs increased £13.6bn to £53.3bn primarily driven by the appreciation of ZAR against GBP and the reallocation of operational risk RWAs fromNon-Core associated with exited businesses and assets.

 

2015 compared to 2014

Profit before tax reduced £562m to a loss of £114m. Profit before tax excluding the impact of notable items moved from a profit of £99m in 2014 to a loss of £380m in 2015.

Net operating income increased to £338m (2015: £276m) due to an increase in own credit, partially offset by the factors outlined below.

Net operating income excluding notable items reduced to a loss of £92m (2014: income of £242m) primarily reflecting the net expense from Treasury operations and thenon-recurrence of gains in 2014, including net gains from foreign exchange recycling arising from the restructure of Group subsidiaries.

Total operating expenses excluding notable items increased £202m to £346m primarily due to costs relating to the implementation of the structural reform programme.

Total assets decreased £1.6bn to £59.4bn and RWAs decreased £2.1bn to £39.7bn primarily due to the depreciation of ZAR against GBP.

 

Notes

aAs at 31 December 2015 loansRefer to pagesi to x and advancespages 212 to 215 for further information, reconciliations and calculations of non-IFRS performance measures included £74.8bn (2014: £86.4bn) of loans and advances to customers (including settlement balances of £18.6bn (2014: £25.8bn) and cash collateral of £24.8bn (2014: £32.2bn)) and loans and advances to banks of £17.4bn (2014: £19.9bn) (including settlement balances of £1.6bn (2014: £2.7bn) and cash collateral of £5.7bn (2014: £6.9bn)).throughout this document.
bDuring 2015, new reverse repurchase agreementsIncludes Africa Banking assets held for sale of £65.1bn (December 2015: £47.9bn) and other similar secured lending in certain businesses have been designated at fair value to better align to the way the business manages the portfolio’s risk and performance. Included within financialweighted assets designated at fair value are reverse repurchase agreements designated at fair value of £42.5bn (2014: £3.4bn)£42.3bn (December 2015: £31.7bn).

 

  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 20152016 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  201207


BarclaysNon-Core

   

2016

£m

 

 

  

2015

£m

 

 

  

2014

£m

 

 

Income statement information

   

Net interest income

  160   615   590 

Net trading income

  (1,703)   (706)   (590) 

Net fee, commission and other income

  379   703   1,143 

Total income

  (1,164)   612   1,143 

Credit impairment charges and other provisions

  (122)   (134)   (241) 

Net operating income

  (1,286)   478   902 

Operating expenses

  (1,509)   (1,958)   (2,611) 

UK bank levy

  (76)   (88)   (102) 

Litigation and conduct

  (246)   (500)   (301) 

Total operating expenses

  (1,831)   (2,546)   (3,014) 

Other net income/(expenses)

  331   (535)   (813) 

Loss before tax

  (2,786)   (2,603)   (2,925) 

Attributable loss

  (1,916)   (2,418)   (2,659) 

 

Balance sheet information

            

Loans and advances to banks and customers at amortised costb

  £51.1bn   £51.8bn   £70.7bn 

Derivative financial instrument assets

  £188.7bn   £213.7bn   £288.9bn 

Derivative financial instrument liabilities

  £178.6bn   £202.1bn   £280.6bn 

Reverse repurchase agreements and other similar secured lending

  £0.1bn   £3.1bn   £50.7bn 

Financial assets designated at fair value

  £14.5bn   £21.4bn   £25.5bn 

Total assets

  £279.7bn   £325.8bn   £502.4bn 

Customer depositsc

  £12.5bn   £20.9bn   £30.8bn 

Risk weighted assets

  £32.1bn   £54.3bn   £89.1bn 

Leverage exposure

  £101.5bn   £148.7bn   £316.4bn 
             

Key facts

            

Number of employees (full time equivalent)

  5,500   9,900   15,000 

 

Performance measures

            

Average equity

  £7.8bn   £11.2 bn   £16.0bn 

Average allocated tangible equitya

  £7.8bn   £10.9bn   £15.6bn 

Loan loss rate (bps)

  22   23   39 

 

Notable items

            

Total income

   

Revision of ESHLA valuation methodology

        (935) 

Litigation and conduct

   

Provisions for UK customer redress

     (123)   (75) 

Provisions for ongoing investigations and litigation including Foreign Exchange

     (201)    

Operating expenses

   

Impairment of goodwill and other assets relating to businesses being disposed

     (96)    

Other net expenses

   

Losses on sale relating to the Spanish business

   �� (468)   (761) 

Total notable items

     (888)   (1,771) 

 

Analysis of total income

            

Businesses

  485   1,139   1,503 

Securities and loans

  (638)   (350)   (318) 

Derivatives

  (1,011)   (177)   (42) 

Total income

  (1,164)   612   1,143 

Notes
aRefer to pagesi to x and pages 212 to 215 for further information, reconciliations and calculations ofnon-IFRS performance measures included throughout this document.
bAs at 31 December 2016 loans and advances included £38.5bn (December 2015: £40.4bn) of loans and advances to customers (including settlement balances of £0.1bn (December 2015: £0.3bn) and cash collateral of £17.3bn (December 2015: £19.0bn)), and £12.6bn (December 2015: £11.4bn) of loans and advances to banks (including settlement balances of £0.1bn (December 2015: £nil) and cash collateral of £12.1bn (December 2015: £10.1bn)).
cAs at 31December 2016 customer deposits included settlement balances of £0.1bn (December 2015: £0.2bn) and cash collateral of £11.9bn (December 2015: £12.3bn).

208  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2016 Annual Report on Form 20-F


Financial review

Analysis of results by business

    

 

 

Head Office

20152016 compared to 20142015

The lossLoss before tax increased to £2,786m (2015: £2,603m). Loss before tax excluding notable itemsa increased to £2,786m (2015: £1,715m) driven by reduced income and increased losses resulting from continued progress on the rundown of £402m (2014: profitDerivatives, Businesses and Securities and loans, partially offset by lower operating expenses and higher other net income primarily from business and country exits.

Total income reduced £1,776m to a net expense of £97m) was primarily£1,164m.

Businesses income reduced £654m to £485m due to the net expense from Treasury operationsimpact of lower income following the completion of the sale of a number of income generating businesses and costsfees paid to Head Office relating to the implementationtermination of the structural reform programme.internal hedging and funding positions no longer required.

Net operatingSecurities and loans income decreased £288m to ana net expense of £107m (2014:£638m primarily driven by the impact of restructuring the ESHLA portfolio, thenon-recurrence of a £91m provision release relating to a litigation matter in Q115 and portfolio rundown. Fair value losses on the ESHLA portfolio were £393m (2015: £359m).

Derivatives income reduced £834m to a net expense of £242m) primarily£1,011m principally reflecting the net expense from Treasury operations andcosts of running down the non-recurrence of gainsportfolio.

Credit impairment charges improved 9% to £122m due to lower impairment charges in 2014, including net gains from foreign exchange recycling arising from the restructure of Group subsidiaries.European businesses.

Total operating expenses increased £158mimproved 28% to £300m primarily due to costs relating to£1,831m reflecting the implementationnon recurrence of notable items and the structural reform programme and an increase in costs to achieve, partially offset by reduced litigation and conduct charges.

Total assets increased £7.3bn to £56.4bn due to an increase in the element of the liquidity buffer held centrally.

2014 compared to 2013

Profit before tax of £97m improved from a loss of £15m in 2013.

Net operating income increased to £242m (2013: £145m) predominantly due to net gains of £88m from foreign exchange recycling arising from the restructure of Group subsidiaries.factors outlined below.

Total operating expenses decreased £22mexcluding notable items improved 14% to £142m mainly due to£1,831m reflecting cost savings from ceasing certain investment banking activities in a reduction in UK bank levy to £9m (2013: £29m), the non-recurrencenumber of costs associated with the Salz Reviewcountries and the establishmentcompletion of the strategic cost programme in the prior year,sale of a number of businesses, partially offset by increased litigationa c.£200m increase in restructuring charges, which totalled c.£400m.

Other net income of £331m (2015: net expense £535m) included gains on the sale of Barclays Risk Analytics and conduct charges.Index Solutions, the Asia wealth and investment management business and the Southern European cards business, partially offset by the loss on sale of the French retail, business of £455m.

Loans and advances to banks and customers at amortised cost decreased £0.7bn to £51.1bn due to the sale of the Asia wealth and investment management business, and the rundown and exit of historical investment bank assets, partially offset by the recognition of £8bn of ESHLA loans at amortised cost, following the restructure of LOBO loan terms.

Total assets increased £22.5bndecreased £46.1bn to £49.1bn reflecting an increase in£279.7bn due to lower derivative financial instrument assets which decreased £25.0bn to £188.7bn whilst derivative financial instrument liabilities decreased £23.5bn to £178.6bn mainly on continued rundown of the Group liquidity poolderivative back book.

Leverage exposure decreased £47bn to £101bn due to reduced potential future exposure on derivatives and trading portfolio assets.

RWAs decreased £10.6bnreduced £22.2bn to £5.6bn,£32.1bn despite the appreciation of USD and EUR against GBP, including receipt of certain US Lehman acquisition assetsa £10bn reduction in Derivatives, a £3bn reduction in Securities and loans, a £4bn reduction in Businesses RWAs, and a £6.9bn revision£4bn reallocation of operational risk RWAs to 2013 RWAs following full implementation of CRD IV reporting, as disclosed in the 30 June 2014 Results Announcement.

Negative average allocated equity reduced to £0.4bn (2013: £7.0bn) as the Group moved towards the allocation rate of 10.5% fully loaded CRD IV CET1 ratio during the year, resulting in a reduction in excess equity allocated to businesses.

Head Office associated with business disposals and exits.

    

 

2015

£m

  

  

   

 

2014

£m

  

  

   

 

2013

£m

  

  

 Income statement information      
 Total income   (107   242     142  
 Credit impairment releases and other provisions             3  
 Net operating (expense)/income   (107   242     145  
 Operating expenses   (246   (57   (103
 UK bank levy   (8   (9   (29
 Litigation and conduct   (14   (66   (10
 Cost to achieve   (32   (10   (22
 Total operating expenses   (300   (142   (164
 Other net income/(expense)   5     (3   4  
 (Loss)/profit before tax   (402   97     (15
 Attributable (loss)/profit   (202   112     (89
 Balance sheet information               
 Total assets   £56.4bn     £49.1bn     £26.6bn  
 Risk weighted assets   £7.7bn     £5.6bn     £16.2bn  
 Key facts               
 Number of employees (full time equivalent)   800     100     100  

202  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F


Barclays Non-Core

(£164m) total income net of

insurance claims

£1,459m loss before tax

2015 compared to 2014

Loss before tax increased 24%decreased to £1,459m£2,603m (2014: £2,925m). Loss before tax decreased excluding notable items £561m to £1,715m driven by continued progress in the exit of Businesses, Securities and loans, and Derivative assets. RWAs reduced £29bn£34.8bn to £47bn£54.3bn including a £10bn reduction in Derivatives, £9bn£13bn reduction in Securities and loans, £11bn reduction in Derivatives, and BusinessBusinesses reductions fromdriven by the completion of the sales of the Spanish and UK Secured Lending businesses. The announced sales of the Portuguese and Italian retail businesses, which are due to be completed in H116, are expected to result in a further £2.5bn reduction in RWAs.

Total income netreduced £531m to £612m due to the non recurrence of insurance claimsnotable items, partially offset by the reduction in income outlined below.

Total income excluding notable items reduced £1,466m to an expense of £164m (2014: income of £1,050m).£612m. Businesses income reduced 44%24% to £613m due to£1,139m driven by the impact of lower income following the completion of the sale of businesses including the Spanish business, Barclays Wealth Americas and the sale and rundown of legacy portfolio assets.UK Secured Lending. Securities and loans income reduceddecreased 10% to ana net expense of £481m (2014: income of £117m)£350m primarily driven by fair value losses and funding costsof £359m (2014: £156m) on the ESHLA portfolio, the active rundown of securities, exit of historical investment bank businesses and the non-recurring gain on the sale of the UAE retail bankingbusinesses and portfolio in 2014. Fair value losses on the ESHLA portfolio were £359m (2014: £156m), of which £156m was in Q415, as gilt swap spreads widened. Derivativesrundown. Derivative income reduced 76%£135m to an expense of £296m reflecting£177m due to the active rundown of the portfolios and funding costs.portfolios.

Credit impairment charges improved 54%44% to £78m£134m due to higher recoveries in Europe and the sale of the Spanish business.

Total operating expenses improved 40%16% to £1,199m£2,546m reflecting savings from the sales of the Spanish UAE retail, commodities,business, Barclays Wealth Americas, and several principal investment businesses, as well as a reduction in costs to achieve, and conduct and litigation charges.businesses.

Loans and advances to banks and customers reduced 28%at amortised cost decreased 27% to £45.9bn£51.8bn due to the reclassification of £5.5bn of loans relating toassets on the announced salessale of the Portuguese and Italian businesses to assets held for sale, and the rundown and exit of historical investment bank assets.

Derivative financial instrument assets and liabilities decreased 26% to £210.3bn£213.7bn and 28% to £198.7bn£202.1bn respectively, largely as a result of trade reduction.

Total assets decreased 36%£176.6bn to £303.1bn£325.8bn due to reduced reverse repurchase agreements and other similar secured lending, and lower derivative financial instrument assets.

Leverage exposure reduced £156.2bndecreased £167.7bn to £121.3bn£148.7bn primarily in reverse repurchase agreements, potential future exposure on derivatives and trading portfolio assets.

RWAs decreased £28.7bnreduced £34.8bn to £46.6bn and period end equity decreased £3.8bn to £7.2bn primarily£54.3bn driven by the sale of the Spanish business, the active rundown of legacy structured and credit products, and derivative trade unwinds.

2014 compared to 2013

Loss before tax reduced 15% to £1,180m as Non-Core made good progress in exiting and running down certain businesses and securities during 2014. This drove a £34.6bn reduction in RWAs, making substantial progress towards the Non-Core target reductions as outlined in the Group Strategy Update on 8 May 2014.

Total income net of insurance claims reduced 54% to £1,050m. Businesses income reduced 27% to £1,101m due to the sale and rundown of legacy portfolio assets and the rationalisation of product offerings within the European retail business. Securities and loans income reduced 82% to £117m primarily driven by the active rundown of securities, fair value losses on wholesale loan portfolios and the non-recurrence of prior year favourable market movements on certain securitised products, partially offset by a £119m gain on the sale of the UAE retail banking portfolio. Derivatives income reduced £321m to an expense of £168m reflecting the funding costs of the traded legacy derivatives portfolio and the non-recurrence of fair value gains in the prior year.

Credit impairment charges improved 81% to £168m due to the non-recurrence of impairments on single name exposures, impairment releases on the wholesale portfolio as a result of confirmation on Spanish government subsidies in the renewable energy sector and improved performance in Europe, primarily due to improved recoveries and delinquencies in the mortgages portfolio.

Total operating expenses improved 25% to £2,011m reflecting savings from strategic cost programmes, including lower headcount and the results of the previously announced European retail restructuring. In addition, costs to achieve reduced 61% to £212m.

Loans and advances to banks and customers reduced 22% to £63.9bn due to a £12.9bn reclassification of loans relating to the Spanish business, which was held for sale, and a reduction in Europe retail driven by a run-off of assets.

Trading portfolio assets reduced 48% to £15.9bn due to the sale and rundown of legacy portfolio assets.

Derivative financial instrument assets and liabilities increased 19% to £285.4bn and 21% to £277.1bn respectively, driven by decreases in major forward interest rates.

Total assets decreased 8% to £471.5bn with reduced reverse repurchase agreements and other similar secured lending, and trading portfolio assets, due to the rundown of legacy portfolio assets, offset by an increase in derivative financial instrument assets. BCBS 270 leverage exposure reduced to £277bn.

RWAs decreased £34.6bn to £75.3bn and average allocated equity decreased £3.7bn to £13.4bn, reflecting the disposal of businesses, rundown and exit of securities and loans, and derivative risk reductions.

Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  203


Financial review

Analysis of results by business

 

Barclays Non-Core – continued

    

 

2015

£m

  

  

   

 

2014

£m

  

  

   

 

2013

£m

  

  

 Income statement information      
 Net interest income   249     214     307  
 Net trading income   (805   120     1,327  
 Net fee, commission and other income   765     1,026     983  
 Total income   209     1,360     2,617  
 Net claims and benefits incurred under insurance contracts   (373   (310   (324
 Total income net of insurance claims   (164   1,050     2,293  
 Credit impairment charges and other provisions   (78   (168   (900
 Net operating (expense)/income   (242   882     1,393  
 Operating expenses   (873   (1,510   (1,929
 UK bank levy   (78   (91   (109
 Litigation and conduct   (148   (198   (96
 Costs to achieve   (100   (212   (538
 Total operating expenses   (1,199   (2,011   (2,672
 Other net expenses   (18   (51   (110
 Loss before tax   (1,459   (1,180   (1,389
 Attributable loss   (1,523   (1,085   (1,783
 Balance sheet information               
 Loans and advances to banks and customers at amortised costb   £45.9bn     £63.9bn     £81.9bn  
 Derivative financial instrument assets   £210.3bn     £285.4bn     £239.3bn  
 Derivative financial instrument liabilities   £198.7bn     £277.1bn     £228.3bn  
 Reverse repurchase agreements and other similar secured lendingc   £2.4bn     £49.3bn     £104.7bn  
 Financial assets designated at fair valuec   £20.1bn     £22.2bn     £19.5bn  
 Total assets   £303.1bn     £471.5bn     £511.2bn  
 Customer deposits   £14.9bn     £21.6bn     £29.3bn  
 Risk weighted assets   £46.6bn     £75.3bn     £109.9bn  
 Leverage exposure   £121.3bn     £277.5bn     n/a  
 Key facts               
 Number of employees (full time equivalent)   5,600     8,900     9,900  
 Performance measures               
 Return on average tangible equityd   (5.1%   (5.4%   (9.3%
 Average allocated tangible equity   £8.9bn     £13.2bn     £16.8bn  
 Return on average equityd   (4.1%   (4.1%   (7.0%
 Average allocated equity   £9.0bn     £13.4bn     £17.1bn  
 Period end allocated equity   £7.2bn     £11.0bn     £15.1bn  
 Analysis of total income net of insurance claims   £m     £m     £m  
 Businesses   613     1,101     1,498  
 Securities and loans   (481   117     642  
 Derivatives   (296   (168   153  
 Total income net of insurance claims   (164   1,050     2,293  

NotesNote

a2013 adjusted total operating expensesRefer to pagesi to x and profit before tax have been revisedpages 212 to account215 for the reclassificationfurther information, reconciliations and calculations of £173m of charges, relating to a US residential mortgage-related business settlement with the Federal Housing Finance Agency, to provisions for onging investigations and litigations including Foreign Exchange to aid comparability.
bAs at 31 December 2015 loans and advancesnon-IFRS performance measures included £35.2bn (2014: £51.6bn) of loans and advances to customers (including settlement balances of £0.2bn (2014: £1.6bn) and cash collateral of £19.0bn (2014: £22.1bn)) and loans and advances to banks of £10.6bn (2014: £12.3bn) (including settlement balances of nil (2014: £0.3bn) and cash collateral of £10.1bn (2014: £11.3bn)).
cDuring 2015, new reverse repurchase agreements and other similar secured lending in certain businesses have been designated at fair value to better align to the way the business manages the portfolio’s risk and performance. Included within financial assets designated at fair value are reverse repurchase agreements designated at fair value of £1.4bn (2014: £1.0bn).
dReturn on average equity and average tangible equity for Barclays Non-Core represents its impact on the Group. This does not represent the return on average tangible equity of the Non-Core business.

204  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F


Returns and equity

by business

Returns on average equity and average tangible equity are calculated as profit for the year attributable to ordinary equity holders of the parent (adjusted for the tax credit recorded in reserves in respect of coupons on other equity instruments) divided by average allocated equity or average allocated tangible equity for the period as appropriate, excluding non-controlling and other equity interests for businesses, apart from Africa Banking (see below). Allocated equity has been calculated as 10.5% of CRD IV fully loaded risk weighted assets for each business, adjusted for CRD IV fully loaded capital deductions, including goodwill

and intangible assets, reflecting the assumptions the Group uses for capital planning purposes. The excess of allocated Group equity, caused by the fully loaded CRD IV CET1 ratio being below 10.5% on average in the period, is allocated as negative equity to Head Office. Allocated tangible equity is calculated using the same method, but excludes goodwill and intangible assets.

For Africa Banking, the equity used for return on average equity is Barclays’ share of the statutory equity of the BAGL entity (together with that of the Barclays Egypt and Zimbabwe businesses which remain outside the BAGL corporate entity), as well as Barclays’ goodwill on acquisition of these businesses. The tangible equity for return on tangible equity uses the same basis, but excludes both the Barclays’ goodwill on acquisition and the goodwill and intangibles held within the BAGL statutory equity.

 Return on average tangible equity               
    

 

2015

%

  

  

   

 

2014

%

  

  

   

 

2013

%

c 

  

 Personal and Corporate Banking   16.2     15.8     12.7  
 Barclaycard   22.3     19.9     19.9  
 Africa Banking   11.7     12.9     11.3  
 Investment Bank   6.0     2.8     8.5  
 Barclays Core operating businesses   12.7     10.8     11.6  
 Head Office impacta   (1.8   0.5     2.8  
 Barclays Core   10.9     11.3     14.4  
 Barclays Non-Core impacta   (5.1   (5.4   (9.3
 Barclays Group adjusted totald   5.8     5.9     5.1  
 Barclays Group statutory total   (0.7   (0.3   1.2  
                
 Return on average equity               
    

 

2015

%

  

  

   

 

2014

%

  

  

   

 

2013

%

c 

  

 Personal and Corporate Banking   12.1     11.9     9.7  
 Barclaycard   17.7     16.0     15.5  
 Africa Banking   8.7     9.3     8.1  
 Investment Bank   5.6     2.7     8.2  
 Barclays Core operating businesses   10.4     8.9     9.7  
 Head Office impacta   (1.4   0.3     1.6  
 Barclays Core   9.0     9.2     11.3  
 Barclays Non-Core impacta   (4.1   (4.1   (7.0
 Barclays Group adjusted totald   4.9     5.1     4.3  
 Barclays Group statutory total   (0.6   (0.2   1.0  
                
 Profit/(loss) attributable to ordinary equity holders of the parentb               
    

 

2015

£m

  

  

   

 

2014

£m

  

  

   

 

2013

£m

c 

  

 Personal and Corporate Banking   2,203     2,075     1,681  
 Barclaycard   1,114     943     822  
 Africa Banking   332     360     356  
 Investment Bank   829     415     1,308  
 Head Office   (202   112     (89
 Barclays Core   4,276     3,905     4,078  
 Barclays Non-Core   (1,510   (1,072   (1,783
 Barclays Group adjusted totald   2,766     2,833     2,295  
 Barclays Group statutory total   (394   (174   540  

Notes

aReturn on average equity and average tangible equity for Head Office and Barclays Non-Core represents their impact on Barclays Core and the Group respectively. This does not represent the return on average equity and average tangible equity of Head Office or the Non-Core business.
bProfit for the period attributable to ordinary equity holders of the parent includes the tax credit recorded in reserves in respect of interest payments on other equity instruments.
c2013 adjusted total operating expenses and profit before tax have been revised to account for the reclassification of £173m of charges, relating to a US residential mortgage-related business settlement with the Federal Housing Finance Agency, to provisions for ongoing investigations and litigation including Foreign Exchange to aid comparability.
dAdjusted Barclays Group profit excludes the impact of own credit of £430m gain (2014: £34m gain), impairment of goodwill and other assets relating to businesses being disposed of £96m (2014: nil), provisions for UK customer redress of £2,772m (2014: £1,110m), gain on US Lehman acquisition assets of £496m (2014:£461m), provisions for ongoing investigations and litigation including Foreign Exchange of £1,237m (2014: £1,250m), loss on sale relating to the Spanish, Portuguese and Italian businesses of £580m (2014: £446m), Education, Social Housing, and Local Authority (ESHLA) revision of valuation methodology of nil (2014: £935m), and gain on valuation of a component of the defined retirement benefit liability £429m gain (2014: nil).throughout this document.

 

  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 20152016 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  205209


  Discontinued Operation: Africa Banking

On 1 March 2016, Barclays announced its intention to sell down the Group’s interest in BAGL. This sell down is intended to be to a level which will permit deconsolidation from an accounting and regulatory perspective, subject to shareholder and regulatory approvals as required. On 5 May 2016 Barclays executed the first tranche of the sell down of the Group’s interest in BAGL with the sale of 12.2% of BAGL’s issued share capital. Following completion of the sale, Barclays’ holding represents 50.1% of BAGL’s issued share capital.

The terms of the transitional services arrangements and related separation payments have been agreed with BAGL and submitted to relevant regulators as part of a request for approval for Barclays to sell down to below a 50% holding. These proposed separation terms include contributions totalling £765m, of which £27.5m was paid in 2016, with the remainder to be paid over the period through to completion of any initial sale of Barclays’ stake in BAGL to below 50%. The majority of these funds would be used by BAGL to separate from the Barclays group, including termination of the existing Master Services Agreement, making investments in branding, operations and technology, and covering separation related expenses. In addition, Barclays will contribute an amount equivalent to 1.5% of BAGL’s market capitalisation to a new Broad-Based Black Economic Empowerment scheme, equating to approximately £130m at

the 31 December 2016 share price and ZAR exchange rate, and expects to incur some additional operating expenses in respect of delivering the separation of the businesses under the transitional services arrangements.

These proposed contributions have been taken into account in assessing whether any impairment of the BAGL disposal group was required in the Group’s balance sheet. No impairment of the BAGL disposal group was required at 31 December 2016, as the market value of BAGL less estimated costs to sell at the year-end share price and ZAR exchange rate was £8.4bn which was greater than the carrying asset value of BAGL at that date of £7.3bn, plus the proposed costs of separation referred to above.

The Africa Banking business meets the requirements for presentation as a discontinued operation. As such, these results have been presented as two lines on the face of the Group income statement, representing the profit after tax and non-controlling interest in respect of the discontinued operation. Were the fair value of BAGL, based on its quoted share price, less estimated costs to sell, to fall below the carrying amount of the net assets of BAGL including goodwill on acquisition, a resulting impairment to Barclays’ stake in BAGL would also be recognised through these lines.

      

2016 

£m 

 

 

     

2015 

£m 

 

 

    

2014 

£m 

Income statement information

            

Net interest income

     2,169       1,950      1,994 

Net fee, commission and other income

     1,577       1,464      1,532 

Total income

     3,746       3,414      3,526 

Credit impairment charges and other provisions

     (445)      (353)     (347)

Net operating income

     3,301      3,061      3,179 

Operating expenses

     (2,345)      (2,091)     (2,199)

UK bank levy

     (65)      (50)     (44)

Litigation and conduct

     –       –      (2)

Total operating expenses

     (2,410)      (2,141)     (2,245)

Other net income

                10 

Profit before tax

     897       927      944 

Profit after tax

     591       626      653 

Attributable profit

     189       302      334 

Balance sheet information

     £bn       £bn      £bn 

Total assetsa

     65.1       47.9      53.7 

Risk weighted assetsa

     42.3       31.7      36.7 

Key facts

                   

Period end – ZAR/GBP

     16.78       23.14      18.03 

Average – ZAR/GBPb

     20.04       19.57      17.84 

Barclays Africa Group Limited share price (ZAR)

     168.69       143.49      182.00 

Barclays Africa Group Limited number of shares (m)

     848       848      848 

Number of employees (full time equivalent)

     40,800       41,500      42,300 

Notes

aAfrica Banking assets held for sale and RWAs are reported in Head Office within Core.
bThe average rate is derived from daily spot rates during the year.

210  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2016 Annual Report on Form 20-F


Financial review

Analysis of results by business

    

 

 

Returns and equity by business – continuedMargins analysis

 

 Average allocated tangible equity             
   

        2015  

£bn  

   

 

        2014

£bn

  

  

   

 

        2013

£bn

  

  

 Personal and Corporate Banking  13.6     13.1     13.2  
 Barclaycard  5.0     4.7     4.1  
 Africa Banking  2.8     2.8     3.2  
 Investment Bank  13.9     14.6     15.3  
 Head Officea  3.9     (0.6   (7.4
 Barclays Core  39.2     34.6     28.4  
 Barclays Non-Core  8.9     13.2     16.8  
 Barclays Group adjusted total  48.1     47.8     45.2  
 Barclays Group statutory total  47.7     47.0     44.3  
              
 Average allocated equity             
   

2015  

£bn  

   

 

2014

£bn

  

  

   

 

2013

£bn

  

  

 Personal and Corporate Banking  18.2     17.5     17.3  
 Barclaycard  6.3     5.9     5.3  
 Africa Banking  3.8     3.9     4.4  
 Investment Bank  14.8     15.4     15.9  
 Head Officea  4.2     (0.4   (7.0
 Barclays Core  47.3     42.3     35.9  
 Barclays Non-Core  9.0     13.4     17.1  
 Barclays Group adjusted total  56.3     55.7     53.0  
 Barclays Group statutory total  55.9     54.9     52.2  
              
 Period end allocated equity             
   

2015  

£bn  

   

 

2014

£bn

  

  

   

 

2013

£bn

  

  

 Personal and Corporate Banking  18.3     17.9     17.3  
 Barclaycard  6.3     6.2     5.4  
 Africa Banking  3.4     4.0     3.8  
 Investment Bank  13.0     14.7     14.6  
 Head Officea  6.6     2.1     (2.1
 Barclays Core  47.6     44.9     39.0  
 Barclays Non-Core  7.2     11.0     15.1  
 Barclays Group adjusted total  54.8     55.9     54.1  
 Barclays Group statutory total  54.5     55.2     53.3  
              

Note

aBased on risk weighted assets and capital deductions in Head Office plus the residual balance of average ordinary shareholders’ equity and tangible ordinary shareholders’ equity.

206  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F


 Margins analysis

Total PCB, BarclaycardBarclays UK and Africa BankingBarclays International net interest income increased 5% to £12.0bn£10.3bn due to an increase in average customer assets to £287.7bn (2014: £280.0bn)£274.6bn (2015: £268.8bn) with growth in PCB and Barclaycard, partially offset by reductions in Africa Banking as the ZAR depreciated against GBP.Barclays International, while Barclays UK remained stable. Net interest margin increased 10bps11bps to 4.18%3.76% primarily due to growth in interest earning lending within Barclaycard.the cards portfolio of Barclays International and higher margins on deposits in Barclays UK.

Group net interest income increaseddecreased to £12.6bn (2014: £12.1bn)£10.5bn (2015: £10.6bn) including net structural hedge contributions of £1.5bn (2014: £1.6bn)(2015: £1.4bn). Equity structural hedge income decreased driven by the maintenance of the hedge in a continuing low rate environment.

Net interest margin by business reflects movements in the Group’s internal funding rates which are based on the cost to the Group of alternative funding in wholesale markets. The internal funding rate prices intra-group funding and liquidity to appropriately give appropriate credit to businesses with net surplus liquidity and to charge those businesses in need of alternative funding at a rate that is driven by prevailing market rates and includes a term premium.

 

 

    Year ended 31 December 2016    Year ended 31 December 2015 
    

Net interest
income

£m

 
 

 

   


Average
customer
assets
£m
 
 
 
 
   

Net interest
margin

£m

 
 

 

   

Net interest
income

£m

 
 

 

   


Average
customer
assets
£m
 
 
 
 
   

Net interest
margin

£m

 
 

 

Barclays UK

   6,048    167,233    3.62    5,973    167,599    3.56 

Barclays Internationala

   4,275    107,333    3.98    3,841    101,164    3.80 

Total Barclays UK and Barclays International

   10,323    274,566    3.76    9,814    268,763    3.65 

Otherb

   214              794           

Total net interest income

   10,537              10,608           

 

    Year ended 31 December 2015     Year ended 31 December 2014  
    
 

 

Net interest
income

£m

  
  

  

   
 
 
 
Average
customer
assets
£m
  
  
  
  
   
 

 

Net interest
margin

%

  
  

  

   
 

 

Net interest
income

£m

  
  

  

   
 
 

 

Average
customer
assets

£m

  
  
  

  

   
 

 

Net interest
margin

%

  
  

  

 Personal and Corporate Banking   6,438     214,989     2.99     6,298     210,026     3.00  
 Barclaycard   3,520     38,560     9.13     3,044     34,776     8.75  
 Africa Banking   2,066     34,116     6.06     2,093     35,153     5.95  
 Total Personal and Corporate Banking, Barclaycard
 and Africa Banking
   12,024     287,665     4.18     11,435     279,955     4.08  
 Investment Bank   588         647      
 Head Office   (303             (216          
 Barclays Core   12,309         11,866      
 Barclays Non-Core   249               214            
 Group net interest income   12,558               12,080            

Notes

aBarclays International margins have been restated to include interest earning lending within the investment banking business.
bOther includes Head Office, BarclaysNon-Core andnon-lending related investment banking balances.

 

  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 20152016 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  207211


Non-IFRS performance measures

Barclays management believes that the non-IFRS performance measures included in this document provide valuable information to the readers of the financial statements as they enable the reader to identify a more consistent basis for comparing the business’ performance between financial periods, and provide more detail concerning the elements of performance which the managers of these businesses are most directly able to influence or are relevant for an assessment of Barclays PLC and its subsidiaries (the Group). They also reflect an important aspect of the way in which operating targets are defined and performance is monitored by Barclays’ management.

Non-IFRS and IFRS performance measures may also be presented on an excluding notable items basis. Notable items are considered to be significant items impacting comparability of performance.

Any non-IFRS performance measures in this document are not a substitute for IFRS measures and readers should consider the IFRS measures as well.

Non-IFRS performance measures glossary

Measure

Definition

Barclays Core

Barclays Core includes Barclays UK, Barclays International and Head Office. A reconciliation of Core statutory results and results excluding notable items is included on pages vi to viii.

Return on average tangible shareholders’ equity

Statutory profit after tax attributable to ordinary shareholders, including an adjustment for the tax credit in reserves in respect of other equity instruments, as a proportion of average shareholders’ equity excludingnon-controlling interests and other equity instruments adjusted for the deduction of intangible assets and goodwill. The components of the calculation have been included on page 213.

Return on average allocated tangible shareholders’ equity

Statutory profit after tax attributable to ordinary shareholders, including an adjustment for the tax credit in reserves in respect of other equity instruments, as a proportion of average allocated tangible equity. The components of the calculation have been included on page 213.

Average tangible shareholders’ equity

Calculated as the average of the monthly period end tangible shareholders’ equity during the period.

Average allocated tangible shareholders’ equity

Calculated as the average of the monthly period end allocated tangible shareholders’ equity during the period.

Cost: income ratio

Total operating expenses divided by total income.

Basic earnings/(loss) per share contribution (Barclays Core andNon-Core)

The calculation is consistent with the IFRS measure and applied to the Barclays Core andNon-Core: statutory profit after tax attributable to ordinary shareholders, including an adjustment for the tax credit in reserves in respect of other equity instruments, divided by the Group basic weighted average number of shares. The components of the calculation have been included on page 215.

Loan loss rate

Is quoted in basis points and represents total loan impairment divided by gross loans and advances to customers and banks held at amortised cost at the balance sheet date.

Loan: deposit ratio

Loans and advances divided by customer accounts calculated for Barclays UK, Barclays International andNon-Core, excluding investment banking businesses. This excludes particular liabilities issued by the retail businesses that have characteristics comparable to retail deposits (for example structured Certificates of Deposit and retail bonds), which are included within debt securities in issue.

Notable items

Notable items are considered to be significant items impacting comparability of performance and are shown for each of the business segments. A reconciliation between statutory results and results excluding notable items is included on pages vi to viii including relevant performance measures.

Net interest margin

Net interest income divided by the sum of average customer assets. The components of the calculation have been included on page 211.

Tangible net asset value per share

Calculated by dividing shareholders equity, excludingnon-controlling interests and other equity instruments, less goodwill and intangible assets, by the number of issued ordinary shares. The components of the calculation have been included on page 215.

212  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2016 Annual Report on Form 20-F


Returns

Return on average allocated tangible equity is calculated as profit for the period attributable to ordinary equity holders of the parent (adjusted for the tax credit recorded in reserves in respect of interest payments on other equity instruments) divided by average allocated tangible equity for the period as appropriate, excludingnon-controlling and other equity interests for businesses. Allocated tangible equity has been calculated as 11.5% of CRD IV fully loaded risk weighted assets for each business, adjusted for CRD IV fully loaded capital deductions, excluding goodwill and intangible assets, reflecting the assumptions the Group uses for capital planning purposes. Head Office average tangible equity represents the difference between the Group’s average tangible equity and the amounts allocated to businesses.

    

Year ended
31.12.16
£m
 
 
 
   

Year ended
31.12.15
£m
 
 
 
   

Year ended
31.12.14
£m
 
 
 
 Attributable profit      
 Barclays UK   828    (47   852 
 Barclays International   2,412    1,758    926 
 Head Office   110    11    374 
 Barclays Core   3,350    1,722    2,152 
 BarclaysNon-Core   (1,916   (2,418   (2,659
 Africa Banking discontinued operation   189    302    334 
 Barclays Group   1,623    (394)    (174
 Tax credit in respect of interest payments on other equity instruments   £m    £m    £m 
 Barclays UK   29    14    17 
 Barclays International   83    42    23 
 Head Office   (1       (1
 Barclays Core   111    56    39 
 BarclaysNon-Core   17    14    14 
 Africa Banking discontinued operation            
 Barclays Group   128    70    54 
 Profit/(loss) attributable to ordinary equity holders of the parent   £m    £m    £m 
 Barclays UK   857    (33   869 
 Barclays International   2,495    1,800    949 
 Head Office   109    11    373 
 Barclays Core   3,461    1,778    2,191 
 BarclaysNon-Core   (1,899   (2,405   (2,645
 Africa Banking discontinued operation   189    302    334 
 Barclays Group   1,751    (324   (120
 Average allocated tangible equitya   £bn    £bn    £bn 
 Barclays UK   8.9    9.3    9.1 
 Barclays International   25.5    24.9    25.0 
 Head Officeb   6.5    2.6    (2.7
 Barclays Core   41.0    36.8    31.4 
 BarclaysNon-Core   7.8    10.9    15.6 
 Barclays Group   48.7    47.7    47.0 
 Return on average allocated tangible equitya   %    %    % 
 Barclays UK   9.6%    (0.3%   9.5% 
 Barclays International   9.8%    7.2%    3.8% 

 Barclays Core

 

   

 

8.4%

 

 

 

   

 

4.8%

 

 

 

   

 

7.0%

 

 

 

 Barclays Group   3.6%    (0.7%   (0.3%

Note

aRefer to pagesi to x and pages 212 to 215 for further information, reconciliations and calculations of non-IFRS performance measures included throughout this document.
bIncludes the Africa Banking discontinued operation.

Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2016 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  213


Financial review

Non-IFRS performance measures

 Returns excluding notable items               
    

Year ended
31.12.16
£m
 
 
 
   

Year ended
31.12.15
£m
 
 
 
   

Year ended
31.12.14
£m
 
 
 
 Attributable profit excluding notable items               

 

 Barclays UK

  

 

 

 

1,685

 

 

  

 

 

 

1,961

 

 

  

 

 

 

1,707

 

 

 Barclays International   1,961    2,320    1,734 
 Head Office   135    (176   114 
 Barclays Core   3,781    4,105    3,555 
 BarclaysNon-Core   (1,916   (1,711   (1,109
 Africa Banking discontinued operation   189    302    334 
 Barclays Group   2,054    2,696    2,780 
 Tax credit in respect of interest payments on other equity instruments               
 Barclays UK   29    14    17 
 Barclays International   83    42    23 
 Head Office   (1       (1
 Barclays Core   111    56    39 
 BarclaysNon-Core   17    14    14 
 Africa Banking discontinued operation            
 Barclays Group   128    70    54 
 Profit/(loss) attributable to ordinary equity holders of the parent excluding notable items               
 Barclays UK   1,714    1,975    1,724 
 Barclays International   2,044    2,362    1,757 
 Head Office   133    (176)    126 
 Barclays Core   3,891    4,161    3,594 
 BarclaysNon-Core   (1,899   (1,697   (1,095
 Africa Banking discontinued operation   189    302    334 
 Barclays Group   2,182    2,766    2,834 
 Average allocated tangible equity excluding notable itemsa   £bn    £bn    £bn 
 Barclays UK   8.9    9.3    9.1 
 Barclays International   25.5    24.9    25.0 
 Head Officeb,c   6.8    2.9    (1.9
 Barclays Core   41.3    37.2    32.2 
 BarclaysNon-Core   7.8    10.9    15.6 
 Barclays Group   49.0    48.1    47.8 
 Return on average allocated tangible equity excluding notable itemsa   %    %    % 
 Barclays UK   19.3%    21.1%    18.9% 
 Barclays International   8.0%    9.5%    7.0% 

 Barclays Core

 

   

 

9.4%

 

 

 

   

 

11.2%

 

 

 

   

 

11.2%

 

 

 

 Barclays Group   4.4%    5.8%    5.9% 

Notes

aRefer to pagesi to x and pages 212 to 215 for further information reconciliations and calculations of non-IFRS performance measures included throughout this document.
bIncludes the Africa Banking discontinued operation.
cExcludes the cumulativepost-tax impact of own credit.

214  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2016 Annual Report on Form 20-F


Non-IFRS performance measures

Earnings per share      
    

Year ended
31.12.16
£m
 
 
 
   

Year ended
31.12.15
£m
 
 
 
   

Year ended
31.12.14
£m
 
 
 
Profit/(loss) attributable to ordinary equity holders of the parenta               
Barclays Core   3,461    1,778    2,191 
BarclaysNon-Core   (1,899)    (2,405)    (2,645) 
Africa Banking discontinued operation   189    302    334 
Barclays Groupb   1,751    (324)    (120) 
      
    £m    £m    £m 
Basic weighted average number of shares   16,860    16,683    16,329 
      
Basic earnings per ordinary sharea.b   p    p    p 
Barclays Core contribution   20.5    10.7    13.4 
BarclaysNon-Core contribution   (11.3)    (14.4)    (16.2) 
Barclays Group   10.4    (1.9)    (0.7) 
      
Profit/(loss) attributable to ordinary equity holders of the parent excluding notable itemsa   £m    £m    £m 
Barclays Core   3,891    4,161    3,594 
BarclaysNon-Core   (1,899)    (1,697)    (1,095) 
Africa Banking discontinued operation   189    302    334 
                
Barclays Groupb   2,182    2,766    2,834 
      
Basic earnings per ordinary share excluding notable itemsa,b   p    p    p 
Barclays Core contribution   23.1    24.9    22.0 
BarclaysNon-Core contribution   (11.3)    (10.2)    (6.7) 
                
Barclays Group   12.9    16.6    17.3 
Tangible net asset value      
    

Year ended
31.12.16
£m
 
 
 
   

Year ended
31.12.15
£m
 
 
 
   

Year ended
31.12.14
£m
 
 
 
Total equity excludingnon-controlling interests   64,873    59,810    59,567 
Other equity instruments   (6,449)    (5,305)    (4,322) 
Shareholder’s equity excluding non-controlling interests attributable to ordinary shareholders of the parent   58,424    54,505    55,245 
Goodwill and intangiblesc   (9,245)    (8,222)    (8,180) 
Tangible shareholders’ equity excludingnon-controlling interests attributable to ordinary shareholders of the parent   49,179    46,283    47,023 
      
    £m    £m    £m 
Shares in issue   16,963    16,805    16,498 
      
    p    p    p 
Net asset value per share   344    324    335 
Tangible net asset value per share   290    275    285 

Notes

aProfit for the period attributable to ordinary equity holders of the parent includes the tax credit recorded in reserves in respect of interest payments on other equity instruments. The tax credit of £128m (2015: £70m) is allocated to businesses in proportion to the allocation of the payments in relation to the other equity instruments.
bIncludes the Africa Banking discontinued operation
c2016 includes goodwill and intangibles in relation to Africa Banking of £1,519m.

Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2016 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  215


Financial statements

Contents

Detailed analysis of our statutory accounts, independently audited and providing

in-depth disclosure on the financial performance of the Group.

 

       Page       Note  
Consolidated financial statementsConsolidated financial statements        

Consolidated financial statements

   

 

Page

 

 

 

     

 

Note

 

 

 

 

§

 Presentation of information   209       n/a   

§

 Presentation of information   217      n/a 
 

§

 Independent Registered Public Accounting Firm’s report   210       n/a   

§

 Independent Registered Public Accounting Firm’s report   218      n/a 
 

§

 Consolidated income statement   211       n/a   

§

 Consolidated income statement   219      n/a 
 

§

 Consolidated statement of comprehensive income   212       n/a   

§

 Consolidated statement of comprehensive income   220      n/a 
 

§

 Consolidated balance sheet   213       n/a   

§

 Consolidated balance sheet   221      n/a 
 

§

 Consolidated statement of changes in equity   214       n/a   

§

 Consolidated statement of changes in equity   222      n/a 
 

§

 Consolidated cash flow statement   215       n/a   

§

 Consolidated cash flow statement   223      n/a 
 

§

 Parent Company accounts   216       n/a   

§

 Parent Company accounts   224      n/a 
 

§

 Notes to the financial statements   218       n/a   

§

 Notes to the financial statements   226      n/a 
 

§

 

Significant accounting policies

 

   218       1   

§

 

Significant accounting policies

 

   226      1 
Notes to the financial statementsNotes to the financial statements        Notes to the financial statements        
Performance/return 

§

 Segmental reporting   221       2   

§

 Segmental reporting   231      2 
 

§

 Net interest income   221       3   

§

 Net interest income   231      3 
 

§

 Net fee and commission income   222       4   

§

 Net fee and commission income   232      4 
 

§

 Net trading income   222       5   

§

 Net trading income   232      5 
 

§

 Net investment income   223       6   

§

 Net investment income   233      6 
 

§

 Credit impairment charges and other provisions   223       7   

§

 Credit impairment charges and other provisions   233      7 
 

§

 Operating expenses   225       8   

§

 Operating expenses   235      8 
 

§

 Profit/(loss) on disposal of subsidiaries, associates and joint ventures   225       9   

§

 Profit/(loss) on disposal of subsidiaries, associates and joint ventures   235      9 
 

§

 Tax   226       10   

§

 Tax   236      10 
 

§

 Earnings per share   229       11   

§

 Earnings per share   240      11 
 

§

 

Dividends on ordinary shares

 

   229       12   

§

 

Dividends on ordinary shares

 

   240      12 
Assets and liabilities held at fair value 

§

 Trading portfolio   230       13  
Assets and liabilities 

§

 Trading portfolio   241      13 
held at fair value 

§

 Financial assets designated at fair value   241      14 
 

§

 Financial assets designated at fair value   230       14   

§

 Derivative financial instruments   242      15 
 

§

 Derivative financial instruments   231       15   

§

 Financial investments   245      16 
 

§

 Available for sale financial assets   234       16   

§

 Financial liabilities designated at fair value   245      17 
 

§

 Financial liabilities designated at fair value   234       17   

§

 Fair value of financial instruments   246      18 
 

§

 Fair value of assets and liabilities   235       18   

§

 

Offsetting financial assets and financial liabilities

 

   263      19 
 

§

 

Offsetting financial assets and financial liabilities

 

   251       19  
Financial instruments held 

§

 Loans and advances to banks and customers   253       20  
at amortised cost 

§

 Finance leases   253       21  
Financial instruments 

§

 Loans and advances to banks and customers   264      20 
held at amortised cost 

§

 Finance leases   264      21 
 

§

 

Reverse repurchase and repurchase agreements including other
similar secured lending and borrowing

 

   254       22   

§

 

Reverse repurchase and repurchase agreements including other similar lending and borrowing

 

   265      22 
Non-current assets and other investments 

§

 Property, plant and equipment   255       23  
Non-current assets and 

§

 Property, plant and equipment   266      23 
other investments 

§

 Goodwill and intangible assets   267      24 
 

§

 Goodwill and intangible assets   256       24   

§

 

Operating leases

 

   269      25 
 

§

 

Operating leases

 

   258       25  
Accruals, provisions, contingent liabilities 

§

 Accruals, deferred income and other liabilities   259       26  
Accruals, provisions, 

§

 Accruals, deferred income and other liabilities   270      26 
contingent liabilities 

§

 Provisions   270      27 
and legal proceedings 

§

 Provisions   259       27   

§

 Contingent liabilities and commitments   272      28 
 

§

 Contingent liabilities and commitments   261       28   

§

 

Legal, competition and regulatory matters

 

   272      29 
 

§

 

Legal, competition and regulatory matters

 

   261       29  
Capital instruments, equity and reserves 

§

 Subordinated liabilities   272       30  
 

§

 Ordinary shares, share premium and other equity   276       31  
Capital instruments, 

§

 Subordinated liabilities   281      30 
equity and reserves 

§

 Ordinary shares, share premium and other equity   284      31 
 

§

 Reserves   277       32   

§

 Reserves   285      32 
 

§

 

Non-controlling interests

 

   277       33   

§

 

Non-controlling interests

 

   285      33 
Employee benefits 

§

 Share based payments   279       34   

§

 Share-based payments   287      34 
 

§

 

Pensions and post retirement benefits

 

   281       35   

§

 

Pensions and post retirement benefits

 

   288      35 
Scope of consolidation 

§

 Principal subsidiaries   285       36   

§

 Principal subsidiaries   294      36 
 

§

 Structured entities   286       37   

§

 Structured entities   295      37 
 

§

 Investments in associates and joint ventures   291       38   

§

 Investments in associates and joint ventures   298      38 
 

§

 Securitisations   291       39   

§

 Securitisations   299      39 
 

§

 

Assets pledged

 

   293       40   

§

 

Assets pledged

 

   301      40 
Other disclosure matters 

§

 Related party transactions and Directors’ remuneration   294       41   

§

 Related party transactions and Directors’ remuneration   302      41 
 

§

 Auditors’ remuneration   296       42   

§

 Auditors’ remuneration   304      42 
 

§

 Financial risks, liquidity and capital management   297       43   

§

 Financial risks, liquidity and capital management   304      43 
 

§

 Non-current assets held for sale and associated liabilities   297       44   

§

 Assets included in disposal groups held for sale and associated liabilities   305      44 
 

§

 Barclays PLC (the Parent Company)   298       45   

§

 Barclays PLC (the Parent Company)   307      45 
 

§

 

Related undertakings

 

   299       46   

§

 Related undertakings   308      46 

 

208216  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 20152016 Annual Report on Form 20-F  


Presentation of information

 

 

Barclays’Barclays approach to disclosures

The Group aims to continually enhance its disclosures and their usefulness to the readers of the financial statements in the light of developing market practice and areas of focus. Consequently Barclays’Barclays disclosures go beyond the minimum standards required by accounting standards and other regulatory requirements.

Barclays continuescontinue to support the recommendations and guidance made by the Enhanced Disclosure Taskforce (EDTF). The EDTF was formed by the Financial Stability Board with a remit to broaden and deepen the risk disclosures of global banks in a number of areas, including liquidity and funding, credit risk and market risk. Barclays has fully adopted the recommendations across the Annual Report and Pillar 3 Report.

In line with the Financial Reporting Council’s guidance on ‘ClearClear and Concise’ reporting, for 2015,Concise reporting. Barclays has focused reporting on material items and sought to reorganise information to aid usersusers’ understanding.

It is Barclays’ view that best in class disclosures will continue to evolve in light of ongoing market and stakeholder engagement with the banking sector. Barclays is committed to engaging with a published Code for Financial Reporting Disclosure (the Code). The Code sets out five disclosure principles together with supporting guidance which states that UK banks will:

 

§ provide high quality, meaningful and decision-useful disclosures

 

§ review and enhance their financial instrument disclosures for key areas of interest

 

§ assess the applicability and relevance of good practice recommendations to their disclosures acknowledging the importance of such guidance

 

§ seek to enhance the comparability of financial statement disclosures across the UK banking sector and

 

§ clearly differentiate in their annual reports between information that is audited and information that is unaudited.

British Bankers’ Association (BBA) Code for Financial Reporting Disclosure

Barclays has adopted the BBA Code for Financial Reporting Disclosure and has prepared the 20152016 Annual Report and Accounts in compliance with the Code.

Statutory accountsAccounts

The consolidated accounts of Barclays PLC and its subsidiaries are set out on pages 211219 to 215223 along with the accounts of Barclays PLC itself on pages 216 and 217.224 to 225. The accounting policies on pages 218226 to 220230 and the Notesnotes commencing on page 221231 apply equally to both sets of accounts unless otherwise stated.

The financial statements have been prepared on a going concern basis, in accordance with The Companies Act 2006 as applicable to companies using IFRS.

On 1 March 2016, Barclays announced its intention to sell down the Group’s interest in BAGL. This sell down is intended to be to a level which will permit deconsolidation from an accounting and regulatory perspective, subject to shareholder and regulatory approvals as required. As the Africa Banking Business meets requirements for presentation as a discontinued operation, these results have been presented as two lines on the face of the Group income statement, representing the profit after tax andnon-controlling interest in respect of the discontinued operation.

Capital Requirements Country by CountryCountry-by-Country Reporting

HM Treasury has transposed the requirements set out under CRD IV and issued the Capital Requirements Country by CountryCountry-by-Country Reporting Regulations 2013. The legislation requires Barclays PLC to publish additional information in respect of the year ended 31 December 2015.2016. This information is available on the Barclays’Barclays website: home.barclays/ barclays.com/citizenship/reports-and-publications/country-snapshot.html

 

 

  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 20152016 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  209217


Independent Registered Public Accounting Firm’s report

 

 

Report of Independent Registered Public Accounting Firm

To The Board of Directors and Shareholders of Barclays PLC

In our opinion, the accompanying consolidated balance sheets and the related consolidated income statements, consolidated statements of comprehensive income, consolidated statements of changes in equity and consolidated cash flow statements present fairly, in all material respects, the financial position of Barclays PLC and its subsidiaries at 31 December 20152016 and 31 December 2014,2015, and the results of their operations and their cash flows for each of the three years in the period ended 31 December 20152016 in conformity with International Financial Reporting Standards as issued by the International Accounting Standards Board. Also in our opinion, the Company maintained, in all material respects, effective internal control over financial reporting as of 31 December 2015,2016, based on criteria established inInternal Control - Integrated Framework 2013 issued by the Committee of Sponsoring Organizations of the Treadway Commission (COSO). The Company’s management is responsible for these financial statements, for maintaining effective internal control over financial reporting and for its assessment of the effectiveness of internal control over financial reporting, included in management’s report on internal control over financial reporting included in the Directors’ Report appearing on page 40 of the Annual Report to Shareholders. Our responsibility is to express opinions on these financial statements and on the Company’s internal control over financial reporting based on our integrated audits. We conducted our audits in accordance with the standards of the Public Company Accounting Oversight Board (US). Those standards require that we plan and perform the audits to obtain reasonable assurance about whether the financial statements are free of material misstatement and whether effective internal control over financial reporting was maintained in all material respects. Our audits of the financial statements included examining, on a test basis, evidence supporting the amounts and disclosures in the financial statements, assessing the accounting principles used and significant estimates made by management, and evaluating the overall financial statement presentation. Our audit of internal control over financial reporting

included obtaining an understanding of internal control over financial reporting, assessing the risk that a material weakness exists, and testing and evaluating the design and operating effectiveness of internal control based on the assessed risk. Our audits also included performing such other procedures as we considered necessary in the circumstances. We believe that our audits provide a reasonable basis for our opinions.

A company’s internal control over financial reporting is a process designed to provide reasonable assurance regarding the reliability of financial reporting and the preparation of financial statements for external purposes in accordance with generally accepted accounting principles. A company’s internal control over financial reporting includes those policies and procedures that (i) pertain to the maintenance of records that, in reasonable detail, accurately and fairly reflect the transactions and dispositions of the assets of the company; (ii) provide reasonable assurance that transactions are recorded as necessary to permit preparation of financial statements in accordance with generally accepted accounting principles, and that receipts and expenditures of the company are being made only in accordance with authorisations of management and directors of the company; and (iii) provide reasonable assurance regarding prevention or timely detection of unauthorised acquisition, use, or disposition of the company’s assets that could have a material effect on the financial statements.

Because of its inherent limitations, internal control over financial reporting may not prevent or detect misstatements. Also, projections of any evaluation of effectiveness to future periods are subject to the risk that controls may become inadequate because of changes in conditions, or that the degree of compliance with the policies or procedures may deteriorate.

/s/ PricewaterhouseCoopers LLP

PricewaterhouseCoopers LLP

London, UKUnited Kingdom

2922 February 20162017

 

 

210218  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 20152016 Annual Report on Form 20-F  


Consolidated financial statements

Consolidated income statement

    

 

For the year ended 31 December

   Notes     

 

2015

£m

  

  

   

 

2014

£m

  

  

   

 

2013

£m

  

  

Continuing operations

        

Interest income

   3     17,201     17,363     18,315  

Interest expense

   3     (4,643   (5,283   (6,715

Net interest income

        12,558     12,080     11,600  

Fee and commission income

   4     9,655     9,836     10,479  

Fee and commission expense

   4     (1,763   (1,662   (1,748

Net fee and commission income

        7,892     8,174     8,731  

Net trading income

   5     3,623     3,331     6,553  

Net investment income

   6     1,138     1,328     680  

Net premiums from insurance contracts

     709     669     732  

Other income

        67     186     148  

Total income

     25,987     25,768     28,444  

Net claims and benefits incurred on insurance contracts

        (533   (480   (509

Total income net of insurance claims

     25,454     25,288     27,935  

Credit impairment charges and other provisions

   7     (2,114   (2,168   (3,071

Net operating income

        23,340     23,120     24,864  

Staff costs

   8     (9,960   (11,005   (12,155

Infrastructure costs

   8     (3,180   (3,443   (3,531

Administration and general expenses

   8     (3,528   (3,621   (4,113

Provision for UK customer redress

   27     (2,772   (1,110   (2,000

Provision for ongoing investigations and litigation including Foreign Exchange

   27     (1,237   (1,250   (173

Operating expenses

   8     (20,677   (20,429   (21,972

Share of post-tax results of associates and joint ventures

     47     36     (56

(Loss)/profit on disposal of subsidiaries, associates and joint ventures

   9     (637   (471   6  

Gain on acquisitions

                  26  

Profit before tax

     2,073     2,256     2,868  

Taxation

   10     (1,450   (1,411   (1,571

Profit after tax

        623     845     1,297  

Attributable to:

                    

Equity holders of the parent

     (394   (174   540  

Other equity holdersa

        345     250       

Total equity holders

     (49   76     540  

Non-controlling interests

   33     672     769     757  

Profit after tax

        623     845     1,297  
         p     p     p  

Earnings per share

        

Basic (loss)/earnings per share

   11     (1.9   (0.7   3.8  

Diluted (loss)/earnings per share

   11     (1.9   (0.7   3.7  

 

For the year ended 31 December   Note    

2016

£m

 

 

   

2015

£m

 

 

   

2014

£m

 

 

Continuing operations        
Interest income   3    14,541    13,953    14,194 
Interest expense   3    (4,004   (3,345   (4,108
Net interest income        10,537    10,608    10,086 
Fee and commission income   4    8,570    8,470    8,622 
Fee and commission expense   4    (1,802   (1,611   (1,500
Net fee and commission income        6,768    6,859    7,122 
Net trading income   5    2,768    3,426    3,086 
Net investment income   6    1,324    1,097    1,309 
Other income        54    50    160 
Total income     21,451    22,040    21,763 
Credit impairment charges and other provisions   7    (2,373   (1,762   (1,821
Net operating income        19,078    20,278    19,942 
Staff costs   8    (9,423   (8,853   (9,860
Infrastructure costs   8    (2,998   (2,691   (2,895
Administration and general expenses   8    (2,917   (2,983   (3,069
Provision for UK customer redress        (1,000   (2,772   (1,110
Provision for ongoing investigations and litigation relating to Foreign Exchange            (1,237   (1,250
Operating expenses   8    (16,338   (18,536   (18,184
Share ofpost-tax results of associates and joint ventures     70    41    28 
Profit/(loss) on disposal of subsidiaries, associates and joint ventures   9    420    (637   (473
Profit before tax     3,230    1,146    1,313 
Taxation   10    (993   (1,149   (1,121
Profit/(loss) after tax in respect of continuing operations     2,237    (3   192 
Profit after tax in respect of discontinued operation        591    626    653 
Profit after tax        2,828    623    845 
Attributable to:                    
Equity holders of the parent     1,623    (394   (174
Other equity holdersa        457    345    250 
Total equity holders of the parent     2,080    (49   76 
Non-controlling interests in respect of continuing operations   33    346    348    449 
Non-controlling interests in respect of discontinued operation   33    402    324    320 
Profit after tax        2,828    623    845 
Earnings per share        
Basic earnings/(loss) per ordinary share   11    10.4    (1.9   (0.7
Basic earnings/(loss) per ordinary share in respect of continuing operations     9.3    (3.7   (2.7
Basic earnings per ordinary share in respect of discontinued operation     1.1    1.8    2.0 
Diluted earnings/(loss) per share   11    10.3    (1.9   (0.7

 

Note

aThe profit after tax attributable to other equity holders of £345m (2014: £250m)£457m (2015: £345m) is offset by a tax credit recorded in reserves of £70m (2014: £54m)£128m (2015: £70m). The net amount of £275m (2014: £196m)£329m (2015: £275m), along with NCI, is deducted from profit after tax in order to calculate earnings per share.

 

  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 20152016 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  211219


Consolidated financial statements

Consolidated statement of comprehensive income

    

 

 

For the year ended 31 December

     
 
2015
£m
  
  
     
 
2014
£m
  
  
     
 
2013
£m
  
  
   
2016
£m
 
 
   
2015
£m
 
 
   
2014
£m
 
 

Profit after tax

     623       845       1,297     2,828    623    845 

Other comprehensive (loss)/income from continuing operations:

            
Profit/(loss) after tax in respect of continuing operations   2,237    (3   192 
Profit after tax in respect of discontinued operation   591    626    653 
Other comprehensive income that may be recycled to profit or loss from continuing operations:      

Currency translation reserve

                  

Currency translation differences

     (476     486       (1,767   3,024    748    774 

Available for sale reserve

                  

Net gains/(losses) from changes in fair value

     33       5,333       (2,734

Net gains transferred to net profit on disposal

     (373     (619     (145
Net gains from changes in fair value   2,147    64    5,339 
Net losses transferred to net profit on disposal   (912   (374   (619

Net losses/(gains) transferred to net profit due to impairment

     17       (31     (7   20    17    (31

Net (gains)/losses transferred to net profit due to fair value hedging

     (148     (4,074     2,376  
Net (gains) transferred to net profit due to fair value hedging   (1,677   (148   (4,074

Changes in insurance liabilities

     86       (94     28     53    86    (94

Tax

     134       (102     100     (18   126    (103

Cash flow hedging reserve

                  

Net (losses)/gains from changes in fair value

     (407     2,687       (1,914

Net gains transferred to net profit

     (268     (767     (547
Net gains/(losses) from changes in fair value   1,455    (312   2,650 
Net losses transferred to net profit   (365   (238   (713

Tax

     81       (380     571     (292   57    (384

Other

     21       (42     (37   13    20    (42

Total comprehensive (loss)/income that may be recycled to profit or loss

     (1,300     2,397       (4,076
Other comprehensive income that may be recycled to profit or loss   3,448    46    2,703 

Other comprehensive income/(loss) not recycled to profit or loss:

            
Other comprehensive (loss)/income not recycled to profit or loss:         

Retirement benefit remeasurements

     1,174       268       (512   (1,309   1,176    268 

Tax

     (260     (63     (3   329    (260   (63

Other comprehensive (loss)/income for the period

     

 

(386

 

 

     

 

2,602

 

  

 

     

 

(4,591

 

 

Total comprehensive income/(loss) for the year

     237       3,447       (3,294
Other comprehensive income for the period   2,468    962    2,908 
Total comprehensive income for the year, net of tax from continuing operations   4,705    959    3,100 
Total comprehensive income/(loss) for the year, net of tax from discontinued operation   2,111    (722   346 
Total comprehensive income for the year   6,816    237    3,446 

Attributable to:

                  

Equity holders of the parent

     45       2,756       (3,406   5,233    45    2,755 

Non-controlling interests

     192       691       112     1,583    192    691 
     237       3,447       (3,294
Total comprehensive income for the year   6,816    237    3,446 

 

212220  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 20152016 Annual Report on Form 20-F  


Consolidated financial statements

Consolidated balance sheet

 

 

As at 31 December

   Notes     

 

2015

£m

  

  

   

 

2014

£m

  

  

   

 

2013

£m

  

  

   Notes    

2016

£m

 

 

   

2015

£m

 

 

   

2014

£m

 

 

Assets

                

Cash and balances at central banks

     49,711     39,695     45,687       102,353    49,711    39,695 

Items in the course of collection from other banks

     1,011     1,210     1,282       1,467    1,011    1,210 

Trading portfolio assets

   13     77,348     114,717     133,069     13    80,240    77,348    114,717 

Financial assets designated at fair value

   14     76,830     38,300     38,968     14    78,608    76,830    38,300 

Derivative financial instruments

   15     327,709     439,909     350,300     15    346,626    327,709    439,909 

Available for sale investments

   16     90,267     86,066     91,756  

Financial investments

   16    63,317    90,267    86,066 

Loans and advances to banks

   20     41,349     42,111     39,422     20    43,251    41,349    42,111 

Loans and advances to customers

   20     399,217     427,767     434,237     20    392,784    399,217    427,767 

Reverse repurchase agreements and other similar secured lending

   22     28,187     131,753     186,779     22    13,454    28,187    131,753 

Prepayments, accrued income and other assets

     3,010     3,607     3,920       2,893    3,010    3,607 

Investments in associates and joint ventures

   38     573     711     653     38    684    573    711 

Property, plant and equipment

   23     3,468     3,786     4,216     23    2,825    3,468    3,786 

Goodwill and intangible assets

   24     8,222     8,180     7,685     24    7,726    8,222    8,180 

Current tax assets

   10     415     334     219     10    561    415    334 

Deferred tax assets

   10     4,495     4,130     4,807     10    4,869    4,495    4,130 

Retirement benefit assets

   35     836     56     133     35    14    836    56 

Non current assets classified as held for sale

   44     7,364     15,574     495  

Assets included in disposal groups classified as held for sale

   44    71,454    7,364    15,574 

Total assets

      1,120,012     1,357,906     1,343,628        1,213,126    1,120,012    1,357,906 

Liabilities

                

Deposits from banks

     47,080     58,390     55,615       48,214    47,080    58,390 

Items in the course of collection due to other banks

     1,013     1,177     1,359       636    1,013    1,177 

Customer accounts

     418,242     427,704     431,998       423,178    418,242    427,704 

Repurchase agreements and other similar secured borrowing

   22     25,035     124,479     196,748     22    19,760    25,035    124,479 

Trading portfolio liabilities

   13     33,967     45,124     53,464     13    34,687    33,967    45,124 

Financial liabilities designated at fair value

   17     91,745     56,972     64,796     17    96,031    91,745    56,972 

Derivative financial instruments

   15     324,252     439,320     347,118     15    340,487    324,252    439,320 

Debt securities in issue

     69,150     86,099     86,693       75,932    69,150    86,099 

Subordinated liabilities

   30     21,467     21,153     21,695     30    23,383    21,467    21,153 

Accruals, deferred income and other liabilities

   26     10,610     11,423     12,934     26    8,871    10,610    11,423 

Provisions

   27     4,142     4,135     3,886     27    4,134    4,142    4,135 

Current tax liabilities

   10     903     1,021     1,042     10    737    903    1,021 

Deferred tax liabilities

   10     122     262     373     10    29    122    262 

Retirement benefit liabilities

   35     423     1,574     1,958     35    390    423    1,574 

Liabilities included in disposal groups classified as held for sale

   44     5,997     13,115          44    65,292    5,997    13,115 

Total liabilities

      1,054,148     1,291,948     1,279,679        1,141,761    1,054,148    1,291,948 

Total equity

                

Called up share capital and share premium

   31     21,586     20,809     19,887     31    21,842    21,586    20,809 

Other equity instruments

   31     5,305     4,322     2,063     31    6,449    5,305    4,322 

Other reserves

   32     1,898     2,724     249     32    6,051    1,898    2,724 

Retained earnings

      31,021     31,712     33,186        30,531    31,021    31,712 

Total equity excluding non-controlling interests

     59,810     59,567     55,385       64,873    59,810    59,567 

Non-controlling interests

   33     6,054     6,391     8,564     33    6,492    6,054    6,391 

Total equity

      65,864     65,958     63,949        71,365    65,864    65,958 

Total liabilities and equity

      1,120,012     1,357,906     1,343,628        1,213,126    1,120,012    1,357,906 

The Board of Directors approved the financial statements on pages 211219 to 305316 on 2922 February 2016.2017.

John McFarlane

Group Chairman

JesJames E Staley

Group Chief Executive

Tushar Morzaria

Group Finance Director

 

  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 20152016 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  213221


Consolidated financial statements

Consolidated statement of changes in equity

 

 

   

 

 

 

 

 

Called up

share

capital

and share

premium

£m

  

  

  

  

  

  

  
 

 

 

Other
equity

instruments

£m

  
  

  

  

  

 

 

 

Available

for sale

reserve

£m

  

  

  

  

  

 

 

 

 

Cash

flow

hedging

reserve

£m

  

  

  

  

  

  

 

 

 

Currency

translation

reserve

£m

  

  

  

  

  

 

 

 

 

 

Other

reserves

and

treasury

shares

£m

  

  

  

  

  

  

  

 

 

Retained

earnings

£m

  

  

  

  

 

 

 

 

 

 

Total

equity

excluding

non-

controlling

interests

£m

  

  

  

  

  

  

  

  

 

 

 

Non-

controlling

interests

£m

  

  

  

  

  

 

 

Total

equity

£m

  

  

  

Balance as at 1 January 2015

  20,809    4,322    562    1,817    (582  927    31,712    59,567    6,391    65,958  

Profit after tax

      345                    (394  (49  672    623  

Currency translation movements

                  (41          (41  (435  (476

Available for sale investments

          (245                  (245  (6  (251

Cash flow hedges

              (556              (556  (38  (594

Pension remeasurement

                          916    916    (2  914  

Other

                          20    20    1    21  

Total comprehensive (loss)/income for the year

      345    (245  (556  (41      542    45    192    237  

Issue of new ordinary shares

  137                            137        137  

Issue of shares under employee share schemes

  640                        571    1,211        1,211  

Issue and exchange of other equity instruments

      995                        995        995  

Other equity instruments coupons paid

      (345                  70    (275      (275

Redemption of preference shares

                                        

Increase in treasury shares

                      (602      (602      (602

Vesting of shares under employee share schemes

                      618    (755  (137      (137

Dividends paid

                          (1,081  (1,081  (552  (1,633

Other reserve movements

      (12                  (38  (50  23    (27

Balance as at 31 December 2015

  21,586    5,305    317    1,261    (623  943    31,021    59,810    6,054    65,864  

        

                                        

Balance as at 1 January 2014

  19,887    2,063    148    273    (1,142  970    33,186    55,385    8,564    63,949  

Profit after tax

      250                    (174  76    769    845  

Currency translation movements

                  560            560    (74  486  

Available for sale investments

          414                    414    (1  413  

Cash flow hedges

              1,544                1,544    (4  1,540  

Pension remeasurement

                          205    205        205  

Other

                          (43  (43  1    (42

Total comprehensive (loss)/income for the year

      250    414    1,544    560        (12  2,756    691    3,447  

Issue of new ordinary shares

  150                            150        150  

Issue of shares under employee share schemes

  772                        693    1,465        1,465  

Issue and exchange of other equity instruments

      2,263                    (155  2,108    (1,527  581  

Other equity instruments coupons paid

      (250                  54    (196      (196

Redemption of preference shares

                          (104  (104  (687  (791

Increase in treasury shares

                      (909      (909      (909

Vesting of shares under employee share schemes

                      866    (866            

Dividends paid

                          (1,057  (1,057  (631  (1,688

Other reserve movements

      (4                  (27  (31  (19  (50

Balance as at 31 December 2014

  20,809    4,322    562    1,817    (582  927    31,712    59,567    6,391    65,958  
                                         

Balance as at 1 January 2013

  12,477        527    2,099    59    989    34,464    50,615    9,371    59,986  

Profit after tax

                          540    540    757    1,297  

Currency translation movements

                  (1,201          (1,201  (566  (1,767

Available for sale investments

          (379                  (379  (3  (382

Cash flow hedges

              (1,826              (1,826  (64  (1,890

Pension remeasurement

                          (503  (503  (12  (515

Other

                          (37  (37      (37

Total comprehensive (loss)/income for the year

          (379  (1,826  (1,201          (3,406  112    (3,294

Issue of new ordinary shares

  6,620                            6,620        6,620  

Issue of shares under employee share schemes

  790                        689    1,479        1,479  

Issue and exchange of other equity instruments

      2,063                        2,063        2,063  

Other equity instruments coupons paid

                                        

Redemption of preference shares

                                        

Increase in treasury shares

                      (1,066      (1,066      (1,066

Vesting of shares under employee share schemes

                      1,047    (1,047            

Dividends paid

                          (859  (859  (813  (1,672

Other reserve movements

                          (61  (61  (106  (167

Balance as at 31 December 2013

  19,887    2,063    148    273    (1,142  970    33,186    55,385    8,564    63,949  

   


Called up

share

capital

and share

premium
£m

 

 

 

 

 
 

  


Other
equity
instruments
£m
 
 
 
 
  


Available

for sale

reserve
£m

 

 

 
 

  


Cash

flow

hedging

reserve
£m

 

 

 

 
 

  


Currency

translation

reserve
£m

 

 

 
 

  





Other

reserves
and
treasury
shares
£m

 

 
 
 
 
 

  


Retained

earnings
£m

 

 
 

  





Total

equity
excluding
non-

controlling
interests
£m

 

 
 
 

 
 
 

  


Non-

controlling

interests
£m

 

 

 
 

  


Total

equity
£m

 

 
 

Balance as at 1 January 2016

  21,586   5,305   317   1,261   (623  943   31,021   59,810   6,054   65,864 

Profit after tax

     457               1,434   1,891   346   2,237 

Currency translation movements

              3,022         3,022   2   3,024 

Available for sale investments

        (387              (387     (387

Cash flow hedges

           798            798      798 

Pension remeasurement

                    (980  (980     (980

Other

                    12   12   1   13 

Total comprehensive income net of tax from continuing operations

     457   (387  798   3,022      466   4,356   349   4,705 

Total comprehensive income net of tax from discontinued operation

        (4  46   652      183   877   1,234   2,111 

Total comprehensive (loss)/income for the year

     457   (391  844   3,674      649   5,233   1,583   6,816 

Issue of new ordinary shares

  68                     68      68 

Issue of shares under employee share schemes

  188                  668   856      856 

Issue and exchange of other equity instruments

     1,132                  1,132      1,132 

Other equity instruments coupons paid

     (457              128   (329     (329

Redemption of preference shares

                    (417  (417  (1,170  (1,587

Increase in treasury shares

                 (140     (140     (140

Vesting of shares under employee share schemes

                 166   (415  (249     (249

Dividends paid

                    (757  (757  (575  (1,332

Net equity impact of partial BAGL disposal

                    (349  (349  601   252 

Other reserve movements

     12               3   15   (1  14 

Balance as at 31 December 2016

  21,842   6,449   (74  2,105   3,051   969   30,531   64,873   6,492   71,365 

        

                                        

Balance as at 1 January 2015

  20,809   4,322   562   1,817   (582  927   31,712   59,567   6,391   65,958 

Profit after tax

     345               (696  (351  348   (3

Currency translation movements

              747         747   1   748 

Available for sale investments

        (229              (229     (229

Cash flow hedges

           (493           (493     (493

Pension remeasurement

                    916   916      916 

Other

                    20   20      20 

Total comprehensive income net of tax from continuing operations

     345   (229  (493  747      240   610   349   959 

Total comprehensive income net of tax from discontinued operation

        (16  (63  (788     302   (565  (157  (722

Total comprehensive (loss)/income for the year

     345   (245  (556  (41     542   45   192   237 

Issue of new ordinary shares

  137                     137      137 

Issue of shares under employee share schemes

  640                  571   1,211      1,211 

Issue and exchange of other equity instruments

     995                  995      995 

Other equity instruments coupons paid

     (345              70   (275     (275

Redemption of preference shares

                              

Increase in treasury shares

                 (602     (602     (602

Vesting of shares under employee share schemes

                 618   (755  (137     (137

Dividends paid

                    (1,081  (1,081  (552  (1,633

Other reserve movements

     (12              (38  (50  23   (27

Balance as at 31 December 2015

  21,586   5,305   317   1,261   (623  943   31,021   59,810   6,054   65,864 
                                         

Balance as at 1 January 2014

  19,887   2,063   148   273   (1,142  970   33,186   55,385   8,564   63,949 

Profit after tax

     250               (507  (257  449   192 

Currency translation movements

              773         773   1   774 

Available for sale investments

        418               418      418 

Cash flow hedges

           1,554            1,554      1,554 

Pension remeasurement

                    205   205      205 

Other

                    (43  (43  1   (42

Total comprehensive income net of tax from continuing operations

     250   418   1,554   773      (345  2,650   451   3,101 

Total comprehensive income net of tax from discontinued operation

        (4  (10  (213     333   106   240   346 

Total comprehensive (loss)/income for the year

     250   414   1,544   560      (12  2,756   691   3,447 

Issue of new ordinary shares

  150                     150      150 

Issue of shares under employee share schemes

  772                  693   1,465      1,465 

Issue and exchange of other equity instruments

     2,263               (155  2,108   (1,527  581 

Other equity instruments coupons paid

     (250              54   (196     (196

Redemption of preference shares

                    (104  (104  (687  (791

Increase in treasury shares

                 (909     (909     (909

Vesting of shares under employee share schemes

                 866   (866         

Dividends paid

                    (1,057  (1,057  (631  (1,688

Other reserve movements

     (4              (27  (31  (19  (50

Balance as at 31 December 2014

  20,809   4,322   562   1,817   (582  927   31,712   59,567   6,391   65,958 

 

214222  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 20152016 Annual Report on Form 20-F  


Consolidated financial statements

Consolidated cash flow statement

        

 

 

For the year ended 31 December

   

 

2015

£m

  

  

   

 

2014

£m

  

  

   

 

2013

£m

  

  

   

2016

£m

 

 

   

2015

£m

 

 

   

2014

£m

 

 

Continuing operations

            

Reconciliation of profit before tax to net cash flows from operating activities:

            

Profit before tax

   2,073     2,256     2,868     3,230    1,146    1,312 

Adjustment for non-cash items:

            

Allowance for impairment

   2,105     2,168     3,071     2,357    1,752    1,816 

Depreciation, amortisation and impairment of property, plant, equipment and intangibles

   1,324     1,279     1,274     1,261    1,215    1,108 

Other provisions, including pensions

   4,333     3,600     3,674     1,964    4,241    3,487 

Net loss on disposal of investments and property, plant and equipment

   (374   (619   (145

Other non-cash movements

   (635   (808   (1,293

Net profit on disposal of investments and property, plant and equipment

   (912   (374   (619

Othernon-cash movements including exchange rate movements

   (20,025   226    (595

Changes in operating assets and liabilities

            

Net decrease/(increase) in loans and advances to banks and customers

   27,565     3,684     (3,915

Net decrease/(increase) in reverse repurchase agreements and other similar secured lending

   103,566     55,021     (10,264

Net (decrease) in deposits and debt securities in issue

   (37,721   (2,113   (13,392

Net (decrease) in repurchase agreements and other similar secured borrowing

   (99,444   (72,269   (20,430

Net (increase)/decrease in loans and advances to banks and customers

   (25,385   22,641    4,079 

Net decrease in reverse repurchase agreements and other similar lending

   14,733    103,471    54,380 

Net increase/(decrease) in deposits and debt securities in issue

   49,064    (33,120   (2,319

Net (decrease) in repurchase agreements and other similar borrowing

   (4,852   (99,602   (72,107

Net (increase)/decrease in derivative financial instruments

   (2,868   2,593     971     (2,318   (3,315   2,961 

Net decrease in trading assets

   37,342     18,368     13,443  

Net (decrease)/increase in trading liabilities

   (11,157   (8,340   8,670  

Net (increase) in financial investments

   (3,757   (7,156   (6,114

Net (increase)/decrease in other assets

   (2,324   (14,694   128  

Net (decrease)/increase in other liabilities

   (2,230   8,141     (1,930

Net (increase)/decrease in trading assets

   (5,577   37,091    18,651 

Net increase/(decrease) in trading liabilities

   880    (10,877   (8,565

Net decrease/(increase) in financial investments

   807    (3,064   (5,882

Net (increase) in other assets

   (2,629   (2,661   (14,642

Net (increase)/decrease in other liabilities

   (532   (1,766   8,092 

Corporate income tax paid

   (1,670   (1,552   (1,558   (780   (1,670   (1,552

Net cash from operating activities

   16,128     (10,441   (24,942   11,286    15,334    (10,395

Purchase of available for sale investments

   (120,251   (108,645   (92,015   (65,086   (120,061   (109,296

Proceeds from sale or redemption of available for sale investments

   113,048     120,843     69,473     102,515    114,529    119,129 

Purchase of property, plant and equipment

   (852   (657   (736

Purchase of property, plant and equipment and intangibles

   (1,707   (1,928   (691

Proceeds from sale of property, plant and equipment and intangibles

   358    393    335 

Proceeds from part disposal of investment in BAGL

   595         

Other cash flows associated with investing activities

   (379   (886   633     32    516    (48

Net cash from investing activities

   (8,434   10,655     (22,645   36,707    (6,551   8,429 

Dividends paid

   (1,496   (1,688   (1,672   (1,304   (1,496   (1,688

Proceeds of borrowings and issuance of subordinated debt

   1,138     826     700  

Repayments of borrowings and redemption of subordinated debt

   (682   (1,100   (1,425

Issuance of subordinated debt

   1,457    879    848 

Redemption of subordinated debt

   (1,143   (556   (869

Net issue of shares and other equity instruments

   1,278     559     9,473     1,400    1,278    559 

Repurchase of shares and other equity instruments

   (1,587       (104

Net purchase of treasury shares

   (679   (909   (1,066   (140   (679   (909

Net redemption of shares issued to non-controlling interests

        (746   (100           (746

Net cash from financing activities

   (441   (3,058   5,910     (1,317   (574   (2,805

Net cash from discontinued operations

   405    (1,821   1,809 

Effect of exchange rates on cash and cash equivalents

   824     (431   198     10,473    1,689    (313

Net increase/(decrease) in cash and cash equivalents

   8,077     (3,275   (41,479   57,554    8,077    (3,275

Cash and cash equivalents at beginning of year

   78,479     81,754     123,233     86,556    78,479    81,754 

Cash and cash equivalents at end of year

   86,556     78,479     81,754     144,110    86,556    78,479 

Cash and cash equivalents comprise:

            

Cash and balances at central banks

   49,711     39,695     45,687     102,353    49,711    39,695 

Loans and advances to banks with original maturity less than three months

   35,876     36,282     35,259     38,252    35,876    36,282 

Available for sale treasury and other eligible bills with original maturity less than three months

   816     2,322     644     356    816    2,322 

Trading portfolio assets with original maturity less than three months

   153     180     164         153    180 

Cash and cash equivalents held for sale

   3,149         
   86,556     78,479     81,754     144,110    86,556    78,479 

Interest received was £20,376m (2014: £21,372m, 2013: £23,387m)£22,099m (2015: £20,376m; 2014: £21,372m) and interest paid was £7,534m (2014: £8,566m, 2013: £10,709m)£8,850m (2015: £7,534m; 2014: £8,566m).

The Group is required to maintain balances with central banks and other regulatory authorities and these amounted to £4,369m (2014: £4,448m, 2013: £4,722m)£4,254m (2015: £4,369m; 2014: £4,448m).

For the purposes of the cash flow statement, cash comprises cash on hand and demand deposits and cash equivalents comprise highly liquid investments that are convertible into cash with an insignificant risk of changes in value with original maturities of three months or less. Repurchase and reverse repurchase agreements are not considered to be part of cash equivalents.

 

  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 20152016 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  215223


Financial statements of Barclays PLC

Parent company accounts

            

 

Income statement

                          

For the year ended 31 December

   Notes       
 
2015
£m
  
  
     
 
2014
£m
  
  
     
 
2013
£m
  
  

Dividends received from subsidiary

       876       821       734  

Net interest expense

       (7     (6     (6

Other income/(expense)

   45       227       275       (137

Management charge from subsidiary

          (6     (6     (6

Profit before tax

       1,090       1,084       585  

Tax

          (43     (57     35  

Profit after tax

          1,047       1,027       620  

Attributable to

                          

Ordinary equity holders

       702       777       620  

Other equity holders

          345       250         

Income statement

                          

For the year ended 31 December

   Notes      
2016
£m
 
 
     
2015
£m
 
 
     
2014
£m
 
 

Dividends received from subsidiary

       621      876      821 

Net interest income/(expense)

       5      (7     (6

Other income

   45      334      227      275 

Operating expenses

          (26     (6     (6

Profit before tax

       934      1,090      1,084 

Tax

          (60     (43     (57

Profit after tax

          874      1,047      1,027 

Attributable to

                          

Ordinary equity holders

       417      702      777 

Other equity holders

          457      345      250 

Profit after tax and total comprehensive income for the year was £1,047m (2014: £1,027m)£874m (2015: £1,047m). There were no other components of total comprehensive income other than the profit after tax.

The Company had nohas seven members of staff during the year (2014: nil, 2013:(2015: nil).

 

Balance sheet

                          

As at 31 December

   Notes       

 

2015

£m

  

  

     

 

2014

£m

  

  

   Notes      
2016
£m
 
 
     
2015
£m
 
 

Assets

                    

Investment in subsidiary

   45       35,303       33,743  

Loans and advances to subsidiary

   45       7,990       2,866  

Derivative financial instrument

   45       210       313  

Investment in subsidiaries

   45      36,553      35,303 

Loans and advances to subsidiaries

   45      19,421      7,990 

Financial investments

   45      1,218       

Derivative financial instruments

   45      268      210 

Other assets

        133       174          105      133 

Total assets

        43,636       37,096          57,565      43,636 

Liabilities

                    

Deposits from banks

       494       528         547      494 

Subordinated liabilities

   45       1,766       810     45      3,789      1,766 

Debt securities in issue

   45       6,224       2,056     45      16,893      6,224 

Other liabilities

               10          14       

Total liabilities

        8,484       3,404          21,243      8,484 

Shareholders’ equity

          

Equity

          

Called up share capital

   31       4,201       4,125     31      4,241      4,201 

Share premium account

   31       17,385       16,684     31      17,601      17,385 

Other equity instruments

   31       5,321       4,326     31      6,453      5,321 

Capital redemption reserve

       394       394         420      394 

Retained earnings

        7,851       8,163          7,607      7,851 

Total shareholders’ equity

        35,152       33,692  

Total liabilities and shareholders’ equity

        43,636       37,096  

Total equity

        36,322      35,152 

Total liabilities and equity

        57,565      43,636 

The financial statements on pages 216 and 217224 to 225 and the accompanying note on page 298307 were approved by the Board of Directors on 2922 February 20162017 and signed on its behalf by:

John McFarlane

Group Chairman

JesJames E Staley

Group Chief Executive

Tushar Morzaria

Group Finance Director

 

216224  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 20152016 Annual Report on Form 20-F  


        

        

        

 

 

Statement of changes in equity

                                      
   Notes    



Called up
share capital
and share
premium

£m

 
 
 
 

 

   

Other equity
instruments

£m

 
 

 

   


Capital
redemption
reserve

£m

 
 
 

 

  

Available for
sale reserve
£m
 
 
 
   

Retained
earnings
£m
 
 
 
   
Total equity
£m
 
 

Balance as at 1 January 2016

     21,586    5,321    394       7,851    35,152 

Profit after tax and total comprehensive income

         457           417    874 

Issue of new ordinary shares

     68                   68 

Issue of shares under employee share schemes

     188                   188 

Issue of other equity instruments

         1,132               1,132 

Dividends

   12                   (757   (757

Other equity instruments coupons paid

         (457          91    (366

Other

                26    5    31 

Balance as at 31 December 2016

      21,842    6,453    394  26    7,607    36,322 
       Notes     
 

 

 

    Called up share
capital and

share premium

£m

  
  

  

  

   
 

 

    Other equity
instruments

£m

  
  

  

   

 

 
 

Capital

    reserves and

other equity
£m

  

  

  
  

   

 
 

    Retained

earnings
£m

  

  
  

   
 
    Total equity
£m
  
  

Balance as at 1 January 2015

     20,809     4,326     394     8,163     33,692       20,809    4,326    394     8,163    33,692 

Profit after tax and total comprehensive income

          345          702     1,047           345         702    1,047 

Issue of new ordinary shares

     137                    137       137                 137 

Issue of shares under employee share schemes

     640                    640       640                 640 

Issue of other equity instruments

          995               995           995             995 

Dividends

   12                    (1,081   (1,081   12                 (1,081   (1,081

Other equity instruments coupons paid

          (345        70     (275         (345        70    (275

Other

                     (3   (3                    (3   (3

Balance as at 31 December 2015

      21,586     5,321     394     7,851     35,152        21,586    5,321    394      7,851    35,152 

Balance as at 1 January 2014

     19,887     2,063     394     8,398     30,742       19,887    2,063    394     8,398    30,742 

Profit after tax and total comprehensive income

          250          777     1,027           250         777    1,027 

Issue of new ordinary shares

     150                    150       150                 150 

Issue of shares under employee share schemes

     772                    772       772                 772 

Issue of other equity instruments

          2,263               2,263           2,263             2,263 

Dividends

   12                    (1,057   (1,057   12                 (1,057   (1,057

Other equity instruments coupons paid

          (250        54     (196         (250        54    (196

Other

                     (9   (9                    (9   (9

Balance as at 31 December 2014

      20,809     4,326     394     8,163     33,692        20,809��   4,326    394      8,163    33,692 

Balance as at 1 January 2013

     12,477          394     8,654     21,525  

Profit after tax and total comprehensive income

                    620     620  

Issue of new ordinary shares

     6,620                    6,620  

Issue of shares under employee share schemes

     790                    790  

Issue of other equity instruments

          2,063               2,063  

Dividends

   12                    (859   (859

Other

                   (17   (17

Balance as at 31 December 2013

      19,887     2,063     394     8,398     30,742  
                         

Cash flow statement

                                      

For the year ended 31 December

            

 

2015

£m

  

  

   

 

2014

£m

  

  

   

 

2013

£m

  

  

              

2016

£m

 

 

   

2015

£m

 

 

   

2014

£m

 

 

Reconciliation of profit before tax to net cash flows from operating activities:

            

Reconciliation of profit before tax to net cash flows from operating activities:

 

       

Profit before tax

         1,090     1,084     585           934    1,090    1,084 

Changes in operating assets and liabilities

         100     734     (546         37    100    734 

Other non-cash movements

         52     (43   (20         62    52    (43

Corporate income tax (paid)/received

            (27   38     (3                  (27   38 

Net cash from operating activities

            1,215     1,813     16  

Net cash generated from operating activities

             1,033    1,215    1,813 

Capital contribution to subsidiary

            (1,560   (3,684   (8,630             (1,250   (1,560   (3,684

Net cash used in investing activities

            (1,560   (3,684   (8,630             (1,250   (1,560   (3,684

Issue of shares and other equity instruments

         1,771     3,185     9,473           1,388    1,771    3,185 

Net (increase) in loans and advances to bank subsidiaries of the Parent

         (4,973   (2,866              (10,942   (4,973   (2,866

Net increase in deposits and debt securities in issue

         4,052     2,056                9,314    4,052    2,056 

Proceeds of borrowings and issuance of subordinated debt

         921     803     (859         1,671    921    803 

Dividends paid

         (1,081   (1,057              (757   (1,081   (1,057

Coupons paid

            (345   (250     

Net cash from financing activities

            345     1,871     8,614  

Coupons paid on AT1 instruments

             (457   (345   (250

Net cash generated from financing activities

             217    345    1,871 

Net increase/(decrease) in cash and cash equivalents

                                               

Cash and cash equivalents at beginning of year

                                               

Cash and cash equivalents at end of year

                                               

Net cash from operating activities includes:

            

Net cash generated from operating activities includes:

             

Dividends received

         876     821     734           621    876    821 

Interest paid

            (7   (6   (6

Interest received/(paid)

             5    (7   (6

The Parent Company’s principal activity is to hold the investment in its wholly-owned subsidiary,subsidiaries, Barclays Bank PLC.PLC and Group Service Company. Dividends received are treated as operating income.

The Company was not exposed at 31 December 20152016 or 20142015 to significant risks arising from the financial instruments it holds, which comprised loans and advances and other assets which had no market risk or material credit risk.

 

  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 20152016 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  217225


Notes to the financial statements

For the year ended 31 December 20152016

    

 

 

This section describes Barclays’ significant accounting policies and critical accounting estimates that relate to the financial statements and notes as a whole. If an accounting policy or a critical accounting estimate relates to a specificparticular note, the applicable accounting policy and/or critical accounting estimate is contained withinwith the relevant note.

    

1 Significant accounting policies

 

 

1. Reporting entity

These financial statements are prepared for Barclays PLC and its subsidiaries (the Barclays PLC Group or the Group) under Section 399 of the Companies Act 2006. The Group is a major global financial services provider engaged in retail banking, credit cards, wholesale banking, investment banking, wealth management and investment management services. In addition, individual financial statements have been presented for the holding company.

 

2. Compliance with International Financial Reporting Standards

The consolidated financial statements of the Group, and the individual financial statements of Barclays PLC, have been prepared in accordance with International Financial Reporting Standards (IFRS) and interpretations (IFRICs) issued by the Interpretations Committee, as published by the International Accounting Standards Board (IASB). They are also in accordance with IFRS and IFRIC interpretations endorsed by the EU.European Union. The principal accounting policies applied in the preparation of the consolidated and individual financial statements are set out below, and in the relevant notes to the financial statements. These policies have been consistently applied.

 

3. Basis of preparation

The consolidated and individual financial statements have been prepared under the historical cost convention modified to include the fair valuation of investment property, and particular financial instruments, to the extent required or permitted under IFRS as set out in the relevant accounting policies. They are stated in millions of pounds Sterling (£m), the functional currency of Barclays PLC.

 

4. Accounting policies

Barclays prepares financial statements in accordance with IFRS. The Group’s significant accounting policies relating to specific financial statement items, together with a description of the accounting estimates and judgements that were critical to preparing them, are set out under the relevant notes. Accounting policies that affect the financial statements as a whole are set out below.

 

(i) Consolidation

Barclays applies IFRS 10Consolidated Financial Statements.

 

The consolidated financial statements combine the financial statements of Barclays PLC and all its subsidiaries. Subsidiaries are entities over which Barclays PLC has control. The Group has control over another entity when the Group has all of the following:

 

1) power over the relevant activities of the investee, for example through voting or other rightsrights;

 

2) exposure to, or rights to, variable returns from its involvement with the investee,investee; and

 

3) the ability to affect those returns through its power over the investee.

 

The assessment of control is based on the consideration of all facts and circumstances. The Group reassesses whether it controls an investee if facts and circumstances indicate that there are changes to one or more of the three elements of control.

 

Intra-group transactions and balances are eliminated on consolidation and consistent accounting policies are used throughout the Group for the purposes of the consolidation.

 

Changes in ownership interests in subsidiaries are accounted for as equity transactions if they occur after control has already been obtained and they do not result in loss of control.

 

As the consolidated financial statements include partnerships where the Group member is a partner, advantage has been taken of the exemption under Regulation 7 of the Partnership (Accounts) Regulations 2008 with regard to preparing and filing of individual partnership financial statements.

 

Details of the principal subsidiaries are given in Note 36, and a complete list of all subsidiaries is presented in Note 46.

 

(ii) Foreign currency translation

The Group applies IAS 21The Effects of Changes in Foreign Exchange Rates.Rates. Transactions and balances in foreign currencies are translated into Sterling at the rate ruling on the date of the transaction. Foreign currency balances are translated into Sterling at the period end exchange rates. Exchange rate gains and losses on such balances are taken to the income statement.

 

The Group’s foreign operations (including subsidiaries, joint ventures, associates and branches) based mainly outside the UK may have different functional currencies. The functional currency of an operation is the currency of the main economy to which it is exposed.

 

Prior to consolidation (or equity accounting) the assets and liabilities ofnon-Sterling operations are translated at the closing rate and items of income, expense and other comprehensive income are translated into Sterling at the rate on the date of the transactions. Exchange rate differences arising on the translation of foreign operations are included in currency translation reserves within equity. These are transferred to the income statement when the Group loses control, joint control or significant influence over the foreign operation or on partial disposal of the operation.

 

(iii) Financial assets and liabilities

The Group applies IAS 39Financial Instruments: Recognition and Measurement to the recognition, classification and measurement, and derecognition of financial assets and financial liabilities, the impairment of financial assets, and hedge accounting.

226  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2016 Annual Report on Form 20-F


1 Significant accounting policiescontinued

 

Recognition

The Group recognises financial assets and liabilities when it becomes a party to the terms of the contract, which is the trade date or the settlement date.

 

218  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F


1 Significant accounting policiescontinued

Classification and measurement

Financial assets and liabilities are initially recognised at fair value and may be held at fair value or amortised cost depending on the Group’s intention towardstoward the assets and the nature of the assets and liabilities, mainly determined by their contractual terms.

 

The accounting policy for each type of financial asset or liability is included within the relevant note for the item. The Group’s policies for determining the fair values of the assets and liabilities are set out in Note 18.

 

Derecognition

The Group derecognises a financial asset, or a portion of a financial asset, from its balance sheet where the contractual rights to cash flows from the asset have expired, or have been transferred, usually by sale, and with them either substantially all the risks and rewards of the asset or significant risks and rewards, along with the unconditional ability to sell or pledge the asset.

 

Financial liabilities are derecognised when the liability has been settled, has expired or has been extinguished. An exchange of an existing financial liability for a new liability with the same lender on substantially different terms – generally a difference of 10% in the present value of the cash flows or a substantive qualitative amendment – is accounted for as an extinguishment of the original financial liability and the recognition of a new financial liability.

 

Critical accounting estimates and judgements

Transactions in which the Group transfers assets and liabilities, portions of them, or financial risks associated with them can be complex and it may not be obvious whether substantially all of the risks and rewards have been transferred. It is often necessary to perform a quantitative analysis. Such an analysis compares the Group’s exposure to variability in asset cash flows before the transfer with its retained exposure after the transfer.

 

A cash flow analysis of this nature may require judgement. In particular, it is necessary to estimate the asset’s expected future cash flows as well as potential variability around this expectation. The method of estimating expected future cash flows depends on the nature of the asset, with market and market-implied data used to the greatest extent possible. The potential variability around this expectation is typically determined by stressing underlying parameters to create reasonable alternative upside and downside scenarios. Probabilities are then assigned to each scenario. Stressed parameters may include default rates, loss severity, or prepayment rates.

 

(iv) Issued debt and equity instruments

The Group applies IAS 32Financial Instruments: Presentation, to determine whether funding is either a financial liability (debt) or equity.

 

Issued financial instruments or their components are classified as liabilities if the contractual arrangement results in the Group having a present obligation to either deliver cash or another financial asset, or a variable number of equity shares, to the holder of the instrument. If this is not the case, the instrument is generally an equity instrument and the proceeds included in equity, net of transaction costs. Dividends and other returns to equity holders are recognised when paid or declared by the members at the AGM and treated as a deduction from equity.

 

Where issued financial instruments contain both liability and equity components, these are accounted for separately. The fair value of the debt is estimated first and the balance of the proceeds is included within equity.

 

New and amended standards and interpretations

The accounting policies adopted are consistent with those of the previous financial year. There were no new or amended standards or interpretations that resulted in a change in accounting policy.

 

Future accounting developments

There have been and are expected to be a number of significant changes to the Group’s financial reporting after 20152016 as a result of amended or new accounting standards that have been or will be issued by the IASB. The most significant of these are as follows:

 

IFRS 9 – Financial instruments

IFRS 9 Financial Instruments which will replace IAS 39Financial Instruments: Recognition and Measurement is effective for periods beginning on or after 1 January 2018 and is currently expected to bewas endorsed by the EU in November 2016. IFRS 9, in particular the impairment requirements, will lead to significant changes in the accounting for financial instruments. Barclays does not expect to restate comparatives on initial application of IFRS 9 on 1 January 2018 but will provide detailed transitional disclosures in accordance with the amended requirements of IFRS 7.

 

Impairment

IFRS 9 introduces a revised impairment model which will require entities to recognise expected credit losses based on unbiased forward-looking information, replacinginformation. This replaces the existing IAS 39 incurred loss model which only recognises impairment if there is objective evidence that a loss is already incurred.

incurred and would measure the loss at the most probable outcome. The IFRS 9 impairment model will be applicable to all financial assets at amortised cost, lease receivables, debt financial assets at fair value through OCI,other comprehensive income, loan commitments and financial guarantee contracts. This contrasts to the IAS 39 impairment model which is not applicable to loan commitments and financial guarantee contracts (these were covered by IAS 37). In addition, the IAS 39 Availablerequires the impairment of available for Sale assets model is not fully alignedsale debt to be based on the modelfair value loss rather than estimated future cashflows as for amortised cost assets. Intercompany exposures, including loan commitments and financial guarantee contracts, are also in scope in the stand alone reporting entity accounts.

 

IFRS 9 requires the recognition of lifetime expected credit losses for financial instruments for which the credit risk has increased significantly since initial recognition. If the credit risk has not increased significantly since initial recognition 12 month expected credit losses are recognised, being the expected credit losses from default events that are possible within 12 months after the reporting date.

 

Expected credit losses are the unbiased probability of default weighted average credit losses determined by evaluating a range of possible outcomes
Barclays PLC and forecast future economic conditions. Credit losses are the expected cash shortfalls from what is contractually due over the expected life of the financial instrument, discounted at the effective interest rate.Barclays Bank PLC 2016 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  227


Notes to the financial statements

For the year ended 31 December 2016

1 Significant accounting policiescontinued

 

Under IFRS 9, impairment will be recognised earlier than is the case under IAS 39 because it requires

The measurement of expected losses to be recognised before the loss event arises. Measurement will involve increased complexity and judgement including estimation of probabilities of defaults, loss given default, a range of unbiased future economic scenarios, estimation of expected lives, estimation of exposures at default and assessing increases in credit risk.

It is expected to have a material financial impact but itand impairment charges will tend to be more volatile. Impairment will also be recognised earlier and the amounts will be higher. Unsecured products with longer expected lives, such as revolving credit cards, are expected to be most impacted. It will not be practical to disclose reliable financial impact estimates until the implementation programme and validation and testing is further advanced.advanced, which will be no later than the Barclays PLC Annual Report 2017.

Based on the current requirements of CRD IV, the expected increase in the accounting impairment provision would reduce CET1 capital but the impact would be partially mitigated by the ‘excess of expected losses over impairment’ included in the CET1 calculation as discussed on page 156. However, the Basel Committee on Banking Supervision (BCBS) is currently considering amending the capital rules as a result of IFRS 9 and is considering transitional rules which may mitigate or spread capital impacts from 1 January 2018 as well as permanent changes to the capital requirements. In addition, as part of its review of the Capital Requirements Regulation (CRR) the European Commission has proposed that the capital impact of IFRS 9 isphased-in over a five-year period. IFRS 9 is considered in the Group capital planning.

Key concepts and management judgements

The impairment requirements are complex and require management judgements, estimates and assumptions. Key concepts and management judgements will continue to be refined during the 2017 parallel run and as any further authoritative guidance is issued, and include:

  Determining a significant increase in credit risk since initial recognition

IFRS 9 requires the recognition of 12 month expected credit losses (the expected credit losses from default events that are expected within 12 months of reporting date) if credit risk has not significantly increased since initial recognition (stage 1), and lifetime expected credit losses for financial instruments for which the credit risk has increased significantly since initial recognition or which are credit impaired. Barclays expects to estimate when a significant increase in credit risk has occurred based on quantitative and qualitative assessments. Quantitative assessments will be based on changes in and/or absolute thresholds for weighted average cumulative lifetime probabilities of default, determined for each portfolio. Qualitative drivers of a significant increase in credit risk are expected to include exposures determined to be higher risk (by credit risk) and subject to closer credit risk monitoring. Exposures which are more than 30 days past due will be used as a backstop rather than a primary driver. Exposures will move back to stage 1 once they no longer meet the criteria for a significant increase in credit risk and when any cure criteria used for credit risk management are met. This is subject to a minimum of 12 months’ full performance including timely receipt of all payments over that period, for exposures that have been restructured or granted forbearance or concessions. Barclays does not expect to rely primarily on the low credit risk exemption which would assume facilities of investment grade are not significantly deteriorated. Determining the probability of default at initial recognition is expected to require management estimates, in particular for exposures issued before the effective date of IFRS 9. For certain revolving facilities such as credit cards and overdrafts, this is expected to be when the facility was first entered into which could have been significantly in the past. Exposures modified due to financial difficulty do not generally result in a substantial modification or derecognition and therefore the probability of default at initial recognition is not reset for these exposures.

  Forward-looking information

Credit losses are the expected cash shortfalls from what is contractually due over the expected life of the financial instrument, discounted at the original effective interest rate. Expected credit losses are the unbiased probability-weighted credit losses determined by evaluating a range of possible outcomes and considering future economic conditions. When there is anon-linear relationship between forward-looking economic scenarios and their associated credit losses, a range of forward-looking economic scenarios, currently expected to be a minimum of five, will be considered to ensure a sufficient unbiased representative sample of the complete distribution is included in determining the expected loss. Stress testing methodologies will be leveraged for forecasting economic scenarios for IFRS 9 purposes.

  Definition of default and credit impaired assets

The definition of default for the purpose of determining expected credit losses is expected to be aligned to the Regulatory Capital CRR Article 178 definition of default, which considers indicators that the debtor is unlikely to pay, includes exposures in forbearance and is no later than when the exposure is more than 90 days past due or 180 days past due in the case of UK mortgages. When exposures are identified as credit impaired or purchased or originated as such, IFRS 9 requires separate disclosure and interest income to be presented on a net basis rather than gross.

Credit impairment is expected to occur when the exposure has defaulted which is also anticipated to align to when an exposure is identified as individually impaired under the incurred loss model of IAS 39.Write-off polices are not expected to change from IAS 39.

  Expected life

Lifetime expected credit losses must be measured over the expected life. This is restricted to the maximum contractual life and takes into account expected prepayment, extension, call and similar options, except for certain revolver financial instruments that include both a drawn and an undrawn component where the entity’s contractual ability to demand repayment and cancel the undrawn commitment does not limit the entity’s exposure to credit losses to the contractual notice period, such as credit cards and overdrafts. The expected life for these revolver facilities is expected to be behavioral life. Potential future modifications of contracts are not taken into account when determining the expected life or exposure at default until they occur.

  Modelling techniques

Expected credit losses (ECL) are calculated by multiplying three main components, being the probability of default (PD), loss given default (LGD) and the exposure at default (EAD). The Basel ECL calculations are leveraged for IFRS 9 modelling but adjusted for key differences which include:

–  BCBS requires 12 month through the economic cycle losses whereas IFRS 9 requires 12 month or lifetime point-in-time losses based on conditions at the reporting date and multiple forecasts of the future economic conditions over the expected lives; and

–  IFRS 9 models do not include some of the conservative BCBS model floors and downturn assessments and require discounting to the reporting date at the original effective interest rate rather than using the cost of capital to the date of default.

Management adjustments will be made to modelled output to account for situations where known or expected risk factors and information have not been considered in the modelling process, for example forecast economic scenarios for uncertain political events.

228  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2016 Annual Report on Form 20-F


1 Significant accounting policiescontinued

Classification and measurement

IFRS 9 will require financial assets to be classified on the basis of two criteria:

1) The business model within which financial assets are managed, and;

2) Their contractual cash flow characteristics (whether the cash flows represent ‘solely payments of principal and interest’).

Financial assets will be measured at amortised cost if they are held within a business model whose objective is to hold financial assets in order to collect contractual cash flows, and their contractual cash flows represent solely payments of principal and interest.

Financial assets will be measured at fair value through other comprehensive income if they are held within a business model whose objective is achieved by both collecting contractual cash flows and selling financial assets, and their contractual cash flows represent solely payments of principal and interest.

Other financial assets are measured at fair value through profit and loss. There is an option to make an irrevocable election fornon-traded equity investments to be measured at fair value through other comprehensive income, in which case dividends are recognised in profit or loss, but gains or losses are not reclassified to profit or loss upon derecognition, and impairment is not recognised in the income statement.

The accounting for financial liabilities is largely unchanged, except for financial liabilities designated at fair value through profit and loss. Gains and losses on such financial liabilities arising from changes in Barclays’ own credit risk will be presented in other comprehensive income rather than in profit and loss. There is no subsequent reclassification of realised gains or losses on own credit to profit and loss statement.

Barclays’ Classification and Measurement implementation programme is in progress. An assessment of potential changes to financial assets based on 30 June 2016 balances is being conducted, including an assessment of business models across various portfolios, and a review of contractual cash flow features for material financial assets.

There are some classification changes expected but they are not significant from a Group perspective. The notable potential exception relates to loans with symmetric make whole or fair value prepayment options, which are currently subject to interpretation discussions at IFRS Interpretations Committee (IFRIC) and IASB as to whether their contractual cash flows represent solely payments of principal and interest, or whether they must be measured at fair value through profit or loss in their entirety. Such prepayment features are present in some fixed rate corporate and investment bank loans. The carrying value of such loans is expected to be significant on initial application of IFRS 9. If such loans are concluded to be measured at fair value through profit or loss the potential impact on opening equity and profit or loss would depend on their fair values compared to their carrying amounts, and the future changes in fair value.

Business models are determined on initial application and this may differ from the model at 30 June 2016 for certain portfolios, and contractual cash flow characteristics assessed as at 30 June 2016 may not be representative of the population on transition.

The focus of the project during 2017 will be on finalising processes, governance and controls in preparation for initial application in 2018. IFRS 9 is applied retrospectively, although comparatives are not restated, with adjustments arising from classification and measurement changes recognised in opening equity.

Hedge accounting

IFRS 9 contains revised requirements on hedge accounting, which are more closely aligned with an entity’s risk management strategies and risk management objectives. The new rules would replace the current quantitative effectiveness test with a simpler version, and requires that an economic relationship exist between the hedged item and the hedging instrument. Under the new rules, voluntary hedgede-designations would not be allowed.

Adoption of the IFRS 9 hedge accounting requirements is optional, and certain aspects of IAS 39, being the portfolio fair value hedge for interest rate risk, would continue to be available for entities (while applying IFRS 9 to the remainder of the entity’s hedge accounting relationships) until the IASB completes its accounting for dynamic risk management project.

Based on analysis performed, Barclays expects to continue applying IAS 39 hedge accounting, although it will implement the amended IFRS 7 hedge accounting disclosure requirements.

Own credit

Barclays has applied the option in IFRS 9 to recognise changes in own credit in other comprehensive income from 1 January 2017. This will have no effect on net assets, and any changes due to own credit in prior periods have not been restated. Any realised and unrealised amounts recognised in other comprehensive income will not be reclassified to the income statement in future periods.

 

 

  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 20152016 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  219229


Notes to the financial statements

For the year ended 31 December 20152016

    

 

 

1 Significant accounting policiescontinued

 

Based on the current requirements of CRD IV, the expected increase in the accounting impairment provision would reduce CET1 capital but the impact would be partially mitigated by the ‘excess of expected losses over impairment’ included in the CET1 calculation as discussed on page 150).

Classification and measurement

IFRS 9 will require financial assets to be classified on the basis of two criteria:

1) the business model within which financial assets are managed, and

2) their contractual cash flow characteristics (whether the cash flows represent ‘solely payments of principal and interest’).

Financial assets will be measured at amortised cost if they are held within a business model whose objective is to hold financial assets in order to collect contractual cash flows, and their contractual cash flows represent solely payments of principal and interest.

Financial assets will be measured at fair value through other comprehensive income if they are held within a business model whose objective is achieved by both collecting contractual cash flows and selling financial assets, and their contractual cash flows represent solely payments of principal and interest.

Other financial assets are measured at fair value through profit and loss. There is an option to make an irrevocable election for non-traded equity investments to be measured at fair value through other comprehensive income.

The accounting for financial liabilities is largely unchanged, except for financial liabilities designated at fair value through profit and loss. Gains and losses on such financial liabilities arising from changes in Barclays’ own credit risk will be presented in other comprehensive income rather than in profit and loss.

Hedge accounting

IFRS 9 contains revised requirements on hedge accounting, which are more closely aligned with an entity’s risk management strategies and risk management objectives. The new rules would replace the current quantitative effectiveness test with a simpler version, and requires that an economic relationship exist between the hedged item and the hedging instrument. Under the new rules, voluntary hedge de-designations would not be allowed.

Adoption of the IFRS 9 hedge accounting requirements is optional, and certain aspects of IAS 39, being the portfolio fair value hedge for interest rate risk, would continue to be available for entities (while applying IFRS 9 to the remainder of the entity’s hedge accounting relationships) until the IASB completes its accounting for dynamic risk management project. Barclays is considering the most appropriate approach to adopt in this area.

IFRS 15 – Revenue from Contracts with Customers

In 2014, the IASB issued IFRS 15Revenue from Contracts with Customerswhich will replace IAS 18Revenue and IAS 11Construction Contracts. It applies to all contracts with customers except leases, financial instruments and insurance contracts. The standard will establish a more systematic approach for revenue measurement and recognition. During July 2015, the IASB confirmed the deferral of the effective date by one year to 1 January 2018. The standard has not yet been endorsed by the EU. Adoption of the standard is not expected to have a significant impact.

IFRS 16 – Leases

In January 2016, the IASB issued IFRS 16Leases, which will replace IAS 17Leases. Under the new requirements, lessees would be required to recognise assets and liabilities arising from both operating and finance leases on the balance sheet. The expected effective date is 1 January 2019. The standard has not yet been endorsed by the EU.

Insurance contracts

The IASB also plans to issue a new standard on insurance contracts.

The Group is in the process of considering the financial impacts of the new standards.

Critical accounting estimates and judgements

The preparation of financial statements in accordance with IFRS requires the use of estimates. It also requires management to exercise judgement in applying the accounting policies. The key areas involving a higher degree of judgement or complexity, or areas where assumptions are significant to the consolidated and individual financial statements are highlighted under the relevant note. Critical accounting estimates and judgements are disclosed in:

IFRS 15 – Revenue from Contracts with Customers

In 2014, the IASB issued IFRS 15Revenue from Contracts with Customers which will replace IAS 18Revenue and IAS 11 Construction Contracts. It applies to all contracts with customers except leases, financial instruments and insurance contracts. The standard establishes a more systematic approach for revenue measurement and recognition by introducing a five-step model governing revenue recognition. The five-step model includes:

1) identifying the contract with the customer;

2) identifying each of the performance obligations included in the contract;

3) determining the amount of consideration in the contract;

4) allocating the consideration to each of the identified performance obligations, and;

5) recognising revenue as each performance obligation is satisfied.

In April 2016, the IASB issued clarifying amendments to IFRS 15 which provide additional application guidance but did not change the underlying principles of the standard. The standard was endorsed by the EU in September 2016. Adoption of the standard on 1 January 2018 is not expected to have a significant impact. Current project implementation efforts are primarily focused on preparing and sourcing information necessary to comply with the enhanced disclosure requirements introduced by IFRS 15.

IFRS 16 – Leases

In January 2016, the IASB issued IFRS 16 Leases, which will replace IAS 17 Leases. IFRS 16 will apply to all leases with the exception of licenses of intellectual property, rights held by licensing agreement within the scope of IAS 38Intangible Assets, service concession arrangements, leases of biological assets within the scope of IAS 41Agriculture, and leases of minerals, oil, natural gas and similarnon-regenerative resources. IFRS 16 will not result in a significant change to lessor accounting; however for lessee accounting there will no longer be a distinction between operating and finance leases. Instead lessees will be required to recognise both a right of use asset and lease liability on balance sheet for all leases. As a result Barclays will observe an increase in both assets and liabilities for transactions currently accounted for as operating leases as at 1 January 2019 (the effective date of IFRS 16). A scope exemption will apply toshort-term and low-value leases. Current project implementation efforts are focused on preparing and sourcing information necessary to comply with IFRS 16 requirements. The standard has not yet been endorsed by the EU.

Critical accounting estimates and judgements

The preparation of financial statements in accordance with IFRS requires the use of estimates. It also requires management to exercise judgement in applying the accounting policies. The key areas involving a higher degree of judgement or complexity, or areas where assumptions are significant to the consolidated and individual financial statements are highlighted under the relevant note. Critical accounting estimates and judgements are disclosed in:

IFRS 15 – Revenue from Contracts with Customers

In 2014, the IASB issued IFRS 15Revenue from Contracts with Customers which will replace IAS 18Revenue and IAS 11 Construction Contracts. It applies to all contracts with customers except leases, financial instruments and insurance contracts. The standard establishes a more systematic approach for revenue measurement and recognition by introducing a five-step model governing revenue recognition. The five-step model includes:

1) identifying the contract with the customer;

2) identifying each of the performance obligations included in the contract;

3) determining the amount of consideration in the contract;

4) allocating the consideration to each of the identified performance obligations, and;

5) recognising revenue as each performance obligation is satisfied.

In April 2016, the IASB issued clarifying amendments to IFRS 15 which provide additional application guidance but did not change the underlying principles of the standard. The standard was endorsed by the EU in September 2016. Adoption of the standard on 1 January 2018 is not expected to have a significant impact. Current project implementation efforts are primarily focused on preparing and sourcing information necessary to comply with the enhanced disclosure requirements introduced by IFRS 15.

IFRS 16 – Leases

In January 2016, the IASB issued IFRS 16 Leases, which will replace IAS 17 Leases. IFRS 16 will apply to all leases with the exception of licenses of intellectual property, rights held by licensing agreement within the scope of IAS 38Intangible Assets, service concession arrangements, leases of biological assets within the scope of IAS 41Agriculture, and leases of minerals, oil, natural gas and similarnon-regenerative resources. IFRS 16 will not result in a significant change to lessor accounting; however for lessee accounting there will no longer be a distinction between operating and finance leases. Instead lessees will be required to recognise both a right of use asset and lease liability on balance sheet for all leases. As a result Barclays will observe an increase in both assets and liabilities for transactions currently accounted for as operating leases as at 1 January 2019 (the effective date of IFRS 16). A scope exemption will apply toshort-term and low-value leases. Current project implementation efforts are focused on preparing and sourcing information necessary to comply with IFRS 16 requirements. The standard has not yet been endorsed by the EU.

Critical accounting estimates and judgements

The preparation of financial statements in accordance with IFRS requires the use of estimates. It also requires management to exercise judgement in applying the accounting policies. The key areas involving a higher degree of judgement or complexity, or areas where assumptions are significant to the consolidated and individual financial statements are highlighted under the relevant note. Critical accounting estimates and judgements are disclosed in:

  Page

 

    Page  

 

  Page    Page

Credit impairment charges and other provisions

  223

 

  

Fair value of financial instruments

 

  234  

 

  233  

Fair value of financial instruments

  246

Income taxes

  226

 

  

Provisions

 

  259  

 

  236  

Provisions

  270

Available for sale assets

  234  

Retirement benefit obligations

  281    245  

Retirement benefit obligations

  288

Other disclosures

To improve transparency and ease of reference, by concentrating related information in one place, and to reduce duplication, certain disclosures required under IFRS have been included within the Risk management section as follows:

§ Segmental reporting on pages 191 to 221

§ Credit risk management, on pages 99 and 100, including exposures to selected countries

§ Market risk, on pages 101 and 102

§ Funding risk – capital, on pages 103 and 104 and

§ Funding risk – liquidity, on page 105.

These are covered by the Audit opinion included on page 210.

Derecognition of financial assets

  299    

Other disclosures

To improve transparency and ease of reference, by concentrating related information in one place, and to reduce duplication, certain disclosures required under IFRS have been included within the Risk management section as follows:

Segmental reporting on pages 197 to 210;

Credit risk management, on pages 101 and 102 including exposures to selected countries;

Market risk, on page 103;

Funding risk – liquidity, on pages 105 and 106 ; and

Funding risk – capital, on pages 106 and 107.

These are covered by the Audit opinion, where referenced as audited, included on page 218.

The accompanying notes on pages 226 to 316 form an integral part of these financial statements.

Other disclosures

To improve transparency and ease of reference, by concentrating related information in one place, and to reduce duplication, certain disclosures required under IFRS have been included within the Risk management section as follows:

Segmental reporting on pages 197 to 210;

Credit risk management, on pages 101 and 102 including exposures to selected countries;

Market risk, on page 103;

Funding risk – liquidity, on pages 105 and 106 ; and

Funding risk – capital, on pages 106 and 107.

These are covered by the Audit opinion, where referenced as audited, included on page 218.

The accompanying notes on pages 226 to 316 form an integral part of these financial statements.

 

220230  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 20152016 Annual Report on Form 20-F  


Notes to the financial statements

Performance/return

    

 

 

The notes included in this section focus on the results and performance of the Group. Information on the income generated, expenditure incurred, segmental performance, tax, earnings per share and dividends are included here.

 

The notes included in this section focus on the results and performance of the Group. Information on the income generated, expenditure incurred, segmental performance, tax, earnings per share and dividends are included here.

2 Segmental reporting

 

 

Presentation of segmental reporting

The Group’s segmental reporting is presented in accordance with IFRS 8Operating Segments. Operating segments are reported in a manner consistent with the internal reporting provided to the Executive Committee, which is responsible for allocating resources and assessing performance of the operating segments, and has been identified as the chief operating decision maker. All transactions between business segments are conducted on an arm’s-lengtharm’s length basis, with intra-segment revenue and costs being eliminated in Head Office. Segmental income and expense excludes BAGL as it meets the requirement of a discontinued operation. Income and expenses directly associated with each segment are included in determining business segment performance.

 

During 2016 the Group’s activities have beenre-segmented into Barclays UK and Barclays International in preparation for regulatory ring fencing requirements. In addition Barclays’ interest in Barclays Africa Group Limited wasre-classified as a discontinued operation and theNon-Core segment has been enlarged. Comparatives have been updated to reflect there-segmentation.

An analysis of the Group’s performance by business segment and income by geographic segment is included on pages 191197 and 192.198. Further details on each of the segments are provided on pages 193199 to 221.210.

3 Net interest income

 

 

Accounting for interest income and expense

The Group applies IAS 39Financial Instruments: Recognition and Measurement.Measurement. Interest income on loans and advances at amortised cost, available for salefinancial investments debt investments,securities, and interest expense on financial liabilities held at amortised cost, are calculated using the effective interest method which allocates interest, and direct and incremental fees and costs, over the expected lives of the assets and liabilities.

 

The effective interest method requires the Group to estimate future cash flows, in some cases based on its experience of customers’ behaviour, considering all contractual terms of the financial instrument, as well as the expected lives of the assets and liabilities. Due

Barclays incurs certain costs to originate credit card balances with the large numbermost significant beingco-brand partner fees. To the extent these costs are attributed to revolving customer balances they are capitalised and subsequently included within the calculation of product types (both assetsthe effective interest rate. They are amortised to interest income over the period of expected repayment of the originated balance. Costs attributed to transacting customer balances are recorded within fee and liabilities),commission expense when incurred. There are no other individual estimates involved in the normal coursecalculation of business there are no individual estimateseffective interest rates that are material to the results or financial position.

 

 

     

 

2015

£m

  

  

     

 

2014

£m

  

  

     

 

2013

£m

  

  

     

2016

£m

 

 

     

2015

£m

 

 

     

2014

£m

 

 

Cash and balances with central banks     158       193       219       186      157      186 
Available for sale investments     1,387       1,615       1,804  

Financial investments

     740      698      803 
Loans and advances to banks     541       446       468       600      487      376 
Loans and advances to customers     14,732       14,677       15,613       12,958      12,512      12,768 
Other     383       432       211       57      99      61 
Interest income     17,201       17,363       18,315  

Interest incomea

     14,541      13,953      14,194 
Deposits from banks     (177     (199     (201     (265     (128     (133
Customer accounts     (930     (1,473     (2,656     (1,514     (1,406     (2,205
Debt securities in issue     (1,722     (1,922     (2,176     (990     (553     (691
Subordinated liabilities     (1,644     (1,622     (1,572     (1,104     (1,015     (1,006
Other     (170     (67     (110     (131     (243     (73
Interest expense     (4,643     (5,283     (6,715

Interest expensea

     (4,004     (3,345     (4,108
Net interest income     12,558       12,080       11,600       10,537      10,608      10,086 

Costs to originate credit card balances of £480m (2015: £368m) have been amortised to interest during the period.

Interest income includes £149m (2014: £153m)£75m (2015: £91m; 2014: £117m) accrued on impaired loans.

Other interest income principally includes interest income relating to reverse repurchase agreements and hedging activity.agreements. Similarly, other interest expense principally includes interest expense relating to repurchase agreements and hedging activity.agreements.

Included in net interest income is hedge ineffectiveness as detailed on page 233.in Note 15.

2016

Net interest income remained stable at £10,537m (2015: £10,608m), driven by increased expenses from debt securities in issue partially offset by volume growth and margin improvement within Barclays International cards portfolio.

2015

Net interest income increased by 4%£522m (5%) to £12,558m,£10,608m, primarily driven by margin improvement in Barclaycard and Africa Banking, and volume growth in both PCB and Barclaycard. This was partially offset by a decrease in Head Office due to a reduction in interest income on AFS investments. Interest income decreased by 1% to £17,201m, driven by a decline in income on AFS investments which fell 14% to £1,387m. Interest expense decreased 12% to £4,643m, driven by reducedlower interest expense onfrom customer accounts falling by 37% to £930m.accounts.

2014Note

Net interest income increased by 4% to £12,080m, driven by improvements in PCB savings margins and volume growth in Barclaycard, partially offset by a reduction in Africa Banking due to currency movements and the sale and rundown of assets in Non-Core. Interest income decreased by 5% to £17,363m, driven by a reduction in income from loans and advances to customers which fell 6% to £14,677m. Interest expense reduced 21% to £5,283m, driven by a reduction in interest on customer accounts of £1,183m to £1,473m.

aBoth interest income and interest expense for 2015 and 2014 have been adjusted by £442m and £605m respectively in order to better align the effect of hedge accounting relationships with the related hedged items. The following categories were restated: financial investments by £(545)m (2014: £(637)m), loans and advances to customers by £987m (2014: £1,242m). Customer accounts by £(1,783)m (2014: £(2,016)m), debt securities in issue by £784m (2014: £859m) and subordinated liabilities by £557m (2014: £552m).

 

  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 20152016 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  221231


Notes to the financial statements

Performance/return

    

 

 

4 Net fee and commission income

 

 

Accounting for net fee and commission income

The Group applies IAS 18Revenue.Revenue. Fees and commissions charged for services provided or received by the Group are recognised as the services are provided, for example on completion of the underlying transaction.

 

 

     
 
2015
£m
  
  
     
 
2014
£m
  
  
     
 
2013
£m
  
  
   

2016

£m

 

 

  

2015

£m

 

 

  

2014

£m

 

 

Fee and commission income                
Banking, investment management and credit related fees and commissions     9,497       9,681       10,311     8,452   8,340   8,483 
Foreign exchange commission     158       155       168     118   130   139 
Fee and commission income     9,655       9,836       10,479     8,570   8,470   8,622 
Fee and commission expense     (1,763     (1,662     (1,748   (1,802  (1,611  (1,500
Net fee and commission income     7,892       8,174       8,731     6,768   6,859   7,122 

20152016

Net fee and commission income decreased £282m£91m to £7,892m.£6,768m. This was primarily driven by an increase in expenses in Barclays International due to higher customer reward costs and lower fees income inNon-Core due to the sale of the US and Asia wealth businesses and the closure of the equities traded securities business as well as a decrease within Barclays UK due to lower interchange fees on account of EU Interchange regulation. These movements were partially offset by an increase in income in Barclays International driven by growth in the cards portfolio and an increase in investment banking business due to higher fees income from the US loans/bonds and investment grade products coupled with higher financial advisory fees.

2015

Net fee and commission income decreased £263m to £6,859m. This was primarily driven by lower income inNon-Core due to the sale of the US Wealth and Spanish retail businessesbusiness and the Barclays UK business due to the launch of the revised PCB overdraft proposition in mid 2014, which recognises the majority of the overdraft income as net interest income as opposed to fee income. Investment Bank income decreased,The decrease in Barclays International is driven by lower equity underwriting fees partially offset by higher financial advisory and debt underwriting fees. Growthfees and increase in Africa Banking was offset by adverse currency movements. These movements were partly offset by increases in Barclaycard International, driven by growth in payment volumes.

2014

Net fee and commission income decreased £557m to £8,174m. This was driven by lower fees as a result of decreased debt underwriting fees and declines in cash commissions, reflecting lower volumes in the Investment Bank. Further decreases were caused by the launch of the revised PCB overdraft proposition, which recognises the majority of the overdraft income as net interest income as opposed to fee income, and adverse currency movements in Africa Banking. These movements were partly offset by increases in Barclaycard, driven by growth in payment volumes.

5 Net trading income

 

 

Accounting for net trading income

In accordance with IAS 39,Financial Instruments: Recognition and Measurement, trading positions are held at fair value, and the resulting gains and losses are included in the income statement, together with interest and dividends arising from long and short positions and funding costs relating to trading activities.

 

Income arises from both the sale and purchase of trading positions, margins which are achieved through market makingmarket-making and customer business and from changes in fair value caused by movements in interest and exchange rates, equity prices and other market variables.

 

Own credit gains/losses arise from the fair valuation of financial liabilities designated at fair value through profit andor loss. See Note 17 Financial liabilities designated at fair value.

 

 

     
 
2015
£m
  
  
     
 
2014
£m
  
  
     
 
2013
£m
  
  
     
2016
£m
 
 
     
2015
£m
 
 
     
2014
£m
 
 
Trading income     3,193       3,297       6,773       2,803      2,996      3,052 
Own credit gains/(losses)     430       34       (220

Own credit (losses)/gains

     (35)      430      34 
Net trading income     3,623       3,331       6,553       2,768      3,426      3,086 

Included within net trading income were gains of £31m (2015: £992m (2014:gain; 2014: £1,051m loss, 2013: £914m gain)loss) on financial assets designated at fair value and lossesgains of £346m (2015: £187m (2014:loss; 2014: £65m loss, 2013: £684m loss) on financial liabilities designated at fair value.

2016

Net trading income decreased by 19% to £2,768m, primarily reflecting a £465m movement in own credit as the credit spreads on Barclays’ issued debt were relatively flat as compared to prior year. Trading income decreased by £193m, mainly driven by the continued disposal and running down of certain businesses and fair value reduction on the ESHLA portfolio withinNon-Core. This was partially offset by higher contributions from Fixed Income businesses that benefited from market volatility and higher client volumes during the year.

2015

Net trading income increased 9%by 11% to £3,623m,£3,426m, primarily reflecting a £396m favourable variance in own credit due to widening of credit spreads on Barclays’ issued debt. Trading income decreased by £104m,£56m, mainly driven by the continued disposal and running down of certain businesses and fair value movements on the ESHLA portfolio within Non-Core, and depreciation of ZAR against GBP.Non-Core. This was partially offset by increases in various Investment Bankinvestment banking businesses within Barclays International driven by higher volatility and trading activity during the year.

2014

Net trading income decreased 49% to £3,331m, primarily reflecting a £2,541m decrease in trading income, as lower volatility and subdued trading activity combined with tighter spreads reduced income across a number of businesses. Disposals and running down of certain Non-Core businesses and the £935m fair value reduction on the ESHLA portfolio (see Note 18 for further details) also contributed to the lower income. This was partially offset by a £254m favourable variance in own credit gains/losses.

 

222232  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 20152016 Annual Report on Form 20-F  


    

    

    

 

6 Net investment income

 

 

Accounting for net investment income

Dividends are recognised when the right to receive the dividend has been established. Other accounting policies relating to net investment income are set out in Note 16 Available for sale financial assets and Note 14 Financial assets designated at fair value.value and Note 16 Financial Investments.

 

 

     
 
2015
£m
  
  
     
 
2014
£m
  
  
     
 
2013
£m
  
  
     
2016
£m
 
 
     
2015
£m
 
 
     
2014
£m
 
 
Net gain from disposal of available for sale investments     374       620       145       912      385      622 
Dividend income     8       9       14       8      8      9 
Net gain from financial instruments designated at fair value     238       233       203       158      193      203 
Other investment income     518       466       318       246      511      475 
Net investment income     1,138       1,328       680       1,324      1,097      1,309 

2016

Net investment income increased by 21% to £1,324m. This was largely driven by a gain of £615m on disposal of Barclays’ share of Visa Europe Limited and gains on buy-back of senior and subordinated debt issuances. These increases were partially offset by non-repeat of gains of £496m recognised in 2015 in other investment income due to the final and full legal settlement in respect of US Lehman acquisition assets.

2015

Net investment income decreased by £190m16% to £1,138m.£1,097m. This was largely driven by lower gains and fewer disposals of available for sale investments due to unfavourable market conditions. During the year a gain of £496m (2014: £461m) was recognised in other investment income due to the final and full legal settlement in respect of US Lehman acquisition assets.

2014

Net investment income increased by £648m to £1,328m. This was largely driven by an increase in disposals of available for sale investments due to favourable market conditions and increases in other investment income as a result of greater certainty regarding the recoverability of certain assets not yet received from the 2008 US Lehman acquisition (2014: £461m gain; 2013: £259m gain).

7 Credit impairment charges and other provisions

 

 

Accounting for the impairment of financial assets

Loans and other assets held at amortised cost

In accordance with IAS 39, the Group assesses at each balance sheet date whether there is objective evidence that loan assets or available for sale financial investments (debt or equity) will not be recovered in full and, wherever necessary, recognises an impairment loss in the income statement.

 

An impairment loss is recognised if there is objective evidence of impairment as a result of events that have occurred and these have adversely impacted the estimated future cash flows from the assets. These events include:

 

§  becoming aware of significant financial difficulty of the issuer or obligor

 

§  a breach of contract, such as a default or delinquency in interest or principal payments

 

§  the Group, for economic or legal reasons relating to the borrower’s financial difficulty, grants a concession that it would not otherwise consider

 

§  it becomes probable that the borrower will enter bankruptcy or other financial reorganisation

 

§  the disappearance of an active market for that financial asset because of financial difficulties and

 

§  observable data at a portfolio level indicating that there is a measurable decrease in the estimated future cash flows, although the decrease cannot yet be ascribed to individual financial assets in the portfolio – such as adverse changes in the payment status of borrowers in the portfolio or national or local economic conditions that correlate with defaults on the assets in the portfolio.

 

Impairment assessments are conducted individually for significant assets, which comprise all wholesale customer loans and larger retail business loans and collectively for smaller loans and for portfolio level risks, such as country or sectoral risks. For the purposes of the assessment, loans with similar credit risk characteristics are grouped together – generally on the basis of their product type, industry, geographical location, collateral type, past due status and other factors relevant to the evaluation of expected future cash flows.

 

The impairment assessment includes estimating the expected future cash flows from the asset or the group of assets, which are then discounted using the original effective interest rate calculated for the asset. If this is lower than the carrying value of the asset or the portfolio, an impairment allowance is raised.

 

If, in a subsequent period, the amount of the impairment loss decreases, and the decrease can be related objectively to an event occurring after the impairment was recognised, the previously recognised impairment loss is reversed by adjusting the allowance account. The amount of the reversal is recognised in the income statement.

 

Following impairment, interest income continues to be recognised at the original effective interest rate on the restated carrying amount, representing the unwind of the discount of the expected cash flows, including the principal due onnon-accrual loans.

 

Uncollectable loans are written off against the related allowance for loan impairment on completion of the Group’s internal processes andwhen all reasonably expected recoverable amounts have been collected. Subsequent recoveries of amounts previously written off are credited to the income statement.

 

 

  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 20152016 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  223233


Notes to the financial statements

Performance/return

 

 

7 Credit impairment charges and other provisionscontinued

 

 

Available for sale financial assets

Impairment of available for sale debt instruments

Debt instruments are assessed for impairment in the same way as loans. If impairment is deemed to have occurred, the cumulative decline in the fair value of the instrument that has previously been recognised in the AFSavailable for sale reserve is removed from reserves and recognised in the income statement. This may be reversed if there is evidence that the circumstances of the issuer have improved.

 

Impairment of available for sale equity instruments

Where there has been a prolonged or significant decline in the fair value of an equity instrument below its acquisition cost, it is deemed to be impaired. The cumulative net loss that has been previously recognised directly in the AFSavailable for sale reserve is removed from reserves and recognised in the income statement.

 

Increases in the fair value of equity instruments after impairment are recognised directly in other comprehensive income. Further declines in the fair value of equity instruments after impairment are recognised in the income statement.

 

Critical accounting estimates and judgements

The calculation of impairment involves the use of judgement, based on the Group’s experience of managing credit risk.

 

Within the retail and small businesses portfolios, which comprise large numbers of small homogenoushomogeneous assets with similar risk characteristics where credit scoring techniques are generally used, statistical techniques are used to calculate impairment allowances on a portfolio basis, based on historical recovery rates and assumed emergence periods. These statistical analyses use as primary inputs the extent to which accounts in the portfolio are in arrears and historical information on the eventual losses encountered from such delinquent portfolios. There are many such models in use, each tailored to a product, line of business or customer category. Judgement and knowledge is needed in selecting the statistical methods to use when the models are developed or revised. The impairment allowance reflected in the financial statements for these portfolios is therefore considered to be reasonable and supportable. The impairment charge reflected in the income statement for retail portfolios is £1,808m (2014: £1,844m, 2013: £2,161m)£2,053m (2015: £1,535m; 2014: £1,549m) and amounts to 86% (2014: 84%, 2013: 71%87% (2015: 88%; 2014: 83%) of the total impairment charge on loans and advances.

 

For individually significant assets, impairment allowances are calculated on an individual basis and all relevant considerations that have a bearing on the expected future cash flows are taken into account (for example, the business prospects for the customer, the realisable value of collateral, the Group’s position relative to other claimants, the reliability of customer information and the likely cost and duration of thework-out process). The level of the impairment allowance is the difference between the value of the discounted expected future cash flows (discounted at the loan’s original effective interest rate), and its carrying amount. Subjective judgements are made in the calculation of future cash flows. Furthermore, judgements change with time as new information becomes available or aswork-out strategies evolve, resulting in frequent revisions to the impairment allowance as individual decisions are taken. Changes in these estimates would result in a change in the allowances and have a direct impact on the impairment charge. The impairment charge reflected in the financial statements in relation to wholesale portfolios is £289m (2014: £360m, 2013: £901m)£299m (2015: £209m; 2014: £308m) and amounts to 14% (2014: 16%, 2013: 29%13% (2015: 12%; 2014: 17%) of the total impairment charge on loans and advances. Further information on impairment allowances and related credit information is set out within the Risk review.

 

 

     
 
2015
£m
  
  
     
 
2014
£m
  
  
     
 
2013
£m
  
  
     
2016
£m
 
 
     
2015
£m
 
 
     
2014
£m
 
 
New and increased impairment allowances     3,056       3,230       3,929       3,259      2,641      2,809 
Releases     (547     (809     (683     (551     (535     (791
Recoveries     (400     (221     (201     (365     (350     (166
Impairment charges on loans and advances     2,109       2,200       3,045       2,343      1,756      1,852 
Provision (releases)/charges for undrawn contractually committed facilities and guarantees provided     (12     4       17  

Provision charges/(releases) for undrawn contractually committed facilities and guarantees provided

     9      (12     5 
Loan impairment     2,097       2,204       3,062       2,352      1,744      1,857 
Available for sale investment     17       (31     1       21      18      (31
Reverse repurchase agreements            (5     8                   (5
Credit impairment charges and other provisions     2,114       2,168       3,071       2,373      1,762      1,821 

20152016

Loan impairment fell 5%increased by 35% to £2,097m,£2,352m, primarily due to increased charges following the management review of impairment modelling for UK and US cards portfolios and the impairment of a number of single name exposures.

2015

Loan impairment decreased by 6% to £1,744m, reflecting lower impairment in PCBBarclays UK andNon-Core, partially offset by higherincreased charges in the Investment Bank and Barclaycard.

2014Barclays International.

Loan impairment fell 28% to £2,204m, reflecting lower impairment in Non-Core, PCB, and Africa Banking partially offset by higher charges in Barclaycard.

 

224234  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 20152016 Annual Report on Form 20-F  


                

                

                    

 

8 Operating expenses

 

 

Accounting for staff costs

The Group applies IAS 19Employee benefits in its accounting for most of the components of staff costs.

 

Short-term employee benefits – salaries, accrued performance costs and social security are recognised over the period in which the employees provide the services to which the payments relate.

 

Performance costs – recognised to the extent that the Group has a present obligation to its employees that can be measured reliably and are recognised over the period of service that employees are required to work to qualify for the services.

 

Deferred cash bonus awards and deferred share bonus awards are made to employees to incentivise performance over the vesting period.period employees provide services. To receive payment under an award, employees must provide service over the vesting period, typically three years from the grant date.period. The period over which the expense for deferred cash and share bonus awards is recognised is based upon the common understanding betweenperiod employees consider their services contribute to the employee andawards. For past awards, the Group and the terms and conditions of the award. The Group considers that it is appropriate to recognise the awards over the period from the date of grant to the date that the awards vest as this is the period over which the employees understand that they must provide service in ordervest. In relation to receive awards. The table on page 91 details the relevant award dates, payment dates and the period in which the income statement charge arises for bonuses. No expense has been recognised in 2015 for the deferred bonuses that will beawards granted in March2017, the Group, taking into account the changing employee understanding surrounding those awards, considered it appropriate for expense to be recognised over four years including the financial year prior to the grant date. The impact in 2016 as they are dependent upon future performance rather than performance during 2015.of the 2017 grant is an expense of £150m including social security costs.

 

The accounting policies for share basedshare-based payments, and pensions and other post retirementpost-retirement benefits are included in Note 34 and Note 35 respectively.

 

 

     

 

2015

£m

  

  

     

 

2014

£m

  

  

     

 

2013

£m

  

  

     

2016

£m

 

 

     

2015

£m

 

 

     

2014

£m

 

 

Infrastructure costs                        
Property and equipment     1,353       1,570       1,610       1,180      1,082      1,281 
Depreciation of property, plant and equipment     554       585       647       492      475      495 
Operating lease rentals     500       594       645       561      411      512 
Amortisation of intangible assets     617       522       480       670      570      454 
Impairment of property, equipment and intangible assets     153       172       149       95      150      153 
Gain on property disposals     3                           3       
Total infrastructure costs     3,180       3,443       3,531       2,998      2,691      2,895 
Administration and general costs                        
Consultancy, legal and professional fees     1,191       1,104       1,253       1,105      1,078      997 
Subscriptions, publications, stationery and communications     760       842       869       644      678      756 
Marketing, advertising and sponsorship     536       558       583       435      451      470 
Travel and accommodation     218       213       307       136      188      185 
UK bank levy     476       462       504       410      425      418 
Goodwill impairment     102              79             102       
Other administration and general expenses     245       442       518       187      61      243 
Total administration and general costs     3,528       3,621       4,113       2,917      2,983      3,069 
Recurring staff cost     10,389       11,005       12,155  
Gains on retirement benefits     (429              
Staff costs     9,960       11,005       12,155       9,423      8,853      9,860 
Provision for UK customer redress     2,772       1,110       2,000       1,000      2,772      1,110 
Provision for ongoing investigations and litigation including Foreign Exchange     1,237       1,250       173             1,237      1,250 
Operating expenses     20,677       20,429       21,972       16,338      18,536      18,184 

For information on2016

Operating expenses decreased by 12% to £16,338m (2015: £18,536m) primarily due to lower PPI provisions and lower litigation provisions in 2016. This is partially offset by an increase in staff costs referprimarily due to pages 57£395m of additional charges relating to 58 of the Remuneration Report.2016 compensation costs.

2015

Operating expenses have increased by 1%2% to £20,677m (2014: £20,429m)£18,536m attributable to an increase in provisions for UK customer redress including PPI and an increase in impairment of goodwill partially offset by a decrease in staff costs (includes a gain on Retirementretirement benefits, refer to Note 35, of £429m) and infrastructure costs reflecting savings from strategic cost programmes.

2014

Operating expenses have reduced by 7% to £20,429m, primarily driven by savings from strategic cost programmes, including a 5% reduction in headcount and currency movements, lower provisions for UK customer redress including PPI, reduced IT and infrastructure spend and non-occurrence of various provisions raised last year. This was partially offset by the charge of £1,250m (2013: £173m) for ongoing investigations and litigation relating to Foreign Exchange.

The impact of strategic cost programmes have driven savings across infrastructure and administration costs. Staff costs have decreased by 9% to £11,005m, reflecting a 5% net reduction in headcount and reductions in incentive awards granted.

9 Profit/(loss) on disposal of subsidiaries, associates and joint ventures

During the year, the lossgain on disposal of subsidiaries, associates and joint ventures was £637m (2014:£420m (2015: loss of £471m, 2013: gain£637m; 2014: loss of £6m)£473m), principally relating to the sale of Spanish, PortugueseBarclays Risk Analytics and Italian businesses.Index Solutions, the disposal of the Southern European card business and the sale of the private banking and wealth management services conducted through the Hong Kong and Singapore branches. These gains were partially offset with the IFRS 5 charge on an impending disposal of the French business. Please refer to Note 44Non-current assets held for sale and associated liabilities.liabilities for further detail.

 

  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 20152016 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  225235


Notes to the financial statements

Performance/return

    

 

10 Tax

 

 

Accounting for income taxes

Barclays applies IAS 12Income Taxes in accounting for taxes on income. Income tax payable on taxable profits (Current Tax) is recognised as an expense in the period in which the profits arise. Withholding taxes are also treated as income taxes. Income tax recoverable on tax allowable losses is recognised as a current tax asset only to the extent that it is regarded as recoverable by offset against taxable profits arising in the current or prior period. Current tax is measured using tax rates and tax laws that have been enacted or substantively enacted at the balance sheet date.

 

Deferred tax is provided in full, using the liability method, on temporary differences arising from the differences between the tax bases of assets and liabilities and their carrying amounts in the consolidated financial statements. Deferred tax is determined using tax rates and legislation enacted or substantively enacted by the balance sheet date which are expected to apply when the deferred tax asset is realised or the deferred tax liability is settled. Deferred tax assets and liabilities are only offset when there is both a legal right toset-off and an intention to settle on a net basis.

The Group considers an uncertain tax position to exist when it considers that ultimately, in the future, the amount of profit subject to tax may be greater than the amount initially reflected in the Group’s tax returns. The Group accounts for provisions in respect of uncertain tax positions in two different ways.

A current tax provision is recognised when it is considered probable that the outcome of a review by a tax authority of an uncertain tax position will alter the amount of cash tax due to, or from, a tax authority in the future. From recognition, the current tax provision is then measured at the amount the Group ultimately expects to pay the tax authority to resolve the position.

Deferred tax provisions are adjustments made to the carrying value of deferred tax assets in respect of uncertain tax positions. A deferred tax provision is recognised when it is considered probable that the outcome of a review by a tax authority of an uncertain tax position will result in a reduction in the carrying value of the deferred tax asset. From recognition of a provision, measurement of the underlying deferred tax asset is adjusted to take into account the expected impact of resolving the uncertain tax position on the loss or temporary difference giving rise to the deferred tax asset.

The approach taken to measurement takes account of whether the uncertain tax position is a discrete position that will be reviewed by the tax authority in isolation from any other position, or one of a number of issues which are expected to be reviewed together concurrently and resolved simultaneously with a tax authority. Barclays’ measurement of provisions is based upon its best estimate of the additional profit that will become subject to tax. For a discrete position, consideration is given only to the merits of that position. Where a number of issues are expected to be reviewed and resolved together, Barclays will take into account not only the merits of its position in respect of each particular issue but also the overall level of provision relative to the aggregate of the uncertain tax positions across all the issues that are expected to be resolved at the same time. In addition, in assessing provision levels, it is assumed that tax authorities will review uncertain tax positions and that all facts will be fully and transparently disclosed.

 

 

     

 

2015

£m

  

  

   

 

2014

£m

  

  

     

 

2013

£m

  

  

     

2016 

£m 

 

 

     

2015

£m

 

 

     

2014

£m

 

 

Current tax charge          
Current tax charge/(credit)            
Current year     1,901     1,421       1,997       896       1,605       1,131  
Adjustment for prior years     (183   (19     156  
Adjustments in respect of prior years     (361)      (188)      (19) 
     1,718     1,402       2,153       535       1,417       1,112  
Deferred tax charge/(credit)                      
Current year     (346   75       (68     393       (346)      75  
Adjustment for prior years     78     (66     (514
Adjustments in respect of prior years     65       78       (66) 
     (268   9       (582     458       (268)       
Tax charge     1,450     1,411       1,571       993       1,149       1,121  

236  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2016 Annual Report on Form 20-F


10 Tax relating to each component of other comprehensive income can be found in the consolidated statement of comprehensive income which additionally includes within Other a tax credit of £21m (2014: £42m charge) principally relating to share based payments.continued

The table below shows the reconciliation between the actual tax charge and the tax charge that would result from applying the standard UK corporation tax rate to the Group’s profit before tax.

 

                                                      
      

 

2015

£m

  

  

     

 

2015

%

  

  

     

 

2014

£m

  

  

     

 

2014

%

  

  

     

 

2013

£m

  

  

     

 

2013

%

  

  

Profit before tax from continuing operations

     2,073              2,256              2,868         

Tax charge based on the standard UK corporation tax rate of 20.25%

(2014: 21.50%, 2013: 23.25%)

     420       20.25       485       21.50       667       23.25  

Non-creditable taxes including withholding taxes

     309       14.9       329       14.6       559       19.5  

Non-deductible provisions for UK customer redress

     283       13.6                              

Non-UK profits at statutory tax rates different from the UK statutory tax rate

     274       13.2       253       11.2       328       11.4  

Non-deductible provisions for ongoing investigations and litigation including Foreign Exchange

     261       12.6       387       17.2                

Non-deductible expenses including UK bank levy

     207       10.0       285       12.6       296       10.3  

Impact of change in tax rates

     158       7.6       9       0.4       (159     (5.5

Tax adjustments in respect of share based payments

     30       1.4       21       0.9       (13     (0.5

Non-deductible impairments and losses on disposal

     26       1.3       234       10.4                

Non-taxable gains and income

     (241     (11.6     (282     (12.5     (234     (8.2

Adjustments in respect of prior years

     (105     (5.1     (85     (3.8     (358     (12.5

Changes in recognition and measurement of deferred tax assets

     (77     (3.7     (183     (8.1     409       14.3  

Other items

     (52     (2.5     40       1.8       137       4.8  

Non-UK losses at statutory tax rates different from the UK statutory tax rate

     (43     (2.1     (82     (3.6     (61     (2.1

Tax charge

     1,450       69.9       1,411       62.5       1,571       54.8  
                                                      
      
2016
£m
 
 
     

2016

%

 

 

     
2015
£m
 
 
     

2015

%

 

 

     
2014
£m
 
 
     

2014

%

 

 

Profit before tax from continuing operations

     3,230             1,146             1,313        

Tax charge based on the standard UK corporation tax rate of 20%

                        

(2015: 20.25%, 2014; 21.50%)

     646      20.0%      232      20.25%      282      21.5% 

Impact of profits/losses earned in territories with different statutory rates to the UK (weighted average tax rate is 32.8%

                        

(2015: 33.4%, 2014; 29.3%))

     415      12.8%      151      13.2%      103      7.8% 

Recurring items:

                        

Non-creditable taxes including withholding taxes

     277      8.6%      309      27.0%      329      25.1% 

Non-deductible expenses

     114      3.5%      67      5.8%      146      11.1% 

Impact of UK bank levy beingnon-deductible

     82      2.5%      96      8.4%      99      7.5% 

Other items

     58      1.9%      (14     (1.1%     42      3.3% 

Tax adjustments in respect of share-based payments

     34      1.1%      30      2.6%      21      1.6% 

Impact of change in tax rates

     30      0.9%      158      13.8%      9      0.7% 

Adjustments in respect of prior years

     (296     (9.2%     (110     (9.6%     (85     (6.5%

Non-taxable gains and income

     (199     (6.2%     (197     (17.2%     (212     (16.1%

Changes in recognition of deferred tax and effect of unrecognised tax losses

     (178     (5.5%     (71     (6.2%     (115     (8.8%

Impact of Barclays Bank PLC’s overseas branches being taxed both locally and in the UK

     (128     (4.0%     (35     (3.1%     (68     (5.2%

Non-recurring items:

                        

Non-deductible provisions for UK customer redress

     203      6.3%      283      24.7%             

Non-deductible impairments and losses on divestments

     67      2.1%      39      3.4%      234      17.8% 

Non-deductible provisions for investigations and litigation

     48      1.5%      261      22.8%      387      29.5% 

Non-taxable gains and income on divestments

     (180     (5.6%     (50     (4.4%     (51     (3.9%
                                           

Total tax charge

     993      30.7%      1,149      100.3%      1,121      85.4% 

Factors driving the effective tax rate

The effective tax rate of 69.9% (2014: 62.5%) increased from30.7% is higher than the previous year. ThisUK corporation tax rate of 20% primarily due to profits earned outside the UK being taxed at higher local statutory tax rates. In addition the effective tax rate is mainly due toaffected by provisions for UK customer redress that were beingnon-deductible in 2015 as a result of changes introduced by the for tax purposes,non-creditable taxes andnon-deductible expenses including UK summer Budget, andbank levy. These factors, which have each increased the impact of changes to tax rates. The changes to tax rates in the period that had an adverse impact on the 2015 tax charge were the reduction of the local New York tax rate and the increase of the UK tax rate, specifically through the introduction of the new corporation tax surcharge that applies to banks. These tax rate changes resulted in the carrying value of US deferred tax assets being reduced and are further explained later in Note 10.

The effective tax rate, are partially offset by the impact ofnon-taxable gains and income, including those arising from divestments, and reductions in expected liabilities in respect of 69.9% on statutory profit before tax is significantly higher thana range of issues related to a number of prior years.

Relative to the prior year, the effective tax rate on adjusted profit before tax. For further detailstax decreased to 30.7% (2015: 100.3%). This was principally a result of a lower level ofnon-deductible provisions for investigations and litigation in 2016, as well as gains arising in 2016 on the adjusteddivestment of businesses and assets, as the Group has pursued its strategy to run-downNon-Core, that were taxed at low rates.

The Group’s future tax charge will be sensitive to the geographic mix of profits earned and the tax rates in force in the jurisdictions in which we operate. In the UK, legislation to reduce the corporation tax rate to 19% from 1 April 2017 and to 17% from 1 April 2020 has been enacted. In the US, proposed tax reform measures include a reduction in the US corporate income tax rate to as low as 15%. The US rate change is a proposal only at this stage and developments are being closely monitored. In the long term, a reduction in the tax rate would enhance the returns generated by the Group’s US business. However, if enacted, such a change would have a substantialup-front negative impact on the measurement of the Group’s US deferred tax assets, although this would reverse over time and result in a lower effective tax rate please referas these assets are utilised.

Tax in the consolidated statement of comprehensive income

The most significant tax charge in the consolidated statement of comprehensive income relates to page 187cash flow hedging reserve. The majority of this tax charge is on income brought into charge in the UK in 2016 and this reflects the new surcharge of 8%, that applies to banks’ UK profits, as well as the standard UK corporation tax rate of 20%. Additionally included within the ‘Other’ line is a tax credit of £21m (2015: £21m credit) relating to share-based payments.

Tax in respect of discontinued operation

Tax relating to the discontinued operation can be found in the BAGL disposal group income statement (see Note 44). The tax charge of £306m (2015: £301m) relates entirely to the profit from the ordinary activities of the financial review.discontinued operation.

 

226  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 20152016 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  237


Notes to the financial statements

Performance/return

        

 

 

10 Tax continued

Current tax assets and liabilities

Movements on current tax assets and liabilities were as follows:

 

     

 

2015

£m

  

  

     

 

2014

£m

  

  

     
2016
£m
 
 
     
2015
£m
 
 

Assets

     334       219       415      334 

Liabilities

     (1,021     (1,042     (903     (1,021

As at 1 January

     (687     (823     (488     (687

Income statement

     (1,718     (1,402

Income statement from continuing operations

     (535     (1,417

Income statement in relation to BAGL disposal group

           (301

Other comprehensive income

     6       (26     23      6 

Corporate income tax paid

     1,670       1,552       780      1,670 

Other movements

     241       12       44      241 
     (488     (687     (176     (488

Assets

     415       334       561      415 

Liabilities

     (903     (1,021     (737     (903

As at 31 December

     (488     (687     (176     (488

Deferred tax assets and liabilities

                

The deferred tax amounts on the balance sheet were as follows:

                
     

 

2015

£m

  

  

     
 
2014
£m
  
  
     
2016
£m
 
 
     
2015
£m
 
 

Barclays Group US Inc (BGUS) – US tax group

     1,903       1,588  

Intermediate Holding Company (IHC) – US tax group

     2,207      2,049 

Barclays Bank PLC (US Branch) – US tax group

     1,569       1,591       1,766      1,569 

Barclays PLC – UK tax group

     411       461       575      411 

Other

     612       490       321      466 

Deferred tax asset

     4,495       4,130       4,869      4,495 

Deferred tax liability

     (122     (262     (29     (122

Net deferred tax

     4,373       3,868       4,840      4,373 

US deferred tax assets in BGUSthe IHC and the US Branch

The deferred tax asset in BGUSthe IHC of £1,903m (2014: £1,588m)£2,207m (2015: £2,049m) includes £449m (2014: £348m)£321m (2015: £503m) relating to tax losses and the deferred tax asset in the US Branch of £1,569m (2014: £1,591m)£1,766m (2015: £1,569m) includes £244m (2014: £479m)£142m (2015: £244m) relating to tax losses. Under US tax rules, losses can be carried forward and offset against profits for a period of 20 years. The losses first arose in 2011 in BGUSthe IHC and 2008 in the US Branch and therefore any unused amounts may begin to expire in 2031 and 2028 respectively. The remaining US deferred tax assets relate primarily to temporary differences for which there is no time limit on recovery.

The valuation of the Group’s US deferred tax assets was adjusted downwards in 2015 as a result of bothfor the reduction in the local New York rate ofIHC tax which affected the deferred tax asset in both BGUSlosses and the US Branch and the introductionlosses are projected to be fully utilised by 2018.

The measurement of the new UK corporation tax surcharge, which affected theUS branch deferred tax asset in theassets takes into account both US Branch. The US Branch deferred tax assetand UK tax. This is stated net of a measurement for UK tax because Barclays Bank PLC is subject to UK tax on its worldwide profits, including the profits of its non-UKoverseas branches.

The US branch deferred tax asset forassets are valued at the BGUS tax loss is projected to be fully utilised in 2017 and the deferred tax asset fordifference between the US Branch loss to be fully utilised in 2018.and UK tax rates.

UK tax group deferred tax asset

The deferred tax asset in the UK tax group of £411m (2014: £461m)£575m (2015: £411m) relates entirely to temporary differences (2014: £245m related to tax losses). Based on profit forecasts, it is probable that there will be sufficient future taxable profits available against which the temporary differences will be utilised.differences.

Other deferred tax assets

The deferred tax asset of £612m (2014: £490m)£321m (2015: £466m) in other entities within the Group includes £209m (2014: £243m)£40m (2015: £155m) relating to tax losses carried forward. These deferred tax assets relate to a number of different territories and their recognition is based on profit forecasts or local country lawslaw which indicate that it is probable that the losses and temporary differences will be utilised.

Of the deferred tax asset of £612m (2014: £490m)£321m (2015: £466m), an amount of £106m (2014: £140m)£267m (2015: £106m) relates to entities which have suffered a loss in either the current or prior year. This has been taken into account in reaching the above conclusion that these deferred tax assets will be fully recovered in the future.

 

238  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 20152016 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  227


Notes to the financial statements

Performance/return

 

 

10 Taxcontinued

The table below shows movements on deferred tax assets and liabilities during the year. The amounts are different from those disclosed on the balance sheet and in the preceding table as they are presented before offsetting asset and liability balances where there is a legal right toset-off and an intention to settle on a net basis.

 

   


Fixed asset
timing
differences
£m
 
 
 
 
   

Available
for sale

investments

£m

 
 

 

 

   

Cash flow
hedges
£m
 
 
 
   

Retirement
benefit

obligations

£m

 
 

 

 

   

Loan

impairment

allowance

£m

 

 

 

 

   

Other
provisions
£m
 
 
 
   


Tax losses
carried
forward

£m

 
 
 

 

   





Share-based
payments
and
deferred
com-
pensation

£m

 
 
 
 
 
 

 

   

Other

£m

 

 

   

Total

£m

 

 

Assets

   2,008    28    5    95    157    261    902    623    1,511    5,590 

Liabilities

   (194   (70   (239   (144                   (570   (1,217

At 1 January 2016

   1,814    (42   (234   (49   157    261    902    623    941    4,373 

Income statement

   (358   9    (7   (8   52    17    (522   15    344    (458

Other comprehensive income

       49    (61   132                20    (6   134 

Other movements

   253    26    (31   16    (58   (27   123    74    415    791 
   1,709    42    (333   91    151    251    503    732    1,694    4,840 

Assets

   1,801    183        91    151    251    503    732    2,013    5,725 

Liabilities

   (92   (141   (333                       (319   (885

At 31 December 2016

   1,709    42    (333   91    151    251    503    732    1,694    4,840 
   
 
 
 
Fixed asset
timing
differences
£m
  
  
  
  
   
 
 
 
Available
for sale
investments
£m
  
  
  
  
   
 
 
Cash flow
hedges
£m
  
  
  
   
 
 
 
Retirement
benefit
obligations
£m
  
  
  
  
   
 
 
 
Loan
impairment
allowance
£m
  
  
  
  
   
 
 
Other
provisions
£m
  
  
  
   
 
 
 
Tax losses
carried
forward
£m
  
  
  
  
   
 

 
 
 

Share based
payments

and deferred
compensation
£m

  
  

  
  
  

   
 
Other
£m
  
  
   

 

Total

£m

  

  

                              

Assets

   1,542     18     5     321     176     233     1,315     729     951      5,290      1,542    18    5    321    176    233    1,315    729    951    5,290 

Liabilities

   (555   (35   (464                            (368)     (1,422)     (555   (35   (464                       (368   (1,422

At 1 January 2015

   987     (17   (459   321     176     233     1,315     729     583      3,868      987    (17   (459   321    176    233    1,315    729    583    3,868 

Income statement

   779     (13   1     (119   (14   21     (540   (126   279      268      779    (13   1    (119   (14   21    (540   (126   279    268 

Other comprehensive income

        (14   221     (261             122     (10   (21)     37          (14   221    (261           122    (10   (21   37 

Other movements

   48     2     3     10     (5   7     5     30     100      200      48    2    3    10    (5   7    5    30    100    200 
   1,814     (42   (234   (49   157     261     902     623     941      4,373      1,814    (42   (234   (49   157    261    902    623    941    4,373 

Assets

   2,008     28     5     95     157     261     902     623     1,511      5,590      2,008    28    5    95    157    261    902    623    1,511    5,590 

Liabilities

   (194   (70   (239   (144                       (570)     (1,217)     (194   (70   (239   (144                   (570   (1,217

At 31 December 2015

   1,814     (42   (234   (49   157     261     902     623     941      4,373      1,814    (42   (234   (49   157    261    902    623    941    4,373 
                              

Assets

   1,525     53     5     490     376     360     1,235     762     1,078      5,884   

Liabilities

   (761   (61   (87   (9                       (532)     (1,450)  

At 1 January 2014

   764     (8   (82   481     376     360     1,235     762     546      4,434   

Income statement

   172     84     (1   (54   70     (87   4     (40   (157)     (9)  

Other comprehensive income

        (104   (380   (63                  (10   (5)     (562)  

Other movements

   51     11     4     (43   (270   (40   76     17     199        
   987     (17   (459   321     176     233     1,315     729     583      3,868   

Assets

   1,542     18     5     321     176     233     1,315     729     951      5,290   

Liabilities

   (555   (35   (464                            (368)     (1,422)  

At 31 December 2014

   987     (17   (459   321     176     233     1,315     729     583      3,868   

Other movements include the impact of changes in foreign exchange rates as well as deferred tax amounts relating to acquisitions, disposals and exchange gains and losses.transfers to held for sale.

The amount of deferred tax liability expected to be settled after more than 12 months is £675m (2014: £1,123m)£273m (2015: £675m). The amount of deferred tax assets expected to be recovered after more than 12 months is £4,838m (2014: £4,845m)£5,066m (2015: £4,838m). These amounts are before offsetting asset and liability balances where there is a legal right toset-off and an intention to settle on a net basis.

Unrecognised deferred tax

Tax losses and temporary differences

Deferred tax assets have not been recognised in respect of gross deductible temporary differences of £51m (2014: £2,332m),£64m (2015: £51m) and gross tax losses of £13,456m (2014: £9,764m) which includes£16,820m (2015: £13,456m). The increase in these losses in 2016 is largely a result of the weakening of sterling against the overseas currencies these losses are denominated in. The tax losses include capital losses of £3,838m (2014: £3,522m),£3,138m (2015: £3,838m) and unused tax credits of £452m (2014: £405m)£514m (2015: £452m). Of these tax losses, £389m (2014: £341m)£394m (2015: £389m) expire within five years, £13m (2014: £18m)£57m (2015: £13m) expire within six to ten years, £124m (2014: £812m)£358m (2015: £124m) expire within 11 to 20 years and £12,930m (2014: £8,593m)£16,011m (2015: £12,930m) can be carried forward indefinitely. Deferred tax assets have not been recognised in respect of these items because it is not probable that future taxable profits and gains will be available against which they can be utilised.

Group investments in subsidiaries, branches and associates

Deferred tax is not recognised in respect of the value of the Group’s investments in subsidiaries, branches and associates where the Group is able to control the timing of the reversal of the temporary differences and it is probable that such differences will not reverse in the foreseeable future. It is not practicable to determine theThe aggregate amount of income tax that would be payable were suchthese temporary differences to reverse.for which deferred tax liabilities have not been recognised is £2bn (2015: £2bn).

Critical accounting estimates and judgements

The Group is subjectdoes not consider there to corporate income taxesbe a significant risk of a material adjustment to the carrying amount of current and deferred tax balances, including provisions for uncertain tax positions, in numerous jurisdictionsthe next financial year. The provisions for uncertain tax positions cover a diverse range of issues and the calculationreflect legal advice from external counsel where relevant. It should be noted that only a proportion of the Group’stotal uncertain tax charge and worldwide provisions for corporate income taxes necessarily involves a degree of estimation and judgement. There are many transactions and calculations for which the ultimate tax treatment is uncertain and cannot be determined until resolution has been reached with the relevant tax authority. The Group has a number of open tax returns with various tax authorities with whom there is active dialogue. Liabilities relating to these open and judgemental matters are based on estimates of whether additional taxespositions will be due after taking into account external advice, where appropriate. Where the final tax outcome of these matters is different from the amounts provided, such differences will impact the tax chargeunder audit at any point in a future period. There is no individual position currentlytime, and could therefore be subject to challenge by a tax authority that if resolved in an adverse manner would materially impactover the Group’s financial position.next year.

Deferred tax assets have been recognised based on business profit forecasts. Further detail on the recognition of deferred tax assets is provided in the deferred tax assets and liabilities section of this tax note.

 

228  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 20152016 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  239


Notes to the financial statements

Performance/return

        

 

 

11 Earnings per share

11 Earnings per share

                        
    

 

2015

£m

  

  

   

 

2014

£m

  

  

   

 

2013

£m

  

  

      
2016
£m
 
 
     
2015
£m
 
 
     
2014
£m
 
 

(Loss)/profit attributable to equity holders of parent from continuing operations

  

   (394   (174   540  

Profit/(loss) attributable to ordinary equity holders of the parent from continuing and discontinued operations

Profit/(loss) attributable to ordinary equity holders of the parent from continuing and discontinued operations

 

     1,623      (394     (174

Tax credit on profit after tax attributable to other equity holders

Tax credit on profit after tax attributable to other equity holders

  

   70     54       

Tax credit on profit after tax attributable to other equity holders

 

     128      70      54 

Dilutive impact of convertible options

  

             1  

(Loss)/profit attributable to equity holders of parent from continuing operations including dilutive impact of convertible options

  

   (324   (120   541  

Total Profit/(loss) attributable to ordinary equity holders of the parent from continuing and discontinued operations

Total Profit/(loss) attributable to ordinary equity holders of the parent from continuing and discontinued operations

 

     1,751      (324     (120

Continuing operations

Continuing operations

 

            

Profit/(loss) attributable to ordinary equity holders of the parent from continuing operations

Profit/(loss) attributable to ordinary equity holders of the parent from continuing operations

 

     1,434      (696     (508

Tax credit on profit after tax attributable to other equity holders

Tax credit on profit after tax attributable to other equity holders

 

     128      70      54 

Profit/(loss) attributable to equity holders of the parent from continuing operations

Profit/(loss) attributable to equity holders of the parent from continuing operations

 

     1,562      (626     (454

Discontinued operations

Discontinued operations

 

            

Profit attributable to ordinary equity holders of the parent from discontinued operations

Profit attributable to ordinary equity holders of the parent from discontinued operations

 

     189      302      334 

Dilutive impact of convertible options from discontinued operations

Dilutive impact of convertible options from discontinued operations

 

     (1            

Profit attributable to equity holders of the parent from discontinued operations including dilutive impact on convertible options

Profit attributable to equity holders of the parent from discontinued operations including dilutive impact on convertible options

 

     188      302      334 
                

Profit/(loss) attributable to equity holders of the parent from continuing and discontinued operations including dilutive impact on convertible options

Profit/(loss) attributable to equity holders of the parent from continuing and discontinued operations including dilutive impact on convertible options

 

     1,750      (324     (120
                        
    

 

2015

million

  

  

   

 

2014

million

  

  

   

 

2013

million

  

  

      
2016
million
 
 
     
2015
million
 
 
     
2014
million
 
 

Basic weighted average number of shares in issue

Basic weighted average number of shares in issue

  

   16,687     16,329     14,308                   16,860      16,687      16,329 

Number of potential ordinary shares

Number of potential ordinary shares

  

   367     296     360                      184      367      296 

Diluted weighted average number of shares

Diluted weighted average number of shares

  

   17,054     16,625     14,668                      17,044      17,054      16,625 
                                    
   Basic earnings per share           Diluted earnings per sharea                Basic earnings per share      Diluted earnings per sharea 
   

 

2015

p

  

  

   

 

2014

p

  

  

   

 

2013

p

  

  

   

 

2015

p

  

  

   

 

2014

p

  

  

   

 

2013

p

  

  

     
2016
p
 
 
     
2015
p
 
 
     
2014
p
 
 
     

2016

p

 

 

     

2015

p

 

 

     

2014

p

 

 

(Loss)/earnings per ordinary share from continuing operations

   (1.9)    (0.7   3.8     (1.9   (0.7   3.7  

Basic earnings/(loss) per ordinary share

     10.4      (1.9     (0.7     10.3      (1.9     (0.7

Basic earnings/(loss) per ordinary share from continuing operations

     9.3      (3.7     (2.7     9.2      (3.7     (2.7

Basic earnings per ordinary share from discontinued operations

     1.1      1.8      2.0      1.1      1.8      2.0 

The calculation of basic earnings per share is based on the profit attributable to equity holders of the parent and the basic weighted average number of shares excluding treasury shares held in employee benefit trusts or held for trading. When calculating the diluted earnings per share, the weighted average number of shares in issue is adjusted for the effects of all dilutive potential ordinary shares held in respect of Barclays PLC, totalling 367m (2014: 296m)184m (2015: 367m) shares. In addition, the profit attributable to equity holders of the parent is adjusted for the dilutive impact of the potential conversion of outstanding options held in respect of Barclays Africa Group Limited.BAGL. The increasedecrease in the number of potential ordinary shares is due to the average share price of £2.52 (2014: £2.39)£1.74 (2015: £2.52) being greaterlower than the average strike price of £2.11 (2014: £2.15)£1.88 (2015: £2.11). During the year the total number of share options granted under employee share schemes was 553m (2014: 666m)584m (2015: 533m). The schemes have strike prices ranging from £1.30£1.20 to £4.35.£2.49.

Of the total number of employee share options and share awards at 31 December 2015, 23m (2014: 24m)2016, 93m (2015: 23m) were anti-dilutive.

The 358m173m increase in the basic weighted average number of shares since 31 December 20142015 to 16,687m16,860m is primarily due to shares issued under employee share schemes and the Scrip Dividend Programme.

12 Dividends on ordinary shares

The Directors have approved a final dividend in respect of 20152016 of 3.5p2.0p per ordinary share of 25p each which will be paid on 5 April 20162017 to shareholders on the Share Register on 113 March 2016. As at2017. On 31 December 2015,2016, there were 16,805m16,963m ordinary shares in issue. The financial statements for the year ended 31 December 2015 does2016 do not reflect this dividend, which will be accounted for in shareholders’ equity as an appropriation of retained profits in the year ending 31 December 2016.2017. The 20152016 financial statements include the 20152016 interim dividends of £503m (2014: £493m)£169m (2015: £503m) and final dividend declared in relation to 20142015 of £578m (2014: £564m)£588m (2015: £578m).

 

Note

aPotential ordinary shares shall be treated as dilutive when, and only when, their conversion to ordinary shares would increase loss per share.

 

240  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 20152016 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  229


Notes to the financial statements

Assets and liabilities held at fair value

        

 

 

The notes included in this section focus on assets and liabilities the Group holds and recognises at fair value. Fair value refers to the price that would be received to sell an asset or the price that would be paid to transfer a liability in an arm’s-lengtharms-length transaction with a willing counterparty, which may be an observable market price or, where there is no quoted price for the instrument, may be an estimate based on available market data. Detail regarding the Group’s approach to managing market risk can be found on pages 101 to 102.page 103.

13 Trading portfolio

 

 

Accounting for trading portfolio assets and liabilities

In accordance with IAS 39, all assets and liabilities held for trading purposes are held at fair value with gains and losses in the changes in fair value taken to the income statement in Netnet trading income (Note 5).

 

 

              Trading portfolio assets     Trading portfolio liabilities  
     
 
2015
£m
  
  
   

 

2014

£m

  

  

   

 

2015

£m

  

  

   

 

2014

£m

  

  

Debt securities and other eligible bills

  

   45,576     65,997     (24,985   (28,739

Equity securities

  

   29,055     44,576     (8,982   (16,022

Traded loans

  

   2,474     2,693            

Commodities

  

   243     1,451          (363

Trading portfolio assets/(liabilities)

  

   77,348     114,717     (33,967   (45,124

14 Financial assets designated at fair value

 

  

 

Accounting for financial assets designated at fair value

In accordance with IAS 39, financial assets may be designated at fair value, with gains and losses taken to the income statement in Net trading income (Note 5) and Net investment income (Note 6). The Group has the ability to make the fair value designation when holding the instruments at fair value reduces an accounting mismatch (caused by an offsetting liability or asset being held at fair value), or is managed by the Group on the basis of its fair value, or includes terms that have substantive derivative characteristics (Note 15 Derivative financial instruments).

 

The details on how the fair value amounts are arrived for financial assets designated at fair value are described in Fair value of assets and liabilities (Note 18).

 

  

    

  

     

 

2015

£m

  

  

   

 

2014

£m

  

  

Loans and advances

  

   17,913     20,198  

Debt securities

  

   1,383     4,448  

Equity securities

  

   6,197     6,306  

Reverse repurchase agreementsa

  

   49,513     5,236  

Customers’ assets held under investment contracts

  

   1,449     1,643  

Other financial assets

  

   375     469  

Financial assets designated at fair value

  

   76,830     38,300  

 

Credit risk of loans and advances designated at fair value and related credit derivatives

The following table shows the maximum exposure to credit risk, the changes in fair value attributable to changes in credit risk, and the cumulative changes in fair value since initial recognition together with the amount by which related credit derivatives mitigate this risk:

 

  

   

    
 
Maximum exposure as at
31 December
  
  
   
 
Changes in fair value
during the year ended
  
  
   
 
Cumulative changes in
fair value from inception
  
  
    

 

2015

£m

  

  

   

 

2014

£m

  

  

   
 
2015
£m
  
  
   

 

2014

£m

  

  

   

 

2015

£m

  

  

   

 

2014

£m

  

  

Loans and advances designated at fair value, attributable to credit risk

   17,913     20,198     69     (112   (629   (828

Value mitigated by related credit derivatives

   417     359     26          42     18  

Note

aDuring 2015, new reverse repurchase agreements and other similar secured lending in certain businesses have been designated at fair value to better align to the way the business manages the portfolio’s risk and performance.
           Trading portfolio assets   Trading portfolio liabilities 
    

2016

£m

 

 

  

2015

£m

 

 

  

2016

£m

 

 

  

2015

£m

 

 

Debt securities and other eligible bills

 

  38,789   45,576   (26,842  (24,985

Equity securities

 

  38,329   29,055   (7,831  (8,982

Traded loans

 

  2,975   2,474       

Commodities

 

  147   243   (14   

Trading portfolio assets/(liabilities)

 

  80,240   77,348   (34,687  (33,967

14 Financial assets designated at fair value

 

 

Accounting for financial assets designated at fair value

In accordance with IAS 39, financial assets may be designated at fair value, with gains and losses taken to the income statement within net trading income (Note 5) and net investment income (Note 6). The Group has the ability to make the fair value designation when holding the instruments at fair value reduces an accounting mismatch (caused by an offsetting liability or asset being held at fair value), or is managed by the Group on the basis of its fair value, or includes terms that have substantive derivative characteristics described in Note 15 Derivative financial instruments.

 

The details on how the fair value amounts are derived for financial assets designated at fair value are described in Note 18 Fair value of assets and liabilities.

 

 

 

 

      
    

2016

£m

 

 

  

2015

£m

 

 

Loans and advances

 

  10,519   17,913 

Debt securities

 

  70   1,383 

Equity securities

 

  4,558   6,197 

Reverse repurchase agreements

 

  63,162   49,513 

Customers’ assets held under investment contracts

 

  37   1,449 

Other financial assets

 

  262   375 

Financial assets designated at fair value

 

  78,608   76,830 

 

Credit risk of loans and advances designated at fair value and related credit derivatives

The following table shows the maximum exposure to credit risk, the changes in fair value attributable to changes in credit risk, and the cumulative changes in fair value since initial recognition together with the amount by which related credit derivatives mitigate this risk:

 

 

      
   
Maximum exposure as at
31 December
 
 
  
Changes in fair value during
the year ended
 
 
  
Cumulative changes in fair
value from inception
 
 
   

2016

£m

 

 

  

2015

£m

 

 

  

2016

£m

 

 

  

2015

£m

 

 

  

2016

£m

 

 

  

2015

£m

 

 

Loans and advances designated at fair value, attributable to credit risk

  10,519   17,913   (42  69   (42  (629

Value mitigated by related credit derivatives

  339   417   (2  26   (13  42 

 

230  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 20152016 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  241


Notes to the financial statements

Assets and liabilities held at fair value

        

 

 

15 Derivative financial instruments

 

Accounting for derivatives

Derivative instruments are contracts whose value is derived from one or more underlying financial instruments or indices defined in the contract. They include swaps, forward rate agreements, futures, options and combinations of these instruments and primarily affect the Group’s net interest income, net trading income, net fee and commission income and derivative assets and liabilities. Notional amounts of the contracts are not recorded on the balance sheet.

The Group applies IAS 39. All derivative instruments are held at fair value through profit or loss. Derivatives are classified as assets when their fair value is positive or as liabilities when their fair value is negative. This includes terms included in a contract or other financial asset or liability (the host), which, had it been a stand-alone contract, would have met the definition of a derivative. These are separated from the host and accounted for in the same way as a derivative.

Hedge accounting

The Group applies hedge accounting to represent, to the maximum possible extent permitted under accounting standards, the economic effects of its interest and currency risk management strategies. Derivatives are used to hedge interest rate, exchange rate, commodity, and equity exposures and exposures to certain indices such as house price indices and retail price indices related to non-trading positions. Where derivatives are held for risk management purposes, and when transactions meet the required criteria for documentation and hedge effectiveness, the Group applies fair value hedge accounting, cash flow hedge accounting, or hedging of a net investment in a foreign operation, as appropriate to the risks being hedged.

Fair value hedge accounting

Changes in fair value of derivatives that qualify and are designated as fair value hedges are recorded in the income statement, together with changes in the fair value of the hedged asset or liability that are attributable to the hedged risk. The fair value changes adjust the carrying value of the hedged asset or liability held at amortised cost.

If hedge relationships no longer meet the criteria for hedge accounting, hedge accounting is discontinued. For fair value hedges of interest rate risk, the fair value adjustment to the hedged item is amortised to the income statement over the period to maturity of the previously designated hedge relationship using the effective interest method. If the hedged item is sold or repaid, the unamortised fair value adjustment is recognised immediately in the income statement.

Cash flow hedge accounting

For qualifying cash flow hedges, the fair value gain or loss associated with the effective portion of the cash flow hedge is recognised initially in other comprehensive income, and then recycled to the income statement in the periods when the hedged item will affect profit or loss. Any ineffective portion of the gain or loss on the hedging instrument is recognised in the income statement immediately.

When a hedging instrument expires or is sold, or when a hedge no longer meets the criteria for hedge accounting, any cumulative gain or loss existing in equity at that time remains in equity and is recognised when the hedged item is ultimately recognised in the income statement. When a forecast transaction is no longer expected to occur, the cumulative gain or loss that was recognised in equity is immediately transferred to the income statement.

Hedges of net investments

The Group’s net investments in foreign operations, including monetary items accounted for as part of the net investment, are hedged for foreign currency risks using both derivatives and foreign currency borrowings. Hedges of net investments are accounted for similarly to cash flow hedges; the effective portion of the gain or loss on the hedging instrument is being recognised directly in other comprehensive income and the ineffective portion being recognised immediately in the income statement. The cumulative gain or loss recognised in other comprehensive income is recognised in the income statement on the disposal or partial disposal of the foreign operation, or other reductions in the Group’s investment in the operation.

Accounting for derivatives

Derivative instruments are contracts whose value is derived from one or more underlying financial instruments or indices defined in the contract. They include swaps, forward-rate agreements, futures, options and combinations of these instruments and primarily affect the Group’s net interest income, net trading income and derivative assets and liabilities. Notional amounts of the contracts are not recorded on the balance sheet.

The Group applies IAS 39. All derivative instruments are held at fair value through profit or loss. Derivatives are classified as assets when their fair value is positive or as liabilities when their fair value is negative. This includes terms included in a contract or other financial asset or liability (the host), which, had it been a stand-alone contract, would have met the definition of a derivative. If these are separated from the host i.e. when the economic characteristics of the embedded derivative are not closely related with those of the host contract and the combined instrument is not measured at fair value through profit or loss then they are accounted for in the same way as derivatives.

Hedge accounting

The Group applies hedge accounting to represent, to the maximum possible extent permitted under accounting standards, the economic effects of its interest and currency risk management strategies. Derivatives are used to hedge interest rate, exchange rate, commodity, and equity exposures and exposures to certain indices such as house price indices and retail price indices related tonon-trading positions. Where derivatives are held for risk management purposes, and when transactions meet the required criteria for documentation and hedge effectiveness, the Group applies fair value hedge accounting, cash flow hedge accounting, or hedging of a net investment in a foreign operation, as appropriate to the risks being hedged.

Fair value hedge accounting

Changes in fair value of derivatives that qualify and are designated as fair value hedges are recorded in the income statement, together with changes in the fair value of the hedged asset or liability that are attributable to the hedged risk. The fair value changes adjust the carrying value of the hedged asset or liability held at amortised cost.

If hedge relationships no longer meet the criteria for hedge accounting, hedge accounting is discontinued. For fair value hedges of interest rate risk, the fair value adjustment to the hedged item is amortised to the income statement over the period to maturity of the previously designated hedge relationship using the effective interest method. If the hedged item is sold or repaid, the unamortised fair value adjustment is recognised immediately in the income statement.

Cash flow hedge accounting

For qualifying cash flow hedges, the fair value gain or loss associated with the effective portion of the cash flow hedge is recognised initially in other comprehensive income, and then recycled to the income statement in the periods when the hedged item will affect profit or loss. Any ineffective portion of the gain or loss on the hedging instrument is recognised in the income statement immediately.

When a hedging instrument expires or is sold, or when a hedge no longer meets the criteria for hedge accounting, any cumulative gain or loss existing in equity at that time remains in equity and is recognised when the hedged item is ultimately recognised in the income statement. When a forecast transaction is no longer expected to occur, the cumulative gain or loss that was recognised in equity is immediately transferred to the income statement.

Hedges of net investments

The Group’s net investments in foreign operations, including monetary items accounted for as part of the net investment, are hedged for foreign currency risks using both derivatives and foreign currency borrowings. Hedges of net investments are accounted for similarly to cash flow hedges; the effective portion of the gain or loss on the hedging instrument is being recognised directly in other comprehensive income and the ineffective portion being recognised immediately in the income statement. The cumulative gain or loss recognised in other comprehensive income is recognised in the income statement on the disposal or partial disposal of the foreign operation, or other reductions in the Group’s investment in the operation.

 

Total derivatives

                        2016          2015    
   2015   2014  
  

 

 

 

Notional

 

  

      

 

 

 

Notional

 

  

       Notional    Fair value    Notional    Fair value 
   contract     Fair value     contract     Fair value     contract        contract     
   amount     Assets     Liabilities     amount     Assets     Liabilities     amount    Assets    Liabilities    amount    Assets    Liabilities 
   £m     £m     £m     £m     £m     £m     £m    £m    £m    £m    £m    £m 

Total derivative assets/(liabilities) held for trading

   29,437,102     326,772     (323,788   32,624,342     438,270     (438,623   36,185,820    345,624    (339,646   29,437,102    326,772    (323,788

Total derivative assets/(liabilities) held for risk management

   316,605     937     (464   268,448     1,639     (697   336,524    1,002    (841   316,605    937    (464

Derivative assets/(liabilities)

   29,753,707     327,709     (324,252   32,892,790     439,909     (439,320   36,522,344    346,626    (340,487   29,753,707    327,709    (324,252

The fair value of gross derivative assets decreasedincreased by 26%6% to £328bn, driven by decrease in interest rate derivatives of £79bn due to net trade reduction and an increase in the major interest rate forward curves and a decrease£347bn. This was mainly in foreign exchange derivatives largely due to increase in trade volumes and appreciation of £19bn, materially reflecting trade maturities.all major currencies against GBP. Information on further netting of derivative financial instruments is included within Note 19 Offsetting financial assets and financial liabilities.

Trading derivatives are managed within the Group’s market risk management policies, which are outlined on pages 101 and 102.page103.

The Group’s exposure to credit risk arising from derivative contracts are outlined in the Credit Riskrisk section on page 130.139 and 140.

242  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2016 Annual Report on Form 20-F


15 Derivative financial instrumentscontinued

The fair values and notional amounts of derivative instruments held for trading are set out in the following table:

Derivatives held for trading

        2016              2015      
    

Notional
contract

amount

£m

 
 

 

 

   Fair value    

Notional
contract

amount

£m

 
 

 

 

   Fair value 
     
Assets
£m
 
 
   
Liabilities
£m
 
 
     
Assets
£m
 
 
   
Liabilities
£m
 
 

Foreign exchange derivatives

            

Forward foreign exchange

   2,308,922    32,442    (30,907   1,277,863    17,613    (19,433) 

Currency swaps

   1,086,552    40,083    (40,164   1,006,640    30,703    (32,449) 

OTC options bought and sold

   772,031    6,338    (6,762   924,832    6,436    (6,771) 

OTC derivatives

   4,167,505    78,863    (77,833   3,209,335    54,752    (58,653) 

Foreign exchange derivatives cleared by central counterparty

   43,478    366    (388   9,308    33    (44) 

Exchange traded futures and options – bought and sold

   18,813    31    (27   6,071    13    (12) 

Foreign exchange derivatives

   4,229,796    79,260    (78,248   3,224,714    54,798    (58,709) 

Interest rate derivatives

            

Interest rate swaps

   4,799,897    153,822    (143,059   4,600,472    159,040    (148,475) 

Forward-rate agreements

   296,559    999    (968   371,510    440    (390) 

OTC options bought and sold

   2,522,430    42,412    (43,373   2,634,527    48,995    (49,001) 

OTC derivatives

   7,618,886    197,233    (187,400   7,606,509    208,475    (197,866) 

Interest rate derivatives cleared by central counterpartya

   14,439,407    30,503    (31,528   11,407,745    21,871    (22,603) 

Exchange traded futures and options – bought and sold

   7,952,733    397    (370   5,470,872    281    (263) 

Interest rate derivatives

   30,011,026    228,133    (219,298   24,485,126    230,627    (220,732) 

Credit derivatives

            

OTC swaps

   615,057    11,811    (10,513   671,389    14,087    (12,693) 

Credit derivatives cleared by central counterpartya

   332,743    4,462    (4,572   277,257    4,094    (3,931) 

Credit derivatives

   947,800    16,273    (15,085   948,646    18,181    (16,624) 

Equity and stock index derivatives

            

OTC options bought and sold

   102,545    6,766    (8,837   53,645    5,507    (7,746) 

Equity swaps and forwards

   105,120    2,253    (4,435   98,264    1,794    (3,855) 

OTC derivatives

   207,665    9,019    (13,272   151,909    7,301    (11,601) 

Exchange traded futures and options – bought and sold

   585,620    8,070    (8,600   429,592    6,498    (6,851) 

Equity and stock index derivatives

   793,285    17,089    (21,872   581,501    13,799    (18,452) 

Commodity derivatives

            

OTC options bought and sold

   14,053    395    (461   21,959    1,402    (1,408) 

Commodity swaps and forwards

   16,086    1,528    (1,821   29,161    3,645    (3,397) 

OTC derivatives

   30,139    1,923    (2,282   51,120    5,047    (4,805) 

Exchange traded futures and options – bought and sold

   173,774    2,946    (2,861   145,995    4,320    (4,466) 

Commodity derivatives

   203,913    4,869    (5,143   197,115    9,367    (9,271) 

Derivative assets/(liabilities) held for trading

   36,185,820    345,624    (339,646   29,437,102    326,772    (323,788) 

Total OTC derivatives held for trading

   12,639,252    298,849    (291,300   11,690,262    289,662    (285,618) 

Total derivatives cleared by central counterparty held for trading

   14,815,628    35,331    (36,488   11,694,310    25,998    (26,578) 

Total exchange traded derivatives held for trading

   8,730,940    11,444    (11,858   6,052,530    11,112    (11,592) 

Derivative assets/(liabilities) held for trading

   36,185,820    345,624    (339,646   29,437,102    326,772    (323,788) 

Note

aThe Chicago Mercantile Exchange (CME) changed its rulebook with effective date 3 January 2017. Under the new rules, OTC positions cleared will be settled daily by cash payments and not collateralised by these payments (known currently as variation margin). For reporting periods following the effective date, the fair value of derivatives will reflect the settlement which will reduce the fair value of the recognised derivative assets and liabilities and there will be no separate cash collateral recognised for the daily ‘variation margin’. As of 31 December 2016, the fair value of impacted derivatives assets was £20.4bn and derivative liabilities £21.5bn.

 

  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 20152016 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  231243


Notes to the financial statements

Assets and liabilities held at fair value

 

 

15 Derivative financial instrumentscontinued

The fair values and notional amounts of derivative instruments held for trading are set out in the following table:

Derivatives held for trading

                              
   2015     2014  
    

 
 

 

Notional

contract
amount

£m

  

  
  

  

   Fair value     

 
 

 

Notional

contract
amount

£m

  

  
  

  

  

 

 

 

Fair value

 

  

     
 
Assets
£m
  
  
   
 
Liabilities
£m
  
  
     
 
Assets
£m
  
  
   

 

Liabilities

£m

  

  

Foreign exchange derivatives

            

Forward foreign exchange

   1,277,863     17,613     (19,433   1,684,832     31,883     (34,611

Currency swaps

   1,006,640     30,703     (32,449   1,109,795     32,209     (33,919

OTC options bought and sold

   924,832     6,436     (6,771   895,226     10,267     (10,665

OTC derivatives

   3,209,335     54,752     (58,653   3,689,853     74,359     (79,195

Foreign exchange derivatives cleared by central counterparty

   9,308     33     (44   11,382     56     (70

Exchange traded futures and options – bought and sold

   6,071     13     (12   57,623     18     (16

Foreign exchange derivatives

   3,224,714     54,798     (58,709   3,758,858     74,433     (79,281

Interest rate derivatives

            

Interest rate swaps

   4,600,472     159,040     (148,475   5,779,015     209,962     (200,096

Forward rate agreements

   371,510     440     (390   467,812     794     (722

OTC options bought and sold

   2,634,527     48,995     (49,001   3,083,200     67,039     (67,575

OTC derivatives

   7,606,509     208,475     (197,866   9,330,027     277,795     (268,393

Interest rate derivatives cleared by central counterparty

   11,407,745     21,871     (22,603   15,030,090     30,166     (31,152

Exchange traded futures and options – bought and sold

   5,470,872     281     (263   2,210,602     382     (336

Interest rate derivatives

   24,485,126     230,627     (220,732   26,570,719     308,343     (299,881

Credit derivatives

            

OTC swaps

   671,389     14,087     (12,693   896,386     18,864     (17,825

Credit derivatives cleared by central counterparty

   277,257     4,094     (3,931   287,577     4,643     (4,542

Credit derivatives

   948,646     18,181     (16,624   1,183,963     23,507     (22,367

Equity and stock index derivatives

            

OTC options bought and sold

   53,645     5,507     (7,746   67,151     6,461     (9,517

Equity swaps and forwards

   98,264     1,794     (3,855   102,663     1,823     (3,532

OTC derivatives

   151,909     7,301     (11,601   169,814     8,284     (13,049

Exchange traded futures and options – bought and sold

   429,592     6,498     (6,851   490,960     6,560     (6,542

Equity and stock index derivatives

   581,501     13,799     (18,452   660,774     14,844     (19,591

Commodity derivatives

            

OTC options bought and sold

   21,959     1,402     (1,408   38,196     1,592     (1,227

Commodity swaps and forwards

   29,161     3,645     (3,397   61,639     7,985     (8,175)  

OTC derivatives

   51,120     5,047     (4,805   99,835     9,577     (9,402

Exchange traded futures and options – bought and sold

   145,995     4,320     (4,466   350,193     7,566     (8,101

Commodity derivatives

   197,115     9,367     (9,271   450,028     17,143     (17,503

Derivative assets/(liabilities) held for trading

   29,437,102     326,772     (323,788   32,624,342     438,270     (438,623

Total OTC derivatives held for trading

   11,690,262     289,662     (285,618   14,185,915     388,879     (387,864

Total derivatives cleared by central counterparty held for trading

   11,694,310     25,998     (26,578   15,329,049     34,865     (35,764

Total exchange traded derivatives held for trading

   6,052,530     11,112     (11,592   3,109,378     14,526     (14,995

Derivative assets/(liabilities) held for trading

   29,437,102     326,772     (323,788   32,624,342     438,270     (438,623

232  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F


15 Derivative financial instrumentscontinued

The fair values and notional amounts of derivative instruments held for risk management are set out in the following table:

 

Derivatives held for risk management

                              2016          2015    
     Notional    Fair value    Notional    Fair value 
     2015   2014       contract        contract     
      

 
 

 

Notional

contract
amount

£m

  

  
  

  

   Fair value     

 
 

 

Notional

contract
amount

£m

  

  
  

  

  

 

 

 

Fair value

 

  

     amount    Assets    Liabilities    amount    Assets    Liabilities 
   
 
Assets
£m
  
  
   
 
Liabilities
£m
  
  
   
 
Assets
£m
  
  
   
 
Liabilities
£m
  
  
      £m    £m    £m    £m    £m    £m 

Derivatives designated as cash flow hedges

                            

Currency swaps

     1,357     133                           1,357    453    –     1,357    133     

Interest rate swaps

     14,198     162     (115   19,218     223     (60     5,965    154    (6)    14,198    162    (115) 

Forward foreign exchange

     759     5          930     17                    –     759    5     

Interest rate derivatives cleared by central counterparty

      147,072               82,550                  181,541    62    (27)    147,072         

Derivatives designated as cash flow hedges

      163,386     300     (115   102,698     240     (60      188,863    669    (33)    163,386    300    (115) 

Derivatives designated as fair value hedges

                            

Interest rate swaps

     13,798     637     (264   27,345     1,379     (590     10,733    301    (744)    13,798    637    (264) 

Forward foreign exchange

     2,527          (32                            –     2,527        (32) 

Interest rate derivatives cleared by central counterparty

      134,939               135,553                  130,842        –     134,939         

Derivatives designated as fair value hedges

      151,264     637     (296   162,898     1,379     (590      141,575    301    (744)    151,264    637    (296) 

Derivatives designated as hedges of net investments

                            

Forward foreign exchange

      1,955          (53   2,852     20     (47      6,086    32    (64)    1,955        (53) 

Derivatives designated as hedges of net investments

      1,955          (53   2,852     20     (47      6,086    32    (64)    1,955        (53) 

Derivative assets/(liabilities) held for risk management

      316,605     937     (464   268,448     1,639     (697      336,524    1,002    (841)    316,605    937    (464) 

Total OTC derivatives held for risk management

     34,594     937     (464   50,345     1,639     (697     24,141    940    (814)    34,594    937    (464) 

Total derivatives cleared by central counterparty held for risk management

      282,011               218,103                  312,383    62    (27)    282,011         

Derivative assets/(liabilities) held for risk management

      316,605     937     (464   268,448     1,639     (697      336,524    1,002    (841)    316,605    937    (464) 

The Group has hedged the following forecast cash flows, which primarily vary with interest rates. These cash flows are expected to impact the income statement in the following periods, excluding any hedge adjustments that may be applied:

The Group has hedged the following forecast cash flows, which primarily vary with interest rates. These cash flows are expected to impact the income statement in the following periods, excluding any hedge adjustments that may be applied:

  

The Group has hedged the following forecast cash flows, which primarily vary with interest rates. These cash flows are expected to impact the income statement in the following periods, excluding any hedge adjustments that may be applied:

 

      Up to     One to     Two to     Three to     Four to     More than        Up to    One to    Two to    Three to    Four to    More than 
  Total   one year     two years     three years     four years     five years     five years     Total    one year    two years    three years    four years    five years    five years 
   £m    £m    £m    £m    £m    £m    £m 

2016

              

Forecast receivable cash flows

   2,616    455    531    511    411    327    381 

Forecast payable cash flows

   52    15    16    7    6    5    3 
  £m   £m     £m     £m     £m     £m     £m  

2015

                            

Forecast receivable cash flows

       4,952   555     816     875     813     633     1,260     4,952    555    816    875    813    633    1,260 

Forecast payable cash flows

  872   769     35     31     22     11     4     872    769    35    31    22    11    4 

2014

              

Forecast receivable cash flows

  4,277   308     491     695     729     651     1,403  

Forecast payable cash flows

  972   178     770     10     7     4     3  
                     

The maximum length of time over which the Group hedges exposure to the variability in future cash flows for forecast transactions, excluding those forecast transactions related to the payment of variable interest on existing financial instruments is 10 years (2015: 10 years).

The maximum length of time over which the Group hedges exposure to the variability in future cash flows for forecast transactions, excluding those forecast transactions related to the payment of variable interest on existing financial instruments is 10 years (2015: 10 years).

 

Amounts recognised in net interest income

                                       

2016

£m

 

 

   

2015

£m

 

 

             2015     2014  
                  £m     £m  

Gains/(losses) on the hedged items attributable to the hedged risk

           552     2,610  

(Losses)/gains on the hedging instruments

                  (485   (2,797

Gains on the hedged items attributable to the hedged risk

Gains on the hedged items attributable to the hedged risk

 

           1,787     552  

Losses on the hedging instruments

                  (1,741)    (485) 

Fair value ineffectiveness

             67     (187             46     67  

Cash flow hedging ineffectiveness

             16     41               28     16  

Net investment hedging ineffectiveness

                  (2                       (3)    (2) 

Gains and losses transferred from the cash flow hedging reserve to the income statement included a £36m£17m gain (2014: £52m(2015: £36m gain) transferred to interest income; a £267m£491m gain (2014: £778m(2015: £267m gain) to interest expense; anil (2015: £4m loss (2014: £15m loss) to net trading income; a £17m gain (2014: nil)(2015: £17m gain) to administration and general expenses; and a £69m£75m loss (2014: £78m(2015: £69m loss) to taxation.

 

244  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 20152016 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  233


Notes to the financial statements

Assets and liabilities held at fair value

 

 

16 Available for sale financial assetsFinancial investments

 

 

Accounting for available for sale financial assetsinvestments

 

Available for sale financial assets are held at fair value with gains and losses being included in other comprehensive income. The Group uses this classification for assets that are not derivatives and are not held for trading purposes or otherwise designated at fair value through profit or loss, or at amortised cost. Dividends and interest (calculated using the effective interest method) are recognised in the income statement in Note 3 Netnet interest income (Note 3) or, Note 6 Netnet investment income.income (Note 6). On disposal, the cumulative gain or loss recognised in other comprehensive income is also included in net investment income.

 

Held to maturity assets are held at amortised cost. The Group uses this classification when there is an intent and ability to hold the asset to maturity. Interest on the investments are recognised in the income statement within Net interest income (Note 3).

 

    2015     2014  
    £m     £m  

Debt securities and other eligible bills

   89,278     85,539  

Equity securities

   989     527  

Available for sale investments

    90,267     86,066  
    2016    2015 
    £m    £m 

Available for sale debt securities and other eligible bills

   57,703    89,278 

Available for sale equity securities

   438    989 

Held to maturity debt securities

   5,176     

Financial investments

    63,317    90,267 

In June 2016 UK Gilts previously classified as available for sale investments, were reclassified to held to maturity in order to reflect the intention with these assets. Any previous fair value gain or loss on the asset that has been accumulated within the available for sale reserve (Note 32) is amortised to profit or loss over the remaining life of the financial asset using the effective interest method.

17 Financial liabilities designated at fair value

 

 

Accounting for liabilities designated at fair value through profit and loss

 

In accordance with IAS 39, financial liabilities may be designated at fair value, with gains and losses taken to the income statement within Netnet trading income (Note 5) and Netnet investment income (Note 6). The Group has the ability to make the fair value designation when holding the instruments at fair value reduces an accounting mismatch (caused by an offsetting liability or asset being held at fair value), or is managed by the Group on the basis of its fair value, or includes terms that have substantive derivative characteristics (see Note(Note 15 Derivative financial instruments).

 

The details on how the fair value amounts are arrivedderived for financial liabilities designated at fair value are described in Note 18 Fair value of assets and liabilities (Note 18).liabilities.

 

 

   2015   2014     2016    2015 
     Contractual       Contractual         Contractual            Contractual 
     amount due       amount due         amount due            amount due 
   Fair value     on maturity     Fair value     on maturity     Fair value      on maturity        Fair value      on maturity 
   £m     £m     £m     £m     £m      £m        £m      £m 

Debt securities

   33,177     36,097     42,395     44,910     34,985      37,034        33,177      36,097 

Deposits

   6,029     6,324     7,206     7,301     5,269      5,303        6,029      6,324 

Liabilities to customers under investment contracts

   1,633          1,823          37      –        1,633       

Repurchase agreementsa

   50,838     50,873     5,423     5,433  

Repurchase agreements

   55,710      55,760        50,838      50,873 

Other financial liabilities

   68     68     125     125     30      30        68      68 

Financial liabilities designated at fair value

   91,745     93,362     56,972     57,769     96,031      98,127        91,745      93,362 

The cumulative own credit net loss recognised is £226m (2014: £716m)£239m (2015: £226m).

Note

aDuring 2015, new repurchase agreements and other similar secured borrowing in certain businesses have been designated at fair value to better align to the way the business manages the portfolio’s risk and performance.

 

234  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 20152016 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  245


Notes to the financial statements

Assets and liabilities held at fair value

    

 

 

18 Fair value of assets and liabilitiesfinancial instruments

 

 

Accounting for financial assets and liabilities – fair values

The Group applies IAS 39. All financial instruments are initially recognised at fair value on the date of initial recognition and, depending on the classification of the asset or liability, may continue to be held at fair value either through profit or loss or other comprehensive income. The fair value of a financial instrument is the price that would be received to sell an asset or paid to transfer a liability in an orderly transaction between market participants at the measurement date.

 

Wherever possible, fair value is determined by reference to a quoted market price for that instrument. For many of the Group’s financial assets and liabilities, especially derivatives, quoted prices are not available and valuation models are used to estimate fair value. The models calculate the expected cash flows under the terms of each specific contract and then discount these values back to a present value. These models use as their basis independently sourcedindependently-sourced market parameters including, for example, interest rate yield curves, equities and commodities prices, option volatilities and currency rates.

 

For financial liabilities measured at fair value, the carrying amount reflects the effect on fair value of changes in own credit spreads derived fromcalibrated to observable market data such as in primary issuance and redemption activity for structured notes. Own credit spreads onfor instruments issued out of Barclays Bank PLC were previously derived from Barclays Bank PLC issued bonds or credit default swaps (CDS). Most market parameters are either directly observable or are implied from instrument prices. The model may perform numerical proceduresvanilla debt in the pricing such as interpolation when input values do not directly correspondsecondary market but, due to extensive bondbuy-back programmes, observations of Barclays Bank PLC secondary market bond prices have significantly decreased and no longer provide a reliable estimation for the most actively traded market trade parameters.fair value measurement.

 

On initial recognition, it is presumed that the transaction price is the fair value unless there is observable information available in an active market to the contrary. The best evidence of an instrument’s fair value on initial recognition is typically the transaction price. However, if fair value can be evidenced by comparison with other observable current market transactions in the same instrument, or is based on a valuation technique whose inputs include only data from observable markets, then the instrument should be recognised at the fair value derived from such observable market data.

 

For valuations that have made use of unobservable inputs, the difference between the model valuation and the initial transaction price (‘Day One profit’) is recognised in profit or loss either: on a straight-line basis over the term of the transaction; or where appropriate over the period until all model inputs will become observable where appropriate; or released in full when previously unobservable inputs become observable.

 

Various factors influence the availability of observable inputs and these may vary from product to product and change over time. Factors include the depth of activity in the relevant market, the type of product, whether the product is new and not widely traded in the marketplace, the maturity of market modelling and the nature of the transaction (bespoke or generic). To the extent that valuation is based on models or inputs that are not observable in the market, the determination of fair value can be more subjective, dependentdepending on the significance of the unobservable input to the overall valuation. Unobservable inputs are determined based on the best information available, for example by reference to similar assets, similar maturities or other analytical techniques.

 

The sensitivity of valuations used in the financial statements to possible changes in significant unobservable inputs is shown on page 244.256.

 

Critical accounting estimates and judgements

The valuation of financial instruments often involves a significant degree of judgement and complexity, in particular where valuation models make use of unobservable inputs (‘Level 3’ assets and liabilities). This note provides information on these instruments, including the related unrealised gains and losses recognised in the period, a description of significant valuation techniques and unobservable inputs, and a sensitivity analysis.

 

 

Valuation

IFRS 13Fair Value Measurement requires an entity to classify its assets and liabilities according to a hierarchy that reflects the observability of significant market inputs. The three levels of the fair value hierarchy are defined below.

Quoted market prices – Level 1

Assets and liabilities are classified as Level 1 if their value is observable in an active market. Such instruments are valued by reference to unadjusted quoted prices for identical assets or liabilities in active markets where the quoted price is readily available, and the price represents actual and regularly occurring market transactions. An active market is one in which transactions occur with sufficient volume and frequency to provide pricing information on an ongoing basis.

Valuation technique using observable inputs – Level 2

Assets and liabilities classified as Level 2 have been valued using models whose inputs are observable in an active market.either directly or indirectly. Valuations based on observable inputs include assets and liabilities such as swaps and forwards which are valued using market standard pricing techniques, and options that are commonly traded in markets where all the inputs to the market standard pricing models are observable.

Valuation technique using significant unobservable inputs – Level 3

Assets and liabilities are classified as Level 3 if their valuation incorporates significant inputs that are not based on observable market data (unobservable inputs). A valuation input is considered observable if it can be directly observed from transactions in an active market, or if there is compelling external evidence demonstrating an executable exit price. Unobservable input levels are generally determined via reference to observable inputs, historical observations or using other analytical techniques.

 

246  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2016 Annual Report on Form 20-F


18 Fair value of financial instrumentscontinued

The following table shows the Groups’ assets and liabilities that are held at fair value disaggregated by valuation technique (fair value hierarchy) and balance sheet classification:

Assets and liabilities held at fair value

                    
   Valuation technique using 
    



Quoted
market
prices
(Level 1)
£m
 
 
 
 
 
   

Observable
inputs

(Level 2)

£m

 
 

 

 

   


Significant
unobservable
inputs

(Level 3)

£m

 
 
 

 

 

   

Total

£m

 

 

As at 31 December 2016

        

Trading portfolio assets

   41,550    36,625    2,065    80,240 

Financial assets designated at fair value

   4,031    64,630    9,947    78,608 

Derivative financial assets

   5,261    332,819    8,546    346,626 

Available for sale investments

   21,218    36,551    372    58,141 

Investment property

           81    81 

Assets included in disposal groups classified as held for salea

   6,754    8,511    6,009    21,274 

Total assets

   78,814    479,136    27,020    584,970 

Trading portfolio liabilities

   (20,205   (14,475   (7   (34,687

Financial liabilities designated at fair value

   (70   (95,121   (840   (96,031

Derivative financial liabilities

   (5,051   (328,265   (7,171   (340,487

Liabilities included in disposal groups classified as held for salea

   (397   (5,224   (6,201   (11,822

Total liabilities

   (25,723   (443,085   (14,219   (483,027

As at 31 December 2015

        

Trading portfolio assets

   36,676    35,725    4,947    77,348 

Financial assets designated at fair value

   6,163    52,909    17,758    76,830 

Derivative financial assets

   6,342    315,949    5,418    327,709 

Available for sale investments

   42,552    46,693    1,022    90,267 

Investment property

           140    140 

Assets included in disposal groups classified as held for salea

   26    8    7,330    7,364 

Total assets

   91,759    451,284    36,615    579,658 

Trading portfolio liabilities

   (23,978   (9,989       (33,967

Financial liabilities designated at fair value

   (240   (90,203   (1,302   (91,745

Derivative financial liabilities

   (5,450   (314,033   (4,769   (324,252

Liabilities included in disposal groups classified as held for salea

   (1,024   (802   (4,171   (5,997

Total liabilities

   (30,692   (415,027   (10,242   (455,961

Note

aDisposal groups held for sale and measured at fair value less cost to sell are included in the fair value table. For disposal groups measured at carrying amount, the underlying financial assets and liabilities measured at fair value are included in the fair value disclosures on pages 247 to 260 and items measured at amortised cost are included on page 261.Non-financial assets (£6.6bn) and liabilities (£1.7bn) within disposal groups measured at carrying amount are excluded from these disclosures.

  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 20152016 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  235247


Notes to the financial statements

Assets and liabilities held at fair value

    

 

 

18 Fair value of assets and liabilitiescontinued

The following table shows the Group’s assets and liabilities that are held at fair value disaggregated by valuation technique (fair value hierarchy) and balance sheet classification:

Assets and liabilities held at fair value

                    
   Valuation technique using    
    

 

 

 

 

Quoted

market

prices

(Level 1)

£m

  

  

  

  

  

   

 

 

 

Observable

inputs

(Level 2)

£m

  

  

  

  

   

 

 

 

 

Significant

unobservable

inputs

(Level 3)

£m

  

  

  

  

  

   

 

Total

£m

  

  

As at 31 December 2015

        

Trading portfolio assets

   36,676     35,725     4,947     77,348  

Financial assets designated at fair valuea

   6,163     52,909     17,758     76,830  

Derivative financial assets

   6,342     315,949     5,418     327,709  

Available for sale investments

   42,552     46,693     1,022     90,267  

Otherb

   26     8     7,470     7,504  

Total assets

   91,759     451,284     36,615     579,658  

Trading portfolio liabilities

   (23,978   (9,989        (33,967

Financial liabilities designated at fair valuea

   (240   (90,203   (1,302   (91,745

Derivative financial liabilities

   (5,450   (314,033   (4,769   (324,252

Otherb

   (1,024   (802   (4,171   (5,997

Total liabilities

   (30,692   (415,027   (10,242   (455,961

As at 31 December 2014

        

Trading portfolio assets

   48,962     59,428     6,327     114,717  

Financial assets designated at fair value

   9,934     8,461     19,905     38,300  

Derivative financial assets

   9,863     425,301     4,745     439,909  

Available for sale investments

   44,234     40,519     1,313     86,066  

Otherb

   33     198     15,550     15,781  

Total assets

   113,026     533,907     47,840     694,773  

Trading portfolio liabilities

   (26,840   (17,935   (349   (45,124

Financial liabilities designated at fair value

   (15   (55,141   (1,816   (56,972

Derivative financial liabilities

   (10,313   (424,687   (4,320   (439,320

Otherb

             (13,115   (13,115

Total liabilities

   (37,168   (497,763   (19,600   (554,531

Notes

aDuring 2015, new reverse repurchase agreements and other similar secured lending and repurchase agreements and other similar secured borrowing in certain businesses have been designated at fair value to better align to the way the business manages the portfolio’s risk and performance.
bOther includes assets and liabilities held for sale of £7,364m (2014: £15,574m) and £5,997m (2014: £13,115m) respectively, which are measured at fair value on a non-recurring basis. Refer to Note 44 for more information on non-current assets and liabilities held for sale. Other also includes investment property of £140m (2014: £207m).

236  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F


18 Fair value of assets and liabilitiesfinancial instrumentscontinued

The following table shows the Group’s assets and liabilities that are held at fair value disaggregated by valuation technique (fair value hierarchy) and product type:type.

 

Assets and liabilities held at fair value by product type

                              
     Assets         Liabilities    
   Valuation technique using     Valuation technique using  
    

 

 

 

 

Quoted

market

prices

(Level 1)

£m

  

  

  

  

  

   

 

 

 

Observable

inputs

(Level 2)

£m

  

  

  

  

   

 

 

 

 

Significant

unobservable

inputs

(Level 3)

£m

  

  

  

  

  

   

 

 

 

 

Quoted

market

prices

(Level 1)

£m

  

  

  

  

  

   

 

 

 

Observable

inputs

(Level 2)

£m

  

  

  

  

   
 
 

 

 

Significant
unobservable
inputs

(Level 3)

£m

  
  
  

  

  

As at 31 December 2015

            

Interest rate derivatives

        228,751     2,675          (218,864   (2,247

Foreign exchange derivatives

   2     54,839     95     (4   (58,594   (196

Credit derivativesa

        16,279     1,902          (16,405   (219

Equity derivatives

   3,830     9,279     690     (2,870   (14,037   (1,545

Commodity derivatives

   2,510     6,801     56     (2,576   (6,133   (562

Government and government sponsored debt

   55,150     52,967     419     (15,036   (5,474   (1

Corporate debt

   352     11,598     2,895     (234   (4,558   (15

Certificates of deposit, commercial paper and other money market instruments

   82     503          (5   (6,955   (382

Reverse repurchase and repurchase agreementsb

        49,513               (50,838     

Non-asset backed loans

        1,931     16,828                 

Asset backed securities

        12,009     770          (384   (37

Commercial real estate loans

             551                 

Issued debt

                       (29,695   (546

Equity cash products

   29,704     4,038     171     (8,943   (221     

Funds and fund linked products

        1,649     378          (1,601   (148

Physical commodities

   87     156                      

Otherc

   42     971     9,185     (1,024   (1,268   (4,344

Total

   91,759     451,284     36,615     (30,692   (415,027   (10,242

As at 31 December 2014

            

Interest rate derivatives

        308,706     1,239     (5   (299,181   (1,344

Foreign exchange derivatives

   4     74,358     108     (3   (79,188   (138)  

Credit derivativesa

        21,541     1,966          (21,958   (409

Equity derivatives

   3,847     9,750     1,247     (3,719   (13,780   (2,092

Commodity derivatives

   6,012     10,946     185     (6,586   (10,580   (337

Government and government sponsored debt

   62,577     48,296     1,014     (11,563   (14,002   (346

Corporate debt

   151     22,036     3,061          (3,572   (13

Certificates of deposit, commercial paper and other money market instruments

   78     921          (4   (6,276   (665

Reverse repurchase and repurchase agreements

        5,236               (5,423     

Non-asset backed loans

   1     2,462     17,744                 

Asset backed securities

   30     16,211     1,631          (67     

Commercial real estate loans

             1,180                 

Issued debt

                  (10   (40,592   (749

Equity cash products

   40,252     7,823     171     (15,276   (699     

Funds and fund linked products

        2,644     631          (2,060   (210

Physical commodities

   4     1,447               (363     

Otherc

   70     1,530     17,663     (2   (22   (13,297

Total

   113,026     533,907     47,840     (37,168   (497,763   (19,600

Assets and liabilities reclassified between Level 1 and Level 2

There were transfers of £537m assets and £801m liabilities (2014: nil) of equity and foreign exchange derivatives from Level 1 to Level 2 to reflect the market observability of these product types.

Assets and liabilities held at fair value by product type

                              
     Assets        Liabilities   
   Valuation technique using    Valuation technique using 
    

Quoted

market

prices

(Level 1)

£m

 

 

 

 

 

   

Observable

inputs

(Level 2)

£m

 

 

 

 

   

Significant

unobservable

inputs

(Level 3)

£m

 

 

 

 

 

   

Quoted

market

prices

(Level 1)

£m

 

 

 

 

 

   

Observable

inputs

(Level 2)

£m

 

 

 

 

   

Significant

unobservable

inputs

(Level 3)

£m

 

 

 

 

 

As at 31 December 2016

            

Interest rate derivatives

       222,892    5,759        (215,213   (4,860

Foreign exchange derivatives

       79,612    132        (78,263   (51

Credit derivatives

       14,662    1,611        (14,844   (241

Equity derivatives

   4,210    11,842    1,037    (4,058   (15,808   (2,007

Commodity derivatives

   1,052    3,809    8    (991   (4,138   (13

Government and government sponsored debt

   31,203    49,834    3    (12,761   (11,454    

Corporate debt

   46    11,921    969    (27   (1,907   (5

Certificates of deposit, commercial paper and other money market instruments

       994            (6,936   (319

Reverse repurchase and repurchase agreements

       63,162            (55,710    

Non-asset backed loans

       2,888    8,767             

Asset backed securities

       1,956    515        (256    

Commercial real estate loans

           442             

Issued debt

                   (31,973   (298

Equity cash products

   35,399    6,478    150    (7,416   (934   (2

Funds and fund linked products

   53    137    273        (170   (37

Private equity investments

   23    110    856        (18   (12

Assets and liabilities held for sale

   6,754    8,511    6,009    (397   (5,224   (6,201

Othera

   74    328    489    (73   (237   (173

Total

   78,814    479,136    27,020    (25,723   (443,085   (14,219

As at 31 December 2015

            

Interest rate derivatives

       228,751    2,675        (218,864   (2,247

Foreign exchange derivatives

   2    54,839    95    (4   (58,594   (196

Credit derivatives

       16,279    1,902        (16,405   (219

Equity derivatives

   3,830    9,279    690    (2,870   (14,037   (1,545

Commodity derivatives

   2,510    6,801    56    (2,576   (6,133   (562

Government and government sponsored debt

   55,150    52,967    419    (15,036   (5,474   (1

Corporate debt

   352    11,598    2,895    (234   (4,558   (15

Certificates of deposit, commercial paper and other money market instruments

   82    503        (5   (6,955   (382

Reverse repurchase and repurchase agreements

       49,513            (50,838    

Non-asset backed loans

       1,931    16,828             

Asset backed securities

       12,009    770        (384   (37

Commercial real estate loans

           551             

Issued debt

                   (29,695   (546

Equity cash products

   29,704    4,038    171    (8,943   (221    

Funds and fund linked products

       1,649    378        (1,601   (148

Private equity investments

   7    283    1,388             

Assets and liabilities held for sale

   26    8    7,330    (1,024   (802   (4,171

Othera

   96    836    467        (466   (173

Total

   91,759    451,284    36,615    (30,692   (415,027   (10,242

 

NotesNote

aCredit derivatives includes derivative exposure to monoline insurers.
bDuring 2015, new reverse repurchase agreements and other similar lending and repurchase agreements and other similar secured borrowing in certain businesses have been designated at fair value to better align to the way the business manages the portfolio’s risk and performance.
cOther includes non-current assets and liabilities held for sale, private equity investments, asset backed loans, physical commodities and investment property.

 

Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  237


Notes to the financial statements

Assets and liabilities held at fair value

18 Fair value of assets and liabilitiescontinued

Level 3 movement analysis

The following table summarises the movements in the Level 3 balance during the year. The table shows gains and losses and includes amounts for all assets and liabilities transferred to and from Level 3 during the year. Transfers have been reflected as if they had taken place at the beginning of the year.

Analysis of movements in Level 3 assets and liabilities                                          
             Total gains and losses          
             in the period     Total        
             recognised in the     gains        
   As at             income statement     or losses     Transfers     As at 31  
   1 January             Trading     Other     recognised         December  
    

 

2015

£m

  

  

   
 
Purchases
£m
  
  
   
 
Sales
£m
  
  
   
 
Issues
£m
  
  
   
 
Settlements
£m
  
  
   
 
income
£m
  
  
   
 
income
£m
  
  
   

 

in OCI

£m

  

  

   
 
In
£m
  
  
   
 
Out
£m
  
  
   

 

2015

£m

  

  

Government and government sponsored debt   685     27     (119        (109   (6             2     (160   320  
Corporate debt   3,026     62     (64        (20   (47             5     (80   2,882  
Asset backed securities   1,610     1,365     (1,565        (711   58               5     (19   743  
Non-asset backed loans   273     520     (251        (3   (42             11     (1   507  
Funds and fund linked products   589          (174        (56   (27             12     (4   340  
Other   144     23     (19        (9   (14             53     (23   155  
Trading portfolio assets   6,327     1,997     (2,192        (908   (78             88     (287   4,947  
Commercial real estate loans   1,179     3,540     (3,878        (342   49     1                    549  
Non-asset backed loansc   17,471     192     (114        (756   (531   (6                  16,256  
Asset backed loans   393     1,098     (1,260        2     8               15          256  
Private equity investments   701     94     (200        (3   8     38          4     (132   510  
Other   161     66     (31        (3   (11   5          26     (26   187  
Financial assets designated at fair value   19,905     4,990     (5,483        (1,102   (477   38          45     (158   17,758  
Asset backed securities   1                                             (1     
Government and government sponsored debt   327     14     (36                       1          (212   94  
Other   985     65     (91        (1,026        549     419     27          928  
Available for sale investments   1,313     79     (127        (1,026        549     420     27     (213   1,022  
                                                        
Othera   207     27     (89                  (5                  140  
                                                        
Trading portfolio liabilities   (349                                           349       
Certificates of deposit, commercial paper and other money market instruments   (666             (216   261          17               221     (383
Issued debt   (748             (16   245     (4   (8        (38   4     (565
Other   (402                  (19   (18   75               10     (354
Financial liabilities designated at fair value   (1,816             (232   487     (22   84          (38   235     (1,302
Interest rate derivatives   (105   1     218          (247   203               243     117     430  
Credit derivatives   1,557     273     (12        (6   (123             (11   7     1,685  
Equity derivatives   (845   111     (2   (290   103     34               (21   52     (858
Commodity derivatives   (152                  (66   (6             (388   106     (506
Foreign exchange derivatives   (30   14     (1   (7   9     (14             (73        (102
Net derivative financial instrumentsb   425     399     203     (297   (207   94               (250   282     649  
                                                           
Total   26,012     7,492     (7,688   (529   (2,756   (483   666     420     (128   208     23,214  

Notes

aOther includes investment property of £140m (2014: £207m). Non-current assets held for sale of £7,330m (2014: £15,574m) and liabilities in a disposal group classified as held for sale of £4,171m (2014: £13,115m) are not included as these are measured at fair value on a non-recurring basis.
bThe derivative financial instruments are represented on a net basis. On a gross basis, derivative financial assets are £5,418m (2014: £4,745m) and derivative financial liabilities are £4,769m (2014: £4,320m).
cA partially offsetting market gain of £172m (2014: £2,921m loss) has been recognised on the Level 2 derivative instruments that hedge the ESHLA loan portfolio interest rate risk.

238248  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 20152016 Annual Report on Form 20-F  


    

    

    

 

 

18 Fair value of assets and liabilitiesfinancial instrumentscontinued

Analysis of movements in Level 3 assets and liabilities  
             Total gains and losses in     Total        
             the period recognised in     gains        
   As at             the income statement     or losses     Transfers     As at 31  
   1 January             Trading     Other     recognised         December  
    

 

2014

£m

  

  

   
 
Purchases
£m
  
  
   
 
Sales
£m
  
  
   
 
Issues
£m
  
  
   
 
Settlements
£m
  
  
   
 
income
£m
  
  
   
 
income
£m
  
  
   

 

in OCI

£m

  

  

   
 
In
£m
  
  
   
 
Out
£m
  
  
   

 

2014

£m

  

  

Government and government sponsored debt   161     96     (198        (46   5               676     (9   685  
Corporate debt   3,039     177     (332        (370   484               39     (11   3,026  
Asset backed securities   2,111     1,037     (1,552        (141   178               8     (31   1,610  
Non-asset backed loans   176     250     (30        (49   2               13     (89   273  
Funds and fund linked products   494          (92             (17             204          589  
Other   440     8     (369        54     22                    (11   144  
Trading portfolio assets   6,421     1,568     (2,573        (552   674               940     (151   6,327  
Commercial real estate loans   1,198     2,919     (2,678        (334   76     (2                  1,179  
Non-asset backed loansc   15,956     2     (177        (81   1,830     9               (68   17,471  
Asset backed loans   375     855     (777        (4   19               1     (76   393  
Private equity investments   1,168     173     (500        (11   4     82               (215   701  
Other   73     75     (1        (35   9     32          2     6     161  
Financial assets designated at fair value   18,770     4,024     (4,133        (465   1,938     121          3     (353   19,905  
Asset backed securities   1                                                  1  
Government and government sponsored debt   59     281     (12        (1                            327  
Other   2,085     37     (78        (1,694   1     586     74     4     (30   985  
Available for sale investments   2,145     318     (90        (1,695   1     586     74     4     (30   1,313  
                                                        
Othera   451     47     (238                  5               (58   207  
                                                        
Trading portfolio liabilities                            (3             (346        (349
Certificates of deposit, commercial paper and other money market instruments   (409             (254   12     2     88          (108   3     (666
Issued debt   (1,164             (16   293     88               (48   99     (748
Other   (67             (341   10     6     30          (40        (402
Financial liabilities designated at fair value   (1,640             (611   315     96     118          (196   102     (1,816
Interest rate derivatives   (15   5     45     (5   7     (358             103     113     (105
Credit derivatives   1,420     11               42     121               (81   44     1,557  
Equity derivatives   (601   86     (12   (305   113     (278             (14   166     (845
Commodity derivatives   (141             (3   (10   4               (11   9     (152
Foreign exchange derivatives   31          (12   (4   (71   (6             29     3     (30
Net derivative financial instrumentsb   694     102     21     (317   81     (517             26     335     425  
                                                        
Total   26,841     6,059     (7,013   (928   (2,316   2,189     830     74     431     (155   26,012  

Notes

aOther includes investment property of £140m (2014: £207m). Non-current assets held for sale of £7,330m (2014: £15,574m) and liabilities in a disposal group classified as held for sale of £4,171m (2014: £13,115m) are not included as these are measured at fair value on a non-recurring basis.
bThe derivative financial instruments are represented on a net basis. On a gross basis, derivative financial assets are £5,418m (2014: £4,745m) and derivative financial liabilities are £4,769m (2014: £4,320m).
cA partially offsetting market gain of £172m (2014: £2,921m loss) has been recognised on the Level 2 derivative instruments that hedge the ESHLA loan portfolio interest rate risk.

Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  239


Notes to the financial statements

Assets and liabilities held at fair value

18 Fair value of assets and liabilitiescontinued

Assets and liabilities move between Level 2 and Level 3 primarily due to i) an increase or decrease in observable market activity related to an input, or ii) a change in the significance of the unobservable input, with assets and liabilities classified as Level 3 if an unobservable input is deemed significant.

Unrealised gains and losses on Level 3 financial assets and liabilities

The following table discloses the unrealised gains and losses recognised in the year arising on Level 3 financial assets and liabilities held at year end.

Unrealised gains and losses recognised during the period on Level 3 assets and liabilities held at period end  
   2015     2014  
       Other           Other    
   Income statement     compre-       Income statement     compre-    
   Trading     Other     hensive       Trading     Other     hensive    
As at 31 December   
 
income
£m
  
  
   
 
income
£m
  
  
   
 
income
£m
  
  
   
 
Total
£m
  
  
   
 
income
£m
  
  
   
 
income
£m
  
  
   
 
income
£m
  
  
   
 
Total
£m
  
  
Trading portfolio assets   (125             (125   466               466  
Financial assets designated at fair value   (562   (17        (579   1,849     (9        1,840  
Available for sale assets        (20   488     468          572     80     652  
Trading portfolio liabilities   (1             (1   (3             (3
Financial liabilities designated at fair value   (24   76          52     98     118          216  
Othera        (22        (22        5          5  
Net derivative financial instruments   123               123     (238             (238
Total   (589   17     488     (84   2,172     686     80     2,938  

The trading losses of £562m (2014: trading gains of £1,849m) within Level 3 financial assets designated at fair value was primarily due to fair value losses on the ESHLA loan portfolio of £531m.

Valuation techniques and sensitivity analysis

Sensitivity analysis is performed on products with significant unobservable inputs (Level 3) to generate a range of reasonably possible alternative valuations. The sensitivity methodologies applied take account of the nature of the valuation techniques used, as well as the availability and reliability of observable proxy and historical data and the impact of using alternative models.

Sensitivities are dynamically calculated on a monthly basis. The calculation is based on range or spread data of a reliable reference source or a scenario based on relevant market analysis alongside the impact of using alternative models. Sensitivities are calculated without reflecting the impact of any diversification in the portfolio.

The valuation techniques used for the material products within Levels 2 and 3, and observability and sensitivity analysis for products within Level 3, are described below.

Interest rate derivatives

Description: These are derivatives linked to interest rates or inflation indices. This category includes futures, interest rate and inflation swaps, swaptions, caps, floors, inflation options, balance guaranteed swaps and other exotic interest rate derivatives.

Valuation:Interest rate derivative cash flows are valued using interest rate yield curves whereby observable market data is used to construct the term structure of forward rates. This is then used to project and discount future cash flows based on the parameters of the trade. Instruments with optionality are valued using volatilities implied from market observable inputs. Exotic interest rate derivatives are valued using industry standard and bespoke models based on observable and unobservable market parameter inputs. Input parameters include interest rates, volatilities, correlations and others as appropriate. Inflation forward curves and interest rate yield curves may be extrapolated beyond observable tenors.

Balance guaranteed swaps are valued using cash flow models that calculate fair value based on loss projections, prepayment, recovery and discount rates. These parameters are determined by reference to underlying asset performance.

Observability: In general, input parameters are deemed observable up to liquid maturities which are determined separately for each parameter and underlying. Certain correlation, convexity, long dated forwards and volatility exposures are unobservable beyond liquid maturities. Unobservable market data and model inputs are set by referencing liquid market instruments and applying extrapolation techniques or inferred via another reasonable method.

Level 3 sensitivity:Sensitivity relating to unobservable valuation inputs is based on the dispersion of consensus data services where available, otherwise stress scenarios or historic data are used.

Notes

aOther consists of investment properties.

240  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F


18 Fair value of assets and liabilitiescontinued

Foreign exchange derivatives

Description:These are derivatives linked to the foreign exchange (FX) market. This category includes FX forward contracts, FX swaps and FX options. The vast majority are traded as OTCover the counter (OTC) derivatives.

Valuation: Exotic andnon-exotic derivatives are valued using industry standard and bespoke models. Input parameters include FX rates, interest rates, FX volatilities, interest rate volatilities, FX interest rate correlations and others as appropriate. Unobservable model inputs are set by referencing liquid market instruments and applying extrapolation techniques to match the appropriate risk profile.

Observability:Certain correlations, long dated forwards and volatilities are unobservable beyond liquid maturities.

Level 3 sensitivity:Sensitivity relating to unobservable valuation inputs is primarily based on the dispersion of consensus data services.

Credit derivatives

Description: These are derivatives linked to the credit spread of a referenced entity, index or basket of referenced entities or a pool of referenced assets via securitisation. This category includes single name and index CDS,credit default swaps (CDS), asset backed CDS, synthetic CDOs andNth-to-default basket swaps.

Valuation:CDS are valued using a market standard model that incorporates the credit curve as its principal input. Credit spreads are observed directly from broker data, third partythird-party vendors or priced to proxies. Where credit spreads are unobservable, they are determined with reference to recent transactions or proxied from bond spreads on observable trades of the same issuer or other similar entities. Synthetic CDOs are valued using a model that calculates fair value based on credit spreads, recovery rates, correlations and interest rates, and is calibrated to the index tranche market.

Observability:CDS contracts referencing entities that are not actively traded are considered unobservable. The correlation input to synthetic CDO valuation is considered unobservable as it is proxied from the observable index tranche market. Where an asset backed credit derivative does not have an observable market price and the valuation is determined using a model, thean instrument is considered unobservable.

Level 3 sensitivity: The sensitivity of valuations of the illiquid CDS portfolio is determined by applying a shift to each spread curve. The shift is based on the average range of pricing observed in the market for similar CDS. Synthetic CDO sensitivity is calculated using correlation levels derived from the range of contributors to a consensus bespoke service.

Derivative exposure to monoline insurers

Description:These products are derivatives through which credit protection has been purchased on structured debt instruments (primarily CLOs) from monoline insurers.

Valuation:Given the bespoke nature of the CDS, the primary valuation input is the price of the cash instrument it protects.

Observability: While the market value of the cash instrument underlying the CDS contract may be observable, its use in the valuation of CDS is considered unobservable due to the bespoke nature of the monoline CDS contracts.

Level 3 sensitivity:Due to the high degree of uncertainty, the sensitivity reflects the impact of writing down the credit protection element of fair value to zero.

Equity derivatives

Description:These are derivatives linked to equity indices and single names. This category includes exchange traded and OTC equity derivatives including vanilla and exotic options.

Valuation: The valuations of OTC equity derivatives are determined using industry standard models. Input parameters include stock prices, dividends, volatilities, inte restinterest rates, equity repo curves and, for multi-asset products, correlations. Unobservable model inputs are determined by reference to liquid market instruments and applying extrapolation techniques to match the appropriate risk profile.

Observability: In general, input parameters are deemed observable up to liquid maturities which are determined separately for each parameter and underlying.

Level 3 sensitivity:Sensitivity is estimated based on the dispersion of consensus data services either directly or through proxies.

Commodity derivatives

Description:These products are exchange traded and OTC derivatives based on underlying commodities such as metals, crude oil and refined products, agricultural, power and natural gas.

Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2016 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  249


Notes to the financial statements

Assets and liabilities held at fair value

18 Fair value of financial instrumentscontinued

Valuation:The valuations of commodity swaps and options are determined using models incorporating discounting of cash flows and other industry standard modelling techniques. Valuation inputs include forward curves, volatilities implied from market observable inputs and correlations. Unobservable inputs are set with reference to similar observable products or by applying extrapolation techniques from the observable market.

Observability: Certain correlations, forward curves and volatilities for longer dated exposures are unobservable.

Level 3 sensitivity:Sensitivity is determined primarily by measuring historical variability over two years. Where historical data is unavailable or uncertainty is due to volumetric risk, sensitivity is measured by applying appropriate stress scenarios or using proxybid-offer spread levels.

Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  241


Notes to the financial statements

Assets and liabilities held at fair value

18 Fair value of assets and liabilitiescontinued

Complex derivative instruments

Valuation estimates made by counterparties with respect to complex derivative instruments, for the purpose of determining the amount of collateral to be posted, often differ, sometimes significantly, from Barclays’ own estimates. In almost all cases, Barclays has been able to successfully resolve such differences or otherwise reach an accommodation with respect to collateral posting levels, including in certain cases by entering into compromise collateral arrangements. Due to the ongoing nature of collateral calls, Barclays will often be engaged in discussion with one or more counterparties in respect of such differences at any given time. Valuation estimates made by counterparties for collateral purposes are considered, like any other third partythird-party valuation, considered when determining Barclays’ fair value estimates.

Government and government sponsored debt

Description:These are government bonds, supra sovereign bonds and agency bonds.

Valuation:Liquid government bonds actively traded through an exchange or clearing house are marked to the closing levels observed in these markets. Less liquid bonds are valued using observable market prices which are sourced from broker quotes, inter-dealer prices or other reliable pricing services. Where there are no observable market prices, fair value is determined by reference to either issuances or CDS spreads ofyields on other bonds from the same issuer as proxy inputs to obtain discounted cash flow amounts.issuer.

Observability:Where an observable market price is not available the bond is considered Level 3.

Level 3 sensitivity:Sensitivity is calculated by using the range of observable proxy prices.

Corporate debt

Description:This primarily contains corporate bonds.

Valuation:Corporate bonds are valued using observable market prices which are sourced from broker quotes, inter-dealer prices or other reliable pricing services. Where there are no observable market prices, fair value is determined by reference to either issuances or CDS spreads of the same issuer as proxy inputs to obtain discounted cash flow amounts. In the absence of observable bond or CDS spreads for the respective issuer, similar reference assets or sector averages are applied as a proxy (the appropriateness of proxies being assessed based on issuer, coupon, maturity and industry).

Observability:Where an observable market price is not available the security is considered Level 3.

Level 3 sensitivity:The sensitivity forof the corporate bonds portfolio is determined by applying a shift to each underlying position driven by average ranges of external levels observed in the market for similar bonds.

Certificates of Deposit, Commercial Paper and other money market instruments

Description: These are certificates of deposit, commercial paper and other money market instruments.

Valuation: Certificates of deposit and commercial paper are valued using observable market prices which are sourced from broker quotes inter-dealer prices or other reliable pricing services. Where there are no observable market prices, fair value is determined by reference to either issuances or CDS spreads of the same issuer as proxy inputs to obtain discounted cash flow amounts. In the absence of observable bond or CDS spreads for the respective issuer, similar reference assets or sector averages are applied as a proxy (the appropriateness of proxies being assessed based on issuer, coupon, maturity and industry).

Observability: Where an observable market price is not available the instrument is considered Level 3.

Level 3 sensitivity: Sensitivity is calculated by using the range of observable proxy prices.

Reverse repurchase and repurchase agreements

Description: These include securities purchased under resale agreements, securities sold under repurchase agreements, and other similar secured lending agreements.

Valuation:Reverse repurchase and repurchase agreements are valued by discounting the expected future cash flows. The inputs to the valuation include interest rates and repo rates, which are determined based on the specific parameters of the transaction.

Observability:In general, input parameters are deemed observable up to liquid maturities, as determined based on the specific parameters of the transaction. Unobservable market data and model inputs are set by referencing liquid market instruments and applying extrapolation techniques or inferred via another reasonable method.

Level 3 sensitivity:Sensitivity relating to unobservable valuation inputs is based on the dispersion of consensus data services where available, otherwise stress scenarios or historic data are used. In general, the sensitivity of unobservable inputs is insignificant to the overall balance sheet valuation given the predominantly short termshort-term nature of the agreements.

Non-asset backed loans

Description:This category is largely made up of fixed rate loans, such asprimarily the ESHLA portfolio, which are valued using models that discount expected future cash flows.

Valuation: Fixed rate loans are valued using models that calculate fair value based on observable interest rates and unobservable loan spreads. Unobservable loan spreads incorporate funding costs, the level of comparable assets such as gilts, issuer credit quality and other factors.

Observability:Within this population, the unobservable input is the loan spread.

Level 3 sensitivity:The sensitivity forof fixed rate loans is calculated by applying a shift to loan spreads.

250  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2016 Annual Report on Form 20-F


18 Fair value of financial instrumentscontinued

Asset backed securities

Description:These are securities that are linked to the cash flows of a pool of referenced assets via securitisation. This category includes residential mortgage backed securities, commercial mortgage backed securities, CDOs, CLOscollaterallised loan obligations (CLOs) and other asset backed securities.

Valuation:Where available, valuations are based on observable market prices which are sourced from broker quotes and inter-dealer prices. Otherwise, valuations are determined using industry standard discounted cash flow analysis that calculates the fair value based on valuation inputs such as constant default rate, conditional prepayment rate, loss given default and yield. These inputs are determined by reference to a number of sources including proxying to observed transactions, market indices or market research, and by assessing underlying collateral performance.

Proxying to observed transactions, indices or research requires an assessment and comparison of the relevant securities’ underlying attributes including collateral, tranche, vintage, underlying asset composition (historical losses, borrower characteristics and loan attributes such as loan to valueloan-to-value ratio and geographic concentration) and credit ratings (original and current).

Observability: Where an asset backed product does not have an observable market price and the valuation is determined using a discounted cash flow analysis, anthe instrument is considered unobservable.

Level 3 sensitivity: The sensitivity analysis for asset backed products is based on externally sourced pricing dispersion or by stressing the inputs of discounteddiscount cash flow analysis.

242  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F


18 Fair value of assets and liabilitiescontinued

Commercial real estate loans

Description:This portfolio includes loans that are secured by a range of commercial property types including retail, hotel, office, multi-family and industrial properties.

Valuation:Performing loans are valued using discounted cash flow analysis which considers the characteristics of the loan such as property type, geographic location, credit quality and property performance reviews in order to determine an appropriate credit spread. Where there is significant uncertainty regarding loan performance, valuation is based on independent third partythird-party appraisals or bids for the underlying properties. Independent third party appraisals are determined by discounted cash flow analysis, andanalysis. The key valuation inputs are yield and loss given default.

Observability: Since each commercial real estate loan is unique in nature and the secondary loan market is relatively illiquid, valuation inputs are generally considered unobservable.

Level 3 sensitivity: For performing loans, sensitivity is determined by stressing the credit spread for each loan. For loans which have significant uncertainty regarding loan performance, sensitivity is determined by either a range of bids or by stressing the inputs to independent third party appraisals.

Issued debt

Description:This category contains Barclays issued notes.

Valuation:Fair valued Barclays issued notes are valued using discounted cash flow techniques and industry standard models incorporating various observable input parameters depending on the terms of theobserved for each parameter or instrument.

Observability:Barclays issued notes are generally observable. Structured notes are debt instruments containing embedded derivatives. Where either an input to the embedded derivative or the debt instrument is deemed unobservable and significant to the overall valuation of the note, the structured note is classified as Level 3.

Level 3 sensitivity: Sensitivity to the unobservable input in the embedded derivative is calculated in line with the method used for the type of derivative instrument concerned.

Other

Description:Other includes non-current assets and liabilities held for sale and private equity investments. See below for more detail. Other also includes investment properties.

Non-current assets held for saleEquity cash products

Description: Non-current assets held for sale materially consists of the Portuguese Retail Banking, WealthThis category includes listed equities, Exchange Traded Funds (ETF) and Investment Management businesses and part of the Portuguese Corporate banking business, Barclays Vida y Pensiones (BVP), a company offering life insurance, pension products and services in Spain, Portugal and Italy, and the Italian Retail business. These sales are part of the divestment of the Barclays Non-Core segment of the Group.preference shares.

Valuation:Non-current assets held for sale are valued at the lower Valuation of carrying value and fair value less cost to sell.equity cash products is primarily determined through market observable prices.

Observability: The itemsPrices are generally observed in Level 2 and Level 3 include customer cash, nostro accounts with other banks and other time deposits.the market. Where a price for an equity security is not available, the instrument is considered unobservable.

Level 3 sensitivity:The businesses held for sale Sensitivity is calculated based on a stressed valuation on the underlying asset.

Funds and fund linked products

Description: This category includes holdings in hedge funds and funds of funds.

Valuation: In general, fund holdings are valued based on the latest available valuation received from the fund administrator. In the case of illiquid fund holdings the valuation will take account of all available information in relation to the underlying fund or collection of funds and may be adjusted relative to the performance of relevant index benchmarks.

Observability: Funds are deemed unobservable where the fund is either suspended, in wind-down, has a redemption restriction that severely affects liquidity, or where the latest net asset value from the fund administrators is older than the frequency dictated by the fund offering documents.

Level 3 sensitivity: Sensitivity is calculated on an individual fund basis using a loss-based scenario approach which factors in the underlying assets of the specific fund and assumed recovery rates.

Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2016 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  251


Notes to the financial statements

Assets and liabilities held at the agreed price less costs to sell and are not expected to display significant sensitivity.fair value

18 Fair value of financial instrumentscontinued

Private equity investments

Description:This category includes private equity investments.

Valuation:Private equity investments are valued in accordance with the ‘International Private Equity and Venture Capital Valuation Guidelines’. This requiresThese require the use of a number of individual pricing benchmarks such as the prices of recent transactions in the same or similar entities, discounted cash flow analysis and comparison with the earnings multiples of listed comparative companies. Full valuations are generally performed at least biannually,bi-annually, with the positions reviewed periodically for material events that might impact upon fair value. The valuation of unquoted equity instruments is subjective by nature. However, the relevant methodologies are commonly applied by other market participants and have been consistently applied over time. Private equity investments include Barclays’ equity interest in Visa Europe, an available for sale asset, which has been valued by reference to consideration, some of which is contingent upon future events, that will be receivable upon completion of the announced sale of Visa Europe to Visa Inc. The elements of consideration that are contingent on future events have been deemed unobservable and no value has been attributed to such elements in the year-end valuation.

Observability:Unobservable inputs include earnings estimates, multiples of comparative companies, marketability discounts and discount rates.

Level 3 sensitivity:The relevant valuation models are each sensitive to a number of key assumptions, such as projected future earnings, comparator multiples, marketability discounts and discount rates. Valuation sensitivity is estimated by flexing such assumptions to reasonable alternative levels and determining the impact on the resulting valuation.

Assets and liabilities held for sale

Description: Assets and liabilities held for sale materially consist of the intention to dispose of BAGL, France, Egypt, BVP and Zimbabwe.

Valuation: Assets and liabilities held for sale are valued at the lower of carrying value and fair value less cost to sell.

Level 3 sensitivity: The disposal groups that are measured at fair value less cost to sell are valued at the agreed price less costs to sell and are not expected to display significant sensitivity. The sensitivity of the assets and liabilities measured at carrying value is explained within the relevant product descriptions.

Other

Description: Other includes asset-backed loans, physical commodities and investment property.

Assets and liabilities reclassified between Level 1 and Level 2

There were transfers of £2,340m of government bond assets during the period from Level 2 to Level 1 to reflect the market observability of these product types (2015: £537m assets and £801m liabilities of equity and foreign exchange derivatives transferred from Level 1 to Level 2).

Level 3 movement analysis

The following table summarises the movements in the Level 3 balances during the period. The table shows gains and losses and includes amounts for all financial assets and liabilities that are held at fair value transferred to, and from, Level 3 during the period. Transfers have been reflected as if they had taken place at the beginning of the year.

Assets and liabilities included in disposal groups classified as held for sale and measured at fair value less cost to sell are not included as these are measured at fair value on anon-recurring basis.

Asset and liability transfers between Level 2 and Level 3 are primarily due to i) an increase or decrease in observable market activity related to an input or ii) a change in the significance of the unobservable input, with assets and liabilities classified as Level 3 if an unobservable input is deemed significant.

During the year:

£2.1bn corporate bonds were transferred from Level 3 to Level 2 to reflect the market observability of the products;

£8.6bn ofnon-asset backed loans were derecognised due to a substantial modification of terms on the ESHLA loans. The new restructured loans are measured on an amortised cost basis; and

Market moves in the interest rate and inflation markets have resulted in an increase in the value of the Level 3 assets being reported, the gains have largely been offset through Level 2 hedges.

252  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2016 Annual Report on Form 20-F


    

    

    

18 Fair value of financial instrumentscontinued

Analysis of movements in Level 3 assets and liabilities

 

                                        
             Total gains and         
             losses in the period    Total       
             recognised in the    gains or       
   As at            income statement    losses re-    Transfers    As at 31 
   1 January          Settle-    Trading    Other    cognised        December 
   2016a    Purchases    Sales    Issues    ments    income    income    in OCI    In    Out    2016 
    £m    £m    £m    £m    £m    £m    £m    £m    £m    £m    £m 

Government and government sponsored debt

   320        (317                               3 

Corporate debt

   2,843    38    (48       (5   206            32    (2,097   969 

Non-asset backed loans

   507    173    (498       (4   (38           18    (7   151 

Asset backed securities

   743    129    (295       (171   111            1    (3   515 

Funds and fund linked products

   340        (77           23            1    (14   273 

Other

   155    59    (16       (1   (8               (35   154 

Trading portfolio assets

   4,908    399    (1,251       (181   294            52    (2,156   2,065 

Non-asset backed loans

   15,963                (8,602   1,155    100                8,616 

Asset backed loans

   256    48    (225       (20   30            112        201 

Commercial real estate loans

   543    2,658    (2,755       (12   56                (48   442 

Private equity investments

   457    38    (51       (3   16    120        6    (21   562 

Other

   78                (21   (19   85        41    (38   126 

Financial assets designated at fair value

   17,297    2,744    (3,031       (8,658   1,238    305        159    (107   9,947 

Private equity investments

   877    15    (254       (407           63            294 

Other

   44    53    (14       (16       4    7    1    (1   78 

Available for sale investments

   921    68    (268       (423       4    70    1    (1   372 
                                                        

Investment property

   82        (3               2                81 
                                                        

Trading portfolio liabilities

           (9           (1               3    (7

Certificates of deposit, commercial paper and other money market instruments

   (272           (19   48    2    (7       (301   230    (319

Issued debt

   (538               231        9                (298

Other

   (244               83    (48   (2       (50   38    (223

Financial liabilities designated at fair value

   (1,054           (19   362    (46           (351   268    (840

Interest rate derivatives

   418    45    3        (6   228            294    (83   899 

Foreign exchange derivatives

   (104       30    2    40    6            55    52    81 

Credit derivatives

   1,685    2    (306       (119   111            3    (6   1,370 

Equity derivatives

   (857   196    7    (83   (34   (98           (15   (86   (970

Commodity derivatives

   (506               91    (3               413    (5

Net derivative financial instrumentsb

   636    243    (266   (81   (28   244            337    290    1,375 
                                                        
Assets and liabilities held for sale   424    126    (166   (116   85        172            49    574 
                                                        

Total

   23,214    3,580    (4,994   (216   (8,843   1,729    483    70    198    (1,654   13,567 
                                                        

Net liabilities held for sale measured at fair value onnon-recurring basis

                                                     (766

Total

   23,214    3,580    (4,994   (216   (8,843   1,729    483    70    198    (1,654   12,801 

Notes

aThe Level 3 opening balances have been amended to exclude the asset and liabilities held for sale.
bThe derivative financial instruments are represented on a net basis. On a gross basis, derivative financial assets are £8,546m (2015: £5,418m) and derivative financial liabilities are £7,171m (2015: £4,769m).

 

  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 20152016 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  243253


Notes to the financial statements

Assets and liabilities held at fair value

    

 

 

18 Fair value of financial instrumentscontinued

 

Analysis of movements in Level 3 assets and liabilities

 

             Total gains and         
             losses in the period    Total       
             recognised in the    gains or       
   As at            income statement    losses re-    Transfers    As at 31 
   1 January            Trading    Other    cognised        December 
    

2015

£m

 

 

   
Purchases
£m
 
 
   

Sales

£m

 

 

   

Issues

£m

 

 

   

Settlements

£m

 

 

   

income

£m

 

 

   

income

£m

 

 

   

in OCI

£m

 

 

   

In

£m

 

 

   

Out

£m

 

 

   

2015

£m

 

 

Government and government sponsored debt

   685    27    (119       (109   (6           2    (160   320 

Corporate debt

   3,026    62    (64       (20   (47           5    (80   2,882 

Non-asset backed loans

   273    520    (251       (3   (42           11    (1   507 

Asset backed securities

   1,610    1,365    (1,565       (711   58            5    (19   743 

Funds and fund linked products

   589        (174       (56   (27           12    (4   340 

Other

   144    23    (19       (9   (14           53    (23   155 

Trading portfolio assets

   6,327    1,997    (2,192       (908   (78           88    (287   4,947 

Non-asset backed loans

   17,471    192    (114       (756   (531   (6               16,256 

Asset backed loans

   393    1,098    (1,260       2    8            15        256 

Commercial real estate loans

   1,179    3,540    (3,878       (342   49    1                549 

Private equity investments

   701    94    (200       (3   8    38        4    (132   510 

Other

   161    66    (31       (3   (11   5        26    (26   187 

Financial assets designated at fair value

   19,905    4,990    (5,483       (1,102   (477   38        45    (158   17,758 

Government and government sponsored debt

   327    14    (36                   1        (212   94 

Private equity investments

   425    29    (89               471    22        20    878 

Other

   561    36    (2       (1,026       78    397    27    (21   50 

Available for sale investments

   1,313    79    (127       (1,026       549    420    27    (213   1,022 
                                                        

Investment property

   207    27    (89               (5               140 
                                                        

Trading portfolio liabilities

   (349                                   349     

Certificates of deposit, commercial paper and other money market instruments

   (666           (216   261        17            221    (383

Issued debt

   (748           (16   245    (4   (8       (38   4    (565

Other

   (402               (19   (18   75            10    (354

Financial liabilities designated at fair value

   (1,816           (232   487    (22   84        (38   235    (1,302

Interest rate derivatives

   (105   1    218        (247   203            243    117    430 

Foreign exchange derivatives

   (30   14    (1   (7   9    (14           (73       (102

Credit derivatives

   1,557    273    (12       (6   (123           (11   7    1,685 

Equity derivatives

   (845   111    (2   (290   103    34            (21   52    (858

Commodity derivatives

   (152               (66   (6           (388   106    (506

Net derivative financial instrumentsa

   425    399    203    (297   (207   94            (250   282    649 
                                                        

Total

   26,012    7,492    (7,688   (529   (2,756   (483   666    420    (128   208    23,214 

Net assets held for sale measured at fair value onnon-recurring basis

                       3,159 
                                                        

Total

   26,012    7,492    (7,688   (529   (2,756   (483   666    420    (128   208    26,373 

Note

aThe derivative financial instruments are represented on a net basis. On a gross basis, derivative financial assets are £8,546m (2015: £5,418m) and derivative financial liabilities are £7,171m (2015: £4,769m).

254  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2016 Annual Report on Form 20-F


18 Fair value of financial instrumentscontinued

Unrealised gains and losses on Level 3 financial assets and liabilitiescontinued

The following table discloses the unrealised gains and losses recognised in the year arising on Level 3 financial assets and liabilities held at year end.

 

Sensitivity analysis of valuations using unobservable inputs                              
   Fair value     Favourable changes     Unfavourable changes  
    
 
 
Total
assets
£m
  
  
  
   
 
 
Total
liabilities
£m
  
  
  
   
 
 
Income
statement
£m
  
  
  
   
 
Equity
£m
  
  
   
 
 
Income
statement
£m
  
  
  
   
 
Equity
£m
  
  
As at 31 December 2015            
Interest rate derivatives   2,675     (2,247   93          (103     
Foreign exchange derivatives   95     (196   17          (17     
Credit derivativesa   1,902     (219   66          (96     
Equity derivatives   690     (1,545   167          (185     
Commodity derivatives   56     (562   13          (13     
Government and government sponsored debt   419     (1   4          (4     
Corporate debt   2,895     (15   10     1     (5   (1
Certificates of deposit, commercial paper and other money market instruments        (382                    
Non-asset backed loans   16,828          1,581          (1,564     
Asset backed securities   770     (37   1          (1     
Commercial real estate loans   551          24          (1     
Issued debt        (546                    
Equity cash products   171               17          (17
Funds and fund linked products   378     (148   1          (1     
Otherb   9,185     (4,344   154     318     (172   (53
Total   36,615     (10,242   2,131     336     (2,162   (71
As at 31 December 2014            
Interest rate derivatives   1,239     (1,344   70          (71     
Foreign exchange derivatives   108     (138   36          (36     
Credit derivativesa   1,966     (409   81          (229     
Equity derivatives   1,247     (2,092   220          (220     
Commodity derivatives   185     (337   46          (46     
Government and government sponsored debt   1,014     (346             (2     
Corporate debt   3,061     (13   26     (1   (9   (4
Certificates of deposit, commercial paper and other money market instruments        (665   3          3       
Non-asset backed loans   17,744          1,164          (820     
Asset backed securities   1,631          46     1     (72   (1
Commercial real estate loans   1,180          20          (19     
Issued debt        (749                    
Equity cash products   171               11          (11
Funds and fund linked products   631     (210   14          (14     
Otherb   17,663     (13,297   180     82     (156   (55
Total   47,840     (19,600   1,906     93     (1,691   (71
 Unrealised gains and losses recognised during the period on Level 3 assets and liabilities held at period end 
         2016                   2015           
   Income statement        Other      Income statement        Other   
       compre-          compre-   
   Trading    Other    hensive      Trading    Other    hensive   
   income    income    income    Totala    income    income    income    Total 
 As at 31 December   £m    £m    £m    £m    £m    £m    £m    £m 
 Trading portfolio assets   243            243    (125           (125
 Financial assets designated at fair value   227    271        498    (562   (17       (579
 Available for sale investments       6    70    76        (20   488    468 
 Investment property       2        2        (22       (22
 Trading portfolio liabilities   (1           (1   (1           (1
 Financial liabilities designated at fair value   96    (6       90    (24   76        52 
 Net derivative financial instruments   175            175    123            123 
 Assets and liabilities held for sale       128        128                 
 Total   740    401    70    1,211    (589   17    488    (84

Note

aThe £1.2bn unrealised gain on Level 3 assets (2015: £84m loss) is largely offset by losses on related Level 2 and Level 1 portfolio hedges.

Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2016 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  255


Notes to the financial statements

Assets and liabilities held at fair value

18 Fair value of financial instrumentscontinued            
 Sensitivity analysis of valuations using unobservable inputs                              
   Fair value    Favourable changes    Unfavourable changes 
   Total    Total    Income      Income   
   assets    liabilities    statement    Equity    statement    Equity 
    £m    £m    £m    £m    £m    £m 
 As at 31 December 2016            
 Interest rate derivatives   5,759    (4,860   209        (249    
 Foreign exchange derivatives   132    (51   15        (15    
 Credit derivatives   1,611    (241   127        (133    
 Equity derivatives   1,037    (2,007   163        (164    
 Commodity derivatives   8    (13   5        (5    
 Government and government sponsored debt   3                     
 Corporate debt   969    (5   7        (2    
 Certificates of deposit, commercial paper and other money market instruments       (319           (1    
 Reverse repurchase and repurchase agreements                        
 Non asset backed loans   8,767        462        (597    
 Asset backed securities   515        1        (1    
 Commercial real estate loans   442        2        (2    
 Issued debt       (298                
 Equity cash products   150    (2   12    26    (11   (26
 Funds and fund linked products   273    (37   6        (6    
 Private equity investments   856    (12   104    18    (104   (21
 Assets and liabilities held for sale   699    (125   3        (3    
 Othera   489    (173   147        (105    
 Total   21,710    (8,143   1,263    44    (1,398   (47
 As at 31 December 2015            
 Interest rate derivatives   2,675    (2,247   93        (103    
 Foreign exchange derivatives   95    (196   17        (17    
 Credit derivatives   1,902    (219   66        (96    
 Equity derivatives   690    (1,545   167        (185    
 Commodity derivatives   56    (562   13        (13    
 Government and government sponsored debt   419    (1   4        (4    
 Corporate debt   2,895    (15   10    1    (5   (1
 Certificates of deposit, commercial paper and other money market instruments       (382                
 Reverse repurchase and repurchase agreements                        
 Non asset backed loans   16,828        1,581        (1,564    
 Asset backed securities   770    (37   1        (1    
 Commercial real estate loans   551        24        (1    
 Issued debt       (546                
 Equity cash products   171            17        (17
 Funds and fund linked products   378    (148   1        (1    
 Private equity investments   1,388        149    318    (149   (53
 Othera   467    (173   5        (23    
 Total   29,285    (6,071   2,131    336    (2,162   (71

The effect of stressing unobservable inputs to a range of reasonably possible alternatives, alongside considering the impact of using alternative models, would be to increase fair values by up to £2.1bn (2014: £1.9bn)£1.3bn (2015: £2.1bn) or to decrease fair values by up to £2.2bn (2014: £1.7bn)£1.4bn (2015: £2.2bn) with substantially all the potential effect impacting profit and loss rather than reserves.

NotesNote

aCredit derivatives includes derivative exposure to monoline insurers.
bOther includes non-current assets and liabilities held for sale, which are measured at fair value on a non-recurring basis, investment property, private equity investments and asset backed loans.loans, physical commodities and investment property.

 

244256  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 20152016 Annual Report on Form 20-F  


    

    

    

 

 

18 Fair value of assets and liabilitiesfinancial instrumentscontinued

Significant unobservable inputs

The following table discloses the valuation techniques and significant unobservable inputs for assets and liabilities recognised at fair value and classified as Level 3 along with the range of values used for those significant unobservable inputs:

 

    
 
 
Total
assets
£m
  
  
  
   
 
 
Total
liabilities
£m
  
  
  
  

Valuation

technique(s)

  

Significant

unobservable

inputs

     

 

     2015

    Range

  

  

   

 

     2014

    Range

  

  

   Unitsa  
             Min     Max     Min     Max    

Derivative financial

instrumentsb

                   
Interest rate   2,675     (2,247  Discounted cash flows  Inflation forwards    0.3     8     (0.5   11     %  
derivatives      Option model  Inflation volatility    36     197     40     300     bp vol  
        IR – IR correlation    (55   100     (88   100     %  
        FX – IR correlation    (20   30     14     90     %  
                Interest rate volatility     5     249     6     437     bp vol  
Credit derivativesc   1,902     (219  Discounted cash flows  Credit spread    140     413     116     240     bps  
      Correlation model  Credit correlation    26     41     36     90     %  
        Credit spread    10     9,923     6     5,898     bps  
             Comparable pricing  Price     80     102     64     100     points  
Equity derivatives   690     (1,545    Equity volatility         318     1     97     %  
        Equity – equity correlation    (54   100     (55   99     %  
                Equity – FX correlation     (100   40     (80   55     %  

Non-derivative

financial

instruments

                   
Corporate debt   2,895     (15  Discounted cash flows  Credit spread    120     529     140     900     bps  
             Comparable pricing  Price     1     114          104     points  
Asset backed   770     (37  Discounted cash flows  Conditional prepayment rate         25          5     %  
securities        Constant default rate         2          9     %  
        Loss given default    30     100     45     100     %  
        Yield    5     58     3     11     %  
        Credit spread    157     1,416     74     2,688     bps  
             Comparable pricing  Price     1     114          100     points  
Commercial real   551         Discounted cash flows  Loss given default    0     100          100     %  
estate loans        Yield              4     8     %  
                Credit spread     230     801     124     675     bps  

Non-asset backed

loans

   16,828         Discounted cash flows  Loan spread     3     994     39     1,000     bps  
Otherd   1,855     (173  Discounted cash flows  

Loss given default

         94               %  
        Yield    7     12     8     9     %  
      Comparable pricing  Price         103          133     points  
             Net asset valuee  Net asset value                           
    

Total
assets

£m

 
 

 

   

Total
liabilities
£m
 
 
 
  

Valuation

technique(s)

  

Significant

unobservable inputs

    

       2016

      Range

 

 

     

         2015

        Range

 

 

   Unitsa 
            Min    Max      Min    Max   

Derivative financial

instrumentsb

                    

Interest rate

   5,759    (4,860  Discounted cash flows  Inflation forwards   (1   8          8    % 

derivatives

        Credit spread   25    1,669      25    1,563    bps 
      Option model  Inflation volatility   35    207      36    197    bp vol 
        IR –  IR correlation   (26   98      (55   100    % 
        FX –  IR correlation   (15   81      (20   30    % 
                Interest rate volatility    9    295      5    249    bp vol 

Credit derivatives

   1,611    (241  Discounted cash flows  Credit spread   133    274      140    413    bps 
      Correlation model  Credit correlation   25    43      26    41    % 
        Credit spread   13    2,317      10    9,923    bps 
             Comparable pricing  Price    84    100      80    102    points 

Equity derivatives

   1,037    (2,007  Option model  Equity volatility   1    150          318    % 
        Equity – equity correlation   (90   100      (54   100    % 
                Equity – FX correlation    (80   25      (100   40    % 

Non-derivative financial

instruments

                    

Corporate debt

   969    (5  Discounted cash flows  Credit spread   145    190      120    529    bps 
             Comparable pricing  Price        121      1    114    points 

Non-asset backed loans

   8,767       Discounted cash flows  Loan spread   30    1,495      3    994    bps 
        Price       99          100    points 
             Comparable pricing  Price        100          101    points 
        Conditional            

Asset backed securities

   515       Discounted cash flows  prepayment rate                 25    % 
        Constant default rate                 2    % 
        Loss given default             30    100    % 
        Yield             5    58    % 
        Credit spread   70    150      157    1,416    bps 

Commercial real estate loans

   442       Discounted cash flows  Loss given default        100          100    % 
        Credit spread   179    408      230    801    bps 

Private equity investments

   856    (12  Discounted cash flows  Loss given default                  94    % 
      

 

EBITDA multiple

  

 

EBITDA multiple

  

 

 

 

5

 

 

  

 

 

 

17

 

 

    

 

 

 

 

 

  

 

 

 

12

 

 

  

 

 

 

multiple

 

 

Otherc

 

   

 

1,754

 

 

 

   

 

(1,018

 

 

                                  

Total

   21,710    (8,143                                  

 

Notes

aThe units used to disclose ranges for significant unobservable inputs are percentages, points basis point volatility and basis points. Basis point volatility is a measure of implied volatility in terms of annual absolute basis point change in the underlying rate. Points are a percentage of par; for example, 100 points equals 100% of par. A basis point equals 1/100th of 1%; for example, 150 basis points equals 1.5%.
bCertain derivative instruments are classified as Level 3 due to a significant unobservable credit spread input into the calculation of the Credit Valuation Adjustment for the instruments. The range of significant unobservable credit spreads is between 69-1,175bps.65-874bps (2015:67-1,175bps).
cCredit derivatives includes derivative exposure to monoline insurers.
dOther includes private equity investments, asset backed loansthe remaining Level 3 assets and investment property.liabilities.

 

  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 20152016 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  245257


Notes to the financial statements

Assets and liabilities held at fair value

 

 

18 Fair value of assets and liabilitiesfinancial instrumentscontinued

The following section describes the significant unobservable inputs identified in the table above, and the sensitivity of fair value measurement of the instruments categorised as Level 3 assets or liabilities to increases in significant unobservable inputs. Where sensitivities are described, the inverse relationship will also generally apply.

Where reliable interrelationshipsinter-relationships can be identified between significant unobservable inputs used in fair value measurement, a description of those interrelationships
inter-relationships is included below.

Forwards

A price or rate that is applicable to a financial transaction that will take place in the future. A forward is generally based on the spot price or rate, adjusted for the cost of carry, and defines the price or rate that will be used to deliver a currency, bond, commodity or some other underlying instrument at a point in the future. A forward may also refer to the rate fixed for a future financial obligation, such as the interest rate on a loan payment. In general, a significant increase in a forward in isolation will result in a movement in fair value that is favourable for the contracted receiver of the underlying (currency, bond, commodity, etc.), but the sensitivity is dependent on the specific terms of the instrument.

Credit spread

Credit spreads typically represent the difference in yield between an instrument and a benchmark security or reference rate. Credit spreads reflect the additional yield that a market participant would demand for taking exposure to the credit risk of an instrument and form part of the yield used in a discounted cash flow calculation.

In general, a significant increase in credit spread in isolation will result in a movement in fair value that is unfavourable for the holder of a cash asset.

For a derivative instrument, a significant increase in credit spread in isolation can result in a movement in fair value that is favourable or unfavourable depending on the specific terms of the instrument.

Volatility

Volatility is a key input in the valuation of derivative products containing optionality. Volatility is a measure of the variability or uncertainty in returns for a given derivative underlying. It represents an estimate of how much a particular underlying instrument, parameter or index will change in value over time. In general, volatilities will be implied from observed option prices. For unobservable options the implied volatility may reflect additional assumptions about the nature of the underlying risk, as well as reflecting the given strike/maturity profile of a specific option contract.

In general a significant increase in volatility in isolation will result in a movement in fair value that is favourable for the holder of a simple option, but the sensitivity is dependent on the specific terms of the instrument.

There may be inter-relationships between unobservable volatilities and other unobservable inputs that can be implied from observation, e.g. when equity prices fall, implied equity volatilities generally rise but these are specific to individual markets and may vary over time.

Correlation

Correlation is a measure of the relationship between the movements of two variables i.e. how the change in one variable influences a change in the other variable. Correlation is a key input into valuation of derivative contracts with more than one underlying instrument. For example, where an option contract is written on a basket of underlying names, the volatility of the basket, and hence the fair value of the option, will depend on the correlation between the basket’s components. Credit correlation generally refers to the correlation between default processes for the separate names that make up the reference pool of a collateralised debt obligation structure.

A significant increase in correlation in isolation can result in a movement in fair value that is favourable or unfavourable depending on the specific terms of the instrument.

Comparable price

Comparable instrument prices are used in valuation by calculating an implied yield (or spread over a liquid benchmark) from the price of a comparable observable bond, then adjusting that yield (or spread) to derive a value for the unobservable bond. The adjustment to yield (or spread) should account for relevant differences in the bonds such as maturity or credit quality. Alternatively, aprice-to-price basis can be assumed between the comparable instrument and bond being valued in order to establish the value of the bond.

In general, a significant increase in comparable price in isolation will result in a movement in fair value that is favourable for the holder of a cash instrument.

For a derivative instrument, a significant increase in an input derived from a comparable price in isolation can result in a movement in fair value that is favourable or unfavourable depending on the specific terms of the instrument.

Loan spread

Loan spreads typically represent the difference in yield between an instrument and a benchmark security or reference rate. Loan spreads typically reflect funding costs, credit quality, the level of comparable assets such as gilts, and other factors, and form part of the yield used in a discounted cash flow calculation.

The ESHLA portfolio primarily consists of long dated fixed rate loans extended to counterparties in the UK Education, Social Housing and Local Authority sectors. The loans are categorised as Level 3 in the fair value hierarchy due to their illiquid nature and the significance of unobservable loan spreads to the valuation. Valuation uncertainty arises from the long dated nature of the portfolio, the lack of a secondary market in the loans and the lack of observable loan spreads. The majority of ESHLA loans are to borrowers in heavily regulated sectors that are considered extremely low credit risk, and have a history of zero defaults since inception. While the overall loan spread range is from 30bps to 1,495bps (2015: 3bps to 994bps), the vast majority of spreads are concentrated towards the bottom end of this range, with 99% of the loan notional being valued with spreads less than 200bps consistently for both years.

In general, a significant increase in loan spreads in isolation will result in a movement in fair value that is unfavourable for the holder of a loan.

258  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2016 Annual Report on Form 20-F


18 Fair value of financial instrumentscontinued

Conditional prepayment rate

Conditional prepayment rate is the proportion of voluntary, unscheduled repayments of loan principal by a borrower. Prepayment rates affect the weighted average life of securities by altering the timing of future projected cash flows.

A significant increase in a conditional prepayment rate in isolation can result in a movement in fair value that is favourable or unfavourable depending on the specific terms of the instrument.

Conditional prepayment rates are typically inversely correlated to credit spread, i.e. securities with high borrower credit spread typically experience lower prepayment rates and also tend to experience higher default rates.

Constant default rate

The constant default rate represents an annualised rate of default of the loan principal by the borrower.

A significant increase in a constant default rate in isolation can result in a movement in fair value that is favourable or unfavourable depending on the specific terms of the instrument.

Constant default rate and conditional prepayment rates are typically inversely correlated:correlated; fewer defaults on loans will typically will mean higher credit quality and therefore more prepayments.

Correlation

Correlation is a measure of the relationship between the movements of two variables (i.e. how the change in one variable influences a change in the other variable). Correlation is a key input into valuation of derivative contracts with more than one underlying instrument. For example, where an option contract is written on a basket of underlying names, the volatility of the basket, and hence the fair value of the option, will depend on the correlation between the basket components. Credit correlation generally refers to the correlation between default processes for the separate names that make up the reference pool of a CDO structure.

A significant increase in correlation in isolation can result in a movement in fair value that is favourable or unfavourable depending on the specific terms of the instrument.

Credit spread

Credit spreads typically represent the difference in yield between an instrument and a benchmark security or reference rate. Credit spreads reflect the additional yield that a market participant would demand for taking exposure to the credit risk of an instrument, and form part of the yield used in a discounted cash flow calculation.

In general, a significant increase in credit spread in isolation will result in a movement in fair value that is unfavourable for the holder of a cash asset.

For a derivative instrument, a significant increase in credit spread in isolation can result in a movement in fair value that is favourable or unfavourable depending on the specific terms of the instrument.

Loan spread

Loan spreads typically represent the difference in yield between an instrument and a benchmark security or reference rate. Loan spreads typically reflect funding costs, credit quality, the level of comparable assets such as gilts and other factors, and form part of the yield used in a discounted cash flow calculation.

The ESHLA portfolio primarily consists of long dated fixed rate loans extended to counterparties in the UK Education, Social Housing and Local Authority sectors. The loans are categorised as Level 3 in the fair value hierarchy due to their illiquid nature and the significance of unobservable loan spreads to the valuation. Valuation uncertainty arises from the long dated nature of the portfolio, the lack of secondary market in the loans and the lack of observable loan spreads. The majority of ESHLA loans are to borrowers in heavily regulated sectors that are considered extremely low credit risk, and have a history of zero defaults since inception. While the overall credit spread range is 991bps (2014: 961bps), the vast majority of spreads are concentrated towards the bottom end of this range, with 99% of the loan notional being valued with spreads less than 200bps, consistently for both years.

In general, a significant increase in loan spreads in isolation will result in a movement in fair value that is unfavourable for the holder of a loan.

Forwards

A price or rate that is applicable to a financial transaction that will take place in the future. A forward is generally based on the spot price or rate, adjusted for the cost of carry, and defines the price or rate that will be used to deliver a currency, bond, commodity or some other underlying instrument at a point in the future. A forward may also refer to the rate fixed for a future financial obligation, such as the interest rate on a loan payment. In general, a significant increase in a forward in isolation will result in a movement in fair value that is favourable for the contracted receiver of the underlying (currency, bond, commodity, etc), but the sensitivity is dependent on the specific terms of the instrument.

246  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F


18 Fair value of assets and liabilitiescontinued

Loss given default (LGD)

LGDLoss given default represents the expected loss upon liquidation of the collateral as a percentage of the balance outstanding.

In general, a significant increase in the LGD in isolation will translate to lower recovery and lower projected cash flows to pay to the securitisation, resulting in a movement in fair value that is unfavourable for the holder of the securitised product.

Volatility

Volatility is a key input in the valuation of derivative products containing optionality. Volatility is a measure of the variability or uncertainty in returns for a given derivative underlying. It represents an estimate of how much a particular underlying instrument, parameter or index will change in value over time. In general, volatilities will be implied from observed option prices. For unobservable options the implied volatility may reflect additional assumptions about the nature of the underlying risk, as well as reflecting the given strike/maturity profile of a specific option contract.

In general a significant increase in volatility in isolation will result in a movement in fair value that is favourable for the holder of a simple option, but the sensitivity is dependent on the specific terms of the instrument.

There may be inter-relationships between unobservable volatilities and other unobservable inputs that can be implied from observation (e.g. when equity prices fall, implied equity volatilities generally rise) but these are specific to individual markets and may vary over time.

Yield

The rate used to discount projected cash flows in a discounted future cash flow analysis.

In general, a significant increase in yield in isolation will result in a movement in fair value that is unfavourable for the holder of a cash instrument.

EBITDA Multiple

EBITDA multiple is the ratio of the valuation of the investment to the earnings before interest, taxes, depreciation and amortisation.

In general an increase in the multiple is favourable to the holder of the investment.

Fair value adjustments

Key balance sheet valuation adjustments are quantified below:

 

     
 
2015
£m
  
  
     
 
2014
£m
  
  
   
2016
£m
 
 
   
2015
£m
 
 
Bid-offer valuation adjustments     (360     (396
Other exit adjustments     (149     (169

Exit price adjustments derived from marketbid-offer spreads

   (475   (509
Uncollateralised derivative funding     (72     (100   (82   (72
Derivative credit valuation adjustments:            
– Monolines     (9     (24

– Monolinesa

   –     (9
– Other derivative credit valuation adjustments     (318     (394   (237   (318
Derivative debit valuation adjustments     189       177     242     189  

Bid-offer valuationExit price adjustments derived from marketbid-offer spreads

The Group uses mid marketmid-market pricing where it is a market maker and has the ability to transact at, or better than, mid price (which is the case for certain equity, bond and vanilla derivative markets). For other financial assets and liabilities,bid-offer adjustments are recorded to reflect the priceexit level for the expected close out strategy. The methodology for determining thebid-offer adjustment for a derivative portfolio involves calculating the net risk exposure by offsetting long and short positions by strike and term in accordance with the risk management and hedging strategy.

Bid-offer levels are generally derived from market sources,quotes such as broker data.

Other exit adjustments

Market data input for exotic derivatives Less liquid instruments may not have a directly observablebid-offer spread. level. In such instances, an exit adjustment is applied asmay be derived from an observablebid-offer level for a proxy for the bid-offer adjustment. An example of this is correlation risk where an adjustment is applied to reflect the possible range of values that market participants apply. The exit adjustment may becomparable liquid instrument, determined by calibrating to derivative prices, or by scenario analysis or historical analysis. Other exit

Exit price adjustments have reduced by £20m£34m to £149m respectively£475m as a result of movements in market bid-offer spreads.risk reduction and spread tightening.

Note

aDerivative exposure to monoline insurers was exited in 2016.

Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2016 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  259


Notes to the financial statements

Assets and liabilities held at fair value

18 Fair value of financial instruments continued

Discounting approaches for derivative instruments

Collateralised

In line with market practice, the methodology for discounting collateralised derivatives takes into account the nature and currency of the collateral that can be posted within the relevant CSA.credit support annex (CSA). This CSA awareCSA-aware discounting approach recognises the ‘cheapest to deliver’ option that reflects the ability of the party posting collateral to change the currency of the collateral.

For counterparties in dispute regarding the settlement of collateral interest, where the relevant rate is currently negative, an additional fair value adjustment of £24m is held to account for the potential impact of resolving the dispute.

Uncollateralised

A fair value adjustment of £72m£82m is applied to account for the impact of incorporating the cost of funding into the valuation of uncollateralised and partially collateralised derivative portfolios and collateralised derivatives where the terms of the agreement do not allow the rehypothecation of collateral received. This adjustment is referred to as the ‘FundingFunding Fair Value Adjustment’Adjustment (FFVA). FFVA has decreasedincreased by £28m£10m to £72m£82m mainly as a result of material trade unwinds and the reduction in the average maturity date of the portfolio as trades tend to maturity.unwinds.

FFVA is determined by calculating the net expected exposure at a counterparty level and applying a funding rate to these exposures that reflects the market cost of funding. Barclays’ internal Treasury rates are used as an input to the calculation. The approach takes into account the probability of default of each counterparty, as well as any mandatory break clauses.

FFVA incorporates a scaling factor which is an estimate of the extent to which the cost of funding is incorporated into observed traded levels. On calibrating the scaling factor, it is with the assumption that Credit Valuation Adjustments (CVA) and Debit Valuation Adjustments (DVA) are retained as valuation components incorporated into such levels. The effect of incorporating this scaling factor at 31 December 20152016 was to reduce FFVA by £216m (2014: £300m)£246m (2015: £216m).

Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  247


Notes to the financial statements

Assets and liabilities held at fair value

18 Fair value of assets and liabilitiescontinued

Uncollateralised derivative trading activity is used to determine this scaling factor. The trading history analysed includes new trades, terminations, trade restructures and novations. The FFVA balance and movement is driven by the Barclays’ own cost of funding spread over LIBOR, counterparty default probabilities and recovery rates, as well as the market value of the underlying derivatives. Movements in the market value of the portfolio in scope for FFVA are mainly driven by interest rates, inflation rates and foreign exchange levels.

Barclays continues to monitor market practices and activity to ensure the approach to uncollateralised derivative valuation remains appropriate. The above approach has been in use since 2012 with no significant changes.

Derivative credit and debit valuation adjustments

Credit valuation adjustments (CVA)CVAs and debit valuation adjustments (DVA)DVAs are incorporated into derivative valuations to reflect the impact on fair value of counterparty credit risk and Barclays’ own credit quality respectively. These adjustments are calculated for uncollateralised and partially collateralised derivatives across all asset classes. CVA and DVA are calculated using estimates of exposure at default, probability of default and recovery rates, at a counterparty level. Counterparties include but(but are not limited to,to) corporates, monolines, sovereigns and sovereign agencies, supranationals and special purpose vehicles.

Exposure at default is generally based on expected exposure, estimated through the simulation of underlying risk factors. For some complex products, where this approach is not feasible, simplifying assumptions are made, either through approximating with a more vanilla structure, or using current or scenario basedscenario-based mark to market as an estimate of future exposure. Where a strong CSA exists to mitigate counterparty credit risk, the exposure at default is set to zero.

Probability of default and recovery rate information is generally sourced from the CDS markets. For counterparties where this information is not available, or considered unreliable due to the nature of the exposure, alternative approaches are taken based on mapping internal counterparty ratings onto historical or market basedmarket-based default and recovery information. In particular, this applies to sovereign relatedsovereign-related names where the effect of using the recovery assumptions implied in CDS levels would imply a £56m (2014: £120m)£95m (2015: £56m) increase in CVA.

Correlation between counterparty credit and underlying derivative risk factors may lead to a systematic bias in the valuation of counterparty credit risk, termed ‘wrong way’‘wrong-way,’ or ‘right way’‘right-way’, risk. This is not systematically incorporated into the CVA calculation but risk of ‘wrong way’is adjusted where the underlying exposure is controlled atdirectly related to the trade origination stage.counterparty.

CVA decreased by £91m£90m to £327m,£237m, primarily due to reductionreductions in the average maturity date of the portfolio as trades tend to maturity. In addition, there wasdriven by trade unwinds, including a reduction in monoline CVA of £15m due to trade unwinds.£9m. DVA increased by £12m£53m to £189m,£242m, primarily as a result of Barclays’ credit spreads deteriorating.widening.

Portfolio exemptions

The Group uses the portfolio exemption in IFRS 13Fair Value Measurement to measure the fair value of groups of financial assets and liabilities.

Instruments are measured using the price that would be received to sell a net long position, i.e. an asset, for a particular risk exposure or to transfer a net short position, i.e. a liability, for a particular risk exposure in an orderly transaction between market participants at the balance sheet date under current market conditions. Accordingly, the Group measures the fair value of the group of financial assets and liabilities consistently with how market participants would price the net risk exposure at the measurement date.

Unrecognised gains as a result of the use of valuation models using unobservable inputs

The amount that has yet to be recognised in income that relates to the difference between the transaction price i.e. the(the fair value at initial recognition,recognition) and the amount that would have arisen had valuation models using unobservable inputs been used on initial recognition, less amounts subsequently recognised, is £101m (2014: £96m)£179m (2015: £187m). There are additions of £35m (2014: nil)£29m (2015: £42m) and £31m (2014: £41m)£37m (2015: £51m) of amortisation and releases.

The reserve held for unrecognised gains is predominantly related to derivative financial instruments.

Third party credit enhancements

Structured and brokered certificates of deposit issued by Barclays Group are insured up to $250,000 per depositor by the Federal Deposit Insurance

Corporation (FDIC) in the US. The FDIC is funded by premiums that Barclays and other banks pay for deposit insurance coverage. The carrying value of these issued certificates of deposit that are designated under the IAS 39 fair value option includes this third party credit enhancement. Theon-balance sheet value of these brokered certificates of deposit amounted to £3,729m (2014: £3,650m)£3,905m (2015: £3,729m).

Valuation control framework

The valuation control framework covers fair value positions and is a key control in ensuring the material accuracy of valuations.

The valuation control function within Finance is responsible for independent price verification, oversight of prudent and fair value adjustments and escalation of valuation issues.

Governance over the valuation process is the responsibility of the Valuation Committee, and this is the governance forum to which valuation issues are escalated.

The Valuation Committee meets on a monthly basis and is responsible for overseeing valuation policy and practice within the Group. It provides reports to the Board Audit Committee, which examines the judgements taken on valuation and related disclosures.

Price verification uses independently sourced data that is deemed most representative of the market. The characteristics against which the data source is assessed are independence, reliability, consistency with other sources and evidence that the data represents an executable price. The most current data available at the balance sheet date is used. Where significant variances are noted in the independent price verification process, an adjustment is made to fair value. Additional fair value adjustments may be made to reflect such factors as bid-offer spreads, market data uncertainty, model limitations and counterparty risk. Further detail on these fair value adjustments is disclosed on page 247.

 

248260  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 20152016 Annual Report on Form 20-F  


    

    

    

 

 

18 Fair value of assets and liabilitiesfinancial instrumentscontinued

Comparison of carrying amounts and fair values for assets and liabilities not held at fair value

The following table summarises the fair value of financial assets and liabilities measured at amortised cost on the Group’s balance sheet:

 

As at 31 December 2015     
 

 

Carrying
amount

£m

  
  

  

   

 

 

Fair

value

£m

  

  

  

   
 
 

 

 

Quoted
market
prices

(Level 1)

£m

  
  
  

  

  

   
 

 

 

Observable
inputs

(Level 2)

£m

  
  

  

  

   
 
 

 

 

Significant
unobservable
inputs

(Level 3)

£m

  
  
  

  

  

As at 31 December 2016   

Carrying
amount

£m

 
 

 

   

Fair value

£m

 

 

   

Quoted
market

prices

(Level 1)

£m

 
 

 

 

 

   

Observable
inputs

(Level 2)

£m

 
 

 

 

   


Significant

unobservable
inputs

(Level 3)

£m

 

 
 

 

 

Financial assets                      
Held to maturitya   5,176    5,347    5,347         
Loans and advances to banks     41,349     41,301     5,933     34,125     1,243     43,251    43,228    7,256    34,987    985 
Loans and advances to customers:                      
– Home loans     155,863     151,431               151,431     144,765    141,155            141,155 
– Credit cards, unsecured and other retail lending     67,840     67,805     1,148     284     66,373     57,808    57,699    737    42    56,920 
– Finance lease receivables     4,776     4,730        
– Finance lease receivablesb   1,602    1,598       
– Corporate loans     170,738     169,697     585     129,847     39,265     188,609    186,715        126,979    59,736 
Reverse repurchase agreements and other similar secured lendinga     28,187     28,187          28,187       
Reverse repurchase agreements and other similar secured lending   13,454    13,454        13,454     
Assets included in disposal groups classified as held for salec   43,593    44,838    1,070    4,614    39,154 
Financial liabilities                      
Deposits from banks     (47,080   (47,080   (4,428   (42,652        (48,214   (48,212   (5,256   (42,895   (61
Customer accounts:                      
– Current and demand accounts     (147,122   (147,121   (130,439   (16,537   (145   (138,204   (138,197   (127,258   (10,921   (18
– Savings accounts     (135,567   (135,600   (122,029   (13,537   (34   (133,344   (133,370   (120,471   (12,891   (8
– Other time deposits     (135,553   (135,796   (43,025   (84,868   (7,903   (151,630   (151,632   (48,853   (96,240   (6,539
Debt securities in issue     (69,150   (69,863   (190   (69,122   (551   (75,932   (76,971   (196   (74,712   (2,063
Repurchase agreements and other similar secured borrowinga     (25,035   (25,035        (25,035     
Repurchase agreements and other similar secured borrowing   (19,760   (19,760       (19,760    
Subordinated liabilities     (21,467   (22,907        (22,907        (23,383   (24,547       (24,547    
Liabilities included in disposal groups classified as held for salec   (51,775   (51,788   (22,264   (28,998   (526
As at 31 December 2014            
As at 31 December 2015          
Financial assets                      
Loans and advances to banks     42,111     42,088     2,693     38,756     639     41,349    41,301    5,933    34,125    1,243 
Loans and advances to customers:                      
– Home loans     166,974     159,602               159,602     155,863    151,431            151,431 
– Credit cards, unsecured and other retail lending     63,583     63,759     1,214     488     62,057     67,840    67,805    1,148    284    66,373 
– Finance lease receivables     5,439     5,340        
– Finance lease receivablesb   4,776    4,730             
– Corporate loans     191,771     188,805     233     143,231     45,341     170,738    169,697    585    129,847    39,265 
Reverse repurchase agreements and other similar secured lending     131,753     131,753     2     131,751          28,187    28,187        28,187     
Financial liabilities                      
Deposits from banks     (58,390   (58,388   (4,257   (54,117   (14   (47,080   (47,080   (4,428   (42,652    
Customer accounts:                      
– Current and demand accounts     (143,057   (143,085   (126,732   (16,183   (170   (147,122   (147,121   (130,439   (16,537   (145
– Savings accounts     (131,163   (131,287   (116,172   (15,086   (29   (135,567   (135,600   (122,029   (13,537   (34
– Other time deposits     (153,484   (153,591   (43,654   (101,736   (8,201   (135,553   (135,796   (43,025   (84,868   (7,903
Debt securities in issue     (86,099   (87,522   (188   (87,334        (69,150   (69,863   (190   (69,122   (551
Repurchase agreements and other similar secured borrowing     (124,479   (124,479   (423   (124,056        (25,035   (25,035       (25,035    
Subordinated liabilities     (21,153   (22,718        (22,701   (17   (21,467   (22,907       (22,907    

Notes

aIn June 2016 UK Gilts previously classified as available for sale were reclassified to held to maturity in order to reflect the intention with these assets.
bThe fair value hierarchy for finance lease receivables is not required as part of the standard.
cDisposal groups held for sale and measured at fair value less cost to sell are in included in the fair value table. For disposal groups measured at carrying amount, the underlying financial assets and liabilities measured at fair value are included in the fair value disclosures on pages 247 to 260 and items measured at amortised cost are included on page 261. Non financial assets (£6.6bn) and liabilities (£1.7bn) within disposal groups measured at carrying amount are excluded from these disclosures.

Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2016 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  261


Notes to the financial statements

Assets and liabilities held at fair value

18 Fair value of financial instrumentscontinued

The fair value is an estimate of the price that would be received to sell an asset or paid to transfer a liability in an orderly transaction between market participants at the measurement date. As a wide range of valuation techniques are often available, it may not be appropriate to directly compare this fair value information to independent market sources or other financial institutions. Different valuation methodologies and assumptions can have a significant impact on fair values which are based on unobservable inputs.

Note

aDuring 2015, new reverse repurchase agreements and other similar secured lending and repurchase agreements and other similar secured borrowing in certain businesses have been designated at fair value to better align to the way the business manages the portfolio’s risk and performance.

Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  249


Notes to the financial statements

Assets and liabilities held at fair value

18 Fair value of assets and liabilitiescontinued

Financial assets

The carrying value of financial assets held at amortised cost (including loans and advances to banks and customers, and other lending such as reverse repurchase agreements and cash collateral on securities borrowed) is determined in accordance with the relevant accounting policy noted on pages 253 and 254.in Note 20.

Loans and advances to banks

The fair value of loans and advances, for the purpose of this disclosure, is derived from discounting expected cash flows in a way that reflects the current market price for lending to issuers of similar credit quality. Where market data or credit information on the underlying borrowers is unavailable, a number of proxy/extrapolation techniques are employed to determine the appropriate discount rates.

There is minimal difference between the fair value and carrying amount due to the short termshort-term nature of the lending, (i.e.i.e. predominantly overnight deposits)deposits, and the high credit quality of counterparties.

Loans and advances to customers

The fair value of loans and advances to customers, for the purpose of this disclosure, is derived from discounting expected cash flows in a way that reflects the current market price for lending to issuers of similar credit quality.

For retail lending, (i.e. homei.e. Home loans and credit cards)cards, tailored discounted cash flow models are used to estimate the fair value of different product types. For example, for home loans different models are used to estimate fair values of tracker, offset and fixed rate mortgage products. Key inputs to these models are the differentials between historic and current product margins and estimated prepayment rates.

The discount of fair value to carrying amount for home loans has reduced to 2.5% (2015: 2.8% (2014: 4.4%) due to changes in product mix across the loan portfolio and movements in product margins.

The fair value of corporate loans is calculated by the use of discounted cash flow techniques where the gross loan values are discounted at a rate of difference between contractual margins and hurdle rates or spreads where Barclays charges a margin over LIBOR depending on credit quality and loss given default and years to maturity. The discount between the carrying and fair value has decreasedincreased to 1.0% (2015: 0.6% (2014: 1.5%).

Reverse repurchase agreements

The fair value of reverse repurchase agreements approximates carrying amount as these balances are generally short dated and fully collateralised.

Financial liabilities

The carrying value of financial liabilities held at amortised cost (including customer accounts, other deposits, repurchase agreements and cash collateral on securities lent, debt securities in issue and subordinated liabilities) is determined in accordance with the accounting policy noted on pages 254 and 272.in Note 22.

Deposits from banks and customer accounts

In many cases, the fair value disclosed approximates carrying value because the instruments are short term in nature or have interest rates that reprice frequently, such as customer accounts and other deposits and short termshort-term debt securities.

The fair value for deposits with longer termlonger-term maturities such as time deposits, are estimated using discounted cash flows applying either market rates or current rates for deposits of similar remaining maturities. Consequently the fair value discount is minimal.

Debt securities in issue

Fair values of other debt securities in issue are based on quoted prices where available, or where the instruments are short dated, carrying amount approximates fair value. The fair value difference has decreasedincreased to 1.4% (2015: 1.0% (2014: 1.7%).

Repurchase agreements

The fair value of repurchase agreements approximates carrying amounts as these balances are generally short dated.

Subordinated liabilities

Fair values for dated and undated convertible andnon-convertible loan capital are based on quoted market rates for the issueissuer concerned or issuesissuers with similar terms and conditions.

 

250262  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 20152016 Annual Report on Form 20-F  


    

    

    

 

 

19 Offsetting financial assets and financial liabilities

In accordance with IAS 32Financial Instruments:Instruments: Presentation,, the Group reports financial assets and financial liabilities on a net basis on the balance sheet only if there is a legally enforceable right to set offset-off the recognised amounts and there is intention to settle on a net basis, or to realise the asset and settle the liability simultaneously. The following table shows the impact of netting arrangements on:

 

§all financial assets and liabilities that are reported net on the balance sheet

 

§all derivative financial instruments and reverse repurchase and repurchase agreements and other similar secured lending and borrowing agreements that are subject to enforceable master netting arrangements or similar agreements, but do not qualify for balance sheet netting.

The table identifies the amounts that have been offset in the balance sheet and also those amounts that are covered by enforceable netting arrangements (offsetting arrangements and financial collateral) but do not qualify for netting under the requirements of IAS 32 described above.

The ‘Net amounts’ presented below are not intended to represent the Group’s actual exposure to credit risk, as a variety of credit mitigation strategies are employed in addition to netting and collateral arrangements.

 

    Amounts subject to enforceable netting arrangements            
   Effects of offsetting on-balance sheet     Related amounts not offseta     Amounts not    
    
 
 
Gross
amounts
£m
  
  
  
   

 

 

Amounts

offset

£m

  

b 

  

   
 
 
 

 

Net amounts
reported on
the balance
sheet

£m

  
  
  
  

  

   
 
 
Financial
instruments
£m
  
  
  
   
 
 
Financial
collateral
£m
  
  
  
   
 
Net amount
£m
  
  
   

 

 

 

 

subject to

enforceable

netting

arrangements

£m

  

  

  

c 

  

   

 

 

Balance sheet

total

£m

  

d 

  

As at 31 December 2015                
Derivative financial assetse   328,692     (7,685   321,007     (259,582   (42,402   19,023     6,702     327,709  
Reverse repurchase agreements and other similar secured lending   33,805     (11,220   22,585          (22,299   286     5,602     28,187  
Reverse repurchase agreements designated at fair valuef   135,792     (91,668   44,124          (44,101   23     5,389     49,513  
Total assets   498,289     (110,573   387,716     (259,582   (108,802   19,332     17,693     405,409  
Derivative financial liabilitiese   (325,984   7,645     (318,339   259,582     40,124     (18,633   (5,913   (324,252
Repurchase agreements and other similar secured borrowing   (30,525   10,687     (19,838        19,838          (5,197   (25,035
Repurchase agreements designated at fair valuef   (141,126   92,201     (48,925        48,364     (561   (1,913   (50,838
Total liabilities   (497,635   110,533     (387,102   259,582     108,326     (19,194   (13,023   (400,125
As at 31 December 2014                
Derivative financial assets   617,981     (182,274   435,707     (353,631   (52,278   29,798     4,202     439,909  
Reverse repurchase agreements and other similar secured lending   204,895     (97,254   107,641          (106,436   1,205     24,112     131,753  
Reverse repurchase agreements designated at fair value   4,119          4,119          (3,918   201     1,117     5,236  
Total assets   826,995     (279,528   547,467     (353,631   (162,632   31,204     29,431     576,898  
Derivative financial liabilities   (617,161   184,496     (432,665   353,631     54,311     (24,723   (6,655   (439,320
Repurchase agreements and other similar secured borrowing   (202,218   97,254     (104,964        104,023     (941   (19,515   (124,479
Repurchase agreements designated at fair value   (4,256        (4,256        3,942     (314   (1,167   (5,423
Total liabilities   (823,635   281,750     (541,885   353,631     162,276     (25,978   (27,337   (569,222

Notes

aFinancial collateral of £42,402m (2014: £52,278m) was received in respect of derivative assets, including £34,918m (2014: £44,047m) of cash collateral and £7,484m (2014: £8,231m) of non-cash collateral. Financial collateral of £40,124m (2014: £54,311m) was placed in respect of derivative liabilities, including £35,464m (2014: £43,768m) of cash collateral and £4,660m (2014: £10,543m) of non-cash collateral. The collateral amounts are limited to net balance sheet exposure so as to not include over-collateralisation. Of the £34,918m, (2014: £44,047m) cash collateral held, £27,732m, (2014: £33,769m) was included in deposits from banks and £7,186m (2014: £10,278m), was included in customer accounts. Of the £35,464m, (2014: £43,768m) cash collateral placed, £13,238m (2014: £16,815m) was included in loans and advances to banks and £22,226m (2014: £26,953m) was included in loans and advances to customers.
bAmounts offset for Derivative financial assets include cash collateral netted of £572m (2014: £1,052m). Amounts offset for Derivative liabilities include cash collateral netted of £532m (2014: £3,274m). Settlements assets and liabilities have been offset amounting to £8,886m (2014: £13,258m). No other significant recognised financial assets and liabilities were offset in the balance sheet. Therefore, the only balance sheet categories necessary for inclusion in the table are those shown above.
cThis column includes contractual rights of set off that are subject to uncertainty under the laws of the relevant jurisdiction.
dThe balance sheet total is the sum of ‘Net amounts reported on the balance sheet’ that are subject to enforceable netting arrangements and ‘Amounts not subject to enforceable netting arrangements’.
eThe decrease in amounts offset is due to the conversion of Barclays daily collateralised interest rate swaps with LCH Clearnet Ltd, for which the collateral was offset against the derivative exposure, into daily settled interest rate swaps in December 2015. This led to a reduction in gross balances available to be offset. The derivative notional disclosure in Note 15 includes the notional of the daily settled interest rate swaps.
fDuring 2015, new reverse repurchase agreements and repurchase agreements, other similar secured lending and borrowing in certain businesses have been designated at fair value to better align to the way the business manages the portfolio’s risk and performance.

Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  251


Notes to the financial statements

Assets and liabilities held at fair value

19 Offsetting financial assets and financial liabilitiescontinued

    Amounts subject to enforceable netting arrangements    Amounts      
   Effects of offsettingon-balance sheet    Related amounts not offseta    not   
As at 31 December 2016   

Gross
amounts
£m
 
 
 
   

Amounts
offsetb

£m

 
 

 

   



Net amounts
reported on
the balance
sheet

£m

 
 
 
 

 

   

Financial
instruments
£m
 
 
 
   

Financial
collateral
£m
 
 
 
   


Net

amount
£m


 
 

   



subject to

enforceable
netting
arrange-

mentsc £m

 

 
 
 

 

   


Balance

sheet totald
£m

 

 
 

                

Derivative financial assets

   353,078    (11,934   341,144    (273,602   (49,923   17,619    5,482    346,626 

Reverse repurchase agreements and other similar secured lendinge

   257,430    (187,262   70,168        (69,932   236    6,448    76,616 

Total assets

   610,508    (199,196   411,312    (273,602   (119,855   17,855    11,930    423,242 

Derivative financial liabilities

   (345,752   10,962    (334,790   273,602    47,383    (13,805   (5,697   (340,487

Repurchase agreements and other similar secured borrowinge

   (257,854   187,262    (70,592       68,897    (1,695   (4,878   (75,470

Total liabilities

   (603,606   198,224    (405,382   273,602    116,280    (15,500   (10,575   (415,957

As at 31 December 2015

                

Derivative financial assets

   328,692    (7,685   321,007    (259,582   (42,402   19,023    6,702    327,709 

Reverse repurchase agreements and other similar secured lending

   169,597    (102,888   66,709        (66,400   309    10,991    77,700 

Total assets

   498,289    (110,573   387,716    (259,582   (108,802   19,332    17,693    405,409 

Derivative financial liabilities

   (325,984   7,645    (318,339   259,582    40,124    (18,633   (5,913   (324,252

Repurchase agreements and other similar secured borrowing

   (171,651   102,888    (68,763       68,202    (561   (7,110   (75,873

Total liabilities

   (497,635   110,533    (387,102   259,582    108,326    (19,194   (13,023   (400,125

Derivative assets and liabilities

The ‘Financial instruments’ column identifies financial assets and liabilities that are subject to set offset-off under netting agreements, such as the ISDA

Master Agreement or derivative exchange or clearing counterparty agreements, whereby all outstanding transactions with the same counterparty can be offset andclose-out netting applied across all outstanding transactiontransactions covered by the agreements if an event of default or other predetermined events occur.

Financial collateral refers to cash andnon-cash collateral obtained, typically daily or weekly, to cover the net exposure between counterparties by enabling the collateral to be realised in an event of default or if other predetermined events occur.

Repurchase and reverse repurchase agreements and other similar secured lending and borrowing

The ‘Amounts offset’ column identifies financial assets and liabilities that are subject to set off under netting agreements, such as global master repurchase agreementsGlobal Master Repurchase Agreements and global master securities lending agreements,Global Master Securities Lending Agreements, whereby all outstanding transactions with the same counterparty can be offset andclose-out netting applied across all outstanding transactiontransactions covered by the agreements if an event of default or other predetermined events occur.

Financial collateral typically comprises highly liquid securities which are legally transferred and can be liquidated in the event of counterparty default.

These offsetting and collateral arrangements and other credit risk mitigation strategies used by the Group are further explained in the Credit risk mitigation section on page 100.102.

Notes

aFinancial collateral of £49,923m (2015: £42,402m) was received in respect of derivative assets, including £41,641m (2015: £34,918m) of cash collateral and £8,282m (2015: £7,484m) ofnon-cash collateral. Financial collateral of £47,383m (2015: £40,124m) was placed in respect of derivative liabilities, including £43,763m (2015: £35,464m) of cash collateral and £3,620m (2015: £4,660m) ofnon-cash collateral. The collateral amounts are limited to net balance sheet exposure so as to not include over-collateralisation. Of the £41,641m (2015: £34,918m) cash collateral held, £26,834m (2015: £27,732m) was included in deposits from banks and £14,807m (2015: £7,186m), was included in customer accounts. Of the £43,763m (2015: £35,464m) cash collateral placed, £17,587m (2015: £13,238m) was included in loans and advances to banks and £26,176m (2015: £22,226m) was included in loans and advances to customers.
bAmounts offset for Derivative financial assets include cash collateral netted of £972m (2015: £572m). Amounts offset for Derivative liabilities did not include any cash collateral netted for December 2016 (2015: £532m). Settlements assets and liabilities have been offset amounting to £10,486m (2015: £8,886m). No other significant recognised financial assets and liabilities were offset in the balance sheet. Therefore, the only balance sheet categories necessary for inclusion in the table are those shown above.
cThis column includes contractual rights ofset-off that are subject to uncertainty under the laws of the relevant jurisdiction.
dThe balance sheet total is the sum of ‘Net amounts reported on the balance sheet’ that are subject to enforceable netting arrangements and ‘Amounts not subject to enforceable netting arrangements’.
eRepurchase and Reverse Repurchase agreements include instruments at amortised cost and instruments designated at fair value through profit and loss. Reverse Repurchase agreements and other similar secured lending of £76,616m (December 2015: £77,700m) is split by fair value £63,162m (December 2015: £49,513m) and amortised cost £13,454m (December 2015: £28,187m). Repurchase agreements and other similar secured borrowing of £75,470m (December 2015: £75,873m) is split by fair value £55,710m (December 2015: £50,838m) and amortised cost £19,760m (December 2015: £25,035m).

 

252  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 20152016 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  263


Notes to the financial statements

Financial instruments held at amortised cost

    

 

 

The notes included in this section focus on assets that are held at amortised cost arising from the Group’s retail and wholesale lending including loans and advances, finance leases, repurchase and reverse repurchase agreements and similar secured lending. Detail regarding the Group’s capital and liquidity position can be found on pages 152 to 177.

The notes included in this section focus on assets that are held at amortised cost arising from the Group’s retail and wholesale lending including loans and advances, finance leases, repurchase and reverse repurchase agreements and similar secured lending. Detail regarding the Group’s capital and liquidity position can be found on pages 154 to 171.

20 Loans and advances to banks and customers

 

 

Accounting for financial instruments held at amortised cost

Loans and advances to customers and banks, customer accounts, debt securities and most financial liabilities, are held at amortised cost. That is, the initial fair value (which is normally the amount advanced or borrowed) is adjusted for repayments and the amortisation of coupon, fees and expenses to represent the effective interest rate of the asset or liability.

 

In accordance with IAS 39, where the Group no longer intends to trade in financial assets it may transfer them out of the held for trading classification and measure them at amortised cost if they meet the definition of a loan. The initial value used for the purposes of establishing amortised cost is fair value on the date of the transfer.

 

 

As at 31 December   

 

2015

£m

  

  

   

 

2014

£m

  

  

   

2016

£m

 

 

     

2015

£m

 

 

Gross loans and advances to banks   41,349     42,111     43,251      41,349 
Less: allowance for impairment                    
Loans and advances to banks   41,349     42,111     43,251      41,349 
Gross loans and advances to customers   404,138     433,222     397,404      404,138 
Less: allowance for impairment   (4,921   (5,455   (4,620     (4,921
Loans and advances to customers   399,217     427,767     392,784      399,217 

Further information onIncluded within the Group’scarrying value of gross loans and advances to banks and customers and impairment allowances is included on pages 117are effective interest rate adjustments of £1,028m (2015: £917m). Of the total balance deferred, £649m (2015: £424m) relate to 118.

Priorcosts, such asco-brand partner fees, incurred to 2010, the Group reclassified certain financial assets, originally classified as held for trading, that were deemed to be not held for trading purposes to loans and advances. The carrying value and fair value of securities reclassified into loans and advances is £975m (2014: £1,862m) and £958m (2014: £1,834m) respectively.

If the reclassifications had not been made, the Group’s income statement for 2015 would have included a net gain on the reclassified trading assets of £12m (2014: gain of £57m).originate credit card balances.

21 Finance leases

 

 

Accounting for finance leases

The Group applies IAS 17Leases in accounting for finance leases, both where it is the lessor or the lessee. A finance lease is a lease which confers substantially all the risks and rewards of the leased assets on the lessee. Where the Group is the lessor, the leased asset is not held on the balance sheet; instead a finance lease receivable is recognised representing the minimum lease payments receivable under the terms of the lease, discounted at the rate of interest implicit in the lease. Where the Group is the lessee, the leased asset is recognised in property, plant and equipment and a finance lease liability is recognised, representing the minimum lease payments payable under the lease, discounted at the rate of interest implicit in the lease.

 

Interest income or expense is recognised in interest receivable or payable, allocated to accounting periods to reflect a constant periodic rate of return.

 

Finance lease receivables

Finance lease receivables are included within loans and advances to customers. The Group engagesspecialises in asset-based lending and works with a broad range of international technology, industrial equipment and commercial companies to provide customised finance programmes to assist manufacturers, dealers and distributors of assets.

 

   2015   2014  
       Present           Present    
   Gross       value of       Gross       value of    
   investment       minimum     Un-     investment       minimum     Un-  
   in finance     Future     lease     guaranteed     in finance     Future     lease     guaranteed  
   lease     finance     payments     residual     lease     finance     payments     residual  
   receivables     income     receivable     values     receivables     income     receivable     values     2016    2015 
   £m     £m     £m     £m     £m     £m     £m     £m     




Gross
investment
in finance
lease
receivables
£m
 
 
 
 
 
 
   


Future
finance
income
£m
 
 
 
 
   





Present
value of
minimum
lease
payments
receivable
£m
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
   



Un-
guaranteed
residual
values

£m

 
 
 
 

 

   




Gross
investment
in finance
lease
receivables
£m
 
 
 
 
 
 
   


Future
finance
income
£m
 
 
 
 
   





Present
value of
minimum
lease
payments
receivable
£m
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
   



Un-
guaranteed
residual
values

£m

 
 
 
 

 

Not more than one year   1,826     (230   1,596     117     2,139     (304   1,835     125     646    (37   609    60    1,826    (230   1,596    117 
Over one year but not more than five years   3,569     (555   3,014     275     4,159     (682   3,477     293     986    (57   929    132    3,569    (555   3,014    275 
Over five years   224     (32   192     21     213     (40   173     17     73    (4   69    19    224    (32   192    21 
Total   5,619     (817   4,802     413     6,511     (1,026   5,485     435     1,705    (98   1,607    211    5,619    (817   4,802    413 

The decrease in finance lease receivables is primarily driven by BAGL balances now being classified as held for sale.

The impairment allowance for uncollectable finance lease receivables is £56m (2014: £82m).

Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  253


Notesamounted to the financial statements

Financial instruments held at amortised cost

21 Finance leasescontinued£6m (2015: £56m).

Finance lease liabilities

The Group leases items of property, plant and equipment on terms that meet the definition of finance leases. Finance lease liabilities are included within Note 26 Accruals, deferred income and other liabilities.

As at 31 December 2015,2016, the total future minimum payments under finance leases were nil (2014: £14m)£15m (2015: nil). The carrying amount of assets held under finance leases was nil (2014: £31m)£15m (2015: nil).

264  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2016 Annual Report on Form 20-F


22 Reverse repurchase and repurchase agreements including other similar lending and borrowing

Reverse repurchase agreements (and stock borrowing or similar transaction)transactions) are a form of secured lending whereby the Group provides a loan or cash collateral in exchange for the transfer of collateral, generally in the form of marketable securities subject to an agreement to transfer the securities back at a fixed price in the future. Repurchase agreements are where the Group obtains such loans or cash collateral, in exchange for the transfer of collateral.

 

 

Accounting for reverse repurchase and repurchase agreements including other similar lending and borrowing

The Group purchases (a reverse repurchase agreement) or borrows securities subject to a commitment to resell or return them. The securities are not included in the balance sheet as the Group does not acquire the risks and rewards of ownership. Consideration paid (or cash collateral provided) is accounted for as a loan asset at amortised cost, unless it is designated at fair value through profit and loss.

 

The Group may also sell (a repurchase agreement) or lend securities subject to a commitment to repurchase or redeem them. The securities are retained on the balance sheet as the Group retains substantially all the risks and rewards of ownership. Consideration received (or cash collateral provided) is accounted for as a financial liability at amortised cost, unless it is designated at fair value through profit and loss.

 

 

     

 

2015

£m

  

  

     

 

2014

£m

  

  

     
2016
£m
 
 
     
2015
£m
 
 
Assets                
Banks     8,954       39,528       2,769      8,954 
Customers     19,233       92,225       10,685      19,233 
Reverse repurchase agreements and other similar secured lendinga     28,187       131,753  

Reverse repurchase agreements and other similar secured lending at amortised costa

     13,454      28,187 
Liabilities                
Banks     13,951       49,940       12,820      13,951 
Customers     11,084       74,539       6,940      11,084 
Repurchase agreements and other similar secured borrowinga     25,035       124,479  

Repurchase agreements and other similar secured borrowing at amortised costa

     19,760      25,035 

 

 

 

Note

aDuring 2015, newNew reverse repurchase and repurchase agreements including other similar secured lending and borrowing in certain businesses have been designated at fair value following a change in accounting treatment implemented in 2015 to better align to the way the business manages the portfolio’s risk and performance (see Notes 14 and 17 for further detail).

 

254  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 20152016 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  265


Notes to the financial statements

Non-current assets and other investments

    

 

 

The notes included in this section focus on the Group’snon-current tangible and intangible assets and property, plant and equipment, which provide long-term future economic benefits.

The notes included in this section focus on the Group’s non-current tangible and intangible assets and property, plant and equipment, which provide long-term future economic benefits.

23 Property, plant and equipment

 

Accounting for property, plant and equipment

The Group applies IAS 16Property Plant and Equipmentand IAS 40Investment Properties.Properties.

Property, plant and equipment is stated at cost, which includes direct and incremental acquisition costs less accumulated depreciation and provisions for impairment, if required. Subsequent costs are capitalised if these result in anthe enhancement to the asset.

Depreciation is provided on the depreciable amount of items of property, plant and equipment on a straight-line basis over their estimated useful economic lives. Depreciation rates, methods and the residual values underlying the calculation of depreciation of items of property, plant and equipment are kept under review to take account of any change in circumstances. The Group uses the following annual rates in calculating depreciation:

 

  Annual rates in calculating depreciation  Depreciation rate
  Freehold land  Not depreciated
  Freehold buildings and long-leasehold property (more than 50 years to run)  2-3.3%
  Leasehold property over the remaining life of the lease (less than 50 years to run)  Over the remaining life of the lease        
  Costs of adaptation of freehold and leasehold property  6-10%
  Equipment installed in freehold and leasehold property  6-10%
  Computers and similar equipment  17-33%
  Fixtures and fittings and other equipment  9-20%

Where leasehold property has a remaining useful life of less than 17 years, costs of adaptation and installed equipment are depreciated over the remaining life of the lease.

Investment property

The Group initially recognises investment property at cost, and subsequently at fair value at each balance sheet date, reflecting market conditions at the reporting date. Gains and losses on remeasurement are included in the income statement.

 

 

   
 

 

Investment
property

£m

  
  

  

   

 

Property

£m

  

  

   

 

Equipment

£m

  

  

   
 
 
Leased
assets
£m
  
  
  
   

 

Total

£m

  

  

   

Investment
property
£m
 
 
 
   
Property
£m
 
 
   
Equipment
£m
 
 
   

Leased
assets
£m
 
 
 
   

Total

£m

 

 

Cost                    
As at 1 January 2016   140    3,919    4,259    62    8,380 
Additions       167    370        537 
Disposalsa   (6   (761   (631       (1,398
Change in fair value of investment properties                    
Exchange and other movementsb   (53   104    (158   (52   (159
As at 31 December 2016   81    3,429    3,840    10    7,360 
Accumulated depreciation and impairment          
As at 1 January 2016       (1,697   (3,177   (38   (4,912
Depreciation charge       (185   (325       (510
Disposalsa       635    405        1,040 
Exchange and other movementsb       (236   54    29    (153
As at 31 December 2016       (1,483   (3,043   (9   (4,535
Net book value   81    1,946    797    1    2,825 
Cost          
As at 1 January 2015   207     4,054     4,350     10     8,621     207    4,054    4,350    10    8,621 
Additions and disposals   (71   22     173     49     173  
Additions   13    385    405    49    852 
Disposals   (84   (363   (232       (679
Change in fair value of investment properties   10                    10     10                10 
Exchange and other movements   (6   (157   (264   3     (424   (6   (157   (264   3    (424
As at 31 December 2015   140     3,919     4,259     62     8,380     140    3,919    4,259    62    8,380 
Accumulated depreciation and impairment                    
As at 1 January 2015        (1,669   (3,157   (9   (4,835       (1,669   (3,157   (9   (4,835
Depreciation charge        (181   (373        (554       (181   (373       (554
Disposals        144     159          303         144    159        303 
Exchange and other movements        9     194     (29   174         9    194    (29   174 
As at 31 December 2015        (1,697   (3,177   (38   (4,912       (1,697   (3,177   (38   (4,912
Net book value   140     2,222     1,082     24     3,468     140    2,222    1,082    24    3,468 
Cost          
As at 1 January 2014   451     3,924     4,552     10     8,937  
Additions and disposals   (160   174     7          21  
Change in fair value of investment properties   (1                  (1
Exchange and other movements   (83   (44   (209        (336
As at 31 December 2014   207     4,054     4,350     10     8,621  
Accumulated depreciation and impairment          
As at 1 January 2014        (1,513   (3,201   (7   (4,721
Depreciation charge        (184   (399   (2   (585
Disposals        34     271          305  
Exchange and other movements        (6   172          166  
As at 31 December 2014        (1,669   (3,157   (9   (4,835
Net book value   207     2,385     1,193     1     3,786  

Notes

aCost and depreciation disposals include £0.9bn relating to fully depreciated assets that are no longer in use. There is no impact on the net book value.
bIncludes property, plant and equipment relating to BAGL of £627m (cost of £1,066m less accumulated depreciation of £439m) which was reclassified to held for sale.

266  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2016 Annual Report on Form 20-F


23 Property, plant and equipmentcontinued

Property rentals of £9m (2014: £5m)£7m (2015: £9m) and £9m (2014: £14m)£6m (2015: £9m) have been included in net investment income and other income respectively. Impairment of £38m (2014: £61m)£19m (2015: £38m) was charged in the period.

The fair value of investment property is determined by reference to current market prices for similar properties, adjusted as necessary for condition and location, or by reference to recent transactions updated to reflect current economic conditions. Discounted cash flow techniques may be employed to calculate fair value where there have been no recent transactions, using current external market inputs such as market rents and interest rates. Valuations are carried out by management with the support of appropriately qualified independent valuers. Refer to Note 18 Fair value of assets and liabilitiesfinancial instruments for further details.

Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  255


Notes to the financial statements

Non-current assets and other investments

24 Goodwill and intangible assets

 

 

Accounting for goodwill and other intangible assets

Goodwill

The carrying value of goodwill is determined in accordance with IFRS 3Business CombinationsandIAS 36Impairment of Assets.Assets.

 

Goodwill arises on the acquisition of subsidiaries, associates and joint ventures, andventures. It represents the excess of the fair value of the purchase consideration over the fair value of the Group’s share of the assets acquired and the liabilities and contingent liabilities assumed on the date of the acquisition.

 

Goodwill is reviewed annually for impairment, or more frequently when there are indications that impairment may have occurred. The test involves comparing the carrying value of goodwill with the present value of thepre-tax cash flows, discounted at a rate of interest that reflects the inherent risks of the cash generating unit (CGU) to which the goodwill relates, or the CGU’s fair value if this is higher.

 

Intangible assets

Intangible assets other than goodwill are accounted for in accordance with IAS 38Intangible Assets and IAS 36Impairment of Assets..

 

Intangible assets include brands, customer lists, internally generated software, other software, licences and other contracts and core deposit intangibles. They are initially recognised when they are separable or arise from contractual or other legal rights, the cost can be measured reliably and, in the case of intangible assets not acquired in a business combination, where it is probable that future economic benefits attributable to the assets will flow from their use.

 

Intangible assets are stated at cost (which is, in the case of assets acquired in a business combination, the acquisition date fair value) less accumulated amortisation and provisions for impairment, if any, and are amortised over their useful lives in a manner that reflects the pattern to which they contribute to future cash flows, generally using the amortisation periods set out below:

 

  Annual rates in calculating amortisation  Amortisation period
  Goodwill  Not amortised
  Internally generated softwarea  12 months to 6 years
  Other software  12 months to 6 years
  Core deposits intangibles  12 months to 25 years
  Brands  12 months to 25 years
  Customer lists  12 months to 25 years
  Licences and other  12 months to 25 years

Intangible assets are reviewed for impairment when there are indications that impairment may have occurred.

 

         Internally          Core                      
     generated     Other     deposit       Customer     Licences    
   Goodwill     software     software     intangibles     Brands     lists     and other     Total  
    £m     £m     £m     £m     £m     £m     £m     £m  
2015                
Cost                
As at 1 January 2015   6,329     3,240     482     186     112     1,721     447     12,517  
Additions and disposals   (515   998     75                    18     576  
Exchange and other movements   (211   (126   (15   (40   (26   (56   6     (468
As at 31 December 2015   5,603     4,112     542     146     86     1,665     471     12,625  
Accumulated amortisation and impairment                
As at 1 January 2015   (1,442   (1,257   (194   (88   (111   (962   (283   (4,337
Disposals   518     128     2                    3     651  
Amortisation charge        (421   (17   (6        (143   (30   (617
Impairment charge   (102   (101   (1   (1        (12        (217
Exchange and other movements   28     17     (2   20     25     36     (7   117  
As at 31 December 2015   (998   (1,634   (212   (75   (86   (1,081   (317   (4,403
Net book value   4,605     2,478     330     71          584     154     8,222  
2014                
Cost                
As at 1 January 2014   6,346     2,411     556     194     116     1,543     437     11,603  
Additions and disposals   36     702     176               123     7     1,044  
Exchange and other movements   (53   127     (250   (8   (4   55     3     (130
As at 31 December 2014   6,329     3,240     482     186     112     1,721     447     12,517  
Accumulated amortisation and impairment                
As at 1 January 2014   (1,468   (999   (217   (85   (97   (799   (253   (3,918
Disposals        98     21               14     2     135  
Amortisation charge        (306   (19   (7   (18   (142   (30   (522
Impairment charge        (74   (21             (5        (100
Exchange and other movements   26     24     42     4     4     (30   (2   68  
As at 31 December 2014   (1,442   (1,257   (194   (88   (111   (962   (283   (4,337
Net book value   4,887     1,983     288     98     1     759     164     8,180  

Note

aExceptions to the stated rate relate to useful lives of certain core banking platforms that are assessed individually and, if appropriate, amortised over longer periods ranging from 10 to 15 years.

 

256  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 20152016 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  267


Notes to the financial statements

Non-current assets and other investments

    

 

 

24 Goodwill and intangible assetscontinued

24 Goodwill and intangible assetscontinued   
    
Goodwill
£m
 
 
   


Internally
generated
software
£m
 
 
 
 
   

Other
software
£m
 
 
 
   


Core
deposit
intangibles
£m
 
 
 
 
   
Brands
£m
 
 
   

Customer
lists

£m

 
 

 

   

Licences
and other

£m

 
 

 

   

Total

£m

 

 

2016                
Cost                
As at 1 January 2016   5,603    4,112    542    146    86    1,665    471    12,625 
Additions and disposals   (77   955    2            59    78    1,017 
Exchange and other movementsa   (679   (140   (340   (140   (86   (16   (4   (1,405
As at 31 December 2016   4,847    4,927    204    6        1,708    545    12,237 
Accumulated amortisation and impairment                
As at 1 January 2016   (998   (1,634   (212   (75   (86   (1,081   (317   (4,403
Disposals   77    46    1            14    12    150 
Amortisation charge       (480   (36           (129   (29   (674
Impairment charge       (73   (1               (1   (75
Exchange and other movementsa   (9   277    105    69    86    (35   (2   491 
As at 31 December 2016   (930   (1,864   (143   (6       (1,231   (337   (4,511
Net book value   3,917    3,063    61            477    208    7,726 
2015                
Cost                
As at 1 January 2015   6,329    3,240    482    186    112    1,721    447    12,517 
Additions and disposals   (515   998    75                18    576 
Exchange and other movements   (211   (126   (15   (40   (26   (56   6    (468
As at 31 December 2015   5,603    4,112    542    146    86    1,665    471    12,625 
Accumulated amortisation and impairment                
As at 1 January 2015   (1,442   (1,257   (194   (88   (111   (962   (283   (4,337
Disposals   518    128    2                3    651 
Amortisation charge       (421   (17   (6       (143   (30   (617
Impairment charge   (102   (101   (1   (1       (12       (217
Exchange and other movements   28    17    (2   20    25    36    (7   117 
As at 31 December 2015   (998   (1,634   (212   (75   (86   (1,081   (317   (4,403
Net book value   4,605    2,478    330    71        584    154    8,222 

Goodwill

Goodwill is allocated to business operations according to business segments as follows:

 

      

 

2015

£m

  

  

     

 

2014

£m

  

  

Personal and Corporate Banking

     3,472       3,471  

Africa Banking

     725       915  

Barclaycard

     408       427  

Barclays Non-Core

            74  

Total net book value of goodwill

         4,605           4,887  
    
2016
£m
 
 
   
2015
£m
 
 
Barclays UK   3,556    3,621 
Barclays International   361    258 
Africa Banking       703 
BarclaysNon-Core       23 
Total net book value of goodwill   3,917    4,605 

Critical accounting estimates and judgements

Goodwill

Testing goodwill for impairment involves a significant amount of judgement. This includes the identification of independent CGUs and the allocation of goodwill to these units based on which units are expected to benefit from the acquisition. The allocation is reviewed following business reorganisation.reorganisations. Cash flow projections necessarily take into account changes in the market in which a business operates including the level of growth, competitive activity, and the impacts of regulatory change. Determining both the expectedpre-tax cash flows and the risk adjustedrisk-adjusted interest rate appropriate to the operating unit requires the exercise of judgement. The estimation ofpre-tax cash flows is sensitive to the periods for which detailed forecasts are available and to assumptions regarding long-term sustainable cash flows.

Other intangible assets

Determining the estimated useful lives of intangible assets (such as those arising from contractual relationships) requires an analysis of circumstances. The assessment of whether an asset is exhibiting indicators of impairment as well as the calculation of impairment, which requires the estimationestimate of future cash flows and fair values less costs to sell, also requires the preparation of cash flow forecasts and fair values for assets that may not be regularly bought and sold.

Note

aIncludes goodwill and intangibles relating to BAGL of £1.1bn which was reclassified to held for sale.

268  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2016 Annual Report on Form 20-F


24 Goodwill and intangible assetscontinued

Impairment testing of goodwill

During 2015,2016, the Group recognised an impairment charge of nil (2015: £102m). The impairment charge of £102m (2014: nil) primarily attributablerecognised in 2015 related toNon-Core and the withdrawal of the Bespoke product in Barclaycard. This isBarclays International which was as a result of the carryingrecoverable amount of the goodwill relating to these businesses not being supported based on the value in use calculations.

Key assumptions

The key assumptions used for impairment testing are set out below for each significant goodwill balance. Other goodwill of £881m (2014: £1,031m)£787m (2015: £1,475m) was allocated to multiple CGUs which are not considered individually significant.

Personal and Corporate Banking (PCB)Barclays UK

Goodwill relating to Woolwich in Personal Banking and Business Banking was £3,225m (2014: £3,225m)£3,130m (2015: £3,130m) of the total PCBBarclays UK balance. The carrying value of the CGU ishas been determined by using an allocation of total Group shareholder funds excluding goodwill based on the CGU’s share of risk weighted assets before goodwill balances are added back.net asset value. The recoverable amount of the CGU has been determined using cash flow predictions based on financial budgets approved by management and covering a three-yearfive-year period, with a terminal growth rate of 2.4% (2014:2.0% (2015: 2.4%) applied thereafter. The forecast cash flows have been discounted at apre-tax rate of 14.6% (2015: 11.4% (2014: 11.0%). Based on these assumptions, the recoverable amount exceeded the carrying amount including goodwill by £24,811m (2014: £17,260m)£4,130m (2015: £14,097m). A one percentage point change in the discount rate or terminal growth rate would increase or decrease the recoverable amount by £4,860m (2014: £2,888m)£988m (2015: £2,775m) and £3,422m (2014: £2,070m)£615m (2015: £2,109m) respectively. A reduction in the forecast cash flows of 10% per annum would reduce the recoverable amount by £4,835m (2014: £2,697m)£1,293m (2015: £2,789m).

Africa

Goodwill relatingThe headroom reflects the changes made to the Absa Retail Bank CGU was £499m (2014: £631m)cash generating unit (CGU) in Barclays UK as part of the total Africa Banking balance.business reorganisation in 2016. The carrying value of the CGU has been determined by using net asset value. The recoverable amount of Absa Retail Bank has been determined usingreduction in headroom in 2016 reflects changes in discount rate and future cash flow predictions based on financial budgets approved by management and covering a three year period, with a terminal growth rate of 6% (2014: 6%) applied thereafter. The forecast cash flows have been discounted at a pre-tax rate of 18.5% (2014: 18.7%). The recoverable amount calculated based on value in use exceeded the carrying amount including goodwill by £2,946m (2014: £1,623m). A one percentage point change in the discount rate or the terminal growth rate would increase or decrease the recoverable amount by £349m (2014: £329m) and £221m (2014: £206m) respectively. A reduction in the forecast cash flows of 10% per annum would reduce the recoverable amount by £469m (2014: £440m).

Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  257


Notes to the financial statements

Non-current assets and other investments

projections.

25 Operating leases

 

 

Accounting for operating leases

The Group applies IAS 17Leases, for operating leases. An operating lease is a lease where substantially all of the risks and rewards of the leased assets remain with the lessor. Where the Group is the lessor, lease income is recognised on a straight-line basis over the period of the lease unless another systematic basis is more appropriate. The Group holds the leased assets on-balanceon balance sheet within property, plant and equipment.

 

Where the Group is the lessee, rentals payable are recognised as an expense in the income statement on a straight-line basis over the lease term unless another systematic basis is more appropriate.

 

Operating lease receivables

The Group acts as lessor, whereby items of plant and equipment are purchased and then leased to third parties under arrangements qualifying as operating leases. The future minimum lease payments expected to be received undernon-cancellable operating leases was £1m (2014:nil (2015: £1m).

Operating lease commitments

The Group leases various offices, branches and other premises undernon-cancellable operating lease arrangements. With such operating lease arrangements, the asset is kept on the lessor’s balance sheet and the Group reports the future minimum lease payments as an expense over the lease term. The leases have various terms, escalation and renewal rights. There are no contingent rents payable.

Operating lease rentals of £500m (2014: £594m)£560m (2015: £411m) have been included in administration and general expenses.

The future minimum lease payments by the Group undernon-cancellable operating leases are as follows:

 

   2015   2014     2016    2015 
   
 
Property
£m
  
  
   
 
Equipment
£m
  
  
   
 
Property
£m
  
  
   
 
Equipment
£m
  
  
   
Property
£m
 
 
  
Equipment
£m
 
 
   
Property
£m
 
 
   
Equipment
£m
 
 

Not more than one year

   376     1     403     41     364       376    1 

Over one year but not more than five years

   1,127     11     1,147     106     974  23    1,127    11 

Over five years

   1,874          2,036          1,520       1,874     

Total

   3,377     12         3,586     147     2,858  23        3,377    12 

Total future minimum sublease payments to be received undernon-cancellable subleases were £1m (2014: £99m)was £2m (2015: £1m).

 

258  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 20152016 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  269


Notes to the financial statements

Accruals, provisions, contingent liabilities and legal proceedings

    

 

The notes included in this section focus on the Group’s accruals, provisions and contingent liabilities. Provisions are recognised for present obligations arising as consequences of past events where it is probable that a transfer of economic benefit will be necessary to settle the obligation, and it can be reliably estimated. Contingent liabilities reflect potential liabilities that are not recognised on the balance sheet.

The notes included in this section focus on the Group’s accruals, provisions and contingent liabilities. Provisions are recognised for present obligations arising as consequences of past events where it is probable that a transfer of economic benefit will be necessary to settle the obligation, and it can be reliably estimated. Contingent liabilities reflect potential liabilities that are not recognised on the balance sheet.

26 Accruals, deferred income and other liabilities

 

 

Accounting for insurance contracts

The Group applies IFRS 4Insurance Contractsto its insurance contracts. An insurance contract is a contract that compensates a third party against a loss fromnon-financial risk. Some wealth management and other products, such as life assurance contracts, combine investment and insurance features; these are treated as insurance contracts when they pay benefits that are at least 5% more than they would pay if the insured event does not occur.

 

Insurance liabilities include current best estimates of future contractual cash flows, claims handling, and administration costs in respect of claims. Liability adequacy tests are performed at each balance sheet date to ensure the adequacy of contract liabilities. Where a deficiency is highlighted by the tests, insurance liabilities are increased with any deficiency being recognised in the income statement.

 

Insurance premium revenue is recognised in the income statement in the period earned, net of reinsurance premiums payable, in net premiums from insurance contracts. Increases and decreases in insurance liabilities are recognised in the income statement in net claims and benefits on insurance contracts.

 

 

   

 

2015

£m

  

  

  

2014   

£m   

   

2016

£m

 

 

   

2015

£m

 

 

Accruals and deferred income

   4,271    4,770     4,422    4,271 

Other creditors

   3,770    3,851     4,382    3,770 

Obligations under finance leases (see Note 21)

       36     15     

Insurance contract liabilities, including unit-linked liabilities

   2,569    2,766     52    2,569 

Accruals, deferred income and other liabilities

       10,610        11,423         8,871        10,610 

Accruals and deferred income decreasedincreased by 10%4% to £4.3bn£4.4bn mainly driven by loweraccruals towards staff costs and administrative and general costs accrued as at 31 December 2015.2016.

Insurance liabilities relate principallyLiabilities relating to the Group’s long-term business.business have decreased by £2.5bn primarily driven byNon-Core entities being classified as held for sale. Insurance contract liabilities associated with the Group’s short term non-lifeshort-term business are £115m (2014: £157m)£52m (2015: £115m). The maximum amounts payable under all of the Group’s insurance products, ignoring the probability of insured events occurring and the contribution from investments backing the insurance policies, were £65bn (2014: £82bn)£0.4bn (2015: £65bn) or £49bn (2014: £74bn)£0.2bn (2015: £49bn) after reinsurance. Of this insured risk, £55bn (2014: £69bn) or £43bn (2014: £66bn) after reinsurances was concentratedThe decrease in short-term insurance contractsthe maximum amounts payable is primarily due to BAGL which has been classified as held for sale in Africa.2016.

The impact to the income statement and equity under a reasonably possible change in the assumptions used to calculate the insurance liabilities would be £5m (2014: £8m)£2m (2015: £1m).

27 Provisions

 

 

Accounting for provisions

The Group applies IAS 37Provisions, Contingent Liabilities and Contingent Assetsin accounting fornon-financial liabilities.

 

Provisions are recognised for present obligations arising as consequences of past events where it is more likely than not that a transfer of economic benefit will be necessary to settle the obligation, which can be reliably estimated. Provision is made for the anticipated cost of restructuring, including redundancy costs when an obligation exists. This is the caseexists; for example, when the Group has a detailed formal plan for restructuring a business and has raised valid expectations in those affected by the restructuring by announcing its main features or starting to implement the plan. A provisionProvision is made for undrawn loan commitments if it is probable that the facility will be drawn and resultsresult in the recognition of an asset at an amount less than the amount advanced.

 

 

      Undrawn          Legal,                 Customer Redress          
    contractually    Customer redress     competition         

Onerous
contracts
£m
 
 
 
  


Redundancy
and
restructuring
£m
 
 
 
 
  




Undrawn
contractually
committed
facilities and
guarantees
£m
 
 
 
 
 
 
  


Payment
Protection
Insurance
£m
 
 
 
 
   


Other
customer
redress
£m
 
 
 
 
   




Legal,
competition
and
regulatory
matters

£m

 
 
 
 
 

 

   

Sundry
provisions
£m
 
 
 
   
Total
£m
 
 
   

 

 

Onerous

contracts

£m

  

  

  

  

 

 

 

Redundancy

and

restructuring

£m

  

  

  

  

  

 

 

 

committed

facilities and

guarantees

£m

  

  

  

  

  
 
 
 
Payment
Protection
Insurance
£m
  
  
  
  
   
 
 
 
Other
customer
redress
£m
  
  
  
  
   

 

 

 

and

regulatory

matters

£m

  

  

  

  

   

 

 

Sundry

provisions

£m

  

  

  

   

 

Total

£m

  

  

As at 1 January 2015   205   291   94   1,059     586     1,690     210     4,135  

As at 1 January 2016

   141  186  60  2,106    896    489    264    4,142 
Additions   120   190   25   2,200     821     1,559     177     5,092     328  336  52  1,000    297    212    206    2,431 
Amounts utilised   (42 (136 (2 (1,171   (440   (2,616   (49   (4,456   (39 (274 (1 (1,127   (396   (254   (84   (2,175
Unused amounts reversed   (149 (140 (37       (32   (136   (86   (580   (53 (60 (44      (93   (27   (36   (313
Exchange and other movements   7   (19 (20 18     (39   (8   12     (49   8  18          8    35    (20   49 
As at 31 December 2015   141   186   60   2,106     896     489     264     4,142  

As at 31 December 2016

   385  206  67  1,979    712    455    330    4,134 

Provisions expected to be recovered or settled within no more than 12 months after 31 December 20152016 were £2,113m (2014: £3,464m)£2,045m (2015: £2,113m).

270  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2016 Annual Report on Form 20-F


27 Provisionscontinued

Onerous contracts

Onerous contract provisions comprise an estimate of the costs involved with fulfilling the terms and conditions of contracts where the liability is higher than the amount of economic benefit to be received.

Redundancy and restructuring

These provisions comprise the estimated cost of restructuring, including redundancy costs where an obligation exists. Additions made during the year relate to formal restructuring plans and have either been utilised, or reversed, where total costs are now expected to be lower than the original provision amount.

Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  259


Notes to the financial statements

Accruals, provisions, contingent liabilities and legal proceedings

27 Provisionscontinued

Undrawn contractually committed facilities and guarantees

Provisions are made if it is probable that a facility will be drawn and the resulting asset is expected to have a realisable value that is less than the amount advanced.

Customer redress

Customer redress provisions comprise the estimated cost of making redress payments to customers, clients and counterparties for losses or damages associated with inappropriate judgement in the execution of our business activities. Provisions for other customer redress include £282m (2014: nil) in respect of Packaged Bank Accounts and £290m (2014: nil)£264m (2015: £290m) in respect of historic pricing practices associated with certain Foreign Exchange transactions for certain customers between 2005 and 2012, and smaller provisions across the retail and corporate businesses which are likely to be utilised withinin the next 12 months.

Sundry provisions

This category includes provisions that do not fit into any of the other categories, such as fraud losses and dilapidation provisions.

Legal, competition and regulatory matters

The Group is engaged in various legal, proceedings, bothcompetition and regulatory matters in the UK and US and a number of other overseas jurisdictions, including the US.jurisdictions. For further information in relation to legal proceedings and discussion of the associated uncertainties, please see Note 29 Legal, competition and regulatory matters.

Critical accounting estimates and judgements

Payment Protection Insurance redressRedress

As at 31 December 2015,2016, Barclays had recognised cumulative provisions totalling £7.4bn (2014: £5.2bn)£8.44bn (31 December 2015: £7.44bn) against the cost of Payment Protection Insurance (PPI) redress and associated processing costs with utilisation of £5.3bn (2014: £4.2bn)£6.46bn (31 December 2015: £5.33bn), leaving a residual provision of £2.1bn (2014: £1.1bn)£1.98bn (31 December 2015: £2.11bn).

Through to 31 December 2015, 1.6m (2014: 1.3m)2016, 1.8m (31 December 2015: 1.6m) customer initiated claimsaclaimsa had been received and processed. The volume of claims received during 20152016 decreased 9%8%b from 2014.2015. This rate of decline however was slower than previously recorded but in line with expectations.

The current provision reflects the estimated costs of PPI redress primarily relating to customer initiated complaints and ongoing remediation programmes. This also includes liabilities managed by third parties arising from portfolios previously sold where Barclays remains liable.

As at 31 December 2016, the provision of £2.0bn represents Barclays’ best estimate of expected duePPI redress. However, it is possible the eventual outcome may differ from the current estimate. We will continue to steady levelsreview the adequacy of claims from Claims Management Companies (CMC)provision level in particular.

During 2015 claims volumes continued to decline, but at a slower rate than had been projected at the startrespect of the year based on historic experience. As a result, management has revised upwards its estimateongoing level of future volumes and recognised additional provisions totalling £2.2bn during the year. The provision estimate reflects an assessment of the proposals contained in a consultation published by the FCA on 26 November 2015 which, if enacted, would impact on the timing and volume of future claims flow. This includes estimating the impact of a proposed 2018 complaint deadline and guidance on the impact of a 2014 UK Supreme Court judgment (Plevin vs Paragon Personal Finance Limited). The potential impact of these proposals is difficult to estimate and the outcome of the consultation is not yet known.complaints.

The PPI provision is calculated using a number of key assumptions which continue to involve significant management judgement and modelling:

 

§ customer initiated claim volumes – claims received but not yet processed plus an estimate of future claims initiated by customers where the volume is anticipated to decline over time

§proactive response rate – volume of claims in response to proactive mailing

§uphold rate – the percentage of claims that are upheld as being valid upon reviewcease after half year 2019

 

§ average claim redress – the expected average payment to customers for upheld claims based on the type and age of the policy/policies

 

§ processing cost per claim – the cost to Barclays of assessing and processing each valid claim.

These assumptions remain subjective, in particular due to the uncertainty associated with future claims levels, which include complaints driven by CMC activity.

The current provision represents Barclays’ revised best estimate of all future expected costs of PPI redress, however, it is possible the eventual outcome may differ from the current estimate. If this were to be material, the provision will be increased or decreased accordingly.redress.

The following table details by key assumption, actual data through to 31 December 2015,2016, key forecast assumptions used in the provision calculation and a sensitivity analysis illustrating the impact on the provision if the future expected assumptions prove too high or too low.

 

    Cumulative            Sensitivity analysis     Cumulative  
   actual to       Future       increase/decrease     actual to  

Assumption

   31.12.15         expected       in provision     31.12.14  

Customer initiated claims received and processeda

   1,570k     730kc     50k = £103m     1,300k  

Proactive mailing

   680k       150k       50k = £16m     680k  

Response rate to proactive mailing

   28%       26%       1% = £2m     28%  

Average uphold rate per claimc

   86%d     88%       1% = £18m     79%  

Average redress per valid claime

   £1,808       £1,810       £100 = £87m     £1,740  

Processing cost per claimf

   £300       £295       50k = £15m     £294  
 Assumption   

Cumulative
actual to
31.12.16
 
 
 
   
Future
expected
 
 
   



Sensitivity
analysis
increase/
decrease in
provision
 
 
 
 
 
   

Cumulative
actual to
31.12.15
 
 
 
 Customer initiated claims received and processeda   1,840k    650k    50k = £100m    1,570k 
 Average uphold rate per claimc   87%    83%    1% = £15m    86% 
 Average redress per valid claimd   £2,137    £1,950    £100 = £74m    £1,808 
 Processing cost per claime   £410    £350    50k = £17m    £300 

Notes

aTotal claims received directly by Barclays to date, including those received via CMCs but excluding those for which no PPI policy exists and excluding responses to proactive mailing.
bGross volumes received.received including no PPI.
cAverage uphold rate per claim excludescustomer initiated claims received directly by Barclays and proactive mailings, excluding those for which no PPI policy exists.
dAverage uphold rate adjusted to include full remediation.redress stated on a per policy basis for future customer initiated complaints received directly by Barclays and proactive mailings.
eChange in average uphold rate mainly due to increased remediation in 2015.
fProcessing cost per claim on an upheld complaints basis, includes direct staff costs and associated overheads.

 

260  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 20152016 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  271


Notes to the financial statements

Accruals, provisions, contingent liabilities and legal proceedings

 

 

28 Contingent liabilities and commitments

 

 

Accounting for contingent liabilities

Contingent liabilities are possible obligations whose existence will be confirmed only by uncertain future events, and present obligations where the transfer of economic resources is uncertain or cannot be reliably measured. Contingent liabilities are not recognised on the balance sheet but are disclosed unless the outflow of economic resources is remote.

 

 

The following table summarises the nominal principal amount of contingent liabilities and commitments which are not classified as on-balancerecorded on balance sheet:

 

   

 

2015

£m

  

  

   

 

2014

£m

  

  

   2016    2015 

Contingent liabilities and commitments excluding BAGL

   £m    £m 

Guarantees and letters of credit pledged as collateral security

   16,065     14,547     15,303    16,065 

Performance guarantees, acceptances and endorsements

   4,556     6,777     4,636    4,556 

Contingent liabilities

   20,621     21,324     19,939    20,621 

Documentary credits and other short-term trade related transactions

   845     1,091     1,005    845 

Forward starting reverse repurchase agreementsa

   93     13,856  

Forward starting reverse repurchase agreements

   24    93 

Standby facilities, credit lines and other commitments

   281,369       276,315     302,657    281,369 

The Financial Services Compensation Scheme

The Financial Services Compensation Scheme (the FSCS) is the UKUK’s government-backed compensation scheme for customers of authorised institutions that are unable to pay claims. It provides compensation to depositors in the event that UK licensed deposit-taking institutions are unable to meet their claims. The FSCS raises levies on UK licensed deposit-taking institutions to meet such claims based on their share of UK deposits on 31 December of the specified years preceding the scheme year (which runs from 1 April to 31 March).

Compensation has previously been paid out by the FSCS, funded by loan facilities totalling approximately £18bn provided by HM Treasury to the FSCS in support of FSCS’s obligations to the depositors of banks declared in default. The interest rate chargeable on the loan and levied to the industry is subject to a floor equal to the higher of HM Treasury’s own cost of borrowing (typically 2024 UK Gilt yield), and GBP LIBOR with12-month maturity plus a spread.100 basis points. The FSCS recovered £1bn capital shortfall in respect of the legacy facility from industry in three instalments across 2013, 2014 and 2015. A separate shortfall in respect of Dunfermline Building Society was levied on the industry in both 2014, 2015 and 2015.fully recovered in 2016. The FSCS liability for the interest and capital levy for 2015-2016 was2016/17 has been recognised and paid in 2015.2016. Barclays has included an accrual of £56m£55m in other liabilities as at

31 December 2015 (2014: £88m)2016 (2015: £56m) in respect of the Barclays’Barclays portion of the Interest Levy. Capital Levies for 2015/16 were recognised in 2015 and settled in the same year.

Further details on contingent liabilities relating to legal, and competition and regulatory matters can be found in Note 29.

29 Legal, competition and regulatory matters

Barclays PLC, (BPLC), Barclays Bank PLC (BBPLC) and the Group face legal, competition and regulatory challenges, many of which are beyond our control. The extent of the impact on BPLC, BBPLCBarclays PLC, Barclays Bank PLC and the Group of these matters cannot always be predicted but may materially impact our operations, financial results, condition and prospects. Matters arising from a set of similar circumstances can give rise to either a contingent liability or a provision, or both, depending on the relevant facts and circumstances. The Group has not disclosed an estimate of the potential financial effect on the Group of contingent liabilities where it is not currently practicable to do so.

Investigations into certain advisory services agreements and Civil Actioncivil action

The United Kingdom (UK) Serious Fraud Office (SFO), the Financial Conduct Authority (FCA) has alleged that BPLC and BBPLC breached their disclosure obligations in connection with two advisory services agreements entered into by BBPLC. The FCA has imposed a £50m fine. BPLC and BBPLC are contesting the findings. The UK Serious Fraud Office (SFO), the US Department of Justice (DOJ) and the US Securities and Exchange Commission (SEC) are also investigating these agreements.

Background Information

The FCA has investigatedhave been conducting investigations into certain agreements, including two advisory services agreements entered into by BBPLCBarclays Bank PLC.

Background Information

Barclays Bank PLC entered into two advisory services agreements with Qatar Holding LLC (Qatar Holding) in June and October 2008 respectively, and2008. The FCA subsequently commenced an investigation into whether these agreements may have related to BPLC’sBarclays PLC’s capital raisings in June and November 2008. The FCA issued warning notices (Warning Notices) against BPLC and BBPLC in September 2013.

2008 (the Capital Raisings). The existence of the June 2008 advisory services agreement entered into in June 2008 was disclosed, but the entry into the advisory services agreement in October 2008 and the fees payable under both agreements, which amountamounted to a total of £322m payable over a period of five years, were not disclosed in the announcements or public documents relating to the capital raisings in JuneCapital Raisings.

In September 2013, the FCA issued warning notices (the Notices) finding that while, Barclays PLC and November 2008. While the Warning Notices consider that BPLC and BBPLCBarclays Bank PLC believed at the time of the execution of the agreements that there should be at least some unspecified and undetermined value to be derived from the agreements, they state thatthem, the primary purpose of the agreements was not to obtain advisory services but to make additional payments, which would not be disclosed, for the Qatari participation in the capital raisings.

Capital Raisings. The Warning Notices concludeconcluded that BPLCBarclays PLC and BBPLCBarclays Bank PLC were in breach of certain disclosure-related listing rules and BPLCBarclays PLC was also in breach of Listing Principle 3 (the requirement to act with integrity towards holders and potential holders of the Company’s shares). In this regard, the FCA considers that BPLCBarclays PLC and BBPLCBarclays Bank PLC acted recklessly. The financial penalty provided in the Warning Notices against the Group is £50m. BPLCBarclays PLC and BBPLCBarclays Bank PLC continue to contest the findings.

Note

aForward starting reserve repurchase agreements were previously disclosed as loan commitments. Following the business designation of reverse repurchase and repurchase agreements at fair value through profit and loss new forward starting reverse repurchase agreements are within the scope of IAS 39 and are recognised as derivatives on the balance sheet.

Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  261


Notes to the financial statements

Accruals, provisions, contingent liabilities and legal proceedings

29 Legal, competition and regulatory matterscontinued

Recent Developments

The FCASFO has agreed that the FCA enforcement process be stayed pending progress in the SFO’salso been conducting an investigation into the agreements, referred to above, in respect of whichand the Group has received and has continuedcontinues to respond to requests for further information.information in that investigation, which is at an advanced stage. The FCA action has been stayed pending the resolution of the SFO investigation.

In addition, the DOJ and the SEC have been conducting investigations relating to the agreements.

In January 2016, PCP Capital Partners LLP and PCP International Finance Limited (PCP) served a claim on BBPLCBarclays Bank PLC seeking damages of £721.4m plus interest and costs for fraudulent misrepresentation and deceit, arising from alleged statements made by BBPLCBarclays Bank PLC to PCP in relation to the terms on which securities were to be issued to investors, including PCP, in the November 2008 capital raising. BBPLCBarclays Bank PLC is defending the claim.

Claimed Amounts/Financial Impact

It is not currently practicable to provide an estimate of the financial impact of the actions described on the Group or what effect that they might have upon the Group’s operating results, cash flows or financial position in any particular period. PCP has made a claim against BBPLCBarclays Bank PLC totalling £721.4m plus interest and costs. This amount does not necessarily reflect BBPLC’sBarclays Bank PLC’s potential financial exposure if a ruling were to be made against it.

272  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2016 Annual Report on Form 20-F


29 Legal, competition and regulatory matterscontinued

Investigations into certain business relationships

The DOJ and SEC are undertaking an investigation into whether the Group’s relationships with third parties who assist BPLCBarclays PLC to win or retain business are compliant with the US Foreign Corrupt Practices Act. Certain regulators in other jurisdictions have also been briefed on the investigations. Separately, the Group is cooperating with the DOJ and SEC in relation to an investigation into certain of its hiring practices in Asia and elsewhere and is keeping certain regulators in other jurisdictions informed.

Claimed Amounts/Financial Impact

It is not currently practicable to provide an estimate of the financial impact of the actions described on the Group or what effect that they might have upon the Group’s operating results, cash flows or financial position in any particular period.

Alternative Trading Systems and High-Frequency Trading

The SEC, the New York State Attorney General (NYAG), the FCA and regulators in certain other jurisdictions have been investigating a range of issues associated with alternative trading systems (ATSs), including dark pools, and the activities of high-frequency traders. Various parties, including the NYAG, have filed complaints against BPLC and Barclays Capital Inc. (BCI) and certain of the Group’s current and former officers in connection with ATS related activities. BPLC and BCI have settled with the NYAG and the SEC, and BCI continues to provide information to other relevant regulatory authorities in response to their enquiries. BPLC and BCI continue to defend against the class actions described below.

Background Information

Civil complaints have been filed in the New York Federal Court on behalf of a putative class of plaintiffs against BPLC and BCI and others generally alleging that the defendants violated the federal securities laws by participating in a scheme in which high-frequency trading firms were given informational and other advantages so that they could manipulate the US securities market to the plaintiffs’ detriment. These complaints were consolidated (Trader Class Action) and Barclays filed a motion to dismiss this action.

In June 2014, the NYAG filed a complaint (NYAG Complaint) against BPLCBarclays PLC and BCIBarclays Capital Inc. (BCI) in the Supreme Court of the State of New York (NY Supreme Court) alleging, amongst other things, that BPLCBarclays PLC and BCI engaged in fraud and deceptive practices in connection with LX, the Group’sSEC-registered ATS. In February 2016, Barclays reached separate settlement agreements with each of the SEC and the NYAG to resolve those agencies’ claims against Barclays PLC and BCI relating to the operation of LX for $35m each.

BPLCBarclays PLC and BCI have also been named in a purported class action by an institutional investor client under California law based on allegations similar to those in the NYAG Complaint. ThisIn October 2016, the federal court in California class action has been consolidated withgranted the Trader Class Action.motion of Barclays PLC and BCI to dismiss the entire complaint and plaintiffs have appealed the court’s decision.

Also, followingFollowing the filing of the NYAG Complaint, BPLCBarclays PLC and BCI were also named in a shareholder securities class action along with certain of its former CEOs, and its current and a former CFO, andas well as an employee in Equities Electronic Trading on the basis(Shareholder Class Action). The plaintiffs claim that investors suffered damages when their investments in Barclays American Depository Receipts declined in value as a result of the allegations in the NYAG Complaint. BPLCBarclays PLC and BCI filed a motion to dismiss the complaint, which the court granted in part and denied in part. In February 2016, the court granted plaintiffs’ motion to conductcertified the litigationaction as a class action.

Recent Developments

In August 2015, the Court granted Barclays’ motion to dismiss the Trader Class Action, and the plaintiffs have chosen not to appeal. Also in August 2015, the Court granted Barclays’ motion to dismiss the California class action, and later transferred that action to the Central District of California. The California class action plaintiffs have filed an amended complaint, which Barclays has filed a motion to dismiss.

On 1 February 2016, Barclays reached separate settlement agreements with each of the SEC and the NYAG to resolve those agencies’ claims against BPLC and BCI relating to the operation of LX for $35m each.appealed that certification.

Claimed Amounts/Financial Impact

The remaining complaintsclass actions seek unspecified monetary damages and injunctive relief. It is not currently practicable to provide an estimate of the financial impact of the matters in this sectionactions described on the Group or what effect that these mattersthey might have upon the Group’s operating results, cash flows or the Group’s financial position in any particular period.

262  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F


29 Legal, competition and regulatory matterscontinued

FERC

The US Federal Energy Regulatory Commission (FERC) has filed a civil action against BBPLCBarclays Bank PLC and certain of its former traders in the US District Court in California seeking to collect on an order assessing a $435m civil penalty and the disgorgement of $34.9m of profits, plus interest, in connection with allegations that BBPLCBarclays Bank PLC manipulated the electricity markets in and around California. The US Attorney’s Office in the Southern District of New York (SDNY) has informed BBPLC that it is looking into the same conduct at issue in the FERC matter, and aA civil class action complaint was also filed in the US District Court for the SDNYSouthern District of New York (SDNY) against BBPLCBarclays Bank PLC asserting antitrust claims based on allegations that mirror those raised in the civil suit filed by FERC.

Background Information

In October 2012, FERC issued an Order to Show Cause and Notice of Proposed Penalties (Order and Notice) against BBPLCBarclays Bank PLC and four of its former traders in relation to their power trading in the western US. In the Order and Notice, FERC asserted that BBPLCBarclays Bank PLC and its former traders violated FERC’s Anti-Manipulation Rule by manipulating the electricity markets in and around California from November 2006 to December 2008, and proposed civil penalties and profit disgorgement to be paid by BBPLC.Barclays Bank PLC.

In October 2013, FERC filed a civil action against BBPLCBarclays Bank PLC and its former traders in the US District Court in California seeking to collect the $435m civil penalty and disgorgement of $34.9m of profits, plus interest.

In September 2013, the criminal division of the US Attorney’s Office in SDNY advised BBPLC that it is looking at the same conduct at issue in the FERC matter.

In June 2015, a civil class action complaint was filed in the US District Court for the SDNY against BBPLCBarclays Bank PLC by Merced Irrigation District, a California utility company, asserting antitrust allegations in connection with BBPLC’sBarclays Bank PLC’s purported manipulation of the electricity markets in and around California. The factual allegations mirror those raised in the civil suitaction filed by FERC against BBPLCBarclays Bank PLC currently pending in the US District Court in California.

Recent Developments

In October 2015, the US District Court in California ordered that it would bifurcate its assessment of liabilities and penalties from its assessment of disgorgement. FERC has filed and BBPLCBarclays Bank PLC is opposing a brief seeking summary affirmance of the penalty assessment. The court has indicated that it will either affirm the penalty assessment or require further evidence to determine this issue.

BBPLC has appealed Oral argument on the bifurcation ordermotion to affirm the US Court of Appeals for the Ninth Circuit and has also filed a motion with the US District Courtpenalty assessment occurred in California to stay the proceedings pending the outcome of the appeal.February 2017.

In December 2015, BBPLCBarclays Bank PLC filed a motion to dismiss the civil class action for failure to state a claim.claim, which the SDNY in February 2016 granted in part and denied in part.

Claimed Amounts/Financial Impact

FERC has made claims against BBPLC and certain of its former tradersBarclays Bank PLC totalling $469.9m, plus interest, for civil penalties and profit disgorgement. The civil class action complaint refers to damages of $139.3m. These amounts do not necessarily reflect BBPLC’sBarclays Bank PLC’s potential financial exposure if a ruling were to be made against it in either action.

Investigations into LIBOR and other Benchmarks

Regulators and law enforcement agencies, including certain competition authorities, from a number of governments have been conducting investigations relating to BBPLC’sBarclays Bank PLC’s involvement in manipulating certain financial benchmarks, such as LIBOR and EURIBOR. BBPLC, BPLCBarclays Bank PLC, Barclays PLC and BCI have reached settlements with the relevant law enforcement agency or regulator in certain of the investigations, but others, including the investigations by the US State Attorneys General, the SFO and the prosecutors’ office in Trani, Italy remain pending.

Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2016 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  273


Notes to the financial statements

Accruals, provisions, contingent liabilities and legal proceedings

29 Legal, competition and regulatory matterscontinued

Background Information

In June 2012, BBPLCBarclays Bank PLC announced that it had reached settlements with the Financial Services Authority (FSA) (as predecessor to the FCA), the US Commodity Futures Trading Commission (CFTC) and the DOJ Fraud Section(DOJ-FS) in relation to their investigations concerning certain benchmark interest rate submissions, and BBPLCBarclays Bank PLC agreed to pay total penalties of £290m. The settlement with theDOJ-FS was made by entry into aNon-Prosecution Agreement (LIBOR NPA)(NPA) which has now expired. In addition, BBPLCBarclays Bank PLC was granted conditional leniency from the DOJ Antitrust Division(DOJ-AD) in connection with potential US antitrust law violations with respect to financial instruments that reference EURIBOR. The DOJ granted final leniency to Barclays Bank PLC in May 2016.

Investigations bySettlements with the US State Attorneys General and the Swiss Competition Commission

Following the settlements announced in June 2012, a group of 31 US State Attorneys General (SAGs) commenced its own investigationinvestigations into LIBOR, EURIBOR and the Tokyo Interbank Offered Rate. The Group has cooperatedIn August 2016, Barclays Bank PLC, BCI and 44 SAGs entered into a settlement agreement resolving the claims of those SAGs (and those of any other SAG who joined the settlement within 60 days) with respect to the matters subject to the investigations. Barclays agreed among other things to make payments totalling $100m to the SAGs in connection with the investigation throughout and issettlement.

In December 2016, a settlement in advanced discussionsthe sum of CHF29.8m was reached with the SAGs about potential resolution.Swiss Competition Commission relating to its investigation into EURIBOR-related conduct.

Investigation by the SFO

In July 2012, the SFO announced that it had decided to investigate the LIBOR matter, in respect of which BBPLCBarclays Bank PLC has received and continues to respond to requests for information. The SFO’s investigation, including in respect of Barclays Bank PLC, continues.

For a discussion of civil litigation arising in connection with these investigations see ‘LIBOR and other Benchmarks Civil Actions’.

Claimed Amounts/Financial Impact

Aside from the settlements discussed above, it is not currently practicable to provide an estimate of the financial impact of the actions described on the Group or what effect that they might have upon the Group’s operating results, cash flows or financial position in any particular period.

Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  263


Notes to the financial statements

Accruals, provisions, contingent liabilities and legal proceedings

29 Legal, competition and regulatory matterscontinued

LIBOR and other Benchmark Civil Actions

Following the settlements of the investigations referred to above in ‘Investigations into LIBOR and other Benchmarks’, a number of individuals and corporates in a range of jurisdictions have threatened or brought civil actions against the Group in relation to LIBOR and/or other benchmarks. While several of such cases have been dismissed and certain have settled subject to approval from the court (and in the case of class actions, the right of class members toopt-out of the settlement and to seek to file their own claims), other actions remain pending and their ultimate impact is unclear.

Background Information

A number of individuals and corporates in a range of jurisdictions have threatened or brought civil actions against the Group and other banks in relation to manipulation of LIBOR and/or other benchmark rates.

USD LIBOR Cases in MDL Court

The majority of the USD LIBOR cases, which have been filed in various US jurisdictions, have been consolidated forpre-trial purposes before a single judge in the SDNY (MDL Court).

The complaints are substantially similar and allege, amongst other things, that BBPLCBarclays Bank PLC and the other banks individually and collectively violated provisions of the US Sherman Antitrust Act (Antitrust Act), the Commodity Exchange Act (CEA), the US Racketeer Influenced and Corrupt Organizations Act (RICO) and various state laws by manipulating USD LIBOR rates.

The lawsuits seek unspecified damages with the exception of five lawsuits, in which the plaintiffs are seeking a combined total in excess of $1.25bn in actual damages against all defendants, including BBPLC,Barclays Bank PLC, plus punitive damages. Some of the lawsuits also seek trebling of damages under the US Sherman Antitrust Act and RICO.

The proposed class actions purportpurported to be brought on behalf of (amongst others) plaintiffs that (i) engaged in USD LIBOR-linkedover-the-counter transactions (OTC Class); (ii) purchased USD LIBOR-linked financial instruments on an exchange (Exchange-Based Class); (iii) purchased USD LIBOR-linked debt securities (Debt Securities Class); (iv) purchased adjustable rateadjustable-rate mortgages linked to USD LIBOR (Homeowner Class); or (v) issued loans linked to USD LIBOR (Lender Class).

In August 2012 the MDL Court stayed all newly filed proposed class actions and individual actions (Stayed Actions), so that the MDL Court could address the motions pending in three lead proposed class actions (Lead Class Actions) and three lead individual actions (Lead Individual Actions).

In March 2013, August 2013 and June 2014, the MDL Court issued a series of decisions effectively dismissing the majority of claims against BBPLCBarclays Bank PLC and other panel bank defendants in the Leadthree lead proposed class actions (Lead Class ActionsActions) and Leadthree lead individual actions (Lead Individual Actions.Actions).

As a result, the:

§Debt Securities Class was dismissed entirely

§claims of the Exchange-Based Class were limited to claims under the CEA

§claims of the OTC Class were limited to claims for unjust enrichment and breach of the implied covenant of good faith and fair dealing.

The Debt Securities Class has appealed the dismissal of their action to the US Court of Appeals for the Second Circuit (Second Circuit). Multiple other plaintiffs in the litigation beforeIn July 2014, the MDL Court also joined the appeal, which has been briefed and argued. A decision is pending.

Additionally, the MDL Court has begun to address the claims inallowed the Stayed Actions manyto proceed and a number of which, including state law fraudplaintiffs filed amended complaints. The MDL Court subsequently dismissed a number of Lead Individual Action claims and tortious interference claims, were not assertedall Homeowner Class and Lender Class claims. In May 2016, the appeal court reversed the MDL Court’s holding that plaintiffs in the Lead Class Actions. As a result, in October 2014,Actions, including the direct action plaintiffs (those who have brought suits individually rather than as part of a class action) filed their amended complaintsDebt Securities Class, and in November 2014,Lead Individual Actions had not suffered an injury under the defendants filed their motions to dismiss. In August 2015,Antitrust Act, and remanded the antitrust claims for the MDL Court granted in partCourt’s further consideration of those claims and denied in part the motion to dismiss the direct action plaintiffs’ claims. Althoughrelated issues. Following further consideration, the MDL Court dismissed a numberthe majority of antitrust claims on various grounds, a numberagainst foreign defendants, including Barclays Bank PLC, for lack of state law claims will proceedpersonal jurisdiction. Certain plaintiffs have sought leave to discovery.

In November 2014, the plaintiffs in the Lender Class and Homeowner Class actions filed their amended complaints. In January 2015, the defendants filed their motions to dismiss. In November 2015,move the MDL Court granted in partto reconsider its decision, and denied in part the motionscertain defendants, including Barclays Bank PLC, have sought leave to move to dismiss these actions, dismissing all claims against BBPLC brought by the Homeowner Class and reserving judgment with respect to the claims asserted by the Lender Class. In December 2015, the MDL Court approved a schedule for litigation of class certification issues, with the associated discovery beginning in 2016 and extending through 2017.

Until there are further decisions, the ultimate impactcertain of the MDL Court’s decisions will be unclear, although it is possible that the decisions will be interpreted by the courts to affect other litigation, including the actions described further below, some of which concern different benchmark interest rates.remaining antitrust claims.

In December 2014, the MDL Court granted preliminary approval for the settlement of the remaining Exchange-Based Class claims for $20m. Final approval of the settlement is awaiting plaintiff’s submission of a plan for allocation of the settlement proceeds acceptable to the MDL Court.Court and will be subject to the right of class members toopt-out of the settlement and to seek to file their own claims.

In November 2015, the outstanding OTC Class claims were settled for $120m. The settlement is subject to approvalwas preliminarily approved by the MDL Court.court in December 2016, but remains subject to final court approval and the right of class members toopt-out of the settlement and to seek to file their own claims.

In November 2016, a settlement was agreed with respect to the Debt Securities Class claims. As the plaintiffs have not yet sought court approval of the settlement, the amount (which Barclays does not consider to be material to the Group) has not yet been publicly disclosed.

 

264274  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 20152016 Annual Report on Form 20-F  


    

    

    

 

 

29 Legal, competition and regulatory matterscontinued

EURIBOR CasesCase in the SDNY

In February 2013, a EURIBOR-related class action was filed against BPLC, BBPLC,Barclays PLC, Barclays Bank PLC, BCI and other EURIBOR panel banks.banks in the SDNY. The plaintiffs assertasserted antitrust, CEA, RICO, and unjust enrichment claims. In particular, BBPLC is allegedclaims relating to have conspired with other EURIBOR panel banks to manipulate EURIBOR. The lawsuit is brought on behalf of purchasers and sellers of NYSE LIFFE EURIBOR futures contracts, purchasers of Euro currency-related futures contracts and purchasers of other derivative contracts (such as interest rate swaps and forward rate agreements that are linked to EURIBOR) during the period 1 June 2005 through 31 March 2011.manipulation. In October 2015, the class action was settled for $94m subject to court approval. The settlement has been preliminarily approved by the court but remains subject to final approval.

Securities Fraud Case inapproval and the SDNYright of class members toopt-out

BPLC, BBPLC of the settlement and BCI were also named as defendants along with four former officers and directors of BBPLC in a securities class action in the SDNY in connection with BBPLC’s role as a contributor panel bank to LIBOR. The complaint principally alleged that BBPLC’s Annual Reports for the years 2006seek to 2011 contained misstatements and omissions and that BBPLC’s daily USD LIBOR submissions constituted false statements in violation of US securities law. In November 2015, the class action was settled for $14m. The settlement has been preliminarily approved by the court but remains subject to final approval.file their own claims.

Additional USD LIBOR Case in the SDNY

An additional individual action was commenced in February 2013 in the SDNY against BBPLCBarclays Bank PLC and other panel bank defendants. The plaintiff alleged that the panel bank defendants conspired to increase USD LIBOR, which caused the value of bonds pledged as collateral for a loan to decrease, ultimately resulting in the sale of the bonds at a low point in the market. The panel bank defendants moved to dismiss the action, and the motion was granted inIn April 2015. In June 2015, the plaintiff sought leavecourt dismissed the action. The plaintiff’s motion to file a further amended complaint; that motioncomplaint is pending.

Sterling LIBOR CasesCase in SDNY

In May 2015, a putative class action was commenced in the SDNY against BBPLCBarclays Bank PLC and other Sterling LIBOR panel banks by a plaintiff involved in exchange-traded andover-the-counter derivatives that were linked to Sterling LIBOR. The complaint alleges, among other things, that BBPLCBarclays Bank PLC and other panel banks manipulated the Sterling LIBOR rate between 2005 and 2010 and, in so doing, committed CEA, antitrust,Antitrust Act, and RICO violations. Proceedings are ongoing.

In Januaryearly 2016, this class action was consolidated with an additional putative class action concerning Sterling LIBOR was commenced in the SDNYmaking similar allegations against BBPLCBarclays Bank PLC and BCI as well asand other Sterling LIBOR panel banks. This additional class action similarly alleges manipulation of the Sterling LIBOR rate between 2005 and 2010, and asserts claims for violations of the CEA, antitrust, and RICO statutes, as well as common law violations. Proceedings are ongoing.Defendants have filed a motion to dismiss.

Complaint in the US District Court for the Central District of California

In July 2012, a purportedputative class action complaint in the US District Court for the Central District of California was amended to include allegations related to USD LIBOR and names BBPLCBarclays Bank PLC as a defendant. The amended complaint was filed on behalf of a purportedputative class that includes holders of adjustable rate mortgages linked to USD LIBOR. In January 2015, the court granted BBPLC’sBarclays Bank PLC’s motion for summary judgmentjudgement and dismissed all of the remaining claims against BBPLC.Barclays Bank PLC. The plaintiff has appealed the court’s decision to the US Court of Appeals for the Ninth Circuit.dismissal was affirmed on appeal in December 2016.

Japanese Yen LIBOR CaseCases in SDNY

A putative class action was commenced in April 2012 in the SDNY against BBPLCBarclays Bank PLC and other Japanese Yen LIBOR panel banks by a plaintiff involved in exchange-traded derivatives. The complaint also names members of the Japanese Bankers Association’s Euroyen Tokyo Interbank Offered Rate (Euroyen TIBOR) panel, of which BBPLCBarclays Bank PLC is not a member. The complaint alleges, amongst other things, manipulation of the Euroyen TIBOR and Yen LIBOR rates and breaches of the CEA and US Sherman Antitrust Act between 2006 and 2010. In March 2014, the court dismissed the plaintiff’s antitrust claims in full, but sustained the plaintiff’s CEA claims. The plaintiff moved for leave to file a third amended complaint adding additional claims, including a RICO claim, which was denied in March 2015. Theare pending. Plaintiff has sought an immediate appeal of that decision,amended the pleadings to extend the putative class period, and that request is pending. Discovery is continuing.defendants have filed a partial motion to dismiss claims arising during the extended period.

In July 2015, a second putative class action concerning Yen LIBOR was filed in the SDNY against BPLC, BBPLCBarclays PLC, Barclays Bank PLC and BCI. The complaint names members of the Yen LIBOR panel, the Euroyen TIBOR panel, and certain of their affiliates and brokers. The complaint alleges breaches of the US Sherman Antitrust Act and RICO between 2006 and 2010 based on factual allegations that are substantially similar to those in the April 2012 class action. Defendants have filed a motion to dismiss.

SIBOR/SOR Case in the SDNY

A putative class action was commenced in July 2016 in the SDNY against Barclays PLC, Barclays Bank PLC, BCI, and other defendants, alleging manipulation of the Singapore Interbank Offered Rate (SIBOR) and Singapore Swap Offer Rate (SOR). The complaint alleges, amongst other things, manipulation of the SIBOR and SOR rates and breaches of the Antitrust Act and RICO between 2007 and 2011. Defendants filed motions to dismiss.

Non-US Benchmarks Cases

In addition to US actions, legal proceedings have been brought or threatened against the Group in connection with alleged manipulation of LIBOR and EURIBOR in a number of jurisdictions. The number of such proceedings innon-US jurisdictions, the benchmarks to which they relate, and the jurisdictions in which they may be brought have increased over time.

Claimed Amounts/Financial Impact

Aside from the settlements discussed above, it is not currently practicable to provide an estimate of the financial impact of the actions described on the Group or what effect that they might have onupon the Group’s operating results, cash flows or financial position in any particular period.

Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  265


Notes to the financial statements

Accruals, provisions, contingent liabilities and legal proceedings

29 Legal, competition and regulatory matterscontinued

Foreign Exchange Investigations

Various regulatory and enforcement authorities have been investigating a range of issues associated with Foreign Exchange sales and trading, including electronic trading. Certain of these investigations involve multiple market participants in various countries. The Group has reached settlements with the CFTC, the DOJ, the New York State Department of Financial Services (NYDFS), the Board of Governors of the Federal Reserve System (Federal Reserve) and the FCA (together, the 2015 Resolving Authorities) and the Administrative Council for Economic Defence in Brazil with respect to certain of these investigations as further described below. The South African Competition Commission (SACC) has initiated proceedings before the South African Competition Tribunal (Tribunal). Investigations by the European Commission (Commission), the Administrative Council for Economic Defence in Brazil and the South African Competition Commission,DOJ, amongst others, remain pending.

Background Information

In May 2015, the Group announced that it had reached settlements with the 2015 Resolving Authorities in relation to investigations into certain sales and trading practices in the Foreign Exchange market, that it hadmarket. In connection with these settlements, the Group agreed to pay total penalties of approximately $2.38bn, including a $60m penalty imposed by the DOJ as a consequence ofand to undertake certain practices continuing after entry into the LIBOR NPA, and that BPLC had agreed to plead guilty to a violation of US anti-trust law.remedial actions.

Under the plea agreement with the DOJ, BPLC agreedin addition to pay a criminal fine, of $650m andBarclays PLC agreed to a term of probation of three years from the date of the final judgment in respect of the plea agreement during which BPLCBarclays PLC must, amongst other things, (i) commit no crime whatsoever in violation of the federal laws of the United States,US, (ii) implement and continue to implement a compliance program designed to prevent and detect the conduct that gave rise to the plea agreement and (iii) strengthen its compliance and internal controls as required by relevant regulatory or enforcement agencies. In January 2017, the US District Court for the District of Connecticut accepted the plea agreement and in accordance with the agreement sentenced Barclays PLC to pay $650m as a fine and $60m for violating the NPA (which amounts are part of the $2.38bn referred to above) and to serve three years of probation from the date of the sentencing order. The Group also continues to provide relevant information to certain of the 2015 Resolving Authorities.

Pursuant

Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2016 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  275


Notes to the settlement with the CFTC, BBPLC consented to, among other things, pay a civil monetary penalty of $400m.financial statements

Pursuant to its settlement with the Federal Reserve, BBPLCAccruals, provisions, contingent liabilities and BBPLC’s New York branch consented to an order imposing a civil monetary penalty of $342mlegal proceedings

29 Legal, competition and ordering BBPLC and BBPLC’s New York branch to submit in writing to the Federal Reserve Bank of New York for its approval certain programs to enhance internal controls and compliance. Under the Federal Reserve order, BBPLC and its institution-affiliated parties must not in the future directly or indirectly retain certain individuals who participated in the misconduct underlying the order.

Pursuant to the settlement with the NYDFS, BBPLC and BBPLC’s New York branch consented to an order imposing a civil monetary penalty of $485m and requiring BBPLC and BBPLC’s New York branch to take all steps necessary to terminate four identified employees. BBPLC and BBPLC’s New York branch must also continue to engage the independent monitor previously selected by the NYDFS to conduct a comprehensive review of certain compliance programs, policies, and procedures.

The FCA issued a Final Notice and imposed a financial penalty of £284m on BBPLC.regulatory matterscontinued

The full text of the DOJ plea agreement, the orders of the CFTC, NYDFS and Federal Reserve, orders, and the FCA Final Notice issued by the FCA related to the settlements referred to above are publicly available on the 2015 Resolving Authorities’ respective websites.

The settlementsIn December 2016 the Group reached a settlement with the Administrative Council for Economic Defence in May 2015 did not encompass ongoing investigations of electronic trading in theBrazil regarding its investigation into certain Foreign Exchange market.trading conduct. The Group is cooperating with certain authorities which continueagreed to investigate sales and trading practicesa penalty of various sales and trading personnel, including Foreign Exchange personnel, among multiple market participants, including BBPLC, in various countries.approximately £4.9m as part of the settlement agreement.

TheAn investigation by the FCA is also investigatinginto historic pricing practices by BBPLCBarclays Bank PLC associated with certain Foreign Exchange transactions forwas discontinued in December 2016. Barclays Bank PLC has initiated a customer remediation program and is keeping the FCA informed on its progress.

The DOJ is also conducting an investigation into conduct relating to certain customers between 2005trading activities in connection with certain transactions during 2011 and 2012. BBPLCBarclays is cooperatingproviding information to the DOJ and other relevant authorities reviewing this conduct.

In February 2017 the SACC referred Barclays Bank PLC, BCI and Absa Bank Limited, a subsidiary of Barclays Africa Group Limited, among other banks, to the Tribunal to be prosecuted for breaches of South African antitrust law related to Foreign Exchange trading of South African Rand. The SACC found from its investigation that, from at least 2007, the banks had engaged in various forms of collusive behaviour. Barclays was the first to bring the conduct to the attention of the SACC under its leniency programme and has cooporated with, and will continue to cooperate with, the FCA regardingSACC in relation to this matter. The SACC is therefore not seeking an order from the proposed terms and timing for appropriate customer redress.Tribunal to impose any fine on Barclays Bank PLC, BCI or Absa Bank Limited.

For a discussion of civil litigation arising in connection with these investigations see ‘Civil Actions in Respectrespect of Foreign Exchange Trading’Exchange’ below.

Recent Developments

In November 2015, BBPLC announced that it had reached a settlement with the NYDFS in respect of its investigation into BBPLC and BBPLC’s New York branch electronic trading of Foreign Exchange and Foreign Exchange trading systems in the period between 2009 to 2014. Pursuant to the settlement the NYDFS imposed a civil monetary penalty of $150m, primarily for certain internal systems and controls failures. The Group continues to cooperate with other ongoing investigations.

Claimed Amounts/Financial Impact

The fines in connection withprovision for the May 2015 settlements with the Resolving Authorities were covered by the Group’s provisions of £2.05bn.

A provision of £290m in redress costs for certain customers was recognised in Q3 2015 in relationcustomer remediation program relating to the FCA investigation into historic pricing practices by BBPLCBarclays Bank PLC associated with certain Foreign Exchange transactions referred to above. Itabove was £264m as of 31 December 2016 (see Provisions Note 27). Aside from the settlements discussed above it is not currently practicable to provide an estimate of any further financial impact of the actions described on the Group or what effect they might have on the Group’s operating results, cash flows or financial position in any particular period.

266  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F


29 Legal, competition and regulatory matterscontinued

Civil Actions in respect of Foreign Exchange

SinceBackground Information

A number of individuals and corporates in a range of jurisdictions have threatened or brought civil actions against the Group and other banks in relation to Foreign Exchange or may do so in future. Certain of these cases have been dismissed or have been settled subject to approval from the relevant court (and in the case of class actions, the right of class members toopt-out of the settlement and to seek to file their own claims).

Consolidated FX Action

Beginning in November 2013, a number of civil actions have beenwere filed in the SDNY on behalf of proposed classes of plaintiffs alleging manipulation of Foreign Exchange markets under the US Sherman Antitrust Act and New York state law and naming several international banks as defendants, including BBPLC.Barclays Bank PLC. In February 2014, the SDNY combined all then-pending actions alleging a class of US persons in a single consolidated action. Settlements have been agreed with certain proposed classes of plaintiffs inaction (Consolidated FX Action). In September 2015, Barclays Bank PLC and BCI settled the consolidated class actionConsolidated FX Action for $384m. The settlement itself is subject to final court approval. The remaining proceedings are ongoing.approval and the right of class members toopt-out of the settlement and to seek to file their own claims.

ERISA FX Action

Since February 2015, several additionalother civil actions have been filed in the SDNY on behalf of proposed classes of plaintiffs alleging injuriespurporting to allege different legal theories of injury (other than those alleged in the Consolidated FX Action) related to Barclays’ alleged manipulation of Foreign Exchange rates and naming several international banks as defendants, including BPLC, BBPLCBarclays PLC, Barclays Bank PLC and BCI. One of the newly filed actionssuch consolidated action asserts claims under the US Employee Retirement Income Security Act (ERISA) statute (ERISA Claims) and includes allegations of conduct that are duplicative of allegations in the other cases, as well as additional allegations about Foreign Exchange sales practices and ERISA plans. The Court has ruled that the ERISA allegations concerning collusive manipulation of FX rates are covered by the settlement agreement in the Consolidated FX Action, but has not ruled on whether allegations characterised by the ERISA plaintiffs asnon-collusive manipulation of FX rates are likewise covered by the agreement. In September 2016, the Court dismissed all claims (based on both alleged collusive andnon-collusive conduct) in the ERISA Claims against Barclays and all other defendants as a matter of law. The ERISA plaintiffs have appealed this decision.

Retail Basis Action

Another action was filed in the Northern District of California (and subsequently transferred to the SDNY) against several international banks, including Barclays PLC and BCI, on behalf of a putative class of individuals that exchanged currencies on a retail basis at bank branches.branches (Retail Basis Claims). The Court has ruled that the Retail Basis Claims are not covered by the settlement agreement in the Consolidated FX Action. Barclays has moved to dismiss the Retail Basis Claims as a matter of law.

Recent DevelopmentsLast Look Actions

In September 2015, BBPLC and BCI settled with certain proposed classes of plaintiffs in the consolidated action for $384m subject to court approval.

In addition, in November 2015 and December 2015, two additional civil actions were filed in the SDNY on behalf of proposed classes of plantiffsplaintiffs alleging injuries based on Barclays’ purported improper rejection of customer trades through Barclays’Barclays Last Look system. In February 2016, BBPLCBarclays Bank PLC and BCI agreed a settlement with plaintiffs insettled one of the actions for $50m on a class-wide basis subjectbasis. (The other action was voluntarily dismissed.) Class members have the right to court approval. The amountopt-out of the proposed settlement is $50m. and to seek to file their own claims.

ETF FX Action

In FebruarySeptember 2016, the plaintiffsanother action was filed in the secondSDNY under federal, New York and California law on behalf of proposed classes of stockholders of Exchange Traded Funds and others who supposedly were indirect investors in FX Instruments. Barclays will move to dismiss this action voluntarily dismissed their claims.as a matter of law or, alternatively, to enjoin the claims as covered by the settlement agreement in the Consolidated FX Action.

Canadian FX Action

Similar civil actions to the Consolidated FX Action have been filed in Canadian courts on behalf of proposed classes of plaintiffs containing similar factual allegations of manipulation of Foreign Exchange rates as in the US actions and of damages resulting from such manipulation in violation of Canadian law.

Claimed Amounts/Financial Impact

Aside from the settlements discussed above, the financial impact of the actions described on the Group or what effect that they might have upon the Group’s operating results, cash flows or financial position in any particular period is currently uncertain.

ISDAFIX Investigation

Regulators and law enforcement agencies, including the CFTC, have conducted separate investigations into historical practices with respect to ISDAFIX, amongst other benchmarks.

276  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2016 Annual Report on Form 20-F


In May 2015, the CFTC entered into a settlement order with BPLC, BBPLC and BCI pursuant to which BPLC, BBPLC and BCI agreed to pay a civil monetary penalty of $115m in connection with the CFTC’s industry-wide investigation into the setting of the US Dollar ISDAFIX benchmark. In addition, the CFTC order requires BPLC, BBPLC and BCI to cease and desist from violating provisions of the CEA, fully cooperate with the CFTC in related investigations and litigation and undertake certain remediation efforts to the extent not already undertaken.

Investigations by other regulators and law enforcement agencies remain pending. For a discussion of civil litigation arising in connection with these investigations see ‘Civil Actions in Respect of ISDAFIX’ below.

Claimed Amounts/Financial Impact29 Legal, competition and regulatory matterscontinued

The fine in connection with the May 2015 settlement with the CFTC was covered by the Group’s provisions of £2.05bn.

It is not currently practicable to provide an estimate of any further financial impact of the actions described on the Group or what effect they might have on the Group’s operating results, cash flows or financial position in any particular period.

Civil Actions in respect of ISDAFIX

SinceBeginning in September 2014, a number of ISDAFIX related civil actions have beenwere filed in the SDNY on behalf of a proposed class of plaintiffs, alleging that BBPLC,Barclays Bank PLC, a number of other banks and one broker, violated the US Sherman Antitrust Act and several state laws by engaging in a conspiracy to manipulate the USD ISDAFIX. AThose actions, which were consolidated amended complaint was filed in February 2015.2015, arose in connection with certain regulatory and law enforcement agencies’ investigations into historical practices with respect to ISDAFIX.

In April 2016, Barclays Bank PLC and BCI entered into a settlement agreement with plaintiffs to resolve the consolidated action for $30m, fully resolving all ISDAFIX-related claims that were or could have been brought by the class. In May 2016, the court preliminarily approved the settlement, which remains subject to final approval and to the right of class members toopt-out of the settlement and to seek to file their own claims.

Claimed Amounts/Financial Impact

ItAside from the settlements discussed above, it is not currently practicable to provide an estimate of theany further financial impact of the actions described on the Group or what effect that they might have upon the Group’s operating results, cash flows or financial position in any particular period.

Precious Metals Investigation

BBPLCBarclays Bank PLC has been providing information to the DOJ, the CFTC and other authorities in connection with investigations into precious metals and precious metals-based financial instruments.

For a discussion of civil litigation arising in connection with these investigations see ‘Civil Actions in Respectrespect of the Gold Fix’ below.

Claimed Amounts/Financial Impact

It is not currently practicable to provide an estimate of the financial impact of the actions described on the Group or what effect that they might have upon the Group’s operating results, cash flows or financial position in any particular period.

Civil Actions in respect of the Gold Fix

Since March 2014, a number of civil complaints have been filed in US Federal Courts, each on behalf of a proposed class of plaintiffs, alleging that BBPLCBarclays Bank PLC and other members of The London Gold Market Fixing Ltd. manipulated the prices of gold and gold derivative contracts in violation of the CEA, the US Sherman Antitrust Act, and state antitrust and consumer protection laws. All of the complaints have been transferred to the SDNY and consolidated for pre-trialpretrial purposes. In April 2015, defendants

A similar civil action has been filed in Canadian courts on behalf of a motion to dismissproposed class of plaintiffs containing similar factual allegations of the claims. Proceedings are ongoing.manipulation of the prices of gold in violation of Canadian law.

Claimed Amounts/Financial Impact

It is not currently practicable to provide an estimate of the financial impact of the actions described on the Group or what effect that they might have upon the Group’s operating results, cash flows or financial position in any particular period.

Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  267


Notes to the financial statements

Accruals, provisions, contingent liabilities and legal proceedings

29 Legal, competition and regulatory matterscontinued

US Residential and Commercial Mortgage-related Activity and Litigation

The Group’s activities within the US residential mortgage sector during the period from 2005 through 2008 included:

 

§ sponsoring and underwriting of approximately $39bn of private-label securitisationssecuritisations;

 

§ economic underwriting exposure of approximately $34bn for other private-label securitisationssecuritisations;

 

§ sales of approximately $0.2bn of loans to government sponsored enterprises (GSEs);

 

§ sales of approximately $3bn of loans to othersothers; and

 

§ sales of approximately $19.4bn of loans (net of approximately $500m of loans sold during this period and subsequently repurchased) that were originated and sold to third parties by mortgage originator affiliates of an entity that the Group acquired in 2007 (Acquired Subsidiary).

Throughout this time period affiliates of the Group engaged in secondary market trading of US residential mortgaged-backed securities (RMBS) and US commercial mortgage-backed securities (CMBS), and such trading activity continues today.

In connection with its loan sales and certain private-label securitisations, on 31 December 2015,2016, the Group had unresolved repurchase requests relating to loans with a principal balance of approximately $2.3bn$2.2bn at the time they were sold, and civil actions have been commenced by various parties alleging that the Group must repurchase a substantial number of such loans.

In addition, the Group is party to a number of lawsuitslawsuit filed by purchasersa purchaser of RMBS asserting statutory and/or common law claims. The current outstanding face amount of RMBS related to these pending claims against the Group as of 31 December 20152016 was approximately $0.4bn.$0.1bn.

Regulatory and governmental authorities, including amongst others, the DOJ, SEC, Special Inspector General for the US Troubled Asset Relief Program (SIGTARP), the US Attorney’s Office for the District of Connecticut and the US Attorney’s Office for the Eastern District of New York (EDNY) have initiatedbeen conducting wide-ranging investigations into market practices involving mortgage-backed securities, and the Group is cooperating with severalthose investigations. In December 2016, the DOJ filed a civil complaint against Barclays in the US District Court for the EDNY containing a number of those investigations.allegations, including mail and wire fraud, relating to mortgage-backed securities sold between 2005 and 2007. The complaint seeks, amongst other relief, unspecified monetary penalties. Barclays is defending the complaint.

RMBS Repurchase Requests

Background Information

The Group was the sole provider of various loan-level representations and warranties (R&Ws) with respect to:

 

§ approximately $5bn of Group sponsored securitisationssecuritisations;

 

§ approximately $0.2bn of sales of loans to GSEsGSEs; and

 

§ approximately $3bn of loans sold to others.

Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2016 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  277


Notes to the financial statements

Accruals, provisions, contingent liabilities and legal proceedings

29 Legal, competition and regulatory matterscontinued

In addition, the Acquired Subsidiary provided R&Ws on all of the $19.4bn of loans it sold to third parties.

R&Ws on the remaining Group sponsored securitisations were primarily provided by third-party originators directly to the securitisation trusts with a Group subsidiary, such as the depositor for the securitisation, providing more limited R&Ws. There are no stated expiration provisions applicable to most R&Ws made by the Group, the Acquired Subsidiary or these third parties.

Under certain circumstances, the Group and/or the Acquired Subsidiary may be required to repurchase the related loans or make other payments related to such loans if the R&Ws are breached.

The unresolved repurchase requests received on or before 31 December 20152016 associated with all R&Ws made by the Group or the Acquired Subsidiary on loans sold to GSEs and others and private-label activities had an original unpaid principal balance of approximately $2.3bn$2.2bn at the time of such sale.

A substantial number (approximately $2.2bn) of theThe unresolved repurchase requests discussed above relate to civil actions that have been commenced by the trustees for certain RMBS securitisations in which the trustees allege that the Group and/or the Acquired Subsidiary must repurchase loans that violated the operative R&Ws. Such trustees and other parties making repurchase requests have also alleged that the operative R&Ws may have been violated with respect to a greater (but unspecified) amount of loans than the amount of loans previously stated in specific repurchase requests made by such trustees. Cumulative realised losses reported at 31 December 2016 on loans covered by R&Ws made by the Group or the Acquired Subsidiary are approximately $1.3bn. All of the litigation involving repurchase requests remain at early stages.

In addition, the Acquired Subsidiary is subject to a more advanced civil action seeking, among other things, indemnification for losses allegedly suffered by a loan purchaser as a result of alleged breaches of R&Ws provided by the Acquired Subsidiary in connection with loan sales to the purchaser during the period 1997 to 2007. This litigation is ongoing.

Claimed Amounts/Financial Impact

It is not currently practicable to provide an estimate of the financial impact of the actions described on the Group or what effect that they might have upon the Group’s operating results, cash flows or financial position in any particular period.

268  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F


29 Legal, competition and regulatory matterscontinued

RMBS Securities Claims

Background Information

As a result of some of the RMBS activities described above, the Group ishas been party to a number of lawsuits filed by purchasers of RMBS sponsored and/or underwritten by the Group between 2005 and 2008. As a general matter, these lawsuits allege,alleged, among other things, that the RMBS offering materials allegedly relied on by such purchasers contained materially false and misleading statements and/or omissions and generally demanddemanded rescission and recovery of the consideration paid for the RMBS and recovery of monetary losses arising out of their ownership.

Recent Developments

The Group has settledresolved a number of these claims, including in October 2015 a settlement with the National Credit Union Administration to resolve two outstanding civil lawsuits for $325m.and only one action currently remains pending.

Claimed Amounts/Financial Impact

If the Group were to lose the pending actions the Group believes it could incur a loss of up to the outstanding amountApproximately $0.1bn of the RMBS at the time of judgment, plus any cumulative losses on the RMBS at such time and any interest, fees and costs, less the market value of the RMBS at such time and less any provisions taken to date.

The original face amount of RMBS related to the remaining pending civil actions against the Group total approximately $1.3bn, of which approximately $0.4bnaction was outstanding as at 31 December 2015. Cumulative2016. There were virtually no cumulative realised losses reported on these RMBS as at 31 December 20152016. The Group does not expect that, if it were approximately $0.1bn.

Although the purchasers into lose the remaining securities actions have generally not identified a specific amount of alleged damages, the Group has estimated the total market value of these RMBS as at 31 December 2015pending action, any such loss to be approximately $0.3bn. The Group may be entitled to indemnification for a portion of such losses.material.

Mortgage-related Investigationsactions

In addition to the RMBS Repurchase Requests and RMBS Securities Claims, numerous regulatory andNumerous governmental authorities amongst them the DOJ, SEC, Special Inspector General for the US Troubled Asset Relief Program, the US Attorney’s Office for the District of Connecticut and the US Attorney’s Office for the Eastern District of New York have been investigating various aspects of the mortgage-related business, including issuance and underwriting practices in primary offerings of RMBS and trading practices in the secondary market for both RMBS and CMBS.business. The Group continueshas responded to respond to requests from the DOJ relating to the RMBS Working Group of the Financial Fraud Enforcement Task Force (RMBS Working Group), which was formed to investigatepre-financial crisis mortgage-related misconduct. In connection with several of the investigations by members of the RMBS Working Group, a number of financial institutions have entered into settlements involving substantial monetary payments.payments resolving claims related to the underwriting, securitisation and sale of residential mortgage-backed securities. In December 2016, the DOJ filed a civil complaint against Barclays in the US District Court in the EDNY containing a number of allegations, including mail and wire fraud, relating to mortgage-backed securities sold between 2005 and 2007. The complaint seeks, amongst other relief, unspecified monetary penalties. Barclays is defending the complaint.

The Group has also received requests for information and subpoenas from the SEC, the US Attorney’s Office for the District of Connecticut and SIGTARP related to trading practices in the secondary market for both RMBS and CMBS. The investigation by the SEC is at an advanced stage.

Claimed Amounts/Financial Impact

It is not currently practicable to provide an estimate of the financial impact of the actions described on the Group or what effect that they might have upon the Group’s operating results, cash flows or financial position in any particular period, but theperiod. The cost of resolving these investigationsactions could individually or in aggregate prove to be substantial.

American Depositary Shares

BPLC, BBPLCBarclays PLC, Barclays Bank PLC and various former members of BPLC’sBarclays PLC’s Board of Directors have been named as defendants in a securities class action consolidated in the SDNY alleging misstatements and omissions in offering documents for certain American Depositary Shares issued by BBPLCBarclays Bank PLC in April 2008 with an original face amount of approximately $2.5 billion (the April 2008 Offering).

Background Information

The plaintiffs have asserted claims under the Securities Act of 1933, alleging that the offering documents for the April 2008 Offering contained misstatements and omissions concerning (amongst other things) BBPLC’sBarclays Bank PLC’s portfolio of mortgage-related (including US subprime-related) securities, BBPLC’sBarclays Bank PLC’s exposure to mortgage and credit market risk, and BBPLC’sBarclays Bank PLC’s financial condition. The plaintiffs have not specifically alleged the amount of their damages.

In June 2014,2016, the SDNY deniedcertified the defendants’ motion to dismiss the claims. The case is in discovery.action as a class action. Barclays has moved for summary judgement.

Claimed Amounts/Financial Impact

It is not currently practicable to provide an estimate of the financial impact of the action described on the Group or what effect that it might have upon the Group’s operating results, cash flows or financial position in any particular period.

278  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2016 Annual Report on Form 20-F


29 Legal, competition and regulatory matterscontinued

BDC Finance L.L.C.

BDC Finance L.L.C. (BDC) filed a complaint against BBPLCBarclays Bank PLC in the NY Supreme Court alleging breach of contract in connection with a portfolio of total return swaps governed by an ISDA Master Agreement (collectively, the Agreement). Parties related to BDC have also sued BBPLCBarclays Bank PLC and BCI in Connecticut State Court in connection with BBPLC’sBarclays Bank PLC’s conduct relating to the Agreement.

Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  269


Notes to the financial statements

Accruals, provisions, contingent liabilities and legal proceedings

29 Legal, competition and regulatory matterscontinued

Background Information

In October 2008, BDC filed a complaint in the NY Supreme Court alleging that BBPLCBarclays Bank PLC breached the Agreement when it failed to transfer approximately $40m of alleged excess collateral in response to BDC’s October 2008 demand (Demand).

BDC asserts that under the Agreement BBPLCBarclays Bank PLC was not entitled to dispute the Demand before transferring the alleged excess collateral and that even if the Agreement entitled BBPLCBarclays Bank PLC to dispute the Demand before making the transfer, BBPLCBarclays Bank PLC failed to dispute the Demand. BDC demands damages totalling $298m plus attorneys’ fees, expenses, and prejudgementpre-judgement interest. Proceedings are currently pending before the NY Supreme Court.and a trial on liability issues is currently scheduled to occur in 2017.

In September 2011, BDC’s investment advisor, BDCM Fund Adviser, L.L.C. and its parent company, Black Diamond Capital Holdings, L.L.C. also sued BBPLCBarclays Bank PLC and BCI in Connecticut State Court for unspecified damages allegedly resulting from BBPLC’sBarclays Bank PLC’s conduct relating to the Agreement, asserting claims for violation of the Connecticut Unfair Trade Practices Act and tortious interference with business and prospective business relations. The parties have agreed to a stay of thatthis case.

Claimed Amounts/Financial Impact

BDC has made claims against the Group totalling $298m plus attorneys’ fees, expenses, andpre-judgement interest. This amount does not necessarily reflect the Group’s potential financial exposure if a ruling were to be made against it.

Civil Actions in respect of the US Anti-Terrorism Act

In April 2015, an amended civil complaint was filed in the US Federal Court in the Eastern District of New YorkEDNY by a group of approximately 250 plaintiffs, alleging that BBPLCBarclays Bank PLC and a number of other banks engaged in a conspiracy and violated the US Anti-Terrorism Act (ATA) by facilitating US dollarDollar denominated transactions for the Government of Iran and various Iranian banks, which in turn funded Hezbollah and other attacks that injured or killed the plaintiffs’ family members. Plaintiffs seek to recover for pain, suffering and mental anguish pursuant to the provisions of the ATA, which allows for the tripling of any proven damages. BBPLC hasdamages and attorneys’ fees. Plaintiffs filed a second amended complaint in July 2016, which, among other things, added various plaintiffs, bringing the total number of plaintiffs to approximately 350. In November 2016, defendants’ filed a motion to dismissdismiss.

In November 2016, a separate civil complaint was filed in the actionUS Federal Court in the Southern District of Illinois by a group of approximately 90 plaintiffs, alleging claims under the ATA against Barclays Bank PLC and a number of other banks. The allegations against Barclays Bank PLC are substantially similar to those in the second amended complaint in the US Federal Court in the EDNY action. Plaintiffs filed an amended complaint in January 2017, which, is fully briefed.among other things, added various plaintiffs, bringing the total number of plaintiffs to approximately 200.

Claimed Amounts/Financial Impact

It is not currently practicable to provide an estimate of the financial impact of the matters in this sectionactions described on the Group or what effect that these mattersthey might have upon the Group’s operating results, cash flows or the Group’s financial position in any particular period.

Interest Rate Swap US Civil Action

In November 2015, an antitrust class action was filed against BPLC, BBPLC,Barclays PLC, Barclays Bank PLC, and BCI, andtogether with other financial institutions in the SDNY by a US retirement and pension fund. The complaint alleges that the defendants that act as market makers for certain types of derivativesinterest rate swaps (IRS), Trade Web, and TradewebICAP, are named as defendants in several antitrust class actions consolidated in the SDNY. The complaints allege defendants conspired to prevent the development of exchanges for interest rate swaps (IRS)IRS and demandsdemand unspecified money damages, treble damages and legal fees. Plaintiffs include certain swap execution facilities, as well asbuy-side investors. The plaintiff claimsbuy-side investors claim to represent a class of buy-side investors that transacted infixed-for-floating IRS with defendants in the US from 1 January 2008 to the present, including, otherfor example, US retirement and pension funds, municipalities, university endowments, municipalities, corporations, insurance companies and insurance companies.investment funds. Defendants filed motion to dismiss.

Claimed Amounts/Financial Impact

It is not currently practicable to provide an estimate of the financial impact of the actionactions described on the Group or what effect it hashave upon the Group’s operating results, cash flows or financial position in any particular period.

Treasury Auction Securities Civil Actions

Numerous putative class action complaints have been filed in US Federal Courts against BCI and other financial institutions that have served as primary dealers in US Treasury securities. The complaints have been or areconsolidated in the process of being consolidated in theUS Federal Court in New York. The complaints generally allege that defendants conspired to manipulate the US Treasury securities market in violation of US federal antitrust laws, the CEA and state common law. Some complaints also allege that defendants engaged in illegal “spoofing” of the US Treasury market. The Group is considering

Certain governmental authorities have been conducting investigations into activities relating to the allegationstrading of government securities in the complaintsvarious markets and is keeping all relevant agencies informed.Barclays has been providing information to various authorities on an ongoing basis.

Claimed Amounts/Financial Impact

It is not currently practicable to provide an estimate of the financial impact of the actions described on the Group or what effect that they might have upon the Group’s operating results, cash flows or financial position in any particular period.

Investigation into Americas Wealth & Investment Management Advisory Business

The SEC is investigating the non-performance of certain due diligence on third-party managers by the Manager Research division ofpractices in Barclays’ former Wealth & Investment Management, Americas investment advisory business relating to certain due diligence failures, fee and billing practices and mutual fund fee waivers and related disclosures. Barclays has been cooperating with the Groupinvestigation, which is respondingat an advanced stage.

Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2016 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  279


Notes to requests for information.the financial statements

Accruals, provisions, contingent liabilities and legal proceedings

29 Legal, competition and regulatory matterscontinued

Claimed Amounts/Financial Impact

It is not currently practicable to provide an estimate of the financial impact of the investigationaction described on the Group or what effect that it might have upon the Group’s operating results, cash flows or financial position in any particular period.

Retail Structured Products Investigation

The Group is cooperating with an enforcement investigation commenced by the FCA in connection with structured deposit products provided to UK customers from June 2008November 2009 to the present.

Claimed Amounts/Financial Impact

It is not currently practicable to provide an estimate of the financial impact of these mattersthe action described on the Group or what effect that they mayit might have upon the Group’s operating results, cash flows or the Group’s financial position in any particular period.

270  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F


29 Legal, competition and regulatory matterscontinued

Investigation into suspected money laundering related to foreign exchange transactions in South African operation

Absa Bank Limited, a subsidiary of Barclays Africa Group Limited, has identified potentially fraudulent activity by certain of its customers using import advance payments for imports in 2014 and 2015 to effect foreign exchange transfers from South Africa to beneficiary accounts located in East Asia, UK, Europe and the US. As a result, the Group ishas been conducting a review of relevant activity, processes, systems and controls. The Group is keeping relevant agencies and regulatorsauthorities informed as to the ongoing status of this matter.

Itmatter and is too earlyproviding information to assess reliably the outcome.these authorities as part of its ongoing cooperation.

Claimed Amounts/Financial Impact

It is not currently practicable to provide an estimate of the financial impact of the actions described on the Group or what effect that they might have upon the Group’s operating results, cash flows or financial position in any particular period.

Portuguese Competition Authority Investigation

The Portuguese Competition Authority is investigating whether competition law was infringed by the exchange of information about retail credit products amongst 15 banks in Portugal, including the Group, over a period of 11 years with particular reference to mortgages, consumer lending and lending to small and medium enterprises. The Group is cooperating with the investigation.

Claimed Amounts/Financial Impact

It is not currently practicable to provide an estimate of the financial impact of these mattersthe action described or what effect that they mayit might have upon operating results, cash flows or the Group’s financial position in any particular period.

Credit Default Swap (CDS) Antitrust Investigations and Civil Actions

The Commission and theDOJ-AD commenced investigations into the CDS market in 2011 and 2009, respectively. In December 2015 the Commission announced its decision to close its investigations in respect of BBPLCBarclays Bank PLC and 12 other banks. TheIn July 2016 the Commission continuesannounced its decision to pursue its case in respectaccept legally binding commitments relating to licensing of inputs for CDS exchange trading from each of the remaining entities subject to the investigation, ISDA and Markit Ltd., and close its investigation. TheDOJ-AD has also closed its investigation.

A related civil class action in the SDNY involving similar claims against Barclays Bank PLC, other financial institutions, Markit Ltd., and ISDA which could indirectly expose BBPLC to financial loss.was settled for a total of US$1.864bn (including a payment of US $170m from Barclays Bank PLC). The case relates to concerns about actions to delay and prevent the emergence of exchange traded credit derivative products.

The DOJ-AD’s investigation is a civil investigation and relates to similar issues.

In September 2015, BBPLC settled a proposed, consolidated class action that had been filedsettlement received final approval in the US alleging similar issues for $178mApril 2016 subject to court approval.the right of class members toopt-out of the settlement and to seek to file their own claims.

Claimed Amounts/Financial Impact

Aside from the settlement discussed above, it is not currently practicable to provide an estimate of the financial impact of the actions described on the Group or what effect that they might have upon the Group’s operating results, cash flows or financial position in any particular period.

Lehman Brothers

Since September 2009, BCI and BBPLC have been engaged in litigation with various entities that have sought to challenge certain aspects of the transaction pursuant to which BCI, BBPLC and other companies in the Group acquired most of the assets of Lehman Brothers Inc. in September 2008, as well as the court order (Order) approving the sale (Sale). All of the claims challenging the Sale were ultimately resolved in favour of BCI. In May 2015, BCI and BBPLC reached a settlement with the SIPA Trustee for Lehman Brothers Inc. (Trustee) to resolve the remaining outstanding litigation between them relating to the Sale. Pursuant to the settlement, BBPLC has received all of the assets that BBPLC asserted it was entitled to receive with the exception of $80m of assets that the Trustee is entitled to retain and approximately $0.3bn of margin for exchange-traded derivatives still owed to BBPLC but expected to be received from third parties. The settlement was approved by the United States Bankruptcy Court for the SDNY on 29 June 2015, thereby bringing the litigation relating to the Sale to an end.

General

The Group is engaged in various other legal, competition and regulatory matters both in the UK and US and a number of other overseas jurisdictions. It is subject to legal proceedings by and against the Group which arise in the ordinary course of business from time to time, including (but not limited to) disputes in relation to contracts, securities, debt collection, consumer credit, fraud, trusts, client assets, competition, data protection, money laundering, financial crime, employment, environmental and other statutory and common law issues.

The Group is also subject to enquiries and examinations, requests for information, audits, investigations and legal and other proceedings by regulators, governmental and other public bodies in connection with (but not limited to) consumer protection measures, compliance with legislation and regulation, wholesale trading activity and other areas of banking and business activities in which the Group is or has been engaged. The Group is keeping all relevant agencies briefed as appropriate in relation to these matters and others described in this noteNote on an ongoing basis.

At the present time, the Group does not expect the ultimate resolution of any of these other matters to have a material adverse effect on its financial position. However, in light of the uncertainties involved in such matters and the matters specifically described in this note, there can be no assurance that the outcome of a particular matter or matters will not be material to the Group’s operating results of operations or cash flowsflow for a particular period, depending on, amongamongst other things, the amount of the loss resulting from the matter(s) and the amount of income otherwise reported for the reporting period.

 

280  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 20152016 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  271


Notes to the financial statements

Capital instruments, equity and reserves

    

 

The notes included in this section focus on the Group’s loan capital and shareholders equity including issued share capital, retained earnings, other equity balances and interests of minority shareholders in our subsidiary entities(non-controlling interests). For more information on capital management and how the Group maintains sufficient capital to meet our regulatory requirements see pages 152 to 158.

The notes included in this section focus on the Group’s loan capital and shareholders’ equity including issued share capital, retained earnings, other equity balances and interests of minority shareholders in our subsidiary entities (non-controlling interests). For more information on capital management and how the Group maintains sufficient capital to meet our regulatory requirements see pages 103 to 104.

30 Subordinated liabilities

 

Accounting for subordinated debt

Subordinated debt is measured at amortised cost using the effective interest method under IAS 39.

Accounting for subordinated debt

Subordinated debt is measured at amortised cost using the effective interest method under IAS 39.

Subordinated liabilities include accrued interest and comprise undated and dated loan capital as follows:

 

         

 

2015

£m

  

  

   

 

2014

£m

  

  

Undated subordinated liabilities

     5,248     5,640  

Dated subordinated liabilities

        16,219     15,513  

Total subordinated liabilities

        21,467     21,153  

 

None of the Group’s loan capital is secured.

 

      

Undated subordinated liabilities

               
       

Subordinated liabilities per

balance sheet

 
    Initial call date     
 
2015
£m
  
  
   
 
2014
£m
  
  

Barclays Bank PLC issued

      

Tier One Notes (TONs)

      

6% Callable Perpetual Core Tier One Notes

   2032     16     16  

6.86% Callable Perpetual Core Tier One Notes (USD 569m)

   2032     626     604  

Reserve Capital Instruments (RCIs)

      

5.926% Step-up Callable Perpetual Reserve Capital Instruments (USD 159m)

   2016     113     112  

7.434% Step-up Callable Perpetual Reserve Capital Instruments (USD 117m)

   2017     85     85  

6.3688% Step-up Callable Perpetual Reserve Capital Instruments

   2019     38     39  

14% Step-up Callable Perpetual Reserve Capital Instruments

   2019     3,062     3,065  

5.3304% Step-up Callable Perpetual Reserve Capital Instruments

   2036     51     52  

Undated Notes

      

6.875% Undated Subordinated Notes

   2015          140  

6.375% Undated Subordinated Notes

   2017     143     146  

7.7% Undated Subordinated Notes (USD 99m)

   2018     69     69  

8.25% Undated Subordinated Notes

   2018     149     152  

7.125% Undated Subordinated Notes

   2020     195     202  

6.125% Undated Subordinated Notes

   2027     245     249  

Junior Undated Floating Rate Notes (USD 109m)

   Any interest payment date     74     70  

Undated Floating Rate Primary Capital Notes Series 3

   Any interest payment date     145     145  

Bonds

      

9.25% Perpetual Subordinated Bonds (ex-Woolwich PLC)

   2021     91     94  

9% Permanent Interest Bearing Capital Bonds

   At any time     45     46  

Loans

      

5.03% Reverse Dual Currency Undated Subordinated Loan (JPY 8,000m)

   2028     42     39  

5% Reverse Dual Currency Undated Subordinated Loan (JPY 12,000m)

   2028     59     54  

Barclays SLCSM Funding B.V. guaranteed by the Bank

      

6.14% Fixed Rate Guaranteed Perpetual Subordinated Notes

   2015          261  

Total undated subordinated liabilities

        5,248     5,640  

272  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F


30 Subordinated liabilitiescontinued

         

2016

£m

 

 

   

2015

£m

 

 

Undated subordinated liabilities     4,495    5,248 
Dated subordinated liabilities        18,888    16,219 
Total subordinated liabilities        23,383    21,467 

 

None of the Group’s loan capital is secured.

 

      
Undated subordinated liabilities               
     
Subordinated liabilities per
balance sheet
 
 
    Initial call date    

2016

£m

 

 

   

2015

£m

 

 

Barclays Bank PLC issued      
Tier One Notes (TONs)      
6% Callable Perpetual Core Tier One Notes   2032    17    16 
6.86% Callable Perpetual Core Tier One Notes (USD 179m)   2032    232    626 
Reserve Capital Instruments (RCIs)      
5.926%Step-up Callable Perpetual Reserve Capital Instruments   2016        113 
7.434%Step-up Callable Perpetual Reserve Capital Instruments (USD 117m)   2017    100    85 
6.3688%Step-up Callable Perpetual Reserve Capital Instruments   2019    37    38 
14%Step-up Callable Perpetual Reserve Capital Instruments   2019    3,124    3,062 
5.3304%Step-up Callable Perpetual Reserve Capital Instruments   2036    54    51 
Undated Notes      
6.375% Undated Subordinated Notes   2017    140    143 
7.7% Undated Subordinated Notes (USD 99m)   2018    84    69 
8.25% Undated Subordinated Notes   2018    148    149 
7.125% Undated Subordinated Notes   2020    193    195 
6.125% Undated Subordinated Notes   2027    45    245 
Junior Undated Floating Rate Notes (USD 38m)   Any interest payment date    31    74 
Undated Floating Rate Primary Capital Notes Series 3   Any interest payment date    21    145 
Bonds      
9.25% Perpetual Subordinated Bonds(ex-Woolwich Plc)   2021    91    91 
9% Permanent Interest Bearing Capital Bonds   At any time    47    45 
Loans      
5.03% Reverse Dual Currency Undated Subordinated Loan (JPY 8,000m)   2028    54    42 
5% Reverse Dual Currency Undated Subordinated Loan (JPY 12,000m)   2028    77    59 
Total undated subordinated liabilities        4,495    5,248 

Undated loan capital

Undated loan capital is issued by the Bank and its subsidiaries for the development and expansion of the business and to strengthen the capital bases. The principal terms of the undated loan capital are described below.below:

Subordination

All undated loan capital ranks behind the claims against the bank of depositors and other unsecured unsubordinated creditors and holders of dated loan capital in the following order: Junior Undated Floating Rate Notes; other issues of Undated Notes, Bonds and Loans ranking pari passu with each other; followed by TONs and RCIs ranking pari passu with each other.

Interest

All undated loan capital bears a fixed rate of interest until the initial call date, with the exception of the 9% Bonds which are fixed for the life of the issue, and the Junior and Series 3 Undated Notes which are floating rate.

After the initial call date, in the event that they are not redeemed, the 6.375%, 7.125%, 6.125% Undated Notes and the 9.25% Bonds will bear interest at rates fixed periodically in advance for five-year periods based on market rates. All other undated loan capital except the two floating rate Undated Notes will bear interest, and the two floating rate Undated Notes currently bear interest, at rates fixed periodically in advance based on London interbank rates.

Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2016 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  281


Notes to the financial statements

Capital instruments, equity and reserves

30 Subordinated liabilitiescontinued

Payment of interest

The Bank is not obliged to make a payment of interest on its Undated Notes, Bonds and Loans excluding the 7.7% Undated Notes, 8.25% Undated Notes and 9.25% Bonds if, in the preceding six months, a dividend has not been declared or paid on any class of shares of Barclays PLC or, in certain cases, any class of preference shares of the Bank. The Bank is not obliged to make a payment of interest on its 9.25% Perpetual Subordinated Bonds if, in the immediately preceding 12 months’ interest period, a dividend has not been paid on any class of its share capital. Interest not so paid becomes payable in each case if such a dividend is subsequently paid or in certain other circumstances. During the year, the Bank declared and paid dividends on its ordinary shares and on all classes of preference shares.

No payment of principal or any interest may be made unless the Bank satisfies a specified solvency test.

The Bank may elect to defer any payment of interest on the 7.7% Undated Notes and 8.25% Undated Notes. Until such time as any deferred interest has been paid in full, neither the Bank nor Barclays PLC may declare or pay a dividend, subject to certain exceptions, on any of its ordinary shares, preference shares, or other share capital or satisfy any payments of interest or coupons on certain other junior obligations.

The Bank may elect to defer any payment of interest on the RCIs. Any such deferred payment of interest must be paid on the earlier of: (i) the date of redemption of the RCIs, (ii) the coupon payment date falling on or nearest to the tenth anniversary of the date of deferral of such payment, and (iii) in respect of the 14% RCIs only, substitution. WhileWhilst such deferral is continuing, neither the Bank nor Barclays PLC may declare or pay a dividend, subject to certain exceptions, on any of its ordinary shares or preference shares.

The Bank may elect to defer any payment of interest on the TONs if it determines that it is, or such payment would result in it being, innon-compliance with capital adequacy requirements and policies of the PRA. Any such deferred payment of interest will only be payable on a redemption of the TONs. Until such time as the Bank next makes a payment of interest on the TONs, neither the Bank nor Barclays PLC may (i) declare or pay a dividend, subject to certain exceptions, on any of their respective ordinary shares or Preference Shares, or make payments of interest in respect of the Bank’s Reserve Capital Instruments and (ii) certain restrictions on the redemption, purchase or reduction of their respective share capital and certain other securities also apply.

Repayment

All undated loan capital is repayable at the option of the Bank, generally in whole, at the initial call date and on any subsequent coupon or interest payment date or in the case of the 6.375%, 7.125%, 6.125% Undated Notes and the 9.25% Bonds on any fifth anniversary after the initial call date. In addition, each issue of undated loan capital is repayable, at the option of the Bank in whole in the event of certain changes in the tax treatment of the notes, either at any time, or on an interest payment date. There are no events of default exceptnon-payment of principal or mandatory interest. Any repayments require the prior approval of the PRA.

Other

All issues of undated subordinated liabilities arenon-convertible.

 

Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  273


Notes to the financial statements

Capital instruments, equity and reserves

30 Subordinated liabilitiescontinued

Dated subordinated liabilities

                            
             Subordinated liabilities  
             per balance sheet  
     Initial       Maturity       2015       2014  
      call date       date       £m       £m  

Barclays PLC issued

                

2.625% Fixed Rate Subordinated Callable Notes (EUR 1,250m)

     2020       2025       918         

4.375% Fixed Rate Subordinated Notes (USD 1,250m)

         2024       883       810  

Barclays Bank PLC issued

                

4.38% Fixed Rate Subordinated Notes (USD 75m)

         2015              49  

4.75% Fixed Rate Subordinated Notes (USD 150m)

         2015              98  

6.05% Fixed Rate Subordinated Notes (USD 1,556m)

         2017       1,124       1,102  

Floating Rate Subordinated Notes (EUR 40m)

         2018       29       31  

6% Fixed Rate Subordinated Notes (EUR 1,750m)

         2018       1,377       1,462  

CMS-Linked Subordinated Notes (EUR 100m)

         2018       77       82  

CMS-Linked Subordinated Notes (EUR 135m)

         2018       103       109  

Fixed/Floating Rate Subordinated Callable Notes

     2018       2023       555       565  

7.75% Contingent Capital Notes (USD 1,000m)

     2018       2023       679       640  

Floating Rate Subordinated Notes (EUR 50m)

         2019       36       38  

5.14% Lower Tier 2 Notes (USD 1,094m)

         2020       808       767  

6% Fixed Rate Subordinated Notes (EUR 1,500m)

         2021       1,252       1,338  

9.5% Subordinated Bonds (ex-Woolwich PLC)

         2021       293       306  

Subordinated Floating Rate Notes (EUR 100m)

         2021       73       77  

10% Fixed Rate Subordinated Notes

         2021       2,317       2,363  

10.179% Fixed Rate Subordinated Notes (USD 1,521m)

         2021       1,083       1,062  

Subordinated Floating Rate Notes (EUR 50m)

         2022       37       39  

6.625% Fixed Rate Subordinated Notes (EUR 1,000m)

         2022       891       947  

7.625% Contingent Capital Notes (USD 3,000m)

         2022       1,984       1,856  

Subordinated Floating Rate Notes (EUR 50m)

         2023       37       39  

5.75% Fixed Rate Subordinated Notes

         2026       802       828  

5.4% Reverse Dual Currency Subordinated Loan (JPY 15,000m)

         2027       80       74  

6.33% Subordinated Notes

         2032       60       62  

Subordinated Floating Rate Notes (EUR 100m)

         2040       74       78  

Absa Bank Limited issued

                

8.1% Subordinated Callable Notes (ZAR 2,000m)

     2015       2020              114  

10.28% Subordinated Callable Notes (ZAR 600m)

     2017       2022       26       34  

Subordinated Callable Notes (ZAR 400m)

     2017       2022       18       22  

Subordinated Callable Notes (ZAR 1,805m)

     2017       2022       79       101  

Subordinated Callable Notes (ZAR 2,007m)

     2018       2023       88       112  

8.295% Subordinated Callable Notes (ZAR 1,188m)

     2018       2023       42       64  

5.50% CPI-linked Subordinated Callable Notes (ZAR 1,500m)

     2023       2028       86       109  

Barclays Africa Group Limited Issued

                

Subordinated Callable Notes (ZAR 370m)

     2019       2024       16       21  

10.835% Subordinated Callable Notes (ZAR 130m)

     2019       2024       6       7  

Subordinated Callable Notes (ZAR 1,693m)

     2020       2025       74         

10.05% Subordinated Callable Notes (ZAR 807m)

     2020       2025       36         

11.4% Subordinated Callable Notes (ZAR 288m)

     2020       2025       13         

11.365% Subordinated Callable Notes (ZAR 508m)

     2020       2025       23         

Subordinated Callable Notes (ZAR 437m)

     2020       2025       19         

11.81% Subordinated Callable Notes (ZAR 737m)

     2022       2027       33         

Subordinated Callable Notes (ZAR 30m)

     2022       2027       1         

Other capital issued by Barclays Africa and Japan

            2016–2019       87       107  

Total dated subordinated liabilities

                   16,219       15,513  

274282  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 20152016 Annual Report on Form 20-F  


    

    

    

 

 

30 Subordinated liabilitiescontinued

30 Subordinated liabilitiescontinued        

Dated subordinated liabilities

                    
       

Subordinated liabilities per

balance sheet

 

 

    
Initial
call date
 
 
   
Maturity
date
 
 
   

2016

£m

 

 

   

2015

£m

 

 

Barclays PLC issued

        

2.625% Fixed Rate Subordinated Callable Notes (EUR 1,250m)

   2020    2025    1,084    918 

4.375% Fixed Rate Subordinated Notes (USD 1,250m)

     2024    1,054    883 

5.20% Fixed Rate Subordinated Notes (USD 2,050m)

     2026    1,590     

Barclays Bank PLC issued

        

6.05% Fixed Rate Subordinated Notes (USD 1,556m)

     2017    1,316    1,124 

Floating Rate Subordinated Notes (EUR 40m)

     2018    34    29 

6% Fixed Rate Subordinated Notes (EUR 1,750m)

     2018    1,590    1,377 

CMS-Linked Subordinated Notes (EUR 100m)

     2018    90    77 

CMS-Linked Subordinated Notes (EUR 135m)

     2018    120    103 

Fixed/Floating Rate Subordinated Callable Notes

   2018    2023    548    555 

7.75% Contingent Capital Notes (USD 1,000m)

   2018    2023    822    679 

Floating Rate Subordinated Notes (EUR 50m)

     2019    42    36 

5.14% Lower Tier 2 Notes (USD 1,094m)

     2020    956    808 

6% Fixed Rate Subordinated Notes (EUR 1,500m)

     2021    1,444    1,252 

9.5% Subordinated Bonds(ex-Woolwich Plc)

     2021    286    293 

Subordinated Floating Rate Notes (EUR 100m)

     2021    85    73 

10% Fixed Rate Subordinated Notes

     2021    2,345    2,317 

10.179% Fixed Rate Subordinated Notes (USD 1,521m)

     2021    1,285    1,083 

Subordinated Floating Rate Notes (EUR 50m)

     2022    43    37 

6.625% Fixed Rate Subordinated Notes (EUR 1,000m)

     2022    1,042    891 

7.625% Contingent Capital Notes (USD 3,000m)

     2022    2,390    1,984 

Subordinated Floating Rate Notes (EUR 50m)

     2023    43    37 

5.75% Fixed Rate Subordinated Notes

     2026    384    802 

5.4% Reverse Dual Currency Subordinated Loan (JPY 15,000m)

     2027    103    80 

6.33% Subordinated Notes

     2032    64    60 

Subordinated Floating Rate Notes (EUR 68m)

     2040    58    74 

Absa Bank Limited issueda

        

10.28% Subordinated Callable Notes (ZAR 600m)

   2017    2022        26 

Subordinated Callable Notes (ZAR 400m)

   2017    2022        18 

Subordinated Callable Notes (ZAR 1,805m)

   2017    2022        79 

Subordinated Callable Notes (ZAR 2,007m)

   2018    2023        88 

8.295% Subordinated Callable Notes (ZAR 1,188m)

   2018    2023        42 

5.50%CPI-linked Subordinated Callable Notes (ZAR 1,500m)

   2023    2028        86 

Barclays Africa Group Limited Issueda

        

Subordinated Callable Notes (ZAR 370m)

   2019    2024        16 

10.835% Subordinated Callable Notes (ZAR 130m)

   2019    2024        6 

Subordinated Callable Notes (ZAR 1,693m)

   2020    2025        74 

10.05% Subordinated Callable Notes (ZAR 807m)

   2020    2025        36 

11.4% Subordinated Callable Notes (ZAR 288m)

   2020    2025        13 

11.365% Subordinated Callable Notes (ZAR 508m)

   2020    2025        23 

Subordinated Callable Notes (ZAR 437m)

   2020    2025        19 

11.81% Subordinated Callable Notes (ZAR 737m)

   2022    2027        33 

Subordinated Callable Notes (ZAR 30m)

   2022    2027        1 

Other capital issued by Barclays Africaa

     2019        3 

Capital issued by other subsidiaries

        2017-2019    70    84 

Total dated subordinated liabilities

             18,888    16,219 

Dated loan capital

Dated loan capital is issued by the Company, the Bank and respective subsidiaries for the development and expansion of their business and to strengthen their respective capital bases. The principal terms of the dated loan capital are described below:

Subordination

Dated loan capital issued by the Company ranks behind the claims against the Company of unsecured unsubordinated creditors but before the claims of the holders of its equity.

All dated loan capital issued by the Bank ranks behind the claims against the Bank of depositors and other unsecured unsubordinated creditors but before the claims of the undated loan capital and the holders of its equity. The dated loan capital issued by other subsidiaries is similarly subordinated.

Notes

aInstruments forming part of the BAGL group have been reclassified to Liabilities included in disposal groups classified as held for sale. For more information refer to Note 44 on page 305.

Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2016 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  283


Notes to the financial statements

Capital instruments, equity and reserves

30 Subordinated liabilitiescontinued

Interest

Interest on the Floating Rate Notes is fixed periodically in advance, based on the related interbank or local central bank rates.

Interest on the 7.75% Contingent Capital Notes and the 2.625% Fixed Rate Subordinated Callable Notes are fixed until the call date. After the respective call dates, in the event that they are not redeemed, the interest rates will be resetre-set and fixed until maturity based on a market rate.

Repayment

Those Notes with a call date are repayable at the option of the issuer, on conditions governing the respective debt obligations, some in whole or in part, and some only in whole. The remaining dated loan capital outstanding at 31 December 20152016 is redeemable only on maturity, subject in particular cases to provisions allowing an early redemption in the event of certain changes in tax law, or to certain changes in legislation or regulations.

Any repayments prior to maturity require, in the case of the Company and the Bank, the prior approval of the PRA, or in the case of the overseas issues, the approval of the local regulator for that jurisdiction and of the PRA in certain circumstances.

There are no committed facilities in existence at the balance sheet date which permit the refinancing of debt beyond the date of maturity.

Other

The 7.625% Contingent Capital Notes will be automatically transferred from investors to Barclays PLC (or another entity within the Group) for nil consideration in the event the Barclays PLC consolidated CRD IV CET1Common Equity Tier 1 (CET1) ratio (FSA October 2012 transitional statement) falls below 7.0%.

The 7.75% Contingent Capital Notes will be automatically written-down and investors will lose their entire investment in the notes in the event the Barclays PLC consolidated CRD IV CET1Common Equity Tier 1 (CET1) ratio (FSA October 2012 transitional statement) falls below 7.0%.

Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  275


Notes to the financial statements

Capital instruments, equity and reserves

31 Ordinary shares, share premium, and other equity

Called up share capital, allotted and fully paid                              
   

Number of

shares

m

 

 

 

   

Ordinary

shares

£m

 

 

 

   

Share

premium

£m

 

 

 

   

Total share

capital and

share

premium

£m

 

 

 

 

 

   

Other 

equity 

instruments 

£m 

 

 

 

 

As at 1 January 2016

   16,805    4,201    17,385    21,586    5,305  

Issued to staff under share incentive plans

   116    30    158    188    –  

Issuances relating to Scrip Dividend Programme

   42    10    58    68    –  

AT1 securities issuance

                   1,132  

Other movements

                   12  

As at 31 December 2016

   16,963    4,241    17,601    21,842    6,449  
   

 

 

Number of

shares

m

  

  

  

   

 

 

Ordinary

shares

£m

  

  

  

   

 

 

Share

premium

£m

  

  

  

   

 

 

 

 

Total share

capital and

share

premium

£m

  

  

  

  

  

   

 

 

 

Other

equity

instruments

£m

  

  

  

  

As at 1 January 2015   16,498     4,125     16,684     20,809     4,322     16,498    4,125    16,684    20,809    4,322  
Issued to staff under share incentive plans   253     63     577     640          253    63    577    640    –  
Issuances relating to Scrip Dividend Programme   54     13     124     137          54    13    124    137    –  
AT1 securities issuance                       995                     995  
Other movements                       (12                   (12) 
As at 31 December 2015   16,805     4,201     17,385     21,586     5,305     16,805    4,201    17,385    21,586    5,305  
As at 1 January 2014   16,113     4,028     15,859     19,887     2,063  
Issued to staff under share incentive plans   320     81     691     772       
Issuances relating to Scrip Dividend Programme   65     16     134     150       
AT1 securities issuance                       2,263  
Other movements                       (4
As at 31 December 2014   16,498     4,125     16,684     20,809     4,322  

Called up share capital

Called up share capital comprises 16,805m (2014: 16,498m)16,963m (2015: 16,805m) ordinary shares of 25p each. The increase was due to the issuance of 253m (2014:320m)116m (2015: 253m) shares under employee share schemes and a further 54m (2014: 65m)42m (2015: 54m) issued as part of the Barclays PLC Scrip Dividend Programme.

Share repurchase

At the 20152016 AGM on 2328 April 2015,2016, Barclays PLC was authorised to repurchase 1,650mpurchase up to an aggregate of 1,681m of its ordinary shares of 25p. The authorisation is effective until the AGM in 20162017 or the close of business on 30 June 2016,2017, whichever is the earlier. No share repurchases were made during either 20152016 or 2014.2015.

Other equity instruments

Other equity instruments of £5,305m (2014: £4,322m)£6,449m (2015: £5,305m) include AT1 securities issued by Barclays PLC. In 2016, there was one issuance of Fixed Rate Resetting Perpetual Subordinated Contingent Convertible Securities, with a principal amount of £1.1bn. In 2015, there was one issuance of Fixed Rate Resetting Perpetual Subordinated Contingent Convertible Securities, with a principal amount of £1.0bn. In 2014, there were three issuances of Fixed Rate Resetting Perpetual Subordinated Contingent Convertible Securities, with principal amounts of $1.2bn,1.1bn and £0.7bn.

The AT1 securities are perpetual securities with no fixed maturity and are structured to qualify as AT1 instruments under CRD IV.

The principal terms of the AT1 securities are described below:

 

§ AT1 securities rank behind the claims against Barclays PLC of (i) unsubordinated creditors; (ii) claims which are expressed to be subordinated to the claims of unsubordinated creditors of Barclays PLC but not further or otherwise; or (iii) claims which are, or are expressed to be, junior to the claims of other creditors of Barclays PLC, whether subordinated or unsubordinated, other than claims which rank, or are expressed to rank, pari passu with, or junior to, the claims of holders of the AT1 securitiessecurities.

 

§ AT1 securities bear a fixed rate of interest until the initial call date. After the initial call date, in the event that they are not redeemed, the AT1 securities will bear interest at rates fixed periodically in advance for five-year periods based on market ratesrates.

 

§ interestInterest on the AT1 securities will be due and payable only at the sole discretion of Barclays PLC, and Barclays PLC has sole and absolute discretion at all times and for any reason to cancel (in whole or in part) any interest payment that would otherwise be payable on any interest payment datedate.

284  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2016 Annual Report on Form 20-F


31 Ordinary shares, share premium, and other equitycontinued

§ AT1 securities are undated and are repayable, at the option of Barclays PLC, in whole at the initial call date, or on any fifth anniversary after the initial call date. In addition, the AT1 securities are repayable, at the option of Barclays PLC, in whole in the event of certain changes in the tax or regulatory treatment of the securities. Any repayments require the prior consent of the PRA.

All AT1 securities will be converted into ordinary shares of Barclays PLC, at a pre-determinedpre determined price, should the fully loaded CET1 ratio of the Barclays PLC Group fall below 7.0%.

276  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F


32 Reserves

Currency translation reserve

The currency translation reserve represents the cumulative gains and losses on the retranslation of the Group’s net investment in foreign operations, net of the effects of hedging.

As at 31 December 2015,2016, there was a debitcredit balance of £3,051m (2015: £623m (2014: £582m debit) in the currency translation reserve. The increase in the debitcredit balance of £3,674m (2015: £41m (2014: £560m decrease to a debit balance)debit) principally reflected the depreciationstrengthening of ZAR and EUR against GBP, offset by the appreciation of USDall major currencies against GBP. The currency translation reserve movement associated withnon-controlling interests was a £801m credit (2015: £435m debit (2014: £74m debit) reflecting the depreciationstrengthening of ZAR against GBP.

During the year a £101m net gain (2015: £65m net loss (2014: £91m net gain)loss) from recycling of the currency translation reserve was recognised in the income statement.

Available for sale reserve

The available for sale reserve represents the unrealised change in the fair value of available for sale investments since initial recognition.

As at 31 December 20152016 there was a creditdebit balance of £74m (2015: £317m (2014: £562m credit) in the available for sale reserve. The decrease of £391m (2015: £245m (2014: £414m increase) principally reflecteddecrease) was primarily due to a £350m loss£2,192m gain from changes in fair value on government bonds,Government Bonds, predominantly held in the liquidity pool £148mwhich was more than offset by £1,677m of losses from related hedging £378mand £912m of net gains transferred to the income statement, partially offset by a £396mnet profit, mainly due to £615m gain from changes in fair valueon disposal of equity investments inBarclays’ share of Visa Europe and an £86m change in insurance liabilities.Limited. A tax creditcharge of £132m£28m was recognised in the period relating to these items. The tax credit on AFS movements represented an effective rate of tax of 35.0% (2014: 19.9%). This is significantly higher than the UK corporation tax rate of 20.25% (2014: 21.5%) due to AFS movements including the Visa Europe gain that will be offset by existing UK capital losses for which a deferred tax asset has not been recognised.

Cash flow hedging reserve

The cash flow hedging reserve represents the cumulative gains and losses on effective cash flow hedging instruments that will be recycled to the income statement when the hedged transactions affect profit or loss.

As at 31 December 2015,2016, there was a credit balance of £2,105m (2015: £1,261m (2014: £1,817m credit) in the cash flow hedging reserve. The decreaseincrease of £844m (2015: £556m (2014: £1,544m increase)decrease) principally reflected a £378m decrease£1,595m increase in the fair value of interest rate swaps held for hedging purposes as interest rate forward curves increased and £247mdecreased, partially offset by £450m gains recycled to the income statement in line with when the hedged item affects profit or loss partially offset by aand tax creditcharge of £66m.£326m. The tax creditcharge on cash flow hedging reservehedge movements represented an effective rate of tax of 27.9% (2015: 10.6% (2014: 19.8%). This is significantly lower thantax charge reflects the introduction of the new surcharge of 8%, that applies to bank’s UK profits with effect from January 2016, in addition to the standard UK corporation tax rate of 20.25% (2014: 21.5%) due to the tax rate changes introduced by the UK Summer Budget increasing associated deferred tax liabilities.20%.

Other reserves and treasury shares

As at 31 December 2015,2016, there was a credit balance of £1,011m (2014: £1,011m£969m (2015: £943m credit) in other reserves relatingand treasury shares.

A credit balance of £1,011m (2015: £1,011m credit ) related to the excess repurchase price paid over nominal of redeemed ordinary and preference shares issues by the Group.

The treasury shares relate to Barclays PLC shares held in relation to the Group’s various share schemes. These schemes are described in Note 34 Share basedShare-based payments.

Treasury shares are deducted from shareholders’ equity within other reserves. A transfer is made to retained earnings in line with the vesting of treasury shares held for the purposes of share basedshare-based payments.

As at 31 December 2015,2016, there was a debit balance of £42m (2015: £68m (2014: £84m debit) in other reserves relating to treasury shares. The increasedecrease principally reflected £602m (2014: £909m)£166m (2015: £618m) transferred from treasury shares reflecting the vesting of deferred share-based payments, partially offset by £140m (2015: £602m) net purchases of treasury shares held for the purposes of employee share schemes, partially offset by £618m (2014: £866m) transferred to retained earnings reflecting the vesting of deferred share based payments.schemes.

33Non-controlling interests

    
Profit attributable to
non-controlling interest
 
 
   
Equity attributable to
non-controlling interest
 
 
   
Dividends paid to
non-controlling interest
 
 
    
2016
£m
 
 
   
2015
£m
 
 
   
2016
£m
 
 
   
2015
£m
 
 
   
2016
£m
 
 
   
2015
£m
 
 

Barclays Bank PLC issued:

            

– Preference shares

   340    343    2,698    3,654    340    343 

– Upper Tier 2 instruments

   3    2    272    486         

Barclays Africa Group Limited

   402    324    3,507    1,902    235    209 

Othernon-controlling interests

   3    3    15    12         

Total

   748    672    6,492    6,054    575    552 

    
 
Profit attributable to
non-controlling interest
  
  
   
 
Equity attributable to
non-controlling interest
  
  
   
 
Dividends paid to
non-controlling interest
  
  
    
 
2015
£m
  
  
   
 
2014
£m
  
  
   
 
2015
£m
  
  
   
 
2014
£m
  
  
   
 
2015
£m
  
  
   
 
2014
£m
  
  
 Barclays Bank PLC issued:            
 – Preference shares   343     441     3,654     3,654     343     441  
 – Upper Tier 2 instruments   2     2     486     486            
 Barclays Africa Group Limited   325     320     1,902     2,247     209     189  
 Other non-controlling interests   2     6     12     4          1  
 Total   672     769     6,054     6,391     552     631  

Subsidiaries of the Group that give rise to significantnon-controlling interests are Barclays Bank PLC and Barclays Africa Group Limited.

Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  277


Notes to the financial statements

Capital instruments, equity and reserves

33 Non-controlling interestscontinued

Barclays Bank PLC

Barclays PLC holds 100% of the voting rights of Barclays Bank PLC. As at 31 December 2015,2016, Barclays Bank PLC has in issue preference shares and Upper Tier 2 instruments, representing 11% (2014:(2015: 11%) of its equity. Preference share dividends and redemption are typically at the discretion of Barclays Bank PLC. The payment of Upper Tier 2 instrument coupons and principal are typically at the discretion of Barclays Bank PLC, except for coupon payments that become compulsory where Barclays PLC has declared or paid a dividend on ordinary shares in the preceding six monthsix-month period. Preference share and Upper Tier 2 instrument holders typically only have rights to redeem in the event of insolvency.

 

Instrument

            
    

 

2015

£m

  

  

     

 

2014

£m

  

  

Preference Shares:

      

6.00% non cumulative callable preference shares

   203       203  

6.278% non cumulative callable preference shares

   318       318  

4.75% non cumulative callable preference shares

   211       211  

6.625% non cumulative callable preference shares

   406       406  

7.1% non cumulative callable preference shares

   657       657  

7.75% non cumulative callable preference shares

   550       550  

8.125% non cumulative callable preference shares

   1,309       1,309  

Total Barclays Bank PLC Preference Shares

   3,654       3,654  

Barclays Africa Group Limited

   201       258  

Total

   3,855       3,912  

Upper Tier 2 Instruments:

      

Undated Floating Rate Primary Capital Notes Series 1

   222       222  

Undated Floating Rate Primary Capital Notes Series 2

   264       264  

Total Upper Tier 2 Instruments

   486       486  

 

Summarised financial information for Barclays Africa Group Limited

 

Summarised financial information for Barclays Africa Group Limited, before intercompany eliminations, is set out below:

 

      
    
 
 

 

 

Barclays
Africa Group
Limited

2015

£m

  
  
  

  

  

     
 
 

 

 

Barclays
Africa Group
Limited

2014

£m

  
  
  

  

  

Income statement information

      

Total income net of insurance claims

   3,418       3,530  

Profit after tax

   781       765  

Total other comprehensive income for the year, after tax

   26       (7

Total comprehensive income for the year

   807       758  

Statement of cash flows information

      

Net cash inflows

   923       43  

Balance sheet information

      

Total assets

   49,471       55,378  

Total liabilities

   45,200       50,150  

Shareholder equity

   4,271       5,228  
Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2016 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  285

Full


Notes to the financial statements for Barclays Africa Group Limited can be obtained at barclaysafrica.com/barclaysafrica/Investor-Relations.

Capital instruments, equity and reserves

33Non-controlling interestscontinued

Instrument

  

2016

£m

 

 

   

2015  

£m  

 

 

Preference Shares:

   

6.00% non cumulative callable preference shares

  203    203   

6.278% non cumulative callable preference shares

  318    318   

4.75% non cumulative callable preference shares

  211    211   

6.625% non cumulative callable preference shares

      406   

7.1% non cumulative callable preference shares

  657    657   

7.75% non cumulative callable preference shares

      550   

8.125% non cumulative callable preference shares

  1,309    1,309   

Total Barclays Bank PLC Preference Shares

  2,698    3,654   

Barclays Africa Group Limited

  277    201   

Total

  2,975    3,855   

Upper Tier 2 Instruments:

   

Undated Floating Rate Primary Capital Notes Series 1

  93    222   

Undated Floating Rate Primary Capital Notes Series 2

  179    264   

Total Upper Tier 2 Instruments

  272    486   

Protective rights ofnon-controlling interests

Barclays Africa Group Limited

Barclays owns 62.5% (62.3%50.2% (50.1% including treasury shares) of the share capital of Barclays Africa Group Limited. Barclays PLC’s rights to access the assets of Barclays Africa and its group companies are restricted by virtue of the South African Companies Act which requires 75% shareholder approval to dispose of all or the greater part of Barclays Africa Group Limited’s assets or to complete the voluntary winding up of the entity.

Barclays Bank PLC

Barclays Bank PLC also has in issue preference shares which arenon-controlling interests to the Group. Under the terms of these instruments, Barclays PLC may not pay dividends on ordinary shares until a dividend is next paid on these instruments or the instruments are redeemed or purchased by Barclays Bank PLC. There are no restrictions on Barclays Bank PLC’s ability to remit capital to the Parent as a result of these issued instruments.

 

278286  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 20152016 Annual Report on Form 20-F  


Notes to the financial statements

Employee benefits

    

 

 

The notes included in this section focus on the costs and commitments associated with employing our staff.

The notes included in this section focus on the costs and commitments associated with employing our staff.

34 Share basedShare-based payments

 

 

Accounting for share basedshare-based payments

The Group applies IFRS 2Share Based Share-Based Payments in accounting for employee remuneration in the form of shares.

 

Employee incentives include awards in the form of shares and share options, as well as offering employees the opportunity to purchase shares on favourable terms. The cost of the employee services received in respect of the shares or share options granted is recognised in the income statement over the period that employees provide services, generally the period in which the award is granted or notified and the vesting date of the shares or options. The overall cost of the award is calculated using the number of shares and options expected to vest and the fair value of the shares or options at the date of grant.

 

The number of shares and options expected to vest takes into account the likelihood that performance and service conditions included in the terms of the awards will be met. Failure to meet thenon-vesting condition is treated as a cancellation, resulting in an acceleration of recognition of the cost of the employee services.

 

The fair value of shares is the market price ruling on the grant date, in some cases adjusted to reflect restrictions on transferability. The fair value of options granted is determined using option pricing models to estimate the numbers of shares likely to vest. These take into account the exercise price of the option, the current share price, the risk-free interest rate, the expected volatility of the share price over the life of the option and other relevant factors. Market conditions that must be met in order for the award to vest are also reflected in the fair value of the award, as are any othernon-vesting conditions – such as continuing to make payments into a share based savings scheme.

 

The charge for the year arising from share basedshare-based payment schemes was as follows:

 

     Charge for the year       Charge for the year             
     
 
2015
£m
  
  
     
 
2014
£m
  
  
     
 
2013
£m
  
  
     
2016
£m
 
 
     
2015
£m
 
 
     
2014
£m
 
 

Share Value Plan

     442       575       576       473      442      575 

Others

     100       84       126       192      86      82 

Total equity settled

     542       659       702       665      528      657 

Cash settled

     24       43       25       1      4      5 

Total share based payments

     566       702       727       666      532      662 

The terms of the main current plans are as follows:

Share Value Plan (SVP)

The SVP was introduced in March 2010 and approved by shareholders (for Executive Director participation and use of new issue shares) at the AGM in April 2011. SVP awards are granted to participants in the form of a conditional right to receive Barclays PLC shares or provisional allocations of Barclays PLC shares which vest or are considered for release over a period of three years in equal annual tranches. Participants do not pay to receive an award or to receive a release of shares. The grantor may also make a dividend equivalent payment to participants on release of a SVP award. SVP awards are also made to eligible employees for recruitment purposes. All awards are subject to potential forfeiture in certain leaver scenarios. See also Note 8 for additional detail on share awards granted under SVP.

Other schemes

In addition to the SVP, the Group operates a number of other schemes including schemes operated by, and settled in, the shares of subsidiary undertakings, none of which areis individually or in aggregate material in relation to the charge for the year or the dilutive effect of outstanding share options. Included within other schemes are Sharesave (both UK and overseas), the Barclays’ Long Term Incentive Plan, the Share Incentive Award and the Executive Share Award Scheme.

Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  279


Notes to the financial statements

Employee benefits

34 Share based paymentscontinued

Share option and award plans

The weighted average fair value per award granted and weighted average share price at the date of exercise/release of shares during the year was:

 

              
 
Weighted average fair value
per award granted in year
  
  
   

 

 

Weighted average share

price at exercise/release

during year

  

  

  

              

 

2015

£

  

  

   

 

2014

£

  

  

   

 

2015

£

  

  

   

 

2014

£

  

  

SVPa

       2.54     2.33     2.53     2.31  

Othersa

             0.49-2.54     0.52-2.39     2.37-2.67     2.23-2.56  

 

SVP are nil cost awards on which the performance conditions are substantially completed at the date of grant. Consequently the fair value of these awards is based on the market value at that date.

 

Movements in options and awards

 

The movement in the number of options and awards for the major schemes and the weighted average exercise price of options was:

 

  

  

  

    SVPa,b     Othersa,c  
   Number (000s)     Number (000s)     

 

Weighted average

ex. price (£)

  

  

    2015     2014     2015     2014     2015     2014  

Outstanding at beginning of year/acquisition date

   480,042     524,260     185,599     231,989     1.61     1.55  

Granted in the year

   186,397     275,152     55,982     64,326     2.27     1.78  

Exercised/released in the year

   (252,031   (287,319   (50,538   (71,594   1.41     1.44  

Less: forfeited in the year

   (27,938   (32,051   (20,811   (32,784   1.76     1.66  

Less: expired in the year

             (3,257   (6,338   2.39     2.24  

Outstanding at end of year

   386,470     480,042     166,975     185,599     1.75     1.61  

Of which exercisable:

   30     44     26,058     20,025     1.48     1.88  

 

Certain of the Group’s share option plans enable certain Directors and employees to subscribe for new ordinary shares of Barclays PLC. For accounting for treasury shares see Note 32 Reserves.

 

The weighted average contractual remaining life and number of options and awards outstanding (including those exercisable) at the balance sheet date are as follows:

 

  

  

              2015     2014  
              
 
 
 
 
Weighted
average
remaining
contractual
life in years
  
  
  
  
  
   
 
 
 
 
Number of
options/
awards
outstanding
(000s)
  
  
  
  
  
   
 
 
 
 
Weighted
average
remaining
contractual
life in years
  
  
  
  
  
   
 
 
 
 
Number of
options/
awards
outstanding
(000s)
  
  
  
  
  

SVPa,b

       1     386,470     1     480,042  

Othersa

             0-2     166,975     0-3     185,599  
    

Weighted average

fair value per award

granted in year

 

 

 

   

Weighted average

share price at exercise/

release during year

 

 

 

    

2016

£

 

 

   

2015

£

 

 

   

2016

£

 

 

   

2015

£

 

 

SVPa   1.66    2.54    1.66    2.53 
Othersa   0.61-1.67    0.49-2.54    1.65-1.88    2.37-2.67 

SVP are nil cost awards on which the performance conditions are substantially completed at the date of grant. Consequently the fair value of these awards is based on the market value at that date.

Notes

aOptions/award granted over Barclays PLC shares.

Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2016 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  287


Notes to the financial statements

Employee benefits

34 Share based paymentscontinued

Movements in options and awards

The movement in the number of options and awards for the major schemes and the weighted average exercise price of options was:

    SVPa,b    Othersa,c 
   Number (000s)    Number (000s)   

Weighted average

ex. price (£)

 

 

    2016    2015    2016   2015   2016    2015 

Outstanding at beginning of

year/acquisition date

   386,470    480,042    166,975   185,599   1.75    1.61 

Granted in the year

   229,371    186,397    154,069   55,982   1.20    2.27 

Exercised/released in the year

   (191,623   (252,031   (60,912  (50,538  1.39    1.41 

Less: forfeited in the year

   (18,202   (27,938   (47,342  (20,811  1.95    1.76 

Less: expired in the year

           (7,661  (3,257  1.83    2.39 

Outstanding at end of year

   406,016    386,470    205,129   166,975   1.38    1.75 

Of which exercisable:

        30    24,435   26,058   1.78    1.48 

 

Certain of the Group’s share option plans enable certain Directors and employees to subscribe for new ordinary shares of Barclays PLC. For accounting for treasury shares see Note 32 Reserves.

 

The weighted average contractual remaining life and number of options and awards outstanding (including those exercisable) at the balance sheet date are as follows:

 

 
              2016   2015 
              



Weighted
average
remaining
contractual
life in years
 
 
 
 
 
  



Number of
options/
awards
outstanding
(000s
 
 
 
 
  



Weighted
average
remaining
contractual
life in years
 
 
 
 
 
   



Number of
options/
awards
outstanding
(000s
 
 
 
 

SVPa,b

       1   406,016   1    386,470 

Othersa

             0-3   205,129   0-2    166,975 

There were no significant modifications to the share based payments arrangements in 20152016 and 2014.2015.

As at 31 December 2015,2016, the total liability arising from cash-settled share based payments transactions was £13m (2014: £45m)nil (2015: £13m).

Holdings of Barclays PLC shares

Various employee benefit trusts established by the Group hold shares in Barclays PLC to meet obligations under the Barclays share based payment schemes. The total number of Barclays shares held in these employee benefit trusts at 31 December 20152016 was 5.16.6 million (2014: 5.2(2015: 5.1 million). Dividend rights have been waived on all these shares. The total market value of the shares held in trust based on the year end share price of £2.19 (2014: £2.43)£2.23 (2015: £2.19) was £11.2m (2014: £12.6m)£14.7m (2015: £11.2m).

35 Pensions and post retirement benefits

Accounting for pensions and post retirement benefits

The Group operates a number of pension schemes and post-employment benefit schemes.

Defined contribution schemes – the Group recognises contributions due in respect of the accounting period in the income statement. Any contributions unpaid at the balance sheet date are included as a liability.

Defined benefit schemes – the Group recognises its obligations to members of each scheme at the period end, less the fair value of the scheme assets after applying the asset ceiling test. The clarifications contained in the proposed amendments to IFRIC 14 as to when an entity has an unconditional right to benefit from a scheme surplus are not expected to have a material impact on the Group. The Trustee board do not have a substantive right to augment benefits in the UKRF, nor do they have the right to wind up the plan except in the dissolution of the Bank or termination of contributions by the Bank.

Each scheme’s obligations are calculated using the projected unit credit method. Scheme assets are stated at fair value as at the period end.

Changes in pension scheme liabilities or assets (remeasurements) that do not arise from regular pension cost, net interest on net defined benefit liabilities or assets, past service costs, settlements or contributions to the scheme, are recognised in other comprehensive income. Remeasurements comprise experience adjustments (differences between previous actuarial assumptions and what has actually occurred), the effects of changes in actuarial assumptions, return on scheme assets (excluding amounts included in the interest on the assets) and any changes in the effect of the asset ceiling restriction (excluding amounts included in the interest on the restriction).

 

Post-employment benefit schemes – the cost of providing health care benefits to retired employees is accrued as a liability in the financial statements over the period that the employees provide services to the Group, using a methodology similar to that for defined benefit pension schemes.

 

 

Notes

aOptions/awardsaward granted over Barclays PLC shares.
bNil cost award and therefore the weighted average exercise price was nil.
cThe number of awards within Others at the end of the year principally relates to Sharesave (number of awards exercisable at end of year was 12,479,264)10,584,072). The weighted average exercise price relates to Sharesave.

 

280288  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 20152016 Annual Report on Form 20-F  


    

    

    

 

 

35 Pensions and post retirement benefitscontinued

Accounting for pensions and post retirement benefits

The Group operates a number of pension schemes (including defined contribution and defined benefit) and post-employment benefit schemes.

Defined contribution schemes – the Group recognises contributions due in respect of the accounting period in the income statement. Any contributions unpaid at the balance sheet date are included as a liability.

Defined benefit schemes – the Group recognises its obligations to members of the scheme at the period end, less the fair value of the scheme assets after applying the asset ceiling test. The clarifications contained in the proposed amendments to IFRIC 14 as to when an entity has an unconditional right to benefit from a scheme surplus are not expected to have a material impact on the Group.

Each scheme’s obligations are calculated using the projected unit credit method on the assumptions set out in the note below. Scheme assets are stated at fair value as at the period end.

Changes in pension scheme liabilities or assets (remeasurements) that do not arise from regular pension cost, net interest on net defined benefit liabilities or assets, past service costs, settlements or contributions to the scheme, are recognised in other comprehensive income.

Remeasurements comprise experience adjustments (differences between previous actuarial assumptions and what has actually occurred), the effects of changes in actuarial assumptions, return on scheme assets (excluding amounts included in the interest on the assets) and any changes in the effect of the asset ceiling restriction (excluding amounts included in the interest on the restriction).

Post-employment benefits – the cost of providing health care benefits to retired employees is accrued as a liability in the financial statements over the period that the employees provide services to the Group, using a methodology similar to that for defined benefit pension schemes.

Pension schemes

UK Retirement Fund (UKRF)

The UKRF is the Group’s main scheme, representing 92%96% of the Group’s total retirement benefit obligations. The UKRF was closed to new entrants on 1 October 2012, and comprises 10 sections, the two most significant of which are:

 

§ Afterwork, which comprises a contributory cash balance defined benefit element, and a voluntary defined contribution element. The cash balance element is accrued each year and revalued until Normal Retirement Age in line with the increase in Retail Price Index (RPI) (up to a maximum of 5% p.a.). An investment related increase of up to 2% a year may also be added at Barclays’ discretion. Between 1 October 2003 and 1 October 2012 the majority of new employees outside of the Investment Bankinvestment banking business within Barclays International were eligible to join this section. The costs ofill-health retirements and death in service benefits for Afterwork members are borne by the UKRF. The main risks that Barclays runs in relation to Afterwork are limited to needing to makealthough additional contributions are required ifpre-retirement investment returns are not sufficient to provide for the benefits.

 

§ theThe 1964 Pension Scheme. Most employees recruited before July 1997 built up benefits in thisnon-contributory defined benefit scheme in respect of service up to 31 March 2010. Pensions were calculated by reference to service and pensionable salary. From 1 April 2010, members became eligible to accrue future service benefits in either Afterwork or the Pension Investment Plan (PIP), a historic defined contribution section which is now closed to future contributions. The risks that Barclays runs in relation to the 1964 section are typical of final salary pension schemes, principally that investment returns fall short of expectations, that inflation exceeds expectations, and that retirees live longer than expected.

Barclays Pension Savings Plan (BPSP)

§ From 1 October 2012, a new UK pension scheme, the BPSP, was established to satisfy Auto Enrolment legislation. The BPSP is a defined contribution scheme (Group Personal Pension) providing benefits for all new Barclays UK hires from 1 October 2012, Investment Bank UKinvestment banking business within Barclays International employees who were in PIP as at 1 October 2012, and also all UK employees who were not members of a pension scheme at that date. As a defined contribution scheme, BPSP is not subject to the same investment return, inflation or longevitylife expectancy risks for Barclays that defined benefit schemes are. Members’ benefits reflect contributions paid and the level of investment returns achieved.

Apart from the UKRF and the BPSP, Barclays operates a number of smaller pension and long-term employee benefits and post-retirement health care plans globally, the largest of which are the US and South African defined benefit schemes. Many of the schemes are funded, with assets backing the obligations held in separate legal vehicles such as trusts. Others are operated on an unfunded basis. The benefits provided, the approach to funding, and the legal basis of the schemes, reflect their local environments.

Governance

The UKRF operates under trust law and is managed and administered on behalf of the members in accordance with the terms of the Trust Deed and Rules and all relevant legislation. The Corporate Trustee is Barclays Pension Funds Trustees Limited, a private limited company and a wholly owned subsidiary of Barclays Bank PLC. The Trustee is the legal owner of the assets of the UKRF which are held separately from the assets of the Group.

The Trustee Board comprises six Management Directors selected by Barclays, of whom three are independent Directors with no relationship with Barclays or the UKRF, plus three Member Nominated Directors selected from eligible active staff and pensioner members who apply for the role.

The BPSP is a Group Personal Pension arrangement which operates as a collection of personal pension plans. Each personal pension plan is a direct contract between the employee and the BPSP provider (Legal & General Assurance Society Limited), and is regulated by the FCA.

Similar principles of pension governance apply to the Group’s other pension schemes, although different legislation covers overseas schemes where, in most cases,depending on local legislation.

Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2016 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  289


Notes to the Group has the power to determine the funding rate.financial statements

Employee benefits

35 Pensions and post retirement benefitscontinued

Amounts recognised

The following tables include amounts recognised in the income statement and an analysis of benefit obligations and scheme assets for all Group defined benefit schemes. The net position is reconciled to the assets and liabilities recognised on the balance sheet. The tables include funded and unfunded post-retirement benefits.

 

Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  281


Notes to the financial statements

Employee benefits

35 Pensions and post retirement benefitscontinued

Income statement charge

               
             2015               2014               2013  
    £m     £m     £m  

Current service cost

   303     324     371  

Net finance cost

   42     78     55  

Past service cost

   (434   (5   4  

Settlements

   1     (15   (3

Total

   (88   382     427  

Past Service costs includes a £429m (2014: nil; 2013: nil) gain on valuation of a component of the defined retirement benefit liability.

Balance sheet reconciliation

   2015   2014  

Income statement chargea

            
                 2016                2015                2014 
      £m    £m    £m 

Current service cost

     243    255    279 

Net finance cost

     (32   41    69 

Past service cost

         (432   (1

Other movements

      2    1    (15

Total

      213    (135   332 

Past service costs includes a nil (2015: £429m; 2014: nil) gain on valuation of a component of the defined retirement benefit liability.

Past service costs includes a nil (2015: £429m; 2014: nil) gain on valuation of a component of the defined retirement benefit liability.

 

Balance sheet reconciliationa

   2016    2015 
     Of which       Of which       Of which      Of which 
     relates to       relates to       relates to      relates to 
   Total     UKRF     Total     UKRF     Total    UKRF    Total    UKRF 
   £m     £m     £m     £m     £m    £m    £m    £m 

Benefit obligation at beginning of the year

   (30,392   (27,931   (27,568   (25,093   (28,279   (26,027   (30,392   (27,931

Current service cost

   (303   (234   (324   (258   (243   (220   (303   (234

Interest costs on scheme liabilities

   (1,147   (1,010   (1,261   (1,101   (1,016   (980   (1,147   (1,010

Past service cost

   434     429     5     2             434    429 

Settlements

             83       

Remeasurement gain/(loss) – financial

   1,161     1,121     (2,493   (2,382

Remeasurement loss – demographic

   (159   (160   (370   (340

Remeasurement (loss)/gain – financial

   (7,214   (7,170   1,161    1,121 

Remeasurement gain/(loss) – demographic

   413    390    (159   (160

Remeasurement gain – experience

   609     611     407     418     525    490    609    611 

Employee contributions

   (36   (2   (35   (2   (4   (1   (36   (2

Benefits paid

   1,172     1,021     999     825     1,852    1,800    1,172    1,021 

Exchange and other movements

   382     128     165          933    (129   382    128 

Benefit obligation at end of the year

   (28,279   (26,027   (30,392   (27,931   (33,033   (31,847   (28,279   (26,027

Fair value of scheme assets at beginning of the year

       28,874         26,827         25,743         23,661     28,752    26,829    28,874    26,827 

Interest income on scheme assets

   1,105     979     1,183     1,042     1,048    1,023    1,105    979 

Employer contribution

   689     586     347     241     720    634    689    586 

Settlements

             (68     

Remeasurement – return on scheme assets greater than discount rate

   (476   (446   2,736     2,705  

Remeasurement – return on scheme assets greater/(less) than discount rate

   5,009    5,002    (476   (446

Employee contributions

   36     2     35     2     4    1    36    2 

Benefits paid

   (1,172   (1,021   (999   (825   (1,852   (1,800   (1,172   (1,021

Exchange and other movements

   (304   (98   (103   1     (1,024   131    (304   (98

Fair value of scheme assets at the end of the year

   28,752     26,829     28,874     26,827     32,657    31,820    28,752    26,829 

Net surplus/(deficit)

   473     802     (1,518   (1,104

Net (deficit)/surplus

   (376   (27   473    802 

Irrecoverable surplus (effect of asset ceiling)

   (60                          (60    

Net recognised assets/(liabilities)

   413     802     (1,518   (1,104

Net recognised (liabilities)/assets

   (376   (27   413    802 

Retirement benefit assets

   836     802     56          14        836    802 

Retirement benefit liabilities

   (423        (1,574   (1,104   (390   (27   (423    

Net retirement benefit liabilities

   413     802     (1,518   (1,104

Net retirement benefit (liabilities)/assets

   (376   (27   413    802 

Included within the benefit obligation was £2,050m (2014: £2,272m)£979m (2015: £2,050m) relating to overseas pensions and £202m (2014: £189m)£207m (2015: £202m) relating to other post-employment benefits. Of the total benefit obligation of £28,279m (2014: £30,392m), £245m (2014: £286m) was wholly unfunded.

As at 31 December 2015,2016, the UKRFUKRF’s scheme assets were in surplusdeficit versus IAS 19R19 obligations by £802m (2014: deficit£27m (2015: surplus of £1,104m)£802m). The movement for the UKRF is mainly due to a £1.9bn decrease in the defined benefit obligation. The decrease in defined benefit obligation can be linkeddiscount rate to 2.62% (2015: 3.82%), and an increase in discountinflation rate membershipto 3.35% (2015: 3.05%) partially offset by deficit contributions, updated mortality assumptions based on scheme experience, and higher than assumed returns on plan assets. The UKRF benefits paid of £1,800m (2015: £1,021m) included transfers out of the fund and contribution refunds of £1,029m (2015: £270m).

Where a changescheme’s assets exceed its obligation, an asset is recognised to the calculationextent that it does not exceed the present value of statutory underpin forfuture contribution holidays or refunds of contributions (the “asset ceiling”). In the case of the UKRF the asset ceiling is not applied as, in certain benefits.specified circumstances such aswind-up, Barclays expects to be able to recover any surplus. The application of the asset ceiling to other plans is considered on an individual plan basis.

Critical accounting estimates and judgements

Actuarial valuation of the schemes’ obligation is dependent upon a series of assumptions, below is a summary of the main financial and demographic assumptions adopted for the UKRF.

 

UKRF financial assumptions

          
           2015             2014  
    % p.a     % p.a  

Discount rate

   3.82     3.67  

Inflation rate

   3.05     3.05  

Rate of increase in salaries

   2.55     2.55  

Rate of increase for pensions in payment

   2.87     2.98  

Rate of increase for pensions in deferment

   2.87     2.98  

Afterwork revaluation rate

   3.27     3.35  

Key UKRF financial assumptions

   
2016
% p.a.
 
 
   
2015
% p.a.
 
 

Discount rate

   2.62    3.82 

Inflation rate (RPI)

   3.35    3.05 

Note

aComparative information for the income statement charge has been restated to exclude discontinued operations, while balance sheet information has not been restated. Please see page 217 for more details.

290  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2016 Annual Report on Form 20-F


35 Pensions and post retirement benefitscontinued

The UKRF discount rate assumption for 20152016 was based on a variant of the standard Willis Towers Watson RATE Link model. This variant includes all bonds rated AA by at least one of the four major ratings agencies, and assumes that yields after year 30 are flat. For 2014,The RPI inflation assumption for 2016 was set by reference to the Bank of England’s implied inflation spot curve, assuming the spot curve remains flat after the published 25 years. The inflation assumption incorporates a deduction of 20 basis points as an allowance for an inflation risk premium. The methodology used to derive the discount rate and price inflation assumption was based onis consistent with that used at the single equivalent discount rate implied by the standard Willis Towers Watson RATE Link model.

282  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F


35 Pensions and post retirement benefitscontinuedprior year end.

The UKRF’s post-retirement mortality assumptions are based on a best estimate assumption derived from an analysis in 20142016 of Barclays’Barclays own post-retirement mortality experience, and taking account of the recent evidence from published mortality surveys. An allowance has been made for future mortality improvements based on the 20132015 core projection model published by the Continuous Mortality Investigation Bureau subject to a long-term trend of 1.25% p.a.per annum in future improvements. The table below shows how the assumed life expectancy at 60, for members of the UKRF, has varied over the past three years:

 

Assumed life expectancy

              2016      2015      2014 
           2015             2014             2013  
   £m     £m     £m  

Life expectancy at 60 for current pensioners (years)

                  

– Males

   28.4     28.3     27.9       27.9      28.4      28.3 

– Females

   30.0     29.9     29.0       29.7      30.0      29.9 

Life expectancy at 60 for future pensioners currently aged 40 (years)

                  

– Males

   30.2     30.1     29.3       29.7      30.2      30.1 

– Females

   32.0     31.9     30.6       31.7      32.0      31.9 

Sensitivity analysis on actuarial assumptions

The sensitivity analysis has been calculated by valuing the UKRF liabilities using the amended assumptions shown in the table below and keeping the remaining assumptions the same as disclosed in the table above the same, except in the case of the inflation sensitivity where other assumptions that depend on assumed inflation have also been amended correspondingly.amended. The difference between the recalculated liability figure and that stated in the balance sheet reconciliation table above is the figure shown. The selection of these movements to illustrate the sensitivity of the defined benefit obligation to key assumptions should not be interpreted as Barclays expressing any specific view of the probability of such movements happening.

 

Change in key assumptions

          
   2015     2014  
   Impact on UKRF defined     Impact on UKRF defined  
   benefit obligation     benefit obligation  
   (Decrease)/     (Decrease)/     (Decrease)/     (Decrease)/  
   Increase     Increase     Increase     Increase  
    %     £bn     %     £bn  

0.5% increase in discount rate

   (8.2   (2.1   (9.0   (2.5

0.5% increase in assumed price inflation

   5.4     1.4     7.3     2.0  

One year increase to life expectancy at 60

   3.5     0.9     3.5     1.0  
Change in key assumptions          
   2016    2015 
    

(Decrease)/

Increase

in UKRF

defined

benefit

obligation

£bn

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

   


(Decrease)/

Increase in
UKRF

defined

benefit

obligation

£bn

 

 
 

 

 

 

 

Discount rate

    

0.5% p.a. increase

   (2.8   (2.1

0.25% p.a. increase

   (1.4   (1.1

0.25% p.a. decrease

   1.5    1.2 

0.5% p.a. decrease

   3.2    2.4 

Assumed RPI

    

0.5% p.a. increase

   1.9    1.4 

0.25% p.a. increase

   0.9    0.7 

0.25% p.a. decrease

   (0.9   (0.7

0.5% p.a. decrease

   (2.0   (1.3

Life expectancy at 60

    

One year increase

   1.1    0.9 

One year decrease

   (1.1   (0.9

The weighted average duration of the benefit payments reflected in the defined benefit obligation for the UKRF is 1820 years.

Assets

A long termlong-term investment strategy has been set for the UKRF, with its asset allocation comprising a mixture of equities, bonds, property and other appropriate assets. This recognises that different asset classes are likely to produce different long termlong-term returns and some asset classes may be more volatile than others. The long termlong-term investment strategy ensures, among other aims, that investments are adequately diversified. Asset managers are permitted some flexibility to vary the asset allocation from the long termlong-term investment strategy within control ranges agreed with the Trustee from time to time.

The UKRF also employs derivative instruments, where appropriate, to achieve a desired exposure or return, or to match assets more closely to liabilities. The value of assets shown reflects the assets held by the scheme, with any derivative holdings reflected on a fair value basis.

Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2016 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  291


Notes to the financial statements

Employee benefits

35 Pensions and post retirement benefitscontinued

The value of the assets of the schemes and their percentage in relation to total scheme assets were as follows:

 

Analysis of scheme assets

                   
   Total     
 
Of which relates to
UKRF
  
  
     % of total      % of total  
     fair value of      fair value of  
     scheme      scheme  
   Value     assets     Value    assets  
    £m     %     £m    %  

As at 31 December 2015

       

Equities – quoted

   7,764     27.0     6,947    25.9  

Equities – non quoted

   1,757     6.1     1,750    6.5  

Bonds – fixed governmenta

   1,105     3.8     577    2.2  

Bonds – index-linked governmenta

   9,677     33.7     9,670    36.0  

Bonds – corporate and othera

   5,856     20.4     5,680    21.2  

Property – commercialb

   1,602     5.6     1,581    5.9  

Derivativesb

   183     0.6     183    0.7  

Cash

   67     0.2     47    0.2  

Otherb

   741     2.6     394    1.4  

Fair value of scheme assets

   28,752     100.0     26,829    100.0  

Notes

aAssets held are predominantly quoted.
bAssets held are predominantly non-quoted.

Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  283


Notes to the financial statements

Employee benefits

35 Pensions and post retirement benefitscontinued

Analysis of scheme assets

                        
   Total     Of which relates to UKRF     Total    Of which relates to UKRF 
     % of total       % of total     Value    


% of total
    fair value of
scheme
assets
 
 
 
 
   Value    


% of total
    fair value of
scheme
assets
 
 
 
 
         fair value of           fair value of     £m    %    £m    % 
     scheme       scheme  
   Value     assets     Value     assets  
   £m     %     £m     %  

As at 31 December 2014

        

As at 31 December 2016

        

Equities – quoted

   6,813     23.6     5,808     21.6     8,123    24.9    7,840    24.6 

Equities – non-quoted

   1,549     5.4     1,537     5.7     2,043    6.3    2,042    6.4 

Bonds – fixed governmenta

   934     3.2     609     2.3     1,330    4.1    1,072    3.4 

Bonds – index-linked governmenta

   7,114     24.6     7,114     26.5     13,173    40.3    13,165    41.4 

Bonds – corporate and othera

   5,599     19.4     5,317     19.8     5,222    16.0    5,054    15.9 

Property – commercialb

   2,023     7.0     1,945     7.3     1,630    5.0    1,622    5.1 

Derivativesb

   1,472     5.1     1,472     5.5     870    2.7    870    2.7 

Cash

   2,897     10.0     2,644     9.9  

Pooled fundsc

   284     1.0     284     1.1  

Otherb

   189     0.7     97     0.3     266    0.7    155    0.5 

Fair value of scheme assets

   28,874     100.0         26,827     100.0     32,657    100.0        31,820    100.0 

As at 31 December 2015

        

Equities – quoted

   7,764    27.0    6,947    25.9 

Equities –non-quoted

   1,757    6.1    1,750    6.5 

Bonds – fixed governmenta

   1,105    3.8    577    2.2 

Bonds – index-linked governmenta

   9,677    33.7    9,670    36.0 

Bonds – corporate and othera

   5,856    20.4    5,680    21.2 

Property – commercialb

   1,602    5.6    1,581    5.9 

Derivativesb

   183    0.6    183    0.7 

Otherb

   808    2.8    441    1.6 

Fair value of scheme assets

   28,752    100.0    26,829    100.0 

Included within the fair value of scheme assets were: £5m (2014: £3m)£0.2m (2015: £5m) relating to shares in Barclays PLC, £23m (2014: £39m)£0.1m (2015: £23m) relating to bonds issued by the Barclays Group, £6m (2014:PLC, nil (2015: £6m) relating to property occupied by Group companies, and £7m (2014: £14m)nil (2015: £7m) relating to other investments. The UKRF also invests in pooled investment vehicles which may hold shares or debt issued by the Barclays Group.PLC.

The UKRF scheme assets also include £36m (2014:£32m (2015: £36m) relating to UK private equity investments and £1,714m (2014: £1,502m)£2,009m (2015: £1,714m) relating to overseas private equity investments. These are disclosed above within Equities –non-quoted.

Approximately a third40% of the UKRF assets are invested in liability-driven investment strategies; primarily UK gilts as well as interest rate and inflation swaps. These are used to better match the assets to its liabilities. The swaps are used to reduce the scheme’s inflation and duration risks against its liabilities.

Notes

aAssets held are predominately quoted.
bAssets held are predominantlynon-quoted.

292  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2016 Annual Report on Form 20-F


35 Pensions and post retirement benefitscontinued

Funding

The latest triennial funding valuation of the UKRF was carried outis currently underway with an effective date of 30 September 2013. This was completed2016. Contribution requirements, including any deficit recovery plans, must be agreed by 31 December 2017, and are expected to be agreed between the Bank and Trustee well in 2014advance of this statutory deadline. In these discussions, the Bank and the Trustee are taking into account the impact of the Structural Reform Programme.

The previous triennial funding valuation at 30 September 2013 showed a deficit of £3.6bn and a funding level of 87.4%. The next funding valuation of the UKRF is due to be completed in 2017 with an effective date of 30 September 2016. In non-valuation years, the Scheme Actuary prepares an annual update of the funding position. The latest annual update was carried out as at 30 September 2015 and showed a deficit of £6.0bn and a funding level of 82.7%. The increase in funding deficit over the year to 30 September can be mainly attributed to the fall in real gilt yields over the year.

The Bank and Trustee agreed a scheme specificscheme-specific funding target, statement of funding principles, a schedule of contributions and a recovery plan to eliminate the deficit inrelative to the Fund.funding target. The main differences between the funding and IAS 19 assumptions are a more prudent discount rate and longevity assumptionassumptions for funding and a different approach to setting the discount rate.funding.

The recovery plan to eliminateagreed as part of the deficit will result in2013 actuarial valuation provided for the Bank payingto pay deficit contributions to the FundUKRF until 2021. Deficit contributions of £300m were paid in 2015 and also are payable in 2016. FurtherUnder the existing recovery plan, further deficit contributions of £740m per annum are payable during 2017 to 2021. Up2021, and up to £500m of the 2021 deficit contribution is payable in 2017 depending on the deficit level at that time. These deficit contributions are in addition to the regular contributions to meet the Group’s share of the cost of benefits accruing over each year.

Innon-valuation years, the Scheme Actuary prepares an annual update of the funding position. The latest annual update was carried out as at 30 September 2015 and showed a deficit of £6.0bn and a funding level of 82.7%. The increase in funding deficit over the year to 30 September 2015 can be mainly attributedcontributions paid to the fall in real gilt yields overUKRF are agreed between Barclays and the year.Trustee every three years.

Defined benefit contributions paid with respect to the UKRF were as follows:

 

Contributions paid

      
   £m     £m 

2016

           634 

2015

           586     586 

2014

   241     241 

2013

   238  

Included within the Group’s contributions paid were £112m (2015: nil; 2014: nil) Section 75 contributions.

The Group’s expected contribution to the UKRF in respect of defined benefits in 20162017 is £632m (2015: £586m).£1,585m (2016: £634m) including £167m Section 75 contributions. In addition, the expected contributions to UK defined contribution schemes in 20162017 is £49m (2015: £52m)£36m (2016: £49m) to the UKRF and £140m (2015:£124m (2016: £126m) to the BPSP. For the material non-UK defined benefit schemes, the expected contributions in 2016 are £78m (2015: £107m).

Notes

aAssets held are predominantly quoted.
bAssets held are predominantly non-quoted.
cPooled funds relate to a variety of investments which are predominantly non-quoted.

 

284  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 20152016 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  293


Notes to the financial statements

Scope of consolidation

 

 

ThisThe section presents information on the Group’s investments in subsidiaries, joint ventures and associates and its interests in structured entities. Detail is also given on securitisation transactions the Group has entered into and arrangements that are held off-balanceoff balance sheet.

 

36 Principal subsidiaries

 

 

Barclays applies IFRS 10Consolidated Financial Statements. The consolidated financial statements combine the financial statements of Barclays PLC and all its subsidiaries. Subsidiaries are entities over which the Group has control. Under IFRS 10, this is when the Group is exposed or has rights to variable returns from its involvement in the entity and has the ability to affect those returns through its power over the entity.

 

The Group reassesses whether it controls an entity if facts and circumstances indicate that there have been changes to its power, its rights to variable returns or its ability to use its power to affect the amount of its returns.

 

Intra-group transactions and balances are eliminated on consolidation and consistent accounting policies are used throughout the Group for the purposes of the consolidation. Changes in ownership interests in subsidiaries are accounted for as equity transactions if they occur after control has been obtained and they do not result in loss of control.

 

The significant judgements used in applying this policy are set out below.

 

Accounting for investment in subsidiaries

In the individual financial statements of Barclays PLC, investments in subsidiaries are stated at cost less impairment.

Principal subsidiaries for the Group are set out below. This includes those subsidiaries that are most significant in the context of the Group’s business, results or financial position.

 

          Non-     Non-  
       controlling     controlling  
       interests –     interests –  
     Percentage     proportion of     proportion of  
     of voting     ownership     voting  
 Principal place of business or    rights held     interests     interests  

Company name

 incorporation Nature of business   %     %     %  

Company Name

 

Principal place of business or

incorporation

 Nature of business   


Percentage
of voting
rights held
%
 
 
 
 
   





Non-
controlling
interests –
proportion of
ownership
interests

%

 
 
 
 
 
 

 

   





Non-
controlling
interests –
proportion of
voting
interests

%

 
 
 
 
 
 

 

Barclays Bank PLC

 England Banking, holding company   100     11        England Banking, holding company   100    11     

Barclays Capital Securities Limited

 England Securities dealing   100             England Securities dealing   100         

Barclays Private Clients International Limited

 Isle of Man Banking   100          

Barclays Securities Japan Limited

 Japan Securities dealing   100             Japan Securities dealing   100         

Barclays Africa Group Limited

 South Africa Banking   62     38     38   South Africa Banking   50.1    49.9    49.9 

Barclays Capital Inc

 United States Securities dealing   100             US Securities dealing   100         

Barclays Bank Delaware

 United States Credit card issuer   100             US Credit card issuer   100         

The country of registration or incorporation is also the principal area of operation of each of the above subsidiaries. Investments in subsidiaries held directly by Barclays Bank PLC are marked *. See Note 46 Related undertakings for further information on the Group’s undertakings.

Ownership interests are in some cases different to voting interests due to the existence ofnon-voting equity interests, such as preference shares. See Note 33Non-controlling interests for more information.

Barclays Bank SAUPrivate Clients International Limited was considered a principal subsidiary in 2014.2015. Barclays Bank SAU and its subsidiaries, comprisingPrivate Clients International Limited transferred all its associated assets and liabilities was sold to a third party, Caixabank, SA on 2 January 2015.Barclays Bank PLC in October 2016.

Significant judgements and assumptions used to determine the scope of the consolidation

Determining whether the Group has control of an entity is generally straightforward based on ownership of the majority of the voting capital. However, in certain instances, this determination will involve significant judgement, particularly in the case of structured entities where voting rights are often not the determining factor in decisions over the relevant activities. This judgement may involve assessing the purpose and design of the entity. It will also often be necessary to consider whether the Group, or another involved party with power over the relevant activities, is acting as a principal in its own right or as an agent on behalf of others.

There is also often considerable judgement involved in the ongoing assessment of control over structured entities. In this regard, where market conditions have deteriorated such that the other investors’ exposures to the structure’s variable returns have been substantively eliminated, the Group may conclude that the managers of the structured entity are acting as its agent and therefore will consolidate the structured entity.

An interest in equity voting rights exceeding 50% would typically indicate that the Group has control of an entity. However, certain entities, as set out below, are excluded from consolidation because the Group does not have exposure to their variable returns.

 

Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  285


Notes to the financial statements

Scope of consolidation

36 Principal subsidiariescontinued

     Percentage of voting  Equity shareholder’s  Retained profit for   
Country of registration or incorporation  Company name  

Percentage of voting

rights held (%)

  

Equity shareholder’s

funds (£m)

  

Retained profit for   

the year (£m)   

  Company name  rights held (%)  funds (£m)  the year (£m)   
UK  Fitzroy Finance Limited  100    –    Fitzroy Finance Limited  100    –  
Cayman Islands  Palomino Limited  100  2  –    Palomino Limited  100  2  1  

These entities are managed by external counterparties and consequently are not controlled by the Group. Where appropriate, interests relating to these entities are included in Note 37 Structured entities.

Significant restrictions

As is typical for a Group of its size and international scope, there are restrictions on the ability of Barclays PLC to obtain distributions of capital, access the assets or repay the liabilities of members of its Group due to the statutory, regulatory and contractual requirements of its subsidiaries and due to the protective rights ofnon-controlling interests. These are considered below.on the next page.

294  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2016 Annual Report on Form 20-F


36 Principal subsidiariescontinued

Regulatory requirements

Barclays’ principal subsidiary companies have assets and liabilities before intercompany eliminations of £1,468bn (2014: £1,757bn)£1,553bn (2015: £1,468bn) and £1,398bn (2014: £1,683bn)£1,480bn (2015: £1,398bn) respectively. The assets and liabilities are subject to prudential regulation and regulatory capital requirements in the countries in which they are regulated. These require entities to maintain minimum capital levels which cannot be returned to the parent company, Barclays PLC on a going concern basis.

In order to meet capital requirements, subsidiaries may hold certain equity-accounted and debt-accounted issued financial instruments andnon-equity instruments such as Tier 1 and Tier 2 capital instruments and other forms of subordinated liabilities. See Note 33 Non-controlling interests28 Contingent liabilities and commitments, Note 30 Subordinated liabilities and Note 33Non-controlling interests for particulars of these instruments. These instruments may be subject to cancellation clauses or preference share restrictions that would limit the ability of the entity to repatriate the capital on a timely basis.

Liquidity requirements

Regulated subsidiaries of the Group are required to maintain liquidity pools to meet PRA and local regulatory requirements. The main subsidiaries affected are Barclays Bank PLC, Barclays Africa Group Limited and Barclays Capital Inc which must maintain daily compliance with the regulatory minimum. See page 105pages 159 to 177 for further details of liquidity requirements, including those of our significant subsidiaries.

Statutory requirements

The Group’s subsidiaries are subject to statutory requirements not to make distributions of capital and unrealised profits and generally to maintain solvency. These requirements restrict the ability of subsidiaries to make remittances of dividends to Barclays PLC, the ultimate parent, except in the event of a legal capital reduction or liquidation. In most cases, the regulatory restrictions referred to above exceed the statutory restrictions.

Contractual requirements

Asset encumbrance

The Group uses its financial assets to raise finance in the form of securitisations and through the liquidity schemes of central banks. Once encumbered, the assets are not available for transfer around the Group. The assets typically affected are disclosed in Note 40 Assets pledged.Pledged.

Assets held by consolidated structured entities

£80m (2014: £379m)99m (2015: £80m) of assets included in the Group’s balance sheet relate to consolidated investment funds and are held to pay return and principal to the holders of units in the funds. The assets held in these funds cannot be transferred to other members of the Group. The decrease is materially driven by the sale of the Spanish business in January 2015, which included certain European wealth funds, and the disposal of a French wealth fund during the year.

Other restrictions

The Group is required to maintain balances with central banks and other regulatory authorities, and these amounted to £4,369m (2014: £4,448m)£4,254m (2015: £4,369m).

Barclays Africa Group Limited assets are subject to exchange control regulation determined by the South African Reserve Bank (SARB). Special dividends and loans in lieu of dividends cannot be transferred without SARB approval.

37 Structured entities

A structured entity is an entity in which voting or similar rights are not the dominant factor in deciding control. Structured entities are generally created to achieve a narrow and well defined objective with restrictions around their ongoing activities.

Depending on the Group’s power over the activities of the entity and its exposure to and ability to influence its own returns, it may consolidate the entity. In other cases, it may sponsor or have exposure to such an entity but not consolidate it.

Consolidated structured entities

The Group has contractual arrangements which may require it to provide financial support to the following types of consolidated structured entities:

Securitisation vehicles

The Group uses securitisation as a source of financing and a means of risk transfer. Refer to Note 39 Securitisations for further detail.

The Group provides liquidity facilities to certain securitisation vehicles. At 31 December 2015,2016, there were outstanding loan commitments to these entities totalling £135m (2014: £201m)£152m (2015: £135m).

286  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F


37 Structured entitiescontinued

Commercial paper (CP) and medium-term note conduits

The Group provided £8.5bn (2014: £9.1bn)£9bn (2015: £8.5bn) in undrawn contractual backstop liquidity facilities to CP conduits.

Fund management entities

Barclays has contractually guaranteed the performance of certain cash investments in a number of managed investment funds which have resulted in their consolidation. As at 31 December 2015,2016, the notional value of the guarantee was £257m (2014: £585m)£99m (2015: £257m). The decrease is primarily due to the closure of a number of European wealth funds during the year.year, as well as a reduction in fund assets.

Employee benefit and other trusts

The Group provides capital contributions to employee share trusts to enable them to meet their obligations to employees under share-based payment plans. During 2015,2016, the Group provided undrawn liquidity facilities of £784m (2014: £332m)£0.4bn (2015: £0.8bn) to certain trusts.

Unconsolidated Structured Entities in which the Group has an interest

An interest in a structured entity is any form of contractual ornon-contractual involvement which creates variability in returns arising from the performance of the entity for the Group. Such interests include holdings of debt or equity securities, derivatives that transfer financial risks from the entity to the Group, lending, loan commitments, financial guarantees and investment management agreements.

Interest rate swaps, foreign exchange derivatives that are not complex and which expose the Group to insignificant credit risk by being senior in the payment waterfall of a securitisation and derivatives that are determined to introduce risk or variability to a structured entity are not considered to be an interest in an entity and have been excluded from the disclosures below.

Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2016 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  295


Notes to the financial statements

Scope of consolidation

37 Structured entitiescontinued

The nature and extent of the Group’s interests in structured entities is summarised below:

 

Summary of interests in unconsolidated structured entities

                         
    

 

 

Secured

financing

£m

  

  

  

   

 

 

 

    Short-term

traded

interests

£m

  

  

  

  

   

 

 

Traded

    derivatives

£m

  

  

  

   

 

 

Other

    interests

£m

  

  

  

   

 

Total

£m

  

  

As at December 2015

          

Assets

          

Trading portfolio assets

        8,949          1,648     10,597  

Financial assets designated at fair value

   12,382               353     12,735  

Derivative financial instruments

             4,427     1,926     6,353  

Available for sale investments

                  1,060     1,060  

Loans and advances to banks

                  4,067     4,067  

Loans and advances to customers

                  27,700     27,700  

Reverse repurchase agreements and other similar secured lending

   7,117                    7,117  

Other assets

                  31     31  

Total assets

   19,499     8,949     4,427     36,785     69,660  

Liabilities

          

Derivative financial instruments

             2,761     1,926     4,687  

As at December 2014

          

Assets

          

Trading portfolio assets

        14,538          3,668     18,206  

Financial assets designated at fair value

                  963     963  

Derivative financial instruments

             5,207     1,594     6,801  

Available for sale investments

                  1,216     1,216  

Loans and advances to banks

                  4,277     4,277  

Loans and advances to customers

                  30,067     30,067  

Reverse repurchase agreements and other similar secured lending

   37,139                    37,139  

Other assets

                  38     38  

Total assets

   37,139     14,538     5,207         41,823         98,707  

Liabilities

          

Derivative financial instruments

             5,222     1,514     6,736  

Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  287


Notes to the financial statements

Scope of consolidation

Summary of interests in unconsolidated structured entities                         
    

Secured
financing
£m
 
 
 
   


Short-term
traded
interests
£m
 
 
 
 
   

Traded
derivatives
£m
 
 
 
   

Other
interests
£m
 
 
 
   

Total

£m

 

 

As at 31 December 2016          
Assets          
Trading portfolio assets       8,436        516    8,952 
Financial assets designated at fair value   22,706            367    23,073 
Derivative financial instruments           4,731    2,130    6,861 
Available for sale investments               894    894 
Loans and advances to banks               4,915    4,915 
Loans and advances to customers               24,142    24,142 
Reverse repurchase agreements and other similar secured lending   6,338                6,338 
Other assets               25    25 
Total assets   29,044    8,436    4,731    32,989    75,200 
Liabilities          
Derivative financial instruments           3,567    2,130    5,697 
As at 31 December 2015          
Assets          
Trading portfolio assets       8,949        1,648    10,597 
Financial assets designated at fair value   12,382            353    12,735 
Derivative financial instruments           4,427    1,926    6,353 
Available for sale investments               1,060    1,060 
Loans and advances to banks       ���        4,067    4,067 
Loans and advances to customers               27,700    27,700 
Reverse repurchase agreements and other similar secured lending   7,117                7,117 
Other assets               31    31 
Total assets   19,499    8,949    4,427    36,785    69,660 
Liabilities          
Derivative financial instruments           2,761    1,926    4,687 

37 Structured entitiescontinued

Secured financing arrangements, short term traded interests and traded derivatives are typically managed under market risk management policies described on pages 101 and 102page 143 which includes an indication of the change of risk measures compared to last year. For this reason, the total assets of these entities are not considered meaningful for the purposes of understanding the related risks and so have not been presented. Other interests include a portfolio held withinNon-Core portfolio which is being managed down, conduits and corporate lending where the interest is driven by normal customer demand.

Secured financing

The Group routinely enters into reverse repurchase contracts, stock borrowing and similar arrangements on normal commercial terms where the counterparty to the arrangement is a structured entity. Due to the nature of these arrangements, especially the transfer of collateral and ongoing margining, the Group has minimal exposure to the performance of the structured entity counterparty. A description of these transactions is included in Note 22 Reverse repurchase and repurchase agreements including other similar secured lending and borrowing.

Short-term traded interests

The Group buys and sells interests in structured entities as part of its trading activities, for example, retail mortgage backedmortgage-backed securities, CDOscollateralised debt obligations and similar interests. Such interests are typically held individually or as part of a larger portfolio for no more than 90 days. In such cases, the Group typically has no other involvement with the structured entity other than the securities it holds as part of trading activities and its maximum exposure to loss is restricted to the carrying value of the asset.

As at 31 December 2015, £8,576m (2014: £12,058m)2016, £6,568m (2015: £7,443m) of the Group’s £8,949m (2014: £14,538m)£8,436m (2015: £8,949m) short-term traded interests were comprised of debt securities issued by asset securitisation vehicles.

Traded derivatives

The Group enters into a variety of derivative contracts with structured entities which reference market risk variables such as interest rates, foreign exchange rates and credit indices amongamongst other things. The main derivative types which are considered interests in structured entities include index basedindex-based and entity specific credit default swaps, balance guaranteed swaps, total return swaps, commodities swaps, and equity swaps. A description of the types of derivatives and the risk management practices are detailed in Note 15 Derivative financial instruments. The risk of loss may be mitigated through ongoing margining requirements as well as a right to cash flows from the structured entity which are senior in the payment waterfall. Such margining requirements are consistent with market practice for many derivative arrangements and in line with the Group’s normal credit policies.

Derivative transactions require the counterparty to provide cash or other collateral under margining agreements to mitigate counterparty credit risk. Included in the traded derivatives total are £409m (2014: £445m) of derivative assets which are ‘cleared derivative’ type arrangements. These are transactions where the Group enters into a contract with an exchange on behalf of a structured entity client and holds an opposite position with it. The Group is exposed to settlement risk only on these derivatives which is mitigated through daily margining. Total notionals amounted to £117,642m (2014: £176,584m)£1,183,215m (2015: £1,117,642m).

296  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2016 Annual Report on Form 20-F


37 Structured entitiescontinued

Except for CDScredit default swaps where the maximum exposure to loss is the swap notional amount, it is not possible to estimate the maximum exposure to loss in respect of derivative positions as the fair value of derivatives is subject to changes in market rates of interest, exchange rates and credit indices which by their nature are uncertain. In addition, the Group’s losses would be subject to mitigating action under its traded market risk and credit risk policies that require the counterparty to provide collateral in cash or other assets on a daily basis in most cases.

Other interests in unconsolidated structured entities

The Group’s interests in structured entities not held for the purposes of short-term trading activities are set out below, summarised by the purpose of the entities and limited to significant categories, based on maximum exposure to loss.

 

288  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F


37 Structured entitiescontinued    

Nature of interest

                                          
   

 

 

 

Structured

credit

portfolio

£m

  

  

  

  

   

 

 

 

Multi-seller

conduit

programmes

£m

  

  

  

  

   

 

Lending

£m

  

  

   
 

 

 

Mortgage-
backed

securities

£m

  
  

  

  

   

 

 

 

Investment

funds and

trusts

£m

  

  

  

  

   

 

Others

£m

  

  

   

 

Total

£m

  

  

   


Structured
credit
portfolio
£m
 
 
 
 
   


Multi-seller
conduit
programmes
£m
 
 
 
 
   

Lending

£m

 

 

   


Mortgage-
backed
securities
£m
 
 
 
 
   


Investment
funds and
trusts

£m

 
 
 

 

   
Others
£m
 
 
   

Total

£m

 

 

As at December 2015

              
As at 31 December 2016              

Trading portfolio assets

                            

– Debt securities

   1,545                         40     1,585     441                        441 

– Equity securities

                            63     63                         75    75 

Financial assets designated at fair value

                                                 

– Loans and advances to customers

             247               6     253             260            4    264 

– Debt securities

             41               57     98             50            48    98 

– Equity securities

                            2     2                         5    5 

Derivative financial instruments

                            1,926     1,926                         2,130    2,130 

Available for sale investments

                                                 

– Debt securities

   537               515          8     1,060     535            357        2    894 
Loans and advances to banks           4,890            25    4,915 

Loans and advances to customers

   1,599     5,029     20,571               501     27,700     637    6,016    16,754            735    24,142 

Loans and advances to banks

             4,051               16     4,067  

Other assets

        4     7          20          31         5    7        13        25 

Total on-balance sheet exposures

   3,681     5,033     24,917     515     20     2,619     36,785  

Total off-balance sheet notional amounts

   708     3,042     10,225               1,409     15,384  
Total on balance sheet exposures   1,613    6,021    21,961    357    13    3,024    32,989 
Total off balance sheet notional amounts   681    2,734    9,873            1,058    14,346 

Maximum exposure to loss

   4,389     8,075     35,142     515     20     4,028     52,169     2,294    8,755    31,834    357    13    4,082    47,335 

Total assets of the entity

   36,290     81,355     376,296     115,351     21,766     5,084     636,142     22,508    75,535    492,950    12,213    18,550    4,621    626,377 

As at December 2014

              
As at 31 December 2015              

Trading portfolio assets

                            

– Debt securities

   3,590                         51     3,641     1,545                    40    1,585 

– Equity securities

                            27     27                         63    63 

Financial assets designated at fair value

                            

– Loans and advances to customers

             881               11     892             247            6    253 

– Debt securities

                            35     35             41            57    98 

– Equity securities

                            36     36                         2    2 

Derivative financial instruments

             80               1,514     1,594                         1,926    1,926 

Available for sale investments

                            

– Debt securities

   1     575          626          14     1,216     537            515        8    1,060 
Loans and advances to banks           4,051            16    4,067 

Loans and advances to customers

   3,390     8,236     17,780               661     30,067     1,599    5,029    20,571            501    27,700 

Loans and advances to banks

             4,277                    4,277  

Other assets

        5     9          21     3     38         4    7        20        31 

Total on-balance sheet exposures

   6,981     8,816     23,027     626     21     2,352     41,823  

Total off-balance sheet notional amounts

   1,078     8,075     6,359               2,104     17,616  
Total on balance sheet exposures   3,681    5,033    24,917    515    20    2,619    36,785 
Total off balance sheet notional amounts   708    3,042    10,225            1,409    15,384 

Maximum exposure to loss

   8,059     16,891     29,386     626     21     4,456     59,439     4,389    8,075    35,142    515    20    4,028    52,169 

Total assets of the entity

   50,279     97,298         390,522     147,422     25,556         5,816         716,893     36,290    81,355    376,296    115,351    21,766    5,084    636,142 

Maximum exposure to loss

Unless specified otherwise below, the Group’s maximum exposure to loss is the total of its on-balanceon balance sheet positions and its off-balanceoff balance sheet arrangements, being loan commitments and financial guarantees. Exposure to loss is mitigated through collateral, financial guarantees, the availability of netting and credit protection held.

Structured Credit Portfolio

This comprises interests in debt securities issued by securitisation vehicles, mainly CLOs, CDOs,Collateralised Loan Obligations (CLOs), Collateralised Debt Obligations (CDOs), Residential and Commercial Mortgage-Backed Securitisation structures (RMBSs and CMBSs), and drawn and undrawn loan facilities to these entities. In some cases, the securities are ‘wrapped’ with credit protection from a monoline insurer, which transfers the credit risk to the monoline. The entities are wholly debt financed through the issuance of tranches of debt securities or through direct funding, such as the loan facilities provided by the Group. As the underlying assets of the entities amortise and pay down, the debt securities issued by the entities are repaid in order of seniority. Where the entities experience significant credit deterioration, debt securities may be written off or cancelled in reverse order of seniority.

As at 31 December 2016, the £1,613m (2015: £3,681m) Group’s funded exposures comprised of £441m (2015: £1,545m) debt securities at fair value and £637m (2015: £1,599m) amortised cost loans and advances. Of which £645m (2015: £2,783m) were within investment grade, and the remainder eithernon-investment grade or not rated. The Group also had £681m (2015: £708m) of unfunded exposures in the form of undrawn liquidity commitments. Of the £2,294m (2015: £4,389m) of funded and unfunded exposures, £2,294m (2015: £4,387m) is senior in the capital structure of the entity.

 

  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 20152016 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  289297


Notes to the financial statements

Scope of consolidation

    

 

 

37 Structured entitiescontinued

As at 31 December 2015 the Group’s funded exposures comprised £1,545m (2014: £3,591m) debt securities at fair value and £1,599m (2014: £3,390m) amortised cost loans and advances. Of the £3,681m (2014: £6,981m), £2,783m (2014: £4,822m) is investment grade, with the remainder either non-investment grade or not rated. The Group also had £708m (2014: £1,078m) of unfunded exposures in the form of undrawn liquidity commitments. Of the £4,389m (2014: £8,059m) of funded and unfunded exposures, £4,387m (2014: £7,897m) is senior in the capital structure of the entity.

Though the Group’s funded exposures are primarily investment grade and senior in the capital structure, there are cases where the interests that are subordinate to the Group’s senior and mezzanine interests have minimal or no value, due to decreases in the fair value of the underlying collateral held by the entity.

The Group’s income from these entities comprises trading income (largely gains and losses on changes in the fair value and interest earned on bonds) on items classified as held for trading and interest income on interests classified as loans and receivables.

During 2015,2016, the Group recorded a fair value lossgain of £78m (2015: £4m (2014: £91m loss) on debt securities. Impairmentsecurities, impairment losses recorded on loans and advances were immaterial in both the current and prior year.

The fair value of the Group’s interests in certain CLOs and CDOs is influenced by the protection directly provided to the structured entities by monoline insurers in addition to the value of the collateral held by the entities. The protection provided to the entities by the monoline insurers is in the form of a CDS. However, the ability of the monolines to make payments is uncertain, which is reflected in the valuation of the Group’s interests in the monoline wrapped CLOs and CDOs.

Multi-seller conduit programmesprogramme

The conduits engagemulti-seller conduit engages in providing financing to various clients and hold whole or partial interests in pools of receivables or similar obligations. These instruments are protected from loss through over-collateralisation, seller guarantees, or other credit enhancements provided to the conduits.conduit. The Group’s off balance sheet exposure included in the table above represents liquidity facilities that are provided to the conduitsconduit for the benefit of the holders of the commercial paper issued by the conduitsconduit and will only be drawn where the conduits areconduit is unable to access the commercial paper market. If these liquidity facilities are drawn, the Group is protected from loss through over-collateralisation, seller guarantees, or other credit enhancements provided to the conduits.conduit. The Group also has overlapping exposure to the conduit that arises from the letter of credit and the programme loan. The letter of credit is an unfunded commitment that is only funded to cover credit losses up to 10% of total commitments. The programme loan, which allows the conduit to comply with US risk retention rules, is a funded exposure that is positioned pari passu with the interests of commercial paper holders. The Group earns income from fees received on the liquidity facility and the letter of credit provided to the conduits.conduit, as well as from management fees. There were no impairment losses on this lending in either of the current year or the prior year.

Lending

The portfolio includes lending provided by the Group to unconsolidated structured entities in the normal course of its lending business to earn income in the form of interest and lending fees and includes loans to structured entities that are generally collateralised by property, equipment or other assets. All loans are subject to the Group’s credit sanctioning process. Collateral arrangements are specific to the circumstances of each loan with additional guarantees and collateral sought from the sponsor of the structured entity for certain arrangements. During the period the Group incurred an impairment of £35m (2014: £31m)£24m (2015: £35m) against such facilities. The main types of lending are £3bn (2014: £4bn)£2bn (2015: £3bn) of funding loans to bankruptcy remote structured entities to either invest or develop properties, £4bn (2014: £5bn)£3bn (2015: £4bn) of loans to structured entities which have been created by an individual to hold one or more assets, £2bn (2014:(2015: £2bn) to entities whose operations are limited to financing or funding the acquisition of specific assets such as schools, hospitals, roads and renewable energy projects under the Private Finance Initiative (PFI), and £1bn (2014:(2015: £1bn) of funding loans to bankruptcy remote structured entities to enable them to purchase capital equipment for parent companies and are supported by government export guarantees.

Mortgage-backed securities

This represents a portfolio of floating rate notes mainly mortgage-backed security positions, used as an accounting hedge of interest rate risk under the Group’s structural hedging programme. All notes are investment grade. The portfolio has decreased owing to a reduced requirement for hedge accounting capacity in sterling.Sterling.

Investment funds and trusts

In the course of its fund management activities, the Group establishes pooled investment funds that comprise investments of various kinds, tailored to meet certain investors’ requirements. The Group’s interest in funds is generally restricted to a fund management fee, the value of which is typically based on the performance of the fund.

The Group acts as trustee to a number of trusts established by or on behalf of its clients. The purpose of the trusts, which meet the definition of structured entities, is to hold assets on behalf of beneficiaries. The Group’s interest in trusts is generally restricted to unpaid fees which, depending on the trust, may be fixed or based on the value of the trust assets. Barclays has no other risk exposure to the trusts.

Other

This includes £1,926m (2014: £1,514m)£2,130m (2015: £1,926m) of derivative transactions with structured entities where the market risk is materially hedged with corresponding derivative contracts.

Assets transferred to sponsored unconsolidated structured entities

Assets transferred to sponsored unconsolidated structured entities were immaterial.

38 Investments in associates and joint ventures

Accounting for associates and joint ventures

Barclays applies IAS 28 Investments in Associates and IFRS 11 Joint Arrangements. Associates are entities in which the Group has significant influence, but not control, over the operating and financial policies. Generally the Group holds more than 20%, but less than 50%, of their voting shares. Joint ventures are arrangements where the Group has joint control and rights to the net assets of the entity.

The Group’s investments in associates and joint ventures are initially recorded at cost and increased (or decreased) each year by the Group’s share of the post acquisition profit/(loss). The Group ceases to recognise its share of the losses of equity accounted associates when its share of the net assets and amounts due from the entity have been written off in full, unless it has a contractual or constructive obligation to make good its share of the losses. In some cases, investments in these entities may be held at fair value through profit or loss, for example, those held by private equity businesses.

 

290298  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 20152016 Annual Report on Form 20-F  


    

    

    

 

 

38 Investments in associates and joint venturescontinued

Accounting for associates and joint ventures

Barclays applies IAS 28Investments in Associates and IFRS 11Joint Arrangements. Associates are entities in which the Group has significant influence, but not control, over the operating and financial policies. Generally the Group holds more than 20%, but less than 50%, of their voting shares. Joint ventures are arrangements where the Group has joint control and rights to the net assets of the entity.

The Group’s investments in associates and joint ventures are initially recorded at cost and increased (or decreased) each year by the Group’s share of the post acquisition profit/(loss). The Group ceases to recognise its share of the losses of equity accounted associates when its share of the net assets and amounts due from the entity have been written off in full, unless it has a contractual or constructive obligation to make good its share of the losses. In some cases, investments in these entities may be held at fair value through profit or loss, for example, those held by private equity businesses.

There are no individually significant investments in joint ventures or associates held by Barclays.

 

    2015     2014  
   Associates     Joint ventures       Total     Associates     Joint ventures       Total  
    £m     £m       £m     £m     £m       £m  
  Equity accounted   217     356       573     303     408       711  
  Held at fair value through profit or loss   77     475       552     307     366       673  
  Total   294     831       1,125     610     774       1,384  

 

Summarised financial information for the Group’s equity accounted associates and joint ventures is set out below. The amounts shown are the net income of the investees, not just the Group’s share for the year ended 31 December 2015, with the exception of certain undertakings for which the amounts are based on accounts made up to dates not earlier than three months before the balance sheet date.

 

   

                Associates     Joint ventures  
             2015         2014         2015           2014  
                £m     £m     £m       £m  
  Profit/(loss) from continuing operations         6     (9   86       146  
  Other comprehensive income                    13     (24     (5
  Total comprehensive income               6     4     62       141  
         2016                2015        
   Associates    Joint ventures      Total    Associates    Joint ventures      Total  
    £m    £m      £m    £m    £m      £m  

Equity accounted

   321    363      684    217    356      573  

Held at fair value through profit or loss

       484      484    77    475      552  

Total

   321    847      1,168    294    831      1,125  

 

Summarised financial information for the Group’s equity accounted associates and joint ventures is set out below. The amounts shown are the net income of the investees, not just the Group’s share for the year ended 31 December 2016, with the exception of certain undertakings for which the amounts are based on accounts made up to dates not earlier than three months before the balance sheet date.

 

 

                Associates    Joint ventures 
             2016        2015        2016          2015  
                £m    £m    £m      £m  

Profit from continuing operations

         33    5    64      73  

Other comprehensive expense

                       19      (24) 

Total comprehensive income from continuing operations

               33    5    83      49  

Unrecognised shares of the losses of individually immaterial associates and joint ventures were nil (2014:(2015: nil).

The Group’s associates and joint ventures are subject to statutory requirements such that they cannot make remittances of dividends or make loan repayments to Barclays PLC without agreement from the external parties.

The Group’s share of commitments and contingencies of its associates and joint ventures comprised unutilised credit facilities provided to customers of £1,450m (2014: £1,566m)£1,755m (2015: £1,450m). In addition, the Group has made commitments to finance or otherwise provide resources to its joint ventures and associates of £177m (2014: £183m)£263m (2015: £177m).

39 Securitisations

 

Accounting for securitisations

The Group uses securitisations as a source of finance and a means of risk transfer. Such transactions generally result in the transfer of contractual cash flows from portfolios of financial assets to holders of issued debt securities.

Securitisations may, depending on the individual arrangement, result in continued recognition of the securitised assets and the recognition of the debt securities issued in the transaction; lead to partial continued recognition of the assets to the extent of the Group’s continuing involvement in those assets or to derecognition of the assets and the separate recognition, as assets or liabilities, of any rights and obligations created or retained in the transfer. Full derecognition only occurs when the Group transfers both its contractual right to receive cash flows from the financial assets, or retains the contractual rights to receive the cash flows, but assumes a contractual obligation to pay the cash flows to another party without material delay or reinvestment, and also transfers substantially all the risks and rewards of ownership, including credit risk, prepayment risk and interest rate risk.

Accounting for securitisations

The Group uses securitisations as a source of finance and a means of risk transfer. Such transactions generally result in the transfer of contractual cash flows from portfolios of financial assets to holders of issued debt securities.

Securitisations may, depending on the individual arrangement, result in continued recognition of the securitised assets and the recognition of the debt securities issued in the transaction; lead to partial continued recognition of the assets to the extent of the Group’s continuing involvement in those assets or result in full derecognition of the assets and the separate recognition, as assets or liabilities, of any rights and obligations created or retained in the transfer. Full derecognition occurs when the Group transfers both its contractual right to receive cash flows from the financial assets, or retains the contractual rights to receive the cash flows, but assumes a contractual obligation to pay the cash flows to another party without material delay or reinvestment, and also transfers substantially all the risks and rewards of ownership, including credit risk, prepayment risk and interest rate risk.

In the course of its normal banking activities, the Group makes transfers of financial assets, either legally (where legal rights to the cash flows from the asset are passed to the counterparty) or beneficialbeneficially (where the Group retains the rights to the cash flows but assumes a responsibility to transfer them to the counterparty). Depending on the nature of the transaction, this may result in derecognition of the assets in their entirety, partial derecognition or no derecognition of the assets subject to the transfer.

Full derecognition only occurs when the Group transfers both its contractual right to receive cash flows from the financial assets (or retains the contractual rights to receive the cash flows, but assumes a contractual obligation to pay the cash flows to another party without material delay or reinvestment) and substantially all the risks and rewards of ownership, including credit risk, prepayment risk and interest rate risk. When an asset is transferred, in some circumstances, the Group may retain an interest in it (continuing involvement) requiring the Group to repurchase it in certain circumstances for other than its fair value on that date.

Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  291


Notes to the financial statements

Scope of consolidation

39 Securitisationscontinued

A summary of the main transactions, and the assets and liabilities and the financial risks arising from these transactions, is set out below:

Transfers of financial assets that do not result in derecognition

Securitisations

The Group was party to securitisation transactions involving its residential mortgage loans, business loans and credit card balances.

In these transactions, the assets, interests in the assets, or beneficial interests in the cash flows arising from the assets, are transferred to a special purpose entity, which then issues interest bearing debt securities to third party investors.

Securitisations may, depending on the individual arrangement, result in continued recognition of the securitised assets and the recognition of the debt securities issued in the transaction. Partial continued recognition of the assets to the extent of the Group’s continuing involvement in those assets can also occur or derecognition of the assets and the separate recognition, as assets or liabilities, of any rights and obligations created or retained in the transfer.

Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2016 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  299


Notes to the financial statements

Scope of consolidation

39 Securitisationscontinued

The following table shows the carrying amount of securitised assets that have not resulted in full derecognition, together with the associated liabilities, for each category of asset on the balance sheet:

 

   2015   2014     2016    2015 
   Assets   Liabilities   Assets       Liabilities     Assets    Liabilities    Assets      Liabilities 
   
 
 
Carrying
amount
£m
  
  
  
   
 
Fair value
£m
  
  
   
 
 
Carrying
amount
£m
  
  
  
   
 
Fair value
£m
  
  
   
 
 
Carrying
amount
£m
  
  
  
   
 
Fair value
£m
  
  
     
 
 
Carrying
amount
£m
  
  
  
   
 
Fair value
£m
  
  
   

Carrying

amount

£m

 

 

 

   

Fair Value

£m

 

 

   

Carrying

amount

£m

 

 

 

   

Fair Value

£m

 

 

   

Carrying

amount

£m

 

 

 

   

Fair Value

£m

 

 

     

Carrying

amount

£m

 

 

 

   

Fair Value

£m

 

 

Loans and advances to customers

                                    

Residential mortgage loans

   376     362     (168   (170   2,830     2,619       (2,352   (2,360   125    120    (107   (107   376    362      (168   (170

Credit cards, unsecured and other retail lending

   5,433     5,472     (4,604   (4,606   7,060     7,162       (5,160   (5,178   5,094    5,084    (4,926   (4,931   5,433    5,472      (4,604   (4,606

Corporate loans

   8     8     (8   (8   157     154       (135   (146

Corporate loansa

                   8    8      (8   (8

Total

   5,817     5,842     (4,780   (4,784   10,047     9,935       (7,647   (7,684   5,219    5,204    (5,033   (5,038   5,817    5,842      (4,780   (4,784

Loans and advances to customers

                                    

Retained interests in residential mortgage loans

                       66     n/a            n/a  

Retained interests in corporate loans

   42     42     n/a     n/a                        

Retained interests in corporate loansa

                   42    42      n/a    n/a 

Balances included within loans and advances to customers represent securitisations where substantially all the risks and rewards of the asset have been retained by the Group.

The relationship between the transferred assets and the associated liabilities is that holders of notes may only look to cash flows from the securitised assets for payments of principal and interest due to them under the terms of their notes, although the contractual terms of their notes may be different to the maturity and interest of the transferred assets.

Retained interests in transfers of financial assets that resulted in partial derecognition are securities which represent a continuing exposure to the prepayment and credit risk in the underlying securitised assets. TheFor the Group only, the carrying amount of the loans before transfer was £78m (2014: £120m)nil (2015: £78m). The retained interest is initially recorded as an allocation of the original carrying amount based on the relative fair values of the portion derecognised and the portion retained.

For transfers of assets in relation to repurchase agreements, see Note 22 Reverse repurchase and repurchase agreements including other similar and secured lending and borrowing and Note 40 Assets pledged.

Continuing involvement in financial assets that have been derecognised

In some cases, the Group may have transferred a financial asset in its entirety but may have continuing involvement in it. This arises in asset securitisations where loans and asset backed securities were derecognised as a result of the Group’s continuing involvement, mainly withinNon-Core, with CLOs, CDOs, RMBS and CMBS. Continuing involvement largely arises from providing financing into these structures in the form of retained notes, which do not bear first losses.

The table below shows the potential financial implications of such continuing involvement:

 

   

 

Continuing involvement as at

31 December 2015

  

  

   
 
Gain/(loss) from
continuing involvement
  
  
   

Continuing involvement as at

31 December 2016

 

 

   

Gain/(loss) from continuing

involvement

 

 

Type of transfer

   
 
 
Carrying
amount
£m
  
  
  
   
 
Fair value
£m
  
  
   
 
 
 
Maximum
exposure
to loss
£m
  
  
  
  
   
 
 
 

 

For the year
ended 31
December
2015

£m

  
  
  
  

  

   
 
 
 

 

Cumulative
to 31
December
2015

£m

  
  
  
  

  

   

Carrying

amount

£m

 

 

 

   

Fair value

£m

 

 

   

Maximum

exposure

to loss

£m

 

 

 

 

   

For the year

ended 31

December

2016

£m

 

 

 

 

   

Cumulative

to 31

December

2016

£m

 

 

 

 

 

CLO and other assets

   686     684     686     7     (36   10    10    10        (3

US sub-prime and Alt-A

   38     37     38          (426                   (95

Commercial mortgage backed securities

                         

Total

   724     721     724     7     (462   10    10    10        (98
          
   

Continuing involvement as at

31 December 2015

 

 

   
Gain/(loss) from continuing
involvement
 
 

Type of transfer

   

Carrying

amount

£m

 

 

 

   

Fair value

£m

 

 

   


Maximum

exposure
to loss

£m

 

 
 

 

   

For the year

ended 31

December

2015

£m

 

 

 

 

 

   

Cumulative

to 31

December

2015

£m

 

 

 

 

 

CLO and other assets

   686    684    686    7    (36

USsub-prime andAlt-A

   38    37    38        (426

Total

   724    721    724    7    (462

Note

aCorporate loans and retained interest in corporate loans balances as at December 2015 were attributable to BAGL which is classified as held for sale in 2016.

 

292300  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 20152016 Annual Report on Form 20-F  


    

    

    

 

 

+39 Securitisationscontinued

Assets which represent the Group’s continuing involvement in derecognised assets are recorded in the following line items:

    

 

            Continuing involvement  as at            

31 December 2014

  

  

   
 
Gain/(loss) from
continuing involvement
  
  

Type of transfer

   
 
 
Carrying
amount
£m
  
  
  
   
 
Fair value
£m
  
  
   
 
 

 

Maximum
exposure
to loss

£m

  
  
  

  

   
 
 
 

 

For the year
ended 31
December
2014

£m

  
  
  
  

  

   
 
 
 

 

Cumulative
to 31
December
2014

£m

  
  
  
  

  

CLO and other assets

   1,370     1,354     1,370     14     (720

US sub-prime and Alt-A

   208     195     208          (1,365

Commercial mortgage backed securities

   200     200     200     15     (8

Total

   1,778     1,749     1,778     29     (2,093

Assets which represent the Group’s continuing involvement in derecognised assets are recorded in the following line items:

 

  

Type of transfer

             
 
 
Loans and
advances
£m
  
  
  
   
 
 

 

Trading
portfolio
assets

£m

  
  
  

  

   

 

Total

£m

  

  

As at 31 December 2015

          

CLO and other assets

       327     359     686  

US sub-prime and Alt-A

       38          38  

Commercial mortgage backed securities

                         

Total

             365     359     724  

As at 31 December 2014

          

CLO and other assets

       829     541     1,370  

US sub-prime and Alt-A

       200     8     208  

Commercial mortgage backed securities

                  200     200  

Total

             1,029     749     1,778  

Type of transfer

   

Loans and

advances

£m

 

 

 

   

Trading

portfolio

assets

£m

 

 

 

 

   

Total

£m

 

 

As at 31 December 2016

      

CLO and other assets

       10    10 

USsub-prime andAlt-A

            

Total

       10    10 

As at 31 December 2015

      

CLO and other assets

   327    359    686 

USsub-prime andAlt-A

   38        38 

Total

   365    359    724 

40 Assets pledged

Assets are pledged as collateral to secure liabilities under repurchase agreements, securitisations and stock lending agreements or as collateral posted against derivative margin requirements.security deposits relating to derivatives. Assets pledged as collateral include all assets categorised as encumbered in the disclosure on pages 162 to 164,page 168, other than those held in commercial paper conduits. In these transactions, Barclays will be required to step in to provide financing itself under a liquidity facility if the vehicle cannot access the commercial paper market. The following table summarises the nature and carrying amount of the assets pledged as security against these liabilities:

 

   

 

2015

£m

  

  

   

 

2014

£m

a 

  

   

2016

£m

 

 

   

2015

£m

 

 

Trading portfolio assets

   49,308     50,782     51,241    49,308 

Financial assets designated at fair value

   2,534     2,324  

Financial assets at fair value

   3,195    2,534 

Loans and advances to customers

   51,038     62,459     30,414    51,038 

Cash collateral

   62,599     72,562     68,797    62,599 

Available for sale financial investments

   11,666     8,732  

Financial Investments

   13,053    11,666 

Non current assets held for sale

   1,930     4,693     117    1,930 

Assets pledged

   179,075     201,552     166,817    179,075 

Barclays has an additional £13bn (2014: £9bn)£14bn (2015: £13bn) of loans and advances within its asset backed funding programmes that can readily be used to raise additional secured funding and are available to support future issuance.

Collateral held as security for assets

Under certain transactions, including reverse repurchase agreements and stock borrowing transactions, the Group is allowed to resell orre-pledge the collateral held. The fair value at the balance sheet date of collateral accepted andre-pledged to others was as follows:

 

   

 

2015

£m

  

  

   

 

2014

£m

  

  

   

2016

£m

 

 

   

2015

£m

 

 

Fair value of securities accepted as collateral

   308,162     396,480     466,975    308,162 

Of which fair value of securities re-pledged/transferred to others

   266,015     313,354     405,582    266,015 

The full disclosure as per IFRS 7 has been included in collateral and other credit enhancements (seesee pages 113119 to 114).

Note

a 2014 has been revised to align balance sheet categories to the asset encumbrance table on page 163.120.

 

  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 20152016 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  293301


Notes to the financial statements

Other disclosure matters

    

 

 

The notes included in this section focusfocuses on related party transactions, auditors’Auditors’ remuneration and Directors’directors’ remuneration. Related parties include any subsidiaries, associates, joint ventures, entities under common directorships and Key Management Personnel.

 

41 Related party transactions and Directors’ remuneration

Related party transactions

Parties are considered to be related if one party has the ability to control the other party or exercise significant influence over the other party in making financial or operational decisions, or one other party controls both. The definition includes subsidiaries, associates, joint ventures and the Group’s pension schemes.

Subsidiaries

Transactions between Barclays PLC and its subsidiaries also meet the definition of related party transactions. Where these are eliminated on consolidation, they are not disclosed in the Group Financial Statements. Transactions between Barclays PLC and its subsidiary, Barclays Bank PLC are fully disclosed in Barclays PLC’s balance sheet and income statement. A list of the Group’s principal subsidiaries is shown in Note 36.

Associates, joint ventures and other entities

The Group provides banking services to its associates, joint ventures, the Group pension funds (principally the UK Retirement Fund) and to entities under common directorships, providing loans, overdrafts, interest andnon-interest bearing deposits and current accounts to these entities as well as other services. Group companies also provide investment management and custodian services to the Group pension schemes. The Group also provides banking services for unit trusts and investment funds managed by Group companies, which are not individually material. All of these transactions are conducted on the same terms as third partythird-party transactions. Summarised financial information for the Group’s investments in associates and joint ventures is set out in Note 38.

Amounts included in the Group’s financial statements, in aggregate, by category of related party entity are as follows:

 

           Pension     

Associates

£m

 

 

   

Joint

ventures

£m

 

 

 

  

Pension

funds, unit

trusts and

investment

funds

£m

          Entities    funds, unit  
          under    trusts and  
      Joint    common    investment  
  Associates    ventures    directorships    funds  
   £m      £m      £m     £m  

For the year ended and as at 31 December 2016

      

Income

   (20   7   4

Impairment

   (13      

Total assets

   72    2,244   

Total liabilities

   94    95   260

For the year ended and as at 31 December 2015

              

Income

   (19)     40      (4)    4     (19   40   4

Impairment

   (4)     (2)     –     –     (4   (2  

Total assets

   36      1,578      116     –     36    1,578   

Total liabilities

   158      133          184     158    133   184

For the year ended and as at 31 December 2014

              

Income

   (5)          51     4     (5   9   4

Impairment

   –      (1)     –     –         (1  

Total assets

   130      1,558      219     –     130    1,558   

Total liabilities

   264      188      36     149     264    188   149

For the year ended and as at 31 December 2013

        

Income

   (10)     24          3  

Impairment

   (3)     (4)     –     –  

Total assets

   116      1,521      33     5  

Total liabilities

   278      185      73     207  

Guarantees, pledges or commitments given in respect of these transactions in the year were £881m (2014: £911m)£940m (2015: £881m) predominantly relating to joint ventures. No guarantees, pledges or commitments were received in the year. Derivatives transacted on behalf of the pensionpensions funds, unit trusts and investment funds were £13m (2014: £587m)£3m (2015: £13m).

Key Management Personnel

The Group’s Key Management Personnel, and persons connected with them, are also considered to be related parties for disclosure purposes. Key Management Personnel are defined as those persons having authority and responsibility for planning, directing and controlling the activities of Barclays PLC (directly or indirectly) and comprise the Directors of Barclays PLC and the Officers of the Group, certain direct reports of the Group Chief Executive and the heads of major business units and functions.

There were no material related party transactions with entities under common directorship where a Director or other member of Key Management Personnel (or any connected person) is also a Director or other member of Key Management Personnel (or any connected person) of Barclays.

 

294302  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 20152016 Annual Report on Form 20-F  


        

        

        

 

 

41 Related party transactions and Directors’ remunerationcontinued

The Group provides banking services to Directors and other Key Management Personnel and persons connected to them. Transactions during the year and the balances outstanding were as follows:

 

  Loans outstanding          
     2015     2014  
      £m     £m  
  As at 1 January     11.4     13.4  
  Loans issued during the year     1.1     1.3  
  Loan repayments during the year     (2.7)    (3.3) 
  As at 31 December     9.8     11.4  

No allowances for impairment were recognised in respect of loans to Directors or other members of Key Management Personnel (or any connected person).

  Deposits outstanding          
     2015     2014  
      £m     £m  
  As at 1 January     103.0     100.2  
  Deposits received during the year     44.8     25.7  
  Deposits repaid during the year     (31.3)    (22.9) 
  As at 31 December     116.5     103.0  

Total commitments outstanding

Total commitments outstanding refers to the total of any undrawn amounts on credit cards and/or overdraft facilities provided to Key Management Personnel. Total commitments outstanding as at 31 December 2015 were £0.5m (2014: £1.3m).

All loans to Directors and other Key Management Personnel (and persons connected to them), (a) were made in the ordinary course of business, (b) were made on substantially the same terms, including interest rates and collateral, as those prevailing at the same time for comparable transactions with other persons and (c) did not involve more than a normal risk of collectability or present other unfavourable features.

Loans outstanding

              
     2016      2015 
      £m      £m 

As at 1 January

     9.8      11.4 

Loans issued during the year

     0.6      1.1 

Loan repayments during the year/change of key management personnel

     (1.2     (2.7

As at 31 December

     9.2      9.8 
No allowances for impairment were recognised in respect of loans to Directors or other members of Key Management Personnel (or any connected person). 
        

Deposits outstanding

              
     2016      2015 
      £m      £m 

As at 1 January

     116.5      103.0 

Deposits received during the year

     18.9      44.8 

Deposits repaid during the year/change of key management personnel

     (128.1     (31.3

As at 31 December

     7.3      116.5 

 

Total commitments outstanding

Total commitments outstanding refers to the total of any undrawn amounts on credit cards and/or overdraft facilities provided to Key Management Personnel. Total commitments outstanding as at 31 December 2016 were £0.2m (2015: £0.5m).

 

All loans to Directors and other Key Management Personnel (and persons connected to them), (a) were made in the ordinary course of business, (b) were made on substantially the same terms, including interest rates and collateral, as those prevailing at the same time for comparable transactions with other persons and (c) did not involve more than a normal risk of collectability or present other unfavourable features.

 

Remuneration of Directors and other Key Management Personnel

Total remuneration awarded to Directors and other Key Management Personnel below represents the awards made to individuals that have been approved by the Board Remuneration Committee as part of the latest remuneration decisions, and is consistent with the approach adopted for disclosures set out on pages 5051 to 83.85. Costs recognised in the income statement reflect the accounting charge for the year and are included within operating expenses. The difference between the values awarded and the recognised income statement charge principally relates to the recognition of deferred costs for prior year awards. Figures are provided for the period that individuals met the definition of Directors and other Key Management Personnel.

 

      2015     2014  
      £m     £m  
  Salaries and other short-term benefits     31.3     28.3  
  Pension costs     0.3     0.3  
  Other long-term benefits     4.7     8.1  
  Share-based payments     11.0     15.0  
  Employer social security charges on emoluments     5.2     5.8  
  Costs recognised for accounting purposes     52.5     57.5  
  Employer social security charges on emoluments     (5.2)    (5.8) 
  Other long-term benefits – difference between awards granted and costs recognised     2.5     (4.3) 
  Share-based payments – difference between awards granted and costs recognised     (2.3)    (8.4) 
  Total remuneration awarded     47.5     39.0  

20162015
£m£m

Salaries and other short-term benefits

31.931.3

Pension costs

0.20.3

Other long-term benefits

11.04.7

Share-based payments

21.911.0

Employer social security charges on emoluments

6.25.2

Costs recognised for accounting purposes

71.252.5

Employer social security charges on emoluments

(6.2(5.2

Other long-term benefits – difference between awards granted and costs recognised

(2.52.5

Share-based payments – difference between awards granted and costs recognised

(8.9(2.3

Total remuneration awarded

53.647.5

Disclosure required by the Companies Act 2006

The following information regarding Directors is presented in accordance with the Companies Act 2006:

      2015     2014  
      £m     £m  
  Aggregate emolumentsa     7.0     7.8  
  Amounts paid under LTIPsb     2.2     –  
      9.2     7.8  

There were no pension contributions paid to defined contribution schemes on behalf of Directors (2014: nil). There were no notional pension contributions to defined contribution schemes.

As at 31 December 2015, there were no Directors accruing benefits under a defined benefit scheme (2014: nil).

Notes

aThe aggregate emoluments include amounts paid for the 2015 year. In addition, deferred share awards for 2015 will be made to Antony Jenkins and Tushar Morzaria which will only vest subject to meeting certain conditions. The total of the deferred share awards is £0.7m (£1.2m for 2014).
bThe figure shown for 2015 in ‘Amounts paid under long-term incentive schemes’ is the amount that was released in 2015 in respect of the 2012-2014 Barclays Long Term Incentive Plan (‘LTIP’) cycle. The LTIP amount in the single total figure table for executive Directors’ 2015 remuneration in the Directors’ Remuneration report relates to the award that is scheduled to be released in 2016 in respect of the 2013-2015 LTIP cycle.

Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  295


Notes to the financial statements

Other disclosure matters

 

 

20162015
£m£m

Aggregate emolumentsa

8.17.0

Amounts paid under LTIPsb

2.2
8.19.2

There were no pension contributions paid to defined contribution schemes on behalf of Directors (2015: £nil). There were no notional pension contributions to defined contribution schemes.

As at 31 December 2016, there were no Directors accruing benefits under a defined benefit scheme (2015: nil).

Notes

aThe aggregate emoluments include amounts paid for the 2016 year. In addition, a deferred share award for 2016 will be made to James E Staley and Tushar Morzaria which will only vest subject to meeting certain conditions. The total of the deferred share awards is £1.4m for 2016 (£0.7m for 2015).
bThe figure of nil is shown for 2016 in “Amounts paid under LTIPs” because neither executive Director held an LTIP award that was released in 2016. The LTIP amount in the single total figure table for executive Directors’ 2016 remuneration in the Directors’ Remuneration report relates to the award that is scheduled to be released in 2017 in respect of the 2014-2016 LTIP cycle.

 

41 Related party transactions and Directors’ remunerationcontinued

Directors’ and Officers’ shareholdings and options

The beneficial ownership of ordinary share capital of
Barclays PLC by all Directors and Officers of Barclays Bank PLC (involving 26 persons) at 31 December 2015 amounted to 10,586,812 (2014: 9,078,157) ordinary shares of 25p each (0.06%2016 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  303


Notes to the financial statements

Other disclosure matters

41 Related party transactions and Directors’ remunerationcontinued

Directors’ and Officers’ shareholdings and options

The beneficial ownership of ordinary share capital of Barclays PLC by all Directors and Officers of Barclays PLC (involving 24 persons) at 31 December 2016 amounted to 11,464,580 (2015: 10,586,812) ordinary shares of 25p each (0.07% of the ordinary share capital outstanding).

At 31 December 2016, executive Directors and officers of Barclays PLC (involving 13 persons) held options to purchase a total of 22,527 (2015: 17,206) Barclays PLC ordinary shares of 25p each at prices ranging from 120p to 178p under Sharesave.

Advances and credit to Directors and guarantees on behalf of Directors

In accordance with Section 413 of the Companies Act 2006, the total amount of advances and credits made available in 2016 to persons who served as Directors during the year was £0.2m (2015: £0.3m). The total value of guarantees entered into on behalf of Directors during 2016 was £nil (2015:£nil).

42 Auditors’ remuneration

Auditors’ remuneration is included within consultancy, legal and professional fees in administration and general expenses and comprises:

      
Audit
£m
 
 
     

Audit
related
£m
 
 
 
     

Taxation
services
£m
 
 
 
     

Other
services
£m
 
 
 
     
Total
£m
 
 

2016

                    

Audit of the Group’s annual accounts

     14                        14 

Other services:

                    

Fees payable for the Company’s associatesa

     27                        27 

Other services suppliedb

           3                  3 

Other services relating to taxation

                    

– compliance services

                              

– advisory servicesc

                              

Other

           1            4      5 

Total Auditors’ remuneration

     41      4            4      49 

2015

                    

Audit of the Group’s annual accounts

     13                        13 

Other services:

                    

Fees payable for the Company’s associatesa

     21                        21 

Other services suppliedb

           3                  3 

Other services relating to taxation

                    

– compliance services

                 1            1 

– advisory servicesc

                              

Other

           4            1      5 

Total Auditors’ remuneration

     34      7      1      1      43 

2014

                    

Audit of the Group’s annual accounts

     11                        11 

Other services:

                    

Fees payable for the Company’s associatesa

     24                        24 

Other services suppliedb

           4                  4 

Other services relating to taxation

                    

– compliance services

                 1            1 

– advisory servicesc

                              

Other

           3            1      4 

Total Auditors’ remuneration

     35      7      1      1      44 

The figures shown in the above table relate to fees paid to PricewaterhouseCoopers LLP and its associates, of which the fees paid in relation to discontinued operations were £12m (2015: £10m, 2014: £10m).

At 31 December 2015, executive Directors and officers of Barclays PLC (involving 32 persons) held options to purchase a total of 17,206 (2014: 30,398) Barclays PLC ordinary shares of 25p each at prices ranging from 133.01p to 178p under Sharesave.

Advances and credit to Directors and guarantees on behalf of Directors

In accordance with Section 413 of the Companies Act 2006, the total amount of advances and credits made available in 2015 to persons who served as Directors during the year was £0.3m (2014: £0.4m). The total value of guarantees entered into on behalf of Directors during 2015 was nil (2014: nil).

42 Auditors’ remuneration

Auditors’ remuneration is included within consultancy, legal and professional fees in administration and general expenses and comprises:

          

 

 

 

Audit

 

  

  

 

 

 

Taxation

 

  

  

 

 

 

Other

 

  

   
     Audit   related   services   services   Total  
      £m     £m     £m     £m    £m  
  2015            
  Audit of the Group’s annual accounts     13                   13  
  Other services:            
  Fees payable for the Company’s associatesa     21                   21  
  Other services suppliedb          3              3  
  Other services relating to taxation            
  – compliance services               1         1  
  – advisory servicesc                        –  
  Other          4          1    5  
  Total auditors’ remuneration     34     7     1     1    43  
  2014            
  Audit of the Group’s annual accounts     11                   11  
  Other services:            
  Fees payable for the Company’s associatesa     24                   24  
  Other services suppliedb          4              4  
  Other services relating to taxation            
  – compliance services               1         1  
  – advisory servicesc                        –  
  Other          3          1    4  
  Total auditors’ remuneration     35     7     1     1    44  
  2013            
  Audit of the Group’s annual accounts     10                   10  
  Other services:            
  Fees payable for the Company’s associatesa     25                   25  
  Other services suppliedb          3              3  
  Other services relating to taxation            
  – compliance services               2         2  
  – advisory servicesc                        –  
  Other          3          2    5  
  Total auditors’ remuneration     35     6     2     2    45  

The figures shown in the above table relate to fees paid to PricewaterhouseCoopers LLP and its associates for continuing operations of business. Fees paid to other auditors not associated with PricewaterhouseCoopers LLP in respect of the audit of discontinued operations were £5m (2015: £4m, 2014: £4m).

43 Financial risks, liquidity and capital management

To improve transparency and ease of reference, by concentrating related information in one place, and to reduce duplication, disclosures required under IFRS relating to financial risks and capital resources have been included within the Risk management and governance section as follows:

§Credit risk, on pages 116 to 140;

§Market risk, on pages 141 to 151;

§Capital resources, on pages 152 to 158; and

§Liquidity risk, on pages 159 to 177.

Notes

aComprises the fees for the statutory audit of the subsidiaries both inside and outside UK and fees for the work performed by associates of PricewaterhouseCoopers LLP in respect of the auditconsolidated financial statements of the Company’s subsidiaries were £4m (2014: £4m, 2013: £5m).

Notes

aComprises the fees for the statutory audit of the subsidiaries and associated pension schemes both inside and outside Great Britain and fees for the work performed by associates of PricewaterhouseCoopers LLP in respect of the consolidated financial statements of the Company. Fees relating to the audit of the associated pension schemes were nil (2014: £0.2m).Company.
bComprises services in relation to statutory and regulatory filings. These include audit services for the review of the interim financial information under the Listing Rules of the UK listing authority.
cIncludes consultation on tax matters, tax advice relating to transactions and other tax planning and advice.

bComprises services in relation to statutory and regulatory filings. These include audit services for the review of the interim financial information under the Listing Rules of the UK listing authority.
cIncludes consultation on tax matters, tax advice relating to transactions and other tax planning and advice.

296  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015
304  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2016 Annual Report on Form 20-F  


        

        

        

 

44 Assets included in disposal groups classified as held for sale and associated liabilities

 

43 Financial risks, liquidity and capital managementAccounting fornon-current

To improve transparency and ease of reference, by concentrating related information in one place, and to reduce duplication, disclosures required under IFRS relating to financial risks and capital resources have been included within the Risk management and governance section as follows:

§Credit risk, on pages 111 to 137

§Market risk, on pages 138 to 147

§Capital risk, on pages 148 to 153

§Liquidity risk, on pages 154 to 171.

44 Non-current assets held for sale and associated liabilities

 

Accounting for non-current assets held for sale and associated liabilities

The group applies IFRS 5Non-current Assets Held for Sale and Discontinued Operations.

Non-current

The Group applies IFRS 5Non-current Assets Held for Sale and Discontinued Operations.

Non-current assets (or disposal groups) are classified as held for sale when their carrying amount is to be recovered principally through a sale transaction rather than continuing use. In order to be classified as held for sale, the asset must be available for immediate sale in its present condition subject only to terms that are usual and customary and the sale must be highly probable. Non-current assets (or disposal groups) held for sale are measured at the lower of carrying amount and fair value less cost to sell.

Assets classified as held for sale

                                          
      
 

 

Portugal
2015

£m

  
  

  

     

 

 

BVP

2015

£m

  

  

  

     

 

 

Italy

2015

£m

  

  

  

     
 
 
Other
2015
£m
  
  
  
     
 

 

Total
2015

£m

  
  

  

     

 

 

Total

2014

£m

  

  

  

Available for sale financial investments

     7       1,220              3       1,230       162  

Loans and advances to customers

     3,407              2,091       15       5,513       14,943  

Property, plant and equipment

     42                     86       128       92  

Deferred tax assets

            22                     22       291  

Other assets

     28       756       27       104       915       557  

Total

     3,484       1,998       2,118       208       7,808       16,045  

Balance of impairment unallocated under IFRS 5

     (180     (22     (242            (444     (471

Total agreed to consolidated balance sheet

     3,304       1,976       1,876       208       7,364       15,574  
                                           

Liabilities classified as held for sale

                                          
      
 

 

Portugal
2015

£m

  
  

  

     

 

 

BVP

2015

£m

  

  

  

     

 

 

Italy

2015

£m

  

  

  

     
 
 
Other
2015
£m
  
  
  
     
 

 

Total
2015

£m

  
  

  

     

 

 

Total

2014

£m

  

  

  

Deposits from banks

                                        (4,313

Customer accounts

     (1,826            (2,174            (4,000     (6,827

Repurchase agreements and other similar secured borrowing

                                        (77

Other liabilities

     (37     (1,858     (66     (36     (1,997     (1,898

Total

     (1,863     (1,858     (2,240     (36     (5,997     (13,115

Sale of the Portuguese business

The disposal group includes all assets and liabilities of the Portuguese Retail Banking, Wealth and Investment Management businesses and part of the Portuguese Corporate banking business. This sale is part of the divestment of the Non-Core segment of the Group.

The Portuguese disposal was announced on 2 September 2015 and the sale is due to complete in Q116. A loss of £180m has been recognised in the income statement within (loss)/profit on disposal of subsidiaries, associates and joint ventures.

Sale of Barclays Vida Y Pensiones

The disposal group includes all assets and liabilities of Barclays Vida Y Pensiones (BVP), a company offering life insurance, pension products and services in Spain, Portugal and Italy. BVP was classified as held for sale in the first half of 2015 andwhen their carrying amount is expected to be soldrecovered principally through a sale transaction rather than continuing use. In order to be classified as held for sale, the asset must be available for immediate sale in the first half of 2016. A loss of £22m has been recognised in the income statement within (loss)/profit on disposal of subsidiaries, associatesits present condition subject only to terms that are usual and joint ventures.

Sale of the Italian business

The disposal group includes the assets and liabilities of the Italian Retail Banking business including mortgages. This sale is part of the divestment of the Non-Core segment of the Group.

The Italian disposal was announced on 3 December 2015customary and the sale is expected to complete in the first half of 2016. A loss of £258m has been recognised in the income statement within (loss)/profit onmust be highly probable.Non-current assets (or disposal of subsidiaries, associates and joint ventures.

Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  297


Notes to the financial statements

Other disclosure matters

44 Non-current assetsgroups) held for sale are measured at the lower of carrying amount and associated liabilitiescontinuedfair value less cost to sell.

Other held for sale assets

Other assets

On 1 March 2016, Barclays announced its intention to reduce the Group’s 62.3% interest in BAGL. This reduction is intended to be to a level which will permit deconsolidation from an accounting and regulatory perspective for which approval was granted by shareholders at the Group’s general meeting held on 28 April 2016. On 5 May 2016 Barclays sold 12.2% of the Group’s interest in BAGL resulting in a transfer tonon-controlling interests of £601m. Following this sale, Barclays’ interest represents 50.1% of BAGL’s share capital. The BAGL disposal group includes all assets and liabilities of BAGL and its subsidiaries as well as Group balances associated with BAGL and expected contributions that will form part of the sale.

No impairment for BAGL has been recognised under IFRS 5 as at 31 December 2016. Impairment under IFRS 5 is calculated as the difference between fair value less disposal costs and the carrying value of the disposal group. The fair value is determined by reference to the quoted market price for BAGL and the foreign exchange rate for ZAR/GBP as at 31 December 2016, less the expected contributions. The fair value less disposal costs and the expected contribution exceeds the Barclays Risk Analysis Index Solutions business. A pre-tax gain of approximately £480m is expected to be recognised on completion during 2016.

During the year, a number of held for sale assets have been disposed of. The sale of the Spanish business (Barclays Bank SAU) took place in January 2015. Losses of £446m in 2014 and £117m in 2015 have been recognised in the income statement within (loss)/profit on disposal of subsidiaries, associates and joint ventures. Of the 2015 loss, £97m relates to recycling of the related currency translation reserve with the remainder due to revision of the estimated closing net asset value as at 31 December 2016.

Barclays continues to explore a sale through the disposal of its shares in BAGL during the course of 2017.

Assets included in disposal groups classified as held for sale

                        
      

BAGL
2016

£m

 
 

 

     

Other
2016
£m
 
 
 
   

Total
2016

£m

 
 

 

   

Total
2015
£m
 
 
 

Cash and balances at central banks

     2,689      241    2,930    21 

Items in the course of collection from other banks

     549      21    570    24 

Trading portfolio assets

     3,044      40    3,084     

Financial assets designated at fair value

     5,546      1,438    6,984    696 

Derivative financial instruments

     1,992          1,992     

Financial investments

     4,995      2,742    7,737    1,230 

Loans and advances to banks

     1,184      482    1,666    74 

Loans and advances to customers

     41,793      1,711    43,504    5,513 

Prepayments, accrued income and other assets

     637      59    696    47 

Investments in associates and joint ventures

     63      24    87    10 

Property, plant and equipment

     902      52    954    128 

Goodwill

     965      32    997     

Intangible assets

     554      16    570    43 

Current and deferred tax assets

     124      25    149    22 

Retirement benefit assets

     33          33     

Total

     65,070      6,883    71,953    7,808 

Balance of impairment unallocated under IFRS 5

            (499   (499   (444

Total assets classified as held for sale

     65,070      6,384    71,454    7,364 
            

Liabilities included in disposal groups classified as held for sale

                        
      

BAGL
2016

£m

 
 

 

     

Other
2016

£m

 
 

 

   

Total
2016

£m

 
 

 

   

Total
2015

£m

 
 

 

Deposits from banks

     2,113      36    2,149     

Items in the course of collection due to banks

     350      23    373    74 

Customer accounts

     39,331      3,100    42,431    4,000 

Repurchase agreements and other similar secured borrowing

     597          597     

Trading portfolio liabilities

     388          388     

Financial liabilities designated at fair value

     3,748      3,577    7,325    346 

Derivative financial instruments

     1,610      1    1,611    3 

Debt securities in issue

     7,997          7,997    1,474 

Subordinated liabilities

     934          934     

Accruals, deferred income and other liabilities

     1,061      119    1,180    39 

Provisions

     52      51    103    34 

Current and deferred tax liabilities

     154      8    162    (6

Retirement benefit liabilities

     26      16    42    33 

Total liabilities classified as held for sale

     58,361      6,931    65,292    5,997 
                         

Net assets/(liabilities) classified as held for salea

     6,709      (547   6,162    1,367 

Expected BAGL separation payments and costsb,c

     866          866     

Disposal group post contribution

     7,575      (547   7,028    1,367 

Notes

aThe carrying value of the disposal group on completion.is stated after the elimination of internal balances between Barclays and BAGL of £595m. Internal balances have been considered in determining the carrying value of BAGL (of £7.3bn before the planned contributions in respect of BAGL) for the purposes of measuring the disposal group at the lower of carrying amount and fair value less costs to sell.
bIn December 2016, Barclays finalised proposals regarding planned contributions to the BAGL group relating to the reimbursement of certain expenses as well as contributions for investment to support separation activities. The salecash and cash equivalents to make these planned contributions is included within the perimeter of the Pakistan business took placedisposal group, also for the purposes of measuring the disposal group at the lower of carrying amount and fair value less costs to sell. The planned contributions are reported within Cash and balances at central banks in June 2015,the Group’s consolidated balance sheet.
cIn December 2016, Barclays reimbursed BAGL for expenses incurred for an amount of £28m. This amount is excluded from the proposed overall potential reimbursement and UKSL in September 2015 with gainscontribution figure of £14m and £7m respectively recognised in other income.£866m.

45
Barclays PLC (the Parent Company)

Other income/(expense)

Other income of £227m (2014: £275m) includes £345m (2014: £250m) of income received from gross coupon payments onand Barclays Bank PLC issued AT1 securities partially offset by a £114m fair value loss (2014: £27m gain)2016 Annual Report on derivative financial instruments.Form 20-F  |  305


Notes to the financial statements

Other disclosure matters

44 Assets included in disposal groups classified as held for sale and associated liabilitiescontinued

The BAGL disposal group meets the requirements for presentation as a discontinued operation. As such, the results, which have been presented as the profit after tax andnon-controlling interest in respect of the discontinued operation on the face of the Group income statement, are analysed in the income statement below.

BAGL group income statement

              

For the year ended 31 December

     

2016

£m

 

 

     

2015

£m

 

 

Net interest income

     2,169      1,950 

Net fee and commission income

     1,072      1,033 

Net trading income

     281      197 

Net investment income

     45      41 

Other income

     179      193 

Total income

     3,746      3,414 

Credit impairment charges and other provisions

     (445     (353

Net operating income

     3,301      3,061 

Staff costs

     (1,186     (1,107

Administration and general expenses

     (653     (545

Depreciation of property, plant and equipment

     (513     (442

Amortisation of intangible assets

     (58     (47

Operating expenses

     (2,410     (2,141

Share ofpost-tax results of associates and joint ventures

     6      7 

Profit before tax

     897      927 

Taxation

     (306     (301

Profit after tax

     591      626 

Attributable to:

              

Equity holders of the parent

     189      302 

Non-controlling interests

     402      324 

Profit after tax

     591      626 

Other comprehensive income relating to discontinued operations is as follows:

 

 

For the year ended 31 December

     
2016
£m
 
 
     
2015
£m
 
 

Available for sale assets

     (9     (22

Currency translation reserves

     1,451      (1,223

Cash flow hedge reserves

     89      (101

Other comprehensive income, net of tax from discontinued operations

     1,531      (1,346

The cash flows attributed to the discontinued operations are as follows:

 

        

For the year ended 31 December

     
2016
£m
 
 
     
2015
£m
 
 

Net cash flows from operating activities

     1,164      794 

Net cash flows from investing activities

     (691     (1,883

Net cash flows from financing activities

     (105     133 

Effect of exchange rates on cash and cash equivalents

     37      (865

Net increase/(decrease) in cash and cash equivalents

     405      (1,821

Non-current assets
306  |  Barclays PLC and liabilities

Investment in subsidiary

The investment in subsidiary of £35,303m (2014: £33,743m) represents investments made into Barclays Bank PLC including £5,350m (2014: £4,350m) of AT1 securities. The increase of £1,560m during the year was due to a £1,000m increased holding2016 Annual Report on Form 20-F


44 Assets included in disposal groups classified as held for sale and associated liabilitiescontinued

Other held for sale assets

Sale of the French retail business

The disposal group includes the total assets and liabilities in the French retail business with assets of £4bn. An impairment of £456m has been recognised in expectation of the loss on sale, with the sale expected to be completed in 2017.

Sale of the Egypt banking business

The disposal group includes the total assets and liabilities in Barclays Bank Egypt, with assets of £1bn. Subject to regulatory approvals, the sale is expected to be completed in Q1 2017.

Sale of Barclays Vida Y Pensiones

The majority of the disposal group have been sold during 2016. The sale of the remaining Spanish Life Insurance business, with assets of £657m, is expected to complete in 2017.

Sale of the Zimbabwe business

The disposal group includes the total assets and liabilities in the Zimbabwe business, with assets of £362m. The sale is expected to be completed in Q4 2017.

Sale of other businesses

Other disposals include £379m of assets, mainly comprised of the Italian business, with assets of £258m. The sale is expected to be completed in 2017. The remaining businesses mainly comprise of the Irish Insurance business, UK Trust and Vocalink, all of which are expected to be completed in 2017.

During the year, a number of disposal groups of held for sale assets have been disposed of. The sale of the Asia Wealth business took place in November 2016. A gain on sale of £164m has been recognised in the income statement within (loss)/profit on disposal of subsidiaries, associates and joint ventures. The sales of Barclays Risk Analytics and Index Solutions Ltd in August 2016, the Spanish and Portuguese credit card businesses in November 2016, Italian insurance business in June 2016, Italian retail banking in August 2016, Portuguese retail and insurance businesses in April 2016, the Offshore Trust business in January 2016, the sale of the designated Market Maker business in April 2016 and part of the Spanish Insurance business in November 2016 also took place this year.

45 Barclays PLC (the Parent Company)

Other income

Other income of £334m (2015: £227m) includes £457m (2015: £345m) of income received from gross coupon payments on Barclays Bank PLC issued AT1 securities.

Non-Current Assets and Liabilities

Investment in subsidiaries

The investment in subsidiary of £36,553m (2015: £35,303m) represents investments made in Barclays Bank PLC, including £6,486m (2015: £5,350m) of AT1 securities. The increase of £1,250m during the year was mainly driven by a $1.5bn AT1 issuance during the third quarter.

Loans and advances to subsidiaries, subordinated liabilities and debt securities in issue

During the period, Barclays PLC issued $2.1bn of Fixed Rate Subordinated Notes included within the subordinated liabilities balance of £3,789m (2015: £1,766m), $6.7bn of Fixed Rate Senior Notes, Yen 20bn of Fixed Rate Senior Notes, 2.7bn Fixed and Floating Rate Senior Notes, £1.3bn of Fixed Rate Senior Notes and AUD 0.2bn of Fixed Rate Senior Notes included within the debt securities in issue balance of £16,893m (2015: £6,224m). The proceeds raised through these transactions were used to invest in subsidiaries of Barclays Bank PLC accounted for as loans and advances to subsidiaries of £19,421m (2015: £7,990m).

Barclays PLC retains the discretion to manage the nature of its internal investments in subsidiaries according to their regulatory and business needs. As we implement our structural reform programme, Barclays PLC will invest capital and funding to Barclays Bank PLC and other group subsidiaries such as the Group Service Company, the US IHC and the UK ring-fenced bank.

Financial investments

The financial investment assets relate to loans made to subsidiaries of the Group. These instruments include a feature that allows for the loan to be written down in whole or in part by the borrower only in the event that the liabilities of the subsidiary would otherwise exceed its assets.

Derivative financial instrument

The derivative financial instrument of £268m (2015: £210m) held by the Parent Company represents Barclays PLC’s right to receive a Capital Note for no additional consideration, in the event the Barclays PLC consolidated CRD IV Common Equity Tier 1 (CET1) ratio (FSA October 2012 transitional statement) falls below 7% at which point the notes are automatically assigned by the holders to Barclays PLC.

Total equity

Called up share capital and share premium of Barclays PLC was £21,842m (2015: £21,586m). Other equity instruments of £6,453m (2015: £5,321m) comprises of AT1 securities. For further details please refer to Note 31 Ordinary share, share premium and other equity.

Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC issued securities and a further cash contribution of £560m.

Loans and advances to subsidiary, subordinated liabilities and debt securities in issue

During the period, Barclays PLC issued1.25bn equivalent of Fixed Rate Subordinated Notes included within the subordinated liabilities balance of £1,766m (2014: £810m), $5.5bn of Fixed Rate Senior Notes, Yen 60bn of Fixed and Floating Rate Notes and100m of private MTN included within the debt securities in issue balance of £6,224m (2014: £2,056m). The proceeds raised through these transactions were used to invest in Barclays Bank PLC Notes in each case with a ranking corresponding to the notes issued by Barclays PLC and included within the loans and advances to subsidiary balance of £7,990m (2014: £2,866m).

Derivative financial instrument

The derivative financial instrument of £210m (2014: £313m) held by the Parent Company represents Barclays PLC’s right to receive a Capital Note with a face value of $3bn for no additional consideration, in the event the Barclays PLC consolidated CRD IV CET1 ratio (FSA October 2012 transitional statement) falls below 7% at which point the notes are automatically assigned by the holders to Barclays PLC.

Shareholders’ equity

Called up share capital and share premium of Barclays PLC was £21,586m (2014: £20,809m). Other equity instruments of £5,321m (2014: £4,326m) comprises of AT1 securities. For further details please refer to Note 31.

298  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 20152016 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  307


Notes to the financial statements

46 Related undertakings

The Group’s corporate structure consists of a number of related undertakings, comprising subsidiaries, joint ventures, associates and significant other interests. A full list of these undertakings, the country of incorporation and the ownership of each share class is set out below. The information is provided as at 31 December 2016.

The entities are grouped by the countries in which they are incorporated. The profits earned by the activities of these entities are in some cases taxed in countries other than the country of incorporation. Barclays’ 2016 Country Snapshot provides details of where the Group carries on its business, where its profits are subject to tax and the taxes it pays in each country it operates in.

Wholly owned subsidiaries

Unless otherwise stated the undertakings below are wholly owned and consolidated by Barclays and the share capital disclosed comprises ordinary or common shares which are held by Group subsidiaries.

Wholly owned subsidiariesNote
United Kingdom
– 1 Churchill Place, London, E14 5HP 


Notes to the financial statements

46 Related undertakings

The Group’s corporate structure consists of a number of related undertakings, comprising subsidiaries, joint ventures, associates and significant other interests. A full list of these undertakings, the country of incorporation and the ownership of each share class is set out below. The information is provided as at 31 December 2015.

The entities are grouped by the countries in which they are incorporated. The profits earned by the activities of these entities are in some cases taxed in countries other than the country of incorporation. Barclays’ 2015 Country Snapshot provides details of where the Group carries on its business, where its profits are subject to tax and the taxes it pays in each country it operates in.

Wholly owned subsidiaries

Unless otherwise stated the undertakings below are wholly owned and consolidated by

Aequor Investments Limited
Ardencroft Investments Limited
B D & B Investments Limited
B.P.B. (Holdings) Limited
Barafor Limited
Barclay Leasing Limited
Barclays and the share capital disclosed comprises ordinary or common shares which are held by Group subsidiaries. Where multiple share classes are held the proportion of the nominal value of each class of shares held is 100% unless otherwise stated.

Wholly owned subsidiariesNote

United Kingdom

54 Lombard Street InvestmentsF, I
Aequor Investments Limited
Alynore Investments Limited PartnershipB
Ardencroft Investments LimitedF, I
Astraea Investment FundsJ, K
Axis PartnersB
B D & B Investments Limited
B.P.B. (Holdings) Limited
Barafor Limited
Barclay Leasing Limited
Barclaycard Funding PLC
Barclays (Security Realisation) Limited
Barclays Africa Group Holdings LimitedJ, K
Barclays Aldersgate Investments Limited
Barclays Asset Management Limited
Barclays Bank PLCA, F, I
Barclays Bank Trust Company LimitedI, P
Barclays Bayard Investments TrustD
Barclays BCL FI TrustD
Barclays Bedivere TrustD
Barclays BR Holdings TrustD
Barclays BR Investments TrustD
Barclays Cantal Investments TrustD
Barclays Capital Asia Holdings Limited
Barclays Capital Finance Limited
Barclays Capital Japan Securities Holdings Limited
Barclays Capital Luxembourg S.à r.l. TrustD
Barclays Capital Margin Financing Limited
Barclays Capital Nominees (No.2) Limited
Barclays Capital Nominees (No.3) Limited
Barclays Capital Nominees Limited
Barclays Capital Principal Investments Limited
Barclays Capital Securities Client Nominee Limited
Barclays Capital Securities LimitedF, I
Barclays Capital Services Limited
Barclays Capital Strategic Advisers Limited
Barclays Capital Trading Luxembourg(Security Realisation) Limited
Barclays Aegis Trust D
Barclays Africa Group Holdings LimitedJ, K
Barclays Aldersgate Investments Limited
Barclays Asset Management Limited
Barclays Bank PLCA, F, I
Barclays BCL FI TrustD
Barclays Bedivere TrustD
Barclays BR Investments TrustD
Barclays Cantal Investments TrustD
Barclays Capital Asia Holdings Limited
Barclays Capital Finance Limited
Barclays Capital Japan Securities Holdings Limited
Barclays Capital Luxembourg S.à.r.l. TrustD
Barclays Capital Margin Financing Limited
Barclays Capital Nominees (No.2) Limited
Barclays Capital Nominees (No.3) Limited
Barclays Capital Nominees Limited
Barclays Capital Principal Investments Limited
Barclays Capital Securities Client Nominee Limited
Barclays Capital Securities LimitedF, I
Barclays Capital Services LimitedA
Barclays CCP Funding LLPB
Barclays Claudas Investments Partnership B
Barclays Converted Investments (No.2) Limited 
Barclays Converted Investments Limited
Barclays Darnay Euro Investments Limited (In Liquidation) 
Barclays Direct Investing Nominees Limited 
Barclays Directors Limited 
Barclays Equity Index Investments Bare Trust D
Barclays Executive Schemes Trustees Limited
Barclays Export and Finance Company Limited (In Liquidation) 
Barclays Fiduciary Services (UK) Limited
Barclays Financial Planning 
Barclays Financial Planning Nominee Company Limited 
Barclays Funds Investments Limited 
Barclays Global Investors Finance Limited (In Liquidation)
Barclays Global Investors UK Holdings Limited (in Liquidation)J, K
Barclays Global Shareplans Nominee Limited 
Barclays Group Holdings Limited 
Barclays Group Operations Limited 
Barclays Industrial Development Limited 
Barclays Industrial Investments Limited 
Barclays Insurance Services Company Limited 
Wholly owned subsidiariesNote
Barclays Investment Management Limited 
Barclays Lamorak Trust D
Barclays Leasing (No.9) Limited 
Barclays Long Island Limited 
Barclays Luxembourg EUR Holdings TrustD
Barclays Luxembourg Finance Index TrustD
Barclays Luxembourg GBP Holdings Trust D
Barclays Luxembourg USD Holdings Trust D
Barclays Marlist Limited 
Barclays Mercantile Business Finance Limited 
Barclays Mercantile Highland Finance Limited (In Liquidation)
Barclays Mercantile Limited
Barclays Metals Limited 
Barclays Nominees (Branches) Limited 
Barclays Nominees (George Yard) Limited 
Barclays Nominees (K.W.S.) Limited 
Barclays Nominees (Monument) Limited 
Barclays Nominees (Provincial) Limited 
Barclays Nominees (United Nations For UNJSPF) Limited
Barclays Operational Services Limited
Barclays Pelleas Investments Limited PartnershipB
Barclays Pelleas Trust D
Barclays Pension Funds Trustees Limited 
Barclays Physical Trading Limited
Wholly owned subsidiaries Note
Barclays Private Bank 
Barclays Private Banking Services Limited 
Barclays Private Trust
Barclays Risk Analytics and Index Solutions Limited 
Barclays SAMS Limited 
Barclays Services (Japan) Limited 
Barclays Sharedealing 
Barclays Shea Limited 
Barclays Singapore Global Shareplans Nominee Limited
Barclays SLCSM (No.1) Limited 
Barclays Stockbrokers (Holdings) Limited 
Barclays Stockbrokers Limited 
Barclays Trust Company LimitedI, P
Barclays UK and Europe PLC 
Barclays Unquoted Investments Limited 
Barclays Unquoted Property Investments Limited 
Barclays USD Funding LLP B
Barclays Wealth Nominees Limited 
Barclayshare Nominees Limited 
Barcosec Limited 
Barley Investments Limited I, J, K
Barometers Limited 
Barsec Nominees Limited 
BB Client Nominees Limited
BBUK Private Credit Partners Limited (In Liquidation) 
BCLI GP Trust D
Blossom Finance General PartnershipB
BMBF (Bluewater Investments) Limited 
BMBF (No.12) Limited
BMBF (No.18) Limited (Dissolved 20/01/2016) 
BMBF (No.21) Limited 
BMBF (No.24) Limited 
BMBF (No.3) Limited 
BMBF (No.6) Limited 
BMBF (No.9) Limited 
BMBF USD NO 1 Limited 
BMI (No.6) Limited (Dissolved 16/01/2016)

Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  299


Notes to the financial statements

46 Related undertakingscontinued

Wholly owned subsidiariesNote
BMI (No.9) Limited 
BNRI ENG 2013 Limited Partnership B
BNRI ENG 2014 Limited Partnership B
BNRI ENG GP LLP B
BNRI England 2010 Limited Partnership B
BNRI England 2011 Limited Partnership B
BNRI England 2012 Limited PartnershipB
BNRI PIA Scot GP Limited
BNRI Scots GP, LLP B
Boudeuse Limited 
Capel Cure Sharp Limited 
Carnegie Holdings Limited I, J, K
Chapelcrest Investments Limited
Clearlybusiness.com Limited (In Liquidation) 
Clydesdale Financial Services Limited 
Cobalt Investments Limited 
Condor No.1 Limited Partnership B
Condor No.2 Limited Partnership B
CP Flower Guaranteeco (UK) Limited E
CP Propco 1 Limited 
CP Propco 2 Limited 
CP Topco Limited J, K
CPIA England 2008 Limited Partnership B
CPIA England 2009 Limited Partnership B
CPIA England No.2 Limited Partnership B
Denham Investments Limited 
DMW Realty Limited 
Durlacher Nominees Limited 
Eagle Financial and Leasing Services (UK) Limited
Ebbgate Investments Limited (In Liquidation)
Eldfell Investments Limited (In Liquidation)
EM Investments No.1 Limited (In Liquidation) 
Equity Value Investments Limited Liability Partnership B
Equity Value Investments No.1 Limited 
Equity Value Investments No.2 Limited F, I
Exshelfco (DZBC)
Fair and Square Limited (In Liquidation) 
Finpart Nominees Limited 

308  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2016 Annual Report on Form 20-F


46 Related undertakingscontinued

Wholly owned subsidiariesNote
– 1 Churchill Place, London, E14 5HP (continued)

FIRSTPLUS Financial Group PLC

Fitzroy Finance LimitedZ
Foltus Investments Limited
Gerrard (OMH) Limited
Gerrard Financial Planning Limited
Gerrard Investment Management Limited
Gerrard Management Services Limited
Gerrard Nominees Limited
Global Dynasty Natural Resource Private Equity 
Fitzroy Finance LimitedZ
Foltus Investments Limited
Gerrard (OMH) Limited
Gerrard Financial Planning Limited
Gerrard Investment Management Limited
Gerrard Management Services Limited
Gerrard Nominees Limited
Global Dynasty Natural Resource Private Equity Limited Partnership B
Globe Nominees Limited 
GM Computers Limited 
Greig Middleton Holdings Limited 
Greig Middleton Nominees Limited 
Hawkins Funding Limited 
Heraldglen Limited G, H, I
Hoardburst Limited (In Liquidation)
Investors In Infrastructure Limited 
J.V. Estates Limited 
Keepier Investments 
Kirsche Investments Limited 
Laser Investment Company 1 Limited (In Liquidation)
Laser Investment Company 2 Limited (In Liquidation)
Leonis Investments LLPB
Lindley Developments Limited U
Lombard Street Nominees Limited 
Long Island Assets Limited
Luscinia Investments Funds 
Maloney Investments Limited
MCC Leasing (No. 6) Limited (In Liquidation)
MCC Leasing (No.24) Limited (Dissolved 04/02/2016) 
Menlo Investments Limited 
Mercantile Credit Company Limited
Mercantile Industrial Leasing Limited (In Liquidation) 
Mercantile Leasing Company (No.132) Limited
Mercers Debt Collections Limited 
MK Opportunities LP B
Wholly owned subsidiariesNote
Muleta
Murray House Investment Management Limited
Naxos Investments Limited
North Colonnade Investments Limited
Northwharf Investments LimitedI, X
Northwharf Nominees Limited
PIA England No.2 Limited PartnershipB
Real Estate Participation Management Limited
Real Estate Participation Services Limited
Relative Value Investments UK Limited Liability PartnershipB
Relative Value Trading Limited
Roder Investments No. 1 LimitedI, Y
Roder Investments No. 2 LimitedI, Y
Ruthenium Investments Limited
RVT CLO Investments LLPB
Scotlife Home Loans (No.3) Limited
Sharelink Nominees Limited
Solution Personal Finance Limited
Surety Trust Limited
Swan Lane Investments LimitedF, I
US Real Estate Holdings No.1 Limited
US Real Estate Holdings No. 2 Limited
US Real Estate Holdings No.3 Limited
W.D. Pension Fund Limited
Wedd Jefferson (Nominees) Limited
Westferry Investments Limited
Woolwich Assured Homes Limited
Woolwich Homes (1987) LimitedE
Woolwich Homes Limited
Woolwich Limited
Woolwich Plan Managers Limited
Woolwich Qualifying Employee Share Ownership Trustee Limited
Woolwich Surveying Services Limited
Zeban Nominees Limited
Barclays Financial Planning (Entered Liquidation 26 January 2017)

– Hill House, 1 Little New Street, London, EC4A 3TR

54 Lombard Street Investments (In Liquidation)
Barclays Global Investors Finance Limited (in Liquidation)
Barclays Global Investors UK Holdings Limited (in Liquidation)J, K
Barclays Mercantile Highland Finance Limited (in Liquidation)
Barclays Physical Trading Limited (In Liquidation)
Eldfell Investments Limited (in Liquidation)
Fair and Square Limited (in Liquidation)
Mercers Debt Collections Limited (In Liquidation)
Pendle Shipping Limited (In Liquidation) 
Murray House Investment Management Limited
Naxos Investments Limited
North Colonnade Investments Limited
Northwharf Investments LimitedI, X
Northwharf Nominees Limited
Odysseus (Martins) Investments Limited (In Liquidation)
Pecan Aggregator LPB
Pendle Shipping Limited
PIA England No.2 Limited Partnership
Wholly owned subsidiariesNote
Reflex Nominees Limited (In Liquidation)

– 5 The North Colonnade, Canary Wharf, London, E14 4BB

Barclays Bayard Investments TrustD
BBR Holdings TrustD
Barclays Capital Trading Luxembourg TrustD
Barclays Luxembourg EUR Holdings TrustD
Barclays Luxembourg Finance Index TrustD
CPIA Canada HoldingsB
Leonis Investments LLP B
Preferred Liquidity Limited PartnershipB
R.C. Greig Nominees Limited
Real Estate Participation Management Limited
Real Estate Participation Services Limited
Reflex Nominees Limited
Relative Value Investments UK Limited Liability PartnershipB
Relative Value Trading Limited
Roder Investments No. 1 LimitedI, Y
Roder Investments No. 2 LimitedI, Y
Ruthenium Investments Limited
RVT CLO Investments LLPB
Scotlife Home Loans (No.3) Limited
Sharelink Nominees Limited
Solution Personal Finance LimitedJ, K, L
Stellans Investments Limited (In Liquidation)
Surety Trust Limited
Swan Lane Investments LimitedF, I
The Logic Group Enterprises Limited
The Logic Group Holdings LimitedJ
US Real Estate Holdings No.3 Limited
W.D. Pension Fund Limited
Wedd Jefferson (Nominees) Limited
Westferry Investments Limited
Woolwich Assured Homes Limited
Woolwich Homes (1987) LimitedE
Woolwich Homes Limited
Woolwich Limited
Woolwich Plan Managers Limited
Woolwich Qualifying Employee Share Ownership Trustee Limited
Woolwich Surveying Services Limited
Wysteria Euro Investments Limited (In Liquidation)
Zeban Nominees Limited

Argentina

Compañia regional del Sur S.A.
Compañía Sudamerica S.A.

Belgium

Belgian Turbine Lease Corporation NV

Brazil

Banco Barclays S.A.
Barclays Corretora de Titulos e Valores Mobiliarios S.A.

Canada

Barclays Canadian Commodities Limited
Barclays Capital Canada Inc
Barclays Corporation Limited
CPIA Canada Holdings B

– Aurora Building, 120 Bothwell Street, Glasgow, G2 7JS

Barclays SLCSM (No.1) Limited (In Liquidation)
R.C. Grieg Nominees Limited

– 50 Lothian Road, Festival Square, Edinburgh, EH3 9WJ

BNRI PIA Scot GP Limited
BNRI Scots GP, LLPB
Pecan Aggregator LPB
– Logic House, Waterfront Business Park, Fleet Road, GU1 3SB

The Logic Group Holdings Limited

J
The Logic Group Enterprises Limited
Argentina

– 855 Leandro N.Alem Avenue, 8th Floor, Buenos Aires

Compañía Sudamerica S.A.

– Marval, O’Farrell & Mairal, Av. Leandro N. Alem 882, Buenos Aires, C1001AAQ

Compañia Regional del Sur S.A.
Brazil
– Av. Brigadeiro Faria Lima, No. 4.440, 12th Floor, Bairro Itaim Bibi, Sao Paulo, CEP,04538-132

Banco Barclays S.A.

Canada

– 333 Bay Street, Suite 4910, Toronto ON M5H 2R2

Barclays Capital Canada Inc
– Stikeman Elliott LLP, 199 Bay Street, 5300 Commerce Court West, Toronto ON M5L 1B9

Barclays Corporation Limited

Cayman Islands

– Maples Corporate Services Limited, PO Box 309GT, Ugland House, South Church Street, Grand Cayman,KY1-1104

 

 
Alymere Investments Limited G, H, I
Alymere Investments Two Limited (In Liquidation) 
Analytical Trade UK Limited 
Aquitaine Investments Limited (In Liquidation)
Aubisque UK Investments Limited (In Liquidation)
Barclays Capital (Cayman) Limited
Barclays Trust Company (Cayman) Limited (Sold 14/01/2016)
Barclays Wealth Corporate Nominees Limited (Sold 14/01/2016)
Beille Investments Limited (In Liquidation)
Bigorre UK Investments Limited (In Liquidation)
Blaytell Limited
Braven Investments No.1 Limited
Brule 1 Investments Limited (In Liquidation)
Calthorpe Investments Limited
Capton Investments Limited
Claudas Investments LimitedG, H, I
Claudas Investments Two Limited
Colombiere UK Investments Limited (In Liquidation) 

300  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F
Barclays Capital (Cayman) Limited 


46 Related undertakingscontinued

Wholly owned subsidiariesNote
Coskwo
Braven Investments No.1 Limited
Capton Investments Limited
Claudas Investments LimitedG, H, I
Claudas Investments Two Limited 
CPIA Investments No.1 Limited V
CPIA Investments No.2 Limited F, I
Cureton Investments No. 1 Limited (In Liquidation) 
Cuth Investments Limited F, I, T
Eagle Holdings Ltd (Sold 14/01/2016)
Eagle Management Services Limited (Sold 14/01/2016)
Feste Investments Limited (In Liquidation)
Furbridge Investments Limited
Gallen Investments LimitedH, I
Gironde Investments Limited (In Liquidation)
Godler Limited
Golden Eagle Holdings Ltd (Sold 14/01/2016) 
Hamar Investments Limited
Hurley Investments No.1 Limited
Iris Investments 1 LimitedG, H, I
Mintaka Investments No. 4 Limited
OGP Leasing Limited
Pelleas Investments Limited
Pelleas Investments Two Limited
Pippin Island Investments Limited
Razzoli Investments LimitedF, I
RVH LimitedF, I
Zanonne Investments Limited (In Liquidation)
Zumboorok Investments Limited
– PO Box 1093, Queensgate House, Grand Cayman,KY1-1102

Blaytell Limited

Coskwo Limited
Godler Limited 
Harflane Limited 

Hauteville UK Investments Limited (In Liquidation)  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2016 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  309


Notes to the financial statements

46 Related undertakingscontinued

Wholly owned subsidiariesNote

– PO Box 1093, Queensgate House, Grand Cayman,KY1-1102continued

Hentock Limited 
Hollygrice Limited
Pilkbull Limited
Strickyard Limited
Winhall Limited
– 190 Elgin Avenue, George Town, Grand Cayman,KY1-9005

Calthorpe Investments Limited

Gallen Investments Limited
JV Assets LimitedL
Palomino LimitedZ
Raglan Investments Limited
Wessex Investments Limited
– Walkers Corporate Limited, Cayman Corporate Centre,
27 Hospital Road, George Town, KY1 – 9008

Long Island Holding B Limited

Hollygrice Limited
Hurley Investments No.1 LimitedI, W
Hurley Investments No.2 Limited (In Liquidation)
HYMF (Cayman) Limited
Iris Investments 1 LimitedG, H, I
JV Assets Limited
Mintaka Investments No. 4 Limited
Moselle No 3 UK Investments Limited (In Liquidation)
OGP Leasing Limited
Palomino LimitedZ
Pelleas Investments Limited
Pelleas Investments Two Limited
Pilkbull Limited
Pippin Island Investments Limited
Raglan Investments Limited
Razzoli Investments LimitedF, I
RVH LimitedF, I
Spargi Investments Limited (In Liquidation)
Spatial Investments Limited (In Liquidation)
Spoonhill Investments Limited (In Liquidation)
Strickyard Limited
Tourmalet UK Investments Limited (In Liquidation)
Ventotene Investments Limited (In Liquidation)
Wessex Investments Limited
Winhall Limited
Zane Investments Limited
Zanonne Investments Limited (In Liquidation)
Zinc Holdings Limited (In Liquidation)
Zumboorok Investments LimitedF, I, T

China

– Room 213, Building 1, No. 1000 Chenhui Road,

ZhangjiangHi-Tech Park, Shanghai

 

 
Barclays Technology Centre (Shanghai) Company Limited
Egypt
– Star Capital AI Tower, City Stars Project, 2 Ali Rashed Street,

Nasr City, Cairo

Barclays Bank Egypt SAE
France

– 183 avenue Daumesnil, Paris, 75012

Barclays Courtage SAS
Barclays Diversification
Barclays Patrimoine S.C.S.
Barclays Vie SA
BBAIL SAS

– 32 avenue George V, Paris, 75008

Barclays France SA
Barclays Wealth Managers France SA
Germany

– Bockenheimer Landstrasse38-40,D-60323 Frankfurt Am Main

Barclays Capital Effekten GmbH
Sulm Investments GmbH (In Liquidation)
– c/o SFM Deutschland GmbH, Gruneburgweg58-62, 60322,

Frankfurt am Main

Baubecon Holding 1 GmbH (In Liquidation)
Opal 110. GmbH (In Liquidation)

– Gasstrasse 4c, 22761, Hamburg, Germany

Baban Mantel AG (In Liquidation)
Gibraltar

– Suite 1, Burns House, 19 Town Range

Frankland Properties Limited
Norfolk LPB
Ringmer Properties Limited
Saveway Properties Limited
Stowmarket Investments Limited
Townmead Properties Limited
Trefield Holdings Limited
Guernsey

– P.O. Box 33, Maison Trinity, Trinity Square, St. Peter Port, GY1 4AT

Barclays Insurance Guernsey PCC LimitedQ
– PO BOX 41, Floor 2, Le Marchant House, Le Truchot, St Peter Port,

GY1 3BE

Barclays Nominees (Guernsey) Limited
Hong Kong

– 42nd floor Citibank Tower, Citibank Plaza, 3 Garden Road

Barclays Bank (Hong Kong Nominees) Limited (In Liquidation)
Barclays Capital Asia Nominees Limited (In Liquidation)

– Level 41, Cheung Kong Center, 2 Queen’s Road Central

Barclays Asia Limited
Barclays Capital Asia Limited  

Egypt

Barclays Bank Egypt SAE

France

Barclays Courtage SAS
Barclays Diversification
Barclays France SA
Barclays Patrimoine S.C.S.
Barclays Vie SA
Barclays Wealth Managers France SA
BBAIL SAS

Germany

Barclaycard Bank AG
Barclays Capital Effekten GmbH
Baubecon Holding 1 GmbH (In Liquidation)
Opal 110. GmbH (In Liquidation)
Sulm Investments GmbH

Gibraltar

Barclays Gibraltar Nominees Company Limited
Frankland Properties Limited
Norfolk LPB
Ringmer Properties Limited
Saveway Properties Limited
Stowmarket Investments Limited
Townmead Properties Limited
Trefield Holdings
Wholly owned subsidiariesNote
India
– 208 Ceejay House, Shivsagar Estate, Dr A Beasant Road, Worli,

Mumbai, 400 018

Barclays Securities (India) Private Limited 
Wholly owned subsidiariesNote

Guernsey

Barclays Wealth Trustees (India) Private Limited

– 67, Maker Tower ‘F’ 6th Floor, Cuffe Parade, Mumbai, 400 005

 

Barclays Insurance Guernsey PCC LimitedQ
Barclays Nominees (Guernsey) Limited
Barclays Wealth Advisory Holdings (Guernsey) Limited (Sold 14/01/2016)
Barclays Wealth Corporate Officers (Guernsey) Limited (Sold 14/01/2016)
Barclays Wealth Corporate Services (Guernsey) Limited (Sold 14/01/2016)
Barclays Wealth Directors (Guernsey) Limited (Sold 14/01/2016)
Barclays Wealth Fund Managers (Guernsey) Limited (Sold 14/01/2016)
Barclays Wealth Nominees (Guernsey) Limited (Sold 14/01/2016)
Barclays Wealth Trustees (Guernsey) Limited (Sold 14/01/2016)
Bormio Limited (Sold 14/01/2016)
Lindmar Trust Company Limited (Sold 14/01/2016)
Regency Secretaries Limited (Sold 14/01/2016)

Hong Kong

Barclays Asia Limited
Barclays Bank (Hong Kong Nominees) Limited (In Liquidation)
Barclays Capital Asia Limited
Barclays Capital Asia Nominees Limited (In Liquidation)
Barclays Wealth Nominees (Hong Kong) Limited (Sold 14/01/2016)

India

Barclays Holdings India Private Limited (In Liquidation)
Barclays Investments & Loans (India) LimitedF, I
Barclays Securities (India) Private Limited
Barclays Shared Services Private Limited
Barclays Technology Centre India Private Limited
Barclays Wealth Trustees (India) Private Limited

Indonesia

PT Bank Barclays Indonesia (In Liquidation)
PT Bhadra Buana Persada (In Liquidation)
Ireland
Barclaycard International Payments Limited
Barclays Assurance (Dublin) Limited
Barclays Bank Ireland Public Limited Company
Barclays Equities Trading (Ireland) Limited (In Liquidation)
Barclays Insurance (Dublin) Limited
Barclays Ireland Nominees Limited

Isle of Man

Barclays Holdings (Isle of Man) Limited
Barclays Nominees (Manx) Limited
Barclays Portfolio (IoM GP) No.2 Limited
Barclays Private Clients International LimitedJ, K
Barclays Trust Company (Isle of Man) Limited (Sold 14/01/2016)
Barclays Wealth Corporate Officers (Isle of Man) Limited (Sold 14/01/2016)
Barclays Wealth Corporate Services (IOM) Limited (Sold 14/01/2016)
Barclays Wealth Directors (Isle of Man) Limited (Sold 14/01/2016)
Barclays Wealth Nominees (IOM) Limited (Sold 14/01/2016)
Barclays Wealth Trustees (Isle of Man) Limited (Sold 14/01/2016)
Barclaytrust (Nominees) Isle of Man Limited (Sold 14/01/2016)
Barclaytrust International Nominees (Isle of Man) Limited (Sold 14/01/2016)
Island Nominees Limited (Sold 14/01/2016)
Stowell Limited (Sold 14/01/2016)
Walbrook (IOM) 2006 Nominees (No. 1) Limited (Sold 14/01/2016)
Walbrook (IOM) Nominees (No. 23) Limited (Sold 14/01/2016)
Walbrook (IOM) Nominees (No. 3) Limited (Sold 14/01/2016)
Walbrook (IOM) Nominees (No. 4) Limited (Sold 14/01/2016)
Walbrook (IOM) Nominees (No. 5) Limited (Sold 14/01/2016)
Walbrook (IOM) Nominees (No. 6) Limited (Sold 14/01/2016)

Italy

Barclays Private Equity S.p.A. (In Liquidation)
Barclays Services Italia S.p.A. (In Liquidation)

Japan

Barclays Funds and Advisory Japan Limited
Barclays Securities Japan Limited
Barclays Wealth Services Limited

Jersey

Barbridge Limited
Barclays Nominees (Jersey) Limited
Barclays Services Jersey Limited
Barclays Trust Company (Jersey) Limited (Sold 14/01/2016)
Barclays Wealth Corporate Officers (Jersey) Limited (Sold 14/01/2016)
Barclays Wealth Directors (Jersey) Limited (Sold 14/01/2016)
Barclays Wealth Fund Managers (Jersey) Limited (Sold 14/01/2016)
Barclays Wealth Management Jersey Limited
Barclays Wealth Signatories Limited (Sold 14/01/2016) 
Barclays Holdings India Private Limited (In Liquidation)
– DLF IT Park 8th Floor, Building 9A and B, 1/124 Shivaji Gardens,

Mount Poonamallee Road, Manapakkam, Chennai, 600089

 

 Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  301


Notes

Barclays Shared Services Private Limited
– Ground to the financial statementsFourth Floor, Wing 3 – Cluster A, Eon Free Zone, MIDC

Knowledge Park, Pune, 411014

 

Barclays Technology Centre India Private Limited
– Level 10, Block B6, Nirlon Knowledge Park, Off Western Express

Highway, Goregaon (East), Mumbai, 40063

 

Barclays Investments & Loans (India) LimitedF, I
Indonesia
– Barclays House, 12th Floor, Jl. Jend Sudirman Kav.22-23, Jakarta,

12920

 

46 Related undertakingscontinued

Wholly owned subsidiariesNote
Barclays Wealth Trustees (Jersey) Limited (Sold 14/01/2016)
Barclaytrust Channel Islands Limited
Barclaytrust International (Jersey) Limited (Sold 14/01/2016)
Barclaytrust Jersey Limited (Sold 14/01/2016)
BIFML PTC Limited
CP Newco 1 Limited
CP Newco2 LimitedJ, K
CP Newco3 Limited
Karami Holdings Limited (Sold 14/01/2016)
MK Opportunities GP Ltd
Sandringham Nominees Limited (Sold 14/01/2016)
Tiara Trustees (Jersey) Limited (Sold 14/01/2016)
Walbrook Executors Limited (Sold 14/01/2016)
Walbrook Properties Limited (Sold 14/01/2016)
PT Bank Barclays Indonesia (In Liquidation)  

– Plaza Lippo, 10th Floor, Jalan Jend, Sudirman Kav 25, Jakarta, 12920

PT Bhadra Buana Persada (In Liquidation)
Ireland

– Two Park Place, Hatch Street, Dublin 2

Barclaycard International Payments Limited
Barclays Assurance (Dublin) Designated Activity Company
Barclays Bank Ireland Public Limited Company
Barclays Insurance (Dublin) Designated Activity Company
Barclays Ireland Nominees Limited (In Liquidation)
Isle of Man

– Barclays House, Victoria Street, Douglas, IM1 2LE

Barclays Nominees (Manx) Limited
Barclays Portfolio (IoM GP) No.2 Limited
Barclays Private Clients International LimitedJ, K

– 2nd Floor, St Georges Court, Upper Church Street, Douglas, IM1 1EE

Barclays Holdings (Isle of Man) Limited
Italy

– Milano, Via della Moscova 18

Barclays Private Equity S.p.A. (In Liquidation)
Japan

10-1, Roppongi6-chome,Minato-ku, Tokyo

Barclays Funds and Advisory Japan Limited
Barclays Securities Japan Limited
Barclays Wealth Services Limited
Jersey

– Third Floor, 37 Esplanade, St. Helier, JE2 3QA

CP Newco 1 Limited
CP Newco2 LimitedJ, K
CP Newco3 Limited

– La Motte Chambers, St Helier, JE1 1BJ

Barclays Services Jersey Limited

39-41 Broad Street, St Helier, JE2 3RR

Barclays Wealth Management Jersey Limited
BIFML PTC Limited

– 13 Castle Street, St. Helier, JE4 5UT

Barclays Index Finance TrustS

– Lime Grove House, Green Street, St Helier, JE1 2ST

Barbridge Limited

– 13 Library Place, St Helier, JE4 8NE

Barclays Nominees (Jersey) Limited
Barclaytrust Channel Islands Limited

– Appleby Trust (Jersey) Limited, PO Box 207,13-14

Esplanade, St Helier, JE1 1BD
MK Opportunities GP Ltd
Korea, Republic of
A-1705 Yeouido Park Centre,28-3 Yeouido-dong,

Yeongdeungpo-gu, Seoul

 

 
Barclays Korea GP Limited  

Luxembourg

 

310  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2016 Annual Report on Form 20-F  
Adler Toy Holding Sarl


46 Related undertakingscontinued

Wholly owned subsidiariesNote
Luxembourg

– 9, allée Scheffer,L-2520

 
Barclays Aegis Investments S.à r.l. 
Barclays Alzin Investments S.à r.l. 
Barclays Bayard Investments S.à r.l.J, K
Barclays BCL Fixed Income S.à r.l.
Barclays BCLI no.1 S.à r.l.
Barclays BCLI no.2 S.à r.l.
Barclays Bedivere Investments S.à r.l.
Barclays Bordang Investments S.à r.l.
Barclays BR Holdings S.à r.l.
Barclays BR Investments S.à r.l.
Barclays Cantal Investments S.à r.l.
Barclays Capital Luxembourg S.à r.l.I, N
Barclays Capital Trading Luxembourg S.à r.l.
Barclays Equity Index Investments S.à r.l.
Barclays Lamorak Investments S.à r.l.
Barclays Leto Investments S.à r.l.
Barclays Luxembourg EUR Holdings S.à r.l
Barclays Luxembourg Finance S.à r.l.I, K
Barclays Luxembourg GBP Holdings S.à r.l.
Barclays Luxembourg Holdings S.à r.l.
Barclays Luxembourg Holdings SSCB
Barclays Luxembourg USD Holdings S.à r.l.
Barclays Pelleas Investments S.à r.l.G, I
Barclays US Investments S.à r.l. J, K

Barclays BCL Fixed Income S.à.r.l.

– 9, allée Scheffer,L-2520 (continued)

Barclays BCLI no.1 S.à r.l
Barclays BCLI no.2 S.à r.l.
Barclays Bedivere Investments S.à r.l.
Barclays Bordang Investments S.à r.l.
Barclays BR Holdings S.à r.l.
Barclays BR Investments S.à r.l.
Barclays Cantal Investments S.�� r.l.J
Barclays Capital Luxembourg S.à r.l.
Barclays Capital Trading Luxembourg S.à r.l.J, K
Barclays Claudas Investments PartnershipB
Barclays Equity Index Investments S.à r.l.
Barclays Lamorak Investments S.à r.l.
Barclays Leto Investments S.à r.l.
Barclays Luxembourg EUR Holdings S.à r.l
Barclays Luxembourg Finance S.à r.l.
Barclays Luxembourg GBP Holdings S.à r.l.
Barclays Luxembourg Holdings S.à r.l.I, AA
Barclays Luxembourg Holdings SSCB
Barclays Luxembourg USD Holdings S.à r.l.J, K
Barclays Pelleas Investments PartnershipB
Barclays Pelleas Investments S.à r.l.G, I
Barclays US Investments S.à r.l.J, K
Blossom Finance General PartnershipB

68-70 Boulevard de la Petrusse,L-2320

Adler Toy Holding Sarl
Malaysia

– Unit30-01, Level 30, Tower A, Vertical Business Suite, Avenue 3,
Bangsar South, No.8, Jalan Kerinchi, Kuala Lumpur, 59200

Barclays Capital Markets Malaysia Sdn Bhd. (In Liquidation)F, I
Mauritius
– C/O Rogers Capital Corporate Services, St. Louis Business Centre,

Cnr Desroches & St. Louis Streets, Port Louis

 

Barclays Capital Markets Malaysia Sdn Bhd.F, I

Mauritius

Barclays (H&B) Mauritius Limited 
Barclays Capital Mauritius Limited 
Barclays Capital Securities Mauritius Limited

– Fifth Floor, Ebene Esplanade, 24 Cybercity, Ebene

Barclays (H&B) Mauritius Limited 
Barclays Mauritius Overseas Holdings Limited
Mexico

– Paseo de la Reforma 505, 41 Floor, Torre Mayor, Col.
Cuauhtemoc, CP 06500

Barclays Bank Mexico, S.A.K, M
Barclays Capital Casa de Bolsa, S.A. de C.V.K, M
Grupo Financiero Barclays Mexico, S.A. de C.V.K, M
Servicios Barclays, S.A. de C.V.
Monaco

– 31 Avenue de la Costa, BP 339

Barclays Wealth Asset Management (Monaco) S.A.M
Netherlands

– Strawinskylaan 3105, 1077 ZX, Amsterdam

Barclays SLCSM Funding B.V.

– De Boelelaan 7, 1083 Hj Amsterdam

Chewdef BidCo BV. (In Liquidation)
Nigeria

– Southgate House, Udi Street, Osborne Estate, Ikoyi, Lagos

Barclays Group Representative Office (NIG) Limited
Philippines

– 21/F, Philamlife Tower, 8767 Paseo de Roxas, Makati City, 1226

Meridian(SPV-AMC) Corporation  

Mexico

Wholly owned subsidiariesNote
Russian Federation

– Four Winds Plaza, 1st Tverskaya-Yamskaya Str , Moscow 21, 125047

 

 
Barclays Bank Mexico, S.A.K, M
Barclays Capital Casa de Bolsa, S.A. de C.V.K, M
Grupo Financiero Barclays Mexico, S.A. de C.V.K, M
Servicios Barclays, S.A. de C.V.

Monaco

Barclays Wealth Asset Management (Monaco) S.A.M.

Netherlands

Barclays SLCSM Funding B.V.
Chewdef BidCo BV. (In Liquidation)

Nigeria

Barclays Group Representative Office (NIG) Limited

Philippines

Meridian (SPV-AMC) Corporation

Portugal

Barclays Wealth Managers Portugal – SGFIM, S.A.

Russian Federation

Limited Liability Company Barclays Capital

Saudi Arabia

Barclays Saudi Arabia (In Liquidation)

Singapore

Barclays Bank (Singapore Nominees) Pte Ltd.
Barclays Bank (South East Asia) Nominees Private Limited Liability Company Barclays Capital (In Liquidation)
Saudi Arabia

– 18th Floor Al Faisaliah Tower , Riyadh, 11311

Barclays Saudi Arabia (In Liquidation)
Singapore
– 10 Marina Boulevard,#24-01 Marina Bay Financial Centre, Tower 2,

018983

Barclays Bank (Singapore Nominees) Pte Ltd
Barclays Bank (South East Asia) Nominees Pte Ltd 
Barclays Capital Futures (Singapore) Private Limited 
Barclays Capital Holdings (Singapore) Private Limited
Barclays Merchant Bank (Singapore) Ltd.
Wholly owned subsidiariesNote
Barclays Capital Holdings (Singapore) Private Limited
Barclays Merchant Bank (Singapore) Ltd.
Barclays Wealth Trustees (Singapore) Limited (Sold 14/01/2016)

Spain

– Plaza De Colon 1, 28046, Madrid

Barclays Tenedora De Immuebles SL.
Barclays Vida Y Pensiones, Compania De Seguros, S.AZ
The Logic Group Enterprises S.L
Switzerland

– Chemin de Grange Canal18-20, PO Box 3941, 1211, Geneva

Barclays Bank (Suisse) S.A.
BPB Holdings SA
Taiwan

– 11/F, 106Xin-Yi Road, Sec. 5, Taipei 110

 

 
Barclays Mediador, Operador de Banca Seguros Vinculado, S.A.
Barclays Tenedora De Immuebles SL.
Barclays Vida Y Pensiones, Compañía De Seguros, S.A.
Iberalbion A.I.E.
The Logic Group Enterprises S.L

Switzerland

Barclays Bank (Suisse) S.A.
Barclaytrust (Suisse) SA (Sold 14/01/2016)
BPB Holdings SA

Taiwan

Barclays Capital Securities Taiwan Limited

Thailand

Barclays Capital Securities (Thailand) Ltd.

Uganda

Barclays Bank of Uganda Limited

Ukraine

Barclays Capital Services (Ukraine) LLC (In Liquidation)C

United States

475 Fifth 09 LLCC
Analog Analytics Inc
Analytical FX Trading Strategy Cell IF, I
Analytical FX Trading Strategy Cell II
Analytical FX Trading Strategy Series LLCC
Analytical Trade Holdings LLC
Analytical Trade Investments LLCH
Archstone Equity Holdings Inc
Barclays Bank DelawareF, I
Barclays BWA, Inc.
Barclays Capital Commodities Corporation
Barclays Capital Derivatives Funding LLCC
Barclays Capital Energy Inc.
Barclays Capital Equities Trading GPB
Barclays Capital Securities Taiwan Limited (In Liquidation)
Thailand
– 87, M Thai Tower All Seasons Place, 23rd Floor, Wireless Road,

Lumpini, Phatumwan, Bangkok, 10330

Barclays Capital (Thailand) Ltd. (In Liquidation)

United States

– Corporation Trust Company, Corporation Trust Center,

1209 Orange Street, Wilmington DE 19801

Archstone Equity Holdings Inc
Barclays BWA, Inc.
Barclays Capital Commodities Corporation
Barclays Capital Derivatives Funding LLCC
Barclays Capital Energy Inc.
Barclays Capital Real Estate Finance Inc.
Barclays Capital Real Estate Holdings Inc.
Barclays Capital Real Estate Inc.
Barclays Commercial Mortgage Securities LLCC
Barclays Delaware Holdings LLCF, I
Barclays Electronic Commerce Holdings Inc.
Barclays Financial LLCC
Barclays Group US Inc.
Barclays Investment Holdings LLC
Barclays Oversight Management Inc.
Barclays Receivables LLCC
Barclays Services Corporation
Barclays US CCP Funding LLCC
Barclays US Funding LLCC
Barclays US LLC G, I
Barclays Capital Inc.
Barclays Capital Real Estate Finance Inc.
Barclays Capital Real Estate Holdings Inc.
Barclays Capital Real Estate Inc.
Barclays Capital Services Inc.
Barclays Commercial Mortgage Securities LLCC
Barclays Delaware Holdings LLCF, I
Barclays Dryrock Funding LLCC
Barclays Electronic Commerce Holdings Inc.
Barclays Financial LLCC
Barclays Group US Inc.
Barclays Insurance U.S. Inc.
Barclays Investment Holdings Inc.
Barclays Oversight Management Inc.
Barclays Receivables LLCC
Barclays Services Corporation
Barclays Services LLCC
Barclays US CCP Funding LLCC
Barclays US Funding LLCC
Barclays US GPF Inc.
Barclays US LPB
Barclays US Management, LLCC
BCAP LLC C
BNRI Acquisition No.4 LLC C
BNRI Acquisition No.5, LP B
BTXS Inc.
Centergate at Gratigny LLCC
CPIA Acquisition No.1 LLCC
CPIA Acquisition No.2 LLCC
CPIA Acquisition No.3 LLC C
CPIA Equity No. 1 Inc. 
CPIA Finance No.1, LLCC
CPIA FX Investments Inc.
CPIA Holdings No.1, LLCC
Crescent Real Estate Member LLC C
Curve Investments GPB

302  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F


46 Related undertakingscontinued

Wholly owned subsidiariesNote
Equifirst Corporation (In Liquidation)
Gracechurch Services Corporation 
HYMF, Inc.
La Torretta Beverages LLCC
La Torretta Hospitality LLCC
La Torretta Operations LLCC
Lagalla Investments LLCC
Long Island Holding A LLCC
Long Island Holding B LLC C
LTDL Holdings LLC C
Marbury Holdings LLC 
Persica Holdings LLC C
Persica Lease LLC C
Persica LL LLC C
Persica Property LLC C

Preferred Liquidity, LLC  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2016 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  311
Procella Investments LLCC
Procella Investments No.1 LLCC
Procella Investments No.2 LLCC
Procella Investments No.3 LLCC
Procella Swaps LLCC
Protium Finance I LLCC
Protium Master Grantor TrustD
Protium Master Mortgage LPB
Protium REO I LPB
RB Special Assets, L.L.C.C
Relative Value Holdings, LLC
Rhode Investments LLCC
Securitized Asset Backed Receivables LLCC
Sutton Funding LLCC
TPLL LLCC
TPProperty LLCC
TPWorks LLCC
US Secured Investments LLCC
Vail 09 LLCC
Vail Development 09 LLCC
Vail Hotel 09 LLCC
Vail Hotel A LLCC
Vail Hotel B LLCC
Vail Residential 09 LLCC
Vail SC LLCC
Vanoise IncH, I
Verain Investments LLCI, J, K
Wilmington Riverfront Receivables LLCJ, K

Zambia


Notes to the financial statements

46 Related undertakingscontinued

 

Barclays Bank Zambia Plc
Kafue House Limited
Wholly owned subsidiariesNote
– Corporation Trust Company, Corporation Trust Center,
1209 Orange Street, Wilmington DE 19801 (continued)
Protium Finance I LLCC
Protium Master Mortgage LPB
Protium REO I LPB
RB Special Assets, L.L.C.C
Securitized Asset Backed Receivables LLCC
Sutton Funding LLCC
TPLL LLCC
TPProperty LLCC
TPWorks LLCC
US Secured Investments LLCC
Vail 09 LLCC
Vail Residential 09 LLCC
Vail SC LLCC

– 1201 North Market Street, P.O. Box 1347 Wilmington, DE19801

Barclays Bank DelawareF, I
Procella Investments LLCC
Procella Investments No.1 LLCC
Procella Investments No.2 LLCC
Procella Investments No.3 LLCC
Procella Swaps LLCC
Verain Investments LLC  

– 2711 Centerville Road, Suite 400, Wilmington DE 19808

Analog Analytics Inc
Barclays Capital Equities Trading GPB
Barclays Capital Holdings Inc.G, I
Lagalla Investments LLC
Protium Master Grantor TrustD
Relative Value Holdings, LLC

– 745 Seventh Avenue, New York NY 10019

Alynore Investments Limited PartnershipB
Curve Investments GPB
Preferred Liquidity, LLCJ
– CT Corporation System, One Corporate Center, Floor 11, Hartford CT

06103-3220

Barclays Capital Inc.
– c/o RL&F Service Corp, One Rodney Square, 10th Floor, Tenth and

King Streets, Wilmington DE 19801

Analytical Trade Holdings LLC
Analytical Trade Investments LLCBB

– 100 South West Street, Wilmington DE 19801

Barclays Dryrock Funding LLCC
Wilmington Riverfront Receivables LLCJ, K

– 100 South Wacker Drive, Suite 2000, Chicago IL 60606

BTXS Inc.

– 15 East North Street, Dover DE DE 19801

Barclays Services LLCC

– 200 Park Avenue, New York, New York, 10166

HYMF, Inc.

– CT Corporation System, 225 Hillsborough Street, Raleigh, NC 27603

Barclays US GPF Inc.

– CT Corporation System, 350 North St. Paul Street, Dallas TX 75201

La Torretta Beverages LLCC
La Torretta Hospitality LLCC
La Torretta Operations LLCC
– Aon Insurance Managers (USA) Inc., 199 Water Street, New York

NY 10038

Barclays Insurance U.S. Inc.

– Suite 1100, 50 W. Liberty St., Reno, Nev 89501

CPIA FX Investments Inc.

– 500 Forest Point Circle, Charlotte, North Carolina 28273

Equifirst Corporation (In Liquidation)
Zimbabwe
– 2 Premium Close, Mount Pleasant Business Park,

Mount Pleasant, Harare

 

Afcarme Zimbabwe Holdings (Pvt) Limited 
Branchcall Computers (Pvt) Limited  
– 2nd Floor, Barclays House, Corner Jason Moyo

Avenue/First Street, Harare

Afcarme Zimbabwe Holdings (Pvt) Limited

Other Related Undertakings

Unless otherwise stated, the undertakings below are consolidated and the share capital disclosed comprises ordinary or common shares which are held by subsidiaries of the Group. The Group’s overall ownership percentage is provided for each undertaking.

Other related undertakingsPercentage    Note
United Kingdom

Unless otherwise stated, the undertakings below are consolidated and the share capital disclosed comprises ordinary or common shares which are held by subsidiaries of the Group. The ownership percentage is provided for each undertaking. Where multiple share classes are held the proportion of the nominal value of each class of shares held is the same as the ownership unless otherwise stated.– 1 Churchill Place, London, E14 5HP

 

Other related undertakingsPercentage    Note

United Kingdom

Barclays Africa Limited62.32%
Barclays Alma Mater Management Limited
Partnership30.00%B, Z
Barclays Covered Bond Funding LLP50.00%B
Barclays Infrastructure Investors Management LP38.00%B, Z
BEIF Management Limited Partnership30.00%B, Z
BMC (UK) Limited40.13%Z
Business Growth Fund PLC23.96%Z
Camperdown UK Limited50.00%
Barclays Africa Limited50.10%
Barclaycard Funding PLC75.00% J Z
Claas Finance Limited 51.00% K
PSA Credit Company Limited (in liquidation)50.00%J, L
Barclays Covered Bond Funding LLP50.00%B

– 1 Angel Lane, London, EC4R 3AB

Vocalink Holdings Limited15.18%Z

– 1 Poultry, London, England, EC2R 8EJ

Igloo Regeneration (General Partner) Limited25.00%L, Z
– 1 Robeson Way, Sharston Green Business Park,

Manchester, M22 4SW

KDC Holdings Limited37.41%EE, Z

3-5 London Road, Rainham, Kent, ME8 7RG

Trade Ideas Limited20.00%Z

– Derby Training Centre, Ascot Drive, Derby, DE24 8GW

Develop Training Group Limited70.01%CC, Z

– 50 Lothian Road, Festival Square, Edinburgh, EH3 9BY

Equistone Founder Partner II L.P. 20.00% B, Z
Equistone Founder Partner III L.P. 35.00% B, Z
– Building 6 Chiswick Park, 566 Chiswick High Road,

London W4 5HR

Intelligent Processing Solutions Limited19.50%Z
– 13 Frensham Road, Sweet Briar Industrial Estate,

Norwich, NR3 2BT

Warehouse Express Group Limited62.88%DD, Z

– Oak House, Ellesmere Port, Cheshire, CH65 9HQ

Elan Homes Holdings Limited59.94%J, L, Z

– 16 Palace Street, London, SW1E 5JD

Barclays Alma Mater Management Limited Partnership30.00%B, Z

20-22 Bedford Row, London, WC1R 4JS

Cyber Defence Alliance Limited25.00%E, Z

– 30 Gresham Street, London, EC2V 7PG

Gresham Leasing March (3) Limited30.00%Z

– 80 New Bond Street, London, W1S 1SB

Other related undertakings Percentage    Note
Equity Estates Basingstoke Limited31.16%J, Z
GN Tower Limited 50.00%Z
GW City Ventures Limited50.00%K, Z
– Basepoint Business Centre,70-72 The Havens Ransomes

Europ, IP3 9SJ, Ipswich

Equity Estates Basingstoke Limited25.05%J, Z

– 5th Floor, 70 Gracechurch Street, London, EC3V 0XL

Camperdown UK Limited50.00%J, Z

– 5 North Colonnade, Canary Wharf, London, E14 4BB

BEIF Management Limited Partnership30.00%B, Z
Imalivest LP66.71%J, K, Z
– Blake House, Schooner Court, Crossways Business Park,

Dartford, DA2 6QQ

Lakeview Computers Group Limited57.83%J, Z

– Queens House, 8 Queen Street, London EC4N 1SP

BIE Topco Limited44.80%J, Z

– No.1 Dorset Street, Southampton, Hampshire, SO15 2DP

MCC (15) GH Limited72.25%J, Z

– 2nd Floor, 110 Cannon Street, London, EC4N 6EU

Vectorcommand Limited (in Liquidation)30.39%J, K, Z

– 55 Baker Street, London, W1U 7EU

Formerly H Limited (In Liquidation)70.32%J, Z
– Countryside House, The Warley Hill Business Park,

The Drive, Brentwood, Essex, CM13 3AT

Woolwich Countryside Limited50.00%O, Z
– Haberfield Old Moor Road, Wennington, Lancaster,

LA2 8PD

Full House Holdings Limited67.43%J, Z

– 6th Floor 60 Gracechurch Street, London, EC3V 0HR

BMC (UK) Limited40.57%F, J, Z
– Central House, 124 High Street, Hampton Hill, Middlesex

TW12 1NS

Rio Laranja Holdings Limited45.00%J, Z

13-15 York Buildings, London, WC2N 6JU

Business Growth Fund PLC24.18% Z
Gresham Leasing March (3) Limited30.00%Z
GW City Ventures Limited50.00%K, Z
Igloo Regeneration (General Partner) Limited25.00%L, Z
Imalivest LP66.28%B, Z
Intelligent Processing Solutions Limited19.50%Z
PetroGranada Limited65.25%Z
PSA Credit Company Limited (in liquidation)50.00%J, L
Vocalink Holdings Limited15.00%Z
Woolwich Countryside Limited50.00%O, Z

Australia

 

312  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2016 Annual Report on Form 20-F  
Hydra Energy Holdings Pty Ltd59.26%Z


46 Related undertakingscontinued

Other related undertakingsPercentage    Note    

Botswana

– 5th Floor, Prime Plaza, Plot 74358, Central Business

District, Gabarone

 

  
Barclays Bank of Botswana Limited33.98%

– Deloitte & Touche House, Lot 50664 , Gaborone

Barclays Insurance Services (Pty) Limited33.98%

– Khama Crescent, Plot 17938, Government Enclave

Barclays Life Botswana Proprietary Limited50.10%
Canada
– 15th Floor, Bankers Court, 850 – 2nd Street, Calgary AB

T2P 0R8

Clearbrook Resources Inc21.62%Z
Cayman Islands
– Maples Corporate Services Limited, PO Box 309GT,
Ugland House, South Church Street, Grand Cayman,

KY1-1104

Chrysaor Holdings Limited39.60%F, J, Z
Cupric Canyon Capital LP40.03%FF, Z
Southern Peaks Mining LP56.17%FF, Z
Third Energy Holdings Limited77.82%F, J, K, Z
Germany

– SchopenhauerstraBe 10,D-90409, Nurnberg

Eschenbach Holding GmbH21.70%Z
Ghana

– Barclays House, High Street, Accra

Barclays Bank of Ghana Limited50.10%
Hong Kong

– 6/F, Kiu Fu Commercial Building,300-306 Lockhart Road

CR SpaClub at Sea (HK) Limited53.86%Z
Indonesia
– Wisma GKBI 39th Floor, Suite 3906, Jl. Jend. Sudirman

No.28, Jakarta, 10210

PT Barclays Capital Securities Indonesia (In Liquidation)99.00%
Isle of Man
– 3rd Floor, St George’s Court, Upper Church Street,

Douglas, IM1 1EE

Absa Manx Holdings Limited50.10%
Absa Manx Insurance Company Limited50.10%
Kenya

– 5th Floor, IKM Place, 5th Ngong Avenue, Nairobi

Barclays Life Assurance Kenya Limited31.99%

– The West End Building, Waiyaki Way, Nairobi

Barclays (Kenya) Nominees Limited34.32%
Barclays Bank Insurance Agency Limited34.32%
Barclays Bank of Kenya Limited34.32%
Barclays Deposit-Taking Microfinance Limited34.32%
Barclays Financial Services Limited34.32%
Barclays Pension Services Limited31.20%Z

– 9th Floor, Williamson House, 4th Ngong Avenue, Nairobi

First Assurance Company Limited31.99%
First Assurance Holdings Limited50.10%
Korea, Republic of
– 18th Floor, Daishin Finance Centre, 343, Samil-daero,

Jung-go, Seoul

Woori BC Pegasus Securitization Specialty Co., Limited70.00%W
Luxembourg

– 9, allée Scheffer,L-2520

BNRI Limehouse No.1 Sarl96.30%R
Partnership Investments S.à r.l.33.40%
Preferred Funding S.à r.l.33.33%H
Preferred Investments S.à r.l.33.33%H, I
Barclays Bank of Botswana Limited42.27%
Barclays Insurance Services (Pty) Limited42.27%
Barclays Life Botswana Proprietary Limited62.32%

Canada

Clearbrook Resources Inc20.71%Z

Cayman Islands

Chrysaor Holdings Limited37.98%Z
Cupric Canyon Capital GP Limited49.90%Z
Cupric Canyon Capital LP38.10%B, Z
Southern Peaks Mining LP54.67%B, Z
SPM GP Limited49.61%Z
Third Energy Holdings Limited74.76%Z

France

Financière DSBG SAS31.51%Z
Sogetrel27.31%Z

Germany

Eschenbach Holding GmbH23.25%Z

Ghana

Barclays Bank of Ghana Limited62.32%

Hong Kong

CR SpaClub at Sea (HK) Limited53.86%Z

Indonesia

PT Barclays Capital Securities Indonesia99.00%

Isle of Man

Absa Manx Holdings Limited62.32%
Absa Manx Insurance Company Limited62.32%

Italy

Eudea SpA22.03%Z

Jersey

Barclays Index Finance Trust32.69%S

Kenya

Barclays (Kenya) Nominees Limited42.69%
Barclays Bank Insurance Agency Limited42.69%
Barclays Bank of Kenya Limited42.69%
Barclays Deposit-Taking Microfinance Limited42.69%
Barclays Financial Services Limited42.69%
Barclays Life Assurance Kenya Limited39.45%
Barclays Pension Services Limited38.81%
First Assurance Company Limited39.45%
First Assurance Holdings Limited62.31%

Korea, Republic of

Woori BC Pegasus Securitization Specialty Co., Limited70.00%

Luxembourg

BNRI Limehouse No.1 Sarl96.30%R
Partnership Investments S.à r.l.33.40%
Preferred Funding S.à r.l.33.33%H
Preferred Investments S.à r.l.33.33%H, I

Malta

– RS2 Buildings, Fort Road, Mosta MST 1859

 

  
RS2 Software PLC 18.25% Z
Other related undertakingsPercentage    Note    

Mauritius

– Barclays House, 68 Cyber City, Ebène

 

 
Barclays Bank Mauritius Limited50.10%G, H, J, K
Monaco

– 31 Avenue de la Costa, Monte Carlo

Societe Civile Immobiliere 31 Avenue de la Costa75.00%
Mozambique

– Avenida 25 de Setembro, No 1184, 15 Andar, Maputo

Barclays Bank Mocambique SA49.50%

– Rua da Imprensa, 183 – R/C, Maputo

Global Alliance Seguros, S.A.50.10%
Namibia

– Bougain Villas, 78 Sam Nujoma Drive, Windhoek

EFS Namibia Proprietary Limited50.10%
– Unit 6, Ausspann Plaza, Dr Agostinho Nero Road,

Ausspannplatz, Windhoek

Absa Namibia Proprietary Limited50.10%
Netherlands

– Alexanderstraat 18, 2514 JM, The Hague

Tulip Oil Holding BV30.45%J, L,Z
Nigeria

– Plot 6, Block XII, Osborne Estate, Ikoyi, Lagos

Absa Capital Representative Office Nigeria Limited50.10%
Norway

– Postbox 6783, ST Olavs plass, 0130 Oslo

EnterCard Norge AS40.00%Z

– Skansegata 2, Stavanger, 4006, Rogland

Origo Exploration Holding AS28.32%F, I, Z
Seychelles
– Capital City, Room1-01, 1st Floor, Independence

Avenue, Victoria, Mahe

Barclays Bank (Seychelles) Limited49.98%
South Africa
– Barclays Towers West, 15 Troye Street,

Johannesburg, 2001

1900 Summerstrand Share Block Limited50.10%
Absa Alternative Asset Management Proprietary Limited50.10%
Absa Asset Management Proprietary Limited50.05%
Absa Bank Limited50.10%I, J
Absa Capital Securities Proprietary Limited50.10%
Absa Consultants and Actuaries Proprietary Limited50.10%
Absa Development Company Holdings Proprietary Limited50.10%F, I
Absa Estate Agency Proprietary Limited50.10%
Absa Financial Services Africa Holdings Proprietary Limited50.10%
Absa Financial Services Limited50.10%
Absa Fleet Services Proprietary Limited50.10%
Absa Fund Managers Limited50.10%
Absa idirect Limited50.10%
Absa Insurance and Financial Advisers Proprietary Limited50.10%
Absa Insurance Company Limited50.10%
Absa Insurance Risk Management Services Limited50.10%
Absa Investment Management Services Proprietary Limited50.10%
Absa Life Limited50.10%F, I
Absa Mortgage Fund Managers Proprietary Limited50.10%
Absa Nominees Proprietary Limited50.10%
Absa Ontwikkelingsmaatskappy Eiendoms Beperk50.10%
Absa Outsource Competency Centre Proprietary Limited50.10%
Absa Portfolio Managers Proprietary Limited50.10%
Absa Property Development Proprietary Limited50.10%
Absa Secretarial Services Proprietary Limited50.10%
Absa Stockbrokers and Portfolio Management
Proprietary Limited50.10%
Absa Technology Finance Solutions Proprietary Limited50.10%
Absa Trading and Investment Solutions Holdings
Proprietary Limited50.10%
Absa Trading and Investment Solutions Proprietary Limited50.10%
Absa Trust (Natal) Limited50.10% 
Barclays Bank Mauritius Limited62.32%G, H, J, K

Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2016 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  313

Monaco


Notes to the financial statements

46 Related undertakingscontinued

 

Other related undertakingsPercentage    Note    

– Barclays Towers West, 15 Troye Street,

Johannesburg, 2001 (continued)

 
Société Civile Immobilière 31 Avenue de la Costa75.00%

Mozambique

Barclays Bank Moçambique SA61.58%
Global Alliance Seguros, S.A.62.32%

Namibia

Absa Namibia Proprietary Limited62.32%
EFS Namibia Proprietary Limited62.32% 
Absa Trust Limited50.10%I, J
Absa Vehicle Management Proprietary Limited50.10%
Absa Vehicle Management Solutions Proprietary Limited50.10%
ABSAN Proprietary Limited50.10%
ACS Nominees Proprietary Limited50.10%
AIMS Nominees (RF) Proprietary Limited50.10%
Alberton Industrial Properties Proprietary Limited50.10%
Allied Development Company Proprietary Limited50.10%
Allied Grinaker Properties Proprietary Limited (In Liquidation)25.55%
Allpay Consolidated Investment Holdings Proprietary Limited50.10%
Allpay Eastern Cape Proprietary Limited (In Liquidation)33.07%
Allpay Free State Proprietary Limited (In Liquidation)30.06%
Allpay Gauteng Proprietary Limited (In Liquidation)30.06%
Allpay Mpumalanga Proprietary Limited50.10%
Allpay Western Cape Proprietary Limited (In Liquidation)33.07%
Bankorptrust Limited50.10%
Barclays Africa Group Limited50.10%
Barclays Africa Regional Office Proprietary Limited50.10%
Cedar Lakes Country Estates Proprietary Limited
(Liquidated on 19 January 2017)50.10%
Combined Mortgage Nominees Proprietary Limited50.10%
Compro Holdings Proprietary Limited50.10%
Draaikloof Properties Proprietary Limited (In Liquidation)40.08%
FFS Finance South Africa (RF) Proprietary Limited25.05%
Fradey Nominees (RF) Proprietary Limited50.10%
Goldreef Village Share Block Limited50.10%
Instant Life Proprietary Limited37.57%
iSentials Proprietary Limited25.05%
MAN Financial Services (SA) (RF) Proprietary Limited25.05%
Marmanet Retirement Village Proprietary Limited50.10%
Kempwest Proprietary Limited25.05%
Lekkerleef Eiendoms Beperk50.10%
MB Acquired Operations Limited (In Liquidation)50.10%
Meeg Asset Finance Proprietary Limited (In Liquidation)50.10%
Merfin Proprietary Limited50.10%
Nation-Wide Recovery Services Proprietary Limited25.05%
NewFunds (RF) Proprietary Limited50.10%
Newgold Issuer (RF) Limited50.10%Z
Newgold Managers Proprietary Limited24.55%
Olieven Properties Proprietary Limited
(Liquidated on 19 January 2017)50.10%
Ottawa Development Trust Proprietary Limited50.10%
Palmietfontein Investments Proprietary Limited
(Liquidated on 19 January 2017)50.10%
Roodekop Townships Proprietary Limited50.10%
UBS Trust Limited50.10%
United Development Corporation Proprietary Limited50.10%
United Towers Proprietary Limited50.10%
Volkskas Eiendomsdienste Eiendoms Beperk50.10%I, J
Volkskastrust Beperk50.10%I, J
Woodbook Finance Proprietary Limited50.10%
Woolworths Financial Services Proprietary Limited25.05%

– Absa Capital, 15 Alice Lane, Sandton, Gauteng

 

 Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  303


Notes to the financial statements

46 Related undertakingscontinued

Other related undertakingsPercentage    Note    

Netherlands

Tulip Oil Holding BV30.43%Z

Nigeria

Absa Capital Representative Office Nigeria Limited62.32%

Norway

EnterCard Norge AS40.00%Z
Origo Exploration Holding AS23.08%Z

Seychelles

Barclays Bank (Seychelles) Limited62.18%

South Africa

1900 Summerstrand Share Block Limited62.32%
Absa Alternative Asset Management Proprietary Limited62.32%
Absa Asset Management Proprietary Limited62.26%
Absa Bank Limited62.32%I, J
Absa Capital Securities Proprietary Limited62.32%F, I
Absa Consultants and Actuaries Proprietary Limited62.32%
Absa Development Company Holdings Proprietary Limited62.32%F, I
Absa Estate Agency Proprietary Limited62.32%
Absa Financial Services Africa Holdings Proprietary Limited62.32%
Absa Financial Services Limited62.32%
Absa Fleet Services Proprietary Limited62.32%
Absa Fund Managers Limited62.32%
Absa idirect Limited62.32%
Absa Insurance and Financial Advisers Proprietary Limited62.32%
Absa Insurance Company Limited62.32%
Absa Insurance Risk Management Services Limited62.32%
Absa Investment Management Services Proprietary Limited62.32%
Absa Life Limited62.32%F, I
Absa Mortgage Fund Managers Proprietary Limited62.32%
Absa Nominees Proprietary Limited62.32%
Absa Ontwikkelingsmaatskappy Eiendoms Beperk62.32%
Absa Outsource Competency Centre Proprietary Limited62.32%
Absa Portfolio Managers Proprietary Limited62.32%
Absa Property Development Proprietary Limited62.32%
Absa Secretarial Services Proprietary Limited62.32%
Absa Stockbrokers Proprietary Limited62.32%
Absa Technology Finance Solutions Proprietary Limited62.32%
Absa Trading and Investment Solutions Holdings62.32%
Proprietary Limited
Absa Trading and Investment Solutions Proprietary Limited62.32%
Absa Trust (Natal) Limited62.32%
Absa Trust Limited62.32%I, J
Absa Vehicle Management Proprietary Limited62.32%
Absa Vehicle Management Solutions Proprietary Limited62.32%
ABSAN Proprietary Limited62.32%
Account on Us Proprietary Limited31.16%
ACMB Specialised Finance Nominees Proprietary Limited62.32%
(In Liquidation)
ACS Nominees Proprietary Limited62.32%
African Spirit Trading 309 Proprietary Limited31.16%Z
AIMS Nominees (RF) Proprietary Limited62.32%
Alberton Industrial Properties Proprietary Limited62.32%
Allied Development Company Proprietary Limited62.32%
Allied Grinaker Properties Proprietary Limited31.78%
Allpay Consolidated Investment Holdings Proprietary Limited62.32%
Allpay Eastern Cape Proprietary Limited – (In Liquidation)41.13%
Allpay Free State Proprietary Limited (In Liquidation)37.39%
Allpay Gauteng Proprietary Limited (In Liquidation)37.39%
Allpay Limpopo Proprietary Limited (In Liquidation)62.32%
Allpay Mpumalanga Proprietary Limited62.32%
Allpay Northern Cape Proprietary Limited (In Liquidation)62.32%
Allpay Northwest Proprietary Limited (In Liquidation)62.32%
Allpay Payment Solutions Proprietary Limited (In Liquidation)62.32%
Allpay Western Cape Proprietary Limited (In Liquidation)41.13%
Bankorptrust Limited62.32%
Barclays Africa Group Limited62.32%
Barclays Africa Regional Office Proprietary Limited62.32%
Barrie Island Property Investments Proprietary Limited62.32%
Blue Age Properties 60 Proprietary Limited62.32%
Campus on Rigel Proprietary Limited20.77%Z
Cedar Lakes Country Estates Proprietary Limited62.32%
Combined Mortgage Nominees Proprietary Limited62.32%
Compro Holdings Proprietary Limited62.32%
Culemborg Investment Properties Proprietary Limited35.67%
Barrie Island Property Investments Proprietary Limited50.10%
Blue Age Properties 60 Proprietary Limited50.10%
Culemborg Investment Properties Proprietary Limited28.69% J, K
Other related undertakingsPercentage    Note    
Diluculo Investments Proprietary Limited62.32%
Diluculo Properties Proprietary Limited62.32%
Diluculo Property Trading Proprietary Limited62.32%
Draaikloof Properties Proprietary Limited49.86%
FFS Finance South Africa (RF) Proprietary Limited31.16%
Fradey Nominees (RF) Proprietary Limited62.32%
Goldreef Village Share Block Limited61.88%
Guaret Investments No 1 Proprietary Limited62.32%H, I
Integrated Processing Solutions Proprietary Limited31.16%
iSentials Proprietary Limited31.16%
Kangrove Proprietary Limited (In Liquidation)62.32%
Kempwest Proprietary Limited31.16%
Lekkerleef Eiendoms Beperk62.32%
Lodel Proprietary Limited (In Liquidation)62.32%
MAN Financial Services (SA) (RF) Proprietary Limited31.16%
Marmanet Retirement Village Proprietary Limited62.32%
MB Acquired Operations Limited (In Liquidation)62.32%
Meeg Asset Finance Proprietary Limited (In Liquidation)62.32%
Merfin Proprietary Limited62.32%
Nation-Wide Recovery Services Proprietary Limited31.16%
NewFunds (RF) Proprietary Limited62.32%
Newgold Issuer (RF) Limited62.32%
Newgold Managers Proprietary Limited30.54%
Ngwenya River Estate Proprietary Limited62.32%
Nkwe Rosslyn Properties Proprietary Limited62.32%
Northern Lights Trading 197 Proprietary Limited31.16%
Diluculo Investments Proprietary Limited50.10%
Diluculo Properties Proprietary Limited50.10%
Diluculo Property Trading Proprietary Limited50.10%
Ngwenya River Estate Proprietary Limited50.10%
Nkwe Rosslyn Properties Proprietary Limited50.10%
Pienaarsrivier Properties Proprietary Limited50.10%

– 18 Bompas Road, Dunkeld West

African Spirit Trading 309 Proprietary Limited25.05%Z

– 52 Grosvenor Road, Bryanston, 2021

Campus on Rigel Proprietary Limited (In Liquidation)16.70%Z
– 9th Floor, Standard Bank Centre, 5 Simmonds Street,

Johannesburg

Integrated Processing Solutions Proprietary Limited25.05%

– Abcon House, Fairway Office Park, Bryanston

Somerset West Autopark Proprietary Limited16.70%Z

– Corner Ian Halle, P O Box 44845, Claremont, 7735

Northern Lights Trading 197 Proprietary Limited25.05%Z
Pacific Heights Investments 196 Proprietary Limited25.05% Z
Olieven Properties Proprietary Limited62.32%
Other related undertakings Percentage    Note    
Ottawa Development Trust Proprietary Limited62.32%
Pacific Heights Investments 196 Proprietary Limited31.16%Z
Palmietfontein Investments Proprietary Limited62.32%
Pienaarsrivier Properties Proprietary Limited62.32%
RainFin (RF) Proprietary Limited30.54%Z
Roodekop Townships Proprietary Limited62.32%
Somerset West Autopark Proprietary Limited20.77%Z
T E AND M J Proprietary Limited (In Liquidation)62.32%
Tembisa Mall Proprietary Limited31.16%Z
The Ballito Junction Development Proprietary Limited62.32%F, I
(in Liquidation)
Thebes Landgoed Eiendoms Beperk62.32%
UBS Trust Limited62.32%
United Development Corporation Proprietary Limited62.32%
United Towers Proprietary Limited62.32%
Up-Front Investments 132 Proprietary Limited31.16%
Volkskas Eiendomsdienste Eiendoms Beperk62.32%I, J
Volkskastrust Beperk62.32%I, J
Woodbook Finance Proprietary Limited62.32%

Woolworths Financial Services Proprietary Limited

31.16%

Sweden

– c/o ForeningsSparbanken AB, 105 34 Stockholm

EnterCard Holding AB40.00%K, Z
EnterCard Sverige AB40.00%Z
Tanzania, United Republic of
– Azali Certified Public Secretaries, Hillside Apartments,

First Floor, Suite #04, Ragati Road Upperhill, Nairobi

First Assurance Company Limited (Tanzania)16.79%
– Barclays House, P O Box 5137, Ohio Street,

Dar es Salaam

Barclays Bank Tanzania Limited50.10%G, I
– Mezzanine Floor, NBC House, Sokoine Drive,

Dar Es Salaam

National Bank of Commerce Limited27.55%
Turkey
– Bahcelievier Mah., Kaldirim Cad. No. 34/1,

Cengelkoy-Uskudar, Istanbul

CRKK RESORT OTEL ISLETMECILGI LIMITED SIRKETI54.40%Z
Uganda

– 16 Kampala Road, Kampala

Barclays Bank of Uganda Limited50.10%
United States

– 777 Main Street, Fort Worth TX 76102

CR Lenox Residences, LLC54.40%C, Z
CR Management, LLC54.40%C, Z
CRE Diversified Holdings LLC80.00%C, Z
Crescent Crown Greenway Plaza SPV LLC80.00%C, Z
Crescent Crown Land Holding SPV LLC80.00%C, Z
Crescent Plaza Hotel Owner GP, LLC80.00%C, Z
Crescent Plaza Hotel Owner, L.P.80.00%B, Z
Crescent Plaza Residential LP, LLC80.00%C, Z
Crescent Plaza Residential, L.P.80.00%B, Z
Crescent Plaza Residential, LLC80.00%C, Z
Crescent Plaza Restaurant GP, LLC80.00%C, Z
Crescent Property Services LLC80.00%C, Z
Crescent Real Estate Equities Limited Partnership80.00%B, Z
Crescent Real Estate Equities, LLC80.00%C, Z
Crescent Real Estate Holdings LLC80.00%C, Z
Crescent Resort Development LLC80.00%C, Z
Crescent Tower Residences GP, LLC80.00%C, Z
Crescent Tower Residences, L.P.80.00%B, Z
Crescent TRS Holdings LLC80.00%C, Z
Crescent-Fearing, L.P.40.00%B, Z
CREW Tahoe Holdings LLC80.00%C, Z
DBL Texas Holdings LLC80.00%C, Z
Desert Mountain Development LLC80.00%C, Z
Desert Mountain Properties Limited Partnership74.40%B, Z
East West Resort Development VII LLC80.00%C, Z
Mira Vista Development LLC78.40%C, Z
Moon Acquisition Holdings LLC80.00%C, Z
Moon Acquisition LLC80.00%C, Z
Mountainside Partners LLC80.00%C, Z
Sonoma Golf Club, LLC64.00%C, Z
Sonoma Golf, LLC64.00%C, Z
Sonoma National, LLC80.00%C, Z

– 8600 E. Rockcliff Road, Tuscon AZ 85750

 

  
EnterCard Holding AB40.00%K, Z
EnterCard Sverige AB40.00%Z

Tanzania, United Republic of

Barclays Bank Tanzania Limited62.32%
First Assurance Company Limited (Tanzania)34.43%
National Bank of Commerce Limited41.06%

Turkey

CRKK RESORT OTEL ISLETMECILGI LIMITED SIRKETI54.40%Z

United States

Blue River Land Company, LLC39.55%C, Z
Canyon Ranch Enterprises, LLC54.40%C, Z
Central Platte Valley Management, LLC51.78%C, Z
Continental Intermodal Group GP LLC50.00%C, Z
Continental Intermodal Group LP37.29%B, Z
CR Bodrum Management, LLC 54.40% C, Z
CR Employment, Inc. 54.40% Z
CR Las Vegas, LLC54.40%C, Z
CR Lenox Residences, LLC 54.40% C, Z
CR License, LLC54.40%C, Z
CR Management, LLC 54.40% C, Z
CR Miami Employment, LLC 54.40% C, Z
CR Miami, LLC 54.40% C, Z
CR Operating, LLC 54.40% C, Z
CR Orlando, LLC 54.40% C, Z
CR Products, LLC 54.40% C, Z
CR Resorts, LLC 54.40% C, Z

304  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F


46 Related undertakingscontinued

Other related undertakingsPercentage    Note    
CR SpaClub at Sea, LLC54.40%C, Z
Spa Project Advisors, LLC54.40%C, Z
Tucson/Lenox Special Manager, Inc.54.40%Z
Tucson/Lenox, LLC 54.40% C, Z
CR SPE1, LLC54.40%C, Z
CRE Diversified Holdings LLC80.00%C, Z
Crescent CR Holdings LLC80.00%C, Z
Crescent Crown Greenway Plaza SPV LLC80.00%C, Z
Crescent Crown Land Holding SPV LLC80.00%C, Z
Crescent Fresh Series B Hold Co.80.00%Z
Crescent McKinney Olive Holdings GP LLC80.00%C, Z
Crescent Plaza Hotel Owner GP, LLC80.00%C, Z
Crescent Plaza Hotel Owner, L.P.80.00%B, Z
Crescent Plaza Residential LP, LLC80.00%C, Z
Crescent Plaza Residential, L.P.80.00%B, Z
Crescent Plaza Residential, LLC80.00%C, Z
Crescent Plaza Restaurant GP, LLC80.00%C, Z
Crescent Property Services LLC80.00%C, Z
Crescent Real Estate Equities Limited Partnership80.00%B, Z
Crescent Real Estate Equities, LLC80.00%C, Z
Crescent Real Estate Holdings LLC80.00%C, Z
Crescent Resort Development LLC80.00%C, Z
Crescent Tower Residences GP, LLC80.00%C, Z
Crescent Tower Residences, L.P.80.00%B, Z
Crescent TRS Holdings LLC80.00%C, Z
Crescent-Fearing, L.P.40.00%B, Z
CREW Tahoe Holdings LLC80.00%C, Z
CREW Tahoe LLC60.80%C, Z
Cupric Canyon Capital LLC26.04%C, Z
DBL Texas Holdings LLC80.00%C, Z
Desert Mountain Development LLC80.00%C, Z
Desert Mountain Properties Limited Partnership74.40%B, Z
DG Solar Lessee II, LLC50.00%C, Z
DG Solar Lessee, LLC50.00%C, Z
East West Resort Development IV, L.P., L.L.L.P.71.11%B, Z
East West Resort Development V, L.P., L.L.L.P.74.75%B, Z
East West Resort Development VI, L.P., L.L.L.P.35.86%B, Z
East West Resort Development VII LLC80.00%C, Z
East West Resort Development VIII, L.P., L.L.L.P.71.11%B, Z
East West Resort Development XIV, L.P., L.L.L.P.33.52%B, Z
EW Deer Valley, LLC29.28%C, Z
EWRD Perry Holding, L.P., L.L.L.P.67.61%B, Z
EWRD Perry-Riverbend, LLC54.31%C, Z
EWRD Summit Holding, L.P., L.L.L.P.79.57%B, Z
EWRD Summit, LLC79.10%C, Z
Gray’s Station, LLC56.96%C, Z
Home Run Tahoe, LLC60.82%C, Z
Mira Vista Development LLC78.40%C, Z
Mira Vista Golf Club, L.C.76.83%Z
Moon Acquisition Holdings LLC80.00%C, Z
Moon Acquisition LLC80.00%C, Z
Mountainside Partners LLC80.00%C, Z
MV Penthouses, LLC51.20%C, Z
MVWP Development LLC30.40%C, Z
MVWP Investors LLC60.80%C, Z
Northstar Mountain Properties, LLC60.82%C, Z
Northstar Trailside Townhomes, LLC60.82%C, Z
Northstar Village Townhomes, LLC56.93%C, Z
Old Greenwood Realty, Inc.60.80%Z
Old Greenwood, LLC60.80%C, Z
Overlook at Sugarloaf Inc62.32%

314  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2016 Annual Report on Form 20-F  
Parkside Townhomes, LLC47.63%C, Z
Sonoma Golf Club, LLC64.00%C, Z
Sonoma Golf, LLC64.00%C, Z
Sonoma National, LLC80.00%C, Z
Spa Project Advisors, LLC54.40%C, Z
St. Charles Place, LLC47.63%C, Z
Stellar Residences, LLC60.82%C, Z
Stellar Townhomes, LLC60.82%C, Z
Tahoe Club Company, LLC60.80%C, Z
Tahoe Club Employee Company60.80%Z
Tahoe Mountain Resorts, LLC60.82%C, Z
The Glades Tahoe, LLC60.82%C, Z
The Park at One Riverfront, LLC47.63%C, Z
Truckee Land, LLC74.75%C, Z
Tucson/Lenox Special Manager, Inc.54.40%Z
Tucson/Lenox,


46 Related undertakingscontinued

Other related undertakingsPercentage    Note    
– 126 Riverfront Lane , 5th Floor, Drawer 2770,

Avon CO 81620

Blue River Land Company, LLC39.55%C, Z
East West Resort Development IV, L.P., L.L.L.P.71.11%B, Z
East West Resort Development VI, L.P., L.L.L.P.35.86%B, Z
East West Resort Development VIII, L.P., L.L.L.P.71.11%B, Z
East West Resort Development XIV, L.P., L.L.L.P.33.52%B, Z
EW Deer Valley, LLC29.28%C, Z
EWRD Perry Holding, L.P., L.L.L.P.67.61%B, Z
EWRD Perry-Riverbend, LLC54.31%C, Z
EWRD Summit Holding, L.P., L.L.L.P.79.57%B, Z
EWRD Summit, LLC79.10%C, Z
MV Penthouses, LLC51.20%C, Z
Water House on Main Street LLC35.26%C, Z

– 3001 Northstar Drive, C200, Truckee CA 96161

CREW Tahoe LLC60.80%C, Z
East West Resort Development V, L.P., L.L.L.P.74.75%B, Z
Gray’s Station, LLC56.96%C, Z
Home Run Tahoe, LLC60.82%C, Z
Northstar Mountain Properties, LLC60.82%C, Z
Northstar Trailside Townhomes, LLC60.82%C, Z
Northstar Village Townhomes, LLC56.93%C, Z
Old Greenwood Realty, Inc.60.80%Z
Old Greenwood, LLC60.80%C, Z
Tahoe Club Company, LLC60.80%C, Z
Tahoe Mountain Resorts, LLC60.82%C, Z
The Glades Tahoe, LLC60.82%C, Z

– Corporation Service Company, 2711 Centreville Road,

Suite 400, Wilmington DE 19808

CR SPE1, LLC 54.40% C, Z
Crescent CR Holdings LLC80.00%C, Z
Crescent Fresh Series B Hold Co.80.00%Z
Crescent McKinney Olive Holdings GP LLC80.00%C, Z
MVWP Development LLC30.40%C, Z
MVWP Investors LLC60.80%C, Z
Stellar Residences, LLC60.82%C, Z
Stellar Townhomes, LLC60.82%C, Z
– 1701 Wynkoop Street, Suite 140, Box 47, Denver

CO 80202

 

Other related undertakingsPercentage    Note    
Union Center LLC51.78%C, Z
Vendue/Prioleau Associates LLC49.60%C, Z
Village Walk, LLC46.08%C, Z
VS BC Solar Lessee I LLC50.00%C, Z
Water House on Main Street LLC35.26%C, Z

Zambia

Barclays Life Zambia Limited62.32%
Parkside Townhomes, LLC47.63%C, Z
St. Charles Place, LLC47.63%C, Z
The Park at One Riverfront, LLC47.63%C, Z
Central Platte Valley Management, LLC51.78%C, Z
Union Center LLC51.78%C, Z
– Corporation Trust Company, Corporation Trust Center,

1209 Orange Street, Wilmington DE 19801

DG Solar Lessee II, LLC50.00%C, Z
DG Solar Lessee, LLC50.00%C, Z
Cupric Canyon Capital LLC40.03%FF, Z
VS BC Solar Lessee I LLC50.00%C, Z
– East West Partners, Inc., 126 Riverfront Lane, 5th Floor,

Avon CO 81620

Tahoe Club Employee Company60.80%Z
– 200 Renaissance Parkway Suite 20, Atlanta,

Georgia 30308

Overlook at Sugarloaf Inc50.10%
– C/O Capitol Services Inc., Suite B, 1675 South State

Street, Dover DE 19901-5140

Continental Intermodal Group LP37.58%FF, Z
– C/O W.J. Harrison & Associates, P.C., 3561 East Sunrise

Dr., Ste. 201, Tucson AZ 85718

CR Bodrum Management, LLC54.40%C, Z

– 6600 Mira Vista Blvd., Fort Worth TX 76132

Mira Vista Golf Club, L.C.76.83%Z
– c/o National Corporate Research Ltd. 615 DuPont

Highway, Dover, Kent County, DE 19901

Surrey Funding Corporation99.45%
Sussex Purchasing Corporation99.45%  
Other related undertakingsPercentage    Note    
Zambia

– 3rd Floor, Mpile Park, 74 Independence Avenue, Lusaka

Barclays Life Zambia Limited50.10%
– Stand No. 4643 and 4644, Elunda Office Park,

Addis Ababa Roundabout, Lusaka

Barclays Bank Zambia PLC50.10%

– Kafue House, Cairo Road, Lusaka, 10101

Kafue House Limited50.10%
Zimbabwe
– 2nd Floor, Barclay House, Corner First Street, Jason

Moyo Avenue, PO Box 1279, Harare

 

  
Barclays Bank of Zimbabwe Limited 67.68% 
Barclays Merchant Bank of Zimbabwe Limited (In Liquidation) 67.68% 
Barclays Zimbabwe Nominees (Pvt) Limited 67.68% 
BRAINS Computer Processing (Pvt) Limited (In Liquidation)67.68%F, I
Fincor Finance Corporation Limited 67.68%  
– 2 Premium Close, Mount Pleasant Business Park,

Mount Pleasant , Harare

BRAINS Computer Processing (Pvt) Limited (In Liquidation)78.45%F, I

Subsidiaries by virtue of control

The related undertakings below are subsidiaries in accordance with s.1162 Companies Act 2006 as Barclays can exercise dominant influence or control over them. The entities are owned by The Barclays Bank UK Retirement Fund.

Subsidiaries by virtue of control

The related undertakings below are subsidiaries in accordance with s.1162 Companies Act 2006 as Barclays can exercise dominant influence or control over them. The entities are all owned by the Barclays Bank UK Retirement Fund.

Subsidiaries by virtue of control Percentage     Note    

United Kingdom

– 1 Churchill Place, London, E14 5HP

 

  
Oak Pension Asset Management Limited0.00%Z
Water Street Investments Limited0.00%Z
Cayman Islands
– PO Box 309GT, Ugland House, South Church Street,

Grand Cayman,KY1-1104

Hornbeam Limited 0.00% Z
Water Street Investments Limited0.00%Z

Cayman Islands

Joint Ventures

The related undertakings below are Joint Ventures in accordance with s. 18, Schedule 4, The Large andMedium-sized Companies and Groups (Accounts and Reports) Regulations 2008 and are proportionally consolidated.

 

Hornbeam Limited0.00%Z

Joint Ventures

The related undertakings below are Joint Ventures in accordance with s. 18, Schedule 4, The Large and Medium-sized Companies and Groups (Accounts and Reports) Regulations 2008 and are proportionally consolidated.

Joint Ventures Percentage     Joint management factors

United Kingdom

– 21 Garlick Hill, London,

EC4V 2AU

Vaultex UK Limited

50.00%The Joint Venture Board comprises two Barclays representative directors, two JV partner directors and threenon-JV partner directors. The Board is responsible for setting the company strategy and budgets.

Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2016 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  315


Notes to the financial statements

46 Related undertakingscontinued

 

Notes
A  Directly held by Barclays PLC

Vaultex UK Limited

21 Garlick Hill, London EC4V 2AU

50.00%The Joint Venture Board comprises two Barclays representative directors, two JV partner directors and three non-JV partner directors. The Board are responsible for setting the company strategy and budgets.

Notes

ADirectly held by Barclays PLC
BPartnership Interest
CMembership Interest
DTrust Interest
EGuarantor
FPreference Shares
GA Preference Shares
HB Preference Shares
IOrdinary/Common Shares in addition to other shares
JA Ordinary Shares
KB Ordinary Shares
LC Ordinary Shares
MF Ordinary Shares
NO Ordinary Shares
OW Ordinary Shares
PRedeemable Ordinary Shares
QCore Shares and Insurance (Classified) Shares
RB, C, D, E (94.36%), F (94.36%), G (94.36%), H (94.36%), I (94.36%), J (95.23%) and K Class Shares
SA and B Unit Shares
TClass A Residual Shares, Class B Residual Shares
UA Voting Shares and B Non-Voting Shares
UA Voting Shares and BNon-Voting Shares
VClass A Ordinary Shares, Class A Preference Shares (48.50%), Class B Ordinary Shares, Class C Ordinary Shares, Class C Preference Shares (92.53%), Class D Ordinary Shares, Class D Preference Shares, Class E Ordinary Shares, Class E Preference Shares, Class F Ordinary Shares, Class F Preference Shares, Class H 2012 Ordinary Shares, Class H 2012 Preference Shares, Class H Ordinary Shares, Class H Preference Shares (79.84%), Class I Preference Shares (50.00%), Class J Ordinary Shares, Class J Preference Shares
WClass A1, A2, A3, A4, A6, A8, A9, A10, A11, A12, A13, A14, A15, A16 and Class B
WFirst Class Common Shares, Second Class Common Shares
XPEF Carry Shares
YEUR Tracker Shares, GBP Tracker Shares and USD Tracker Shares
ZNot Consolidated (see Note 37 for scope of consolidation)
ZNot Consolidated (see Note 37 Structured entities)
AAUSD Linked Ordinary Shares
BBRedeemable Class B Shares
CCA Ordinary, Y Ordinary, Z Ordinary
DDA Ordinary, B Ordinary, ZA Ordinary, ZB Ordinary, D Ordinary
EEA Ordinary, ZI Ordinary
FFClass A Units / Interests

 

 

316  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2016 Annual Report on Form 20-F
Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  305


Notes to the financial statements

Page left blank for pagination purposes


Additional shareholder information

    

    

 

 

 

Shareholder information

Additional shareholder information

Articles of Association

Barclays PLC (the “Company”) is a public limited company registered in England and Wales under company number 48839. Barclays, originally named Barclay & Company Limited, was incorporated in England and Wales on 20 July 1896 under the Companies Acts 1862 to 1890 as a company limited by shares. The company name was changed to Barclays Bank Limited on 17 February 1917 and it was registered on 15 February 1982 as a public limited company under the Companies Acts 1948 to 1980. On 1 January 1985, the company changed its name to Barclays PLC.

Under the Companies Act 2006 a company’s Memorandum of Association now need only contain the names of the subscribers and the number of shares each subscriber has agreed to take. For companies in existence as of 1 October 2009, all other provisions which were contained in the company’s Memorandum of Association, including the company’s objects, are now deemed to be contained in the company’s articles. The Companies Act 2006 also states that a company’s objects are unrestricted unless the company’s articles provide otherwise.

The Articles of Association were adopted at the Company’s Annual General Meeting (“AGM”) on 30 April 2010 and amended at the AGM of the Company on 25 April 2013.

The following is a summary and explanation of the current Articles of Association, which are available for inspection.

Directors

(i) The minimum number of Directors (excluding alternate Directors) is five. There is no maximum limit. There is no age limit for Directors.

(ii) Excluding executive remuneration and any other entitlement to remuneration for extra services (including service on board committees) under the Articles, a Director is entitled to a fee at a rate determined by the Board but the aggregate fees paid to all Directors shall not exceed £2,000,000 per annum or such higher amount as may be approved by an ordinary resolution of the Company. Each Director is entitled to reimbursement for all reasonable travelling, hotel and other expenses properly incurred by him/her in or about the performance of his/her duties.

(iii) No Director may act (either himself/herself or through his/her firm) as an auditor of the Company. A Director may hold any other office of the Company on such terms as the Board shall determine.

(iv) At each AGM of the Company, one third of the Directors (rounded down) are required under the Articles of Association to retire from office by rotation and may offer themselves forre-election. The Directors so retiring are first, those who wish to retire and not offer themselves forre-election, and, second those who have been longest in office (and in the case of equality of service length are selected by lot). Other than a retiring Director, no person shall (unless recommended by the Board) be eligible for election unless a member notifies the Company Secretary in advance of

his/her intention to propose a person for election. It is Barclays’ practice that all Directors offer themselves forre-election annually in accordance with the UK Corporate Governance Code.

(v) The Board has the power to appoint additional Directors or to fill a casual vacancy amongst the Directors. Any Director so appointed holds office until the next AGM, when he/she may offer himself/herself for reappointment. He/she is not taken into account in determining the number of Directors retiring by rotation.

(vi) The Board may appoint any Director to any executive position or employment in the Company on such terms as they determine.

(vii) The Company may by ordinary resolution remove a Director before the expiry of his/her period of office (without prejudice to a claim for damages for breach of contract or otherwise) and may by ordinary resolution appoint another person who is willing to act to be a Director in his/her place.

(viii) A Director may appoint either another Director or some other person approved by the Board to act as his/her alternate with power to attend Board meetings and generally to exercise the functions of the appointing Director in his/her absence (other than the power to appoint an alternate).

(ix) The Board may authorise any matter in relation to which a Director has, or can have, a direct interest that conflicts, or possibly may conflict with, the Company’s interests. Only Directors who have no interest in the matter being considered will be able to authorise the relevant matter and they may impose limits or conditions when giving authorisation if they think this is appropriate.

(x) A Director may hold positions with or be interested in other companies and, subject to legislation applicable to the Company and the FCA’s requirements, may contract with the Company or any other company in which the Company is interested. A Director may not vote or count towards the quorum on any resolution concerning any proposal in which he/she (or any person connected with him/her) has a material interest (other than by virtue of his/her interest in securities of the Company) or if he/she has a duty which conflicts or may conflict with the interests of the Company, unless the resolution relates to any proposal:

(a) to indemnify a Director or provide him/her with a guarantee or security in respect of money lent by him/her to, or any obligation incurred by him/her or any other person for the benefit of (or at the request of), the Company (or any other member of the Group);

(b) to indemnify or give security or a guarantee to a third party in respect of a debt or obligation of the Company (or any other member of the Group) for which the Director has personally assumed responsibility;

(c) to obtain insurance for the benefit of Directors;

(d) involving the acquisition by a Director of any securities of the Company (or any other member of the Group) pursuant to an offer to existing holders of securities or to the public;

(e) that the Director underwrite any issue of securities of the Company (or any other member of the Group);

306  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F


Additional shareholder information

Shareholder information

Additional shareholder information

Articles of Association

Barclays PLC (the “Company”) is a public limited company registered in England and Wales under company number 48839. The Company, originally named Barclay & Company Limited, was incorporated in England and Wales on 20 July 1896 under the Companies Acts 1862 to 1890 as a company limited by shares. The company name was changed to Barclays Bank LimitedPLC 2016 Annual Report on 17 February 1917 and it was registered on 15 February 1982 as a public limited company under the Companies Acts 1948 to 1980. On 1 January 1985, the Company changed its name to Barclays PLC.Form 20-F  |  317


Additional shareholder information

Under the Companies Act 2006 a company’s Memorandum of Association now need only contain the names of the subscribers and the number of shares each subscriber has agreed to take. For companies in existence as of 1 October 2009, all other provisions which were contained in the company’s Memorandum of Association, including the company’s objects, are now deemed to be contained in the company’s articles. The Companies Act 2006 also states that a company’s objects are unrestricted unless the company’s articles provide otherwise.

The Articles of Association were adopted at the Company’s Annual General Meeting (“AGM”) on 30 April 2010 and amended at the AGM by special resolution of the Company on 25 April 2013.

The following is a summary and explanation of the current Articles of Association, which are available for inspection.

Directors

(i) The minimum number of Directors (excluding alternate Directors) is five. There is no maximum limit. There is no age limit for Directors.

(ii) Excluding executive remuneration and any other entitlement to remuneration for extra services (including service on board committees) under the Articles, a Director is entitled to a fee at a rate determined by the Board but the aggregate fees paid to all Directors shall not exceed £2,000,000 per annum or such higher amount as may be approved by an ordinary resolution of the Company. Each Director is entitled to reimbursement for all

reasonable travelling, hotel and other expenses properly incurred by him/her in or about the performance of his/her duties.

(iii) No Director may act (either himself/herself or through his/her firm) as an auditor of the Company. A Director may hold any other office of the Company on such terms as the Board shall determine.

(iv) At each AGM of the Company, one third of the Directors (rounded down) are required under the Articles of Association to retire from office by rotation and may offer themselves for re-election. The Directors so retiring are first, those who wish to retire and not offer themselves for re-election, and, second those who have been longest in office (and in the case of equality of service length are selected by lot). Other than a retiring Director, no person shall (unless recommended by the Board) be eligible for election unless a member notifies the Company Secretary in advance of his/her intention to propose a person for election. It is Barclays’ practice that all Directors offer themselves for re-election annually in accordance with the UK Corporate Governance Code.

(v) The Board has the power to appoint additional Directors or to fill a casual vacancy amongst the Directors. Any Director so appointed holds office until the next AGM, when he/she may offer himself/herself for reappointment. He/she is not taken into account in determining the number of Directors retiring by rotation.

(vi) The Board may appoint any Director to any executive position or employment in the Company on such terms as they determine.

(vii) The Company may by ordinary resolution remove a Director before the expiry of his/her period of office (without prejudice to a claim for damages for breach of contract or otherwise) and may by ordinary resolution appoint another person who is willing to act to be a Director in his/her place.

(viii) A Director may appoint either another Director or some other person approved by the Board to act as his/her alternate with power to attend Board meetings and generally to exercise the functions of the appointing Director in his/her absence (other than the power to appoint an alternate).

    

Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  307


Additional shareholder information

    

 

 

 

(ix) The Board may authorise any matter in relation to which a Director has, or can have, a direct interest that conflicts, or possibly may conflict with, the Company’s interests. Only Directors who have no interest in the matter being considered will be able to authorise the relevant matter and they may impose limits or conditions when giving authorisation if they think this is appropriate.

(x) A Director may hold positions with or be interested in other companies and, subject to legislation applicable to the Company and the FCA’s requirements, may contract with the Company or any other company in which the Company is interested. A Director may not vote or count towards the quorum on any resolution concerning any proposal in which he/she (or any person connected with him/her) has a material interest (other than by virtue of his/her interest in securities of the Company) or if he/she has a duty which conflicts or may conflict with the interests of the Company, unless the resolution relates to any proposal:

(a) to indemnify a Director or provide him/her with a guarantee or security in respect of money lent by him/her to, or any obligation incurred by him/her or any other person for the benefit of (or at the request of), the Company (or any other member of the Group);

(b) to indemnify or give security or a guarantee to a third party in respect of a debt or obligation of the Company (or any other member of the Group) for which the Director has personally assumed responsibility;

(c) to obtain insurance for the benefit of Directors;

(d) involving the acquisition by a Director of any securities of the Company (or any other member of the Group) pursuant to an offer to existing holders of securities or to the public;

(e) that the Director underwrite any issue of securities of the Company (or any other member of the Group);

(f) concerning any other company in which the Director is interested as an officer or creditor or Shareholder but, broadly, only if he/she (together with his/her connected persons) is directly or indirectly interested in less than 1% of either any

class of the issued equity share capital or of the voting rights of that company; and

(g) concerning any other arrangement for the benefit of employees of the Company (or any other member of the Group) under which the Director benefits or stands to benefit in a similar manner to the employees concerned and which does not give the Director any advantage which the employees to whom the arrangement relates would not receive.

(xi) A Director may not vote or be counted in the quorum on any resolution which concerns his/her own employment or appointment to any office of the Company or any other company in which the Company is interested.

(xii) Subject to applicable legislation, the provisions described in which the Director is interested as an officer or creditor or Shareholder but, broadly, only if he/she (together with his/her connected persons) is directly or indirectly interested in less than 1% of either any class of the issued equity share capital or of the voting rights of that company; and

(g) concerning any other arrangement for the benefit of employees of the Company (or any other member of the Group) under which the Director benefits or stands to benefit in a similar manner to the employees concerned and which does not give the Director any advantage which the employees to whom the arrangement relates would not receive.

(xi) A Director may not vote or be counted in the quorum on any resolution which concerns his/her own employment or appointment to any office of the Company or any other company in which the Company is interested.

(xii) Subject to applicable legislation, the provisions described insub-paragraphs (x) and (xi) may be relaxed or suspended by an ordinary resolution of the members of the Company or any applicable governmental or other regulatory body.

(xiii) A Director is required to hold an interest in ordinary shares having a nominal value of at least £500, which currently equates to 2,000 Ordinary Shares unless restricted from acquiring or holding such interest by any applicable law or regulation or any applicable governmental or other regulatory body. A Director may act before acquiring those shares but must acquire the qualification shares within two months from his/her appointment. Where a Director is unable to acquire the requisite number of shares within that time owing to law, regulation or requirement of any governmental or other relevant authority, he/she must acquire the shares as soon as reasonably practicable once the restriction(s) end.

(xiv) The Board may exercise all of the powers of the Company to borrow money, to mortgage or charge its undertaking, property and uncalled capital and to issue debentures and other securities.

Classes of Shares

The Company only has Ordinary Shares in issue. The Articles of Association also provide for pound sterling preference shares of £100 each, US dollar preference shares of US$100 each, US dollar preference shares of $0.25 each, euro preference shares of100 each and yen preference shares of ¥10,000 each (together, the “Preference Shares”). In accordance with the

308  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F


Additional shareholder information

authority granted at the AGM on 25 April 2013, Preference Shares may be issued by the Board from time to time in one or more series with such rights and subject to such restrictions and limitations as the Board may determine. No Preference Shares have been issued to date.

Dividends

Subject to the provisions of the Articles and applicable legislation, the Company in general meeting may declare dividends on the Ordinary Shares by ordinary resolution, but any such dividend may not exceed the amount recommended by the Board. The Board may also pay interim or final dividends if it appears they are justified by the Company’s financial position.

Each Preference Share confers the right to a preferential dividend (“Preference Dividend”) payable in such currency at such rates (whether fixed or calculated by reference to or in accordance with a specified procedure or mechanism), on such dates and on such

other terms as may be determined by the Board prior to allotment thereof.

The Preference Shares rank in regard to payment of dividends in priority to the holders of Ordinary Shares and any other class of shares in the Company ranking junior to the Preference Shares.

Dividends may be paid on the Preference Shares if, in the opinion of the Board, the Company has sufficient distributable profits, after payment in full or the setting aside of a sum to provide for all dividends payable on (or in the case of shares carrying a cumulative right to dividends, before) the relevant dividend payment date on any class of shares in the Company ranking pari passu with or in priority to the relevant series of Preference Shares as regards participation in the profits of the Company.

If the Board considers that the distributable profits of the Company available for distribution are insufficient to cover the payment in full of Preference Dividends, Preference Dividends shall be paid to the extent of the distributable profits on a pro rata basis.

Notwithstanding the above, the Board may, at its absolute discretion, determine that any Preference Dividend which would

otherwise be payable may either not be payable at all or only payable in part.

If any Preference Dividend on a series of Preference Shares is not paid, or is only paid in part, for the reasons described above, holders of Preference Shares will not have a claim in respect of suchnon-payment.

If any dividend on a series of Preference Shares is not paid in full on the relevant dividend payment date, a dividend restriction shall apply. The dividend restriction means that, subject to certain exceptions, neither the Company nor Barclays Bank may (a) pay a dividend on, or (b) redeem, purchase, reduce or otherwise acquire, any of their respective ordinary shares, other preference shares or other share capital ranking equal or junior to the relevant series of Preference Shares until the earlier of such time as the Company next pays in full a dividend on the relevant series of Preference Shares or the date on which all of the relevant series of Preference Shares are redeemed.

All unclaimed dividends payable in respect of any share may be invested or otherwise made use of by the Board for the benefit of the Company until claimed. If a dividend is not claimed after 12 years of it becoming payable, it is forfeited and reverts to the Company.

The Board may, with the approval of an ordinary resolution of the Company, offer Shareholders the right to choose to receive an allotment of additional fully paid Ordinary Shares instead of cash in respect of all or part of any dividend. The Company currently provides a scrip dividend programme pursuant to an authority granted at the AGM held on 25 April 2013.

Redemption and Purchase

Subject to applicable legislation and the rights of the other shareholders, any share may be issued on terms that it is, at the option of the Company or the holder of such share, redeemable. The Directors are authorised to determine the terms, conditions and manner of redemption of any such shares under the Articles of Association.

 

 

318  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 20152016 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  309


Additional shareholder information

    

    

 

 

 

Calls on capital

The Directors may make calls upon the members in respect of any monies unpaid on their shares. A person upon whom a call is made remains liable even if the shares in respect of which the call is made have been transferred. Interest will be chargeable on any unpaid amount called at a rate determined by the Board (of not more than 20% per annum).

If a member fails to pay any call in full (following notice from the Board that such failure will result in forfeiture of the relevant shares), such shares (including any dividends declared but not paid) may be forfeited by a resolution of the Board, and will become the property of the Company. Forfeiture shall not absolve a previous member for amounts payable by him/her (which may continue to accrue interest).

The Company also has a lien over all partly paid shares of the Company for all monies payable or called on that share and over the debts and liabilities of a member to the Company. If any monies which are the subject of the lien remain unpaid after a notice from the Board demanding payment, the Company may sell such shares.

Annual and other general meetings

The Company is required to hold an AGM in addition to such other general meetings as the Directors think fit. The type of the meeting will be specified in the notice calling it. Under the Companies Act 2006, the AGM must be held within six months of the financial year end. A general meeting may be convened by the Board on requisition in accordance with the applicable legislation.

In the case of an AGM, a minimum of 21 clear days’ notice is required. The notice must be in writing and must specify the place, the day and the hour of the meeting, and the general nature of the business to be transacted. A notice convening a meeting to pass a special resolution shall specify the intention to propose the resolution as such. The accidental failure to give notice of a general meeting or thenon-receipt of such notice will not invalidate the proceedings at such meeting.

Subject as noted above, all Shareholders are entitled to attend and vote at general meetings. The Articles do, however, provide that arrangements may be made for simultaneous attendance at a satellite meeting place or, if the meeting place is inadequate to accommodate all members and proxies entitled to attend,

another meeting place may be arranged to accommodate such persons other than that specified in the notice of meeting, in which case Shareholders may be excluded from the principal place.

Holders of Preference Shares have no right to receive notice of, attend or vote at, any general meetings of the Company as a result of holding Preference Shares.

Notices

A document or information may be sent by the Company in hard copy form, electronic form, by being made available on a website, or by another means agreed with the recipient, in accordance with the provisions set out in the Companies Act 2006. Accordingly, a document or information may only be sent in electronic form to a person who has agreed to receive it in that form or, in the case of a company, who has been deemed to have so agreed pursuant to

applicable legislation. A document or information may only be sent by being made available on a website if the recipient has agreed to receive it in that form or has been deemed to have so agreed pursuant to applicable legislation, and has not revoked that agreement.

In respect of joint holdings, documents or information shall be sent to the joint holder whose name stands first in the register.

A member who (having no registered address within the UK) has not supplied an address in the UK at which documents or information may be sent in hard copy form, or an address to which notices, documents or information may be sent or supplied by electronic means, is not entitled to have documents or information sent to him/her.

In addition, the Company may cease to send notices to any member who has been sent documents on two consecutive occasions over a period of at least 12 months and when each of those documents is returned undelivered or notification is received that they have not been delivered.

Capitalisation of profits

The Company may, by ordinary resolution, upon the recommendation of the Board capitalise all or any part of an amount standing to the credit of a reserve or fund to be set free for distribution provided that amounts from the share premium account, capital redemption reserve or any profits not

310  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F


Additional shareholder information

available for distribution should be applied only in paying up unissued shares to be allotted to members credited as fully paid and no unrealised profits shall be applied in paying up debentures of the Company or any amount unpaid on any share in the capital of the Company.

Indemnity

Subject to applicable legislation, every current and former Director or other officer of the Company (other than any person engaged by the company as auditor) shall be indemnified by the Company against any liability in relation to the Company, other than (broadly) any liability to the Company or a member of the Group, or any criminal or regulatory fine.fine

Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2016 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  319


Additional shareholder information

    

    

 

Officers of the Group Date of appointmentAppointment as Officer
 

Lawrence Dickinson

Company Secretary

2002

Robert Le Blanc

Chief Risk Officer

2004

Maria Ramos

Chief Executive, Barclays Africa Group

2009

Ashok Vaswani

 

 

Chief Executive Personal and Corporate BankingOfficer, Barclays UK

 

  

2012

 

Bob Hoyt

 

 

Group General Counsel

2013

Thomas King

Chief Executive, Investment Bank

 

  

2013

 

Tushar Morzaria

 

 

Group Finance Director

 

  

2013

 

Michael Roemer

 

 

Group Head of Compliance

 

  

2014

Michael Harte

Chief Operations and Technology Officer

2014

Jonathan Moulds

Group Chief Operating Officer

2015

 

James E Staley

 

 

Group Chief Executive Officer

 

  

2015

 

Tristram Roberts

 

 

Group Human Resources Director

 

  

2015

 

Amer Sajed

 

 

Interim Chief Executive,CEO, Barclaycard International

 

  

2015

 

Paul Compton

Group Chief Operating Officer

2016

CS Venkatakrishnan

Chief Risk Officer

2016

Claire Davies

Company Secretary

2016

Tim Throsby

President, Barclays International

Chief Executive Officer, Corporate and Investment Bank

2017

 

 

320  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 20152016 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  311


Additional shareholder information

    

    

 

 

 

 

Dividends on the ordinary shares of Barclays PLC

On 1 March 2016, Barclays PLC has paidannounced that it would pay semi-annual dividends on its ordinary shares every year since its incorporation in 1896.

Since December 2009 Barclays has declared and paid dividends on a quarterly basis. A final dividend for the full year ended 31 December 2014 of 3.5p was paid in April 2015 and there were three equal payments in June, September and December 2015 of 1p per ordinary share.going forward. A final dividend for the full year ended 31 December 2015 of 3.5p will bewas paid on 5 April 2016. In respect of the year ended 31 December 2016, one interim dividend of 1p was paid on 19 September 2016 and a final dividend of 2.0p was announced on 1 March 201623 February 2017 for payment on 5 April 2016.2017.

The dividends declared for each of the last five years were:

 

Pence per 25p ordinary share

Pence per 25p ordinary share

  

Pence per 25p ordinary share

 

   

 

2015

 

  

 

   

 

2014

 

  

 

   

 

2013

 

  

 

   

 

2012

 

  

 

   

 

2011

 

  

 

   

 

2016

 

 

 

   

 

2015

 

 

 

   

 

2014

 

 

 

   

 

2013

 

 

 

   

 

2012

 

 

 

Interim

   3.00     3.00     3.00     3.00     3.00     1.00    3.00    3.00    3.00    3.00 

Final

   

 

3.50

 

  

 

   

 

3.50

 

  

 

   

 

3.50

 

  

 

   

 

3.50

 

  

 

   

 

3.00

 

  

 

   

 

 

2.00

 

 

 

 

 

   

 

 

3.50

 

 

 

 

 

   

 

 

3.50

 

 

 

 

 

   

 

 

3.50

 

 

 

 

 

   

 

 

3.50

 

 

 

 

 

Total

   

 

6.50

 

  

 

  

 

 

 

 

6.50

 

 

  

 

  

 

 

 

 

6.50

 

 

  

 

  

 

 

 

 

6.50

 

 

  

 

  

 

 

 

 

6.00

 

 

  

 

  

 

 

 

 

3.00

 

 

 

 

   

 

6.50

 

 

 

   

 

6.50

 

 

 

   

 

6.50

 

 

 

   

 

6.50

 

 

 

                           

US Dollars per 25p ordinary share

US Dollars per 25p ordinary share

  

US Dollars per 25p ordinary share

 

   

 

2015

 

  

 

   

 

2014

 

  

 

   

 

2013

 

  

 

   

 

2012

 

  

 

   

 

2011

 

  

 

   

 

2016

 

 

 

   

 

2015

 

 

 

   

 

2014

 

 

 

   

 

2013

 

 

 

   

 

2012

 

 

 

Interim

  

 

 

 

 

0.05

 

 

  

 

  

 

 

 

 

0.05

 

 

  

 

  

 

 

 

 

0.05

 

 

  

 

  

 

 

 

 

0.05

 

 

  

 

  

 

 

 

 

0.05

 

 

  

 

  

 

 

 

 

 

0.01

 

 

 

 

 

 

  

 

 

 

 

 

0.05

 

 

 

 

 

 

  

 

 

 

 

 

0.05

 

 

 

 

 

 

  

 

 

 

 

 

0.05

 

 

 

 

 

 

  

 

 

 

 

 

0.05

 

 

 

 

 

 

Final

   

 

0.05

 

  

 

  

 

 

 

 

0.05

 

 

  

 

  

 

 

 

 

0.05

 

 

  

 

  

 

 

 

 

0.05

 

 

  

 

  

 

 

 

 

0.05

 

 

  

 

   

 

 

0.02

 

 

 

 

 

   

 

 

0.05

 

 

 

 

 

   

 

 

0.05

 

 

 

 

 

   

 

 

0.05

 

 

 

 

 

   

 

 

0.05

 

 

 

 

 

Total

  

 

 

 

 

0.10

 

 

  

 

  

 

 

 

 

0.10

 

 

  

 

  

 

 

 

 

0.10

 

 

  

 

  

 

 

 

 

0.10

 

 

  

 

  

 

 

 

 

0.10

 

 

  

 

  

 

 

 

 

0.03

 

 

 

 

  

 

 

 

 

0.10

 

 

 

 

  

 

 

 

 

0.10

 

 

 

 

  

 

 

 

 

0.10

 

 

 

 

  

 

 

 

 

0.10

 

 

 

 

The gross dividends applicable to an American Depositary Share (ADS) representing four ordinary shares, before deduction of withholding tax, are as follows:

   

US Dollars per American Depositary Share

  

   

 

2015

 

  

 

   

 

2014

 

  

 

   

 

2013

 

  

 

   

 

2012

 

  

 

   

 

2011

 

  

 

Interim

  

 

 

 

 

0.18

 

 

  

 

  

 

 

 

 

0.18

 

 

  

 

  

 

 

 

 

0.18

 

 

  

 

  

 

 

 

 

0.19

 

 

  

 

  

 

 

 

 

0.19

 

 

  

 

Final

  

 

 

 

 

0.20

 

 

  

 

  

 

 

 

 

0.22

 

 

  

 

  

 

 

 

 

0.23

 

 

  

 

  

 

 

 

 

0.22

 

 

  

 

  

 

 

 

 

0.19

 

 

  

 

Total

  

 

 

 

 

0.38

 

 

  

 

   

 

0.40

 

  

 

   

 

0.41

 

  

 

   

 

0.41

 

  

 

   

 

0.38

 

  

 

The gross dividends applicable to an American Depositary Share (ADS) representing four ordinary shares, before deduction of withholding tax, are as follows:

 

US Dollars per American Depositary Share

 

 

    

 

2016

 

 

 

   

 

2015

 

 

 

   

 

2014

 

 

 

   

 

2013

 

 

 

   

 

2012

 

 

 

 

Interim

 

 

  

 

 

 

 

0.05

 

 

 

 

  

 

 

 

 

0.18

 

 

 

 

  

 

 

 

 

0.18

 

 

 

 

  

 

 

 

 

0.18

 

 

 

 

  

 

 

 

 

0.19

 

 

 

 

Final

 

 

  

 

 

 

 

 

0.10

 

 

 

 

 

 

  

 

 

 

 

 

0.20

 

 

 

 

 

 

  

 

 

 

 

 

0.22

 

 

 

 

 

 

  

 

 

 

 

 

0.23

 

 

 

 

 

 

  

 

 

 

 

 

0.22

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Total

 

   

 

0.15

 

 

 

   

 

0.38

 

 

 

   

 

0.40

 

 

 

   

 

0.41

 

 

 

   

 

0.41

 

 

 

The final dividends shown above are expressed in Dollars translated at the closing spot rate for Pounds Sterling as determined by Bloomberg at 5pm in New York City (the ‘Closing Spot Rate’) on the latest practicable date for inclusion in this report. No representation is made that

Pounds Sterling amounts

have been, or could have been, or could be, converted into Dollars at these rates.

Trading market for ordinary shares of Barclays PLC

The principal trading market for Barclays PLC ordinary shares is the London Stock Exchange. At the close of business on 31 December 2015, 16,804,603,9492016, 16,963,242,876 ordinary shares were in issue.

Ordinary share listings were also obtained on the New York Stock Exchange (NYSE) with effect from 9 September 1986. Trading on the NYSE is in the form of ADSs under the symbol ‘BCS’. Each ADS represents four ordinary shares and is evidenced by an American Depositary Receipt (ADR). The ADR depositary is J PJP Morgan Chase Bank, N.A. Details of trading activity are published in the stock tables of leading daily newspapers in the US.

There were 523517 ADR holders and 1,6751,673 recorded holders of ordinary shares with US addresses at 31 December 2015,2016, whose shareholdings represented approximately 0.02%4.68% of total outstanding ordinary shares on that date. Since a certain number of the ordinary shares and ADRs were held by brokers or other nominees, the number of recorded holders in the US may not be representative of the number of beneficial holders or of their country of residence.

The following table shows the high and low sales price for the ordinary shares during the periods indicated, based onmid-market prices at close of business on the London Stock Exchange and the high and low sale price for ADSs as reported on the NYSE composite tape.

 

 

Sale prices for ordinary shares

  

   25p ordinary shares     

 

 

American

 

Depositary Shares

  

 

  

  

 

 

 

High

 

  

  

 

 

 

Low

 

  

  

 

 

 

High

 

  

  

 

 

 

Low

 

  

   

 

 

 

p

 

  

  

 

 

 

p

 

  

  

 

 

 

US$

 

  

  

 

 

 

US$

 

  

2016

 

 

        

By month:

 

        

February

 

   

 

182.8

 

  

 

   

 

147.9

 

  

 

   

 

10.66

 

  

 

   

 

8.63

 

  

 

January

 

  

 

 

 

 

218.9

 

 

  

 

  

 

 

 

 

178.4

 

 

  

 

  

 

 

 

 

12.96

 

 

  

 

  

 

 

 

 

10.37

 

 

  

 

 

Sale prices for ordinary shares

 

   25p ordinary shares    

 

American

 

Depositary Shares

 

 

 

  

 

 

 

High

 

 

  

 

 

 

Low

 

 

  

 

 

 

High

 

 

  

 

 

 

Low

 

 

   

 

 

 

p

 

 

  

 

 

 

p

 

 

  

 

 

 

US$

 

 

  

 

 

 

US$

 

 

 

2017

 

        

By month:

        

February1

 

   

 

 

239.25

 

 

 

 

 

   

 

 

221.35

 

 

 

 

 

   

 

 

11.89

 

 

 

 

 

   

 

 

11.12

 

 

 

 

 

January

 

   

 

236.25

 

 

 

   

 

219.45

 

 

 

   

 

11.71

 

 

 

   

 

11.07

 

 

 

 

1 as at 22 February 2017

 

 

    

2016

        

By month:

 

        
August  

 

 

 

172.25

 

 

  

 

 

 

146.00

 

 

  

 

 

 

9.11

 

 

  

 

 

 

7.84

 

 

September   174.75    164.70    9.31    8.39 
October   191.30    166.50    9.27    8.16 
November   215.95    181.35    10.75    8.91 
December   239.00    212.95    11.99    10.70 
By Quarter:        
First quarter   215.25    147.85    12.85    8.62 
Second quarter   186.95    127.20    11.18    7.03 
Third quarter   174.75    131.65    9.31    7.06 
Fourth quarter   239.00    166.50    11.99    8.16 
2015        
First quarter   266.00    223.55    16.31    13.63 
Second quarter   274.45    248.90    17.15    14.94 
Third quarter   288.95    239.00    17.98    14.58 
Fourth quarter   257.00    209.10    15.81    12.80 
2014   296.50    207.90    19.58    13.50 
2013   308.39    242.39    18.93    15.69 
2012   288.00    148.20    17.47    9.31 
2011   333.55    138.85    21.64    8.55 
2010   383.20    255.40    24.10    15.40 
2009   383.60    51.20    25.40    3.10 
 

 

312  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 20152016 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  321


Additional shareholder information

 

 

 

 

2015

 

        

 

By month:

        
August   288.95     244.7     17.98     15.29  
September   262.5     239     16.28     14.58  
October   257     232     15.81     14.23  
November   236.05     220.05     14.61     13.27  
December   234.75     209.1     14.09     12.8  
By Quarter:        
First quarter   266     223.55     16.31     13.63  
Second quarter   274.45     248.9     17.15     14.94  
Third quarter   288.95     239     17.98     14.58  
Fourth quarter   257     209.1     15.81     12.8  
2014        
First quarter   296.5     230.95     19.58     15.41  
Second quarter   262.45     212.8     17.73     14.55  
Third quarter   234.55     207.9     15.53     14.26  
Fourth quarter   249.45     207.9     15.54     13.50  
2013   308.39     242.39     18.93     15.69  
2012   288.00     148.20     17.47     9.31  
2011   333.55     138.85     21.64     8.55  
2010   383.20     255.40     24.10     15.40  
2009   383.60     51.20     25.40     3.10  
2008   506.40     127.70     41.40     7.40  

This section incorporates information on the prices at which securities of Barclays PLC have traded. It is emphasised that past performance cannot be relied upon as a guide to future performance.

 

Shareholdings at 31

December 2015a

 Number of
shareholders
 Percentage
of holders
 Shares held Percentage
of

capital

Shareholdings at 31

December 2016a

 Number of
shareholders
 Percentage
of

holders

 Shares held Percentage
of

capital

Classification of shareholders    Classification of shareholders
Personal Holders 279,092 95.97% 470,007,048 2.80% 266,012 97.24% 456,102,830 2.69%
Banks and Nominees 3,129 1.08% 14,859,691,756 88.43% 2,764 1.01% 14,785,945,892 87.16%
Other Companies 8,578 2.95% 1,474,893,844 8.78% 4,787 1.75% 1,721,183,651 10.15%
Insurance Companies 2 0.00% 523 0.00% 2 0.00% 523 0.00%
Pension Funds 8 0.00% 10,778 0.00% 7 0.00% 9,980 0.00%
Total 290,809 100.00% 16,804,603,949 100.00% 273,572 100.00% 16,963,242,876 100.00%
Shareholding range
1 - 100 19,421 6.68% 711,520 0.00% 18,163 6.64% 678,463 0.00%
101 - 250 59,269 20.38% 12,073,995 0.07% 55,920 20.44% 11,370,607 0.07%
251 - 500 79,537 27.35% 27,783,774 0.17% 75,447 27.58% 26,331,004 0.16%
501 - 1,000 46,810 16.10% 33,197,807 0.20% 44,334 16.21% 31,375,347 0.18%
1,001 - 5,000 61,333 21.09% 135,514,901 0.81% 56,942 20.81% 125,625,032 0.74%
5,001 - 10,000 12,899 4.44% 90,575,688 0.54% 12,094 4.42% 84,906,729 0.50%
10,001 - 25,000 7,758 2.67% 117,540,890 0.70% 7,190 2.63% 108,767,678 0.64%
25,001 - 50,000 1,799 0.62% 61,645,616 0.37% 1,668 0.61% 56,858,249 0.34%
50,001 and over 1,983 0.68% 16,325,559,758 97.15% 1,184 0.66% 16,517,329,767 97.37%
Totals 290,809 100.00% 16,804,603,949 100.00% 273,572 100.00% 16,963,242,876 100.00%
United States Holdings 1,675 0.58% 4,150,392 0.02% 1,673 0.61% 4,200,586 0.02%

Note

 

aa.These figures do not include Barclays Sharestore members.

Currency of presentation

In this report, unless otherwise specified, all amounts are expressed in Pound Sterling. For the months of September 20132016 through to February 2014,2017, the highest and lowest closing spot rates as determined by Bloomberg at 5:00 p.m (New York time) (the ‘Closing Spot Rate’), expressed in USD per GBP were:

 

 
 (US Dollars per Pound Sterling)
 February January December November October September

(US Dollars per Pound Sterling)

(US Dollars per Pound Sterling)

 

   February    January    December    November    October    September 
 2016 2015   

 

2017

 

 

 

   

 

2016

 

 

 

High 1.46 1.47 1.52 1.54 1.55 1.56  

 

 

 

 

1.27

 

 

 

 

  

 

 

 

 

1.26

 

 

 

 

  

 

 

 

 

1.27

 

 

 

 

  

 

 

 

 

1.26

 

 

 

 

  

 

 

 

 

1.28

 

 

 

 

  

 

 

 

 

1.34

 

 

 

 

Low

 

1.39

 

 

1.42

 

 

1.47

 

 

1.50

 

 

1.51

 

 

1.51

 

   

 

 

1.24

 

 

 

 

 

  

 

 

 

 

 

1.20

 

 

 

 

 

 

  

 

 

 

 

 

1.22

 

 

 

 

 

 

  

 

 

 

 

 

1.22

 

 

 

 

 

 

  

 

 

 

 

 

1.21

 

 

 

 

 

 

  

 

 

 

 

 

1.30

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

  
   (US Dollars per Pound Sterling)  
    2015     2014     2013     2012     2011  
Average   1.53     1.65     1.56     1.59     1.61  

 

(US Dollars per Pound Sterling)

 

 

    

 

2016

 

 

 

   

 

2015

 

 

 

   

 

2014

 

 

 

   

 

2013

 

 

 

   

 

2012

 

 

 

Average

 

 

   

 

 

1.56

 

 

 

 

 

  

 

 

 

 

 

1.53

 

 

 

 

 

 

  

 

 

 

 

 

1.65

 

 

 

 

 

 

  

 

 

 

 

 

1.56

 

 

 

 

 

 

  

 

 

 

 

 

1.59

 

 

 

 

 

 

On 2922 February 2016,2017, the Closing Spot Rate in Pound Sterling was $1.39.$1.25.

No representation is made that Pounds Sterling amounts have been, or could have been, or could be, converted into USD at any of the above rates. For the purpose of presenting financial information in this report, exchange rates other than those shown above may have been used.

 

 

322  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 20152016 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  313


Additional shareholder information

 

 

 

 

Taxation of UK holders

The following is a summary of certain UK tax issues which are likely to be material to the holding and disposal of Ordinary Shares of Barclays PLC, Preference Shares of Barclays Bank PLC (the ‘Bank’), or ADSs representing such Ordinary Shares or Preference Shares (together the ‘Shares’).

It is based on current law and the practice of Her Majesty’s Revenue and Customs (‘HMRC’), which may be subject to change, possibly with retrospective effect. It is a general guide for information purposes and should be treated with appropriate caution. It is not intended as tax advice and it does not purport to describe all of the tax considerations that may be relevant to a prospective purchaser, holder or disposer of Shares. In particular, save where expressly stated to the contrary, this summary deals with shareholders who are resident and, in the case of individuals, domiciled in (and only in) the UK for UK tax purposes, who hold their Shares as investments (other than under an individual savings account) and who are the absolute beneficial owners of their Shares and any dividends paid on them.

The statements are not addressed to: (i) shareholders who own (or are deemed to own) 10 per cent. or more of the voting power of Barclays PLC or the Bank; (ii) shareholders who hold Shares as part of hedging transactions; (iii) investors who have (or are deemed to have) acquired their Shares by virtue of an office or employment; and (iv) shareholders who hold Shares in connection with a trade, profession or vocation carried on in the UK (whether through a branch or agency or, in the case of a corporate shareholder, through a permanent establishment, or otherwise). It does not discuss the tax treatment of classes of shareholder subject to special rules, such as dealers in securities.

Persons who are in any doubt as to their tax position should consult their professional advisers. Persons who may be liable to taxation in jurisdictions other than the United KingdomUK in respect of their acquisition, holding or disposal of Shares are particularly advised to consult their professional advisers as to whether they are so liable.

(i) Taxation of dividends

In accordance with UK law, Barclays PLC or the Bank (as the case may be) pays dividends on the Shares without any deduction or withholding tax in respect of any taxes imposed by the UK government or any UK taxing authority.

Under currentDividends paid on or after 6 April 2016

For dividends paid on or after 6 April 2016, dividends paid to a UK law (butresident individual shareholder in a tax year (the ‘Total Dividend Income’) will generally form part of that shareholder’s total income for UK income tax purposes. The Total Dividend Income will be regarded as the top slice of the shareholder’s total income, and will be subject to UK income tax at the proposed changesrates discussed below.

The rate of UK income tax applicable to the Total Dividend Income will depend on the amount of the Total Dividend Income and the UK income tax band(s) that the Total Dividend Income falls within when included as part of the shareholder’s total income for UK income tax purposes.

A nil rate of UK income tax applies to the first £5,000 of Total Dividend Income received by an individual shareholder in law discussed below)a tax year (the ‘Nil Rate Amount’)

Where the Total Dividend Income received by an individual shareholder in a tax year exceeds the Nil Rate Amount, the excess amount (the ‘Remaining Dividend Income’) will be subject to UK income tax at the following rates:

(a) at the rate of 7.5% on any portion of the Remaining Dividend Income that falls within the basic tax band;

(b) at the rate of 32.5% on any portion of the Remaining Dividend Income that falls within the higher tax band; and

(c) at the rate of 38.1% on any portion of the Remaining Dividend Income that falls within the additional tax band.

In determining the tax band the Remaining Dividend Income falls within, the individual shareholder’s Dividend Income (along with any other dividends received that are included in the shareholder’s total income for UK income tax purposes) for the tax year in question (including the portion comprising the Nil Rate Amount) will be treated as the top slice of the shareholder’s total income for UK tax purposes.

Subject to special rules for small companies, UK resident shareholders within the charge to UK corporation tax will be subject to UK corporation tax on the dividends paid on the Shares unless the dividend falls within an exempt class and certain conditions are met.

Dividends paid between 6 April 2015 and 5 April 2016 (inclusive)

In respect of dividends paid between 6 April 2015 and 5 April 2016 (inclusive) (the ‘2015-2016 tax year’), a UK resident individual shareholder will be subject to tax under a different UK regime for the taxation of dividends. UK resident individuals receiving a dividend during the 2015-2016 tax year will generally be entitled to a tax credit in respect of such dividend which may be used by certain shareholders to set against any liability they may have to UK income tax on that dividend. The value of the tax credit is currently equal toone-ninth of the amount of the cash dividend. The cash dividend received plus the related tax credit (together, the ‘gross dividend’) will be part of the shareholder’s total income for UK income tax purposes. Itpurposes for the 2015-2016 tax year. The gross dividend will be regarded as the top slice of the shareholder’s income, and will be subject to UK income tax at a special rate (discussed below).the rates discussed below.

If the shareholder is a UK resident individual liable to UK income tax solely at the basic rate for the 2015-2016 tax year, then that shareholder will be liable to UK income tax of 10% of the gross dividend. Since the tax credit will fully match this liability, there should be no further tax liability in respect of the dividend received. A UK resident individual shareholder that is a higher or additional rate taxpayer for the 2015-2016 tax year will be liable to UK income tax on the gross dividend at special marginal rates (currently 32.5%(32.5% or 37.5% respectively) against which the tax credit may be set. In that case, there will be a further liability to UK income tax for the shareholder as the tax credit will not fully match the tax liability.

On 9 December 2015 the UK Government published draft legislation which proposes to amend the taxation of dividends paid on or after 6 April 2016 to UK resident individuals. If enacted, that legislation will replace the tax credit described above with an annual tax-free dividend allowance of £5,000. It will also amend the rates of UK tax on dividends to 7.5 per cent. for a UK resident individual liable to UK income tax solely at the basic rate, 32.5 per cent. for a UK resident individual liable to UK income tax at the higher rate and 38.1 per cent for a UK resident individual liable to UK income tax at the additional rate.

314  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F


Additional shareholder information

Subject to special rules for small companies, UK resident shareholders within the charge to UK corporation tax will be subject to UK corporation tax on the dividends paid on the Shares unlessin the dividend falls within an exempt class and certain conditions are met.2015-2016 tax year in the same way as dividends paid on or

Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2016 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  323


Additional shareholder information

after 6 April 2016 (see the section “–(i) Taxation of Dividends-Dividends paid on or after 6 April 2016” above).

UK resident shareholders are not entitled to any repayment of the tax credits attaching to the dividends paid on the Shares.Shares in the 2015-2016 tax year. Anon-UK resident shareholder will not generally be entitled to any payment from HMRC of a tax credit in respect of a UK dividend paid on the Shares.Shares in the 2015-2016 tax year. Somenon-UK resident shareholders may be able to recover some of the tax credit in respect of a UK dividend paid on the Shares in the 2015-2016 tax year under an applicable double tax treaty and should consult their own professional advisers as to whether they are so entitled and as to the process for making such a claim.

(ii) Taxation of shares under the Dividend Reinvestment Plan

Where a shareholder elects to purchase shares using their cash dividend as part of the Dividend Reinvestment Plan, such shareholders will generally be liable for UK income tax or corporation tax (as the case may be) on dividends reinvested in the Dividend Reinvestment Plan on the same basis as if they had received the cash and arranged the investment themselves. They should accordingly include the dividend received in their tax return in the normal way.

(iii) Taxation of capital gains

The disposal of Shares may, depending on the shareholder’s circumstances, give rise to a liability to tax on chargeable capital gains.

Where Shares are sold, a liability to tax may result if the proceeds from that sale exceed the sum of the base cost of the Shares sold and any other allowable deductions such as share dealing costs and, in certain circumstances, indexation relief. To arrive at the total base cost of any Barclays PLC shares held, in appropriate cases the amount subscribed for rights taken up in 1985, 1988 and 2013 must be added to the cost of all such shares held. For this purpose, current legislation permits the market valuation at 31 March 1982 to be substituted for the original cost of shares purchased before that date. Shareholders other than those within the charge to UK corporation tax should note that, following the Finance Act 2008, no indexation allowance will be available. Shareholders within the charge to UK corporation tax may be eligible for indexation allowance.

Chargeable capital gains may also arise from the gifting of Shares to connected parties such as relatives (although not spouses or civil partners) and family trusts.

The calculations required to compute chargeable capital gains may be complex. Shareholders are advised to consult their personal financial adviser if further information regarding a possible tax liability in respect of their holdings of shares is required.

(iv) Stamp duty and stamp duty reserve tax

Dealings in Shares will generally be subject to UK stamp duty or stamp duty reserve tax (although see the comments below as regards ADSs in the section ‘Taxation of US holders – StampUK stamp Duty’). The transfer on sale of Ordinary Shares and Preference Shares will generally be liable to stamp duty at 0.5% of the consideration paid for that transfer. An unconditional agreement to transfer Ordinary Shares and Preference Shares, or any interest therein, will generally be subject to stamp duty reserve tax at 0.5% of the consideration given. Such liability to stamp duty reserve tax

will be cancelled, or a right to a repayment (generally with interest) in respect of the stamp duty reserve tax liability will arise, if the agreement is completed by a duly stamped transfer within six years of the agreement having become unconditional. Both stamp duty and stamp duty reserve tax are normally the liability of the transferee.

Paperless transfers of Ordinary Shares and Preference Shares within CREST are liable to stamp duty reserve tax rather than stamp duty.

Stamp duty reserve tax on transactions settled within the CREST system or reported through it for regulatory purposes will be collected by CREST.

Special rules apply to certain categories of person, including intermediaries, market makers, brokers, dealers and persons connected with depositary arrangements and clearance services.

(v) Inheritance tax

An individual may be liable to inheritance tax on the transfer of Shares. Where an individual is so liable, inheritance tax may be charged on the amount by which the value of his or her estate

Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  315


Additional shareholder information

is reduced as a result of any transfer by way of gift or other gratuitous transaction made by them or treated as made by them.

Taxation of US holders

The following is a summary of the principal US federal income tax consequences and certain UK tax consequences for US holders (as defined below) of Ordinary Shares of Barclays PLC, Preference Shares of Barclays Bank PLC (the ‘Bank’), or ADSs representing such Ordinary Shares or Preference Shares, who own the shares or ADSs as capital assets for tax purposes. It is not, however, a comprehensive analysis of all the potential US or UK tax consequences for such holders and it does not discuss the tax consequences of members of special classes of holders subject to special rules, including (i) dealers in securities, (ii) traders in securities that elect to use amark-to-market method of accounting for securities holdings,(iii) tax-exempt organizations, (iv) life insurance companies, (v) holders liable for alternative minimum tax, (vi) holders that actually or constructively own 10 per cent or more of the voting stock of Barclays PLC or the Bank, (vii) holders that hold shares or ADSs as part of a straddle or a hedging or conversion transaction, (viii) holders that purchase or sell shares or ADSs as part of a wash sale, (ix) holders whose functional currency is not the US dollar, or (x) holders who are resident, or (in the case of individuals) ordinarily resident, or who are carrying on a trade, in the UK. The summary also does not address any aspect of US federal taxation other than US federal income taxation (such as the estate and gift tax or the Medicare tax on net investment income). Investors are advised to consult their tax advisers regarding the tax implications of their particular holdings, including the consequences under applicable state and local law, and in particular whether they are eligible for the benefits of the Treaty, as defined below.

This section is also based on the Internal Revenue Code of 1986, as amended (the ‘Code’), its legislative history, existing and proposed regulations, published rulings and court decisions, (the ‘Code’), and on the Double Taxation Convention between the UK and the US as entered into force in March 2003 (the ‘Treaty’), and, in respect of UK tax, the Estate and Gift Tax Convention between the UK and the US as entered into force on 11 November 1979 (the ‘Estate and Gift Tax Convention’), the current UK tax law and the practice of HMRC, all of which are subject to change, possibly on a retroactive basis. This

324  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2016 Annual Report on Form 20-F


Additional shareholder information

section is based in part upon the representations of the ADR Depositary and the assumption that each obligation of the Deposit Agreement and any related agreement will be performed in accordance with its terms.

A US holder“US holder” is a beneficial owner of shares or ADSs that is, for US federal income tax purposes, (i) a citizen or resident of the US, (ii) a US domestic corporation, (iii) an estate whose income is subject to US federal income tax regardless of its source, or (iv) a trust if a US court can exercise primary supervision over the trust’s administration and one or more US persons are authorised to control all substantial decisions of the trust. If a partnership holds the shares or ADSs, the US federal income tax treatment of a partner will generally depend on the status of the partner and the tax treatment of the partnership. A partner in a partnership holding the shares or ADSs should consult its tax adviser with regard to the US federal income tax treatment of an investment in the shares or ADSs.

For the purposes of the Treaty, the Estate and Gift Tax Convention, between the UK and the US, and the Code, the holders of ADRs evidencing ADSs will be treated as owners of the underlying Ordinary Shares or Preference Shares, as the case may be. Generally, exchanges of shares for ADRs and ADRs for shares will not be subject to US federal income tax or to UK capital gains tax.

(i) Taxation of dividends

Subject to the PFIC rules discussed below, a US holder is subject to US federal income taxation on the gross amount of any dividend paid by Barclays PLC or the Bank, as applicable, out of its current or accumulated earnings and profits (as determined for US federal income tax purposes).

Dividends paid by Barclays PLC or the Bank, as applicable, with respect to the Ordinary Shares, Preference Shares or ADSs will generally be qualified dividend income. Dividends paid to a noncorporate US holder that constitute qualified dividend income will be taxable to the holder at preferential rates, provided that the holder has a holding period of the shares or ADSs of more than 60 days during the121-day period beginning 60 days before theex-dividend date (or, in the case of Preference Shares or ADSs relating thereto, if the dividend is attributable to a period or periods aggregating over 366 days, provided that the holder holds the shares or ADSs for more than 90 days during the181-day period beginning 90 days before theex-dividend date) and meets certain other holding period requirements. A US holder will not be subject to UK withholding tax. Dividends must be included in income when the US holder, in the case of shares, or the Depositary, in the

316  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F


Additional shareholder information

case of ADSs, actually or constructively receives the dividend, and will not be eligible for the dividends-received deduction generally allowed to US corporations in respect of dividends received from other US corporations. For foreign tax credit purposes, dividends will generally be income from sources outside the US and will, depending on a US holder’s circumstances, be either ‘passive’ or ‘general’ income for purposes of computing the foreign tax credit allowable to a US holder.

The amount of the dividend distribution includable in income will be the US Dollar value of the Pound Sterling payments made, determined at the spot Pound Sterling/US Dollar rate on the date the dividend distribution is includable in income, regardless of whether the payment is in fact converted into US Dollars. Generally, any gain or loss resulting from currency exchange fluctuations

during the period from the date the dividend payment is includable in income to the date the payment is converted into US Dollars will be treated as ordinary income or loss and, for foreign tax credit limitation purposes, from sources within the US, and will not be eligible for the special tax rates applicable to qualified dividend income.

Distributions in excess of current or accumulated earnings and profits, as determined for US federal income tax purposes, will be treated as a return of capital to the extent of the US holder’s basis in the shares or ADSs and thereafter as capital gain. Because Barclays PLC and the Bank do not currently maintain calculations of earnings and profits for US federal income tax purposes, it is expected that distributions with respect to the shares and ADSs will generally be reported to US holders as dividends.

(ii) Taxation of capital gains

Subject to the PFIC rules discussed below, generally, US holders will not be subject to UK tax, but will be subject to US tax on capital gains realised on the sale or other disposition of Ordinary Shares, Preference Shares or ADSs. Generally, a US holder will recognise capital gain or loss for US federal income tax purposes equal to the difference between the US Dollar value of the amount realised and a US holder’s tax basis, determined in US Dollars, in its shares or ADSs. Capital gain of a noncorporate US holder is generally taxed at preferential rates where the holder has a holding period of greater than one year.

The gain or loss will generally be income or loss from sources within the US for foreign tax credit limitation purposes.

(iii) Taxation of premium on redemption or purchase of shares

No refund of tax will be available under the Treaty in respect of any premium paid on a redemption of Preference Shares by the Bank or on a purchase of Ordinary Shares by Barclays PLC. For US tax purposes, redemption premium generally will be treated as an additional amount realised in the calculation of a US holder’s gain or loss.

(iv) Taxation of passive foreign investment companies (PFICs)

Barclays PLC and the Bank believe that their respective shares and ADSs should not be treated as stock of a PFIC for US federal income tax purposes, but this conclusion is a factual determination that is made annually and thus may be subject to change. If Barclays PLC or the Bank were to be treated as a PFIC, then the gain realised on the sale or other disposition of the shares or ADSs would in general not be treated as a capital gain. Instead, unless a US holder elects to be taxed annually on amark-to-market basis with respect to its shares or ADSs, such gain and certain ‘excess distributions’ would be treated as having been realised ratably over a US holder’s holding period for the shares or ADSs and generally would be taxed at the highest tax rate in effect for each such year to which the gain was allocated, together with an interest charge in respect of the tax attributable to each such year. With certain exceptions, a US holder’s shares or ADSs will be treated as stock in a PFIC if Barclays PLC or the Bank, as applicable, was a PFIC at any time during such holder’s holding period in its shares or ADSs. Dividends that a US holder receives will not be eligible for the special tax rates applicable to qualified dividend income if Barclays PLC or the Bank is treated as a PFIC with respect to such US holder either in the taxable year of the distribution or the preceding taxable year, but instead will be taxable at rates applicable to ordinary income.

Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2016 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  325


Additional shareholder information

(v) Certain Reporting Requirements

US holders should consult their tax advisers regarding any tax reporting or filing requirements that may apply to receiving payments on or with respect to, acquiring, owning, or disposing of the shares or ADSs. Failure to comply with certain reporting obligations could result in the imposition of substantial penalties.

Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  317


Additional shareholder information

(vi) StampUK stamp duty and stamp duty reserve tax

No obligation to pay UK stamp duty will arise on the transfer on sale of an ADS, provided that any instrument of transfer is not executed in, and remains at all times outside, the UK. No UK stamp duty reserve tax is payable in respect of an agreement to transfer an ADS. For the UK stamp duty and stamp duty reserve tax implications of dealings in shares, see the section “Taxation of UK holders – (iv) Stamp duty and stamp duty reserve tax” above.

(vii) EstateUK estate and gift tax

Under the Estate and Gift Tax Convention, between the UK and the US, a US holder generally is not subject to UK inheritance tax.

FATCA Risk Factor

In certain circumstances, shares or ADSs may be subject to US “passthru” withholding tax starting in 2019. The US has enacted rules, commonly referred to as ‘FATCA’, that generally impose a new reporting and withholding regime with respect to certain US source payments (including dividends and interest), gross proceeds from the disposition of property that can produce US source interest and dividends, and certain payments made by, and financial accounts held with, entities that are classified as financial institutions under FATCA. The US has entered into an intergovernmental agreement regarding the implementation of FATCA with the UK (the “UK IGA”). Under the UK IGA, as currently drafted, it is not expected that either Barclays PLC or the Bank will be required to withhold tax under FATCA on payments made with respect to the shares or ADSs. However, significant aspects of when and how FATCA will apply remain unclear, and no assurance can be given that withholding under FATCA will not become relevant with respect to payments

made on or with respect to the shares or ADS in the future. Investors should consult their own tax advisers regarding the potential impact of FATCA.

The Barclays Group has registered with the Internal Revenue Service (‘IRS’) for FATCA. The Global Intermediary Identification Number (GIIN) for the Bank in the United Kingdom is E1QAZN.00001.ME.826 and it is a Reporting Model 1 FFI. The GIINs for other parts of the Barclays Group or Barclays branches outside of the UK may be obtained from your usual Barclays contact on request. The IRS list of registered Foreign Financial Institutions is publicly available at https://apps.irs.gov/app/fatcaFfilist/flu.jsf.

Exchange controls and other limitations affecting security holders

Other than certain economic sanctions which may be in force from time to time, there are currently no UK laws, decrees or regulations which would affect the transfer of capital or remittance of dividends, interest and other payments to holders of Barclays securities who are not residents of the UK. There are also no restrictions under the Articles of Association of either Barclays PLC or Barclays Bank PLC, or (subject to the effect of any such economic sanctions) under current UK laws, which relate only tonon-residents of the UK, and which limit the right of suchnon-residents to hold Barclays securities or, when entitled to vote, to do so.

Documents on display

It is possible to read and copy documents that have been filed by Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC with the US Securities and Exchange Commission at the US Securities and Exchange Commission’s office of Investor Education and Advocacy located at 100 F Street, NE Washington DC 20549. Please call the US Securities and Exchange Commission at1-800-SEC-0330 for further information on the public reference rooms and their copy charges. Filings with the US Securities and Exchange Commission are also available to the public from commercial document retrieval services, and from the website maintained by the US Securities and Exchange Commission at www.sec.gov.

 

 

318326  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 20152016 Annual Report on Form 20-F  


Additional shareholder information

        

            

 

 

 

 

Fees and Charges Payable by a Holder of ADSs

The ADR depositary collects fees for delivery and surrender of ADSs directly from investors depositing ordinary shares or surrendering ADSs for the purpose of withdrawal or from intermediaries acting for them.

The charges of the ADR depositary payable by investors are as follows:

 

Type of Service     ADR Depositary Actions   Fee

 

ADR depositary or substituting the underlying shares

 

 

Issuance of ADSs against the deposit of ordinary shares, including deposits and issuances in respect of:

 

 

$5.00 or less per 100 ADSs (or portion thereof) evidenced by the new ADSs delivered

– Share distributions, stock splits, rights issues, mergers

 
 

 

– Exchange of securities or other transactions or event or other distribution affecting the ADSs or deposited securities

 

 

 

 

Receiving or distributing cash dividends

 

 

 

Distribution of cash dividends

 

 

$0.04 or less per ADS*

 

Selling or exercising rights

 

 

Distribution or sale of securities, the fee being in an amount equal to the fee for the execution and delivery of ADSs which would have been charged as a result of the deposit of such securities

 

 

 

$5.00 or less per each 100 ADSs (or portion thereof)

 

Withdrawing an underlying ordinary share

 

 

 

Acceptance of ADSs surrendered for withdrawal of deposited ordinary shares

 

 

 

$5.00 or less for each 100 ADSs (or portion thereof)

 

General depositary services, particularly those charged on an annual basis

 

 

 

Other services performed by the ADR depositary in administering the ADS program

 

 

No fee currently payable

 

Expenses of the ADR depositary

 

 

Expenses incurred on behalf of Holders in connection with:

- Expenses of the ADR depositary in connection with the conversion of foreign currency into US dollars (which are paid out of such foreign currency)

 

 

Expenses payable at the sole discretion of the ADR depositary by billing Holders or by deducting charges from one or more cash dividends or other cash distributions

 

 

- Expenses of the ADR depositary in connection with the conversion of foreign currency into US dollars (which are paid out of such foreign currency)

– Taxes and other governmental charges

 
 

 

– Cable, telex and facsimile transmission/delivery

 
 

 

– Transfer or registration fees, if applicable, for the registration of transfers or underlying ordinary shares

 
  

 

– Any other charge payable by ADR depositary or its agents

 

  

* The fee in relation to the distribution of cash dividends was $0.0064 per ADS in respect of dividends paid in the year ended 31 December 2016.

*The fee in relation to the distribution of cash dividends was $0.01 per ADS in respect of dividends paid in the year ended 31 December 2015.

 

  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 20152016 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  319327


Additional shareholder information

        

        

 

 

 

 

Fees and Payments made by the ADR depositary to Barclays

The ADR depositary has agreed to provide Barclays with an amount based on the cash dividend fee charged on each ADS during each contract yeartwelve-month period running from August 11 of the relevant year to August 10 of the following year (a ‘Contract Year’) for expenses incurred by Barclays in connection with the ADS program (such amount being the ‘Contribution’ for the relevant Contract Year). The Contributions are paid to Barclays in two instalments each Contract Year.Year, both of which are scheduled to be paid in the Barclays’ fiscal year in which the relevant Contract Year ends.

The table below sets out the Contribution for the 2014/20152015/2016 Contract Year and thus the total amount received in the year ended 31 December 2015:

2016:

 

Cash Dividend Fee Amount Collected during 2014/20152015/2016

 

Contract Year

  

Amount provided in Contributions from the ADR depositary

 

for the year ended 31 December 20152016

US$0.010.0084 per ADSADS**

 

   

 

$1,500,000

 

     

Total

 

   

 

$1,500,000

 

** On 1 March 2016, Barclays announced its decision to pay dividends on a bi-annual rather than quarterly basis. As a result, the fees in relation to the 2015/16 Contract Year covering the September and December 2015 and April 2016 dividends amounted to $0.0084 per ADS.

Under certain circumstances, includingnon-routine corporate actions, removal of the ADR depositary or termination of the ADS program by Barclays, Barclays may be charged by the ADR depositary certain fees (including in connection with depositary services, certain expenses paid on behalf of Barclays, an administrative fee, fees fornon-routine services and corporate actions and any other reasonable fees/expenses incurred by the ADR depositary).

The ADR depositary has agreed to waive certain of its fees chargeable to Barclays with respect to standard costs associated with the administration of the ADS program.

 

320328  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 20152016 Annual Report on Form 20-F  


Additional informationInformation

        

        

 

 

 

 

External auditor objectivity andindependence: Non-Audit Services

Our policy on the provision of services by the Group’s statutory Auditor (the ‘Policy’) sets out the circumstances in which the auditor may be permitted to undertakenon-audit work for the Group.

The Board Audit Committee oversees compliance with the Policy and considers and, if appropriate, approves requests to use the Auditor fornon-audit work. Allowable services arepre-approved up to but not including £100,000 or £25,000 in the case of certain taxation services. The Group Finance Director and the Company Secretary and their teams deal with day to day administration of the Policy, facilitating requests for approval.

Details of the services that are prohibited and allowed under the Policy are set out below:

Services that are prohibited include:

 

 Bookkeeping;

 

 design and implementation of financial information systems;

 

 design or implementation of internal controls or risk management services related to financial information

*appraisal or valuation services;

 

 fairness opinions orcontribution-in-kind reports;

 

 *actuarial services;

 

 internal audit outsourcing;audit;

 

 management and Human Resources functions;

 

 broker or dealer, investment advisor or investment banking services; and

 

 legal, expert and taxcertain *tax services involving advocacy or personal services to persons in a financial reporting role.role; and

transaction-related and restructuring services.

*these may be permissible subject to compliance with certain requirements

Allowable services that the Board Audit Committee considers for approval include:

 

 statutory audit and regulatory audit related services and regulatorynon-audit services;

 

 other attest and assurance services;

 

 accountancy advicetraining, surveys and training;software;

 

 risk management and controls advice;

 

 transaction support;

 

 taxation services;

 

 business support and recoveries; and

 

 translation services.

 

  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 20152016 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  321329


Additional information

 

 

 

 

 

NYSE Corporate Governance

NYSE Corporate Governance Statement

As our main listing is on the London Stock Exchange, we follow the UK Corporate Governance Code. However, as Barclays also has American Depositary Receipts listed on the New York Stock Exchange (NYSE), we are also subject to the NYSE’s Corporate Governance Rules (NYSE Rules). We are exempt from most of the NYSE Rules, which US domestic companies must follow, because we are anon-US company listed on the NYSE. However, we are required to provide an Annual Written Affirmation to the NYSE of our compliance with the applicable NYSE Rules and must also disclose any significant differences between our corporate governance practices and those followed by domestic US companies listed on the NYSE. Key differences between the Code and NYSE Rules are set out here:

Director Independence

NYSE Rules require the majority of the Board to be independent. The Code requires at least half of the Board (excluding the Chairman) to be independent. The NYSE Rules contain different tests from the Code for determining whether a Director is independent. We follow the Code’s recommendations as well as developing best practices among other UK public companies. The independence of ournon-executive Directors is reviewed by the Board on an annual basis and it takes into account the guidance in the Code and the criteria we have established for determining independence, which are described on page 37.

Board Committees

We have a Board Nominations Committee and a Board Remuneration Committee, both of which are broadly similar in purpose and constitution to the Committees required by the NYSE Rules and whose terms of reference comply with the Code’s requirements. The NYSE Rules state that both Committees must be composed entirely of independent Directors. As the Group Chairman was independent on appointment, the Code permits him to chair the Board Nominations Committee. Except for this appointment, both Committees are composed solely ofnon-executive Directors, whom the Board has determined to be independent. We comply with the NYSE Rules requirement that we have a Board Audit Committee comprised solely of independentnon-executive Directors. However, we follow the Code recommendations, rather than the NYSE Rules, regarding the responsibilities of the Board Audit Committee (except for applicable mandatory responsibilities under the Sarbanes-Oxley Act), although both are broadly comparable. Although the NYSE Rules state that the Board Audit Committee is to take responsibility for risk oversight, Barclays has additional Board Committees which address different areas of risk management. To enhance Board governance of risk, Barclays has two risk committees; the Board Risk Committee and the Board Reputation Committee. A full description of each Board Committee can be found on page 96.in the governance section.

Corporate Governance Guidelines

The NYSE Rules require domestic US companies to adopt and disclose corporate governance guidelines. There is no equivalent recommendation in the Code but the Board Nominations Committee has developed corporate governance guidelines, ‘Corporate Governance in Barclays’, which have been approved and adopted by the Board.

Code of Ethics

The NYSE Rules require that domestic US companies adopt and disclose a code of business conduct and ethics for Directors, officers and employees.The Barclays Way was introduced in 2013,2013; this is a Code of Conduct which outlines the Values and Behaviours which govern our way of working across our business globally.The Barclays Way has been adopted on a Group wide basis by all Directors, Officers and employees.The Barclays Way is available to view on the Barclays website at home.barclays/about-barclays/barclays-values.

Shareholder Approval of Equity-compensation Plans

The NYSE listing standards require that shareholders must be given the opportunity to vote on all equity-compensation plans and material revisions to those plans. We comply with UK requirements, which are similar to the NYSE standards. However, the Board does not explicitly take into consideration the NYSE’s detailed definition of what are considered ‘material revisions’.

 

322330  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 20152016 Annual Report on Form 20-F  


Additional information

        

        

 

 

 

 

Share Capital

Substantial shareholders

As at 20 February 2017 the Company had been notified under Rule 5 of the Disclosure and Transparency Rules of the UKLA of the following holdings of voting rights in its shares:

2016                    
Holder   
Number of
Barclays Shares
 
 
   



% of total
voting rights
attached to
issued share
capitala
 
 
 
 
 
   
Number of
warrants
 
 
   



% of total
voting rights
attached to
issued share
capitala
 
 
 
 
 
The Capital Group Companies Incb   1,172,090,125    6.98    -    - 
Qatar Holding LLCc   1,017,455,690    5.99    -    - 
BlackRock, Incd   922,509,972    5.45    -    - 

a The percentage of voting rights detailed above were as calculated at the time of the relevant disclosures made in accordance with Rule 5 of the DTR.

b. The Capital Group Companies Inc (CG) holds its shares via CG Management companies and funds. Part of the CG holding is held as American Depositary Receipts.

c. Qatar Holding LLC is wholly-owned by Qatar Investment Authority.

d Total shown includes 3,860,531 contracts for difference to which voting rights are attached. Part of the holding is held as American Depositary receipts. On 19 January 2017, BlackRock, Inc. disclosed by way of a Schedule 13G filed with the SEC, beneficial ownership of 1,054,988,420 ordinary shares of the Company as of 31 December 2016, representing 6.2% of that class of shares.

On 23 January 2017 the Company was notified that Norges Bank now holds 508,175,594 Barclays shares, representing 2.996% of the total voting rights attached to the issued share capital. The relevant threshold for UK disclosure is 3%, so Norges Bank will make no further notifications to the Company unless they again exceed 3% of the total voting rights attached to the issued share capital.

As at 29 February 2016 the Company had been notified under Rule 5 of the Disclosure and Transparency Rules of the UKLA of the following holdings of voting rights in its shares:

 

2015

                        

Holder

   

 

 

 

Number of

 

Barclays Shares

 

  

 

  

 

   

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

% of total

 

voting rights

 

attached to

 

issued share

 

capitala

 

  

 

  

 

  

 

  

 

  

 

   

 

 

 

Number of

 

warrants

 

  

 

  

 

   

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

% of total

 

voting rights

 

attached to

 

issued share

 

capitala

 

  

 

  

 

  

 

  

 

  

 

   
Number of
Barclays Shares
 
 
   



% of total
voting rights
attached to
issued  share
capitala
 
 
 
 
 
   
Number of
warrants
 
 
   



% of total
voting rights
attached to
issued share
capitala
 
 
 
 
 
Qatar Holding LLCb   813,964,552     6.65     -     -     813,964,552    6.65    -    - 
BlackRock, Incc   822,938,075     5.02     -     -     822,938,075    5.02    -    - 
The Capital Group Companies Incd   1,172,090,125     6.98     -     -     1,172,090,125    6.98    -    - 
Norges Bank   506,870,056     3.02     -     -     506,870,056    3.02    -    - 

a The percentage of voting rights detailed above were as calculated at the time of the relevant disclosures made in accordance with Rule 5 of the DTR.

b Qatar Holding LLC is wholly-owned by Qatar Investment Authority.

c Total shown includes 1,408,618 contracts for difference to which voting rights are attached. On 25 January 2016, BlackRock, Inc. disclosed, by way of a Schedule 13G filed with the SEC, beneficial ownership of 1,109,026,156 ordinary shares of Barclays PLC as of 31 December 2015, representing 6.6% of that class of shares.

d The Capital Group Companies Inc (CG) holds its shares via CG Management companies and funds. Part of the CG holding is held as American Depositary Receipts (ADRs) with a ratio of 1 share to every 4 ADRs.

As at 27 February 2015 the Company had been notified under Rule 5 of the Disclosure and Transparency Rules of the UKLA of the following holdings of voting rights in its shares:

  

  

   

  

  

2014

            

Holder

   

 

 

 

Number of

 

Barclays Shares

 

  

 

  

 

   

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

% of total

 

voting rights

 

attached to

 

issued share

 

capitala

 

  

 

  

 

  

 

  

 

  

 

   

 

 

 

Number of

 

warrants

 

  

 

  

 

   

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

% of total

 

voting rights

 

attached to

 

issued share

 

capitala

 

  

 

  

 

  

 

  

 

  

 

Qatar Holding LLCb   813,964,552     6.65     -     -  
BlackRock, Incc   822,938,075     5.02     -     -  
The Capital Group Companies Incd   861,142,569     5.22     -     -  

a The percentage of voting rights detailed above were as calculated at the time of the relevant disclosures made in accordance with Rule 5 of the DTR.

b Qatar Holding LLC is wholly-owned by Qatar Investment Authority.

c Total shown includes 1,408,618 contracts for difference to which voting rights are attached. On 12 January 2015 BlackRock, Inc disclosed, by way of a Schedule 13G filed with the SEC, beneficial ownership of 1,032,843,875 ordinary shares of Barclays PLC as of 31 December 2014, representing 6.3% of that class of shares.

d The Capital Group Companies Inc (CG) holds its shares via CG Management companies and funds. Part of the CG holding is held as American Depositary Receipts (ADRs) with a ratio of 1 share to every 4 ADRs.

As at 4 March 2014, the Company had been notified under Rule 5 of the Disclosure and Transparency Rules of the UKLA of the following holdings of voting rights in its shares:

  

  

   

  

  

2013

            

Holder

   

 

 

 

Number of

 

Barclays Shares

 

  

 

  

 

   

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

% of total

 

voting rights

 

attached to

 

issued share

 

capitala

 

  

 

  

 

  

 

  

 

  

 

   

 

 

 

Number of

 

warrants

 

  

 

  

 

   

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

% of total

 

voting rights

 

attached to

 

issued share

 

capitala

 

  

 

  

 

  

 

  

 

  

 

Qatar Holding LLCb   813,964,552     6.65     -     -  
BlackRock, Incc   805,969,166     7.06     -     -  
The Capital Group Companies Incd   809,174,196     5.03     -     -  

a The percentage of voting rights detailed above were as calculated at the time of the relevant disclosures made in accordance with Rule 5 of the DTR.

b Qatar Holding LLC is wholly-owned by Qatar Investment Authority.

c Total shown includes 1,408,618 contracts for difference to which voting rights are attached. On 13 February 2014 Qatar Holding LLC25 January 2016, BlackRock, Inc. disclosed, by way of a Schedule 13G filed with the SEC, beneficial ownership of 1,017,455,6901,109,026,156 ordinary shares of Barclays PLC as of 31 December 2013,2015, representing 6.31% of that class of shares.

c Total shown includes 8,003,236 contracts for difference to which voting rights are attached. On 17 January 2014 BlackRock, Inc disclosed, by way of a Schedule 13G filed with the SEC, beneficial ownership of 1,040,177,738 ordinary shares of Barclays PLC as of 31 December 2014, representing 6.5%6.6% of that class of shares.

d The Capital Group Companies Inc (CG) holds its shares via CG Management companies and funds. Part of the CG holding is held as American Depositary Receipts (ADRs) with a ratio of 1 share to every 4 ADRs.

 

  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 20152016 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  323331


Additional information

        

        

 

 

 

 

As at 27 February 2015 the Company had been notified under Rule 5 of the Disclosure and Transparency Rules of the UKLA of the following holdings of voting rights in its shares:

2014                    
Holder   
Number of
Barclays Shares
 
 
   



% of total
voting rights
attached to
issued share
capitala
 
 
 
 
 
   
Number of
warrants
 
 
   



% of total
voting rights
attached to
issued share
capital
 
 
 
 
 
Qatar Holding LLCb   813,964,552    6.65    -    - 
BlackRock, Incc   822,938,075    5.02    -    - 
The Capital Group Companies Incd   861,142,569    5.22    -    - 

a The percentage of voting rights detailed above were as calculated at the time of the relevant disclosures made in accordance with Rule 5 of the DTR.

b Qatar Holding LLC is wholly-owned by Qatar Investment Authority.

c Total shown includes 1,408,618 contracts for difference to which voting rights are attached. On 12 January 2015 BlackRock, Inc disclosed, by way of a Schedule 13G filed with the SEC, beneficial ownership of 1,032,843,875 ordinary shares of Barclays PLC as of 31 December 2014, representing 6.3% of that class of shares.

d The Capital Group Companies Inc (CG) holds its shares via CG Management companies and funds. Part of the CG holding is held as American Depositary Receipts (ADRs) with a ratio of 1 share to every 4 ADRs.

Disclosure controls and procedures

The Chief Executive, JesJames E Staley, and the Group Finance Director, Tushar Morzaria, conducted with Group Management an evaluation of the effectiveness of the design and operation of the Group’s disclosure controls and procedures of each of Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC as at 31 December 2015,2016, which are defined as those controls and procedures designed to ensure that information required to be disclosed in reports filed or submitted under the US Securities Exchange Act of 1934 is recorded, processed, summarised and reported within the time periods specified in the US Securities and Exchange Commission’s rules and forms. As of the date of the evaluation, the Chief Executive and Group Finance Director concluded that the design and operation of these disclosure controls and procedures were effective.

Change in Registrant’s Certifying Accountant

In 2015, in order to conform with the auditor rotation requirements of the final statutory audit services order published in October 2014 by the UK’s Competition and Markets Authority, which took effect in January 2015, the Board Audit Committee (through the Audit Tender Oversight Sub-Committee) conducted an external audit tender. Barclays did not request PwC to submit a tender proposal and PwC declined to stand for re-election as the Group’s auditor. Barclays identified KPMG as the preferred candidate for appointment as the new auditor and made a recommendation to the Board. The Board announced on 3 July 2015 that it had appointed KPMG as Auditor following the completion of the audit of the Barclay PLC and Barclays Bank PLC financial statements for the year ended 31 December 2016 and the audit of the effectiveness of internal control over financial reporting as of 31 December 2016. Accordingly, the engagement of PricewaterhouseCoopers LLP, Barclays’ current auditor, will not be renewed for 2017. The appointment of KPMG is subject to the approval of Barclays’ shareholders at the 2017 Annual General Meeting.

During the two years prior to 31 December 2015, (1) PwC has not issued any reports on the financial statements of Barclays PLC or Barclays Bank PLC or on the effectiveness of internal control over financial reporting that contained an adverse opinion or a disclaimer of opinion, nor were the auditors’ reports of PwC qualified or modified as to uncertainty, audit scope, or accounting principles, and (2) there has not been any disagreement over any matter of accounting principles or practices, financial statement disclosure, or auditing scope or procedures, which disagreement if not resolved to PwC’s satisfaction would have caused it to make reference to the subject matter of the disagreement in connection with its auditors’ reports, or any “reportable event” as described in Item 16F(a)(1)(v) of Form 20-F.

Barclays has provided PwC with a copy of the foregoing disclosure and has requested that PwC furnish Barclays with a letter addressed to the SEC stating whether it agrees with such disclosure. A copy of the letter, dated 1 March 2015, is filed herewith as Exhibit 15.2.

Board of Directors

John McFarlane, Chairman

John McFarlane is a senior figure in global banking and financial services circles and is in his 42nd year in the sector (including 22 years as a main-board director, 10 years as CEO and six years as chairman). John is Chairman of Barclays. John joined the Board as a non-executive Director in January 2015Barclays PLC and became Chairman at the conclusion of the AGM in April 2015.Barclays Bank PLC. He is also anon-executive director of Westfield Corporation and Old Oak Holdings.Holdings Limited. He is chairman of TheCityUK and a member of the Financial Services Trade and Investment Board and the European Financial Roundtable. John was formerly chairman of Aviva plc, where he oversaw a transformation of the company the board and management, making Aviva one of the UK’s best-performing financial institutions. Forfor a brief period he was also chairman of FirstGroup plc. John hasHe was also a strong track record as a CEOnon-executive director of the Royal Bank of Scotland plc, joining at the time of the UK government rescue. Prior to that, for 10 years he was Chief Executive officer of Australia and subsequently as a chairmanNew Zealand Banking Group Ltd, Group Executive Director of Standard Chartered plc and brings to Barclays extensive experiencehead of investment, corporate and retail banking, as well as insurance, strategy, risk and cultural change. John is a senior figure in global banking and financial services circles and is in his 40th yearCitibank in the sector including 20 years as a board director, 10 years as CEO and more recently as chairman.UK.

Jes Staley, Chief Executive, Executive Director

Jes Staley joined Barclays as Group Chief Executive on 1 December 2015. Jes has nearly four decades of extensive experience in banking and financial services. He worked for more than 30 years at JP Morgan, initially training as a commercial banker, and later advancing to the leadership of major businesses involving equities, private banking and asset management, and ultimately heading the company’s Global Investment Bank. Most recently, Jes served as Managing Partner at BlueMountain Capital.

Sir Gerry Grimstone, Deputy Chairman and Senior Independent Director, Non-executive Director

Sir Gerry Grimstone is Deputy Chairman and Senior Independent Director of Barclays and chairs the Board Reputation Committee. He is also chairman of Standard Life plc, one of the UK’s largest savings and investments businesses. He is an independentnon-executive board member of Deloitte LLP where he represents the public interest. Within the UK public sector, he is the leadnon-executive on the board of the Ministry of Defence and is a member of HM Treasury’s Financial Services Trade and Investment Board. From 2012-2015, Gerry served as the chairman of TheCityUK, the representative body for the financial and professional services industry in the UK. Gerry has held a number of board appointments in the public and private sectors and has served as one of the UK’s Business Ambassadors. He was previously a senior investment banker at Schroders and ran businesses in London, New York and Asia Pacific. He specialised in mergers and acquisitions and capital-raising for major companies worldwide. Prior to that, he was an official in HM Treasury where he was responsible for privatisation and policy towards state-owned enterprises. Sir Gerry’s other current principal external appointments are the Financial Services Trade and Investment Board and The Shareholder Executive.

Mike Ashley,Non-executive Director

Mike joined the Board as anon-executive Director in September 2013. He was formerly head of quality and risk management for KPMG Europe LLP (ELLP), which forms part of the KPMG global network, where his responsibilities included the management of professional risks and quality control.

 

324332  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 20152016 Annual Report on Form 20-F  


Additional information

    

    

 

 

 

 

and quality control. He was a member of the ELLP Board and was also KPMG UK’s designated Ethics Partner. Mike has over 20 years’ experience as an audit partner, during which he was the lead audit partner for several large financial services groups, most recently HSBC Holdings PLC and Standard Chartered PLC, and also for the Bank of England. Mike has an in depth understanding of auditing and the associated regulatory issues, with specific experience of large, global banks. Mike’s other current principal external appointments are Institute of Chartered Accountants in England and Wales’ Ethics Standards Committee (member), European Financial Reporting Advisory Group’s Technical Expert Group (vice chair), Charity Commission (board member), Government Internal Audit Agency (chairman) and International Ethics Standards Board for Accountants.Accountants (member).

Tim Breedon,Non-executive Director

Tim was appointed to the Board as anon-executive Director in November 2012. Tim held a number of roles at Legal & General Group plc (L&G) before joining its board as group directorGroup Director (Investments) and becoming group chief executive. He was later an adviserGroup Chief Executive, a position he held from January 2006 to L&G, primarily with responsibilities in connection with Solvency II.June 2012. Tim was a director of the Association of British Insurers (ABI), and also served as its chairman. He was also chairman of the UK Government’snon-bank lending taskforce, anindustry-led taskforce that looked at the structural and behavioural barriers to the development of alternative debt markets in the UK. Tim was a director of the Financial Reporting Council and was on the board of the Investment Management Association. Tim has over 25 years of experience in financial services and has extensive knowledge and experience of regulatory and government relationships. He brings to the Board the experience and knowledge of leading a financial services company, combined with an understanding of the UK and EU regulatory environment and risk management. His customer focus and understanding of investor issues, gained both at L&G and the ABI, is of particular relevance to Barclays. Tim’sBarclays.Tim’s other current principal external appointments are as chairman of Apax Global Alpha Limited (chairman) and Marie Curie Cancer Care (trustee).chairman of The Northview Group.

Mary Francis, CBE,Non-executive Director

Mary Francis CBE was appointed to the Board as anon-executive Director in October 2016. Mary has extensive board-level experience across a range of industries and is currently serving on the boards of Swiss Re Group and Ensco plc. She has previously served as Senior Independent Director on the board of Centrica and as anon-executive director of Aviva, Cable & Wireless Communications, the Bank of England and Alliance & Leicester. In her executive career, Mary was a senior civil servant in HM Treasury for twelve years, before serving as Private Secretary to the Prime Minister, Deputy Private Secretary to the Queen and as Director General of the Association of British Insurers.

Crawford Gillies,Non-executive Director

Crawford joined the Board as anon-executive Director in May 2014. Crawford has over three decades of business and management experience, initially with Bain & Company, a firm of international management consultants, where he was managing director Europe from 2001 to 2005. While at Bain he worked with major companies in the UK, Continental Europe and North America across multiple sectors. Since 2007 he has beenFrom 2007-2016 Crawford was on the board of Standard Life plc, where he has chaired the remuneration committee. He was chairman of the law firm Hammonds, now Squire Sanders (2006 - 2009), has chaired Control Risks Group Holdings LtdInternational since 2007 and chaired Touch Bionics (2006 - 2011), an innovative medical device company. He joinedCrawford was also on the board of MITIE Group PLC in 2012.from 2012 to July 2015. He has also held public sector posts in England and Scotland. He was an independent member of the Department of Trade and Industry (2002(2002 - 2007) and chaired its Audit and Risk Committee (2003 - 2007). He is former Chairmanchairman of Scottish Enterprise and of the Confederation of British Industry in London. Crawford’s other current principal external appointments are as Non-executive Directoranon-executive director of SSE plc and Standard Life plc. Crawford intends to retire from his position at Standard Life plc in 2016.The Edrington Group Limited.

Reuben Jeffery III,Non-executive Director

Reuben joined the Board in July 2009 as anon-executive Director. He is currently CEO, president and a director of Rockefeller & Co Inc. and Rockefeller Financial Services Inc. Reuben served in the US government as under secretary of State for Economic, Energy and Agricultural Affairs, as chairman of the Commodity Futures Trading Commission and as a special assistant to the President on the staff of the National Security Council. Before his government service, Reuben spent 18 years at Goldman, Sachs & Co where he was managing partner of Goldman Sachs in Paris and led the firm’s europeanEuropean financial institutions group in London. Prior to joining Goldman Sachs, Reuben was a corporate attorney with Davis Polk & Wardwell. Reuben has a broad range of financial services experience, particularly investment banking, and in addition brings extensive insight into the US political and regulatory environment. Reuben’s other current principal external appointments are International Advisory Council of the China Securities Regulatory Commission (member), Advisory Board of Towerbrook Capital Partners LP (member), Financial Services Volunteer Corps (Director) and the(director), Advisory Board of J. Rothschild Capital Management Limited (member).

Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  325


Additional information

Wendy Lucas-Bull, Non-executive Director

Wendy was appointed to the Board as a non-executive Director in September 2013. She is currently chairman of Barclays Africa Group Limited (formerly Absa Group Limited), one of the largest financial services groups in Africa and majority owned by Barclays. She previously served as an executive director of Rand Merchant Bank and became chief executive of FirstRand Ltd’s retail businesses following the merger of Rand Merchant Bank and First National Bank. She has held senior board positions at the Development Bank of Southern Africa, the South African Financial Markets Advisory Board, Eskom, Aveng Ltd and Nedbank Group Limited. Wendy has also held positions on the boards of Telkom SA, Alexander Forbes Ltd, Dimension Data PLC and Anglo American Platinum Ltd. Wendy’s extensive experience provides the Board with valuable retail, commercial, asset management and investment banking expertise. Her widespread experience stems for board level positions in South African banks, having led some of South Africa’s blue chip companies, most notably as CEO of one of the largest retail banks in South Africa, serving as a senior executive of one of the major investment banks in South Africa, as well as providing consultancy services to the largest banks, financial exchanges and insurers in South Africa and internationally. As a CEO Wendy has a track record of successful financial turnaround and cultural transformation of a major South African bank. Her in-depth knowledge of banking in Africa also provides invaluable insight into banking in the region. Wendy has led or participated in a number of conduct related consultations throughout her career, and such knowledge and experience contribute greatly towards the discussion of culture at Barclays.The Asia Foundation (trustee).

Tushar Morzaria, Group Finance Director, Executive Director

Tushar joined the Board and Group Executive Committee of Barclays in October 2013 as Group Finance Director. Prior to this, he was CFO, corporate and investment bank at JP Morgan, a role he held on the merger of the investment bank and the wholesale treasury/security services business at JP Morgan. Prior to the merger, he was CFO of the investment bank and held other various roles during his career at JP Morgan.

Tushar qualified as an accountant at Coopers &and Lybrand Deloitte and for most of his career he has worked in investment banking, having held various roles at SG Warburg, JP Morgan and Credit Suisse. Tushar has over 20 years of strategic financial management experience, which prove invaluable in his role as Group Finance Director.

Dambisa Moyo,Non-executive Director

Dambisa joined the Board in May 2010 as anon-executive Director. She is an international economist and commentator on the global economy, with a background in financial services. After completing a PhD in Economics, she worked for Goldman Sachs in the debt capital markets, hedge funds coverage and global macroeconomics teams. Dambisa has also worked for the World Bank and formerly served as anon-executive director of Lundin Petroleum AB (publ). and SABMiller PLC. Dambisa’s background as an economist, in particular her knowledge and understanding of global macroeconomic issues and African economic, political and social issues, provides an important contribution to the Board’s discussion of Barclays’ business and citizenship strategy. Dambisa’s other current principal external appointments are asnon-executive director of SABMiller plc, Barrick Gold Corporation and Seagate Technology plc.

Frits van Paasschen, Non-executive Director

Frits was appointed to the Board as a non-executive Director in August 2013. Frits is an experienced directorplc and CEO. He is the former CEO and president of Starwood Hotels and Resorts Worldwide Inc, one of the world’s largest hotel companies. He served as a non-executive director for two NYSE-listed companies, Jones Apparel Group and Oakley. He previously served as the CEO and President of Coors Brewing Company and has held various senior management positions with Nike, Inc. and Disney Consumer Products.

Frits’ extensive global and commercial experience and role as a CEO of an international business provides valuable strategic insight. In particular, his experience in developing and marketing brands, and a broad knowledge of enhancing business performance and the customer experience in a retail environment, is highly beneficial to many aspects of Barclays’ business.Chevron Corporation.

 

326  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 20152016 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  333


Additional information

    

    

 

 

 

 

Diane de Saint Victor,Non-executive Director

Diane was appointed to the Board as anon-executive Director in June 2015.March 2013. She is currently executive director, general counsel and company secretary and a member of the group executive committee of ABB Limited, the publicly listed internationala pioneering technology leader in electrification products, robotics and motion, industrial automation and power and automation technologiesgrids. The company basedis headquartered in Switzerland.

Her She is a member of the board of directors of the American Chamber of Commerce in France. At ABB her responsibilities include Head of Legal and Integrity Group. She was formerly senior vice president and general counsel of The Airbus Group, formerly EADS Group, the European aerospace and defence company. Diane’s legal experience and her knowledge of regulatory and compliance matters allows her to provide a unique perspective to the Board and its Committees.

Diane Schueneman,Non-executive Director

Diane was appointed to the Board as anon-executive Director in June 2015. Diane has extensive experience in managing global, cross-discipline business operations, client services and technology in the financial services industry. She spent 37 years with Merrill Lynch and held senior roles with responsibility for banking, brokerage services and technology provided to the company’s retail and middle market clients, and latterly for IT, operations and client services worldwide as senior vice president and& head of global infrastructure solutions. As a consultant at McKinsey & Company she advised the IRS Commissioner in the US and has held a number ofnon-executive directorships.

Steve Thieke,Non-executive Director

Steve was appointed to the Board as anon-executive Director in January 2014. He has four decades of experience in financial services, both in regulation and investment banking. Steve worked for the Federal Reserve Bank of New York for 20 years, where he held several senior positions in credit and capital market operations and banking supervision and later he became anon-executive director at the FSA. He has also held senior roles in investment banking and risk management with JP Morgan, where he spent ten years. He was head of the fixed income division,co-head of global markets, president and chairman of JP Morgan Securities, Inc. and head of the corporate risk management group, retiring from JP Morgan in 1999. He has significant board level experience, both in executive andnon-executive roles, including spending seven years as a director of Risk Metrics Group, where latterly he served as chairman of the board, and nine years on the board of PNC Financial Services Group, Inc.Corp.

Group Executive Committee

Jes Staley, Group Chief Executive, Executive Director

See above for full biography.

Tushar Morzaria, Group Finance Director, Executive Director

See above for full biography.

Robert Le Blanc,Paul Compton, Group Chief RiskOperating Officer

RobertPaul joined Barclays as Group Chief Operating Officer in 2002 as HeadMay 2016. In this role, Paul is responsible for leading the global Operations & Technology functions, driving the implementation of Risk Managementthe structural reform and cost transformation programmes, and for the Investment Bank, and has been the Chief Risk Officer for the Group since 2004.delivery of other major bank-wide projects. Prior to joining Barclays, Robert spent mostPaul was the Chief Administrative Officer of JPMorgan Chase, and was accountable for overseeing global technology, operations, real estate and general services. Before being appointed in this role in 2013, Paul served asCo-Chief Administrative Officer for the Corporate & Investment Bank, Deputy Head of Operations for JPMorgan Chase, and head of the JPMorgan Chase Global Service Centre in India. Paul started his career at JPMorgan in 1997, and first led the overhaul of the wholesale bank’s credit risk infrastructure, before taking on the role as Chief Financial Officer for the Investment Bank. Previous to JP Morgan, Paul spent 10 years as Principal at Ernst & Young in the capital markets, fixed income, emerging marketBrisbane and credit and risk management areas in New York and London. Robertoffices. He has previously been a member of the Group Executive Committee since November 2009. From May 2016, Robert will become Vice Chair of Risk and Strategy.

Michael Harte, Chief Operations and Technology Officer

Michael joined Barclays in July 2014, becoming a member of the Group Executive Committee. Before joining Barclays, Michael was group executive of enterprise services and chief information officer at the Commonwealth Bank of Australia Group (CBA), where he was responsible for group-wide retail and institutional banking systems and operations, brokerage, wealth and asset management systems. Together with his team, Michael transformed CBA into one of the most respected, customer focused and technology leading banks in the world: one of only 8 AA rated banks and top ten by market capitalisation. In his earlier career, Michael held the posts of executive vice president, chief information officer, IT and operations and technology posts at PNC Financial Services Group, Inc (2001-2006, New York) and at Citigroup (1996-2001, London and New York).

 

334  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 20152016 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  327


Additional information

    

    

 

 

 

 

member of the Board of Directors of the Depository Trust and Clearing Corporation (DTCC) American Australian Association and the American Red Cross of Greater New York.

Bob Hoyt, Group General Counsel

Bob joined Barclays as Group General Counsel designate in October 2013 and became Group General Counsel in November 2013,is responsible for all legal issuesand regulatory matters across Barclays.Barclays as Group General Counsel. Previously, Bob is also a member of the Group Executive Committee. Bob joined Barclays fromwas at PNC Financial Services Group, where he was general counselGeneral Counsel and chief regulatory affairs officer,Chief Regulatory Affairs Officer, having previously served as deputy general counselDeputy General Counsel since 2009. Prior to then he held roles in public serviceBetween 2006 and 2009, Bob served as general counsel atGeneral Counsel of the US Department of the Treasury, 2006-2009,where he was the Chief Legal Officer of the department and as special assistant and associate counsela senior policy advisor to Secretary Henry M. Paulson, Jr. Prior to that Bob served at the White House. Bob spent much of the early part of his career in private practice, specialising in securities, litigation and corporate.

Tom King, Chief Executive, Investment Bank

Tom is Chief Executive of the Investment Bank. He is also a member of the Group Executive Committee. Tom joined Barclays in December 2009 as Head of Investment Banking Division (IBD), EMEA, and Co-Head of Global Corporate Finance. In April 2012, he assumed additional responsibility for jointly overseeing the newly combined Corporate Finance/M&A team. He was appointed Deputy Head of IBD in October 2012, and became Head of IBD in March 2013. Tom was appointed Co-Chief Executive of Corporate and Investment Banking on 1 May 2013 and joined the Group Executive Committee, in addition to his Investment Banking responsibilities. Previously, Tom was at CitigroupHouse where he was most recently head of banking for EMEA. Tom joined Salomon BrothersSpecial Assistant and Associate Counsel to President George W. Bush. Earlier in 1989his career, Bob was a partner in the Securities, Litigation and moved to London in 1999 when he was appointed global head of mergers and acquisitions. He was named head of EMEA Investment Banking in 2005, and headCorporate departments of the combined Corporatelaw firm of Wilmer Cutler Pickering Hale and Investment Bank in 2008.

Jonathan Moulds, Group Chief Operating Officer

Jonathan joined Barclays in February 2015 as Group Chief Operating Officer. He also is a member of the Group Executive Committee. Jonathan began his career in finance with Chicago Research and Trading, which was acquired by Bank of America. Jonathan remained at Bank of America Merrill Lynch for over 15 years until 2012 holding a number of positions including head of Latin America, Canada and Europe, head of risk for global markets and head of international global markets. Latterly, Jonathan was Head of Bank of America Merrill Lynch Europe and CEO of Merrill Lynch International. More broadly, Jonathan has been a board member for bodies such as the Association of Financial Markets, Europe and the Global Markets Association. Jonathan is a renowned patron of the arts and was appointed CBE in the 2015 New Year Honours list for his services to philanthropy.

Maria Ramos, Chief Executive, Absa Group and Barclays Africa

Maria is the Chief Executive Officer of Barclays Africa Group Limited (formerly Absa), which is majority owned by Barclays. Prior to joining Absa on 1 March 2009, she was the group chief executive of Transnet Limited, the state-owned South African freight transport and logistics service provider. This was after a term as director-general of the National Treasury of South Africa (formerly the Department of Finance)Dorr (WilmerHale). She currently serves on the executive committees of the World Economic Forum’s International Business Council and Business Leadership South Africa. Maria joined the Group Executive Committee in November 2009.

Tristram Roberts, Group Human Resources Director

Tristram is the Group Human Resources Director. Tristram joined Barclays in July 2013 as HR Director for the Investment Bank. HeHis remit was expanded his remit in May 2014 to include HR responsibilities for BarclaysNon-Core, and became the Group HR Director in December 2015. Prior to Barclays, Tristram was headHead of human resourcesHuman Resources for global functionsGlobal Functions and operationsOperations & technologyTechnology at HSBC Holdings PLC, as well as group head of performance and reward. Previously, he was group reward and policy director for Vodafone Group plc.Plc. Tristram began his career in consulting. He became a partner with Arthur Andersen in 2001 and was subsequently a partner with both Deloitte and KPMG.

328  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F


Additional information

Michael Roemer, Group Head of Compliance

Mike joined Barclays in January 2011 as the Head of Internal Audit, before becoming Group Head of Compliance in January 2014 and joining the Group Executive Committee.Audit. Mike joined Barclays from CIT Group where he was the chief auditor, reporting directly to the board audit committee and having global responsibility for CIT Group’s internal audit function. Mikefunction.Mike has 27 years’ experience in internal audit, with 23 years of that time spent at JP Morgan. Mike currently serves on the advisory board of theMake-A-Wish Foundation of Metro New York where he is audit committee chair. He also serves on the board of Ronald McDonald House of New York, Inc. where he is also audit committee chair. In 2016, the LGBT Agenda (Lesbian, Gay, Bisexual and Transgender) announced Mike’s appointment as the new ExCo sponsor.

Amer Sajed, Interim CEO, Barclaycard International

Amer isSajed was appointed Chief Executive Officer for Barclaycard, the Interim CEO of Barclaycard. He is also a memberglobal consumer payments business of the Barclays Banking Group, Executive Committee.in May 2015. Barclaycard is a leading payments company with more than 15,000 employees, £40bn in net loans and advances and 28m customers and clients. In 2015, Barclaycard enabled payments globally with a value of more than £293bn and contributed 30% of Barclays’ PBT. Prior to his appointment as interim CEO for Barclaycard Amer served as CEOChief Executive Officer for Barclaycard US.US, the payments arm of Barclays in the United States. During his five years leading the US business it doubled in size to rank as one of the top ten credit card companies locally. Amer joined Barclaycard in August of 2006. Before assuming the US post, he was Chief Executive Officer for UK Cards. From 2010 to 2012, Amer also oversaw theBarclays’ South African Cards Issuingcards issuing and Acquiringacquiring businesses. Before coming to Barclays,Barclaycard, Amer worked at Citigroup for 20 years in various roles – most recently overseeing the travel and affluent segment. Previously, he served in senior finance roles. Amer served on the Board of Visa Europe from July 2015 to June 2016.

Tim Throsby, President, Barclays International and Chief Executive Officer, Corporate and Investment Bank

Tim Throsby is President of Barclays International and Chief Executive Officer of the Corporate and Investment Bank at Barclays. Based in London, he is a member of the Group Executive Committee. Prior to joining Barclays in January 2017, Tim worked for JP Morgan where he held a variety of senior management roles, most recently serving as Global Head of Equities. Tim has had an extensive career in banking and asset management, working initially for Credit Suisse and Macquarie, before joining Goldman Sachs in 1995 as a Managing Director andCo-Head of Equity Derivatives for Asia. In 2002, he joined Lehman Brothers to lead the Asia Equities Division, before relocating to New York in 2004 to run the global Equity Derivatives business as well as risk arbitrage. In

Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2016 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  335


Additional information

2005, he became President of Citadel Asia where he oversaw the investment firm’s Asia business. He serves on the board of Human Dignity Trust, and is a school governor at the Ark Oval Primary Academy.

CS Venkatakrishnan, Chief Risk Officer

Venkat joined as Chief Risk Officer in March 2016. Venkat is responsible for helping to define, set and manage the risk profile of Barclays. He has over 20 years of financial market and risk management expertise. Venkat worked at JP Morganfrom 1994, most recently as Head of Model Risk and Development and Operational Risk. Prior to this, he worked in fixed income structuring at the JP Morgan Investment Bank. This followed upon 14 years in JP Morgan Asset Management where he held senior positions in the Global Fixed Income business.

Ashok Vaswani, CEO, Personal and Corporate BankingBarclays UK

Ashok is responsible for the Personal and Corporate Bank. Ashok joined Barclays in 2010, managing the credit card business across the UK, Europe and the Nordics, joining the boardbecoming chairman of Entercard Holdings AB.Entercard. He went on to manage Barclays in Africa, Barclays Retail Business Bank globally and then became CEO for RetailBarclays Personal and Business Banking, covering Europe,Corporate Banking. Ashok represents Barclays as aNon-Executive director on the Board of Barclays Africa Group Limited and is a member of the UK.Board of Directors of Telenor ASA and a member of the Trustee Board at Citizens Advice. He also sits on the advisory boards of a number of institutions such as Rutberg & Co and is Founder Director ofLend-a-Hand, anon-profit organisation focused on rural education in India. Ashok has previously served on the advisory boards of SP Jain Institute of Management, Insead Singapore and Visa Asia Pacific. Prior to Barclays, Ashok was a partner atwith a J P Morgan Chase funded private equity firm - Brysam Global Partners, a New York City based private equity firmwhich focused on building retail financial service businesses in emerging markets. Ashok also spent 20 years with Citigroup working in Asia, Middle East, Central Asia, Europe and North America,where his last position beingwas as CEO, of the global consumer bank in Asia Pacific. Ashok is on the advisory board of S. P. Jain Institute of Management and has served on the advisory board of Insead Singapore and Visa Asia Pacific. He is founder director of Lend-a-Hand, a non-profit organisation focused on economic development in India. Ashok represents Barclays as a non-executive director on the board of Barclays Africa Group Limited (formerly Absa Group Limited), having been appointed in February 2013. Ashok has beenwas also a member of the Group ExecutiveCitigroup Operating Committee, since October 2012.the Citigroup Management Committee and the Global Consumer Planning Group.

 

336  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 20152016 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  329


Additional information

    

    

 

 

 

 

Section 13(r) to the US Securities Exchange Act of 1934 (Iran sanctions and related disclosure)

Section 13(r) of the US Securities Exchange Act of 1934, as amended (the ‘Exchange Act’) requires each SEC reporting issuer to disclose in its annual and, if applicable, quarterly reports whether it or any of its affiliates have knowingly engaged in certain activities, transactions or dealings relating to Iran or with the Government of Iran or certain designated natural persons or entities involved in terrorism or the proliferation of weapons of mass destruction during the period covered by the report. The required disclosurerequirement includes disclosure of activities not prohibited by US or other law even if conducted outside the US bynon-US companies or affiliates in compliance with local law. Pursuant to Section 13(r) of the Exchange Act we note the following in relation to activity occurring in 2015,2016, the period covered by this annual report, or in relation to activity we became aware of in 20152016 relating to disclosable activity prior to the reporting period. Barclays earned total revenue of less than £28,000£30,000 in 2016 from the activities disclosed below.

Legacy guarantees

Barclays entered into several guarantees for the benefit of Iranian banks between 1993 and 2006 in connection with the supply of goods and services by Barclays’ customers to Iranian buyers. These were counter guarantees issued to the Iranian banks to support guarantees issued by these banks to the Iranian buyers. The Iranian banks and a number of the Iranian buyers were then designated as Specially Designated Nationals (“SDNs”) by the U.S. Treasury Department’s Office of Foreign Assets Control (“OFAC”). In addition, Barclays entered into similar guarantees between 1993 and 2005 for the benefit of a Syrian bank that is now an OFAC SDN. Some of the underlying buyers related to the Syrian guarantees have also been designated as OFAC SDNs.

The guarantees have been issued with the following conditions:either on:

 

(i)On an “extend or pay” basis, wherewhich means that, although the guarantee is of limited duration on its face, until there is full performance under the contract to provide goods and/orand services, the terms of the guarantee require Barclays to either maintain the guarantee or pay the beneficiary bank the full amount of the guarantee;guarantee, or

(ii)Wherethe basis that Barclays obligations can only be discharged with the consent of the beneficiary or counterparty.counter party.

Barclays is not able to exit its obligations under the guarantees unilaterally, and thus maintains a limited legacy portfolio of these guarantees. The guarantees were in compliance with applicable laws and regulations at the time at which they were entered into. Revenue in the amount of less than £15,000£11,000 was received in the year ended 31 December 2015. Any2016.    

Since the implementation of the Joint Comprehensive Plan of Action (“JCPOA”) on 16 January 2016, Barclays has terminated a number of these Iran-related legacy guarantees and intends to terminate the remainder where agreement can be reached with the counterparty, in accordance with applicable law. All payments made underin connection with termination of the guarantees arehave been made in compliance with applicable laws and regulations. Barclays intends to terminate each of these legacy guarantees if the applicable law changes so as to allow it.

Lease payments

Barclays is party to a long-term lease, entered into in 1979, with the National Iranian Oil Company (“NIOC”), pursuant to which Barclays rents part of NIOC House in London to house a Barclays bank branch. NIOC is the custodian trustee for the NIOC Pension Fund. The lease is for 60-years,60 years, contains no early termination clause and has 2423 years remaining. Barclays makes quarterly lease payments to Naft Trading and Technology Ltd, a wholly-owned subsidiary of the NIOC Pension Fund in respect of this lease. NIOC is wholly owned by the Iranian Government and iswas an SDN.SDN until it was delisted by OFAC and EU in January 2016 following implementation of sanctions relief under the Joint Comprehensive Plan of Action (JCPOA) with Iran. In December 2012, NIOC Pension Fund was sanctioned in the UK, by HM Treasury. From this pointAs a result of the listing, lease payments were made to a frozen account at Turkiye Is Bankasi in line with UK regulations. However, in 2014, Turkiye Is Bankasi refused to accept any further payments into the frozen account. Since then, noaccount, preventing Barclays from making further lease payments have been made andpayments. Barclays continues to accrueaccrued the ongoing rental payments on its books. In 2015 an additional payment of under £6,000 was made directly to a UK supplier by Barclays in respect ofbooks until November 2016, when Turkiye Is Bankasi confirmed they would accept payments again into the upkeep of the branch.frozen

 

 

330  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 20152016 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  337


Additional information

    

    

 

 

 

 

account. At this time the accrued lease payments were made and quarterly lease payments have restarted. Sanctions on NIOC Pension Fund were lifted on 18 January 2017. Barclays attributed no revenue in 2016 in relation to this activity.

Local Clearing SystemsSystem

Banks in the United Arab Emirates (“UAE”), including certain of the Iranian banks that are or were OFAC SDNs, participate in the various banking payment and settlement systems used in the UAE (the “UAE Clearing Systems”). Barclays, by virtue of its banking activities in the UAE, participates in the UAE Clearing Systems, and its participation in the UAE Clearing Systems is in compliance with applicable lawlaws and regulations. However, in order to help mitigate the risk of participating in transactions in which participant Iranian OFAC SDN banks may be involved, Barclays has implemented restrictions relating to its participation in the UAE Image Cheque Clearance System (ICCS), the UAE Funds Transfer System (FTS), the Direct Debit System (DDS) Automated Teller Machine (ATM) / Cheque Deposit Machine (CDM) activity as well as restricting activity via the Wages Protection Scheme (WPS). Barclays attributed no revenue in 20152016 from the OFAC SDN banks in relation to its participation in the UAE Clearing Systems.

Commercial mortgageMortgage

On 24 May 2013, a Barclays customer and its director were designated by OFAC under theNon-Proliferation and of Weapons of Mass Destruction (“NPWMD”) regime. Both the customer and the director werede-listed inmid-January 2016 as a result of the implementation of the JCPOA. The customer continues to hold a commercial mortgage with Barclays. The terms and conditions of the commercial mortgage do not allow for an early exit and Barclays is legally required to maintain the loan until the maturity date or until the customer defaults on payments. Repayments of the mortgage by the customer are being made in accordance with applicable laws and regulations. Revenues earned by Barclays in 2015throughout 2016 were less than £19,000.£18,000.

New OFAC notificationDesignees

On 6 September 2012 “Organization for Peace and Development Pakistan” opened an account in Pakistani Rupees with31 March 2016, a Barclays Pakistan. On 7 April 2015 OFAC issued a notification advising that the “Organization for Peace and Development Pakistan”retail customer was a new alias for an already sanctioned entity, Revival of Islamic Heritage Society, which has been designated under the OFAC SpecificallySpecially Designated Global Terrorist (“SDGT”) regime. It has also been listedregime by the European Union (“EU”) and in the UK by HM Treasury (“HMT”) under the Al Qaida Terrorism and

Terrorism Financing regime since January 2002. At the time theOFAC. The customer’s GBP account was opened in 2000, subsequently became dormant, and was closed in July 2003. Upon designation, the account balance was moved to an internal dormant account preventing funds from being paid outside of Barclays. No revenue was earned from the relationship in 2016.

In March 2016, a company which was a Barclays Pakistanretail customer was not awaredesignated under the Specially Designated Global Terrorist (“SDGT”) regime by OFAC, in addition to the company director and one of the linkscompany officials who also had accounts with Barclays. The accounts were closed wherever possible with the remaining balances being moved to a sundry account in accordance with applicable laws. One GBP credit card remains open but blocked to prevent spending. Repayments by the designated entity.customer are being made in accordance with applicable laws and regulations. Barclays earned less than £850 in revenue from the three relationships in 2016.

Payments notified

Barclays Zimbabwe held an account for a relief, rescue, and medical aid organisation owned and controlled from within Iran and funded by the Government of Iran. The account was identified on 7 April 2015, followingopened for the OFAC notification and was frozen by Barclays on 9 April 2015.

The account was closed on 12 May 2015purpose of providingfree-of-charge medical services via a voluntary medical centre established through a memorandum of understanding (MOU) between the Government of Zimbabwe and the funds were held in an account in Barclays Bank Pakistan, pendingorganisation. Neither the sale of Barclays Bank Pakistan to Habib Bank Ltd on 15 June 2015. A licence was granted by HMT to transfer the account to Habib Bank Ltd on 26 June 2015 (AFU/2015/015). The Barclays Bank PLC account holding the frozen funds was transferred to Habib Bank Ltd on 28 August 2015 in accordance with the licence. Barclays derived no revenue in relation to this account.

Review of designation

Mohammad Moinie, an existing customer, wasorganisation nor its officials are designated by OFAC as a Special Designated National (SDN) on 6 September 2013, under EO 13599. In April 2015 Barclaycard identified the customer as the SDN designated by OFAC.

A review of the customer’s account established the account was held in GBP. No US nexus was identified in relation to any transactions undertaken on the account. The relationship was exited at the customer’s request on 130 June 2015.2016. Barclays derived noearned less than £150 in revenue throughout its relationship with the customer.

IdentificationBarclays UK holds an account for aUK-based humanitarian organisation, which opened its office in Democratic People’s Republic of payments involving OFAC designated entity

In 2015,Korea in 2003 and implemented a small project. Barclays identified thathas processednon-USD payments to its customer,fund the office in North Korea and the projects that are run out of the office, which work to improve the lives of children in North Korea. The beneficiary bank is listed under the NPWMD regime. Barclays earned £70 in revenue from the activity.

Barclays holds a media company, had potentially beenrelationship with HMRC, a government agency which received indirectlyfunds from Press TV via a third partyan OFAC SDN on the SDGT list in relation to a weekly news show on Press TV. Press TV is designatedthe settlement of tax liabilities with the UK Government. The payment was received by Barclays and credited to the HMRC account. The payment activity was covered by licenses issued by OFAC dueand HM Treasury. Barclays earned £40 in revenue from the activity.

Barclays processed a payment of £106.13 from a UK resident customer, which was ultimately remitted to itsthe Iranian government ownership. Payments totalling GBP 138,040.00 have been receivedEmbassy in Russia. The funds relating to the original transaction were settled by anon-Barclays related merchant acquirer, which was subsequently reimbursed by Barclays. No direct monies were paid to the customer from that third party since April 2013. The accounts of the customer and associated personsIranian Government by Barclays. Revenues earned by Barclays in 2016 were closed in February 2016. Revenue derived in 2015 from all account activity was less than £250.negligible.

 

 

Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  331


Additional information

Payment relating to exports to Iran

In April 2015 Barclays established that it had processed an inbound US dollar payment on 27 October 2014, for which the ultimate remitter was located in Iran. The transaction related to the export of video surveillance products from the UK to Iran, for use on commercial aircraft belonging to state owned entity, ATA Airlines, located in Iran.

A voluntary disclosure of the possible violation of the Iranian Transactions Sanctions Regulations (31 CFR Part 560) under the Economic Sanctions Enforcement Procedures of OFAC, 31 CFR Part 501, Appendix A was made to OFAC on 22 October 2015. There were no US origin goods involved. Furthermore, there was no breach of UK/EU regulations as the payment was below reporting threshold and a UK licence was held for the export of the goods involved. Revenues earned by Barclays were less than GBP 10.00 in 2014, but the case was not identified for disclosure in the 20F filed in March 2015. No revenue was derived in 2015.

The customer’s transactional accounts are to be exited.

Ministry of Industry, Mine and Trade

During 2015, a payment from 2014 was identified as disclosable. The payment was from a London-based Barclays customer made a payment in favour of an entity in Kazakhstan called Joint Stock Company KTZ Express. The payment was stopped in sanctions screening due to a system match unrelated to Iran. However, it was subsequently released based on information provided by the customer that the final destination of the goods was Istanbul and that there was no direct or indirect involvement of any sanctioned countries.

A return of the funds was received in April 2014 from KTZ Express in favour of the Barclays customer and contained the reference “Prepayment return due to unperformed services”. The customer advised Barclays that the seller of the wheat was unable to supply the wheat and that the order was never fulfilled. In response to a Barclays request, the US correspondent bank supplied a copy of the invoice which showed the Government of Iran (the Ministry of Industry, Mine and Trade) as the intended recipient of the wheat and appears to show the customer was acting on behalf of the Government of Iran.

Less than GBP 10.00 of revenue was derived by Barclays in 2014. No revenue was derived in 2015.

332338  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 20152016 Annual Report on Form 20-F  


Additional information

Summary of Certain Share and Cash Plans and Long-Term Incentive PlansInformation

    

    

 

 

Summary of Barclays Group share and cash plans and long-term incentive plans

Barclays operates a number of share, and cash plans and long-term incentive plans. The principal plans used for awards made in or, in respect of, the 20152016 performance year are shown in the table below. Awards are granted either by the plan trustee or by the Board Remuneration Committee, and are subject to the applicable plan rules. Barclays has a number of employee benefit trusts which operate with these plans. In some cases the trustee purchases shares in the market to satisfy awards; in others, new issue or treasury shares may be used to satisfy awards where the appropriate shareholder approval has been obtained. Maria Ramos, a member of the Executive Committee and Chief Executive of Barclays Africa Group Limited, also participates in share and cash plans and long-term incentive plans of Barclays Africa Group Limited.

 

 

Summary of principal share and cash plans and long-term incentive plans

 

 

Name of plan

 

  

Eligible

employees

 

  

 

Executive

Directors

eligible

 

  

Delivery

 

    

Design details

 

 

Deferred Share Value Plan (SVP)(DSVP)

  

 

All employees (including executive(excluding Directors)

  

 

YesNo

  

 

Deferred share bonus typically released in annual instalments over a three, five or seven year period, dependent on future service and subject to malus provisions

    

 

–  Plan typically used for mandatory deferral of a proportion of bonus into Barclays shares where bonus is above a threshold (set annually by the Committee)

 

–  This plan typically works in tandem with the CVP

 

–  Deferred share bonus vests over three, five or seven years in equal annual instalments dependent on future service

 

–  Vesting is subject to malus, and suspension provisions and the other provisions of the rules of the plan

 

–  Dividend equivalents may be released based on the number of shares under award that are released

 

–  On cessation of employment, eligible leavers normally remain eligible for release (on the scheduled release dates) subject to the Committee and/or trustee discretion. For other leavers, awards will normally lapse

 

–  On change of control, awards may vest at the Committee’s and/or trustee’s discretion

 

–  For SVP awards made in 2015respect of 2016 to materialMaterial Risk Takers (“MRTs”), a holding period of 6 months will apply to shares (after tax) on release

 

Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2016 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  339


Additional information

Share Value Plan (SVP)

All employees (including executive Directors)

Yes

Deferred share bonus typically released in annual instalments over a three, five or seven year period, dependent on future service and subject to malus provisions

–  The SVP is in all material respects the same as the DSVP described above. The principle differences are that executive Directors may only participate in the SVP and under the DSVP, if a MRT whose award is deferred over five or seven years resigns after the third anniversary of grant, they will be treated as an eligible leaver in respect of any unvested tranches of that award.

 

Cash Value Plan (CVP)

  

 

All employees (excluding executive Directors)(excludingDirectors)

  

 

No

  

 

Deferred cash bonus paid in annual instalments over a three, five or seven year period, dependent on future service and subject to malus provisions

    

 

–  Plan typically used for mandatory deferral of a proportion of bonus where bonus is above a threshold (set annually by the Committee)

 

–  This plan typically works in tandem with the SVPDSVP

 

–  Deferred cash bonus vests over three years in equal annual instalments dependent on future service

 

–  Vesting is subject to malus, suspension provisions and the other provisions of the rules of the plan

 

–  Participants may be awarded a service credit of 10% of the initial value of the award aton the same time as the final instalment is paid (provided they are in active employment)third anniversary of a grant

 

–  Change of control and leaver provisions are as for SVP

 

Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  333


Additional information

Summary of Certain Share and Cash Plans and Long-Term Incentive Plans

 

Barclays LTIP

  

 

Selected employees (including executive Directors)

  

 

Yes

  

 

Awards over Barclays shares or over other capital instruments, subject to risk-adjusted performance conditions and malus provisions

    

 

–  Awarded on a discretionary basis with participation reviewed by the Committee

 

–  Awards only vest if the risk-adjusted performance conditions are satisfied over a three year period

 

–  Vesting is subject to malus, suspension provisions and the other provisions of the rules of the plan

 

–  For awards made for the 2013-2015 performance period, 50% of anyAny Barclays shares released under the Barclays LTIP award (after payment of tax) will be subject to an additional two year holdingholder period of no less than the minimum regulatory requirements (currently 6 months).

 

–  For awards made for the 2014-2016 performance period, any Barclays shares released (after payment of tax) will be subject to an additional two year holding period

–  For the awards made for 2015-2017, any Barclays shares released (after payment of tax) will be subject to an additional two year holder period.

–  On cessation of employment, eligible leavers normally remain eligible for release (on the scheduled release dates)pro-rated for time and performance. For other leavers, awards will normally lapse

 

–  On change of control, awards may vest at the Committee’s discretion

 

Business Unit Long-Term Incentive Plans

Selected senior

employees

(excluding

executive Directors)

within each

business unit

No

Design varies by business unit. Awards made after at least three years, with additional deferral

after this period. Awards typically made 50% in cash and 50% in Barclays share awards

–  Participation on a discretionary basis

–  Risk-adjusted performance conditions vary by business unit to reflect applicable business strategy

–  Minimum plan duration is between three and five years (depending on plan)

–  Award is subject to malus provisions and provisions of the plan rules

–  Participation may cease if the participant leaves Barclays other than for eligible leaver reasons

–  No new awards under business unit long-term incentive plans are expected to be made in 2016

Sharesave

All employees in the UK and Ireland

Yes

Options over Barclays shares at a

–  HMRC approved in the UK and approved by the Revenue Commissioners in Ireland

 

334340  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 20152016 Annual Report on Form 20-F  


Additional information

Summary of Certain Share and Cash Plans and Long-Term Incentive Plans

    

 

 

Sharesave  All employees in the UK and Ireland  Yes  

Options over Barclays shares at a discount of 20%, with shares or cash value of savings delivered after three to five years

    

–  HMRC tax advantaged plan in the UK and approved by the Revenue Commissioners in Ireland

 

–  Opportunity to purchase Barclays shares at a discount price (currently a 20% discount) set on award date with savings made over three, five or seven year term

 

–  Maximum individual savings of £250 per month (315 in Ireland)

 

–  On cessation of employment, eligible leavers may exercise options and acquire shares to the extent of their savings for six months

 

–  On change of control, participants may exercise options and acquire shares to the extent of their savings for six months

 

–  At 31 December 2015, executive Directors and officers of Barclays PLC (involving 32 persons) held options to purchase a total of 17,206 (2014: 30,398) Barclays PLC ordinary shares of 25p each at prices ranging from 133.01p to 178p under Sharesave. The expiry dates on these options range from 1 May 2016 to May 1 2019.

 

 

Sharepurchase

  

 

All employees in the UK

  

 

Yes

  

 

Barclays shares and dividend/matching shares held in trust for three to five years

    

 

–  HMRC approvedtax advantaged plan

 

–  Participants may purchase up to £1,800 of Barclays shares each tax year

 

–  Barclays matches the first £600 of shares purchased by employees on a one for one basis for each tax year

 

–  Dividends received are awarded as additional shares

 

–  Purchased shares may be withdrawn at any time (though if removed prior to three years from award, the corresponding matching shares are forfeited).

 

–  On cessation of employment, participants must withdraw shares

 

–  Depending on reason for and timing of leaving, matching shares may be forfeited

 

–  On change of control, participants are able to instruct the Sharepurchase trustee how to act or vote on their behalf

 

Global Sharepurchase

  

 

Employees in certainnon-UK jurisdictions

  

 

Yes

  

 

Barclays shares and dividend/matching shares held in trust for three to five years

    

 

–  Global Sharepurchase is an extension of the Sharepurchase plan offered in the UK

 

–  Operates in substantially the same way as Sharepurchase (see above)

 

 

  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 20152016 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  335341


Barclays’ approach to managing risks

Contents

Barclays’ approach to managing risks

Page
Risk management strategy, governance and risk culture343
Management of credit risk and the internal ratings-based approach352
Management of credit risk mitigation techniques and counterparty credit risk368
Management of market risk372
Management of securitisation exposures380
Management of Treasury and Capital Risk384
Management of operational risk392
Management of model risk396
Management of conduct risk398
Management of reputation risk400
Management of legal risk402

 

 

 

 

 

Barclays’ approach to managing risksLOGO

 

LOGO

Risk management

strategy, governance

342  |  Barclays PLC and risk culture

LOGOBarclays Bank PLC 2016 Annual Report on Form 20-F  


In this section we describe the approaches and strategies forBarclays’ approach to managing risks at Barclays. It contains information on how

Risk management strategy, governance and risk management functions are organised, how they ensure their independence and foster a sound risk culture throughout the organisation.

        

 

In this section we describe the approaches and strategies for managing risks at Barclays. It contains information on how risk management functions are organised, how they ensure their independence and foster a sound risk culture throughout the organisation.

§

A discussion of how our risk management strategy is designed to foster a strong risk culture is contained on pages 337 and 338
347 to 348

 

§

A governance structure, encompassing the organisation of the function as well as executive and Board committees, supports the continued application of the Enterprise Risk Management Framework (ERMF). This is discussed in pages 338345 to 341
346

 

§

The ERMF sets out the tools, techniques and organisational arrangements to ensure all material risks are identified and understood (see pages 344 and 345)
page 344)

 

§

Pages 346348 to 353351 describe group-wide risk management tools that support risk management, ExCo and the Board in discharging their responsibilities, and how they are applied in the strategic planning cycle.

 


Barclays’ approach to managing risks

Risk management strategy, governance and risk culture

 

This section outlines the Group’s strategy for managing risk and how risk culture has been developed to ensure that there is a set of objectives and practices which are shared across the Group. It provides details of the Group’s governance, specific information on policies that the Group determines to be of particular significance in the current operating environment, committee structures and how responsibilities are assigned. The last part of the section provides an insight into how risk management is part of the strategy setting process, including the planning process, the setting of risk appetite and stress testing across the Group.

Risk Management Strategy

The Group has clear risk management objectives and a well-established strategy to deliver them through core risk management processes.

At a strategic level, the Group’s risk management objectives are to:

 

§identify the Group’s significant risks

LOGO

§formulate the Group’s risk appetite and ensure that business profile and plans are consistent with it

§optimise risk/return decisions by taking them as close as possible to the business, while establishing strong and independent review and challenge structures

§ensure that business growth plans are properly supported by effective risk infrastructure

§manage risk profile to ensure that specific financial deliverables remain achievable under a range of adverse business conditions

§help executives improve the control and co-ordination of risk taking across the business.

A key element in the setting of clear management objectives is the Enterprise Risk Management Framework (ERMF), which sets out key activities, tools, techniques and organisational arrangements so that material risks facing the Group are identified and understood, and that appropriate responses are in place to protect Barclays and prevent detriment to its customers, employees or community. This will help the Group meet its goals, and enhance its ability to respond to new opportunities.

The ERMF covers those risks incurred by the Group that were foreseeable, continuous, and sufficiently material to merit establishing specific Group-wide control frameworks. These are known as Principal and Key Risks (see Principal and Key Risks on page 345 for more information).

LOGO

The aim of the risk management process is to provide a structured, practical and easily understood set of three steps - Evaluate, Respond and Monitor (the E-R-M process) - that enables management to identify and assess risks, determine the appropriate risk response, and then monitor the effectiveness of the risk response and changes to the risk profile.

§ Evaluate: risk evaluation must be carried out by those individuals, teams and departments who manage the underlying operational or business process, and so are best placed to identify and assess the potential risks, and also include those responsible for delivering the objectives under review.

§ Respond: the appropriate risk response effectively and efficiently ensures that risks are kept within appetite, which is the level of risk that the Group is prepared to accept while pursuing its business strategy. There are three types of response: i) accept the risk but take necessary mitigating actions such as use of risk controls; ii) stop the existing activity/do not start the proposed activity; or iii) continue the activity but transfer risks to another party via use of insurance.

§Monitor: once risks have been identified and measured, and controls put in place, progress towards objectives must be tracked. Monitoring must be ongoing and can prompt re-evaluation of the risks and/or changes in responses. Monitoring must be carried out proactively. In addition to “reporting”, it includes ensuring risks are maintained within risk appetite and checking that controls are functioning as intended and remain fit for purpose.

 

 

  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 20152016 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  337343


Barclays’ approach to managing risks

Risk management strategy, governance and risk culture

        

 

 

Introduction

Barclays engages in activities which entail risk taking, every day, throughout its business. This section introduces these risks, and outlines key governance arrangements for managing them. These include roles and responsibilities, frameworks, policies and standards, assurance and lessons learned processes. The Group’s approach to fostering a strong Risk Culture is also described.

Enterprise Risk Management Framework (ERMF)

The process is orientated around material risks impacting delivery ofGroup has clear risk management objectives and is useda strategy to promote an efficient and effective approach to risk management. This three stepdeliver them through core risk management process:processes. The ERMF sets the strategic direction by defining clear standards, objectives and responsibilities for all areas of Barclays. It supports the CEO and CRO in embedding effective risk management and a strong Risk Culture.

The ERMF sets out:

 

§ can bePrincipal Risks faced by the group

§Risk Appetite requirements

§Roles and responsibilities for risk management

§Risk Committee structure.

A revised ERMF was approved by the Board in December 2016. This includes a revised risk taxonomy comprising eight Principal Risks. Credit, market, funding, operational and conduct Risk have been aligned to this new taxonomy and the management of these risks has not materially changed. Model Risk, Reputation Risk and Legal Risk are newly classified as Principal Risks in the latest version of the ERMF, reflecting the heightened importance of these risk types in the current environment. In 2016, Model Risk was managed in accordance with dedicated policies linked to the ERMF. These policies supplemented the key risk control frameworks underlying the financial risk types and applied to all businesses and functions in which financial risks were incurred or managed. Reputation Risk was considered as part of Conduct Risk and Legal Risk was included as asub-risk type under Operational Risk. In this Annual Report, the Risk Management sections (page 344 to 403) follows the new Principal Risk taxonomy of eight risks, reflecting our current approach to risk management. The Risk Performance sections follow the Principal Risk taxonomy (of five risks) which prevailed during 2016. Information on Reputation Risk Performance in 2016 is included as part of the Conduct Risk section (page 180), information on Legal Risk performance in 2016 can be found in the Material existing and emerging risks section (page 88), the Supervision and regulation section (page 182) and Note 29 to the Financial Statements (page 272). The definition of the Three Lines of Defence and associated responsibilities were also revised. The ERMF also contains a revised governance structure, including new Group and Business Risk committees, with representation from the First and Second Lines of Defence.

Principal Risks

The ERMF identifies Principal Risks and sets out responsibilities and risk management standards. Note that Legal, Reputation and Model risks are Principal Risks from January 2017 following Board approval in December 2016.

Financial Principal Risks:

§Credit risk: The risk of loss to every objective at every levelthe firm from the failure of clients, customers or counterparties, including sovereigns, to fully honour their obligations to the firm, including the whole and timely payment of principal, interest, collateral and other receivables

§Market risk: The risk of loss arising from potential adverse changes in the bank, both top-downvalue of the firm’s assets and liabilities from fluctuation in market variables including, but not limited to, interest rates, foreign exchange, equity prices, commodity prices, credit spreads, implied volatilities and asset correlations
§Treasury and capital risk: This comprises:

–  Liquidity risk: The risk that the firm is unable to meet its contractual or contingent obligations or that it does not have the appropriate amount, tenor and composition of funding and liquidity to support its assets

–  Capital risk: The risk that the firm has an insufficient level or composition of capital to support its normal business activities and to meet its regulatory capital requirements under normal operating environments or stressed conditions (both actual and as defined for internal planning or regulatory testing purposes). This includes the risk from the firm’s pension plans

–  Interest rate risk in the banking book: The risk that the firm is exposed to capital or income volatility because of a mismatch between the interest rate exposures of its(non-traded) assets and liabilities

Non-Financial Principal Risks:

§Operational risk: The risk of loss to the firm from inadequate or bottom-upfailed processes or systems, human factors or due to external events (for example fraud) where the root cause is not due to credit or market risks.

§Model risk: The risk of the potential adverse consequences from financial assessments or decisions based on incorrect or misused model outputs and reports

§Reputation risk: The risk that an action, transaction, investment or event will reduce trust in the firm’s integrity and competence by clients, counterparties, investors, regulators, employees or the public

§Conduct risk: The risk of detriment to customers, clients, market integrity, competition or Barclays from the inappropriate supply of financial services, including instances of wilful or negligent misconduct

§Legal risk: The risk of loss or imposition of penalties, damages or fines from the failure of the firm to meet its legal obligations including regulatory or contractual requirements

Risk Appetite for the Principal Risks

Risk Appetite is defined as the level of risk which the firm is prepared to accept in the conduct of its activities. The Risk Appetite of the firm:

§specifies the level of risk we are willing to take and why, to enable specific risk taking activities

§considers all Principal Risks individually and, where appropriate, in aggregate

§communicates the acceptable level of risk for different risk types; this may be expressed in financial ornon-financial terms, and is measured and effectively monitored

§describes agreed parameters for the firm’s performance under varying levels of financial stress with respect to profitability

 

§ is embedded intoconsidered in key decision-making processes, including business planning, mergers and acquisitions, new product approvals and business change initiatives.

Risk Appetite is approved and disseminated across legal entities and businesses, including by use of Mandate and Scale limits to enable and control specific activities that have material concentration risk implications for the firm. These limits also help reduce the likelihood and size ofone-off losses. The Risk Appetite must be formally reviewed on at least an annual frequency in conjunction with the Medium Term Planning (MTP) process and approved by the Board.

344  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2016 Annual Report on Form 20-F


Barclays’ approach to managing risks

Risk management strategy, governance and risk culture

Roles and responsibilities in the management of risk – the Three Lines of Defence

All colleagues have a responsibility to contribute to the risk management of the group. These responsibilities are set out in the “Three Lines of Defence”. In 2016 these definitions were simplified. Regardless of their function, all teams who manage processes in the firm are responsible for designing, implementing, remediating, monitoring and testing the controls for those processes.

First Line of Defence:

The First Line comprises all employees engaged in the revenue generating and client facing areas of the firm and all associated support functions, including Finance, Treasury, Technology and Operations, Human Resources etc. Employees in the first line are responsible for:

§identifying all the business decision making processrisks in the activities in which they are engaged, and developing appropriate policies, standards and controls to govern their activities

 

§ guidesoperating within any and all limits which the Group’s response to changesRisk and Compliance functions establish in connection with the external or internal environment in which existing activities are conductedRisk Appetite of the firm

 

§ involves all staffescalating risk events to senior managers and all three lines of defence (see pages 343Risk and 344).Compliance.

Internal controls are critical to running a cost-effective and stable business. To ensure these controls remain strong, sustainable, and efficient the new strategic position of Chief Controls Officer has been created. The Chief Controls Office will help to maintain and enhance an effective and consistent control framework across the organisation.

The first line must establish their own policies and controls (subject to the Controls Framework of the firm), particularly with respect to operational activities, and require their colleagues to manage all controls to specified tolerances. These control-related activities are also considered First Line and are permitted so long as they are within any applicable limits established by Risk or Compliance. All activities in the first line are subject to oversight from the relevant parts of the second and third lines.

Governance structureSecond Line of Defence:

Employees of Risk exists whenand Compliance comprise the outcomeSecond Line of taking a particular decision or courseDefence. The role of actionthe Second Line is uncertainto establish the limits, rules and could potentially impact whether, or how well,constraints under which first line activities shall be performed, consistent with the Risk Appetite of the firm, and to monitor the performance of the First Line against these limits and constraints.

The Second Line may not establish limits for all First Line activities, especially those related to Operational Risk. The controls for these will ordinarily be established by Controls Officers operating within the Controls Framework of the firm, under the oversight of the Second Line.

The Second Line can also undertake certain additional activities if, in the judgement of the Group delivers on its objectives.CRO, this will reduce the firm’s exposure to risk.

Third Line of Defence:

Employees of Internal Audit comprise the Third Line of Defence. They provide independent assurance to the Board and Executive Management over the effectiveness of governance, risk management and control over current, systemic and evolving risks.

The Group faces risks throughout its business, every day,Legal department does not sit in everything it does. Some risks are taken after appropriate consideration – such as lending moneyany of the three lines, but supports them all. The Legal department is, however, subject to a customer. Other risks may ariseoversight from unintended consequences of internal actions, for example an IT system failure or poor sales practices. Finally, some risks are the result of events outside the Group but which impact its business – such as major exposure through trading or lendingRisk and Compliance, with respect to a market counterparty which later fails.Operational and Conduct Risks.

All employees must play their partRoles and responsibilities in the Group’smanagement of risk management, regardless of position, function or location. All employees are required to be familiar with risk management policies that arecommittees

Business Risk Committees consider Risk matters relevant to their activities, know howbusiness, and escalate as required to escalate actual or potential risk issues,the Group Risk Committee (GRC), whose Chairman in turn escalates to Board Committees and have a role-appropriate level of awareness of the ERMF (see Risk governance and assigning responsibilities for more information on page 343), risk management processes and governance arrangements.Board.

Furthermore, from March 2016 members of the Board, Executive Committee and a limited number of specified senior individuals will be subject to additional rules included within the Senior Managers Regime (SMR), which clarifies their accountability and responsibilities. Members of the SMR are held to four additional specific rules of conduct in which they must:

§take reasonable steps to ensure that the Group is effectively controlled

§take reasonable steps to ensure that the Group complies with relevant regulatory requirements and standards

§take reasonable steps to ensure that any delegated responsibilities are to the appropriate individual and that the delegated responsibilities are effectively discharged

§disclose appropriately any information to the FCA or PRA, which they would reasonably expect to made aware of.

There are three keyfive Board-level forumsfora which review and monitor risk across the Group. These are: The main Board, itself, the Board Risk Committee, the Board Audit Committee, the Board Reputation Committee and the Board ReputationRemuneration Committee.

The Chairman of each Committee prepares a statement each year on the committee’s activities, which is included in the governance section.

LOGO

The Board

One of the Board’s (Board of Directors of Barclays PLC) responsibilities is the approval of risk appetiteRisk Appetite (see the Risk Management and Strategy section on page 346)348), which is the level of risk the Group chooses to take in pursuit of its business objectives. The Chief Risk OfficerGroup CRO (GCRO) regularly presents a report to the Board summarising developments in the risk environment and performance trends in the key portfolios. The Board is also responsible for the Internal Control and Assurance Framework (Group Control Framework).ERMF. It oversees the management of the most significant risks through regular review of risk exposures and related key controls.exposures. Executive management responsibilities relating to this are set out in the ERMF.

 

338  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F


Barclays’ approach to managing risks

Risk management strategy, governance and risk culture

LOGO

The Board Risk Committee (BRC)

The BRC monitors the Group’s risk profile against the agreed financial appetite. Where actual performance differs from expectations, the actions being taken by management are reviewed to ensure that the BRC is comfortable with them. After each meeting, the ChairChairman of the BRC prepares a report for the next meeting of the Board. All members are non-executive Directors.independent executive directors. The Group Finance Director (GFD) and the Chief Risk Officer (CRO)GCRO attend each meeting as a matter of course.

The BRC also considers the Group’s risk appetite statement for operational risk and evaluates the Group’s operational risk profile and operational risk monitoring.

Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2016 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  345


Barclays’ approach to managing risks

Risk management strategy, governance and risk culture

The BRC receives regular and comprehensive reports on risk methodologies, the effectiveness of the risk management framework, and the Group’s risk profile, including the key issues affecting each business portfolio and forward risk trends. The Committee also commissionsin-depth analyses of significant risk topics, which are presented by the CRO or senior risk managers in the businesses. The Chair of the Committee prepares a statement each year on its activities.

The Board Audit Committee (BAC)

The BAC receives regular reports on the effectiveness of internal control systems, quarterly reports on material control issues of significance, and quarterly papers on accounting judgements (including impairment). It also receives a half-yearly review of the adequacy of impairment allowances, which it reviews relative to the risk inherent in the portfolios, the business environment, the Group’s policies and methodologies and the performance trends of peer banks. The Chairman of the BAC also sits on the BRC.

The Board Reputation Committee (RepCo)

The RepCo reviews management’s recommendations on conduct and reputational risk and the effectiveness of the processes by which the Group identifies and manages these risks. It also reviews and monitors the effectiveness of Barclays’ Citizenship strategy, including the management of Barclays’ economic, social and environmental contribution.

In addition, the Board Audit and Board Remuneration Committees receive regular risk reports to assist them in the undertaking of their duties.

The Board Audit Committee (BAC)

The BAC receives regular reports on the effectiveness of internal control systems, quarterly reports on material control issues of significance, and quarterly papers on accounting judgements (including impairment). It also receives a quarterly review of the adequacy of impairment allowances, which it reviews relative to the risk inherent in the portfolios, the business environment, the Group’s policies and methodologies and the performance trends of peer banks. The Chairman of the BAC also sits on the BRC.

The Board Remuneration Committee (RemCo)

The RemCo receives a detailed report on risk management performance from the BRC, regular updates on the risk profile and proposals for the on anex-ante andex-post risk adjustments to variable remuneration. These inputs are considered in the setting of performance incentives.

SummariesCoverage of risk reports to executive and Board risk committees

Chairs of Risk Committees at executive and Board levels specify the information they require to discharge their duties. Advance committee calendars are agreed with the committee chairman. Topics that are regularly covered include:

§Financial and Operational risk profile

§Risk perspective on medium-term plans and strategy

§Risk Appetite

§Results of stress tests, including CCAR

§Risk inputs into remuneration decisions

§Other technical topics, e.g. Model risk.

In addition to regular topics, committees consider ad hoc papers on current risk topics, such as:

§Political events and their potential impacts on Barclays and its customers

§Economic developments in major economies or sectors

§Impacts of key market developments on the risk management of the firm.

Reports are generally presented by CROs or other accountable executives. Occasionally subject matter experts are delegated to present specific topics of interest. Report presenters are responsible for ensuring the processes for creating reports include appropriate controls and that these are operated effectively.

Roles and responsibilities in the management of risk – senior management

Certain roles within Barclays carry specific responsibilities and accountabilities with respect to risk management and the ERMF.

Group CEO Officer (CEO)

The CEO is accountable for leading the development of Barclays’ strategy and business plans that align to our Goal, Purpose and Values within the approved Risk Appetite, and for managing and organising executive management to ensure these are executed. Managing Barclays’ financial and operational performance within the approved Risk Appetite is ultimately the CEO’s responsibility.

Specifically a crucial role of the relevantCEO is to appoint the most senior Risk owners at the executive level including the Chief Risk Officer, Chief Compliance Officer and Group General Counsel, and all Chief Executive officers of business professionalunits. He must work with them to embed a strong Risk Culture within the firm, with particular regard to the identification, escalation and management of risk management experiencematters.

Group Chief Risk Officer (CRO)

The Group CRO leads the Risk Function across Barclays. His responsibilities include developing and maintaining the ERMF and to clearly articulate Risk Culture objectives. Specific accountabilities include:

§preparing and recommending the firm’s Risk Appetite to the Board Risk Committees

§developing, operating and maintaining a comprehensive risk management framework for Barclays to monitor and manage the risk profile of the firm against the approved Risk Appetite

§providing accurate, transparent and timely reporting to the Board that compares the Risk Appetite set for Barclays and the businesses (by risk type and in aggregate where appropriate), against the actual Risk Profile of the firm under normal and stressed scenarios

§defining the risk taxonomy (Principal Risks) and ensuring it remains relevant and comprehensive

§bringing a risk perspective to compensation decisions

§reporting to the Group Wide Risk Committee, the Group Executive Committee, the Board and its relevant committees including the Board Risk Committee, regulators and other stakeholders on Barclays’ risk positions, adherence to Risk Appetite and enterprise wide risk and control.

Chief Compliance Officer

The Chief Compliance Officer is accountable to the Group CEO for the oversight of regulated activities undertaken by the Directors ofGroup, and leads the Board are presented in the Board of Directors section on pages 3 and 4 of the 2015 Form 20-F. The terms of reference and additional details on membership and activities for each of the principal Board Committees are available from the Corporate Governance section at: home.barclays/corporategovernance.Compliance Function across Barclays. Specific accountabilities include:

§ensuring the Group’s Conduct and Reputation Risks are effectively managed and escalated to the Board where appropriate

§setting minimum standards through compliance policies applicable globally and monitoring breaches, specially for Conduct and Reputation Risks and Financial Crime

§inputting into compensation structures, objectives and performance management of employees who can expose Barclays to significant risk

§ensuring there is a robust whistleblowing process in place on an enterprise wide basis and for ensuring it is effectively managed

§using mandate to access any part of the organisation and any information, bringing to the attention of line and senior management or the Board, as appropriate, any situation that is of concern from a Conduct or Reputation Risk management perspective of that could materially violate approve Risk Appetite guidelines.

 

346  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 20152016 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  339


Barclays’ approach to managing risks

Risk management strategy, governance and risk culture

 

 

LOGO

The CRO is a member of the Executive Committee and has overall day-to-day accountability for risk management under delegated authority from the Chief Executive Officer (CEO). The CEO is accountable for proposing a risk appetite that underpins the strategic plan to the Board for approval, and the CRO is responsible for providing oversight, advice and challenge to the CEO, and preparing and recommending the Group’s risk appetite to the CEO and the Board. Risk appetite therefore sets the ‘tone from the top’ and provides a basis for ongoing dialogue between management and Board level around the Group’s current and evolving risk profile.

The CRO manages the independent risk function and chairs the Financial Risk Committee (FRC) and the Operational Risk Review Forum (ORRF), which monitor the Group’s financial and non-financial risk profile relative to agreed risk appetite. Principal Risk Officers (PROs), reporting to the CRO and supported by Key Risk Officers (KROs) where appropriate, are responsible for establishing a Group-wide framework for oversight of the relevant risks and controls. Their teams liaise with each business as part of the monitoring and management processes.

In addition, each business has an embedded risk management function, headed by a Business Chief Risk Officer (BCRO). BCROs and their teams are responsible for assisting business heads in the identification and management of their business risk profiles and for implementing appropriate controls. These teams also assist Central Risk in the formulation of Group policies and their implementation across the businesses. The BCROs’ report jointly to the CRO and to their respective business heads.

The Risk Executive Committee is responsible for the effectiveness and efficiency of risk management and embedding a strong risk culture, approval of the Group’s risk governance framework, and agreement and endorsement of the overall infrastructure strategy for the risk function. It is also the senior decision making forum for the risk function, excluding matters relating to the risk profile. It is chaired by the CRO with a membership comprising senior risk management.

The CEO must consult the Chairman of the BRC in respect of the CRO’s performance appraisal and compensation, as well as all appointments to or departures from the role.

340  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F


Barclays’ approach to managing risksGeneral Counsel

Risk management strategy, governance and risk culture

The Group Treasurer heads the Group Treasury function and chairs the Treasury Committee which:

§manages the Group’s liquidity, maturity transformation and structural interest rate exposure through the setting of policies and controls

§monitors the Group’s liquidity and interest rate maturity mismatch

§monitors usage of regulatory and economic capital

§has oversight of the management of the Group’s capital plan.

The Head of Compliance chairs the Conduct and Reputation Risk Committee (CRRC) which assesses the quality of the application of the Reputation and Conduct Risk Control Frameworks. It also recommends conduct risk appetite, sets policies to ensure consistent adherence to that appetite, and reviews known and emerging reputational and conduct related risks to consider if actionGeneral Counsel is required.

Barclays’ risk culture

In Barclays, risk culture refers to the combination of the individual and collective norms, values, attitudes and behaviours of all of employees, in relation their awareness of risk, and how they take and manage risk.

The taking of risk is a fundamental part of banking, and so for Barclays to be successful it must have good risk management practices underpinned by a strong risk culture. To ensure that this is achieved all colleagues are required to:

 

§understand that risk management is important in all of our activities

§have an awarenessDevelop and sensitivity tomaintain the risk issues which could arise in their individual roles

§take risk issues and considerations fully into account, before taking decisions and acting

§have good practices on how they manage risk on an ongoing basis as appropriate:

recognise when they are taking risk

discuss and debate risks

take action to manage and mitigate risks

escalate risks where necessary

identify areas for improvement and learn from mistakes

seek to remediate and improve how we manage risk.

§Value and promote these habits, practices and behaviours.

There is a focus on four key areas that evidence a strong risk culture: tone from the top; accountability; effective communication and challenge; and incentives.

Tone from the top

Leaders should demonstrate through their everyday behaviours the importance of strong risk management and ensure that their teams have sufficient resource and capability to manage the risk environment.

Achieving good outcomes for customer and clients is central to colleagues’ approach to managing risk and managers will ensure that their teams identify and resolve risk issues within agreed timeframes and learn from mistakes to avoid repeating them.

Accountability

Barclays has implemented and operates a strong Risk Governance framework and ensures that colleagues understand the business processes, as well as the associated risks relevant to their role and the level of risk they can take, which is consistent with the Group’s risk appetite.

Colleagues must actively manage risk, believe it is the right thing to do and take personal responsibility for risk management issues.

Effective Communication and Challenge

Barclays ensures that colleagues feel empowered and supported to raise issues and that those issues are then appropriately escalated, investigated and reported.

Incentives

The Group’s desired risk management behaviours are supported by appropriate recruitment, performance, reward and promotion decisions. It also ensures that wrong behaviour is defined and that there are visible consequences to such actions.

Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  341


Barclays’ approach to managing risks

Risk management strategy, governance and risk culture

Sustaining a sound risk culture

Barclays uses a variety of tools to sustain its risk culture including, for example, employee training, semi-annual performance reviews and adjustments to compensation. Employees are provided with regular role-specific mandatory quarterly training courses, which deliver training across the breadth of risk topics; with further optional training courses continuously available.

Semi-annual performance reviews include an assessment of risk and control performance, which is also considered as part of promotion decisions, particularly to Managing Director.

Risk performance is also measured (in the form of employee breaches and any involvement in other risk events) and taken into consideration for compensation purposes.

Risk Appetite and the ‘Tone from the top’

Communicating and enforcing risk appetite in all businesses creates a common understanding and fosters debate around what types of risks are acceptable, and what levels of risk are appropriate at business and Group level.

To develop a consistently strong risk culture across the Group, clear statements have been communicated as to the Group risk appetite for all risk types. In particular, risk appetite:

§articulates the types and level of risk we are willing to take and why, to enable specific risk taking activities. It also specifies those risks the Group seeks to avoid and why, to constrain specific risk taking activitiesLegal Risk Framework

 

§ is embedded within key decision-making processes including business planning, mergers and acquisitions, new product approvals and business change initiativesDefine the Legal Risk Policies

 

§ providesDevelop the Group-wide and Business Risk Appetite for Legal Risk.

Senior Managers Regime

A number of Members of the Board, the majority of the Executive Committee and a limited number of specified senior individuals are also subject to additional rules included within the Senior Managers Regime (SMR), which clarifies their accountability and responsibilities. Those designated with a Senior Manager Function under the SMR are held to four specific rules of conduct in which they must:

1.take reasonable steps to ensure that the business of the firm for which they are responsible is controlled effectively

2.take reasonable steps to ensure that the business of the firm for which they are responsible complies with relevant regulatory requirements and standards of the regulatory system

3.take reasonable steps to ensure that any delegation of their responsibilities is to an appropriate individual and that they oversee the discharge of the delegated responsibilities effectively

4.disclose appropriately any information to the FCA or PRA, which they would reasonably expect notice.

The SMR applies to specific legal entities. Within Barclays, the legal entities which are subject to the SMR are Barclays Bank PLC, Barclays Capital Securities Limited and Barclays Bank Trust Company Limited and the reference to “firm” above should be construed accordingly

Frameworks, Policies and Standards

Frameworks, policies and standards set out the governance around Barclays’ activities:

§Frameworks cover the management processes for a framework for performance managementcollection of related activities and disciplinary consequences in cases of breachdefine the associated policies used to govern them

 

§ is implemented underPolicies set out control objectives, principles and other core requirements for the direct leadershipactivities of the CEO, who is responsible for leading, managing and organising executive management to achieve execution of the strategy and business plans in line with risk appetitefirm. Policies describe “what” must be done

 

§ is owned byStandards set out the Board.key controls that ensure the objectives set out in the Policy are met, and who needs to carry them out. Standards describe “how” controls should be undertaken.

Improvements toFrameworks, Policies and Standards are owned by the approach in 2015 have delivered further embedment withinarea responsible for performing the businesses,described activity. In particular, frameworks, policies and improved alignmentstandards associated with stress testing. See risk appetite on page 346the Principal Risks are owned and 347 for more information.

Supporting colleagues to manage risk – in the right way

By supporting colleagues to manage risk in the right way, the Group seeks to ensure that all risk managers share the Barclays’ Values and to promote a common understanding of the role that risk management plays:

§risk management capability and ability to act in a risk aware manner forms part of the assessment process for all new employees and promotion candidates globally

§management of risk and control is assessed as part of the annual performance appraisal process for all colleagues globally. Positive risk management behaviours will be rewarded

§the “Being Barclays” global induction programme supports new colleagues in understanding how risk management culture and practices support how the Group does business and the link to the Barclays’ values

§leadership master classes cover the building, sustaining and supporting a trustworthy organisation and are offered to colleagues globally.

Learning from our mistakes

Learning from mistakes is central to the Group’s culture and values, demonstrating a commitment to excellence, service and stewardship and taking accountability for failure as well as success. The Group seeks to learn lessons on a continuous basis to support achievement of strategic objectives; operational excellence and to meet commitments to stakeholders, including colleagues, customers, shareholders and regulators.

Barclays has implemented a Group Lessons Learnt Standard as part of the ERMF, setting out requirements for completing Lessons Learnt Assessments in response to significant events. The approach to Lessons Learnt builds on the process established for operational risk in

342  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F


Barclays’ approach to managing risks

Risk management strategy, governance and risk culture

2012 and fulfils the Group’s Salz commitmentswritten by ensuring a consistent and effective approach applicable to all Principal Risks. The approach is directly aligned to the three lines of defence model (see below), with businesses and functions accountable for undertaking lessons learnt assessments; Principal and Key Risk Officers providing input, oversight and challenge; with independent review by internal audit.

Core components of the Lessons Learnt approach include:

§defined triggers for when lessons learnt assessments must be completed

§requirements and guidance for root cause analysis to identify the causes of events within the Group

§templates to ensure conclusions are reported consistently throughout management committees

§a central system to record completed lessons learnt assessments and to facilitate sharing across the Group.

Since its launch at the end of 2014, Lessons Learnt approach continues to evolve and an enhanced approach will be launched in 2016.

Risk governance and assigning responsibilities

Responsibility for risk management resides at all levels of the Group, from the Board and the Executive Committee down through the organisation to each business manager and risk specialist. These responsibilities are distributed so that risk/return decisions are: taken at the most appropriate level; as close as possible to the business; and are subject to robust and effective review and challenge. Responsibility for effective review and challenges resides at all levels.

The ERMF articulates a clear, consistent, comprehensive and effective approach for the management of all risks within the Group and creates the context for setting standards and establishing the right practices throughout the Group. It sets out a philosophy and approach that is applicable to the whole bank, all colleagues and to all types of risk. The ERMF sets out the key activities required for all employees to operate Barclays’ risk and control environment with specific requirements for key individuals, including the CRO and CEO, and the overall governance framework designed to support its effective operation. See risk culture on page 341 for more information.

The ERMF supports risk management and control by ensuring that there is a:

§sustainable and consistent implementation of the three lines of defence across all businesses and functions

§clear segregation of activities and duties performed by colleagues across the whole bank

§framework for the management of Principal Risks

§consistent application of risk appetite across all Principal Risks

§clear and simple policy hierarchy.

Three lines of defence

The enterprise risk management process is the ‘defence’ and organising businesses and functions into three ‘lines’ enhances the E-R-M process by formalising independence and challenge, while still promoting collaboration and the flow of information between all areas. The three lines of defence operating model enables the Group to separate risk management activities:

First line: Manage operational and business processes; design, implement, operate, test and remediate controls

First line activities are characterised by:

§ownership of and direct responsibility for the Group’s returns or elements of its results

§ownership of major operations, systems and processes fundamental to the operation of the bank

§direct linkage of objective setting, performance assessment and reward to profit and loss performance.

With respect to risk management the first line responsibilities include:

§taking primary accountability for risk identification, ownership, management and control (including performance of portfolios, trading positions, operational risks etc.) within approved mandate, as documented under the Key Risk Control Frameworks, including embedding a supportive risk culture

Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  343


Barclays’ approach to managing risks

Risk management strategy, governance and risk culture

§collaborating with second line on implementing and improving risk management processes and controls

§monitoring the effectiveness of risk controls and the risk profile compared to the approved risk appetite

§maintaining an effective control environment across all risks, processes and operations arising from the business, including implementing standards to meet Group policies.

Second Line: Oversee and challenge the first line, and provide second line risk management activity.

Second line activities are characterised by:

§oversight, monitoring and challenge of the first line of defence activities

§design, ownership or operation of Key Risk Control Frameworks impacting the activities of the first line of defence

§operation of certain second line risk management activities (e.g. financial rescue of a firm)

§no direct linkage of objective setting, performance assessment and reward to revenue (measures related to mitigation of losses and balancing risk and reward are permissible).

With respect to risk management the second line of defence responsibilities include:defence.

§defining the ERMF

§establishing the policy architecture for the Key Risks, including KeyThe Group CRO is accountable for ensuring that frameworks, policies and associated standards are developed and implemented for each of the Financial Principal Risks, Operational Risk and Model Risk Control Frameworks, policies, and standards

§defining delegated discretions and setting limits within the control frameworks to empower risk taking by the first line

§assisting in setting the direction of the portfolio to achieve performance against risk appetite

§may define and operate approval processes for certain decisions within the second line to protect the Group from material risks

§communicating, educating and advising the first line on their understanding of the risk framework and its requirements

§collaborating with the first line to support business growth and drive an appropriate balance between risk and reward without diminishing the independence from the first line

§reporting on the effectiveness of the risk and control environment to executive management and Board committees.

Third line: Provide assurance that the E-R-M process is fit-for-purpose, and that it is being carried outthey are subject to limits, monitored, reported on and escalated as intended

Third line activities are characterised by:

§providing independent and timely assurance to the Board and Executive Management over the effectiveness of governance, risk management and control.

With respect to risk management the third line of defence responsibilities include:

§assessing the effectiveness of risk management and risk mitigation in the context of the current and expected business environment

§acting independently and objectively.

Following the annual review, in 2016, we have further refined the three lines of defence model by clarifying that responsibilities for risk management and control are defined in relation to the activities individuals undertake as part of their role.required. The three key activities are: “Setting Policy and Conformance” (second line); “Managing Operational or Business Process” (first and second line); and “Providing Independent Assurance” (third line). Second and third line activities have not changed, however we have emphasised the key responsibilities of the first line, which includes colleagues’ responsibility for understanding and owning the process end to end, and designing, operating, testing and remediating appropriate controls to manage those risks. Performed appropriately and by all colleagues, together these responsibilities will drive a stronger risk and control environment at Barclays, benefitting our customers, clients, shareholders and regulators.

344  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F


Barclays’ approach to managing risks

Risk management strategy, governance and risk culture

Principal and Key Risks

Principal Risks comprise individual Key Risks to allow for more granular analysis. As at 31 December 2015 the five Principal Risks were: i) Credit; ii) Market; iii) Funding; iv) Operational; and v) Conduct. Since the beginning of 2015, Reputation Risk has been recognised as a Key Risk within Conduct Risk given their close alignment and the fact that as separate Principal Risks they had a common Principal Risk Officer.

Risk management responsibilities for Principal and Key Risks are set out in the ERMF. The ERMF creates clear ownership and accountability; ensures the Group’s most significant risk exposures are understood and managed in accordance with agreed risk appetite and risk tolerances; and ensures regular reporting of risk exposures and control effectiveness.

For each Key Risk, the Key RiskChief Compliance Officer is responsiblelikewise accountable for developing a risk appetite statement and overseeing and managing the risk in line with the ERMF. This includes the documentation, communication and maintenance of a KeyConduct Risk Control Framework which sets out, for every business across the firm, the mandated control requirements in managing exposures to that Key Risk. These control requirements are given further specification, according to the business or risk type, to provide a complete and appropriate system of internal control.

Business and Function heads are responsible for obtaining ongoing assurance that the key controls they have put in place to manage the risks to their business objectives are operating effectively. Reviews are undertaken on a six-monthly basis and support the regulatory requirement for the Group to make an annual statement about its system of internal controls. At the business level executive management holds specific Business Risk Oversight Meetings to monitor all Principal Risks.

Key Risk Officers report their assessments of the risk exposure and control effectiveness to Group-level oversight committees and their assessments form the basis of the reports that go to the:

Board Risk Committee:

§     Financial Risk Committee has oversight of Credit and Market Risks

§     Treasury Committee has oversight of Funding Risk

§     Operational Risk Review Forum has oversight of the risk profile of all Operational Risk types.

Board Reputation Committee:

§     Conduct and Reputation Risk, Committee has oversightand the Group General Counsel for Legal Risk. The Group CRO and Group Chief Compliance Officer have the right to require amendments to any Frameworks, Policies or Standards in the firm, for any reason, including inconsistencies or contradictions among them.

Frameworks, Policies and Standards are subject to minimum annual review, and challenge by the Risk and/or Compliance functions, unless explicitly waived by the relevant heads of Conduct and Reputation Risks.those functions. Principal Risk Frameworks are subject to approval by relevant committees of the Board.

Assurance

Assurance is undertaken to assess the control environment and to independently assess the ERMF, which includes testing specific elements of the control environment documented in standards and checking that control testing activities are reliable, to provide confidence to the Board in the risk and control framework.

The Credit Risk Review Group (CRRG) provides an independent review and monitoring of the quality and condition of all the wholesale loan and derivative portfolios through a review of the overall credit sanctioning process. CRRG has a mandate from the CRO and has direct access to the CRO and to the BRC.

Internal Audit is responsible for the independent review of risk management and the control environment. Its objective is to provide reliable, valued and timely assurance to the Board and executive management over the effectiveness of controls, mitigating current and evolving material risks and thus enhancing the control culture within the Group. The BAC reviews and approves Internal Audit’s plans and resources, and evaluates the effectiveness of Internal Audit. An assessment by independent external advisers is also carried out periodically.

Effectiveness of risk management arrangements

The embedding of the ERMF is monitored by executive and board committees as described above. The ERMF and its component keyprincipal risks are subject to control testing assurance reviews to confirm its effectiveness or identify issues to be mitigated. Management and the Board are satisfied that these arrangements are appropriate given the risk profile of the Group.

Learning from our mistakes

Learning from mistakes is central to the Group’s culture and values, demonstrating a commitment to excellence, service and stewardship and taking accountability for failure as well as success. The Group seeks to learn lessons on a continuous basis to support achievement of strategic objectives; operational excellence and to meet commitments to stakeholders, including colleagues, customers, shareholders and regulators.

Barclays has implemented an updated Group Lessons Learnt Standard as part of the ERMF, setting out requirements for completing Lessons Learnt Assessments in response to significant events. The approach to Lessons Learnt has been further enhanced with the implementation of a new process and system of record during 2016 and fulfils the Group’s Salz commitments by ensuring a consistent and effective approach applicable to all Principal Risks. The approach is directly aligned to the three lines of defence model (see page 345), with businesses and functions accountable for undertaking lessons learnt assessments; the second line providing input, oversight and challenge; with independent review by Internal Audit.

Core components of the Lessons Learnt approach include:

§defined triggers for when Lessons Learnt Assessments must be completed

§requirements and guidance for root cause analysis to identify the causes of events within the Group

§templates to ensure conclusions are reported consistently throughout management committees

§a central system to record completed Lessons Learnt Assessments and to facilitate sharing across the Group.

Barclays’ Risk Culture

Barclays defines Risk Culture as “norms, attitudes and behaviours related to risk awareness, risk taking and risk management”. At Barclays this is reflected in how we identify, escalate and manage risk matters.

Our Code of Conduct – the Barclays Way

Globally, all colleagues must attest to the “Barclays Way”, our Code of Conduct, and all frameworks, policies and standards applicable to their roles. The Code of Conduct outlines the Purpose and Values which govern our Barclays Way of working across our business globally. It constitutes a reference point covering all aspects of colleagues’ working relationships, specifically (but not exclusively) with other Barclays employees, customers and clients, governments and regulators, business partners, suppliers, competitors and the broader community.

 

  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 20152016 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  345347


Barclays’ approach to managing risks

Risk management strategy, governance and risk culture

    

 

 

Definition of Risk Culture and its determinants

ManagementWe review our culture through the lens of model risk

Model risk is the risk of suffering adverse consequences from decisions based on incorrect or misused model outputs and reports. Management of model risk is an important area of focus for the Group.

Model risk is inherent in each of the Key Risks where models are used for measurement or management and is, therefore, managed as part of each individual key risk control framework and supported by the Group Model Risk Policy (GMRP) and relevant standards.

Model risk is managed by a number of activities, including:four “determinants”, associated with desired outcomes:

 

§ ensuring that modelsManagement and governance: Consistent tone from the top; responsibilities are identified as per the GMRP definition, across businessesclear to enable identification and recorded in the Group Models Database (GMD), the Group-wide model inventorychallenge

 

§ ensuring that every model has a model owner who is accountable for the model,Motivation and drives the development/maintenance of the model by a qualified model developerincentives: The right behaviours are rewarded and modelled

 

§ ensuring that every model is subjectCompetence and effectiveness: Colleagues are enabled to technical validation by the Independent Validation Unit (IVU) as required by GMRPidentify, coordinate, escalate and address risk and control matters

 

§ ensuring that every model is approved by appropriately senior and knowledgeable risk individuals in the organisation, following IVU validation

§periodic model risk reportingIntegrity: Colleagues are willing to the senior management and the Board

§Internal Audit provides independent challenge of modelmeet their risk management through business line and thematic audits.responsibilities; colleagues escalate issues on a timely basis.

The Executive Modelsrest of this section sets out key elements of our approach to embedding a strong Risk Culture.

Management and governance

Leaders must demonstrate through their everyday behaviours the importance of strong risk management and ensure that their teams have sufficient resource and capability to manage the risk environment.

The simplification of the three lines of defence, as well as the reorganisation of business and risk committees with first and second lines of defence representation promote ownership and accountabilities for risk management.

Motivation and incentives

Barclays seeks to ensure that compensation and promotion decisions take account of risk behaviours.

Management of risk and control is assessed as part of the annual performance appraisal process for all colleagues globally. Positive risk management behaviours will be rewarded and considered as part of promotion decisions, particularly to Managing Director.

Competence and effectiveness

A risk capability scorecard was developed for the Board Risk Committee (EMC) fulfilsto monitor and measure capability, and to identify any areas for improvement. Barclays has also appointed a Chief Risk Officer for Treasury and Capital and a Head of Model Risk Management.

Integrity

The “Being Barclays” global induction supports new colleagues in understanding how risk management culture and practices support how the specific requirement of approving the Group’s most material (A*/High and Complex) models; the EMC decisions are based onGroup does business reviews and the associated IVU validations for these models. EMClink to Barclays’ values. The Leadership Curriculum covers building, sustaining and supporting a trustworthy organisation and is chairedoffered to colleagues globally.

The continued promotion and reinforcement of Barclays’ Values, as well as the Barclays Way was reflected in the near-perfect rate of completion of related training by the accountable Risk ExCo memberemployees. Messages and has among its members the Deputy Group Finance Director andcommunications from the Chief Risk Officer.Officer emphasise the importance of early escalation of risk issues.

Group-wide risk management tools

To support the Group-wide management of risks, the Board uses risk appetite, mandate and scale, and stress testing as key inputs in the annual planning cycle, including setting of the Group’s strategy. The following describes in further detail the group-wide risk management tools used as part of this process.

Risk Appetite

Risk appetite is defined as the level of risk that the Group is prepared to accept while pursuing its business strategy, recognising a range of possible outcomes as business plans are implemented.

Risk appetite sets the ‘tone from the top’ and provides a basis for ongoing dialogue between management and Board with respect to the Group’s current and evolving risk profile, allowing strategic and financial decisions to be made on an informed basis.

The Risk Appetite Framework is intended to achieve the following objectives:

§describe agreed parameters for Group performance under various stress levels, for example:

Profitability, loss and return metric

Capital levels, CET1 ratio

§consider all Principal and Key Risks both individually and, where appropriate, in aggregate

§assess and communicate the acceptable level of risk for each risk types; this may be expressed in financial or non-financial terms, but must enable measurement and effective monitoring

§articulate the risks the Group is willing to take and why to enable specific risk taking activities; and articulate those risks to avoid and why to constrain specific risk taking activities

§be embedded in key decision-making processes including mergers and acquisitions, new product approvals and business change initiatives

§monitor throughout the year and respond as appropriate.

The risk appetite for financial risks is set by the Board on the basis of severe stress tests as it is during periods of macro-economic stress that losses materialise. In order to articulate the risk appetite for the firm, the Board first defines the deterioration in the firm’s performance it is willing to accept under stressed macroeconomic conditions. The acceptable deterioration is defined through a range of financial performance and capital metrics, which are reviewed by the Board on an annual basis. Barclays have moved to a scenario-based Stress Testing approach from the previous modelled approach of 1 in 7 and 1 in 25 risk events. The new approach continues to assess scenarios under stress conditions. For 2016 these are summarised in the following table.

346  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F


Barclays’ approach to managing risks

Risk management strategy, governance and risk culture

Measure relevant to strategy and risk                     

Link between strategy and risk profile

Profit before tax,

Return on equity,

Return on RWAs

Fundamental economic and business indicators of the performance of the Bank and underpin the firm’s capacity to make capital distributions.

Common Equity Tier 1 and leverage ratios

Monitor capital adequacy in relation to capital plan and targets.

Loan loss rate (LLR)

Describes the credit risk profile and whether impairment is within appetite.

Return on equity (RoE),

Return on regulatory capital

Risk-return based performance metrics which allow strategic and financial decisions to be made on an informed basis.

Barclays businesses run the stress test(s) as a fully integrated part of the annual Medium Term Planning (MTP) process, to ensure that the risk appetite business demand is based on the businesses’ most recent strategic plans. The deterioration of financial performance as a result of the stress test is subsequently compared to the tolerances agreed by the Board. Subsequently the risk appetite is allocated back to individual businesses and utilisation is monitored on a quarterly basis. This approach ensures that businesses’ risk appetite proposals are based on their latest strategic plans and allows the Board to allocate risk appetite such that it fully supports the firm’s chosen strategy within acceptable boundaries of risk taking.

Mandate and scale

Mandate and scale is a risk management approach that seeks to formally review and control business activities to ensure that they are within mandate (i.e. aligned with expectations), and are of an appropriate scale (relative to the risk and reward of the underlying activities) based on an extensive system of limits. Using limits and triggers helps mitigate the risk of concentrations which would be out of line with expectations, and which may lead to unexpected losses of a scale that would be detrimental to the stability of the relevant business line or the Group.

For example, for commercial property finance and construction portfolios, there is a comprehensive series of limits in place to control exposure within each business and geographic sector. To ensure that limits are aligned to the underlying risk characteristics, the mandate and scale limits differentiate between types of exposure. There are, for example, individual limits for property investment and property development.

The mandate and scale framework is used to:

§limit concentration risk

§keep business activities within Group and individual business mandate

§ensure activities remain of an appropriate scale relative to the underlying risk and reward

§ensure risk-taking is supported by appropriate expertise and capabilities.

As well as Group-level mandate and scale limits, further limits are set by risk managers within each business, covering particular portfolios. Unapproved excesses of limits will result in performance management and disciplinary consequences.

Stress testing

Group-wide stress tests are an integral part of the MTP process and annual review of risk appetite. They aim to ensure that the Group’s financial position and risk profile provide sufficient resilience to withstand the impact of severe economic stress. The Group-wide stress testing process is supported by a Capital Stress Testing Standard which sets out the minimum control requirements and defines clear roles and responsibilities across businesses and central functions. The diagram below outlines the key steps in the Group-wide stress testing process.

Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  347


Barclays’ approach to managing risks

Risk management strategy, governance and risk culture

LOGO

The Group-wide stress testing process begins with a detailed scenario setting process, with the FRC and BRC agreeing the range of scenarios to be tested. The scenarios are designed to be severe but plausible, and relevant to the business. A wide range of macroeconomic parameters are defined (such as GDP, unemployment, house prices, FX and interest rates), which allows the impact of the scenarios across the wide range of products and portfolios to be assessed across the Group.

Businesses prepare detailed MTP business plans which form the baseline for the stress test assessment. The stress test process is detailed and comprehensive, using bottom-up analysis across the businesses including both on- and off-balance sheet positions, and combines running statistical models with expert judgement. An overview of the stress testing approach by Principal Risk is provided in the table below. As part of their stress test assessments, businesses are also required to identify potential management actions that could be taken to mitigate the impact of stress and document these within their results.

There is robust governance in place with detailed review of stress testing methodology and results both within businesses (including sign-off by BCROs and BCFOs) and by central functions.

The businesses stress test results are consolidated to form a Group view which is used for tax analysis and by Group Treasury to assess the stress impact on the Group’s capital plans. For the latter, capital management actions such as reducing dividends or redeeming certain capital instruments may be considered. The Group also maintains recovery plans which take into consideration actions to facilitate recovery from severe stress or an orderly resolution. These actions are additional to those included in the Group-wide stress testing results.

The overall stress testing results of the Group are presented for review and approval by the FRC and BRC, and are also shared with the Treasury Committee and included as part of the review and sign-off of the MTP by the Board.

348  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F


Barclays’ approach to managing risks

Risk management strategy, governance and risk culture

Summary of methodologies for Group-wide stress testing by risk type:

Principal Risk

Stress testing approach
¡     Credit risk impairment: For retail portfolios businesses use regression models to establish a relationship between arrears movements and key macroeconomic parameters such as interest rates and unemployment, incorporating roll-rate analysis to estimate stressed levels of arrears by portfolio. In addition, combination of house price reductions and increased customer drawdowns for revolving facilities leads to higher LGD which also contributes to increased impairment levels. For wholesale portfolios the stress shocks on credit risk drivers (PDs, LGDs and EADs) are primarily calibrated using historical and expected relationships with key macro-economic parameters such as GDP, inflation and interest rates.

Credit risk

¡Counterparty credit risk losses: The scenarios include market risk shocks that are applied to determine the market value under stress of contracts that give rise to Counterparty Credit Risk (CCR). Counterparty losses, including from changes to the Credit Valuation Adjustment and from defaults, are modelled based on the impact of these shocks as well as using stressed credit risk drivers (PDs and LGDs). The same approach is used to stress the market value of assets held as available for sale or at fair value in the banking book.
¡

Credit risk weighted assets: The impact of the scenarios is calculated via a combination of business volumes and using similar factors to impairment drivers above, as well as the regulatory calculation and the level of pro-cyclicality of underlying regulatory credit risk models.

Market risk

¡Trading book losses: All market risk factors on the balance sheet are stressed using specific market risk shocks (and are used for the CCR analysis, above). The severity of the shocks applied are dependent on the liquidity of the market under stress, e.g. illiquid positions are assumed to have a longer holding period than positions in liquid markets.

¡

Pension fund: The funding position of pension funds are stressed, taking into account key economic drivers impacting future obligations (e.g. long-term inflation and interest rates) and the impact of the scenarios on the value of fund assets.

¡The risk of a mismatch between assets and liabilities, leading to funding difficulties, is assessed. Businesses apply scenario variables to forecasts of customer loans and advances and deposits levels, taking into account management actions to mitigate the impact of the stress which may impact business volumes. The Group funding requirement under stress is then estimated and takes into account lower availability of funds in the market.
¡The analysis of funding risk also contributes to the estimate of stressed income and costs:

Funding risk

–     Stress impact on non-interest income is primarily driven by lower projected business volumes and hence lower income from fees and commissions
–  Impact on net interest income is driven by stressed margins, which depend on the level of interest rates under stress as well as funding costs, and on stressed balance sheet volumes. This can be partly mitigated by management actions that may include repricing of variable rate products, taking into account interbank lending rates under stress
–  

The impact on costs is mainly driven by business volumes and management actions to partly offset profit reductions (due to impairment increases and decreases in income) such as headcount reductions and lower performance costs.

Operational risk, and Conduct risk

¡     

These Principal Risks are generally not impacted as they are not directly linked to the economic scenario. Note that operational risk, however, is included as part of the reverse stress testing framework that incorporates assessment of idiosyncratic operational risk events.

The role of stress testing as input to businesses’ plans and setting of strategy is described in more detail in the section below. The results also feed into our internal capital adequacy assessment process (ICAAP) submission to the Prudential Regulation Authority (PRA).

Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  349


Barclays’ approach to managing risks

Risk management strategy, governance and risk culture

In 2015, the internal Group-wide stress testing exercise was run as part of the MTP process, where the Group assessed the impact of an “Adverse” global recession scenario. This was used for the MTP Risk Review and risk appetite setting process.

Regulatory stress testing

In addition to running internal Group-wide stress tests , the Group also runs regulatory stress tests.

Additionally in 2015, the PRA ran its annual concurrent stress testing of the major UK banks, which was based on the Bank of England (BoE) stress scenario. The results of the stress test were published in December 2015, and support the BoE’s aim for increased transparency as part of its stress testing framework.

In 2016, the European Banking Authority will run a stress test across the major EU banks. This will be run in addition to the annual BoE stress test.

Reverse stress testing

The Group-wide stress testing framework also includes reverse stress testing techniques which aim to identify the circumstances under which the Group’s business model would no longer be viable, leading to a significant change in business strategy and to identify appropriate mitigating actions. Examples include extreme macroeconomic downturn scenarios (for example in 2015 Barclays ran a ‘Severely Adverse’ global recession scenario), or specific idiosyncratic events, covering both operational risk and capital/liquidity events.

Reverse stress testing is used to help support ongoing risk management and is an input to our Recovery Planning process.

Business and risk type specific stress tests

Stress testing techniques at portfolio and product level are also used to support risk management. For example, portfolio management in the US cards business employs stressed assumptions of loss rates to determine profitability hurdles for new accounts. In the UK mortgage business, affordability thresholds incorporate stressed estimates of interest rates. In the Investment Bank, global scenario testing is used to gauge potential losses that could arise in conditions of a severe but plausible market stress. Stress testing is also conducted on positions in particular asset classes, including interest rates, commodities, equities, credit and foreign exchange.

Risk management in the setting of strategy

The planning cycle is centred on the MTP process, performed annually. This embeds the Group’s objectives into detailed business plans which take into account the likely business and macroeconomic environment. The strategy is informed by a detailed risk assessment of the plans, which includes reviewing the Group’s risk profile and setting of risk appetite. The BRC has overall responsibility for reviewing the Group’s risk profile and making appropriate recommendations to the Board. The Board is ultimately responsible for approving the MTP and the Group’s risk appetite.

The planning cycle is summarised in the diagram below, and shows that the detailed risk assessment of the plans is an integral part of the MTP process. In particular, the risk appetite process ensures that senior management and the Board understand the MTP’s sensitivities to key risk types, and includes a set of limits to ensure the Group stays within appetite. Additionally, stress testing informs management about the impact to the business of adverse macroeconomic scenarios and potential management actions that could be taken to mitigate the impact of stress.

350  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F


Barclays’ approach to managing risks

Risk management strategy, governance and risk culture

LOGO

Plan

Businesses prepare detailed business plans as part of the MTP process. A key component of this process is the businesses’ internal risk assessment, which combines running statistical models e.g. to calculate forecast impairments over the period of the plan, and risk subject matter expert judgement. The risk teams work closely with other functions within their businesses to inform the business plans.

Businesses are required to assess each of their portfolios and all Principal Risks (as relevant to their business) when preparing their business plans, and prepare detailed documentation, providing key risk metrics such as projected loan loss rate (LLR) by portfolio. As part of their internal risk assessment, businesses provide performance of their business plans under expected and stressed macroeconomic scenarios, which defines the proposed risk appetite reflected in their plans and feeds into the setting of risk appetite for the Group.

Additionally, businesses assess the performance of their business plans under stress, based on ‘severe, but plausible’ macroeconomic scenarios provided by risk in collaboration with business economists and agreed with the BRC at the start of the process. As part of their stress test assessment, businesses are required to identify and document management actions that would be taken to mitigate the impact of stress, such as cost reductions and increased collections activity to reduce impairments.

Within the businesses, there is detailed risk review of the business plans, involving senior risk managers, with BCROs required to sign off on the risk profile of the plans, including the risk appetite and stress testing assessments described above. The results of businesses’ internal risk assessment and corresponding detailed documentation forms the basis for discussion for the risk review process and setting of risk appetite for the Group, outlined below.

Evaluate

Following submissions by businesses of their MTP business plans, there is a detailed review process led by the central risk team. This includes a robust review and challenge of business’ plans to ensure that the financial projections are internally consistent, value creating, achievable given risk management capabilities (e.g. supported by appropriate risk infrastructure) and that they present a suitable balance between risk and reward. The risk review process is informed by the detailed documentation provided by businesses, which forms the basis for discussion. The format and content of the documentation is pre-agreed to ensure sufficient information is provided to allow a detailed and comprehensive risk review.

Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  351


Barclays’ approach to managing risks

Risk management strategy, governance and risk culture

The risk review process includes a review of the proposed risk appetite by the business, including assessment of business plans under stress which is used to inform the MTP. If the businesses’ plans entail too high a level of risk, management will challenge the businesses’ plans. This assessment is based on a comparison of businesses’ own risk appetite assessment reflected in their business plans (‘bottom-up’ risk appetite) with the central risk team’s view (‘top-down’ risk appetite) based on the financial constraints set by the Board for the Group. Businesses may be asked to update their business plans to ensure the bottom-up risk appetite is within top-down appetite. There is also a detailed review of the stressed estimates and methodology used to translate the economic scenario to stressed estimates, as well as the management actions included in businesses’ results to ensure that these are appropriate and realistic in a stressed environment.

Risk review meetings are held with the CRO and each business, where the senior management of the business present their business plans and the findings from the risk reviews are discussed, including the risk appetite proposals and stress testing results. Businesses may be required to change their business plans as a result of these meetings.

Respond

Following detailed risk review of businesses plans, the central risk team will recommend to the BRC for approval by the Board an appropriate risk appetite for the Group, taking into account businesses’ stress testing results. Mandate and Scale limits are also set. Based on the agreed risk appetite, limits are reviewed for appropriateness by the central risk team, as outlined below, and recommended to the BRC.

Risk Appetite

Risk appetite is defined as the level of risk which the firm is prepared to accept in the conduct of its activities.

Risk appetite sets the ‘tone from the top’ and provides a basis for ongoing dialogue between management and Board with respect to the Group’s current and evolving risk profile, allowing strategic and financial decisions to be made on an informed basis.

The GroupRisk Appetite Framework is intended to achieve the following objectives:

§Specify the level of risk we are willing to take and why, to enable specific risk taking activities

§Consider all Principal Risks individually and in aggregate.

§Consistently communicate the acceptable level of risk for different risk types; this may be expressed in financial ornon-financial terms, and should be measured, as applicable, and effectively monitored

§Describe agreed parameters for the firm’s performance under financial stress with respect to profitability:

Profitability and loss metrics

Capital ratios

§Be considered in key decision-making processes, including business planning, mergers and acquisitions, and business change initiatives

The risk appetite limit across principalfor financial risks is set by the Board on the basis of “adverse” stress tests, as it is during periods of macro-economic stress that these losses materialise. In order to articulate the risk appetite for the firm, the Board first defines the deterioration in the firm’s performance it is willing to accept under stressed macroeconomic conditions. The acceptable deterioration is defined through a set of financial constraints which are reviewed by the Board on an annual basis. For 2017 these constraints are summarised in the following table.

 Measure relevant to

 strategy and risk

Link between strategy and risk profile
 Profit after taxFundamental performance of the Bank and underpins the firm’s capacity to make capital distributions.
 Common Equity Tier 1

 (CET1)

Monitor capital adequacy in relation to capital plan, targets and regulatory hurdle rates.

Barclays businesses run the stress test(s) as a fully integrated part of the annual settingMedium Term Planning (MTP) process, to ensure that the risk appetite businesses demand is based on the businesses’ most recent strategic plans. The deterioration of financial performance as a result of the stress test is subsequently compared to the tolerances agreed by the Board. With Board approval the risk appetite is allocated back to individual businesses and utilisation is monitored regularly and reported to Board on a quarterly basis. This approach ensures that businesses’ risk appetite proposals are based on their latest strategic plans and allows the Board to allocate risk appetite such that it fully supports the firm’s chosen strategy within acceptable boundaries of risk appetite. The allocation is consistent with the annual MTP risk review of the business strategy under stress.taking.

Mandate and scale

Mandate and scale is a risk management approach that seeks to formally review and control business activities to ensure that they are within mandate (i.e. aligned with expectations), and are of an appropriate scale (relative to the risk and reward of the underlying activities) based on an extensive system of limits. Using limits and triggers helps mitigate the risk of concentrations which would be out of line with expectations, and which may lead to unexpected losses of a scale that would be detrimental to the stability of the relevant business line or the Group.

For example, for leveraged finance and commercial property finance portfolios, there are a comprehensive series of limits in place to control exposure within each business and geographic sector. To ensure that limits are set at Group or business level.aligned to the underlying risk characteristics, the mandate and scale limits differentiate between types of exposure. There are, for example, individual limits for property investment and property development.

The mandate and scale framework is used to:

 

§ Group limits are approved by the appropriatelimit concentration risk committee (e.g. Wholesale Credit Risk Management Committee) and are subject to additional escalation and governance requirements.

 

§ Business limits are approved by the relevantkeep business risk teamactivities within Group and reportableindividual business mandate

§ensure activities remain of an appropriate scale relative to the relevantunderlying risk committee.and reward

§ensure risk-taking is supported by appropriate expertise and capabilities.

The most material mandate and scale limits are designated asA-level (Board level) andB-Level (Group-level). Group limits are approved by the appropriate risk committee (e.g. Wholesale Credit Risk Management Committee) and are subject to additional escalation and governance requirements.

Further limits are set by risk managers within each business, covering particular portfolios. Unapproved excesses of limits will result in

348  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2016 Annual Report on Form 20-F


Barclays’ approach to managing risks

Risk management strategy, governance and risk culture

performance management and disciplinary consequences. Business limits are approved by the relevant business risk team and reportable to the relevant risk committee.

Limits reflect the nature of the risk being managed and controlled and are measured by total financing limits, LGD, stress loss or other metrics as appropriate. There is explicit identification of the exposures that are captured by limits and any material exclusion must be agreed. Limits are reviewed at least annually. The factors taken into consideration when setting the limit will include:

 

§ Group Risk Appetite

 

§ current exposure / exposure/MTP forecasts

 

§ risk return considerations

 

§ senior risk management judgement.

Mandate and scale limits are split between three types:

§caps: Hard limit, set to limit concentration to a live portfolio or risk

§run off ceilings: Set to monitor legacy positions being managed down over time

§triggers for discussion: Threshold set as trigger for follow up/investigation.

352  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F


Barclays’ approach to managing risks

Risk management strategy, governance and risk culture

Monitor

Risk Appetite

The loss appetite allocation to businesses is tracked using an agreed and repeatable monitoring measure. The percentage utilisation of appetite is a risk metric that is part of the business Balanced Scorecard. Appetite utilisation is reported to the BRC on a quarterly basis. Breaches must be approved and remedial actions mandated.

Mandate and scale

The limit excess process includes the following key points:

§businesses must have adequate processes in place to monitor limit caps to avoid excesses

§all excesses must be reported to the central risk team within 24 hours

§credit applications that would cause or increase an excess can only be approved once the limit cap is increased

§a remediation plan must be put in place.

A limit breach will have occurred if a limit goes into excess without being authorised by the relevant authority; or where the limit excess process is not adhered to unless the policy or terms of the limit allows for temporary excess.

Stress testing

Stress testing is also used asGroup-wide stress tests are an integral part of the MTP process and annual review of risk monitoring framework. For example,appetite. They aim to ensure that the Group’s financial position and risk profile provide sufficient resilience to withstand the impact of severe economic stress. The Group-wide stress testing process is supported by a Capital Stress Testing Standard which sets out the minimum control requirements and defines clear roles and responsibilities across businesses and central functions. The results also feed into our internal capital adequacy assessment process (ICAAP) submission to the PRA.

The following diagram outlines the key steps in the Group-wide stress testing process, which are described below.

LOGO

The Group-wide stress testing process begins with a detailed scenario setting process, with the GRC and BRC agreeing the range of scenarios to be tested. The scenarios are designed to be severe but plausible, and relevant to the business. A wide range of macroeconomic parameters are defined (such as GDP, unemployment, house prices, FX and interest rates), which allows the impact of the scenarios across the wide range of products and portfolios to be assessed across the Group.

Businesses prepare detailed MTP business plans which form the baseline for the stress test assessment. The stress test process is detailed and comprehensive, usingbottom-up analysis across all of our businesses including bothon- andoff-balance sheet positions, and combines running statistical models with expert judgement. An overview of the stress testing results informapproach by Principal Risk is provided in the retail early warning indicator framework which is designedtable on page 350. As part of their stress test assessments, businesses are also required to triggeridentify potential management actions that wouldcould be taken to mitigate the impact of stress.stress and document these within their results.

There is robust governance in place with detailed review of stress testing methodology and results both within businesses (includingsign-off by business CROs and CFOs) and by central functions.

The businesses stress test results are consolidated to form a Group view which is used to assess the stress impact on the Group’s capital plans. For the latter, capital management actions such as reducing dividends or redeeming certain capital instruments may be considered. The Group also maintains recovery plans which take into consideration actions to facilitate recovery from severe stress or an orderly resolution. These actions are additional to those included in the Group-wide stress testing results.

The overall stress testing results are reviewed and signed off by the Board, following review by the GRC, BRC, Treasury Committee and ExCo.

 

  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 20152016 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  353349


Barclays’ approach to managing risks

Risk management strategy, governance and risk culture

    

 

 

Summary of methodologies for Group-wide stress testing by risk type

Principal Risk

Stress testing approach

Credit risk

§  Credit risk impairment:For retail portfolios businesses use regression models to establish a relationship between arrears movements and key macroeconomic parameters such as interest rates, inflation and unemployment, incorporating roll-rate analysis to estimate stressed levels of arrears by portfolio. In addition, house price reductions (for mortgages) and increased customer drawdowns (for revolving facilities) lead to higher LGDs which also contribute to increased impairment levels. For wholesale portfolios the stress shocks on credit risk drivers (PDs, LGDs and EADs) are primarily calibrated using historical and expected relationships with key macro-economic parameters such as GDP, inflation and interest rates.

§  Counterparty credit risk losses:The scenarios include market risk shocks that are applied to determine the market value under stress of contracts that give rise to Counterparty Credit Risk (CCR). Counterparty losses, including from changes to the Credit Valuation Adjustment and from defaults, are modelled based on the impact of these shocks as well as using stressed credit risk drivers (PDs and LGDs). The same approach is used to stress the market value of assets held as available for sale or at fair value in the banking book.

§  Credit risk weighted assets:The impact of the scenarios is calculated via a combination of business volumes and using similar factors to impairment drivers above, as well as the regulatory calculation and the level ofpro-cyclicality of underlying regulatory credit risk models.

Market risk

§  Trading book losses:All market risk factors on the balance sheet are stressed using specific market risk shocks (and are used for the CCR analysis, above). The severity of the shocks applied are dependent on the liquidity of the market under stress, e.g. illiquid positions are assumed to have a longer holding period than positions in liquid markets.

Treasury and Capital Risk

Interest Rate Risk in the Banking Book & Liquidity Risk:

§  The risk of a mismatch between assets and liabilities, leading to funding difficulties, is assessed. Businesses apply scenario variables to forecasts of customer loans and advances and deposits levels, taking into account management actions to mitigate the impact of the stress which may impact business volumes. The Group funding requirement under stress is then estimated and takes into account lower availability of funds in the market.

§  The analysis of funding risk also contributes to the estimate of stressed income and costs:

     –

Stress impact onnon-interest income is primarily driven by lower projected business volumes and hence lower income from fees and commissions

Impact on net interest income is driven by stressed margins, which depend on the level of interest rates under stress as well as funding costs, and on stressed balance sheet volumes. This can be partly mitigated by management actions that may include repricing of variable rate products, taking into account interbank lending rates under stress

The impact on costs is mainly driven by business volumes and management actions to partly offset profit reductions (due to impairment increases and decreases in income) such as headcount reductions and lower performance costs.

Capital Risk:

§  Capital risk is assessed by taking all key risks (as listed above) into consideration when assessing Barclays’ ability to withstand a severe stress. The stressed results are considered against internally agreed risk appetite levels but also regulatory minima and perceived market expectations. The MTP can only be agreed by the Board if this is within the agreed risk appetite levels under stress.

§  The funding position of pension funds is also stressed as part of the capital risk assessment, taking into account key economic drivers impacting future obligations (e.g. long-term inflation and interest rates) and the impact of the scenarios on the value of fund assets.

Operational risk, and Conduct risk

§  Operational risk is generally not impacted as there is no direct link to the stress economic scenario. However, it is included as part of the reverse stress testing framework that incorporates assessment of idiosyncratic operational risk events.

In 2016, the internal Group-wide stress testing exercise was run as part of the MTP process, where the Group assessed the impact of an “Adverse” global recession scenario. This was used for the MTP Risk Review and risk appetite setting process.

The Group-wide stress testing framework also includes reverse stress testing techniques which aim to identify the circumstances under which the Group’s business model would no longer be viable, leading to a significant change in business strategy and to identify appropriate mitigating actions. Examples include extreme macroeconomic downturn (‘severely adverse’) scenarios, or specific idiosyncratic events, covering both operational risk and capital/liquidity events.

Reverse stress testing is used to help support ongoing risk management and is an input to our Recovery Planning process.

Business and risk type specific stress tests

Stress testing techniques at portfolio and product level are also used to support risk management. For example, portfolio management in the US cards business employs stressed assumptions of loss rates to determine profitability hurdles for new accounts. In the United Kingdom home loans business, affordability thresholds incorporate stressed estimates of interest rates. In investment banking, global scenario testing is used to gauge potential losses that could arise in conditions of a severe but plausible market stress. Stress testing is also conducted on positions in particular asset classes, including interest rates, commodities, equities, credit and foreign exchange.

Regulatory stress testing

In addition to running internal Group-wide stress tests, the Group also runs regulatory stress tests.

In 2016, the PRA ran its annual concurrent stress testing of the major UK banks, which was based on the Bank of England (BoE) stress scenario. The results of the stress test were published in November 2016, and support the BoE’s aim for increased transparency as part of its stress testing framework.

Additionally, in 2016, the European Banking Authority ran a stress test across the major European banks. The results were published in July.

The firm is also subject to stress testing run by non UK regulators e.g. the Federal Reserve, which are typically focused at the local legal entity level.

LOGO

Management of
credit risk

LOGO  350  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2016 Annual Report on Form 20-F  


Barclays’ approach to managing risks

Risk management strategy, governance and risk culture

    

Risk management in the setting of strategy

The risk appetite and (internal) stress testing processes described above form the basis of the risk review of the Medium Term Plan (MTP), performed annually. The MTP embeds the Group’s objectives into detailed business plans taking into account the likely business and macroeconomic environment. The strategy is informed by the risk review process, which includes reviewing the Group’s risk profile and setting of risk appetite.

§The MTP risk review process includes a review of the proposed risk appetite by the business, including assessment of business plans under stress which is used to inform the MTP.

§If the businesses’ plans entail too high a level of risk, management will challenge the plans. This assessment is based on a comparison of businesses own risk appetite assessment reflected in their business plans(‘bottom-up’ risk appetite) with the central risk team’s view(‘top-down’ risk appetite) based on the financial constraints set by the Board for the Group.

§Businesses may be asked to update their business plans to ensure thebottom-up risk appetite is withintop-down appetite. There is also a detailed review of the stressed estimates and methodology used to translate the economic scenario to stressed estimates, as well as the management actions included in businesses’ results to ensure that these are appropriate and realistic in a stressed environment.

§Risk review meetings are held with the CEO, CFO, CRO and Treasurer of each business, where they present their business plans to the Group CRO and the findings from the risk reviews are discussed, including the risk appetite proposals and stress testing results. Businesses may be required to change their business plans as a result of these meetings

The BRC has overall responsibility for reviewing the Group’s risk profile and making appropriate recommendations to the Board. The Board is ultimately responsible for approving the MTP and the Group’s risk appetite. The risk appetite process ensures that senior management and the Board understand the MTP’s sensitivities by risk type, and includes a set of limits to ensure the Group stays within appetite, as described above.

Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2016 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  351


Barclays’ approach to managing risks

Management of credit risk and the internal ratings-based approach

This section discusses the organisation specific to the management of credit risks, and provides details of the calculation of risk weighted assets under the Internal Ratings Based approach of the Basel framework.

 

 §Pages 355 to 369 coverPage 353 covers the aspects of the Group’s risk management framework specific to credit risk, including committees and the Group reporting structure


§As 66% of our regulatory capital is for credit risk, we devote pages360 to 367 to detailing how we approach the internal ratings models, and how the framework supports risk differentiation and management.

 

 

 

 

CreditLOGO

352  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2016 Annual Report on Form 20-F


Barclays’ approach to managing risks

Management of credit risk managementand the internal ratings-based approach

The risk of suffering financial loss should any of the Group’s customers, clients or market counterparties fail to fulfil their contractual obligations to the Group.

 

Credit risk

The risk of loss to the firm from the failure of clients, customers or counterparties, including sovereigns, fully to honour their obligations to the firm, including the whole and timely payment of principal, interest, collateral and other receivables

Overview

The granting of credit is one of the Group’s major sources of income and, as a Principal Risk, the Group dedicates considerable resources to its control. The credit risk that the Group faces arises mainly from wholesale and retail loans and advances together with the counterparty

credit risk arising from derivative contracts with clients. This is demonstrated by the impairment charge analysis chart. Other sources of credit risk arise from trading activities, including: debt securities, settlement balances with market counterparties,counterparties; available for sale (AFS) assetsassets; and reverse repurchase agreements (reverse repos).loans.

Credit risk management objectives are to:

 

§ maintain a framework of controls to ensure credit risk-taking is based on sound credit risk management principles

 

§ identify, assess and measure credit risk clearly and accurately across the Group and within each separate business, from the level of individual facilities up to the total portfolio

Total credit impairment charge and other provisions – Dec 15 (£2,114m)

 

LOGO

Note: Wholesale and Retail Loans and Advances include charges against contingent liabilities and guarantees

§ control and plan credit risk-taking in line with external stakeholder expectations and avoiding undesirable concentrations

 

§ monitor credit risk and adherence to agreed controls

 

§ ensure that risk-reward objectives are met.met

§More information of the reporting of credit risk can be found on page 354.

Board oversight and flow of risk related information

LOGO

Organisation and structure

LOGO

Wholesale and retail portfolios are managed separately to reflect the differing nature of the assets; wholesale balances tend to be larger and are managed on an individual basis, while retail balances are larger in number but smaller in value and are, therefore, managed on a homogenous portfolio basis.

Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  355


Barclays’ approach to managing risks

Management of credit risk

Credit risk management responsibilities have been structured so that decisions are taken as close as possible to the business, while ensuring robust review and challenge of performance, risk infrastructure and strategic plans. The credit risk management teams in each business are accountable to the relevant BCROBusiness CRO who, in turn, reports to the Group CRO.

Roles and responsibilities

The responsibilities of the credit risk management teams in the businesses, the sanctioning team and other shared services include: sanctioning new credit agreements (principally wholesale); setting policies for approval of transactions (principally retail); setting risk appetite; monitoring risk against limits and other parameters; maintaining robust processes, data gathering, quality, storage and reporting methods for effective credit risk management; performing effective turnaround and workout scenarios for wholesale portfolios via dedicated restructuring and recoveries teams; maintaining robust

collections and recovery processes/units for retail portfolios; and review and validation of credit risk measurement models.

For wholesale portfolios, credit risk approval is undertaken by experienced credit risk professionals operating within a clearly defined delegated authority framework, with only the most senior credit officers entrusted with the higher levels of delegated authority. The largest credit exposures, which are outside the Risk Sanctioning Unit or Risk Distribution Committee authority require the support of the Group Senior Credit Officer (GSCO), the Group’s most senior credit risk sanctioner. For exposures in excess of the GSCOGSCO’s authority, approval by Group CRO is required. In the wholesale portfolios, credit risk managers are organised in sanctioning teams by geography, industry and/or product.

The role of the Central Risk function is to provide Group-wide direction, oversight and challenge of credit risk-taking. Central Risk sets the Credit Risk Control Framework, which provides the structure within which credit risk is managed, together with supporting credit risk policies.

Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2016 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  353


Barclays’ approach to managing risks

Management of credit risk and the internal ratings-based approach

Reporting

The Group dedicates considerable resources to gaining a clear and accurate understanding of credit risk across the business and ensuring that its balance sheet correctly reflects the value of the assets in accordance with applicable accounting principles. This process can be summarised in five broad stages:

 

§ measuring exposures and concentrations

 

§ monitoring performance and asset quality

 

§ monitoring for weaknesses in portfolios

 

§ raising allowances for impairment and other credit provisions

 

§ returning assets to a performing status or writing off assets when the whole or part of a debt is considered irrecoverable.

Measuring exposures and concentrations

Loans and advances to customers provide the principal source of credit risk to the Group although it is also exposed to other forms of credit risk through, for example, loans and advances to banks, loan commitments and debt securities. Risk management policies and processes are designed to identify and analyse risk, to set appropriate risk appetite, limits and controls, and to monitor the risks and adherence to limits by means of reliable and timely data.

One area of particular review is concentration risk. A concentration of credit risk exists when a number of counterparties or customers are engaged in similar activities or geographies, and have similar economic

characteristics that would cause their ability to meet contractual obligations to be similarly affected by changes in economic and other conditions. As a result, the Group constantly reviews its concentration in a number of areas including, for example, geography, maturity and industry.

Mandate and scale limits are used to maintain concentrations at appropriate levels, which are aligned with the businesses’ stated risk appetite. Limits are typically based on the nature of the lending and the amount of the portfolio meeting certain standards of underwriting criteria. Diversification, to reduce concentration risk, is achieved through setting maximum exposure guidelines to individual counterparties. Excesses are reported to the BRC.

356  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F


Monitoring performance and asset quality

Trends in the quality of the Group’s loan portfolio are monitored in a number of ways including tracking loan loss rate and coverage ratios.

Loan loss rate

The loan loss rate (LLR) provides a way of consistently monitoring trends in loan portfolio quality at the Group, business and product levels. The LLR represents the annualised impairment charges on loans and advances to customers and banks and other credit provisions as a percentage of the total,period-end loans and advances to customers and banks, gross of impairment allowances. Details of the LLR for the current period may be found in the Credit Risk Performance section in the 2015 Form 20-F.on page 127.

Loan loss rate (bps) – longer-termLonger-term trends

 

LOGOLOGO

Note

aRestated to reflect the impact of IFRS10, which results in some former Exit Quadrant exposures being recorded at fair value from 2012 onwards
b2015 and 2016 figures exclude Africa

Note a: Restated to reflect the impact of IFRS10, which results in some former Exit Quadrant exposures being recorded at fair value from 2012 onwards

From a full year peak of 156bps at 31 December 2009, the LLR has been on an improving trend. By the end of 2011, the LLR of 77bps had returned topre-crisis levels and was lower than the long-term average. The LLR fell from 2012 to 2014 and remained at a low level in 2015, at 47bps.increasing slightly in 2016 to 53bps.

Coverage ratios

The impairment allowance is the aggregate of the identified and unidentified impairment (UI) balances. Impairment allowance coverage, or the coverage ratio, is reported at two levels:

 

§ credit risk loans (CRLs) coverage ratio, calculated as impairment allowances as a percentage of CRL balances

 

§ potential credit risk loans coverage ratio (impairment allowances as a percentage of total CRL and Potential Problem Loan balances).

See identifying potential credit risk loans on page 361 for more information for the criteria for these categories.

 

§ Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual ReportSee identifying potential credit risk loans on Form 20-F  |  357page 133 for more information for the criteria for these categories.


Barclays’ approach to managing risks

Management of credit risk

CRL coverage

LOGO

Note: Some Non-Core exposures are not reported as CRLs following the introduction of IFRS10, which accounts for these balances at fair valueLOGO

Notes

aSomeNon-core exposures are not reported as CRLs following the introduction of IFRS10, which accounts for these balances at fair value
bAll historical figures exclude Africa

Appropriate coverage ratios will vary according to the type of product but can be broadly shown to have typical severity rates based upon historic analysis:

 

§ secured retailRetail home loans:10%-25%

 

§ credit cards, unsecured and other personal lending products:65%-85%

354  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2016 Annual Report on Form 20-F


Barclays’ approach to managing risks

Management of credit risk and the internal ratings-based approach

§ corporate facilities:30%-50%.

CRL coverage ratios would therefore be expected to be at or around these levels over a defined period of time.

Higher coverage in Retail unsecured and other is primarily driven by cards portfolio particularly in the UK and US, reflecting higher provisions pending full implementation of newly developed and independently approved models with enhanced methodology, following an impairment policy revision in Q3 2016.

In principle, a number of factors may affect the Group’s overall coverage ratios, including:

The mix of products within total CRL balances:coverage ratios will tend to be lower when there is a high proportion of secured retailRetail and corporate balances within total CRLs. This is due to the fact that the recovery outlook on these types of exposures is typically higher than retailRetail unsecured products, with the result that they will have lower impairment requirements.

The stage in the economic cycle:coverage ratios will tend to be lower in the earlier stages of deterioration in credit conditions. At this stage, Retail delinquent balances will be predominantly in the early delinquency cycles and

corporate names will have only recently moved to CRL categories. As such balances attract a lower impairment requirement, the CRL coverage ratio will be lower.

The balance of PPLs to CRLs:the impairment requirements for PPLs are lower than for CRLs, so the greater the proportion of PPLs, the lower the PCRL coverage ratio.

Write-off policies:the speed with which defaulted assets are written off will affect coverage ratios. The more quickly assets are written off, the lower the ratios will be, since stock with 100% coverage will tend to roll out of PCRL categories more quickly.

Details of the coverage ratios for the current period are shown in the above chart and may be found in the analysis of loans and advances and impairment section in the 2015 Form 20-F.at page 127.

Monitoring weaknesses in portfolios

While the basic principles for monitoring weaknesses in wholesaleWholesale and retailRetail exposures are broadly similar, they reflect the differing nature of the assets. As a matter of policy, all facilities granted to corporate or wholesaleWholesale counterparties are subject to a review on, at least, an annual basis, even when they are performing satisfactorily.

LOGO

 

358  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F


LOGO

Wholesale portfolios1

Within the wholesaleWholesale portfolios, the Basel definitions of default are used as default indicators which have been aligned to the IAS 39 objective evidence of impairment. A default is triggered if individual identified impairment is recognised. Group definitions of default used are:

 

§ bank puts the credit obligation on anon-accrued status

 

§ bank makes acharge-off or account specific identified impairment resulting from a significant perceived decline in credit quality

 

§ bank sells the credit obligation at a material credit-related economic loss

 

§ bank consents to a distressed restructuring of the credit obligation where this is likely to result in a diminished financial obligation caused by the material forgiveness or postponement of principal, interest or fees

1Includes certain Business Banking facilities which are recorded as Retail for management purposes.

Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  359


Barclays’ approach to managing risks

Management of credit risk

 

§ bank triggers a petition for obligor’s bankruptcy or similar order

 

§ bank becomes aware of the obligor having sought or having been placed in bankruptcy or similar protection where this would avoid or delay repayment of the credit obligation to the banking group

 

§ bank becomes aware of an acceleration of an obligation by a firm

 

§ where the obligor is a bank – revocation of authorisation

 

§ where the obligor is a sovereign – trigger of default definition of an approved External Credit Assessment Institution (ECAI) such as a rating agency

§ obligor past due more than 90 days on any material credit obligation to the Group.

Wholesale accounts that are deemed to contain heightened levels of risk are recorded on graded watchlists (WL) comprising three categories graded in line with the perceived severity of the risk attached to the lending, and its probability of default. Examples of heightened levels of risk may include, for example:

 

§ a material reduction in profits

 

§ a material reduction in the value of collateral held

 

§ a decline in net tangible assets in circumstances which are not satisfactorily explained

 

§ periodic waiver requests or changes to the terms of the credit agreement over an extended period of time.

These lists are updated monthly and circulated to the relevant risk control points. Once an account has been placed on WL, the exposure is monitored and, where appropriate, exposure reductions are effected. Should an account become impaired, it will normally, but not necessarily, have passed through each of the three categories, which reflects the need for increasing caution and control. While all counterparties, regardless of financial health, are subject to a full review of all facilities on at least an annual basis, more frequent interim reviews may be undertaken should circumstances dictate. Specialist recovery functions deal with counterparties in higher levels of WL, default, collection or insolvency. Their mandate is to maximise shareholder value, ideally via working intensively with the counterparty to help them

Note

1Includes certain Business Banking facilities which are recorded as Retail for
management purposes.

Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2016 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  355


Barclays’ approach to managing risks

Management of credit risk and the internal ratings-based approach

to either return to financial health or, in the cases of insolvency, obtain the orderly and timely recovery of impaired debts. Where a counterparty’s financial health gives grounds for concern, it is immediately placed into the appropriate category.

Retail portfolios

Within the retailRetail portfolios, which tend to comprise homogeneous assets, statistical techniques more readily allow potential credit weaknesses to be monitored on a portfolio basis. The approach is consistent with the Group’s policy of raising a collective impairment allowance as soon as objective evidence of impairment is identified. Retail accounts can be classified according to specified categories of arrears status (or 30 day cycle), which reflects the level of contractual payments which are overdue. An outstanding balance is deemed to be delinquent when it is one day or “one penny” down and goes into default when it moves into recovery, normally 180 days. Impairment is considered at all stages of the customer’s outstanding obligations.

The probability of default increases with the number of contractual payments missed, thus raising the associated impairment requirement.

Once a loan has passed through a prescribed number of cycles, normally six, it will becharged-off and enter recovery status.Charge-off refers to the point in time when collections activity changes from the collection of arrears to the recovery of the full balance. In most cases,charge-off will result in the account moving to a legal recovery function or debt sale. This will typically occur after an account has been treated by a collections function. However, in certain cases, an account may be charged off directly from a performing status, such as in the case of insolvency or death.

The timings of thecharge-off points are established based on the type of loan. For the majority of products, the standard period for charging off accounts is six cycles (180 days past due date of contractual obligation). Earlycharge-off points are prescribed for unsecured assets. For example, in case of customer bankruptcy or insolvency, associated accounts are charged off within 60 days of notification.

360  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F


Identifying potential credit risk loans

The Group reports potentially and actually impaired loans as PCRLs. PCRLs comprise two categories of loans: PPLs and CRLs.

PPLs are loans that are currently complying with repayment terms but where serious doubt exists as to the ability of the borrower to continue to comply with such terms in the near future. If the credit quality of a wholesaleWholesale loan on a WL deteriorates to the highest category, or a Retail loan deteriorates to delinquency cycle 2, consideration is given to including it within the PPL category.

Should further evidence of deterioration be observed, a loan may move to the CRL category. Events that would trigger the transfer of a loan from the PPL to the CRL category include a missed payment or a breach of covenant. CRLs comprise three classes of loans:

Impaired loans: comprisescomprise loans where an individually identified impairment allowance has been raised and also include loans which are fully collateralised or where indebtedness has already been written down to the expected realisable value. This category includes all retailRetail loans that have been charged off to legal recovery. The category may include loans, which, while impaired, are still performing.

Accruing past due 90 days or more: comprises loans that are 90 days or more past due with respect to principal or interest. An impairment allowance will be raised against these loans if the expected cash flows discounted at the effective interest rate are less than the carrying value.

Impaired and restructured loans: comprises loans not included above where, for economic or legal reasons related to the debtor’s financial difficulties, a concession has been granted to the debtor that would not otherwise be considered. Where the concession results in the expected cash flows discounted at the effective interest rate being less than the loan’s carrying value, an impairment allowance will be raised. See Forbearance and other concession programmes on page 365 to 368below for more detail.

Allowances for impairment and other credit provisions

The Group establishes, through charges against profit, impairment

allowances and other credit provisions for the incurred loss inherent in the lending book. Under IFRS, impairment allowances are recognised where there is objective evidence of impairment as a result of one or more loss events that have occurred after initial recognition, and where these events have had an impact on the estimated future cash flows of the financial asset or portfolio of financial assets. Impairment of loans and receivables is measured as the difference between the carrying amount and the present value of estimated future cash flows discounted at the financial asset’s original effective interest rate. If the carrying amount is less than the discounted cash flows, then no further allowance is necessary.

As one of the controls to ensure that adequate impairment allowances are held, movements in impairment to individual names with a total impairment allowance of £10m or more are presented to the GSCO for approval.

Individually assessed impairment

Impairment allowances are measured individually for assets that are individually significant, and collectively where a portfolio comprises homogenous assets and where appropriate statistical techniques are available. In terms of individual assessment, the principal trigger point for impairment is the missing of a contractual payment which is evidence that an account is exhibiting serious financial problems, and where any further deterioration is likely to lead to failure. Details of other trigger points can be found above. Two key inputs to the cash flow calculation are the valuation of all security and collateral, as well as the timing of all asset realisations, after allowing for all attendant costs. This method applies mainly in the wholesaleWholesale portfolios.

Collectively assessed impairment

For collective assessment, the principal trigger point for impairment is the missing of a contractual payment, which is the policy consistently adopted across all credit cards, unsecured loans, mortgages and most other retailRetail lending. The calculation methodology relies on the historical experience of pools of similar assets; hence the impairment allowance is collective. The impairment calculation is typically based on a roll-rate approach, where the percentage of assets that move from the initial delinquency to default is derived from statistical probabilities based on historical experience. Recovery amounts are calculated using a weighted average for the relevant portfolio. This method applies mainly to the retailRetail portfolios and is consistent with Group policy of raising an allowance as soon as impairment is identified. Unidentified impairment is also included in collective impairment.

Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  361


Barclays’ approach to managing risks

Management of credit risk

Impairment for losses incurred but not specifically indentifiedidentified

Unidentified impairment allowances are also raised to cover losses which are judged to be incurred but not yet specifically identified in customer exposures at the balance sheet date, and which, therefore, have not been specifically reported. The incurred but not yet reported calculation is based on the asset’s probability of moving from the performing portfolio to being specifically identified as impaired within the given emergence period and then on to default within a specified period, termed as the outcome period. This is calculated on the present value of estimated future cash flows discounted at the financial asset’s effective interest rate. The emergence and outcome periods vary across products.

Wholesale portfolios

Impairment in the wholesaleWholesale portfolios is generally calculated by valuing each impaired asset on a case by case basis, i.e. on an individual assessment basis. A relatively small amount of wholesaleWholesale impairment relates to unidentified or collective impairment; in such cases, impairment is calculated using modelled Probability of Default (PD) x Loss Given Default (LGD) x Exposure at Default (EAD) adjusted for an emergence period.

Retail portfolios

For retailRetail portfolios, the impairment allowance is mainly assessed on a collective basis and is based on the drawn balances adjusted to take into account the likelihood of the customer defaulting at a particular point in time (PDpit) and the amount estimated as not recoverable (LGD). The basic calculation is:

Impairment allowance = Total outstandings x PDpit x LGD

356  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2016 Annual Report on Form 20-F


Barclays’ approach to managing risks

Management of credit risk and the internal ratings-based approach

The PDpit increases with the number of contractual payments missed thus raising the associated impairment requirement.

In retail,Retail, the current policy also incorporates a high risk segment which is included in the unidentified impairment calculation. High risk segments are those which can be demonstrated to experience higher levels of loss within the performing segment. This segmentation allows for earlier identification of potential loss in a portfolio. Unidentified impairment is also referred to as collective impairment. This is to reflect the impairment that is collectively held against a pool of assets where a loss event has occurred, but has not yet been captured.

Sensitivity of the impairment to key assumptions

Wholesale portfolios

Impairment in the wholesaleWholesale portfolios is generally calculated by valuing each impaired asset on a case by case basis, and is not therefore primarily model-driven. As such, the key assumptions that would have the most impact on impairment provisions in the wholesaleWholesale portfolios are the valuations placed upon security and collateral held and the timing of asset realisations.

When calculating impairment, estimated future cash flows are discounted at the financial asset’s original effective interest rate. At present, in wholesaleWholesale portfolios, the impact of discounting is relatively small in itself but would rise with reference rates. In addition, to the extent that a rise in interest rates impacted economic growth and/or serviceability of wholesaleWholesale clients and customers, this would be expected to feed through in future impairment numbers.

In 2015, key judgements were made on a number of identified cases within Investment Bank, Corporate Banking and Wealth and Investment Management.

Retail portfolios

For Retail portfolios, impairment is calculated predominantly using models. The models are developed using historical data and include explicit and implicit assumptions such as debt sale estimates, house price valuations and the distribution of accounts. Model monitoring and validation are undertaken regularly, at least annually, to ensure that models are fit for purpose. Further to this, the Group accounts for the impact of changes in the economic environment and lags resulting from the design of the models to ensure overall impairment adequacy. See Management adjustments to Models for Impairment on page 137 for more information on key management judgements in 2015.2016. See stress testing (pages 347 to 350)(page 161) for further information.

Emergence and outcome periods

To develop models to calculate the allowance for impairment it is first necessary to estimate the time horizons of these models. These time horizons are called the emergence and outcome periods Emergence Period relates to the time between a loss event occurring and that event becoming apparent via the account becoming delinquent and attracting identified impairment. Outcome is an analytically derived period taken to capture lifetime defaults associated with the observed loss event.

362  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F


This methodology ensures that the Group captures the loss incurred at the correct balance sheet date. These impairment allowances are reviewed and adjusted at least quarterly by an appropriate charge or release of the stock of impairment allowances based on statistical analysis and management judgement. Where appropriate, the accuracy of this analysis is periodically assessed against actual losses. For further detail, see modelling of risk on pages 360 to 367.

Wholesale portfolios

For wholesaleWholesale portfolios in Corporate Bankingcorporate banking and Investment Bank,investment bank, the emergence period is portfolio specific and is based on the anticipated length of time from the occurrence of a loss event to identified impairment being incurred. The emergence period in Corporate Bankingcorporate banking is derived from actual case file review. This is periodically benchmarked against the time taken to move between risk grades in internal watchlists, from WL1 or 2 into WL3, which is the level of risk that will attract a collective impairment allowance. Both methodologies produce similar results for the emergence period, which is currently six months. Within Corporate Banking,corporate banking, post model adjustments can be made to increase the emergence period for certain industry sectors to reflect, for example, a benign environment. The average life of the Investment Bankinvestment bank portfolio is estimated to be 18 months, during which time Investment Bank is exposed to losses on the portfolio. However, it is expected that incurred losses would become apparent within six months, therefore the Investment Bank

investment bank also uses asix-month emergence period.

Retail portfolios

During 2015,2016, the Retail Impairment Policy was significantly strengthened and required enhancements to modelling approaches to both emergence and outcome periods. Policy continues to define minimum emergenceperiods across the credit card portfolios, notably UK and US. Emergence periods at a product level, asare shown in the following table.table below.

 

  Emergence and outcome periods

 

    
    

 

Emergence period

 

(months)

 

  Product Type

 

  

            2015             

 

  

            2014             

 

 

  Credit cards

  

 

2

  

 

3

  Current Accounts / Overdrafts

  3  3

  Unsecured Loans

  3  3

  Secured Loans

 

  6

 

  3

 

Policy enhancement now requires businesses to capture lifetime defaults allowing consideration to cure rates and future events, subject to a minimum floor of 80%.

Emergence periods

  
  Emergence period (months)   

Product Type

 2016 2015 

Credit cards

 3-3.5 

Current Accounts

 4 

Unsecured Loans

 4 

Secured Loans

 6 

Businesses undertake regular analysis, at least annually, to validate that the minimum emergence periods above continue to reflect the actual observed time between the occurrence of a loss event and entry to an impaired state, in order to ensure they remain appropriate and provide sufficient coverage of future losses.

Where any shortfalls are identified at a business or portfolio level, the prescribed minimum emergence periods are increased to reflect our mostup-to-date experience of customer behaviour.

The final approved emergence periods are incorporated within the rates used as part of the overall UI assessment, which now encompasses total outstanding balances on all accounts that are in order, and for which no identified impairment allowances are held.

Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  363


Barclays’ approach to managing risks

Management of credit risk

Individual evidence based outcome periods are also derived at a business/portfolio level, Businesses are required to capture lifetime defaults allowing consideration to cure rates and future events, subject to thea minimum period in the table above. floor of 80%.

Final outcome periods adopted arere-evaluated on an annual basis to ensure they continue to reflect the actual time elapsing from the initial indication of potential default to the default event.

Returning assets to a performing status

Wholesale portfolios

In wholesaleWholesale portfolios, an account may only be returned to a performing status when it ceases to have any actual or perceived financial stress and no longer meets any of the WL criteria, or once facilities have been fully repaid or cancelled. Unless a facility is fully repaid or cancelled, the decision in Corporate Bankingcorporate banking to return an account to performing status may only be taken by the credit risk team, while within the Investment Bank,investment bank, the decision can only be taken by the Investment Bank watchlistBarclays International Watch List Committee.

Retail portfolios

A retailRetail asset,pre-point ofcharge-off, may only be returned to a performing status in the following circumstances:

 

§all arrears (both capital and interest) have been cleared and payments have returned to original contractual payments

 

§for revolving products, are-age event (see page 368)360) has occurred, when the customer is returned to anup-to-date status without having cleared the requisite level of arrears

 

§for amortising products, which are performing on a programme of forbearance and meet the following criteria may be returned to the performing book classified as High Risk21:

 

 -no interest rate concessions must have been granted

 

 -restructure must remain within original product parameters (original term + extension)

 

 -twelve consecutive payments at the revised contractual payment amount must have been received post the restructure event.

For residential mortgages, accounts may also be considered for rehabilitation postcharge-off, where customer circumstances have

Note

1The identification and subsequent treatment ofup-to-date customers who, either through an event or observed behaviour exhibit potential financial difficulty. High Risk includes customers who have suffered recent financial dislocation, i.e. prior forbearance orre-age.

Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2016 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  357


Barclays’ approach to managing risks

Management of credit risk and the internal ratings-based approach

changed. The customer must clear all unpaid capital and interest, and confirm their ability to meet full payments going forward.

Recovery units

Recovery units are responsible for exposures where deterioration of the counterparty/customer credit profile is severe, to the extent that timely or full recovery of exposure is considered unlikely and default has occurred or is likely in the short-term.short term. Recovery teams set and implement strategies to recover the Group’s exposure through realisation of assets and collateral, inco-operation with counterparties/customers and where this is not possible through insolvency and legal procedures.

In wholesale,Wholesale, for a case to be transferred to a recovery unit, it must be in default and have ceased to actively trade or be in insolvency. In Retail, the timings of thecharge-off points to recovery units are established based on the type of loan. For the majority of products, the standard period for charging off accounts is six missed contractual payments (180 days past due date of contractual obligation) unless a Forbearance programme is agreed. Early points are prescribed for unsecured assets. For example, in case of customer bankruptcy or insolvency, associated accounts are charged off within 60 days of notification. See recovery information included in Analysis of Specific Portfolio and Asset Types section in the 2015 Form 20-F.2016 Annual Report.

Foreclosures in process and properties in possession

Foreclosure is the process where the bank initiates legal action against a customer, with the intention of terminating the loan agreement whereby the bank may repossess the property subject to local law and recover amounts it is owed.owned. This process can be initiated by the bank independent of the impairment treatment and it is therefore possible that the foreclosure process may be initiated while the account is still in collections (delinquent) or in recoveries (postcharge-off) where the customer has not agreed a satisfactory repayment schedule with the bank.

2 The identification and subsequent treatment of up-to-date customers who, either through an event or observed behaviour exhibit potential financial difficulty. High Risk includes customers who have suffered recent financial dislocation, i.e. prior forbearance or re-age.

364  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F


Properties in possession include properties held as ‘loans and advances to customers’ and properties held as ‘other real estate owned’.

Held as ’loans‘loans and advances to customers’ (UK and Italy) refers to the properties where the customer continues to retain legal title but where the bank has enforced the possession order as part of the foreclosure process to allow for the disposal of the asset, or the court has ordered the auction of the property.

Held as ‘other real estate owned’ (South Africa and Portugal)Africa) refers to properties where the bank has taken legal ownership of the title as a result of purchase at an auction or similar and treated as ‘other real estate owned’ within other assets on the bank’s balance sheet.

Writing off assets

Write-off refers to the point where it is determined that the asset is irrecoverable, it is no longer considered economically viable to try and recover the asset, it is deemed immaterial, or full and final settlement is reached and a shortfall remains. In the event ofwrite-off, the customer balance is removed from the balance sheet and the impairment reserve held against the asset is released.

The timing and extent of write-offs may involve some element of subjective judgement. Nevertheless, awrite-off will often be prompted by a specific event, such as the inception of insolvency proceedings or other formal recovery action, which makes it possible to establish that some or the entire advance is beyond realistic prospect of recovery. The position of impaired loans is also reviewed at least quarterly to ensure that irrecoverable advances are being written off in a prompt and orderly manner and in compliance with any local regulations.

For retailRetail portfolios, the timings of thewrite-off points are established based on the type of loan. For unsecured, assets in the recoveries book will bewritten-off if the required qualifying repayments are not made within a rolling twelve-month period. For secured loans, the shortfall after the receipt of the proceeds from the disposal of the collateral is written off within three months of that date if no repayment schedule has been agreed with the borrower. Such assets are only written off once all the necessary procedures have been completed and the amount of the loss has been determined.

Subsequent recoveries of amounts previously written off are written

back and hence decrease the amount of the reported loan impairment charge in the income statement. In 2015,2016, total write-offs of impaired financial assets decreased 24%12% to £2.27bn (2014: £3.01bn)£2.0bn (2015: £2.28bn).

Total write-offs of financial assets (£m)a

 

LOGO

LOGONote

a2016 figure excludes Africa

Forbearance and other concession programmes

Forbearance programmes

Forbearance takes place when a concession is made on the contractual terms of a facility in response to an obligor’s financial difficulties. The Group offers forbearance programmes to assist customers and clients in financial difficulty through agreements that may include accepting less than contractual amounts due where financial distress would otherwise prevent satisfactory repayment within the original terms and conditions of the contract. These agreements may be initiated by the customer, the bank or a third party.

Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  365


Barclays’ approach to managing risks

Management of credit risk

Forbearance programmes for wholesaleWholesale portfolios

The majority of wholesaleWholesale client relationships are individually managed, with lending decisions made with reference to specific circumstances and on bespoke terms.

Forbearance occurs when, for reasons relating to the actual or perceived financial difficulty of an obligor, a concession is granted below the Group’s current standard rates (i.e. lending criteria below the Group’s current lending terms), that would not otherwise be considered. This includes all troubled debt restructures granted below our standard rates.

Forbearance would typically be evident where the concession(s) agreed impact the ability to repay debt or avoid recognising a default with a lack of appropriate commercial balance and risk mitigation/structural enhancement of benefit to the Group in return for concession(s).

The following list is not exhaustive but provides some examples of instances that would typically be considered to be evidence of forbearance:

 

§a reduction of current contractual interest rate for the sole purpose of maintaining performing debt status, with no other improvement to terms of benefit to the Group

 

§non-enforcement of a material covenant breach impacting the counterparty’s ability to repay

 

§converting a fully or partially amortising facility to a bullet repayment at maturity, with no other improvement to terms of benefit to the Group, for the sole purpose of avoiding a payment default due to customer’s inability to meet amortisation

 

§extension in maturity date for a project finance facility that gives an effective contractual term longer than the underlying project contract being financed

 

§any release of a material security interest without receiving appropriate value by way of repayment/alternate security offered or other improvement in terms available to the Group commensurate with the value of the security released.

Where a concession is granted that is not a result of financial difficulty and/or is within our current market terms, the concession would not amount to forbearance. For example, a commercially balanced restructure within the Group’s current terms which involves the granting concessions and receiving risk mitigation/structural enhancement of benefit to the Group would not be indicative of forbearance.

The following list (not exhaustive) gives some examples of instances

358  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2016 Annual Report on Form 20-F


Barclays’ approach to managing risks

Management of credit risk and the internal ratings-based approach

that would not typically be considered to be forbearance:

 

§temporary/permanent waivers/resets of covenants agreed in line with our current terms

 

§amending contractual maturity to meet current lending terms that results in a previously amortising facility having a bullet repayment as a consequence of shorter maturity date

 

§equity/warrants taken to increase return to the Group without compromising contractual interest

 

§extension of maturity date where the extension is within the normally granted terms for the type of facility in question

 

§release of a material security interest where commensurate value is received by way of repayment/other security offered.

Cases where a technical default may have occurred, the Group has decided to reserve its position but does not consider the default to be sufficient to impact the counterparty’s ability to pay, would not typically be considered forbearance (as the counterparty would continue to meet its payment obligations under existing terms).

The Troubled Assets Policy requires that a permanent record is retained of all individual cases of forbearance, and upon granting forbearance the counterparty is placed on WL. The counterparty then remains on WL and is flagged as being in forbearance for a minimum of 12 months from the date forbearance is applied. Counterparties may be removed from WL status within 12 months in exceptional circumstances, e.g. full repayment of facilities or significant restructuring. Counterparties placed on WL status are subject to increased levels of credit risk oversight.

366  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F


Counterparties who have been granted forbearance are classified as a Basel ‘unlikeliness’ to pay default for capital purposes, with PD of 1 throughout the period that they remain classified as being in forbearance. This is on the basis that, without intervention by the Group, the counterparties are unlikely to meet their obligations in full which would lead to default.

Impairment is assessed on an individual basis and recognised where relevant impairment triggers have been reached including where counterparties are in arrears and require renegotiation of terms. Forbearance is considered to be an indicator that impairment may be present and an impairment test is performed for all cases placed in forbearance.

Given that these loans have already been assessed for impairment at the point of being classified as being in forbearance, the Group does not have additional procedures to evaluate the likelihood that these loans would default within the loss emergence and confirmation periods.

A control framework exists along with regular sampling to ensure policies for watchlist and impairment are enforced as defined and to ensure that all assets have suitable levels of impairment applied. Portfolios are subject to independent assessment.

Aggregate data for Wholesale forbearance cases is reviewed by the Wholesale Credit Risk Management Committee.

Forbearance programmes for retail portfolios

Retail forbearance is available to customers experiencing financial difficulties. Forbearance solutions take a number of forms depending on individual customer circumstances. Short-term solutions focus on temporary reductions to contractual payments and may change from capital and interest payments to interest only. For loan customers with longer-term financial difficulties, term extensions may be offered, which may include interest rate concessions, For credit card customers with longer-term financial difficulties, a switch to a fully amortising plan may be offered, which may include an interest rate concession.

When an account is placed into a programme of forbearance, the asset will be classified as such for the remainder of its term, unless after 12 months it qualifies for reclassification, upon which it will be returned to theup-to-date book and classified as high risk for a further 12 month period. When the Group agrees to a forbearance programme with a customer, the impairment allowance recognises the impact on cash flows of the agreement to receive less than the original contractual payments. The Retail Impairment Policy prescribes the methodology for impairment of forbearance assets, which is measured by comparing the debt outstanding to the revised expected repayment. This results in

higher impairment, in general, than for fully performing assets, reflecting the additional credit risk attached to loans subject to forbearance.

Barclays has continued to assist customers in financial difficulty through the use of forbearance programmes. However, the extent of forbearance offered by the Group to customers and clients remains small in comparison to the overall size of the loan book.

The level of forbearance extended to customers in other Retail portfolios is not material and, typically, does not currently play a significant part in the way customer relationships are managed. However, additional portfolios will be added to this disclosure should the forbearance in respect of such portfolios become material.

A retailRetail loan is not considered to be renegotiated where the amendment is at the request of the customer, there is no evidence of actual or imminent financial difficulty and the amendment meets with all underwriting criteria. In this case it would be treated as a new loan. In the normal course of business, customers who are not in financial difficulties frequently apply for new loan terms, for example to take advantage of a lower interest rate or to secure a further advance on a mortgage product. Where these applications meet our underwriting criteria and the loan is made at market interest rates, the loan is not classified as being in forbearance. Only in circumstances where a customer has requested a term extension, interest rate reduction or further advance and there is evidence of financial difficulty is the loan classified as forbearance and included in our disclosures on forbearance.

Please see the Creditcredit risk performance section of the 2015 Form 20-Fon page 183 for details of principal wholesale and retailRetail assets currently in forbearance.

Impairment of loans under forbearance

Loans under forbearance programmes are subject to Group policy. In both retailRetail and wholesaleWholesale portfolios, identified impairment is raised for such accounts, recognising the agreement between the Group and customer to pay less than the original contractual payment and is measured using a future discounted cash flow approach comparing the debt outstanding to the expected repayment on the debt.

Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  367


Barclays’ approach to managing risks

Management of credit risk

This results in higher impairment, in general, being held for loans under forbearance than for fully performing assets, reflecting the additional credit risk attached to loans subject to forbearance.

Sustainability of loans under forbearance

The Group monitors the sustainability of loans for which forbearance has been granted.

Wholesale portfolios

In the wholesaleWholesale portfolios, counterparties that have been granted forbearance are placed on WL and therefore are subject to increased levels of credit risk oversight. Counterparties then remain on WL and are classified as being in forbearance with a PD of 1 for capital purposes for a minimum of 12 months from the date forbearance is applied until satisfactory performance is evidenced. Forbearance status and the related default treatment for capital can be removed after 12 months from being applied if any of the following criteria is met:

 

§the counterparty no longer benefits from a concession below our current market rates or reverts back to their original lending terms (prior to the concession being applied)

 

§the counterparty ceases to have any actual or perceived financial stress

 

§a significant restructure takes place which leads to a significant improvement in the credit profile of the counterparty.

Counterparties may only be removed from being classified as being in forbearance with a PD of 1 for capital purposes within 12 months in exceptional circumstances, e.g. full repayment of facilities or significant restructuring that materially improves credit quality. Counterparties continuing to benefit from a concession below current market can be removed from WL and no longer be classified as in forbearance provided they do not meet any of the WL criteria and can evidence consistent satisfactory performance throughout the minimum twelve-month period.

Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2016 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  359


Barclays’ approach to managing risks

Management of credit risk and the internal ratings-based approach

Retail portfolios

In retailRetail portfolios, the type of forbearance programme offered should be appropriate to the nature and the expected duration of the customer’s financial distress. It is imperative that the solution agreed is both appropriate to that customer and sustainable, with a clear demonstration from the customer of both willingness and ability to repay. Before any permanent programme of forbearance is granted, an affordability assessment is undertaken to ensure suitability of the offer. When customers exit forbearance, the accounts are ring-fenced as a High Risk segment within theup-to-date book for a period of at least twelve months.

For disclosure on the Group’s accounting policy with respect to impairment, see note 7page 233 – and pages 361 to 363.Note 7.

Other programmes

Retail re-ageingre-aging activity

Re-ageingRe-aging refers to the placing of an account into anup-to-date position without the requisite repayment of arrears. There-age policy applies to revolving products only. No reduction is made to the minimum due payment amounts which are calculated, as a percentage of balance, with any unpaid principal included in the calculation of the following month’s minimum due payment.

The changes in timing of cash flows followingre-aging do not result in any additional cost to the Group. The following are the conditions required to be met before are-age may occur:

 

§the account must not have been previously charged off or written off

 

§the borrower cannot be bankrupt, subject to an Individual Voluntary Arrangement (a UK contractual arrangement with creditors for individuals wishing to avoid bankruptcy), a fraud or deceased

 

§the borrower must show a renewed willingness and ability to repay the debt. This will be achieved by the borrower making at least three consecutive contractual monthly payments or the equivalent cumulative amount. Contractual monthly payment is defined as the contractual minimum due. Funds may not be advanced for any part of this

 

§the account must have been on book at least nine months (i.e. nine months prior to the three-month qualification period)

 

§no account should bere-aged more than once within any twelve-month period, or more than twice in a five year period.

Assets are considered to belong to a separate High Risk pool. Under High Risk, the performance of the assets is a risk characteristic and results in a higher probability of default being assigned to them in impairment models which meet the requirement of IAS 39,AG87-88.

368  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F


This results in an appropriately higher impairment allowance being recognised on the assets.

Retail small arrears capitalisation

All small arrears capitalisations are now considered a form of Forbearance, based on the European Banking Authority’s requirements for Supervisory Reporting on Forbearance andNon-Performing exposures.

Refinancing risk

This is the risk that the borrower or group of correlated borrowers may be unable to repay bullet-repayment loans at expiry, and will therefore need refinancing.

From a large corporates perspective, refinancing risk will typically be associated with loans that have an element of bullet repayment incorporated into the repayment profile. Refinancing risk is taken into account on a case by case basis as part of the credit review and approval process for each individual loan. The review will consider factors such as the strength of the business model and sustainability of the cash flows; and for bridge loans, the certainty of the sources of repayment and any associated market risk.

Commercial real estate loans will frequently incorporate a bullet repayment element at maturity. Where this is the case, deals are sized and structured to enable the Group to term out the loan if the client were unable to refinance the loan at expiry. Credit review will incorporate an examination of various factors that are central to this consideration, such as tenant quality, tenancy agreements (including break clauses), property quality and interest rate sensitivity.

Loans to small and medium enterprises (SMEs) will typically be either revolving credit lines to cover working capital needs or amortising exposures, with periodic refinancing to give the opportunity to review structure, pricing, etc.

Please refer to the maturity analysis for UK CRE and customers with interest-only home loans in the credit risk performance section in the 2015 Form 20-F2016 Annual Report for more information.

Environmental Riskrisk

The Group has a dedicated Environmental Risk Management team, as part of the central Credit Risk Management function, recognising that environment is a mainstream credit risk issue. Environmental issues are required considerations in credit risk assessment, and environmental risk standards are included in the Wholesale Credit Risk Control Framework.

The Group’s approach to environmental credit risk management addresses risk under three categories, namely Direct Riskrisk and Indirect Risk,risk, which are covered below, and Reputation Risk,risk, on which more detail may be found in the Conduct Risk section on pages 408 and 409.page 400.

Direct Riskrisk can arise when the Group takes commercial land as collateral. In many jurisdictions, enforcement of a commercial mortgage by the bank, leading to possession, potentially renders the Group liable for the costs of remediating a site if deemed by the regulator to be contaminated, including forpre-existing conditions. In the UK, the Group’s approach requires commercial land, if being pledged as collateral, to be subject to a screening mechanism. Where required further assessment of the commercial history of a piece of land and its potential for environmental contamination helps ensure any potential environmental degradation is reflected in the value ascribed to that security. It also identifies potential liabilities which may be incurred by the Group, if realisation of the security were to become a possibility.

Indirect Riskriskcan arise when environmental issues may impact the creditworthiness of the borrower. For instance, incremental costs may be incurred in upgrading a business’ operations to meet emerging environmental regulations or tightening standards. In other circumstances, failure to meet those standards may lead to fines. Environmental impacts on businesses may also include shifts in the market demand for goods or services generated by our customers, or changing supply chain pressures. Environmental considerations affecting our clients can be varied. The bank has developed a series of environmental risk briefing notes, covering ten broad industry headings ranging from Agriculture and Fisheries to Oil and Gas, from Mining and Metals to Utilities and Waste Management. These briefing notes are available to colleagues in business development and credit risk functions across the organisation, outlining the nature of environmental and social risks of which to be aware, as well as the factors which mitigate those risks.

Internal ratings based (IRB) approach

The IRB approach largely relies on internal models to derive the risk parameters/components used in determining the capital requirement for a given exposure. The main risk components include measures of the probability of default (PD), loss given default (LGD) and the exposure at default (EAD). The IRB approach is divided into three alternative applications,Own-Estimates, Supervisory Estimates and Specialised Lending:

Own-Estimates IRB (OEIRB): Barclays uses its own models to estimate PD, LGD and EAD to calculate given risk exposures for various asset classes and the associated Risk Weighted Assets (RWAs)

Supervisory IRB (SIRB): Barclays uses its own PD estimates, but relies on supervisory estimates for other risk components. The SIRB approach is particularly used to floor risk parameters for wholesale credit exposures where default data scarcity may impact the robustness of the model build process.

Specialised Lending IRB: For specialised lending exposures for which PD cannot be modelled reliably, Barclays uses a set of risk weights defined in the relevant regulation, and takes into account a range of prescribed risk factors.

While in the past the industry has used the terms ‘Advanced’,

360  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2016 Annual Report on Form 20-F


Barclays’ approach to managing risks

Management of credit risk and the internal ratings-based approach

‘Foundation’ and ‘Slotting’ IRB, the current enforcing regulation (the Capital Requirements Regulation) does not use these terms.

The IRB calculation for credit risk

For both OEIRB and SIRB approaches, Barclays uses the regulatory prescribed risk-weight functions for the purposes of deriving capital requirements.

In line with regulatory requirements, Long Run Average PD and downturn LGD and CF (Conversion Factor) estimates are used for each customer/facility to determine regulatory capital for all exposures in scope.

For the purpose of pricing and existing customer management, point in time (PIT) PD, LGD and EAD are generally used as these represent the best estimates of risk given the current position in the credit cycle. Whilst Long Run Average PDs are always tested at grade/pool level, PIT PDs are also used for the calculation of capital on certain retail unsecured products, in line with regulation.

Applications of internal ratings

The three components – PD, LGD and CF – are the building blocks used in a variety of applications that measure credit risk across the entire portfolio:

§credit approval: PD models are used in the approval process in both retail and wholesale portfolios. In high-volume retail portfolios, application and behaviour scorecards are frequently used as decision-making tools. In wholesale and some retail home loans portfolios, PD models are used to direct applications to an appropriate credit-sanctioning level

§credit grading:this was originally introduced in the early 1990s to provide a common measure of risk across the Group. Barclays now employs a21-point scale of default probabilities. These are shown in page 121

§risk-reward and pricing:PD, LGD and CF estimates are used to assess the profitability of deals and portfolios and to facilitate risk-adjusted pricing and strategy decisions

§risk appetite:estimates are used to calculate the expected loss and the potential volatility of loss in the Group’s risk appetite framework. See page 348

§impairment calculation: under IAS 39, many collective impairment estimates incorporate the use of PD and LGD models.

§collections and recoveries:model outputs are used to identify segments of the portfolio where collection and recovery efforts should be prioritised

§economic capital (EC) calculation:most EC calculations use similar inputs as the regulatory capital (RC) process

§risk management information:Risk generate reports to inform senior management on issues such as business performance, risk appetite and EC consumption. Model outputs are used as key indicators in those reports. Risk also generates regular report on model risk, which covers model accuracy, model use, input data integrity and regulatory compliance among other issues.

Ratings processes and models for credit exposures

Wholesale credit

To construct ratings for wholesale customers, including financial institutions, corporates, specialised lending, purchased corporate receivables and equity exposures, Barclays complements its internal models suite with external models and rating agencies’ information. A model hierarchy is in place requiring users/credit officers to adopt a consistent approach/model to rate each counterparty based on the asset class type and the nature of the transaction. Barclays has 144 internally approved Wholesale models, of which 38 are used to calculate regulatory capital for credit exposures.

Wholesale PD models

Barclays employs a range of methods in the construction of these models:

§statistical models are used for our high volume portfolios such as small or medium enterprises (SME). The models are typically built using large amounts of internal data, combined with supplemental

data from external data suppliers where available. Wherever external data is sourced to validate or enhance internally held data, similar data quality standards to those applicable to the internal data management are enforced

§structural models incorporate in their specification the elements of the industry-accepted Merton framework to identify the distance to default for a counterparty. This relies upon the modeller having access to specific time series data or data proxies for the portfolio. Data samples used to build and validate these models are typically constructed by appropriately combining data sets from internal default observations with comparable externally obtained data sets from commercial providers such as rating agencies and industry data gathering consortia

§expert lender models are used for those parts of the portfolio where there is insufficient internal or external data to support the construction of a statistically robust model. These models utilise the knowledge andin-depth expertise of the senior credit officers dealing with the specific customer type being modelled. For all portfolios with a low number of default observations, the Group adopts specific regulatory rules, methodologies and floors in its estimates to ensure that the calibration of the model meets the current regulatory criteria for conservatism.

Wholesale LGD models

The LGD models typically rely on statistical analysis to derive the model drivers (including seniority of claim, collateral coverage, recovery periods, industry and costs) that best explain the Group’s historical loss experience, often supplemented with other relevant and representative external information where available. The models are calibrated to downturn conditions for regulatory capital purposes and, where internal and external data is scarce, they are subject to SIRB floors to ensure the calibration of the model meets the current regulatory criteria for conservatism.

Wholesale CF models

The wholesale CF models estimate the potential utilisation of the currently available headroom based on statistical analysis of the available internal and external data and past client behaviour. As is the case with the LGD models, the CF models are subject to downturn calibration for regulatory capital purposes and to floors where data is scarce.

Retail credit

Retail banking and cards operations have long and extensive experience of using credit models in assessing and managing risks. As a result, models play an integral role in customer approval and management decisions. Most retail portfolios are data rich; consequently, most models are builtin-house using statistical techniques and internal data. Exceptions are some expert lender models (similar to those described in the wholesale context) where data scarcity precludes the statistically robust derivation of model parameters. In these cases, appropriately conservative assumptions are typically used, and wherever possible these models are validated/benchmarked against external data. Barclays has 235 internally approved retail models, of which 25 are used to calculate regulatory capital for credit exposures.

Retail PD models

Application and behavioural scorecards are most commonly used for retail PD modelling:

§application scorecards are derived from historically observed performance of new clients. They are built using customer demographic and financial information, supplemented by credit bureau information where available. Through statistical techniques, the relationship between these candidate variables and the default marker is quantified to produce output scores reflecting a PD. These scores are used primarily for new customer decisioning but are, in some cases, also used to allocate a PD to new customers for the purpose of capital calculation

§behavioural scorecards differ from application scorecards in that they rely on the historically observed performance of existing clients. The statistically derived output scores are used for existing customer management activities as well as for the purpose of capital calculation.

 

  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 20152016 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  369361


Barclays’ approach to managing risks

Management of credit risk and the internal ratings-based approach

Retail LGD models

Retail LGD models are built using bespoke methods chosen to best model the operational recovery process and practices. In a number of secured portfolios, LGD drivers are parameterised with market factors (e.g. house price indices, haircut of the property value) to capture market trends. For most unsecured portfolios, where recoveries are not based on collateral, statistical models of cash flows are used to estimate ultimate recoveries and LGDs. In all instances, cash flows are discounted to the point of default by using bespoke country and product level factors. For capital calculations, customised economic downturn adjustments, taking into account loss and default dependency, are made to adjust losses to stressed conditions.

Retail CF models

CF models within retail portfolios are split into two main methodological categories. The general methodology is to derive product level credit conversion factors (CCFs) from historical balance migrations, typically for amortising product, such as mortgages, consumer loans. These are frequently further segmented at a bucket level (e.g. by delinquency). The most sophisticated CF models are based on behavioural factors, determining customer level CCFs from characteristics of the individual facility, typically for overdrafts and credit cards. For capital calculations, customised downturn adjustments, taking into account loss and default dependency, are made to adjust for stressed conditions.

The control mechanisms for the rating system

Model risk has been identified as a risk to be managed under the ERMF. Consequently, the GMRP and its supporting standards covering theend-to-end model life cycle are in place to support the management of risk models.

Key controls captured by the Model Risk Policy cover:

§model governance is anchored in assigning accountabilities and responsibilities to each of the main stakeholders:

–  model owner – each model must have a model owner who has overall accountability for the model

–  model developers – support the model owner and drive development according to model owner defined scope/purpose

–  independent Validation Unit (IVU) – responsible for independent review, challenge and approval of all models.

§externally developed models are subject to the same governance standards as internal models

§models are classified by Materiality (High/Low) and Complexity(Complex/Non-complex)

§all models must be validated and approved by IVU before initial implementation/use

§models are subject to annual review by the model owner and periodic validation and approval by IVU

§all models must be recorded in the Group Models Database (GMD), which records model owners and developers

§model owners must ensure there is evidence that model implementation is accurate and tested.

If a model is found to performsub-optimally, it may be rejected and/or subjected to a Post Model Adjustment (PMA) before approval for continued use is granted.

The Independent Validation Unit (IVU) reporting line is separate from that of the model developers. IVU is part of Model Risk Management (MRM), and the head of MRM reports to Barclays’ Chief Risk Officer. The model development teams have separate reporting lines to the Barclays UK and Barclays International Chief Risk Officers, who in turn report to the Barclays Chief Risk Officer.

Under the 3 lines of defence approach stated in ERMF, the actions of all parties with responsibilities under the Group Model Risk Policy are subject to independent audit by Barclays Internal Audit.

Validation processes for credit exposures

Validation of credit models covers observed model performance but also the scope of model use, interactions between models, data use and quality, the model’s theoretical basis, regulatory compliance and any remediations to model risk that are proposed or in place.

The following sections provide more detail on processes for validating the performance of each model type.

Wholesale PD models

To assess model calibration, the Independent Validation Unit compares the model prediction of default frequency to the realised internal default rate both over the latest year and over all observable model history. Due to the relative infrequency of default of large wholesale obligors, along-run perspective on default risk is vital. Default rates are also compared to external benchmarks where these are relevant and available, such as default rates in rating-agency data. In practice, since financial crises have been infrequent, IVU would expect the model PD used in calculating regulatory capital to exceed the long run observed default rate.

For portfolios where few internal defaults have been observed, portfolio PD is compared to the ‘most prudent PD’ generated by the industry-standard Pluto-Tasche method, using conservative parameter assumptions.

To assess model discrimination performance, the IVU compares the rank-ordering of internal ratings with the pattern of defaults, if any, to construct the industry-standard Gini statistic or similar. The ordering of internal ratings is also compared to the ordering of internal and external comparator ratings where these are available.

Mobility metric and population stability index is also routinely calculated to infer relevant aspects of the model performance.

Wholesale LGD models

To assess model calibration, model outputs are compared to the LGD observed on facilities that entered default in ‘downturn’ periods, as requested by the regulator. Both internal and external data on observed LGD are examined, but preference is given to internal data, since these reflect Barclays’ recover policies. Comparisons are performed by product seniority and security status and for other breakdowns of the portfolio. Model outputs are also compared to thelong-run average of observed LGD. The time-lapse between facility default and the closure of recovery is varied and may be long. In the construction of observed LGD, recoveries are discounted back to the date of default at a conservative interest rate, following regulatory guidance of at least 9%. As noted above, regulatory floors are in place for the LGD used in calculating regulatory capital for exposure types where few default observations are available.

To assess model discrimination, the IVU compares the rank-ordering of model predictions to that of observed LGD and calculates the Spearmans Rank correlation coefficient and other measures of discrimination.

Wholesale CF models

To assess model calibration, the conversion factors observed in internal data are compared to model predictions, both in downturn periods as defined by the regulator, and on along-run average basis. Comparisons are performed separately for different product types. Validation focuses on internal data, with external data used as a benchmark, because conversion factors are related to banks’ facility management practices. Particular care is used in separating cases where facility limits changed between the date of observation and default, as these can lead to measurements of conversion factors that take extreme values. As a benchmark only, total predicted exposure at default for all defaulted facilities is compared to realised exposure at default. This comparison is done because it is relatively insensitive to extreme values for observed CF on some facilities. The primary validation tests are performed on facility-weighted rather then exposure-weighted basis, however, in line with the relevant regulations.

Retail PD models

To assess rating philosophy, i.e. whether it is aPoint-in-Time system orThrough-the-Cycle system, the Independent Validation Unit produces migration indices to investigate relevant grade migration.

To assess model calibration, the Independent Validation Unit compares the model prediction of default frequency to the realised internal default rate by grade/pool as required by CRR. As a minimum, IVU expects the expected default rate is at least equal or above the level of observed

 

362  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2016 Annual Report on Form 20-F


Barclays’ approach to managing risks

Management of credit risk and the internal ratings-based approach

default rate.

To assess model discrimination performance, the IVU compares the rank-ordering of internal ratings with the pattern of defaults, if any, to construct the industry-standard Gini statistic or similar.

To assess model stability, the population distribution, the character distribution and parameter estimates are assessed individually.

A 0.03% regulatory floor is in place for the facility level PD used in calculating regulatory capital.

Retail LGD models

LGD model components are compared to observed value respectively, this may include but not limited to probability of possession/charge off, forced sale discount, time from default to crystallisation and discount rate. Where components are similar to PD in nature, the approach stated in the PD section applies to assess the calibration, discrimination and stability of the component.

The calibration of the overall LGD is assessed through the expected against actual comparison by default flow and stock population respectively. The downturn LGD appropriateness is further assessed to ensure that the downturn LGD is equal to or above thelong-run average of observed LGD. This exercise is performed at grade/pool level according to CRR. In the construction of observed LGD, recoveries are discounted back to the date of default at a conservative interest rate, following regulatory guidance. As noted above, regulatory floors are in place for the LGD used in calculating regulatory capital where appropriate (this includes but not limited to thenon-zero LGD floor at account level, the collateral uncertainty consideration, the portfolio level LGD floor and UK property haircut floor).

The primary validation tests are performed on facility-weighted rather then exposure-weighted basis, however, in line with the relevant regulations.

Retail CF models

The calibration of the overall CF is assessed through the expected

against actual comparison by default flow and stock population respectively. The downturn CF appropriateness is further assessed to ensure that the downturn CF is equal to or above thelong-run average of observed CF. This exercise is performed at grade/pool level according to CRR. Particular care is used in separating cases where facility limits changed between the date of observation and default, as these can lead to measurements of conversion factors that take extreme values.

Depending on the modelling approach, the relevant measure used for PD/LGD may be used accordingly to assess calibration, discrimination and stability.

CF is floored so that the exposure at the point of default cannot be less than exposure observed at point of regulatory reporting.

The primary validation tests are performed on facility-weighted rather then exposure-weighted basis, however, in line with the relevant regulations.

Table 84 for credit risk model characteristics shows modelled variables to calculate RWAs (PD, LGD, and EAD) at portfolio level, with number of models and their significance in terms of RWAs, model method or approach, numbers of years of data used, Basel asset class of the customer or client, and regulatory thresholds applied.

Selected features of material models

The table below contains selected features of the Group’s AIRB credit risk models which are used to calculate RWAs, with their significance in terms of RWAs, model methodology or approach, numbers of years of data used, Basel asset class of the customer or client, and any regulatory thresholds applied. RWAs have been reported with the BUK and BI split. Please note that RWAs reported are as of Sep’16 since complete reconciled information was not published for Dec’16 at the time of reporting.

§PD models listed in the table account for £106bn of total AIRB approach RWAs

§LGD models listed in the table account for £119bn of total AIRB approach RWAs

Table 84 IRB credit risk models’ selected features

 

                  
   Size of associated portfolio         Applicable 
Component   (RWAs)     Number of    Basel asset    industry-wide 
modelled Portfolio  BUK (£m)  BI (£m)  Model description and methodology   years loss data    classes measured    regulatory thresholds 
PD Publicly traded corporate  121  28,104  Statistical model using a Merton-based methodology. It takes quantitative factors as inputs.   > 10 Years    Corporate    
PD floor of
0.03%
 
 
PD Customers rated by Moody’s and S&P  11  27,009  Rating Agency Equivalent model converts agency ratings into estimated equivalent PIT default rates using credit cycles based on Moody’s data.   > 10 Years    



Corporate,
Financial
Institutions
and
Sovereigns
 
 
 
 
 
   


PD floor of
0.03% for
corporate and
institutions
 
 
 
 
PD Corporate and SME customers with turnover < £20m  4,977  4,548  Statistical models that uses regression techniques to derive relationship between observed default experience and a set of behavioral variables.   6 - 10 Years    

Corporate,
Corporate
SME,
 
 
 
   
PD floor of
0.03%
 
 
PD Corporate customers with turnover >= £20m  221  10,618  Statistically derived models sourced from an external vendor (Moody’s RiskCalc)   6 - 10 Years    Corporate    
PD floor of
0.03%
 
 
PD Home Finance  16,043    Statistical scorecards estimated using regression techniques, segmented along arrears status and portfolio type.   6 - 10 Years    



Secured By
Real Estate
(residential
andbuy-to-let
mortgages)
 
 
 
 
 
   
PD floor of
0.03%
 
 
PD Barclaycard UK  15,110    Statistical scorecards estimated using regression techniques, segmented along arrears status and portfolio type.   6 - 10 Years    

Qualifying
Revolving
Retail (QRRE)
 
 
 
   
PD floor of
0.03%
 
 

LOGO  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2016 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  363


Barclays’ approach to managing risks

Management of credit risk and the internal ratings-based approach

Table ## IRB credit risk models’ selected features continued

 

         
    Size of associated portfolio        

Applicable

industry-wide

regulatory thresholds

Component

modelled

    (RWAs)    

Number of

years loss data

  

Basel asset

classes measured

  
  

Portfolio

  

BUK (£m)

  

BI (£m)      

  

Model description and methodology

      
LGD  Corporate and Financial Institutions    53,992      Model based on a statistical regression that outputs a long run average LGD by estimating the expected value of recovery. Inputs include industry, seniority, instrument, collateral and country.  > 10 Years  Corporate,
Financial
Institutions
  LGD floor of 45%
based on low
default portfolio
criteria
LGD  All business customers
(excluding certain specialised sectors)
  4,938  29,292      Model is based on a function estimated using actual recoveries experience. It takes account of collateral value and an allowance for non collateral recovery.  > 10 Years  Corporate,  LGD floor of 5%
LGD  UK Home Finance  16,043    Data driven estimates of loss and probability of possession  6 - 10 Years  Secured By Real Estate (residential andbuy-to-let mortgages)  The portfolio average downturn LGD is floored at 10%
LGD  Barclaycard UK  15,110    Statistical models combining segmented regression and other forecasting techniques  6 - 10 Years  Qualifying Revolving Retail (QRRE)  

Credit Risk IRB models performance back testing - estimated versus actual

The following tables compare the PDs and LGDs estimated by the Group’s IRB models with the actual default and loss rates. Comparisons are based on the assets in IRB approach portfolios and are used to assess performance of the models. The estimates and actual figures represent direct outputs from the models rather than outputs used in regulatory capital calculations that may be adjusted to apply more conservative assumptions.

Back testing results are reported within each IRB exposure class at overall Group level both for Retail and Wholesale excluding Africa, as the historical Barclays UK and Barclays International split is not available for the Wholesale obligors. The Barclays UK and Barclays International classification has been initiated from 2016 and we intend to report back testing results at Barclays UK and Barclays International level from next year onwards.

Risk models are subject to the Group Model Risk Policy which contains detailed guidance on the minimum standards for model risk management. For example, PDs must be estimated over a sufficient period, show sufficient differentiation in predictions for different customers, show conservatism where data limitations exist, and follow prescriptive techniques. These standards are achieved via an independent validation process through appropriately independent experts. Once validated and correctly implemented, models are subject to regular monitoring to ensure they can still be used. Comparing model estimates with actual default rates for PD and loss rates for LGD form part of this monitoring. Such analysis is used to assess and enhance the performance of the models.

Further detail is provided in the management of model risk on page 396.

PD measures

§The model estimated PIT PDs are compared with the actual default rates by PD ranges within each IRB exposure class. PD ranges, estimated PDs and actual default rates are based on the existing models default definitions. UK Cards is the only CRD IV compliant portfolio for the reporting period, for the remaining portfolios CRD IV compliant models are either under implementation or currently under development/approval as per the CRD IV roll out plan agreed with the PRA.

§The estimated PDs are forward-looking average PD by the model at the beginning of the twelve-month period, i.e. average PD of the Nov’15non-defaulted obligors including inactive andnon-borrowers. Both EAD weighted and simple average PDs have been reported.

§The estimated PDs are compared with the simple average of historical annual default rates over the past 5 years, starting Nov’11.

§The PIT PD is used as a predicted measure in internal monitoring and annual validation of the models. In contrast, the capital calculation uses TTC or Regulatory PDs (not shown below), calibrated tolong-run default averages with additional adjustments where modelled outputs display evidence of risk understatement (including credit expert overrides, regulatory adjustments etc.). The PIT measure is subject to under or over prediction depending on the relative position of the portfolio to the credit cycle.

§A mapping has been provided between external ratings and internal PD ranges based on the published reports from the two rating agencies - Moody’s and S&P.

§For the wholesale models, the average default probabilities in the tables have been determined from the full scope of clients graded by the IRB model suite, which may include some clients that have either zero exposure or zero limits marked at the time of calculation.

LGD measures

§The model estimated LGDs, unadjusted for regulatory floors and for downturn adjustments, are compared with the actual LGDs within each IRB exposure class.

§The estimated LGDs are derived from a simple average of LGDs at the time of default for the set of cases closed over the previous twelve months.

§The actual LGD rate is the simple average observed loss rate for the set of cases closed over the previous twelve months, regardless of the time of default.

§The LGD measures are used as a predicted measure in internal monitoring and annual validation of the models. The capital calculation uses Downturn LGDs with additional adjustments and regulatory floors where modelled outputs display evidence of risk understatement.

364  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2016 Annual Report on Form 20-F


Barclays’ approach to managing risks

Management of credit risk and the internal ratings-based approach

Table 85: Analysis of expected performance versus actual results

This table provides an overview of credit risk model performance, assessed by the analysis of average PDs and average LGDs.

The table compares the raw model output to the actual experience in our portfolios. Such analysis is used to assess and enhance the adequacy and accuracy of models. The raw outputs are subject to a number of adjustments before they are used in the calculation of capital, for example to allow for the position in the credit cycle and the impact of stress on recovery rates.

Asset Class 
         

Weighted
Average
PD

   

Arithmetic
Average
PD by
obligors

  Number of obligors  

Defaulted
obligors
in the year

   

of which:
new
defaulted

in the year

   

Average
historical
annual
default

%

 
    External Ratings Equivalent     As at
Nov’15
 As at
Nov’16
      
Wholesale EBA PD Range (%) Moody’s S&P  %   %              £m   

Central

 

0.00 to <0.15

 

Aaa, Aa1, Aa2, Aa3,

 

AAA, AA+, AA,AA-,

   0.02%    0.03%  132 97           0.00% 

governments

  

A1, A2, A3, Baa1

 

A+, A,A-, BBB+

            

or central

 

0.15 to <0.25

 

Baa1, Baa2

 

BBB+, BBB

   0.18%    0.22%  6 7           0.00% 

banks

 

0.25 to <0.50

 

Baa3, Ba1

 

BBB-, BB+

   0.36%    0.37%  7 8           0.00% 
 

0.50 to <0.75

 

Ba1, Ba2

 

BB+, BB

   0.00%    0.65%  3 1           0.00% 
 

0.75 to <2.50

 

Ba2, Ba3, B1, B2

 

BB,BB-, B+, B

   0.86%    1.39%  11 10           0.00% 
 

2.50 to <10.00

 

B1, B2, B3

 

B+, B, B-

   0.00%    6.58%  6 7           0.00% 
 

10.00 to <100.00

 Caa1, Caa2, Caa3, Ca, C   CCC+, CCC, CCC-, CC, C   0.00%    23.24%  4 4           0.00% 
  

100.00 (default)

 D D   100.00%    100.00%              0.00% 

Institutions

 

0.00 to <0.15

 

Aaa, Aa1, Aa2, Aa3,

 

AAA, AA+, AA, AA-,

   0.03%    0.03%  7,098 8,661           0.00% 
  

A1, A2, A3, Baa1

 

A+, A,A-, BBB+

            
 

0.15 to <0.25

 

Baa1, Baa2

 

BBB+, BBB

   0.20%    0.19%  731 880           0.00% 
 

0.25 to <0.50

 

Baa3, Ba1

 

BBB-, BB+

   0.37%    0.39%  320 386           0.00% 
 

0.50 to <0.75

 

Ba1, Ba2

 

BB+, BB

   0.61%    0.65%  123 111           0.00% 
 

0.75 to <2.50

 

Ba2, Ba3, B1, B2

 

BB,BB-, B+, B

   1.53%    1.34%  264 222           0.00% 
 

2.50 to <10.00

 

B1, B2, B3

 

B+, B, B-

   6.42%    5.26%  191 141           0.00% 
 

10.00 to <100.00

 

Caa1, Caa2, Caa3,

 

CCC+, CCC,CCC-,

   17.64%    25.21%  98 72   2        0.46% 
  

Ca, C

 

CC, C

            
  

100.00 (default)

 D D   100.00%    100.00%  47 15           0.00% 

Corporate

 

0.00 to <0.15

 

Aaa, Aa1, Aa2, Aa3,

 

AAA, AA+, AA,AA-,

   0.04%    0.05%  1525 1383           0.00% 
  

A1, A2, A3, Baa1

 

A+, A,A-, BBB+

            
 

0.15 to <0.25

 

Baa1, Baa2

 

BBB+, BBB

   0.20%    0.20%  300 364           0.03% 
 

0.25 to <0.50

 

Baa3, Ba1

 

BBB-, BB+

   0.36%    0.38%  713 636   4        0.25% 
 

0.50 to <0.75

 

Ba1, Ba2

 

BB+, BB

   0.61%    0.62%  398 297   2        0.13% 
 

0.75 to <2.50

 

Ba2, Ba3, B1, B2

 

BB,BB-, B+, B

   1.25%    1.32%  1,109 841   4        0.35% 
 

2.50 to <10.00

 

B1, B2, B3

 

B+, B, B-

   4.57%    4.78%  845 1,263   29        1.85% 
 

10.00 to <100.00

 

Caa1, Caa2, Caa3,

 

CCC+, CCC,CCC-,

   23.94%    21.88%  323 247   18        3.99% 
  

Ca, C

 

CC, C

            
  

100.00 (default)

 D D   100.00%    100.00%  311 276           0.00% 

Corporate

 

0.00 to <0.15

 

Aaa, Aa1, Aa2, Aa3,

 

AAA, AA+, AA, AA-,

   0.07%    0.08%  964 748           0.06% 

SME

  

A1, A2, A3, Baa1

 

A+, A,A-, BBB+

            
 

0.15 to <0.25

 

Baa1, Baa2

 

BBB+, BBB

   0.19%    0.19%  1,310 1,508           0.20% 
 

0.25 to <0.50

 

Baa3, Ba1

 

BBB-, BB+

   0.36%    0.36%  2,826 2,904   4        0.13% 
 

0.50 to <0.75

 

Ba1, Ba2

 

BB+, BB

   0.64%    0.64%  2,056 2,194   2    1    0.22% 
 

0.75 to <2.50

 

Ba2, Ba3, B1, B2

 

BB,BB-, B+, B

   1.28%    1.35%  4,146 4,405   19    1    0.51% 
 

2.50 to <10.00

 

B1, B2, B3

 

B+, B, B-

   5.24%    4.96%  3,698 4,719   72    5    3.60% 
 

10.00 to <100.00

 

Caa1, Caa2, Caa3,

 

CCC+, CCC,CCC-,

   23.28%    23.01%  732 528   48    1    10.18% 
  

Ca, C

 

CC, C

            
  

100.00 (default)

 D D   100.00%    100.00%  214 134           0.00% 

Specialist

 

0.00 to <0.15

 

Aaa, Aa1, Aa2, Aa3,

 AAA, AA+, AA,AA-,   0.07%    0.07%  30 29           0.00% 

Lending

  

A1, A2, A3, Baa1

 

A+, A,A-, BBB+

            
 

0.15 to <0.25

 

Baa1, Baa2

 

BBB+, BBB

   0.19%    0.19%  107 35           0.00% 
 

0.25 to <0.50

 

Baa3, Ba1

 

BBB-, BB+

   0.37%    0.37%  180 145           0.00% 
 

0.50 to <0.75

 

Ba1, Ba2

 

BB+, BB

   0.61%    0.64%  137 169           0.76% 
 

0.75 to <2.50

 

Ba2, Ba3, B1, B2

 

BB,BB-, B+, B

   1.18%    1.29%  142 218           0.00% 
 

2.50 to <10.00

 

B1, B2, B3

 

B+, B, B-

   5.02%    5.09%  152 135   1        2.43% 
 

10.00 to <100.00

 

Caa1, Caa2, Caa3,

 

CCC+, CCC,CCC-,

   28.12%    25.71%  14 12   1        13.96% 
  

Ca, C

 

CC, C

            
  

100.00 (default)

 D D   100.00%    100.00%  69 60           0.00% 

Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2016 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  365


Barclays’ approach to managing risks

Management of credit risk and the internal ratings-based approach

Table 85: Analysis of expected performance versus actual resultscontinued

 

 

     

Asset Class

 

     
             

Arithmetic

Average

PD by

obligors

               
                     

of which:

new

   

Average

historical

 
         Weighted    Number of obligors  Defaulted     
         Average    As at As at  obligors   defaulted   annual 
    External Ratings Equivalent  PD    Nov’15 Nov’16  in the year   in the year   default 
Retail EBA PD Range (%) Moody’s S&P  %   %  £m £m  £m   £m   % 

SMEa

 

0.00 to <0.15

 

Aaa, Aa1, Aa2, Aa3,

 

AAA, AA+, AA, AA-,

   0.04%    0.06%  33,578 34,933   21    1    0.04% 
  

A1, A2, A3, Baa1

 

A+, A,A-, BBB+

            
 

0.15 to <0.25

 

Baa1, Baa2

 

BBB+, BBB

   0.20%    0.20%  23,989 25,288   28    1    0.07% 
 

0.25 to <0.50

 

Baa3, Ba1

 

BBB-, BB+

   0.37%    0.37%  54,759 57,747   69    4    0.07% 
 

0.50 to <0.75

 

Ba1, Ba2

 

BB+, BB

   0.64%    0.64%  43,467 61,414   99    6    0.13% 
 

0.75 to <2.50

 

Ba2, Ba3, B1, B2

 

BB,BB-, B+, B

   1.48%    1.54%  210,081 172,631   448    83    0.19% 
 

2.50 to <10.00

 

B1, B2, B3

 

B+, B, B-

   4.68%    5.54%  305,063 313,511   1,374    288    0.43% 
 

10.00 to <100.00

 

Caa1, Caa2, Caa3,

 

CCC+, CCC, CCC-,

   20.67%    23.61%  303,665 339,375   7,206    1,136    3.46% 
  

Ca, C

 

CC, C

            
  

100.00 (default)

 

D

 

D

   100.00%    100.00%  5,606 5,097           0.00% 

Secured

 

0.00 to <0.15

 

Aaa, Aa1, Aa2, Aa3,

 

AAA, AA+, AA,AA-,

   0.09%    0.09%  700,161 745,590   510        0.08% 

by Real

  

A1, A2, A3, Baa1

 

A+, A,A-, BBB+

            

Estate

 

0.15 to <0.25

 

Baa1, Baa2

 

BBB+, BBB

   0.19%    0.19%  191,114 137,113   314        0.15% 
 

0.25 to <0.50

 

Baa3, Ba1

 

BBB-, BB+

   0.33%    0.33%  105,224 60,859   365        0.29% 
 

0.50 to <0.75

 

Ba1, Ba2

 

BB+, BB

   0.63%    0.62%  17,538 12,575   145        0.69% 
 

0.75 to <2.50

 

Ba2, Ba3, B1, B2

 

BB,BB-, B+, B

   1.23%    1.25%  21,316 18,452   450        2.03% 
 

2.50 to <10.00

 

B1, B2, B3

 

B+, B, B-

   5.12%    5.05%  6,085 5,467   465        7.06% 
 

10.00 to <100.00

 

Caa1, Caa2, Caa3,

 

CCC+, CCC, CCC-,

   38.18%    37.73%  6,102 5,270   2,024        49.52% 
  

Ca, C

 

CC, C

            
  

100.00 (default)

 

D

 

D

   100.00%    100.00%  11,983 11,694            

Qualifying

 

0.00 to <0.15

 

Aaa, Aa1, Aa2, Aa3,

 

AAA, AA+, AA,AA-,

   0.07%    0.05%  10,391,483 10,551,296   3,453    893    0.04% 

Revolving

  

A1, A2, A3, Baa1

 

A+, A,A-, BBB+

            

Retail

 

0.15 to <0.25

 

Baa1, Baa2

 

BBB+, BBB

   0.20%    0.20%  1,927,465 1,814,853   3,015    682    0.18% 
 

0.25 to <0.50

 

Baa3, Ba1

 

BBB-, BB+

   0.36%    0.36%  2,244,780 2,166,187   6,625    1,038    0.34% 
 

0.50 to <0.75

 

Ba1, Ba2

 

BB+, BB

   0.62%    0.61%  1,158,422 1,140,628   6,018    564    0.60% 
 

0.75 to <2.50

 

Ba2, Ba3, B1, B2

 

BB,BB-, B+, B

   1.44%    1.38%  2,652,087 2,703,357   31,720    1,293    1.29% 
 

2.50 to <10.00

 

B1, B2, B3

 

B+, B, B-

   4.88%    4.81%  1,499,071 1,591,182   71,475    1,470    4.70% 
 

10.00 to <100.00

 

Caa1, Caa2, Caa3,

 

CCC+, CCC, CCC-,

   25.47%    28.16%  433,988 494,297   129,694    96    28.13% 
  

Ca, C

 

CC, C

            
  

100.00 (default)

 

D

 

D

   100.00%    100.00%  591,116 476,487           0.00% 

Other

 

0.00 to <0.15

 

Aaa, Aa1, Aa2, Aa3,

 

AAA, AA+, AA,AA-,

   0.13%    0.12%  351 60   2        0.58% 

Retail

  

A1, A2, A3, Baa1

 

A+, A,A-, BBB+

            
 

0.15 to <0.25

 

Baa1, Baa2

 

BBB+, BBB

   0.21%    0.21%  2,259 1,958   5        0.56% 
 

0.25 to <0.50

 

Baa3, Ba1

 

BBB-, BB+

   0.41%    0.40%  19,001 46,054   66        0.58% 
 

0.50 to <0.75

 

Ba1, Ba2

 

BB+, BB

   0.64%    0.64%  38,663 87,272   155        0.64% 
 

0.75 to <2.50

 

Ba2, Ba3, B1, B2

 

BB,BB-, B+, B

   1.58%    1.54%  326,841 335,910   2,784        1.30% 
 

2.50 to <10.00

 

B1, B2, B3

 

B+, B, B-

   3.99%    3.98%  161,800 124,689   6,406        4.47% 
 

10.00 to <100.00

 

Caa1, Caa2, Caa3,

 

CCC+, CCC, CCC-,

   45.12%    41.24%  18,055 25,917   8,251        35.54% 
  

Ca, C

 

CC, C

            
  

100.00 (default)

 

D

 

D

   100.00%    100.00%  59,108 43,731           0.00% 

Asset Class

               
   Number of     
   resolved cases over     
   last one year    Predicted LGD    Actual LGD 
   (Dec’15 to Nov’16)    (Simple Average)    (Simple Average) 
         %    % 

Wholesale

      

 

Investment Bank

   19    30%    11% 

 

Corporate Bank

   89    42%    22% 
      

 

Retail

      

 

SME

   2,116    82%    67% 

 

Secured by Real Estate

   4,168    4%    4% 

 

Qualifying Revolving Retail

   357,342    74%    72% 

 

Other retail

   36,968    79%    77% 

Note

a Refer to the notes below for an explanation of data limitations relating to the Retail SME figures presented in this table

366  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2016 Annual Report on Form 20-F


Barclays’ approach to managing risks

Management of credit risk and the internal ratings-based approach

2016 AIRB models back testing summary

Section below provides AIRB model performance summary based on the above back testing results, along with the remediation plans.

Wholesale

§The Wholesale book continues to maintain low default rates across IRB exposure classes, with no defaults observed for ‘Central Governments or Central Banks’. The estimated PDs are higher (conservative) compared to actual default rates for most PD ranges within each exposure class.

§There are two key LGD models used for the Wholesale IRB exposures. Both the LGD models overestimate (conservative) on a PIT basis.

§A new set of replacement models are currently under development to comply with CRD IV requirements for the material portfolios, and are scheduled to be submitted to the PRA over2017-18

Retail SME

§The estimated PDs rank order the actual default experience for the UK SME book, i.e. higher PDs implying higher actual default rates.

§The estimated PDs and LGD are much higher (conservative) compared to the actual default rates and LGD. The actual PD is low due to the inclusion of immaterial and dormant customers in the denominator. In addition, there was a temporary default identification issue during the reporting period, which has now been rectified, though the retrospective identification was not possible. The LGD model is benchmarked to the Corporate LGD model.

§A new set of CRD IV compliant models have been approved by the PRA in 2016 and are currently under implementation.

Secured by Real Estate

§This covers mortgage portfolios for UK and Italy. Rank ordering is maintained across PD ranges.

§For UK Mortgages, the PD model is accurate, slightly conservative at an overall level (0.34% expected vs. 0.31% actual). The portfolio maintains low LGD and the model overestimates (2.2% estimated vs. 1.0% actual). The new CRD IV compliant model suite is awaiting PRA approval.

§For Italy Mortgages, both the PIT PD and LGD models underestimate(non-conservative) primarily due to a decrease in the House Price Index (HPI). The portfolio has observed significant losses in recovery as a result of the lengthening of the auction process and general collateral devaluation driven by a depressed housing market. In addition, the market at origination when appraisals of the collateral values were carried out was significantly optimistic. A new set of CRD IV compliant models are currently under development, and are due for PRA submission by December 2017. Interim Post Model Adjustments (PMA) are in place to address existing models deficiencies.

Qualifying Revolving Retail

§This constitutes UK Cards, Germany Cards and UK Current Account portfolios. The estimated PDs rank order well across all 3 portfolios and at an overall level.

§For UK Cards, a slight underestimation is observed in the PD model driven by the high risk bands; 1.9% estimated vs. 2.1% actual at an overall level. The LGD model is accurate (69.9% estimated vs. 69.5% actual). The existing CRD IV model suite is currently under recalibration to further improve its accuracy.

§For Germany Cards, a slight overestimation in the PD estimates is driven byin-order population; 1.5% estimated vs. 1.4% actual at an overall level. The overestimation in the LGD model (84% estimated vs. 75% actual), is primarily driven by debt sale at a better price. New CRD IV models are currently under development, and are due for PRA submission in H1 2017.

§For UK Current Accounts, PD model overestimates are primarily due to a decrease in actual default rates over the last year (0.73% estimated vs. 0.57% actual). The LGD model is accurate (84% estimated vs. 80% actual). New CRD IV compliant model suites are currently under internal review; to be submitted to the PRA by Q1 2017.

Other Retail

§This covers UK Barclayloan portfolio. The PD rank ordering holds except for the low PD ranges, which have a low number of defaults.

§The current portfolio default rate and estimated PD is lower compared to the historical average default rate due to an improvement in the portfolio quality. However, both PD (3.4% estimated vs. 3.1% actual) and LGD (79% expected vs. 77% actual) models are accurate at an overall level based on a comparison over past one year.

§New CRD IV compliant capital suite has been submitted to the PRA in Dec’16.

Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2016 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  367


Barclays’ approach to managing risks

Management of credit risk mitigation techniques and counterparty credit risk

 

 

Management of credit risk mitigation techniques and counterparty credit risk

LOGO

    

Counterparty credit risk arises from derivatives and similar contracts. This section details the specific aspects of the risk framework related to this type of credit risk. As credit risk mitigation is one of the principal uses of derivative contracts by banks, this is also discussed in this section.

 

§ OnA general discussion of credit risk mitigation (covering traditional credit risks) is also included from page 375 a high level description of the types of exposures incurred in the course of Barclays’ activity.369.

 

§ Mitigation techniques specific to counterparty credit risk are also discussed.

 

§A more general discussion of credit risk mitigation (covering traditional credit risks) is also included from page 371.


 

 

 

 

 

LOGO

368  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2016 Annual Report on Form 20-F


Barclays’ approach to managing risks

Management of credit risk mitigation techniques and counterparty credit risk

Credit risk mitigation

The Group employs a range of techniques and strategies to actively mitigate the counterparty credit risk.risks. These can broadly be divided into three types:

 

§ netting andset-off

 

§ collateral

 

§ risk transfertransfer.

The Group has detailed policies in place to ensure that credit risk mitigation is appropriately recognised and recorded. The recognition of credit risk mitigation is subject to a number of considerations, including ensuring legal certainty of enforceability and effectiveness, ensuring the valuation and liquidity of the collateral is adequately monitored, and ensuring the value of the collateral is not materially correlated with the credit quality of the counterparty.

All three types of credit risk mitigation may be used by different areas of the Group for exposures with a full range of counterparties. For instance, Investment Bank, Corporate Banking and other business areasbusinesses may all take property, cash or other physical assets as collateral for exposures to retailers, property companies or other client types.

Netting andset-off

In most jurisdictions in which the Group operates, credit risk exposures can be reduced by applying netting andset-off. In exposure terms, this credit risk mitigation technique has the largest overall impact on net exposure to derivative transactions, compared with other risk mitigation techniques.

For derivative transactions, the Group’s normal practice is to enter into standard master agreements with counterparties (e.g. ISDAs)ISDAS). These master agreements typically allow for netting of credit risk exposure to a counterparty resulting from a derivative transactiontransactions against the Group’s obligations to the counterparty in the event of default, and so produce a lower net credit exposure. These agreements may also reduce settlement exposure (e.g. for foreign exchange transactions) by allowing payments on the same day in the same currency to beset-off against one another.

Under IFRS, netting is permitted only if both of the following criteria are satisfied:

 

§ the entity currently has a legally enforceable right to set off the recognised amounts

 

§ the entity intends either to settle on a net basis, or to realise the asset and settle the liability simultaneously.

Under US GAAP, netting is also permitted, regardless of a currently legally enforceable right ofset-off and/or the intention to settle on a net basis, where there is a counterparty master agreement that would be enforceable in the event of bankruptcy.

Collateral

The Group has the ability to call on collateral in the event of default of the counterparty, comprising:

 

§ home loans: a fixed charge over residential property in the form of houses, flats and other dwellings. The value of collateral is impacted by property market conditions which drive demand and therefore value of the property. Other regulatory interventions on ability to repossess, longer period to repossession and granting of forbearance may also affect the collateral value

 

§ wholesale lending: a fixed charge over commercial property and other physical assets, in various forms

 

§ other retail lending:includes charges over motor vehicle and other physical assets; second lien charges over residential property, which are subordinate to first charges held either by the Group or by another party; and finance lease receivables, for which typically the Group retains legal title to the leased asset and has the right to repossess the asset on the default of the borrower

 

§ derivatives:the Group also often seeks to enter into a margin agreement (e.g. Credit Support Annex (CSA)) with counterparties with which the Group has master netting agreements in place. These annexes to master agreements provide a mechanism for further reducing credit risk, whereby collateral (margin) is posted on a regular basis (typically daily) to collateralise the mark to market exposure of a

derivative portfolio measured on a net basis. The Group may additionally negotiate the receipt of an independent amount further mitigating risk by collateralising potential mark to market exposure moves

Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  371


Barclays’ approach to managing risks

Management of counterparty credit risk and credit risk mitigation techniques

 

§ reverse repurchase agreements:collateral typically comprises highly liquid securities which have been legally transferred to the Group subject to an agreement to return them for a fixed price

 

§ financial guarantees and similaroff-balance sheet commitments:cash collateral may be held against these arrangements.

For details of the fair value of collateral held, please refer to maximum exposure table in the credit risk performance section on page 113.119.

In exposure terms, the main portfolios that the Group takes collateral for are home loans and Reverse Repurchase Agreementsreverse repurchase agreements with financial institutions.

Floating charges over receivables

The Group may also obtain collateral in the form of floating charges over receivables and inventory of corporate and other business customers. The value of this collateral varies from period to period depending on the level of receivables and inventory. It is impracticable to provide an estimate of the amount (fair value or nominal value) of this collateral. The Group may in some cases obtain collateral and other enhancements at a counterparty level, which are not specific to a particular class of financial instrument. The fair value of the credit enhancement gained has been apportioned across the relevant asset classes.

Collateral for derivative contracts

The collateral obtained for derivatives is predominantly cash or government bonds (G7 and other highly rated governments). Appropriate haircuts may be applied tonon-cash collateral, which are agreed when the margin agreement (e.g. CSA) is negotiated.

Valuation of collateral and impact of market moves

Typically, assets other than cash are subject to regular revaluation (for example via physical review, linking to an external index or depreciation of the asset), to ensure they continue to achieve appropriate mitigation of risk. Customer agreements often include requirements for provision of additional collateral, should valuations decline or credit exposure increase, for example due to market moves impacting a derivative exposure.

The carrying value ofnon-cash collateral reflects the fair value of the physical assets, limited to the carrying value of the asset where the exposure is over-collateralised. In certain cases, where active markets or recent valuations of the assets are not available, estimates are used. For assets collateralised by residential or commercial property (and certain other physical assets), where it is not practicable to assess current market valuations of each underlying property, values reflect historical fair values updated for movements in appropriate external indices. For further information on LTV ratios in principal home loans portfolios, see the Credit Risk performance - Credit riskreview section of the 2015 form 20-F.on page 128 to 129.

Liens over fluctuating assets such as inventory and trade receivables, known as floating charges, over the assets of a borrower are monitored annually. The valuation of this type of collateral takes into account the ability to establish objectively a price or market value, the frequency with which the value can be obtained (including a professional appraisal or valuation), and the volatility or a proxy for the volatility of the value of the collateral.

For assets collateralised by traded financial instruments, values reflect MTM or mark to model values of those assets, applying a haircut where appropriate. A haircut is the valuation percentage applicable to each type of collateral and will be largely based on liquidity and price volatility of the underlying security.

Valuation of collateral – property

When property is taken as collateral, it is monitored to establish whether the current value is less than its value at origination. Monitoring is undertaken annually for commercial property or via linking to an external index for residential property. More frequent monitoring may be carried out where the property sector is subject to significant deterioration.

Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2016 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  369


Barclays’ approach to managing risks

Management of credit risk mitigation techniques and counterparty credit risk

Deterioration is monitored principally by geography. Specific exercises to monitor property values may be undertaken where the property sector in a given geography has been subject to significant deterioration and where the Group has a material concentration of property collateral.

372  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F


Monitoring may be undertaken either at a portfolio level (typically retail) or at an individual level (typically wholesale).

In retail businesses, monitoring on a portfolio level refers to a more frequent process of indexing collateral values on each individual loan, using a regional or national index, and updating LGD values. This monitoring may be a desk top assessment and need not necessarily include physical assessment of properties. In the event ofcharge-off, an individual valuation of the property is undertaken within 3 months of thecharge-off event and subsequently undertaken at least every six months whilst incharge-off.

In wholesale, monitoring is undertaken by individuals who are not part of the sales / relationship part of the business. Where an appropriate local index is not available, property values are monitored on an individual basis as part of the annual review process for the loan. For larger loans, in addition to the regular annual review, the property value is reviewed by an independent valuer at least once every three years. This review is a more detailed assessment than the standard property monitoring review, and may include a fresh professional valuation. In addition, an independent valuer reviews the property valuation where information indicates that the value of the property may have declined materially relative to general market prices. In addition, trigger points are defined under which property values must be reviewed.

Valuation of collateral – distressed assets

The net realisable value from a distressed sale of collateral obtained by the Group upon default or insolvency of counterparty will in some cases be lower than the carrying value recognised. Assets obtained are normally sold, generally at auction, or realised in an orderly manner for the maximum benefit of the Group, the borrower’s other creditors and the borrower, in accordance with the relevant insolvency regulations. For business customers, in some circumstances, where excess funds are available after repayment in full of the outstanding loan, they are offered to any other, lower ranked, secured lenders. Any additional funds are returned to the borrower. The Group does not occupy repossessed properties for its business use or use assets obtained in its operations.

Additional revaluations are usually performed when a loan is moved to WL. Exceptions to this may be considered where it is clear a revaluation is not necessary, for instance where there is a very high margin of security or a recent valuation has been undertaken. Conversely, a material reduction in the value of collateral held represents an increase in credit risk and will often cause a loan to be placed on the WL.

Any one of the above events may also trigger a test for impairment, depending on individual circumstances of the loan. When calculating impairment, the difference between an asset’s carrying amount and the present value of all estimated cash flows discounted at the original effective interest rate will be recognised as impairment. Such cash flows include the estimated fair value of the collateral, which reflects the results of the monitoring and review of collateral values as detailed above and valuations undertaken as part of the Group’s impairment process.

Whether property values are updated as part of the annual review process, or by indexation of collateral values, the updated collateral values feed into the calculation of risk parameters which, in turn, feed into identified and unidentified impairment calculations at each balance sheet date.

Trends in LLRs incorporate the impact of any decrease in the fair value of collateral held.

Risk transfer

A range of instruments including guarantees, credit insurance, credit derivatives and securitisation can be used to transfer credit risk from one counterparty to another. These mitigate credit risk in two main ways:

 

§ if the risk is transferred to a counterparty which is more credit worthy than the original counterparty, then overall credit risk is reduced

§ where recourse to the first counterparty remains, both counterparties must default before a loss materialises. This is less likely than the default of either counterparty individually so credit risk is reduced.

Risk transfer can also be used to reduce risk concentrations within portfolios lowering the impact of stress events.

Risk transfer transactions are undertaken with consideration to whether the collateral provider is correlated with the exposure, the credit worthiness of the collateral provider and legal certainty of enforceability and effectiveness. Where credit risk mitigation is deemed to transfer credit risk, this exposure is appropriately recorded against the credit risk mitigation provider.

Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  373


Barclays’ approach to managing risks

Management of counterparty credit risk and credit risk mitigation techniques

In exposure terms, risk transfer is used most extensively as a credit risk mitigation technique for wholesale loans and derivative financial instruments.

Off-balance sheet risk mitigation

The Group applies fundamentally the same risk management policies foroff-balance sheet risks as it does for itson-balance sheet risks. In the case of commitments to lend, counterparties/customers will be subject to the same credit management policies as for loans and advances. Collateral may be sought depending on the strength of the counterparty and the nature of the transaction.

Recognition of credit risk mitigation in capital calculations

Credit risk mitigation is used to reduce credit risk associated with an exposure, which may reduce potential losses in the event of obligor default or other specified credit events.

Credit risk mitigation that meets certain regulatory criteria may be used to improve risk parameters and reduce RWA consumption against a given obligor. Collateral that meets these regulatory conditions is referred to as eligible collateral. Eligibility criteria are specified in articles 195 to 204 of the Capital Regulations Requirement (CRR).

The Group’s policies and standards set out criteria for the recognition of collateral as eligible credit risk mitigation and are designed to be fully consistent with all applicable local regulations and regulatory permissions.

Where regulatory capital is calculated under AIRB regulations, the benefit of collateral is generally taken by adjusting LGDs. For standardised portfolios, the benefit of collateral is taken using the financial collateral comprehensive method: supervisory volatility adjustments approach.

For instruments that are deemed to transfer credit risk, in AIRB portfolios the protection is generally recognised by using the PD and LGD of the protection provider.

For exposures treated under the standardised approach, the impact of eligible credit risk mitigation is primarily recognised by reducing the EAD associated with the exposure that benefits from the mitigation.

Managing concentrations within credit risk mitigation

Credit risk mitigation taken by the Group to reduce credit risk may result in credit or market risk concentrations.

Guarantees that are treated as eligible credit risk mitigation are marked as an exposure against the guarantor and aggregated with other credit exposure to the guarantor. Limit monitoring at the counterparty level is then used for monitoring of concentrations in line with Group policy.

Commercial real estate lending is another potential source of concentration risk arising from the use of credit risk mitigation. The portfolio is regularly reviewed to assess whether a concentration in a particular region, industry or property type exists, and portfolio limits are in place to control the level of exposure to commercial, residential, investment and development activity. See pages 371 to 373119 for more information on collateral, valuation and monitoring of concentrations.

374  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F


Counterparty credit risk

Derivative counterparty credit exposures

The Group enters into financial instruments that are traded or cleared on an exchange, including interest rate swaps, futures and options on futures. Holders of exchange traded instruments provide daily margins

370  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2016 Annual Report on Form 20-F


Barclays’ approach to managing risks

Management of credit risk mitigation techniques and counterparty credit risk

with cash or other securities at the exchange, to which the holders look for ultimate settlement.

The Group also enters into financial instruments that are traded over the counter, rather than on a recognised exchange. These instruments range from standardised transactions in derivative markets, to trades where the specific terms are tailored to the requirements of the Group’s counterparties. In most cases, industry standard documentation is used, most commonly in the form of a master agreement, with individual transaction confirmations. The existence of a signed master agreement is intended to give the Group protection in situations where the Group’s counterparty is in default.

Counterparty credit exposure arises from the risk that parties are unable to meet their payment obligations under certain financial contracts such as derivatives, securities financing transactions (e.g. repurchase agreements), or long settlement transactions.

A Monte Carlo simulation engine is used to estimate the Potential Future Exposure (PFE) to derivative and securities financing counterparties. The exposure simulation model simulates future market states and the MTM of the derivative transactions under those states. Simulated exposures including the effect of credit mitigants such as netting, collateral and mandatory break clauses can then be generated.

Credit limits for CCR are assessed and allocated using the PFE measure. A number of factors are taken into account when setting credit limits for individual counterparties, including but not limited to the credit quality and nature of the counterparty the rationale for the trading activity entered into and anywrong-way risk considerations.

The expected exposures generated by this engine are also used as an input into both internal and regulatory capital calculations covering CCR.

‘Wrong-way risk’ in a trading exposure arises when there is significant correlation between the underlying asset and the counterparty, which in the event of default would lead to a significant MTM loss to the counterparty. Specificwrong-way risk trades, which are self-referencing or reference to other entities within the same counterparty group, require approval by a senior credit officer. The exposure to the counterparty will reflect the additional risk generated by these transactions.

Derivative CCR (credit value adjustments)

As the Group participates in derivative transactions it is exposed to CCR, which is the risk that a counterparty will fail to make the future payments agreed in the derivative contract. This is considered as a separate risk to the volatility of the MTM payment flows. Modelling this counterparty risk is an important part of managing credit risk on derivative transactions.

The counterparty risk arising under derivative transactions is taken into account when reporting the fair value of derivative positions. The adjustment to the value is known as credit value adjustment (CVA). It is the difference between the value of a derivative contract with a risk-free counterparty and that of a contract with the actual counterparty. This is equivalent to the cost of hedging the counterparty risk in the Credit Default Swap (CDS) market.

CVAs for derivative positions are calculated as a function of the expected exposure, which is the average of future hypothetical exposure values for a single transaction or group of transactions with the same counterparty, the credit spread for a given horizon and the LGD.

The expected exposure is calculated using Monte Carlo simulations of risk factors that may affect the valuation of the derivative transactions in order to simulate the exposure to the counterparty through time. These simulated exposures include the effect of credit mitigants such as netting, collateral and mandatory break clauses. Counterparties with appropriate credit mitigants will generate a lower expected exposure profile compared to counterparties without credit mitigants in place for the same derivative transactions.

Derivative netting and collateral arrangements

Credit risk from derivatives is mitigated where possible through netting agreements whereby derivative assets and liabilities with the same counterparty can be offset. Group policy requires all netting arrangements to be legally documented. The ISDA Master Agreement is

the Group’s preferred agreement for documenting OTC derivatives. It provides the contractual framework within which dealing activities across a full range of OTC products are conducted, and contractually binds both parties to applyclose-out netting across all outstanding transactions covered by an agreement if either party defaults or other predetermined events occur. The majority of the Group’s OTC derivative exposures are covered by ISDA master netting and ISDA CSA collateral agreements.

Collateral is obtained against derivative assets, depending on the creditworthiness of the counterparty and/or nature of the transaction. Any collateral taken in respect of OTC trading exposures will be subject to a ‘haircut’, which is negotiated at the time of signing the collateral agreement. A haircut is the valuation percentage applicable to each type of collateral and will be largely based on liquidity and price volatility of the underlying security. The collateral obtained for derivatives is predominantly either cash, direct debt obligation government (G14+) bonds denominated in the domestic currency of the issuing country, debt issued by supranationals or letters of credit issued by an institution with a long-term unsecured debt rating of A+/A3 or better. Where the Group has ISDA master agreements, the collateral document will be the ISDA CSA. The collateral document must give Barclays the power to realise any collateral placed with it in the event of the failure of the counterparty.

 

  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 20152016 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  375371


Barclays’ approach to managing risks

Management of market risk

 

LOGO

This section describes the governance structure specific to the management of market risks, as well as a discussion of measurement techniques.

 

Management of market risk

LOGO

This section describes the governance structure specific to the management of market risks, as well as a discussion of measurement techniques.

§Market risks are varied, and a range of techniques must be used to manage them. From page 377 we provide an overview of the market risks we incur across the Group

§The governance structure specific to market risks is discussed on pages 378 and 379.373 to 374.

LOGO

The rest of the section is divided into traded, non-traded and other risks:

 

§
372  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2016 Annual Report on Form 20-F  Traded market risk, the risk of the Group being impacted by changes in the level or volatility of positions in the trading book, is covered on pages 379 to 388.Measurement techniques such as VaR, are discussed, as well as techniques applied when statistical techniques are not appropriate

§Non-traded market risks, the risk that the Group is unable to hedge its banking book, mainly arising as a result of lending and deposit taking activities, are discussed from 388 to 390, along with a discussion of how they are managed

§Other market risks, such as those associated with Barclays pension obligations, are analysed separately from page 390.


Barclays’ approach to managing risks

Management of market risk

 

 

 

Introduction to the management of market risk

The risk of a reduction to earnings or capital due to volatility of trading book positions or as the consequence of running a banking book balance sheet and liquidity funding pools.

Market risk

The risk of loss arising from potential adverse changes in the value of the firm’s assets and liabilities from fluctuation in market variables including, but not limited to, interest rates, foreign exchange, equity prices, commodity prices, credit spreads, implied volatilities and asset correlations

Overview

Traded marketMarket risk

Traded marketMarket risk arises primarily as a result of client facilitation in wholesale markets, involving market making activities, risk management solutions and execution of syndications. Upon execution of a trade with a client, the Group will look to hedge against the risk of the trade moving in an adverse direction. Mismatches between client transactions and hedges result in market risk due to changes in asset prices.

Non-traded market risk

Banking book operations generate non-traded market risk, primarily through interest rate risk arising from the sensitivity of net interest margins to changes in interest rates. As the principal banking businesses engage in internal derivative trades with Treasury to manage their interest rate risk to within its defined risk appetite. However, the businesses remain susceptible to market risk from four key sources:

§prepayment risk: balance run-off may be faster or slower than expected, due to customer behaviour in response to general economic conditions or interest rates. This can lead to a mismatch between the actual balance of products and the hedges executed with Treasury based on initial expectations

§recruitment risk: the volume of new business may be lower or higher than expected, requiring the business to unwind or execute hedging transactions with Treasury at different rates than expected

§residual risk and margin compression: the business may retain a small element of interest rate risk to facilitate the day-to-day management of customer business. Additionally, in the current low rate environment, deposits on which the Group sets the interest rate are exposed to margin compression. This is because for any further fall in base rate the Group must absorb an increasing amount of the rate move in its margin

§lag risk: the risk of being unable to re-price products immediately after a change in interest rates due to mandatory notification periods. This is highly prevalent in managed rates savings product (e.g. Every Day Saver) where customers must be informed in writing of any planned reduction in their savings rates.

Pension risk

The Group maintains a number of defined benefit pension schemes for past and current employees. The ability of the pension fund to meet the projected pension payments is maintained principally through investments.

Pension risk arises because the estimated market value of the pension fund assets might decline; investment returns might reduce; or the estimated value of the pension liabilities might increase as a result of changes to the market process. The Group monitors the market risks arising from its defined benefit pension schemes, and works with the Trustees to address shortfalls. In these circumstances, The Group could be required or might choose to make extra contributions to the pension fund. The Group’s main defined benefit scheme was closed to new entrants in 2012.

Insurance risk

Insurance risk is managed within Africa Banking, where four categories of insurance risk are recognised: short-term insurance underwriting risk; life insurance underwriting risk; life insurance mismatch risk; life and insurance investment risk.

Insurance risk arises when:

§aggregate insurance premiums received from policyholders under a portfolio of insurance contracts are inadequate to cover the claims arising from those policies and the expenses associated with the management of the portfolio of policies and claims

§premiums are not invested to adequately match the duration, timing and size of expected claims

§unexpected fluctuations in claims arise or excessive exposure (e.g. in individual or aggregate exposures) relative to capacity is retained in the entity.

Insurance entities also incur market risk (on the investment of accumulated premiums and shareholder capital), credit risk (counterparty exposure on investments and reinsurance transactions), liquidity risk and operational risk from their investments and financial operations.

Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  377


Barclays’ approach to managing risks

Management of market risk

LOGO

Traded marketMarket risk in the businesses resides primarily in Investment Bank,Barclays International, Group Treasury Africa Banking andNon-Core. These businesses have the mandate to incur traded market risk. Non-traded market risk is mostly incurred in PCB and Barclaycard.

Market risk oversight and challenge is provided by business committees and Group committees, including the Market Risk CommitteeCommittee.

Organisation and Group Market Risk. The chart above gives an overview of the business control structure.structure

LOGO

Roles and responsibilities

The objectives of market risk management are to:

 

§ understand and control market risk by robust measurement, limit setting, reporting and oversight

378  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F


 

§ facilitate business growth within a controlled and transparent risk management framework

 

§ ensure that traded market risk in the businesses is controlled according to the allocated appetite

 

§ control non-traded market risk in line with approved appetite

§control insurance risk in line with approved appetite

§support theNon-Core strategy of asset reductions by ensuring that market risk remains within agreed risk appetite.

To ensure the above objectives are met, a well established governance structure is in place to manage these risks consistent with the ERMF (evaluate-respond-monitor).ERMF. See page 336344 on risk management strategy, governance and risk culture.

The BRC recommends market risk appetite to the Board for their approval. The Market Risk Principal Risk Officer (MRPRO) is responsible for the Market Risk Control Framework and, under delegated authority

from the CRO, agrees with the BCROs a limit framework within the context of the approved market risk appetite.

Across the Group, market risk oversight and challenge is provided by business committees, Group committees, including the Group Market Risk Committee and Group Market Risk. The chart above gives an overview of the business control structure.Committee.

The Group Market Risk Committee approves and makes recommendations concerning the Group-wide market risk profile. This includes overseeing the operation of the Market Key Risk FrameworksFramework and associated standards and policies; reviewing arising market or regulatory issues, limits and utilisation; and risk appetite levels to the Board. The Committee is chaired by the MRPRO and attendees include the business heads of market risk, business aligned market risk managers and senior managers from Group Market Risk and Internal Audit.

The head of each business is accountable for all market risks associated with its activities, while the head of the market risk team covering each business is responsible for implementing the key risk control frameworksframework for market risk.

Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2016 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  373


Barclays’ approach to managing risks

Management of market risk

Risk management in the setting of strategy

Appetite for market risk is recommended by the risk function to BRC for agreement by the Board. Mandate and scales are set to control levels of market risk and ensure the Group remains within the BRC approved risk appetite. The Group runs an annual Group-wide stress testing exercise which aims to simulate the dynamics of exposures across the Group and cover all risk factors. The exercise is also designed to measure the impact to the Group’s fundamental business plan, and is used to manage the wider Group’s strategy.

See pages 350 to 353 for more detail on the role of risk in the setting of strategy.

LOGOSee page 351 for more detail on the role of risk in the setting of strategy.

Market risk culture

Market risk managers are independent from the businesses they cover, and their line management reports into the CRO. This embeds a risk culture with strong adherence to limits that support Group-wide risk appetite. See page 341 to 343 for more detail on risk culture.

LOGOSee pages 347 to 348 for more detail on risk culture.

Management of traded market risk, mitigation and hedging policies

The governance structure helps ensure all market risks that the Group is exposed to are well managed and understood.

Traded market risk is generated primarily as a result of market making activities, syndications and providing risk management solutions to clients. Group Treasury supports the businesses in managing their interest rate risk. Positions will contribute both to market risk limits and regulatory capital if relevant.

As part of the continuous monitoring of the risk profile, Market Risk meets with the businesses to discuss the risk profile on a regular basis. The outcome of these reviews includes further detailed assessments of event risk via stress testing, risk mitigation and risk reduction.

Traded market risk measurement – management view

Market risk management measures

A range of complementary approaches to measure traded market risk are used which aim to capture the level of losses that the bank is exposed to due to unfavourable changes in asset prices. The primary tools to control the firm’s exposures are:

 

Measure    Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  379


Barclays’ approach to managing risks

Management of market risk

Description

  Measure

Description

Management Value at Risk

(VaR)

    

An estimate of the potential loss arising from unfavourable market movements, if the current positions were to be held unchanged for one business day.

Primary stress tests    

An estimate of potential losses that might arise from severe market moves or scenarios impacting key liquid market risk exposures.

Secondary stress tests    

Modelled losses from unfavourable market movements to illiquid market risk exposures.

Business scenario stresses    

Multi asset scenario analysis of severe, but plausible events that may impact the market risk exposures of the Investment Bank.

investment bank.

The use of Management VaR for traded market risk is broader than the application for use of VaR for regulatory capital, and captures standardised, advanced and certain banking books where traded market risks are deemed to exist. The wider scope of Management VaR is what the Group deems as material market risk exposures which may have a detrimental impact on the performance of the trading business. The scope used in Regulatory VaR (see page 383)377) is narrower as it applies only to trading book positions as approved by the PRA.PRA

Stress testing and scenario analysis are also an important part of the risk management framework, to capture potential risk that may arise in severe but plausible events.

Management VaR

Estimates the potential loss arising from unfavourable market movements, over one day for a given confidence level:

§Estimates the potential loss arising from unfavourable market movements, over one day for a given confidence level:

 

§ differs from the Regulatory VaR used for capital purposes in scope, confidence level and horizon

 

§ back testing is performed to ensure the model is fit for purpose.

VaR is an estimate of the potential loss arising from unfavourable market movements if the current positions were to be held unchanged for one business day. For internal market risk management purposes, a historical simulation methodology with atwo-year equally weighted historical period, at the 95% confidence level is used for all trading books and some banking books. Risk factors driving VaR are grouped into key risk types as follows:summarised below:

 

Risk factor

    

Description

Interest rate    

Changes in the level or shape of interest rate expectations can impact prices of interest rate sensitive assets, such as bonds and derivatives instruments, such as interest rate swaps.

Spread    

Difference between bond yields and swaps rates that arises when a business has positions in both bonds and interest rate/inflation derivatives instruments. Both assets may trade at different levels but are fundamentally exposed to similar risk.

Foreign

exchange

    The impact of changes in foreign exchange rates and volatilities.
Equity    

Risk due to changes in equity prices, volatilities and dividend yields, for example as part of market making activities, syndication or underwriting of initial public offerings.

Commodity    

Arises primarily from providing hedging solutions to clients and access to financial investors via financially-settled energy derivatives exposed to a range of commodity products on both a derivative and physical basis, and involves movementschanges in the absolutelevel of energy spot or forward prices and shape of the spot and forward curves.

their volatilities.
Inflation    

Arises from the impact of changes in inflation rates and volatilities on cash instruments and derivatives. This arises as part of market marking activities, whereby the Group may be exposed to changes in inflation rates, for example, market making syndications for inflation linked securities.

Traded credit    

Arises from the uncertainty of credit quality impacting prices of assets, for example positions such as corporate bonds, securitised products and credit based derivative instruments, including credit default swaps.

Basis    

The impact of changes in interest rate tenor basis (e.g. the basis between swaps vs 3M LIBOR and swaps vs 6M LIBOR) and cross-currency basis and is primarily generated as a result of market making activities.

380  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F


In some instances, historical data is not available for particular market risk factors for the entire look-back period, for example, complete historical data would not be available for our equity security following an initial public offering. In these cases, market risk managers will proxy the unavailable market risk factor data with available data for a related market risk factor.

The output of the Management VaR model can be readily tested through back testing. This checks instances where actual losses exceed the predicted potential loss estimated by the VaR model. If the number of instances is higher than expected, where actual losses exceed the predicted potential loss estimated by the VaR model, this may indicate limitations with the VaR calculation, for example, a risk factor that would not be adequately captured by the model.

374  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2016 Annual Report on Form 20-F


Barclays’ approach to managing risks

Management of market risk

The Management VaR model in some instances may not appropriately measure some market risk exposures, especially for market moves that are not directly observable via prices. Market risk managers are required to identify risks which are not adequately captured in VaR (‘risks not in VaR’ or ‘RNIVs’, discussed below).

When reviewing VaR estimates, the following considerations are taken into account:

 

§ the historical simulation uses the most recent two years of past data to generate possible future market moves, but the past may not be a good indicator of the future

 

§ theone-day time horizon may not fully capture the market risk of positions that cannot be closed out or hedged within one day

 

§ VaR is based on positions as at close of business and consequently, it is not an appropriate measure forintra-day risk arising from a position bought and sold on the same day

 

§ VaR does not indicate the potential loss beyond the VaR confidence level.

Limits are applied at the total level as well as by risk factor type, which are then cascaded down to particular trading desks and businesses by the market risk management function.

See page 141 for a review of Management VaR in 2015.

Primary stress tests

§ Key tool used by management to measure liquid market risks from extreme market movements or scenarios in each major trading asset class.

Stress testing provides an estimate of potential significant future losses that might arise from extreme market moves or scenarios. Primary stress tests apply stress moves to key liquid risk factors for each of the major trading asset classes, namely:

 

§ interest ratesrates:: shock to the level and structure of interest rates and inflation across currencies

 

§ creditcredit:: impact on traded corporate credit exposures and securities structures, including across rating grades, geography, sectors and products

 

§ foreign exchangeexchange:: impact of unfavourable moves in currency prices and volatility

 

§ equityequity:: shocks to share prices including exposures to specific markets and sectors

 

§ commoditiescommodities:: adverse commodity price changes across both physical and derivative markets

§securitised products: stresses to securitised structures and associated hedges.markets.

Primary stresses apply moves to liquid assets incorporating up to 10 days holding period. Shock scenarios are determined by a combination of observed extreme historical moves and forward looking elements as appropriate.

Primary stresses are calculated for each asset class on a standalone basis. Risk managers calculate several stress scenarios and communicate the results to senior managers to highlight concentrations and the level of exposures. Primary stress loss limits are applied across the trading businesses and is a key market risk control.

Secondary stress tests

§ Key tool used by management to measure illiquid market risks from extreme market movements or scenarios in each major trading asset class.

Secondary stress tests are used in measuring potential losses arising from market risks that are not captured in the primary stress tests. These may relate to financial instruments or risk exposures which are not readily or easily tradable or markets that are naturally sensitive to a rapid deterioration in market conditions.

Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  381


Barclays’ approach to managing risks

Management of market risk

For each asset class, secondary stresses are aggregated to a single stress loss which allows the business to manage its liquid and illiquid risk factors. Limits against secondary stress losses are also applied, which allows the firm to manage and control the level of illiquid risk factors.

Stresses are specific to the exposure held and are calibrated on both

observed extreme moves and some forward-looking elements as appropriate.

Business scenario stresses

§ Key tool used by management to measure aggregated losses across the entire trading book as a result of extreme forward-looking scenarios encompassing simultaneous shocks to multiple asset classes.

Business scenario stresses apply simultaneous shocks to all risk factors assessed by applying changes to foreign exchange rates, interest rates, credit spreads, commodities and equities to the entire portfolio, for example, the impact of a rapid and extreme slowdown in the global economy. The measure shows results on a multi-asset basis across all trading exposures. Business scenarios are used for risk appetite monitoring purposes and are useful in identifying concentrations of exposures and highlighting areas that may provide some diversification.

The estimated impact on market risk exposures are calculated and reported by the market risk management function on a frequent and regular basis. The stress scenario and the calibration ofon the shocks are also reviewed by market risk managers periodically for its relevance considering theany market environment.

Scenarios such as aadverse global recession, deterioration in the availability of liquidity, contagion effects of a slowdown in one of the major economies, slowdown in a major economic regioneasing of global growth concerns, and a historical event scenario are examples of business scenarios. If necessary, market event-specific scenarios are also calculated, such as, a unilateral decision to exit the Eurozone by a member country, and the impact of a large financial institution collapse, a disorderly exit of quantitative easing programmes, including unexpected rapid and continuous interest rate rises as a result.

See page 142 for a review of business scenario stresses in 2015.

Traded market risk measurement – regulatory view

Regulatory view of traded positions

For regulatory purposes, the trading book is defined as one that consists of all positions in CRD financial instruments and commodities held either with trading intent, or in order to hedge other elements of trading, and which are either free of any restrictive covenants on their tradability, or able to be hedged. A CRD financial instrument is defined as a contract that gives rise to both a financial asset of one party and a financial liability or equity instrument of another party.

All of the below regulatory measures, including the standardised approach, generate market risk capital requirements, in line with the regulatory requirements set out in the Capital Requirements Directive (‘CRD IV’) and Regulation. Positions which cannot be included in the trading book are included within the banking book and generate risk capital requirements in line with this treatment.

Inclusion of exposures in the regulatory trading book

The Group maintains a Trading Book Policy, which defines the minimum requirements a business must meet to run trading positions and the process by which positions are allocated to trading or banking books. Trading intent is a key element in deciding whether a position should be treated as a trading or banking book exposure.

Positions in the trading book are subject to market risk capital, computed using models where regulatory approval has been granted, otherwise the market risk capital requirement is calculated using standard rules as defined in the Capital Requirement Regulation (CRR), part of the CRD IV package. If any of the criteria specified in the policy are not met for a position, then that position must be allocated to the banking book.

Most of the Group’s market risk regulatory models are assigned the highest model materiality rating. Consequently, the Regulatory VaR model is subject to annualre-approval at the Executive Models Committee (EMC), which is chaired by the CROIndependent Validation Unit. The Independent Validation Unit makes an assessment of model assumptions and the GFD. EMC considers evidence of model suitability provided by the model owner, as well as an independent validation conducted by the Independent Validation Unit.owner. The following table summarises the models used for market risk regulatory purposes and the applicable regulatory thresholds.

 

382  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 20152016 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  375


Barclays’ approach to managing risks

Management of market risk

 

 

Valuation standards

CRR article 105 defines regulatory principles which need to be applied to fair value assets and liabilities, in order to determine a prudent valuation.

The Prudent Valuation Adjustment (PVA) is applied to accounting fair values where there are a range of plausible alternative valuations. It is calculated in accordance with Article 105 of the Capital Requirements Regulation (CRR), and includes (where relevant) adjustments for the following factors: unearned credit spreads,close-out costs, operational risk, market price uncertainty, early termination, investing and funding costs, future administrative costs and model risk. The PVA includes adjustment for all fair valued financial instruments and commodities, irrespective of whether they are in the trading or banking book.

Page 248246 sets out the valuation control framework for accounting valuations and the related responsibilities of the Finance-Product Control ValuationsFinance-product control valuations function and the Valuation Committee. This function and committee are also responsible for the oversight of the PVA and ensuring compliance with article 105 of the CRR.

Regulatory measures for traded market risk

There are a number of regulatory measures which the Group has permission to use in calculating regulatory capital (internal models approval). These are listed below:

 

Measure

    

Definition

Regulatory Value at

Risk (VaR)

    

An estimate of the potential loss arising from unfavourable market movements calibrated to 99% confidence interval10-day holding period.

Stressed Value at

Risk (SVaR)

    

An estimate of the potential loss arising from a twelve-month period of significant financial stress calibrated to 99% confidence interval10-day holding period.

Incremental Risk

Charge (IRC)

    

An estimate of the incremental risk arising from rating migrations and defaults, beyond what is already captured in specific market risk VaR for thenon-correlation trading portfolio. Uses a 99.9% confidence level and aone-year horizon.

All PriceComprehensive Risk (APR)

Measure (CRM)
    

An estimate of all the material market risk, including rating migration and default for the correlation trading portfolio.

Regulatory VaR

§ Estimates the potential loss arising from unfavourable market movements.

 

§ Regulatory VaR differs from the management approach in the following respects.

 

VaR Variable

  

 

Regulatory

 

  

 

Management

 

 Regulatory Management

Confidence interval

  

 

99%

 

  

 

95%

 

 99% 95%

Scope

  

 

As approved by the regulator (PRA)

 

  

 

Management view of market risk exposures. Includes trading books and banking books exposed to price risk

 

 As approved by the regulator (PRA) Management view of market risk exposures. Includes trading books and banking books exposed to price risk

Look-back period

  

 

2 years

 

  

 

2 years

 

 2 years 2 years

Liquidity Horizon (holding

period)

  

 

10 days

 

  

 

1 day

 

 10 days 1 day

Regulatory VaR allows oversight of the total potential losses, at a given confidence level, of those trading books which received approval from the regulator to be covered via an internal model. Regulatory VaR levels contribute to the calculation of the market risk RWAs.

Management VaR allows the bank to supervise the total market risk across the Group, including all trading books and some banking books.

Management VaR is also utilised for internal capital model (economic capital).

Regulatory VaR is fundamentally the same as the Management VaR (see page 380)374), with the key differences listed above.

The model is complemented with RNIVs, as described on page 387 and 388.

379.

Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  383


Barclays’ approach to managing risks

Management of market risk

Stressed Value at Risk (SVaR)

§ Estimates the potential loss arising from unfavourable market movements in a stressed environment.

 

§ Identical to Regulatory VaR, but calibrated over aone-year stressed period.

Regulatory capital is allocated to individual businesses. For regulatory capital calculation purposes the Group computes a market risk capital requirement based on a ten-day, 99% VaR metric calibrated to a period of significant financial stress. This Stressed VaR (‘SVaR’) capital requirement is added to the market risk capital requirement arising from regulatory VaR, the Incremental Risk Charge and the All Price Risk on an undiversified basis.

§Regulatory capital is allocated to individual businesses. For regulatory capital calculation purposes the Group computes a market risk capital requirement based on aone-day scaled toten-day, 99% VaR metric calibrated to a period of significant financial stress. This Stressed VaR (‘SVaR’) capital requirement is added to the market risk capital requirement arising from regulatory VaR, the Incremental Risk Charge and the Comprehensive Risk Measure on an undiversified basis.

The SVaR model must be identical to the VaR model used by the Group, with the exception that the SVaR model must be calibrated to aone-year period of significant financial stress (‘the SVaR period’). The Group selects the SVaR period to be aone-year period that maximises the sum of general market risk Regulatory VaR and specific market risk Regulatory VaR for positions in scope of regulatory approval. The SVaR period is reviewed on a quarterly basis or when required by material changes in market conditions or the trading portfolio.

SVaR cannot be meaningfully backtested as it is not sensitive to current market conditions. Many market risk factors with complete historical data over atwo-year period may not have complete data covering the SVaR period and consequently, more proxies may be required for SVaR than for VaR. The SVaR metric itself has the same strengths and weaknesses as the Group’s VaR model.

Incremental Risk Charge (IRC)

§ Captures risk arising from rating migrations and defaults for traded debt instruments incremental to that already captured by Regulatory VaR and SVaR.

IRC captures the risk arising from ratings migrations or defaults in the traded credit portfolio. IRC measures this risk at a 99.9% confidence level with aone-year holding period and applies to all positions in scope for specific risk including sovereign exposure.

The Group’s IRC model simulates default and ratings transition events for individual names. The behaviour of names is correlated with one another to simulate a systemic factor to model the possibility of multiple downgrades or defaults. The correlations betweennon-sovereign names are based on the Basel-defined correlations stipulated in the IRB approach to measuring credit risk capital, with a fixed correlation between sovereign names.

The Group’s IRC model simulates the impact of a ratings transition by estimating the improvement or deterioration in credit spreads resulting from the transition and assumes that the historically observed average change in credit spreads (measured in relative terms) resulting from ratings transitions provides an accurate estimate of likely widening or tightening of credit spreads in future transitions. For each position, the model computes the impact of spread moves up or down atpre-specified relative movements, and the actual impact is obtained by interpolating or extrapolating the actual spread move from thesepre-computed values.

The Group’s IRC model assumes that ratings transitions, defaults and any spread increases occur on an instantaneous basis.

376  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2016 Annual Report on Form 20-F


Barclays’ approach to managing risks

Management of market risk

All PriceComprehensive Risk (APR)Measure (CRM)

§Captures all market risks affecting the correlation trading portfolio.

Captures all market risks affecting the correlation trading portfolio.

APRComprehensive Risk Measure covers the correlation trading portfolio and is intended to adequately capture all risk factors relevant to corporateNth-to-default (on a basket of referenced names) and tranched credit derivatives. The capital requirement is based on a 99.9% confidence interval over aone-year holding period. The model generates a scenario based on a Monte Carlo simulation and revalues the portfolio under the simulated market scenario.

The model captures the following risk factors in the correlation trading portfolio:

§ default and ratings migration over aone-year time horizon

 

§ credit spread volatility

 

§ recovery risk: uncertainty of the recoverable value under default

 

§ correlation risk

 

§ basis risk: basis between credit indices and its underlying constituents

 

§ hedge slippage: portfolio rebalancing assumption.

The Group’s APRComprehensive Risk Measure model is based on the IRC model but also captures market risks not related to transition or default events, such as movements in credit spreads or correlations. These risk factors are included as part of the Monte Carlo simulation using distributions calibrated to historically observed moves.

Table 86: Market risk models selected features

384  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F

Component modelled

  

Number of significant models and

size of associated portfolio (RWAs)

Model description and methodologyApplicable regulatory thresholds

Regulatory VaR

1 model; £3.5bnEqually-weighted historical simulation of potential daily P&L arising from market movesRegulatory VaR is computed withten-day holding period and 99% confidence level

SVaR

1 model; £6.6bnSame methodology as used for VaR model, but using a different time seriesRegulatory SVaR is computed withten-day holding period and 99% confidence level

IRC

1 model; £2.1bnMonte Carlo simulation of P&L arising from ratings migrations and defaultsIRC is computed withone-year holding period and 99.9% confidence level

Comprehensive Risk Measure

1 model; £0.4bnSame approach as IRC, but it incorporates market-driven movements in spreads and correlations for application to correlation trading portfolios.Comprehensive Risk Measure is computed withone-year holding period and 99.9% confidence level. As required in CRD IV, the Comprehensive Risk Measure charge is subject to a floor set with reference to standard rules charge


 

Regulatory back testing

Back testing is the method by which the Group checks and affirms that its procedures for estimating VaR are reasonable and serve its purpose of estimating the potential loss arising from unfavourable market movements. The back testing process is a regulatory requirement and seeks to estimate the performance of the regulatory VaR model. Performance is measured by the number of exceptions to the model i.e. net trading P&L loss in one trading day is greater than the estimated VaR for the same trading day. The Group’s procedures could be underestimating VaR if exceptions occur regularlymore frequently than expected (a 99% confidence interval indicates that one exception will occur in 100 days).

Back testing is performed at a legal entity level,sub-portfolio levels and business-aligned portfolios (shown in the table below and in the charts on the next page) on the Group’s regulatory VaR model. Regulatory back testing compares Regulatory VaR at 99% confidence level (one-day(one-day holding period equivalent) to actual and hypothetical changes in portfolio value as defined in CRR Article 366. The consolidated Barclays Bank PLC and Barclays Capital Securities Ltd is the highest level of consolidation for the VaR models that are used in the calculation of regulatory capital.

A back testing exception is generated when a loss is greater than the daily VaR for any given day.

As defined by the PRA, a green modelstatus is consistent with a good working VaR model and is achieved for models that have four or fewer back testing exceptions in a12-month period. Back testing counts the number of days when a loss exceeds the corresponding VaR estimate, measured at the 99% regulatory confidence level. For the Investment Bank’sinvestment bank’s regulatory DVaR model at the consolidated legal entity level, green model status was maintained for 2015.2016.

Back testing is also performed on management VaR to ensure it remains reasonable and fit for purpose.

Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  385


Barclays’ approach to managing risks

Management of market risk

The table below shows the VaR back testing exceptions on legal entities aligned to the Group’s business in 2015.as at 31 December 2016. A back testing exception is generated when a loss is greater than the VaR for a given day. Exceptions are shown by legal entity rather than asset class as in prior disclosures. Model performance at a legal entity level determines regulatory capital within those entities. Legal entity disclosure also reflects the management perspective as Barclays moves forward with structural change, where VaR and model performance of VaR for a legal entity across asset class becomes more relevant than asset class metrics across legal entity.

For the investment bank’s regulatory DVaR model at the consolidated legal entity level, green model status was maintained for 2016.

    Actual P&L    Hypo P&L 

Legal entity

   
Total
Exceptions
 
 
   Status   

Total

Exceptions

 

 

   Status 

BBPlc Trading and BCSL

   2        2     

BBPlc Trading

   1        2     

BSCL

   6        1     

BBSA

   3             

BCI*

   2        3     

IHC

           1     

*BCI back testing has been replaced by IHC back testing from 1 July 2016 (both are included below for their respective periods). Please note that IHC back testing is performed for hypo P&L only as per US regulatory requirements.
RAG status is accurate as ofyear-end.

 

  

Legal Entities

Total Exception        

Status        

BBPLC TradingBarclays PLC and BCSL

3

Green        

BBPLC Trading

4

Green        

BCSL

4

Green        

BBSA

2

Green        

BCI

2

Green        

Barclays Bank PLC 2016 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  377


Barclays’ approach to managing risks

Management of market risk

The charts below show VaR for the Group’s regulatory portfolios aligned to legal entity where at least one exception has occurred during 2015.2016. The dark blue linesand grey points on the charts indicate losses on the small number of days on which theyactual and hypo P&L respectively exceeded the VaR amount.

The majority ofBacktesting exceptions are caused when realised volatility exceeds the backtesting exceptions in the year were99% percentile predicted by VaR. In addition to being driven by markets movingmarket moves in a fashion unanticipated by the model, primarily by increases in realised volatility compared to that predicted by the VaR atexcess of the 99% confidence level. Additionallevel, exceptions arecan be caused

by non-VaR type risks which may be related to events, such as corporate actions or pricing remarks in line with valuation policies, whichthat impact P&L that are not captured directly in the VaR model.itself but that are separately captured through VaR and nonVaR-type Risks Not in VaR (RNIVs).

Exceptions are reported to internal management and regulators on a regular basis and exceptions are investigated to ensure the model performs as expected. Overall back testing for the consolidated legal entity remains in the green zone, suggesting that the VaR remains fit for purpose.

LOGO

 

386378  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 20152016 Annual Report on Form 20-F  


Barclays’ approach to managing risks

Management of market risk

    

 

 

LOGO

Management of risks not fully captured in models, including Risks not in VaR (RNIVs)

The Group’s’ risk identification process captures risks that either have been observed to, or have the capacity to, produce material losses in normal and stressed market conditions. To ensure risk coverage, the range of keycore risks is identified following either market convention, regulatory guidance, or the specific historical experience of the Group’sGroups and is considered as part of the new product processes.

Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  387


Barclays’ approach to managing risks

Management of market risk

In some instances, the Management and Regulatory VaR model may not appropriately measure some market risks, especially where market moves are not directly observable via prices, the Group has policies to ensure thatadd-ons are applied where risks are not captured by the model. RNIVs refer to those keycore risks that are not captured, or not adequately captured, in VaR and SVaR. RNIVs can include:

 

§ risks not fully captured elsewhere and/or illiquid risk factors such as cross-risks;

 

§ basis risks;

 

§ higher-order risks;

 

§ calibration parameters, for instance to model parameter uncertainty; and

 

§ potential losses in excess of fair valuation adjustments taken in line with the Valuation Control Framework. Please see note 18 ‘Fair value of assets and liabilities’ for more details on fair value adjustments.

The treatment of RNIVs follows whether the risks are considered VaR type ornon-VaR type, which depends on, and can change with, the evolving state of financial markets:

 

§ VaR-type RNIVs: Typically represent risks that are not well captured in VaR, mainly because of infrastructure limitations or methodology limitations. In this instance two metrics are calculated, a VaR RNIV and a SVaR RNIV, using the same confidence level, capital horizon and observation period as VaR and SVaR respectively and are capitalised using the same multipliers as VaR and SVaR

 

§ Non-VaR-type RNIVsNonVaR-type RNIVs:: Typically represent risks which would not be well captured by any VaR model either because it represents an event not historically observed in the VaR time series (e.g., currency peg break) or a market risk factor which is not seen to move frequently (e.g. correlation). These are typically estimated using stress scenarios. The stress methodology is calibrated equivalently to at least 99% confidence level and a capital horizon of at least 10 days over an appropriate observation period, depending on the liquidity of the risk. For the purpose of regulatory capital, the capital charge is equal to the loss arising from the stress test except when these risks are already adequately captured elsewhere e.g. via the IRC or APR models, which are intended to capture certain risks not adequately covered by VaR

For regulatory capital these RNIVs are aggregated without any offsetting or diversification benefit.

Traded market risk control

The metrics that are used to measure market risk are controlled through the implementation of appropriate limit frameworks. Limits are set at the total Group level, asset class level, for example, interest rate risk, and at business level, for example, securitised products.rates trading. Stress limits and many book limits, such as foreign exchange and interest rate sensitivity limits, are also used to control risk appetite.

Firm-wide limits are reported to the BRC and are termedA-level limits for total management VaR, asset class VaR, primary stress and secondary stresses and business scenarios. These are then cascaded down by risk managers in order to meet the firm-wide risk appetite.

EachA-level limit is set after consideration is given to revenue generation opportunities and overall risk appetite approved by the Board. Compliance with limits is monitored by the independent risk functions in the trading businesses with oversight provided by Group Market Risk.

Throughout 2015,2016, Group Market Risk continued its ongoing programme of control testing and conformance reviewstesting on the trading businesses’ market risk management practices. These reviews are intended to verify the business’s conformance with the Market Risk Control Framework and best practices.

Traded market risk reporting

Trading businesses market risk managers produce a number of detailed and summary market risk reports daily, weekly, fortnightly and monthly for business and risk managers. Where relevant on a Group-wide basis, these are sent to Group Market Risk for review and a risk summary is presented at the Group Market Risk Committee and the trading businesses’ various market risk committees. The overall market risk profile is also presented to BRC on a regular basis.

Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2016 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  379


Barclays’ approach to managing risks

Management of securitisation exposures

Securitisations give rise to credit, market and other risks. This section discusses the types of business activities and exposures that we incur in the course of activities related to securitisations.

§  The objectives pursued in securitisation activities and the types of activities undertaken are discussed on page 381.

§  A description of the risks incurred in the course of securitisation activities, and how we manage them, is contained on page 382.

LOGO

380  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2016 Annual Report on Form 20-F


Barclays’ approach to managing risks

Management of securitisation exposures

This section discloses information about the Group’s securitisation activities distinguishing between the various functions performed in supporting its customers and managing its risks. It includes traditional securitisations as well as synthetic transactions effected through the use of derivatives or guarantees.

A securitisation is defined as a transaction or scheme where the payments are dependent upon the performance of a single exposure or pool of exposures and where the subordination of tranches determines the distribution of losses during the ongoing life of the transaction or scheme. Such transactions are ordinarily undertaken to transfer risk for the Group or on behalf of a client.

Certain transactions undertaken by the Group are not disclosed as they do not fall under the regulatory securitisation framework (defined under Part Three, Title II, Chapter 5 of the CRR, part of the CRD IV package). These include funding transactions for the purposes of generating term liquidity, and certain government guaranteed transactions.

Objectives of securitisation activities

In the course of its business, the Group has undertaken securitisations of its own originated assets as well as the securitisation of third party assets via special purpose vehicles, sponsored conduit vehicles and shelf programmes.

The Group has securitised its own originated assets in order to manage the Group’s credit risk position and to generate term funding for the Group balance sheet. The Group also participates in primary securitisations and distributes bonds to the market to facilitate term liquidity for its clients.

The Group also purchases asset backed loans and securities for the purpose of supporting client franchise, and purchases asset backed securities (ABS) for the purpose of investing its liquidity pool.

Further, the Group makes a secondary market for a range of securitised products globally, including residential mortgage backed securities (RMBS), commercial mortgage backed securities (CMBS) and ABS.

The role and involvement of the Group in securitisations in 2016

The Group adopts the following roles in the securitisation processes in which it is involved:

Originator of assets prior to securitisation

The Group originates or purchases commercial mortgage loans for the purpose of securitisation. The securities are then sold to investors through a broker-dealer subsidiary.

The Group securitises assets otherwise originated in the ordinary course of business including corporate loans, consumer loans and commercial mortgage loans. The Group also provides derivative transactions to securitisations sponsored by itself and third parties. These transactions are included in the Group trading book.

Providing warehousing facilities collateralised by third party assets prior to securitisation or exit via whole-loan sale

The Group provides warehouse financing to third party loan originators, including for agency eligible loans that can be securitised by the Federal National Mortgage Association (‘Fannie Mae’), the Federal Home Loan Mortgage Corporation (‘Freddie Mac’), or the Government National Mortgage Association (‘Ginnie Mae’) and for corporate loans that can be securitised via collateralized loan obligations (CLO).

Executor of securitisation trades including bond marketing and syndication

The Group transacts primarily as a principal in RMBS, ABS, CLO and CMBS with institutional investors and other broker-dealers. Agency backed residential and commercial mortgage securitisations include Credit Risk Transfer securities (FannieMae-sponsored CAS and FreddieMac-sponsored STACR bonds). ABS securitisations include consumer ABS (e.g. credit card, student loan and auto) andnon-traditional ABS (e.g. timeshares, wireless towers and whole business securitisations).Non-agency commercial mortgage securitisations include CMBS and commercial real estate collateralised loan obligations (CRE CLO). The bank makes secondary market in CLOs and acts as arranger on behalf of clients to structure and place arbitrage CLOs. The bank can also createre-securitisations of real estate mortgage investment conduits(Re-REMICs) of mortgage backed securities.

Purchaser of third party securitisations to support client franchise

The Group may purchase third party securitisations. The Group also funds on its own balance sheet securitisations similar to the ones funded via its sponsored conduits (see below). In such transactions the Group would not be defined as an originator or sponsor for regulatory purposes.

Sponsoring conduit vehicles

The Group acts as managing agent and administrative agent of amulti-seller asset backed commercial paper (ABCP) conduit, Sheffield Receivables Corporation (Sheffield), through which interests in securitisations of third party originated assets are funded via the issuance of ABCP.

From a regulatory perspective, Barclays acts as a sponsor of Sheffield. In relation to such conduit activity, the Group provides all or a portion of the backstop liquidity to the commercial paper, programme-wide credit enhancement and, as appropriate, interest rate and foreign currency hedging facilities. The Group receives fees for the provision of these services.

Sheffield holds securities classified as available for sale, measured at fair value with changes in fair value recognised through other comprehensive income (OCI) andnon-securities classified as loans and receivables, measured at amortised cost on its standalone financial statements. It funds the assets through the issuance of ABCP. Note that Sheffield is consolidated for accounting but not regulatory purposes.

Funding transactions to generate term liquidity

Secured funding forms one of the key components of the Group’s diversified funding sources providing access to the secured wholesale market and complementing the diversification of funding by maturity, currency and geography. The Group issues ABS and covered bonds secured primarily by customer loans and advances. In 2016, the Group raised £0.4bn term funding through public securitisation.

While Barclays has a number of outstanding securitisation transactions to provide term or contingent liquidity, the Group currently manages four key,on-balance sheet asset backed funding programmes to obtain term financing for mortgage and credit card lendings. These programmes also support retained issuances for the Group to access central bank funding. The UK regulated covered bond and the residential mortgage master trust securitisation programmes both utilise assets originated by the Group’s UK residential mortgage business. The third programme is a credit card master trust securitisation and uses receivables from the Group’s UK credit card business. The fourth programme is a SEC registered securitisation programme backed by US domiciled credit card receivables.

Risk transfer transactions

The Group has entered into synthetic and cash securitizations of corporate and commercial loans (originated in the ordinary course of business) for the purposes of the transfer of credit risk to third party investors. The regulatory capital requirements of these transactions fall under CRD IV.

Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2016 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  381


Barclays’ approach to managing risks

Management of securitisation exposures

Securitisation risks, monitoring and hedging policies

Capital requirements against securitisation exposures are subject to a separate framework under CRD IV (see CRR article 449) to account for the particular characteristics of this asset class. For risk management purposes, however, a securitisation is aligned to the risk type to which it gives rise.

Credit risks

In a securitisation structure, the payments are dependent upon the performance of a single exposure or pool of exposures. As these underlying exposures are usually credit instruments, the performance of the securitisation is exposed to credit risk.

Securitisation exposures are subject to the Group Credit Risk policies and standards and business level procedures. This includes the requirement to review in detail each transaction at a minimum on an annual basis. As collateral risk is the primary driver the analysis places a particular focus on the underlying collateral performance, key risk drivers, servicer due diligence and cash flows, and the impact of these risks on the securitisation notes. The risk is addressed through the transaction structure and by setting an appropriate modelled tolerance level. Structural features incorporate wind-down triggers set against factors including, but not limited to, defaults/charge-offs, delinquencies, excess spread, dilution, payment rates and yield, all of which help to mitigate potential credit deterioration. Qualitative aspects such as counterparty risk and ancillary issues (operational and legal risk) are also considered. Changes to the credit risk profile of securitisation exposures will also be identified through ongoing transaction performance monitoring. In addition, periodic stress tests of the portfolio as part of ongoing risk management are conducted as well as in response to Group-wide or Regulatory requests.

The principal committee responsible for the monitoring of the credit risk arising from securitisations is Wholesale Credit Risk Management Committee (WCRMC). Executive responsibility rests with the Regional Heads of Financial Institutions Credit Risk.

Market and liquidity risks

Market risk for securitised products is measured, controlled and limited through a suite of VaR,non-VAR and stress metrics in accordance with the Group’s Market Risk Policies and Procedures. The key risks of securitisation structures are interest rate, credit, spread, prepayment and liquidity risk. Interest rate and spread risk is hedged with standard liquid interest rate instruments (including interest rate swaps, US Treasuries and US Treasury futures). The universe of hedging instruments for credit and prepayment risk is limited and relatively illiquid, resulting in basis risks. In providing warehouse financing, the Group is exposed to mark to market (if counterparty defaults on related margin call).

Hedging

Securitisation andre-securitisation exposures benefit from the relative seniority of the exposure in the capital structure. Due to lack of availability in the credit default swap market for individual asset backed securities, there are no material CDS hedge counterparties relating to the securitisation andre-securitisation population.

Operational risks

Operational risks are incurred in all of the Group’s operations. In particular, all securitised (andre-securitised) assets are subject to a degree of risk associated with documentation and the collection of cash flows.

In providing warehouse financing, we incur potential contingent operational risks related to representations and warranties should we need to foreclose on the line and it be later discovered that the underlying loans were not underwritten to agency agreed criteria. Such risks are mitigated by daily collateral margining and ready agency bids. Market risk is also mitigated by employing forward trades.

The Operational Risk Review Forum oversees the management of operational risks for the entire range of the Group’s activities.

Rating methodologies, ECAIs and RWA calculations

RWAs reported for securitised andre-securitised banking book and trading book assets at 31 December 2016 are calculated in line with CRR and UK PRA rules and guidance. The Group has approval to use, and therefore applies, the internal ratings based approach for the calculation of RWAs where appropriate, and the Standardised Approach elsewhere.

The Group employs eligible ratings issued by nominated External Credit Assessment Institutions (ECAIs) to risk weight its securitisation and re securitisation exposure where their use is permitted. Ratings are considered eligible for use based on their conformance with internal rating standard which is compliant with both CRR and European Credit Rating Agency regulation. The ECAIs nominated by the Group for this purpose are Standard & Poor’s, Moody’s, Fitch and DBRS.

As required by CRR, the Group uses credit ratings issued by these ECAIs consistently for all exposures within the securitisation exposure class. For that reason, there is no systematic assignment of particular agencies to types of transactions within the securitisation exposure class.

For Sheffield, the Internal Assessment Approach (IAA) framework mirrors the ECAI methodology, which also includes Moody’s and Fitch, who rate the Sheffield programme. Under the IAA framework, the securitisation exposure must be internally rated, and the bank’s internal assessment process must meet certain requirements in order to map its own internal rating to an ECAI. Cash flow stress analysis on a securitisation structure is performed as prescribed by an ECAI methodology for the relevant ratings level, and is at least as conservative as the published methodology. Stress factors may include, among other factors, asset yields, principal payment rates, losses, delinquency rates and interest rates.

In determining an internal rating, collateral risks are the primary driver and are addressed through the transaction structure and modelled statistical confidence. The analysis reflects the Group’s view on the transaction, including dilution risk, concentration and tenor limits, as well as qualitative aspects such as counterparty risk and important ancillary issues (operational and legal risks). The adequacy and integrity of the servicer’s systems and processes for underwriting, collections policies and procedures are also reviewed. The Group conducts a full due diligence review of the servicer for each transaction. Each transaction is reviewed on, at least, an annual basis with a focus on the performance of underlying assets. The results of any due diligence review and the financial strength of the seller/servicer, are also factored into the analysis. Ratings of the transaction are reaffirmed with the most up to date ECAI methodologies. Any transaction which deviates from the current methodology is amended accordingly.

382  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2016 Annual Report on Form 20-F


Barclays’ approach to managing risks

Management of securitisation exposures

Summary of the accounting policies for securitisation activities

Certain Group-sponsored entities have issued debt securities or have entered into funding arrangements with lenders in order to finance specific assets. An entity is consolidated by the Group when the Group has control over the entity. The Group controls an entity if it has all of the three elements of control which are i) power over the entity; and ii) exposure, or rights, to variable returns from its involvement with the entity; iii) the ability to use its power over the entity to affect the amount of the Group returns.

The consolidation treatment must be initially assessed at inception and is reassessed if facts and circumstances indicate that there are changes to one or more of the three elements of control.

Typically, assets that are awaiting securitisation on the Group balance sheet are measured at fair value through P&L, using the appropriate method for the asset class as they are classified as held for trading or are designed at fair value through profit and loss, under the IAS 39 fair value option. However somenon-derivative assets held prior to securitisation may qualify as loans and receivables and are measured at amortised cost. When securitised assets have been included on the Group balance sheet it is necessary to consider whether those assets may be removed from the Group balance sheet. Assets which have been transferred to third parties (i.e. an unconsolidated Group entity), will remain on the Group balance sheet, and treated as financings, unless the following criteria apply:

§substantially all the risks and rewards associated with the assets have been transferred, in which case, they are derecognised in full

§if a significant portion, but not all, of the risks and rewards have been transferred, the asset is derecognised entirely if the transferee has the ability to sell the financial asset, otherwise the asset continues to be recognised only to the extent of the Group’s continuing involvement.

Any financial support or contractual arrangements provided to unconsolidated entities, over securitised assets, would be recognised as a liability on balance sheet if it met the relevant IFRS criteria, or gave rise to a provision under IAS 37, and have to be disclosed. Note, however, that the Group has a Significant Risk Transfer policy that does not allow for any support to be provided to any transactions that fall under the securitisation framework.

Assets may be transferred to a third party through a legal sale or an arrangement that meets the ‘passthrough’ criteria where the substance of the arrangement is principally that the Group is acting solely as a cash collection agent on behalf of the eventual recipients.

Where the transfer applies to a fully proportionate share of all or specifically identified cash flows, the relevant accounting treatment is applied to that proportion of the asset.

When the above criteria support the case that the securitisation should not be accounted for as financing, the transaction will result in sale treatment or partial sale treatment to the extent the Group has no continuing involvement. Where the Group has continuing involvement the assets will continue to be recognised to the extent of the continuing involvement. Gains are recognised to the extent that proceeds that can be measured using observable market data exceed the assets derecognised.

Any retained interests, which will consist of loans and/or securities depending on the nature of the transaction, are valued in accordance with the Group’s Accounting Policies, as set out in the 2016 Annual Report. To the extent that these interests are measured at fair value, they will be included within the fair value disclosures in the financial statements in the Annual Report. As outlined in these disclosures, key valuation assumptions for retained interests of this nature will include spreads to discount rates, default and recovery rates and prepayment rates that may be observable or unobservable.

In a synthetic securitisation transaction, the underlying assets are not sold into the relevant special purpose entity (SPE). Instead, their performance is transferred into the vehicle through a synthetic instrument such as a CDS, a credit linked note or a financial guarantee. The accounting policies outlined above will apply to synthetic securitisations.

Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2016 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  383


Barclays’ approach to managing risks

Management of Treasury and Capital Risk

This section provides an analysis of the management of liquidity, capital and Interest rate risk in the banking risk.

§    Liquidity risk, with a focus on how it is managed to ensure that resources are adequate at all times including under stress, is discussed on pages 386 to 387

§    Capital risk, including how the risk of insufficient capital and leverage ratios and pension risk are managed, is discussed on pages 388 to 389

§    The management of Interest rate risk in the banking book is discussed on pages390 to 391

LOGO

384  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2016 Annual Report on Form 20-F


Barclays’ approach to managing risks

Management of Treasury and Capital Risk

Treasury and capital risk

The risk that the Group may not achieve its business plans because of the availability of planned liquidity, a shortfall in capital or a mismatch in the interest rate exposures of its assets and liabilities. The Treasury and Capital Risk function is an independent risk function with responsibility for oversight of the following risks:

Liquidity risk:The risk that the firm is unable to meet its contractual or contingent obligations or that it does not have the appropriate amount, tenor and composition of funding and liquidity to support its assets

  Capital risk:The risk that the firm has an insufficient level or composition of capital to support its normal business activities and to meet its regulatory capital requirements under normal operating environments or stressed conditions (both actual and as defined for internal planning or regulatory testing purposes). This includes the risk from the firm’s pension plans

  Interest rate risk in the banking book: The risk that the firm is exposed to capital or income volatility because of a mismatch between the interest rate exposures of its(non-traded) assets and liabilities.

Overview

Barclays Treasury manages treasury and capital risk on aday-to-day basis with the Treasury Committee acting as the principal management body. To ensure effective oversight and segregation of duties and in line with the ERMF, the Treasury and Capital Risk function is responsible for oversight key capital and liquidity risk management activities.

To ensure effective oversight and segregation of duties and in line with the ERMF, the Treasury and Capital Risk function is responsible for oversight key capital, liquidity,non-traded market risk (NTMR) and pension risk management activities. The following describes the structure and governance associated with the risk types within the Treasury and Capital Risk function.

Organisation and structure

LOGO

Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2016 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  385


Barclays’ approach to managing risks

Management of Treasury and Capital Risk

Liquidity risk management

Overview

The efficient management of liquidity is essential to the Group in retaining the confidence of the financial markets and ensuring that the business is sustainable. There is a control framework in place for managing liquidity risk and this is designed to meet the following objectives:

§To maintain liquidity resources that are sufficient in amount and quality and a funding profile that is appropriate to meet the liquidity risk appetite as expressed by the Board

§To maintain market confidence in the Group’s name.

This is achieved via a combination of policy formation, review and governance, analysis, stress testing, limit setting and monitoring. Together, these meet internal and regulatory requirements.

Roles and responsibilities

The Treasury and Capital Risk function is responsible for the management and governance of the liquidity risk mandate defined by the Board. Treasury has the primary responsibility for managing liquidity risk within the set risk appetite.

Liquidity risk management

A control framework is in place for Liquidity Risk under which the Treasury function operates. The control framework describes liquidity risk management processes, associated policies and controls that the Group has implemented to manage liquidity risk within the Liquidity Risk Appetite (LRA) and is subject to annual review.

The Board sets the LRA over Group stress tests and is represented as the level of risk the Group chooses to take in pursuit of its business objectives and in meeting its regulatory obligations. The approved LRA is implemented in line with the control framework and policy for liquidity risk.

Control framework

Barclays has a comprehensive control framework for managing the Group’s liquidity risk. It is designed to deliver the appropriate term and structure of funding consistent with the LRA set by the Board.

The control framework incorporates a range of ongoing business management tools to monitor, limit and stress test the Group’s balance sheet and contingent liabilities and a Contingency Funding Plan. Limit setting and transfer pricing are tools that are designed to control the level of liquidity risk taken and drive the appropriate mix of funds. Together, these tools reduce the likelihood that a liquidity stress event could lead to an inability to meet the Group’s obligations as they fall due.

The stress tests assess the potential contractual and contingent stress outflows under a range of scenarios, which are then used to determine the size of the liquidity pool that is immediately available to meet anticipated outflows if a stress occurs.

The Group maintains a Contingency Funding Plan which details how liquidity stress events of varying severity would be managed. Since the precise nature of any stress event cannot be known in advance, the plans are designed to be flexible to the nature and severity of the stress event and provide a menu of options that can be drawn upon as required. Barclays also maintains Recovery Plans which consider actions to generate additional liquidity in order to facilitate recovery in a severe stress.

LOGO

Risk Appetite and planning

Barclays has established a LRA over Group stress tests and is represented as the level of liquidity risk the Group chooses to take in pursuit of its business objectives and in meeting its regulatory obligations.

The key expression of the liquidity risk is through stress tests. It is measured with reference to the liquidity pool compared to anticipated stressed net contractual and contingent outflows for each of five stress scenarios. Barclays has defined both internal short term and long term LRA stress test metrics.

The LRA for internal stress tests is approved by the Board. The LRA is reviewed on a continuous basis and is subject to formal review at least annually as part of the Individual Liquidity Adequacy Assessment Process (ILAAP).

Statement of Liquidity Risk Appetite: The Board has approved that the Group will maintain an amount of available liquidity resources to meet modelled and prescribed regulatory liquidity stress outflows over a period of time (minimum buffer duration):

§   30 days in a Barclays specific stress

§   90 days in a market wide stress

§   30 days in a combined stress

§   LCR 30 days minimum ratio 100% (Pillar 1 basis)

§   LCR 30 days minimum ratio 80% (Pillar 2 basis)

§   Long term LRA 80% LCR (Pillar 2).

The stress outflows are used to determine the size of the Group Liquidity Pool, which represents those resources immediately available to meet outflows in a stress. In addition to the liquidity pool, the control framework and policy provides for other management actions, including generating liquidity from other liquid assets on the Group’s balance sheet in order to meet additional stress outflows, or to preserve or restore the Liquidity Pool in the event of a liquidity stress.

386  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2016 Annual Report on Form 20-F


Barclays’ approach to managing risks

Management of Treasury and Capital Risk

Liquidity limits

Barclays manages limits on a variety of on andoff-balance sheet exposures, a sample of which is shown in the table below. These limits serve to control the overall extent and composition of liquidity risk taken by managing exposure to the cash outflows.

LOGO

Early warning indicators

Barclays monitors a range of market indicators for early signs of liquidity risk either in the market or specific to Barclays, a sample of which are shown in the table below. These are designed to immediately identify the emergence of increased liquidity risk to maximise the time available

to execute appropriate mitigating actions. Early warning indicators are used as part of the assessment of whether to invoke the Group’s Contingency Funding Plan, which provides a framework for how the liquidity stress would be managed.

LOGO

Contingency funding plan and recovery & resolution planning

Barclays maintains a Contingency Funding Plan (CFP) which is designed to provide a framework where a liquidity stress could be effectively managed. The CFP is proportionate to the nature, scale and complexity of the business and is tested to ensure that it is operationally robust. The CFP details the circumstances in which the plan could be invoked, including as a result of adverse movements in liquidity early warning indicators. As part of the plan, the Barclays Treasurer has established a Liquidity Management Committee (LMC). On invocation of the CFP by the Executive Committee, the LMC would meet to identify the likely impact of the event on the Group and determine the appropriate response for the nature and severity of the stress.

The CFP provides a communication plan and includes management actions to respond to liquidity stresses of varying severity. This could include monetising the liquidity pool, slowing the extension of credit, increasing the tenor of funding and securitising or selling assets.

Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2016 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  387


Barclays’ approach to managing risks

Management of Treasury and Capital Risk

Capital risk management

Overview

Capital risk is managed through ongoing monitoring and management of the capital position, regular stress testing and a robust capital governance framework

LOGO

Organisation and structure

The management of capital risk is integral to the Group’s approach to financial stability and sustainability management, and is embedded in the way businesses and legal entities operate.

Capital risk management is underpinned by a control framework and policy. The capital management strategy, outlined in the Group and legal entity capital plans, is developed in alignment with the control framework and policy for capital risk, and is implemented consistently in order to deliver on the Group’s objectives.

The Board approves the Group capital plan, internal and regulatory stress tests, and the Group recovery plan. The Treasury Committee is responsible for monitoring and managing capital risk in line with the Group’s capital management objectives, capital plan and risk frameworks. The Board Risk Committee reviews the risk profile, and annually reviews risk appetite and the impact of stress scenarios on the Group capital plan/forecast in order to agree the Group’s projected capital adequacy.

Local management ensures compliance with an entity’s minimum regulatory capital requirements by reporting to local Asset and Liability Committees with oversight by the Group’s Treasury Committee, as required.

Roles and responsibilities

Treasury has the primary responsibility for managing and monitoring capital and reports to the Group Finance Director. The Treasury and Capital Risk function contains a Capital Risk Oversight team, and is an independent risk function that reports to the Group CRO and is responsible for oversight of capital risk.

Capital risk management

The Group’s capital management strategy is driven by the strategic aims of the Group and the risk appetite set by the Board. The Group’s objectives are achieved through well embedded capital management practices.

Capital planning and allocation

The Group assesses its capital requirements on multiple bases, with the Group’s capital plan set in consideration of the Group’s risk profile and appetite, strategic and performance objectives, regulatory requirements, and market and internal factors, including the results of stress testing. The capital plan is managed on atop-down andbottom-up basis through both short-term and medium-term financial planning cycles, and is developed with the objective of ensuring that the Group maintains an adequate level of capital to support its capital requirements.

The PRA determines the regulatory capital requirements for the consolidated Group. Under these regulatory frameworks, capital requirements are set in consideration of the level of risk that the firm is exposed to and the factors above, and are measured through both risk-based RWAs and leverage-based metrics. An internal assessment of the Bank’s capital adequacy is undertaken through the Internal Capital Adequacy Assessment Process (ICAAP) and is used to inform the capital requirements of the firm.

The Group expects to meet the minimum requirements for capital and leverage both during the transition period and upon full implementation, and also holds an internal buffer sized according to the firm’s assessment of capital risk.

Through the capital planning process, capital allocations are approved by the Group Executive committee, taking into consideration the risk appetite and strategic aims of the Group. Regulated legal entities are, at a minimum, capitalised to meet their current and forecast regulatory and business requirements.

Monitoring and reporting

Capital is managed and monitored to ensure that Barclays’ capital plans remain appropriate and that risks to the plans are considered.

Limits are in place to support alignment with the capital plan and adherence to regulatory requirements, and are monitored through appropriately governed forums. Capital risks against firm-specific and macroeconomic early warning indicators are monitored and reported to the Treasury Committee, with clear escalation channels to senior management. This enables a consistent and objective approach to monitoring the capital outlook against the capital plan, and supports the early identification when outlooks deteriorate.

Capital management information is readily available to support the Senior Management’s strategic andday-to-day business decision making.

Stress testing and risk mitigation

Internal group-wide stress testing is undertaken to quantify and understand the impact of sensitivities on the capital plan and capital ratios arising from stressed macroeconomic conditions. Recent economic, market and peer institution stresses are used to inform the assumptions developed for internal stress tests and to assess the effectiveness of mitigation strategies.

The Group also undertakes stress tests prescribed by the BoE and EBA, and legal entities undertake stress tests prescribed by their local regulators. These stress tests inform decisions on the size and quality of the internal capital buffer required and the results are incorporated into the Group capital plan to ensure adequacy of capital under normal and severe, but plausible stressed conditions.

Actions are identified as part of the stress tests that can be taken to mitigate the risks that may arise in the event of material adverse changes in the current economic and business outlook. As an additional layer of protection, the Group Recovery Plan defines the actions and implementation strategies available to the Group to increase or preserve capital resources in the situation that a stress occurs that is more severe than anticipated.

388  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2016 Annual Report on Form 20-F


Barclays’ approach to managing risks

Management of Treasury and Capital Risk

Regulatory and accounting developments

Further changes to capital requirements are expected due to continued regulatory focus on the risk weighting of assets, including Basel Committee on Banking Supervision (BCBS) proposals on fundamental review of the trading book, revisions to standardised rules for credit risk, counterparty credit risk, CVA volatility risk and operational risk, application of an RWA floor based on the standardised approach to limit the use of internal models in certain areas as well as the impact of IFRS 9 on the firm’s capital position.

Additional capital requirements are also expected from other regulatory reforms, including UK, EU and US proposals on bank structural reform and current European Banking Authority (EBA) proposals for ‘Minimum Requirement for own funds and Eligible Liabilities (MREL) under the EU Bank Recovery and Resolution Directive (BRRD). Included within these reforms are the Bank of England final rules on MREL requirements for UK banks which were published on 31 October 2016. The Bank of England has stated that the bank’s final MREL requirements will be subject to a review in 2020.

Many of the expected regulatory proposals are still subject to finalisation, with calibration and timing of implementation still to be determined and the potential for the impacts to be different from those originally expected when in final form. For further information see ‘Funding Risk’ in the Material Risks section and ‘Regulatory Developments’ in the Supervision and Regulation section.

Transferability of capital

Surplus capital held in Group entities is required to be repatriated to Barclays Bank PLC in the form of dividends and/or capital repatriation, subject to local regulatory requirements, exchange controls and tax implications. This approach provides optimal flexibility on there-deployment of capital across legal entities. Pre and post the implementation of ring-fencing, capital is managed for the Group as a whole as well as its operating subsidiaries to ensure fungibility and redeployment of capital while meeting relevant internal and regulatory targets at entity levels.

Foreign exchange risk

The Group has capital resources and RWAs denominated in foreign currencies. Changes in foreign exchange rates result in changes in the Sterling equivalent value of foreign currency denominated capital resources and RWAs. As a result, the Group’s regulatory capital ratios are sensitive to foreign currency movements.

The Group’s capital ratio management strategy is to minimise the volatility of the capital ratios caused by foreign exchange rate movements. To achieve this, the Group aims to maintain the ratio of foreign currency CET1, Tier 1 and Total capital resources to foreign currency RWAs the same as the Group’s consolidated capital ratios.

The Group’s investments in foreign currency subsidiaries and branches, to the extent that they are not hedged for foreign exchange movements, translate into GBP upon consolidation creating CET1 capital resources sensitive to foreign currency movements. Changes in the GBP value of the investments due to foreign currency movements are captured in the currency translation reserve, resulting in a movement in CET1 capital.

To create foreign currency Tier 1 and Total Capital resources additional to the CET1 capital resources, the Group issues debt capital innon-Sterling currencies, where possible. This is primarily achieved through the issuance of debt capital from Barclays PLC or Barclays Bank PLC in US Dollar and Euro, but can also be achieved by subsidiaries issuing capital in local currencies.

Management of pension risk

The Group maintains a number of defined benefit pension schemes for past and current employees. The ability of the pension fund to meet the projected pension payments is maintained principally through investments.

Pension risk arises because the estimated market value of the pension fund assets might decline; investment returns might reduce; or the estimated value of the pension liabilities might increase as a result of changes to the market process. The Group monitors the market risks arising from its defined benefit pension schemes, and works with the Trustees to address shortfalls. In these circumstances, the Group could be required or might choose to make extra contributions to the pension fund. The Group’s main defined benefit scheme was closed to new entrants in 2012.

Many of the Group’s defined benefit (DB) pension funds are established as trusts in order to keep the fund’s assets separate from the sponsor (Barclays). As such, the Trustees are responsible for:

§Investment strategy including asset allocation and performance of assets.

§Assessing the level of technical provision required.

§Ensuring any minimum funding objectives is met.

§Complying with local legislation.

The legal structure of Barclays’ DB pension funds and the role of the Trustees mean that Pension Risk is not part of the Bank’s risk appetite assessment used to manage other key risks.

Pension Forums

The Pension Executive Board (PEB) has accountability for the effective operation of pensions across Barclays Group. It is the most senior executive body for pensions in Barclays.

The Pension Management Group (PMG) is accountable for oversight and workflow management of the group’s responsibilities of the pension arrangements operated by Barclays PLC and its subsidiaries globally. The PMG is accountable to the PEB.

The PEB and PMG are not created or mandated under the ERMF. However these forums provide Risk the opportunity to discuss pension risk in a wider context as other relevant stakeholders from HR, Legal, Treasury and Finance are also represented at these meetings.

Key Pension Risk control and governance include:

Annual review, challenge and proposal of the IAS19 market driven assumptions used for the calculation of the pension scheme liabilities used in Barclays disclosures.

§Representation and input at key Pension forums.

§Input into the Group’s ICAAP for Pension risk.

§Input into the Group’s strategic plan and Stress Test exercise.

§Provide independent oversight of the Pension risk profiles from the Bank’s perspective.

§Coordinates response to regulatory initiatives, developments and proposals on Pension, which may include inputs from material overseas schemes such as in the US, Europe and Africa.

Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2016 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  389


Barclays’ approach to managing risks

Management of Treasury and Capital Risk

Interest rate risk in the banking book management

Overview

Banking book operations generatenon-traded market risk, primarily through interest rate risk arising from the sensitivity of net interest margins to changes in interest rates. To manage interest rate risk within its defined risk appetite, the principal banking businesses engages in internal derivative trades with Treasury. However, the businesses remain susceptible to market risk from six key sources:

§direct risk: the mismatch between therun-off of product balances and the associated interest rate hedge, given that the balance sheet is held static

§structural risk:the impact of the rate shock on the rolling hedge replenishment rate onnon-maturity products, given that the balance sheet is held static

§prepayment risk:balancerun-off may be faster or slower than expected, due to customer behaviour in response to general economic conditions or interest rates. This can lead to a mismatch between the actual balance of products and the hedges executed with Treasury based on initial expectations

§recruitment risk:the volume of new business may be lower or higher than expected, requiring the business to unwindpre-hedging or execute hedging transactions with Treasury at different rates than expected

§residual risk and margin compression:the business may retain a small element of interest rate risk to facilitate the day to day management of customer business. Additionally, in the current low rate environment, deposits on which the Group sets the interest rate are exposed to margin compression. This is because for any further fall in base rate the Group must absorb an increasing amount of the rate move in its margin

§lag risk:the risk of being unable tore-price products immediately after a change in interest rates due to both mandatory notification periods and operational constraints in large volume mailings. This is highly prevalent in managed rates savings product (e.g. Every Day Saver) where customers must be informed in writing of any planned reduction in their savings rates.

Non-traded market risk also arises from the Liquidity Buffer investment portfolio, which is managed to a defined risk appetite. Investments in the liquidity buffer are generally subject to available for sale accounting rules; changes in the value of these assets impact capital via the available for sale reserve.

Roles and responsibilities

The Treasury Market Risk team:

§Provides risk management oversight and monitoring of all traded- andnon-traded market risk in Treasury, which specifically includes risk management of the liquidity buffer, funding activities, asset and liability management hedging, residual interest rate risk from the hedge accounting solution and foreign exchange translation hedging

§Sets and monitors risk limits to ensurenon-traded market risk taken in Treasury and the customer banking book adheres to agreed risk appetite.

The IRRBB team:

§Assesses interest rate risk in the banking book, particularly as it relates to customer banking book and Treasury

§Acts as review and challenge of the first line’s risk management practices and decisions including the hedging activity performed by Treasury on behalf of the business

§Acts as review and challenge for the behavioural assumptions used in hedging and transfer pricing.

Management ofnon-traded market risk, mitigation and hedging policies

Barclays actively seeks to minimise interest risk in the banking book by actively hedging this risk with the use of interest rate products. At the same time Barclays actively manages the potential asset and liability mismatches and changes to interest rates that could reduce the value of our investment portfolios.

Non-traded risk measurement

Barclays uses a range of complementary technical approaches to measurenon-traded market risk.

388  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F


Summary of measures for non-traded market risk

 

  MeasureSummary of measures fornon-traded

Definition market risk

 

Measure

Definition

Annual earnings at risk

  

Impact on earnings of a parallel (upward or downward) movement in interest rates.

Economic value of equity (EVE)

  

Change in the present value of the banking book of a parallel (upward or downward) interest rate shock.

Economic capital

  

Economic Capital (EC) is held to protect against unexpected loss (in excess of expected loss) and calculated over aone-year time horizon.

Value at risk (VaR)

  

An estimate of the potential loss arising from unfavourable market movements, if the current positions were to be held unchanged for a set period of time.

Stress testing

  

Scenario based stress testing using a variety of economic parameters to quantify the impact to profit and lossP&L and the balance sheet under various levels of stress.

The risk in each business is measured and controlled using both an income metric (Annual Earnings at Risk) and value metrics (Economic Value of Equity, Economic Capital and VaR).

Annual Earnings at Risk (AEaR)

AEaR measures the sensitivity of net interest income over the nextone-year period. It is calculated as the difference between the estimated income using the expected base rate forecast and the lowest estimated income following a parallel increase or decrease in interest rates (200bps), subject to a minimum interest rate of 0%. 200bp shocks are consistent with industry best practice and supported by banking regulators.

The main model assumptions are:

 

§ The balance sheet is kept at the current level, i.e. no growth is assumed; andassumed

 

§ Balances are adjusted for an assumed behavioural profile. This includes the treatment of fixed rate loans including mortgages.

AEaR is applied to the entire banking book, including the liquidity buffer and internal trades with the trading book to hedge against interest rate risk in the banking book exposures. The metric provides a measure of how interest rate risk may impact the Group’s earnings, providing a simple comparison between risk and returns. The main disadvantage of the metric is its short-term focus, as it only measures the impact on a position in the first 12 months. In order to counter this, the Group has implemented additional economic value risk metrics.

See page 143 for a review

390  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2016 Annual Report on Form 20-F


Barclays’ approach to managing risks

Management of AEaR in 2015.Treasury and Capital Risk

Economic Value of Equity (EVE)

EVE calculates the change in the present value of the non tradednon-traded exposure for a parallel upward and downward interest rate (200bps) shock. This shock is useful for drawing comparisons across portfolios, and is also a regulatory reporting requirement. Note that the EVE calculation measures sensitivity in terms of present value, while AEaR measures income sensitivity.

The EVE measure is applied to the entire banking book, that is, the same coverage as AEaR, and covers the full life of transactions and hedges ensuring the risk over the whole life of positions are considered. The main weaknesses of this model stem from its simplicity. In particular, it does not capture the impact of business growth or of management actions, and is based on the balance sheet as at the reporting date.

Economic Capital (EC, for recruitment, prepayment and residual risk)

EC consistent models, based on DVaR methodologies, are used to measure unexpected losses to a 99.98% confidence interval over aone-year period. Withinnon-traded risk, this measure aims to capture recruitment risk, prepayment risk and residual risk for banking book products (see definitions on page 377)108). EC metrics typically measure variations in economic value from specific sources of risk, for example, prepayment risk EC for fixed rate mortgages predicts the cost of hedging to reduce any mismatch exposure resulting from the impact of an interest rate shock on customer prepayment levels.

Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  389


Barclays’ approach to managing risks

Management of market risk

EC is used in the active management of the banking book. Limits are set against EC metrics and breaches trigger mitigating actions to reduce exposure to appropriate levels. EC modelling is typically applied only to fixed rate products and the majority of variable rate and administered rate portfolios are not subject to an EC measure.

Advantages of EC are that it can calculate unexpected losses to an appropriate degree of confidence given the nature of the risks, and that it covers sources of loss beyond the scope of other models (AEaR only covers income changes over aone-year period; EVE only considers existing business and does not include any dynamic customer behaviour assumptions). The main weaknesses come from necessary simplifying assumptions. In the case of models based on statistical confidence intervals, the choice of the statistical distribution may drive under-prediction of very extreme events (i.e. the real distribution may befat-tailed). To mitigate this, the Group continues to improve its models using long time series of historical data to capture extreme effects.

See pages 144 for a review of EC in 2015.

Value at Risk (VaR)

VaR is an estimate of the potential loss arising from unfavourable market movements, if the current positions were to be held unchanged for a set period. For internal market risk management purposes, a historical simulation methodology is used with atwo-year equally weighted historical period, at the 95% confidence level for banking book portfolios covered by the measure. This calculation is a present value sensitivity while AEaR is an income sensitivity.

Daily VaR is used to measure residual interest and foreign exchange risks within certain banking book portfolios.

Quarterly scaled VaR is used to measure risk in the Liquidity Buffer Investment Portfolio. The calculation uses a five-year historical period, a 95% confidence level and is scaled from daily to quarterly by an approved constant factor.

Stress testing

Stress losses are calculated for the liquidity buffer portfolio, but not subject to controlled limits.

Allnon-traded market risk positions are subject to the Group’s annual stress testing exercise, where scenarios based on economic parameters are used to determine the potential impact of the positions on results and the balance sheet.

Non-traded market risk control

Non-traded market risk is controlled through the use of limits on many of the above risk measures. Limits are set at the total business level and then cascaded down. The total business level limits are owned by the BCROs, while the overall Group AEaR limit is agreed with Group Market Risk and approved by the FRC.BRC. Compliance with limits is monitored by the respective business market risk team with oversight provided by Group Market Risk.

Businesses manage their interest rate risk exposures by transferring this risk to Group Treasury, who then mitigate this risk using external markets if appropriate to keep the overall exposure within the agreed risk appetite. Group policy preventsnon-trading businesses to run trading books; this is only permitted for the Investment Bank,investment bank, Group Treasury, BarclaysNon-Core and Africa Banking.

Non-traded market risk reporting

The Group Market Risk function producesBusinesses market risk managers produce a number of detailed and summary market risk reports monthly. Where relevant on a daily, weekly, fortnightlyGroup-wide basis, these are sent to Group Market Risk for review and monthly basis, for business and risk managers. Aa risk summary is presented at the Group Market Risk Committee and otherthe various market risk forums.

Management of Pension Risk

Pension risk control

committees at business level. The investment strategy of the UKRF is owned and defined by the Trustee who is independent to the bank. As such, pension risk is not governed by the conventional limit framework observed in traded and non-tradedoverall market risk. Instead, Group Market Risk have put in place a pension risk control framework to create consistency in the evaluation and monitoring of the risk in a coordinated way with other key risks across Barclays.

The risk and positions are reported monthly to the Market Risk Committee (MRC) and periodically to the Pensions Management Group (PMG), Pension Executive Board (PEB) and BRC.

390  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F


Group Market Risk is responsible for the ongoing challenge of the risk profile andis also presented to that aim will ensure:

§At least annual review of all pension funds shortfalls;

§Detailed review of liability driven data;

§A continuous and detailed interaction exists between Group Market Risk, the pension asset manager and other key stakeholders;

§To conduct, where necessary, any ad-hoc analyses to ensure a consistent view of the risk positions of the fund.

Pension risk measurements

The following metrics are used to describe pension risk:

§Asset/Liability mismatch under IAS19, Funding and Solvency Rules;

§Asset VaR and liability VaR;

§Total pension risk VaR i.e. which captures the hedging effect of the matching assets, and potential diversification between assets and liabilities.

The VaR used for pension risk is calibrated atBRC on a 95% confidence level, with a one year horizon to reflect the long-term nature of the risk. Whilst the asset portfolio is sensitive to the volatility to any asset class the pension asset manager invests in, the liabilities are mainly exposed to interest rates and corporate credit spreads which are the main components of the discount rate; and inflation which drives the pension increase assumptions.regular basis.

Group Market Risk also conduct regulatory and internal stress tests on material pension schemes to assess how these react to potential shock scenarios, the results of which form part of Barclays submission for the EU and Bank of England Stress Tests.

See page 146 for a review of pension risk in 2015.

Management of insurance risk

Insurance risk measurement

Risk measurement is largely based on best practice actuarial methodologies for the measurement of assets and liabilities, capital quantification and the monitoring of exposures against predetermined limits, in compliance with regulatory standards relevant to their application. The methodology can be deterministic or stochastic (both closed-form and simulation), depending on the application. Capital adequacy calculations are calculated at a 99.5% confidence level for regulatory purposes, and a higher confidence level for economic capital purposes. Absa Life extrapolates the underwriting Capital Adequacy Requirement (CAR) by assuming that life underwriting risk follows an appropriate statistical distribution.

The estimation of insurance technical provisions requires a number of assumptions. The appropriateness of the actuarial assumptions are reviewed by the independent external actuaries. Furthermore, the internal risk function acts as second line of defence, and provides oversight, review and challenge to the actuarial functions. Assumptions are made around demographic factors (e.g. mortality, morbidity), statistical factors (e.g. claims incidence, reporting and development patterns), and economic factors (e.g. yield curves, market returns). Stress testing can also be used to isolate and examine the impact of specific, or combinations of, variables.

Insurance risk control

Insurance risk is managed within Barclays Africa Group Limited. From an economic capital perspective, four significant categories of insurance risk and their governance procedures are:

§short-term insurance underwriting risk: monitored on a quarterly basis by the Underwriting Committee to ensure the risk taken is in line with underwriting guidelines and appropriately priced and reserved for. Risk governance is monitored by the Control Review Committee (CRC), the Actuarial Review Committee (ARC) and Key Risk reporting

§life insurance underwriting risk: monitored on a quarterly basis by the Underwriting Committee to ensure the risk taken is in line with underwriting guidelines and appropriately priced and reserved for. Risk governance is monitored by the CRC, the ARC and Key Risk reporting

§life insurance mismatch risk: monitored every other month by the entity’s Capital and Investment Risk Committee. A quarterly review is conducted by the Wealth, Investment Management and Insurance (WIMI) Financial Risk Committee, and an annual review by the ARC

§life and short-term insurance investment risk: monitored by the entity Capital and Investment Risk Committee on at least a quarterly basis.

Short-term insurance underwriting activities are undertaken by Absa Insurance Company and Absa idirect. Life insurance underwriting activities are undertaken by Absa Life, Barclays Life Botswana, Barclays Life Zambia and Woolworths Financial Services (through an Absa Life cell captive). Global Alliance Mozambique underwrites both life and short-term insurance business.

Short-term insurance underwriting risk, life insurance underwriting risk, life insurance mismatch risk and investment risks are core to the business of the insurance entities. The successful management of these risks ultimately impacts the success of the entities. The same risk management frameworks and governance structures that enabled the effective management of risks for the South African entities are implemented and embedded in any new entities.

 

  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 20152016 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  391


Barclays’ approach to managing risks

Management of operational risk

        

 

 

    

LOGO

Management of operational risk

LOGO  

The sources of operational risks, and how those risks are managed, are detailed in this section.

 

 § The types of risks that are classified as operational risks are described on page 394.page393.

 

 § Governance, management and measurement techniques are covered on pages 394159 to 396.161.

LOGO

392  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2016 Annual Report on Form 20-F


Barclays’ approach to managing risks

Management of operational risk

        

 

 

Operational risks

The risk of loss to the firm from inadequate or failed processes or systems, human factors or due to external events (for example fraud) where the root cause is not due to credit or market risks.

Operational risk management overview

Any instance where there is a potential or actual impact to the Group resulting from inadequate or failed internal processes, people, systems, or from an external event. The impacts to the Group can be financial, including losses or an unexpected financial gain, as well as non-financial such as customer detriment, reputational or regulatory consequences.

Overview

The management of operational risk has two key objectives:

 

§ minimise the impact of losses suffered, both in the normal course of business (small losses) and from extreme events (large losses)

 

§ improve the effective management of the Group and strengthen its brand and external reputation.

The Group is committed to the management and measurement of operational risk and was granted a waiver by the FSA (now the PRA) to operate an Advanced Measurement Approach (AMA) for operational risk, which commenced in January 2008. The majority of the Group calculates regulatory capital requirements using AMA (93%(94% of capital requirements), however, in specific areasexcept for small parts of the organisation acquired since the original permission (6% of capital requirements) using the Basic Indicator Approach (7%) is applied.(BIA). The Group works to benchmark its internal operational risk management and measurement practices with peer banks and to drive the further development of advanced techniques.

The Group is committed to operating within a strong system of internal controlcontrols that enables business to be transacted and risk taken without exposing the Group to unacceptable potential losses or reputational damage.damages. The Group has an overarching framework that sets out the approach to internal governance. This guide establishes the mechanisms and processes by which the Board directs the organisation, through setting the tone and expectations from the top, delegating authority and monitoring compliance.

Organisation and Structurestructure

LOGO

A key component is the Enterprise Risk Management Framework (ERMF), the purpose of which is to identifyOrganisation and set minimum requirements in respect of the main risks to achieving the Group’s strategic objectives and to provide reasonable assurance that internal controls are effective. The ERMF also defines the characteristics of an effective Control Environment, against which the businesses are assessed. Management, in all three lines of defence, are required to manage their businesses and functions in accordance with the characteristics set out below:

§structurethere is a strong tone from the top and culture supporting the management of controls

Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  393


 

 

LOGO

 

§there is clear individual accountability and responsibility for the management of the control environment, starting at senior levels, and incorporated into performance objectives

§key customer processes and other activities are clearly identified and understood

§the material risks arising from these are identified and assessed

§a risk appetite is established for the variable outcomes in these risks

§a set of comprehensive and sustainable key controls is established and operated to remain within the risk appetite

§any issues, events outside of risk appetite including control failures are identified and escalated

§programmes for the remediation of control gaps or execution failures are established and implemented

§a feedback loop including a “Lessons Learnt” process is used to inform and improve control performance

§assurance is provided by 1st line and 2nd lines of defence on the reliability of control solutions and remediation activities for their own control areas.

The key elements of the Group’s system of internal control, which is aligned to the recommendations of The Committee of Sponsoring Organizations of the Treadway Commission, Internal Control – Integrated Framework (COSO), are set out in the risk control frameworks relating to each of the Group’s Key Risks and in the Group Operational Risk Framework.

Operational Risk comprises a number of specific Key Risksrisks defined as follows:follow:

 

§ external suppliersupplier:inadequate selection and ongoing management of external suppliers

 

§ financial crime: failure to comply with anti money laundering , anti-bribery and anti-corruption and sanctions policies. In early January 2016, the oversight of Financial Crime was transferred to Group Compliance

§financial reportingreporting:reporting mis-statement or omission within external financial or regulatory reporting

 

§ fraudfraud:dishonest behaviour with the intent to make a gain or cause a loss to others

 

§ informationinformation:inadequate protection of the Group’s information in accordance with its value and sensitivity

 

§ legal: failure to identify and manage legal risks

§payments processprocess:failure in operation of payments processes

 

§ peoplepeople:inadequate people capabilities, and/or performance/reward structures, and/or inappropriate behaviours

§ premises and security& security:: unavailability of premises (to meet business demand) and/or safe working environments, and inadequate protection of physical assets, employees and customers against external threats

 

§ taxationtaxation:: failure to comply with tax laws and practice which could lead to financial penalties, additional tax charges or reputational damagedamages

 

§ technology (including CyberSecurity)cyber security):failure to develop and deploy secure, stable and reliable technology solutions which includes risk of loss or detriment to the Group’s business and customers as a result of actions committed or facilitated through the use of networked information systems

 

§ transaction operations: failure in the management of critical transaction processes.

Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2016 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  393


Barclays’ approach to managing risks

Management of operational risk

In order to ensure complete coverage of the potential adverse impacts on the Group arising from operational risk, the operational risk taxonomy extends beyond the operational Key Risksrisks listed above to cover areas included within conduct risk. For more information on Conduct Riskconduct risk please see pages 406 to 409.page 399.

These risks may result in financial and/or non-financial impacts including legal/regulatory breaches or reputational damage.damages.

Operational The Group also recognises that there are certain threats/risk drivers that are more thematic and have the potential to impact the bank’s strategic objectives. These are Enterprise Risk Themes and require an overarching and integrated management approach. These include:

§change: risk of failure in delivering change appropriately

§cyber: any cyber attack that disrupts the ability of networks, infrastructures, or applications to perform their intended functions

§resilience: characteristic of an organisation, whereby it is able to survive and prosper in its commercial endeavors regardless of the impact of adverse events, shocks and chronic or incremental changes.

Roles and responsibilities

The prime responsibility for the management of operational risk and the compliance with control requirements rests with the business and functional units where the risk arises. The operational risk profile and control environment is reviewed by business management through specific meetings which cover governance, risk and control. Businesses are required to report their operational risks on both a regular and an event-driven basis. The reports include a profile of the material risks that may threaten the achievement of their objectives and the effectiveness of key controls, material control issues, operational risk events and a review of scenarios.

394  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F


Barclays’ approach to managing risks

Management of operational risk

The Group Head of Operational Risk as Principal Risk Officer, is responsible for establishing, owning and maintaining an appropriate Group-wide Operational Risk Framework and for overseeing the portfolio of operational risk across the Group.

Operational risk management acts in a second line of defence capacity, and is responsible for implementation of the framework and monitoring operational risk events and risk exposures Key indicators (KIs) allow the Group to monitor its operational risk profile and material control issues.alert management when risk levels exceed acceptable ranges or risk appetite levels and drive timely decision making and actions. Through attendance at Business Unit Governance, Risk and Controlsbusiness GRC meetings, itoperational risk management provides specific risk input into the issues highlighted and the overall risk profile of the business. Operational risk issues escalated from these meetings are considered by the Principal Risk Officer through the second line of defence review meetings, which also consider material control issues and their effective remediation.meetings. Depending on their nature, the outputs of these meetings are presented to the BRC or the BAC.

Specific reports are prepared by businesses, Key Risk Officers and Group Operational Risk on a regular basis for BRC and BAC.

Operational risk framework

The Operational Risk Strategy and Framework comprises a number of elements which allow the Group to manage and measure its operational risk profile and to calculate the amount of operational risk capital that the Group needs to hold to absorb potential losses. The minimum, mandatory requirements for each of these elements are set out in the group operational risk frameworkGroup Operational Risk Framework and supporting policies and standards. This framework is implemented across the Group:Group with all businesses required to implement and operate an Operational Risk Framework that meets, as a minimum, the requirements detailed in the operational risk policies.

§vertically, through the organisational structure with all businesses required to implement and operate an operational risk framework that meets, as a minimum, the requirements detailed in these operational risk policies

§horizontally, with the Group Key Risk officers required to monitor information relevant to their Key Risk from each operational risk framework element.

The Operational Risk frameworkFramework is a key component of the ERMF and has been designed to improve risk management and meet a number of external governance requirements including the Basel Capital Accord, the Capital Requirements Directive and Turnbull guidance as an evaluation framework for the purposes of Section 404(a) of the Sarbanes-Oxley Act. It also supports the Sarbanes-Oxley requirements.

The operational risk strategy and frameworkOperational Risk Framework includes the following elements:

Risk and Control Self-Assessmentscontrol self-assessments

The Group identifies and assesses all material risks within each business and evaluates the key controls in place to mitigate those risks. Managers

in the businesses use self-assessment techniques to identify risks, evaluate the effectiveness of key controls in place and assess whether the risks are being effectively managed within business risk appetite.managed. The businesses are then able to make decisions on what action, if any, is required to reduce the level of risk to the Group. These risk assessments are monitored on a regular basis to ensure that each business continually understands the risks it faces.

Risk events

An operational risk event is any circumstance where, through the lack or failure of a control, the Group has actually, or could have, made a loss. The definition includes situations in which the Group could have made a loss, but in fact made a gain, as well as incidents resulting in reputational damage or regulatory impact only.

A standard threshold is used across the Group for reporting risk events and part of the analysis includes the identification of improvements to processes or controls, to reduce the recurrence and/or magnitude of risk events. For significant events, both financial and non-financial, this analysis includes the completion of a formal lessons learnt.

The Group also maintains a record of external risk events which are publicly available and is a member of the Operational RiskDataRiskdata eXchange (ORX), a not-for-profit association of international banks formed to share anonymous loss data information. This external loss information is used to support and inform risk identification, assessment and measurement.

Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  395


Operational risk appetite

The Group’s approach to determining its operational risk appetite combines both quantitative measures and qualitative judgement, in order to best reflect the nature of non-financial risks.

The monitoring and tracking of operational risk measures is supplemented with qualitative review and discussion at senior management executive committees on the actions being taken to improve controls and reduce risk to an acceptable level.

Operational risk appetite is aligned to the Group’s Risk Appetite Framework. The BRC considers, and recommends to the Board for approval, the Group’s risk appetite statement for operational risk based on performance in the current year and the projections for financial volatility the following year.

Key Risk appetite statements are agreed with the Principal Risk Officer, utilising the same approach, and are contained within the respective Key Risk Frameworks.

Key indicators

Key indicators (KIs) are metrics which allow the Group to monitor its operational risk profile. KIs include measurable thresholds that reflect the risk appetite of the business and are monitored to alert management when risk levels exceed acceptable ranges or risk appetite levels and drive timely decision making and actions.

Key Risk scenarios

Key riskRisk scenarios are a summary of the extreme potential risk exposure for each Key Riskrisk in each business and function, and include an assessment of the potential frequency of risk events, the average size of losses and three extreme scenarios. The Key Riskrisk scenario assessments are a key input to the Advanced Measurement Approach calculation of regulatory and economic capital requirements (see following section on operational risk measurement). The assessment considers analysis of internal and external loss experience, Key Riskkey risk indicators, risk and control self-assessments and other risk information. The businesses and functions analyse potential extreme scenarios, considering the:

 

§ circumstances and contributing factors that could lead to an extreme event

 

§ potential financial and non-financial impacts (for example reputational damage)

 

§ controls that seek to limit the likelihood of such an event occurring, and the mitigating actions that would be taken if the event were to occur (for example crisis management procedures, business continuity or disaster recovery plans).

Management may then conclude whether the potential risk is acceptable (within appetite) or whether changes in risk management control or business strategy are required.

The key risk scenarios are regularly re-assessed, taking into account trends in risk factors such as mis-selling, conduct and financial crime risks.

394  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2016 Annual Report on Form 20-F


Barclays’ approach to managing risks

Management of operational risk

Reporting

The ongoing monitoring and reporting of operational risk is a key component of the Operational Risk Framework. Reports are used by the operational risk function and by business management to understand, monitor, manage and control operational risks and losses.

The operational risk profile is reviewed by senior management at the Businesses GRC meetings as well as Operational Risk Review Forum as well asand BRC, BAC and the Board.

Operational risk measurement

The Group assesses its operational risk capital requirements using an Advanced Measurement Approach. The approach involves estimating the potential range of losses that could be incurred in a year from operational risk events, using statistical distributions. Regulatory capital requirements are set to cover 99.9% of the estimated losses. The Group also assesses its economic capital requirements to cover 99.98% of the estimated losses that exceed the typical losses (diversified across all risk classes).

The potential frequency and severity of losses is estimated for each Key Risk (within the Operational Risk and Conduct risk categories) across the Group’s businesses and functions. The potential range of individual loss severities is represented by a statistical distribution, estimated from the average loss size and three extreme scenarios (from Risk Assessments), as well as loss data from the Operational Riskdata eXchange (ORX).

The capital calculation also takes into account the possibility of dependences between operational risk losses occurring in a year (between businesses and functions and between risks).

In certain joint ventures and associates, the Group uses the Basic Indicator Approach to determine the capital requirements: some Africa Retail Banking, including Barclays Bank Mozambique and National Bank of Commerce (Tanzania); the business activities acquired from Lehman Brothers; and the portfolios of assets purchased from Woolworths Financial Services in South Africa, Standard Life Bank, ING Direct, MBNA Corporate Cards, Upromise, RCI, Egg Cards, EdCon, Sallie Mae, Ameriprice, Hawaiian Airlines, JetBlue and US Airways.

Insurance

As part of its risk management approach, the Group also uses insurance to mitigate the impact of some operational risks.

396  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F


LOGO

Management of funding risk

LOGO

    

This section provides an analysis of the management of liquidity and capital risk.

§Liquidity risk, with a focus on how it is managed to ensure that resources are adequate at all times including under stress, is discussed on pages 398 to 401

§Capital risk, including how the risk of insufficient capital and leverage ratios is managed, is discussed on pages 402 to 405.
 


Barclays’ approach to managing risks

Management of funding risk

Funding Risk

The ability of the Group to achieve its business plans may be adversely impacted if it does not effectively manage its capital (including leverage) and liquidity ratios. Group Treasury manage Funding Risk on a day-to-day basis with the Treasury Committee acting as the key governance forum.

LOGO

Capital and Liquidity Risks are managed by two separate areas; these are covered below.

Liquidity Risk

Liquidity risk is the risk that a firm, although solvent, either does not have sufficient financial resources available to enable it to meet its obligations as they fall due, or can secure such resources only at excessive cost. This also results in a firm’s inability to meet regulatory liquidity requirements. This risk is inherent in all banking operations and can be affected by a range of Group-specific and market-wide events.

The Board has formally recognised a series of risks that are continuously present in Barclays and materially impact the achievement of Barclays objectives one of which is Funding risk. Liquidity risk is recognised as a Key risk within Funding risk. The efficient management of liquidity is essential to the Group in retaining the confidence of the financial markets and ensuring that the business is sustainable. Liquidity risk is managed through the Liquidity Risk Management Framework (the Liquidity Framework) which is designed to meet the following objectives:

§To maintain liquidity resources that are sufficient in amount and quality and a funding profile that is appropriate to meet the liquidity risk appetite as expressed by the Board;

§To maintain market confidence in the Group’s name;

This is achieved via a combination of policy formation, review and governance, analysis, stress testing, limit setting and monitoring. Together, these meet internal and regulatory requirements.

Governance and organisation

Barclays Treasury operates a centralised governance control process that covers all of the Group’s liquidity risk management activities. As per Enterprise Risk Management Framework the Key Risk Officer (KRO) approves the Key Risk Control Framework for Liquidity Risk (‘Key Risk Control Framework’) under which the treasury function operates. The KRO is in the Risk function. The Key Risk Control Framework describes liquidity policies and controls that the Group has implemented to manage liquidity risk within the Liquidity Risk Appetite (LRA) and is subject to annual review.

398  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F


The Board sets the Liquidity Risk Appetite (LRA), over Group stress tests, being the level of risk the Group chooses to take in pursuit of its business objectives and in meeting its regulatory obligations. The approved LRA is implemented and managed by the Treasury Committee through the Key Risk Control Framework.

Liquidity risk framework

Barclays has a comprehensive Key Risk Control Framework for managing the Group’s liquidity risk. The Key Risk Control Framework is designed to deliver the appropriate term and structure of funding consistent with the Liquidity Risk Appetite set by the Board.

The Key Risk Control Framework incorporates a range of ongoing business management tools to monitor, limit and stress test the Group’s balance sheet and contingent liabilities and a Contingency Funding Plan. Limit setting and transfer pricing are tools that are designed to control the level of liquidity risk taken and drive the appropriate mix of funds, which together reduce the likelihood that a liquidity stress event could lead to an inability to meet the Group’s obligations as they fall due. The stress tests assess potential contractual and contingent stress outflows under a range of scenarios, which are then used to determine the size of the liquidity pool that is immediately available to meet anticipated outflows, if a stress occurred.

The Group maintains a Contingency Funding Plan which details how liquidity stress events of varying severity would be managed. Since the precise nature of any stress event cannot be known in advance, the plans are designed to be flexible to the nature and severity of the stress event and provide a menu of options that could be used as appropriate at the time. Barclays also maintains Recovery Plans which consider actions to generate additional liquidity in order to facilitate recovery in a severe stress.

LOGO

Ongoing business management

Risk Appetite and Planning

Under the Key Risk Control Framework, Barclays has established a Liquidity Risk Appetite (LRA), over Group stress tests, being the level of liquidity risk the Group chooses to take in pursuit of its business objectives and in meeting its regulatory obligations.

The key expression of the liquidity risk is through stress test. It is measured with reference to the liquidity pool compared to anticipated stressed net contractual and contingent outflows for each of five stress scenarios.

The LRA for internal stress tests is approved by the Board. The LRA is reviewed on a continuous basis and is subject to formal review at least annually as part of the Individual Liquidity Adequacy Assessment Process (ILAAP).

Statement of Liquidity Risk Appetite: The Board has approved that the Group will maintain an amount of available liquidity resources to meet modelled and prescribed regulatory liquidity stress outflows over a period of time (minimum buffer duration):

       30 days in a Barclays specific stress

      90 days in a market wide stress

       30 days in a combined stress

      LCR 30 days minimum ratio 100% (Pillar 1 basis)

 

  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 20152016 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  399395


Barclays’ approach to managing risks

Management of fundingmodel risk

        

 

 

The stress outflows are used to determine the size of the Group Liquidity Pool, which represents those resources immediately available to meet outflows in a stress. In addition to the liquidity pool, the Key Risk Control Framework provides for other management actions, including generating liquidity from other liquid assets on the Group’s balance sheet in order to meet additional stress outflows, or to preserve or restore the Liquidity Pool in the event of a liquidity stress.

Liquidity Limits

Barclays manages limits on a variety of on and off-balance sheet exposures, a sample of which is shown in the table below. These limits serve to control the overall extent and composition of liquidity risk taken by managing exposure to the cash outflows.

 

LOGO

Internal Pricing and Incentives

Barclays actively manages the composition and duration of the balance sheet and of contingent liabilities through the transfer of liquidity premium directly to business units. Liquidity premiums are charged and credited to businesses according to the behavioural life of assets and liabilities and contingent liquidity risk under stress. These transfer pricing mechanisms are designed to ensure that liquidity risk is reflected in product pricing and performance measurement, thereby ensuring that the Liquidity Framework is integrated into business level decision making to drive the appropriate mix of sources and uses of funds.

Early Warning Indicators

Barclays monitors a range of market indicators for early signs of liquidity risk either in the market or specific to Barclays, a sample of which are shown in the table below. These are designed to immediately identify the emergence of increased liquidity risk to maximise the time available to execute appropriate mitigating actions. Early Warning Indicators are used as part of the assessment of whether to invoke the Group’s Contingency Funding Plan, which provides a framework for how the liquidity stress would be managed.

LOGO

The sources of model risks, and how those risks are managed, are detailed in this section.

§  The types of risks that are classified as model risks are described on page 397.

§  Governance, management and measurement techniques are covered on page 397.

LOGO

 

400396  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 20152016 Annual Report on Form 20-F  


Barclays’ approach to managing risks

Management of model risk

        

 

 

Model risk

Model risk is the potential for adverse consequences arising from decisions based on incorrect or misused model outputs.

Overview

Barclays uses models to support a broad range of activities, including informing business decisions and strategies, measuring and limiting risk, valuing exposures, conducting stress testing, assessing capital adequacy, managing client assets, and meeting reporting requirements.

Because models are imperfect and incomplete representations of reality, they may be subject to errors affecting the accuracy of their output.

Model errors can result in inappropriate business decisions being made, financial loss, regulatory risk, reputational risk and/or inadequate capital reporting.

Models may also be misused, for instance applied to products that they were not intended for, or not adjusted, where fundamental changes to their environment would justify re-evaluating their core assumptions.

Errors and misuse are the primary sources of model risk.

Robust model risk management is crucial to ensuring that model risk is assessed and managed within a defined risk appetite. Strong model risk culture, appropriate technology environment, and adequate focus on understanding and resolving model limitations are crucial components.

Organisation and structure

Barclays allocates substantial resources to identify and record models and their usage, document and monitor the performance of models, validate models and ensure that model limitations are adequately addressed.

Barclays has a dedicated Model Risk Management (MRM) function that consists of two main units: the Independent Validation Unit (IVU), responsible for model validation and approval, and Model Governance and Controls (MGC), covering model risk governance, controls and reporting, including ownership of model risk policy.

The model risk policy prescribes group-wide, end to end requirements for the identification, measurement and management of model risk, covering model documentation, development, implementation, monitoring, annual review, independent validation and approval, change and reporting processes. The Policy is supported by global Standards covering model inventory, documentation, validation, complexity and materiality, testing and monitoring, overlays, as well as vendor models and CCAR benchmarking.

Barclays is continuously enhancing model risk management. MRM reports to the Group Chief Risk Officer and operates a global framework. Implementation of best practice standards is a central objective of the Group. Large new model development programmes are currently in motion to implement the model requirements of UK structural reform, CCAR, FRTB and IFRS9.

 

Contingency Funding PlanOrganisation and structure

Barclays maintains a Contingency Funding Plan (CFP), which is designed to provide a framework where a liquidity stress could be effectively managed. The CFP is proportionate to the nature, scale

LOGO

Roles and complexity of the business and is tested to ensure that it is operationally robust. The CFP details the circumstances in which the plan could be invoked, including as a result of adverse movements in Liquidity Early Warning Indicators. As part of the plan the Barclays Treasurer has established a Liquidity Management Committee (LMC.) On invocation of the CFP by the Executive Committee (ExCo), the LMC would meet to identify the likely impact of the event on the Group and determine the response, which would be proportionate to the nature and severity of the stress.

The CFP provides a communication plan and includes management actions to respond to liquidity stresses of varying severity. This could include monetising the liquidity pool, slowing the extension of credit, increasing the tenor of funding and securitising or selling assets.

Recovery and Resolution Planning (RRP)responsibilities

In accordance with the requirements of the PRA Rulebook: Recovery and Resolution, Barclays has developed a Group Recovery Plan. The key objectives are to provide the Group with a range of options to ensure the viability of the firm in a stress, set consistent early warning indicators to identify when the Recovery Plan should be invoked and to enable the Group to be adequately prepared to respond to stressed conditions.model risk management activities include:

§ensuring that models are correctly identified across all relevant areas of the firm, and recorded in the Group Models Database (GMD), the Group-wide model inventory. The heads of the relevant areas (typically, the Business Chief Risk Officers, Business Chief Executive Officers, the Treasurer, the Chief Financial Officer etc) annually attest to the completeness and accuracy of the model inventory. MGC undertakes regular conformance reviews on the model inventory. These activities are detailed in the Model Inventory, Workflow and Taxonomy Standard

§ensuring that every model has a model owner who is accountable for the model. The model owner must sign off models prior to submission to IVU for validation. The model owner works with the relevant technical teams (model developers, implementation, monitoring, data services, regulatory) to ensure that the model presented to IVU is and remains fit for purpose, in accordance with the Model Documentation Standard, and the Model Testing, Monitoring and Annual Review Standard
§ensuring that every model is subject to validation and approval by IVU, prior to being implemented and on a continual basis, in accordance with the Model Validation and Approval Standard. The level of review and challenge applied by IVU is tailored to the materiality and complexity of each model. Validation includes a review of the model assumptions, conceptual soundness, data, design, performance testing, compliance with external requirements if applicable, as well as any limitations, proposed remediation and overlays with supporting rationale. Material model changes are subject to prioritised validation and approval

§specific Standards cover model risk management activities relating to CCAR benchmarking and challenger modelling, model overlays, vendor models, and model complexity and materiality.

 

  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 20152016 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  401397


Barclays’ approach to managing risks

Management of fundingconduct risk

        

 

 

Capital Risk

Overview

      Capital risk

      Capital risk is the risk that the Group has insufficient capital resources to:

§Meet minimum regulatory requirements in the UK and in other jurisdictions such as the United States and South Africa where regulated activities are undertaken. The Group’s authority to operate as a bank is dependent upon the maintenance of adequate capital resources at each level where prudential capital requirements are applied;
§Support its credit rating. A weaker credit rating would increase the Group’s cost of funds; and
§Support its growth and strategic options.

Organisation and structure

Capital Management is integral to the Group’s approach to financial stability and sustainability management and is therefore embedded in the way businesses and legal entities operate. Capital demand and supply is actively managed on a centralised basis, at a business level, at a local entity level and on a regional basis taking into account the regulatory, economic and commercial environment in which Barclays operates.

Roles and responsibilities

The Group’s Capital Management strategy is driven by the strategic aims of the Group and the Risk Appetite set by the Board. The Group’s objectives are achieved through well embedded capital management practices:

Capital planning

Capital forecasts are managed on a top-down and bottom-up basis through both short term (one year) and medium term (three to five years) financial planning cycles. Barclays’ capital plans are developed with the objective of maintaining capital that is adequate in quantity and quality to support the Group’s risk profile, regulatory and business needs. As a result, the Group holds a diversified capital base that provides strong loss absorbing capacity and optimised returns.

Barclays’ capital plans are continually monitored against relevant internal target capital ratios to ensure they remain appropriate, and that risks to the plan, including possible future regulatory changes, are considered.

Local management ensures compliance with an entity’s minimum regulatory capital requirements by reporting to local Asset and Liability Committees with oversight by the Group’s Treasury Committee, as required.

402  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F


LOGO

Regulatory requirements

Capital planning is set in consideration of minimum regulatory requirements in all jurisdictions in which the Group operates. Regulatory capital requirements are determined by the PRA.

Under these regulatory frameworks, capital requirements are set in consideration of the level of risk that the firm is exposed to which is measured through both risk weighted assets (RWAs) and leverage.

 Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  403


Barclays’ approach to managing risks

Management of funding risk

 

Capital held to support the level of risk identified is set in consideration of minimum ratio requirements and internal buffers.

Target ratios

The Group’s capital plan is set in consideration of our risk profile, business and regulatory requirements as determined by the PRA. The Group expects to meet the minimum requirements for leverage and capital ratios including the CET1, AT1, T2 and MREL/TLAC minima, both during the transition period and upon full implementation and also hold an internal buffer sized according to the firm’s assessment of various risks including uncontrollable market factors.

Regulatory reform

Further changes to capital requirements may occur due to continued regulatory focus on the risk weighting of assets, including Basel Committee on Banking Supervision (BCBS) proposals on fundamental review of the trading book, revisions to standardised rules for credit risk, counterparty credit risk, CVA volatility risk and operational risk as well as the application of RWA floor based on standardised approach to limit the use internal models in certain areas.

Additional capital requirements may also arise from other regulatory reforms, including UK, EU and US proposals on bank structural reform and current European Banking Authority (EBA) proposals for ‘Minimum Requirement for own funds and Eligible Liabilities (MREL) under the EU Bank Recovery and Resolution Directive (BRRD). Included within these reforms are the Bank of England proposals on MREL requirements for UK banks which were published in December 2015. We expect these requirements to be finalised and communicated to banks during the course of 2016.

However, many of the proposals are still subject to finalisation and implementation and may have a different effect when in final form, the impact of these proposals is still being assessed. For further information see Funding Risk in Material Risks Review and Regulatory Developments in the section on Supervision and Regulation.

Governance

The Group and legal entity capital plans are underpinned by the Capital Risk Framework, which includes capital management policies and practices approved by the Principal Risk Officer. These plans are implemented consistently in order to deliver on the Group objectives.

The Board approves the Group capital plan, stress tests and recovery plan. The Treasury Committee manages compliance with the Group’s capital management objectives. The Committee reviews actual and forecast capital demand and resources on a bi-monthly basis. The Board Risk Committee annually reviews risk appetite and then analyses the impacts of stress scenarios on the Group capital forecast in order to understand and manage the Group’s projected capital adequacy.

Monitoring and managing capital

Capital is monitored and managed on an ongoing basis through;

Stress testing:Internal group-wide stress testing is undertaken to quantify and understand the impact of sensitivities on the capital plan and capital ratios arising from stressed macroeconomic conditions. Actual recent economic, market and regulatory scenarios are used to inform the assumptions of stress tests and assess the effectiveness of mitigation strategies.

The Group also undertakes stress tests prescribed by the BoE and EBA. Legal entities undertake stress tests prescribed by their local regulators. These stress tests inform decisions on the size and quality of capital buffer required and the results are incorporated into the Group capital plan to ensure adequacy of capital under normal and severe, but plausible stressed conditions.

Risk mitigation: As part of the stress testing process actions are identified that should be taken to mitigate the risks that could arise in the event of material adverse changes in the current economic and business outlook.

As an additional layer of protection, the Barclays Recovery Plan defines the actions and implementation strategies available for the Group to increase or preserve capital resources in the event that stress events are more extreme than anticipated.

This section provides an analysis of the management of conduct risk.

 

404  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F


Barclays’ approach to managing risks

Management of funding risk

Senior Management awareness and transparency:Barclays Treasury works closely with Risk, businesses and legal entities to support a proactive approach to identifying sources of capital ratio volatility which are considered in the Group’s capital plan. Capital risks against firm-specific and macroeconomic early warning indicators are monitored and reported to Treasury Committee, associated with clear escalation channels to senior management.

Capital management information is readily available at all times to support the Executive Management’s strategic and day-to-day business decision making, as may be required.

The Group submits its Board approved ICAAP document to the PRA on an annual basis, which forms the basis of the Individual Capital Guidance (ICG) set by the PRA.

Capital allocation: Capital allocations are approved by the Group Executive committee and monitored by the Treasury Committee, taking into consideration the risk appetite, growth and strategic aims of the Group. Regulated legal entities are, at a minimum, allocated adequate capital to meet their current and forecast regulatory and business requirements.

Transferability of capital: The Group’s policy is for surplus capital held in Group entities to be repatriated to BB PLC in the form of dividends and/or capital repatriation, subject to local regulatory requirements, exchange controls and tax implications. This approach provides optimal flexibility on the re-deployment of capital across legal entities. The Group is not aware of any material impediments to the prompt transfer of capital resources, in line with the above policy, or repayment of intra-group liabilities when due.

Foreign exchange risk:The Group has capital resources and risk weighted assets denominated in foreign currencies. Changes in foreign exchange rates result in changes in the Sterling equivalent value of foreign currency denominated capital resources and RWAs. As a result, the Group’s regulatory capital ratios are sensitive to foreign currency movements.

The Group’s capital ratio management strategy is to minimise the volatility of the capital ratios caused by foreign exchange rate movements. To achieve this, the Group aims to maintain the ratio of foreign currency CET 1, Tier 1 and Total capital resources to foreign currency RWAs the same as the Group’s consolidated capital ratios.

The Group’s investments in foreign currency subsidiaries and branches, to the extent that they are not hedged for foreign exchange movements, translate into GBP upon consolidation creating CET1 capital resources sensitive to foreign currency movements. Changes in the GBP value of the investments due to foreign currency movements are captured in the currency translation reserve, resulting in a movement in CET1 capital.

To create foreign currency Tier 1 and Total Capital resources additional to the CET1 capital resources, the Group issues, where possible, debt capital in non-Sterling currencies. This is primarily achieved by the issuance of debt capital from Barclays PLC or Barclays Bank PLC in USD and EUR, but can also be achieved by subsidiaries issuing capital in local currencies, such as Barclays Africa Group Limited in South Africa.

Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  405


LOGO

Management of
conduct risk
(including
reputation risk)
LOGO  

This section provides an analysis of the management of conduct risk (including reputation risk).

§Conduct risk is the risk that detriment is caused to our customers, clients, counterparties or the Group and its employees because of inappropriate judgement in the execution of our business activities (see pages 407 and 408)page 399).

LOGO

 

§
398  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2016 Annual Report on Form 20-F  Reputation risk is the risk of damage to the Barclays brand arising from association, action or inaction which is perceived by stakeholders to be inappropriate or unethical (see pages 408 and 409)


Barclays’ approach to managing risks

Management of conduct risk

    

 

 

Conduct risk

The risk of detriment to customers, clients, market integrity, competition or Barclays from the inappropriate supply of financial services, including instances of wilful or negligent misconduct.

Conduct risk

The risk that detriment is caused to customers, clients, counterparties or the Group because of inappropriate judgement in the execution of our business activities

Overview

The Group defines, manages and mitigates conduct risk with the goalgoals of providing goodpositive customer and client outcomes and protecting market integrity. This includes taking reasonable steps to ensure our culture and strategy are appropriately aligned to these goals; our products and services are reasonably designed and delivered to meet the needs of our customers and clients as well as promoting the fair and orderly operation of the markets in which we do business.

As part of the Enterprise Risk Management Framework (ERMF) refresh (page 344), Reputation risk has been designated as a Principal Risk and Financial Crime has been designated as a Risk Category under Conduct Risk.

Organisation and structure

The Group has defined seven Key Risks that are the main sub-risk types to Conduct Risk:

§Our products or services do not meet customers’ needs or have the potential to cause customer detriment

§The way we design and undertake transaction services has the potential to cause customer detriment

§The way we design or undertake customer servicing has the potential to cause customer detriment

§Our strategy or business model has the potential to cause customer detriment

§Our governance arrangements or culture has the potential to cause customer detriment

§We fail to obtain and maintain relevant regulatory authorisations, permissions and licence requirements

§Damage to Barclays reputation is caused during the conduct of our business

Organisation and structure

The Conduct and Reputation Risk Committee (CRRC) derives its authority from(GRC) is the Barclays Group Head of Compliance. The purpose of the CRRC is to reviewmost senior Executive body responsible for reviewing and monitormonitoring the effectiveness of Barclays’ management of Conduct and Reputation Risk. In addition, specific committees monitor conduct risk and the control environment at the business level.risk.

LOGO

 

LOGO

Roles and responsibilities

The Conduct Risk Principal Risk Framework (PRF)PRF comprises a number of elements that allow the Group to manage and measure its conduct risk profile.

The PRF is implemented vertically across the Group:

§Vertically,Group through an organisational structure that requires all businesses to implement and operate their own conduct risk framework that meets the requirements detailed within the ERMF

§Horizontally, with Group Key Risk Officers (KROs) required to monitor information relevant to their Key Risk from each element of the Conduct Risk PRF

Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  407


Barclays’ approach to managing risks

Management ofimplement and operate their own conduct risk

frameworks that meet the requirements within the ERMF.

The primary responsibility for managing conduct risk and compliance with control requirements sits with the business where the risk arises. The Conduct Risk Accountable Executive for each business is responsible for ensuring the implementation of, and adherence to the PRF.

The Conduct Principal Risk OfficerLead is responsible for owning and maintaining an appropriate Group-wide Conduct Risk PRF and for overseeing Group-wide Conduct Riskconduct risk management.

Businesses are required to report their conduct risks on both a quarterly and an event-driven basis. The quarterly reports detail conduct risks inherent within the business strategy and include forward looking horizon scanning analysis as well as backward looking evidence-based indicators from both internal and external sources. For details please refer

Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2016 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  399


Barclays’ approach to the Risk Review, Conduct and Reputation Risk Performancemanaging risks

Management of reputation risk

This section provides an analysis of this report (page 175).

Business level reports are reviewed within Compliance. Compliance then creates Group level reports for consideration by CRRC and RepCo. The Group periodically assesses itsthe management of conduct risk through independent audits and addresses issues identified.reputation risk.

Event-driven reporting consists

§Reputation risk is the risk of damage to the Barclays brand arising from association, action or inaction which is perceived by stakeholders to be inappropriate or unethical (see page 401).

LOGO

400  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2016 Annual Report on Form 20-F


Barclays’ approach to managing risks

Management of any risks or issues that breach certain thresholds for severity and probability. Any such risks or issues must be promptly escalated to the business and the appropriate KRO.

In 2015 Reputation Risk was re-designated as a Key Risk under the Conduct Risk Principal Risk. The Reputation Key Risk Framework outlines the processes and actions required of the business. These include regular and forward looking reviews of current and emerging reputation risks so that a topical and comprehensive reputation risk profile

Reputation risk

The risk that an action, transaction, investment or event will reduce trust in the firm’s integrity and competence by clients, counterparties, investors, regulators, employees or the public.

Overview

A reduction of the organisation can be maintained.

Reputation risk is the risk of damage to the Group’s brand arising from any association, action or inaction which is perceived by stakeholders (e.g. customers, clients, colleagues, shareholders, regulators, opinion formers) to be inappropriate or unethical. Damage to the Group’s brandtrust in Barclays’ integrity and consequent erosion of our reputation reducescompetence may reduce the attractiveness of the GroupBarclays to stakeholders and maycould lead to negative publicity, loss of revenue, regulatory or legislative action, loss of existing and potential client business, reduced workforce morale and difficulties in recruiting talent. Ultimately it may destroy shareholder value.

With effect from 2017, Reputation Risk has been re-designated as a Principal Risk within the Enterprise Risk Management Framework.

Organisation and structure

The Group Risk Committee (GRC) is the most senior Executive body responsible for reviewing and monitoring the effectiveness of Barclays’ management of Reputation Risk.

LOGO

Roles and responsibilities

The Chief Compliance Officer is accountable for ensuring that a Reputation Principal Risk Framework and policies are developed and that they are subject to limits, monitored, reported on and escalated, as required.

Reputation risk may arise init is by nature pervasive and can be difficult to quantify, requiring more subjective judgment than many different ways,other risks. The Reputation Principal Risk Framework sets out what is required to ensure reputation risk is managed effectively and consistently across the bank.

The primary responsibility for example:

§failure to act in good faith and in accordance with the Group’s values and code of conduct;

§failure (real or perceived) to comply with the law or regulation, or association (real or implied) with illegal activity;

§failures in corporate governance, management or technical systems;

§failure to comply with internal standards and policies;

§association with controversial sectors or clients;

§association with controversial transactions, projects, countries or governments;

§association with controversial business decisions, including but not restricted to, decisions relating to: products (in particular new products), delivery channels, promotions/advertising, acquisitions, branch representation, sourcing/supply chain relationships, staff locations, treatment of financial transactions;

§association with poor employment practices.

In each case,identifying and managing reputation risk and adherence to the control requirements sits with the business and support functions where the risk may arise from failurearises.

Each business is required to comply with either stated norms,operate within established reputation risk appetite and to submit quarterly reports to the Group Reputation Management team, highlighting their most significant current and potential reputation risks and issues and how they are being managed. These reports are a key internal source of information for the quarterly reputation risk reports which are likely to change over time, so an assessment of reputation risk cannot be static. If not managed effectively, stakeholder expectations of responsible corporate behavior will not be met.

408  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F


Barclays’ approach to managing risks

Management of conduct risk

Reputation Risk may also arise and cause damage to the Group’s image, through association with clients, their transactions or their projects if these are perceived by external stakeholders to be environmentally damaging. Whereprepared for the Group is financing infrastructure projects which have potentially adverse environmental impacts,Risk Committee and the Group’s Client Assessment and Aggregation policy and supporting Environmental and Social Risk Standard will apply. This policy identifies the circumstances in which the Group requires due diligence to include assessment of specialist environmental reports. These reports will include consideration of a wide range of the project’s potential impacts including on air, water and land quality, on biodiversity issues, on locally affected communities, including any material upstream and downstream impacts, and on working conditions together with employee and community health and safety. Adherence to the Environmental and Social Risk Standard is the mechanism by which Barclays fulfils the requirements of the Equator Principles. These Principles are an internationally recognised framework for environmental due diligence in project finance. Barclays was one of the four banks which collaborated in developing the Principles, ahead of their launch in 2003 with 10 adopting banks. There are now more than 80 banks worldwide which have adopted the Equator Principles (see www.equator-principles.com).Board Reputation Committee.

 

  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 20152016 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  409401


Barclays’ approach to managing risks

Management of legal risk

This section provides an analysis of the management of legal risk.

§    Legal risk is the risk of loss or imposition of penalties, damages or fines from the failure of the firm to meet its legal obligations including regulatory or contractual requirements (see page 403)

LOGO

402  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2016 Annual Report on Form 20-F


Barclays’ approach to managing risks

Management of legal risk

Legal risk

The risk of loss or imposition of penalties, damages or fines from the failure of the firm to meet its legal obligations including regulatory or contractual requirements.

Overview

With effect from 2017, legal risk, which was previously a Key Risk under operational risk, has been re-designated as a Principal Risk within the Enterprise Risk Management Framework.

The Legal Risk Framework prescribes group-wide requirements for the identification, measurement and management of legal risk, covering assessment, risk appetite, key indicators and governance. The Group General Counsel (GCC) is the Legal Principal Risk Officer and owns the Legal Risk Framework and the associated legal policies.

Legal risk is defined by the five respective Legal Policies:

§Contractual arrangements – failure to have enforceable contracts in place or for contracts to be enforceable as intended

§Litigation management – failure to adequately manage litigation involving Barclays as either claimant or defendant

§Intellectual property (IP) – failure to protect the Group’s IP assets or Barclays infringing IP rights of third parties

§Competition/antitrust law – failure to follow competition/antitrust law or failure to manage relationships with competition and antitrust authorities

§Use of law firms – failure to control instruction of an external law firm.

Group-wide and Business/Function specific Standards may be put in place to support the implementation of the legal policies. The standards are aligned to one of the policies and are implemented by Businesses/ Functions.

Organisation and structure

The Group Risk Committee (GRC) is the most senior executive body responsible for reviewing and monitoring the effectiveness of Barclays’ management of legal risk. Escalation paths from this forum exist to the Board of Barclays Plc.

LOGO

Roles and responsibilities

The Legal Risk Framework sets out what is required to ensure legal risk is managed effectively and consistently across the bank.

The primary responsibility for managing legal risk and adherence to the control requirements sits with the business where the risk arises.

On behalf of the businesses, the aligned General Counsel or Legal Senior Management, will undertake legal risk appetite assessments and provide advice and guidance on legal risk management. The legal risk assessment includes both quantitative and qualitative criteria including:

§Knowledge of legal risk material control issues or weaknesses

§Emerging risks resulting from upcoming changes in the control environment, systems, or internal organisational structures

§Potential implications on Barclays of forthcoming changes in the external legal and regulatory environment and/or prevailing decisions from courts and enforcing authorities as they relate to defined legal risks.

§The Legal Principal Risk Officer is responsible for owning and maintaining an appropriate Legal Risk Framework and for overseeing Group-wide legal risk management.

Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2016 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  403


Additional information

Additional financial disclosure (unaudited)

 

 

 

All disclosures in this section (pages 410 to 432) are unaudited unless otherwise stated.

Deposits and short-term borrowings

Deposits

Deposits include deposits from banks and customers account. The following table displays these balances on an average balance sheet basis.customer accounts.

 

 

Average for the year ended

  

 

 

 

2015 

 

  

  

 

 

 

2014 

 

  

  

 

 

 

2013 

 

  

31 Decembera

   

 

£m

 

  

 

   

 

£m

 

  

 

   

 

£m

 

  

 

Average for the year ended

31 Decembera

   

2016

£m

 

 

   

2015

£m

 

 

   

2014

£m

 

 

Deposits from banks

            

UK

   7,402     6,002      8,551     5,552    7,402    6,002 

Europe

   40,389     41,101      52,505     38,180    40,389    41,101 

Americas

   7,439     6,191      6,131     6,633    7,439    6,191 

Asia

   6,744     6,524      6,950     6,611    6,744    6,524 

Africa

   3,710     3,735      4,568     2,705    3,710    3,735 

Total deposits from banks

   65,684     63,553      78,705     59,681    65,684    63,553 

Customer Accounts

            

UK

   283,482     274,468      262,685     301,730    283,482    274,468 

Europe

   44,474     55,121      62,073     41,718    44,474    55,121 

Americas

   70,924     65,433      58,815     76,909    70,924    65,433 

Asia

   10,279     13,444      13,825     7,914    10,279    13,444 

Africa

   39,159     43,101      47,712     12,258    39,159    43,101 

Customer Accounts

   

 

448,318

 

  

 

   

 

451,567 

 

  

 

   

 

445,110

 

  

 

   440,529    448,318    451,567 

Deposits from banks in offices in the United Kingdom received from non-residents amounted to £31,976m (2014: £42,172m)£36,976m (2015: £31,976m). The balances below are on a spot basis as at 31 December 2015,2016, rather than the average basis per the tables included above.

 

 

Year ended 31 December

   2015      2014      2013        
2016
£m
 
 
     
2015
£m
 
 
     
2014
£m
 
 
   £m     £m     £m  

Customer Accounts

   

 

418,242

 

  

 

   

 

427,704 

 

  

 

   

 

431,999

 

  

 

     423,178      418,242      427,704 

In offices in the United Kingdom:

                  

Current and Demand Accounts

                  

- interest free

   73,987     68,647      61,343       85,296      73,987      68,647 

Current and Demand Accounts

                  

- interest bearing

   33,467     34,047      29,451       37,200      33,467      34,047 

Savings accounts

   119,838     114,828      107,865       123,833      119,838      114,828 

Other time deposits- retail

   13,903     12,100      15,113       14,526      13,903      12,100 

Other time deposits- wholesale

   70,399     72,150      60,457       84,805      70,399      72,150 

Total repayable in offices

   311,594     301,772      274,229  

in the United Kingdom

         

Total repayable in offices in the United Kingdom

     345,660      311,594      301,772 

In offices outside

the United Kingdom:

                  

Current and Demand Accounts

                  

- interest free

   12,777      17,236      15,497       9,722      12,777      17,236 

Current and Demand Accounts

                  

- interest bearing

   26,891      23,127      28,558       5,986      26,891      23,127 

Savings accounts

   15,729      16,335      15,620       9,511      15,729      16,335 

Other time deposits

   51,251      69,234      98,095       52,299      51,251      69,234 

Total repayable in offices

outside the United Kingdom

   106,648      125,932      157,770       77,518      106,648      125,932 

Customer accounts deposits in offices in the United Kingdom received from non-residents amounted to £47,129m (2014: £48,654m)£51,161m (2015: £41,924mb).

Note

aCalculated based on month-end balances. The average balance differs to the average balance sheets as the latter excludes non-interest bearing settlement balances.
bAmounts for 2015 have been revised by £5,205m to better reflect amounts due from non-residents.

 

404  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2016 Annual Report on Form 20-F

Short-term borrowings


Additional information

Short-term borrowings include deposits from banks, commercial paper, negotiable certificates of deposit and repurchase agreements.

Deposits from banks

Deposits from banks are taken from a wide range of counterparties and generally have maturities of less than one year.Additional financial disclosure (unaudited)

 

    
   2015      2014      2013   
    

 

£m

 

  

 

   

 

£m

 

  

 

   

 

£m

 

  

 

Year-end balance

   47,080      58,390      55,615  

Average balancea, b

   65,684      63,553      78,705  

Maximum balancea

   84,270      72,810      95,808  

Average interest rate during year

   0.3%     0.3%     0.3%  

Year-end interest rate

 

   

 

0.2%

 

  

 

   

 

0.4%

 

  

 

   

 

0.4%

 

  

 

Short-term borrowings

 

Short-term borrowings include deposits from banks, commercial paper, negotiable certificates of deposit and repurchase agreements.

 

Deposits from banks

 

Deposits from banks are taken from a wide range of counterparties and generally have maturities of less than one year.

 

 

 

 

 

      

2016

£m

 

 

     

2015

£m

 

 

     

2014

£m

 

 

Year-end balance

     48,214      47,080      58,390 

Average balancea, b

     59,681      65,684      63,553 

Maximum balancea

     66,404      84,270      72,810 

Average interest rate during year

     0.4%      0.3%      0.3% 

Year-end interest rate

     0.4%      0.2%      0.4% 

Notes

aCalculated based on month-end balances.
bThe average balance differs to the average balance sheet as the latter excludes non-interest bearing settlement balances.

Commercial paper

Commercial paper is issued by the Group, mainly in the United States, generally in denominations of not less than $100,000, with maturities of up to 270 days.

 

 
   2015      2014      2013   
   

 

£m

 

  

 

   

 

£m

 

  

 

   

 

£m

 

  

 

     
2016
£m
 
 
     

2015

£m

 

 

     

2014

£m

 

 

Year-end balance

   6,689      7,125      11,269       8,132      6,689      7,125 

Average balancea

   9,192      11,797      15,169       7,711      9,192      11,797 

Maximum balancea

   13,407      16,891      18,320       8,471      13,407      16,891 

Average interest rate during year

   0.3%     0.3%     0.2%       0.8%      0.3%      0.3% 

Year-end interest rate

   

 

0.3%

 

  

 

   

 

0.2%

 

  

 

   

 

0.2%

 

  

 

     1.0%      0.3%      0.2% 

Note

aCalculated based on month-end balances.

Negotiable certificates of deposit

Negotiable certificates of deposits are issued mainly in the United Kingdom and United States, generally in denominations of not less than $100,000.

 

  

 

 

 

2015 

 

  

  

 

 

 

2014 

 

  

  

 

 

 

2013 

 

  

   £m     £m     £m  
     
2016
£m
 
 
     
2015
£m
 
 
     
2014
£m
 
 

Year-end balance

   14,312      23,928      20,729        20,373      14,312      23,928 

Average balancea

   22,298      23,947      28,644        15,540      22,298      23,947 

Maximum balancea

   29,216      29,100      36,158        20,373      29,216      29,100 

Average interest rate during year

   1.0%     0.9%     1.0%       0.4%      1.0%      0.9% 

Year-end interest rate

   

 

1.0%

 

  

 

   0.9%     0.7%       0.5%      1.0%      0.9% 

Note

aCalculated based on month-end balances.

Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2016 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  405


Additional information

Additional financial disclosure (unaudited)

Repurchase Agreements

Repurchase agreements are entered into with both customers and banks and generally have maturities of not more than three months.

 

  

 

 

 

2015 

 

  

  

 

 

 

2014 

 

  

  

 

 

 

2013 

 

  

    

 

 

 

2016

 

 

    

 

 

 

2015

 

 

    

 

 

 

2014

 

 

   £m     £m     £m       

 

£m

 

 

 

     

 

£m

 

 

 

     

 

£m

 

 

 

Year-end balanced

   25,035     124,479     196,748       19,760      25,035      124,479 

Average balancea, b, c, d

   114,933     191,181     246,562       24,966      114,933      191,181 

Maximum balancea, d

   167,343     218,523     280,203       28,057      167,343      218,523 

Average interest rate during year

   0.3%     0.2%     0.3%       0.8%      0.3%      0.2% 

Year-end interest rate

   0.3%     0.2%     0.1%       

 

0.7%

 

 

 

     

 

0.3%

 

 

 

     

 

0.2%

 

 

 

Notes

aCalculated based on month-end balances.
bThe average balance differs to the average balance sheet as the latter excludes non-interest bearing settlement balances.
cThe average balance differs to the average balance sheet as the latter is stated on a gross basis prior to any offsetting of liabilities against assets.
dDuring 2015, reverse repurchase and repurchase agreements including other similar lending and borrowing in certain businesses have been designated at fair value following a change in accounting treatment to better align to the way the business manages the portfolio’s risk and performance.

Commitments and contractual obligations

Commercial commitments include guarantees, contingent liabilities and standby facilities.

Commercial commitments

 

   

 

Amount of commitment expiration per period

 

 

 

   

 

 

Less than

 

one year

 

 

 

 

 

  

 

 

 

 

 

 

Between

 

one to three

 

years

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

  

 

 

 

 

 

 

Between

 

three to five

 

years

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

   

 

 

After five

 

years

 

 

 

 

 

  

 

 

 

 

 

 

Total

 

amounts

 

committed

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

    £m    £m    £m    £m    £m 

As at 31 December 2016

          

Guarantees and letters of credit pledged as collateral security

   14,498    403    25    377    15,304 

Performance guarantees, acceptances and endorsements

   4,400    140    64    32    4,636 

Documentary credits and other short-term trade related transactions

   1,005    -    -    -    1,005 

Forward starting reverse repurchase agreements

   24    -    -    -    24 

Standby facilities, credit lines and other commitments

   302,335    102    150    70    302,657 

As at 31 December 2015

          

Guarantees and letters of credit pledged as collateral security

   15,227    499    47    292    16,065 

Performance guarantees, acceptances and endorsements

   4,350    83    114    10    4,557 

Documentary credits and other short-term trade related transactions

   718    119    8    -    845 

Forward starting reverse repurchase agreements

   93    -    -    -    93 

Standby facilities, credit lines and other commitments

   278,923    1,426    906    114    281,369 

Note

Commercial commitments for 2016 exclude BAGL balances now held for sale but are included for 2015

 

410406  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 20152016 Annual Report on Form 20-F  


Additional information

Additional financial disclosure (unaudited)

 

 

 

Commitments and contractual obligations

Commercial commitments include guarantees, contingent liabilities and standby facilities.

Commercial commitments

 

   

 

Amount of commitment expiration per period

 

   

 

Less than

one year

  

  

  

 

 

 

 

 

Between

one to three

years

 

  

  

  

  

 

 

 

 

 

Between

three to five

years

 

  

  

  

   

 

After five

years

  

  

  

 

Total

amounts

committed

    £m     £m     £m     £m    £m

As at 31 December 2015

          

Guarantees and letters of credit pledged as collateral security

   15,227     499     47     292    16,065 

Performance guarantees, acceptances and endorsements

   4,350     83     114     10    4,557 

Documentary credits and other short-term trade related transactions

   718     119     8      845 

Forward starting reverse repurchase agreements

   93          93 

Standby facilities, credit lines and other commitments

   278,923     1,426     906     114    281,369 

As at 31 December 2014

          

Guarantees and letters of credit pledged as collateral security

   14,275     205     23     44    14,547 

Performance guarantees, acceptances and endorsements

   5,414     260     61     1,042    6,777 

Documentary credits and other short-term trade related transactions

   976     115        1,091 

Forward starting reverse repurchase agreements

   13,856          13,856 

Standby facilities, credit lines and other commitments

   269,796     4,515     1,847     157    276,315 

Contractual obligations include debt securities, operating lease and purchase obligations.

 

 Contractual obligations   Payments due by period
   

 

 

 

Less than

 

one year

 

  

 

  

 

   

 

 

 

 

 

Between

 

one to

 

three years

 

  

 

  

 

  

 

   

 

 

 

 

 

Between

 

three to

 

five years

 

  

 

  

 

  

 

   

 

 

 

After five

 

years

 

  

 

  

 

  

Total

 

    £m     £m     £m     £m    £m
As at 31 December 2015          
Long-term debta   30,525      23,101      17,773      31,978     103,377 
Operating lease obligations   377      603      535      1,874     3,389 
Purchase obligations   485      434      262      276     1,457 
Total   31,387      24,138      18,570      34,128     108,223 
As at 31 December 2014          
Long-term debta   46,724      20,820      15,690      32,735     115,969 
Operating lease obligations   444      687      566      2,036     3,733 
Purchase obligations   511      371      153      208     1,243 
Total   47,679      21,878      16,409      34,979     120,945 

Net cash flows from derivatives used to hedge long-term debt amount to £5.5bn (2014: £6.3bn).

Further information on the contractual maturity of the Group’s assets and liabilities is given in the Funding section of the on page 103.

Contractual obligations

   Payments due by period 
   

 

Less than

 

one year

 

 

 

   

 

 

Between

 

one to

 

three years

 

 

 

 

 

   

 

 

Between

 

three to

 

five years

 

 

 

 

 

   

 

After five

 

years

 

 

   Total 
    £m    £m    £m    £m    £m 

As at 31 December 2016

          

Long-term debta

   46,528    20,005    19,829    31,044    117,406 

Operating lease obligations

   364    547    450    1,520    2,881 

Purchase obligations

   342    206    122    127    797 

Total

   47,234    20,758    20,401    32,691    121,084 

As at 31 December 2015

          

Long-term debta

   30,525    23,101    17,773    31,978    103,377 

Operating lease obligations

   377    603    535    1,874    3,389 

Purchase obligations

   485    434    262    276    1,457 

Total

   31,387    24,138    18,570    34,128    108,223 

Notes

 

aLong-term debt has been prepared to reflect cash flows on an undiscounted basis, which includes interest payments.

Net cash flows from derivatives used to hedge long-term debt amount to £3.5bn (2015: £5.5bn).

Further information on the contractual maturity of the Group’s assets and liabilities is given in the Funding section of the Risk Review.

 

  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 20152016 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  411407


Additional information

Additional financial disclosure (unaudited)

 

 

 

Securities

 

Securities at fair value

    

 

 

 

 

2015

 

 

  

 

    

 

 

 

 

2014

 

 

  

 

    

 

 

 

 

2013

 

 

  

 

     

 

2016

 

 

 

     

 

2015

 

 

 

     

 

2014

 

 

 

As at 31 December

     

 

£m

 

  

 

     

 

£m

 

  

 

     

 

£m

 

  

 

     

 

£m

 

 

 

     

 

£m

 

 

 

     

 

£m

 

 

 

Investment securities – available for sale

            

Investment securities – Financial Investments

            

United Kingdom government

     

 

17,947

 

  

 

     

 

18,849

 

  

 

     

 

20,580

 

  

 

     

 

15,351

 

 

 

     

 

17,947

 

 

 

     

 

18,849

 

 

 

Other government

     

 

49,427

 

  

 

     

 

41,700

 

  

 

     

 

37,258

 

  

 

     

 

28,750

 

 

 

     

 

49,427

 

 

 

     

 

41,700

 

 

 

Other public bodies and US Agencies

     

 

5,462

 

  

 

     

 

6,034

 

  

 

     

 

8,890

 

  

 

     

 

1,635

 

 

 

     

 

5,462

 

 

 

     

 

6,034

 

 

 

Mortgage and asset backed securities

     

 

1,082

 

  

 

     

 

1,230

 

  

 

     

 

1,918

 

  

 

     

 

804

 

 

 

     

 

1,082

 

 

 

     

 

1,230

 

 

 

Bank and building society certificates of deposit

     

 

 

  

 

     

 

38

 

  

 

     

 

42

 

  

 

     

 

 

 

 

     

 

 

 

 

     

 

38

 

 

 

Corporate and other issuers

     

 

15,360

 

  

 

     

 

17,688

 

  

 

     

 

22,610

 

  

 

     

 

16,339

 

 

 

     

 

15,360

 

 

 

     

 

17,688

 

 

 

Debt securities

     

 

89,278

 

  

 

     

 

85,539

 

  

 

     

 

91,298

 

  

 

     

 

62,879

 

 

 

     

 

89,278

 

 

 

     

 

85,539

 

 

 

Equity securities

     

 

989

 

  

 

     

 

527

 

  

 

     

 

458

 

  

 

     

 

438

 

 

 

     

 

989

 

 

 

     

 

527

 

 

 

Investment securities – available for sale

     

 

90,267

 

  

 

     

 

86,066

 

  

 

     

 

91,756

 

  

 

Investment securities – Financial Investments

     

 

63,317

 

 

 

     

 

90,267

 

 

 

     

 

86,066

 

 

 

Other securities – held for trading

                        

United Kingdom government

     

 

4,020

 

  

 

     

 

7,450

 

  

 

     

 

10,361

 

  

 

     

 

4,793

 

 

 

     

 

4,020

 

 

 

     

 

7,450

 

 

 

Other government

     

 

19,503

 

  

 

     

 

29,720

 

  

 

     

 

40,690

 

  

 

     

 

15,134

 

 

 

     

 

19,503

 

 

 

     

 

29,720

 

 

 

Other public bodies and US Agencies

     

 

8,683

 

  

 

     

 

9,879

 

  

 

     

 

5,820

 

  

 

     

 

5,396

 

 

 

     

 

8,683

 

 

 

     

 

9,879

 

 

 

Mortgage and asset backed securities

     

 

2,927

 

  

 

     

 

7,165

 

  

 

     

 

10,962

 

  

 

     

 

1,568

 

 

 

     

 

2,927

 

 

 

     

 

7,165

 

 

 

Bank and building society certificates of deposit

     

 

559

 

  

 

     

 

240

 

  

 

     

 

182

 

  

 

     

 

23

 

 

 

     

 

559

 

 

 

     

 

240

 

 

 

Corporate and other issuers

     

 

9,884

 

  

 

     

 

11,544

 

  

 

     

 

16,545

 

  

 

     

 

11,875

 

 

 

     

 

9,884

 

 

 

     

 

11,544

 

 

 

Debt securities

     

 

45,576

 

  

 

     

 

65,998

 

  

 

     

 

84,560

 

  

 

     

 

38,789

 

 

 

     

 

45,576

 

 

 

     

 

65,998

 

 

 

Equity securities

     

 

29,055

 

  

 

     

 

44,576

 

  

 

     

 

42,659

 

  

 

     

 

38,329

 

 

 

     

 

29,055

 

 

 

     

 

44,576

 

 

 

Other securities – held for trading

     

 

74,631

 

  

 

     

 

110,574

 

  

 

     

 

127,219

 

  

 

     

 

77,118

 

 

 

     

 

74,631

 

 

 

     

 

110,574

 

 

 

Investment debt securities include government securities held as part of the Group’s treasury management portfolio for asset and liability, liquidity and regulatory purposes and are for use on a continuing basis in the activities of the Group. In addition, the Group holds as investments listed and unlisted corporate securities.

 

Maturities and yield of available for sale debt securities

  

As at 31 December 2015     

 

Maturing with one

year

  

  

     

 

Maturing one but

within five years

  

  

     

 

Maturing after five

but within ten years

  

  

     

 

Maturing after ten

years

  

  

     Total  

Maturities and yield of Financial Investments

Maturities and yield of Financial Investments

 

As at 31 December 2016

     

 

Maturing with one

 

year

 

 

 

     

 

Maturing one but

 

within five years

 

 

 

     

 

 

Maturing after five

 

but within ten

 

years

 

 

 

 

 

     

 

Maturing after ten

 

years

 

 

 

     Total 
     Amount       Yield       Amount       Yield       Amount       Yield       Amount       Yield       Amount       Yield       Amount      Yield      Amount      Yield      Amount      Yield      Amount      Yield      Amount      Yield 
     

 

£m

 

  

 

     

 

%

 

  

 

     

 

£m

 

  

 

     

 

%

 

  

 

     

 

£m

 

  

 

     

 

%

 

  

 

     

 

£m

 

  

 

     

 

%

 

  

 

     

 

£m

 

  

 

     

 

%

 

  

 

     

 

£m

 

 

 

     

 

%

 

 

 

     

 

£m

 

 

 

     

 

%

 

 

 

     

 

£m

 

 

 

     

 

%

 

 

 

     

 

£m

 

 

 

     

 

%

 

 

 

     

 

£m

 

 

 

     

 

%

 

 

 

Government

     

 

8,811

 

  

 

     

 

1.5%

 

  

 

     

 

29,419

 

  

 

     

 

1.4%

 

  

 

     

 

17,583

 

  

 

     

 

1.5%

 

  

 

     

 

11,561

 

  

 

     

 

2.6%

 

  

 

     

 

67,374

 

  

 

     

 

1.6%

 

  

 

     

 

3,014 

 

 

 

     

 

1.4%

 

 

 

     

 

22,635 

 

 

 

     

 

1.4%

 

 

 

     

 

10,153 

 

 

 

     

 

1.3%

 

 

 

     

 

8,300 

 

 

 

     

 

2.8%

 

 

 

     

 

44,102 

 

 

 

     

 

1.6%

 

 

 

Other public bodies and US Agencies

     

 

242

 

  

 

     

 

0.5%

 

  

 

     

 

3,368

 

  

 

     

 

1.3%

 

  

 

     

 

1,691

 

  

 

     

 

2.2%

 

  

 

     

 

161

 

  

 

     

 

1.5%

 

  

 

     

 

5,462

 

  

 

     

 

1.5%

 

  

 

     

 

157 

 

 

 

     

 

1.3%

 

 

 

     

 

1,469 

 

 

 

     

 

0.9%

 

 

 

     

 

 

 

 

     

 

0.0%

 

 

 

     

 

-

 

 

 

     

 

0.0%

 

 

 

     

 

1,626 

 

 

 

     

 

0.9%

 

 

 

Other issuers

     

 

2,322

 

  

 

     

 

1.9%

 

  

 

     

 

11,130

 

  

 

     

 

1.7%

 

  

 

     

 

2,130

 

  

 

     

 

2.1%

 

  

 

     

 

860

 

  

 

     

 

1.6%

 

  

 

     

 

16,442

 

  

 

     

 

1.8%

 

  

 

     

 

4,249 

 

 

 

     

 

1.0%

 

 

 

     

 

10,024 

 

 

 

     

 

2.0%

 

 

 

     

 

2,585 

 

 

 

     

 

2.0%

 

 

 

     

 

293

 

 

 

     

 

2.0%

 

 

 

     

 

17,151 

 

 

 

     

 

1.7%

 

 

 

Total book value

     

 

11,375

 

  

 

     

 

1.5%

 

  

 

     

 

43,917

 

  

 

     

 

1.5%

 

  

 

     

 

21,404

 

  

 

     

 

1.6%

 

  

 

     

 

12,582

 

  

 

     

 

2.5%

 

  

 

     

 

89,278

 

  

 

     

 

1.6%

 

  

 

     

 

7,420 

 

 

 

     

 

1.2%

 

 

 

     

 

34,128 

 

 

 

     

 

1.5%

 

 

 

     

 

12,738 

 

 

 

     

 

1.5%

 

 

 

     

 

8,593 

 

 

 

     

 

2.7%

 

 

 

     

 

62,879 

 

 

 

     

 

1.6%

 

 

 

The yield for each range of maturities is calculated by dividing the annualised interest income prevailing at 31 December 20152016 by the fair value of securities held at that date.

 

412408  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 20152016 Annual Report on Form 20-F  


Additional information

Additional financial disclosure (unaudited)

 

 

 

Average balance sheet

Average balances are based upon monthly averages.

 

Assets

    2015           

 

 

 

 

2016

 

 

 

 

               

 

 

 

Average

 

balance

 

  

 

  

 

     

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Interest

 

presented

 

within net

 

interest

 

income

 

  

 

  

 

  

 

  

 

  

 

     

 

 

 

 

 

Interest

 

presented

 

elsewhere

 

  

 

  

 

  

 

     

 

Total interest

 

  

 

     

 

Rate

 

  

 

          

 

 

Average

 

balance

 

 

 

 

 

     

 

 

 

 

 

Interest

 

presented

 

within net

 

interest

 

income

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

     

 

 

Interest

 

presented

 

elsewhere

 

 

 

 

 

     

 

Total interest

 

 

 

     

 

Rate

 

 

 

               £m       £m       £m       £m       %           

 

 

 

 

£m

 

 

 

 

    

 

 

 

 

£m

 

 

 

 

    

 

 

 

 

£m

 

 

 

 

    

 

 

 

 

£m

 

 

 

 

    

 

 

 

 

%

 

 

 

 

Loans and advances to banks

    UK         51,597       513              514        1.0       UK      55,902      588      3      591      1.1  

Loans and advances to banks

    Non-UK          48,521       186              191        0.4       Non-UK      65,549      197      -      197      0.3  

Loans and advances to banksa

    Total          100,118       699              705        0.7       Total      121,451      785      3      788      0.6  

Loans and advances to customers

    UK         283,191       8,699       84        8,783        3.1       UK      290,751      9,665      136      9,801      3.4  

Loans and advances to customers

    Non-UK          120,252       6,033       212        6,245        5.2       Non-UK      92,044      3,293      89      3,382      3.7  

Loans and advances to customersa

    Total          403,443       14,732       296        15,028        3.7       Total      382,795      12,958      225      13,183      3.4  

Available for sale investments

    UK         84,291       1,039              1,039        1.2  

Financial investments

     UK      71,697      520      43      563      0.8  

Available for sale investments

    Non-UK          9,436       348              348        3.7  

Financial investments

     Non-UK      7,661      220      -      220      2.9  

Available for sale investments

    Total          93,727       1,387              1,387        1.5  

Financial investments

     Total      79,358      740      43      783      1.0  

Reverse repurchase agreements

    UK         86,322       18       187        205        0.2       UK      5,949      (7)      71      64      1.1  

Reverse repurchase agreements

    Non-UK          96,187       45       193        238        0.2       Non-UK      14,752      34      287      321      2.2  

Reverse repurchase agreementsb

    Total          182,509       63       380        443        0.2       Total      20,701      27      358      385      1.9  

Other interest incomec

               -       320              320        -                 31      -      31       

Total interest earning assets not at fair value through P&L

               779,797       17,201       682        17,883        2.3            604,305      14,541      629      15,170      2.5  

Less interest expense

               -       (4,643     (625)       (5,268)       -                 (4,004)      (214)      (4,218)       

Net interest

               779,797       12,558       57        12,615        1.6            604,305      10,537      415      10,952      1.8  

Interest earning assets at fair value through P&L

    UK         48,360                       UK      65,449                 

Interest earning assets at fair value through P&L

    Non-UK          81,031                       Non-UK      78,470                 

Interest earning assets at fair value through P&L

    Total         129,391                       Total      143,919                 

Total interest earning assets

               909,188                            748,224                 

Impairments

             (5,273                         (4,669)                 

Non-interest earning assets

               526,448                            550,299                 

Total

             1,430,363                           1,293,854                 

Percentage of total average interest earning assets in offices outside the UK

               39%                            35%                 

Notes

 

aLoans and advances to banks and customers include all doubtful lendings, includingnon-accrual lendings. Interest receivable on such lendings has been included to the extent to which either cash payments have been received or interest has been accrued in accordance with the income recognition policy of the Group.

 

bAverage balances for reverse repurchase agreements and cash collateral on securities borrowed have been stated on a gross basis prior to any offsetting to provide a more meaningful comparison to the related interest income and expense. The Group balance sheet offsets financial assets and liabilities where there is a legally enforceable right to set off the recognised amounts and there is an intention to settle on a net basis or to realise an asset and liability simultaneously. During 2015, reverseReverse repurchase and repurchase agreements including other similar lending and borrowing in certain businesses have been designated at fair value following a change in accounting treatment to better align to the way the business manages the portfolio’s risk and performance.

 

cOther interest income principally includes interest income relating to hedging activity.

 

  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 20152016 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  413409


Additional information

Additional financial disclosure (unaudited)

 

 

 

Assets

    2014           

 

 

 

 

2015

 

 

 

 

          

 

 

 

Average

 

balance

 

  

 

  

 

     

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Interest

 

presented

 

within net

 

interest

 

income

 

  

 

  

 

  

 

  

 

  

 

     

 

 

 

 

 

Interest

 

presented

 

elsewhere

 

  

 

  

 

  

 

     

 

Total interest

 

  

 

     

 

Rate

 

  

 

          

 

 

Average

 

balance

 

 

 

 

 

     

 

 

 

 

 

Interest

 

presented

 

within net

 

interest

 

income

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

     

 

 

 

Interest

 

presented

 

elsewhere

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

     

 

Total interest

 

 

 

     

 

Rate

 

 

 

          £m       £m       £m       £m       %           

 

 

 

 

£m

 

 

 

 

    

 

 

 

 

£m

 

 

 

 

    

 

 

 

 

£m

 

 

 

 

    

 

 

 

 

£m

 

 

 

 

     

 

%

 

 

 

Loans and advances to banks

    UK     48,162       377       -       377       0.8       UK      51,597      513      1      514      1.0  

Loans and advances to banks

    Non-UK     47,375       262       -       262       0.6       Non-UK      48,521      131      60      191      0.4  

Loans and advances to banksa

    Total     95,537       639       -       639       0.7       Total      100,118      644      61      705      0.7  

Loans and advances to customers

    UK     272,463       8,779       74       8,853       3.2       UK      283,191      9,686      84      9,770      3.4  

Loans and advances to customers

    Non-UK     137,122       5,898       184       6,082       4.4       Non-UK      120,252      2,825      3,420      6,245      5.2  

Loans and advances to customersa

    Total     409,585       14,677       258       14,935       3.6       Total      403,443      12,511      3,504      16,015      4.0  

Available for sale investments

    UK     74,868       1,323       -       1,323       1.8  

Financial investments

     UK      84,291      494      -      494      0.6  

Available for sale investments

    Non-UK     11,130       292       -       292       2.6  

Financial investments

     Non-UK      9,436      204      144      348      3.7  

Available for sale investments

    Total     85,998       1,615       -       1,615       1.9  

Financial investments

     Total      93,727      698      144      842      0.9  

Reverse repurchase agreements

    UK     155,170       31       589       620       0.4       UK      86,322      18      187      205      0.2  

Reverse repurchase agreements

    Non-UK     127,670       55       287       342       0.3       Non-UK      96,187      (239)      479      240      0.2  

Reverse repurchase agreementsb

    Total     282,840       86       876       962       0.3       Total      182,509      (221)      666      445      0.2  

Other interest incomec

          -       346       -       346       -            -      321      -      321       

Total interest earning assets not at fair value through P&L

          873,960       17,363       1,134       18,497       2.1            779,797      13,953      4,375      18,328      2.4  

Less interest expense

          -       (5,283     (980     (6,263     -            -      (3,345)      (2,371)      (5,716)       

Net interest

          873,960       12,080       154       12,234       1.4            779,797      10,608      2,004      12,612      1.6  

Interest earning assets at fair value through P&L

    UK     57,070                       UK      48,360                 

Interest earning assets at fair value through P&L

    Non-UK     56,477                       Non-UK      81,031                 

Interest earning assets at fair value through P&L

    Total     113,547                       Total      129,391                 

Total interest earning assets

          987,507                            909,188                 

Impairments

         (6,770                         (5,273)                 

Non-interest earning assets

          515,020                            526,448                 

Total

          1,495,757                            1,430,363                 

Percentage of total average interest earning assets in offices outside the UK

          38%                            39%                 

Notes

 

aLoans and advances to banks and customers include all doubtful lendings, includingnon-accrual lendings. Interest receivable on such lendings has been included to the extent to which either cash payments have been received or interest has been accrued in accordance with the income recognition policy of the Group.

bAverage balances for reverse repurchase agreements and cash collateral on securities borrowed have been stated on a gross basis prior to any offsetting to provide a more meaningful comparison to the related interest income and expense. The Group balance sheet offsets financial assets and liabilities where there is a legally enforceable right to set off the recognised amounts and there is an intention to settle on a net basis or to realise an asset and liability simultaneously.
cOther interest income principally includes interest income relating to hedging activity.

414  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F


Additional information

Additional financial disclosure (unaudited)

Assets

    2013  
           

 

 

 

Average

 

balance

 

  

 

  

 

     

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Interest

 

presented

 

within net

 

interest

 

income

 

  

 

  

 

  

 

  

 

  

 

     

 

 

 

 

 

Interest

 

presented

 

elsewhere

 

  

 

  

 

  

 

     

 

Total interest

 

  

 

     

 

Rate

 

  

 

           £m       £m       £m       £m       %  

Loans and advances to banks

    UK     51,185       383       35       418       0.8  

Loans and advances to banks

    Non-UK     61,204       304       1       305       0.5  

Loans and advances to banksa

    Total     112,389       687       36       723       0.6  

Loans and advances to customers

    UK     271,111       9,098       148       9,246       3.4  

Loans and advances to customers

    Non-UK     142,494       6,515       254       6,769       4.8  

Loans and advances to customersa

    Total     413,605       15,613       402       16,015       3.9  

Available for sale investments

    UK     73,212       1,346       -       1,346       1.8  

Available for sale investments

    Non-UK     14,802       458       -       458       3.1  

Available for sale investments

    Total     88,014       1,804       -       1,804       2.0  

Reverse repurchase agreements

    UK     193,303       8       715       723       0.4  

Reverse repurchase agreements

    Non-UK     132,488       33       342       375       0.3  

Reverse repurchase agreementsb

    Total     325,791       41       1,057       1,098       0.3  

Other interest incomec

          -       170       -       170       -  

Total interest earning assets not at fair value through P&L

          939,799       18,315       1,495       19,810       2.1  

Less interest expense

          -       (6,715     (1,194)      (7,909     -  

Net interest

          939,799       11,600       301       11,901       1.3  

Interest earning assets at fair value through P&L

    UK     65,534                  

Interest earning assets at fair value through P&L

    Non-UK     75,763                  

Interest earning assets at fair value through P&L

    Total     141,297                  

Total interest earning assets

          1,081,096                  

Impairments

         (8,009                

Non-interest earning assets

          575,219                  

Total

         1,648,306                  

Percentage of total average interest earning assets in offices outside the UK

          39%                  

Notes

aLoans and advances to banks and customers include all doubtful lendings, including non-accrual lendings. Interest receivable on such lendings has been included to the extent to which either cash payments have been received or interest has been accrued in accordance with the income recognition policy of the Group.

 

bAverage balances for reverse repurchase agreements and cash collateral on securities borrowed have been stated on a gross basis prior to any offsetting to provide a more meaningful comparison to the related interest income and expense. The Group balance sheet offsets financial assets and liabilities where there is a legally enforceable right to set off the recognised amounts and there is an intention to settle on a net basis or to realise an asset and liability simultaneously.

 

cOther interest income principally includes interest income relating to hedging activity.

 

d.Net Interest Income from discontinued operations is included within Interest presented elsewhere.

410  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2016 Annual Report on Form 20-F


Additional information

Additional financial disclosure (unaudited)

 

Assets

 

           

 

 

 

 

2014

 

 

 

 

             

 

 

Average

 

balance

 

 

 

 

 

    

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Interest

 

presented

 

within net

 

interest

 

income

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

     

 

 

 

Interest

 

presented

 

elsewhere

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

     

 

Total interest

 

 

 

     

 

Rate

 

 

 

            

 

 

 

 

£m

 

 

 

 

    

 

 

 

 

£m

 

 

 

 

    

 

 

 

 

£m

 

 

 

 

    

 

 

 

 

£m

 

 

 

 

    

 

 

 

 

%

 

 

 

 

Loans and advances to banks

     UK      48,162      380      -      380      0.8 

Loans and advances to banks

     Non-UK      47,375      185      77      262      0.6 

Loans and advances to banksa

     Total      95,537      565      77      642      0.7 

Loans and advances to customers

     UK      272,463      10,021      74      10,095      3.7 

Loans and advances to customers

     Non-UK      137,122      2,744      3,338      6,082      4.4 

Loans and advances to customersa

     Total      409,585      12,765      3,412      16,177      3.9 

Financial investments

     UK      74,868      686      -      686      0.9 

Financial investments

     Non-UK      11,130      117      175      292      2.6 

Financial investments

     Total      85,998      803      175      978      1.1 

Reverse repurchase agreements

     UK      155,170      31      589      620      0.4 

Reverse repurchase agreements

     Non-UK      127,670      (316)      658      342      0.3 

Reverse repurchase agreementsb

     Total      282,840      (285)      1,247      962      0.3 

Other interest incomec

            -      346      -      346      - 

Total interest earning assets not at fair value through P&L

            873,960      14,194      4,911      19,105      2.2 

Less interest expense

            -      (4,108)      (2,763)      (6,871)      - 

Net interest

            873,960      10,086      2,148      12,234      1.4 

Interest earning assets at fair value through P&L

     UK      57,070                 

Interest earning assets at fair value through P&L

     Non-UK      56,477                 

Interest earning assets at fair value through P&L

     Total      113,547                 

Total interest earning assets

            987,507                 

Impairments

         (6,770)                 

Non-interest earning assets

            515,020                 

Total

         1,495,757                 

Percentage of total average interest earning assets in offices outside the UK

            38%                 

Notes

aLoans and advances to banks and customers include all doubtful lendings, includingnon-accrual lendings. Interest receivable on such lendings has been included to the extent to which either cash payments have been received or interest has been accrued in accordance with the income recognition policy of the Group.

bAverage balances for reverse repurchase agreements and cash collateral on securities borrowed have been stated on a gross basis prior to any offsetting to provide a more meaningful comparison to the related interest income and expense. The Group balance sheet offsets financial assets and liabilities where there is a legally enforceable right to set off the recognised amounts and there is an intention to settle on a net basis or to realise an asset and liability simultaneously.

cOther interest income principally includes interest income relating to hedging activity.

d.Net Interest Income from discontinued operations is included within Interest presented elsewhere.

  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 20152016 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  415411


Additional information

Additional financial disclosure (unaudited)

 

 

 

Liabilities

    2015            

 

2016

 

 

 

               

 

Average

balance

  

  

     
 
 
 
 
Interest
presented
within net
interest
income
  
  
  
  
  
     
 
 
Interest
presented
elsewhere
  
  
  
     Total interest       Rate            

 

 

Average

 

balance

 

 

 

 

 

     

 

 

 

 

 

Interest

 

presented

 

within net

 

interest

 

income

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

     

 

 

 

Interest

 

presented

 

elsewhere

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

     

 

Total interest

 

 

 

     

 

Rate

 

 

 

               £m       £m       £m       £m       %           

 

 

 

 

£m

 

 

 

 

    

 

 

 

 

£m

 

 

 

 

    

 

 

 

 

£m

 

 

 

 

    

 

 

 

 

£m

 

 

 

 

    

 

 

 

 

%

 

 

 

 

Deposits by banks

    UK         46,577       69       5       74       0.2       UK      44,890      145      2      147      0.3 

Deposits by banks

    Non-UK          12,716       108       -       108       0.8       Non-UK      9,469      120      -      120      1.3 

Deposits by banks

    Total          59,293       177       5       182       0.3       Total      54,359      265      2      267      0.5 

Customer accounts

    UK         237,723       402       28       430       0.2       UK      251,738      400      (84)      316      0.1 

Customer accounts

    Non-UK          84,304       528       92       620       0.7       Non-UK      62,127      1,113      74      1,187      1.9 

Customer accounts

    Total          322,027       930       120       1,050       0.3       Total      313,865      1,513      (10)      1,503      0.5 

Debt securities in issue

    UK         45,625       1,130       58       1,188       2.6       UK      39,956      757      -      757      1.9 

Debt securities in issue

    Non-UK          35,507       592       44       636       1.8       Non-UK      25,712      232      -      232      0.9 

Debt securities in issue

    Total          81,132       1,722       102       1,824       2.2       Total      65,668      989      -      989      1.5 

Subordinated liabilities

    UK         20,015       1,564       -       1,564       7.8       UK      22,437      1,104      -      1,104      4.9 

Subordinated liabilities

    Non-UK          818       80       -       80       9.8       Non-UK      228      -      -      -      - 

Subordinated liabilities

    Total          20,833       1,644       -       1,644       7.9       Total      22,665      1,104      -      1,104      4.9 

Repurchase agreements

    UK         94,660       -       232       232       0.2       UK      13,736      116      110      226      1.6 

Repurchase agreements

    Non-UK          93,438       52       231       283       0.3       Non-UK      11,424      47      112      159      1.4 

Repurchase agreementsa

    Total          188,098       52       463       515       0.3       Total      25,160      163      222      385      1.5 

Other interest expenseb

               -       118       (65     53       -                 (30)      -      (30)      - 

Total interest bearing liabilities not at fair value through P&L

               671,383       4,643       625       5,268       0.8            481,717      4,004      214      4,218      0.9 

Interest bearing liabilities at fair value through P&L

    UK         51,164                       UK      78,036                 

Interest bearing liabilities at fair value through P&L

    Non-UK          63,779                       Non-UK      69,976                 

Interest bearing liabilities at fair value through P&L

    Total         114,943                       Total      148,012                 

Total interest bearing liabilities

               786,326                            629,729                 

Interest free customer deposits

    UK         71,763                       UK      78,788                 

Interest free customer deposits

    Non-UK          14,182                       Non-UK      10,074                 

Interest free customer deposits

    Total          85,945                       Total      88,862                 

Other non-interest bearing liabilities

             490,992                           510,767                 

Shareholders’ equity

               67,100                            64,496                 

Total

             1,430,363                           1,293,854                 

Percentage of total average interest bearing liabilities in offices outside the UK

               37%                            28%                 

Notes

 

aAverage balances for repurchase agreements and cash collateral on securities lent have been stated on a gross basis prior to any offsetting to provide a more meaningful comparison to the related interest income and expense. The Group balance sheet offsets financial assets and liabilities where there is a legally enforceable right to set off the recognised amounts and there is an intention to settle on a net basis or to realise an asset and liability simultaneously. During 2015, reverseReverse repurchase and repurchase agreements including other similar lending and borrowing in certain businesses have been designated at fair value following a change in accounting treatment to better align to the way the business manages the portfolio’s risk and performance.

 

bOther interest expense principally includes interest expense relating to hedging activity.

 

c.Net Interest Income from discontinued operations is included within Interest presented elsewhere.

416412  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 20152016 Annual Report on Form 20-F  


Additional information

Additional financial disclosure (unaudited)

 

 

 

Liabilities

      2014           

 

 

 

 

2015

 

 

 

 

      

 

          Average

balance

  

  

   
 
 
 
 
Interest
presented
        within net
interest
income
  
  
  
  
  
   
 
 
Interest
presented
        elsewhere
  
  
  
   Total interest             Rate            

 

 

Average

 

balance

 

 

 

 

 

    

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Interest

 

presented

 

within net

 

interest

 

income

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

     

 

 

 

Interest

 

presented

 

elsewhere

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

     

 

Total interest

 

 

     

 

Rate

 

 

 

      £m     £m     £m     £m     %           

 

 

 

 

£m

 

 

 

 

    

 

 

 

 

£m

 

 

 

 

    

 

 

 

 

£m

 

 

 

 

    

 

 

 

 

£m

 

 

 

 

    

 

 

 

 

%

 

 

 

 

Deposits by banks

  UK   41,931     89     -     89     0.2       UK      46,577      72      8      80      0.2 

Deposits by banks

  Non-UK   15,388     110     2     112     0.7       Non-UK      12,716      59      49      108      0.8 

Deposits by banks

  Total   57,319     199     2     201     0.4       Total      59,293      131      57      188      0.3 

Customer accounts

  UK   231,792     744     6     750     0.3       UK      237,723      2,185      28      2,213      0.9 

Customer accounts

  Non-UK   92,337     729     230     959     1.0       Non-UK      84,304      (781)      1,401      620      0.7 

Customer accounts

  Total   324,129     1,473     236     1,709     0.5       Total      322,027      1,404      1,429      2,833      0.9 

Debt securities in issue

  UK   51,218     1,315     82     1,397     2.7       UK      45,625      346      58      404      0.9 

Debt securities in issue

  Non-UK   38,515     607     54     661     1.7       Non-UK      35,507      205      431      636      1.8 

Debt securities in issue

  Total   89,733     1,922     136     2,058     2.3       Total      81,132      551      489      1,040      1.3 

Subordinated liabilities

  UK   19,575     1,541     -     1,541     7.9       UK      20,015      1,007      -      1,007      5.0 

Subordinated liabilities

  Non-UK   1,151     81     -     81     7.0       Non-UK      818      8      72      80      9.8 

Subordinated liabilities

  Total   20,726     1,622     -     1,622     7.8       Total      20,833      1,015      72      1,087      5.2 

Repurchase agreements

  UK   166,224     64     376     440     0.3       UK      94,660      -      232      232      0.2 

Repurchase agreements

  Non-UK   126,347     9     230     239     0.2       Non-UK      93,438      52      231      283      0.3 

Repurchase agreementsa

  Total   292,571     73     606     679     0.2       Total      188,098      52      463      515      0.3 

Other interest expenseb

      -     (6   -     (6   -            -      192      (139)      53      - 

Total interest bearing liabilities not at fair value through P&L

      784,478     5,283     980     6,263     0.8            671,383      3,345      2,371      5,716      0.9 

Interest bearing liabilities at fair value through P&L

  UK   37,722               UK      51,164                 

Interest bearing liabilities at fair value through P&L

  Non-UK   28,755               Non-UK      63,779                 

Interest bearing liabilities at fair value through P&L

  Total   66,477               Total      114,943                 

Total interest bearing liabilities

      850,955                    786,326                 

Interest free customer deposits

  UK   65,294               UK      71,763                 

Interest free customer deposits

  Non-UK   15,033               Non-UK      14,182                 

Interest free customer deposits

  Total   80,327               Total      85,945                 

Other non-interest bearing liabilities

     498,675                   490,992                 

Shareholders’ equity

      65,800                    67,100                 

Total

     1,495,757                   1,430,363                 

Percentage of total average interest bearing liabilities in offices outside the UK

      36%                    37%                 

Notes

aAverage balances for repurchase agreements and cash collateral on securities lent have been stated on a gross basis prior to any offsetting to provide a more meaningful comparison to the related interest income and expense. The Group balance sheet offsets financial assets and liabilities where there is a legally enforceable right to set off the recognised amounts and there is an intention to settle on a net basis or to realise an asset and liability simultaneously.

bOther interest expense principally includes interest expense relating to hedging activity.

 

c.Net Interest Income from discontinued operations is included within Interest presented elsewhere.

  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 20152016 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  417413


Additional information

Additional financial disclosure (unaudited)

 

 

 

Liabilities

      2013            

 

2014

 

 

 

          

 

 

Average

 

balance

 

 

 

 

 

     

 

 

 

 

 

Interest

 

presented

 

within net

 

interest

 

income

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

     

 

 

 

Interest

 

presented

 

elsewhere

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

     

 

Total interest

 

 

 

     

 

Rate

 

 

 

      

 

Average

balance

  

  

   
 
 
 

 

Interest
        presented
within net
interest

income

  
  
  
  

  

   
 
 
Interest
presented
        elsewhere
  
  
  
   Total interest             Rate           

 

 

 

 

£m

 

 

 

 

    

 

 

 

 

£m

 

 

 

 

    

 

 

 

 

£m

 

 

 

 

    

 

 

 

 

£m

 

 

 

 

    

 

 

 

 

%

 

 

 

 

      £m     £m     £m     £m     %  

Deposits by banks

  UK   52,518     78     52     130     0.2       UK      41,931      89      -      89      0.2 

Deposits by banks

  Non-UK   17,308     123     1     124     0.7       Non-UK      15,388      44      70      114      0.7 

Deposits by banks

  Total   69,826     201     53     254     0.4       Total      57,319      133      70      203      0.4 

Customer accounts

  UK   228,046     1,285     74     1,359     0.6       UK      231,792      2,761      6      2,767      1.2 

Customer accounts

  Non-UK   94,640     1,371     198     1,569     1.7       Non-UK      92,337      (557)      1,516      959      1.0 

Customer accounts

  Total   322,686     2,656     272     2,928     0.9       Total      324,129      2,204      1,522      3,726      1.1 

Debt securities in issue

  UK   62,019     1,523     39     1,562     2.5       UK      51,218      456      82      538      1.1 

Debt securities in issue

  Non-UK   42,114     653     47     700     1.7       Non-UK      38,515      236      425      661      1.7 

Debt securities in issue

  Total   104,133     2,176     86     2,262     2.2       Total      89,733      692      507      1,199      1.3 

Subordinated liabilities

  UK   21,764     1,462     -     1,462     6.7       UK      19,575      989      -      989      5.1 

Subordinated liabilities

  Non-UK   1,406     110     -     110     7.8       Non-UK      1,151      17      64      81      7.0 

Subordinated liabilities

  Total   23,170     1,572     -     1,572     6.8       Total      20,726      1,006      64      1,070      5.2 

Repurchase agreements

  UK   205,170     59     428     487     0.2       UK      166,224      64      376      440      0.3 

Repurchase agreements

  Non-UK   149,651     68     355     423     0.3       Non-UK      126,347      9      230      239      0.2 

Repurchase agreementsa

  Total   354,821     127     783     910     0.3       Total      292,571      73      606      679      0.2 

Other interest expenseb

      -     (17   -     (17   -                 -      (6)      (6)      - 

Total interest bearing liabilities not at fair value through P&L

      874,636     6,715     1,194     7,909     0.9            784,478      4,108      2,763      6,871      0.9 

Interest bearing liabilities at fair value through P&L

  UK   51,498               UK      37,722                 

Interest bearing liabilities at fair value through P&L

  Non-UK   30,333               Non-UK      28,755                 

Interest bearing liabilities at fair value through P&L

  Total   81,831               Total      66,477                 

Total interest bearing liabilities

      956,467                    850,955                 

Interest free customer deposits

  UK   58,438               UK      65,294                 

Interest free customer deposits

  Non-UK   13,784               Non-UK      15,033                 

Interest free customer deposits

  Total   72,222               Total      80,327                 

Other non-interest bearing liabilities

     558,116                    498,675                 

Shareholders’ equity

      61,501                    65,800                 

Total

             1,648,306                   1,495,757                 

Percentage of total average interest bearing liabilities in offices outside the UK

      35%                    36%                 

Notes

aAverage balances for repurchase agreements and cash collateral on securities lent have been stated on a gross basis prior to any offsetting to provide a more meaningful comparison to the related interest income and expense. The Group balance sheet offsets financial assets and liabilities where there is a legally enforceable right to set off the recognised amounts and there is an intention to settle on a net basis or to realise an asset and liability simultaneously.

bOther interest expense principally includes interest expense relating to hedging activity.

 

c.Net Interest Income from discontinued operations is included within Interest presented elsewhere.

418414  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 20152016 Annual Report on Form 20-F  


Additional information

Additional financial disclosure (unaudited)

 

 

 

Changes in total interest – volume and rate analysis

The following tables allocate changes in interest between changes in volume and changes in interest rates for the last two years. Volume and rate variances have been calculated on the movement in the average balances and the change in the interest rates on average interest earning assets and average interest bearing liabilities. Where variances have arisen from changes in both volumes and interest rates, these have been allocated proportionately between the two.

 

Interest income

         

 

2015/2014 Change due to

increase/(decrease) in:

  

  

   

 

2014/2013 Change due to

increase/(decrease) in:

     

 

 

 

 

 

2016/2015 Change due to

 

increase/(decrease) in:

 

 

 

 

 

 

  

 

 

 

 

 

2015/2014 Change due to  

 

increase/(decrease) in:  

 

         
 
Total
change
  
  
   Volume     Rate     Total change     Volume    Rate      

 

 

Total

 

change

 

 

 

 

 

   

 

Volume

 

 

 

   

 

Rate

 

 

 

   

 

 

Total

 

change

 

 

 

 

 

   

 

Volume

 

 

 

  

Rate  

 

         £m     £m     £m     £m     £m    £m     

 

 

 

 

£m

 

 

 

 

   

 

£m

 

 

 

   

 

£m

 

 

 

   

 

£m

 

 

 

   

 

£m

 

 

 

  

£m  

 

Loans and advances to banks

  UK     137      28      109      (41)     (24)    (17)    UK    77    45    32    134    28   106  

Loans and advances to banks

  Non-UK      (71)          (77)     (43)     (74)    31     Non-UK    6    57    (51)    (71)    7   (78)  

Loans and advances to banks

  Total      66      34      32      (84)     (98)    14     Total    83    102    (19)    63    35   28  

Loans and advances to customers

  UK     (70)     342      (412)     (393)     46     (439)    UK    31    258    (227)    (325)    387   (712)  

Loans and advances to customers

  Non-UK      163      (802)     965      (687)     (249)    (438)    Non-UK    (2,863)    (1,274)    (1,589)    163    (802)   965  

Loans and advances to customers

  Total      93      (460)     553      (1,080)     (203)    (877)    Total    (2,832)    (1,016)    (1,816)    (162)    (415)   253  

Available for sale investments

  UK     (284)     152      (436)     (23)     30     (53) 

Financial investments

   UK    69    (82)    151    (192)    78   (270)  

Available for sale investments

  Non-UK      56      (49)     105      (166)     (103)    (63) 

Financial investments

   Non-UK    (128)    (59)    (69)    56    (49)   105  

Available for sale investments

  Total      (228)     103      (331)     (189)     (73)    (116) 

Financial investments

   Total    (59)    (141)    82    (136)    29   (165)  

Reverse repurchase agreements

  UK     (415)     (216)     (199)     (103)     (150)    47     UK    (141)    (332)    191    (415)    (216)   (198)  

Reverse repurchase agreements

  Non-UK      (104)     (79)     (25)     (33)     (14)    (19)    Non-UK    81    (358)    439    (102)    (79)   (22)  

Reverse repurchase agreements

  Total      (519)     (295)     (224)     (136)     (164)    28     Total    (60)    (690)    630    (517)    (295)   (220)  

Other interest income

         (26)          (26)     176          176        (290)    -    (290)    (25)    -   (25)  

Total interest receivable

         (614)     (618)          (1,313)     (538)    (775)       (3,158)    (1,745)    (1,413)    (777)    (646)   (129)  
   
                                    
      

Interest expense

         

 

2015/2014 Change due to

increase/(decrease) in:

  

  

   

 

2014/2013 Change due

to increase/(decrease) in:

      

 

 

2016/2015 Change due to

 

increase/(decrease) in:

 

 

 

 

 

   

 

 

2015/2014 Change due to  

 

increase/(decrease) in:  

 

         
 
Total
change
  
  
       Volume     Rate         Total change         Volume    Rate      

 

 

Total

 

change

 

 

 

 

 

   

 

Volume

 

 

 

   

 

Rate

 

 

 

   

 

 

Total

 

change

 

 

 

 

 

   

 

Volume

 

 

 

  

Rate  

 

         £m     £m     £m     £m     £m    £m     

 

 

 

 

£m

 

 

 

 

  

 

 

 

 

£m

 

 

 

 

  

 

 

 

 

£m

 

 

 

 

  

 

 

 

 

£m

 

 

 

 

  

 

 

 

 

£m

 

 

 

 

  

 

£m  

 

Deposits by banks

  UK     
(15)
  
        (24)     (41)     (24)    (17)    UK    67    (1)    68    (9)    10   (19)  

Deposits by banks

  Non-UK      (4)     (21)     17      (12)     (14)    2     Non-UK    12    (31)    43    (6)    (21)   15  

Deposits by banks

  Total      (19)     (12)     (7)     (53)     (38)    (15)    Total    79    (32)    111    (15)    (11)   (4)  

Customer accounts

  UK             (320)     19              (339)     (609)     22     (631)    UK    (1,897)    124    (2,021)    (554)    69   (623)  

Customer accounts

  Non-UK      (339)     (78)     (261)     (610)     (37)    (573)    Non-UK    567    (201)    768    (339)    (78)       (261)  

Customer accounts

  Total      (659)     (59)     (600)     (1,219)     (15)        (1,204)    Total    (1,330)    (77)        (1,253)        (893)    (9)   (884)  

Debt securities in issue

  UK     (209)     (148)     (61)     (165)     (288)    123     UK    353    (56)    409    (134)        (55)   (79)  

Debt securities in issue

  Non-UK      (25)     (53)     28      (39)     (61)    22     Non-UK    (404)    (145)    (259)    (25)    (53)   28  

Debt securities in issue

  Total      (234)     (201)     (33)     (204)     (349)    145     Total    (51)        (201)    150    (159)    (108)   (51)  

Subordinated liabilities

  UK     23      35      (12)     79      (156)    235     UK    97    121    (24)    18    23   (5)  

Subordinated liabilities

  Non-UK      (1)     (27)     26      (29)     (19)    (10)    Non-UK    (80)    (33)    (47)    (1)    (27)   26  

Subordinated liabilities

  Total      22           14      50      (175)    225     Total    17    88    (71)    17    (4)   21  

Repurchase agreements

  UK     (208)     (177)     (31)     (47)     (99)    52     UK    (5)    (344)    339    (208)    (177)   (31)  

Repurchase agreements

  Non-UK      44      (73)     117      (184)     (59)    (125)    Non-UK    (124)    (423)    299    44    (73)   117  

Repurchase agreements

  Total      (164)     (250)     86      (231)     (158)    (73)    Total    (129)    (767)    638    (164)    (250)   86  

Other interest expense

         59           59      11          11            (83)    -    (83)    59    -   59  

Total interest payable

         (995)     (514)     (481)     (1,646)     (735)    (911)       (1,497)    (989)    (508)    (1,155)    (382)   (773)  

 

  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 20152016 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  419415


Additional information

Additional financial disclosure (unaudited)

 

 

 

Credit risk additional disclosure

This section of the report contains supplementary information that is more detailed or contains longer histories than the data presented in the credit risk management section.

A. Impairment

 

Movements in allowance for impairment by geography

                                        
  

 

 

 

 

 

2015

 

£m

 

  

 

  

  

 

 

 

 

 

2014

 

£m

 

  

 

  

  

 

 

 

 

 

2013

 

£m

 

  

 

  

  

 

 

 

 

 

2012

 

£m

 

  

 

  

  

 

2011

 

£m

    

 

 

 

 

 

2016

 

£m

 

 

 

 

 

 

    

 

 

 

 

 

2015

 

£m

 

 

 

 

 

 

    

 

 

 

 

 

2014

 

£m

 

 

 

 

 

 

    

 

 

 

 

 

2013

 

£m

 

 

 

 

 

 

    

 

2012

 

£m

 

Allowance for impairment as at 1 January

   5,455      7,258      7,799      10,597     12,432      4,921       5,455       7,258       7,799      10,597 

Effects of the adoption of IFRS 10

                  (1,701)                                (1,701)

Acquisitions and disposals

        13      (5)     (80)    (18)     (5)            13       (5)     (80)

Unwind of discount

   (149)     (153)     (179)     (211)    (243)     (75)      (149)      (153)      (179)     (211)

Exchange and other adjustments

   (617)     (1,047)     (260)     (206)    (440)     (736)      (617)      (1,047)      (260)     (206)

Amounts written off:

                              

United Kingdom

   (1,354)     (1,313)     (1,548)     (1,972)    (2,401)     (1,272)      (1,354)      (1,313)      (1,548)     (1,972)

Europe

   (200)     (742)     (957)     (1,119)    (932)     (218)      (200)      (742)      (957)     (1,119)

Americas

   (411)     (535)     (276)     (311)    (954)     (664)      (411)      (535)      (276)     (311)

Africa and Middle East

   (300)     (423)     (534)     (655)    (695)     (20)      (300)      (423)      (534)     (655)

Asia

   (12)     (24)     (28)     (62)    (183)     (19)      (12)      (24)      (28)     (62)

Recoveries:

                              

United Kingdom

   281      147      119      127     159      241       281       147       119      127 

Europe

   15      27      18      31     43      18       15       27       18      31 

Americas

   52                         104       52                  

Africa and Middle East

   52      46      63      51     56            52       46       63      51 

Asia

                                                  

New and increased impairment allowance:

                              

United Kingdom

   1,559      1,596      1,687      1,728     2,442      1,659       1,559       1,596       1,687      1,728 

Europe

   399      757      1,131      1,566     1,299      350       399       757       1,131      1,566 

Americas

   649      378      514      250     438      1,164       649       378       514      250 

Africa and Middle East

   438      449      566      853     727      73       438       449       566      853 

Asia

   11      50      31      50     56      13       11       50       31      50 

Reversals of impairment allowance:

                              

United Kingdom

   (320)     (381)     (302)     (356)    (353)     (288)      (320)      (381)      (302)     (356)

Europe

   (141)     (337)     (323)     (463)    (135)     (90)      (141)      (337)      (323)     (463)

Americas

   (59)     (38)     (4)     (23)    (280)     (139)      (59)      (38)      (4)     (23)

Africa and Middle East

   (22)     (45)     (45)     (70)    (113)     (29)      (22)      (45)      (45)     (70)

Asia

   (5)     (8)     (9)     (16)    (50)     (5)      (5)      (8)      (9)     (16)

Recoveries:

                              

United Kingdom

   (281)     (147)     (119)     (127)    (159)     (241)      (281)      (147)      (119)     (127)

Europe

   (15)     (27)     (18)     (31)    (43)     (18)      (15)      (27)      (18)     (31)

Americas

   (52)                        (104)      (52)                 

Africa and Middle East

   (52)     (46)     (63)     (51)    (56)     (1)      (52)      (46)      (63)     (51)

Asia

        (1)     (1)     (3)    (7)     (1)            (1)      (1)     (3)

Allowance for impairment as at 31 December

   4,921      5,455      7,258      7,799     10,597      4,620       4,921       5,455       7,258      7,799 

Average loans and advances for the year

   503,561      505,122      525,995      564,128     548,944      504,246       503,561       505,122       525,995      564,128 

 

420416  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 20152016 Annual Report on Form 20-F  


Additional information

Additional financial disclosure (unaudited)

 

 

 

Analysis of impairment charges

                             

As at 31 December

  

 

 

 

 

 

2015

 

£m

 

  

 

  

    

 

 

 

 

 

2014

 

£m

 

  

 

  

    

 

 

 

 

 

2013

 

£m

 

  

 

  

    

 

 

 

 

 

2012

 

£m

 

  

 

  

  

 

2011

 

£m

Impairment charges:

                

United Kingdom

   958        1,068        1,266        1,245     1,930 

Europe

   243        393        790        1,072     1,121 

Americas

   538        340        510        227     158 

Africa and Middle East

   364        358        458        732     558 

Asia

          41        21        31     (1)

Impairment on loans and advances

   2,109        2,200        3,045        3,307     3,766 

Impairment on available for sale assets

   17        (31)              40     1,860 

Impairment on reverse repurchase agreements

          (5)              (3)    (48)

Impairment charges

   2,126        2,164        3,054        3,344     5,578 

Other credit provisions charge

   (12)              17        (4)    24 

Impairment charges

           2,114                2,168                3,071                3,340             5,602 

The industry classifications in the tables below have been prepared at the level of the borrowing entity. This means that a loan to a subsidiary of a major corporation is classified by the industry in which the subsidiary operates, even though the Parent’s predominant business may be in a different industry.

Analysis of impairment charges

                         

As at 31 December

    

 

 

 

 

 

2016

 

£m

 

 

 

 

 

 

    

 

 

 

 

 

2015

 

£m

 

 

 

 

 

 

    

 

 

 

 

 

2014

 

£m

 

 

 

 

 

 

    

 

 

 

 

 

2013

 

£m

 

 

 

 

 

 

    

 

2012

 

£m

 

Impairment charges:

                    

United Kingdom

     1,130      960      1,071      1,262     1,245 

Europe

     242      244      392      790     1,072 

Americas

     921      539      339      510     227 

Africa and Middle East

     43      7      9      ( 12    37 

Asia

     7      6      41      21     31 

Impairment on loans and advances

     2,343      1,756      1,852      2,571     2,612 

Impairment on available for sale assets

     21      18      ( 31     -     40 

Impairment on reverse repurchase agreements

     -      -      ( 5     8     ( 3)

Impairment charges

     2,364      1,774      1,816      2,579     2,649 

Other credit provisions charge

     9      ( 12     5      17     ( 4)

Impairment charges

     2,373      1,762      1,821      2,596     2,645 

The industry classifications in the tables below have been prepared at the level of the borrowing entity. This means that a loan to a subsidiary of a major corporation is classified by the industry in which the subsidiary operates, even though the Parent’s predominant business may be in a different industry.

The industry classifications in the tables below have been prepared at the level of the borrowing entity. This means that a loan to a subsidiary of a major corporation is classified by the industry in which the subsidiary operates, even though the Parent’s predominant business may be in a different industry.

Total impairment charges on loans and advances by industry

                                              

As at 31 December

  

 

 

 

 

 

2015

 

£m

 

  

 

  

    

 

 

 

 

 

2014

 

£m

 

  

 

  

    

 

 

 

 

 

2013

 

£m

 

  

 

  

    

 

 

 

 

 

2012

 

£m

 

  

 

  

  

 

2011

 

£m

    

 

 

 

 

 

        2016

 

£m

 

 

 

 

 

 

    

 

 

 

 

 

2015

 

£m

 

 

 

 

 

 

    

 

 

 

 

 

2014

 

£m

 

 

 

 

 

 

    

 

 

 

 

 

2013

 

£m

 

 

 

 

 

 

    

 

2012

 

£m

 

United Kingdom:

                                    

Financial institutions

   (4)       (9)              30     83      (1)      (4)      (9)      2     30 

Manufacturing

   (8)        ��     44        12     41      39      (8)      1      44     12 

Construction

   10               23        25     22      7      10      8      23     25 

Property

   11        10        25        82     59      (13)      11      10      25     82 

Energy and water

   42                               12      42      -      -     

Wholesale and retail distribution and leisure

   38        54        52        109     297      38      38      54      52     109 

Business and other services

   108        73        86        138     138      56      110      76      82     138 

Home loans

   27        28        38        18     66      (4)      27      28      38     18 

Cards, unsecured and other personal lending

   735        893        980        799     1,200      975      735      893      980     799 

Other

   (1)       10        16        31     19      20      (1)      10      16     31 

Total United Kingdom

   958        1,068        1,266        1,245     1,930      1,129      960      1,071      1,262     1,245 

Overseas

   1,151        1,132        1,779        2,062     1,836      1,214      796      781      1,309     1,367 

Total Impairment charges

           2,109                2,200                3,045                3,307             3,766      2,343      1,756      1,852      2,571     2,612 

 

  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 20152016 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  421417


Additional information

Additional financial disclosure (unaudited)

 

 

 

Allowance for impairment by industry

  

 

 

 

          2015

 

  

  

 

 

 

          2014

 

  

  

 

 

 

          2013

 

  

  

 

 

 

           2012

 

  

  

 

 

 

              2011

As at 31 December

  

 

 

 

£m

 

  

   %     £m     %     £m     %     £m     %     £m    %

United Kingdom:

                    

Financial institutions

   10      0.2           0.2      23      0.3      411      5.3      456     4.3 

Manufacturing

   30      0.6      32      0.6      84      1.2      37      0.5      97     0.9 

Construction

   32      0.7      33      0.6      45      0.6      31      0.4      53     0.5 

Property

   122      2.5      140      2.6      73      1.0      118      1.5      121     1.1 

Government and central bank

                       18      0.2                    

Energy and water

   90      1.8                                        

Wholesale and retail distribution and leisure

   124      2.5      137      2.5      124      1.7      243      3.1      378     3.6 

Business and other services

   238      4.8      205      3.8      202      2.8      217      2.8      258     2.4 

Home loans

   157      3.2      123      2.3      111      1.5      129      1.7      134     1.3 

Cards, unsecured and other personal lending

   1,652      33.6      1,912      35.1      2,228      30.7      2,043      26.2      2,469     23.3 

Other

   37      0.8      60      1.1      71      1.0      41      0.5      39     0.4 

Total United Kingdom

   2,492      50.6      2,652      48.6      2,980      41.1      3,270      41.9      4,005     37.8 

Overseas

   2,429      49.4      2,803      51.4      4,278      58.9      4,529      58.1      6,592     62.2 

Total

   4,921      100.0      5,455      100.0      7,258      100.0      7,799      100.0      10,597     100.0 
                    

Amounts written off and recovered by industry

   

 

 

 

Amounts written off

 

  

  

 

 

 

Recoveries of amounts previously written off  

As at 31 December

  

 

 

 

 

 

2015  

 

£m

 

  

 

  

  

 

 

 

 

 

2014  

 

£m

 

  

 

  

   

 

 

2013  

 

£m

  

 

  

   

 

 

2012  

 

£m

  

 

  

   

 

 

2011  

 

£m

  

 

  

   

 

 

2015  

 

£m

  

 

  

   

 

 

2014  

 

£m

  

 

  

   

 

 

2013  

 

£m

  

 

  

   

 

 

2012  

 

£m

  

 

  

  

2011  

 

£m

United Kingdom:

                    

Financial institutions

             13      55      67           11               

Manufacturing

        13      55      76      28                         

Construction

   13      21      26      52      45                         

Property

   24      19      34      95      71      13      17               

Energy and water

                                               

Wholesale and retail distribution and leisure

   94      48      78      246      229      17      13           13     39 

Business and other services

   65      59      138      200      127      15      10      19      22     

Home loans

   22      15      39      36      45                         

Cards, unsecured and other personal lending

   1,113      994      1,127      1,184      1,739      214      81      82      73     102 

Other

   14      144      37      27      47                         

Total United Kingdom

   1,354      1,314      1,548      1,972      2,401      281      147      119      127     159 

Overseas

   923      1,723      1,795      2,147      2,764      119      74      82      85     106 

Total

   2,277      3,037      3,343      4,119      5,165      400      221      201      212     265 

Allowance for impairment by industry

Allowance for impairment by industry

  

 

 

 

 

2016

 

 

 

 

  

 

 

 

 

2015

 

 

 

 

  

 

 

 

 

2014

 

 

 

 

  

 

 

 

 

2013

 

 

 

 

  

 

 

 

 

2012

 

As at 31 December

  

 

 

 

 

£m

 

 

 

 

   

 

%

 

 

 

   

 

£m

 

 

 

   

 

%

 

 

 

   

 

£m

 

 

 

   

 

%

 

 

 

   

 

£m

 

 

 

   

 

%

 

 

 

   

 

£m

 

 

 

  

 

United Kingdom:

                    

Financial institutions

   5    0.1    10    0.2    9    0.2    23    0.3    411   5.3 

Manufacturing

   60    1.3    30    0.6    32    0.6    84    1.2    37   0.5 

Construction

   35    0.8    32    0.7    33    0.6    45    0.6    31   0.4 

Property

   89    1.9    122    2.5    140    2.6    73    1.0    118   1.5 

Government and central bank

   -    -    -    -    -    -    18    0.2    -   

Energy and water

   114    2.5    90    1.8    -    -    1    -    -   

Wholesale and retail distribution and leisure

   143    3.1    124    2.5    137    2.5    124    1.7    243   3.1 

Business and other services

   252    5.5    238    4.8    205    3.8    202    2.8    217   2.8 

Home loans

   144    3.1    157    3.2    123    2.3    111    1.5    129   1.7 

Cards, unsecured and other personal lending

   1,653    35.8    1,652    33.6    1,912    35.1    2,228    30.7    2,043   26.2 

Other

   49    1.1    37    0.8    61    1.1    71    1.0    41   0.5 

Total United Kingdom

   2,544    55.1    2,492    50.6    2,652    48.6    2,980    41.1    3,270   41.9 

Overseas

   2,076    44.9    2,429    49.4    2,803    51.4    4,278    58.9    4,529   58.1 

Total

   4,620    100.0    4,921    100.0    5,455    100.0    7,258    100.0    7,799   100.0 
                    

Amounts written off and recovered by industry

Amounts written off and recovered by industry

  

 

 

 

 

Amounts written off

 

 

 

 

   

 

Recoveries of amounts previously written off

 

As at 31 December

  

 

 

 

 

 

2016

 

£m

 

 

 

 

 

 

  

 

 

 

 

 

2015

 

£m

 

 

 

 

 

 

   

 

 

2014

 

£m

 

 

 

 

 

   

 

 

2013

 

£m

 

 

 

 

 

   

 

 

2012

 

£m

 

 

 

 

 

   

 

 

2016

 

£m

 

 

 

 

 

   

 

 

2015

 

£m

 

 

 

 

 

   

 

 

2014

 

£m

 

 

 

 

 

   

 

 

2013

 

£m

 

 

 

 

 

  

2012 

 

£m 

 

United Kingdom:

                    

Financial institutions

   2    3    1    13    55    1    8    11    1   

Manufacturing

   15    6    13    55    76    3    2    6    4   

Construction

   5    13    21    26    52    1    3    3    2   

Property

   18    24    19    34    95    11    13    17    1   

Energy and water

   -    -    -    1    1    2    2    -    -   

Wholesale and retail distribution and leisure

   25    94    48    78    246    5    17    13    4   13 

Business and other services

   52    65    59    138    200    10    15    10    19   22 

Home loans

   11    22    15    39    36    -    3    2    2   

Cards, unsecured and other personal lending

   1,134    1,113    994    1,127    1,184    206    214    81    82   73 

Other

   10    14    144    37    27    2    4    4    4   

Total United Kingdom

   1,272    1,354    1,314    1,548    1,972    241    281    147    119   127 

Overseas

   921    923    1,723    1,795    2,147    125    119    74    82   85 

Total

     2,193      2,277      3,037      3,343      4,119    366    400    221    201   212 
                    

Impairment ratios

                     

Impairment ratios

  

 

 

 

 

 

2015 

 

%

 

  

 

  

    

 

 

 

 

 

2014 

 

%

 

  

 

  

     

 

 

2013 

 

%

  

 

  

     

 

 

2012 

 

%

  

 

  

  

2011 

 

%

                 

 

 

 

 

 

2016

 

%

 

 

 

 

 

 

  

 

 

 

 

 

2015

 

%

 

 

 

 

 

 

   

 

 

2014

 

%

 

 

 

 

 

   

 

 

2013

 

%

 

 

 

 

 

  

2012 

 

 

Impairment charges as a percentage of average loans and advances

   0.42        0.44        0.58        0.59     0.69 

Impairment charges as a percentage of average loans and advances

 

   0.46    0.42    0.44    0.58   0.59 

Amounts written off (net of recoveries) as a percentage of average loans and advances

   0.37        0.56        0.60        0.69     0.89 

Amounts written off (net of recoveries) as a percentage of average loans and advances

 

   0.36    0.37    0.56    0.60   0.69 

Allowance for impairment balance as a percentage of loans and advances as at 31 December

   1.10        1.15        1.54        1.65     2.16 

Allowance for impairment balance as a percentage of loans and advances as at 31 December

 

   1.05    1.10    1.15    1.54   1.65 

 

422418  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 20152016 Annual Report on Form 20-F  


Additional information

Additional financial disclosure (unaudited)

 

 

 

B. Potential credit risk loans

 

 

Credit risk loans summary

                       
  

 

 

 

2015

 

  

  

 

 

 

2014

 

  

   2013     2012    2011

As at 31 December

  

 

 

 

£m

 

  

  

 

 

 

£m

 

  

  

 

 

 

£m

 

  

  

 

 

 

£m

 

  

  

 

£m

Impaired loansa

   5,635      6,854      10,510      11,747     17,326 

Accruing loans which are contractually overdue 90 days or more as to principal or interest

   1,744      1,912      1,903      2,490     3,179 

Impaired and restructured loans

 

   438      723      885      788     837 

Credit risk loans

 

   7,817      9,489      13,298      15,025     21,342 

    

          

 

Credit risk loans

  

 

 

 

2015

 

  

   2014     2013     2012    2011

 

As at 31 December

 

  

 

 

 

£m

 

  

  

 

 

 

£m

 

  

   £m     £m    £m

Impaired loans:

          

United Kingdoma

   2,747      3,090      3,986      4,717     5,801 

Europe

   1,198      2,011      4,137      4,433     5,261 

Americas

   499      317      683      357     3,759 

Africa and Middle East

   1,106      1,353      1,626      2,167     2,408 

Asia

 

   85      83      78      73     97 

Total

 

   5,635      6,854      10,510      11,747     17,326 

Accruing loans which are contractually overdue 90 days or more as to principal or interest:

          

United Kingdoma

   848      971      953      1,227     1,216 

Europe

   300      354      503      476     650 

Americas

   185      149      81      96     110 

Africa and Middle East

   411      437      364      688     1,195 

Asia

 

                      

Total

 

   1,744      1,912      1,903      2,490     3,179 

Impaired and restructured loans:

          

United Kingdom

   286      559      734      615     643 

Europe

   33      31      13      27     60 

Americas

   117      90      81      116     124 

Africa and Middle East

        42      56      25     

Asia

                      

Total

   438      723      885      788     837 

Total credit risk loans:

          

United Kingdoma

   3,881      4,620      5,673      6,559     7,660 

Europe

   1,531      2,396      4,653      4,936     5,971 

Americas

   801      556      845      569     3,993 

Africa and Middle East

   1,519      1,832      2,046      2,880     3,610 

Asia

   85      85      81      81     108 

Credit risk loans

   7,817      9,489      13,298      15,025     21,342 

Credit risk loans summary

                         

As at 31 December

 

   

 

 

2016

 

£m

 

 

 

 

 

   

 

 

2015

 

£m

 

 

 

 

 

   

 

 

2014

 

£m

 

 

 

 

 

   

 

 

2013

 

£m

 

 

 

 

 

   

 

 

2012

 

£m

 

 

 

 

 

Impaired loans

   4,614     5,635     6,854     10,510     11,747  

Accruing loans which are contractually overdue 90 days or more as to principal or interest

   1,474     1,744     1,912     1,903     2,490  

Impaired and restructured loans

   403     438     723     885     788  

Credit risk loans

   6,491     7,817     9,489     13,298     15,025  

 

a2014 impaired loans, accruing loans which are contractually overdue 90 days or more as to principal or interest and total credit risk loans within the United Kingdom have been revised by £55m, £96m and £151m respectively to align methodology for determining arrears categories with other Home Finance risk disclosures.

Credit risk loans

 

As at 31 December

  

 

 

 

 

 

2016

 

£m

 

 

 

 

 

 

  

 

 

 

 

 

2015

 

£m

 

 

 

 

 

 

  

 

 

 

 

 

2014

 

£m

 

 

 

 

 

 

  

 

 

 

 

 

2013

 

£m

 

 

 

 

 

 

  

 

 

 

 

 

2012

 

£m

 

 

 

 

 

 

Impaired loans:

          

United Kingdom

   2,688     2747     3090     3986     4717  

Europe

   1,078     1198     2011     4137     4433  

Americas

   641     499     317     683     357  

Africa and Middle East

   140     1106     1353     1626     2167  

Asia

   67     85     83     78     73  

Total

   4,614     5,635     6,854     10,510     11,747  

Accruing loans which are contractually overdue 90 days or more as to principal or interest:

          

United Kingdom

   810     848     971     953     1,227  

Europe

   331     300     354     503     476  

Americas

   320     185     149     81     96  

Africa and Middle East

   13     411     437     364     688  

Asia

                    

Total

   1,474     1,744     1,912     1,903     2,490  

Impaired and restructured loans:

          

United Kingdom

   217     286     559     734     615  

Europe

       33     31     13     27  

Americas

   180     117     90     81     116  

Africa and Middle East

           42     56     25  

Asia

                    

Total

   403     438     723     885     788  

Total credit risk loans:

          

United Kingdom

   3,715     3,881     4,620     5,673     6,559  

Europe

   1,415     1,531     2,396     4,653     4,936  

Americas

   1,141     801     556     845     569  

Africa and Middle East

   153     1,519     1,832     2,046     2,880  

Asia

   67     85     85     81     81  

Credit risk loans

   6,491     7,817     9,489     13,298     15,025  

 

  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 20152016 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  419


Additional information

Additional financial disclosure (unaudited)

Potential problem loans

 

As at 31 December

 

   

 

 

2016

 

£m

 

 

 

 

 

   

 

 

2015

 

£m

 

 

 

 

 

   

 

 

2014

 

£m

 

 

 

 

 

   

 

 

2013

 

£m

 

 

 

 

 

   

 

 

2012

 

£m

 

 

 

 

 

United Kingdom

   1,302    983    942    1,112    1,035 

Europe

   209     158     208     285     430  

Americas

   599     487     146     99     80  

Africa and Middle East

   32     408     306    ��310     314  

Asia

 

   

 

54 

 

 

 

   

 

14 

 

 

 

   

 

10 

 

 

 

   

 

 

 

 

   

 

 

 

 

 

Potential problem loans

 

  

 

 

 

 

2,196 

 

 

 

 

  

 

 

 

 

2,050 

 

 

 

 

  

 

 

 

 

1,612 

 

 

 

 

  

 

 

 

 

1,808 

 

 

 

 

  

 

 

 

 

1,860 

 

 

 

 

   

 

 

 

2016

 

 

  

 

 

 

2015

 

 

  

 

2014

 

Interest foregone on credit risk loans

 

  

 

 

 

 

£m

 

 

 

 

  

 

 

 

 

£m

 

 

 

 

  

 

£m

 

Interest income that would have been recognised under the original contractual terms

      

United Kingdom

               91                 139                195 

Rest of the World

 

   196     151    173 

 

Total

 

  

 

 

 

 

287 

 

 

 

 

  

 

 

 

 

290 

 

 

 

 

  

 

368 

 

 

Total impairment allowance coverage of credit risk loans

  

 

 

 

2016

 

 

  

 

 

 

2015

 

 

  

 

 

 

2014

 

 

  

 

 

 

2013

 

 

  

 

 

 

2012

 

 

 

As at 31 December

  

 

 

 

 

%

 

 

 

 

  

 

 

 

 

%

 

 

 

 

  

 

 

 

 

%

 

 

 

 

  

 

 

 

 

%

 

 

 

 

  

 

 

 

 

%

 

 

 

 

United Kingdom

   68.5     64.2     57.4     52.5     49.9  

Europe

   48.4     53.3     50.9     53.4     52.8  

Americas

   109.3     89.2     89.7     77.4     83.0  

Africa and Middle East

   58.2     55.3     54.7     52.7     48.0  

Asia

 

   

 

82.1 

 

 

 

   

 

70.3 

 

 

 

   

 

96.5 

 

 

 

   

 

72.8 

 

 

 

   

 

86.4 

 

 

 

 

Total coverage of credit risk lending

 

  

 

 

 

 

71.2 

 

 

 

 

  

 

 

 

 

63.0 

 

 

 

 

  

 

 

 

 

57.5 

 

 

 

 

  

 

 

 

 

54.6 

 

 

 

 

  

 

 

 

 

51.9 

 

 

 

 

    

          

 

Total impairment allowance coverage of potential credit risk loans

  

 

 

 

2016

 

 

  

 

 

 

2015

 

 

  

 

 

 

2014

 

 

  

 

 

 

2013

 

 

  

 

 

 

2012

 

 

 

As at 31 December

 

  

 

 

 

 

%

 

 

 

 

  

 

 

 

 

%

 

 

 

 

  

 

 

 

 

%

 

 

 

 

  

 

 

 

 

%

 

 

 

 

  

 

 

 

 

%

 

 

 

 

United Kingdom

   50.7     51.2     48.7     43.9     43.1  

Europe

   42.2     48.3     46.9     50.3     48.6  

Americas

   71.7     55.5     71.1     69.3     72.7  

Africa and Middle East

   48.1     43.6     46.9     45.8     43.2  

Asia

 

   

 

45.5 

 

 

 

   

 

60.4 

 

 

 

   

 

86.3 

 

 

 

   

 

71.1 

 

 

 

   

 

85.4 

 

 

 

 

Total coverage of potential credit risk lending

 

  

 

 

 

 

53.2 

 

 

 

 

  

 

 

 

 

49.9 

 

 

 

 

  

 

 

 

 

49.7 

 

 

 

 

  

 

 

 

 

48.0 

 

 

 

 

  

 

 

 

 

46.2 

 

 

 

 

420  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2016 Annual Report on Form 20-F


Additional information

Additional financial disclosure (unaudited)

C. Maturity Analysis of Loans and Advances

Maturity analysis of loans and advances to customers

 

                    
 As at 31 December 2016  

On

 

demand

 

£m

   

Not more

 

than

 

three

 

months

 

£m

   

Over

 

three

 

months

 

but not

 

more

 

than six

 

months

 

£m

   

Over six

 

months

 

but not

 

more

 

than one

 

year

 

£m

   

Over one

 

year but

 

not more

 

than

 

three

 

years

 

£m

   

Over

 

three

 

years but

 

not more

 

than five

 

years

 

£m

   

Over five

 

years but

 

not more

 

than ten

 

years

 

£m

   

Over ten

 

years

 

£m

   

Total

 

£m

 

United Kingdom

                  

Corporate lending

   14,810     20,056     1,127     2,929     14,917     14,123     4,478     13,626     86,066  

Other lending to customers in the United Kingdom

   3,544     3,768     2,489     5,181     19,484     16,020     34,367     85,377     170,230  

Total United Kingdom

   18,354     23,824     3,616     8,110     34,401     30,143     38,845     99,003     256,296  

Europe

   5,295     21,497     1,076     1,948     5,618     4,917     2,870     4,515     47,736  

Americas

   3,442     35,518     2,330     4,781     13,982     8,822     6,646     6,771     82,292  

Africa and Middle East

   210     861     200     307     578     870     93     59     3,178  

Asia

   895     4,482     454     764     912     307     74     14     7,902  

Total loans and advances to customers

   28,196     86,182     7,676     15,910     55,491     45,059     48,528     110,362     397,404  

As at 31 December 2015

                  

United Kingdom

                  

Corporate lending

   14,634     14,957     2,791     3,301     12,692     13,922     4,585     11,307     78,189  

Other lending to customers in the United Kingdom

   3,811     4,157     2,454     5,248     18,925     15,911     33,604     79,279     163,389  

Total United Kingdom

   18,445     19,114     5,245     8,549     31,617     29,833     38,189     90,586     241,578  

Europe

   4,459     19,236     4,639     1,957     4,865     4,400     3,351     5,281     48,188  

Americas

   3,090     30,144     2,788     5,336     10,987     8,450     4,926     4,807     70,528  

Africa and Middle East

   4,034     3,021     1,503     2,435     7,057     5,855     4,485     5,910     34,300  

Asia

   509     5,169     578     1,410     1,092     544     175     67     9,544  

Total loans and advances to customers

   30,537     76,684     14,753     19,687     55,618     49,082     51,126     106,651     404,138  

Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2016 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  421


Additional information

Additional financial disclosure (unaudited)

Maturity analysis of loans and advances to banks

 

                    
 As at 31 December 2016  

On

 

demand

 

£m

   

Not more

 

than

 

three

months
£m

   

Over

 

three

 

months

 

but not

 

more

 

than six

 

months

 

£m

   

Over six

 

months

 

but not

 

more

 

than one

 

year

 

£m

   

Over one

 

year but

 

not more

 

than

 

three

 

years

 

£m

   

Over

 

three

 

years but

 

not more

 

than five

 

years

 

£m

   

Over five

 

years but

 

not more

 

than ten

 

years

 

£m

   

Over ten

 

years

 

£m

   

Total

 

£m

 

United Kingdom

   270     5,624     1,485     34     45                 7,458  

Europe

   1,178     11,398     12     25     61                 12,674  

Americas

   1,887     14,329     136     211     313     18             16,894  

Africa and Middle East

   224     772     305     331     146                 1,778  

Asia

   1,299     2,224     815     12     83         13         4,447  

Total loans and advances to banks

   4,858     34,347     2,753     613     648     19     13         43,251  

As at 31 December 2015

                  

United Kingdom

   441     9,520     560         199     13             10,733  

Europe

   1,109     7,885     832     26     66                 9,918  

Americas

   1,193     10,980     244     327     308     26             13,078  

Africa and Middle East

   1,173     880     102     306     404             34     2,900  

Asia

   1,438     2,274     216     175     602         12         4,720  

Total loans and advances to banks

   5,354     31,539     1,954     834     1,579     43     12     34     41,349  

422  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2016 Annual Report on Form 20-F


Additional information

Additional financial disclosure (unaudited)

D. Industrial and Geographical Concentrations of Loans and Advances

                                                                                          

Loans and advances to customers by industry

   2016    2015    2014    2013    2012 

As at 31 December

   £m    £m    £m    £m    £m 

Financial institutions

   91,826     80,785     103,503     103,703     93,745  

Manufacturing

   12,470     12,444     11,849     10,632     11,907  

Construction

   3,525     3,798     3,767     4,245     4,625  

Property

   20,856     20,019     19,544     20,844     22,575  

Government and central bank

   12,029     5,942     7,127     4,999     4,809  

Energy and water

   7,565     7,874     8,557     7,547     7,638  

Wholesale and retail distribution and leisure

   13,143     14,034     13,635     13,288     15,070  

Business and other services

   22,135     26,092     22,803     20,663     24,722  

Home loans

   145,184     156,384     167,520     180,295     172,875  

Cards, unsecured loans and other personal lending

   59,851     63,217     58,914     55,806     58,863  

Other

   8,820     13,549     16,003     19,463     21,530  

Loans and advances to customers

   397,404     404,138     433,222     441,485     438,359  
          

 

Loans and advances to customers in the UK

   2016    2015    2014    2013    2012 

As at 31 December

   £m    £m    £m    £m    £m 

Financial institutions

   22,214     18,530     23,728     22,101     22,290  

Manufacturing

   6,816     5,735     6,274     5,411     6,078  

Construction

   3,254     3,164     2,957     3,195     3,108  

Property

   18,145     15,556     15,053     15,096     15,283  

Government and central bank

   6,654     512     276     819     198  

Energy and water

   2,348     1,922     2,096     1,715     2,286  

Wholesale and retail distribution and leisure

   10,586     10,382     9,997     9,734     9,810  

Business and other services

   16,427     16,314     13,944     13,052     15,971  

Home loans

   131,945     132,324     132,864     129,703     119,781  

Cards, unsecured loans and other personal lending

   31,260     30,452     28,061     30,396     31,772  

Other

   6,647     6,687     8,944     8,444     9,476  

Loans and advances to customers in the UK

   256,296     241,578     244,194     239,666     236,053  
          

Loans and advances to customers in Europe

   2016    2015    2014    2013    2012 

As at 31 December

   £m    £m    £m    £m    £m 

Financial institutions

   19,803     16,918     22,126     17,791     20,245  

Manufacturing

   2,613     2,352     1,641     2,051     2,827  

Construction

   30     68     193     625     663  

Property

   1,047     796     1,175     2,652     3,242  

Government and central bank

   3,545     3,415     3,759     1,583     2,458  

Energy and water

   1,497     1,280     2,612     3,119     2,376  

Wholesale and retail distribution and leisure

   944     711     1,105     1,524     2,588  

Business and other services

   1,170     3,355     1,878     2,882     2,985  

Home loans

   12,189     12,503     19,933     35,110     36,965  

Cards, unsecured loans and other personal lending

   4,283     5,047     5,226     7,146     6,346  

Other

   615     1,743     1,589     2,014     2,471  

Loans and advances to customers in Europe

   47,736     48,188     61,237     76,497     83,166  

Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2016 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  423


Additional information

Additional financial disclosure (unaudited)

        

 

 

 

Potential problem loans

  

 

 

 

2015

 

  

  

 

 

 

2014

 

  

  

 

 

 

2013

 

  

  

 

 

 

2012

 

  

  

 

2011

 

As at 31 December

 

  

 

 

 

 

£m

 

 

  

 

  

 

 

 

 

£m

 

 

  

 

  

 

 

 

 

£m

 

 

  

 

  

 

 

 

 

£m

 

 

  

 

  

 

£m

 

United Kingdoma

   983      942      1,112      1,035     1,110 

Europe

   158      208      285      430     530 

Americas

   487      146      99      80     106 

Africa and Middle East

   408      306      310      314     217 

Asia

 

   

 

14 

 

  

 

   

 

10 

 

  

 

   

 

 

  

 

   

 

 

  

 

  

 

 

Potential problem loans

 

  

 

 

 

 

2,050 

 

 

  

 

  

 

 

 

 

1,612 

 

 

  

 

  

 

 

 

 

1,808 

 

 

  

 

  

 

 

 

 

1,860 

 

 

  

 

  

 

1,972 

 

 

   

 

 

 

2015

 

  

  

 

 

 

2014

 

  

  

 

2013

 

Interest foregone on credit risk loans

 

  

 

 

 

 

£m

 

 

  

 

  

 

 

 

 

£m

 

 

  

 

  

 

£m

 

Interest income that would have been recognised under the original contractual terms

      

United Kingdom

               139                  195                 194 

Rest of the World

 

   

 

151 

 

  

 

   

 

173 

 

  

 

  

217 

 

 

Total

 

  

 

 

 

 

290 

 

 

  

 

  

 

 

 

 

368 

 

 

  

 

  

 

411 

 

 

Total impairment allowance coverage of credit risk loans

  

 

 

 

2015

 

  

  

 

 

 

2014

 

  

  

 

 

 

2013

 

  

  

 

 

 

2012

 

  

  

 

 

 

2011

 

  

 

As at 31 December

 

  

 

 

 

 

%

 

 

  

 

  

 

 

 

 

%

 

 

  

 

  

 

 

 

 

%

 

 

  

 

  

 

 

 

 

%

 

 

  

 

  

 

 

 

 

%

 

 

  

 

United Kingdomb

   64.2      57.4      52.5      49.9      52.3   

Europe

   53.3      50.9      53.4      52.8      48.9   

Americas

   90.5      89.7      77.4      83.0      53.3   

Africa and Middle East

   55.3      54.7      52.7      48.0      40.1   

Asia

 

   

 

57.9 

 

  

 

   

 

 

96.5 

 

 

  

 

 

   

 

72.8 

 

  

 

   

 

86.4 

 

  

 

   

 

90.7 

 

  

 

 

Total coverage of credit risk lending

 

  

 

 

 

 

63.0 

 

 

  

 

  

 

 

 

 

57.5 

 

 

  

 

  

 

 

 

 

54.6 

 

 

  

 

  

 

 

 

 

51.9 

 

 

  

 

  

 

 

 

 

49.7 

 

 

  

 

    

          

 

Total impairment allowance coverage of potential credit risk loans

  

 

 

 

2015

 

  

  

 

 

 

2014

 

  

  

 

 

 

2013

 

  

  

 

 

 

2012

 

  

  

 

 

 

2011

 

  

 

As at 31 December

 

  

 

 

 

 

%

 

 

  

 

  

 

 

 

 

%

 

 

  

 

  

 

 

 

 

%

 

 

  

 

  

 

 

 

 

%

 

 

  

 

  

 

 

 

 

%

 

 

  

 

United Kingdomb

   51.2      48.7      43.9      43.1      45.7   

Europe

   48.3      46.9      50.3      48.6      44.9   

Americas

   56.3      71.1      69.3      72.7      51.9   

Africa and Middle East

   43.6      46.9      45.8      43.2      37.8   

Asia

 

   

 

49.5 

 

  

 

   

 

86.3 

 

  

 

   

 

71.1 

 

  

 

   

 

85.4 

 

  

 

   

 

83.8 

 

  

 

 

Total coverage of potential credit risk lending

 

  

 

 

 

 

49.9 

 

 

  

 

  

 

 

 

 

49.7 

 

 

  

 

  

 

 

 

 

48.0 

 

 

  

 

  

 

 

 

 

46.2 

 

 

  

 

  

 

 

 

 

45.5 

 

 

  

 

a2014 potential problem loans within the United Kingdom have been revised by £121m to align methodology for determining arrears categories with other Home Finance risk disclosures.
b2014 impairment allowance coverage of credit risk loans and of potential credit risk loans within the United Kingdom have been revised to align methodology for determining arrears categories with other Home Finance risk disclosures.
                                                                                                            

 

Loans and advances to customers in the Americas

      

 

 

 

2016

 

 

   2015    2014    2013    2012 

As at 31 December

       £m    £m    £m    £m    £m 

Financial institutions

    45,193     39,798     49,171     49,457     43,428  

Manufacturing

    2,516     1,562     1,458     1,308     1,229  

Construction

    204     120     119     19      

Property

    1,472     1,720     1,542     944     686  

Government and central bank

    125         320     371     785  

Energy and water

    2,720     2,914     2,487     1,496     1,761  

Wholesale and retail distribution and leisure

    985     934     490     473     739  

Business and other services

    3,904     3,363     3,262     2,227     2,368  

Home loans

    595     624     770     783     480  

Cards, unsecured loans and other personal lending

    23,700     18,140     15,666     12,936     12,047  

Other

       878     1,350     1,775     1,301     1,235  

Loans and advances to customers in the Americas

       82,292     70,528     77,060     71,315     64,759  
           

 

Loans and advances to customers in Africa and Middle East

      

 

 

 

2016

 

 

   2015    2014    2013    2012 

As at 31 December

       £m    £m    £m    £m    £m 

Financial institutions

    427     1,860     4,169     6,298     4,546  

Manufacturing

    60     2,320     1,856     1,229     1,252  

Construction

        363     403     379     829  

Property

    96     1,780     1,579     2,029     3,117  

Government and central bank

    483     613     997     1,090     1,368  

Energy and water

    494     1,025     645     739     822  

Wholesale and retail distribution and leisure

    328     1,837     1,831     1,378     1,833  

Business and other services

    237     2,685     3,358     2,058     2,760  

Home loans

    357     10,689     13,591     14,347     15,376  

Cards, unsecured loans and other personal lending

    494     8,081     8,605     4,043     7,540  

Other

       200     3,047     3,210     7,073     7,827  

Loans and advances to customers in Africa and Middle East

       3,178     34,300     40,244     40,663     47,270  
           

 

Loans and advances to customers in Asia

      

 

 

 

2016

 

 

   2015    2014    2013    2012 

As at 31 December

       £m    £m    £m    £m    £m 

Financial institutions

    4,189     3,679     4,309     8,056     3,236  

Manufacturing

    465     475     620     633     521  

Construction

    35     83     95     27     24  

Property

    96     167     195     123     247  

Government and central bank

    1,222     1,399     1,775     1,136      

Energy and water

    506     733     717     478     393  

Wholesale and retail distribution and leisure

    300     170     212     179     100  

Business and other services

    397     375     361     444     638  

Home loans

    98     244     362     352     273  

Cards, unsecured loans and other personal lending

    114     1,497     1,356     1,285     1,158  

Other

       480     722     485     631     521  

Loans and advances to customers in Asia

       7,902     9,544     10,487     13,344     7,111  
           

Interest rate sensitivity of loans and

 

advances

       

 

2016

 

 

 

             

 

2015

 

 

 

     

As at 31 December

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Fixed rate

 

£m

 

 

 

 

 

 

   

 

 

Variable rate

 

£m

 

 

 

 

 

  

 

 

 

 

 

Total

 

£m

 

 

 

 

 

 

  

 

 

 

 

 

Fixed rate

 

£m

 

 

 

 

 

 

  

 

 

 

 

 

Variable rate

 

£m

 

 

 

 

 

 

  

 

 

 

 

 

Total

 

£m

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Banks

 

  

 

14,047  

 

 

 

   

 

29,204  

 

 

 

   

 

43,251  

 

 

 

   

 

12,348  

 

 

 

   

 

29,001  

 

 

 

   

 

41,349  

 

 

 

 

Customers

 

  

 

      124,995  

 

 

 

   

 

      272,409  

 

 

 

   

 

      397,404  

 

 

 

   

 

      121,960  

 

 

 

   

 

      282,178  

 

 

 

   

 

      404,138  

 

 

 

 

424  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 20152016 Annual Report on Form 20-F  


Additional information

Additional financial disclosure (unaudited)

            

 

 

C. Maturity Analysis of Loans and Advances

Foreign outstandings in currencies other than the local currency of the borrower for countries where this exceeds 0.75% of total Group assets

 

 

     

As % of

 

     

Total

 

     

Banks

 

and other

 

financial

 

institutions

 

     

Government

 

and official

 

institutions

 

     

 

Commercial

 

industrial

 

and other

 

private

 

sectors

 

 
     

assets

 

     

£m

 

     

£m

 

     

£m

 

     

£m

 

 
      

As at 31 December 2016a

                    

United States

     7.5      91,365      11,749      10,149      69,468 

Germany

     1.6      18,044      10,204      4,685      3,155 

France

     1.8      19,153      8,120      2,872      8,161 

Cayman Islands

     2.0      14,192      28      2      14,162 

Switzerland

     0.8      9,884      651      7,533      1,700 
                    
                                    

As at 31 December 2015a

                    

United States

     6.9      76,744      11,648      18,422      46,674 

Germany

     1.7      18,564      10,054      5,916      2,594 

France

     1.6      18,388      6,250      7,694      4,444 

Netherlands

     0.9      10,574      1,074      3,208      6,292 

Cayman Islands

     1.0      10,748      78      1      10,669 

Switzerland

     0.8      9,336      1,452      6,642      1,242 
                                    

As at 31 December 2014

                    

United States

     6.2      84,606      7,196      23,409      54,001 

Germany

     1.4      19,481      8,381      8,620      2,480 

France

     2.0      26,884      12,632      5,919      8,333 

Netherlands

             1.1      15,080      1,437      3,279      10,364 

Cayman Islands

     0.9      12,480      49      1      12,430 

Note

 

a  Figures are net of short securities.

                    

 

 

Maturity analysis of loans and advances to customers

 

  

                    
 As at 31 December 2015  

On

 

demand

 

£m

   

Not more

 

than

 

three

��

months

 

£m

   

Over

 

three

 

months

 

but not

 

more

 

than six

 

months

 

£m

   

Over six

 

months

 

but not

 

more

 

than one

 

year

 

£m

   

Over one

 

year but

 

no more

 

than

 

three

 

years

 

£m

   

Over

 

three

 

years but

 

not more

 

than five

 

years

 

£m

   

Over five

 

years but

 

not more

 

than ten

 

years

 

£m

   

Over ten

 

years

 

£m

   

Total

 

£m

 

United Kingdom

                  

Corporate lending

   14,634      14,957      2,791      3,301      12,692      13,922      4,585      11,307      78,189   

Other lending to customers in the United Kingdom

   3,811      4,157      2,454      5,248      18,925      15,911      33,604      79,279      163,389   

Total United Kingdom

   18,445      19,114      5,245      8,549      31,617      29,833      38,189      90,586      241,578   

Europe

   4,459      19,236      4,639      1,957      4,865      4,400      3,351      5,281      48,188   

Americas

   3,090      30,144      2,788      5,336      10,987      8,450      4,926      4,807      70,528   

Africa and Middle East

   4,034      3,021      1,503      2,435      7,057      5,855      4,485      5,910      34,300   

Asia

   509      5,169      578      1,410      1,092      544      175      67      9,544   

Total loans and advances to customers

   30,537      76,684      14,753      19,687      55,618      49,082      51,126      106,651      404,138   

As at 31 December 2014

                  

United Kingdom

                  

Corporate lending

   15,773      19,881      1,898      3,339      12,569      12,253      4,774      11,144      81,631   

Other lending to customers in the United Kingdom

   3,974      3,595      2,309      4,574      17,686      16,350      32,634      81,441      162,563   

Total United Kingdom

   19,747      23,476      4,207      7,913      30,255      28,603      37,408      92,585      244,194   

Europe

   5,049      24,717      1,404      1,692      5,901      5,408      5,116      11,950      61,237   

Americas

   2,624      42,198      1,487      3,800      9,219      8,665      4,382      4,685      77,060   

Africa and Middle East

   4,847      2,875      2,126      2,220      8,769      5,552      6,417      7,438      40,244   

Asia

   491      6,103      513      692      1,609      814      170      95      10,487   

Total loans and advances to customers

   32,758      99,369      9,737      16,317      55,753      49,042      53,493      116,753      433,222   

 

Off-Balance Sheet and other Credit Exposures

 

  

 

 

 

 

2016

 

 

 

 

  

 

 

 

 

2015

 

 

 

 

  

 

 

 

 

2014

 

 

 

 

As at 31 December

 

   

 

£m

 

 

 

   

 

£m

 

 

 

   

 

£m

 

 

 

 

Off-balance sheet exposures

      

Contingent liabilities

   19,939     20,621     21,324  

Commitments

   303,686     282,307     291,262  

On-balance sheet exposures

      

Trading portfolio assets

   80,240     77,348     114,717  

Financial assets designated at fair value

   78,608     76,830     38,300  

Derivative financial instruments

     346,626     327,709     439,909  

Financial investments

 

   

 

63,318 

 

 

 

   

 

90,267 

 

 

 

   

 

86,066 

 

 

 

 

  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 20152016 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  425


Additional information

Additional financial disclosure (unaudited)

            

 

 

Maturity analysis of loans and advances to banks

 

  

                    
 As at 31 December 2015  

On

 

demand

 

£m

   

Not more

 

than

 

three

 

months

 

£m

   

 

Over

 

three

 

months

 

but not

 

more

 

than six

 

months

 

£m

   

Over six

 

months

 

but not

 

more

 

than one

 

year

 

£m

   

Over one

 

year but

 

no more

 

than

 

three

 

years

 

£m

   

Over

 

three

 

years but

 

not more

 

than five

 

years

 

£m

   

Over five

 

years but

 

not more

 

than ten

 

years

 

£m

   

Over ten

 

years

 

£m

   

Total

 

£m

 

United Kingdom

   441      9,520      560           199      13                10,733   

Europe

   1,109      7,885      832      26      66                     9,918   

Americas

   1,193      10,980      244      327      308      26                13,078   

Africa and Middle East

   1,173      880      102      306      404                34      2,900   

Asia

   1,438      2,274      216      175      602           12           4,720   

Total loans and advances to banks

   5,354      31,539      1,954      834      1,579      43      12      34      41,349   

As at 31 December 2014

                  

United Kingdom

   623      6,159      327      325      38                     7,472   

Europe

   2,032      10,375      68           314                     12,793   

Americas

   1,172      10,914      893      186      18      20      24           13,227   

Africa and Middle East

   939      1,086      502      478      245                     3,250   

Asia

   1,109      2,604      1,446      176      22           12           5,369   

Total loans and advances to banks

   5,875      31,138      3,236      1,169      637      20      36           42,111   

426  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F


Additional information

Additional financial disclosure (unaudited)

 

 

 

D. Industrial and Geographical Concentrations of Loans and Advances

                                                                                          

 

Loans and advances to customers by industry

  

 

 

 

2015

 

  

   2014     2013     2012     2011  

As at 31 December

   £m     £m     £m     £m     £m  

Financial institutions

   80,785      103,503      103,703      93,745      93,380   

Manufacturing

   12,444      11,849      10,632      11,907      13,264   

Construction

   3,798      3,767      4,245      4,625      4,931   

Property

   20,019      19,544      20,844      22,575      25,087   

Government and central bank

   5,942      7,127      4,999      4,809      6,135   

Energy and water

   7,874      8,557      7,547      7,638      7,425   

Wholesale and retail distribution and leisure

   14,034      13,635      13,288      15,070      16,818   

Business and other services

   26,092      22,803      20,663      24,722      27,214   

Home loans

   156,384      167,520      180,295      172,875      172,106   

Cards, unsecured loans and other personal lending

   63,217      58,914      55,806      58,863      53,783   

Other

   13,549      16,003      19,463      21,530      23,688   

Loans and advances to customers

   404,138      433,222      441,485      438,359      443,831   
          

 

Loans and advances to customers in the UK

  

 

 

 

2015

 

  

   2014     2013     2012     2011  

As at 31 December

   £m     £m     £m     £m     £m  

Financial institutions

   18,530      23,728      22,101      22,290      20,257   

Manufacturing

   5,735      6,274      5,411      6,078      6,282   

Construction

   3,164      2,957      3,195      3,108      3,444   

Property

   15,556      15,053      15,096      15,283      16,351   

Government and central bank

   512      276      819      198      123   

Energy and water

   1,922      2,096      1,715      2,286      1,598   

Wholesale and retail distribution and leisure

   10,382      9,997      9,734      9,810      10,686   

Business and other services

   16,314      13,944      13,052      15,971      16,731   

Home loans

   132,324      132,864      129,703      119,781      112,394   

Cards, unsecured loans and other personal lending

   30,452      28,061      30,396      31,772      29,881   

Other

   6,687      8,944      8,444      9,476      8,404   

Loans and advances to customers in the UK

   241,578      244,194      239,666      236,053      226,151   
          

 

Loans and advances to customers in Europe

  

 

 

 

2015

 

  

   2014     2013     2012     2011  

As at 31 December

   £m     £m     £m     £m     £m  

Financial institutions

   16,918      22,126      17,791      20,245      20,255   

Manufacturing

   2,352      1,641      2,051      2,827      3,545   

Construction

   68      193      625      663      943   

Property

   796      1,175      2,652      3,242      4,023   

Government and central bank

   3,415      3,759      1,583      2,458      2,167   

Energy and water

   1,280      2,612      3,119      2,376      2,453   

Wholesale and retail distribution and leisure

   711      1,105      1,524      2,588      3,134   

Business and other services

   3,355      1,878      2,882      2,985      5,498   

Home loans

   12,503      19,933      35,110      36,965      38,732   

Cards, unsecured loans and other personal lending

   5,047      5,226      7,146      6,346      6,875   

Other

   1,743      1,589      2,014      2,471      5,711   

Loans and advances to customers in Europe

   48,188      61,237      76,497      83,166      93,336   
          

Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  427


Additional information

Additional financial disclosure (unaudited)

 

 Loans and advances to customers in the Americas

    

 

 

 

2015

 

  

     2014       2013       2012       2011  
 As at 31 December     £m       £m       £m       £m       £m  

 Financial institutions

           39,798              49,171              49,457              43,428              46,636   

 Manufacturing

     1,562        1,458        1,308        1,229        1,400   

 Construction

     120        119        19               33   

 Property

     1,720        1,542        944        686        882   

 Government and central bank

            320        371        785        620   

 Energy and water

     2,914        2,487        1,496        1,761        2,170   

 Wholesale and retail distribution and leisure

     934        490        473        739        661   

 Business and other services

     3,363        3,262        2,227        2,368        1,605   

 Home loans

     624        770        783        480        566   

 Cards, unsecured loans and other personal lending

     18,140        15,666        12,936        12,047        9,691   

 Other

     1,350        1,775        1,301        1,235        1,319   
      

 Loans and advances to customers in the Americas

     70,528        77,060        71,315        64,759        65,583   

     

                    

 

 Loans and advances to customers in Africa and Middle East

    

 

 

 

2015

 

  

     2014       2013       2012       2011  
 As at 31 December     £m       £m       £m       £m       £m  

 Financial institutions

     1,860        4,169        6,298        4,546        2,343   

 Manufacturing

     2,320        1,856        1,229        1,252        1,459   

 Construction

     363        403        379        829        444   

 Property

     1,780        1,579        2,029        3,117        3,618   

 Government and central bank

     613        997        1,090        1,368        2,796   

 Energy and water

     1,025        645        739        822        819   

 Wholesale and retail distribution and leisure

     1,837        1,831        1,378        1,833        2,170   

 Business and other services

     2,685        3,358        2,058        2,760        3,012   

 Home loans

     10,689        13,591        14,347        15,376        19,912   

 Cards, unsecured loans and other personal lending

     8,081        8,605        4,043        7,540        6,521   

 Other

     3,047        3,210        7,073        7,827        7,660   
      

 Loans and advances to customers in Africa and Middle East

     34,300        40,244        40,663        47,270        50,754   

    

                    

 

 Loans and advances to customers in Asia

    

 

 

 

2015

 

  

     2014       2013       2012       2011  
 As at 31 December     £m       £m       £m       £m       £m  

 Financial institutions

     3,679        4,309        8,056        3,236        3,889   

 Manufacturing

     475        620        633        521        578   

 Construction

     83        95        27        24        67   

 Property

     167        195        123        247        213   

 Government and central bank

     1,399        1,775        1,136               429   

 Energy and water

     733        717        478        393        385   

 Wholesale and retail distribution and leisure

     170        212        179        100        167   

 Business and other services

     375        361        444        638        368   

 Home loans

     244        362        352        273        502   

 Cards, unsecured loans and other personal lending

     1,497        1,356        1,285        1,158        815   

 Other

     722        485        631        521        594   
      

 Loans and advances to customers in Asia

     9,544        10,487        13,344        7,111        8,007   

428  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F


Additional information

Additional financial disclosure (unaudited)

 

Interest rate sensitivity of loans and

advances

 

        

 

2015

 

  

 

             

 

2014

 

  

 

     

As at 31 December

 

  

 

 

 

 

 

 

Fixed rate

 

£m

 

 

  

 

  

 

  

 

 

 

 

 

 

Variable rate

 

£m

 

 

  

 

  

 

  

 

 

 

 

 

 

Total

 

£m

 

 

  

 

  

 

  

 

 

 

 

 

 

Fixed rate

 

£m

 

 

  

 

  

 

  

 

 

 

 

 

 

Variable rate

 

£m

 

 

  

 

  

 

  

 

 

 

 

 

 

Total

 

£m

 

 

  

 

  

 

 

Banks

 

   

 

12,348  

 

  

 

   

 

29,001  

 

  

 

   

 

41,349  

 

  

 

   

 

12,949  

 

  

 

   

 

29,162  

 

  

 

   

 

42,111  

 

  

 

 

Customers

 

   

 

      121,960  

 

  

 

   

 

      282,178  

 

  

 

   

 

      404,138  

 

  

 

   

 

      134,086  

 

  

 

   

 

      299,136  

 

  

 

   

 

      433,222  

 

  

 

Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  429


Additional information

Additional financial disclosure (unaudited)

  

Foreign outstandings in currencies other than the local currency of the borrower for countries where this exceeds 0.75% of total

Group assets

  

  

       

As % of

 

     

Total

 

     

Banks

 

and other

 

financial

 

institutions

 

     

Government

 

and official

 

institutions

 

     

 

Commercial

 

industrial

 

and other

 

private

 

sectors

 

 
       

assets

 

     

£m

 

     

£m

 

     

£m

 

     

£m

 

 
       
 

As at 31 December 2015a

                    
 

United States

     6.9        76,744        11,648        18,422        46,674   
 

Germany

     1.7        18,564        10,054        5,916        2,594   
 

France

     1.6        18,388        6,250        7,694        4,444   
 

Netherlands

     0.9        10,574        1,074        3,208        6,292   
 

Cayman Islands

     1.0        10,748        78               10,669   
 

Switzerland

     0.8        9,336        1,452        6,642        1,242   
 

    

                                                       
 

 

As at 31 December 2014

                    
 

United States

     6.2        84,606        7,196        23,409        54,001   
 

Germany

     1.4        19,481        8,381        8,620        2,480   
 

France

     2.0        26,884        12,632        5,919        8,333   
 

Netherlands

     1.1        15,080        1,437        3,279        10,364   
 

Cayman Islands

     0.9        12,480        49               12,430   
 

    

                                   
 

As at 31 December 2013

                    
 

United States

     6.3        82,471        7,656        15,997        58,818   
 

Germany

     2.1        27,584        6,757        5,785        15,042   
 

France

     2.9        38,350        18,038        9,422        10,890   
 

Netherlands

     1.2        15,184        3,132        4,450        7,602   
 

Spain

             1.0                12,622        9,111        1,068        2,443   

  

 

Off-Balance Sheet and other Credit Exposures

 

  

 

 

 

 

2015

 

 

  

 

  

 

 

 

 

2014

 

 

  

 

  

 

 

 

 

2013

 

 

  

 

  

As at 31 December

 

   

 

£m

 

  

 

   

 

£m

 

  

 

   

 

£m

 

  

 

 

Off-balance sheet exposures

      
 

Contingent liabilities

   20,621      21,324      21,184   
 

Commitments

           282,307              291,262              275,571   
 

On-balance sheet exposures

      
 

Trading portfolio assets

   77,348      114,717      133,069   
 

Financial assets designated at fair value

   76,830      38,300      38,968   
 

Derivative financial instruments

   327,709      439,909      350,300   
  

Available for sale financial investments

 

   

 

90,267 

 

  

 

   

 

86,066 

 

  

 

   

 

91,756 

 

  

 

           
  

 

Notional principal amounts of credit derivatives

 

  

 

 

 

 

2015

 

 

  

 

  

 

 

 

 

2014

 

 

  

 

  

 

 

 

 

2013

 

 

  

 

  

As at 31 December

 

   

 

£m

 

  

 

   

 

£m

 

  

 

   

 

£m

 

  

 

  

 

Credit derivatives held or issued for trading purposesb

 

  

 

 

 

 

948,646 

 

 

  

 

  

 

 

 

 

1,183,963 

 

 

  

 

  

 

 

 

 

1,576,184 

 

 

  

 

 

Notional principal amounts of credit derivatives

 

  

 

 

 

 

2016

 

 

 

 

  

 

 

 

 

2015

 

 

 

 

  

 

 

 

 

2014

 

 

 

 

As at 31 December

 

   

 

£m

 

 

 

   

 

£m

 

 

 

   

 

£m

 

 

 

 

Credit derivatives held or issued for trading purposesa

 

   

 

    947,800 

 

 

 

   

 

948,646 

 

 

 

   

 

1,183,963 

 

 

 

Note

 

aFigures are net of short securities.
bIncludes credit derivatives held as economic hedges which are not designated as hedges for accounting purposes.

430  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F


Additional information

Additional financial disclosure (unaudited)

Additional Related Parties disclosures

For US disclosure purposes, the aggregate emoluments of all Directors and Officers of Barclays PLC who held office during the year (2015:(2016:32, 2015: 32 persons, 2014: 33 persons, 2013: 37 persons) for the year ended 31st December 20152016 amounted to £71m (2015: £52.2m, (2014: £56.9m, 2013: £70.0m)2014: £56.9m). In addition, the aggregate amount set aside for the year ended 31st December 2015,2016, to provide pension benefits for the Directors and Officers amounted to £0.3m (2014: £0.3m, 2013: £0.6m)£0.2m (2015:£ 0.3m 2014: £0.3m).

 

Selected financial statistics

   2015     2014     2013     2012     2011  
   

 

 

 

%

 

  

  

 

 

 

%

 

  

  

 

 

 

%

 

  

  

 

 

 

%

 

  

  

 

 

 

%

 

  

Return on average shareholders’ equitya

   1.4     0.8     1.6     (0.5   5.6  

Return on average total assetsb

   0.1     -     0.1     -     0.2  

Average shareholders’ equity as a percentage of average total assets

   5.2     4.8     4.5     4.2     3.9  
          
    2015      2014      2013      2012      2011   

Selected income statement data

  

 

 

 

£m

 

  

  

 

 

 

£m

 

  

  

 

 

 

£m

 

  

  

 

 

 

£m

 

  

  

 

 

 

£m

 

  

Continuing operations

          

Interest income

   17,195     17,369     18,315     19,211     20,589  

Interest expense

   (3,882   (5,231   (6,662   (7,561   (8,393

Non-interest income

   13,442     13,677     16,810     13,807     20,927  

Operating expenses

   (20,677   (20,423   (21,974   (21,007   (20,881

Impairment charges

   (2,114   (2,168   (3,071   (3,340   (5,602

Share of post-tax results of associates and joint ventures

   47     36     (56   110     60  

Profit on disposal of subsidiaries, associates and joint ventures

   (637   (471   6     28     (94

Gain on acquisitions

   -     -     26     2     -  

Profit before tax

   2,841     2,309     2,885     650     5,865  

Profit attributable to equity holders of the parent

   911     528     963     (306   3,533  
          
    2015      2014      2013      2012      2011   

Selected balance sheet data

  

 

 

 

£m

 

  

  

 

 

 

£m

 

  

  

 

 

 

£m

 

  

  

 

 

 

£m

 

  

  

 

 

 

£m

 

  

Total shareholders’ equity

   66,019     63,794     63,220     59,923     63,933  

Subordinated liabilities

   21,955     21,685     22,249     24,422     24,870  

Deposits from banks, customer accounts and debt securities in issue

   534,537     572,357     574,340     587,787     592,460  

Loans and advances to banks and customers

   441,046     470,424     474,059     472,809     485,277  

Total assets

   1,120,727     1,358,693     1,344,201     1,512,777     1,588,555  

Notes

aReturn on average shareholders’ equity represents profit attributable to the equity holders of the parent as a percentage of average shareholders’ equity.
bReturn on average total assets represents profit attributable to the equity holders of the parent as a percentage of average total assets.

Ratio of earnings to fixed charges – Barclays Plc

 

          
   

 

 

 

 

            2016

 

 

 

 

  

 

 

 

 

            2015

 

 

 

 

  

 

 

 

 

            2014

 

 

 

 

  

 

 

 

 

            2013

 

 

 

 

  

 

 

 

 

            2012

 

 

 

 

   

 

 

 

 

(In £m except for ratios)

 

 

 

 

 

Fixed charges

          

Interest expense

   4,004    3,345    4,108    4,904    5,330 

Rental expense

   208    157    207    221    213 

Total Fixed charges

   4,212    3,502    4,315    5,125    5,543 

Earnings

          

Income before taxes andnon-controlling interests

   3,230    1,146    1,313    1,879    (175) 

Less: unremittedpre-tax income of associated companies and joint ventures

   (53)    (26)    (34)    102    (94) 

Total earnings excluding fixed charges

   3,177    1,120    1,279    1,981    (269) 

Fixed charges

   4,212    3,502    4,315    5,125    5,543 

Total earnings including fixed charges

   7,389    4,622    5,594    7,106    5,274 

Ratio of earnings to fixed charges

   1.75    1.32    1.30    1.39    0.95 

Ratio of earnings to fixed charges and preference shares –

Barclays Plc

 

          
   

 

 

 

 

2016

 

 

 

 

  

 

 

 

 

2015

 

 

 

 

  

 

 

 

 

2014

 

 

 

 

  

 

 

 

 

2013

 

 

 

 

  

 

 

 

 

2012

 

 

 

 

   

 

 

 

 

(In £m except for ratios)

 

 

 

 

Fixed charges, preference share dividends and similar appropriations

          

Interest expense

   4,004    3,345     4,108     4,904     5,330  

Rental expense

   208    157     207     221     213  

Fixed charges

   4,212    3,502     4,315     5,125     5,543  

Preference share dividends and similar appropriations

   343    345     443     412     466  

Total fixed charges

   4,555    3,847     4,758     5,537     6,009  

Earnings

          

Income before taxes andnon-controlling interests

   3,230    1,146     1,313     1,879     (175) 

Less: unremittedpre-tax income of associated companies and joint ventures

   (53)    (26)    (34)    102     (94) 

Total earnings excluding fixed charges

   3,177    1,120     1,279     1,981     (269) 

Fixed charges

   4,555    3,847     4,758     5,537     6,009  

Total earnings including fixed charges

   7,732    4,967     6,037     7,518     5,740  

Ratio of earnings to fixed charges, preference share dividends and similar appropriations

   1.70    1.29     1.27     1.36     0.96  

 

Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  431


Additional information

Additional financial disclosure (unaudited)

 

Ratio of earnings to fixed charges – Barclays Plc

 

          
     

 

 

 

 

            2015

 

 

  

 

  

 

 

 

 

            2014

 

 

  

 

  

 

 

 

 

            2013

 

 

  

 

  

 

 

 

 

            2012

 

 

  

 

  

 

 

 

 

            2011

 

 

  

 

     

 

 

 

 

(In £m except for ratios)

 

 

  

 

 

Fixed charges

          
 

Interest expense

   4,643     5,283     6,715     7,557     8,388  
 

Rental expense

 

   

 

211

 

  

 

   

 

261

 

  

 

   

 

254

 

  

 

   

 

251

 

  

 

   

 

268

 

  

 

       
  

Total Fixed charges

 

   

 

4,854

 

  

 

   

 

5,544

 

  

 

   

 

6,969

 

  

 

   

 

7,808

 

  

 

   

 

8,656

 

  

 

 

Earnings

          
 

Income before taxes and non-controlling interests

   2,073     2,256     2,868     797     5,770  
  

Less: unremitted pre-tax income of associated companies and joint ventures

 

   

 

(34

 

 

   

 

(45

 

 

   

 

95

 

  

 

   

 

(113

 

 

   

 

(47

 

 

 

Total earnings excluding fixed charges

   2,039     2,211     2,963     684     5,723  
  

Fixed charges

 

   

 

4,854

 

  

 

   

 

5,544

 

  

 

   

 

6,969

 

  

 

   

 

7,808

 

  

 

   

 

8,656

 

  

 

  

Total earnings including fixed charges

 

   

 

6,893

 

  

 

   

 

7,755

 

  

 

   

 

9,932

 

  

 

   

 

8,492

 

  

 

   

 

14,379

 

  

 

  

Ratio of earnings to fixed charges

 

   

 

1.42

 

  

 

   

 

1.40

 

  

 

   

 

1.43

 

  

 

   

 

1.09

 

  

 

   

 

1.66

 

  

 

 

Ratio of earnings to fixed charges and preference shares –

Barclays Plc

 

          
     

 

 

 

 

2015

 

 

  

 

  

 

 

 

 

2014

 

 

  

 

  

 

 

 

 

2013

 

 

  

 

  

 

 

 

 

2012

 

 

  

 

  

 

 

 

 

2011

 

 

  

 

     

 

 

 

 

(In £m except for ratios)

 

 

  

 

 

Fixed charges, preference share dividends and similar appropriations

          
 

Interest expense

   4,643     5,283     6,715     7,557     8,388  
  

Rental expense

 

   

 

211

 

  

 

   

 

261

 

  

 

   

 

254

 

  

 

   

 

251

 

  

 

   

 

268

 

  

 

 

Fixed charges

   4,854     5,544     6,969     7,808     8,656  
  

Preference share dividends and similar appropriations

 

   

 

345

 

  

 

   

 

443

 

  

 

   

 

412

 

  

 

   

 

466

 

  

 

   

 

514

 

  

 

  

Total fixed charges

 

   

 

5,199

 

  

 

   

 

5,987

 

  

 

   

 

7,381

 

  

 

   

 

8,274

 

  

 

   

 

9,170

 

  

 

 

Earnings

          
 

Income before taxes and non-controlling interests

   2,073     2,256     2,868     797     5,770  
  

Less: unremitted pre-tax income of associated companies and joint ventures

 

   

 

(34

 

 

   

 

(45

 

 

   

 

95

 

  

 

   

 

(113

 

 

   

 

(47

 

 

 

Total earnings excluding fixed charges

   2,039     2,211     2,963     684     5,723  
  

Fixed charges

 

   

 

5,199

 

  

 

   

 

5,987

 

  

 

   

 

7,381

 

  

 

   

 

8,274

 

  

 

   

 

9,170

 

  

 

  

Total earnings including fixed charges

 

   

 

7,238

 

  

 

   

 

8,198

 

  

 

   

 

10,344

 

  

 

   

 

8,958

 

  

 

   

 

14,893

 

  

 

  

Ratio of earnings to fixed charges, preference share dividends and similar appropriations

 

   

 

1.39

 

  

 

   

 

1.37

 

  

 

   

 

1.40

 

  

 

   

 

1.08

 

  

 

   

 

1.62

 

  

 

432426  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 20152016 Annual Report on Form 20-F  


Independent Registered Public Accounting Firm’s Report

    

 

 

Report of Independent Registered Public Accounting Firm

To the Board of Directors and Shareholders of Barclays Bank PLC

In our opinion, the accompanying consolidated balance sheets and the related consolidated income statements, statements of comprehensive income, consolidated statements of changes in equity and consolidated cash flow statements present fairly, in all material respects, the financial position of Barclays Bank PLC (“the Bank”) and its subsidiaries at 31 December 20152016 and 31 December 2014,2015, and the results of their operations and their cash flows for each of the three years in the period ended 31 December 20152016 in conformity with International Financial Reporting Standards as issued by the International Accounting Standards Board. These financial statements are the responsibility of the Bank’s management. Our responsibility is to express an opinion on these financial statements based on our audits. We conducted our audits in accordance with the standards of the Public Company Accounting Oversight Board (United States). Those standards require that we plan and perform the audits to obtain reasonable assurance about whether the financial statements are free of material misstatement. An audit includes examining, on a test basis, evidence supporting the amounts and disclosures in the financial statements, assessing the accounting principles used and significant estimates made by management, and evaluating the overall financial statement presentation. We believe that our audits provide a reasonable basis for our opinion.

/s/ PricewaterhouseCoopers LLP

PricewaterhouseCoopers LLP

London, United Kingdom

2922 February 2016

2017

 

  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 20152016 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  433427


Barclays Bank PLC dataPresentation of information

 

 

[•••] Consolidated income statement

[•••] Consolidated statement of comprehensive income

[•••] Consolidated balance sheet

[•••] Consolidated statement of changes in equity

[•••] Consolidated cash flow statement

[•••] Notes to the accounts

[•••] Additional Financial data

Barclays Bank PLC is a public limited company, registered in England under company number 1026167. The bank was incorporated on 7 August 1925 under the Colonial Bank Act 1925 and on the 4 October 1971 was registered as a company limited by shares under the Companies Act 1948 to 1967. Pursuant to The Barclays Bank Act 1984, on 1 January 1985 the Bank was registered as a public limited company and its name was changed from Barclays Bank International Limited to Barclays Bank PLC.

All of the issued ordinary share capital of Barclays Bank PLC is owned by Barclays PLC.

Barclays approach to disclosures

The Group aims to continually enhance its disclosures and their usefulness to the readers of the financial statements in the light of developing market practice and areas of focus. Consequently Barclays disclosures go beyond the minimum standards required by accounting standards and other regulatory requirements.

Barclays continue to support the recommendations and guidance made by the Enhanced Disclosure Taskforce (EDTF). The EDTF was formed by the Financial Stability Board with a remit to broaden and deepen the risk disclosures of global banks in a number of areas, including liquidity and funding, credit risk and market risk. Barclays has adopted the recommendations across the Annual Report and Pillar 3 report.

In line with the Financial Reporting Council’s guidance on Clear and Concise reporting. Barclays has focused reporting on material items and sought to reorganise information to aid users understanding.

It is Barclays view that best in class disclosures will continue to evolve in light of ongoing market and stakeholder engagement with the banking sector. Barclays are committed to engaging with a published Code for Financial Reporting Disclosure (the Code). The Code sets out five disclosure principles together with supporting guidance which states that UK banks will:

Provide high quality, meaningful and decision-useful disclosures;

Review and enhance their financial instrument disclosures for key areas of interest;

Assess the applicability and relevance of good practice recommendations to their disclosures acknowledging the importance of such guidance;

Seek to enhance the comparability of financial statement disclosures across the UK banking sector; and

Clearly differentiate in their annual reports between information that is audited and information that is unaudited.

On 1 March 2016, Barclays announced its intention to sell down the Group’s interest in BAGL. This sell down is intended to be to a level which will permit deconsolidation from an accounting and regulatory perspective, subject to shareholder and regulatory approvals as required. As the Africa Banking Business meets requirements for presentation as a discontinued operation, these results have been presented as two lines on the face of the Group income statement, representing the profit after tax andnon-controlling interest in respect of the discontinued operation.

British Bankers’ Association (BBA) Code for Financial Reporting Disclosure

Barclays has adopted the BBA Code for Financial Reporting Disclosure and has prepared the 2016 Annual Report and Accounts in compliance with the Code.

Statutory Accounts

The consolidated accounts of Barclays PLC and its subsidiaries are set out on pages 216 to 316 along with the accounts of Barclays PLC itself on pages224 to 225. The accounting policies on pages 226 to 230 and the Notes commencing on page 226 apply equally to both sets of accounts unless otherwise stated.

The financial statements have been prepared on going concern basis, in accordance with The Companies Act 2006 as applicable to companies using IFRS.

Capital RequirementsCountry-by Country Reporting

HM Treasury has transposed the requirements set out under CRD IV and issued the Capital RequirementsCountry-by-Country Reporting Regulations 2013. The legislation requires Barclays PLC to publish additional information in respect of the year ended 31 December 2016. This information is available on the Barclays’s website:barclays.com/citizenship/reports-and-publications/country-snapshot.html

428  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2016 Annual Report on Form 20-F


Barclays Bank PLC data

More extensive disclosures are contained in the Barclays PLC Results Announcement for the period ended 31 December 2016, attached, including risk exposures and business performance, which are materially the same as those for Barclays Bank PLC.

Barclays Bank PLC is a wholly owned subsidiary of Barclays PLC, which is the Group’s ultimate parent company. The business activities of Barclays Bank PLC Group and Barclays PLC Group are fundamentally the same as the only difference isdifferences are the holding company, Barclays PLC and following a restructure in November 2016, the Group Service Company transferring from Barclays Bank PLC to Barclays PLC. Reporting

Differences between Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC results can be summarised as follows:

Balance Sheet Asset size – Barclays PLC £1,213,126m, Barclays Bank PLC £1,213,955m

Income Statement Profit before tax – Barclays PLC £2,828m, Barclays Bank PLC £3,729m

The differences betweenoccur primarily due to the following reasons:

Funding structures

Cash flow hedging

Group Service Company

More detail regarding the main differences is described below.

Funding structures

 Instrument Type  Barclays PLC        

 

£m

  Barclays Bank PLC      

 

£m

 Preference shares  -  5,836

 

 Other shareholders’ equity

  -  271

 

 Non-controlling interests (NCI)

  6,492  3,522

Preference shares and capital notes issued by Barclays Bank PLC are included within share capital in Barclays Bank PLC, and where still outstanding are presented asnon-controlling interests in the financial statements of Barclays PLC are driven by the holding company and resulting differences in funding structures. The significant differences are described below.Group.

 

Instrument Type

     

 

 

Barclays PLC

 

£m

  

 

  

  

 

 

Barclays Bank PLC

 

£m

  

 

  

  Primary reason for difference

Preference shares

 

     

 

-

 

  

 

  

 

5,486

 

  

 

  

Preference shares and capital notes issued by Barclays Bank PLC are included within share capital in Barclays Bank PLC, and presented as non-controlling interests in the financial statements of Barclays PLC Group.

 

 

Other shareholders’ equity

 

    

 

 

 

 

-

 

 

  

 

 

 

 

 

 

485

 

 

  

 

  

 

Non-controlling interests (NCI)

 

    

 

 

 

 

6,054

 

 

  

 

 

 

 

 

 

1,914

 

 

  

 

  

Treasury shares

     (68)    -    Barclays PLC shares held for the purposes of employee share schemes and for trading are recognised as available for sale investments and trading portfolio assets respectively within Barclays Bank PLC. Barclays PLC deducts these treasury shares from shareholders’ equity.

Capital Redemption Reserve (CRR)

     394    24    Arising from the redemption or exchange of Barclays PLC or Barclays Bank PLC shares respectively.
 Instrument TypeBarclays PLC        

£m

Barclays Bank PLC      

£m

 Treasury shares(42)-

Barclays PLC shares held for the purposes of employee share schemes and for trading are recognised as available for sale investments and trading portfolio assets respectively within Barclays Bank PLC. Barclays PLC deducts these treasury shares from shareholders’ equity.

 Instrument Type  Barclays PLC        

 

£m

  Barclays Bank PLC      

 

£m

 Capital Redemption Reserve (CRR)  394  38

Arising from the redemption or exchange of Barclays PLC or Barclays Bank PLC shares respectively

 

 Instrument Type

  

 

Barclays PLC
£m

    

 

Barclays Bank PLC      
£m

 Derivative financial instruments

  346,626    346,820

 Loans and advances to banks

  43,251    43,634

 Subordinated liabilities

  (23,383)    (23,871)

Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2016 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  429


Barclays Bank PLC Contingent Capital Notes (CCNs)data

Barclays Bank PLC has in issue two series of contingent capital notes (CCNs). These both pay interest and principal to the holder unless the consolidated CRD IV CET 1 ratio (FSA October 2012 transitional statement) of Barclays PLC falls below 7%, in which case they are cancelled from the Barclays PLC consolidated perspective. The coupon payable on the CCNs is higher than a market rate of interest for a similar note without this risk.

434  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F


Barclays Bank PLC holds a derivative asset and loan relating to these issuances. The CCN is included in subordinated liabilities and has a higher carrying value in Barclays Bank PLC due to the higher fair value on initial recognition.

 

Cash flow hedging

 

    

 

 Instrument Type

  

 

Barclays PLC

 

£m

   

 

Barclays Bank PLC      

 

£m

 

 Income Statement

    

 Net interest income

   10,537    11,457 

 Tax

   (993)    (1,245) 

 Equity

    

 Cash flow hedging reserve

   2,105    954 

The accounting for these instruments differs between the consolidated financial statements of Barclays PLC andcash flow hedging reserve is larger than Barclays Bank PLC as follows:

In the case of the 7.625% CCN issuance, the cancellation is effected by an automatic legal transfer of title from the holder to Barclays PLC. In these circumstances, Barclays Bank PLC remains liable to Barclays PLC. Barclays Bank PLC does not benefit from the cancellation feature although it pays a higher than market rate for a similar note, and therefore the initial fair value of the note recognised was higher than par. The difference between fair value and par is amortised to the income statement over time.

In the case of the 7.75% CCN issuance, the cancellation is directly effected in Barclays Bank PLC. For Barclays Bank PLC, the cancellation feature is separately valued from the host liability as an embedded derivative with changes in fair value reported in the income statement. The initial fair value of the host liability recognised was higher than par by the amount of the initial fair value of the derivative and the difference is amortised to the income statement over time.

Cash flow hedge

Barclays Bank PLC is no longer expected to be exposed to floatingthe same variable rate cash flows on assets which had previously been designated in cash flow hedges.flows. This is as a direct result of anticipated bank ring fencing and the transfer of these assets to an entity which is not expected to be consolidated by Barclays Bank PLC (although is expected to be consolidated by Barclays PLC). There is also a difference in the income statement due to variance in income and tax due to cash flow hedging not included in Barclays Bank PLC.

As a result,Group Service Company

The ownership of the Group service company was transferred in November 2016 contributing to the following key differences between Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC.

 

 Instrument Type

  

 

Barclays PLC

 

£m

  

 

Barclays Bank PLC      

 

£m

 Staff costs

  (9,423)  (9,211)

 Administration and general expenses

  (2,917)  (3,200)

Employees within the Group Service Company reallocated from Barclays Bank PLC has recycled amountsas part of the restructure. Therefore these staff costs are only shown in Barclays PLC. Group Service Company recharged costs to Barclays Bank PLC leading to higher expenses. These are eliminated on consolidation in Barclays PLC.

 

 Instrument Type

  

 

Barclays PLC

 

£m

    

 

Barclays Bank PLC      

 

£m

 Prepayments, accrued income and other assets

  2,893    4,011

Barclays Bank PLC recognises a receivable from the Group Service Company which had been deferred intois eliminated on consolidation in Barclays PLC. The Bank funded acquisition of shares on behalf of the cash flow hedge reserve pertainingGroup Service Company to these cash flowssatisfy employee share awards creating a receivable of £1bn.

 

 Instrument Type

  

 

Barclays PLC      

 

£m

  

 

Barclays Bank PLC      

 

£m

 Goodwill and intangibles

  7,726  7,348

 Property, plant and equipment

  2,825  2,466

 Customer accounts

  (423,178)  (424,703)

 Debt securities in issue

  (75,932)  (75,369)

 Provisions

  (4,134)  (3,909)

Differences driven by Group Service Company balances reflected in Barclays PLC only, or in the case of customer accounts, intercompany balances between Group Service Company and has prospectively discontinued its hedge accounting relationshipsBarclays Bank Plc, which eliminate on these cash flows, which has increased its income statement volatility. During Q4 2015 this has resultedconsolidation in a net pre-tax income of £692m.Barclays PLC.

 

430  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 20152016 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  435


Barclays Bank PLC data

Consolidated income statement

 

 

 

         2015       2014      2013

For the year ended 31 December

     

 

Notes

 

  

 

     

 

£m

 

  

 

     

 

£m

 

  

 

    

£m

 

For the year ended 31 December 2016

   Notes      

 

2016

 

£m

 

 

 

   

 

2015

 

£m

 

 

 

   

 

2014

 

£m

 

 

 

Continuing operations

                          

Interest income

     a       17,195        17,369       18,315    a      14,423    13,947    14,200 

Interest expense

     

 

a

 

  

 

     

 

(3,882)

 

  

 

     

 

(5,231)

 

  

 

    

(6,662)

 

   a      (2,966)    (2,584)    (4,056) 

Net interest income

          

 

13,313 

 

  

 

     

 

12,138 

 

  

 

    

11,653 

 

        11,457    11,363    10,144 

Fee and commission income

     b       9,679        9,850       10,500    b      8,625    8,494    8,636 

Fee and commission expense

     

 

b

 

  

 

     

 

(1,763)

 

  

 

     

 

(1,662)

 

  

 

    

(1,748)

 

   b      (1,789)    (1,611)    (1,500) 

Net fee and commission income

          

 

7,916 

 

  

 

     

 

8,188 

 

  

 

    

8,752 

 

        6,836    6,883    7,136 

Net trading income

     c       3,627        3,310       6,548    c      2,795    3,430    3,064 

Net investment income

     d       1,138        1,328       680    d��     1,324    1,097    1,309 

Net premiums from insurance contracts

         709        669       732 

Other income

          

 

52 

 

  

 

     

 

182 

 

  

 

    

98 

 

        57    35    157 

Total income

          

 

26,755 

 

  

 

     

 

25,815 

 

  

 

    

28,463 

 

        22,469    22,808    21,810 

Net claims and benefits incurred on insurance contracts

          

 

(533)

 

  

 

     

 

(480)

 

  

 

    

(509)

 

Total income net of insurance claims

         26,222        25,335       27,954 

Credit impairment charges and other credit provisions

     

 

 

  

 

     

 

(2,114)

 

  

 

     

 

(2,168)

 

  

 

    

(3,071)

 

   7      (2,373)    (1,762)    (1,821) 

Net operating income

          

 

24,108 

 

  

 

     

 

23,167 

 

  

 

    

24,883 

 

        20,096    21,046    19,989 

Staff costs

     8       (9,960)       (11,005)      (12,155)   8      (9,211)    (8,853)    (9,860) 

Infrastructure costs

     e       (3,180)       (3,443)      (3,531)   e      (2,937)    (2,691)    (2,895) 

Administration and general expenses

     e       (3,528)       (3,615)      (4,288)   e      (3,200)    (2,983)    (3,063) 

Provisions for UK customer redress

     27       (2,772)       (1,110)      (2,000)   27      (1,000)    (2,772)    (1,110) 

Provision for ongoing investigations and litigation including Foreign Exchange

     

 

27

 

  

 

     

 

(1,237)

 

  

 

     

 

(1,250)

 

  

 

    

 

   27         (1,237)    (1,250) 

Operating expenses

          

 

(20,677)

 

  

 

     

 

(20,423)

 

  

 

    

(21,974)

 

        (16,348)    (18,536)    (18,178) 

Share of post-tax results of associates and joint ventures

         47        36       (56)       70    41    28 

(Loss)/gains on disposal of subsidiaries, associates and joint ventures

     9       (637)       (471)      

Gain on acquisitions

          

 

 

  

 

     

 

 

  

 

    

26 

 

Profit before tax

         2,841        2,309       2,885 

Loss/(gains) on disposal of subsidiaries, associates and joint ventures

   9      565    (637)    (473) 

Profit before tax from continuing operations

       4,383    1,914    1,366 

Tax

     

 

f

 

  

 

     

 

(1,603)

 

  

 

     

 

(1,455)

 

  

 

    

(1,577)

 

   f      (1,245)    (1,302)    (1,165) 

Profit after tax from continuing operations

        3,138    612    201 

Profit after tax from discontinued operations

        591    626    653 

Profit after tax

          

 

1,238 

 

  

 

     

 

854 

 

  

 

    

1,308 

 

        3,729    1,238    854 

Attributable to:

                

Equity holders of the Parent

         911        528       963        2,867    566    85 

Other equity holders

   n      457    345    443 

Non-controlling interests

     

 

n

 

  

 

     

 

327 

 

  

 

     

 

326 

 

  

 

    

345 

 

          

Profit attributable tonon-controlling interests in respect of continuing operations

       3    3    6 

Profit attributable tonon-controlling interests in respect of discontinued operations

        402    324    320 

Profit after tax

          

 

1,238 

 

  

 

     

 

854 

 

  

 

    

1,308 

 

        3,729    1,238    854 

The note numbers refer to the notes on pages 218226 to 305,316, whereas the note letters refer to Barclays Bank PLC supplementary notes on pages 442436 to 453.446.

Barclays Bank PLC supplementary notes provided on pages 442436 to 453446 cover the line items where there is a difference to Barclays PLC.

 

436Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2016 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  431


Barclays Bank PLC data

Consolidated statement of comprehensive income

 For the year ended 31 December   

            2016

£m

 

 

   

            2015

£m

 

 

   

            2014

£m

 

 

 Profit after tax   3,729    1,238    854 
 Profit after tax from continuing operations   3,138    612    201 
 Profit after tax from discontinued operations   591    626    653 
 Other comprehensive income/(loss) for continuing operations:      
 Currency translation reservea      

 

 - Currency translation differences

   3,027    748    774 

 

  Available for sale reservea

      

 

 - Net gains from changes in fair value

   2,178    60    5,352 

 

 - Net losses transferred to net profit on disposal

   (912)    (377)    (619) 

 

 - Net losses/(gains) transferred to net profit due to impairment

   20    17    (31) 

 

 - Net losses transferred to net profit due to fair value hedging

   (1,677)    (148)    (4,074) 

 

 - Changes in insurance liabilities

   53    86    (94) 

 

 - Tax

   (18)    132    (103) 

 

 Cash flow hedging reservea

      

 

 - Net gains/(losses) from changes in fair value

   689    (990)    2,651 

 

 - Net losses transferred to net profit

   (431)    (276)    (713) 

 

 - Tax

   (59)    221    (384) 

 

 Other

   47    19    (19) 
 Total comprehensive income/(loss) that may be recycled to profit and loss   2,917    (508)    2,740 
 Other comprehensive income/(loss) not recycled to profit and loss:               
 Retirement benefit remeasurements   (1,309)    1,179    268 
 Tax   329    (260)    (63) 
 Total comprehensive income for the year, net of tax from continuing operations   5,075    1,023    3,146 

 

 

 Total comprehensive income/(loss) for the year, net of tax from discontinued operations

   2,111    (720)    346 
 Total comprehensive income for the year   7,186    303    3,492 
 Attributable to:      

 

 Equity holders of the Parent

   5,947    457    3,245 

 

 Non-controlling interests

   1,239    (154)    247 
    7,186    303    3,492 

Notes

a  For further details refer to Note l

432  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 20152016 Annual Report on Form 20-F  


Barclays Bank PLC data

Consolidated statement of comprehensive incomebalance sheet

 

 

     2015        2014       2013 

For the year ended 31 December

 

     

 

£m 

 

  

 

     

 

£m 

 

  

 

    

£m 

 

Profit after tax

 

     

 

1,238 

 

  

 

     

 

854 

 

  

 

    

1,308 

 

Other comprehensive (loss)/income for continuing operations:

            

Currency translation reservea

            

- Currency translation differences

     (476)       486       (1,767)

Available for sale reservea

            

- Net gains/(losses) from changes in fair value

     44        5,346       (2,730)

- Net gains transferred to net profit on disposal

     (377)       (619)      (145)

- Net losses/(gains) transferred to net profit due to impairment

     17        (31)      (7)

- Net (gains)/losses transferred to net profit due to fair value hedging

     (148)       (4,074)      2,376 

- Changes in insurance liabilities

     86        (94)      28 

- Tax

     132        (102)      100 

Cash flow hedging reservea

            

- Net (losses)/gains from changes in fair value

     (1,091)       2,687       (1,914)

- Net gains transferred to net profit

     (276)       (767)      (547)

- Tax

     221        (380)      571 

Other

 

     

 

19 

 

  

 

     

 

(19)

 

  

 

    

(37)

 

Total comprehensive (loss)/income that may be recycled to profit and loss

     (1,849)       2,433       (4,072)

Other comprehensive income/(loss) not recycled to profit and loss:

 

                   

Retirement benefit remeasurements

     1,174        268       (512)

Tax

 

     

 

(260)

 

  

 

     

 

(63)

 

  

 

    

(3)

 

Other comprehensive (loss)/income for the year

 

     

 

(935)

 

  

 

     

 

2,638 

 

  

 

    

(4,587)

 

Total comprehensive income/(loss) for the year

 

     

 

303 

 

  

 

     

 

3,492 

 

  

 

    

(3,279)

 

Attributable to:

            

Equity holders of the Parent

     457        3,245       (2,979)

Non-controlling interests

 

     

 

(154)

 

  

 

     

 

247 

 

  

 

    

(300)

 

      

 

303 

 

  

 

     

 

3,492 

 

  

 

    

(3,279)

 

Notes

aFor further details refer to Note m

Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  437


Barclays Bank PLC data

Consolidated balance sheet

      2015     2014    2013     

 

 

31 December

 

2016

 

 

 

 

 

   

 

 

31 December

 

2015

 

 

 

 

 

  

31 December

 

2014

 

As at 31 December

   Notes     £m     £m    £m

As at 31.12.2016

   Notes    £m    £m   £m

Assets

                

Cash and balances at central banks

     49,711      39,695     45,687      102,328    49,711   39,695

Items in the course of collection from other banks

     1,011      1,210     1,282      1,467    1,011   1,210

Trading portfolio assets

        77,398      114,755     133,089    g    80,255    77,398   114,755

Financial assets designated at fair value

   14      76,830      38,300     38,968    13    78,608    76,830   38,300

Derivative financial instruments

        327,870      440,076     350,460    j    346,820    327,870   440,076

Available for sale investments

        90,304      86,105     91,788 

Financial investments

   h    63,365    90,304   86,105

Loans and advances to banks

        41,829      42,657     39,822    i    43,634    41,829   42,657

Loans and advances to customers

        399,217      427,767     434,237    i    392,783    399,217   427,767

Reverse repurchase agreements and other similar secured lending

   22      28,187      131,753     186,779    21    13,454    28,187   131,753

Prepayments, accrued income and other assets

     3,027      3,604     3,919      4,011    3,027   3,604

Investments in associates and joint ventures

   39      573      711     653    39    684    573   711

Property, plant and equipment

   23      3,468      3,786     4,216    22    2,466    3,468   3,786

Goodwill and intangible assets

   24      8,222      8,180     7,685    23    7,348    8,222   8,180

Current tax assets

        385      334     181    f    501    385   334

Deferred tax assets

   10      4,495      4,130     4,807    10    4,763    4,495   4,130

Retirement benefit assets

   35      836      56     133    35    14    836   56

Non-current assets classified as held for disposal

   44      7,364      15,574     495 

Assets in disposal groups classified as held for disposal

   46    71,454    7,364   15,574

Total assets

      1,120,727      1,358,693     1,344,201       1,213,955    1,120,727   1,358,693

Liabilities

                

Deposits from banks

     47,080      58,390     55,615      48,214    47,080   58,390

Items in the course of collection due to other banks

     1,013      1,177     1,359      636    1,013   1,177

Customer accounts

     418,307      427,868     432,032      424,703    418,307   427,868

Repurchase agreements and other similar secured borrowing

   22      25,035      124,479     196,748    21    19,760    25,035   124,479

Trading portfolio liabilities

   13      33,967      45,124     53,464    12    34,687    33,967   45,124

Financial liabilities designated at fair value

   17      91,745      56,972     64,796    16    96,032    91,745   56,972

Derivative financial instruments

        324,252      439,320     347,118    j    340,487    324,252   439,320

Debt securities in issue

     69,150      86,099     86,693      75,369    69,150   86,099

Subordinated liabilities

        21,955      21,685     22,249    29    23,871    21,955   21,685

Accruals, deferred income and other liabilities

   26      10,612      11,432     13,673    25    8,951    10,612   11,432

Provisions

   27      4,142      4,135     3,886    26    3,909    4,142   4,135

Current tax liabilities

        930      1,023     1,042    f    708    930   1,023

Deferred tax liabilities

     100      255     348      4    100   255

Retirement benefit liabilities

   35      423      1,574     1,958    35    377    423   1,574

Liabilities included in disposal groups classified as held for sale

   44      5,997      13,115     –    45    65,292    5,997   13,115

Total liabilities

      1,054,708      1,292,648     1,280,981       1,143,000    1,054,708   1,292,648

Total equity

                

Called up share capital and share premium

        14,472      14,472     14,494    31    14,462    14,472   14,472

Other equity instruments

        5,350      4,350     2,078    31    6,486    5,350   4,350

Other reserves

        933      2,322     –   233    32    4,295    933   2,322

Retained earnings

      43,350      42,650     44,670       42,190    43,350   42,650

Total equity excluding non-controlling interests

     64,105      63,794     61,009      67,433    64,105   63,794

Non-controlling interests

        1,914      2,251     2,211    n    3,522    1,914   2,251

Total equity

      66,019      66,045     63,220       70,955    66,019   66,045

Total liabilities and equity

      1,120,727      1,358,693     1,344,201       1,213,955    1,120,727   1,358,693

The note numbers refer to the notes on pages 218226 to 305,316, whereas the note letters refer to those on pages 442436 to 453.446.

These financial statements have been approved for issue by the Board of Directors on 29 February 2016.

 

438  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 20152016 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  433


Barclays Bank PLC data

Consolidated statement of changes in equity

 

 

   

 

 

 
 

 
 

Called up

share

capital

and
share

premiuma
£m

  

  

  

  
  

  
  

   

 
 
 

Other

equity
instrumentsa
£m

  

  
  
  

   

 

 
 

Available

for sale

reserveb
£m

  

  

  
  

   

 

 

 
 

Cash

flow

hedging

reserveb
£m

  

  

  

  
  

   

 

 
 

Currency

translation

reserveb
£m

  

  

  
  

   
 
 

 
 

 

Other
reserves and
other

shareholders’
equitya

£m

  
  
  

  
  

  

   

 
 

Retained

earnings
£m

  

  
  

   
 
 
 
 
 
 
Total
equity
excluding
non-
controlling
interests
£m
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
   

 

 
 

Non-

controlling

interests
£m

  

  

  
  

   

 

 

Total

equity

£m

  

  

  

   

 

 

 

 

 

Called up

 

share

 

capital

 

and share

 

premiuma

 

£m

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

   

 

 

 

Other

 

equity

 

instrumentsa

 

£m

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

   

 

 

 

Available

 

for sale

 

reserveb

 

£m

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

   

 

 

 

 

Cash

 

flow

 

hedging

 

reserveb

 

£m

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

   

 

 

 

Currency

 

translation

 

reserveb

 

£m

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

   

 

 

 

 

 

Other

 

reserves and

 

other

 

shareholders’

 

equitya

 

£m

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

   

 

 

Retained

 

earnings

 

£m

 

 

 

 

 

   

 

 

 

 

 

 

Total

 

equity

 

excluding

 

non-

 

controlling

 

interests

 

£m

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

   

 

 

 

Non-

 

controlling

 

interests

 

£m

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

   

 

 

Total

 

equity

 

£m

 

 

 

 

 

Balance as at 1 January 2015

   14,472      4,350      578     1,817      (582)     509      42,650      63,794      2,251      66,045   

Balance at 1 January 2016

   14,472    5,350    338    709    (623)    509    43,350    64,105    1,914    66,019 

Profit after tax

   -        345      -        -        -        -        566      911      327      1,238      -    457    -    -    -    -    2,678    3,135    3    3,138 

Currency translation movements

   -        -        -        -        (41)     -        -        (41)     (435)     (476)     -    -    -    -    3,025    -    -    3,025    2    3,027 

Available for sale investments

   -        -        (240)     -        -        -        -        (240)     (6)     (246)     -    -    (356)    -    -    -    -    (356)    -    (356) 

Cash flow hedges

   -        -        -        (1,108)     -        -        -        (1,108)     (38)     (1,146)     -    -    -    199    -    -    -    199    -    199 

Pension remeasurement

   -        -        -        -        -        -        916      916      (2)     914      -    -    -    -    -    -    (980)    (980)    -    (980) 

Other

   -        -        -        -        -        -        19      19      -        19      (17)    -    -    -    -    -    64    47    -    47 

Other comprehensive income for the period from continuing operations

   (17)    457    (356)    199    3,025    -    1,762    5,070    5    5,075 

Other comprehensive income for the period from discontinued operations

   -    -    (4)    46    652    -    183    877    1,234    2,111 

Total comprehensive income for the year

   -        345      (240)     (1,108)     (41)     -        1,501      457      (154)     303      (17)    457    (360)    245    3,677    -    1,945    5,947    1,239    7,186 

Issue and exchange of equity instruments

   -        1,000      -        -        -        -        -        1,000      -        1,000      -    1,136    -    -    -    -    -    1,136    -    1,136 

Other equity instruments coupons paid

   -        (345)     -        -        -        -        70      (275)     -        (275)     -    (457)    -    -    -    -    128    (329)    -    (329) 

Equity settled share schemes

   -        -        -        -        -        -        571      571      -        571      -    -    -    -    -    -    577    577    -    577 

Vesting of Barclays PLC shares under share-based payment schemes

   -        -        -        -        -        -        (755)     (755)     -        (755)  

Redemption of preference shares

   -    -    -    -    -    (199)    (1,378)    (1,577)    -    (1,577) 

Dividends paid on ordinary shares

   -        -        -        -        -        -        (876)     (876)     (209)     (1,085)  

Vesting of shares under employee share schemes

   -    -    -    -    -    -    (414)    (414)    -    (414) 

Dividends paid on preference shares and other shareholders’ equity

   -        -        -        -        -        -        (343)     (343)     -        (343)  

Dividends paid

   -    -    -    -    -    -    (978)    (978)    (235)    (1,213) 

Capital contribution from Barclays PLC

   -    -    -    -    -    -    114    114    -    114 

Net equity impact of partial BAGL disposal

   -    -    -    -    -    -    (349)    (349)    601    252 

Net equity impact of Group Service Company disposal

   -    -    -    -    -    -    (806)    (806)    -    (806) 

Other reserve movements

   7    -    -    -    -    (1)    1    7    3    10 

Balance at 31st December 2016

   14,462    6,486    (22)    954    3,054    309    42,190    67,433    3,522    70,955 

Balance at 1 January 2015

   14,472    4,350    578    1,817    (582)    509    42,650    63,794    2,251    66,045 

Continuing Operations

                    

Profit after tax

   -    345    -    -    -    -    264    609    3    612 

Currency translation movements

   -    -    -    -    748    -    -    748    -    748 

Available for sale investments

   -    -    (230)    -    -    -    -    (230)    -    (230) 

Cash flow hedges

   -    -    -    (1,045)    -    -    -    (1,045)    -    (1,045) 

Pension remeasurement

   -    -    -    -    -    -    919    919    -    919 

Other

   -    -    -    -    -    -    19    19    -    19 
                    

Other comprehensive income for the period from continuing operations

   -    345    (230)    (1,045)    748    -    1,202    1,020    3    1,023 

Other comprehensive income for the period from discontinued operations

   -    -    (10)    (63)    (789)    -    299    (563)    (157)    (720) 

Total comprehensive income for the year

   -    345    (240)    (1,108)    (41)    -    1,501    457    (154)    303 

Issue of shares under employees share schemes

   -    -    -    -    -    -    571    571    -    571 

Issue and exchange of equity instruments

   -    1,000    -    -    -    -    -    1,000    -    1,000 

Other equity instruments coupons paid

   -    (345)    -    -    -    -    70    (275)    -    (275) 

Vesting of shares under employee share schemes

   -    -    -    -    -    -    (755)    (755)    -    (755) 

Dividends paid

   -    -    -    -    -    -    (1,219)    (1,219)    (209)    (1,428) 

Capital contribution from Barclays PLC

   -        -        -        -        -        -        560      560      -        560      -    -    -    -    -    -    560    560    -    560 

Other reserve movements

   -        -        -        -        -        -        (28)     (28)     26     (2)     -    -    -    -    -    -    (28)    (28)    26    (2) 

Balance as at 31 December 2015

   14,472      5,350     338      709      (623)     509      43,350      64,105      1,914      66,019   

Balance at 31st December 2015

   14,472    5,350    338    709    (623)    509    43,350    64,105    1,914    66,019 

Balance at 1 January 2014

   14,494    2,078    151    273    (1,142)    485    44,670    61,009    2,211    63,220 

Continuing Operations

                    

Profit after tax

   -    250    -    -    -    -    (55)    195    6    201 

Currency translation movements

   -    -    -    -    773    -    -    773    1    774 

Available for sale investments

   -    -    431    -    -    -    -    431    -    431 

Cash flow hedges

   -    -    -    1,554    -    -    -    1,554    -    1,554 

Pension remeasurement

   -    -    -    -    -    -    205    205    -    205 

Other

   -    -    -    -    -    -    (19)    (19)    -    (19) 

Other comprehensive income for the period from continuing operations

   -    250    431    1,554    773    -    131    3,139    7    3,146 

Other comprehensive income for the period from discontinued operations

   -    -    (4)    (10)    (213)       333    106    240    346 

Total comprehensive income for the year

   -    250    427    1,544    560    -    464    3,245    247    3,492 

Issue and exchange of equity instruments

   (15)    2,272    -    -    -    16    (1,683)    590    -    590 

Other equity instruments coupons paid

   -    (250)    -    -    -    -    54    (196)    -    (196) 

Redemption of preference shares

   (7)    -    -    -    -    8    (792)    (791)    -    (791) 

Equity settled share schemes

   -    -    -    -    -    -    693    693    -    693 

Vesting of shares under employee share schemes

   -    -    -    -    -    -    (866)    (866)    -    (866) 

Dividends paid

   -    -    -    -    -    -    (1,262)    (1,262)    (190)    (1,452) 

Capital contribution from Barclays PLC

   -    -    -    -    -    -    1,412    1,412    -    1,412 

Other reserve movements

   -    -    -    -    -    -    (40)    (40)    (17)    (57) 

Balance at 31st December 2014

   14,472    4,350    578    1,817    (582)    509    42,650    63,794    2,251    66,045 

Notes

 

Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  439


Barclays Bank PLC data

Consolidated statement of changes in equity

                                                   

Balance as at 1 January 2014

   14,494      2,078      151      273      (1,142)     485      44,670      61,009      2,211      63,220   

Profit after tax

   -        250      -        -        -        -        278      528      326      854   

Currency translation movements

   -        -        -        -        560      -        -        560      (74)     486   

Available for sale investments

   -        -        427      -        -        -        -        427      (1)     426   

Cash flow hedges

   -        -        -        1,544      -        -        -        1,544      (4)     1,540   

Pension remeasurement

   -        -        -        -        -        -        205      205      -        205   

Other

   -        -        -        -        -        -        (19)     (19)     -        (19)  

Total comprehensive income for the year

   -        250     427      1,544      560      -        464      3,245      247      3,492   

Issue and exchange of equity instruments

   (15)     2,272     -        -        -        16      (1,683)     590      -        590   

Redemption of preference Shares

   (7)     -        -        -        -        8      (792)     (791)     -        (791)  

Other equity instruments coupons paid

   -        (250)     -        -        -        -        54      (196)     -        (196)  

Equity settled share schemes

   -        -        -        -        -        -        693      693      -        693   

Vesting of Barclays PLC shares under share-based payment schemes

   -        -        -        -        -        -        (866)     (866)     -        (866)  

Dividends on ordinary shares

   -        -        -        -        -        -        (821)     (821)     (190)     (1,011)  

Dividends on preference shares and other shareholders’ equity

   -        -        -        -        -        -        (441)     (441)     -        (441)  

Capital contribution from Barclays PLC

   -        -        -        -        -        -        1,412      1,412     -        1,412   

Other reserve movements

   -        -        -        -        -        -        (40)     (40)     (17)     (57)  

Balance as at 31 December 2014

   14,472      4,350      578      1,817      (582)     509      42,650      63,794      2,251      66,045   
                                                   

Balance as at 1 January 2013

   14,494      -        526      2,099      59      645      39,244      57,067      2,856      59,923   

Profit after tax

   -        -        -        -        -        -        963      963      345      1,308   

Currency translation movements

   -        -        -        -        (1,201)     -        -        (1,201)     (566)     (1,767)  

Available for sale investments

   -        -        (375)     -        -        -        -        (375)     (3)     (378)  

Cash flow hedges

   -        -        -        (1,826)     -        -         -        (1,826)     (64)     (1,890)  

Pension remeasurement

   -        -        -        -        -        -        (503)     (503)     (12)     (515)  

Other

   -        -        -        -        -        -        (37)     (37)     -        (37)  

Total comprehensive (loss)/income for the year

   -        -        (375)     (1,826)     (1,201)     -        423      (2,979)     (300)     (3,279)  

Issue of other equity instruments

   -        2,078      -        -        -        -        -        2,078      -        2,078  

Equity settled share schemes

   -        -        -        -        -        -        689      689      -        689   

Vesting of Barclays PLC shares under share-based payment schemes

   -        -        -        -        -        -        (1,047)     (1,047)     -        (1,047)  

Dividends on ordinary shares

   -        -        -        -        -        -        (734)     (734)     (342)     (1,076)  

Dividends on preference shares and other shareholders’ equity

   -        -        -        -        -        -        (471)     (471)     -        (471)  

Redemption of capital instruments

   -        -        -        -        -        (100)     -        (100)     -        (100)  

Capital contribution from Barclays PLC

   -        -        -        -        -        -        6,553      6,553      -        6,553   

Other reserve movements

   -        -        -        -        -        (60)     13      (47)     (3)     (50)  

Balance as at 31 December 2013

   14,494      2,078      151      273      (1,142)     485      44,670      61,009      2,211      63,220   

Notes

aFor further details refer to Note l
bFor further details refer to Note m

 

440434  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 20152016 Annual Report on Form 20-F  


Barclays Bank PLC data

Consolidated cash flow statement

 

 

For the year ended 31 December   

 

2015

£m

  

  

   

 

2014

£m

  

  

   

 

2013

£m

  

  

  

 

 

 

 

2016

 

£m

 

 

 

 

  

 

 

 

 

2015

 

£m

 

 

 

 

  

 

 

 

 

2014

 

£m

 

 

 

 

Continuing operations            
Reconciliation of profit before tax to net cash flows from operating activities:            
Profit before tax   2,841     2,309     2,885     4,383    1,914    1,365 
Adjustment for non-cash items:            
Allowance for impairment   2,105     2,168     3,071     2,357    1,752    1,816 
Depreciation, amortisation and impairment of property, plant, equipment and intangibles   1,324     1,279     1,276     1,232    1,215    1,108 
Other provisions, including pensions   4,335     3,600     3,673     1,726    4,243    3,487 
Net profit on disposal of investments and property, plant and equipment   (374)     (620)     (145)     (912)    (374)    (620) 
Other non-cash movements   (2,050)     (1,699)     (2,162)  

Othernon-cash movements including exchange rate movements

   20,780    (1,189)    (1,486) 
Changes in operating assets and liabilities            
Net decrease/(increase) in loans and advances to banks and customers   27,629     3,538     (3,906)  

Net (increase)/decrease in loans and advances to banks and customers

   (25,439)    22,705    3,933 
Net decrease/(increase) in reverse repurchase agreements and other similar lending   103,566     55,021     (10,264)  

Net decrease in reverse repurchase agreements and other similar lending

   14,733    103,471    54,380 
Net (decrease) in deposits and debt securities in issue   (37,820)     (1,983)     (13,447)  

Net increase/(decrease) in deposits and debt securities in issue

   49,961    (33,219)    (2,189) 
Net (decrease) in repurchase agreements and other similar borrowing   (99,444)     (72,269)     (20,430)     (4,852)    (99,602)    (72,107) 
Net (increase)/decrease in derivative financial instruments   (2,862)     2,586     811     (2,351)    (3,309)    2,954 
Net decrease in trading assets   37,330     18,350     13,423  

Net (increase)/decrease in trading assets

   (5,542)    37,079    18,633 
Net (decrease)/increase in trading liabilities   (11,157)     (8,340)     8,670  

Net increase/(decrease) in trading liabilities

   880    (10,877)    (8,565) 
Net (increase) in financial investments   (3,757)     (7,156)     (6,114)  

Net decrease/(increase) in financial investments

   807    (3,064)    (5,882) 
Net (increase)/decrease in other assets   (2,343)     (14,694)     125  

Net (increase) in other assets

   (3,731)    (2,680)    (14,642) 
Net (decrease)/increase in other liabilities   (2,236)     7,409     (1,190)  

Net (increase)/decrease in other liabilities

   (452)    (1,772)    7,360 
Corporate income tax paid   (1,643)     (1,590)     (1,558)     (742)    (1,643)    (1,590) 
Net cash from operating activities   15,444     (12,091)     (25,282)     11,278    14,650    (12,045) 
Purchase of available for sale investments   (120,251)     (108,639)     (92,024)     (65,086)    (120,061)    (109,290) 
Proceeds from sale or redemption of available for sale investments   113,048     120,843     69,474     102,515    114,529    119,129 
Purchase of property, plant and equipment   (852)     (657)     (737)  

Purchase of property, plant and equipment and intangibles

   (2,054)    (1,928)    (1,690) 

Proceeds from sale of property, plant and equipment and intangibles

   234    393    354 

Proceeds from part disposal of investment in BAGL

   595    -    - 
Other cash flows associated with investing activities   (379)     (886)     632     32    516    (68) 
Net cash from investing activities   (8,434)     10,661     (22,655)     36,236    (6,551)    8,435 
Dividends paid   (1,428)     (1,452)     (1,547)     (1,186)    (1,428)    (1,452) 
Proceeds of borrowings and issuance of subordinated debt   1,138     826     700  

Issuance of subordinated debt

   1,457    879    848 
Repayments of borrowings and redemption of subordinated debt   (682)     (1,100)     (1,424)  

Redemption of subordinated debt

   (1,143)    (556)    (869) 
Net redemption of shares and other equity instruments   655     (1,100)     2,078     1,125    655    (1,100) 
Capital Contribution from Barclays PLC   560     1,412     6,553  

Capital contribution from Barclays PLC

   114    560    1,412 
Net redemption of shares issued to non-controlling interests   -     -     (100)  

Repurchase of shares and other equity instruments

   (1,378)    -    - 
Net cash from financing activities   243     (1,414)     6,260     (1,011)    110    (1,161) 

Net cash from discontinued operations

   405    (1,821)    1,809 
Effect of exchange rates on cash and cash equivalents   824     (431)     198     10,468    1,689    (313) 
Net decrease in cash and cash equivalents   8,077     (3,275)     (41,479)  

Net increase in cash and cash equivalents

   57,376    8,077    (3,275) 
Cash and cash equivalents at beginning of year   78,479     81,754     123,233     86,556    78,479    81,754 
Cash and cash equivalents at end of year   86,556     78,479     81,754     143,932    86,556    78,479 
Cash and cash equivalents comprise:            
Cash and balances at central banks   49,711     39,695     45,687     102,328    49,711    39,695 
Loans and advances to banks with original maturity less than three months   35,876     36,282     35,259     38,099    35,876    36,282 
Available for sale treasury and other eligible bills with original maturity less than three months   816     2,322     644     356    816    2,322 
Trading portfolio assets with original maturity less than three months   153     180     164     -    153    180 
   86,556     78,479     81,754  

Cash and cash equivalents held for sale

   3,149    -    - 
   143,932    86,556    78,479 

Interest received by The Group was £20,370m (2014:£21,981m (2015: £20,370m; 2014: £21,372m) and interest paid by The Group was £6,992m (2014:£7,812m (2015: £6,992m; 2014: £8,566m).

The Group is required to maintain balances with central banks and other regulatory authorities and these amounted to £4,369m£4,254m at 31 December 2015 (2014: £4,448m)2016 (2015: £4,369m; 2014: £4,448m).

For the purposes of the cash flow statement, cash comprises cash on hand and demand deposits, and cash equivalents comprise highly liquid investments that are convertible into cash with an insignificant risk of changes in value with original maturities of three months or less. Repurchase and reverse repurchase agreements are not considered to be part of cash equivalents.

 

  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 20152016 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  441435


Barclays Bank PLC data

Notes to the accounts

 

 

a Net interest income

 

            
     

 

 

 

 

2016

 

£m

 

 

 

 

    

 

 

 

 

2015

 

£m

 

 

 

 

    

 

 

 

 

2014

 

£m

 

 

 

 

Cash and balances with central banks     186      157      186 
Financial investments     740      698      803 
Loans and advances to banks     483      481      382 
Loans and advances to customers     12,957      12,512      12,768 

Other

 

     

 

57

 

 

 

     

 

99

 

 

 

     

 

61

 

 

 

Interest incomea

 

     

 

14,423

 

 

 

     

 

13,947

 

 

 

     

 

14,200

 

 

 

Deposits from banks     (204)      (123)      (138) 
Customer accounts     (1,808)      (1,510)      (2,166) 
Debt securities in issue     (690)      (422)      (684) 
Subordinated liabilities     (988)      (978)      (995) 

Other

 

     

 

724

 

 

 

     

 

449

 

 

 

     

 

(73)

 

 

 

Interest expensea

 

     

 

(2,966)

 

 

 

     

 

(2,584)

 

 

 

     

 

(4,056)

 

 

 

Net interest income

 

     

 

11,457

 

 

 

     

 

11,363

 

 

 

     

 

10,144

 

 

 

 

b Net fee and commission income

 

            
     

 

 

 

 

2016

 

£m

 

 

 

 

    

 

 

 

 

2015

 

£m

 

 

 

 

    

 

 

 

 

2014

 

£m

 

 

 

 

Banking, investment management and credit related fees and commissions     8,507      8,365      8,483 

Foreign exchange commission

 

     

 

118

 

 

 

     

 

129

 

 

 

     

 

139

 

 

 

Fee and commission income

 

     

 

8,625

 

 

 

     

 

8,494

 

 

 

     

 

8,622

 

 

 

Fee and commission expense

 

     

 

(1,789)

 

 

 

     

 

(1,611)

 

 

 

     

 

(1,500)

 

 

 

Net fee and commission income

 

     

 

6,836

 

 

 

     

 

6,883

 

 

 

     

 

7,122

 

 

 

 

c Net Trading Income

 

            
     

 

 

 

 

2016

 

£m

 

 

 

 

    

 

 

 

 

2015

 

£m

 

 

 

 

    

 

 

 

 

2014

 

£m

 

 

 

 

Trading income     2,830      3,000      3,030 

Own credit gains/(losses)

 

     

 

(35)

 

 

 

     

 

430

 

 

 

     

 

34

 

 

 

Net trading income

 

     

 

2,795

 

 

 

     

 

3,430

 

 

 

     

 

3,064

 

 

 

Note

a Net interest income

      

 

2015 

£m

  

  

     

 

2014 

£m

  

  

     

 

2013 

£m

  

  

Cash and balances with central banks

     158       193       219  

Available for sale investments

     1,387       1,615       1,804  

Loans and advances to banks

     535       452       468  

Loans and advances to customers

     14,732       14,677       15,613  

Other

     383       432       211  

Interest income

     17,195       17,369       18,315  

Deposits from banks

     (171     (204     (201

Customer accounts

     (1,035     (1,434     (2,602

Debt securities in issue

     (1,593     (1,915     (2,177

Subordinated liabilities

     (1,605     (1,611     (1,572

Other

     522       (67     (110

Interest expense

     (3,882     (5,231     (6,662

Net interest income

     13,313       12,138       11,653  

Interest income includes £149m (2014: £153m, 2013: £179m) accrued on impaired loans.

Other interest income principally includes interest income relating to reverse repurchase agreements and hedging activity. Similarly, other interest expense principally includes interest expense relating to repurchase agreements and hedging activity.

Included in net interest income is hedge ineffectiveness as detailed in the Barclays Plc disclosures in Note 15 Derivative Financial Instruments.

b Net fee and commission income

      

 

2015 

£m

  

  

     

 

2014 

£m

  

  

     

 

2013 

£m

  

  

Banking, investment management and credit related fees and commissions

     9,521       9,695       10,332  

Foreign exchange commission

     158       155       168  

Fee and commission income

     9,679       9,850       10,500  

Fee and commission expense

     (1,763     (1,662     (1,748

Net fee and commission income

     7,916       8,188       8,752  

 

c Net Trading Income

 

            
      
 
2015 
£m
  
  
     
 
2014 
£m
  
  
     
 
2013 
£m
  
  

Trading income

     3,197       3,276       6,768  

Own credit gains/(losses)

     430       34       (220

Net trading income

     3,627       3,310       6,548  
aBoth interest income and interest expenses for 2015 and 2014 have been adjusted by £442m and £605m respectively, in order to better align the effect of hedge accounting relationships with the related hedged items. The following categories were restated: financial investments by £(545)m (2014: £(637)m), loans and advances to customers by £987m (2014: £1,242m), customer accounts by £(1,783m) (2014: £(2,016)m), debt securities in issues by £784m (2014: £859m) and subordinated liabilities by £557m (2014: £552m).

 

442436  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 20152016 Annual Report on Form 20-F  


Barclays Bank PLC data

Notes to the accounts

 

 

d Net investment income

                   
     

 

2016

 

£m

 

 

 

     

 

2015

 

£m

 

 

 

     

 

2014

 

£m

 

 

 

  

 

 

2015

 

£m

  

 

  

  

 

 

2014

 

£m

  

 

  

  

 

 

2013

 

£m

  

 

  

Net gain from disposal of available for sale assets 374    620    145       912      385      622 
Dividend income 8    9    14       8      8      9 
Net gain from financial instruments designated at fair value 238    233    203       158      193      203 
Other investment income 518    466    318       

 

246

 

 

 

     

 

511

 

 

 

     

 

475

 

 

 

Net investment income 1,138    1,328    680       

 

1,324

 

 

 

     

 

1,097

 

 

 

     

 

1,309

 

 

 

e Administrative and general expenses

                   
     

 

2016

 

£m

 

 

 

     

 

2015

 

£m

 

 

 

     

 

2014

 

£m

 

 

 

  

 

 

            2015

 

£m

  

 

  

  

 

 

            2014

 

£m

  

 

  

  

 

 

            2013

 

£m

  

 

  

Infrastructure costs               
Property and equipment 1,353    1,570    1,610       1,147      1,082      1,281 
Depreciation of property, plant and equipment 554    585    647       482      475      495 
Operating lease rentals 500    594    645       550      411      512 
Amortisation of intangible assets 617    522    480       661      570      454 
Impairment of property, equipment and intangible assets 153    172    149       97      150      153 
Gain on property disposals 3    -    -       

 

-

 

 

 

     

 

3

 

 

 

     

 

-

 

 

 

Total infrastructure costs 3,180    3,443    3,531       

 

2,937

 

 

 

     

 

2,691

 

 

 

     

 

2,895

 

 

 

Administration and general costs               
Consultancy, legal and professional fees 1,191    1,104    1,260       1,079      1,078      997 
Subscriptions, publications, stationery and communications 760    842    869       638      678      756 
Marketing, advertising and sponsorship 536    558    583       430      451      470 
Travel and accommodation 218    213    307       132      188      185 
UK bank levy 476    462    504       410      425      418 
Goodwill Impairment 102    -    79       -      102      - 
Other administration and general expenses 245    436    686       

 

511

 

 

 

     

 

61

 

 

 

     

 

237

 

 

 

Total administration and general costsa 3,528    3,615    4,288  
Staff costsb 9,960    11,005    12,155  

Total administration and general costs

     

 

3,200

 

 

 

     

 

2,983

 

 

 

     

 

3,063

 

 

 

Staff costsa     9,211      8,853      9,860 
Provision for UK customer redress 2,772    1,110    2,000       1,000      2,772      1,110 
Provision for ongoing investigations and litigation including Foreign Exchange 1,237    1,250    -       

 

-

 

 

 

     

 

1,237

 

 

 

     

 

1,250

 

 

 

Operating expenses 20,677    20,423    21,974  

Operating expensesb

     

 

16,348

 

 

 

     

 

18,536

 

 

 

     

 

18,178

 

 

 

 

a

Total administration and general expenses of £20,677m (2014: £20,423m; 2013: £21,974m) include depreciation of property, plant and equipment of £554m (2014: £585m; 2013: £647m), amortisation of intangible assets of £617m (2014: £522m; 2013: £480m), goodwill impairment of £102m (2014 £nil; 2013: £79m) and administration and other expenses of £19,404m (2014 £19,316m; 2013: £20,678m).

b

The Group has realigned outsourcing costs from administration and general expenses to staff costs in order to more appropriately reflect the nature and internal management of these costs. The net effect of these movements is to reduce administration and general expenses and to increase staff costs to £1,034m£1,063m in 2016 and £1,014m in 2015.

b

Total operating expenses of £16,348m (2015: £18,536m; 2014: £18,178m) include depreciation of property, plant and equipment of £482m (2015: £475m; 2014: £495m), amortisation of intangible assets of £661m (2015: £570m; 2014: £454m),goodwill impairment nil( 2015 : £102m; 2014 : nil) and £1,055m in 2014.administration and other expenses of £15,205m (2015 £17,389m; 2014: £17,229m).

 

  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 20152016 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  443437


Barclays Bank PLC data

Notes to the accounts

 

 

f Tax

 

      

 

 

2015

 

£m

  

 

  

     

 

 

2014

 

£m

  

 

  

    

2013 

 

£m 

Current tax charge

            

Current year

     2,068           1,448          2,031    

Adjustment for prior years

     (183)          (19)         156    
      1,885           1,429          2,187    

Deferred tax charge/(credit)

            

Current year

     (360)          92          (96)   

Adjustment for prior years

     78           (66)         (514)   
      (282)          26          (610)   

Tax charge

     1,603           1,455          1,577    

 

Tax relating to each component of other comprehensive income can be found in the consolidated statement of comprehensive income which additionally includes within Other a tax credit of £19m (2014: £19m charge) principally relating to share based payments.

 

The table below shows the reconciliation between the actual tax charge and the tax charge that would result from applying the standard UK corporation tax rate to The Group’s profit before tax.

 

      

 

 

2015

 

£m

  

 

  

     

 

 

2014

 

£m

  

 

  

    

2013 

 

£m 

Profit before tax from continuing operations

     2,841           2,309          2,885    

Tax charge based on the standard UK corporation tax rate of 20.25% (2014:21.5%, 2013:23.25%)

     575           496          671    

Non-creditable taxes including withholding taxes

     309           329          559    

Non-deductible provisions for UK customer redress

     283           -          -    

Non-UK profits at statutory tax rates different from the UK statutory tax rate

     274           253          328    

Non-deductible provisions for ongoing investigations and litigation including Foreign Exchange

     261           387          -    

Non-deductible expenses including UK Bank Levy

     207           285          296    

Impact of change in tax rates

     158    ��      8          (155)   

Tax adjustments in respect of share based payments

     30           21          (13)   

Non-deductible impairments and losses on disposal

     26           234          -    

Non-taxable gains and income

     (241)          (282)         (234)   

Adjustments in respect of prior years

     (105)          (85)         (358)   

Changes in recognition and measurement of deferred tax assets

     (77)          (183)         409    

Other items

     (54)          74          135    

Non-UK losses at statutory tax rates different from the UK statutory tax rate

     (43)          (82)         (61)   

Tax charge

     1,603           1,455          1,577    

Effective tax rate

     56.4%        63.0%       54.7% 
      

 

2016

 

£m

 

 

 

     

 

2015

 

£m

 

 

 

     

 

2014

 

£m

 

 

 

 

Current tax charge/(credit)

            

Current year

     1,147      1,772      1,158 

Adjustment for prior years

 

     

 

(359)

 

 

 

     

 

(188)

 

 

 

     

 

(19)

 

 

 

     

 

 

 

 

788

 

 

 

 

     

 

1,584

 

 

 

     

 

1,139

 

 

 

 

Deferred tax charge/(credit)

            

Current year

     392      (360)      92 

Adjustment for prior years

 

     

 

65

 

 

 

     

 

78

 

 

 

     

 

(66)

 

 

 

     

 

 

 

 

457

 

 

 

 

    

 

 

 

 

 

 

(282)

 

 

 

 

 

    

 

 

 

 

 

 

26

 

 

 

 

 

 

Tax charge

 

     

 

1,245

 

 

 

     

 

1,302

 

 

 

     

 

1,165

 

 

 

Tax relating to each component of other comprehensive income can be found in the consolidated statement of comprehensive income which additionally includes within Other a tax credit of £49m (2015: £19m credit) principally relating to share based payments.

The table below shows the reconciliation between the actual tax charge and the tax charge that would result from applying the standard UK corporation tax rate to The Group’s profit before tax.

      

 

2016

 

£m

 

 

 

     

 

2015

 

£m

 

 

 

     

 

2014

 

£m

 

 

 

 

Profit before tax from continuing operations

 

     

 

4,383

 

 

 

     

 

1,914

 

 

 

     

 

1,366

 

 

 

 

Tax charge based on the standard UK corporation tax rate of 20% (2015: 20.25%, 2014: 21.50%)

     877      387      293 

Impact of profits/losses earned in territories with different statutory rates to the UK (weighted average tax rate is 29.5% (2015: 28.1%, 2014: 29.0%))

     415      151      103 

Recurring items:

 

            

Non-creditable taxes including withholding taxes

     277      309      329 

Non-deductible expenses

     114      67      146 

Impact of UK bank levy beingnon-deductible

     82      96      99 

Banking surcharge on UK profits

     75      -      - 

Other items

     49      (16)      75 

Tax adjustments in respect of share based payments

     34      30      21 

Impact of change in tax rates

     32      158      9 

Adjustments in respect of prior years

     (294)      (110)      (85) 

Non-taxable gains and income

     (208)      (197)      (212) 

Changes in recognition of deferred tax and effect of unrecognised tax losses

     (178)      (71)      (115) 

Impact of BB PLC’s overseas branches being taxed both locally and in the UK

     (128)      (35)      (68) 

Non-recurring items:

            

Non-deductible provisions for UK customer redress

     203      283      - 

Non-deductible impairments and losses on divestments

     27      39      234 

Non-deductible provisions for investigations and litigation

     48      261      387 

Non-taxable gains and income on divestments

 

     

 

(180)

 

 

 

     

 

(50)

 

 

 

     

 

(51)

 

 

 

 

Tax charge

     1,245      1,302      1,165 

Effective tax rate

 

     

 

28.4%

 

 

 

     

 

68.0%

 

 

 

     

 

85.3%

 

 

 

 

444438  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 20152016 Annual Report on Form 20-F  


Barclays Bank PLC data

Notes to the accounts

 

 

Current tax assets and liabilities

Movements on current tax assets and liabilities were as follows:

 

      

 

 

2015

 

£m

  

 

  

     

 

 

2014

 

£m

  

 

  

Assets

     334       181  

Liabilities

     (1,023     (1,042

As at 1 January

     (689     (861

Income statement

     (1,885     (1,429

Other comprehensive income

     145       (1

Corporate income tax paid

     1,643       1,590  

Other movementsa

     241       12  
      (545     (689

Assets

     385       334  

Liabilities

     (930     (1,023

As at 31 December

     (545     (689

a   Other movements include current tax amounts relating to acquisitions, disposals and exchange gains and losses.

        

g Trading portfolio assets

 

        
      

 

 

2015

 

£m

  

 

  

     

 

 

2014

 

£m

  

 

  

Debt securities and other eligible bills

     45,626       66,035  

Equity securities

     29,055       44,576  

Traded loans

     2,474       2,693  

Commodities

     243       1,451  

Trading portfolio assets

     77,398       114,755  

 

h Available for sale financial investments

 

        
      

 

 

2015

 

£m

  

 

  

     

 

 

2014

 

£m

  

 

  

Debt securities and other eligible bills

     89,278       85,552  

Equity securities

     1,026       553  

Available for sale financial investments

     90,304       86,105  
      

 

2016

 

£m

 

 

 

     

 

2015

 

£m

 

 

 

 

Assets

     385      334 

Liabilities

 

     

 

(930)

 

 

 

     

 

(1,023)

 

 

 

As at 1 January

     (545)      (689) 

Income statement from continuing operations

     (788)      (1,584) 

Income statement in relation to BAGL disposal group

     -      (301) 

Other comprehensive income

     295      145 

Corporate income tax paid

     742      1,643 

Other movements

 

     

 

89

 

 

 

     

 

241

 

 

 

      

 

(207)

 

 

 

     

 

(545)

 

 

 

Assets

 

     

 

501

 

 

 

     

 

385

 

 

 

Liabilities

 

     

 

(708)

 

 

 

     

 

(930)

 

 

 

 

As at 31 December

 

     

 

(207)

 

 

 

     

 

(545)

 

 

 

Other movements include the impact of changes in foreign exchange rates, as well as deferred tax amounts relating to acquisitions, disposals and transfers to held for sale. 

 

  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 20152016 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  445439


Barclays Bank PLC data

Notes to the accounts

    

 

 

i Loans and advances to banks and customers

g Trading portfolio assets

 

        
     

 

 

 

 

2016

 

£m

 

 

 

 

    

 

 

 

 

2015

 

£m

 

 

 

 

Debt securities and other eligible bills

     38,804      45,626 

Equity securities

     38,329      29,055 

Traded loans

     2,975      2,474 

Commodities

 

     

 

147

 

 

 

     

 

243

 

 

 

Trading portfolio assets

 

     

 

80,255

 

 

 

     

 

77,398

 

 

 

 

h Financial Investments

 

        
      

 

2016

 

£m

 

 

 

     

 

2015

 

£m

 

 

 

Available for sale debt securities and other eligible bills

     57,704      89,278 

Available for sale equity securities

     485      1,206 

Held to maturity debt securities

 

     

 

5,176

 

 

 

     

 

-

 

 

 

Financial Investments

 

     

 

63,365

 

 

 

     

 

90,304

 

 

 

 

i Loans and advances to banks and customers

 

              
      

 

2016

 

£m

 

 

 

     

 

2015

 

£m

 

 

 

Gross loans and advances to banks

     43,634      41,829 

Less: allowance for impairment

 

     

 

-

 

 

 

     

 

-

 

 

 

Loans and advances to banks

 

     

 

43,634

 

 

 

     

 

41,829

 

 

 

Gross loans and advances to customers

     397,403      404,138 

Less: allowance for impairment

 

     

 

(4,620)

 

 

 

     

 

(4,921)

 

 

 

Loans and advances to customers

 

     

 

392,783

 

 

 

     

 

399,217

 

 

 

 

        

 

2015

£m

  

  

   

 

2014

£m

  

  

Gross loans and advances to banks

       41,829     42,657  

Loans and advances to banks

       41,829     42,657  

Gross loans and advances to customers

          404,138           433,222  

Less: allowance for impairment

       (4,921   (5,455

Loans and advances to customers

       399,217     427,767  

 

j Derivative financial instruments

 

              
   
 

 

Notional contract
amount

£m

  
  

  

   
 

 

Fair value
Assets

£m

  
  

  

   

 

Liabilities

£m

  

  

Year ended 31 December 2015

     

Total derivative assets/(liabilities) held for trading

  29,437,102     326,933     (323,788

Total derivative assets/(liabilities) held for risk management

  316,605     937     (464

Derivative assets/(liabilities)

  29,753,707     327,870     (324,252

Year ended 31 December 2014

     

Total derivative assets/(liabilities) held for trading

  32,624,342     438,437     (438,623

Total derivative assets/(liabilities) held for risk management

  268,448     1,639     (697

Derivative assets/(liabilities)

        32,892,790     440,076     (439,320

 

k Subordinated liabilities

 

              
        

 

2015

£m

  

  

   

 

2014

£m

  

  

Undated subordinated liabilities

    5,248     5,640  

Dated subordinated liabilities

       16,707     16,045  

Total subordindated liabilities

       21,955     21,685  

j Derivative financial instruments

 

              
   

 

 

 

Notional

 

contract

 

amount

 

£m

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

   

 

 

Fair value

 

Assets

 

£m

 

 

 

 

 

   

 

Liabilities

 

£m

 

 

 

Year ended 31 December 2016

     

Total derivative assets/(liabilities) held for trading

  36,261,030    345,834    (339,647) 

Total derivative assets/(liabilities) held for risk management

 

  

 

261,314

 

 

 

   

 

986

 

 

 

   

 

(840)

 

 

 

Derivative assets/(liabilities)

 

  

 

      36,522,344

 

 

 

   

 

346,820

 

 

 

   

 

(340,487)

 

 

 

Year ended 31 December 2015

     

Total derivative assets/(liabilities) held for trading

  29,437,102    326,933    (323,788) 

Total derivative assets/(liabilities) held for risk management

 

  

 

316,605

 

 

 

   

 

937

 

 

 

   

 

(464)

 

 

 

Derivative assets/(liabilities)

 

  

 

29,753,707

 

 

 

   

 

327,870

 

 

 

   

 

(324,252)

 

 

 

 

446440  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 20152016 Annual Report on Form 20-F  


Barclays Bank PLC data

Notes to the accounts

    

 

 

 

k Subordinated liabilities

 

              
     

 

 

 

 

    2016

 

£m

 

 

 

 

    

 

 

 

 

2015

 

£m

 

 

 

 

Undated subordinated liabilities

     4,495      5,248 

Dated subordinated liabilities

 

     

 

19,376

 

 

 

     

 

16,707

 

 

 

Total subordindated liabilities

 

     

 

23,871

 

 

 

     

 

21,955

 

 

 

l Ordinary shares, share premium, and other equity

Called up share capital, allotted and fully paid

 

   

 

 

Ordinary

share capital

£m

  

  

  

   

 

 

Preference

share capital

£m

  

  

  

   

 

 

Share

premium

£m

  

  

  

   

 

 

 

 

Total share

capital and

share

premium

£m

  

  

  

  

  

   

 

 

Other equity

instruments

£m

  

  

  

   

 

 

 

Ordinary

 

share

 

capital

 

£m

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

   

 

 

 

Preference

 

share

 

capital

 

£m

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

   

 

 

Share

 

premium

 

£m

 

 

 

 

 

   

 

 

 

 

Total share

 

capital and

 

share

 

premium

 

£m

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

   

 

 

 

Other

 

equity

 

instruments

 

£m

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

As at 1 January 2016

   2,342    38    12,092    14,472    5,350 

AT1 securities issuance

   

 

-

 

 

 

   

 

-

 

 

 

   

 

-

 

 

 

   

 

-

 

 

 

   

 

1,136

 

 

 

Redemptions

   

 

-

 

 

 

   

 

(10)

 

 

 

   

 

-

 

 

 

   

 

(10)

 

 

 

   

 

-

 

 

 

As at 31 December 2016

   

 

2,342

 

 

 

   

 

28

 

 

 

   

 

12,092

 

 

 

   

 

14,462

 

 

 

   

 

6,486

 

 

 

As at 1 January 2015

   2,342     38     12,092     14,472     4,350     2,342    38    12,092    14,472    4,350 

AT1 securities issuance

   -     -     -     -     1,000     

 

-

 

 

 

   

 

-

 

 

 

   

 

-

 

 

 

   

 

-

 

 

 

   

 

1,000

 

 

 

As at 31 December 2015

   2,342     38     12,092     14,472     5,350     

 

2,342

 

 

 

   

 

38

 

 

 

   

 

12,092

 

 

 

   

 

14,472

 

 

 

   

 

5,350

 

 

 

As at 1 January 2014

   2,342     60     12,092     14,494     2,078  

AT1 securities issuance

   -     -     -     -     2,272  

Other movements

   -     (22   -     (22   -  

As at 31 December 2014

   2,342     38     12,092     14,472     4,350  

Ordinary shares

The issued ordinary share capital of Barclays Bank PLC, as at 31 December 2015,2016, comprised 2,342 million ordinary shares of £1 each (2014:(2015: 2,342 million).

Ordinary share capital constitutes 60% (2014:(2015: 60%) of total share capital issued.

Preference shares

The issued preference share capital of Barclays Bank PLC, as at 31 December 2015,2016, comprised 1,000 Sterling Preference Shares of £1 each (2014:(2015: 1,000); 31,856 Euro Preference Shares of100 each (2014:(2015: 31,856); 20,930 Sterling Preference Shares of £100 each (2014:(2015: 20,930); 58,133 US Dollar Preference Shares of $100 each (2014:(2015: 58,133); and 237161 million US Dollar Preference Shares of $0.25 each (2014:(2015: 237 million). In the second quarter of 2016, 46 million US Dollar Preference Shares of $0.25 each were redeemed. In the third quarter of 2016, 30 million US Dollar Preference Shares of $0.25 were redeemed.

Preference share capital constitutes 40% (2014:(2015: 40%) of total share capital issued.

Sterling £1 Preference Shares

1,000 Sterling cumulative callable preference shares of £1 each (the £1 Preference Shares) were issued on 31 December 2004 at nil premium.

The £1 Preference Shares entitle the holders thereof to receive Sterling cumulative cash dividends out of distributable profits of Barclays Bank PLC, semi-annually at a rate reset semi-annually equal to the Sterling interbank offered rate forsix-month sterling deposits.

Barclays Bank PLC shall be obliged to pay such dividends if: (1) it has profits available for the purpose of distribution under the Companies Act 2006 as at each dividend payment date; and (2) it is solvent on the relevant dividend payment date, provided that a capital regulations condition is satisfied on such dividend payment date. The dividends shall not be due and payable on the relevant dividend payment date except to the extent that Barclays Bank PLC could make such payment and still be solvent immediately thereafter. Barclays Bank PLC shall be considered solvent on any date if: (1) it is able to pay its debts to senior creditors as they fall due; and (2) its auditors have reported within the previous six months that its assets exceed its liabilities. If Barclays Bank PLC shall not pay, or shall pay only in part, a dividend for a period of seven days or more after the due date for payment, the holders of the £1 Preference Shares may institute proceedings for thewinding-up of Barclays Bank PLC. No remedy against Barclays Bank PLC shall be available to the holder of any £1 Preference Shares for the recovery of amounts owing in respect of £1 Preference Shares other than the institution of proceedings for thewinding-up of Barclays Bank PLC and/or proving in suchwinding-up.

 

  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 20152016 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  447441


Barclays Bank PLC data

Notes to the accounts

    

 

 

On awinding-up or other return of capital (other than a redemption or purchase by Barclays Bank PLC of any of its issued shares, or a reduction of share capital, permitted by the Articles of Barclays Bank PLC and under applicable law), the assets of Barclays Bank PLC available to shareholders shall be applied in priority to any payment to the holders of ordinary shares and any other class of shares in the capital of Barclays Bank PLC then in issue ranking junior to the £1 Preference Shares on such a return of capital and pari passu on such a return of capital with the holders of any other class of shares in the capital of Barclays Bank PLC then in issue (other than any class of shares in the capital of Barclays Bank PLC then in issue ranking in priority to the £1 Preference Shares on awinding-up or other such return of capital), in payment to the holders of the £1 Preference Shares of a sum equal to the aggregate of: (1) an amount equal to the dividends accrued thereon for the then current dividend period (and any accumulated arrears thereof) to the date of the commencement of thewinding-up or other such return of capital; and (2) an amount equal to £1 per £1 Preference Share. After payment of the full amount of the liquidating distributions to which they are entitled, the holders of the £1 Preference Shares will have no right or claim to any of the remaining assets of Barclays Bank PLC and will not be entitled to any further participation in such return of capital.

The £1 Preference Shares are redeemable at the option of Barclays Bank PLC, in whole but not in part only, subject to the Companies Act 2006 and its Articles. Holders of the £1 Preference Shares are not entitled to receive notice of, or to attend, or vote at, any general meeting of Barclays Bank PLC.

Euro Preference Shares

140,000 Euro 4.75%non-cumulative callable preference shares of100 each (the 4.75% Preference Shares) were issued on 15 March 2005 for a consideration of1,383.3m (£966.7m), of which the nominal value was14m and the balance was share premium. The 4.75% Preference Shares entitle the holders thereof to receive Euronon-cumulative cash dividends out of distributable profits of Barclays Bank PLC, annually at a fixed rate of 4.75% per annum on the amount of10,000 per preference share until 15 March 2020, and thereafter quarterly at a rate reset quarterly equal to 0.71% per annum above the Euro interbank offered rate for three-month Euro deposits.

The 4.75% Preference Shares are redeemable at the option of Barclays Bank PLC, in whole but not in part only, on 15 March 2020, and on each dividend payment date thereafter at10,000 per share plus any dividends accrued for the then current dividend period to the date fixed for redemption.

Sterling Preference Shares

75,000 Sterling 6.0%non-cumulative callable preference shares of £100 each (the 6.0% Preference Shares) were issued on 22 June 2005 for a consideration of £743.7m, of which the nominal value was £7.5m and the balance was share premium. The 6.0% Preference Shares entitle the holders thereof to receive Sterlingnon-cumulative cash dividends out of distributable profits of Barclays Bank PLC, annually at a fixed rate of 6.0% per annum on the amount of £10,000 per preference share until 15 December 2017, and thereafter quarterly at a rate reset quarterly equal to 1.42% per annum above the London interbank offered rate for three-month Sterling deposits.

The 6.0% Preference Shares are redeemable at the option of Barclays Bank PLC, in whole but not in part only, on 15 December 2017, and on each dividend payment date thereafter at £10,000 per share plus any dividends accrued for the then current dividend period to the date fixed for redemption.

448  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F


Barclays Bank PLC data

Notes to the accounts

US Dollar Preference Shares

100,000 US Dollar 6.278%non-cumulative callable preference shares of $100 each (the 6.278% Preference Shares), represented by 100,000 American Depositary Shares, Series 1, were issued on 8 June 2005 for a consideration of $995.4m (£548.1m), of which the nominal value was $10m and the balance was share premium. The 6.278% Preference Shares entitle the holders thereof to receive US Dollarnon-cumulative cash dividends out of distributable profits of Barclays Bank PLC, semi-annually at a fixed rate of 6.278% per annum on the amount of $10,000 per preference share until 15 December 2034, and thereafter quarterly at a rate reset quarterly equal to 1.55% per annum above the London interbank offered rate for three-month US Dollar deposits.

The 6.278% Preference Shares are redeemable at the option of Barclays Bank PLC, in whole but not in part only, on 15 December 2034, and on each dividend payment date thereafter at $10,000 per share plus any dividends accrued for the then current dividend period to the date fixed for redemption.

30 million US Dollar 6.625% non-cumulative callable preference shares of $0.25 each (the 6.625% Preference Shares), represented by 30 million American Depositary Shares, Series 2, were issued on 25 and 28 April 2006 for a consideration of $727m (£406m), of which the nominal value was $7.5m and the balance was share premium. The 6.625% Preference Shares entitle the holders thereof to receive US Dollar non-cumulative cash dividends out of distributable profits of Barclays Bank PLC, quarterly at a fixed rate of 6.625% per annum on the amount of $25 per preference share.

The 6.625% Preference Shares are redeemable at the option of Barclays Bank PLC, in whole but not in part only, on any dividend payment date at $25 per share plus any dividends accrued for the then current dividend period to the date fixed for redemption.

55 million US Dollar 7.1%non-cumulative callable preference shares of $0.25 each (the 7.1% Preference Shares), represented by 55 million American Depositary Shares, Series 3, were issued on 13 September 2007 for a consideration of $1,335m (£657m), of which the nominal value was $13.75m and the balance was share premium. The 7.1% Preference Shares entitle the holders thereof to receive US Dollarnon-cumulative cash dividends out of distributable profits of Barclays Bank PLC, quarterly at a fixed rate of 7.1% per annum on the amount of $25 per preference share.

442  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2016 Annual Report on Form 20-F


Barclays Bank PLC data

Notes to the accounts

The 7.1% Preference Shares are redeemable at the option of Barclays Bank PLC, in whole or in part, on any dividend payment date at $25 per share plus any dividends accrued for the then current dividend period to the date fixed for redemption.

46 million US Dollar 7.75% non-cumulative callable preference shares of $0.25 each (the 7.75% Preference Shares), represented by 46 million American Depositary Shares, Series 4, were issued on 7 December 2007 for a consideration of $1,116m (£550m), of which the nominal value was $11.5m and the balance was share premium. The 7.75% Preference Shares entitle the holders thereof to receive US Dollar non-cumulative cash dividends out of distributable profits of Barclays Bank PLC, quarterly at a fixed rate of 7.75% per annum on the amount of $25 per preference share.

The 7.75% Preference Shares are redeemable at the option of Barclays Bank PLC, in whole or in part, on any dividend payment date at $25 per share plus any dividends accrued for the then current dividend period to the date fixed for redemption.

106 million US Dollar 8.125%non-cumulative callable preference shares of $0.25 each (the 8.125% Preference Shares), represented by 106 million American Depositary Shares, Series 5, were issued on 11 April 2008 and 25 April 2008 for a total consideration of $2,650m (£1,345m), of which the nominal value was $26.5m and the balance was share premium. The 8.125% Preference Shares entitle the holders thereof to receive US Dollarnon-cumulative cash dividends out of distributable profits of Barclays Bank PLC, quarterly at a fixed rate of 8.125% per annum on the amount of $25 per preference share.

Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  449


Barclays Bank PLC data

Notes to the accounts

The 8.125% Preference Shares are redeemable at the option of Barclays Bank PLC, in whole or in part, on any dividend payment date at $25 per share plus any dividends accrued for the then current dividend period to the date fixed for redemption.

No redemption or purchase of any 4.75% Preference Shares, the 6.0% Preference Shares, the 6.278% Preference Shares, the 6.625% Preference Shares, the 7.1% Preference Shares, the 7.75% Preference Shares and the 8.125% Preference Shares (together, the Preference Shares) may be made by Barclays Bank PLC without the prior approval of the UK PRA and any such redemption will be subject to the Companies Act 2006 and the Articles of Barclays Bank PLC.

On awinding-up of Barclays Bank PLC or other return of capital (other than a redemption or purchase of shares of Barclays Bank PLC, or a reduction of share capital), a holder of Preference Shares will rank in the application of assets of Barclays Bank PLC available to shareholders: (1) junior to the holder of any shares of Barclays Bank PLC in issue ranking in priority to the Preference Shares; (2) equally in all respects with holders of other preference shares and any other shares of Barclays Bank PLC in issue ranking pari passu with the Preference Shares; and (3) in priority to the holders of ordinary shares and any other shares of Barclays Bank PLC in issue ranking junior to the Preference Shares.

The holders of the £13m 6% Callable Perpetual Core Tier One Notes and the $569m 6.86% Callable Perpetual Core Tier One Notes of Barclays Bank PLC (together, the TONs) and the holders of the £35m 5.3304%Step-up Callable Perpetual Reserve Capital Instruments, the $159m 5.926%Step-up Callable Perpetual Reserve Capital Instruments, the £33m 6.3688%Step-up Callable Perpetual Reserve Capital Instruments, the $117m 7.434%Step-up Callable Perpetual Reserve Capital Instruments and the £3,000m 14%Step-up Callable Perpetual Reserve Capital Instruments of Barclays Bank PLC (together, the RCIs) would, for the purposes only of calculating the amounts payable in respect of such securities on awinding-up of Barclays Bank PLC, subject to limited exceptions and to the extent that the TONs and the RCIs are then in issue, rank pari passu with the holders of the most senior class or classes of preference shares then in issue in the capital of Barclays Bank PLC. Accordingly, the holders of the preference shares would rank equally with the holders of such TONs and RCIs on such awinding-up of Barclays Bank PLC (unless one or more classes of shares of Barclays Bank PLC ranking in priority to the preference shares are in issue at the time of suchwinding-up, in which event the holders of such TONs and RCIs would rank equally with the holders of such shares and in priority to the holders of the preference shares).

Subject to such ranking, in such event, holders of the preference shares will be entitled to receive out of assets of Barclays Bank PLC available for distributions to shareholders, liquidating distributions in the amount of10,000 per 4.75% Preference Share, £10,000 per 6.0% Preference Share, $10,000 per 6.278% Preference Share, $25 per 6.625% Preference Share, $25 per 7.1% Preference Share, $25 per 7.75% Preference Share and $0.25 per 8.125% Preference Share, plus, in each case, an amount equal to the accrued dividend for the then current dividend period to the date of the commencement of thewinding-up or other such return of capital. If a dividend is not paid in full on any preference shares on any dividend payment date, then a dividend restriction shall apply.

This dividend restriction will mean that neither Barclays Bank PLC nor Barclays PLC may (a) declare or pay a dividend (other than payment by Barclays PLC of a final dividend declared by its shareholders prior to the relevant dividend payment date, or a dividend paid by Barclays Bank PLC to Barclays PLC or to a wholly owned subsidiary) on any of their respective ordinary shares, other preference shares or other share capital or (b) redeem, purchase, reduce or otherwise acquire any of their respective share capital, other than shares of Barclays Bank PLC held by Barclays PLC or a wholly owned subsidiary, until the earlier of: (1) the date on which Barclays Bank PLC next declares and pays in full a preference dividend; and (2) the date on or by which all the preference shares are redeemed in full or purchased by Barclays Bank PLC.

Holders of the preference shares are not entitled to receive notice of, or to attend, or vote at, any general meeting of Barclays Bank PLC. Barclays Bank PLC is not permitted to create a class of shares ranking as regards participation in the profits or assets of Barclays Bank PLC in priority to the preference shares, save with the sanction of a special resolution of a separate general meeting of the holders of the preference shares (requiring a majority of not less than three-fourths of the holders of the

450  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F


Barclays Bank PLC data

Notes to the accounts

preference shares voting at the separate general meeting) or with the consent in writing of the holders of three-fourths of the preference shares.

Except as described above, the holders of the preference shares have no right to participate in the surplus assets of Barclays Bank PLC.

Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2016 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  443


Barclays Bank PLC data

Notes to the accounts

Other equity instruments

Other equity instruments of £5,350m (2014: £4,350m)£6,486m (2015: £5,230m) include AT1 securities issued by Barclays Bank PLC. In 2015,2016, there was one issuance of Fixed Rate Resetting Perpetual Subordinated Contingent Convertible Securities, with a principal amount of £1.0bn.£1.1bn.

The AT1 securities are perpetual securities with no fixed maturity and are structured to qualify as AT1 instruments under CRD IV.

 

Other shareholders’ equity                 
  The Group    The Bank                  The Group   The Bank 
        2015          2014           2015          2014       

            2016

 

   

 

            2015

 

 

 

  

            2016

 

  

 

            2015

 

 

 

  £m   £m    £m   £m      £m   £m   £m  £m 
As at 1 January  485    485    549    549      485   485   549  549 
Redemption    (214)   -   (214)  - 
As at 31 December  485    485    549    549      271   485   335  549 

Included in other shareholders’ equity are capital notes which bear interest at rates fixed periodically in advance, based on London interbank rates. These notes are repayable in each case, at the option of the Bank, in whole on any interest payment date. The Bank is not obliged to make a payment of interest on its capital notes if, in the preceding six months, a dividend has not been declared or paid on any class of shares of Barclays PLC.

Upper Tier 2 Capital instruments were redeemed in full during 2016, resulting in a reduction in other shareholders’ equity of £214m.

m Reserves

Currency translation reserve

The currency translation reserve represents the cumulative gains and losses on the retranslation of the Group’s net investment in foreign operations, net of the effects of hedging.

As at 31 December 20152016 there was a debitcredit balance of £3,054m (2015: £623m (2014: £582m debit) in the currency translation reserve. The increase in the debitcredit balance of £3,677m (2015: £41m (2014: £560m decrease to a debit balance)debit) principally reflected the depreciationstrengthening of ZAR and EUR against GBP, offset by the appreciation of USDall major currencies against GBP. The currency translation reserve movement associated withnon-controlling interests was a £801m credit (2015: £435m debit (2014: £74m debit) reflecting the depreciationappreciation of ZAR against GBP.

During the year a £94m net gain (2015: £65m net loss (2014: £91m net gain)loss) from recycling of the currency translation reserve was recognised in the income statement.

Available for sale reserve

The available for sale reserve represents the unrealised change in the fair value of available for sale investments since initial recognition.

As at 31 December 20152016 there was a creditdebit balance of £338m£22m in the available for sale reserve (2014: £578m(2015: £338m credit). The decrease of £360m (2015: £240m (2014: £427m increase) principally reflected a £350m lossdecrease) primarily due to £2,223m gain from changes in fair value on Government Bonds, predominantly held in the liquidity pool, £148m£1,677m of losses from related hedging, £378m£912m of net gains transferred to net profit, partially offset by £396mmainly due to £615m gain from changes in fair valueon disposal of equity investments inBarclays’ share of Visa Europe and an £86m change in insurance liabilities.Limited. A tax creditcharge of £132m£28m was recognised in the period relating to these items. The tax credit on AFS movements represented an effective rate of tax of 35.5% (2014: 19.4%). This is significantly higher than the UK corporation tax rate of 20.25% (2014: 21.5%) due to AFS movements including the VISA Europe gain that will be offset by existing UK capital losses for which a deferred tax asset has not been recognised.

Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  451


Barclays Bank PLC data

Notes to the accounts

Cash flow hedging reserve

The cash flow hedging reserve represents the cumulative gains and losses on effective cash flow hedging instruments that will be recycled to the income statement when the hedged transactions affect profit or loss.

As at 31 December 20152016 there was a credit balance of £954m (2015: £709m (2014: £1,817m credit) in the cash flow hedging reserve. The decreaseincrease of £245m (2015: £1,108m (2014: £1,544m increase)decrease) principally reflected a £1,062m decrease£829m increase in the fair value of interest rate swaps held for hedging purposes as interest rate forward curves increased and £255mdecreased, partially offset by £516m gains recycled to the income statement in line with when the hedged item affects profit or loss partially offset byand a tax credit of £206m. The tax credit on cash flow hedging reserve movements represented an effective rate of tax of 10.6% (2014: 19.8%). This is significantly lower than the UK corporation tax rate of 20.25% (2014: 21.5%) due to the tax rate changes introduced by the UK Summer Budget increasing associated deferred tax liabilities.£93m.

nm  Non-controlling interests

 

   
 
Profit attributable to Non-
Controlling interest
 
  
   

 

Equity attributable to Non-

Controlling interest

  

  

   

 

Dividends paid to Non-

Controlling interest

  

  

   

 

 

Profit attributable to Non-

 

Controlling interest

 

 

 

 

 

   

 

 

Equity attributable to Non-

 

Controlling interest

 

 

 

 

 

   

 

 

Dividends paid to Non-

 

Controlling interest

 

 

 

 

 

   2015      2014      2015      2014      2015      2014      

 

                2016

 

 

 

   

 

                2015

 

 

 

   

 

                2016

 

 

 

   

 

                2015

 

 

 

   

 

                2016

 

 

 

   

 

                2015

 

 

 

   £m     £m     £m     £m     £m     £m     £m    £m    £m    £m    £m    £m 
Barclays Africa Group Limited   325     320     1,902     2,247     209     189     402    324    3,507    1,902    235    209 
Other non-controlling interests   2     6     12     4     -     1     3    3    15    12    -    - 
Total   327     326     1,914     2,251     209     190     405    327    3,522    1,914    235    209 

Barclays Bank PLC owns 50.2% (2015: 62.5% (2014: 62.3%) of Barclays Africa Group Limited.

Summarised financial information for Barclays Africa Group Limited

Summarised financial information for Barclays Africa Group Limited, before intercompany eliminations, is set out below:

    
 
Barclays Africa Group
Limited
  
  
   
 
Barclays Africa Group
Limited
  
  
   2015      2014   
    £m     £m  

Income statement information

    

Total income net of insurance claims

   3,418     3,530  

Profit after tax

   781     765  

Total other comprehensive income for the year, after tax

   26     (7

Total comprehensive income for the year

   807     758  

Statement of cash flows information

    

Net cash inflows

   923     43  

Balance sheet information

    

Total assets

   49,471     55,378  

Total liabilities

   45,200     50,150  

Shareholder equity

   4,271     5,228  

 

452444  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 20152016 Annual Report on Form 20-F  


Barclays Bank PLC data

Notes to the accounts

    

 

on Dividends on ordinary shares

Ordinary dividends were paid to enable Barclays PLC to fund its dividend to shareholders.

The 20152016 financial statements include £876m (2014: £821m)£638m (2015: £876m) of dividends paid. This includes the final dividend declared in relation to 2014the prior year of £476m (2014: £512m)£502m (2015: £476m) and interim dividends of £400m (2014: £309m)£119m (2015: £400m), resulting in interim dividends of 17p (2014: 13p)5p (2015: 17p) per ordinary share and a total dividend for the year of 37p (2014: 35p)27p (2015: 37p) per ordinary share paid during the year. There was a £18m dividend in specie paid to Barclays PLC in respect of the distribution of Group Service Company to Barclays Bank PLC.

Dividends paid on the 4.75%100 preference shares amounted to £339.67£370.20 per share (2014: £394.46). Due to share buybacks in 2014 no dividends were paid on the 4.875%100 preference shares (2014: £385.81)(2015: £339.67). Dividends paid on the 6.0% £100 preference shares amounted to £600.00 per share (2014:(2015: £600.00). Dividends paid on the 6.278% US$100 preference shares amounted to £410.28£467.05 per share (2014: £383.45)(2015: £410.28). Dividends paid on the 6.625% US$0.25 preference shares amounted to £1.09£1.19 per share (2014: £1.02)(2015: £1.09). Dividends paid on the 7.1% US$0.25 preference shares amounted to £1.17£1.30 per share (2014: £1.09)(2015: £1.17). Dividends paid on the 7.75% US$0.25 preference shares amounted to £1.28£1.35 per share (2014: £1.19)(2015: £1.28). Dividends paid on the 8.125% US$0.25 preference shares amounted to £1.34£1.49 per share (2014: £1.25)(2015: £1.34).

Dividends paid on preference shares amounted to £343m (2014: £441m)£339m (2015: £343m). Dividends paid on other equity instruments amounted to £348m (2014: £252m)£462m (2015: £346m).

po Capital

The Barclays Bank PLC Group’s policies and objectives for managing capital are the same as those for the Barclays PLC Group, disclosed on pages 103 and 104.page 388.

The table below provides details of the Barclays Bank PLC Group at 31 December 2015.2016.

 

Regulatory capital   2015             2016 
   

 

 

 

£m

 

 

Fully loaded Common Equity Tier 1   40,74146,450 
PRA Transitional Tier 1   52,63458,652 
PRA Transitional Total Capital Resources   66,52774,871 

The capital composition of

Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2016 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  445


Barclays Bank PLC Group is broadly equivalentdata

Notes to Barclays PLC Group shown in the table on page 150.accounts

qp Segmental reporting

Segmental reporting by Barclays Bank PLC is the same as that presented in the Barclays PLC financial statements, except for:

– the difference in profit before tax of £1.2bn (2015: £0.8bn) between Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC is included in Head Office; and

–  the difference in profit before tax of £768m (2014: £53m) between Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC is included in Head Office Functions and Other Operations and Investment Bank; and

– the difference in total assets of £0.9bn (2015: £0.8bn) is mainly due to loan notes issued by Barclays Bank PLC to fund the derivatives in Barclays PLC.

–  the difference in total assets of £715m (2014: £787m) is represented by holdings of Barclays PLC shares held for employee share schemes and Barclays Bank Plc issued loan notes to fund the derivatives created in Barclays Plc.

rq Related Parties

The aggregate emoluments of all Directors and Officers of Barclays Bank PLC who held office during the year (2015:(2016: 33 persons, 2015: 33 persons, 2014: 34 persons, 2013: 38 persons) for the year ended 31st December 20152016 amounted to £71.3m (2015: £52.5m, (2014: £57.0m, 2013: £70.3m)2014: £57.0m). In addition, the aggregate amount set aside by the Bank and its subsidiaries for the year ended 31st December 2015,2016, to provide pension benefits for the Directors and Officers amounted to £0.2m (2015: £0.3m (2014: £0.3m, 2013: £0.6m)2014: £0.3m).

 

446  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 20152016 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  453


Additional Financial data

Additional financial disclosure (unaudited)

    

 

 

 

Selected financial statistics

   2015     2014     2013     2012     2011     

 

2016

 

 

 

   

 

2015

 

 

 

   

 

2014

 

 

 

   

 

2013

 

 

 

   

 

2012

 

 

 

  

 

 

 

%

 

  

  

 

 

 

%

 

  

  

 

 

 

%

 

  

  

 

 

 

%

 

  

  

 

 

 

%

 

  

   %    %    %    %    % 

Return on average shareholders’ equitya

   1.4     0.8     1.6     (0.5   5.6     4.5    0.9    0.1    1.7    (0.5) 

Return on average total assetsb

   0.1     -     0.1     -     0.2     0.2    -    -    0.1    - 

Average shareholders’ equity as a percentage of average total assets

   5.2     4.8     4.5     4.2     3.9     5.1    4.9    4.6    3.9    3.8 
                    
   2015      2014      2013      2012      2011      

 

2016

 

 

 

   

 

2015

 

 

 

   

 

2014

 

 

 

   

 

2013

 

 

 

   

 

2012

 

 

 

Selected income statement data

  

 

 

 

£m

 

  

  

 

 

 

£m

 

  

  

 

 

 

£m

 

  

  

 

 

 

£m

 

  

  

 

 

 

£m

 

  

   £m    £m    £m    £m    £m 

Continuing operations

                    

Interest income

   17,195     17,369     18,315     19,211     20,589     14,423    13,947    14,200    14,361    14,772 

Interest expense

   (3,882   (5,231   (6,662   (7,561   (8,393   (2,966)    (2,584)    (4,056)    (4,851)    (5,334) 

Non-interest income

   13,442     13,677     16,810     13,807     20,927     11,012    11,445    11,665    14,553    11,251 

Operating expenses

   (20,677   (20,423   (21,974   (21,007   (20,881   (16,348)    (18,536)    (18,178)    (19,534)    (18,474) 

Impairment charges

   (2,114   (2,168   (3,071   (3,340   (5,602   (2,373)    (1,762)    (1,821)    (2,601)    (2,659) 

Share of post-tax results of associates and joint ventures

   47     36     (56   110     60     70    41    28    (65)    92 

Profit on disposal of subsidiaries, associates and joint ventures

   (637   (471   6     28     (94   565    (637)    (473)    6    28 

Gain on acquisitions

   -     -     26     2     -     -    -    -    26    2 

Profit before tax

   2,841     2,309     2,885     650     5,865     4,383    1,914    1,365    1,896    (322) 

Profit attributable to equity holders of the parent

   911     528     963     (306   3,533     2,867    566    85    963    (306) 
                              
   2015      2014      2013      2012      2011      

 

2016

 

 

 

   

 

2015

 

 

 

   

 

2014

 

 

 

   

 

2013

 

 

 

   

 

2012

 

 

 

Selected balance sheet data

  

 

 

 

£m

 

  

  

 

 

 

£m

 

  

  

 

 

 

£m

 

  

  

 

 

 

£m

 

  

  

 

 

 

£m

 

  

   £m    £m    £m    £m    £m 

Total shareholders’ equity

   66,019     63,794     63,220     59,923     63,933     60,947    64,105    59,444    58,931    57,067 

Subordinated liabilities

   21,955     21,685     22,249     24,422     24,870     23,871    21,955    21,685    22,249    24,422 

Deposits from banks, customer accounts and debt securities in issue

   534,537     572,357     574,340     587,787     592,460     548,286    534,537    572,357    574,340    587,787 

Loans and advances to banks and customers

   441,046     470,424     474,059     472,809     485,277     436,417    441,046    470,424    474,059    472,809 

Total assets

   1,120,727     1,358,693     1,344,201     1,512,777     1,588,555     1,213,955    1,120,727    1,358,693    1,344,201    1,512,777 

Notes

aReturn on average shareholders’ equity represents profit attributable to the equity holders of the parent as a percentage of average shareholders’ equity.

 

bReturn on average total assets represents profit attributable to the equity holders of the parent as a percentage of average total assets.

 

454Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2016 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  447


Additional Financial data

Additional financial disclosure (unaudited)

 

Ratio of earnings to fixed charges – Barclays Bank Plc

 

  

 

 

 

 

2016

 

 

 

 

  

 

 

 

 

2015

 

 

 

 

  

 

 

 

 

2014

 

 

 

 

  

 

 

 

 

2013

 

 

 

 

  

 

 

 

 

2012

 

 

 

 

   

 

 

 

 

(In £m except for ratios)

 

 

 

 

Ratio of earnings to fixed charges          
Fixed charges          
Interest expense   2,966    2,584    4,056    4,851    5,334 
Rental expense   204    157    207    219    216 
      
Total fixed charges   3,170    2,741    4,263    5,070    5,550 
Earnings          
Income before taxes and non-controlling interests   4,383    1,914    1,365    1,896    322 
Less: unremitted pre-tax income of associated companies and joint ventures   (53)    (26)    (34)    102    (94) 
Total earnings excluding fixed charges   4,330    1,888    1,331    1,998    (416) 
Fixed charges   3,170    2,741    4,263    5,070    5,550 
Total earnings including fixed charges   7,500    4,629    5,594    7,068    5,134 

 

Ratio of earnings to fixed charges

 

  

 

 

 

 

2.37

 

 

 

 

  

 

 

 

 

1.69

 

 

 

 

  

 

 

 

 

1.31

 

 

 

 

  

 

 

 

 

1.39

 

 

 

 

  

 

 

 

 

0.93

 

 

 

 

          

 

Ratio of earnings to fixed charges and preference shares – Barclays Bank Plc

 

   

 

2016

 

 

 

   

 

2015

 

 

 

   

 

2014

 

 

 

   

 

2013

 

 

 

   

 

2012

 

 

 

   

 

 

 

 

(In £m except for ratios)

 

 

 

 

Combined fixed charges, preference share dividends and similar appropriations          
Interest expense   2,966    2,584    4,056    4,851    5,334 
Rental expense   204    157    207    219    216 
Fixed charges   3,170    2,741    4,263    5,070    5,550 
Preference share dividends and similar appropriations   343    345    443    412    466 
Total fixed charges   3,513    3,086    4,706    5,482    6,016 
Earnings          
Income before taxes and non-controlling interests   4,383    1,914    1,365    1,896    322 
Less: unremitted pre-tax income of associated companies and joint ventures   (53)    (26)    (34)    102    (94) 
Total earnings excluding fixed charges   4,330    1,888    1,331    1,998    416 
Fixed charges   3,513    3,086    4,706    5,482    6,016 
Total earnings including fixed charges   7,843    4,974    6,037    7,480    5,600 
Ratio of earnings to fixed charges, preference share dividends and similarappropriations   2.23    1.61    1.28    1.36    0.93 

448  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 20152016 Annual Report on Form 20-F  


Additional Financial dataGlossary

    

Ratio of earnings to fixed charges – Barclays Bank Plc (unaudited)   2015     2014     2013     2012     2011  
    (In £m except for ratios)  
Ratio of earnings to fixed charges          
Fixed charges          
Interest expense   3,882     5,231     6,662     7,561     8,393  
Rental expense   211     261     254     251     268  
Total fixed charges   4,093     5,492     6,916     7,812     8,661  
Earnings          
Income before taxes and non-controlling interests   2,841     2,309     2,885     650     5,974  
Less: unremitted pre-tax income of associated companies and joint ventures   (34   (45   95     (113   (47
Total earnings excluding fixed charges   2,807     2,264     2,980     537     5,927  
Fixed charges   4,093     5,492     6,916     7,812     8,661  
Total earnings including fixed charges   6,900     7,756     9,896     8,349     14,588  
Ratio of earnings to fixed charges   1.69     1.41     1.43     1.07     1.68  
          
Ratio of earnings to fixed charges and preference shares – Barclays Bank Plc (unaudited)   2015     2014     2013     2012     2011  
    (In £m except for ratios)  
Combined fixed charges, preference share dividends and similar appropriations          
Interest expense   3,882     5,231     6,662     7,561     8,393  
Rental expense   211     261     254     251     268  
Fixed charges   4,093     5,492     6,916     7,812     8,661  
Preference share dividends and similar appropriations   345     443     412     466     514  
Total fixed charges   4,438     5,935     7,328     8,278     9,175  
Earnings          
Income before taxes and non-controlling interests   2,841     2,309     2,885     650     5,974  
Less: unremitted pre-tax income of associated companies and joint ventures   (34   (45   95     (113   (47
Total earnings excluding fixed charges   2,807     2,264     2,980     537     5,927  
Fixed charges   4,438     5,935     7,328     8,278     9,175  
Total earnings including fixed charges   7,245     8,199     10,308     8,815     15,102  
Ratio of earnings to fixed charges, preference share dividends and similar appropriations   1.63     1.38     1.41     1.06     1.65  

Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  455


Glossary    

    

 

 

 

Glossary of terms

‘A-IRB’ / ‘Advanced-Internal Ratings Based’ See ‘Internal Ratings Based (IRB)’.

‘ABS CDO Super Senior’Super senior tranches of debt linked to collateralised debt obligations of asset backed securities (defined below). Payment of super senior tranches takes priority over other obligations.

‘Acceptances and endorsements’ An acceptance is an undertaking by a bank to pay a bill of exchange drawn on a customer. The Group expects most acceptances to be presented, but reimbursement by the customer is normally immediate. Endorsements are residual liabilities of the Group in respect of bills of exchange which have been paid and subsequently rediscounted.

Additional Tier 1 (AT1) capital’ In the context of CRD IV, a measuretype of a bank’s financial strengthcapital as defined in the Capital Requirements Regulation (CRR).

‘Additional Tier 1 (AT1) securities’Securities that are tradedtreated as additional tier 1 (AT1) capital in the context of CRD IV.

‘Adjusted attributable profit’ Adjusted profit after tax that is attributable to ordinary equity holders of the parent adjusted for the after tax amounts of capital securities classified as equity.

‘Adjusted basic earnings per share’ Basic earnings per share, based on adjusted attributable earnings.

‘Adjusted compensation: net operating income’ Compensation costs as a proportion of adjusted net operating income (adjusted income less credit impairment charges and other provisions).

‘Adjusted cost: income ratio’ Adjusted operating expenses (defined below) compared to adjusted income (defined below).

‘Adjusted income’ Total income net of insurance claims adjusted to exclude the impact of own credit, Education, Social Housing, and Local Authority (ESHLA) revision of valuation methodology and gain on US Lehman acquisition assets.

‘Adjusted total operating expenses’ Total operating expenses adjusted to exclude impairment of goodwill and other assets relating to businesses being disposed, provisions for UK customer redress, provisions for ongoing investigations and litigation including Foreign Exchange and gain on valuation of a component of the defined retirement benefit liability.

‘Adjusted profit after tax’ Adjusted profit before tax (defined below) less tax.

‘Adjusted profit before tax’ Profit before tax adjusted to exclude the impact of own credit, impairment of goodwill and other assets relating to businesses being disposed, provisions for UK customer redress, gain on US Lehman acquisition assets, provisions for ongoing investigations and litigation including Foreign Exchange, loss on sale relating to the Spanish, Portuguese and Italian businesses, Education, Social Housing, and Local Authority (ESHLA) revision of valuation methodology, and gain on valuation of a component of the defined retirement benefit liability.

‘Adjusted return on average risk weighted assets’ Adjusted profit after tax as a proportion of average risk weighted assets.

‘Adjusted return on average shareholders’ equity’ Adjusted profit after tax attributable to ordinary shareholders, including an adjustment for the tax credit in reserves in respect of other equity instruments, as a proportion of average shareholders’ equity, excluding non-controlling interests and other equity instruments.

‘Adjusted return on average tangible shareholders’ equity’ Adjusted profit after tax attributable to ordinary shareholders, including an adjustment for the tax credit in reserves in respect of other equity instruments, as a proportion of average shareholders’ equity excluding non-controlling interests and other equity instruments adjusted for the deduction of intangible assets and goodwill.

‘Advanced Measurement Approach’ Under CRD IV, operational risk charges can be calculated by using one of three methods (or approaches) that increase in sophistication and risk sensitivity: (i) the Basic Indicator Approach; (ii) the Standardised Approach; and (iii) the Advanced Measurement Approach (AMA). Under the AMA the banks are allowed to develop their own empirical model to quantify required capital for operational risk.

456  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F


Glossary

Banks can only use this approach subject to approval from their local regulators.

‘Africa Banking’ The previously reported Africa Retail and Business Banking combined with other businesses across Africa previously reported within Barclaycard,(excluding the Investment Bank, Corporate BankingEgypt and Wealth Management.Zimbabwe businesses transferred to BarclaysNon-Core). The Africa head office function is also included in Africa Banking.Barclays Africa. This combined Barclays Africa Banking business is managed under three primary businesses: Retail and Business Banking; Wealth, Investment Management and Insurance; and Corporate and Investment Banking. The resulting AfricanBarclays Africa business comprises the Barclays Africa Group Limited (BAGL)(‘BAGL’ or ‘Barclays Africa’) listed entity, together with Barclays Egypt and Zimbabwe businesses.entity.

‘Agencies’Bonds issued by state and / or government agencies or government-sponsored entities.

‘Agency Mortgage-Backed Securities’ Mortgage-Backed Securities issued by government-sponsored institutions.

‘All price risk (APR)’ An estimate of all the material market risks, including rating migration and default for the correlation trading portfolio.

‘American Depository Receipts (ADR)’ A negotiable certificate that represents the ownership of shares in anon-US company (for example Barclays) trading in US financial markets.

‘Americas’ Geographic segment comprising the USA, Canada and countries where Barclays operates within Latin America.

‘Annual Earnings at Risk (AEaR)’Impact on earnings of a parallel (upward or downward) movement in interest rates.

‘Application scorecards’ Algorithm based decision tools used to aid business decisions and manage credit risk based on available customer data at the point of application for a product.

‘Arrears’Customers are said to be in arrears when they are behind in fulfilling their obligations with the result that an outstanding loan is unpaid or overdue. Such customers are also said to be in a state of delinquency. When a customer is in arrears, their entire outstanding balance is said to be delinquent, meaning that delinquent balances are the total outstanding loans on which payments are overdue.

‘Arrears Managed accounts’Accounts’ Arrears Managed accountsAccounts are principally Business Lending customers in arrears with an exposure limit less than £50,000 in the UK and100,000 in Europe, supervised using processes designed to manage a homogeneous set of assets.

‘Asia’ Geographic segment comprising countries where Barclays operates within Asia (including Singapore, Japan, China and India), AustralasiaAustralia and the Middle East.

‘Asset Backed Commercial Paper’ Typically short-term notes secured on specified assets issued by consolidated special purpose entities for funding purposes.

‘Asset Backed Securities (ABS)’ Securities that represent an interest in an underlying pool of referenced assets. The referenced pool can comprise any assets which attract a set of associated cash flows but are commonly pools of residential or commercial mortgages and, in the case of Collateralised Debt Obligations (CDOs), the referenced pool may be ABS or other classes of assets.

‘Attributable profit’ Profit after tax that is attributable to ordinary equity holders of the parentBarclays PLC adjusted for the after tax amounts of capital securities classified as equity.

Average allocated tangible shareholders equity’ Calculated as the average of the monthlyperiod-end allocated tangible equity during the period.

‘Average leverage ratio’ As per the updated PRA rulebook, is calculated as the average capital measure divided by the average exposure measure for the quarter, where the average is based on the capital and exposure measure on the last day of each month in the quarter.

‘Average shareholders equity’ Calculated as the average of monthly period end shareholders’ equity excludingnon-controlling interests.

‘Average tangible shareholders equity’ Calculated as the average of monthly period end shareholders’ equity excludingnon-controlling interests adjusted for the deduction of intangible assets and goodwill.

Back testing’Includes a number of techniques that assess the continued statistical validity of a model by simulating how the model would have predicted recent experience.

‘Balance weighted Loan to Value (LTV) ratio’ In the context of the credit risk disclosures on secured home loans, a means of calculating marked to market LTVs derived by calculating individual LTVs at account level and weighting it by the balances to arrive at the average position. Balance weighted loan to value is calculated using the following formula: LTV = ((loan balance 1 x MTM LTV%

Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2016 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  449


Glossary

for loan 1) + (loan balance 2 x MTM LTV% for loan 2) + ... ))) / total outstandings in portfolio.

‘The Bank’ Barclays Bank PLC.

‘Barclaycard’ An international consumer payments company serving the needs of businesses and consumers through credit cards, consumer lending, merchant acquiring, commercial cards and point of sale finance. Barclaycard has scaled operations in UK, US, Germany Iberia and Scandinavia.

Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  457


Glossary

‘Barclays Core’ TheBarclays Core includes Barclays business of PersonalUK, Barclays International and Corporate Banking, Barclaycard, Africa Banking and the Investment Bank, along with Head Office and Other Operations.Office. See also ‘Barclays Non-Core’

‘Barclays Core Operating businesses’The Corecore Barclays businesses operated by Barclays UK (which include the UK Personal business, of Personalthe small UK Corporate and Corporate Banking, Barclaycard, Africa BankingUK Wealth businesses and the Barclaycard UK consumer credit cards business) and Barclays International (which include the large UK Corporate business; the international Corporate and Wealth businesses; the Investment Bank.Bank; the international Barclaycard business; and Barclaycard Business Solutions). See also ‘BarclaysNon-Core’

‘Barclays Direct’A Barclays brand, comprising the savings and mortgage businesses acquired from ING Direct UK in March 2013.

‘Barclays International’ The division of Barclays which will not ultimately be ring-fenced as part of regulatory ring fencing requirements. The division includes the large UK Corporate business; the international Corporate and Wealth businesses; the Investment Bank; the international Barclaycard business (consisting of the US, German and Nordic consumer credit cards businesses); and Barclaycard Business Solutions (including merchant acquiring).

‘BarclaysNon-Core’ This unit groups together businesses and assets that are not strategically attractive to Barclays and that will be exited, or run down, over time.down. See also ‘Barclays Core’

Basel 2’Barclays UK’ The seconddivision of Barclays which will be ring-fenced as part of regulatory ring fencing requirements. The division includes the Basel accords. It sets a framework of minimum capital requirements for banks – coveringUK Personal business; the small UK Corporate and UK Wealth businesses; and the Barclaycard UK consumer credit operational and market risk; supervisory review of banks’ assessment of capital adequacy and disclosure requirements.cards business

‘Basel 3’The third of the Basel Accords on banking supervision. Developed in response to the financial crisis of 2008, setting new requirements on composition of capital, counterparty credit risk, liquidity and leverage ratios.

‘Basel Committee of Banking Supervisors (BCBS or The Basel Committee)’ A forum for regular cooperation on banking supervisory matters which develops global supervisory standards for the banking industry. Its members are officials

from central banks or prudential supervisors from 27 countries and territories.

‘BCBS 270 leverage exposure’ The denominator of the internationally agreed Basel III leverage ratio. The exposure measure makes certain adjustments to Total assets under IFRS in accordance with the requirements stated in BCBS 270 (“Basel III leverage ratio framework and disclosure requirements”).

‘Basis point(s)’ / ‘bp(s)’ One hundredth of a per cent (0.01%); 100 basis points is 1%. The measure is used in quoting movements in interest rates, yields on securities and for other purposes.

‘Basis risk’ Measures the impact of changes in tenor basis (e.g., the basis between swaps vs. 3 month (3M) Libor and swaps vs. 6 month (6M) Libor) and cross currency basis.

‘Behavioural scorecards’ Algorithm based decision tools used to aid business decisions and manage credit risk based on existing customer data derived from account usage.

‘Book quality’ In the context of the Funding Risk, Capital Risk section, changes in RWAs caused by factors such as underlying customer behaviour or demographics leading to changes in risk profile.

‘Book size’In the context of the Funding Risk, Capital Risk section, changes in RWAs driven by business activity, including net originations or repayments.

‘Businesses’ In the context ofNon-Core Analysis of Total income, Barclays Non Core Businessesbusinesses comprise ongoing businesses seeking to besold-off or run down including Europe retail andnon-core elements of the Investment Bank and other non strategic businesses.

‘Business Lending’ Business Lending in Personal and Corporate BankingBarclays UK that primarily relates to small and medium enterprises typically with exposures up to £3m or with a turnover up to £5m.

‘Business scenario stresses’ Multi asset scenario analysis of extreme, but plausible events that may impact the market risk exposures of the Investment Bank.

‘Buy to let mortgage’ A mortgage where the intention of the customer (investor) was to let the property at origination.

‘Capital Conservation Buffer (CCB)’ Common Equity Tier 1 capital required to be held under CRD IV to ensure that banks build up surplus capital outside periods of stress which can be drawn down if losses are incurred.

‘Capital deduction approach’ An approach available to institutions when calculating risk-weighted assets for securitisation exposures. It is the same as a deduction from capital where most punitive risk weight of 1250% is applied (assuming 8% Capital Adequacy ratio).

‘Capital ratios’ Key financial ratios measuring the Group’s capital adequacy or financial strength. These include the CET 1CET1 ratio, Tier 1 capital ratio and Total Capitalcapital ratio.

‘Capital requirements’ Amount to be held by the Group to cover the risk of losses to a certain confidence level.

458  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F


Glossary

‘Capital Requirements Regulation (CRR)’ Regulation (EU) No 575/2013, which accompanies CRD IV and sets out detailed rules for capital eligibility, the calculation of RWAs, the measurement of leverage, the management of large exposures and minimum standards for liquidity.

‘Capital requirements on the underlying exposures (KIRB)’ An approach available to banks when calculating risk weighted assets (RWA) for securitisation exposures. This is based upon the RWA amounts that would be calculated under the IRB approach for the

450  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2016 Annual Report on Form 20-F


Glossary

underlying pool of securitised exposures in the program, had such exposures not been securitised.

‘Capital resources’ Financial instruments on balance sheet that are eligible to satisfy capital requirements.

‘Central Counterparty’ / ‘Central Clearing Counterparties (CCPs)’ A clearing house mediating between the buyer and the seller in a financial transaction, such as a derivative contract or repurchase agreement (repo). Where a central counterparty is used, a singlebi-lateral contract between the buyer and seller is replaced with two contracts, one between the buyer and the CCP and one between the CCP and the seller. The use of CCPs allows for greater oversight and improved credit risk mitigation inover-the-counter (OTC) markets.

‘Charge-off’ In the retail segment this refers to the point in time when collections activity changes from the collection of arrears to the recovery of the full balance. This is normally when six payments are in arrears.

‘Chargesadd-on and non VaR’ In the context of risk weighted assets,Risk Weighted Assets, any additional Market Risk not captured within Modelled VaR, including Incremental Risk chargesCharges and Correlation Risk.

‘Client Assets’ Assets managed or administered by Barclays on behalf of clients including Assetsassets under Managementmanagement (AUM), Custodycustody assets, Assetsassets under Administrationadministration and client deposits.

‘CLOs and Other insured assets’ Highly rated CLO positions wrapped by monolines,non-CLOs wrapped by monolines and other assets wrapped with Credit Support Annex (CSA) protection.

‘Collateralised Debt Obligation (CDO)’ Securities issued by a third party which reference Asset Backed Securities (ABSs) (defined above) and/or certain other related assets purchased by the issuer. CDOs may feature exposure tosub-prime mortgage assets through the underlying assets.

‘Collateralised Loan Obligation (CLO)’ A security backed by the repayments from a pool of commercial loans. The payments may be made to different classes of owners (in tranches).

‘Collateralised Mortgage Obligation (CMO)’ A type of security backed by mortgages. A special purpose entity receives income from the mortgages and passes them on to investors of the security.

‘Collectively assessed impairment allowances’ Impairment of financial assets is measured collectively where a portfolio comprises homogenous assets and where appropriate statistical techniques are available.

Combined Buffer Requirement’ In the context of the CRD IV capital obligations, the combined requirements of the Capital Conservation Buffer, the GSII Buffer, the OSII buffer, the Systemic Risk bubber and an institution specific counter-cyclical buffer.

Commercial paper (CP)’ Short-term notes issued by entities, including banks, for funding purposes.

‘Commercial real estate’ Commercial real estate includes office buildings, industrial property, medical centres, hotels, retail stores, shopping centres, farm land, multifamily housing buildings, warehouses, garages, and industrial properties and other similar

properties. Commercial real estate loans are loans backed by a package of commercial real estate. Note: for the purposes of the Credit Risk section, the UK CRE portfolio includes property investment, development, trading and housebuilders but excludes social housing contractors.

‘Committee of Sponsoring Organisations of the Treadway Commission Framework (COSO)’ A joint initiative of five private sector organisations dedicated to providing development of frameworks and guidance on enterprise risk management, internal control and fraud deterrence.

‘Commodity derivatives’ Exchange traded andover-the-counter (OTC) derivatives based on an underlying commodity (e.g. metals, precious metals, oil and oil related, power and natural gas).

‘Commodity risk’ Measures the impact of changes in commodity prices and volatilities, including the basis between related commodities (e.g. Brent vs. WTI crude prices).

‘Common Equity Tier 1 (CET1) capital’In the context of CRD IV, a measuretype of capital that is predominantly common equity as defined by the Capital Requirements Regulation.Regulation, predominantly consisting of common equity.

‘Common Equity Tier 1 (CET1) ratio’ A measure of the Group’s Common Equity Tier 1 capital as a percentage of risk-weighted assetsRisk Weighted Assets under CRD IV. The Group must meet a prescribed ratio.

‘Compensation: income ratio’ The ratio of compensation to employeesexpense over total income net of insurance claims.

Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  459


Glossary

income. Compensation represents total staff costs lessnon-compensation items consisting of outsourcing, bank payroll tax, staff training, redundancy costs and retirement costs.

Comprehensive Risk Measure (CRM)’ An estimate of all the material market risks, including rating migration and default for the correlation trading portfolio. Also referred to as All Price Risk (APR) and Comprehensive Risk Capital Charge (CRCC).

‘Constant Currency Basis’ ExcludesExcluding the impact of foreign currency conversion to GBP when comparing financial results in two different financial periods.

‘Contingent capital notes (CCNs)’ Interest bearing debt securities issued by Barclays PLC or its subsidiaries that are either permanently written off or converted into an equity instrument from the issuer’s perspective in the event of Barclays PLC the

Group’s core tier 1 (CT1) or common equity tierCommon Equity Tier 1 (CET1) ratio, as appropriate, falling below a specified level.

‘Core deposit intangibles’ Premium paid to acquire the deposit base of an institution.

‘Correlation risk’ Refers to the change in marked to market value of a security when the correlation between the underlying assets changes over time.

Corporate and Investment Banking (CIB)’ Barclays Corporate and Investment Banking businesses which form part of Barclays International.

Cost: income ratio’ OperatingTotal operating expenses compared todivided by total income net of insurance claims.income.

Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2016 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  451


Glossary

‘Cost of Equity’ The rate of return targeted by the equity holders of a company.

‘Cost: net operating income ratio’ Operating expenses compared to total income net of insurance claims less credit impairment charges and other provisions.

‘Cost to Achieve (CTA)’Non-recurring investment in initiatives to drive cost and business efficiency across Barclays through rightsizing, industrialisation and innovation.

‘Cost to income jaws’Relationship of the percentage change movement in total operating expenses relative to total income net of insurance claimsincome.

‘Counter-Cyclical Capital Buffer (CCCB)’ CET1 Capital of up to 2.5% of risk weighted assets that is required to be held under CRD IV rules to ensure that banks build up surplus capital when macroeconomics conditions indicate areas of the economy are overheating.

‘Counter-Cyclical Capital Buffer (CCyB)’ A macroprudential buffer that applies to all PRA regulated institutions from 2018 and is calculated at 35% of any risk weighted countercyclical capital buffer set by the FPC. The CCLB applies in addition to the minimum of 3% and anyG-SII additional Leverage Ratio Buffer that applies,

‘Counterparty credit risk’ In the context of Risk Weighted Assets, by Risk, a component of risk weighted assetsRisk Weighted Assets that represents the risk of loss in derivatives, repurchase agreements and similar transactions resulting from the default of the counterparty.

‘Coverage ratio’In the context of the creditCredit risk disclosures, impairment allowances as a percentage of credit risk loanCredit Risk Loan balances.

‘Covered bonds’Debt securities backed by a portfolio of mortgages that are segregated from the issuer’s other assets solely for the benefit of the holders of the covered bonds.

‘CRD IV’ The Fourth Capital Requirements Directive, an EU Directive and an accompanying Regulation (CRR) that together prescribe EU capital adequacy and liquidity requirements and implements Basel 3 in the European Union. CRD IV came into effect on 1 January 2014.

‘Credit conversion factor (CCF)’ Factor used to estimate the risk fromoff-balance sheet commitments for the purpose of calculating the total Exposure at Default (EAD) used to calculate risk weighted assetsRisk Weighted Assets (RWAs).

‘Credit default swaps (CDS)’ A contract under which the protection seller receives premiums or interest-related payments in return for contracting to make payments to the protection buyer in the event of a defined credit event. Credit events normally include bankruptcy, payment default on a reference asset or assets, or downgrades by a rating agency.

‘Credit derivatives (CDs)’ An arrangement whereby the credit risk of an asset (the reference asset) is transferred from the buyer to the seller of the protection.

‘Credit enhancements’ See ‘Liquidity and Credit enhancements’.

‘Credit impairment charges’ Also known as ‘credit impairment’. Impairment charges on loans and advances to customers and banks and in respect of undrawn facilities and guarantees (see ‘Loan impairment’) and impairment charges on available for sale assets and reverse repurchase agreements.

‘Credit market exposures’ Assets and other instruments relating to commercial real estate and leveraged finance businesses that have been significantly impacted by the deterioration in the global credit markets. The exposures include positions subject to fair value movements in the Income Statement, positions that are classified as loans and advances and available for sale and other assets.

460  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F


Glossary

‘Credit Products’Represents Creditcredit products and Securitised Products income.

‘Credit quality step’ In the context of the Standardised Approach to calculating credit risk RWAs, a “credit quality assessment scale” maps the credit assessments of a recognised credit rating agency or export credit agency to credit quality steps that determine the risk weight to be applied to an exposure.

‘Credit Rating’ An evaluation of the creditworthiness of an entity seeking to enter into a credit agreement.

‘Credit risk’ The risk of the Group suffering financial loss if a counterparty fails to fulfil its contractual obligations to the Group under a loan agreement or similar. In the context of Risk Weighted Assets, by Risk, it is the component of risk weighted assetsRisk Weighted Assets that represents the risk of loss in loans and advances and similar transactions resulting from the default of the counterparty.

‘Credit Risk Loans (CRLs)’ A loan becomes a credit risk loan when evidence of deterioration has been observed, for example a missed payment or other breach of covenant. A loan may be reported in one of three categories: (i) impaired loans,loans; (ii) accruing past due 90 days or more,more; and (iii) impaired or restructured loans. These may include loans which, while impaired, are still performing but have associated individual impairment allowances raised against them.

‘Credit risk mitigation’ A range of techniques and strategies to actively mitigate credit risks to which the bank is exposed. These can be broadly divided into three types; Collateral, Nettingcollateral, netting andset-off, and Risk Transfer.risk transfer.

‘Credit spread’ The premium over the benchmark or risk-free rate required by the market to accept a lower credit quality.

‘Credit Valuation Adjustment (CVA)’ The difference between the risk-free value of a portfolio of trades and the market value which takes into account the counterparty’s risk of default. The CVA therefore represents an estimate of the adjustment to fair value that a market participant would make to incorporate the credit risk of the counterparty due to any failure to perform on contractual agreements.

‘CRL Coverage’ Impairment allowances as a percentage of total CRL (See ‘Credit Risk Loans’). Also known as the ‘CRL coverage ratio’.

Customer assets’ Represents loans and advances to customers. Average balances are calculated as the sum of all daily balances for the year to date divided by number of days in the year to date.

‘Customer deposits’ In the context of Funding Risk, Liquidity Risk section, money deposited by all individuals and companies that are not credit institutions. Such funds are recorded as liabilities in the Group’s balance sheet under Customer Accounts.

452  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2016 Annual Report on Form 20-F


Glossary

‘Customer liabilities’ Customer deposits.

‘Customer net interest income’ The sum of customer asset and customer liability net interest income. Customer net interest income reflects interest related to customer assets and liabilities only and does not include any interest on securities or othernon-customer assets and liabilities.

‘CVA volatility charge’ The volatility charge added to exposures that adjusts formid-market valuation on a portfolio of transactions with a counterparty. This is to reflect the current market value of the credit risk associated with the counterparty to the Bank. The charge is prescribed by the CRR.

‘Daily Value at Risk (DVaR)’ An estimate of the potential loss which might arise from market movements under normal market conditions, if the current positions were to be held unchanged for one business day, measured to a specified confidence level.

‘DBRS’ A credit rating agency.

‘Debit Valuation Adjustment (DVA)’ The opposite of credit valuation adjustmentCredit Valuation Adjustment (CVA). It is the difference between the risk-free value of a portfolio of trades and the market value which takes into account the Group’s risk of default. The DVA, therefore, represents an estimate of the adjustment to fair value that a market participant would make to incorporate the credit risk of the Group due to any failure to perform on contractual agreements.obligations. The DVA decreases the value of a liability to take into account a reduction in the remaining balance that would be settled should the Group default or not perform in terms ofany contractual agreements.obligations.

Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  461


Glossary

‘Debtbuy-backs’ Purchases of the Group’s issued debt securities, including equity accounted instruments, leading to theirde-recognition from the balance sheet.

‘Debt securities in issue’ Transferable securities evidencing indebtedness of the Group. These are liabilities of the Group and include certificates of deposit and commercial paper.

‘Default grades’ Barclays classify ranges of default probabilities into a set of 21 intervals called default grades, in order to distinguish differences in the probability of default risk.

Default fund contributions’ The amount of contribution made by members of a central counterparty (CCP). All members are required to contribute to this fund in advance of using a CCP. The default fund can be used by the CCP to cover losses incurred by the CCP where losses are greater than the margins provided by that member.

Derivatives’ In the context ofNon-Core Analysis of Total income, Derivatives comprise non strategic businesses from thenon-core Investment Bank

‘Derivatives netting’ Adjustments applied across asset and liabilitymark-to-market derivative positions pursuant to legally enforceable bilateral netting agreements and eligible cash collateral received in derivative transactions that meet the requirements of BCBS 270.

‘Diversification effect’ Reflects the fact the risk of a diversified portfolio is smaller than the sum of the risks of its constituent parts. It is measured as the sum of the individual asset class DVaR (see above) estimates less the total DVaR.

‘Dodd-Frank Act (DFA)’ The US Dodd-Frank Wall Street Reform and Consumer Protection Act.Act of 2010.

‘Early warning lists (EWL)’ Categorisations for wholesale customers used within Personal and Corporate Banking to identify at an early stage those customers where it is believed that difficulties may develop, allowing timely corrective action to be taken. There are three categories of EWL, with risk increasing from EWL 1 (caution) to EWL 2 (medium) and EWL 3 (high). It is expected that most cases would be categorised EWL 1 before moving to 2 or 3, but it is recognised that some cases may be categorised to EWL 2 or 3 directly.

‘Early Warning List (EWL) Managed accounts’ EWL Managed accounts are Business Lending customers that exceed the Arrears Managed Accounts limits and are monitored with standard processes that record heightened levels of risk through an EWL grading.

‘Earnings per Share contribution’ The attributable profit or loss generated by a particular business or segment divided by the

weighted average number of Barclays shares in issue to illustrate on a per share basis how that business or segment contributes total EPS.earnings per share.

‘Economic Value of Equity (EVE)’ Change in the present value of the banking book of a parallel (upward or downward) interest rate shock.

‘Encumbrance’ The use of assets to secure liabilities, such as by way of a lien or charge.

‘Enterprise Risk Management Framework (ERMF)’ Barclays Riskrisk management responsibilities are laid out in the Enterprise Risk Management Framework. This framework which was introduced in 2013, creates clear ownership and accountability, ensures the Group’s most significant risk exposures are controlled, understood and managed in accordance with agreed risk appetite, and ensures regular reporting of both risk exposures and the operating effectiveness of controls. This framework also clarifies the definition of the three lines of defence and extends its scope to all businesses and functions.

‘Equities’ Trading businesses encompassing Cash Equities, Equity Derivatives & Equity Financing

‘Equity and stock index derivatives’ Derivatives whose value is derived from equity securities. This category includes equity and stock index swaps and options (including warrants, which are equity options listed on an exchange). The Group also enters into fund-linked derivatives, being swaps and options whose underlyings include mutual funds, hedge funds, indices and multi-asset portfolios. An equity swap is an agreement between two parties to exchange periodic payments, based upon a notional principal amount, with one side paying fixed or floating interest and the other side paying based on the actual return of the stock or stock index. An equity option provides the buyer with the right, but not the obligation, either to purchase or sell a specified stock, basket of stocks or stock index at a specified price or level on or before a specified date.

‘Equity risk’ In the context of trading book capital requirements, the risk of change in market value of an equity investment.

‘Equity structural hedge’ An interest rate hedge in place to manage the volatility in net earnings generated by businesses on the Group’s

Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2016 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  453


Glossary

equity, with the impact allocated to businesses in line with their economic capital usage.

462  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F


Glossary

‘Euro Interbank Offered Rate (EURIBOR)’ A benchmark interest rate at which banks can borrow funds from other banks in the European interbank market.

‘Europe’ Geographic segment comprising countries in which Barclays operates within the EU (excluding UK), Northern Continental and Eastern Europe.

‘European Securities and Markets Authority (ESMA)’ An independent European Supervisory Authority with the remit of enhancing the protection of investors and reinforcing stable and well-functioning financial markets in the European Union. ESMA replaced the Committee of European Securities Regulators (CESR) on 1 January 2011.

‘Expected losses’ The Group’s measure of anticipated losses for exposures captured under an internal ratings based credit risk approach for capital adequacy calculations. It is measured as the Barclays modelled view of anticipated losses based on Probability of Default (PD), Loss Given Default (LGD) and Exposure at Default (EAD), with a one year time horizon.

‘Expert lender models’ Models of risk measures that are used for parts of the portfolio where the risk drivers are specific to a particular counterparty, but where there is insufficient data to support the construction of a statistical model. These models utilise the knowledge of credit experts that have in depth experience of the specific customer type being modelled.

‘Exposure’ Generally refers to positions or actions taken by the firm, or consequences thereof, that may put a certain amount of a bank’s resources at risk.

‘Exposure Atat Default (EAD)’ The estimation of the extent to which Barclays may be exposed to a customer or counterparty in the event of, and at the time of, that counterparty’s default. At default, the customer may not have drawn the loan fully or may already have repaid some of the principal, so that exposure may be less than the approved loan limit.

‘External Credit Assessment Institutions (ECAI)’ Institutions whose credit assessments may be used by credit institutions for the determination of risk weight exposures according to the Capital Requirements Directives (CRD).CRD IV.

‘F-IRB / Foundation-Internal Ratings Based’ See ‘Internal Ratings Based (IRB)’.

‘Financial Conduct Authority (FCA)’ The statutory body responsible for conduct of business regulation and supervision of UK authorised firms from 1 April 2013.firms. The FCA also has responsibility for the prudential regulation of firms that do not fall within the PRA’s scope.

‘Financial Services Compensation Scheme (FSCS)’ The UK’s fund for compensation of authorised financial services firms that are unable to pay claims.

‘Financial collateral comprehensive method (FCCM)’ A counterparty credit risk exposure calculation approach which applies volatility adjustments to the market value of exposure and collateral when calculating risk weighted asset values.

‘Fitch’ A credit rating agency.

‘Forbearance’ Forbearance programmes to assist customers in financial difficulty through agreements to accept less than contractual amounts due where financial distress would otherwise prevent satisfactory repayment within the original terms and conditions of the contract. These agreements may be initiated by the customer, Barclays or a third party and include approved debt counselling plans, minimum due reductions, interest rate concessions and switches from capital and interest repayments to interest-only payments.

‘Forbearance Programmes for Credit Cards’ Can be split into 2 main types: Repayment plans- A temporary reduction in the minimum payment due, for a maximum of 60 months. This may involve a reduction in interest rates to prevent negative amortization; Fully amortising- A permanent conversion of the outstanding balance into a fully amortising loan, over a maximum period of 60 months for cards and 120 months for loans.

‘Forbearance Programmes for Home Loans’ Can be split into 4 main types: Interest-only conversions- A temporary change from a capital and interest repayment to an interest-only repayment, for a maximum of 24 months; Interest rate reductions- A temporary reduction in interest rate, for a maximum of 12 months; Payment concessions- An agreement to temporarily accept reduced loan repayments, for a maximum of 24 months; Term extensions- A permanent extension to the loan maturity date which may involve a reduction in interest rates, and usually involves the capitalisation of arrears.

‘Forbearance Programmes for Unsecured Loans’ Can be split into 3 main types: Payment concessions- An agreement to temporarily accept reduced loan repayments, for a maximum of 12 months; Term extensions- A permanent extension to the loan maturity date, usually involving the capitalisation of arrears; Fully amortising- A permanent conversion of the

Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  463


Glossary

outstanding balance into a fully amortising loan, over a maximum period of 60 months for cards and 120 months for loans.

‘Foreclosures in Progress’ The process by which the bank initiates legal action against a customer with the intention of terminating a loan agreement whereby the bank may repossess the property subject to local law and recover amounts it is owed.

‘Foreign exchange derivatives’ The Group’s principal exchange rate-related contracts are forward foreign exchange contracts, currency swaps and currency options. Forward foreign exchange contracts are agreements to buy or sell a specified quantity of foreign currency, usually on a specified future date at an agreed rate. Currency swaps generally involves the exchange, or notional exchange, of equivalent amounts of two currencies and a commitment to exchange interest periodically until the principal amounts arere-exchanged on a future date. Currency options provide the buyer with the right, but not the obligation, either to purchase or sell a fixed amount of a currency at a specified exchange rate on or before a future date. As compensation for assuming the option risk, the option writer generally receives a premium at the start of the option period.

‘Foreign exchange risk’ In the context of DVaR, the impact of changes in foreign exchange rates and volatilities.

454  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2016 Annual Report on Form 20-F


Glossary

‘Front Arena’ A deal solution that helps to trade and manage positions and risk in the global capital markets.

‘Full time equivalent’ Full time equivalent units are theon-job hours paid for employee services divided by the number of ordinary-time hours normally paid for a full-time staff member when on the job (or contract employees where applicable).

‘Fully loaded’ When a measure is presented or described as being on a fully loaded basis, it is calculated without

applying the transitional provisions set out in Part Ten of the CRD IV Regulation.IV.

‘Fully loaded CET1 ratio’ An estimatedA risk based ratio calculated as CRD IV Common Equity Tier 1 capital divided by CRD IV Risk Weighted Assets (before the application of transitional provisions set out in CRD IV and interpretive guidance published by the PRA).

‘Funding for Lending Scheme (FLS)’ Scheme launched by the Bank of England in July 2012 to incentivise banks and building societies to lend to UK households andnon-financial companies through reduced funding costs, the benefits of which are passed on to UK borrowers in the form of cheaper and more easily available loans.

‘Funding mismatch’ In the context of Eurozone balance sheet funding exposures, the excess of local euro denominated external assets, such as customer loans, over local euro denominated liabilities, such as customer deposits.

‘Funding risk’ The risk that the Group may not be able to achieve its business plans due to being unable to maintain appropriate capital ratios (Capital Risk), being unable to meet its obligations as they fall due (Liquidity Risk), rating agency methodology changes or of adverse changes in interest rate curves impacting structural hedges of non – interest bearing assets/ liabilities or on income or foreign exchange rates on capital ratios (Structural risk).

‘Funds and fund-linked products’ Includes holdings in mutual funds, hedge funds, fund of funds and fund linked derivatives.

‘Gains on acquisitions’ The amount by which the acquirer’s interest in the net fair value of the identifiable assets, liabilities and contingent liabilities, recognised in a business combination, exceeds the cost of the combination.

‘General market risk’ The risk of a price change in a financial instrument due to a change in level of interest rates or owing to a broad equity market movement unrelated to any specific attributes of individual securities.

‘Globally-Systemically Important Financial Institutions (G-SIFIs)Banks(G-SIBs orG-SIIs) Global financial institutions whose size, complexity and systemic interconnectedness, mean that their distress or failure would cause significant disruption to the wider financial system and economic activity. The Financial Stability Board (FSB) and the Basel Committee on Banking Supervision (BCBS) have identified a group of 30 globally systemically important banks.

‘G-SII additional leverage ratio buffer(G-SII ALRB)’ A macroprudential buffer that applies to globally systemically important banks(G-SIBs) and other major domestic UK banks and building societies, including banks that are subject to ring-fencing requirements. TheG-SII ALRB will be calibrated as 35% (on a phased basis) of the combined systemic risk buffers that applies to the bank.

‘GSII Buffer’ Common Equity Tier 1 capital required to be held under CRD IV to ensure thatG-SIBs build up surplus capital to compensate for the systemic risk that such institutions represent to the financial system.

‘Grandfathering’ In the context of CRD IV capital resources, the application of the rules on instrument eligibility during the transitional period as defined in the Capital Requirements Regulation.

464  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F


Glossary

‘Grosscharge-off rates’ Represents the balancescharged-off to recoveries in the reporting period, expressed as a percentage of average outstanding balances excluding balances in recoveries.Charge-off to recoveries generally occurs when the collections focus switches from the collection of arrears to the recovery of the entire outstanding balance, and represents a fundamental change in the relationship between the bank and the customer. This is a measure of the proportion of customers that have gone into default during the period.

‘Gross new lending’ New lendingNewlending advanced to customers during the period.

‘Group’ Barclays PLC together with its subsidiaries.

‘Guarantee’ Unless otherwise described, an undertaking by a third party to pay a creditor should a debtor fail to do so. It is a form of credit substitution.

‘Head Office and Other Operations’ A business segment comprising Brand and Marketing, Finance, Head Office, Human Resources, Internal Audit, Legal and Compliance, Risk, Treasury and Tax and other operations.

‘High Net Worth’ Businesses within PersonalBarclays UK and Corporate BankingBarclays International that provide banking and other services to high net worth customers.

‘High Risk’ In Retail,retail banking, ‘High Risk’ is defined as the subset ofup-to-date customers who, either through an event or observed behaviour exhibit potential financial difficulty. Where appropriate, these customers are proactively contacted to assess whether financial assistance is required.

‘Home loan’ A loan to purchase a residential property. The property is then used as collateral to guarantee repayment of the loan. The borrower gives the lender a lien against the property and the lender can foreclose on the property if the borrower does not repay the loan per the agreed terms. Also known as a residential mortgage.

IHC’ or ‘US IHC’ Barclays US LLC, the intermediate holding company established by Barclays in July 2016, which holds most of Barclays’ subsidiaries and assets in the United States.

IMA / Internal Model Approach’ In the context of Risk Weighted Assets, by Risk Type, Risk Weighted Assets for which the exposure amount has been derived via the use of a PRA approved internal market risk model.

IMM / Internal Model Method’ In the context of Risk Weighted Assets, Risk Weighted Assets for which the exposure amount has been derived via the use of a PRA approved internal counterparty credit risk model.

Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2016 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  455


Glossary

Impairment allowances’ A provision held on the balance sheet as a result of the raising of a charge against profit for incurred

losses in the lending book. An impairment allowance may either be identified or unidentified and individual or collective.

‘Impairment coverage ratio’ Impairment allowance held against balances in specific LTV band expressed as a percentage of balances in the specific LTV Band.

‘Income’ Total income, net of insurance claims,, unless otherwise specified.

‘Incremental Risk Charge’ An estimate of the incremental risk arising from rating migrations and defaults beyond what is already captured in specific market risk VaR for the non correlation trading portfolio.

‘Independent Commission on Banking (ICB)’ Body set up by HM Government to identify structural andnon-structural measures to reform the UK banking system and promote competition.

‘Individual liquidity guidance (ILG)’ Guidance given to a firm about the amount, quality and funding profile of liquidity resources that the PRA has asked the firm to maintain.

‘Inflation risk’ In the context of DVaR, the impact of changes in inflation rates and volatilities on cash instruments and derivatives.

‘Insurance Risk’ The risk of the Group’s aggregate insurance premiums received from policyholders under a portfolio of insurance contracts being inadequate to cover the claims arising from those policies.

‘Interchange’ Income paid to a credit card issuer for the clearing and settlement of a sale or cash advance transaction.

‘Interest only home loans’ Under the terms of these loans, the customer makes payments of interest only for the entire term of the mortgage, although customers may make early repayments of the principal within the terms of their agreement. The customer is responsible for repaying the entire outstanding principal on maturity, which may require the sale of the mortgaged property.

‘Interest rate derivatives’ Derivatives linked to interest rates. This category includes interest rate swaps, collars, floors options and swaptions. An interest rate swap is an agreement between two parties to exchange fixed rate and floating rate interest by means of periodic payments based upon a notional principal amount and the interest rates defined in the contract. Certain agreements combine interest rate and foreign currency swap transactions, which may or may not include the exchange of principal amounts. A basis swap is a form of interest rate swap, in which both parties exchange interest payments based on floating rates, where the floating rates are based upon different underlying reference indices. In a forward rate agreement, two parties agree a future settlement of the difference between an agreed rate and a future interest rate, applied to a notional principal amount. The settlement, which generally occurs at the start of the contract period, is the discounted present value of the payment that would otherwise be made at the end of that period.

Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  465


Glossary

‘Interest rate risk’ The risk of interest rate volatility adversely impacting the Groups net interest margin. In the context of the

calculation of market risk DVaR, measures the impact of changes in interest (swap) rates and volatilities on cash instruments and derivatives.

‘Internal Assessment Approach (IAA)’ oneOne of three types of calculation that a firm with permission to use the Internal Ratings Based (IRB) approach may apply to securitisation exposures. It consists of mapping a firm’s internal rating methodology for credit exposures to those of an external credit assessment institutionExternal Credit Assessment Institution (ECAI) to determine the appropriate risk weight based on the ratings based approach. Its applicability is limited to ABCP programmes related to liquidity facilities and credit enhancement.

‘Internal Capital Adequacy Assessment Process (ICAAP)’ Companies are required to perform a formal internalInternal Capital Adequacy Assessment Process (ICAAP) as part of the Pillar 2 requirements (BIPRU) and to provide this document to the PRA on a yearly basis. The ICAAP document summarises the group’s risk management framework, including approach to managing all risks (i.e. Pillar 1 andnon-Pillar 1 risks); and, the group’s risk appetite, economic capital and stress testing frameworks.

IMM’ / ‘InternalInternal model method’method (IMM)’ In the context of Risk Weighted Assets, by Risk Type, Risk Weighted Assets for which the exposure amount has been derived via the use of a PRA approved internal counterparty credit risk model.

‘Internal Ratings Based (IRB)’ An approach under the CRR framework that relies on the bank’s internal models to derive the risk weights. The IRB approach is divided into two alternative applications, Advanced and Foundation:

 

 Advanced IRB(‘A-IRB’): the bank uses its own estimates of probability of default (PD), loss given default (LGD) and credit conversion factor to model a given risk exposure.

 Foundation IRB: the bank applies its own PD as for Advanced, but it uses standard parameters for the LGD and the credit conversion factor. The Foundation IRB approach is specifically designed for wholesale credit exposures. Hence retail, equity, securitisation positions andnon-credit obligations asset exposures are treated under Standardisedstandardised orA-IRB.

‘Investment Bank’ ConsistsThe Group’s investment bank which consists of origination led and returns focused markets and banking business.business which forms part of the Corporate and Investment Banking segment of Barclays International.

‘Investment Banking Fees’ In the context of Investment Bank Analysis of Total Income, fees generated from origination activity businesses – including financial advisory, Debtdebt and Equityequity underwriting.

‘Investment grade’ A debt security, treasury bill or similar instrument with a credit rating of AAA to BBB as measured by external credit rating agencies.

‘ISDA Master Agreement’ The most commonly used master contract for OTC derivative transactions internationally. It is part of a framework of documents, designed to enable OTC derivatives to be documented fully and flexibly. The framework consists of a master

456  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2016 Annual Report on Form 20-F


Glossary

agreement, a schedule, confirmations, definition booklets, and a credit support annex. The ISDA master agreement is published by the International Swaps and Derivatives Association (ISDA).

‘Key Risk Scenarios (KRS)’ Key Risk Scenarios are a summary of the extreme potential risk exposure for each Key Risk in each business and function, including an assessment of the potential frequency of risk events, the average size of losses and three extreme scenarios. The Key Risk Scenario assessments are a key input to the Advanced Measurement Approach calculation of regulatory and economic capital requirements.

‘Large exposure’ A large exposure is defined as the total exposure of a firm to a counterparty or group of connected clients, whether in the banking book or trading book or both, which in aggregate equals or exceeds 10% of the firm’s eligible capital.

‘Lender Option Borrower Option (LOBO)’ A clause previously included in ESHLA loans that allowed Barclays, on specific dates, to raise the fixed interest rate on the loan, upon which the borrower had the option to either continue with the loan at the higher rate, orre-pay the loan at par.

‘Lending’ In the context of Investment Bank Analysis of Total Income, lending income includes net interest income, gains or losses on loan sale activity, and risk management activity relating to the loan portfolio.

‘Letters of credit’ A letter typically used for the purposes of international trade guaranteeing that a debtor’s payment to a creditor will be made on time and in full. In the event that the

466  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F


Glossary

debtor is unable to make payment, the bank will be required to cover the full or remaining amount of the purchase.

‘Level 1 assets’ High quality liquid assets under the Basel Committee’s Liquidity Coverage Ratio (LCR), including cash, central bank reserves and higher quality government securities.

‘Level 2 assets’ Under the Basel Committee’s Liquidity Coverage Ratio high quality liquid assets (HQLA) are comprised of Level 1 and Level 2 assets, with the latter comprised of Level 2A and Level 2B assets. Level 2A assets include, for example, lower quality government securities, covered bonds and corporate debt securities. Level 2B assets include, for example, lower rated corporate bonds, residential mortgage backed securities and equities that meet certain conditions.

‘Leverage ratio’ A measure of the Group’s Tier 1 capital to total leverage exposure under CRD IV.

‘Liquidity Coverage Ratio (LCR)’ The ratio of the stock of high quality liquid assets to expected net cash outflows over the next 30 days. High-quality liquid assets should be unencumbered, liquid in markets during a time of stress and, ideally, be central bank eligible. These include, for example, cash and claims on central governments and central banks.

‘Liquidity Pool’ The Group liquidity pool comprises cash at central banks and highly liquid collateral specifically held by the Group as a contingency to enable the bank to meet cash outflows in the event of stressed market conditions.

‘Liquidity risk appetite (LRA)’The level of liquidity risk that the Group chooses to take in pursuit of its business objectives and in meeting its regulatory obligations.

‘Liquidity Risk Management Framework (the Liquidity Framework)’ The Liquidity Risk Management Framework (the Liquidity Framework), which is sanctioned by the Board Risk Committee (BRC), and which incorporates liquidity policies, systems and controls that the Group has implemented to manage liquidity risk within tolerances approved by the Board and regulatory agencies.

‘Litigation and conduct charges’ Litigation and conduct charges include regulatory fines, litigation settlements and conduct related customer redress.

‘Loan loss rate’ Is quoted in basis points and represents total loan impairment divided by gross loans and advances to customers and banks held at amortised cost at the balance sheet date.

‘Loan to deposit ratio’ The ratio of loansLoans and advances todivided by customer accounts calculated for PCB, Africa Banking, BarclaycardBarclays UK; Barclays International andNon-Core, Retail. excluding investment banking businesses. This excludes particular liabilities issued by the retail businesses that have characteristics comparable to retail deposits (for example structured Certificates of Deposit and retail bonds), which are included within debt securities in issue.

‘Loan to value (LTV) ratio’ Expresses the amount borrowed against an asset (i.e. a mortgage) as a percentage of the appraised value of the asset. The ratios are used in determining the appropriate level of risk for the loan and are generally reported as an average for new mortgages or an entire portfolio. Also see ‘Marked to market (MMT) LTV ratio.’

‘London Interbank Offered Rate (LIBOR)’ A benchmark interest rate at which banks can borrow funds from other banks in the London interbank market.

‘Long-term refinancing operation (LTRO)’The European Central Bank’s 3 year long term bank refinancing operation.

‘Loss Given Default (LGD)’ The fraction of Exposure at Default (EAD) (defined above) that will not be recovered following default. LGD comprises the actual loss (the part that is not expected to be recovered), together with the economic costs associated with the recovery process.

‘Macro Products’ Represents Rates, Currencycurrency and Commoditiescommodities income.

‘Management DVaR’ For internal market risk management purposes, the investment bank uses aThe Daily Value at Risk (DVaR) used for internal market risk management purposes. The Investment Bank uses a DVaR with atwo-year equally weighted historical period, at a 95% confidence level, for all trading portfolios and certain banking books.

‘Mandatory break clause’In the context of counterparty credit risk, a contract clause that means a trade will be ended on a particular date.

‘Marked to market approach’ A counterparty credit risk exposure calculation approach which uses the current mark to market value of derivative positions as well as a potential future exposureadd-on to calculate an exposure to which a risk weight can be applied.

Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2016 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  457


Glossary

‘Marked to market (MTM) LTV ratio’ The loan amount as a percentage of the current value of the asset used to secure the loan. Also see ‘Balance weighted Loan to Value (LTV) ratio’ and ‘Valuation weighted Loan to Value (LTV) ratio.’

Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  467


Glossary

‘Market risk’ The risk of the Group suffering financial loss due to changes in market prices. In the context of Risk Weighted Assets, by Risk, it is the component of risk weighted assetsRisk Weighted Assets that represents the risk of loss resulting from fluctuations in the market value of positions held in equities, commodities, currencies, derivatives and interest rates.

‘Master netting agreements’ An agreement that provides for a single net settlement of all financial instruments and collateral covered by the agreement in the event of the counterparty’s default or bankruptcy or insolvency, resulting in a reduced exposure.

‘Master trust securitisation programmes’ A securitisation structure where a trust is set up for the purpose of acquiring a pool of receivables. The trust issues multiple series of securities backed by these receivables.

‘Matchbook (or matched book)’ An asset/liability management strategy where assets are matched against liabilities of equivalent value and maturity.

‘Material Risk Takers (MRTs)’ Categories of staff whose professional activities have or are deemed to have a material impact on Barclays’ risk profile, as determined in accordance with the European Banking Authority regulatory technical standard on the identification of such staff.

‘Methodology and policy’ In the context of the Funding Risk, Capital Risk section, the effect on RWAs of methodology changes driven by regulatory policy changes.

‘Minimum capital requirement’ Under Pillar 1 of the Basel framework, the amount of capital required for an exposure.

‘Model updates’ In the context of the Funding Risk, Capital Risk section, changes in RWAs caused by model implementation, changes in model scope or any changes required to address model malfunctions.

‘Model validation’ Process through which models are independently challenged, tested and verified to prove that they have been built, implemented and used correctly, and that they continue to befit-for-purpose.

‘Modelled—VaR’ In the context of risk weighted assets, marketRisk Weighted Assets, Market risk calculated using value at risk models laid down by the CRR and supervised by the PRA.

‘Money market funds’ Investment funds typically invested in short-term debt securities.

‘Monoline derivatives’ Derivatives with a monoline insurer such as credit default swaps referencing the underlying exposures held.

‘Moody’s’ A credit rating agency.

‘Mortgage Current Accounts (MCA) Reserves’ A secured overdraft facility available to home loan customers which allows them to borrow against the equity in their home. It allows draw-down up to an agreed available limit on a separate but connected account to the main mortgage loan facility. The balance drawn must be repaid on redemption of the mortgage.

‘Multilateral development banks’ Financial institutions created for the purposes of development, where membership transcends national boundaries.

‘National discretion’ Discretions in CRD IV given to member states to allow the local regulator additional powers in the application of certain CRD IV rules in its jurisdiction.

‘Net asset value per share’ Calculated by dividing shareholdersshareholders’ equity, excludingnon-controlling interests and other equity instruments, by the number of issued ordinary shares.

‘Net interest income’ The difference between interest income on assets and interest expense on liabilities.

‘Net interest margin’ Net interest income divided by the sum of the average assets and average liabilities for those businesses.customer assets.

‘Net investment income’ Changes in the fair value of financial instruments designated at fair value, dividend income and the net result on disposal of available for sale assets.

‘Net Stable Funding Ratio (NSFR)’ The ratio of available stable funding to required stable funding over a one year time horizon, assuming a stressed scenario. The ratio is required to be over 100% with effect from 2015.. Available stable funding would include such items as equity capital, preferred stock with a maturity of over 1 year, or liabilities with a maturity of over 1 year. The required amount of stable funding is calculated as the sum of the value of the assets held and funded by the institution, multiplied by a specific Required Stable Fundingrequired stable funding (RSF) factor assigned to each particular asset type, added to the amount of potential liquidity exposure multiplied by its associated RSF factor.

468  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F


Glossary

‘Net tangible asset value per share’ Calculated by dividing shareholders equity, excludingnon-controlling interests and other equity instruments, less goodwill and intangible assets, by the number of issued ordinary shares.

‘Net trading income’ Gains and losses arising from trading positions which are held at fair value, in respect of both market-making and customer business, together with interest, dividends and funding costs relating to trading activities.

‘Net written credit protection’ In the context of leverage exposure, the net notional value of credit derivatives protection sold and credit derivatives protection bought.

‘New bookings’ The total of the original balance on accounts opened in the reporting period, including any applicable fees and charges included in the loan amount.

‘Non-asset backed debt instruments’ Debt instruments not backed by collateral, including government bonds; US agency bonds;

458  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2016 Annual Report on Form 20-F


Glossary

corporate bonds; commercial paper; certificates of deposit; convertible bonds; corporate bonds and issued notes.

‘Non-customer net interest income(NII)’ / ‘Non-customer‘Non-customer interest income’ Principally comprises the impact of product and equity structural hedges, as well as certain other net interest income received on government bonds and other debt securities held for the purposes of interest rate hedging and liquidity for local banking activities.

‘Non-model method (NMM)’ In the context of Risk Weighted Assets, Counterparty credit risk, Risk Weighted Assets where the exposure amount has been derived through the use of CRR norms, as opposed to an internal model.

‘Non-performance costs’ Costs other than performance costs.

‘Non-performing proportion of outstanding balances’ Defined as balances greater than 90 days delinquent (including forbearance

accounts greater than 90 days and accounts charged off to recoveries), expressed as a percentage of outstanding balances.

‘Non-significant holdings in financial institutions’ Investments that the Group holds in the capital of banking, financial or insurance entities that are outside the scope of regulatory consolidation and where the bank owns less than 10% of the issued share capital of the entity.

‘Non-performing balances impairment coverage ratio’ Impairment allowance held against non performing balances expressed as a percentage of non performing balances.

‘Non-Traded Market Risk’ The risk of a reduction to earnings or capital due to an inability to hedge the banking book balance sheet.

‘Non-Traded VaR’ Reflects the volatility in the value of the available for sale investments in the liquidity pool which flow directly through capital via the available for sale reserve. The underlying methodology to calculate non traded VaR is similar to Traded Management VaR, but the two measures are not directly comparable. The Non Traded VaR represents the volatility to capital driven by the available for sale exposures. These exposures are in the banking book and do not meet the criteria for trading book treatment.

‘Notable items’ Notable items are considered to be significant items impacting comparability of performance and are shown for each of the business segments.

‘Notch’ A single unit of measurement in a credit rating scale.

‘Notional amount’ The nominal or face amount of a financial instrument, such as a loan or a derivative, that is used to calculate payments made on that instrument.

‘Operational risk’ The risk of loss resulting from inadequate or failed internal processes, people and systems or from external events, including legal risk. In the context of Risk Weighted Assets, it is the component of risk weighted assetsRisk Weighted Assets that represents the risk of loss resulting from these risks.

‘Operational RiskData eXchange (ORX)’ The Operational Riskdata eXchange Association (ORX) is anot-for-profit industry association dedicated to advancing the measurement and management of operational risk in the global financial services industry. Barclays is a member of ORX.

‘Origination led’ Focus on high margin low capital fee based activities and related hedging opportunities.

Origination exposure model’ A technique used to measure the counterparty credit risk of losing anticipated cash flows from

forwards, swaps, options and other derivatives contracts in the event the counterparty to the contract should default.

‘OSII’ Other systemically important institutions are institutions that are deemed to create risk to financial stability due to their systemic importance.

Over-the-counter (OTC) derivatives’ Derivative contracts that are traded (and privately negotiated) directly between two parties. They offer flexibility because, unlike standardised exchange-traded products, they can be tailored to fit specific needs.

‘Own credit’ The effect of changes in the Group’s own credit standing on the fair value of financial liabilities.

‘Owner occupied mortgage’ A mortgage where the intention of the customer was to occupy the property at origination.

‘Past due items’ Refers to loans where the borrower has failed to make a payment when due under the terms of the loan contract.

Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  469


Glossary

‘Payment Protection Insurance (PPI) redress’ Provision for the settlement of PPI miss-selling claims and related claims management costs.

‘Pension Risk’ The risk of the Group’s earnings and capital being adversely impacted by the Group’s defined benefit obligations increasing or the value of the assets backing these defined benefit obligations decreasing due to changes in both the level and volatility of prices.

‘Performance costs’ The accounting charge recognised in the period for performance awards. For deferred incentives and long-term incentives, the accounting charge is spread over the relevant periods in which the employee delivers service.

PersonalPeriod end allocated tangible equity’ Allocated tangible equity is calculated as 11.5% of CRD IV fully loaded risk weighted assets for each business, adjusted for CRD IV fully loaded capital deductions, excluding goodwill and Corporate Banking’ An operating segment that combines core elements of UK Retail and Business Banking, global Wealth and Investment Management, and global Corporate Banking. Transfers tointangible assets, reflecting assumptions the Non-Core segment includeGroup uses for capital planning purposes. Head Office tangible equity represents the UK retail insurance underwriting and investment businesses; selected non-core corporate banking in Europedifference between the Group’s tangible equity and the Middle East and certain long-dated corporate loans; local Wealth operations in certain overseas locations; and certain asset managementamounts allocated to businesses. The African businesses of Corporate Banking and Wealth Management have been moved to Africa Banking.

‘Pillar 1’ The part of the Basel framework that sets outs the rules that govern the calculation of minimumMinimum capital requirements for credit, market and operational risks.

‘Pillar 2’ The part of the Basel framework that covers the supervisory reviews of the bank’s internal assessment of capital to ensure that firms have adequate capital to support all the relevant risks in their business.

‘Pillar 3’ The part of the Basel framework that covers external communication of risk and capital information by banks to promote transparency and good risk management.

‘Post-model adjustment (PMA)’ In the context of Basel models, a PMA is a short term increase in regulatory capital applied at portfolio level to account for model input data deficiencies, inadequate model performance or changes to regulatory definitions (e.g.

Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2016 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  459


Glossary

(e.g. definition of default) to ensure the model output is accurate, complete and appropriate.

‘Potential Credit Risk Loans (PCRLs)’ Comprise the outstanding balances to Potential Problem Loans (defined below) and the three categories of Credit Risk Loans (defined above).

‘Potential Future Exposure on Derivatives’ A regulatory calculation in respect of the Group’s potential future credit exposure on both exchange traded and OTC derivative contracts, calculated by assigning a standardised percentage (based on the underlying risk category and residual trade maturity) to the gross notional value of each contract.

‘Potential Problem Loans (PPLs)’ Loans where serious doubt exists as to the ability of the borrowers to continue to comply with repayment terms in the near future.

‘PRA waivers’ PRA approvals that specifically give permission to the Bank to either modify or waive existing rules. Waivers are specific to an organisation and require applications being submitted to and approved by the PRA.

‘Primary securitisations’The issuance of securities (bonds and commercial papers) for fund-raising.

‘Primary Stress Tests’ In the context of Traded Market Risk, stress testingStress Testing provides an estimate of potentially significant future losses that might arise from extreme market moves or scenarios. Primary stress testsStress Tests apply stress moves to key liquid risk factors for each of the major trading asset classes.

‘Prime Services’ Involves financing of fixed income and equity positions using Repo and Stock Lendingstock lending facilities. The Prime Services business also provides brokerage facilitation services for Hedge Fundhedge fund clients offering execution and clearance facilities for a variety of asset classes.

‘Principal’ In the context of a loan, the amount borrowed, or the part of the amount borrowed which remains unpaid (excluding interest).

‘Principal Investments’ Private equity investments.

Principal Risks’ the principal risks affecting the Group described in the risk review section of the Barclays PLC Annual Report.

Private equity investments’ EquityInvestments in equity securities in operating companies not quoted on a public exchange. Investment in private equity often involves the investment of capital in private companies or the acquisition of a public company that results in the delisting of public equity. Capital for private equity investment is raised by retail or institutional investors and used to fund investment strategies such as leveraged buyouts, venture capital, growth capital, distressed investments and mezzanine capital.

470  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F


Glossary

‘Private-label securitisation’ Residential mortgage backed security transactions sold or guaranteed by entities that are not sponsored or owned by the government.

‘Probability of Default (PD)’ The likelihood that a loan will not be repaid and will fall into default. PD may be calculated for each client who has a loan (normally applicable to wholesale customers/clients)

or for a portfolio of clients with similar attributes (normally applicable to retail customers). To calculate PD, Barclays assesses the credit quality of borrowers and other counterparties and assigns them an internal risk rating. Multiple rating methodologies may be used to inform the rating decision on individual large credits, such as internal and external models, rating agency ratings, and for wholesale assets market information such as credit spreads. For smaller credits, a single source may suffice such as the result from an internal rating model.

‘Product structural hedge’ An interest rate hedge that converts short term interest margin volatility on product balances (such asnon-interest bearing current accounts and managed rate deposits) into a more stable medium term rate and which is built on a monthly basis to achieve a targeted maturity profile.

‘Properties in Possession held as ‘Loans and Advances to Customers’’ Properties in the UK and Italy where the customer continues to retain legal title but where the bank has enforced the possession order as part of the foreclosure process to allow for the disposal of the asset or the court has ordered the auction of the property.

‘Properties in Possession held as ‘Other Real Estate Owned’’ Properties in South Africa, Spain and Portugal where the bank has taken legal ownership of the title as a result of purchase at an auction or similar and treated as ‘Other Real Estate Owned’ within other assets on the bank’s balance sheet.

‘Proprietary trading’ When a bank, brokerage or other financial institution trades on its own account, at its own risk, rather than on behalf of customers, so as to make a profit for itself.

‘Prudential Regulation Authority (PRA)’ The statutory body responsible for the prudential supervision of banks, building societies, insurers and a small number of significant investment

firms in the UK from 1 April 2013.UK. The PRA is a subsidiary of the Bank of England.

‘Prudential valuation adjustment (PVA)’ A calculation which adjusts the accounting values of positions held on balance sheet at fair value to comply with regulatory valuation standards, which place greater emphasis on the inherent uncertainty around the value at which a trading book position could be exited.

‘Public benchmark’ Unsecured medium term notes issued in public syndicated transactions.

Qualifying Revolving Retail Exposure (QRRE)’ In the context of the IRB approach to credit risk RWA calculations, an exposure meeting the criteria set out in BIPRU 4.6.42 R (2). IncludesIt includes most types of credit card exposure.

‘Rates’ In the context of Investment Bank income analysis, trading revenue relating to government bonds and linear interest rate derivatives.

‘Re-aging’ Re-aging is theThe returning of a delinquent account toup-to-date status without collecting the full arrears (principal, interest and fees).

460  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2016 Annual Report on Form 20-F


Glossary

‘Real Estate Mortgage Investment Conduits (REMICs)’An entity that holds a fixed pool of mortgages and that is separated into multiple classes of interests for issuance to investors.

‘Recoveries Impairment Coverage Ratio’ Impairment allowance held against recoveries balances expressed as a percentage of balance in recoveries.

‘Recoveries proportion of outstanding balances’ Represents the amount of recoveries (grossmonth-end customer balances of all accounts that havecharged-off) as at the period end compared to total outstanding balances. The size of the recoveries book would ultimately have an impact on the overall impairment requirement on the portfolio. Balances in recoveries will decrease if: assets arewritten-off; amounts are collected; or assets are sold to a third party (i.e. debt sale).

‘Redenomination risk’The risk of financial loss to the Group should one or more countries exit from the Euro, potentially leading to the devaluation of local balance sheet assets and liabilities.

Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  471


Glossary

‘Regulatory capital’ The amount of capital that a bank holds to satisfy regulatory requirements.

‘Renegotiated loans’ Loans are generally renegotiated either as part of an ongoing customer relationship or in response to an adverse change in the circumstances of the borrower. In the latter case renegotiation can result in an extension of the due date of payment or repayment plans under which the Group offers a concessionary rate of interest to genuinely distressed borrowers. This will result in the asset continuing to be overdue and will be individually impaired where the renegotiated payments of interest and principal will not recover the original carrying amount of the asset. In other cases, renegotiation will lead to a new agreement, which is treated as a new loan.

‘Repricing lag risk’ The risk that when underlying interest rates change it can take a number of months to change the customer rate e.g. should rates decrease then we would need to let our variable savings rate customers know that we would be decreasing their savings rates. This could result in a loss of income as thisit may take several months, whereas the “funding/investment” benefit reduces immediately.

‘Repurchase agreement (repo)(Repo)’ / ‘reverse‘Reverse repurchase agreement (reverse(Reverse repo)’ Arrangements that allow counterparties to use financial securities as collateral for an interest bearing cash loan. The borrower agrees to sell a security to the lender subject to a commitment to repurchase the asset at a specified price on a given date. For the party selling the security (and agreeing to repurchase it in the future) it is a repurchaseRepurchase agreement or repo;Repo; for the counterparty to the transaction (buying the security and agreeing to sell in the future) it is a reverseReverse repurchase agreement or reverseReverse repo.

‘Re-securitisations’The repackaging of securitised productsSecuritised Products into securities. The resulting securities are therefore securitisation positions where the underlying assets are also predominantly securitisation positions.

‘Reserve Capital Instruments (RCIs)’ Hybrid issued capital securities which may be debt or equity accounted, depending on the terms.

‘Residential Mortgage-Backed Securities (RMBS)’ Securities that represent interests in a group of residential mortgages. Investors

in these securities have the right to cash received from future mortgage payments (interest and/or principal).

‘Residual maturity’ The remaining contractual term of a credit obligation associated with a credit exposure.

‘Restructured loans’ Comprises loans where, for economic or legal reasons related to the debtor’s financial difficulties, a concession has been granted to the debtor that would not otherwise be considered. Where the concession results in the expected cash flows discounted at the original effective interest rate being less than the loan’s carrying value, an impairment allowance will be raised.

‘Retail Loans’ Loans to individuals or small and medium sized enterprises rather than to financial institutions and larger businesses. It includes both secured and unsecured loans such as mortgages and credit card balances, as well as loans to certain smaller business customers, typically with exposures up to £3m or with a turnover up to £5m.

‘Return on average risk weighted assets’Risk Weighted Assets’ Statutory profit as a proportion of average risk weighted assets.Risk Weighted Assets.

‘Return on average shareholders’ equity’ Statutory profit after tax attributable to ordinary shareholders, including an adjustment for the tax credit in reserves in respect of other equity instruments, as a proportion of average shareholders’ equity, excludingnon-controlling interests and other equity instruments.

‘Return on average tangible shareholders’ equity’ Statutory profit after tax attributable to ordinary shareholders, including an adjustment for the tax credit in reserves in respect of other equity instruments, as a proportion of average shareholders’ equity excludingnon-controlling interests and other equity instruments adjusted for the deduction of intangible assets and goodwill.

Return on average allocated tangible shareholders’ equity’ Statutory profit after tax attributable to ordinary shareholders, including an adjustment for the tax credit in reserves in respect of other equity instruments, as a proportion of average allocated tangible shareholders’ equity.

Risk Appetite’ Risk Appetite is defined as theThe level of risk that Barclays is prepared to accept whilst pursuing its business strategy, recognising a range of possible outcomes as business plans are implemented.

‘Risk weighted assets (RWAs)’ A measure of a bank’s assets adjusted for their associated risks. Risk weightings are established in accordance with the Basel rules as implemented by CRD IV and local regulators.

472  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F


Glossary

‘Risks not in VaR (RNIVS)’ Refers to all the key risks which are not captured or not well captured within the VaR model framework.

‘Roll rate analysis’The measurement of the rate at which retail accounts deteriorate through delinquency phases.

‘Sales commissions, commitments and other incentives’ Includes commission-based arrangements, guaranteed incentives and Long Term Incentive Plan awards.

Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2016 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  461


Glossary

‘Sarbanes-Oxley requirements’ The Sarbanes-Oxley Act 2002 (SOX), which was introduced by the U.S. Government to safeguard against corporate governance scandals such as Enron, WorldCom and Tyco. AllUS-listed companies must comply with SOX.

‘Second Lien’ Debt that is issued against the same collateral as higher lien debt but that is subordinate to it. In the case of default, compensation for this debt will only be received after the first lien has been repaid and thus represents a riskier investment than the first lien.

‘Secondary Stress Tests’ Secondary stress tests are used in measuring potential losses arising from illiquid market risks that cannot be hedged or reduced within the time period covered in Primary Stress tests.Tests.

‘Securities and loans’ In the context ofNon-Core Analysis of Total income, BarclaysNon-Core Securities and Loans comprise non strategic businesses, predominantly from thenon-core Investment Bank and Corporate.Corporate Bank.

‘Securities Financing Transactions (SFT)’ In the context of risk weighted assetsRisk Weighted Assets (RWAs), any of the following transactions: a repurchase transaction, a securities or commodities lending or borrowing transaction, or a margin lending transaction whereby cash collateral is received or paid in respect of the transfer of a related asset.

‘Securities financing transactions adjustments’ In the context of leverage ratio, a regulatoryadd-on calculated as exposure less collateral, taking into account master netting agreements.

‘Securities lending arrangements’ Arrangements whereby securities are legally transferred to a third party subject to an agreement to return them at a future date. The counterparty generally provides collateral against non performance in the form of cash or other assets.

‘Securitisation’ Typically, a process by which debt instruments such as mortgage loans or credit card balances are aggregated into a pool, which is used to back new securities. A company sells assets to a special purpose vehicle (SPV) which then issues securities backed by the assets. This allows the credit quality of the assets to be separated from the credit rating of the original borrower and transfers risk to external investors.

Securitised Products’ A business within the Investment Bank that offers a range of products relating to residential mortgage backed securities, commercial mortgage backed securities and other asset backed securities, in addition to restructuring and unwinding legacy credit structures.

‘Set-off clauses’In the context of counterpartyCounterparty credit risk, contract clauses that allow Barclays to set off amounts owed to us by a counterparty against amounts owed by us to the counterparty.

Settlement balances’ Are receivables or payables recorded between the date (the trade date) a financial instrument (such as a bond) is sold, purchased or otherwise closed out, and the date the asset is delivered by or to the entity (the settlement date) and cash is received or paid.

‘Settlement risk’ The risk that settlement in a transfer system will not take place as expected, usually owing to a party defaulting on one or more settlement obligations.

‘Slotting’Slotting is a Basel 2 approach that requires a standard set of rules to be used in the calculation of RWAs, based upon an assessment of factors such as the financial strength of the counterparty. The requirements for the application of the Slotting approach isare detailed in BIPRU 4.5.

‘South Africa’ TheIn the context of Africa Banking, the operations of Africa Banking based in South Africa.

‘Sovereign exposure(s)’ Exposures to central governments, including holdings in government bonds and local government bonds.

‘Specific market risk’ A risk that is due to the individual nature of an asset and can potentially be diversified or the risk of a price change in an investment due to factors related to the issuer or, in the case of a derivative, the issuer of the underlying investment.

Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  473


Glossary

‘Spread risk’ Measures the impact of changes to the swap spread, i.e. the difference between swap rates and government bond yields.

‘Standard & Poor’s’ A credit rating agency.

‘Standby facilities, credit lines and other commitments’ Agreements to lend to a customer in the future, subject to certain conditions. Such commitments are either made for a fixed period, or have no specific maturity but are cancellable by the lender subject to notice requirements.

‘Statutory’ Line items of income, expense, profit or loss, assets, liabilities or equity stated in accordance with the requirements of the UK Companies Act 2006 which incorporatesand the requirements of International Financial Reporting Standards (IFRS). See ‘Adjusted profit before tax’ for details of the adjustments made to the statutory results in arriving at the adjusted profit.

‘Statutory return on average shareholders’ equity’ Statutory profit after tax attributable to ordinary shareholders as a proportion of average shareholders’ equity.

‘STD’ / ‘Standardised approach’Approach’ A method of calculating Risk Weighted Assets that relies on a mandatory framework set by the regulator to derive risk weights based on counterparty type and a credit rating provided by an External Credit Assessment Institute.

‘Stress Testing’ A process which involves identifying possible future adverse events or changes in economic conditions that could have unfavourable effects on the Group (either financial ornon-financial), assessing the Group’s ability to withstand such changes, and identifying management actions to mitigate the impact.

‘Stressed Value at Risk (SVaR)’ An estimate of the potential loss arising from a 12 month period of significant financial stress over a one day horizon.

‘Structured entity’ An entity in which voting or similar rights are not the dominant factor in deciding control. Structured entities

are generally created to achieve a narrow and well defined objective with restrictions around their ongoing activities.

462  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2016 Annual Report on Form 20-F


Glossary

‘Structural hedge’ / ‘hedging’ An interest rate hedge which functions to reduce the impact of the volatility of short-term interest rate movements on positions that exist within the balance sheet that carry interest rates that do notre-price with market rates. See also ‘Equity structural hedge’ and ‘Product structural hedge’.

‘Structural model of default’ A model based on the assumption that an obligor will default when its assets are insufficient to cover its liabilities.

‘Structured credit’ Includes legacy structured credit portfolio primarily comprising derivative exposure and financing exposure to structured credit vehicles.

‘Subordinated liabilities’ Liabilities which, in the event of insolvency or liquidation of the issuer, are subordinated to the claims of depositors and other creditors of the issuer.

‘Supranational bonds’ Bonds issued by an international organisation, where membership transcends national boundaries (e.g. the European Union or World Trade Organisation).

‘Synthetic Securitisation Transactions’Securitisation transactions effected through the use of derivatives.

Systemic Risk Buffer’CET1 capital that may be required to be held as part of the Combined Buffer Requirement increasing the capacity of UK banks to absorb stress and limiting the damage to the economy as a results of restricted lending.

Tangible net asset value’ Shareholders’ equity excludingnon-controlling interests adjusted for the deduction of intangible assets and goodwill.

‘Tangible net asset value per share’ Shareholders’ equity excludingnon-controlling interests adjusted for the deduction of intangible assets and goodwill, divided by the number of issued ordinary shares.

‘Tangible shareholders equity’ Shareholders’ equity excludingnon-controlling interests adjusted for the deduction of intangible assets and goodwill.

‘Term premium’ Additional interest required by investors to hold assets with a longer period to maturity.

‘The three lines of defence’ The three lines of defence operating model enables Barclays to separate risk management activities between those parties that: own and take risk, and implement controls (first line); oversee and challenge the first line, provide second line risk management activity and support controls (second line); and, provide assurance that the Evaluate, Respond and Monitor(‘E-R-M’) process isfit-for-purpose, and that it is being carried out as intended (third line).

‘Tier 1 capital’ The sum of the Common Equity Tier 1 capital and Additional Tier 1 capital.

474  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F


Glossary

‘Tier 1 capital ratio’ The ratio which expresses Tier 1 capital as a percentage of risk weighted assets.Risk Weighted Assets under CRD IV.

‘Tier 2 (T2) capital’ In the context of CRD IV, a measuretype of a bank’s financial strength, including qualifying subordinated debt and other Tier 2 securitiescapital as defined in the Capital Requirements Regulation.

‘Tier 2 (T2) securities’ Securities that are treated as Tier 2 (T2) capital in the context of CRD IV.

‘Total capital ratio’Total regulatoryRegulatory capital as a percentage of risk weighted assets.Risk Weighted Assets.

‘Total outstanding balance’ In Retail,retail banking, total outstanding balance is defined as the grossmonth-end customer balances on all accounts including accounts charged off to recoveries.

‘Total return swap’ An instrument whereby the seller of protection receives the full return of the asset, including both the income and change in the capital value of the asset. The buyer of the protection in return receives a predetermined amount.

‘Total balances on forbearance programmes coverage ratio’ Impairment allowance held against Forbearance balances expressed as a percentage of balance in forbearance.

‘Traded Market Risk’ The risk of a reduction to earnings or capital due to volatility of trading book positions.

‘Trading book’ All positions in financial instruments and commodities held by an institution either with trading intent, or in order to hedge positions held with trading intent.

‘Traditional Securitisation Transactions’Securitisation transactions in which an underlying pool of assets generates cash flows to service payments to investors.

Transform’ Package of measures to realise Barclays goal of becoming the ‘Go- to’ Bank, including delivering returns on equity higher than cost of equity in all of the Group’s businesses, and longer-term action in culture, rewards, control and costs.

Transitional’ In the context of CRD IV a measure is described as transitional when the transitional provisions set out in Part Ten of the CRD IV Regulation are applied in its calculation.

Turnbull guidance’Unencumbered’ The Turnbull guidance sets out best practice on internal control for UK listed companies, and assists them in applying section C.2 of the Combined Code on Corporate Governance.Assets not used to secure liabilities or otherwise pledged.

‘United Kingdom (UK)’ Geographic segment where Barclays operates comprising the UK. Also see ‘Europe’.

‘UK Bank levy’ A levy that applies to UK banks, building societies and the UK operations of foreign banks. The levy is payable based on a percentage of the chargeable equity and liabilities of the bank on its balance sheet date.

UK leverage ratio’ as per the updated PRA rulebook, is calculated as the average capital measure divided by the average exposure measure for the quarter, where the average is based on the capital and exposure measure on the last day of each month in the quarter. The average exposure calculation also includes the FPC’s recommendation to allow firms to exclude claims on the central bank from the calculation of the leverage exposure measure, as long as these are matched by deposits denominated in the same currency and of identical or longer maturity.

US Partner Portfolio’Co-branded credit card programs with companies across various sectors including travel, entertainment, retail and financial sectors.

‘US Residential Mortgages’ Securities that represent interests in a group of US residential mortgages.

Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2016 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  463


Glossary

Unencumbered’Utilisation rate’ Assets not used to secure liabilities or otherwise pledged.Utilisation of MCA balances expressed as a percentage of total MCA reserve limits.

‘Valuation weighted Loan to Value (LTV) Ratio’ In the context of credit risk disclosures on secured home loans, a means of calculating marked to market LTVs derived by comparing total outstanding balance and the value of total collateral we hold against these balances. Valuation weighted loan to value is calculated using the following formula: LTV = total outstandings in portfolio /total property values of total outstandings in portfolio.

‘Value at Risk (VaR) See ‘DVaR’.

‘Weighted off balance sheet commitments’ Regulatoryadd-ons to the leverage exposure measure based on credit conversion factors used in the standardised approachStandardised Approach to credit risk.

‘Wholesale loans’ / ‘lending’ Lending to larger businesses, financial institutions and sovereign entities.

‘Write-off’ Refers to the point where it is determined that an asset is irrecoverable, or it is no longer considered economically viable to try to recover the asset or it is deemed immaterial or full and final settlement is reached and the shortfall written off. In the event ofwrite-off, the customer balance is removed from the balance sheet and the impairment reserve held against the asset is released.

‘Wrong-way risk’ Arises, in a trading exposure, when there is significant correlation between the underlying asset and the counterparty, which in the event of default would lead to a significant mark to market loss. When assessing the credit exposure of awrong-way trade, analysts take into account the correlation between the counterparty and the underlying asset as part of the sanctioning process.

464  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2016 Annual Report on Form 20-F


Shareholder information

Resources for shareholders including

contact details for shareholder enquiries

Shareholder information

Page

§  Your Barclays shareholding

466

§  Useful contact details

467

LOGO

 

  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 20152016 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  475465


Shareholder information

Contents

Your Barclays shareholding

 

 

Resources for shareholders including contact details for shareholder enquiries

Page

Shareholder information        Key dates

     

§   Your Barclays shareholding

477

§   Useful contact details

478

476  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F


Your Barclays shareholding

Shareholder information

 

LOGO5 April 2017

  

 

Key dates

LOGO

Final dividend payment date

 

528 April 20162017

Final dividend payment date

27 April 2016

Q1 Results Announcement

 

28 April 201610 May 2017

Annual General Meeting

 

1918 September 2016a2017

Interim dividend payment date1

 

Annual General Meeting (AGM)

This year’s AGM will be held at the Royal Festival Hall, Southbank Centre, Belvedere Road, London SE1 8XX on Thursday, 28 April 2016Wednesday, 10 May 2017 at 11.00am.

The Chairman and Chief Executive will update shareholders on our performance in 20152016 and our goals for 2016.2017. Shareholders will also have the opportunity to ask the Board questions at the meeting.

 

LOGO

LOGO

 

LOGOLOGO  

You can find out more at

home.barclays/agm

Returning funds to shareholders

Over 60,000 shareholders did not cash their Rights Issue cheques which were sent out in September 2013.

During 2015, we conducted a tracing process to reunite these shareholders with their monies together with any unclaimed dividends. At the end of 2015, we had returned over £2.2m to our shareholders.

Note

aPlease note that these dates are provisional and subject to change.

Dividends

We have declared a finalThe last dividend of 3.5for the year ended 31 December 2016 will be 2.09 pence per share, making 6.5the 2016 total dividend 3.09 pence, in total for 2015. However, we intendline with our intention to pay areduce the dividend of 3.0 pence for bothin 2016 and 2017. This will2017 to help us accelerateto continue the imperative rundown ofNon-Core. We The Board recognise the importance of paying a meaningful dividend as part of total shareholder returns and are committed to doing so in the future. We will pay dividends semi-annually from 2016 rather than quarterly.

How do Barclays shareholders receive their dividends?

As at 31 December 2015, Barclays shareholders received their dividends in the following ways:

 

LOGO

How do Barclays shareholders receive their dividends?

 

 1 Direct to your bank account

LOGO

 2 Cheque

3 Scrip dividend programme (new shares)

    52%

27%

21%

As at 31 December 2016, Barclays shareholders received their dividends in the following ways: 
    

Direct to bank account

53.5%
Cheque25.1%

Scrip dividend programme (new shares)

21.4%

 

You can choose how you would like to receive your Barclays dividends – saveSave time and receive your dividends faster

You can by choosing to have your dividendsthem paid directly into your bank or building society account. account

It is easy to set up and your money will be in your bank account on the dividend payment date. If you hold 2,500 shares or less, you can provide your bank or building society details quickly and easily over the telephone using the Equiniti contact details overleaf. If you hold more than 2,500 shares, please writecontact Equiniti for details of how to Equiniti.change your payment instruction.

Scrip Dividend Programme (the Programme)

Shareholders can choose to have their dividends reinvested in new ordinary Barclays shares through the Scrip Dividend Programme. More information, including the Programme Terms and Conditions and application form, are available on our website.

 

LOGOLOGO  

To find out more, contact Equiniti or visit

home.barclays/dividends

Donation to charity

We launched a special share dealing service in October 2015 for shareholders holding 4,000 shares or less. Shareholders could donate their sale proceeds to ShareGift if they wished. Our shareholders donated nearly £130,000.

Action for shareholders

Keep your personal details up to date

Please remember to tell Equiniti if:

 

§Youyou move house

§Youyou need to update your bank or building society detailsdetails.

If you are a Shareview member, you can update your bank or building society account or address details online. If you hold 2,500 shares or less, you can update details quickly and easily over the telephone using the Equiniti contact details overleaf. If you hold more than 2,500 shares you will need to write to Equiniti. You must provide a copy of your share certificate, Sharestore statement or most recent dividend tax voucher.confirmation. If these are not available, you will need to provide a copy of a utility bill or bank statement dated in the last three months.

 

Donations to charity

We launched a Share Dealing Service in November 2016 aimed at shareholders with relatively small shareholdings for whom it might otherwise be uneconomical to deal. One option open to shareholders was to donate their sale proceeds to ShareGift. As a result of this initiative, more than £100,000 was donated.

Returning funds to shareholders

Over 60,000 shareholders did not cash their Shares Not Taken Up (SNTU) cheque following the Rights Issue in September 2013. In 2016, we continued the tracing process to reunite these shareholders with their SNTU monies and any unclaimed dividends. By the end of the year, we had returned over £1.65m to our shareholders.

Note

1Please note that this date is provisional and subject to change.

 

466  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 20152016 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  477


Shareholder information continued

    

    

 

 

Useful contact details

Equiniti

LOGOThe Barclays share register is maintained by Equiniti. If you have any questions about your Barclays shares, please contact Equiniti by visitingshareview.co.uk

LOGO

Equiniti

0371 384 20552 (in the UK)
+44 121 415 7004 (from overseas)
0371 384 22552 (for the hearing impaired in the UK)
+44 121 415 7028 (for the hearing impaired from overseas)

LOGO

Aspect House

Spencer Road
Lancing
West Sussex
BN99 6DA

American Depositary Receipts (ADRs)

ADRs represent the ownership of Barclays PLC shares which are traded on the New York Stock Exchange. ADRs carry prices, and pay dividends, in US dollars.

LOGOIf you have any questions about ADRs, please contact J.P. Morgan:jpmorgan.adr@wellsfargo.comor visitadr.com

LOGO

J.P. Morgan Shareholder Services

+1 800 990 1135 (toll free in US and Canada)
+1 651 453 2128 (outside the US and Canada)

LOGO

JPMorgan Chase Bank N.A.

PO Box 64504
St Paul
MN 55164-0854
USA

Shareholder Relations

LOGO

To give us your feedback or if you have any questions,

please contact:privateshareholderrelations@barclays.com

LOGO

Shareholder Relations

Barclays PLC
1 Churchill Place
London
E14 5HP

Share price

LOGO

Information on the Barclays share price and other share price tools are available at:home.barclays/investorrelations

LOGO

Alternative formats

Shareholder documents can be provided in large print, audio CD or braille free of charge by calling Equiniti.

0371 384 20552 (in the UK)
+44 121 415 7004 (from overseas)

Audio versions of the Strategic Report will also be available at the AGM

Managing your shares online

Shareview

An increasing number of Barclays shareholders can go online to manage their shareholding and find out about Barclays’ performance.Barclays performance by joining Shareview.

By joiningThrough Shareview, you:

 

§will receive the latest updates from Barclays direct by emailto your email.

 

§can update your address and bank details onlineonline.

 

§can vote in advance of general meetingsmeetings.

 

LOGO

LOGO

To join Shareview, please follow these 3three easy steps:

  
Step 1  Go toshareview.co.uk
  
Step 2  Register for electronic communications
by following the instructions on screen
  

Step 3

 

  

You will be sent an activation code
in the post the next working day

 

Shareholder Securitysecurity

Shareholders should be wary of any cold calls with an offer to buy or sell shares. These fraudstersFraudsters use persuasive and high-pressure techniques to lure shareholders into high-risk investments or scams. You should treat any unsolicited calls with caution.

Please keep in mind that firms authorised by the Financial Conduct Authority (FCA) are unlikely to contact you out of the blue. You should consider getting independent financial or professional advice from someone unconnected to the respective firm before you hand over any money.

 

LOGO

LOGO
  Report a scam.If you suspect that you have been approached by fraudsters please tell the FCA using the share fraud reporting form atfca.org.uk/scams. You can also call the
FCA Helpline on 0800 111 6768 or through Action Fraud on 0300 123 2040.

Equiniti

LOGO

The Barclays share register is maintained by Equiniti. If you have any questions about your Barclays shares, please contact Equiniti:shareview.co.uk
Equiniti

LOGO

0371 384 2055a (in the UK)

+44 121 415 7004 (from overseas)

0371 384 2255a (for the hearing impaired in the UK)

+44 121 415 7028 (for the hearing impaired from overseas)

LOGO

Aspect House

Spencer Road

Lancing

West Sussex

BN99 6DA

Shareholder Relations

LOGO

To give us your feedback or if you have any questions, please contact:privateshareholderrelations@barclays.com
Shareholder Relations

LOGO

Barclays PLC

1 Churchill Place

London

E14 5HP

American Depositary Receipts (ADRs)

LOGO

If you have any questions about ADRs, please contact J.P. Morgan:jpmorgan.adr@wellsfargo.com or visitadr.com
J.P. Morgan Shareholder Services

LOGO

+1 800 990 1135 (toll free in US and Canada)

+1 651 453 2128 (outside the US and Canada)

LOGO

JPMorgan Chase Bank N.A.

PO Box 64504

St Paul

MN 55165-0854

USA

Share price

LOGO

Information on the Barclays share price and other share price tools are available at:home.barclays/investorrelations

Alternative formats

LOGO  

Shareholder documents can be provided in large print, audio CD or braille free of charge by calling Equiniti.

 0371 384 2055a (in the UK)

 +44 121 415 7004 (from overseas)

  Audio versions of the Strategic Report will   also be available at the AGM.

 

Note

 

Note

a2Lines open 8.30am to 5.30pm Monday to Friday, excluding public holidays.
 

 

478  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 20152016 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  467


Signatures

The registrant hereby certifies that it meets all of the requirements for filing on Form20-F and that it has duly caused and authorised the undersigned to sign this annual report on its behalf.

 

Date March 1st, 2016February 23rd, 2017

 

  

Barclays PLC

 

(Registrant)

  By 
   

/s/ Tushar Morzaria

   

 

Tushar Morzaria, Group Finance Director

The registrant hereby certifies that it meets all of the requirements for filing on Form20-F and that it has duly caused and authorised the undersigned to sign this annual report on its behalf.

 

Date March 1st, 2016February 23rd, 2017  

Barclays Bank PLC

 

(Registrant)

  By 
   

/s/ Tushar Morzaria

   

 

Tushar Morzaria, Group Finance Director


EXHIBIT INDEX

 

Exhibit  Description
1.1    Articles of Association of Barclays PLC (incorporated by reference to the Form6-K filed on May 2nd, 2013)
1.2    Articles of Association of Barclays Bank PLC (incorporated by reference to the Form6-K filed on May 13th,13th, 2010)
2.1    Long Term Debt Instruments: Neither Barclays PLC nor Barclays Bank PLC is party to any single instrument relating to long-term debt pursuant to which a total amount of securities exceeding 10% of either Barclays PLC’s or Barclays Bank PLC’s total assets (on a consolidated basis) is authorised to be issued. Each of Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC hereby agrees to furnish to the Securities and Exchange Commission (the “Commission”), upon its request, a copy of any instrument defining the rights of holders of its long-term debt or the rights of holders of the long-term debt of any of its subsidiaries for which consolidated or unconsolidated financial statements are required to be filed with the Commission.
4.0    Rules of the Barclays Group Performance Share Plan (2005) (incorporated by reference to the 2006 Form20-F filed on March 26th,26th, 2007)
4.1    Rules of the Barclays PLC Renewed 1986 Executive Share Option Scheme (incorporated by reference to the Barclays PLC Registration Statement on FormS-8 (File no.333-153723) filed on September 29th,29th, 2008)
4.2    Rules of the Barclays PLC Approved Incentive Share Option Plan (incorporated by reference to the Barclays PLC Registration Statement on FormS-8 (File no.333-153723) filed on September 29th,29th, 2008)
4.3    Rules of the Barclays PLC Unapproved Incentive Share Option Plans (incorporated by reference to the Barclays PLC Registration Statement on FormS-8 (File no.333-153723) filed on September 29th,29th, 2008)
4.4    Rules of the Barclays PLC Executive Share Award Scheme (incorporated- Incorporated by reference to the Barclays PLC Registration Statement on FormS-8 (File no.333-173899) filed on May 3rd,3rd, 2011)
4.5    Rules of the Barclays Group Special Award Performance Share Plan (incorporated by reference to the Barclays PLC Registration Statement on FormS-8 (File no.333-153723) filed on September 29th, 2008)29th, 2008
4.6    Rules of the Barclays Group Incentive Share Plan (incorporated by reference to the Barclays PLC Registration Statement on FormS-8 (File no.333-153723) filed on September 29th,29th, 2008)
4.7    Rules of Barclays Bank PLC 1999 Directors Deferred Compensation Plan (amended and restated, effective January 1st, 2008) (incorporated by reference to Barclays Bank PLC’s Registration Statement on FormS-8 (File no.333-149301) filed on February 19th,19th, 2008)
4.8    Rules of Barclays Bank PLC Senior Management Deferred Compensation Plan (amended and restated, effective January 1st, 2008) (incorporated by reference to Barclays Bank PLC’s Registration Statement on FormS-8 (File no.333-149302) filed on February 19th,19th, 2008)
4.9    Rules of the Barclays Group Share Value Plan (incorporated by reference to the 2013 Form20-F filed on


March 14th,. 2014)
4.10  Rules of the Barclays PLC Long Term Incentive Plan (Incorporated by reference to the Barclays PLC Registration Statement on FormS-8 (File no.333-173899) filed on May 3rd,3rd, 2011)
4.11Rules of the Barclays Group Deferred Share Value Plan
4.12  Contract of Employment – Tushar Morzaria (Incorporated by reference to the 2014 Form20-F filed on March 14th, 2014)
4.124.13  Appointment Letter – Reuben Jeffery III (incorporated by reference to the 2009 Form20-F filed on March 19th, 2010)
4.134.14  Appointment Letter – Dambisa Moyo (incorporated by reference to the 2010 Form20-F filed on March 21st, 2011)
4.144.15  Appointment Letter – Tim Breedon (incorporated by reference to the 2012 Form20-F filed on March 13th, 2013)


4.15Appointment Letter – Diane de Saint Victor (incorporated by reference to the 2012 Form 20-F filed on March 13th, 2013)
4.16  Appointment Letter – Michael Ashley (IncorporatedDiane de Saint Victor (incorporated by reference to the 20132012 Form20-F filed on March 1413th, 2014)2013)
4.17  Appointment Letter – Wendy Lucas-BullMichael Ashley (Incorporated by reference to the 2013 Form20-F filed on March 14th, 2014)
4.18  Appointment Letter – Stephen Thieke (Incorporated by reference to the 2013 Form20-F filed on March 14th, 2014)
4.19  Appointment Letter – Frits van Paasschen- Crawford Gillies (Incorporated by reference to the 20132014 Form20-F filed on March 143thrd, 2014)2015)
4.20  Appointment Letter - Crawford GilliesJohn McFarlane (Incorporated by reference to the 2014 Form20-F filed on March 3rd, 2015)
4.21  Appointment Letter - John McFarlane (Incorporated– Sir Gerry Grimstone (incorporated by reference to the 20142015 Form20-F filed on March 31rdst, 2015)2016)
4.22  Appointment Letter – Sir Gerry GrimstoneDiane Schueneman (incorporated by reference to the 2015 Form20-F filed on March 1st, 2016)
4.23Appointment Letter – Diane Schueneman
4.24  Contract of employment – James E Staley (incorporated by reference to the 2015 Form20-F filed on March 1st, 2016)
4.24Transfer of Employment – James E Staley
4.25Transfer of Employment – Tushar Morzaria
4.26Appointment Letter – Mary Francis


7.1  Ratios of earnings to fixed charges. The calculations can be found in the Barclays Bank PLC financial data on page 455448 of theForm 20-F.
7.2  Ratios of earnings to combined fixed charges, preference share dividends and similar appropriations. The calculations can be found in the Barclays Bank PLC financial data on page 455448 of theForm 20-F.
7.3  Ratios of earnings to fixed charges. The calculations can be found in the Barclays PLC financial data on page 432426 of theForm 20-F.
7.4  Ratios of earnings to combined fixed charges, preference share dividends and similar appropriations. The calculations can be found in the Barclays PLC financial data on page 432426 of theForm 20-F.
8.1  List of subsidiaries – The list of subsidiaries of Barclays PLC can be found in Note 36 of the Barclays PLC financial statements on pages 285-286 and in Note 46 of the Barclays PLC financial statements on pages 299-305308 to 316 of the Form20-F.
11.1  Code of Ethics
12.1  Certifications filed pursuant to 17 CFR 240.13(a)-14(a)
13.1  Certifications filed pursuant to 17 CFR 240. 13(a) and 18 U.S.C 1350(a) and 1350(b)
15.1  Consent of PricewaterhouseCoopers LLP for incorporation by reference of reports in certain securities registration statements of Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC.
15.2Letter from PricewaterhouseCoopers LLP regarding change in registrants’ certifying accountant
15.3Chief Executive Officer – Strategy Update (incorporated by reference to the Form 6-K filed on March 1st, 2016)
99.199.2  A table setting forth the issued share capital of Barclays PLC and the Barclays PLC Group’s total shareholders’ equity, indebtedness and contingent liabilities as at 31 December 20152016
99.299.3  A table setting forth the issued share capital of Barclays Bank PLC and the Barclays Bank PLC Group’s total shareholders’ equity, indebtedness and contingent liabilities as at 31 December 20152016